Consent Manager Tag v2.0 (for TCF 2.0) -->
Farnell PDF

RS COMPONENTS Images.png

LD WSECO16 - Farnell - Farnell Element 14

LD WSECO16 - Farnell - Farnell Element 14 - Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

Branding Farnell element14 (France)

 

Farnell Element 14 :

Miniature

Everything You Need To Know About Arduino

Miniature

Tutorial 01 for Arduino: Getting Acquainted with Arduino

Miniature

The Cube® 3D Printer

Miniature

What's easier- DIY Dentistry or our new our website features?

 

Miniature

Ben Heck's Getting Started with the BeagleBone Black Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Home-Brew Solder Reflow Oven 2.0 Trailer

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 3 - Online with Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Discover Simulink Promo -- Exclusive element14 Webinar

Miniature

Ben Heck's TV Proximity Sensor Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's PlayStation 4 Teardown Trailer

See the trailer for the next exciting episode of The Ben Heck show. Check back on Friday to be among the first to see the exclusive full show on element…

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 4 - Your First Raspberry Pi Project

Connect your Raspberry Pi to a breadboard, download some code and create a push-button audio play project.

Miniature

Ben Heck Anti-Pickpocket Wallet Trailer

Miniature

Molex Earphones - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tripp Lite Surge Protector - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Microchip ChipKIT Pi - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Beagle Bone Black - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M E26, LED Lamps - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M Colored Duct Tape - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tenma Soldering Station - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Duratool Screwdriver Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Cubify 3D Cube - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Bud Boardganizer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Starter Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Fluke 323 True-rms Clamp Meter - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Dymo RHINO 6000 Label Printer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M LED Advanced Lights A-19 - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Innovative LPS Resistor Features Very High Power Dissipation

Miniature

Charge Injection Evaluation Board for DG508B Multiplexer Demo

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 2

Miniature

Introducing element14 TV

Miniature

Ben Heck Time to Meet Your Maker Trailer

Miniature

Détecteur de composants

Miniature

Recherche intégrée

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar Trailer Part 1

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar - Part 2 Trailer

Miniature

PiFace Control and Display Introduction

Miniature

Flashmob Farnell

Miniature

Express Yourself in 3D with Cube 3D Printers from Newark element14

Miniature

Farnell YouTube Channel Move

Miniature

Farnell: Design with the best

Miniature

French Farnell Quest

Miniature

Altera - 3 Ways to Quickly Adapt to Changing Ethernet Protocols

Miniature

Cy-Net3 Network Module

Miniature

MC AT - Professional and Precision Series Thin Film Chip Resistors

Miniature

Solderless LED Connector

Miniature

PSA-T Series Spectrum Analyser: PSA1301T/ PSA2701T

Miniature

3-axis Universal Motion Controller For Stepper Motor Drivers: TMC429

Miniature

Voltage Level Translation

Puce électronique / Microchip :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 2 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 3 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 1 of 3

Sans fil - Wireless :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Wireless Power Solutions - Wurth Electronics, Texas Instruments, CadSoft and element14

Miniature

Analog Devices - Remote Water Quality Monitoring via a Low Power, Wireless Network

Texas instrument :

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Automotive LED Headlights

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Digital Power Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Sensor Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Wireless Pen Input Demo (Mobile World Congress)

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Automation System Components

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x - Industry's first 10-GHz fixed/floating point DSP

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x KeyStone Multicore Architecture

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Interfaces

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Concerto™ MCUs - Connectivity without compromise

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Stellaris Robot Chronos

Miniature

Texas Instruments - DRV8412-C2-KIT, Brushed DC and Stepper Motor Control Kit

Ordinateurs :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Connect Raspberry Pi to Car Computer

Miniature

Ben's Portable Raspberry Pi Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ben's Raspberry Pi Portable Computer Trailer 2

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pocket Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Atari Computer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Using Computer Monitors for External Displays

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Partnership with BBC Computer Literacy Project - Answers from co-founder Eben Upton

Miniature

Installing RaspBMC on your Raspberry Pi with the Farnell element14 Accessory kit

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Served - Joey Hudy

Miniature

Happy Birthday Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Raspberry Pi board B product overview

Logiciels :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Opensource or Free CAD Software

Miniature

Tektronix FPGAView™ software makes debugging of FPGAs faster than ever!

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Open-Source Schematic Capture and PCB Layout Software

Miniature

Introduction to Cadsoft EAGLE PCB Design Software in Chinese

Miniature

Altera - Developing Software for Embedded Systems on FPGAs

Tutoriels :

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 1

Miniature

the knode tutorial - element14

Miniature

Ben's Autodesk 123D Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben's CadSoft EAGLE Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Soldering Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's AVR Dev Board tutorial

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pinball Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Interface Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

First Stage with Python and PiFace Digital

Miniature

Cypress - Getting Started with PSoC® 3 - Part 2

Miniature

Energy Harvesting Challenge

Miniature

New Features of CadSoft EAGLE v6

Autres documentations :

[TXT]

 Farnell-MULTICOMP-Ra..> 22-Jul-2014 12:35  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-RASPBERRY-PI..> 22-Jul-2014 12:35  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Dremel-Exper..> 22-Jul-2014 12:34  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-STM32F103x8-..> 22-Jul-2014 12:33  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BD6xxx-PDF.htm  22-Jul-2014 12:33  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-L78S-STMicro..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-RaspiCam-Doc..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SB520-SB5100..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-iServer-Micr..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LUMINARY-MIC..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CLASS 1-or-2..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:29  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Evaluating-t..> 22-Jul-2014 12:28  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LM3S6952-Mic..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Keyboard-Mou..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27  5.9M 

 [TXT] Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 17:08 951K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-pmbta13_pmbt..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06  959K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EE-SPX303N-4..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06  969K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Datasheet-NX..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MIDAS-un-tra..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SERIAL-TFT-M..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MCOC1-Farnel..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05  1.0M

[TXT]

 Farnell-TMR-2-series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48  787K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DC-DC-Conver..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48  781K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  803K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TMLM-Series-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  810K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEL-5-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  814K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TXL-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  829K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEP-150WI-Se..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  837K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AC-DC-Power-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  845K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TIS-Instruct..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  845K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TOS-tracopow..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47  852K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TCL-DC-traco..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  858K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TIS-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  875K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TMR-2-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  897K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TMR-3-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  939K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEN-8-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  939K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46  947K
[TXT]

 Farnell-HIP4081A-Int..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ISL6251-ISL6..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DG411-DG412-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3367-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ICM7228-Inte..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Data-Sheet-K..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Silica-Gel-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TKC2-Dusters..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CRC-HANDCLEA..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-760G-French-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Decapant-KF-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1734-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Araldite-Fus..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-fiche-de-don..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-safety-data-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-A-4-Hardener..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC-Debugger-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MSP430-Hardw..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SmartRF06-Ev..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC2531-USB-H..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BK889B-PONT-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:42  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-User-Guide-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41  2.0M

 [TXT]Farnell-0050375063-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Mini-Fit-Jr-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-43031-0002-M..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-0433751001-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cube-3D-Prin..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MTX-Compact-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MTX-3250-MTX..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MCP3421-Micr..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LM19-Texas-I..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Data-Sheet-S..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LMH6518-Texa..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD7719-Low-V..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DAC8143-Data..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BGA7124-400-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SICK-OPTIC-E..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LT3757-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LT1961-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC18F2420-2..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DS3231-DS-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-RDS-80-PDF.htm  18-Jul-2014 16:57  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD8300-Data-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LT6233-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MAX1365-MAX1..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPSAF5130-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DP83846A-DsP..> 18-Jul-2014 16:55  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Dremel-Exper..> 18-Jul-2014 16:55  1.6M

[TXT]

 Farnell-MCOC1-Farnel..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SL3S1203_121..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PN512-Full-N..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SL3S4011_402..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LPC408x-7x 3..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PCF8574-PCF8..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LPC81xM-32-b..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LPC1769-68-6..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Download-dat..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LPC3220-30-4..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LPC11U3x-32-..> 16-Jul-2014 09:01  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SL3ICS1002-1..> 16-Jul-2014 09:01  2.5M

[TXT]

 Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 08-Jul-2014 18:59  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-tesa®pack63..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Encodeur-USB..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC2530ZDK-Us..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-2020-Manuel-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Synchronous-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Arithmetic-L..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NA555-NE555-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-4-Bit-Magnit..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LM555-Timer-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-L293d-Texas-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SN54HC244-SN..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MAX232-MAX23..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-High-precisi..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SMU-Instrume..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-900-Series-B..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BA-Series-Oh..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-270-Series-O..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Tiva-C-Serie..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-UTO-Souriau-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Clipper-Seri..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SOURIAU-Cont..> 08-Jul-2014 18:47  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-851-Series-P..> 08-Jul-2014 18:47  3.0M

 [TXT] Farnell-SL59830-Inte..> 06-Jul-2014 10:07 1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD7171-16-Bi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:06  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Low-Noise-24..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  938K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-74LCX573-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1N4148WS-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FAN6756-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  850K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  861K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ES1F-ES1J-fi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  867K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-QRE1113-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  879K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-2N7002DW-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDC2512-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDV301N-Digi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-S1A-Fairchil..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  896K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BAV99-Fairch..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  896K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-74AC00-74ACT..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  911K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NaPiOn-Panas..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  911K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LQ-RELAYS-AL..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  924K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ev-relays-ae..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  926K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  931K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Amplifier-In..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  940K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serial-File-..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  941K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Both-the-Del..> 06-Jul-2014 10:01  948K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Videk-PDF.htm   06-Jul-2014 10:01  948K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M 

[TXT]

 Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-0430300011-D..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-06-6544-8-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3M-Polyimide..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3M-VolitionT..> 25-Mar-2014 08:18  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-10BQ060-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 09:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-10TPB47M-End..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-12mm-Size-In..> 14-Jun-2014 09:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-24AA024-24LC..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-50A-High-Pow..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1907-2006-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-5910-PDF.htm    25-Mar-2014 08:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-6517b-Electr..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-A-True-Syste..> 29-Mar-2014 11:13  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD524-PDF.htm   20-Mar-2014 17:33  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ADL6507-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ADSP-21362-A..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1225-12-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:40  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF2412-24-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AN10361-Phil..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARADUR-HY-13..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARALDITE-201..> 21-Mar-2014 08:12  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARALDITE-CW-..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATmega640-VA..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATtiny20-PDF..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 01-Apr-2014 07:42  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Amplificateu..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-An-Improved-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Avvertenze-e..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BC846DS-NXP-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BC847DS-NXP-..> 23-Jun-2014 10:24  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BF545A-BF545..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BK2650A-BK26..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BT151-650R-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BTA204-800C-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BUJD203AX-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BYV29F-600-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BZX384-serie..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Battery-GBA-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-C.A-6150-C.A..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-C.A 8332B-C...> 01-Apr-2014 07:40  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC2560-Bluet..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CD4536B-Type..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CS5532-34-BS..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ceramic-tran..> 14-Jun-2014 18:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cles-electro..> 21-Mar-2014 08:13  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Connectors-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:12  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Construction..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cordless-dri..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Davum-TMC-PD..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-De-la-puissa..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Directive-re..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Documentatio..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Download-dat..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 20-Mar-2014 08:14  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ELMA-PDF.htm    29-Mar-2014 11:13  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EMC1182-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm  11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-F28069-Picco..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm  19-Mar-2014 18:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDS-ITW-Spra..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fastrack-Sup..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ferric-Chlor..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fluke-1730-E..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GALVA-A-FROI..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GALVA-MAT-Re..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GN-RELAYS-AG..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HC49-4H-Crys..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HFE1600-Data..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HI-70300-Sol..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-IP4252CZ16-8..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-KSZ8851SNL-S..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LCW-CQ7P.CC-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LME49725-Pow..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LOCTITE-542-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LOCTITE-3463..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Leaded-Trans..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Loctite3455-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Low-cost-Enc..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Lubrifiant-a..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MC3510-PDF.htm  25-Mar-2014 08:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MCF532x-7x-E..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MPXV7002-Rev..> 20-Mar-2014 17:33  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MX670-MX675-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Microchip-MC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:27  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Midas-Active..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Midas-MCCOG4..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Miniature-Ci..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Mistral-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:12  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-83421-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-COMMER..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Multi-Functi..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Nilfi-sk-E-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Novembre-201..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OXPCIE958-FB..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PDTA143X-ser..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PDTB123TT-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PESD9X5.0L-P..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC18F2455-2..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC24FJ256GB..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMBT4403-PNP..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMEG4002EL-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:18  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMEG4010CEH-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-15..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-EC..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-EZ..> 20-Mar-2014 08:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Id..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Ne..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Ra..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-TS..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Y3..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Pompes-Charg..> 24-Apr-2014 20:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ponts-RLC-po..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Portable-Ana..> 29-Mar-2014 11:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Premier-Farn..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Produit-3430..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Q48-PDF.htm     23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Radial-Lead-..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Reglement-RE..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Repartiteurs..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-S-TRI-SWT860..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SMBJ-Transil..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SPLC780A1-16..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SSC7102-Micr..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SVPE-series-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:15  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Septembre-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serie-Standa..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-2600B..> 20-Mar-2014 17:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Signal-PCB-R..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Strangkuhlko..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Supercapacit..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TDK-Lambda-H..> 14-Jun-2014 18:21  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Telemetres-l..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Termometros-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-U2270B-PDF.htm  14-Jun-2014 18:15  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-USB-Buccanee..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-V4N-PDF.htm     14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPS-AC-Octop..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-celpac-SUL84..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-china_rohs_o..> 21-Mar-2014 10:04  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ir1150s_fr.p..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-techfirst_se..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-testo-205-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-testo-470-Fo..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Sefram-7866HD.pdf-PD..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  472K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-CAT_ENREGISTR..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  461K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-CAT_MESUREURS..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  435K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  481K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  442K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  422K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-SP270.pdf-PDF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  464K
1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 1 LD WSECO16 UHF DIVERSITY WIRELESS SYSTEM UHF Bodypack Transmitter USER´S MANUAL BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUEL D´UTILISATION MANUAL DE USUARIO INSTRUKCJA OBSŁUGI MANUALE D‘USO 2ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Thank you for choosing LD-Systems! We have designed this product to give you reliable operation over many years. Therefore LD-Systems underwrites high quality products with its name and many years of experience as a producer. Please, take a few moments to read these instructions carefully, as we want you to enjoy your new LD-Systems products quickly and to the fullest. Further information about LD-Systems check our website WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM UHF Bodypack Transmitter 3 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 UHF DIVERSITY WIRELESS SYSTEM 4ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO PREVENTIVE MEASURES: 1. Please read the attached safety instructions as well as the following instructions carefully. 2. Please keep all the instructions. 3. Please use the device only as intended. 4. Please respect the valid waste management rules. Please deliver the packaging divided into plastic and paper/ cardboard to the recycling management. 5. Please refer all servicing to qualified personel only if the device is damaged, exposed to liquid/rain or if it does not operate normally. 6. Please, do not expose to any kind of heat such as ovens, radiators, or any other devices (incl. amplifiers). Please check for enough distance between amplifiers and walls, racks, etc. to prevent overheating. 7. After connection please check the wiring to prevent any kind of accident or damage. Please never use any kind of damaged cable and wiring. 8. Only use authorized and stable stands, brackets, shelfs, tables etc.. for installations. Please check for adequate stability against collapse. 9. Appearance of interferences when using wireless systems. The simultaneous use of wireless microphones and of mobile phones (if both devices are not very distant from each other) can lead to the appearance of interferences in the microphone signal which can be heard in the PA system. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove cover (or back). No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product´s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk to persons. The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. CAUTION! HIGH VOLUME! You will operate this transmission system for professional use. Therefore the commercial use of this equipment is liable to the rules and regulations of the Accident Prevention & Insurance Association of your industry sector. Adam Hall as a manufacturer is bound to inform you formally about the existence of eventual sanitary risks. This system is able to induce an acoustic pressure of 80 db. 85 db is by law the maximum audio pressure level which your ear can be exposed to during a work day. It was set according to the technical expertise of the occupational medicine as a basis for the noise rating level. Higher sound levels or longer exposition times could damage your ear. The time of exposition by higher sound pressure levels should be shortened in order to prevent from ear damages. Here are a few reliable warning signals which show that you have exposed yourself for a too long period to excessive sound pressure levels: - You hear bell- or whistling sounds! - You have the impression that you can’t hear high tones anymore! CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN 5 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr All sets contain the following system components: Receiver Audio cable 6.3 mm mono jack to 6.3 mm mono jack Batteries AC Adapter Headset Dynamic handheld microphone Belt Pack Additionally, depending on the set, the following accessories are included: LDWSECO16BPH - ECO Set with belt pack and headset LDWSECO16HHD - ��������������������������ECO Set with dynamic handheld microphone SYSTEM COMPONENTS: THE RECEIVER FEATURES THE PILOT TONE FUNCTION The pilot tone protects against interference due to RF signals from other units. The transmitter adds an inaudible signal, known as the pilot tone, to the transmitted signal. The receiver detects and evaluates the pilot tone, and is thus able to identify the signal of the matching transmitter and mute all others. 6ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ON/OFF SWITCH Press and hold for 1 second to turn on or off. 2 5 SEGMENT AUDIO LEVEL METER 3 CHANNEL A ANTENNA INDICATOR LED 4 CHANNEL B ANTENNA INDICATOR LED 5 CHANNEL NUMBER DISPLAY 6 CHANNEL DOWN BUTTON 7 CHANNEL UP BUTTON 8 IR WINDOW 9 CHANNEL SYNCHRONIZING BUTTON Hold Transmitter in front of the Receiver with both infrared ports in eye contact. Press this button to complete the synchronizing. 10 AUDIO OUTPUT LEVEL CONTROL BUTTON Turn right to increase volume, turn left to decrease volume. 11 ANTENNAS 1 DC POWER ADAPTER SOCKET 2 6.3 MM UNBALANCED JACK OUTPUT 3 XLR BALANCED OUTPUT LD WSECO16 RECEIVER: V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 FRONT PANEL: BACK PANEL: 7 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 MICROPHONE HEAD GRILLE 2 POWER / BATTERY STATUS INDICATOR Red LED lights up when the battery is low, Green LED lights up when the power is on and the battery status is okay. 3 POWER SWITCH 4 BATTERY COVER 5 IR WINDOW HANDHELD TRANSMITTER: 3 1 2 4 5 CHANGING BATTERIES The operating time of the batteries (alkaline) is approx. 10-12 hours. Change the batteries as soon as the red LED blinks. 8ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ANTENNA 2 BATTERY STATUS INDICATOR Red LED lights up when the battery is low, Green LED lights up when the power is on and the battery status is okay. 3 MINI-XLR INPUT 4 GAIN ADJUSTMENT AND MUTE SWITCH Three gain settings are available. Mic: microphone 0 dB: Guitar with passive pickups - 10 dB: Guitar with active pickups 5 ON/OFF/MUTE SWITCH Mid position for mute. 6 IR WINDOW BELT PACK TRANSMITTER: tter WEARING THE BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Fasten the transmitter to a belt 1 or guitar strap 2 . The most secure way to fasten the transmitter is to press it down all the way so that the belt or strap is completely enclosed by the clip, as in variant 1 CHANGING BATTERIES Generally, 2 alkaline batteries will last 10-12 hours. If the LED of the battery status indicator is on, the batteries should be replaced immediately. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 9 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH TIPS FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE: •Aim the transmitter directly at the receiver ("line-of-sight" contact between the devices). •Do not position the receiver near metal objects/surfaces or digital devices (CD players, computers, etc.). •Position the receiver so that it is not directly in front of a wall and is at least 1 m above the floor. •Cell phones, bi-directional radio devices, etc. can interfere with the radio link between transmitter and receiver and should not be operated in the vicinity of the transmitter. TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM DISPLAY SOLUTION No sound or volume too low Transmitter: on/off indicator is off Make certain that the unit is connected correctly. "Power" indicator is off Make certain that the power pack is connected to the receiver correctly. Receiver: RF indicator is on Increase the volume. Increase the gain setting on the transmitter. Check the connections from the receiver to the amplifier or mixer. RF indicator is off Transmitter: indicator is on Do not position the receiver near metal objects. Check whether the transmission path between transmitter and receiver is unobstructed ("line-of-sight" contact). Position the transmitter closer to the receiver. Make certain that the transmitter and the receiver are using the same frequency. Transmitter: Battery status light is on Replace the batteries. Distortion or unwanted noise Receiver: RF indicator ON Remove potential sources of interference such as CD players, computers, digital sources, etc. Increasing distortion Transmitter: Battery status light is on Replace the batteries Substantial difference in levels in comparison with wired operation with the same source or when other guitars or microphones are used Adjust the gain setting on the transmitter and the volume on the receiver accordingly. 10ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO SPECIFICATIONS: SYSTEM Range under typical ambient conditions: 50 m Note: the actual useable range depends on absorption and reflection of the RF signal as well as interference. Frequency range: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz THD: (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz audio signal): <1% 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamics: 90 dB (A-weighted) Temperature range: -10°C / +50°C Note: Range is dependent on battery type. RECEIVER Max. audio output level(ref. +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR connector (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6.3-mm jack connector (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Output impedance: XLR connector: 200 ohms 6.3-mm jack connector: 1 kohms XLR connector: balanced Pin 1: ground Pin 2: (+) Pin 3: (-) Sensitivity (in reference to middle audio frequency): <-92 dB Image rejection: 90 dB Dimensions (W x H x D): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Weight: 400 g Power supply: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, external power adapter BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain range: 30 dB Input impedance: 470 kohms Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Weight: 80 g, without batteries Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10-12 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW HANDHELD MICROPHONE TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV Dimensions: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (diameter) Weight: 270 g Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10-12 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW 11 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Frequency list for intermodulation free use of up to three wireless microphones simultaneously. Frequency MHz Simultaneous FREQUENCY LIST: 12ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: LDWS100GC - guitar cable 6.3 mm mono jack to mini XLR LDWS100MH1 - headset, black LDWSECO16BP - belt pack transmitter LDWS100ML - lavaliere microphone LDWSECO16MD - handheld dynamic microphone 13 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LIMITED WARRANTY This Limited Warranty applies to the Adam Hall, LD Systems, Defender, Palmer and Eminence branded products. The statutory warranty rights towards the seller are not affected by this guarantee. In fact, it justifies, additional independent warranty claims towards Adam Hall. Adam Hall warrants that the Adam Hall product you have purchased from Adam Hall or from an Adam Hall authorized reseller is free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use for a period of 2 or 5 years from the date of purchase. The Limited Warranty Period starts on the date of purchase. In order to receive warranty services you are required to provide proof of the purchase date. Your dated sales or delivery receipt, showing the date of purchase, is your proof of the purchase date. Should products of the brands named above be in need of repair within the limited warranty period, you are entitled to warranty services according to the terms and conditions stated in this document. This Limited Warranty extends only to the original purchaser of this Adam Hall branded product and is not transferable to anyone who obtains ownership of the Adam Hall branded product from the original purchaser. During the Limited Warranty Period, Adam Hall will repair or replace the defective component parts or the product. All component parts or hardware products removed under this Limited Warranty become the property of Adam Hall. In the unlikely event that your Adam Hall product has a recurring failure, Adam Hall, at its discretion, may elect to provide you with a replacement unit of Adam Hall´s choice that is at least equivalent to your Adam Hall branded product in hardware performance. Adam Hall does not warrant that the operation of this product will be uninterrupted or error-free. Adam Hall is not responsible for damage that occurs as a result of your failure to follow the instructions included with the Adam Hall branded product. This Limited Warranty does not apply, - to wear parts (e.g. accumulator) - to any product from which the serial number has been removed or that has been damaged or rendered defec tive as the result of an accident - in case of, misuse, abuse, or other external causes - by operation outside the usage parameters stated in the user´s documentation shipped with the product - by use of spare parts not manufactured or sold by Adam Hall - by modification or service by anyone other than Adam Hall These terms and conditions constitute the complete and exclusive warranty agreement between you and Adam Hall regarding the Adam Hall branded product you have purchased. MANUFACTURER´S DECLARATIONS: 14ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO MANUFACTURER´S DECLARATIONS: LIMITATION OF LIABILITY If your Adam Hall branded hardware product fails to work as warranted above, your sole and exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement. Adam Halls’ maximum liability under this limited warranty is expressly limited to the lesser of the price you have paid for the product or the cost of repair or replacement of any hardware components that malfunction in conditions of normal use. Adam Hall is not liable for any damages caused by the product or the failure of the product, including any lost profits or savings or special, incidental, or consequential damages. Adam Hall is not liable for any claim made by a third party or made by you for a third party. This limitation of liability applies whether damages are sought, or claims are made, under this Limited Warranty or as a tort claim (including negligence and strict product liability), a contract claim, or any other claim. This limitation of liability cannot be waived or amended by any person. This limitation of liability will be effective even if you have advised Adam Hall of an authorized representative of Adam Hall of the possibility of any such damages. This limitation of liability however, will not apply to claims for personal injury. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that may vary from state to state or from country to country. You are advised to consult applicable state or country laws for a full determination of your rights. REQUESTING WARRANTY-SERVICE To request warranty service for the product, contact Adam Hall or the Adam Hall authorized reseller from which you purchased the product. EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY These devices meet the essential requirements and further relevant specifications of Directives 2004/108/EC (EMC) and 2006/95/EC (LVD). For more information, see www.adamhall.com. CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (ELECTRICAL WASTE) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details on where and how they can recycle this item in an enviromentally friendly manner. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. 15 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH WEEE-DECLARATION Your LD-Systems product was developed and manufactured with high quality materials and components wich can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment must be disposed of separately from normal waste at the end of its operational lifetime. Please dispose of this product by bringing it to your local collection point or recycling centre for such equipment. This will help to protect the environment in which we all live. BATTERIES AND ACCUMULATORS The supplied batteries or rechargeable batteries can be recycled. Please dispose of them as special waste or return them to your specialist dealer. In order to protect the environment, only dispose exhausted batteries. Adam Hall GmbH, all rights reserved. The technical data and the functional product characteristics can be subject to modifications. The photocopying, the translation, and all other forms of copying of fragments or of the integrality of this user’s manual is prohibited. 16ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Sie haben die richtige Wahl getroffen! Diese LD-Systems Produkte werden Sie lange Jahre durch Zuverlässigkeit, Wirtschaftlichkeit und einfaches Handling überzeugen. Dafür garantiert LD-Systems mit seinem Namen und seiner in vielen Jahren erworbenen Kompetenz als Hersteller hochwertiger Geräte. Nehmen Sie sich nun ein paar Minuten Zeit, diese Anleitung zu lesen. Wir möchten, dass Sie einfach und schnell in den Genuss dieser Technik kommen. Mehr Informationen zu LD-SYSTEMS finden Sie auf unserer Internetseite WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 17 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 UHF DIVERSITY WIRELESS SYSTEM UHF Bodypack Transmitter 18ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1. Bitte beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise und studieren Sie diese Anleitung sorgfältig. 2. Bewahren Sie alle Hinweise und Anleitungen sicher auf. 3. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nur in der vorgesehenen Art und Weise. 4. Beachten die in Ihrem Land geltenden Entsorgungsgesetze. Trennen Sie bei der Entsorgung bitte Plastik und Papier bzw. Kartonagen von einander. 5. Sollte Ihr Gerät nicht mehr ordnungsgemäß funktionieren, Flüssigkeiten ausgesetzt werden oder auf sonstige Art und Weise beschädigt sein, überlassen Sie bitte jegliche Reparaturen ausschließlich autorisiertem Fachpersonal. 6. Halten Sie das Gerät von Hitzequellen wie z.B. Ofen, Heizkörper, oder sonstige Quellen (auch Verstärker) fern. Sorgen Sie dafür dass das Gerät immer so installiert ist, dass es ausreichend gekühlt wird und nicht überhitzt. 7. Überprüfen Sie alle Verbindungen nach dem Sie das Gerät angeschossen haben um Schäden oder Unfälle zu vermeiden. 8. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich stabile und passende Stative bzw. Befestigungen wenn das Gerät fest installiert wird. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Gerät sicher installiert ist und nicht herunterfallen kann. 9. Auftretende Störungen beim Betrieb von Wireless Systemen. Beim gleichzeitigen Betrieb von Funkmikrofonen und Funktelefonen (bei geringer Entfernung der Geräte zu einander) können im Bereich der Funkmikrofone Störungen auftreten, welche im angeschlossenen Audiosystem hörbar sind. ACHTUNG: Entfernen Sie niemals die Abdeckung, da sonst die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schocks besteht. Im Inneren des Gerätes befinden sich keine Teile, die vom Bediener gewartet oder repariert werden können. Lassen Sie Reparaturen ausschließlich von qualifiziertem Servicepersonal durchführen. Dieses Symbol warnt vor nichtisolierten, gefährlichen Spannungen im Geräteinneren, die einen gefährlichen Schlag verursachen können. Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet wichtige Bedienungs- und Wartungshinweise. Vorsicht! Hohe Lautstärke! Diese Übertragungsanlage wird von Ihnen professionell eingesetzt. Daher unterliegt der Gebrauch bei gewerblicher Nutzung den Regeln und Vorschriften der zuständigen Berufsgenossenschaft. Adam Hall als Hersteller ist daher verpflichtet, Sie auf möglicherweise bestehende gesundheitliche Risiken ausdrücklich hinzuweisen. Mit diesem System können Schalldrücke über 80 db erzeugt werden. 85db ist der Schalldruck, der laut Gesetz als maximal zulässiger Wert über die Dauer eines Arbeitstages auf Ihr Gehör einwirken darf. Er wird nach den Erkenntnissen der Arbeitsmedizin als Berurteilungspegel zu Grunde gelegt. Höhere Lautstärken oder längere Einwirkzeit können Ihr Gehör schädigen. Bei höheren Lautstärken muss die Hörzeit verkürzt werden, um eine Schädigung auszuschließen. Sichere Warnsignale dafür, dass Sie sich zu lange zu lauten Geräuschen ausgesetzt haben, sind: - Sie hören Klingel- oder Pfeifgeräusche in den Ohren! - Sie haben den Eindruck, hohe Töne nicht mehr wahrzunehmen! CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN: 19 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr SYSTEMKOMPONENTEN: Alle Sets beinhalten folgende Systemteile: Empfänger Audiokabel Klinke 6,3 mm mono auf Klinke 6,3 mm mono Batterien Netzteil Handmikrofon dynamisch Headset Belt Pack Zusätzlich sind je nach Set folgende Zubehörteile enthalten: LDWSECO16BPH - ECO Set mit Beltpack und Headset LDWSECO16HHD - ECO Set mit dynamischem Handmikrofon DER EMPFÄNGER VERFÜGT ÜBER EINEN PILOT-TON-SQUELCH FUNKTION Die Pilot-Ton-Einrichtung schützt eine drahtlose Mikrofonanlage vor Einstreuungen unerwünschter Signale, beispielsweise die von anderen Funkanlagen. Der Sender fügt dem eigentlich zu übertragenden Signal ein zweites, unhörbares Signal, den Pilot-Ton, hinzu. Der Empfänger identifiziert diesen als den übereinstimmenden Pilot-Ton und gibt das dazugehörige Signal frei. Alle anderen Signale bleiben gemuted. 20ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ON/OFF SCHALTER 2 AUDIO PEGELANZEIGE 5 SEGMENTE 3 ANTENNE A LED ANZEIGE 4 ANTENNE B LED ANZEIGE 5 ANZEIGE KANALNUMMER 6 NÄCHSTER KANAL 7 VORHERIGER KANAL 8 IR (SYNC) FENSTER 9 KANAL SYNC KNOPF Drücken Sie hier um eine Infrarotverbindung zwischen Sender und Empfänger herzustellen. 10 AUSGANGS-LAUTSTÄRKEREGELUNG Nach links drehen, leiser, nach rechts lauter. 11 ANTENNEN 1 AC NETZADAPTER ANSCHLUSS 2 6.3 MM UNSYMMETRISCHER KLINKENAUSGANG 3 SYMMETRISCHER XLR AUSGANG LD WSECO16 EMPFÄNGER: V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 VORDERSEITE: RÜCKSEITE: 21 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH HANDSENDER: 1 MIKROFONKOPF 2 POWER / BATTERIE STATUS INDIKATOR Rote LED leuchtet, wenn die Batterie schwach ist. Grüne LED leuchtet, wenn das Mikrofon eingeschaltet ist und der Batterie-Status ok ist. 3 POWER SCHALTER 4 BATTERIEABDECKUNG 5 INFRAROT SCHNITTSTELLE 2 3 1 BATTERIEWECHSEL Die Betriebsdauer der Batterie (Alkaline) beträgt ca. 8 Stunden. Wechseln sie die Batterie sobald die rote LED blinkt. 5 4 22ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO BELT PACK SENDER: 1 ANTENNE 2 AN/AUS SCHALTER Für Mute, Schalter in Mittelposition 3 GAIN Gain Regler 3 Gain Settings sind am Belt Pack möglich. Mic: Mikrofon 0: Gitarre mit passiven Tonabnehmern -10 dB: Gitarre mit aktiven Tonabnehmern 4 EINGANG 3-Pin Mini-XLR Eingang 5 BATTERIESTATUSANZEIGE Nach dem Einschalten, blinkt die Anzeige kurz auf. Wenn diese Anzeige stetig aufleuchtet sollten die Batterien umgehend gewechselt werden. tter TRAGEN DES BELT PACK SENDERS Befestigen Sie den Sender an einem Gürtel 1 oder Gitarrengurt 2 . Am besten hält der Sender, wenn Sie ihn wie in Variante 1 komplett nach unten drücken, damit der Gurt vom Clip komplett umschlossen ist. BATTERIEWECHSEL In der Regel halten 2 Alkaline Batterien bis zu 10 Stunden. Wenn die LED der Batteriestandsanzeige leuchtet, sollten Sie die Batterien umgehend wechseln. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 23 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH TIPPS ZUR VERBESSERUNG DER PERFORMANCE: •Richten Sie den Sender direkt auf den Empfänger aus („Sichtkontakt“ zwischen den Geräten). •Stellen Sie den Empfänger nicht in der Nähe metallener Objekte / Oberflächen oder digitaler Geräte (CD-Player, Computer etc.) auf. •Positionieren Sie den Empfänger so, dass er sich nicht unmittelbar vor einer Wand und mindestens 1 m über dem Boden befindet. •Mobiltelefone, bidirektionale Funkgeräte und ähnliches können die Funkverbindung zwischen Sender und Empfänger stören und sollten nicht in der Nähe der Sendeanlage betrieben werden. PROBLEMLÖSUNGEN PROBLEM ANZEIGE LÖSUNG Kein Ton oder Ton zu leise Sender: On/Off -Anzeige leuchtet nicht Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gerät richtig angeschlossen ist. Netzanzeige „Power aus“ Vergewissern Sie sich, dass sie das Netzteil richtig an den Empfänger angeschlossen haben. Empfänger: HF-Anzeige leuchtet Erhöhen Sie die Lautstärke. Erhöhen Sie den Gain-Wert am Sender. Überprüfen Sie die Verkabelung von Empfänger zu Verstärker bzw. Mixer. Empfänger: HF-Anzeige aus Sender: Anzeige leuchtet Positionieren Sie den Empfänger nicht in der Nähe metallener Objekte. Prüfen Sie, ob der Sendeweg zwischen Sender und Empfänger frei ist („Sichtkontakt“). Positionieren Sie den Sender näher am Empfänger. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Sender und Empfänger auf der gleichen Frequenz arbeiten. Sender: Batteriestatusanzeige leuchtet Wechseln Sie die Batterien. Verzerrungen oder unerwünschte Nebengeräusche Empfänger: RF Indicator ON Entfernen Sie mögliche Interferenzquellen wie CD-Player, Computer, digitale Quellen etc. Zunehmende Verzerrungen Sender: Batteriestatusanzeige leuchtet Wechseln Sie die Batterien Deutlicher Pegelunterschied gegenüber Kabelgebundenem Betrieb derselben Quelle bzw. beim Einsatz anderer Gitarren oder Mikrofone Stellen Sie den Gain-Wert am Sender und die Lautstärke am Empfänger entsprechend ein. 24ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO SPEZIFIKATIONEN: SYSTEM Reichweite unter typischen Umgebungsbedingungen: 50 m Hinweis: Der tatsächlich nutzbare Sendebereich ist abhängig von Absorption und Reflexion des HFSignals sowie Interferenzen. Frequenzgang: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz Klirrfaktor (THD): (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamik: 90 dB (A-bewertet) Temperaturbereich: -10°C / +50°C Hinweis: Bereich abhängig vom Batterietyp. EMPFÄNGER Max. Audio-Ausgangspegel (bezogen auf +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR-Anschluss (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6,3-mm-Klinkenanschluss (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Ausgangsimpedanz: XLR-Anschluss: 200 Ohm 6,3-mm-Klinkenanschluss: 1 kOhm XLR-Ausgang: symmetrisch Pol 1: Masse Pol 2: (+) Pol 3: (-) Empfindlichkeit (bezogen auf mittlere Audiofrequenz): <-92 dB Spiegelfrequenzunterdrückung: 90 dB Abmessungen (H x B x T): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Gewicht: 400 g Stromversorgung: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, externes Steckernetzteil BELTPACK SENDER Max. Audio-Eingangspegel: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain-Bereich: 30 dB Eingangsimpedanz: 470 kOhm Abmessungen (H x B x T): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Gewicht: 80 g, ohne Batterien Stromversorgung: 2 Alkali-Batterien Typ „AA“ (Mignon-Zellen) oder entsprechende Akkumulatoren Batteriebetriebsdauer: 8 Stunden (Alkali-Batterien) RF Transmission Power: 10 mW HANDMIKROFON SENDER Max. Audio-Eingangspegel: 0 dBV Abmessungen: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (Durchmesser) Gewicht: 270 g Stromversorgung: 2 Alkali-Batterien Typ „AA“ (Mignon-Zellen) oder entsprechende Akkumulatoren Batteriebetriebsdauer: 10 Stunden (Alkali- Batterien) RF Übertragungs Power: 10 mW 25 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Frequenzliste für intermodulationsfreien Nutzen von bis zu 3 Systemen Frequency MHz Simultaneous FREQUENZLISTE: 26ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO OPTIONALES ZUBEHÖR: LDWS100GC - Gitarrenkabel Klinke 6,3 mm mono auf mini XLR LDWS100MH1 - Headset schwarz LDWSECO1BP - Beltpack Sender LDWS100ML - Lavalier Mikrofon LDWSECO1MD - Handmikrofon dynamisch 27 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH GARANTIEBESTIMMUNGEN Diese Garantie erstreckt sich auf die Marken Adam Hall, LD Systems, Defender, Palmer und Eminence. Die gesetzlichen Gewährleistungsrechte gegenüber dem Verkäufer werden von dieser Garantie nicht berührt. Vielmehr begründet diese Garantie zusätzliche selbständige Ansprüche gegenüber Adam Hall. Mit dieser Garantie stellt Adam Hall sicher, dass das von Ihnen bei Adam Hall oder einem Adam Hall Partner erworbene Produkt bei normalem Gebrauch während des Zeitraums von 2 bzw. 5 Jahren ab Kaufdatum frei von Material- oder Verarbeitungsfehlern ist. Der Garantiezeitraum beginnt mit dem Datum des Kaufs. Der Geltendmachung eines Anspruchs auf Garantieleistungen erforderliche Nachweis des Kaufdatums, erfolgt durch die mit dem Kaufdatum versehene Quittung oder den mit dem Kaufdatum versehenen Lieferschein. Sie haben Anspruch auf den Garantieservice zu den in diesem Dokument aufgeführten Bedingungen und Bestimmungen, falls eine Reparatur der unter den oben genanten Marken vertriebenen Produkte innerhalb des Garantiezeitraums erforderlich ist. Diese Garantie gilt nur für den ursprünglichen Käufer des von Adam Hall vertriebenen Produkts und ist nicht an Personen übertragbar, denen vom ursprünglichen Käufer das Eigentum am Adam Hall Produkt übertragen wird. Innerhalb des Garantiezeitraums werden die fehlerhaften Komponenten oder das Produkt von Adam Hall repariert oder ersetzt. Alle im Rahmen dieser Garantie entfernten Komponenten und Hardware-Produkte gehen in das Eigentum von Adam Hall über. In dem unwahrscheinlichen Fall, dass bei dem von Ihnen erworbenen Adam Hall Produkt ein Fehler wiederholt auftritt, kann Adam Hall nach eigenem Ermessen entscheiden, Ihnen dieses Produkt durch ein vergleichbares Produkt mit mindestens derselben Leistung zu ersetzen. Adam Hall übernimmt keine Garantie für einen störungs- oder fehlerfreien Betrieb dieses Produkts. Adam Hall übernimmt keine Verantwortung für auf eine inkorrekte Befolgung der im Lieferumfang des Adam Hall erhaltenen Anweisungen zurückzuführende Schäden. Diese Garantie erstreckt sich nicht auf - Verschleißteile (z.B. Akkumulator). - Geräte deren Seriennummer entfernt wurde. - Geräte, die durch Eigenverschulden beschädigt wurden. - unsachgemäß oder mißbräuchlich verwendete Geräte. - Geräte, die nicht entsprechend den Betriebsparametern betrieben wurden, welche im Lieferumfang des Produkts enthaltenen Benutzerunterlagen festgelegt sind. - Geräte, die aufgrund der Verwendung nicht von Adam Hall hergestellter oder vertriebener Teile repariert wurden. - Geräte, die durch Änderung oder Wartung durch jemand anderen als Adam Hall getätigt wurden. Diese Bestimmungen und Bedingungen stellen die vollständige und ausschließliche Garantievereinbarung zwischen Ihnen und Adam Hall für das von Ihnen erworbene Adam Hall Produkt dar. HERSTELLERERKLÄRUNGEN: 28ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNG Wenn das unter der Marke Adam Hall vertriebene Produkt nicht entsprechend der obigen Garantie funktioniert, besteht Ihr alleiniger und ausschließlicher Anspruch aus dieser Garantie in der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz. Weitergehende Gewährleistungsansprüche bleiben hiervon unberührt. Die maximale Haftung von Adam Hall im Rahmen dieser Garantie ist ausdrückliche beschränkt auf den jeweils niedrigeren Betrag, der sich entweder aus dem Kaufpreis für das Produkt oder aus den Reparatur- bzw. Ersatzkosten von Hardware-Komponenten, die bei normalem Gebrauch nicht Ordnungsgemäß funktionieren, ergibt. Adam Hall haftet aus dieser Garantie nicht für durch das Produkt oder sein versagen verursachte Schäden, einschließlich entgangener Gewinne, unterbliebener Einsparungen oder besonderer, indirekter oder Folgeschäden. Adam Hall haftet zudem nicht für von Dritten oder von ihnen für Dritte geltend gemachte Ansprüche. Diese Haftungsbeschränkung gilt unabhängig davon, ob Schäden gerichtlich verfolgt werden, ob Schadensersatzansprüche im Rahmen dieser Garantie oder aufgrund unerlaubter Handlungen (Einschließlich Fahrlässigkeit und Gefährdungshaftung) oder aufgrund vertraglicher bzw. sonstiger Ansprüche gestellt werden. Diese Haftungsbeschränkung kann von keiner Person aufgehoben oder ergänzt werden. Diese Haftungsbeschränkung gilt auch dann, wenn sie Adam Hall über die Möglichkeit derartiger Schäden informiert haben. Sie gilt jedoch nicht für Ansprüche aus Personenschäden. Aus dieser Garantie ergeben sich für Sie bestimmte Rechte. Möglicherweise haben Sie weitere Rechte, die Ihnen von Staat zu Staat und von Land zu Land unterschiedlich sein können. Es ist ratsam, die entsprechenden Gesetze des Staates bzw. Landes heranzuziehen, um Ihre Rechte umfassend zu ermitteln. INANSPRUCHNAHME DES REPARATURSERVICE Um den Garantieservice bzw. Reparaturservice für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen, wenden Sie sich bitte an Adam Hall oder an einen Adam Hall Partner, bei dem Sie das Produkt erworben haben. EG-KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG Diese Geräte entsprechen den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren Vorgaben der Richtlinien 2004/108/ EC (EMC) und 2006/95/EC (LVD). Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter www.adamhall.com. KORREKTE ENTSORGUNG DIESES PRODUKTES (Gültig in der Europäischen Union) Dieses Symbol (entweder auf dem Gerät oder dem dazugehörigen Handbuch) weist darauf hin, dass das Gerät nicht mit dem normalen Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf. Um mögliche Schäden an der Umwelt und an Personen zu verhindern, entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät bitte fachgerecht bei einer entsprechenden Stelle für Elektromüll. Als Privatkunde Informieren Sie sich bitte beim Hersteller oder bei Ihrer Gemeinde über die Möglichkeiten der korrekten Entsorgung. Als Geschäftskunde kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Lieferanten und prüfen Sie die Konditionen zur Entsorgung der Geräte. Dieses Produkt sollte nicht mit anderem gewerblichen Abfall entsorgt werden. 29 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH WEEE-DEKLARATION Ihr LD-Systems Produkt wurde unter der Verwendung hochwertiger Materialien und Komponenten die wiederverwertet oder wieder verwendet werden können hergestellt. Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass elektronische Geräte nicht im normalen Hausmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät bitte fachgerecht bei einer entsprechenden Stelle für Elektromüll und helfen Sie dabei unsere Umwelt zu schützen. BATTERIEN UND AKKUS Die mitgelieferten Batterien können wiederverwertet werden. Werfen Sie die Batterien daher nicht in den normalen Hausmüll sondern in gesonderte dafür vorgesehene Container. Helfen Sie, unsere Umwelt sauber zu halten. Adam Hall GmbH, alle Rechte vorbehalten. Änderungen der Technischen Daten und Produktmerkmale vorbehalten. Das Erstellen von Fotokopien, Übersetzungen und anderen Reproduktionen dieser Bedienungsanleitung oder Teilen derselben ohne vorherige Genehmigung ist untersagt. NOTE 30ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Merci d’avoir choisi LD-Systems! Nous avons conçu ce produit afin de vous offrir un matériel fiable, qui vous accompagnera durant de longues années. En achetant l’un des produits de la marque LD-Systems vous bénéficiez de notre compétence reconnue et de nos nombreuses années d’expérience en tant que fabricant. Notre nom est notre garantie. Veuillez s’il-vous-plait prendre quelques minutes pour lire attentivement ces instructions d’utilisation car nous souhaitons que vous puissiez profiter pleinement et au plus vite de votre matériel LD-Systems. Pour plus d’informations sur LD-Systems venez visiter notre site WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 31 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 SYSTÈME HF UHF DIVERSITY UHF Bodypack Transmitter 32ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1. Veuillez lire attentivement les précautions d’utilisation et les instructions suivantes. 2. Veuillez conserver ce manuel d’utilisation. 3. Veuillez utiliser cet appareil uniquement conformément à son but d’utilisation initial. 4. Veuillez respecter les règles de traitement des déchets. Veuillez s’il-vous-plait séparer les déchets plastiques des déchets papiers et les déposer dans un bac à ordures adéquat. 5. En cas de panne, de dommage, d’exposition de l’appareil à la pluie ou autres liquides, veuillez contacter une personne qualifiée pour le service après-vente de nos produits. 6. Veuillez ne pas exposer ce produit à des sources de chaleur, telles que les fours, les radiateurs ou tout autre appareil produisant de la chaleur (notamment les amplificateurs de puissance). Pour éviter les risques de surchauffe veillez à ce que l’appareil ne soit pas placé trop près d’un mur, ou enfermé dans un boitier, pour que la circulation de l’air ne soit pas obstruée. 7. Après avoir connecté votre appareil veuillez inspecter le câblage pour éviter les risques d’accident ou d’avarie. Veuillez ne jamais utiliser de câbles endommagés. 8. Veuillez utiliser uniquement les accessoires et supports de fixation fournis ou recommandés par le constructeur. Assurez vous de la stabilité de votre installation avant d’utiliser votre matériel, vous éviterez les risques de chutes et donc de dommages de l’appareil. 9. Apparition d’interférences lors de l’usage de systèmes HF sans fil. L’utilisation simultanée de micros sans fil et de téléphones portables (si les deux appareils sont peu éloignés l’un de l’autre) peut générer des interférences au niveau du microphone. Ces interférences sont audibles dans les haut-parleurs de votre système de sonorisation lorsque le système sans fil y est relié. DANGER: Pour réduire les risques de choc électrique veuillez ne pas retirer le couvercle (ou la face arrière) de l’appareil. Les pièces situées à l’intérieur de l’appareil ne doivent pas être manipulées par l’utilisateur. Veuillez contacter exclusivement une personne qualifiée pour le service après-vente de nos produits. L’éclair finissant par une flèche, entouré d’un triangle équilatéral vous indique la présence à l’intérieur du boîtier de pièces non isolées, représentant un risque de “haute tension électrique” et pouvant par conséquent blesser les personnes. Le point d’exclamation, entouré d’un triangle équilatéral, vous indique la présence d’instructions importantes quant-à l’utilisation et à l’entretien dans la brochure fournie avec le produit. ATTENTION! NIVEAU SONORE ÉLEVÉ! Vous allez utiliser ce système de transmission sans fil à des fins professionnelles. Dans ce cas l’utilisation de ce produit est soumise à des règles et à des directives définies par votre organisme professionnel de prévention des accidents du travail. En tant que fabricant, Adam Hall se doit de vous mettre en garde formellement sur les risques éventuels que cet appareil peut présenter pour votre santé. Ce système est capable de générer une pression acoustique supérieure à 80dB. 85dB est la limite légale du niveau sonore à laquelle votre ouïe peut être soumise lors d’une journée de travail. Cette valeur a été fixée par la médecine du travail comme valeur de référence pour la mesure du niveau sonore. Vous exposer à des niveaux sonores plus élevés, ou sur une durée plus longue peut endommager votre ouïe. Si vous vous exposez à des pressions acoustiques supérieures à la limite légale, pensez à raccourcir le temps d’exposition pour vous protéger d’éventuelles dégradations de votre ouïe. Voici quelques signes pouvant vous alerter d’une exposition trop longue à un niveau sonore trop élevé : - Vous entendez des sons de cloche, de sonnerie ou des sifflements ! - Vous avez l’impression de ne plus entendre les sons aigus ! PRÉCAUTIONS D’UTILISATION : CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN 33 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr Les ensembles possèdent tous les éléments communs suivants : Récepteur Câble audio, jack 6,35 mm mono vers jack 6,35 mm mono Batteries Bloc Secteur Émetteur à main avec capsule dynamique Micro Serre-tête Émetteur de poche Chaque ensemble possède de plus des éléments différents, comme suit : LDWSECOBPH ECO Set avec émetteur de poche et micro serre-tête LDWSECOHHD ECO Set avec émetteur à main, capsule dynamique COMPOSANTS DU SYSTÈME : LE RÉCEPTEUR INTÈGRE LA FONCTION DE SQUELCH PAR SIGNAL PILOTE (PILOT TONE) La technologie de synchronisation par signal pilote protège des interférences occasionnées par des signaux HF provenant d'autres appareils. L'émetteur superpose un signal inaudible, la fréquence pilote, au signal audio transmis. Le récepteur détecte et évalue cette fréquence pilote, ce qui lui permet d'identifier le signal de l'émetteur correspondant et de couper (Mute) tous les autres. 34ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 INTERRUPTEUR ON / OFF Maintenez enfoncée la touche pendant au moins 1 seconde pour allumer ou éteindre l'émetteur à main. 2 INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU AUDIO 5 SEGMENTS 3 INDICATEUR LED ANTENNE CANAL A 4 INDICATEUR LED ANTENNE CANAL B 5 INDICATEUR NUMÉRO CANAL 6 TOUCHE CANAL - 7 TOUCHE CANAL + 8 PORT IR 9 TOUCHE DE SYNCHRONISATION DE CANAUX Tenez l'émetteur en face du récepteur, les ports infrarouges des deux appareils se trouvant en contact visuel direct. Appuyez ensuite sur cette touche pour lancer la procédure de synchronisation. 10 POTENTIOMÈTRE DE RÉGLAGE DE NIVEAU DE LA SORTIE AUDIO Tournez ce potentiomètre vers la droite pour monter le niveau, vers la gauche pour le baisser. 11 ANTENNES 1 EMBASE POUR TENSION CONTINUE (ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR) 2 SORTIE ASYMÉTRIQUE SUR JACK 6,35 MM 3 SORTIE SYMÉTRIQUE SUR CONNECTEUR XLR RÉCEPTEUR LD WSECO16 : V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 FACE AVANT : FACE ARRIÈRE : 35 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 GRILLE DE PROTECTION DE LA CAPSULE DU MICROPHONE 2 INDICATEUR POWER / ÉTAT DES PILES Cette LED s'allume en rouge lorsque la pile est à remplacer. Elle s'allume en vert lorsque l'émetteur à main est sous tension et que les piles sont en bon état. 3 INTERRUPTEUR MARCHE/ARRÊT (POWER) 4 CAPOT COMPARTIMENT PILES 5 PORT IR ÉMETTEUR À MAIN : 2 3 1 REMPLACEMENT DES PILES La durée de fonctionnement sur piles (alcalines) est d’environ 8 heures. Remplacez les piles dès que la LED se met à clignoter en rouge. 5 4 36ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ANTENNE 2 INDICATEUR D'ÉTAT DES PILES Cette LED s'allume en rouge lorsque la pile est à remplacer. Elle s'allume en vert lorsque l'émetteur de poche est sous tension et que les piles sont en bon état. 3 ENTRÉE SUR CONNECTEUR MINI-XLR 4 SÉLECTEUR DE RÉGLAGE DE GAIN ET DE MUTE Trois valeurs de gain sont disponibles : Mic : signal au niveau micro 0 dB : Guitare avec micros passifs - 10 dB : Guitare avec capteurs actifs 5 INTERRUPTEUR ON / OFF / MUTE Le MUTE correspond à la position médiane de l'interrupteur. ÉMETTEUR DE POCHE : tter PORT DE L’ÉMETTEUR DE POCHE Accrochez l’émetteur à votre ceinture 1 ou à la sangle de votre guitare 2 . La position optimale du récepteur est celle du premier exemple ci-contre, vers le bas, ceinture ou sangle complètement englobée par la pince. 1 REMPLACEMENT DES PILES De façon générale, les 2 piles alcalines LR06 assurent une autonomie de 8 heures. Lorsque la LED d’état des piles s’allume, nous vous recommandons de remplacer ces dernières sans tarder. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 37 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH ASTUCES POUR AMÉLIORER LES PERFORMANCES : •Orientez l'émetteur directement vers le récepteur (contact visuel entre les deux appareils). •Ne placez pas le récepteur à proximité d'objets ou de surfaces métalliques, ni d'appareils numériques (lecteur de CD, ordinateur, etc.). •Ne placez pas le récepteur à proximité directe d'un mur, et veillez à ce qu'il se trouve à au moins à 1 m du sol. •Les téléphones mobiles, appareils de radio bidirectionnels etc. peuvent perturber la liaison entre l'émetteur et le récepteur ; mieux vaut ne pas les utiliser à proximité de la zone d'émission. EN CAS DE PROBLÈME PROBLÈME : INDICATION : SOLUTION : Pas de son, ou signal audio de niveau trop faible Émetteur : L'indicateur On/ Off ne s'allume pas. Vérifiez bien que l'appareil est correctement branché au secteur. Indicateur Power éteint. Vérifiez que vous avez relié correctement le bloc secteur au récepteur. Récepteur : Indicateur HF allumé Montez le son. Augmentez la valeur de gain au niveau de l'émetteur. Vérifiez le parcours du signal du récepteur à l'amplificateur ou à la console. Indicateur HF éteint Émetteur : Indicateur allumé Ne placez pas le récepteur à proximité d'un objet métallique. Vérifiez que l'espace de propagation des ondes est dégagé entre émetteur et récepteur (contact visuel direct). Rapprochez l'émetteur du récepteur. Vérifiez que l'émetteur et le récepteur sont réglés sur une fréquence identique. Émetteur : L'indicateur d'état des piles s'allume Remplacez les piles. Distorsions ou autres bruits parasites indésirables Récepteur : Indicateur RF ALLUMÉ Éloignez les sources potentielles d'interférences, telles que lecteur de CD, ordinateur, source audio numérique, etc. Distorsions audibles dans le signal Émetteur : L'indicateur d'état des piles s'allume Remplacez les piles. Différence de niveau importante par rapport à une liaison câble sur la même source – ou lors d'un changement de guitare ou de microphone Réglez correctement, en compensation, la valeur de gain sur l'émetteur et le volume sonore sur le récepteur. 38ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO SPECIFICATIONS: SYSTEM Range under typical ambient conditions: 50 m Note: the actual useable range depends on absorption and reflection of the RF signal as well as interference. Frequency range: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz THD: (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz audio signal): <1% 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamics: 90 dB (A-weighted) Temperature range: -10°C / +50°C Note: Range is dependent on battery type. RECEIVER Max. audio output level(ref. +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR connector (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6.3-mm jack connector (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Output impedance: XLR connector: 200 ohms 6.3-mm jack connector: 1 kohms XLR connector: balanced Pin 1: ground Pin 2: (+) Pin 3: (-) Sensitivity (in reference to middle audio frequency): <-92 dB Image rejection: 90 dB Dimensions (W x H x D): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Weight: 400 g Power supply: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, external power adapter BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain range: 30 dB Input impedance: 470 kohms Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Weight: 80 g, without batteries Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 8 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW HANDHELD MICROPHONE TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV Dimensions: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (diameter) Weight: 270 g Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW AVAILABLE FIXED FREQUENCIES ECO1: 793.150 MHz | 797.050 MHz | 800.650 MHz | 802.300 MHz | 813.150 MHz ECO2: 863.100 MHz | 863.900 MHz | 864.500 MHz | 864.900 MHz 39 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Liste des fréquences pour utiliser jusqu’à 3 systèmes en simultané sans interférences. Frequency MHz Simultaneous TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: 40ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO ACCESSOIRES OPTIONNELS : LDWS100GC - Câble pour guitare, jack 6,35 mm mono vers mini-XLR LDWS100MH1 - Serre-tête, noir LDWSECO1BP - Émetteur de poche (Belt Pack) LDWS100ML - Micro cravate LDWSECO1MD - Émetteur à main avec capsule dynamique 41 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH GARANTIE LIMITÉE: Cette garantie limitée s’applique aux produits de la marque Adam Hall, LD Systems, Defender, Palmer et Eminence. Les droits inhérents à la garantie légale vis-à-vis du revendeur ne sont pas affectés par cette garantie. En fait elle justifie d’une garantie supplémentaire indépendante auprès de la société Adam Hall. La société Adam Hall garantit que le produit que vous avez acheté Adam Hall ou à l’un de ses revendeurs officiels, est exempt de défaut matériel et d’usinage pour une durée de 2 ans (ou 5 ans pour les produits Palmer) à partir de la date d’achat, lorsqu’il est utilisé dans des conditions normales. La période de garantie limitée débute le jour de l’achat du produit. Pour bénéficier de cette garantie vous devez produire une preuve d’achat sur laquelle figure la date d’achat du produit (ex : ticket de caisse daté, bon de livraison daté…). Si un produit d´une des marques citées ci-dessus venait à nécessiter une réparation durant la période de garantie limitée, vous aurez alors le droit de bénéficier des services de la garantie selon les termes et conditions mentionnés par ce document. Cette garantie limitée ne s’applique qu’à l’acheteur initial de ce produit Adam Hall et ne peut être en aucun cas transférée à un tiers devenu propriétaire du produit. Durant la période de garantie limitée, Adam Hall s‘engage à réparer ou remplacer les pièces défectueuses du produit. Toutes les pièces ou éléments démontés lors d‘une réparation par Adam Hall deviennent la propriété d‘Adam Hall. Dans le cas improbable d´un défaut récurrent, Adam Hall peut, à sa discrétion, décider de vous fournir un produit de remplacement de son choix, dont les capacités techniques sont au moins équivalentes à celles de votre produit initial. Adam Hall ne garantit pas que le fonctionnement de ce produit sera exempt d‘erreur ou ininterrompu. Adam Hall ne peut pas être rendu responsable des dégâts résultant de votre manquement à suivre les instructions d‘utilisation fournies avec votre produit. Cette garantie limitée ne s‘applique pas, - aux pièces d‘usure (ex: piles) - aux produits dont le numéro de série a été effacé ou aux produits endommagés ou rendus défectueux par accident - dans le cas d‘une utilisation non conforme aux conditions normales d‘utilisation, dans le cas d‘abus ou toute autre cause externe - dans le cas d‘un usage du produit en dehors des paramètres d‘utilisation stipulés dans la documentation fournie avec le produit - dans le cas de l‘usage de pièces de remplacement n‘étant pas fabriquées ou vendues par Adam Hall - dans le cas d‘une modification du produit ou d‘une réparation par quiconque autre qu‘Adam Hall Ces termes et conditions constituent l‘accord de garantie complet et exclusif entre vous et Adam Hall concernant le produit de la marque Adam Hall que vous vous êtes procuré. DÉCLARATIONS DU FABRICANT : 42ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITÉ Si votre produit Adam Hall devait ne pas fonctionner correctement, votre seul et unique dédommagement sera la réparation du produit ou son remplacement. La responsabilité maximale imputable à Adam Hall dans le cadre de cette garantie limitée se limite au montant le plus bas. Ce montant découle du prix d’achat du produit ou bien du coût de la réparation ou des pièces de remplacement qui sont tombés en panne dans des conditions d’utilisation normales. Adam Hall n’est pas responsable des dommages causés par le produit ou par un dysfonctionnement du produit, y compris les pertes de profits, les pertes d’épargne, et les conséquences inhérentes à ces dommages. La responsabilité d’Adam Hall ne peut pas être engagée dans le cas d’une réclamation par un tiers ou dans le cas d’une réclamation émanant de l’acheteur initial pour le compte d’un tiers. Cette limitation de responsabilité est valable indépendamment du fait que les dommages commis fassent l’objet de poursuites judiciaires, qu’ils fassent l’objet de réclamation (y compris pour négligence), de réclamations contractuelles ou tout autre réclamation. Cette limitation de responsabilité ne peut être amendée ou dérogée par quiconque. Elle est effective même si vous aviez avisé Adam Hall ou l’un de ses représentants officiels de la possibilité d’un tel dommage. Toutefois cette limitation de responsabilité est sans effet dans le cas de réclamations pour dommages corporels. Cette garantie limitée vous confère des droits légaux spécifiques. Selon votre pays, ou l’État dans lequel vous vous trouvez, il est possible que vous disposiez d’autres droits. Veuillez consulter les lois applicables dans votre pays ou votre État pour déterminer l’ensemble de vos droits. FAIRE FONCTIONNER LA GARANTIE Pour faire fonctionner la garantie sur ce produit, veuillez contacter Adam Hall ou le revendeur agréé auquel vous avez acheté le produit. DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE CE Ces appareils répondent aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes des directives 2004/108/EC (EMC) et 2006/95/EC (LVD). Pour plus d‘informations, consultez www.adamhall.com. ELIMINATION CORRECTE DES DÉCHETS (DÉCHETS ÉLECTROMÉNAGERS) (Applicable dans l’Union Européenne et dans les autres pays européens disposant d’un système de tri des déchets) Ce signe figurant sur le produit, ou dans la brochure jointe au produit, indique qu’il ne doit pas être jeté dans le même bac à ordures que les déchets ménagers classiques lorsqu’il arrive en fin de vie. Pour écarter les risques de pollution de l’environnement ou les risques d’intoxication humaine dûes à un mauvais traitement des déchets, veuillez séparer ce produit des autres types de déchets. Il sera ainsi inséré dans la boucle du recyclage et ces composants pourront être traités puis éventuellement réutilisés. Nous recommandons aux particuliers de contacter leur revendeur local ou les autorités locales pour s’informer de la meilleure façon de traiter les déchets électroménagers. Les professionnels doivent contacter leur fournisseur et examiner avec lui les termes et conditions de leur contrat d’achat. Ce produit ne doit pas être mélangé aux déchets industriels. DÉCLARATIONS DU FABRICANT : 43 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH DECLARATION WEEE Votre produit LD-Systems a été développé et fabriqué avec des matériaux et des composants de haute qualité, qui peuvent être recyclés et/ou réutilisés. Ce symbole indique que les appareils électriques et électroniques, à la fin de leur durée de vie opérationnelle, doivent être gérés séparément des déchets ordinaires. Veuillez apporter ce produit au point de collecte ou centre de recyclage local prévu pour de tels appareils. Vous contribuerez ainsi à la protection de l'environnement dans lequel nous vivons tous. BATTERIES ET ACCUMULATEURS Les piles ou batteries rechargeable livrées avec l'appareil sont recyclables. Veuillez les jeter dans un bac à déchets spécial, ou déposez-les chez votre revendeur spécialisé. Pour une meilleure protection de l'environnement, ne jetez les piles que lorsqu'elles sont épuisées. Adam Hall GmbH, tous droits réservés. Les caractéristiques techniques et les fonctions disponibles sur le produit sont sujettes à modifications. La photocopie, la traduction et toute forme de copie, partielle ou intégrale, de ce manuel utilisateur sont interdites. 44ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Gracias por elegir LD-Systems! Este producto se ha diseñado para ofrecer una fiabilidad y durabilidad óptima. Los productos de LD-Systems se caracterizan por su gran calidad, avalada por el prestigio de la marca y una dilatada experiencia como fabricante. Le rogamos que lea atentamente estas instrucciones para familiarizarse rápidamente con este producto LDSystems y aprovechar al máximo todas las funciones. Si desea obtener información sobre LD-Systems, visite nuestro sitio web WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 45 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 SISTEMA INALÁMBRICO UHF CON DIVERSITY UHF Bodypack Transmitter 46ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO MEDIDAS PREVENTIVAS: 1. Lea atentamente las instrucciones de seguridad adjuntas así como las instrucciones de este documento. 2. Guarde todas las instrucciones. 3. Utilice el equipo únicamente según la finalidad prevista. 4. Procure seguir las normas vigentes sobre reciclaje de desechos. Separe los componentes de plástico, papel y cartón del paquete para reciclarlos en sus contenedores respectivos. 5. Acuda a personal de servicio técnico cualificado en caso de que el equipo esté dañado, no funcione correctamente, se haya expuesto a lluvia o haya caído líquido sobre el equipo. 6. Evite colocar el equipo cerca de una fuente de calor, como hornos, radiadores o cualquier otro dispositivo (incluidos los amplificadores). Mantenga una distancia suficiente entre los amplificadores y las paredes, estanterías, etc. para evitar cualquier sobrecalentamiento. 7. Una vez realizadas todas las conexiones, compruebe el cableado para evitar posibles daños o accidentes. No utilice cables o conexiones que estén dañados. 8. En la instalación utilice solo soportes, fijaciones, estantes, mesas, etc. que sean estables y estén homologados. Compruebe que la estabilidad es adecuada para evitar la caída del equipo. 9. Interferencias con los sistemas inalámbricos. El uso simultáneo de micrófonos inalámbricos y de teléfonos móviles, cuando estos dispositivos están a corta distancia entre sí, puede provocar interferencias en la señal del micrófono que serán audibles en el sistema de megafonía. ADVERTENCIA: Para evitar el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, no retire la tapa (o el panel posterior). Este equipo no contiene piezas que puedan ser reparadas por el usuario. Para cualquier tarea de mantenimiento o reparación, acuda a un técnico cualificado. El símbolo de rayo dentro de un triángulo equilátero advierte al usuario de la presencia de tensión peligrosa sin aislamiento dentro de la carcasa del producto que puede ser de magnitud suficiente como para suponer un riesgo para las personas. El símbolo de exclamación dentro de un triángulo equilátero advierte al usuario de la existencia de importantes instrucciones de funcionamiento y mantenimiento (reparaciones) en la documentación adjunta con el equipo. ¡ADVERTENCIA: ALTO VOLUMEN! Este sistema de transmisión se destina a un uso profesional. Por consiguiente, si se aplica a un uso comercial, estará sujeto a las normas y reglamentos de la Asociación para la prevención de accidentes de su sector profesional. Como fabricante, Adam Hall tiene la obligación de informar formalmente a los usuarios de la existencia de posibles riesgos para la salud. Este sistema puede producir una presión sonora de 80 dB. Por ley, 85 dB es el nivel de presión sonora máximo al que puede estar expuesto durante una jornada laboral. Este nivel se estableció a partir de los datos científicos obtenidos de las investigaciones realizadas en el campo de la medicina del trabajo. Un nivel superior o un tiempo de exposición mayor pueden provocar daños en su oído. Para no ocasionar lesiones auditivas, el tiempo de exposición deberá acortarse si aumenta el nivel de presión sonora. Estos son algunos de los síntomas que indican una exposición excesiva a altos niveles de presión sonora: - Escucha silbidos. - Le parece que ya no puede oír los tonos agudos. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN 47 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr COMPONENTES DEL SISTEMA: Cada set incluye los siguientes componentes: Receptor Cable de audio jack de 6,3 mm mono a jack de 6,3 mm Baterías mono Adaptador de corriente Micrófono de mano dinámico Además, en función del set podrán incluirse los siguientes componentes: LDWSECOBPH Set ECO con petaca y auriculares LDWSECOHHD Set ECO con micrófono dinámico de mano Auriculares Petaca FUNCIÓN DE TONO PILOTO DEL RECEPTOR El tono piloto evita las interferencias ocasionadas por las señales de otros equipos similares. El transmisor añade una señal inaudible, conocida como tono piloto, a la señal transmitida. El receptor detecta el tono piloto, y puede identificar la señal de la emisora correcta y cancelar el resto de transmisores. 48ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 INTERRUPTOR DE ENCENDIDO/APAGADO Pulse y mantenga pulsado durante 1 segundo para encender o apagar. 2 VÚMETRO DE 5 SEGMENTOS 3 LED INDICADOR ANTENA A 4 LED INDICADOR ANTENA B 5 NÚMERO DE CANAL 6 BOTÓN PARA BAJAR CANAL 7 BOTÓN PARA SUBIR CANAL 8 RECEPTOR DE INFRARROJOS 9 BOTÓN PARA SINCRONIZAR CANALES Mantenga el receptor frente al transmisor de tal forma que haya visión directa entre sus dos puertos de infrarrojos. Pulse este botón para realizar la sincronización. 10 BOTÓN PARA CONTROLAR EL NIVEL DE SALIDA DE AUDIO Gire a la derecha para aumentar el nivel; gire a la izquierda para bajarlo. 11 ANTENAS 1 TOMA PARA EL ADAPTADOR DE CORRIENTE 2 SALIDA NO BALANCEADA POR JACK DE 6,3 MM 3 SALIDA BALANCEADA POR XLR RECEPTOR LD WSECO16: V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 PANEL ANTERIOR: PANEL POSTERIOR: 49 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH MICRÓFONO DE MANO TRANSMISOR: 1 REJILLA DEL MICRÓFONO 2 INDICADOR DE ENCENDIDO/ESTADO DE LA BATERÍA El LED se ilumina en color rojo cuando la batería está descargada; se ilumina en color verde cuando el equipo está encendido y el estado de la batería es correcto. 3 INTERRUPTOR DE ENCENDIDO 4 TAPA DEL COMPARTIMENTO DE BATERÍAS 5 RECEPTOR DE INFRARROJOS 2 3 1 SUSTITUCIÓN DE LAS BATERÍAS La duración de unas baterías alcalinas es de 8 horas, aproximadamente. Sustituya las baterías cuando el LED rojo parpadee. 5 4 50ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO PETACA: 1 ANTENA 2 INDICADOR DE ESTADO DE LA BATERÍA El LED se ilumina en color rojo cuando la batería está descargada; se ilumina en color verde cuando el equipo está encendido y el estado de la batería es correcto. 3 ENTRADA MINI-XLR 4 AJUSTE DE GANANCIA Hay tres ajustes de ganancia: Mic: micrófono 0 dB: Guitarra con pastillas pasivas -10 dB: Guitarra con pastillas activas 5 INTERRUPTOR DE ENCENDIDO/APAGADO/MUTE La posición media para silenciarla. 6 RECEPTOR DE INFRARROJOS tter USO DE LA PETACA TRANSMISORA La petaca se cuelga del cinturón 1 o de la cinta de la guitarra 2 . Para mejorar el agarre en el caso 1 , se recomienda deslizar el clip de la petaca hasta el fondo. SUSTITUCIÓN DE LAS BATERÍAS En general, las dos baterías alcalinas duran hasta 8 horas en funcionamiento. Si se ilumina el LED de nivel de batería, deberá sustituir las baterías inmediatamente. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 51 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH CONSEJOS PARA MEJORAR EL RENDIMIENTO: •Asegúrese de que hay "línea directa" entre el transmisor y el receptor. •No coloque el receptor cerca de objetos metálicos o dispositivos electrónicos, como reproductores de CD, ordenadores, etc. •Coloque el receptor de modo que esté alejado de la pared y al menos 1 m por encima del suelo. •Algunos dispositivos, como los teléfonos móviles o los equipos de radio bidireccionales, pueden causar interferencias entre el transmisor y el receptor, por lo que no se deben utilizar cerca del sistema. RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS PROBLEMA INDICACIONES SOLUCIÓN No hay audio o es demasiado bajo Transmisor: el indicador de encendido está apagado Asegúrese de que el sistema está conectado correctamente. El indicador de encendido está apagado Asegúrese de que el adaptador de corriente está correctamente conectado al receptor. Receptor: el indicador de RF está encendido Suba el volumen. Aumente la ganancia del transmisor. Compruebe las conexiones entre el receptor y el amplificador o mezclador. Receptor: el indicador de RF está apagado Transmisor: el LED está encendido No coloque el receptor cerca de objetos metálicos. Compruebe que no hay obstáculos entre el transmisor y el receptor, es decir, que hay "línea directa". Coloque el transmisor más cerca del receptor. Asegúrese de que el transmisor y el receptor estén en la misma frecuencia. Transmisor: se ilumina el indicador de estado de las baterías Sustituya las baterías. El audio está distorsionado o viene con ruido Receptor: se ilumina el indicador de RF Elimine la posible fuente de interferencia: reproductores de CD, ordenadores, generadores de efectos digitales, etc. Aumento de la distorsión Transmisor: se ilumina el indicador de estado de las baterías Sustituya las baterías Hay una gran diferencia de nivel cuando la misma fuente de audio se conecta por cable o cuando se utilizan otras guitarras o micrófonos. Ajuste la ganancia en el transmisor o el nivel de audio en el receptor. 52ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS: SYSTEM Range under typical ambient conditions: 50 m Note: the actual useable range depends on absorption and reflection of the RF signal as well as interference. Frequency range: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz THD: (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz audio signal): <1% 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamics: 90 dB (A-weighted) Temperature range: -10°C / +50°C Note: Range is dependent on battery type. RECEIVER Max. audio output level(ref. +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR connector (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6.3-mm jack connector (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Output impedance: XLR connector: 200 ohms 6.3-mm jack connector: 1 kohms XLR connector: balanced Pin 1: ground Pin 2: (+) Pin 3: (-) Sensitivity (in reference to middle audio frequency): <-92 dB Image rejection: 90 dB Dimensions (W x H x D): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Weight: 400 g Power supply: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, external power adapter BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain range: 30 dB Input impedance: 470 kohms Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Weight: 80 g, without batteries Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10-12 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW HANDHELD MICROPHONE TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV Dimensions: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (diameter) Weight: 270 g Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10-12 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW 53 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Lista de frecuencias para emplear hasta tres micrófonos inalámbricos de forma simultánea y sin intermodulación. Frequency MHz Simultaneous ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS: 54ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO ACCESORIOS OPCIONALES: LDWS100GC: Cable de guitarra de jack de 6,3 mm mono a Mini XLR LDWS100MH1: Auriculares de color negro LDWSECO1BP: Petaca LDWS100ML: Micrófono Lavalier LDWSECO1MD: Micrófono de mano dinámico 55 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH GARANTÍA LIMITADA Esta garantía limitada se aplica a los productos de la marca Adam Hall, LD Systems, Defender, Palmer y Eminence. No afecta a los derechos de garantía legal que asume el vendedor. De hecho, le concede al usuario derechos adicionales ante Adam Hall, independientes de la garantía legal. Adam Hall garantiza que el producto que ha adquirido de Adam Hall o de cualquier distribuidor autorizado de Adam Hall estará exento de defectos de material y mano de obra, en condiciones normales de uso, durante un período de 2 o 5 años a partir de la fecha de compra. La garantía limitada entra en vigor el día de la fecha de compra. Para tener derecho a esta garantía será necesario presentar un justificante de compra válido en el que figure la fecha de compra del producto, por ejemplo, la factura o el albarán de entrega. Si el producto que ha adquirido necesitara una reparación durante la vigencia de la garantía limitada, tendrá derecho a obtener los servicios de garantía conforme a los términos y condiciones establecidos en este documento. Esta garantía limitada se aplica únicamente al comprador original de este producto de Adam Hall y no se puede transferir a terceras personas a las que el comprador haya cedido la propiedad del producto. Durante el periodo de garantía limitada, Adam Hall se compromete a reparar o sustituir las piezas defectuosas del producto. Todas las piezas o componentes retirados durante la reparación pasarán a ser propiedad de Adam Hall. En el caso poco probable de que se produzca un fallo recurrente en el producto adquirido, Adam Hall, a su entera discreción, podrá optar por sustituir dicho producto por otro de similares características. Adam Hall no garantiza el funcionamiento ininterrumpido y sin fallos de este producto. Adam Hall no se hace responsable de los posibles daños ocasionados por no seguir las instrucciones de uso suministradas con el producto Adam Hall. Esta garantía limitada no se aplica: - en caso de desgaste normal de los consumibles (baterías, etc.) - a los productos cuyo número de serie ha sido borrado, o que han quedado dañados y defectuosos debido a un accidente - en caso de defectos ocasionados por una incorrecta utilización o manipulación, o cualquier otra causa ajena - en caso de utilización del producto no conforme con los parámetros establecidos en la documentación facilitada con el producto - en caso de utilización de piezas de repuesto no fabricadas o vendidas por Adam Hall - si el producto ha sido modificado o reparado por personal no autorizado por Adam Hall Estos términos y condiciones constituyen el acuerdo de garantía íntegro y exclusivo entre usted y Adam Hall en relación con el producto Adam Hall que acaba de adquirir. DECLARACIÓN DEL FABRICANTE: 56ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO LIMITACIÓN DE RESPONSABILIDAD Si su producto Adam Hall no funciona de acuerdo con las garantías mencionadas arriba, tendrá derecho exclusivamente a la reparación o sustitución del mismo. La responsabilidad máxima de Adam Hall en virtud de los términos de esta garantía está limitada al menor importe que resulte del precio de compra del producto, del coste de la reparación o la sustitución de las piezas que han dejado de funcionar en condiciones normales de uso. Adam Hall no será responsable de cualquier daño causado por el producto o por el mal funcionamiento del producto, incluidas la pérdida de ganancias, la pérdida de ahorros o cualquier consecuencia derivada de dichas pérdidas. Adam Hall no se hará responsable de ninguna reclamación presentada por un tercero o por el comprador inicial en nombre de un tercero. Esta limitación de responsabilidad se aplicará con independencia de que se solicite una indemnización por daños y perjuicios, o se presenten reclamaciones por negligencia, contractuales o de cualquier otra índole, y no podrá ser derogada o modificada. Esta limitación de responsabilidad será efectiva incluso en el caso de que el comprador hubiese avisado previamente a Adam Hall o a alguno de sus representantes de la posibilidad de reclamar daños y perjuicios. No obstante, esta limitación de responsabilidad no tendrá efecto en caso de reclamación por daños personales. Esta garantía limitada le otorga derechos legales específicos. Puede que posea derechos adicionales conforme a la legislación del país o Estado en el que se encuentre. Le recomendamos que consulte la legislación vigente en su país o Estado para conocer el alcance de sus derechos. APLICACIÓN DE LA GARANTÍA Para solicitar asistencia técnica en relación con el producto en garantía, póngase en contacto con Adam Hall o con el distribuidor autorizado donde adquirió el producto. DECLARACIÓN CE DE CONFORMIDAD Estos dispositivos cumplen con los requisitos esenciales y otras disposiciones pertinentes de las Directivas 2004/108/EC (EMC) y 2006/95/EC (LVD). Para más información, consulte www.adamhall.com. ELIMINACIÓN CORRECTA DE ESTE PRODUCTO (DESECHOS ELÉCTRICOS) (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en los países europeos que dispongan de un sistema de recogida selectiva) El símbolo que aparece sobre el producto o en la documentación adjunta indica que, al final de su vida útil, no deberá desecharse con los demás residuos domésticos. Para evitar posibles efectos negativos en el medio ambiente y en la salud humana debidos al vertido incontrolado de desechos, no mezcle este producto con los demás residuos. La recogida selectiva ayuda a su posterior reciclaje y fomenta la reutilización sostenible de los componentes de este equipo. Si usted es un particular, deberá ponerse en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquirió este producto, o con el ayuntamiento, para informarse sobre el reciclaje adecuado de este equipo. Si usted es una empresa, deberá ponerse en contacto con su proveedor e informarse sobre los términos y condiciones de su contrato de compra-venta. Este producto no debe mezclarse con otros residuos industriales. DECLARACIÓN DEL FABRICANTE: 57 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH DECLARACIÓN SOBRE WEEE Este producto LD-Systems se ha desarrollado y fabricado con materiales y componentes de alta calidad que se pueden reciclar o reutilizar. Este símbolo indica que los equipos eléctricos y electrónicos deben separarse del resto de residuos comunes al final de su vida útil. Para desechar este producto, llévelo al punto de recogida municipal o al centro de reciclaje específico para este tipo de equipos. De este modo, contribuirá a proteger el medioambiente. PILAS Y ACUMULADORES Las pilas suministradas o las pilas recargables se pueden reciclar. Para desecharlas, deposítelas en un contenedor especial o entréguelas a su proveedor especializado. Para proteger el medioambiente, deseche sólo pilas gastadas. Adam Hall GmbH. Todos los derechos reservados. Los datos técnicos y las características funcionales del producto están sujetos a modificaciones. Se prohíbe la fotocopia, traducción y cualquier otra forma de reproducción parcial o total de este manual de usuario. DECLARACIÓN DEL FABRICANTE: 58ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Dziękujemy za wybór LD Systems! Zaprojektowaliśmy ten produkt tak, aby działał sprawnie przez wiele lat. LD-Systems gwarantuje wysoką jakość produktów swoją marką i wieloma latami doświadczenia jako producent. Prosimy abyś zapoznał się dokładnie z niniejszą instrukcją, ponieważ chcemy abyś szybko mógł cieszyć się w pełni swoim nowym produktem LD Systems. Więcej informacji na temat LD Systems znajdziesz na naszej stronie internetowej: WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 59 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 SYSTEM BEZPRZEWODOWY UHF UHF Bodypack Transmitter 60ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1. Przeczytaj uważnie dołączone informacje na temat bezpieczeństwa i następujące po nich wskazówki. 2. Zachowaj pełną dokumentację produktu. 3. Używaj urządzenia zgodnie z jego przeznaczeniem. 4. Przestrzegaj przepisów dotyczących zarządzania odpadami. Posegreguj elementy opakowania na części z tworzywa sztucznego i tektury przed ich przekazaniem do utylizacji. 5. Przekaż urządzenie wykwalifikowanym pracownikom serwisu, jeżeli zostało uszkodzone, narażone na kontakt z deszczem lub płynami, lub gdy nie działa prawidłowo. 6. Nie przechowuj urządzenia w pobliżu źródeł ciepła takich jak piece, kaloryfery i inne urządzenia (w tym wzmacniacze). Zawsze dbaj o zachowanie odległości między urządzeniem, a wzmacniaczami, ścianami, skrzyniami itd. aby zapobiec przegrzaniu. 7. Po podłączeniu upewnij się, że wszystkie połączenia są wykonane prawidłowo, aby uniknąć jakiegokolwiek rodzaju wypadku lub szkody. Nigdy nie używaj wadliwego okablowania. 8. Używaj wyłącznie zatwierdzonych i stabilnych statywów, zaczepów, półek, stołów itp. przy instalacji. Po montażu sprawdź stabilność konstrukcji. 9. Występowanie zakłóceń w systemach bezprzewodowych Równoczesne używanie kilku mikrofonów bezprzewodowych (jeżeli są niezbyt oddalone od siebie) może prowadzić do pojawienia się zakłóceń w sygnale mikrofonowym, które mogą być słyszalne w zestawie PA. UWAGA: Aby zmniejszyć zagrożenie porażeniem elektrycznym, nie zdejmuj pokrywy (lub tylnej części obudowy). Brak elementów serwisowalnych przez użytkownika wewnątrz. Przekaż obsługę serwisową wykwalifikowanym fachowcom. Symbol błyskawicy wewnątrz trójkąta równobocznego ostrzega użytkownika o nieizolowanych częściach pod niebezpiecznym napięciem wewnątrz obudowy produktu, które w znaczący sposób zwiększają zagrożenie dla zdrowia i życia osób. Znak wykrzyknika wewnątrz trójkąta równobocznego zwraca uwagę użytkownika na ważne wskazówki odnośnie obsługi lub konserwacji (serwisu) umieszczone w instrukcjach i opisach dostarczonych wraz z produktem. OSTRZEŻENIE! WYSOKI POZIOM GŁOŚNOŚCI! Opisywany system transmisyjny jest przeznaczony do zastosowań profesjonalnych. Dlatego też komercyjne użytkowanie tego sprzętu podlega zasadom i przepisom bezpieczeństwa właściwym dla danego sektora działalności, w tym regulacjom określonym przez towarzystwa ubezpieczeniowe. Firma Adam Hall, jako wytwórca, jest zobowiązany do formalnego poinformowania o istnieniu potencjalnych zagrożeń zdrowia. System może być źródłem fali dźwiękowej o ciśnieniu akustycznym rzędu 80 dB. Zgodnie z obowiązującymi przepisami, ucho ludzkie może być narażone w czasie dnia roboczego na działanie dźwięków o poziomie 85 dB. Poziom ten, na podstawie ekspertyz technicznych specjalistów od medycyny pracy, został przyjęty jako podstawa klasyfikacji hałasu. Wyższy poziom dźwięku lub dłuższy czas narażenia mogą spowodować uszkodzenie słuchu. Przy wyższych poziomach ciśnienia akustycznego czas narażenia powinien być skrócony, aby zapobiec uszkodzeniu słuchu. Poniżej opisano kilka objawów mogących wskazywać na to, że byłeś zbyt długo narażony na działanie dźwięków o zbyt wysokim poziomie ciśnienia akustycznego: – Słyszysz dzwonienie lub gwizd w uszach, – Odnosisz wrażenie, że nie słyszysz wysokich tonów. ŚRODKI BEZPIECZEŃSTWA: CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN 61 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH KOMPONENTY SYSTEMU: 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr Wszystkie zestawy zawierają następujące elementy systemowe: Odbiornik Kabel audio zakończony obustronnie wtykami mono typu Baterie jack 6,3 mm Zasilacz sieciowy Ręczny mikrofon dynamiczny Zestaw słuchawkowy Nadajnik Belt Pack Dodatkowo, w zależności od zestawu, zawarte są następujące elementy dodatkowe: LDWSECOBPH Zestaw ECO z nadajnikiem Belt Pack i zestawem słuchawkowym LDWSECOHHD Zestaw ECO z ręcznym mikrofonem dynamicznym ODBIORNIK DYSPONUJE FUNKCJĄ TONU PILOTUJĄCEGO Ton pilotujący zapobiega powstawaniu zakłóceń powodowanych przez sygnały RF, emitowane przez inne urządzenia. Nadajnik, wraz z przekazywanym sygnałem, przesyła niesłyszalny sygnał zwany tonem pilotującym. Odbiornik wyszukuje i ocenia ton pilotujący, będąc tym samym zdolnym do identyfikacji sygnału przypisanego nadajnika i wyciszenia innych sygnałów. 62ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 WŁĄCZNIK/WYŁĄCZNIK GŁÓWNY Wciśnij i przytrzymaj przez 1 sekundę, aby włączyć lub wyłączyć urządzenie. 2 5-SEGMENTOWY WSKAŹNIK POZIOMU SYGNAŁU AUDIO 3 WSKAŹNIK LED KANAŁU ANTENY A 4 WSKAŹNIK LED KANAŁU ANTENY B 5 WYŚWIETLACZ NUMERU KANAŁU 6 PRZYCISK PRZEŁĄCZENIA KANAŁU NA NIŻSZY 7 PRZYCISK PRZEŁĄCZENIA KANAŁU NA WYŻSZY 8 OKIENKO PODCZERWIENI 9 PRZYCISK SYNCHRONIZACJI KANAŁU Przytrzymaj nadajnik przed odbiornikiem w taki sposób, aby porty podczerwieni znalazły się naprzeciwko siebie. Wciśnij przycisk, aby zakończyć synchronizację. 10 PRZYCISK KONTROLI POZIOMU WYJŚCIOWEGO SYGNAŁU AUDIO Obrót w prawo zwiększa głośność, a w lewo ją zmniejsza. 11 ANTENY 1 GNIAZDO PODŁĄCZANIA ZASILACZA DC 2 WYJŚCIE KABLA NIESYMETRYCZNEGO JACK 6,3 MM 3 WYJŚCIE KABLA SYMETRYCZNEGO XLR ODBIORNIK LD WSECO16: V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 STRONA PRZEDNIA: STRONA TYLNA: 63 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 GŁÓWKA MIKROFONU 2 WSKAŹNIK STANU ZASILANIA/BATERII Kiedy poziom naładowania baterii jest niski, zapala się czerwona dioda LED. Zielona dioda LED zapala się, gdy urządzenie jest włączone, a poziom naładowania baterii jest dobry. 3 PRZEŁĄCZNIK ZASILANIA 4 POKRYWA BATERII 5 OKIENKO PODCZERWIENI NADAJNIK RĘCZNY: 2 3 1 YMIANA BATERII Czas użytkowania baterii (alkalicznej) wynosi około 8 godzin. Wymienić baterię, gdy czerwona dioda LED zacznie migać. 5 4 64ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ANTENA 2 WSKAŹNIK STANU BATERII Kiedy poziom naładowania baterii jest niski, zapala się czerwona dioda LED. Zielona dioda LED zapala się, gdy urządzenie jest włączone, a poziom naładowania baterii jest dobry. 3 WEJŚCIE MINI-XLR 4 PRZEŁĄCZNIK WZMACNIANIA I WYCISZANIA SYGNAŁU Dostępne są trzy ustawienia wzmocnienia Mikrofonowe: mikrofon 0 dB Gitara z przetwornikami pasywnymi -10 dB Gitara z przetwornikami aktywnymi 5 WŁĄCZNIK/WYŁĄCZNIK/WYCISZENIE Środkowe położenie powoduje wyciszenie. 6 OKIENKO PODCZERWIENI NADAJNIK TYPU BELT PACK: tter NOSZENIE NADAJNIKA BELT PACK Przymocować nadajnik do paska od spodni 1 lub paska od gitary 2 . Nadajnik trzyma się najlepiej, jeśli zostanie maksymalnie nasadzony, jak w wersji 1 , aby zaczep całkowicie obejmował pas. WYMIANA BATERII 2 baterie alkaliczne starczają z reguły na maksymalnie 8 godzin. Gdy zaświeci się wskaźnik LED stanu baterii, należy je niezwłocznie wymienić. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 65 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH PORADY W CELU POPRAWIENIA OSIĄGÓW: •Skierować nadajnik bezpośrednio na odbiornik („kontakt wizualny” obu urządzeń). •Nie stawiać odbiornika blisko metalowych przedmiotów/powierzchni ani urządzeń cyfrowych (odtwarzacz CD, komputer itd.). •Ustawić odbiornik w taki sposób, aby nie stał bezpośrednio przed ścianą i znajdował się co najmniej 1 m nad podłogą. •Telefony komórkowe, dwukierunkowe urządzenia radiowe itp. mogą zakłócić połączenie radiowe pomiędzy nadajnikiem a odbiornikiem i nie powinny być używane w pobliżu urządzenia nadawczego. ROZWIĄZANIA PROBLEMÓW PROBLEM WSKAZANIE ROZWIĄZANIE Brak dźwięku lub dźwięk zbyt cichy Nadajnik: wskaźnik „On/Off” nie świeci. Upewnić się, że urządzenie jest prawidłowo podłączone. Wskaźnik zasilania sieciowego „Power” nie świeci. Upewnić się, że zasilacz sieciowy jest prawidłowo podłączony do odbiornika. Odbiornik: wskaźnik HF świeci. Zwiększyć głośność. Zwiększyć wartość wzmocnienia w nadajniku. Sprawdzić połączenia kablowe pomiędzy odbiornikiem a wzmacniaczem bądź mikserem. Wskaźnik HF odbiornika nie świeci. Nadajnik: wskaźnik świeci. Nie ustawiać odbiornika w pobliżu metalowych przedmiotów. Sprawdzić, czy tor nadawania pomiędzy nadajnikiem a odbiornikiem jest wolny („kontakt wizualny”). Postawić nadajnik bliżej odbiornika. Upewnić się, że nadajnik i odbiornik pracują na tej samej częstotliwości. Nadajnik: wskaźnik stanu baterii świeci. Wymienić baterie. Zniekształcenia lub niepożądane szumy towarzyszące Odbiornik: wskaźnik RF świeci. Usunąć możliwe źródła zakłóceń typu: odtwarzacz CD, komputer, cyfrowe źródła sygnałów itd. Nasilające się zniekształcenia Nadajnik: wskaźnik stanu baterii świeci. Wymienić baterie. Wyraźna różnica poziomów w stosunku do pracy przy podłączeniu tego samego źródła za pomocą kabla bądź zastosowaniu innych gitar lub mikrofonów. Ustawić odpowiednio wartość wzmocnienia w nadajniku oraz głośność w odbiorniku. 66ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO SPECYFIKACJA: SYSTEM Range under typical ambient conditions: 50 m Note: the actual useable range depends on absorption and reflection of the RF signal as well as interference. Frequency range: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz THD: (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz audio signal): <1% 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamics: 90 dB (A-weighted) Temperature range: -10°C / +50°C Note: Range is dependent on battery type. RECEIVER Max. audio output level(ref. +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR connector (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6.3-mm jack connector (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Output impedance: XLR connector: 200 ohms 6.3-mm jack connector: 1 kohms XLR connector: balanced Pin 1: ground Pin 2: (+) Pin 3: (-) Sensitivity (in reference to middle audio frequency): <-92 dB Image rejection: 90 dB Dimensions (W x H x D): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Weight: 400 g Power supply: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, external power adapter BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain range: 30 dB Input impedance: 470 kohms Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Weight: 80 g, without batteries Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 8 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW HANDHELD MICROPHONE TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV Dimensions: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (diameter) Weight: 270 g Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW AVAILABLE FIXED FREQUENCIES ECO1: 793.150 MHz | 797.050 MHz | 800.650 MHz | 802.300 MHz | 813.150 MHz ECO2: 863.100 MHz | 863.900 MHz | 864.500 MHz | 864.900 MHz 67 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Lista częstotliwości umożliwiających korzystanie równocześnie nawet z trzech mikrofonów bezprzewodowych bez intermodulacji. Frequency MHz Simultaneous SPECYFIKACJA: 68ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO OPCJONALNE AKCESORIA: LDWS100GC – kabel gitarowy z wtykiem mono typu jack 6,3 mm i wtykiem mini XLR LDWS100MH1 – zestaw słuchawkowy czarny LDWSECO1BP – nadajnik Belt Pack LDWS100ML – mikrofon osobisty LDWSECO1MD – ręczny mikrofon dynamiczny 69 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Ta Ograniczona Gwarancja dotyczy produktów marek Adam Hall, LD Systems, Defender, Palmer oraz Eminence. Niniejsza gwarancja nie wpływa na prawa gwarancyjne wynikające z przepisów lokalnych. Jest to dodatkowa, niezależna gwarancja ze strony firmy Adam Hall. Adam Hall gwarantuje, że zakupiony produkt Adam Hall zakupiony od firmy Adam Hall lub autoryzowanego przedstawiciela Adam Hall, pozostanie wolny od wad w materiałach i wykonaniu, przy normalnym użytkowaniu przez okres 2 lub 3 lat od daty zakupu. Okres gwarancyjny rozpoczyna się z dniem zakupu. Aby móc skorzystać z serwisu gwarancyjnego, kupujący zobowiązany jest do przedstawienia dowodu zakupu opatrzonego datą. Dokumenty takie jak paragon, faktura lub list przewozowy mogą być dowodem daty zakupu. Jeśli produkt wymienionych powyżej marek wymaga naprawy w czasie trwania okresu gwarancyjnego, nabywcy przysługują gwarancyjne usługi serwisowe zgodne z warunkami przedstawionymi w tym dokumencie. Niniejsza gwarancja obejmuje wyłącznie oryginalnego nabywcę produktu marki Adam Hall i nie można jej przenieść na inną osobę, która przejmie własność produktu od oryginalnego nabywcy. Podczas okresu gwarancyjnego, Adam Hall zobowiązuje się do naprawy lub wymiany wadliwych komponentów produktu. Wszystkie części i elementy wymontowane z urządzenia podczas działań serwisowych stają się własnością Adam Hall. W mało prawdopodobnym przypadku powtarzania się wady produktu Adam Hall, Adam Hall może zdecydować o dostarczeniu urządzenia zamiennego wybranego przez Adam Hall, które charakteryzuje się co najmniej takimi samymi parametrami jak reklamowany produkt. Adam Hall nie gwarantuje, że eksploatacja produktu będzie przebiegać bezbłędnie lub nieprzerwanie. Adam Hall nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za uszkodzenia wynikające z niezastosowania się użytkownika do instrukcji dołączonej do produktu Adam Hall. Ta Ograniczona Gwarancja nie dotyczy, - części podlegających normalnemu zużyciu (np. akumulator) - produktów, których numer seryjny został usunięty, uszkodzony lub pozbawiony czytelnościw wyniku wypadku - przypadków nieprawidłowego użycia, celowego uszkodzenia lub powodów zewnętrznych - przekroczenia dopuszczalnych parametrów pracy określonych w dokumentacji dostarczonej z produktem - użycia części zamiennych nie pochodzących od Adam Hall - przez modyfikację lub serwis nieprzeprowadzony przez Adam Hall Te warunki określają kompletną i wyłączną umowę gwarancyjną między Nabywcą i firmą Adam Hall odnośnie zakupionego produktu markowego Adam Hall. DEKLARACJA ZGODNOŚCI WE: 70ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO OGRANICZENIE ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI Jeśli Twój produkt Adam Hall nie działa prawidłowo, wskazanym i wyłącznym rozwiązaniem jest naprawa lub wymiana. Maksymalna odpowiedzialność firmy Adam Hall w związku z niniejszą gwarancją ogranicza się maksymalnie do kwoty równej cenie zakupu produktu lub kosztom naprawy lub wymiany komponentów sprzętowych, które uległy uszkodzeniu lub nie działają prawidłowo podczas normalnego użytkowania. Adam Hall nie odpowiada za jakiekolwiek szkody spowodowane przez produkt lub awarię produktu, włącznie z utratą zysków lub oszczędności, szczególnych, przypadkowych lub powiązanych szkód. Adam Hall nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za zobowiązania użytkownika wobec stron trzecich lub zobowiązania stron trzecich wobec użytkownika. Ograniczenie odpowiedzialności ma zastosowanie w przypadku, gdy występują roszczenia odszkodowawcze lub składane są reklamacje na podstawie niniejszej gwarancji lub jako roszczenie z tytułu czynu niedozwolonego (włączając w to zaniedbanie oraz ścisłą odpowiedzialność za produkt), roszczenie z umowy lub jakiekolwiek inne roszczenie. Żadna osoba nie może uchylić lub zmienić tych ograniczeń odpowiedzialności. Niniejsze ograniczenie odpowiedzialności pozostaje w mocy nawet jeśli nabywca poinformował firmę Adam Hall lub jej autoryzowanego przedstawiciela o możliwości wystąpienia takich szkód. Te ograniczenia odpowiedzialności nie dotyczą roszczeń wynikających z wystąpienia obrażeń u osób. Niniejsza Gwarancja daje Ci pewne specyficzne prawa. Mogą przysługiwać Ci również inne prawa, które różnią się między sobą zależnie od państwa nadania. Radzimy zapoznanie się z prawem właściwym krajowi zamieszkania, w celu uzyskania kompletnej wiedzy na temat przysługujących praw. ŻĄDANIE OBSŁUGI GWARANCYJNEJ Aby uzyskać obsługę gwarancyjną swojego produktu, skontaktuj się z firmą Adam Hall lub jej autoryzowanym przedstawicielem od którego kupiłeś produkt. DEKLARACJA ZGODNOŚCI WE Urządzenia te odpowiadają podstawowym wymogom i innym wytycznym dyrektyw 2004/108/EC (EMC) i 2006/95/EC (LVD). Więcej informacji na stronie: www.adamhall.com. PRAWIDŁOWE SKŁADOWANIE TEGO PRODUKTU (ODPADY ELEKTRONICZNEI) (Informacje mają zastosowanie w krajach członkowskich UE i innych krajach europejskich, w których obowiązuje segregacja odpadów) Ten znak na produkcie lub dołączonej dokumentacji oznacza, że nie należy go wyrzucać wraz z domowymi odpadkami po wycofaniu z użycia. Aby zapobiec możliwym szkodom dla środowiska i ludzkiego zdrowia spowodowanym niekontrolowanym składowaniem odpadów, prosimy o oddzielenie tego produktu od innych odpadów i odpowiedzialne poddanie go recyklingowi w celu promowania ciągłego odzyskiwania zasobów materiałowych. Użytkownicy domowi powinni skontaktować się ze sprzedawcą lub lokalnym urzędem, aby uzyskać informacje na temat przyjaznej środowisku zbiórki odpadów elektronicznych. Użytkownicy biznesowi powinni skontaktować się ze swoim dostawcą i sprawdzić warunki kontraktu nabycia. Tego produktu nie należy mieszać z innymi odpadami komercyjnymi przy składowaniu. 71 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH DEKLARACJA-WEEE Twój produkt LD Systems został zaprojektowany i wykonany z wysokiej jakości materiałów i komponentów, które można poddać recyklingowi i/lub użyć ponownie. Ten symbol oznacza, że sprzęt elektryczny i elektroniczny należy składować osobno od normalnych odpadów po zakończeniu użytkowania. Prosimy, przekaż ten produkt do lokalnego punktu zbiórki lub centrum recyklingowego przeznaczonego dla tego typu sprzętu. W ten sposób przyczynisz się do ochrony środowiska, w którym żyjemy. BATERIE I AKUMULATORY Dołączone baterie lub akumulatory można poddać recyklingowi. Prosimy, składuj je jako specjalne odpady lub zwróć do punktu nabycia. W celu ochrony środowiska wyrzucaj wyłącznie zużyte baterie. Adam Hall GmbH, wszystkie prawa zastrzeżone. Dane techniczne i funkcjonalne produktu mogą podlegać modyfikacjom. Kopiowanie, tłumaczenie i pozostałe formy reprodukcji fragmentów lub całości tej instrukcji obsługi są zabronione. DEKLARACJA ZGODNOŚCI WE: 72ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO Acquistando un prodotto LD Systems avete fatto la scelta giusta! Quest’apparecchio è stato sviluppato e prodotto secondo elevati standard qualitativi che garantiscono un funzionamento regolare per molti anni. Per questo motivo LD Systems, con il suo nome e la pluriennale esperienza, rappresenta un’azienda produttrice di prodotti audio di qualità. Leggete attentamente questo manuale d’uso per utilizzare al meglio il vostro nuovo amplificatore LD Systems. Per ulteriori informazioni sui prodotti LD Systems consultate il nostro sito internet WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM 73 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH LD WSECO16 SISTEMA WIRELESS UHF DIVERSITY UHF Bodypack Transmitter 74ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1. Attenersi alle avvertenze di sicurezza e leggere attentamente il presente manuale. 2. Conservare in un luogo sicuro tutte le avvertenze e le indicazioni. 3. Utilizzare l'apparecchio solo nei modi previsti dal manuale. 4. Rispettare le leggi in vigore nel paese di installazione sullo smaltimento. Separare la plastica dalla carta e dal cartone per lo smaltimento. 5. Se l'apparecchio non funziona più correttamente, è stato esposto a liquidi o è stato in qualche modo danneggiato, rivolgersi esclusivamente a personale autorizzato per le dovute riparazioni. 6. Tenere l'apparecchio lontano da fonti di calore come stufe, termosifoni o altro (anche amplificatori). Controllare che l'apparecchio sia sempre posizionato in modo tale che si possa raffreddare e che non si surriscaldi. 7. Controllare tutte le linee alle quali l'apparecchio è collegato per evitare danni o incidenti. 8 Utilizzare esclusivamente supporti stabili e adeguati per fissare l'apparecchio. Verificare che l'apparecchio sia installato in modo stabile e non possa cadere. ATTENZIONE: Non togliere mai il coperchio di protezione: pericolo di scosse elettriche. All'interno dell'apparecchio non ci sono parti che possono essere controllate o riparate dall'utente. Per la riparazione rivolgersi esclusivamente a personale qualificato. Questo simbolo avverte del pericolo dovuto alla presenza di una tensione pericolosa non isolata all'interno dell'apparecchio che può causare scosse pericolose. Questo simbolo indica avvertenze e istruzioni d'uso importanti. Attenzione! Volume alto! Questi sistemi di trasmissione vengono utilizzati dall'utente per scopi professionali. Pertanto l'uso per scopi commerciali è soggetto alle norme e ai regolamenti delle associazioni di categoria competenti. Adam Hall, in qualità di produttore, è perciò obbligato a segnalare espressamente la presenza di possibili rischi per la salute. Questi altoparlanti possono generare elevate pressioni sonore. 85db è la pressione sonora massima che per legge può essere esercitata sull'udito umano in una giornata lavorativa. Questo valore è stato stabilito in base a quanto rilevato nel campo della medicina del lavoro. Suoni di maggiore intensità o più prolungati possono provocare danni all'apparato uditivo. Nel caso di volumi più elevati sarà necessario diminuire il tempo di esposizione per evitare eventuali danni all'udito. Alcuni campanelli di allarme che indicano una prolungata esposizione a suoni troppo forti sono: - La presenza di suoni o fischi all'interno dell'orecchio! - La sensazione di non sentire più i suoni ad alta frequenza! AVVERTENZE: CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN 75 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 4 8 12 15 IR A F 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A B IR ASC SYSTEM te tr SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Tutti i set comprendono i seguenti componenti: Ricevitore Cavo audio jack 6,3 mm mono - jack 6,3 mm mono Batterie Alimentatore Microfono a mano dinamico Cuffie Belt pack A seconda del set scelto possono essere compresi anche i seguenti accessori: LDWSECO16BPH Set ECO con belt pack e cuffie LDWSECO16HHD Set ECO con microfono a mano dinamico IL RICEVITORE DISPONE DELLA FUNZIONE TONO PILOTA Il tono pilota permette di proteggere il microfono dalle interferenze provocate dai segnali RF provenienti da altre unità. Il trasmettitore aggiunge al segnale trasmesso un segnale non percepito conosciuto come tono pilota. Il ricevitore riceve e analizza il tono pilota identificando così il segnale del trasmettitore corrispondente ed escludendo tutti gli altri segnali. 76ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 INTERRUTTORE ON/OFF Tenere premuto per 1 secondo per accendere e spegnere il microfono. 2 INDICATORE DI LIVELLO AUDIO A 5 SEGMENTI 3 LED INDICATORE ANTENNA CANALE A 4 LED INDICATORE ANTENNA CANALE B 5 DISPLAY DEL NUMERO DI CANALE 6 PULSANTE CANALE SUCCESSIVO 7 PULSANTE CANALE PRECEDENTE 8 FINESTRA IR 9 PULSANTE SINCRONIZZAZIONE CANALE Posizionare il trasmettitore di fronte al ricevitore facendo attenzione che le due porte ad infrarossi siano in contatto visivo. Premere questo pulsante per completare la sincronizzazione. 10 MANOPOLA DI CONTROLLO DEL LIVELLO AUDIO IN USCITA Ruotare verso destra per aumentare il volume e verso sinistra per diminuirlo. 11 ANTENNE 1 PRESA ALIMENTATORE DC 2 USCITA JACK DA 6,3 MM SBILANCIATA 3 USCITA XLR BILANCIATA RICEVITORE LD WSECO16: V O LU M E 1 4 8 12 15 U H F PLL A N TEN N A D IVER SITY W IR ELESS R EC EIVER IR 0 dBV +6 +3 -3 -5 A SC A B IR ASC SYSTEM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 PANELLO FRONTALE: PANNELLO POSTERIORE: 77 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH 1 GRIGLIA DELLA TESTA DEL MICROFONO 2 SPIA DI STATO BATTERIA / ALIMENTAZIONE Il led rosso si accende quando la batteria è scarica, il led verde si accede quando il dispositivo è accesso e la batteria è carica. 3 INTERRUTTORE GENERALE 4 COPERCHIO BATTERIA 5 FINESTRA IR TRASMETTITORE A MANO: 2 3 1 CHANGING BATTERIES The operating time of the batteries (alkaline) is approx. 8 hours. Change the batteries as soon as the red LED blinks. 5 4 78ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO 1 ANTENNA 2 SPIA DI STATO BATTERIA Il led rosso si accende quando la batteria è scarica, il led verde si accede quando il dispositivo è accesso e la batteria è carica. 3 INGRESSO MINI XLR 4 INTERRUTTORE DI REGOLAZIONE DEL GUADAGNO E MUTE Sono disponibili tre diverse impostazioni del guadagno. Mic: microfono 0 dB: chitarra con pick-up passivo - 10 dB: chitarra con pick-up attivi 5 INTERRUTTORE ON/OFF/MUTE Posizione centrale per attivare la funzione mute. 6 FINESTRA IR TRASMETTITORE BELT PACK: tter COME INDOSSARE IL TRASMETTITORE BELT PACK Fissare il trasmettitore ad una cintura 1 o alla tracolla della chitarra 2 . Per una migliore stabilità del trasmettitore è preferibile fissarlo come mostrato nella figura 1 infilandolo completamente cosicché la cintura risulti stretta dalla clip. SOSTITUZIONE DELLE BATTERIE La durata media di 2 batterie alcaline è di circa 8 ore. Quando il led della spia di stato delle batterie si accendere procedere immediatamente alla sostituzione delle stesse. 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 79 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH CONSIGLI PER UN MIGLIORE FUNZIONAMENTO: •Orientare il trasmettitore verso il ricevitore affinché ci sia "contatto visivo" tra i dispositivi. •Non posizionare il ricevitore vicino a oggetti/superfici metalliche o vicino ad apparecchi digitali (lettori CD, Computer, etc.). •Posizionare il ricevitore in modo tale che non sia a stretto contatto con una parete e che sia ad almeno 1 m di altezza dal pavimento. •Telefoni cellulari, apparecchiature radio bidirezionali o apparecchi simili possono disturbare il collegamento radio tra il trasmettitore e il ricevitore e non devono perciò essere utilizzati vicino al sistema di trasmissione. RISOLUZIONE DEI PROBLEMI PROBLEMA SPIE LUMINOSE SOLUZIONE Nessun suono o suono troppo basso Trasmettitore: la spia on/off non si accende. Assicurarsi che l'apparecchio sia collegato correttamente. Spia di rete "Power" spenta. Assicurarsi che l'alimentatore sia collegato correttamente al ricevitore. Ricevitore: spia HF accesa. Alzare il volume. Alzare il valore di guadagno sul trasmettitore. Controllare i collegamenti tra il ricevitore e l'amplificatore o il mixer. Spia HF ricevitore spenta. Trasmettitore: spia accesa. Non posizionare il ricevitore vicino a oggetti metallici. Verificare che lo spazio di trasmissione tra trasmettitore e ricevitore sia libero ("contatto visivo"). Avvicinare il trasmettitore al ricevitore. Assicurarsi che il trasmettitore e il ricevitore utilizzino la stessa frequenza. Trasmettitore: spia di stato delle batterie accesa. Sostituire le batterie. Distorsioni o interferenze indesiderate. Ricevitore: indicatore RF acceso. Eliminare possibili fonti di interferenza come ad esempio lettori CD, computer, fonti di trasmissione digitali, ecc. Distorsioni crescenti. Trasmettitore: spia di stato delle batterie accesa. Sostituire le batterie. Netta differenza di intensità quando il collegamento della stessa sorgente avviene tramite cavo o in caso di collegamento di altre chitarre o microfoni. Impostare il valore di guadagno sul trasmettitore e il volume del ricevitore in modo adeguato. 80ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO SPECIFICHE: SYSTEM Range under typical ambient conditions: 50 m Note: the actual useable range depends on absorption and reflection of the RF signal as well as interference. Frequency range: (+/-3 dB) 60 Hz - 16 kHz THD: (+/-30 kHz, 1 kHz audio signal): <1% 1 kHz Audiosignal): <1% Dynamics: 90 dB (A-weighted) Temperature range: -10°C / +50°C Note: Range is dependent on battery type. RECEIVER Max. audio output level(ref. +/- 30 kHz, 1 kHz): XLR connector (600 Ω ): -12 dBV 6.3-mm jack connector (3000 Ω ): -18 dBV Output impedance: XLR connector: 200 ohms 6.3-mm jack connector: 1 kohms XLR connector: balanced Pin 1: ground Pin 2: (+) Pin 3: (-) Sensitivity (in reference to middle audio frequency): <-92 dB Image rejection: 90 dB Dimensions (W x H x D): 235 x 118 x 44 mm Weight: 400 g Power supply: 12 - 18 V, 400 mA, external power adapter BELT PACK TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV / +20 dBV Gain range: 30 dB Input impedance: 470 kohms Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 65 x 23 mm Weight: 80 g, without batteries Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 8 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW HANDHELD MICROPHONE TRANSMITTER Max. audio input level: 0 dBV Dimensions: 250 mm (L), 53 mm (diameter) Weight: 270 g Power supply: 2 type "AA" (mignon cell) alkaline batteries or corresponding rechargeable batteries Battery life: 10 hours (alkaline batteries) RF transmission power: 10 mW AVAILABLE FIXED FREQUENCIES ECO1: 793.150 MHz | 797.050 MHz | 800.650 MHz | 802.300 MHz | 813.150 MHz ECO2: 863.100 MHz | 863.900 MHz | 864.500 MHz | 864.900 MHz 81 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH Nr. 1 863,100 X 2 863,900 3 864,500 4 864,900 5 863,200 6 863,300 7 863,400 8 863,500 9 863,600 10 863,700 X 11 863,800 12 864,000 13 864,100 X 14 864,200 15 864,300 16 864,400 LDWSECO16 / LDWS1616 / Roadman / Roadboy Lista di frequenze da utilizzare su massimo tre microfoni wireless contemporaneamente e senza intermodulazione Frequency MHz Simultaneous SPECIFICHE: 82ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO ACCESSORI OPZIONALI: LDWS100GC - Cavo per chitarra jack da 6,3 mm mono - mini XLR LDWS100MH1 - Cuffie nere LDWSECO1BP - Trasmettitore belt pack LDWS100ML - Microfono Lavalier LDWSECO1MD - Microfono a mano dinamico 83 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH GARANZIA DEL PRODUTTORE Le seguenti condizioni di garanzia si applicano ai prodotti dei marchi Adam Hall, LD Systems, LD Premium, Defender, Palmer e Eminence. La presente dichiarazione di garanzia non influisce sui diritti di garanzia del produttore previsti dalla legge, ma estende ulteriormente tali diritti anche nei confronti della ditta Adam Hall. Adam Hall garantisce per un periodo di due o cinque anni dalla data di acquisto che questo prodotto Adam Hall acquistato direttamente dall'azienda o attraverso un rivenditore autorizzato, se utilizzato correttamente, è privo di difetti di materiale e manodopera. Il periodo di garanzia ha inizio dalla data di acquisto del prodotto che, nel caso in cui si voglia usufruire della garanzia, va adeguatamente documentata tramite la presentazione dello scontrino o della bolla di consegna con la data di acquisto. Qualora, entro il periodo di garanzia, i prodotti di una delle marche sovraindicate necessitino di interventi di riparazione, l'utente ha diritto ad usufruire del servizio alle condizioni indicate nel presente documento. Questa garanzia del produttore è valida esclusivamente per il primo proprietario del prodotto Adam Hall e non si può trasferire ad un eventuale proprietario successivo. Entro il periodo di garanzia, Adam Hall si fa carico della riparazione o della sostituzione dei componenti o degli apparecchi difettosi. Tutti i componenti o i prodotti sostituiti usufruendo della garanzia del produttore diventano di proprietà di Adam Hall. Nel caso improbabile che il prodotto acquistato presenti ripetuti malfunzionamenti, la ditta Adam Hall è autorizzata a sostituire a propria discrezione il prodotto difettoso con un altro, a patto che il nuovo prodotto sia di uguale valore rispetto a quello vecchio per quanto riguarda le caratteristiche hardware. Adam Hall non garantisce che il prodotto sia perfettamente funzionante e/o senza difetti. Inoltre, Adam Hall non risponde di danni derivanti dall'inosservanza delle indicazioni riportate nelle istruzioni d'uso fornite con il presente prodotto e in altra documentazione. La garanzia del produttore non copre: - parti soggette ad usura (es. accumulatori), - apparecchi dai quali è stato rimosso il numero di serie o il cui numero di serie risulta illeggibile a causa di danneggiamenti causati dell'utente, - danni derivanti da uso errato o improprio o altre cause esterne, - danni ad apparecchi che non sono stati utilizzati secondo i parametri di funzionamento (parametri indicati nella documentazione contenuta nella confezione), - danni derivanti dall'utilizzo di componenti non prodotti o distribuiti da Adam Hall, - danni derivanti da interventi, modifiche o riparazioni non effettuate da Adam Hall. Le presenti condizioni costituiscono l'accordo di garanzia completo ed esclusivo tra l'acquirente e la Adam Hall per il prodotto Adam Hall acquistato. DICHIARAZIONI DEL PRODUTTORE: 84ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS ESPAÑOL POLSKI ITALIANO LIMITAZIONE DI RESPONSABILITÀ Nel caso in cui, durante il periodo di garanzia, i prodotti hardware Adam Hall presentino difetti di materiale o di lavorazione (in base alla dichiarazione di garanzia precedente), il solo ed unico diritto del cliente previsto dalla presente garanzia è quello di riparazione o sostituzione dell'apparecchio. La massima responsabilità di Adam Hall è limitata, come espressamente indicato nella garanzia, al prezzo d'acquisto o ai costi per la riparazione o la sostituzione (e in questo caso per l'importo minore) dei componenti hardware difettosi in caso di uso corretto degli stessi. Adam Hall non è responsabile per eventuali danni provocati dal prodotto o dal malfunzionamento dello stesso, compresi mancati guadagni, perdite e danni speciali indiretti o conseguenti. Inoltre Adam Hall è indenne da richieste avanzate da terzi o dal cliente in nome di terzi. La presente limitazione di responsabilità vale indipendentemente dal fatto che i danni siano oggetto di procedimenti giudiziari o che siano oggetto di risarcimento danni ai sensi della presente garanzia o per atti illeciti (incluse negligenza e responsabilità oggettiva) o per pretese contrattuali o di altra natura, e non può essere né annullata né modificata. La presente limitazione di responsabilità è valida anche nel caso in cui l'utente abbia avvisato Adam Hall o un rappresentante autorizzato di possibili danni. Tale limitazione non è però valida in caso di richieste per risarcimento danni in relazione a danni a persone. La garanzia del produttore permette di godere di determinati diritti. A seconda della giurisdizione competente (dello stato o della regione in cui si risiede) è possibile ottenere ulteriori diritti. Si consiglia quindi di consultare le leggi applicabili per determinare l'insieme dei diritti di cui si può godere. RICORSO ALLA GARANZIA Per usufruire della garanzia rivolgersi direttamente a Adam Hall o al rivenditore autorizzato Adam Hall, dal quale è stato acquistato il prodotto. CE DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA Questi dispositivi soddisfano i requisiti essenziali e le altre disposizioni pertinenti delle direttive 2004/108/EC (EMC) e 2006/95/EC (LVD). Per ulteriori informazioni, vedere www.adamhall.com. CORRETTO SMALTIMENTO DEL PRODOTTO ("RIFIUTI ELETTRONICI") (Valido nei paesi dell'Unione europea e in altri paesi con sistema di smaltimento differenziato dei rifiuti) Questo simbolo sul prodotto o sui documenti relativi ad esso sta ad indicare che l'apparecchio alla fine del suo ciclo di vita non deve essere smaltito insieme ai normali rifiuti domestici, in modo tale da evitare eventuali danni ambientali e alle persone causati da uno smaltimento incontrollato dei rifiuti. Si prega di smaltire questo prodotto separatamente da altri rifiuti e promuovere così lo sviluppo di cicli economici sostenibili con il riciclaggio. I privati cittadini possono ricevere informazioni sulle possibilità di smaltimento sostenibile presso il venditore dal quale è stato acquistato il prodotto o presso le autorità regionali competenti. I professionisti devono invece contattare il loro fornitore di fiducia e controllare le eventuali condizioni contrattuali per lo smaltimento degli apparecchi. Questo prodotto non deve essere smaltito assieme ad altri rifiuti industriali. DICHIARAZIONI DEL PRODUTTORE: 85 ITALIANO POLSKI ESPAÑOL FRANCAIS FRANCAIS FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH DICHIARAZIONE RAEE Il prodotto LD Systems acquistato è stato realizzato tramite l'utilizzo di materiali e componenti di qualità che possono essere riciclati o riutilizzati. Questo simbolo indica che gli apparecchi elettronici non vanno smaltiti assieme ai normali rifiuti domestici indifferenziati. Si prega di smaltire questo apparecchio a norma di legge presso un punto di raccolta per rifiuti elettronici contribuendo così alla salvaguardia dell'ambiente. BATTERIE E PILE Le batterie incluse nella confezione possono essere riutilizzate. Non gettare quindi le batterie nei normali rifiuti domestici, ma in contenitori appositi per la loro raccolta. Aiutate a mantenere pulito l'ambiente. Adam Hall GmbH, tutti i diritti riservati. I dati tecnici e le caratteristiche del prodotto possono essere soggetti a modifiche. È vietata la copia, la traduzione e qualsiasi altra riproduzione delle presenti istruzioni d'uso o di parte di esse senza previa autorizzazione. 86 Adam Hall GmbH | Daimlerstrasse 9 | 61267 Neu-Anspach | Germany Tel. +49(0)6081/9419-0 | Fax +49(0)6081/9419-1000 web : www.adamhall.com e-mail : mail@adamhall.com WWW.LD-SYSTEMS.COM Details of Multi Blade Sets ( F1571581) F1571581 - Français Jeu multi-lames de précision avec 2 porte-lames – 35 pcs - Jeu universel, idéal pour la réparation et maintenance des composants petits dans l’industrie électronique et électrique, pour des appareillages audio/visuels, pour des laboratoires et développement, le service etc. - lames d’acier carbon, trempées - porte-lames en acier spécial - le jeu est fourni dans une sacoche vinyl - Contenu: 2 pièces ¼“ adaptateurs (porte-lame) 33 lames, métriques – 1 pièce de chaque Pour vis à fente: 0,6 / 1,0 / 1,4 / 1,8 /2,0 et 2,5 mm Pour vis Phillips: tailles 000 / 00 / 0 et 1 Pour vis JIS Type S (japonaise) : tailles 000 / 00 / 0 et 1 Pour vis Torx®: tailles T3 / T4 / T5 / T6 / T7 / T8 / T9 / T10 (tailles T8 et 10 sont Torx percé) Lames hexagonales: 0,7 / 0,9 / 1,3 / 1,5 / 2,0 et 2,5 mm Lames tourne-ecrou: 2,0 / 2,5 / 3,0 / 3,5 et 4,0 mm ( F1571604) F1571604 - Français Jeu multi-lames de précision avec manche porte-lame – 28 pcs - Jeu universel, idéal pour la réparation et maintenance des composants petits dans l’industrie électronique et électrique, pour des appareillages audio/visuels, pour des laboratoires et développement, le service etc. - lames d’acier carbon, trempées - Manche porte-lame en acier, nicklé - le jeu est fourni dans une sacoche vinyl - Contenu: 1 manche porte-lame 27 lames – 1 pièce de chaque Pour vis à fente: .025“ (0,64 mm) / .040“ (1,02 mm) / .055“ (1,4 mm) / .070“ (1,78 mm) / .080“ (2,03 mm) et .100“ (2,54 mm) Pour vis Phillips: tailles 0 et 1 Lames hexagonales: .028“ / .035“ / .050“ / .062“ / .078“ et 0.93“ Lames tourne-ecrou: 5/64“, 3/32“, 7/64“, 1/8“ et 5/32“ Clés plates: 5/64“, 3/32“, 7/64“, 1/8“, 5/32“, 3/16“, ¼“ et 5/16“ OSCILLOSCOPE USB HAUTE RÉSOLUTION YE AR www.picotech.com PicoScope® 4262 Un oscilloscope numérique pour un monde analogique Fourni avec un kit de développement logiciel (SDK) complet, y compris des exemples de programmes•Logiciel compatible avec Windows XP, Windows Vista et Windows 7 Bruit réduit Deux voies Mémoire tampon 16 MS Résolution 16 bits Taux d'échantillonnage 10 Mé/s Bande passante de 5 MHz Déclencheurs numériques avancés Générateur de signaux faible distorsion Générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires Alimentation USB Déclenchement numérique Le déclenchement numérique réduit les erreurs de déclenchement et permet à nos oscilloscopes d'être déclenchés par les plus petits signaux, même à bande passante élevée. L'hystérésis et les seuils de déclenchement peuvent être configurés avec une grande précision et une forte résolution. Le déclenchement numérique réduit en outre les délais de réarmement, ce qui, en conjonction avec l'utilisation d'une mémoire segmentée, permet le déclenchement et la capture d'événements qui interviennent en séquence rapide. Avec la base de temps la plus rapide, il est possible d'utiliser un déclenchement rapide pour capturer une nouvelle forme d'onde chaque microseconde. Notre fonction de test de limite de masque peut ensuite analyser ces formes d'onde et identifier les formes aberrantes qui peuvent être consultées dans la mémoire tampon des formes d'onde. Générateur de fonctions et de formes d'ondes arbitraires Cet appareil comporte un générateur de signaux intégré (sinusoïdale, carrée, triangulaire, niveau CC). En plus des commandes de base permettant de spécifier le niveau, le décalage et la fréquence, des commandes plus avancées vous permettent de balayer toute la plage de fréquences. En conjonction avec l'option de maintien de crête de spectre, cette fonction constitue un outil puissant pour tester les réponses du filtre et de l'amplificateur. Est aussi inclus un générateur de formes d'onde arbitraires entièrement programmable avec une mémoire tampon de 4k d'échantillons. Fonctions de haut de gamme disponibles en série Pour protéger votre investissement, le API et les micrologiciels de votre appareil peuvent être remis à niveau. Nous offrons depuis longtemps le téléchargement gratuit des logiciels de mise à niveau. D'autres sociétés font de vagues promesses concernant les améliorations futures, mais nous avons toujours tenu les promesses spécifiques que nous faisons. Les utilisateurs de nos produits nous récompensent en demeurant nos clients à vie et en nous recommandant souvent auprès de leurs collègues. Haute intégrité des signaux La plupart des oscilloscopes sont conçus en fonction du prix de vente ; les nôtres sont conçus pour répondre à une spécification. Une conception frontale soignée et un blindage efficace réduisent le bruit, la diaphonie et la distorsion harmonique. De longues années d'expérience de la production d'oscilloscopes nous permettent d'obtenir une réponse supérieure aux impulsions et à la variation crête-à-crête de la bande. Nous sommes fiers de la performance dynamique de nos produits et nous publions ces spécifications en détail. Le résultat est simple : lorsque vous analysez un circuit avec un PicoScope, vous pouvez faire entièrement confiance aux données que vous capturez. Faible distorsion, faible interférence Le PicoScope 4262 de Pico Technology est un oscilloscope à deux voies et 16 bits haute résolution avec un générateur de signaux à faible distorsion intégré. Avec sa bande passante de 5 MHz, il peut facilement analyser les signaux audio, ultrasoniques et vibratoires, analyser le bruit dans les sources d’alimentation commutées, mesurer les distorsions et effectuer un large éventail de mesures de précision. Oscilloscope doté d'un maximum de fonctions Le PicoScope 4262 est un oscilloscope doté d'un maximum de fonctions, avec un générateur de fonctions et un générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires plus une fonction de balayage pour permettre l'analyse des réponses en fréquence. Il offre en outre un test de limite de masque, des voies de référence et mathématiques, un système de déclenchement numérique avancé, le décodage série, des mesures automatiques et un affichage de persistance de la couleur. Conçu pour le monde analogique Lorsqu'il est utilisé en mode analyseur de spectres, l'oscilloscope fournit un menu de onze mesures automatiques du domaine de fréquences telles que IMD, THD, SFDR et SNR. Sa performance est si bonne qu'il rivalise avec plusieurs analyseurs audio dédiés et analyseurs de signaux dynamiques d'un prix plusieurs fois supérieur. La plupart des oscilloscopes numériques ont été conçus pour visualiser les signaux numériques rapides. La tendance a été d'utiliser une nouvelle technologie seulement pour augmenter le taux d'échantillonnage et la bande passante. Avec le PicoScope 4262, nous avons ciblé ce qui est important pour la mesure des signaux analogiques : augmentation de la résolution, amélioration de la plage dynamique et réduction du bruit et des distorsions. Déclencheurs avancés En plus de la gamme standard de déclencheurs prévus sur tous les oscilloscopes, le PicoScope 4262 offre une gamme complète de déclencheurs numériques avancés, y compris des déclencheurs de largeur d'impulsion, de perte de niveau et de perte de fenêtre, qui vous aident à mieux capturer les données que vous recherchez. Oscilloscope PicoScope 4262 Introduction au Picoscope 4262 PicoScope 4262 VERTICAL Nombre de voies 2 Connecteurs d'entrée BNC Bande passante (-3 dB) > 5 MHz (4 MHz Plage de ± 20 mV, 3 MHz Plage de ± 10 mV) Limiteur de bande passante Temps de montée (calculée) 70 ns (88 ns sur les ±20 mV, 117 ns sur les ±10 mV) Résolution 16 bits Impédance d'entrée 1 MΩ ±2% || 15 pF ±2 pF Couplage d'entrée CA/CC Sensibilité d'entrée 2 mV/div à 4 V/div (10 divisions verticales) Plages d'entrées ±10 mV, ±20 mV, ±50 mV, ±100 mV, ±200 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±20 V Précision CC ±0.25% (±0.5% sur les ±50 mV plage, ±1% sur les ±20 mV plage, ±2% sur les ±10 mV plage) Protection contre les surtensions ±50 V (CC + CA de crête) HORIZONTAL Taux d'échantillonnage (temps réel 1 ou 2 voies) 10 Mé/s Taux d'échantillonnage (suite transmission USB) *1 MS/s (PicoScope), *10 MS/s 1 voie, *6.7 MS/s 2 voies (SDK) Mémoire tampon 16 Mé Tampon de forme d'onde (no. de segments) 10,000 (PicoScope), 32,768 (SDK) Précision de la base de temps ±50 ppm PERFORMANCE DYNAMIQUE (typique) Diaphonie >50 000 : 1 Distorsion harmonique —95 dB typique @ 10 kHz SFDR —102 dB typique @ 10 kHz Réponse impulsionnelle <1% dépassement toutes les plages Variation crête-à-crête de la bande passante ± 0,2 dB CC de sur l’ensemble de la bande passante Interférences 8,5 μV RMS DÉCLENCHEUR Modes de déclenchement de base Montée, descente Déclencheurs numériques avancés Front, fenêtre, largeur d'impulsion, largeur d'impulsion de fenêtre, perte, perte de fenêtre, intervalle, logique, impulsion transitoire Sensibilité du déclencheur (voie A, voie B) Le déclenchement numérique assure une précision de 1 USB sur l'ensemble de la bande passante Max. capture pré-déclenchement Jusqu'à 100% de la taille de capture Max. délai post-déclenchement Jusqu'à 4 milliards d'échantillons Temps de réarmement du déclenchement < 10 μs sur la base de temps la plus rapide DÉCLENCHEUR EXT Types de déclenchement Front, largeur d'impulsion, perte, intervalle, logique, retardé Caractéristiques d'entrée Panneau arrière BNC, 1 MΩ ±2% || 15 pF ± 2 pF Plage de tensions ±5 V et ±500 mV Bande passante 5 MHz Protection contre les surtensions ± 50 V DÉCODAGE SERIEL Protocoles Bus CAN, I²C, SPI, RS232/UART TESTS DE LIMITE DE MASQUE Statistiques Bon/mauvais, nombre d’échecs, nombre total AFFICHAGE Interpolation Linéaire ou sin (x)/x Modes de persistance Couleur numérique, intensité analogique, personnalisé ou aucun * Les valeurs autorisées montré, les taux réels de l’échantillonnage réalisé dépendent PC. Spécifications de PicoScope 4262 Oscilloscope PicoScope 4262 VOIES MATHÉMATIQUES Fonctions Équations arbitraires utilisant celles-ci : −x, x+y, x−y, x*y, x/y, sqrt(x), x^y, exp(x), ln(x), log(x), abs(x), norm(x), sign(x), sin(x), cos(x), tan(x), arcsin(x), arccos(x), arctan(x), sinh(x), cosh(x), tanh(x) Opérandes A, B (voies d’entrée), T (temps), formes d’ondes de référence, constantes, pi ANALYSEUR DE SPECTRE Plage de fréquences CC à 5 MHz Modes d’affichage Magnitude, Moyenne, Maintien de la valeur de crête Fonctions de fenêtrage Rectangulaire, Gaussien, triangulaire, Blackman, Blackman-Harris, Hamming, Hann, flat-top Nombre de points de la Transformée de Fourier Rapide 128 à 1 million GÉNÉRATEUR DE SIGNAUX Signaux de sortie standard Sinusoïdale, carrée, triangulaire, CC Bande passante 20 kHz Précision de la fréquence de sortie ±50 ppm Résolution de la fréquence de sortie < 0.01 Hz Plage de tensions de sortie ±1 V (en charge d'impédance élevée) Réglage de la tension de décalage 100 μV étapes (dans la plage ±1 V) Variation crête-à-crête de l'amplitude <0,1 dB à 20 kHz, typique Type de connecteur BNC panneau avant Protection contre les surtensions ± 10 V Modes de balayage Montant, descendant, duel avec fréquence sélectionnable et temps de balayage AWG (générateur de formes d'onde arbitraires) Taux de mise à jour 192 kS/s Taille de la mémoire tampon 4 kS Résolution 16 bits Bande passante 20 kHz Temps de montée (10-90%) 11 μs, typique MESURES AUTOMATIQUES Oscilloscope RMS CA, RMS réel, moyenne CC, durée du cycle, fréquence, cycle de service, fréquence de descente, temps de descente, fréquence de montée, temps de montée, largeur impulsion d’état haut, largeur impulsion d’état bas, maximum, minimum, crête à crête Spectre Fréquence de crête, amplitude de crête, amplitude de crête moyenne, puissance totale, THD %, THD dB, THD plus bruit, SFDR, SINAD, SNR, IMD Statistiques Écart minimum, maximum, moyen et écart-type GÉNÉRAL Connectivité PC USB 2.0 Dimensions 210 x 135 x 40 mm (connecteurs compris) Poids < 0,5 kg Plage de températures Fonctionnement : Entreposage : 0 à 45 °C (20 à 30 °C pour la précision nominale) -20 °C à +60 °C Humidité d’utilisation HR 5 à 85 %, sans condensation Humidité de stockage HR 5 à 95 %, sans condensation Accréditations de sécurité Conforme à la norme EN 61010-1:2010 Accréditations IEM CE : Testé en conformité à la norme EN61326-1:2006. FCC : Testé en conformité à la norme partie 15 sous partie B Accréditations environnementales Conforme à RoHS et DEEE Exigences concernant le logiciel/PC PicoScope 6, SDK et exemples de programmes. Microsoft Windows XP, Vista ou Windows 7 (32 ou 64 bits). Langues (prise en charge totale) : Allemand, anglais, espagnol, français, et italien Langues (interface utilisateur uniquement) : Chinois (simplifié et traditionnel), danois, finnois, grec, hongrois, japonais, néerlandais, norvégien, polonais, portugais, roumain, russe, suédois, tchèque et turc Spécifications suite... Avez-vous vu la fiche technique de notre PicoScope de série 4000 ? Elle décrit l'éventail complet des fonctionnalités disponibles avec le logiciel PicoScope qui transforme votre PicoScope 4262 en un oscilloscope et un analyseur de spectre très performants. Toutes ces fonctionnalités sont incluses dans le prix de votre oscilloscope. Pico Technology, James House, Colmworth Business Park, St. Neots, Cambridgeshire, PE19 8YP, Royaume-Uni T : +44 (0) 1480 396 395 F : +44 (0) 1480 396 296 E : sales@picotech.com *Les prix sont corrects à la date de publication. Veuillez contacter Pico Technology pour connaître les derniers prix avant de commander. Erreurs et omissions exceptées. Copyright © 2012 Pico Technology Ltd. Tous droits réservés. MM030.fr-2 CODE DE COMMANDE DESCRIPTION DE L'ARTICLE Livre sterling USD* EUR* PP799 Oscilloscope PicoScope 4262 16 bits (avec sondes) 749 1236 906 Informations concernant la commande Voie A Voie B AWG Le panneau avant du PicoScope 4262 a deux voies d'entrée BNC et une sortie BNC pour le générateur de fonctions et le générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires (AWG). Le panneau arrière du PicoScope 4262 a deux connexions : un port USB de connexion au PC, et un port BNC de connexion sur déclencheur externe. port USB Entrée de déclenchement Votre produit PicoScope 4262 PP799 contient les composants suivants : • 2 sondes MI007 • PicoScope 4262 • Câble USB • Guide de démarrage rapide • CD du logiciel et de référence Connexions du PicoScope 4262 www.picotech.com (générateur de formes d'onde arbitraires) et générateur de fonctions OSCILLOSCOPES À DEUX VOIES AVEC GÉNÉRATEUR DE FORMES D'ONDES ARBITRAIRES www.picotech.com PicoScope® série 2000 Produit de haute qualité de marque fiable Bandes passantes de 10 à 200 MHz Taux d'échantillonnage de jusqu'à 1 Gé/s Déclencheurs numériques avancés Modes d'affichage persistant Tests de limite de masque Décodage série Interface USB 2.0 rapide Compatible USB et portable Mises à niveau de logiciel gratuites Fourni avec un kit de développement logiciel complet, y compris des exemples de programmes•Logiciel compatible avec Windows XP, Windows Vista et Windows 7 •Assistance technique gratuite PicoScope pour flexibilité, portabilité et puissance Ces oscilloscopes pratiques et économiques ont toute la puissance requise pour vos applications, qu'il s'agisse de conception, de recherche, de test, d'éducation, de révision ou de réparation. Ils sont disponibles avec des bandes passantes de 10 MHz à 200 MHz. Les oscilloscopes PicoScope sont compacts, légers et portables. Ils se glissent facilement dans un sac de portable et ils sont donc parfaits pour les ingénieurs de terrain. Ils ne requièrent pas d'alimentation externe, ils sont donc parfaits pour une utilisation de terrain. La connexion PC signifie que les fonctions d'impression, de copie et de messagerie sont toujours disponibles. Les premiers oscilloscopes USB de 1 Gé/s ! Cette série inclut les premiers oscilloscopes compatibles USB avec un taux d'échantillonnage en temps réel de 1 Gé/s qui n'était possible auparavant qu'avec les instruments branchés sur secteur. La plupart des oscilloscopes USB sont limités à 100 ou 200 Mé/s. Pour des signaux répétitifs, le mode échantillonnage en temps équivalent (ETS) porte le taux d'échantillonnage effectif maximum au delà de 10 Gé/s, ce qui permet une résolution temporelle exceptionnelle. Déclenchement numérique La plupart des oscilloscopes numériques vendus aujourd'hui utilisent toujours une architecture de déclenchement analogique basée sur des comparateurs. Cela peut entraîner des erreurs au niveau du temps et de l'amplitude qu'il n'est pas toujours possible d'éliminer par étalonnage. L'utilisation de comparateurs limite souvent la sensibilité des déclencheurs à bande passante élevée et peut aussi créer des délais de réarmement de déclencheurs significatifs. Depuis 1991, nous sommes à l'avant-garde de la recherche dans l'utilisation des déclencheurs purement numériques opérant sur données numérisées. Cela réduit les erreurs de déclenchement et permet à nos oscilloscopes d'être déclenchés par les plus petits signaux, même à bande passante élevée. L'hystérésis et les seuils de déclenchement peuvent être spécifiés avec une grande précision et une forte résolution. Les délais de réarmement réduits permis par le déclenchement numérique plus la mémoire segmentée permettent la capture d'événements intervenant en séquence rapide. À la base de temps la plus rapide, un déclenchement rapide peut capturer une nouvelle forme d'onde toutes les 2 microsecondes jusqu'à ce que la mémoire soit pleine. La fonction de test de limite de masque (voir ci-dessous) aide à détecter les formes d'onde qui ne correspondent pas à vos spécifications. Déclencheurs avancés En plus de la gamme standard de déclencheurs fournis sur tous les oscilloscopes, le PicoScope série 2000 offre une des meilleures sélections de déclencheurs numériques avancés, y compris la largeur d'impulsion, la perte de niveau et la perte de fenêtre qui vous aident à identifier plus rapidement le signal recherché. Configuration de sonde personnalisée La fonction de sonde personnalisée vous permet d'effectuer des corrections de gain, d'atténuation, de décalage et de non-linéarité avec des sondes spéciales ou de réaliser des conversions avec différentes unités de mesure (comme le courant, la puissance ou la température). Vous pouvez sauvegarder les définitions sur disque pour utilisation ultérieure. Des définitions de sondes d'oscilloscope fournies en série par Pico et des pinces électriques sont incorporées. Générateur de fonctions et de formes d'ondes arbitraires Tous les appareils ont un générateur de fonctions intégré avec sinusoïdale, carrée, triangulaire, niveau CC et tout un éventail d'autres formes d'ondes. En plus des commandes permettant de spécifier le niveau, le décalage et la fréquence, des commandes plus avancées vous permettent de balayer toute une plage de fréquences. En conjonction avec l'option de maintien de crête de spectre, cette fonction constitue un outil puissant pour tester les réponses de filtre et d'amplificateur. Les oscilloscopes PicoScope série 2000 comportent également un générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires. Les formes d'ondes peuvent être créées ou éditées en utilisant l'éditeur du générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires, en important des traces d'oscilloscope ou par chargement depuis un tableur. Analyseur de spectre Avec un seul clic de bouton, vous pouvez afficher un graphe de spectres des voies sélectionnées. L'analyseur de spectre permet de visualiser en termes de fréquences des signaux portant sur l'ensemble de la bande passante. Une gamme complète de paramètres vous permet de contrôler un certain nombre de bandes spectrales, de types de fenêtres et de modes d'affichage : instantané, moyenne, maintien de la valeur de crête PicoScope vous permet d'afficher des images de spectre multiples avec différentes sélections de voies et de facteurs de zoom et de les visualiser en conjonction avec des formes d'onde temporelles des mêmes données. Un ensemble très complet de mesures de fréquences automatiques, y compris THD, THD+N, SNR, SINAD et IMD, peuvent être ajoutées à l'affichage. Voies mathématiques Les oscilloscopes PicoScope série 2000 offrent une gamme complète de fonctions mathématiques pour le traitement et la combinaison des voies. Les fonctions peuvent aussi être utilisées sur les formes d'onde de référence. Utilisez la liste intégrée de fonctions simples comme l'addition et l'inversion, ou ouvrez l'éditeur d'équations et créez des fonctions complexes basées sur la trigonométrie, les exponentielles, les logarithmes, les statistiques, les intégrales et les dérivatives. Mesures Vous pouvez ajouter des combinaisons de mesures automatiques à l'affichage, choisies dans une liste de 26 paramètres de spectre et d'oscilloscope. Chaque mesure inclut des données statistiques sur le minimum, le maximum, la moyenne, la déviation standard et la taille de l'échantillon. PicoScope série 2000 Oscilloscopes Tests de limite de masque Cette fonction est spécialement conçue pour les environnements de production et de débogage. Elle permet de capturer un signal en provenance d'un système de production connu et PicoScope définit un masque autour du signal conforme à la tolérance spécifiée. Permet de connecter le système testé et PicoScope met en relief les parties de la forme d'onde qui tombent en dehors de la zone du masque. Les détails mis en relief persistent à l'écran, ce qui permet à l'oscilloscope de repérer des impulsions transitoires intermittentes pendant que vous travaillez sur autre chose. La fenêtre de mesure compte le nombre de défaillances et peut afficher d'autres mesures et statistiques en même temps. Les éditeurs de masques graphiques et numériques peuvent être utilisés séparément ou en conjonction, ce qui permet de saisir des spécifications de masques précises et de modifier les masques existant. Il est possible d'importer et d'exporter les masques sous forme de fichiers. Fonctions de haut de gamme disponibles en série L'achat d'un oscilloscope de certaines sociétés est un peu comme l'achat d'une voiture. Une fois ajoutés tous les suppléments nécessaires, le prix a augmenté de manière considérable. Avec le PicoScope de série 2000, les fonctionnalités de luxe comme l'amélioration de résolution, le test de limite de masque, le décodage série, le déclenchement avancé, les mesures automatiques, les voies mathématiques et le mode XY sont toutes incluses dans le prix. Pour protéger votre investissement, le logiciel de PC et les micrologiciels de votre appareil peuvent être remis à niveau. Nous offrons depuis longtemps le téléchargement gratuit des logiciels de mise à niveau. D'autres sociétés font de vagues promesses concernant des améliorations futures, mais nous avons toujours tenu nos promesses spécifiques, d'année en année. Les utilisateurs de nos produits nous récompensent en demeurant nos clients à vie et en nous recommandant souvent auprès de leurs collègues. Haute intégrité des signaux La plupart des oscilloscopes sont conçus en fonction du prix de vente ; les nôtres sont conçus pour répondre à une spécification. Une conception frontale soignée et un blindage efficace réduisent le bruit, la diaphonie et la distorsion harmonique. Nos 20 années d'expérience de la conception des oscilloscopes nous permettent d'offrir une réponse aux impulsions et une variation crête-à-crête de bande passante supérieures. Nous sommes fiers de la performance dynamique de nos produits et nous publions ces spécifications en détail. Le résultat est simple : lorsque vous analysez un circuit, vous pouvez faire entièrement confiance aux formes d'onde que vous voyez à l'écran. Modes d'affichage avancés Les données anciennes et nouvelles sont superposées, mais les données nouvelles sont identifiables à leur couleur ou teinte plus brillante. Cela permet d'identifier plus facilement les pertes et les impulsions transitoires intermittentes et de mieux estimer leur fréquence relative. Permet de choisir entre la persistance analogique et la couleur numérique, ou de créer un mode d'affichage personnalisé. La conception du logiciel PicoScope garantit que la surface d'affichage maximum est disponible pour la visualisation des formes d'onde. Même sur un portable, vous disposez d'une surface de visualisation et d'une résolution supérieures à celles offertes par un oscilloscope sur banc typique. Décodage série Le PicoScope série 2000 inclut le décodage série en standard. Les protocoles actuellement inclus sont I²C, SPI, RS232/UART et le bus CAN. Cette liste s'allonge au fur et à mesure du lancement de mises à niveau de logiciels gratuits. Le PicoScope affiche alors les données décodées sous le format de votre choix : "dans une vue", "dans une fenêtre" ou les deux à la fois. Le format "dans une vue" représente les données décodées sous forme d'onde sur un axe temps commun, les trames erronées étant marquées en rouge. Vous pouvez effectuer un zoom sur ces trames pour rechercher un bruit ou une distorsion dans la forme d'onde. Le format "dans une fenêtre" affiche une liste des trames décodées, y compris les données et tous les indicateurs et identifiants. Vous pouvez configurer le filtrage pour n'afficher que les trames qui vous intéressent, rechercher des trames ayant des propriétés spécifiques ou définir un profil de démarrage que le programme attend avant de répertorier les données. Vous pouvez aussi créer un tableur pour décoder les données hexadécimales dans des chaînes de texte arbitraires. Acquisition de données haute vitesse et numérisation Les pilotes et le kit de développement de logiciel fournis vous permettent d'écrire votre propre logiciel ou de bénéficier d'une interface avec des progiciels tiers populaires comme LabVIEW. Le pilote prend en charge la transmission des données, un mode continu de capture des données par port USB directement dans la mémoire vive du PC ou le disque dur à un taux de 1 Mé/s ou plus, si bien que vous n'êtes pas limité par la taille de la mémoire tampon. La vitesse maximum dépend du PC. PicoScope 2206 affichage frontal PicoScope série 2000 Oscilloscopes Outils > Voies mathématiques: Permet de combiner les voies d'entrée et les formes d'onde de référence en utilisant une arithmétique simple, ou en créant des équations personnalisées à base de fonctions trigonométriques ou autres. Outils>Décodage série : Permet de décoder un signal de données série et d'afficher les données en conjonction avec le signal physique ou sous forme de tableau détaillé. Outils > Voies de référence : Sauvegarde les formes d'onde en mémoire ou sur disque et les affiche en conjonction avec les entrées actives. Idéal pour les diagnostics et les tests de production. Mesures automatiques : Affiche les mesures calculées à des fins de diagnostic et d'analyse. Il est possible d'ajouter autant de mesures que nécessaire sur chaque vue. Chaque mesure inclut des paramètres statistiques qui indiquent sa variabilité. Test de limite de masque : Permet de créer automatiquement un masque de test à partir d'une forme d'onde ou d'en spécifier un à la main. PicoScope met en relief les parties de la forme d'onde qui tombent en dehors du masque et fournit un profil statistique des erreurs. Outils de zoom et de cadrage : Utilisez les boutons de zoom conventionnels ou essayez la fenêtre d'aperçu du zoom pour une navigation rapide. Pas de boutons ou de commandes incommodes : Utilisez simplement votre souris ! Axes mobiles : Les axes verticaux peuvent être déplacés vers le bas et le haut. Cette fonction est particulièrement utile lorsqu'une forme d'onde en cache une autre. Une commande permet également de réarranger tous les axes automatiquement. Commandes de l'oscilloscope : Les commandes souvent utilisées comme la sélection de plage de tension, de temps de base, de mémoire et de sélection de voie sont placées sur les barres d'outils pour un accès rapide, ce qui laisse la zone d'affichage principale libre pour la présentation claire des forme d'ondes. Des commandes et des fonctions plus avancées sont disponibles dans le menu Outils. Bouton de configuration automatique : Permet de configurer les plages de tension et de temps de base pour un affichage stable de vos signaux. PicoScope : L'affichage peut être aussi simple ou aussi complexe que vous le désirez. On peut commencer avec une vue unique d'une seule voie puis agrandir l'affichage pour inclure un nombre croissant de voies actives, de voies mathématiques et de formes d'onde de référence. Outil de reproduction de forme d'onde : PicoScope enregistre automatiquement jusqu'à 10 000 des formes d'ondes les plus récentes. L'opérateur peut les visualiser rapidement pour identifier les événements intermittents. Vues : PicoScope est conçu avec soin pour fournir la meilleure utilisation possible de la zone d'affichage. Il est possible d'ajouter des vues spectrales et d'oscilloscope qui sont toutes ajustables au niveau de la taille et de la forme. Règles : Chaque axe est équipé de deux règles qui peuvent être déplacées sur l'écran pour effectuer des mesures rapides d'amplitude, de temps et de fréquence. La fenêtre Picoscope SÉLECTEUR DE PRODUIT MODÈLE PicoScope 2204 PicoScope 2205 PicoScope 2206 PicoScope 2207 PicoScope 2208 Bande passante 10 MHz 25 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz Fréquence d'échantillonnage 100 Mé/s 200 Mé/s 500 Mé/s 1 Gé/s 1 Gé/s Mémoire 8 kS 16 kS 24 kS 32 kS 40 kS Générateur de fonctions + Générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires 100 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 1 MHz Déclencheur EXT Non Non Oui Oui Oui SPÉCIFICATIONS DÉTAILLÉES VERTICAL Nombre de voies 2 Bande passante (-3 dB) 10 MHz 25 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz Temps de montée (calculée) 35 ns 14 ns 7 ns 3,5 ns 1,75 ns Résolution 8 bits (12 bits avec amélioration de la résolution) Caractéristiques d'entrée BNC, 1 MΩ ∥ 20 pF BNC, 1 MΩ ±1% ∥ 13 pF ±1 pF Couplage d'entrée CA/CC Sensibilité d'entrée 10 mV/div à 4 V/div (10 divisions verticales) Plages d'entrées ±50 mV, ±100 mV, ±200 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±20 V Plage de décalage analogique (réglage de la position verticale) Aucun ±250 mV (plages 50 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV) ±2,5 V (plages 500 mV, 1 V, 2 V) ±20 V (plages 5 V, 10 V, 20 V) Précision CC ±3% de déviation maximale Protection contre les surtensions ±100 V (CC + CA de crête) HORIZONTAL Max. taux d'échantillonnage (temps réel 1 voie) 100 Mé/s 200 Mé/s 500 Mé/s 1 Gé/s 1 Gé/s Max. taux d'échantillonnage (temps réel 2 voies) 50 Mé/s 100 Mé/s 250 Mé/s 500 Mé/s 500 Mé/s Max. taux d'échantillonnage (répétitif/ETS) 2 Gé/s 4 Gé/s 5 Gé/s 10 Gé/s 10 Gé/s Max. taux d'échantillonnage (transmission) 1 Mé/s (typique) pour le logiciel PicoScope. Le taux utilisant les exemples de programmes SDK dépend du PC. Plages de la base de temps 10 ns à 1000 s/div 5 ns à 1 000 s/div 2 ns à 1 000 s/div 1 ns à 1 000 s/div 500 ps à 1 000 s/div Taille de la mémoire tampon (partagée) Échantillons de 8 k Échantillons de 16 k Échantillons de 24 k Échantillons de 32 k Échantillons de 40 k Max. tampons (déclenchement normal) 10 000 Max. tampons (déclenchement par bloc rapide) N/A 32 Précision de la base de temps ±100 ppm ±50 ppm Gigue d'échantillonnage Non spécifiée < 5 ps RMS PERFORMANCE DYNAMIQUE (typique) Diaphonie (bande passante complète) Mieux que 200:1 (plages égales) Mieux que 400:1 (plages égales) Distorsion harmonique < –50 dB à 100 kHz, entrée de pleine échelle SFDR > 52 dB à 100 kHz, entrée de pleine échelle Interférences 1 LSB (plage ±1 V) < 180 μV RMS (±plage 50 mV) Réponse impulsionnelle < 7% dépassement < 5% dépassement Variation crête-à-crête de bande passante (entrées de l'oscilloscope) (+0,3 dB, –3 dB) de CC à la bande passante intégrale DÉCLENCHEMENT Sources Voie A, Voie B Voie A, Voie B, Ext Modes Aucun, auto, répétition, unique Aucun, auto, répétition, unique, rapide (mémoire segmentée) Déclencheurs numériques avancés (Voies A, B) Montant, descendant, double, hystérésis, fenêtre, largeur d'impulsion, largeur d'impulsion de fenêtre, perte de fenêtre, intervalle, logique, retardé Types de déclencheurs, ETS (voie A, voie B) Front Sensibilité du déclencheur (voie A, voie B) Le déclenchement numérique assure une précision de 1 LSB jusqu'à l'ensemble de la bande passante (ETS : typique 10 mV p-p sur l'ensemble de la bande passante) Max. capture pré-déclenchement 100% de la taille de capture Max. délai post-déclenchement 4 milliards d'échantillons Temps de réarmement du déclenchement Selon le PC < 2 μs sur la base de temps la plus rapide Max. taux de déclenchement Selon le PC Salve de 32 en 64 μs PicoScope série 2000 Oscilloscopes - Spécifications ENTRÉE DE DÉCLENCHEMENT EXTERNE PicoScope 2204 PicoScope 2205 PicoScope 2206 PicoScope 2207 PicoScope 2208 Types de déclencheurs N/A Front, largeur d'impulsion, perte, intervalle, logique Caractéristiques d'entrée Panneau avant BNC, 1 MΩ ±1% ∥ 13 pF ±1 pF Bande passante 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz Plage seuil ±5 V, CC accouplé Précision seuil ±3% de déviation maximale Sensibilité typique 200 mV p-p sur l'ensemble de la bande passante Protection contre les surtensions ±100 V (CC + CA de crête) jusqu'à 10 kHz GÉNÉRATEUR DE FONCTION Signaux de sortie standard Sinusoïdal, carré, triangulaire, tension CC, rampant, (sin x)/x, gaussien, demi-sinusoïdal Signaux de sortie pseudo-aléatoires Aucun Bruit blanc, PRBS Fréquence de signal standard CC à 100 kHz CC à 1 MHz Modes de balayage Voies montantes, descendantes et doubles avec fréquences de marche/arrêt et incréments sélectionnables Précision de la fréquence de sortie ±100 ppm ±50 ppm Résolution de la fréquence de sortie < 0,01 Hz Plage de tensions de sortie ±2 V Réglage de la sortie ±250 mV à ±2 V d'amplitude, décalage de ±1 V Toute amplitude et tout décalage dans la plage ±2 V Variation crête-à-crête de l'amplitude (typique) < 1 dB à 100 kHz < 0,5 dB à 1 MHz Précision CC ±1% de déviation maximale SFDR > 55 dB @ 1 kHz de déviation maximale sinusoïdale > 60 dB @ 10 kHz de déviation maximale sinusoïdale Caractéristiques de sortie Panneau avant BNC, 600 Ω impédance de sortie Protection contre les surtensions ± 10 V GÉNÉRATEUR DE FORMES D'ONDES ARBITRAIRES Taux de mise à jour 2 Mé/s 20 Mé/s Taille de la mémoire tampon Échantillons de 4 k Échantillons de 8 k Résolution 8 bits 12 bits Bande passante 100 kHz > 1 MHz Temps de montée (10% - 90%) < 2 μs < 100 ns ANALYSEUR DE SPECTRE Plage de fréquences CC à 10 MHz CC à 25 MHz CC à 50 MHz CC à 100 MHz CC à 200 MHz Modes d'affichage Magnitude, moyenne, maintien de la valeur de crête Fonctions de fenêtrage Rectangulaire, gaussienne, triangulaire, Blackman, Blackman-Harris, Hamming, Hann, flat-top Nombre de points de la Transformée de Fourier Rapide (FFT) Sélectionnable de 128 à la moitié de la mémoire tampon disponible par puissances de 2 VOIES MATHÉMATIQUES Fonctions +, −, *, /, sqrt, ^, exp, ln, log, abs, norm, sign, sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, sinh, cosh, tanh, dérivative, intégrale, fréq, min, max, moyenne, crête Opérandes A, B (voies d'entrée), T (temps), formes d'ondes de référence, constantes, Pi MESURES AUTOMATIQUES Oscilloscope AC RMS, RMS réelle, moyenne CC, durée du cycle, fréquence, cycle de service, taux de descente, temps de descente, taux de montée, temps de montée, grande largeur d'impulsion, faible largeur d'impulsion, maximum, minimum, crête à crête Spectre Fréquence de crête, amplitude de crête, amplitude de crête moyenne, puissance totale, THD %, THD dB, THD plus bruit, SFDR, SINAD, SNR, IMD Statistiques Déviation standard, moyenne, minimum et maximum DÉCODAGE SÉRIE Protocoles CAN Bus, I²C, SPI, UART TEST DE LIMITE DE MASQUE Statistiques Bon/mauvais, nombre d'échecs, nombre total AFFICHAGE Interpolation Linéaire ou sin (x)/x Modes de persistance Couleur numérique, intensité analogique, personnalisé ou aucun Spécifications suite... Spécifications suite... GÉNÉRAL PicoScope 2204 PicoScope 2205 PicoScope 2206 PicoScope 2207 PicoScope 2208 Connectivité PC USB 2.0 haute vitesse (compatible pleine vitesse) Spécifications de l'alimentation Alimentation par port USB Dimensions (y compris les connecteurs) 150 x 100 x 40 mm 200 x 140 x 40 mm Poids < 0,22 kg < 0,5 kg Plage de températures Fonctionnement : 0 à 50 °C (20 à 30 °C pour la précision nominale). Entreposage : –20 °C à +60 °C. Plage d'humidité Fonctionnement : HR 5 à 80%, sans condensation Entreposage : HR 5 à 95%, sans condensation Accréditations de sécurité Conforme à la norme EN 61010-1:2001 Conforme à la norme EN 61010-1:2010 Accréditations IEM Testé pour la conformité à la norme EN61326-1:2006 et FCC Partie 15 Sous partie B Accréditations environnementales Conforme à RoHS et DEEE Logiciel inclus PicoScope 6, Windows SDK, exemples de programmes (C, Visual Basic, VEE, Excel, LabVIEW, Delphi) Configuration PC requise Microsoft Windows XP, Vista ou Windows 7 32 bits ou 64 bits Accessoires Câble USB Langues (UI et manuel) : Anglais, français, italien, allemand, espagnol Langues (UI seulement) : Chinois (simplifié et traditionnel), tchèque, danois, hollandais, finlandais, grec, hongrois, japonais, norvégien, polonais, portugais, roumain, russe, suédois et turc Pico Technology, James House, Colmworth Business Park, St. Neots, Cambridgeshire, PE19 8YP, Royaume-Uni T : +44 (0) 1480 396 395 F : +44 (0) 1480 396 296 E : sales@picotech.com *Les prix sont corrects à la date de publication. Veuillez contacter Pico Technology pour obtenir les derniers prix avant de commander. Erreurs et omissions exceptées. Copyright © 2011 Pico Technology Ltd. Tous droits réservés. MM012.fr-7 www.picotech.com CODE DE COMMANDE DESCRIPTION Livre sterling USD* EUR* PP419 Oscilloscope PicoScope 2204 10 MHz 159 265 195 PP420 Oscilloscope PicoScope 2205 25 MHz 249 415 305 PP800 Oscilloscope PicoScope 2206 50 MHz 349 575 425 PP801 Oscilloscope PicoScope 2207 100 MHz 449 745 545 PP802 Oscilloscope PicoScope 2208 200 MHz 599 995 725 PP787 2 sondes de 60 MHz pour PicoScope 2204, 2205 et 2206 30 50 36 PP821 2 sondes de 150 MHz pour PicoScope 2207 40 66 48 PP822 2 sondes de 250 MHz pour PicoScope 2208 50 83 60 MI136 Étui - PicoScope 2206/2207/2208 30 50 36 Voie A Voie B Déclencheur externe Générateur de fonctions et de formes d'ondes arbitraires Générateur de fonctions et de formes d'ondes arbitraires USB Contenu du produit • Oscilloscope de série PicoScope 2000 • Câble USB • Guide de démarrage rapide • CD du logiciel et de référence Sondes correspondantes disponibles Si vous ne disposez pas déjà de sondes appropriées, commandez-nous un jeu de sondes. Une pochette de rangement robuste est incluse. Oscilloscopes portables Également disponibles dans la gamme PicoScope série 2000, les oscilloscopes portables PicoScope 2104 et 2105 voie unique sont ce qui se fait de mieux en matière de modèles compacts. Consultez notre site Web pour plus d'informations. Voie A Voie B PicoScope 2204 PicoScope 2205 PicoScope 2206 PicoScope 2207 PicoScope 2208 Informations concernant la commande Étui en option Avec rembourrage en mousse pour votre oscilloscope. Un compartiment dans le couvercle permet de ranger les sondes et autres accessoires. TRUST.COM Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter Ultra small Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter to wirelessly connect your notebook with your smartphone, tablet or other Bluetooth device Key features Latest Bluetooth® 4.0 technology Low energy mode 15 meter wireless range Ultra small size Compatibel with older Bluetooth versions More information Item number : Product link : EAN-code : Marketing materials : carton/pallet : 18187 www.trust.com/18187 8713439181876 www.trust.com/18187/materials 80/2880 ©2012 Trust Computer Products. All rights reserved. All brand names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. TRUST.COM Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter Ultra small Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter to wirelessly connect your notebook with your smartphone, tablet or other Bluetooth device Key features Latest Bluetooth® 4.0 technology Low energy mode 15 meter wireless range Ultra small size Compatibel with older Bluetooth versions More information Item number : Product link : EAN-code : Marketing materials : carton/pallet : 18187 www.trust.com/18187 8713439181876 www.trust.com/18187/materials 80/2880 ©2012 Trust Computer Products. All rights reserved. All brand names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. 1 1 Insert SD card See page 3 for how to prepare the SD card 3 Connect input Plug in a USB keyboard and mouse 2a Connect display Plug in your digital TV or monitor 4 Connect network Connect to your wired network [optional] 5 Power up Plug in the micro USB power supply 2b Connect display If not using HDMI, plug in your analogue TV or display Quick start 1 2b Connect display If not using HDMI, plug in your analogue TV or display Quick start 1 To set up your Raspberry Pi you will need: Item Minimum recommended specification & notes 1 SD card • Minimum size 4Gb; class 4 (the class indicates how fast the card is). • We recommend using branded SD cards as they are more reliable. 2a HDMI to HDMI / DVI lead • HDMI to HDMI lead (for HD TVs and monitors with HDMI input). OR HDMI to DVI lead (for monitors with DVI input). • Leads and adapters are available for few pounds -- there is no need to buy expensive ones! 2b RCA video lead • A standard RCA composite video lead to connect to your analogue display if you are not using the HDMI output. 3 Keyboard and mouse • Any standard USB keyboard and mouse should work. • Keyboards or mice that take a lot of power from the USB ports, however, may need a powered USB hub. This may include some wireless devices. 4 Ethernet (network) cable [optional] • Networking is optional, although it makes updating and getting new software for your Raspberry Pi much easier. 5 Power adapter • A good quality, micro USB power supply that can provide at least 700mA at 5V is essential. • Many mobile phone chargers are suitable—check the label on the plug. • If your supply provides less than 5V then your Raspberry Pi may not work at all, or it may behave erratically. Be wary of very cheap chargers: some are not what they claim to be. • It does not matter if your supply is rated at more than 700mA. 6 Audio lead [optional] • If you are using HDMI then you will get digital audio via this. • If you are using the analogue RCA connection, stereo audio is available from the 3.5mm jack next to the RCA connector. HDMI connector HDMI to DVI lead RCA composite video connector Know your leads: 2 Preparing your SD card for the Raspberry Pi In order to use your Raspberry Pi, you will need to install an Operating System (OS) onto an SD card. An Operating System is the set of basic programs and utilities that allow your computer to run; examples include Windows on a PC or OSX on a Mac. These instructions will guide you through installing a recovery program on your SD card that will allow you to easily install different OS’s and to recover your card if you break it. 1. Insert an SD card that is 4GB or greater in size into your computer 2. Format the SD card so that the Pi can read it a. Windows i. Download the SD Association's Formatting Tool1 from https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_4/eula_windows/ ii. Install and run the Formatting Tool on your machine iii. Set "FORMAT SIZE ADJUSTMENT" option to "ON" in the "Options" menu iv. Check that the SD card you inserted matches the one selected by the Tool v. Click the “Format” button b. Mac i. Download the SD Association's Formatting Tool from https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_4/eula_mac/ ii. Install and run the Formatting Tool on your machine iii. Select “Overwrite Format” iv. Check that the SD card you inserted matches the one selected by the Tool v. Click the “Format” button c. Linux i. We recommend using gparted (or the command line version parted) ii. Format the entire disk as FAT 3. Download the New Out Of Box Software (NOOBS) from: downloads.raspberrypi.org/noobs 4. Unzip the downloaded file a. Windows Right click on the file and choose “Extract all” b. Mac Double tap on the file c. Linux Run unzip [downloaded filename] 5. Copy the extracted files onto the SD card that you just formatted 6. Insert the SD card into your Pi and connect the power supply Your Pi will now boot into NOOBS and should display a list of operating systems that you can choose to install. If your display remains blank, you should select the correct output mode for your display by pressing one of the following number keys on your keyboard; 1. HDMI mode this is the default display mode. 2. HDMI safe mode select this mode if you are using the HDMI connector and cannot see anything on screen when the Pi has booted. 3. Composite PAL mode select either this mode or composite NTSC mode if you are using the composite RCA video connector 4. Composite NTSC mode 1Note: The builtin Windows formatting tool will only format the first partition that Windows can read not the entire disk. For this reason we advise using the official SD Card Association Formatting Tool. multipacPRO 19" chassis –O UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz Overview ........... 0 Cabinets ............ 1 Wall mounted cases ............... 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases .... 3 Climate control .... 4 Desk-top cases .... 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis ......... 6 Front panels, plug-in units ....... 7 Systems ............ 8 Power supply units ................ 9 Backplanes ....... 10 Connectors, front panel component system ............ 11 Appendix ......... 12 Further important information can be found on the internet under www.schroff.biz 6.76 O 0600200306002001 Standards/certifications Modifications  External dimensions in accordance with IEC 602973  Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529  EMC test in accordance with VG 95373 part Note  Where finish is identified as being chromated this provides a conductive surface to maintain high levels of EMC shielding effectiveness  Special colours  Special depths and widths  Front Panel Express: customised cut-outs in front panels, rear panels, cover and base plates  Base plate with integrated rear panel  Customised assembly service Modification examples 06002006 06002007 06002005 Different cut-outs Combined 3 U and 6 U assembly 2 U version with 2 x 3 U assembly For further application examples, see multipac on the Internet 19" chassis –O Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.77 O 19" chassis for horizontal board assembly (standardised) and non-standardised components  EMC shielding can be retrofitted  Versions made of Aluminium or Steel (zinc-plated, AlZn coated)  Use of telescopic slides possible Text Text 19" complete chassis  1, 2 U  Al front panel, St chassis (AIZn coating) 06002003 Configuration of 19" chassis 19" chassis for non-standardised assembly  For the assembly of power supplies with chassis plate, boards...  1 ... 5 U  Al front panel, Al extrusion 06002004 19" chassis for standardised assembly, IEC 60297  For the assembly of a connector (EN 60603) or isolated backplanes  1, 2 U  Al front panel, Al extrusion 06004002 Overview ....... 6.76 19" complete chassis ......... 6.78 Configuration of 19" chassis ..... 6.79 19" chassis for non-standardised components . . . . . 6.80 (Basic frame, chassis plate, covers, front handles, assembly kit for assembly of telescopic slides) 19" chassis for standardised 19" components .... 6.82 (Basic frame, base plate, internal configuration, front handles, assembly kit for assembly of telescopic slides) Guide rails . . . . . 6.84 6.78 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O 06002003 06002051 h = clearance (height H - 30), w = clearance width = 447 mm O  Complete chassis, St (AIZn coated), with Al extrusion front panel  Detachable rear panel for easy assembly  19" and ATX power supplies can be assembled in the 1 U version up to a clearance of 40 mm Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Further dimensions available on request  Use of telescopic slides not possible  No EMC version available  Internal configuration kits cannot be used 19" complete chassis Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al extrusion, 2 mm, front anodised, rear etched (at 1 U), colourless chromated front and rear side of the front panel, from 2 U clear chromated 2 1 Base body plain, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 3 1 Rear panel, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 4 1 Cover plain, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 5 1 Assembly kit Height Height H Depth T Order no. U mm mm 1 43.7 220 20860-120 1 43.7 280 20860-121 1 43.7 340 20860-122 2 88.1 280 20860-126 2 88.1 340 20860-127 Front handles For 1 U, Al extrusion, anodised, PU 2 pieces 20860-256 Front handles For 2 U, Al extrusion, anodised, PU 2 pieces 20860-257 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.79 19" chassis –O 06002001 Example for standardised configuration 06002004 Basic kit 06002050 Dimensions basic kit O  Choose height and depth of the basic kit  Choose further components  For non-standardised versions (1 ... 5 U) – Chassis plate – Cover – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides  For standardised versions (1, 2 U) in accordance with IEC 60297 – Support cover for horizontal board assembly – Internal configuration for connector or backplane assembly – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides Delivery comprises (basic kit) Note  h = clearance height = H - 8.1 mm  b = clearance width = 403 mm  Non-standardised assembly (1 ... 5 U), see page 6.80  Standardised assembly (1, 2 U), see page 6.82 Configuration of 19" chassis 1 2 3 H b h T Item Qty Description 1 2 (4) Al extrusion (2 pieces from 5 U) 2 1 Rear panel, Al, 2 mm, clear chromated 3 1 Front panel, Al extrusion, 3 mm, front anodised, rear etched (at 1U), front and rear side of the front panel from clear chromated (at 2U) 4 1 Assembly kit and user manual 5 1 EMC gasket profile kit (only at 5 U) 6.80 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O  Select – Height and depth of the basic kit (1 ... 5 U) – Chassis plate – Cover plate – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides Order Information Note  Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for non-standardised components Basic frame Chassis plate Cover plate, plain perforated 06002004 06002058 06002053 06002053 Frame, Al extrusion, front panel, Al, rear panel, Al, (5 U 2 pieces and with EMC shielding) For heavy components, Al, 2 mm Pushed into basic frame, Al, 1 mm, clear chromated, please order EMC gasket separately Pushed into basic frame, Al, 1 mm, clear chromated, hole diameter 4 mm, degree of perforation 58 % Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 5 43.7 84 220 20860-201 20860-107 30860-501 30860-510 5 43.7 84 280 20860-202 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 5 43.7 84 340 20860-203 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 2 88.1 84 220 20860-210 20860-107 30860-501 30860-510 2 88.1 84 280 20860-211 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 2 88.1 84 340 20860-212 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 3 132.6 84 280 20860-219 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 3 132.6 84 340 20860-220 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 3 132.6 84 400 20860-221 20860-110 30860-504 30860-513 3 132.6 84 460 20860-222 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 4 177.0 84 280 20860-228 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 4 177.0 84 340 20860-229 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 4 177.0 84 400 20860-230 20860-110 30860-504 30860-513 4 177.0 84 460 20860-231 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 5 221.5 84 460 20860-240 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.81 19" chassis –O Order Information Note  Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for non-standardised components Front handles EMC gasket Telescopic slides assembly kit 06002052 ESA44237 06094004 Al extrusion, anodised To increase EMC shielding; delivery comprises, see page 6.85 For assembly of 19" chassis on telescopic slides, please order telescopic slides separately, see chapter cabinets - accessories Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm PU 2 pieces PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 5 43.7 84 220 20860-256 20860-130 21101-622 5 43.7 84 280 5 43.7 84 340 2 88.1 84 220 2 88.1 84 280 20860-257 2 88.1 84 340 3 132.6 84 280 20860-258 3 132.6 84 340 3 132.6 84 400 3 132.6 84 460 4 177.0 84 280 20860-259 4 177.0 84 340 4 177.0 84 400 4 177.0 84 460 5 221.5 84 460 20860-260 6.82 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O  Select - Height and depth of the basic kit (1, 2 U) - Support cover for horizontal board assembly - Internal configuration for connector or backplane assembly - Front handles - EMC gasket - Telescopic slides Order Information Note  Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for standardised 19" components Basic frame Support cover Internal configuration for horizontal board assembly for connector EN 60603 for insulated backplane assembly 06002004 06002053 06003050 06003051 Frame, Al extrusion, front panel, Al, rear panel Al Al, 1 mm, clear chromated Horizontal rail for 3 and 6 U boards Horizontal rails, threaded inserts, insulation strips for 3 and 6 U boards Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 43.7 84 220 20860-201 30860-519 20860-115 20860-116 1 43.7 84 280 20860-202 30860-520 20860-115 20860-116 1 43.7 84 340 20860-203 30860-521 20860-115 20860-116 2 88.1 84 220 20860-210 30860-519 20860-117 20860-118 2 88.1 84 280 20860-211 30860-520 20860-117 20860-118 2 88.1 84 340 20860-212 30860-521 20860-117 20860-118 3 HE / 3 U 6 HE / 6 U 3 HE / 3 U 6 HE / 6 U Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.83 19" chassis –O Order Information Note  Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for standardised 19" components Front handles EMC gasket Assembly kit for telescopic slides 06002052 ESA44237 06094004 Al extrusion, anodised To increase EMC shielding; delivery comprises, see page 6.85 For mounting of 19" chassis on telescopic slides, please order telescopic slides separately, see chapter cabinet - accessories Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm PU 2 pieces PU 1 Kit PU 1 Kit 1 43.7 84 220 20860-256 20860-130 21101-622 1 43.7 84 280 1 43.7 84 340 2 88.1 84 220 2 88.1 84 280 20860-257 2 88.1 84 340 6.84 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O  For printed board lengths: 100, 160, 220, 280, 340 mm  Material: up to 280 mm length PBT UL 94-V-0, > 280 mm length, head piece PBT UL 94-V-0, middle part Al extrusion, strengthened version  Guide rails: – Can be plugged into horizontal rails made of Al extrusion – Can be plugged into metal which is 1.5 mm thick  Printed board retainer, printed board handle see Accessories Order Information Guide rails Guide rails "accessories" "strengthened accessories" BZA45829 BZA46554 Board length Groove width Colour mm mm PU 2) 10 pieces SPQ 1) 50 pieces SPQ 1) 50 pieces 100 2 red – 64560-082 – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-005 64560-076 160 2 grey – 64560-055 – 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-006 64560-078 220 2 grey – 64560-166 – 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 – – 280 2 red – – 64560-080 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – – Accessories Printed board retainer, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 Printed board handle, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-378 Identification strips for printed board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 1) Delivery may be in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ). Please order the ’SPQ’ quantity or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. 2) Order no. comprises one Packaging Unit (PU); multiple items in one pack. Pricing per PU. Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.85 19" chassis –O ESA44237 1) with EMC shielding material 2) without EMC shielding material O  A high EMC shielding is achieved with the EMC gasketing and cover plates Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  EMC test report on the Internet EMC gasket kit Item Qty Description 1 1 Seal 2100 mm; silicone / nickel, connection side panel / cover 2 2 Saw tooth 400 mm; stainless steel; connection front panel / cover Description Order no. EMC gasket kit 20860-130 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. Main Catalog 24th Edition | October 2012 Equipment Protection Solutions 04 Desk-top cases . Overview . . . . . 0 Desk-top cases Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads und weitere wichtige Informationen finden Sie im Internet unter www.schroff.biz 5.0 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue PROLINE Y The universal case with 19" compatible dimensions e.g. for CompactPCI and VME64x applications - Aluminium case - Height 2 ... 7 U - High EMC shielding i The robust case for 19" compatible or custom electronics assemblies - Aluminium case with aluminium frame front - Height 2 ... 6 U - High EMC shielding 361009005 (12304003 10005004 05802001 06803006 05809001) Desk-top cases Main Catalogue 5.1 E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Accessories b Desk-top or portable case Design alternative to propacPRO - Front and rear frame in aluminium - Aluminium case - Height 2 ... 6 U - For 19" components or individual electronics assemblies J Case to house 19" subracks or 19" chassis - Case with aluminium frame to front and rear - High stability - Height 3 ... 12 U - Identical front and rear - Internal mounting up to 40 kg - Protection class IP 20 36109006 (02004001 02202003 05806006 02992004 05806008) Overview . . . . 5.0 Introduction . . 5.2 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 ratiopacPRO . . 5.6 propacPRO . . . 5.44 compacPRO . . 5.76 comptec . . . . . . 5.100 Accessories Handles . . . . . . . . 5.108 Strap handles . . . 5.111 Tip-up carrying handles . . . . . . . . 5.112 Folding handles 5.113 Tray handles . . . 5.114 Feet . . . . . . . . . . 5.115 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.2 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Introduction IntroductionMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top enclosures Our desk-top cases are used to house PCBs (euroboards) or individual components The choice is yours:  ratiopacPRO, the universal case with 19" compatible dimensions and high EMC shielding, e.g. for CompactPCI and VME64x applications  propacPRO, the robust case with high EMC shielding for 19"-compatible or custom electronics assemblies  compacPRO, Desk-top or portable case for unshielded applications 19" cases Our comptec cases are comparable with small cabinets and are used to house 19" components such as subracks, 19" fan trays or 19" front panels All desk-top enclosures have a very low weight owing to the materials used and are also suitable for mobile use Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days The most important user domains for desk-top enclosures are:  Fitting with euroboards in accordance with IEC 60297  Fitting with individual electrical or mechanical components, e.g.on mounting plates Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Practical technology without time-consuming assembly. The modular product platform of these cases allows a wide range of possible uses with only a small number of components. The intelligent design of all components results in an astonishingly quick and easy assembly of the components. With our PRO product platform we offer you full compatibility of all individual components and accessories, also with our europacPRO subracks. Standard desk-top enclosures can also be adapted easily and with little effort for mobile applications. Case types: Desk-top enclosure/19" case 01810002 02202004 Desk-top enclosure, ratiopacPRO 19" case, comptec Applications for desk-top enclosures 02004079 05809004 05809004 Example above: for euroboards, below: for individual installation One product platform and extensive accessories 05806008 05806006 02005003 02005006 5.3 Desk-top cases – Introduction Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 IntroductionMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Supplied in space-saving packs. Simply unpack parts and screw together - done. Depending on the kit chosen the threaded insert, the perforated rail or the EMC gasket is pre-assembled on the horizontal rail. We offer you three forms of delivery:  Pre-assembled kit for use with 160 mm deep euroboards, frame fitted, cladding parts and guide rails supplied loose.  Pre-assembled kit for individual configuration, frame assembled, cladding parts supplied loose.  Ready assembled cases to your specifications. With our ServicePLUS option you can order ready-assembled cases, with drilled holes and cut-outs and individual front panels - if necessary even by express service. Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Guide rails form the interface between the mechanics of the case and the electronics assembled (PCBs, plug-in units, frame type plug-in units, drive unit modules, etc.). Robust snap-in fixings on the plastic rails assure that the components are held securely, even when exposed to vibrations. Guide rails can also be screwed on. Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Our case product platforms offer standard solutions for achieving electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and to avoid electrostatic interference (ESD)  Shielding on the front and rear of the case is effected by front panels with EMC gaskets  To prevent electrostatic discharge when inserting PCBs, ESD contacts are clipped into the guide rails. These provide a conductive connection between board and case earth/ground  Test reports are available on our website www.schroff.biz for download Forms of delivery for desk-top enclosures 06104001 Flat pack delivery to save space Guide rail 06108084 83 81 79 77 75 73 1 13579 11 EMC and ESD 06108081 Shielding 04503050 Position of the ESD clip 30 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 dB 400 800 1200 1600 2000 Mhz Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.4 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – ServicePLUS ServicePLUSMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days configuration Simple. Fast. For the product you want. Components can be varied and combined freely  Online configuration: www.schroff.co.uk/configuration assembly Assembled by professionals. Double benefit! Fitting of all mechanical, electrical and electronic components by our specialists  Professional and reliable, without extra costs  Ready for despatch within 10 working days modification Small changes. Large impact. Custom drillings, cut-outs and special colours for off-the-shelf products  CAD data are available for you to download and further modify from our website www.schroff.biz  Ready for despatch within 10 working days solution Simple. Fast. From one source. Integration and custom developments  Flowtherm simulation to calculate heat paths; verification in our own climate lab  Special sizes, custom solutions express When fast has to be faster. Delivery time to customer's request  ServicePLUS assembly ready for despatch within 10 working days  ServicePLUS modification and ServicePLUS solution ready for despatch within 15 working days academy Knowledge. Sharing. Partnerships. Knowledge transfer and partnership  Seminars held centrally or at your site.  CAD drawings, test reports, user manuals 5.5 Desk-top cases – ServicePLUS Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Application examples 01809001 01809003 Application: ratiopacPRO-air case in special colour, shielded board cage, filter mat top and bottom Application: ratiopacPRO-air case with processed front and rear panels 02009001 02009003 Application: compacPRO case, modified Application: compacPRO case with fitted horizontal rail with lip and hinged front panel 02009002 02009004 Application: compacPRO case with fitted horizontal rail with lip and folding front panel Application: compacPRO with tip-up carrying handle and front panel (without visible screws) 02109001 05809005 Application: inpac case with hinged and modified front and rear panels Application: propacPRO, EMC case in special colour with mounting plates for individual construction Desk-top cases –Y Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.6 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 06800002 06801005 ratiopacPRO Designed for insertion/extractor handles in accordance with IEC 60297-3-102 and IEEE 1101.10 for CompactPCI and VME64x applications ratiopacPRO air Designed for insertion/extractor handles in accordance with IEC 60297-3-102 and IEEE 1101.10 for CompactPCI and VME64x applications; 1 U extra for ventilation (1/2 U top, 1/2 U bottom) Standards  Inner and outer dimensions in accordance with: IEC 60297-3-101 / IEEE 1101.1 IEC 60297-3-102 / IEEE 1101.10/11  Type of protection IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529  Earthing connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A1  EMC testing in accordance with VG 95373 part 15 06812001 06800015 Case with mounting plate Prepared for CompactPCI and VME64x applications Desk-top cases –Y Main Catalogue 5.7 E 10/2012 YMain Catalogue The universal case with 19" compatible dimensions e.g. for CompactPCI, VME64x and other applications  Base level of shielding in basic versions upwards, additional EMC shielding can be retrofitted  Symmetrical construction, identical front and rear (identical board cage for ratiopacPRO and ratiopacPRO air)  Converts simply from desktop to 19" rack-mounted case and back  No visible screws; cladding parts removable without tools ratiopacPRO  Case with cover strip, front handles or 19" brackets (height 2 U ... 6 U)  Complete case with cover strip and pre-mounted components, with basic shielding (height 3 U, 6 U), additional EMC shielding retrofittable  Tower case (width 4 U) ratiopacPRO air  ratiopacPRO air with additional 1 U height for ventilation  Case with cover strips, front handles or 19" brackets (height 4 U, 5 U, 7 U)  Complete case with cover strips and pre-mounted components, with basic shielding (height 4 U, 7 U), additional EMC shielding retrofittable 06800005 06800005 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours or sizes) e.g. custom solutions (cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.6 ratiopacPRO Complete cases . 5.8 Dimensions . . . . . 5.9 Cases . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Tower cases . . . . 5.12 ratiopacPRO air Cases . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Complete cases . 5.13 Dimensions . . . . . 5.16 Radial fan units . 5.17 EMC gasketing . . 5.18 Accessories Front panels . . . . 5.21 Rear panels . . . . . 5.22 Feet . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Air filters . . . . . . . 5.23 GND/earthing kit 5.24 Front handles . . . 5.24 19" brackets . . . . 5.25 Cable holder. . . . 5.26 Compartment seals. . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Strap handles . . . 5.26 Tip-up carrying handles . . . . . . . . 5.27 Assembly kit. . . . 5.28 Fitting position of horizontal rails . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29 Horizontal rails. . 5.31 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips . 5.35 Z-rails, perforated rails. . 5.35 Divider plates . . . 5.36 Mounting plates . 5.37 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.38 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.39 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . 5.40 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.8 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Desk-top enclosure with pre-configured components, in accordance to IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components, e.g. plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slit in base plate  Rear panel perforated Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note  Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.9  Components see page 5.18  Front handles and 19" mounting brackets from page 5.24  Guide rails from page 5.40 ratiopacPRO complete cases 06812003 01802050 01808055 01808051 3 U 01808052 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 11 15 10 15 11 6, 7, 9 5, 7, 9 4, 7, 8,16 2 3 1 “X” “Y” “Z” 4 9 9 7 7 7 16 8 5 6 “X” “Y” “Z” D - 20 W - 21.4 D W 7.5 H A A- A A D - 20 W - 21.4 D W 7.5 A A- A A H Item Qty Description without EMC with EMC 1 2 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, passivated 2 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces RAL 9006 3 4 4 Cover strip, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, pre-fitted only on EMC version 4 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces RAL 7016 5 2 2 Horizontal rail, centre (top/bottom), type H-ST, Al 6 1 1 Horizontal rail, centre (on 6 U only), type ST, Al 7 6/8 6/8 3 U/6 U: threaded inserts, St, pre-mounted, for indirect backplane mounting with insulation strips 8 – 4 Perforated strip, Al, 1 mm, pre-fitted 9 4 4 Insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 10 1 1 Rear panel, perforated, Al, 2.5 mm 11 2 2 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surfaces conductive, visible surfaces RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection, base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation 12 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 14 – 1 EMC support profile for side panel, pre-mounted (kit) 15 – 4 EMC contact strip for cover plate, pre-mounted (kit) 16 – 4 EMC contact strip front panel - horizontal rails 17 1 1 GND/earthing kit, assembly kit Height H Width W Depth D Unshielded EMC shielded U HP mm Part no. Part no. 3 28 255.5 24572-001 24572-050 3 42 255.5 24572-002 24572-051 3 42 315.5 24572-003 24572-052 3 63 315.5 24572-004 24572-053 3 84 315.5 24572-005 24572-054 3 84 375.5 24572-006 24572-055 3 84 435.5 24572-007 24572-056 6 42 315.5 24572-015 24572-064 6 63 315.5 24572-016 24572-065 6 84 315.5 24572-017 24572-066 6 84 375.5 24572-018 24572-067 6 84 435.5 24572-019 24572-068 5.9 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Text Dimension drawings ratiopacPRO rppr6637 RatiopacPRO with A - bezel; B - front handle; C - 19" mounting bracket; D - 19" mounting bracket with front handle Dimensions table ratiopacPRO Height Width Depth H h w W w1 w2 w D d D1 d2 in U in mm in mm in HP in mm in mm in mm in mm Total depth in mm Useable depth in mm Plug-in depth in mm Board depth in mm 2 88.10 67.90 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 255.5 235.5 175.5 160 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 235.5 220 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 315.5 295.5 175.5 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235.5 220 3 132.55 112.35 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 295.5 280 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 375.5 355.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 4 177.00 156.80 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 435.5 415.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 5 221.45 201.25 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 495.5 475.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 6 265.90 245.70 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 Components mountable in 15 mm depth grid Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.10 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Y YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Cases for individual assembly with 19" standard components or specific internal mounting, e.g. with mounting plate  Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable)  Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side  Four versions: – Bezels – Front handles – 19" mounting brackets – 19" mounting brackets with front handles  For board depth 160 mm, 220 mm, 280 mm, and 340 mm (depending on case depth) Delivery comprises (kit) 3a, 3b, 3c or 3d according to selection Note  Order information, see following page Order Information RatiopacPRO case 01805050 01805051 01805052 01813051 3a: Bezel 3b: Front handle 3c: 19" mounting bracket 3d: 19" mounting bracket with front handle 01813065 Drawing with front cover strip ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 11 11 4 2 3a (3b/3c/3d) 1 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, chromated 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Rear trim, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3a 2 Bezel, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3b 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3c 2 19" mounting bracket, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3d 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces powdercoated, RAL 7016 11 2 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, inner sides conductive, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connections, base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation 12 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 13 1 Fixing materials kit Accessories Earthing kit CU wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow, 1 kit 24571-380 Al diecast foot with tip-up silver, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 10603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, PU 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Stacking aid silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.11 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Note  Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.9  Components see page 5.18 RatiopacPRO case Width W Depth D Case height H 2 U HP mm Part no. Part no. Part no. Part no. Part no. Side panel subdivision (1 U-3 U-1 U) (3 U-2 U) Cover strips 28 255.5 24572-500 24571-002 24571-050 24572-117 24572-261 24571-098 28 315.5 24572-503 24571-005 24571-053 24572-120 24572-264 24571-101 42 255.5 24572-510 24571-014 24571-062 24572-129 24572-273 24571-110 42 315.5 24572-513 24571-017 24571-065 24572-132 24572-276 24571-113 42 255.5 24572-514 24571-018 24571-066 24572-133 24572-277 24571-114 63 255.5 24572-520 24571-026 24571-074 24572-141 24572-285 24571-122 63 315.5 24572-523 24571-029 24571-077 24572-144 24572-288 24571-125 63 375.5 24572-524 24571-030 24571-078 24572-145 24572-289 24571-126 84 255.5 24572-530 24571-038 24571-086 24572-153 24572-297 24571-134 84 315.5 24572-533 24571-041 24571-089 24572-156 24572-300 24571-137 84 375.5 24572-534 24571-042 24571-090 24572-157 24572-301 24571-138 84 435.5 24572-535 24571-043 24571-091 24572-158 24572-302 24571-139 RPPR6629 84 495.5 24572-536 24571-044 24571-092 24572-159 24572-303 24571-140 Front handles 28 255.5 – 24571-702 24571-750 24572-213 24572-357 24571-798 28 315.5 – 24571-705 24571-753 24572-216 24572-360 24571-801 42 255.5 – 24571-714 24571-762 24572-225 24572-369 24571-810 42 315.5 – 24571-717 24571-765 24572-228 24572-372 24571-813 42 375.5 – 24571-718 24571-766 24572-229 24572-373 24571-814 63 255.5 – 24571-726 24571-774 24572-237 24572-381 24571-822 63 315.5 – 24571-729 24571-777 24572-240 24572-384 24571-825 63 375.5 – 24571-730 24571-778 24572-241 24572-385 24571-826 84 255.5 – 24571-738 24571-786 24572-249 24572-393 24571-834 84 315.5 – 24571-741 24571-789 24572-252 24572-396 24571-837 84 375.5 – 24571-742 24571-790 24572-253 24572-397 24571-838 84 435.5 – 24571-743 24571-791 24572-254 24572-398 24571-839 01805050 84 495.5 – 24571-744 24571-792 24572-255 24572-399 24571-840 19" mounting brackets 84 255.5 24572-570 24571-438 24571-486 24572-201 24572-345 24571-534 84 315.5 24572-573 24571-441 24571-489 24572-204 24572-348 24571-537 84 375.5 24572-574 24571-442 24571-490 24572-205 24572-349 24571-538 84 435.5 24572-575 24571-443 24571-491 24572-206 24572-350 24571-539 01805052 84 495.5 24572-576 24571-444 24571-492 24572-207 24572-351 24571-540 19" mounting brackets with front handles 84 255.5 24572-620 24572-630 24572-640 – – 24572-660 84 315.5 24572-623 24572-633 24572-643 – – 24572-663 84 375.5 24572-624 24572-634 24572-644 – – 24572-664 84 435.5 24572-625 24572-635 24572-645 – – 24572-665 01813051 84 495.5 24572-626 24572-636 24572-646 – – 24572-666 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.12 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y 06802001 01802054 1) = open space between the horizontal rails 2) = max. mounting depth Y  Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side  Mounting space 4 U, 84 HP, depth 475 mm  Case based on ratiopacPRO  Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note  Components see page 5.18 ratiopacPRO tower with 4 U width ServicePLUS see page 5.4 4 4 6 3 5 1 2 3 156,8 475.5 2) 177 495.5 1) 221,5 448.7 462.25 427.3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Base/top cover, Al, 2 mm, passivated 2 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surface powdercoated, RAL 7016 3 4 Cover, Al die-cast, RAL 7016 4 2 Lateral cover plate, Al, 1 mm, with GND/earthing connection, visible surfaces powder-coated, internal surface conductive, RAL 9006 5 1 Top cover plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006 6 2 Case foot with anti-slip protection, Al, powder-coated, RAL 7016 7 1 Assembly kit Width Part no. U 4 24571-395 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.13 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 airY The case has 2 x 1/2 U clearance for ventilation  Case with cover strip; with pre-mounted components for euroboards and backplane with insulation strip; no visible screws  Symmetrical design, identical front and rear honeycomb grid ventilation in top cover and base plate  Available in two versions: – unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) – with EMC shielding fitted Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note  Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.16  Components see page 5.18  Front handles and 19" mounting brackets from page 5.24  Guide rails from page 5.40 ratiopacPRO air complete cases 06811001 01802052 01808055 01808053 3 U 01808054 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 13 11 15 “X” “Y” “Z” 13 10 6, 7, 9 5, 7, 9 4, 7, 8, 16 2 3 1 15 14 17 11 4 9 9 7 7 7 16 8 5 6 “X” “Y” “Z” D w 7.5 h H A A - A A D w 7.5 A A - A A h H Item Qty Description without EMC with EMC 1 2 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, passivated 2 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surface RAL 9006 3 4 4 Cover, die-cast zinc, RAL 7016, pre-mounted on EMC version only 4 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surface RAL 7016 5 2 2 Horizontal rail, centre (top/bottom), type H-ST, Al 6 1 1 Horizontal rail, centre (on 6 U only), type ST, Al 7 6/8 6/8 4 U/7 U: threaded inserts, St, pre-mounted, for indirect backplane mounting with insulation strips 8 – 4 Perforated strip, pre-mounted 9 4 4 Insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 10 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm 11 2 2 Top cover and base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection 12 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC, black 13 2 2 Air filter 14 – 1 EMC support profile for side panel, fitted (kit) 15 – 4 EMC contact strip for cover plate, pre-mounted (kit) 16 – 4 EMC contact strip front panel - horizontal rails 17 1 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, self-adhesive, temperature range -20 °C ... +85 °C 18 1 1 GND/earthing kit, assembly kit Case height H PCB height h Width w Depth D Unshielded EMC shielded U U HP mm Part no. Part no. 4 3 28 255.5 24572-025 24572-074 4 3 42 255.5 24572-026 24572-075 4 3 42 315.5 24572-027 24572-076 4 3 63 315.5 24572-028 24572-077 4 3 84 315.5 24572-029 24572-078 4 3 84 375.5 24572-030 24572-079 4 3 84 435.5 24572-031 24572-080 7 6 42 315.5 24572-040 24572-088 7 6 63 315.5 24572-041 24572-089 7 6 84 315.5 24572-042 24572-090 7 6 84 375.5 24572-043 24572-091 7 6 84 435.5 24572-044 24572-092 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.14 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Yair airY The case has 2 x 1/2 U clearances for ventilation beneath and above the board cage  Cases for individual assembly with 19" standard components or specific internal mounting, e.g. with mounting plate  Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable)  Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side  For board depth 160 mm, 220 mm, 280 mm, and 340 mm (depending on case depth)  Online download of 3D CAD data  Four versions: – Bezels – Front handles – 19" mounting brackets – With 19" mounting brackets and front handles Delivery comprises (in kit form) 3a, 3b, 3c or 3d according to selection Note  Order information see following page Order Information RatiopacPRO air case 06801005 01805055 01805056 01805057 01813057 3a: Bezel 3b: Front handle 3c: 19" mounting bracket 3d: 19" mounting bracket with front handle 01813066 Drawing with front cover strip ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 13 11 11 13 4 2 3a (3b/3c/3d) 3 1 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, chromated 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Rear trim, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3a 2 Bezel, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3b 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3c 2 19" mounting angle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3d 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces powdercoated, RAL 7016 11 2 1 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surfaces conductive,visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection, top cover and base plate with ventilation comb 12 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 13 2 Air filters 14 1 Fixing materials kit Accessories Earthing kit CU wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow, 1 kit 24571-380 Al diecast foot with tip-up silver, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 10603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, PU 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Stacking aid silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.15 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Note  Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.16  Components see page 5.18 RatiopacPRO air case Width W Depth D Case height H 4 U 5 U 7 U PCB height h HP mm Part no. Part no. Part no. Bezels 28 255.5 24571-146 24571-194 24571-242 28 315.5 24571-149 24571-197 24571-245 42 255.5 24571-158 24571-206 24571-254 42 315.5 24571-161 24571-209 24571-257 42 375.5 24571-162 24571-210 24571-258 63 255.5 24571-170 24571-218 24571-266 63 315.5 24571-173 24571-221 24571-269 63 375.5 24571-174 24571-222 24571-270 63 435.5 24571-175 24571-223 24571-271 84 255.5 24571-182 24571-230 24571-278 84 315.5 24571-185 24571-233 24571-281 84 375.5 24571-186 24571-234 24571-282 84 435.5 24571-187 24571-235 24571-283 01805055 84 495.5 24571-188 24571-236 24571-284 Front handles 28 255.5 24571-846 24571-894 24571-942 28 315.5 24571-849 24571-897 24571-945 42 255.5 24571-858 24571-906 24571-954 42 315.5 24571-861 24571-909 24571-957 42 375.5 24571-862 24571-910 24571-958 42 435.5 24571-863 24571-911 24571-959 63 315.5 24571-873 24571-921 24571-969 63 375.5 24571-874 24571-922 24571-970 63 435.5 24571-875 24571-923 24571-971 84 255.5 24571-882 24571-930 24571-978 84 315.5 24571-885 24571-933 24571-981 84 375.5 24571-886 24571-934 24571-982 84 435.5 24571-887 24571-935 24571-983 01805056 84 495.5 24571-888 24571-936 24571-984 19" mounting brackets 84 255.5 24571-582 24571-630 24571-678 84 315.5 24571-585 24571-633 24571-681 84 375.5 24571-586 24571-634 24571-682 84 435.5 24571-587 24571-635 24571-683 01805057 84 495.5 24571-588 24571-636 24571-684 With 19" mounting brackets and front handles 84 255.5 24572-670 – 24572-690 84 315.5 24572-673 – 24572-693 84 375.5 24572-674 – 24572-694 84 435.5 24572-675 – 24572-695 01805057 84 495.5 24572-676 – 24572-696 3 1 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.16 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Yair Text Text RatiopacPRO air dimension drawings 01805058 RatiopacPRO air with A - bezel; B - front handle; C - 19" mounting bracket; D - 19" mounting bracket with front handle Dimensions table RatiopacPRO air Height Width Depth H H W W1 W2 w D d D1 d2 in U in mm in mm in HP in mm in mm in mm in mm Total depth in mm Usable depth in mm Plug-in depth in mm Board depth in mm 4 177.00 112.35 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 255.5 235.5 175 160 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 235 220 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 315.5 295.5 175 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235 220 5 221.45 156.80 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 295 280 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 375.5 355.5 175 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235 220 7 310.35 245.70 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 295 280 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 355 340 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 435.5 415.5 175 160 235 220 295 280 355 340 495.5 475.5 175 160 235 220 295 280 355 340 Components mountable in 15 mm depth grid 5.17 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 12309050 12309051 Depth D: 129.8 / 189.9 mm for 160 mm / 220 mm euroboards Main Catalogue  Only 1/2 U height  Ball-bearing radial fans  Fan holder in 4 widths and 2 depths  Air capacity 36 m³/h (free blowing) per fan  Air exhaust via perforation in cover plate  No mechanical modification to case necessary  Simple mounting  No restriction to rear mounting space Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note  Further configurations available on request  Fans with tacho signal available on request Radial fan unit for ratiopacPRO air D 8 26,5 70 W Item Qty Description 1 1 Fan support, Al, 1.5 mm, with crimp sockets for mounting the fans 2 1-3 Radial fan, ball bearing, 12 VDC; airflow volume (50 Hz) 36 m³/h, free blowing; power consumption 6.7 W; connecting cable 300 mm, without plug (AWG 26); noise level in dB (A): 47.0; max. static pressure in Pa: 190; max. ambient temperature: 60 °C; fan housing and rotor: UL 94 V-0 3 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, UL 94, self-adhesive, temperature range -20 °C ... +85 °C 4 1 Terminal clamp, UL 90 V-0 5 1 Assembly kit Width Width Number of fans Part no. for PCB depth HP mm 160 mm 220 mm 28 146.87 1 24572-404 24572-408 42 218.00 1 24572-405 24572-409 63 324.67 2 24572-406 24572-410 84 431.35 3 24572-407 24572-411 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 3 4 1 2 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.18 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air rppr6639 / -airY For vertical EMC shielding between sub-assemblies and side panel  Scope of delivery sufficient for one case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information RPPR6640 / -airY For horizontal EMC shielding between side panels and cover plates  Scope of delivery sufficient for one case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information EMC sealing front/rear panel to side panel 1 2 Item Qty Description 1 4 EMC support profile, Al extrusion 2 2 EMC sealing (textile), core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 3 1 Assembly kit For case height Part no. U 2, 3-air 24571-334 3, 4-air 24571-331 4, 5-air 24571-332 6, 7-air 24571-333 5, 6-air 24571-335 EMC sealing side panel to cover plate Item Qty Description 1 4 Contact strip, stainless steel Depth Part no. mm 255 24571-338 315 24571-339 375 24571-340 435 24571-341 495 24571-342 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.19 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 rppr6739 Main Catalogue  The contact strip is clipped onto the horizontal rail and sets up the contact to front panel or rear panel  Can be used for rear horizontal rails (H-VT, L-VT) and all front horizontal rails Delivery comprises Order Information / -airY For shielding of two horizontal rails located directly above each other with vertical division of the mounting height Delivery comprises Order Information EMC sealing front/rear panel to horizontal rail Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Stainless steel EMC gasket Width Width Qty/PU Part no. HP mm 28 131.78 10 24560-229 42 202.9 10 24560-231 63 304.8 10 24560-233 84 416.3 10 24560-235 84 416.3 100 24560-236 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. EMC sealing horizontal rail to horizontal rail BPA46548 BZA45877 aza45937 Assembly tool Item Qty Description 1 1 Cover strip, Al, 1 mm 2 2 Contact spring, St, stainless Length Part no. HP 20 24562-520 28 24562-528 40 24562-540 42 24562-542 63 24562-563 84 24562-584 Assembly tool for EMC sealing, St, stainless (horizontal rails),1 piece 24560-271 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.20 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air / -airYMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  No screws required for fixing  Special horizontal rails cover the edges of the front panel (top and bottom) and prevent bowing of the front panel Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note  To obtain a shielded case, all EMC sealings must be fitted (front panel/rear panel - side panel; side panel - cover plate; front panel/rear panel - horizontal rail; horizontal rail - horizontal rail)  EMC sealing see from page 5.18 EMC front/rear panel, slotted, shielded 01811055 01811056 Front panel/horizontal rail H W Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: colour passivated 2 2 Horizontal rail, front; special for this front panel 3 4 EMC support profile 4 2 Contact strip horizontal rail - front panel 5 3 EMC textile gasket 6 1 Fixing material kit, user manual For case height Height H For case width Width W Part no. U mm HP mm 2, 3-air 84.0 28 141.9 24572-599 2, 3-air 84.0 42 213.2 24572-600 2, 3-air 84.0 63 319.7 24572-601 2, 3-air 84.0 84 426.4 24572-602 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 24572-603 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213.2 24572-604 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 24572-605 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 24572-606 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 24572-607 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213.2 24572-608 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 24572-609 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 24572-610 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.21 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 06801502 / -airY Front panels can also be used as rear panels  No screws required for fixing  Inserted between side panel and castings such as trim, 19" mounting bracket or handle Delivery comprises Order Information Note  Screw-fixed front panels see chapter Front panels, page 7.4 Full-width front panel, slotted, unshielded Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: colour passivated For case height Height H For case width Width W Part no. U mm HP mm 2, 3-air 84 28 141.9 34571-617 2, 3-air 84 42 213.2 34571-618 2, 3-air 84 63 319.7 34571-619 2, 3-air 84 84 426.4 34571-620 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 34571-605 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213.2 34571-606 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 34571-607 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 34571-608 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 34571-609 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213.2 34571-610 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 34571-611 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 34571-612 5, 6-air 217.3 28 141.9 34571-621 5, 6-air 217.3 42 213.2 34571-622 5, 6-air 217.3 63 319.7 34571-623 5, 6-air 217.3 84 426.4 34571-624 6, 7-air 261.8 28 141.9 34571-613 6, 7-air 261.8 42 213.2 34571-614 6, 7-air 261.8 63 319.7 34571-615 6, 7-air 261.8 84 426.4 34571-616 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.22 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air 01802055 Shieldable 01804050 Unshielded / -airY Two versions: unshielded, Al, 2.5 mm; shieldable, Al extrusion (textile EMC seal, retrofittable)  Mounting on horizontal rails (top and bottom) Delivery comprises Order Information  Please order textile EMC seals separately  Assembly parts see page Chapter 7, Front panels  Rear/front panels without perforation see Chapter 7, Front panels  Rear panels with fan available on request 04602054 Front panels Delivery comprises Order Information Rear panels with ventilation slots 7,45 7,45 B ø 5,9 x 3,3 W Z W - 2,58 3,2 7,2 25 2,5 3 3 H 3,7 3,7 2,5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: iridescent green chromated; unshielded or shieldable with EMC seal (textile) Height H Width W B unshielded shieldable U mm HP mm mm Part no. Part no. 2, 3-air 84 28 141.9 – 30849-007 20848-679 2, 3-air 84 42 213 101.6 30849-014 20848-680 2, 3-air 84 63 319.7 157.5 30849-015 20848-681 2, 3-air 84 84 426.4 208.3 30849-016 20848-682 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 – 30849-008 20848-633 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213 101.6 30849-021 20848-634 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 157.5 30849-022 20848-635 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 208.3 30849-023 20848-636 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 – 30849-009 20848-656 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213 101.6 30849-028 20848-657 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 157.5 30849-029 20848-658 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 208.3 30849-030 20848-659 5, 6-air 217.3 28 141.9 – 30849-011 20848-744 5, 6-air 217.3 42 213 101.6 30849-171 20848-745 5, 6-air 217.3 63 319.7 157.5 30849-172 20848-746 5, 6-air 217.3 84 426.4 208.3 30849-173 20848-747 6, 7-air 261.8 28 141.9 – 30849-010 20848-640 6, 7-air 261.8 42 213 101.6 30849-035 20848-641 6, 7-air 261.8 63 319.7 157.5 30849-036 20848-642 6, 7-air 261.8 84 426.4 208.3 30849-037 20848-643 Textile EMC seals Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Textile EMC seal, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating Height Height Qty/PU Part no. U mm pieces 2, 3-air 52 10 21101-857 3, 4-air 97 100 21101-854 3, 4-air 97 10 21101-853 4, 5-air 142 10 21101-858 5, 6-air 187 10 21101-978 6, 7-air 232 100 21101-856 6, 7-air 232 10 21101-855 5.23 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 Tip-up foot 01802076 Stacking aid/design element / -airY Can be used instead of standard feet  Carrying capacity: 25 kg per foot  Mounting holes in bottom of casing Delivery comprises ((kit)) Order Information Note  Tip-up feet are required to mount the stacking aid rppr6658 / -airY Retrofit mounting without reworking and tools  Filter replacement without opening the case, IP protection retained Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information  To optimise the air supply, tip-up feet must be fitted to the case, see page 5.23 Tip-up feet and stacking aid/design element Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Tip-up foot, silver, similar to RAL 9006 20603-001 Tip-up foot, anthracite, similar to RAL 7016 20603-002 Stacking aid/design element silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid/design element anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Air filters for ratiopacPRO air Item Qty Description 1 1 Filter holder, Al, 1 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Filter mat, synthetic fibre 3 1 Self-adhesive fixings For case width Air filter Replacement filter 1 piece HP Part no. Part no. 28 24571-325 64571-033 42 24571-326 64571-034 63 24571-327 64571-035 84 24571-328 64571-036 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.24 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air aza43284 / -airY Forms the GND/earthing connections between side panels, base plate, top cover and rear panel  Protective GND/earthing connections in accordance with: – DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 – DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 – DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 – DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A1  VDE tested Order Information Earthing kit Description Part no. GND/earthing kit, Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow 24571-380 5.25 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Y  For conversion of cases with cover strip, 19" mounting bracket or 19" mounting bracket with front handle Delivery comprises Order Information Y  For conversion of cases with cover strip, front handle or 19" mounting bracket with front handle Delivery comprises Order Information YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  For conversion of cases with cover strip, front handle or 19" mounting bracket Delivery comprises Order Information Front handles for retrofitting RPPR6651 Item Qty Description 1 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 Front handle for Part no. RatiopacPRO 3 U 24571-301 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24571-302 RatiopacPRO 5 U 24571-993 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24571-303 RatiopacPRO air 3/4 U 24571-304 RatiopacPRO air 4/5 U 24571-305 RatiopacPRO air 6/7 U 24571-306 19" mounting brackets for retrofitting RPPR6652 Qty Description 2 19" mounting bracket, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 19" mounting angle Part no. RatiopacPRO 2 U 24571-994 RatiopacPRO 3 U 24571-295 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24571-296 RatiopacPRO 5 U 24571-992 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24571-297 RatiopacPRO air 4 U 24571-298 RatiopacPRO air 5 U 24571-299 RatiopacPRO air 7 U 24571-300 19" mounting bracket with front handle for conversion 01813056 Qty Description 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powdercoated, RAL 7016 19" mounting angle Part no. RatiopacPRO 2 U 24572-700 RatiopacPRO 3 U 24572-701 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24572-702 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24572-704 RatiopacPRO air 4 U 24572-705 RatiopacPRO air 7 U 24572-707 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.26 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Delivery comprises Order Information / -airY The air baffle (item 1) closes the space (1/2 U) between the rear horizontal rail and base plate Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note  Fan rear panel available on request  Radial fan unit see page 5.17 06801515 / -airY Retrofittable without mechanical modifications to the case  Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg per pair Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Cable holder 02908053 02908052 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable bracket, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drilled holes each per bracket are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Air baffles for ratiopacPRO air 01805059 Item Qty Description 1 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, UL 94 HF 1 + HF 2, self-adhesive, temperature range: -40 °C ... +85 °C For case width Length Part no. HP mm 42 218.4 20833-351 63 325.1 20833-352 84 431.8 20833-353 Strap handles Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, steel spring, plastic-sheathed (flexible plastic), RAL 7016 2 1 Side plate, Al, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Adaptor, Al die-cast 4 1 Assembly kit For case depth For case height 3 U, 4 U air For case height4 HE, 5 Uair mm Part no. Part no. 315 24571-308 24571-314 375 24571-309 24571-315 435 24571-310 24571-316 5.27 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 03/2013 / -airY Retrofittable without mechanical modifications to the case  Adjustable in 30° increments  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Cannot be used in conjunction with front handles  Assembly kit is required for tip-up carrying handle, please order separately Tip-up carrying handles 06803006 RPA43897 For case height For case width A B C D U HP mm mm mm mm 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 42 283,4 279,4 247,4 115 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 63 390,1 386,1 354,1 195 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 84 496,8 492,8 460,8 195 rpa43898 Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, Al extrusion, powder coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Handle shell, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 3 2 Tip-up protection, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 4 2 Notch device, Al die-cast 5 2 Cover cap, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 For case height For case width For case depth Tip-up carrying handle Assembly kit U HP mm Part no. Part no. 3, 4-air 42 255 24571-320 24571-352 3, 4-air 42 315 24571-320 24571-353 3, 4-air 42 375 24571-320 24571-354 3, 4-air 42 435 24571-320 24571-355 3, 4-air 42 495 24571-320 24571-356 3, 4-air 63 255 24571-321 24571-352 3, 4-air 63 315 24571-321 24571-353 3, 4-air 63 375 24571-321 24571-354 3, 4-air 63 435 24571-321 24571-355 3, 4-air 63 495 24571-321 24571-356 3, 4-air 84 255 24571-322 24571-352 3, 4-air 84 315 24571-322 24571-353 3, 4-air 84 375 24571-322 24571-354 3, 4-air 84 435 24571-322 24571-355 3, 4-air 84 495 24571-322 24571-356 4, 5-air 42 255 24571-320 24571-359 4, 5-air 42 315 24571-320 24571-360 4, 5-air 42 375 24571-320 24571-361 4, 5-air 42 435 24571-320 24571-362 4, 5-air 42 495 24571-320 24571-363 4, 5-air 63 255 24571-321 24571-359 4, 5-air 63 315 24571-321 24571-360 4, 5-air 63 375 24571-321 24571-361 4, 5-air 63 435 24571-321 24571-362 4, 5-air 63 495 24571-321 24571-363 4, 5-air 84 255 24571-322 24571-359 4, 5-air 84 315 24571-322 24571-360 4, 5-air 84 375 24571-322 24571-361 4, 5-air 84 435 24571-322 24571-362 4, 5-air 84 495 24571-322 24571-363 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.28 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air / -airY Order Information Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Order Information Order Information Torx panhead screws Description Application Material Dimension Qty/PU Part no. Countersunk screw with Torx For horizontal rail to side panel, with GND/earthing function St, zinc-plated M4 х 14 100 24571-371 AZA45923 Countersunk screw with Torx For horizontal rail to side panel, if guide rail is bolted onto slot 1 St, zinc-plated M4 х 10 100 24571-372 Nut Description Application Material Dimension Qty/PU Part no. AZA45921 Square nut For fixing: parts to side panels, support profiles, mounting plates St, zinc-plated M4 100 24560-140 Assembly tools Description Application Dimension Qty/PU Part no. Torx screwdriver T8 1 64560-026 AZA45925 T20 1 64560-027 aza45938 Assembly tool for horizontal rails Exclusively to fix stainless steel EMC gaskets in horizontal rails – 1 24560-271 aza45937 Assembly tool for front panels For mounting stainless steel EMC contact strips on front panels with lateral slot – 1 24560-270 5.29 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Mounting position ratiopacPRO horizontal rails/central rails front rear front rear 2 U 3 U 01805060 01802057 4 U (3 U + 1 U) 01802058 5 U (1 U + 3 U + 1 U) 5 U (3 U + 2 U) 01805061 01805062 6 U 6 U (2 x 3 U) 01802059 01802060 Horizontal rails can be bolted on in 15 mm depth grid 01808050 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ 100 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 233,35 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ ST / VT / MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ 100 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST L-ST ST VT MZ H-KD H-VT L-VT L-KD H-MZ L-MZ Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.30 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Text Mounting position ratiopacPRO air horizontal rails/central rails front rear front rear 4-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 1/2 U) 01802061 5-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 1U +1/2 U) 01802062 7-air U (1/2 U + 6 U + 1/2 U) 7-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 3U 1/2 U) 01802063 01802064 Horizontal rails can be bolted on in 15 mm depth grid 01808050 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ 100 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ ST / VT / MZ 233,35 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST L-ST ST VT MZ H-KD H-VT L-VT L-KD H-MZ L-MZ 5.31 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Front horizontal rails With long lip for insertion/extraction of CompactPCI and VME64x boards "heavy" "heavy" Type H-KD Type H-LD short lip long lip bza44980 06197008 06197009 Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34560-228 34560-328 42 218.44 34560-242 34560-342 63 325.12 34560-263 34560-363 84 431.80 34560-284 34560-384 M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, necessary if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces 24571-372 24571-372 Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.32 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Rear horizontal rails For indirect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors to EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) 04400001 04400002 04400003 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ standard long lip with Z-rail 06105074 06197011 06197013 06197015 Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 Torx panhead screw, 4 x 10 24571-372 24571-372 24571-372 Perforated rail for connector mounting with insulation strip see page 5.35 – – Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.35 – – Insulation strips see page 5.35 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg 5.33 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Horizontal rails rear, centre For indirect mounting of backplanes via insulation strip For direct backplane mounting For direct fixing of connectors to EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) 04400001 04400002 04400003 Type ST Type VT Type MZ 06108090 06197016 06197017 06197018 Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34561-028 34561-128 34561-228 42 218.44 34561-042 34561-142 34561-242 63 325.12 34561-063 34561-163 34561-263 84 431.80 34561-084 34561-184 34561-284 Torx panhead screw, 4 x 10 24571-372 24571-372 24571-372 Insulation strips see page 5.35 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.34 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Note  All horizontal rails without print  1000 mm version without M4 thread in end Horizontal rails (type AB) for rear I/O guide rails For CompactPCI in rear I/O area 06108009 Type AB 06108069 06197009 Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 20 106.68 34561-520 28 147.32 34561-528 40 208.28 34561-540 42 218.44 34561-542 63 325.12 34561-563 84 431.80 34561-584 – 1000 34561-501 Screw, M4 x 14, PU 100 pieces, for fastening horizontal rail to side panel 24560-130 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg H - KD H - KD H - ST AB H - ST AB 12,75 15 12,75 9,75 3 5.35 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Perforated strip Insulation strip M2.5 M3 (item 1) 06103056 BZA45853 BZ6749 Required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 For centring shielded plug-in units, Al, 1 mm, please order fixing grub screw separately For insulated mounting of backplane; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces2) 28 146.82 34561-328 – 147.12 30845-197 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 218.24 30845-211 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 324.92 30845-232 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 431.60 30845-253 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – – Grub screw M2.5 x 9, PU 100 pieces – – 21101-359 – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 For connector mounting with ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately For connector mounting with ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately For connector mounting with VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Torx panhead screw, to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 piecesItem 3 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rail to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces Item 2 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.36 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Order Information Divider plates Divider plates Mounting position for stainless steel EMC gasket Mounting position for textile EMC gasket front rear front rear bpa45911 06105078 bpa45912 Stainless steel, 1 mm, is mounted by clipping onto horizontal rail, space requirement on component side 2 mm; mounting direction varies with shielding design (EMC stainless steel or textile gasket); retrofitting the divider plate in an already-assembled subrack/case will first require dismantling of the horizontal rails; where front panels are unshielded, both mounting directions are possible Height Depth A B H U mm mm mm mm 1 piece 3 160 158.3 135.0 113.5 34562-761 3 220 218.3 195.0 113.5 34562-762 6 160 158.3 135.0 246.9 34562-763 6 220 218.3 195.0 246.9 34562-764 5.37 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Note  Please order fixing material for assembly of mounting plate separately  A guide rail can be mounted on the first and last slot position  4.4" and "reinforced" guide rails cannot be used Mounting plates Mounting plate Assembly strip for partial widths bpa45875 bpa46557 06812002 Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order assembly strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates Width Board lengths HP mm mm 1 piece 1 piece 28 146.88 160 34562-745 30840-021 28 146.88 220 34562-749 30840-033 28 146.88 280 34562-753 30840-045 28 146.88 340 34562-757 30840-057 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 42 217.99 280 34562-754 30840-045 42 217.99 340 34562-758 30840-057 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 63 324.67 280 34562-755 30840-045 63 324.67 340 34562-759 30840-057 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 280 34562-756 30840-045 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zincplated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for assembly strips of mounting plate Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.38 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Order Information Note  Please order front frame separately Horizontal board installation Horizontal board installation Board cage Front frame for EMC shielding Front frame, unshielded 06102073 bpa45913 bza43061 bpa45914 Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 TE space required; please order front frame for EMC shielding separately 2 horizontal covers, AI, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the subassemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98 = 54TE h H 273,98=54TE w 5.39 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information  Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U  Designed to accept Euroboards (100 mm high) and double Euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note  Please order EMC gasketing kit for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.19  Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.35  Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.33 Combined mountings (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting Alternative front panels for combined mounting Splitting extrusion Horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) Unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 Front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 For combined mounting Item 2 bpa46549 bpa46549 bpa46549 bza45857 bza42182 Item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zincplated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 6: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket (84:0 without items 4, 6) Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, die-cast zinc; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Countersunk screw with Torx M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer, 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – – 21101-855 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 4 4 6 1,3 1,3 2 2 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.40 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and modules, one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units Standard With DIN connector fixing as standard 06101001 06101501 Up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; from 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces2) 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – 160 2.5 red – – 220 2.5 red – – Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.41 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails type "accessories", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plate Storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rail type "Accessories" "Accessories" strengthened For heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 bza46554 06102005 Up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; > 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94V-0, red; support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces2) 1 piece (SPQ 50)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 red/silver – – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 piecesdescription 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 – Coding see page 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.42 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Note  Reinforcement for plastic profiles (PVC) > 280 mm depth available on request Guide rails for CompactPCI, VME64x with coding, 4.4" PCBs, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For CompactPCI, VME64x with coding For 4.4" PCBs In accordance with IEEE 1101.10 and IEC 60297-3-103 Offset 0.1" for power supply units in accordance with IEEE 1101.10 and IEC 60297-3-103 06106001 06106002 06104009 One-piece for groove width 2 mm, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece at groove width 2,5 mm, end-piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, center piece Al profile PBT, UL 94 V-0, for installation of power supplies in CompactPCI systems or plug-in units with SMD placement One-piece, PBT, UL 94 V-0; for 4.4" PCBs or drive units Board lengths Groove width Colour PU 10 pieces2) PU 10 pieces2) PU 10 pieces mm mm mm 70 2 red 24560-355 – – 70 2 grey 24560-360 – – 160 2 red 24560-356 – 24560-361 160 2 grey 24560-358 – – 160 2 green – 24560-359 – 220 2 red – – 24560-362 220 2 grey – – – 220 2 green – – – 160 2.5 red – – – 220 2.5 red 24561-330 – – 220 2.5 grey 24561-340 – – 280 2.5 red 24561-331 – – 280 2.5 grey 24561-341 – – 340 2.5 red 24561-332 – – 340 2.5 grey 24561-342 – – Accessories ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 – – ESD clips, for alignment pin, PU 50 pieces 24560-256 24560-256 – Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-158 Coding peg, PU 100 pieces 20817-501 20817-501 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.43 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Note  Air baffle for 280 mm deep and for 80 mm rear I/O boards available on request Air baffle for slots Air baffle Air baffle with front panel without front panel front panel with lateral groove for stainless steel EMC gasket U front panel for textile EMC gasket 06108085 06108087 06108088 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air baffle, Al, 1 mm; front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC gasket (stainless steel); fixing material kit prevents an air short- circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air deflector, Al, 1 mm, front panel, Al extrusion, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC gasket (textile); fixing material kit prevents an air short-circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 20848-712 20848-728 160 4 6 34562-826 20848-720 20848-736 160 8 3 34562-833 20848-714 20848-730 160 8 6 34562-836 20848-722 20848-738 160 12 3 34562-843 20848-716 20848-732 160 12 6 34562-846 20848-724 20848-740 220 4 3 34562-824 20848-713 20848-729 220 4 6 34562-827 20848-721 20848-736 220 8 3 34562-834 20848-715 20848-731 220 8 6 34562-837 20848-723 20848-739 220 12 3 34562-844 20848-717 20848-733 220 12 6 34562-847 20848-725 20848-741 Assembly tool for EMC gasket (stainless steel), 1 piece – 24560-270 – Desk-top cases –i Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.44 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 iMain Catalogue 05809001 05806052 05806050 05806055 05806056 Easy access provided by removable cladding parts Extremely robust one-piece die-cast frame Non-sensitive, scratch-resistant finish through powder coating Low weight 05806054 05806053 05806051 noa44075 Wide accessory programme with acrylic glass front hoods, carrying handles, ... Assembly possibility for euroboards and backplanes EMC version VDE-compliant GND/earthing Standards  Internal dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101  Ingress protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529  EMC test in accordance with VG 95373 part 15  Protective GND/earth connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A1 Desk-top cases –i Main Catalogue 5.45 E 10/2012 iMain Catalogue Aluminium case for 19" components to IEC 60297-3-100 or individual electronics assemblies  Front frame and side panels in aluminium  Extensive accessories, matched to portable applications  Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable  Design alternative to compacPRO Desktop cases  Complete case (pre-assembled) – Prepared for 19" components to IEC 60297 for installation of euroboards – Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable – Height 3 U, 6 U  Cases – Pre-assembled cases as basis for individual components or 19" components (IEC 60297) – Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable – Height: 2 U, 3 U, 4 U, 6 U – 3 U and 4 U cases prepared for tip-up carrying handle 05809003 05806003 Accessories 05809002 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours, special depths, cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.44 propacPRO Complete cases 3, 6 U, unshielded/ shielded . . . . . . . 5.46 Cases 2, 3 U . . . . 5.50 Cases 4, 6 U . . . . 5.51 Cases for tip-up carrying handle 3, 4 U. . . . . . . . . . 5.52 Dimensions . . . . . 5.53 EMC shielding . . 5.55 Accessories Front panels . . . . 5.54 Rear panels . . . . . 5.55 Design elements 5.58 Lateral covers . . 5.59 Handles . . . . . . . . 5.60 Air filters . . . . . . . 5.61 Hoods . . . . . . . . . 5.62 Mounting plates . 5.64 GND/earthing kit 5.65 Cable holder . . . 5.65 Mounting position horizontal/ central rails . . . . 5.66 Horizontal rails . 5.67 Threaded inserts 5.68 Z-rails, perforated rails . 5.69 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.70 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.71 Tip-up feet . . . . . 5.72 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . 5.73 Divider plates . . . 5.75 Air flow barrier . . 5.75 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.46 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i ServicePLUS see page 5.4 iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slots in base plate  Rear panel with vent slots Delivery comprises (Items 1-7, 9 and 10 fitted) Complete case, EMC shielded 05809004 3 U 05806106 Maximale Einbautiefe = D - 45 (Distanz: Frontplatte - Rückwand) 8 7 5 6 12 11 13 14 10 b 3 4 10 a 15 9 1 9 2 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with EMC side panel gasketing 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot when case is used in vertical position 6 - 2 Adaptor bracket (only at 6 U) 7 - 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 (20603-002) 9 2 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted, RAL 7016 with EMC sealing (textile) 10a 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5; perforated strip, Al, 1 mm, EMC contact strip between front panel - horizontal rail - cover plate 10b 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5; EMC contact strip between rear panel - horizontal rail - cover plate 11 2 2 Centre horizontal rail top/bottom, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting); enclosed loose 12 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 13 1 1 Rear panel with perforation, Al, 2.5 mm, anodised, with EMC sealing (textile) affixed 14 2 2 EMC support profile rear, Al extrusion, EMC sealing (textile) affixed 15 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 16 1 1 GND/earthing kit 17 1 1 Assembly kit 5.47 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Main Catalogue Order Information Note  Dimension drawings of side panel see from page 5.53 Complete cases, EMC shielded 05809051 05806060 3 U 05806062 6 U 155,5 130,0 112,3 289,0 262,8 245,7 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 265,9 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 284,3 D 32,5 Usable width Width W1 Depth D Height Part no. W2 W2 W1 D HP mm mm mm U 28 147.3 185.9 266 3 24576-101 28 147.3 185.9 326 3 24576-102 42 218.4 257 266 3 24576-103 42 218.4 257 326 3 24576-104 42 218.4 257 386 3 24576-105 63 325.1 363.7 266 3 24576-106 63 325.1 363.7 326 3 24576-107 63 325.1 363.7 386 3 24576-108 84 431.8 470.3 266 3 24576-109 84 431.8 470.3 326 3 24576-110 84 431.8 470.3 386 3 24576-111 84 431.8 470.3 446 3 24576-112 84 431.8 470.3 506 3 24576-113 84 431.8 470.3 326 6 24576-121 84 431.8 470.3 446 6 24576-122 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.48 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Main Catalogue  Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slots in base plate  Rear panel perforated Delivery comprises (Items 1-7, 9 and 10 fitted) Complete cases, unshielded 05809004 3 U 05806105 Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) 7 5 6 13 12 14 1 9 2 11 3 4 10 15 9 8 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 - 2 Adaptor bracket (only at 6 U) 7 - 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 (20603-002) 9 2 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted, RAL 7016 with EMC sealing (textile) 10 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 11 2 2 Rear horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting) 12 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 13 1 1 Rear panel with perforation, Al, anodised, 2 mm at 28, 42 and 63 HP, 2.5 mm at 84 HP 14 4 4 Support member for rear panel, Zn die-cast 15 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 16 1 1 GND/earthing kit 17 1 1 Assembly kit 5.49 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Main Catalogue Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note  Dimension drawings of side panel see from page 5.53 Complete cases, unshielded 05809051 05806060 3 U 05806062 6 U 155,5 130,0 112,3 289,0 262,8 245,7 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 265,9 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 284,3 D 32,5 Usable width Width W1 Depth D Height Part no. W2 W2 HP mm mm mm U 28 147.3 185.9 266 3 24576-001 28 147.3 185.9 326 3 24576-002 42 218.4 257 266 3 24576-003 42 218.4 257 326 3 24576-004 42 218.4 257 386 3 24576-005 63 325.1 363.7 266 3 24576-006 63 325.1 363.7 326 3 24576-007 63 325.1 363.7 386 3 24576-008 84 431.8 470.3 266 3 24576-009 84 431.8 470.3 326 3 24576-010 84 431.8 470.3 386 3 24576-011 84 431.8 470.3 446 3 24576-012 84 431.8 470.3 506 3 24576-013 84 431.8 470.3 326 6 24576-021 84 431.8 470.3 446 6 24576-022 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.50 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue  Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slots in base plate  Prepared for GND/earthing Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 5 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note  Case, 3 U with side panel for tip-up carrying handle, see page 5.52  Dimensions see page 5.48  Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 Cases, 2 and 3 U, unshielded 05806001 05806057 05806077 Cross-section 2 U, 3 U 05806059 05806060 2 U 3 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Item Qty Description 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 7 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 2 U 3 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 28 147.3 185.9 266 – 14576-101 28 147.3 185.9 326 – 14576-103 42 218.4 257 266 14576-021 14576-121 42 218.4 257 326 14576-023 14576-123 42 218.4 257 386 – 14576-125 63 325.1 363.7 266 14576-041 14576-141 63 325.1 363.7 326 14576-043 14576-143 63 325.1 363.7 386 14576-045 14576-145 84 431.8 470.3 266 – 14576-161 84 431.8 470.3 326 – 14576-163 84 431.8 470.3 386 – 14576-165 84 431.8 470.3 446 – 14576-167 84 431.8 470.3 506 – 14576-169 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel, PU 1 piece 21102-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.51 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue  Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slots in base plate  Prepared for GND/earthing Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 6 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note  Case, 4 U with side panel for tip-up carrying handle, see page 5.52  Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 Cases, 4 and 6 U, unshielded 05806003 05806058 05806078 05806061 05806062 4 U 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Item Qty Description 4 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 – 2 Adaptor bracket, Al 7 2 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 9 1 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 4 U 6 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 42 218.4 257 266 14576-221 – 42 218.4 257 326 14576-223 – 63 325.1 363.7 266 14576-241 – 63 325.1 363.7 326 14576-243 – 63 325.1 363.7 386 14576-245 – 63 325.1 363.7 446 14576-247 – 84 431.8 470.3 326 – 14576-463 84 431.8 470.3 386 14576-265 14576-465 84 431.8 470.3 446 14576-267 14576-467 84 431.8 470.3 506 14576-269 14576-469 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel , PU 1 piece 21102-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.52 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  Ventilation slots in base plate  Prepared for GND/earthing  Prepared for fitting of tip-up carrying handle Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 6 fitted) Order Information Note  Dimensions see page 5.48  Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 3 U and 4 U cases, unshielded, with holes for tip-up carrying handle 05812006 05812050 05812051 05812052 05812053 3 U 4 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 5 2 1 7 3 4 155,5 130,0 112,3 200,0 174,0 156,8 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 17,0 17,0 Ø 4,6 Ø 10,4 69,0 11,4 121,95 33,05 195,3 D 32,5 17,0 17,0 69,0 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 Ø 4,6 Ø 10,4 Item Qty Description 3 U 4 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006; with drill holes for tip-up carrying handle 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 – 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 7 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 8 1 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 3 U 4 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 42 218.4 257.0 326 14577-123 14577-223 42 218.4 257.0 386 14577-125 – 63 325.1 363.7 326 14577-143 14577-243 63 325.1 363.7 386 14577-145 14577-245 84 431.8 470.3 326 14577-163 – 84 431.8 470.3 386 14577-165 14577-265 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel , PU 1 piece 21102-001 Tip-up carrying handle for 42 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-071 Tip-up carrying handle for 63 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-072 Tip-up carrying handle for 84 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-073 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.53 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Dimensions Extruded side panel 2 U Extruded side panel 3 U 05806079 05806080 Extruded side panel 4 U, right Extruded side panel 4 U, left 05806081 05806082 Extruded side panel 6 U Dimensions table For case depth D d n mm mm mm 266 221.6 210 14 326 281.6 270 18 386 341.6 330 22 446 401.6 390 26 506 461.6 450 30 Note A side panel for case 6 U consists of 2 pieces 3 U extruded side panels Side panel with horizontal rail 05806083 05806107 D 12,25 e = D - 62,1 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.54 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806063 PPA43756 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information  EMC front panel see chapter Front Panels, page 7.7 05806064 05806065 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information Note  Please order items 2, 3 and 4 separately Front panel, unshielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width front panel, Al, 2 mm (on 84 HP = 2.5 mm), anodised, cut edges plain 2 1 Assembly kit For case height For case width A B C D Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm 2 42 238.7 230.0 74.0 84.0 20850-128 2 63 345.4 336.7 74.0 84.0 20850-129 2 84 452.0 443.3 74.0 84.0 20850-130 3 28 167.6 158.9 118.5 128.5 20850-134 3 42 238.7 230.0 118.5 128.5 20850-135 3 63 345.4 336.7 118.5 128.5 20850-136 3 84 452.0 443.3 118.5 128.5 20850-137 4 42 238.7 230.0 162.9 172.9 20850-142 4 63 345.4 336.7 162.9 172.9 20850-143 4 84 452.0 443.3 162.9 172.9 20850-144 6 84 452.0 443.3 251.8 261.8 20850-158 Front panel, 1 U, unshielded, for 4 U case, for mounting on horizontal rails Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Width A B C Front panel HP mm mm mm Part no. 28 141.9 127.0 – 20850-423 42 213.0 198.1 101.6 20850-424 63 319.7 304.8 157.5 20850-425 84 426.4 411.5 203.2 20850-426 Width Item 2 EMC gasket, front panel/ horizontal rail PU 10 pieces Item 3 EMC gasketing kit horizontal rails, 1 piece Item 4 Horizontal rail type H-KD, 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP Part no. Part no. Part no. 28 24560-229 24562-528 34560-228 42 24560-231 24562-542 34560-242 63 24560-233 24562-563 34560-263 84 24560-235 24562-584 34560-284 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 5.55 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802055 01804050 Unshielded 01802055 Shieldable Main Catalogue  Two versions: unshielded, Al, 2.5 mm shieldable, Al extrusion (textile EMC gasketing retrofittable) Delivery comprises Order Information  Please order textile EMC gasket separately  EMC gasket rear panel - horizontal rail see page 5.65  Horizontal rails see page 5.67  Assembly parts see page 6.63 04602054 Main Catalogue  The textile EMC gasket is glue fixed laterally on the front panel, always in the groove on the right-hand side of the profile  Temperature range -40 °C ... +70 °C Delivery comprises () Order Information Rear panel, perforated, for mounting on horizontal rails 7,45 7,45 B ø 5,9 x 3,3 W Z 3,2 7,2 25 3 3 H 2,5 W - 2,58 2,5 3,7 3,7 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: iridescent green chromated; unshielded or shieldable with EMC sealing (textile) Height H Width W B h unshielded shieldable U mm HP mm mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 84 28 141.9 – 78 30849-007 20848-679 2 84 42 213 101.6 78 30849-014 20848-680 2 84 63 319.7 157.5 78 30849-015 20848-681 2 84 84 426.4 208.3 78 30849-016 20848-682 3 128.4 28 141.9 – 122.4 30849-008 20848-633 3 128.4 42 213 101.6 122.4 30849-021 20848-634 3 128.4 63 319.7 157.5 122.4 30849-022 20848-635 3 128.4 84 426.4 208.3 122.4 30849-023 20848-636 4 172.9 28 141.9 – 166.9 30849-009 20848-656 4 172.9 42 213 101.6 166.9 30849-028 20848-657 4 172.9 63 319.7 157.5 166.9 30849-029 20848-658 4 172.9 84 426.4 208.3 166.9 30849-030 20848-659 6 261.8 28 141.9 – 255.8 30849-010 20848-640 6 261.8 42 213 101.6 255.8 30849-035 20848-641 6 261.8 63 319.7 157.5 255.8 30849-036 20848-642 6 261.8 84 426.4 208.3 255.8 30849-037 20848-643 Textile EMC gasket Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Textile EMC gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating Height Height Qty/PU Part no. U mm pieces 2 52 10 21101-857 3 97 100 21101-854 3 97 10 21101-853 4 142 10 21101-858 6 232 100 21101-856 6 232 10 21101-855 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.56 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806066 ppa43882 Main Catalogue  Mounting with support brackets on case (right and left)  Versions with and without perforation Delivery comprises Order Information 05806067 Main Catalogue  Mounts on case (left, right)  Without perforation Delivery comprises Order Information Rear panel, unshielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width rear panel, Al, anodised, cut edges blank 28, 42, 63 HP = 2 mm thickness 84 HP = 2.5 mm thickness 2 4 Support member, Zn die-cast 3 1 Assembly kit Height H Width W w With perforation Without perforation U mm HP mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 84 42 213 190 24576-144 24576-044 2 84 63 320 298 24576-145 24576-045 2 84 84 426 406 24576-146 24576-046 3 128.5 28 142 118 24576-147 24576-047 3 128.5 42 213 190 24576-148 24576-048 3 128.5 63 320 298 24576-149 24576-049 3 128.5 84 426 406 24576-150 24576-050 4 172.9 42 213 190 24576-152 24576-052 4 172.9 63 320 298 24576-153 24576-053 4 172.9 84 426 406 24576-154 24576-054 6 261.8 84 426 406 24576-158 24576-058 Rear panel, shielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width EMC rear panel, Al 1.5 mm, passivated, with GND/earthing connection (Faston 6.3 mm) 2 2 Textile EMC gasketing, for mounting top and bottom, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 3 2 Textile EMC gasketing, for mounting left and right, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 4 1 Assembly kit Height H Height h Width W w Part no. U mm mm HP mm mm 2 101.5 84 42 217.9 213 24576-244 2 101.5 84 63 324.6 319.7 24576-245 3 146 128.4 28 146.8 141.9 24576-247 3 146 128.4 42 217.9 213 24576-248 3 146 128.4 63 324.6 319.7 24576-249 3 146 128.4 84 431.3 426.4 24576-250 4 190.4 172.9 42 217.9 213 24576-252 4 190.4 172.9 63 324.6 319.7 24576-253 4 190.4 172.9 84 431.3 426.4 24576-254 6 279.3 261.8 84 431.3 426.4 24576-258 5.57 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806102 05806097 04602081 Main Catalogue  Front panel with textile EMC gasketing  Hinges can be fitted left or right  Suitable for europacPRO subrack and ratiopacPRO, compacPRO and propacPRO cases Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Usable width reduced by 2 HP (hinged side)  Horizontal rail (item 5) for front panel mounting is required, please order separately  Lateral trim is necessary, please order separately, see page 5.59 05806068 Main Catalogue  For EMC shielding between side panel and top cover or base plate (sufficient for at least 1 case) Order Information Front panel, hinged, shielded, for mounting on horizontal rails 1 3 2 5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, hinged, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated 2 2 Hinge, Zn die-cast, chrome-plated 3 1 Textile EMC gasket core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 4 1 Assembly kit Height Width H h W w Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm 3 84 128.4 89.9 426.4 203.2 20848-611 6 84 261.8 223.2 426.4 203.2 20848-617 Item 5, Horizontal rail Type H-VT heavy duty, recessed mounting 84 HP, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 34560-784 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. EMC side panel gasket Item Description Qty/PU Part no. 1 Sealing cord, silicone, silver coated, Ø 2.4 mm, length 2.1 m 1 30850-354 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.58 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue  To individualise case design Delivery comprises Order Information Note  Size 28 HP and further colours available on request  Cannot be combined with front hood Design elements 05809002 Qty Description 1 Design element, Al extrusion, powder-coated 1 Assembly kit Description Width Light grey RAL 7035 Brilliant blue RAL 5007 HP Part no. Part no. Form 1 42 20850-184 20850-299 63 20850-185 20850-300 PPA43761 84 20850-186 20850-301 Form 2 42 20850-190 20850-315 63 20850-191 20850-316 PPA43762 84 20850-192 20850-317 Form 3 42 20850-196 20850-331 63 20850-197 20850-332 PPA43763 84 20850-198 20850-333 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.59 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806069 Main Catalogue  For lateral covering of frame and for producing a continuous front with front panels and plug-in units  Serves for lateral shielding of side panels simultaneously Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 05806103 Main Catalogue  For vertical EMC shielding between shielded front panels and side panel Delivery comprises Order Information Trim, front, for EMC shielding Item Qty Description 1 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted RAL 7016 2 1 Textile EMC gasket 3 1 Assembly kit For case height h Part no. U mm 2 84 24576-017 3 128.5 24576-117 4 172.9 24576-217 6 261.8 24576-417 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Trim, rear, for EMC shielding Item Qty Description 1 2 EMC contact strip, Al extrusion 2 1 Textile EMC gasket 3 1 Assembly kit Height Height Part no. U mm 2 65.55 24576-018 3 110 24576-118 4 154.45 24576-218 6 243.35 24576-418 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.60 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue  With powder-coated carrying bar  Can be locked in 30° increments  Load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note  To fit the tip-up carrying handle, holes must be drilled in the side panel  Readily prepared cases (3 U and 4 U), for mounting the tip-up carrying handle see page 5.52 05806098 Main Catalogue  Load-carrying capacity: 20 kg Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note  Holes must be drilled into the side panels to fix the strap handle  Side panels with holes already drilled available on request  Usable from case depth of D = 326 mm Tip-up carrying handle 05806101 Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Handle side part, Zn, die-cast, powder-coated, length 180 mm 3 2 Safety insert, St, 1.5 mm, black 4 1 Assembly kit for side panel mounting For case width Part no. HP 28 24576-070 42 24576-071 63 24576-072 84 24576-073 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Strap handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, handle, flexible plastic, grey, RAL 7016 2 2 Cover, grey, RAL 7016 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Strap handle with adaptor 20850-249 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.61 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806070 Main Catalogue  Subsequent mounting possible without modification or tools  Filter change without opening the case, IP protection code not affected Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note  For optimum ventilation feet must be fixed to the case, please order separately Air filter 2 3 1 Item Qty Description 1 1 Filter holder, Al, 1 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Filter mat, synthetic fibre 3 1 Velcro For case width Air filter Replacement filter 1 piece HP Part no. Part no. 28 24576-093 64571-033 42 24576-094 64571-034 63 24576-095 64571-035 84 24576-096 64571-036 Tip-up foot in plastic silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.62 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806071 05806072 1) Front panel 05806073 Lock for front hood Main Catalogue  From acrylic glass, hinged, removable  Mounting of hinges at top or bottom  Lock (max. 2) retrofittable  Lateral cover (item 5) also serves as vertical EMC shielding of side panels Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Cannot be combined with design elements  Other heights available on request  Before assembly of hood feet must be fixed to case; please order separately Front hood 3 U 16 1) 147,2 11 180° 3 Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, PMMA, tinted blue grey, acrylic glass, 3 mm 2 2 Hinge, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 3 2 Handle, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 4 2 Retainer, UL 94 V-0, PC, RAL 7016 5 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted RAL 7016 6 1 Assembly kit For case width Part no. HP 28 24576-080 42 24576-081 63 24576-082 84 24576-083 Lock for front hood Locking cylinder, key, assembly kit, PU 1 kit 60850-171 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.63 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Increases the distance between rear panel and parking surface (when used vertically)  Simplifies cable routing  Increased shock and vibration damping  Required for mounting rear hood Delivery comprises Order Information 05806075 05806076 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  To fit the rear hood, feet must be fitted to the rear panel; please order separately Foot for rear hood ppa45113 ppa45106 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot, PU foam 1 1 Assembly kit For cabinet height Height H Part no. U mm 3 147.9 24576-393 4 192.3 24576-394 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Rear hood Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, fixing with knurled screws 2 1 Assembly kit HeightWidth A B C D E Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm mm 3 42 246 230 213 145.9 64 24576-086 3 63 352.7 336.7 319.7 145.9 64 24576-087 3 84 459.4 443.4 426.4 145.9 64 24576-088 4 63 352.7 336.7 319.7 190.4 108.5 24576-091 4 84 459.4 443.4 426.4 190.4 108.5 24576-092 Foot for rear hood for case height 3 U, PU foam, black, PU 2 pieces 24576-393 Foot for rear hood for case height 4 U, PU foam, black, PU 2 pieces 24576-394 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.64 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information 06103057 propacPRO: D = board length - 47.5 mm; n = 1 for 160 mm board length; n = 2 for 220 mm board length; n=4 for 340 mm board length Note  Please order assembly kit for mounting plate separately  Fixing strips required for partial width, please order separately  Other versions on request  Dimensions side panel with horizontal rail see page 5.53 Mounting plates Mounting plate for fixing of heavy components Mounting plate over full width: mounting is onto the side panels Mounting plate over partial width: mounting is onto one side panel and a fixing strip or onto 2 fixing strips Fixing strip for partial widths 05812001 06102501 05806100 Board lengths Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order fixing strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates Width W W HP mm mm 1 piece 1 piece 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate, PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zinc-plated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for fixing strips for partial width mounting plates, Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 5.65 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806109 Main Catalogue  The EMC contact strip is clipped onto the horizontal rail and forms a conductive link to front or rear panel  Can be used for front/rear horizontal rails type VT (recessed) Delivery comprises Order Information aza43284 Main Catalogue  Protective GND/earthing connections in accordance with: – DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 – DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 – DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 – DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1A1  VDE tested Order Information 02908053 02908052 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information EMC gasket, stainless steel, between front/rear panel and horizontal rail Item Qty Description 1 10/100 EMC gasket, St, stainless Width Length Qty/PU Part no. HP mm pieces 28 131.78 10 24560-229 42 202.9 10 24560-231 63 304.5 10 24560-233 84 416.56 10 24560-235 84 416.56 100 24560-236 GND/earthing kit Description Part no. GND/earthing kit, Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base and rear panel, 1 piece 21102-001 Cable holder 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø 4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable holder, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drill holes each per holder are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.66 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Text Mounting position horizontal/central rails 2 U 05806084 3 U 05806085 05809050 4 U (3 + 1) "Z" (EMC shielding with 2 horizontal rails) 05806086 06106051 6 U 6 U (2 x 3) 05806087 05806088 H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H-VT H-ST H-KD H-MZ ST H - VT H - VT 2 x H - KD H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT ST H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - VT “Z” “Z” 2 x H - KD H - VT H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ 5.67 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Note  Further horizontal rails see from page 6.27  Fitting options see page 5.66 Horizontal rails to front/centre/rear For indiect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors in accordance with EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) Front horizontal rails Stainless steel EMC gasket between horizontal rail and horizontal rail Horizontal rail type H-VT robust, with EMC gasket 06197011 06197011 06197011 bza45877 06106052 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ Type H-KD standard long lip with Z-rail short lip 06197011 06197009 06197015 06197008 Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings item 1: metal strip, Al, 1 mm, item 2: EMC stainless steel gasket; for shielding of 2 horizontal rails positioned directly one above the other if assembly area is divided vertically horizontal rail: Al extrusion, anodised, conductive contact surface for cover plates on shielded cases Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) PU 1 kit 1 piece 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 34560-228 24562-528 24576-028 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 34560-242 24562-542 24576-042 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 34560-263 24562-563 24576-063 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 34560-284 24562-584 24576-084 Torx panhead screw , M4 × 14, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 – 24571-371 Torx panhead screw , M 4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, necessary if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces – – 24571-372 24571-372 – 24571-372 Perforated rail for connector mounting with insulation strip see page 5.69 – – – – – Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.69 – – – – – Insulation strips see page – 5.68 – – – – Threaded inserts see page 5.68 5.68 5.68 5.68 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.68 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806089 Main Catalogue  For indirect backplane mounting (with insulation strip)  For 6 U propacPRO case Delivery comprises (kit, item 1 to 4 are pre-mounted) Order Information Order Information Horizontal rails, centre, type ST-C Item Qty Description 1 1 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, contact surfaces conductive 2 2 Adaptor plate, Al 3 2 Threaded insert, M2.5, St, zinc-plated 4 2 Countersunk screw, M4 x 14 5 4 Pan head screw, M4 x 6 Usable width Length Part no. HP mm 84 431.8 24575-474 Insulation strip 84 HP, PBT UL 94 V-0, grey, PU 10 pieces 24560-884 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Perforated strip Insulation strip M2.5 M3 (item 1) 06103056 BZA45853 BZ6749 Threaded insert required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 Perforated strip for centring shielded plug-in units, Al, 1 mm, please order grub screw separately Insulation strip for insulated backplane mounting; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces 28 146.82 34561-328 – 147.12 30845-197 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 218.24 30845-211 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 324.92 30845-232 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 431.60 30845-253 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – – Grub screw M2.5 x 9, PU 100 pieces – – 21101-359 – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU 5.69 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Item 3, Torx panhead screw to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 pieces 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Item 2, Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rail to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.70 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information  Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U  Designed to accept euroboards (100 mm high) and double euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note  Please order EMC gasketing kit for horizontal rails separately, see page 6.54  Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.68  Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.68 Combined mounting (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting Splitting extrusion Horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) Unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 5 Front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 5 for combined mounting item 2 05806108 bza45819 06102501 06102501 06102501 item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 5: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket; 84:0 without items 4, 5 Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, Zn die-cast; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Torx countersunk screw M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces for fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces for fixing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – 21101-855 5.71 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Horizontal board mounting Horizontal board mounting Board cage Front frame for EMC gasketing Front frame, unshielded 05806092 05806091 bpa45913 bza43061 (1 TE = 1 HP, 1 HE = 1 U) Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 HP space required; please order front frame for EMC gasketing separately 2 horizontal trims, AI 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the sub-assemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height H Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98= 54TE h H 273,98 = 54 TE w Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.72 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806093 02906050 Main Catalogue  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot  Tip-up feet can be used instead of the pre-mounted case feet  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 02908051  Can be used instead of the round standard feet  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case  Secure case stance with slip-proof rubber inserts  Load carrying capacity: 50 kg per foot, max. case weight 40 kg Order Information 1) Part no. comprises 1 piece; delivery is in standard pack quantity (SPQ): please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple Note  Delivery is in standard pack multiples; pricing is per individual item Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Tip-up feet made of die-cast aluminium 41 20 Ø7,8 15,5 Ø3,1 Ø4,6 15 20 16,6 1 Description Qty Part no. Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 5.73 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and frame type plug-in units, one-piece, groove width 2 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units Standard With DIN connector fixing as standard 06102001 06101501 up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece from 280 mm length, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards, 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces description see page 6.41 24560-255 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.74 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information Guide rails type "accessories", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rails Guide rails Guide rails "Accessories" "Accessories" strengthened for heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 06102005 06102005 up to 280 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece from 280 mm length, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94 V-0, red support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 piece (SPQ 50) 1 piece (SPQ 50)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/ silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/ silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 silver – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces description see page 6.41 24560-255 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces, description see page 6.41 24560-377 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 pieces, description see page 6.41 24560-378 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces, description see page 6.41 60817-228 60817-228 – Coding see page 6.41 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 5.75 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Order Information Divider plate Divider plate Mounting position when stainless steel EMC gasket is used Mounting position when textile EMC gasket is used front rear front rear bpa45911 06105078 bpa45912 Stainless steel, 1 mm, is mounted by clipping onto horizontal rail, space requirement on component side 2 mm; mounting direction varies with shielding design (EMC stainless steel or textile gasket); retrofitting the divider plate in an already-assembled subrack/case will first require dismantling of the horizontal rails; where front panels are unshielded, both mounting directions are possible Height Depth A B H U mm mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 3 160 158.3 135.0 113.5 34562-761 3 220 218.3 195.0 113.5 34562-762 6 160 158.3 135.0 246.9 34562-763 6 220 218.3 195.0 246.9 34562-764 Air baffle for slots Air baffle Air baffle with front panel without front panel U front panel for textile EMC gasket 06108085 06108088 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air deflector, Al, 1 mm, front panel, Al extrusion, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC textile gasket, fixing materials kit prevents an air short-circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 20848-728 160 4 6 34562-826 20848-736 160 8 3 34562-833 20848-730 160 8 6 34562-836 20848-738 160 12 3 34562-843 20848-732 160 12 6 34562-846 20848-740 220 4 3 34562-824 20848-729 220 4 6 34562-827 20848-736 220 8 3 34562-834 20848-731 220 8 6 34562-837 20848-739 220 12 3 34562-844 20848-733 220 12 6 34562-847 20848-741 Desk-top cases –b Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.76 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 bMain Catalogue 02004009 02004079 Flexible expansion options, for 19" components e.g. plug-in unit units, or for individual expansion Standards  Interior dimensions in accordance with: IEC 60297-3-101  Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529  GND/earth connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A12 Desk-top cases –b Main Catalogue 5.77 E 10/2012 bMain Catalogue Robust desk-top case for 19" components in accordance with IEC 60297-3-10x or for individual electronics assemblies  Front and rear identical, depth-symmetrical construction  Highly robust thanks to die-cast frame (front/rear)  Side panel with integrated handle function Desk-top cases  Complete case – Pre-configured case, prepared for 19" components – Case height 3 U and 6 U  Case – Case height 2 U, 3 U, 4 U and 6 U 02009005 02004006 Extensive accessory range 02004002 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours, special depths, cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . 5.76 compacPRO Complete cases 3, 6 U . . . . . . . . . . 5.78 Cases 2, 3, 4 U . . 5.79 6 U cases . . . . . . . 5.80 Accessories Filler angle . . . . . 5.81 Cable holder . . . . 5.81 Front panel/rear panel . . . . . . . . . . 5.82 Rear feet . . . . . . . 5.83 Edge protection. 5.83 Hood . . . . . . . . . . 5.84 Front door . . . . . 5.85 Handle . . . . . . . . 5.86 GND/earthing . . . 5.86 Feet . . . . . . . . . . 5.87 Horizontal rail . 5.88 Threaded inserts 5.90 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . . 5.92 Mounting plates . 5.94 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.95 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.96 Air flow barrier . . 5.97 Dimensions . . . . . 5.98 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.78 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02009005 02004054 02008050 bMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Desk-top case with pre-configured components in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards  For backplane mounting with insulation strips  Ventilation slots in base plate  Ventilation slots in rear panel Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1, 2, 6, 8 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 21 (open space: front panel - rear panel) Note  Dimensions of case, side panel see from page 5.98 Complete cases 3 and 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 20 20 D w W 5 h H 1 9 2 4 8 12 7 5 11 10 6 3 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 5 - 2 Side plate powder-coated, RAL 9006, Al, 0.8 mm 6 4 4 Tip-up foot with anti-slip protection, PA, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0 7 2 2 Cover bracket, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain 8 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 9 2 2 Rear horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting) 10 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 11 1 1 Rear panel with 1 row of ventilation slots, Al, anodised, 2 mm for 28, 42 and 63 HP, 2.5 mm for 84 HP 12 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 13 1 1 GND/earthing kit 14 1 1 Assembly kit, also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel Height H Width W Depth D Usable width Part no. w w U mm mm HP mm 3 186 271 28 148 14575-114 3 186 331 28 148 14575-115 3 257 271 42 219 14575-134 3 257 331 42 219 14575-135 3 257 391 42 219 14575-136 3 364 271 63 326 14575-154 3 364 331 63 326 14575-155 3 364 391 63 326 14575-156 3 471 271 84 432 14575-174 3 471 331 84 432 14575-175 3 471 391 84 432 14575-176 3 471 511 84 432 14575-178 6 471 391 84 432 14575-476 6 471 451 84 432 14575-477 5.79 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 b  Desk-top case, pre-configures, for individual assembly  For backplane mounting with insulation strips  Ventilation slots in base plate Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1 and 2 fitted) Order Information Cases 2, 3 and 4 U 02004005 02004054 02004053 ServicePLUS see page 5.4 20 20 D w W 5 h H 3 2 4 5 1 6 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection 4 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated RAL 9006, with earthing connection 5 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black 6 8 Fixing adaptor for cover plate, prefitted 7 1 Assembly kit, also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel, two cover brackets or a rear panel Height Usable width Width W Width w Height H Height h Depth D Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm mm 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 271 14575-023 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 331 14575-025 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 391 14575-027 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 271 14575-063 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 331 14575-065 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 391 14575-067 3 28 186 148 147.1 129.3 271 14575-103 3 28 186 148 147.1 129.3 331 14575-105 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 271 14575-123 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 331 14575-125 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 391 14575-127 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 271 14575-143 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 331 14575-145 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 391 14575-147 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 271 14575-163 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 331 14575-165 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 391 14575-167 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 451 14575-169 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 511 14575-171 4 42 257 219 191.6 173.8 271 14575-223 4 42 257 219 191.6 173.8 331 14575-225 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 271 14575-243 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 331 14575-245 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 391 14575-247 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 331 14575-265 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 391 14575-267 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 451 14575-269 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 511 14575-271 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.80 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02004006 02004055 02004056 b  Desk-top case, pre-configured, for individual assembly  For backplane mounting with insulation strips  Ventilation slots in base plate Delivery comprises (Kit items 1, 2 and 5 fitted) Order Information 6 U cases ServicePLUS see page 5.4 4 7 6 5 3 2 1 20 20 D w W 5 h H Item Qty Description 1 4 Side panel parts, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016, 2 x 3 U 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 5 2 Side plate, Al, 0.8 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 6 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black 7 8 Fixing adaptor for cover plate, prefitted 8 1 Assembly kit also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel, two cover brackets or a rear panel Usable width Width W Width w Height H Height h Depth D Part no. HP mm mm mm mm mm 63 364 326 280.5 262.9 331 14575-445 63 364 326 280.5 262.9 391 14575-447 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 271 14575-463 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 331 14575-465 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 391 14575-467 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 451 14575-469 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 511 14575-471 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.81 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005002 02004062 b  To cover the sides of the frame and to create a continuous front plane with plug-in units and partial-width front panels  This filler angle is recommended when fitting horizontal rails Delivery comprises Order Information Note  Fixing material is supplied with case 02908053 02908052 AccessoriesI/B Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Filler angle Item Qty Description 1 2 Filler angle, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain Height Part no. U 2 24575-019 3 24575-119 4 24575-219 6 24575-419 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Cable holder 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø 4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable bracket, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drill holes each per bracket are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.82 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b b  Front panels and rear panels are screwed on front or rear frame of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Assembly kit to fix one rear and one front panel is included with the case  Cable holder and rear feet, see from page 5.81 02004061 bDelivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note  Cable holder and rear feet see from page 5.81 Front panel and rear panel 02005001 Rear panel/front panel CPA30656 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel with 4 rows of ventilation slots, AI, anodised, cut edges plain; 28, 42, 63 HP = 2 mm thick; 84 HP = 2.5 mm thick 2 1 Front panel, Al, anodised, cut edges plain, 3 mm thick Height Width Height H Height h Width Rear panel Front panel B b U HP mm mm mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 42 84 66 238.7 226.3 30823-015 30823-209 2 84 84 66 452.1 439.7 30823-512 30823-215 3 28 128.4 100 167.5 155.1 30823-021 30823-254 3 42 128.4 100 238.7 226.3 30823-024 30823-257 3 63 128.4 100 345.4 333.1 30823-027 30823-224 3 84 128.4 100 452.1 439.7 30823-515 30823-260 4 42 172.9 144.5 238.7 226.3 30823-033 30823-269 4 63 172.9 144.5 345.4 333.1 30823-036 30823-227 4 84 172.9 144.5 452.1 439.7 30823-518 30823-272 6 63 261.8 233.4 345.4 333.1 30823-045 30823-230 6 84 261.8 233.4 452.1 439.7 30823-521 30823-284 Front panel/rear panel with hidden fixing Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, anodised, cut edges plain, 2.5 mm 2 4 Fixing bracket Height Width Height H Height h Width Part no. B b U HP mm mm mm mm 2 42 84.0 66.0 238.7 226.3 24575-035 2 84 84.0 66.0 452.1 439.7 24575-075 3 28 128.4 100.0 167.5 155.1 24575-115 3 42 128.4 100.0 238.7 226.3 24575-135 3 63 128.4 100.0 345.4 333.1 24575-155 3 84 128.4 100.0 452.1 439.7 24575-175 4 42 172.9 144.5 238.7 226.3 24575-235 4 63 172.9 144.5 345.4 333.1 24575-255 4 84 172.9 144.5 452.1 439.7 24575-275 6 63 261.8 233.4 345.4 333.1 24575-455 6 84 261.8 233.4 452.1 439.7 24575-475 5.83 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005004 02004063 bDelivery comprises Order Information 02005005 02908054 bDelivery comprises Order Information Rear foot with rubber insert A 23 8.5 16.5 ø 4.2 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot with rubber insert, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 2 1 Fixing material For case height A Part no. U mm 3 139 24575-114 4 183.5 24575-214 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Edge protection/rear foot Item Qty Description 1 2 Edge protection, PU foam, black 2 1 Assembly kit For case height A B C Part no. U mm mm mm 3 159.1 114.0 100.0 20823-675 4 203.6 159.0 144.5 20823-676 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 20,2 C B A A A-A A 35 27 27,5 Ø 8 Ø 4,5 5 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.84 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02004065 Dimensions for modifying the rear panel 02004066 bDelivery comprises Order Information  Rear panel, see page 5.82 02005006 02004064 Cable support A4-512 bDelivery comprises Order Information Note  Cable support can only be fitted in conjunction with rear foot for hood  To fit the hood, the rear panel and the rear foot for hood must be mounted on the case  Rear panel, see page 5.82  Rear foot for hood see page 5.84 Rear foot for hood B A D M6 M6 45 30 B 27.55 8 x 6.1 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot, PU foam, black, 75° shore 2 1 Fixing material Height A B D Part no. U mm mm mm 3 133.5 95 65 20823-668 4 177.8 139.5 95 20823-669 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Hood 41.6 41.6 10 4 A 61.5 56 10° 156.5 ø 5.5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, ABS, RAL 7016, wall thickness < 4 mm, fixing with knurled screws 2 1 Assembly kit Height Width A Part no. U HP mm 3 42 267 24575-136 3 63 373.5 24575-156 3 84 480 24575-176 Cable support PC, black, UL 94 V-0, PU 2 pieces 20823-674 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.85 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005003 02004069 Front door, hinged a4-2265 a4-225 1) Front panel b  Assembly of the hinge to top or bottom  With snap-on latch  Lock retrofittable Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Dimensions table Front door, acrylic glass, hinged Item Qty Description 1 2 Side part, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 1 Front door, PMMA, tinted blue-grey, acrylic glass, 3 mm 3 1 Snap-on latch, PC, UL 94 V-0, black 4 2 Spacer plate, Al, 3 mm, passivated 5 1 Assembly kit Height Width Part no. U HP 3 42 24575-137 3 63 24575-157 3 84 24575-177 Lock for front door cylinder, 2 keys, assembly parts 21100-647 Height b H h B U TE mm mm mm 3 42 139,50 128,40 229,60 3 63 139,50 128,40 336,40 3 84 139,50 128,40 443,00 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.86 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b b  With powder-coated handle bar  Handle bar adjustable in 30 degree increments by pressing button  Load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Dimensions aza43284 Main Catalogue  Protective GND/earth connections in accordance with DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160, DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805, DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1, DIN EN 61010-1A2 /VDE 0411 part 1/A1 VDE inpection requested Order Information Tip-up carrying handle 02004002 02004080 68.5 180 c 4 x 30° 4 x 30° b a Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, AI profile, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Lateral section of handle, Zn die-cast, powder coated, length 180 mm 3 2 Safety insert, St, 1.5 mm, black 4 1 Fixing material incl. drilling template for side panel For case height Width Part no. U HP 2 42 24575-038 2 84 24575-078 3, 4 28 24575-118 3, 4 42 24575-138 3, 4 63 24575-158 3, 4 84 24575-178 Case width a b c HP mm mm mm 28 249.32 180.32 202.72 42 320.44 251.44 273.84 63 427.12 358.12 380.52 84 533.80 464.80 487,20 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. GND/earthing kit Description Qty/PU Part no. GND/earthing kit, CU wire 1.5 mm2, PVC covered, green/yellow, links side panel, base plate, cover and rear panel 1 24575-801 5.87 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 02006050  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot  Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 02908051  Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot  Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Al die-cast tip-up foot 41 20 Ø7,8 15,5 Ø3,1 Ø4,6 15 20 16,6 1 Description Qty Part no. Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Accessories Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.88 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Text Mounting position horizontal/central rail Case, 2 U Case, 3 U + 4 U 02004073 02004074 Case, 6 U Case 2 x 3 U (6 U) 02004076 02004077 Horizontal rails 02004078 H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-VT H-VT H-VT ST-C H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-ST H-VT H-MZ 5.89 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Note  Further horizontal rails, see from page 6.27  Fitting options, see page 5.88 Horizontal rails to front/centre/rear For indirect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors in accordance with EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) Front horizontal rails 04400001 04400002 04400003 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ Type H-KD standard long lip with Z-rail short lip 06197011 06197013 06197015 06197008 Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 34560-228 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 34560-242 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 34560-263 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 34560-284 Torx countersunk screw, , M4 × 14, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 Torx countersunk screw, , M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, required if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces – – 24571-372 24571-372 Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.91 – – – Insulation strips see page – 5.90 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.90 5.90 5.90 5.90 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.90 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02005050 b  For indirect backplane mounting (with insulation strip)  For 6 U compacPRO case Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1 to 4 are pre-mounted) Order Information Order Information Horizontal rail, centre, type ST-C 3 2 4 1 5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, contact surfaces conductive 2 2 Adaptor plate, Al 3 2 Threaded insert, M2.5, St, zinc-plated 4 2 Countersunk screw, M4 x 14 5 4 Panhead screw, M4 x 6 Usable width Length Part no. HP mm 63 325.1 24575-454 84 431.8 24575-474 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Insulation strip M2.5 M3 06103056 BZ6749 Threaded insert required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; Use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 Insulation strip for insulated mounting of backplane; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces 28 146.82 34561-328 – 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU 5.91 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Item 3, Torx panhead screw to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 pieces 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Item 2, Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rails to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.92 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and modules, one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units standard standard, with DIN connector fixing 06102001 06101501 up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; from 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards, 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board length Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – 160 2.5 red – – 220 2.5 red – – Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.93 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails type "accessory", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plate Storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rails type accessory accessory, strengthened for heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 06102005 06102005 up to 280 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; > 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94 V?0, red support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board length Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 piece (SPQ 50) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 red/silver – – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 piecesdescription 24560-378 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 60817-228 – Coding see page see page 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.94 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Main Catalogue Order Information Note  For installation and assembly of heavier components  The mounting plate is as wide as the case and is fixed to the side panels  A guide rail can be mounted on the first and last slot positions  4.4" and "strengthened" guide rails cannot be used Mounting plates Mounting plate for fixing of heavy components Mounting plate over full width: mounting is onto the side panels; mounting plate over partial width: mounting is onto one side panel and fixing strip or onto 2 fixing strips Assembly strip for partial widths 06102501 05806100 Width W Board length mm Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order assembly strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates HP W 28 146.88 160 34562-745 30840-021 28 146.88 220 34562-749 30840-033 28 146.88 280 34562-753 30840-045 28 146.88 340 34562-757 30840-057 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 42 217.99 280 34562-754 30840-045 42 217.99 340 34562-758 30840-057 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 63 324.67 280 34562-755 30840-045 63 324.67 340 34562-759 30840-057 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 280 34562-756 30840-045 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zinc-plated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for assembly strips of mounting plate, Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 5.95 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information  Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U  Designed to accept Euroboards (100 mm high) and double Euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note  Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.90  Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.89 Combined mountings (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting: Splitting extrusion horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 for combined mounting Item 2 05806108 bza45819 06102501 06102501 06102501 item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 6: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket (84:0 without items 4, 6) Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, die-cast zinc; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 piece (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Torx countersunk screw M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces finxing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – – 21101-855 – Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.96 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Order Information Horizontal board installation Horizontal board installation Board cage Front frame for EMC shielding Front frame, unshielded 05806092 05806091 bpa45913 bza43061 H = usable height (1 TE = 1 HP, 1 HE = 1 U) Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 HP space required; please order front frame for EMC shielding separately 2 horizontal covers, AI 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the subassemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98 =54 TE h H 273,98 = 54 TE w 5.97 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Air baffle for slots Air baffle without front panel 06108085 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 160 4 6 34562-826 160 8 3 34562-833 160 8 6 34562-836 160 12 3 34562-843 160 12 6 34562-846 220 4 3 34562-824 220 4 6 34562-827 220 8 3 34562-834 220 8 6 34562-837 220 12 3 34562-844 220 12 6 34562-847 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.98 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Text Dimensions Note Side panel for 6 U case consists of two 3 U extruded side panels Dimensions Extruded side panel 2 U Extruded side panel 3 U 02004057 02004058 Extruded side panel 4 U Extruded side panel 6 U 02004059 02004060 A N x 15 = B 19.5 ø 8.5 Y Y Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 Z 49 For case depth Max. mounting depth Dimensions mm mm A in mm B in mm 271 250 231 15 15 = 225 331 310 291 19 15 = 285 391 370 351 23 15 = 345 451 430 411 27 15 = 405 511 490 471 31 15 = 465 A N x 15 = B 55.5 24 19.5 77.5 88.1 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 A N x 15 = B 99.95 49 19.5 121.95 132.55 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 A N x 15 = B 144.4 19.5 166.4 177 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 93 A N x 15 = B 99.95 99.95 19.5 121.95 121.95 132.55 132.55 265.9 ø 8.5 Y Y Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 Z 49 5.99 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.100 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 JMain Catalogue 02202003 Standards  Internal dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297-3-100  Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529  Protective ground connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A1 Desk-top cases –J 5.101 E 10/2012 J Case to accept 19" subracks or 19" chassis  Internal assemblies of up to 40 kg  Up to six rows of ventilation slots in the base plate for optimal air inlet  High stability  Front and rear identical, depth-symmetrical construction  With handle strip or recessed grip Text Case  Al die-cast frame front and rear  Top cover and base plate can be subsequently removed  Top cover and base plate fitted with hidden GND/earth connections  Case height 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 U (cladding parts in steel)  Case height 9 U and 12 U (cladding parts in aluminium) 02202004 02202005 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (cut-outs, special colours) e.g. custom solutions (special sizes) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.100 comptec 3, 4 U, St . . . . . . 5.102 6, 7, 9 U, St . . . . 5.103 9, 12 U, Al . . . . . 5.104 Accessories Folding handle 5.105 Slide rails . . . . . . 5.105 Earthing kit . . . . 5.106 Assembly kit . . . . 5.106 Tip-up feet . . . . . 5.107 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.102 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J JMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Desk-top case (pre-fitted)  Top cover, base plate and rear panel in steel  Front and rear frames in die-cast Al  Ventilation slits in base plate  Ventilation gills in rear panel  Side panel with integral handle function Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 5 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note  Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106  The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page. 5.107  Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105 19" case, 3 U, 4 U 02202001 CTTP0001 Front view CTA30677 h = case foot height, HE = U, internal usable height Side view CTA42313 Usable width b = B - 69 mm, h = height of case foot ServicePLUS see page 5.4 7 1 8 9 2 5 10 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 5 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 7 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 3 153 13.0 300 276 520 10225-601 3 153 13.0 400 376 520 10225-612 3 153 13.0 500 476 520 10225-623 4 198 13.0 300 276 520 10225-602 4 198 13.0 400 376 520 10225-613 4 198 13.0 500 476 520 10225-624 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.103 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 J  Desk-top case (pre-fitted)  With handle shell  Top cover, base plate and rear panel in steel  Front and rear frames in die-cast Al  Ventilation slits in rear panel and base Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note  Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106  The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page 5.107  Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105  Handle shell, item 6, can be replaced by a folding handle, see page 5.105 19" case, 6 U, 7 U, 9U 02202002 CTTP0002 Front view CTA30676 h = case foot height, HE = U, internal usable height Side view CTA42312 Usable depth d = D - 24 mm ServicePLUS see page 5.4 7 1 4 10 9 3 6 5 2 8 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 3 2 Side profile at top, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 4 2 Side profile at bottom, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 5 2 Side panel, St, 1.5 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 6 2 Handle shell, PC, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0, load-carrying capacity: 60 kg/pair 7 1 Cover plate, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 6 286 13 300 276 520 10225-604 6 286 13 400 376 520 10225-615 6 286 13 500 476 520 10225-626 6 286 13 600 576 520 10225-637 7 331 13 400 376 520 10225-616 7 331 13 500 476 520 10225-627 7 331 13 600 576 520 10225-638 9 420 13 400 376 520 10225-618 9 420 13 500 476 520 10225-629 9 420 13 600 576 520 10225-640 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.104 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J 02202006 CTTP0003 Front view CTA30679 Usable width b = B - 69 mm, h = height of case foot Side view CTA42314 Usable depth d = D - 24 mm ServicePLUS see page 5.4 J  Desk-top case (pre-fitted)  With handle shell  Top cover, base plate and rear panel in Al  Front and rear frames in die-cast Al  Ventilation slots in base plate  Air vents in rear panel Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note  Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106  The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page 5.107  Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105  Handle shell, item 6, can be replaced by a folding handle, see page 5.105 19" cases 9 and 12 U, aluminium 9 3 6 5 2 4 10 7 1 8 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 3 2 Side profile at top, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 4 2 Side profile at bottom, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 5 2 Side panel, Al, 1.5 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 6 2 Handle shell, PC, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0, load-carrying capacity: 60 kg/pair 7 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 9 420 13 400 376 520 10225-667 9 420 13 500 476 520 10225-682 9 420 13 600 576 520 10225-693 12 553 13 400 376 520 10225-670 12 553 13 500 476 520 10225-685 12 553 13 600 576 520 10225-696 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.105 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2013 CTTP0006 J  Folding handles can be used instead of the pre-fitted handle shells  Load-carrying capacity: 50 kg/pair Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information J  Slide rails are suitable as support for 19" subracks and 19" chassis Delivery comprises Order Information Note  2 slide rails are required per subrack or 19" chassis  Slide rail cannot be used for shielded 19" subracks; special slide rails available on request Folding handle Item Qty Description 1 2 Folding handle, AI die-cast, RAL 7016 2 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Folding handle 20225-439 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Slide rails CTTP0005 Item Qty Description 1 1 Slide rail, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain, static load-carrying capacity 10 kg For case depth Part no. mm 300 30225-089 400 30225-090 500 30225-091 600 30225-092 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.106 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J aza43284 J  The GND/earthing kit allows VDE compliant earthing of cases in accordance with: EN 50178/VDE 0160 EN 60950/VDE 0805 EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A  VDE tested Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information SC128XXX 06108055 J  For fitting subracks or 19" chassis in a comptec case  For fixing 19" front panels Delivery comprises Order Information GND/earthing kit Item Qty Description 1 1 GND/earthing kit, Cu wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sheathing, green/yellow, connects side panels, cover, base plate and rear panel Description Up to 4 U bigger than 4 U Part no. Part no. GND/earthing kit for cases with steel covers 21100-490 21100-448 GND/earthing kit for cases with aluminium covers – 21100-347 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 19" fixing Item Description 1 Screw M6 × 16, zinc-plated with Pozidrive 2 Cage nut M6, zinc-plated 3 Plastic washer, ABS, black Description Part no. PU = 8 × screw, washer, nut 21100-435 PU = 50 each of M6 screw, washer and cage nut 21101-809 PU = 100 each of M6 screw, washer and cage nut 21101-810 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.107 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 J  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot  Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 J  Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot  Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Part no. comprises 1 piece; delivery is in standard pack quantity (SPQ): please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Tip-up foot in die-cast Al Description Qty Part no. Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.108 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Front handles see page 5.108  Strap handles see page 5.111  Tip-up carrying handles, see page 5.112  Folding handles see page 5.113  Tray handle see page 5.114  Feet, see page 5.115  Screwdriver (Torx) 5.117  Measuring tape, see page 5.117 BZA42318 AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Static load-carrying capacity 10 kg/pair  Bolted from rear Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. BZA42330 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair  Bolted from rear Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Contents 06002052 05895003 02992004 aza43835 02992003 32506001 Front handle, one-piece, width 7 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised A E Part no. mm mm 48 40 10501-001 98 90 10501-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, one-piece, width 9 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised Description Part no. Front handle 10501-003 Pozidrive countersunk screw 14 × 10, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-381 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.109 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair  Bolted from front Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 1 U BZA42316 2 U ... 6 U BZA42327 Main Catalogue  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair  Bolted from rear Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note  Please order panhead screws separately Front handle, one-piece, width 10 mm 02905050 H = 1 U 02905051 H ≥ 2 U 40 h H 10 10 Ø 4,4 8,4 Ø 4 8 Item Qty Description 1 2 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised 2 1 Assembly kit Height H Height H Height h Part no. U mm mm 1 40 28 20860-256 2 69 53 20860-257 3 113 97.5 20860-258 4 157.45 141.9 20860-259 5 201.9 186.4 20860-260 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, one-piece, width 12.2 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, AI extrusion, anodised A E clear anodised black anodised mm mm Part no. Part no. 41 25 10501-116 – 57.5 44.5 10501-016 – 69 55 10501-004 10501-025 102 88 10501-005 10501-026 132 120 10501-006 10501-027 146.4 133.4 10501-018 – 194 180 10501-007 10501-028 249 235 10501-008 10501-029 Panhead pozidrive screw self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 Torx countersunk screw M5 × 12, zinc-plated, 100 pieces 24560-183 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.110 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories A3-227  Static load-carrying capacity 10 kg/pair  In three parts, middle section in Al extrusion, end pieces in glass fibre reinforced plastic  Bolts on from front Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note  Please order panhead screws separately 02908050 Item 1: front handle; item 2: end piece Accessories Order Information Front handle, multi-piece, width 12 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised 2 2 End piece, PA, black A E Part no. mm mm 87.5 73.5 10502-050 102.0 88 10502-057 134.0 120 10502-059 194.0 180 10502-063 249 235 10502-065 Panhead screw pozidrive self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, multi-piece, width 12 mm 1000 40 12 1 2 Description Qty/PU Part no. Item 1, front handle, Al extrusion, anodised,1 m long 1 30502-051 Item 2, end piece, PA, black, 2 pieces each required 1 60502-003 Panhead pozidrive screw self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 5.111 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05895003 02902050 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 02992006 Length 240 mm/170 mm BZA42368 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Strap handle, width 25 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, handle, flexible plastic, grey, RAL 7016 2 2 Cover, grey, RAL 7016 3 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 230 20850-249 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Strap handle, width 22 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, plastic-coated, black 2 2 Cover cap, St, chrome-plated 3 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 170 10504-002 240 10504-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.112 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg (with handle bars of 450 mm length) 02992002 A4-2361 Accessories  Handle can be adjusted in 30° grid by pressing button Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 02992001 A4-2367 Accessories Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Tip-up carrying handle in separate parts 02992002 02992001 Lateral handle parts Item Qty Description 1 2 Lateral parts, die-cast zinc, painted (chrome decor) 2 2 Safety inserts, St, 1.5 mm, black 3 2 Adaptor/locking brackets 4 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 180 10502-297 250 10502-296 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Handle bar Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle bar, AI, black anodised Length Part no. mm 1000 30502-191 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.113 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair  For case ingress protection to IP 40  Locks in folded and opened positions  Equal cut-out for fitting in front of or behind case wall Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. 02992005 Folding plastic handle A2-123 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg/pair  For case ingress protection to IP 40  Locks in folded and opened positions  External mounting only Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Folding metal handle 02992004 A4-2369 A4-2370 Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, Al die-cast, RAL 9005, black 2 1 Handle shell, Al die-cast, RAL 9006, silver Description Part no. Folding metal handle 20505-032 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Folding plastic handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, PA, light grey 2 1 Handle shell, PA, dark grey 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Folding plastic handle 10505-014 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.114 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories 02992003 A3-0670a Size 1, case cut-out 49 × 104 mm A3-0670b Size 2, case cut-out 73 × 171 mm Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order a minimum of 10 tray handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note  Please order spring clips for fixing to the case separately Required: – for handle size 1: 2 spring clips – for handle size 2: 3 spring clips Tray handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle shell, PC, UL 94 V-0 Colour Size 1 for material thickness 1.5 mm Size 1 for material thickness 2.5 mm Size 2 for material thickness 1.5 mm Part no. Part no. Part no. greybrown 60229-002 60229-001 60225-015 black 60229-004 60229-003 60225-012 RAL 7016 – – 20225-167 Spring clip PU 20 pieces 21100-089 Spring clip PU 100 pieces 21100-093 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.115 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 A4-330 Accessories Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 50 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note  Foot is inserted into mounting hole and then fixed by pressing in the expanding pin A4-2315 Accessories Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 50 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Plastic foot Pos. Menge Beschreibung 1 1 Plastic foot, PC, UL 94 V-0, black Description Dimensions Hole diameter Part no. A B C mm mm mm mm For material thickness 1 ... 3 16 7.2 4 7 60224-009 For material thickness 1.5 ... 3 21 15 7 7.7 60224-011 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Rubber foot Dimensions Material Colour Qty Part no. Height Hole diameter mm mm 10 25 Rubber grey 1 60200-001 15 26 Rubber grey 1 60200-027 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.116 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot  Can be used instead of standard feet  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note  Please order assembly kit separately. 0180207502906050 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot  Can be used instead of standard feet  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Plastic tip-up foot AZA43835 02912050 78,4 47 20 38,4 13,9 Ø3,1 Ø4,8 13,3 15,8 14 1 5 Description Qty/PU grey black Part no. Part no. Foot with tip-up, PA, UL 94 HB 1 10603-023 10603-025 Foot without tip-up, PA, UL 94 HB 1 10603-024 10603-026 Pozidrive flathead screw M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-513 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.117 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 AZA43836 Accessories  Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot  Can be used instead of standard feet  Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Retention partsMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days  T8: For mounting guide rails to horizontal rails  T20: For mounting horizontal rails and rear hoods to side panels, cover plates, support brackets and front handles Order Information 32506001 Main Catalogue  Measuring tape with cm, U-, HP-division (lenght 2 m)  Plastic cases, metal measuring tape with automatic collection Order Information Al die-cast tip-up foot Description Qty Part no. Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Accessories Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 Screwdriver AZA45925 Torx screwdriver Qty/PU Part no. pieces M2.5 T 8 Torx 1 64560-026 M4 T 20 Torx 1 64560-027 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Measuring tape Description Qty/PU Part no. Measuring tape 1 89009-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Schroff gmbh, Langenalber Strass e 96–100, D-75334 Straubenhardt WWW.PENTA IREQUIPMENTPROTECT ION.COM 39601-641 © 2012 Pentair Equipment Protection Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 9.3 Power supplies– 19" compatible – AC/DC switched-mode power supply 11396002 DIJM0084 Connector pin-out 19" compatible – AC/DC switched-mode power supply  Wide range mains/line input voltage (from 90 – 264 VAC and 130 – 340 VDC)  Single output voltage  Redundancy operation with integrated decoupling diode  Active Current Share Bus (CSB)  Signalling: Output voltage OK  Efficiency up to 80% Delivery comprises Order Information Note  Please order front panel separately  Output data at Ta= 0 ... 50 °C  Further accessories, see page 9.21 Single, 50 W ecopower Pin Connection 4 Output + V1 6 Output + V1 8 Sense line + V1 10 Sense line 0 V1 12 Output 0 V1 14 Output 0 V1 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 CSB 24 Output OK 26 - 28 L 30 N 32 PE  Qty Description 1 19" compatible power supply height 3 U width A: 6 HP depth 171.93 mm (160 mm deep boards) connector H15M (assembled) keying/coding peg (assembled) Voltage Current Power Description Order no. V A W 5 9 45 SEK 105 13100-043 12 4.2 51 SEK 112 13100-044 15 3.4 51 SEK 115 13100-041 24 2.1 51 SEK 124 13100-045 48 1.1 53 SEK 148 13100-046 Front panel 6 HP, Al, front anodised, rear colourless chromated, with vertical slots for EMC contact strips, incl. assembly kit, 1 piece 21006-943 EMC contact strips Stainless steel, 2 pieces per front panel necessary, PU 10 pieces 21101-705 Connector H 15 F FASTON connection, 1 piece 69001-733 Coding PU (keying/coding peg, 1 piece, keying/coding pin 2 pieces) 60800-123 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 TE = HP = F Aufbau / Exploded diagram / Montage ELA44928 Maßbilder / Dimensions / Dimensions DIJM0001 Fühlerleitungbetrieb (Last) Die Fühlerleitungen werden polrichtig direkt an der Last angeschlossen. Die Leitungen müssen verdrillt oder abgeschirmt sein (Schirm mit PE verbinden). Für optimale Störspannungsunterdrückung sollte negative Ausgangsleitung mit Schutzleiter (PE, Pin 32) verbunden werden. Fühlerleitungbetrieb (lokal) Die Senseanschlüsse werden polrichtig direkt am Power Supply gebrückt. Betrieb ohne Fühlerleitung Fühlerleitungsanschlüsse sind intern mit einem Widerstand verbunden; ohne Fühlerleitungsanschluß wird die Ausgangsspannung ca. auf Nennspannung geregelt. Operation with sense lines (load) The sense lines are connected directly to the load with the correct polarity. The lines must be twisted or screened (connect screen with PE). For optimum interference suppression, the negative output should be connected to the protective GND/earth (PE, pin 32). Operation with sense lines (local) The sense connections are bridged directly to the power supply with the correct polarity. Operation without sense lines Sense connections are connected internally with a resistor; without sense connection the output voltage is approx. the same as the nominal voltage. Utilisation avec lignes de compensation (charge) Les lignes de compensation doivent être raccordées directement à la charge en respectant la correspondance des polarités. Elles doivent être torsadées ou blindées (raccorder le blindage au conducteur de protection PE). Pour obtenir une neutralisation optimale des tensions parasites , la ligne négative devrait être reliée au conducteur de protection (PE, broche 32). Utilisation avec lignes de compensation (local) Les lignes de compensation doivent être pontées directement en sortie d´alimentation en respectant la correspondance des polarités. Utilisation sans lignes de compensation Les raccordements des lignes de compensation sont pontées dans l´alimentation à l´aide d´une résistance. Lorsque les lignes de compensation ne sont pas raccordées en externe, la tension de sortie est régulée approximativement à la valeur nominale. Pos. Item Repère Benennung Description Désignation Bestell-Nr. Order No. Référence 1 Netzgerät, Teileinsatz 3 HE nach DIN 41494, Teil 5 Power Supply, Plug-in unit 3 U to DIN 41494, part 5 Alimentation, Module enfichable 3 U, selon DIN 41494 partie 5 2 Steckverbinder Messerleiste Male connector Connecteur mâle H 15 M, DIN 41612 3 Codierleiste, Kammleiste Coding strip, Female strip Détrompeur, Peigne 4 Steckverbinder-Gegenstück Female connector Connecteur femelle 69001-733 5 Codierleisten-Gegenstück Coding strip Réceptacle détrompeur 60800-123 6 HF Frontplatte (seitlich geschlitzt) mit Befestigungsmaterial Front panel with slots incl. assembly parts Face avant HF (avec fentes latérales) et pièces de fixation 21006-943 7 Sicherung Fuse Fusible secteur Power LED grün, versorgt durch die Ausgangsspannung LED green, supplied by the ouput voltage LED verte, alimentée par tension de sortie D V Einstellung der Ausgangsspannung V Adjustment of the output voltages V Réglage tensions de sortie V Prinzipschaltbild, Steckerbelegung / Circuit diagram, Connector pin-out / Schéma de principe, Brochage DIJM0002 PSU + Sense - Sense - V + V 12,14 4,6 8 10 R C + PSU + Sense - Sense - V + V 12,14 4,6 8 10 R DIJM0057 Uup Udown Hyst. typ. SEK 105 4,6 ±0,2 V 4,5 ±0,2 V 60 mV SEK 112 11,0 ±0,2 V 10,9 ±0,2 V 200 mV SEK 115 13,9 ±0,2 V 13,7 ±0,2 V 200 mV SEK 124 23 ±0,3 V 22,8 ±0,3 V 300 mV SEK 148 46,9 ±0,4 V 45,5 ±0,4 V 600 mV Rpullup SEK 105 470 h SEK 112 1k6 h SEK 115 1k6 h SEK 124 4k7 h SEK 148 20k h + - + - PSU 2 PSU 1 + - RL V1 V1 Leistungsbegrenzung Zum Schutz des Gerätes müssen die maximalen Ausgangsströme mit steigender Temperatur reduziert werden. Das Derating setzt bei 50 °C ein. Strombegrenzung Die Geräte sind für Dauerkurzschluß ausgelegt. Der Ausgangsstrom wird gemäß einer I/U-Kennlinie begrenzt. Wird die Ausgangsspannung vom Anwender erhöht, muß er sicherstellen, daß der maximale Ausgangstrom um den gleichen Faktor verringert wird. Das Netzgerät kann sonst zerstört werden. Beispiel: UDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Überspannungsschutz Der OVP ist werkseitig eingestellt (siehe technische Daten). Beim Ansprechen des Überspannungschutzes wird der Regler abgeschaltet. Wenn die Überspannung nicht mehr ansteht schaltet sich das Netzgerät wieder ein. Serienschaltung Sehen Sie am Ausgang externe Inversdioden vor. Summenspannung von 200 V nicht überschreiten. Spricht bei einem Gerät die Strombegrenzung an, muß die Last kurz abgetrennt werden. Bei Serienschaltung können am Ausgang berührungsgefährliche Spannungen auftreten: SELV-Spannung nur bis 60 VDC. Parallelschaltung Zur Leistungserhöhung oder Redundanzbetrieb werden die Ausgänge der Netzgeräte parallel verbunden. Es erfolgt eine geregelte Lastaufteilung wenn der Current Share Bus der Netzgeräte miteinander verbunden ist (Pin 22, max. 12 Geräte parallelschaltbar, max. Ausgangsleistung ca. 0.9*Pmax.). Damit im Redundanzbetrieb alle Netzgeräte arbeiten ist eine Grundlast von 0,1*Pmax erforderlich. Die Entkoppeldiode ist eingebaut. Netzspannung Die Power Supplies haben einen Weitbereichseingang (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Output OK Signal Das Output OK Signal zeigt an, ob die Ausgangsspannung vorhanden ist (siehe Diagramm Output OK Signal). Der Pullup Widerstand ist eingebaut. Output power Limiting In order to protect the unit the maximum output currents reduced as the temperature increases. Derating is activated at 50 °C. Current limiting The power supply features short-circuit protection. The output current is limited according to an I/V curve. If the output voltage is increased by the user, the maximum output current must be reduced by the same factor. The power supply may otherwise be destroyed. Example: VDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Over-voltage protection The OVP is pre-set (see technical data). When the over-voltage protection is triggered the regulator is switched off. The unit is automatically reset when there is no longer any over-voltage. Series operation External inverse diodes should be used at the output. Do not exceed a total voltage of 200 V. If the current limiting is triggered in a unit the load should be removed briefly. Dangerous voltages may occur at the output with series operation: SELV voltage only up to 60 VDC. Parallel operation The unit outputs are set up for parallel operation to increase the output power or for redundancy. The load share control operates if the Current Share Buses of the unit are linked together(Pin 22 max 12 units). max. output performance approx. 0.9*Pmax. So that all power supplies work in redundancy mode, a basic load of 0.1*Pmax is required. The decoupling diode is built in. Mains/line voltage The power supplies have a broad range input (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Output OK Signal The Output OK Signal is on if there is an existing output voltage(see diagram Output OK Signal). The pullup resistor is build in. Limitation de puissance Afin de protéger l’alimentation, les courants de sortie max. diminuent á mesure que la température augmente. Le derating démarre à 50 °C. Limitation de courant Les alimentations sont conçues pour pouvoir supporter un court-circuit permanent. Le courant des sortie est régulé selon une courbe caractéristique I/V. Si l’utilisateur accroît la tension de sortie, il doit veiller à réduire le courant maximal de sortie dans la même proportion, sinon l’alimentation risque d’être détériorée. Exemple: UDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Protection aux surtensions L’OVP est prérèglé en usine (voir Caractéristiques Techniques). Dans le cas du déclenchement de la protection aux surtensions, l’alimentation est arrêtée. Lorsque la surtension disparait, l’alimentation se remet en marche. Branchement en série Il faut prévoir des diodes de protection contre les inversions de polarité. Ne pas dépasser la tension totale de 200 V. Lorsque l’un des appareils déclenche en limitation de courant, il faut déconnecter la charge pendant un court moment. Lors d’une mise en série, des tensions dangereuse peuvent apparaître à la sortie: tension SELV uniquement jusqu’à 60 VDC. Branchement en parallèle Pour accroitre la puissance ou pour une utilisation en redondance des alimentations les sorties seront reliées en parallèle. Une répartition autonome de la charge est assurée lorsque les sorties Current Share Bus des alimentations sont reliées entre elles (broche 22, max. 12 alimentations en parallèle, tension max. de sortie env. 0.9*Pmax). Pour qu’en mode de redondance toutes les alimentations soient en service il faut une charge minimale de 0,1*Pmax. La diode de découplage est intégrée. Adaptation de la tension secteur L´alimentation dispose d´une plage d´entrée secteur étendue. Elle s´adapte automatiquement à la tension secteur (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Signal Output OK Le signal Output OK indique la présence ou non de la tension de sortie (voir schéma Signal Output OK). La résistante Pullup est intégrée. Strombegrenzung Current limiting Limitation de courant Parallelschaltung (CSB) Parallel operation Branchement en parallèle Serienschaltung Series operation Branchement en série V [ % ] 110 I [ % ] 100 + + + I - - PSU 2 PSU 1 + - - PSU 3 RL CSB 1 I 2 I n Output OK Signal Garantiebedingungen Leistungsdauer Für dieses Produkt leisten wir 2 Jahre Garantie. Der Anspruch beginnt mit dem Tage der Auslieferung. Umfang der Mängelbeseitigung Innerhalb der Garantiezeit beseitigen wir kostenlos alle Funktionsfehler am Produkt, die auf mangelhafte Ausführung bzw. Materialfehler zurückzuführen sind. Weitergehende Ansprüche – insbesondere für Folgeschäden – sind ausgeschlossen. Garantieausschluß Schäden und Funktionsstörungen verursacht durch Nichtbeachten unserer Bedienungsanleitung sowie Fall, Stoß, Verschmutzung oder sonstige unsachgemäße Behandlung fallen nicht unter die Garantieleistung. Die Garantie erlischt, wenn das Produkt von unbefugter Seite geöffnet wurde. Eingriffe erfolgt sind oder die Seriennummer am Produkt verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurde. Abwicklung des Garantieanspruches Das vorliegende Produkt wurde sorgfältig geprüft und eingestellt. Bei berechtigten Beanstandungen schicken Sie uns das Produkt bitte zurück. Zur Erhaltung Ihres Garantieanspruches beachten Sie bitte folgendes:  Legen Sie eine möglichst genaue Beschreibung des Defektes bei.  Das Produkt ist im Original-Karton oder gleichwertiger Verpackung einzusenden und zwar versichert und portofrei. Warranty conditions Duration This product has a warranty of 2 years. The warranty begins on the day of delivery Cover of defects Within the warranty period Schroff will repair free of charge any faulty functioning of the product resulting from faulty design or defective material. All other claims under the warranty are excluded, in particular consequential damage. Warranty exclusion The warranty does not cover damage or functional defects caused by non-adherence to the Company´s operating instructions or such caused by dropping, knocking, contamination or other untoward handling. The warranty is invalidated if the product is opened by unauthorized personnel, tampered with or the serial number on the product has been changed or rendered illegible. Claims under warranty This product has been carefully checked. If you have a valid claim, please return the product to SCHROFF. In order to make a claim under the warranty, ensure that the following is carried out:  Include a detailed description of the fault.  The product should be returned in the original carton or similar packaging, insured and post paid. Garantie Garantie contractuelle Les conditions d‘applications de la garantie, et en particulier la durée, l‘étendue et les cas d‘exclusion, figurent dans nos conditions générales de ventes, paragraphe 11 „Garantie contractuelle“. Application de la garantie Cette alimentation a été soigneusement contrôlée en usine. En cas de réclamations, veuillez nous la retourner accompagnée d‘une description la plus précise possible du défaut constaté, et d‘une copie du bon de livraison ou de la facture. Le produit doit nous être retourné dans son emballage d‘origine port assuré et payé. Schroff n‘assume aucune responsabilité pour des appareils non assurés et endommagés pendant le transport. Technische Daten Technical Data Caractéristiques techniques SEK 105 SEK 112 SEK 115 SEK 124 SEK 148 Eingangsgrößen Input parameters Valeurs d’entée 13100 - 043 - 044 - 041 - 045 - 046 Netzspannung Nennwerte VAC Mains/line voltage Nominal values VAC Tension secteur Valeurs nominales VAC 100 – 240 VAC Arbeitsbereiche Operating ranges Plage de fonctionnement 90 – 264 VAC 128 – 370 VDC 4) Netznennstrom bei 90 VAC / 187 VAC Mains/line current at 90 VAC / 187 VAC Courant nominal pour 90 VAC / 187 VAC 1,3 / 0,6 A Netzfrequenzbereich Mains/line frequency Fréquence secteur 48 – 62 Hz Leistungsfaktor cos j Performance factor cos j Facteur de puissance cos j 0,6 Wirkungsgrad typabhängig Efficiency, depending on type Rendement selon le type 69 – 80% Einschaltstrom IP ( bei 230 VAC ) Current at switch-on IP ( at 230 VAC ) Courant d’appel IP ( pour 230 VAC ) < 20 A Ableitstrom Leakage current Courant de fuite £ 500 μA Ausgangsgrößen Output parameters Valeurs de sortie Ausgangsleistung [ W ] Output [ W ] Puissance de sortie [ W ] 45 51 53 Ausgangsspannung D V [ V ] werkseitig 2) Output voltage D V [ V ] pre-set 2) Tension de sortie D V [ V ] Réglage usine 2) 5 12 15 24 48 Einstellbereich 1) Adjustment range 1) Plage de réglage 1) 4,2 – 6 11 – 13,5 13,5 – 16,5 21 – 25,5 43 – 50 Ausgangsstrom (bei 90 - 264 VAC) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C Output current (at 90 - 264 VAC ) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C Courant de sortie (et 90 - 264 VAC ) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C 9,0 4,2 3,4 2,1 1,1 70 °C 70 °C 70 °C 6,0 2,9 2,4 1,5 0,8 Kurzschlußstrom [ A ] Short-circuit current [ A ] Courant de court-circuit [ A ] < 11 < 6 < 4,5 < 3 < 2 Überspannungsschutz OVP(schaltet Netzgerät ab), automatisch wiederkehrend, werkseitig fest eingestellt [ V ] Over-voltage protection pre-set (switches power supply off) with automatic reset [ V ] Protection surtensions OVP (coupe l’alimentation), remise en marche automatique [ V ] 6 ±0,3 14 ±0,5 17 ±0,5 26 ± 0,5 52 ± 2 Restwelligkeit bei [mVPP] 100 Hz Residual ripple at [mVPP] 100 Hz Ondulation résiduelle [mVPP] 100 Hz < 20 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 150 Taktfrequenz (100 kHz) Frequency (100 kHz) à la fréquence de découpage (100 kHz) < 40 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 60 Störspannung (BW: 100 MHz) [mVPP] Interference voltage (BW: 100 MHz) [mVPP] Tension parasite (BP: 100 MHz) [mVPP] < 100 < 200 < 200 < 200 < 200 Lastausregelung, statisch ( Lastwechsel 0 - 100 % ) [mV] Load control, static ( load change 0 - 100 % ) [mV] Régulation en charge statique ( variation charge 0 - 100 % ) [mV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 100 < 100 Netzausregelung 90 – 264 V [mV] Mains voltage change 90 – 264 V [mV] Régulation secteur 90 – 264 V [mV] < 10 < 25 < 25 < 100 < 100 Temperaturkoeffizient Temperature coefficient Coefficient de température - 0,015 %/K CSB und Ausgang über Diode entkoppelt CSB and output via decoupling diode CSB et Sortie découpling par diode eingebaut / built in / monté Dynamische Regelabweichungen (Lastwechsel: 50 ... 100% mit 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0,135 A/μs) Dynamic control deviations (Load change: 50 ... 100% at 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0.135 A/μs) Valeurs dynamiques de sortie (Variation de charge: 50 ... 100% avec 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0,135 A/μs) Gesamtausregelzeit, Toleranz 0,1% x V1 Nenn [ms] Total control time, Tolerance 0,1 % x V1 nom [ms] Temps de réponse globall, Tolérance 0,1% x V1 Nenn [ms] < 1,5 Überschwingweite und Unterschwingweite [ mV ] Overshoot and undershoot [ mV ] Amplitude de dépassement et amplitude négative [ mV ] < 500 < 250 < 300 < 500 Schutz- und Überwachungseinrichtungen Protection and control features Dispositifs de protection et surveillance Einschaltzeit Soft start delay Temps de montée < 0,8 s Netzsicherung, High Breaking träge Mains/line fuse, high breaking slow Fusible secteur, high breaking slow 4 A/250 VAC, 5 x 20 mm, DIN EN60127-2/V4) Netzausfallüberbrückung bei VAC = 187 VAC und 100 % Last Mains/line failure buffer at VAC = 187 VAC and 100 % load Pontage microcoupures secteur avec VAC = 187 VAC et charge 100 % > 30 ms Fernfühler kompensiert Remote control compensated Compensation max. 0,5 V Strombegrenzungskennlinie Current limiting Limitation de courant U / I , V / I Signalisierung „Ausgangsspannung ok“ “Output OK“ Signal Signalisation «tension de sortie OK» Output OK, low active, internal pull-up max. 55 V / 50 mA High Pegel [ V ] High Level [ V ] High signal [ V ] 5 12 15 24 48 Prüf- und Umweltbedingungen Test and environmental specifications Conditions de test et d’environnement Klimaprüfung nach Climatic test to Epreuve climatique selon IEC 68-2-38 Schock- und Vibrationstest gemäß Beschleunigung 2 g Shock and vibration tests in accordance Acceleration 2 g Tests de chocs et vibrations selon Accélération 2 g EN 60068-2-6 Höhe 3 HE / Tiefe 160 mm / Breite [TE] Hight 3 U / depth 160mm / Width [HP] Hauteur 3 U / Prof. 160 mm, Largeur [F] 6 Gewicht (Masse) Weight Poids (masse) 0,55 kg CE Störaussendung CE Transmission Compatibilité électromagnétique CE Emission EN 50081-1 EN 55011class B, EN 55022 class B Störfestigkeit, Schärfeklasse 3 Susceptability, degree of severity 3 CEM Immunité, sévérity 3 EN 50082-2, EN 61000-4-2,EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4 ,EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 Sicherheit, Schutzklasse 1 Safety, Protection class 1 Sécurité, Classe de protection 1 EN 60950 ( ERG ) Hochspannungsprüfung nach EN 60950 Eingang-Ausgang High voltage test to EN 60950 input-output Tests haute-tension selon EN 60950 Entrée-Sortie 4,3 kVDC 3) Eingang-PE input-PE Entrée-Masse 2,2 kVDC 3) Ausgang-PE output-PE Sortie-Masse 0,7 kVDC 3) UL 1950 UL 1950 UL 1950 No. E 153809 Netzgerät wartungsfrei Power supply, maintenance-free Alimentation sans entretien Ja / yes / oui Kühlart Cooling Refroidissement Convection Umgebungstemperatur Betrieb / Lagerung Ambient temperature Operation / Storage Température ambiante Service / Stockage 0 ... 70 °C / -20 ... + 85 °C MTBF bei Vollast, TU = 40 °C MTBF at full load, Ta = 40 °C MTBF à pleine charge, Ta = 40 °C 500000 h 1) Bei Erhöhung der Ausgangsspannung DV Strombegrenzung beachten. 2) Toleranz ± 100 mV. 3) ACHTUNG: Hochspannungsprüfung wurde durchgeführt. Bei erneuter Prüfung darf max. 80% der Prüfspannung angelegt werden. Bei unsachgemäßer Prüfung (z.B. manche Bauteile müssen kurzgeschlossen werden) kann das Gerät zerstört werden. 4) Für den DC-Betrieb ist eine geeignete Sicherung vorzuschalten, zB. von Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A 1) When increasing the output voltage DV check the current limiting. 2) Tolerance ± 100 mV. 3) CAUTION: The high voltage test has been carried out. Any repeat test must be carried out at max. 80% of the test voltage. If the test is carried out incorrectly (e.g. some components have to be short-circuited), the unit may be destroyed. 4) For DC-operation you must put an additional fuse in front, e.g. from Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A 1) Lorsqu’on augmente la tension de sortie DV il faut tenir compte de la limitation de courant. 2) Tolérance ± 100 mV. 3) ATTENTION: Les tests haute-tension ont été effectués. En cas de répétition de ces tests, uniquement 80 % de la tension d’essai peut être appliquée. En cas de tests non appropriés (certains composants doivent être mis en court-circuit), l’appareil peut être détruit. 5) L’utilisation d’un fusible adéquate est obligatoire pour le fonctionnement en DC, par ex. Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ LebÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁnÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁgÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁfÁÁÁÁÁÁaÁÁÁÁÁÁ hr! ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ DÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁaÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁnÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁgÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁrÁÁÁÁÁÁ!ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ DangÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁrÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁdÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁmÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ort! Attention !  Observer les prescriptions et règles de sécurité!  Avant la mise en service, lire la notice d’utilisation.  Raccorder le conducteur de terre (PE).  Si une protection contre les contacts directs est nécessaire, l’alimentation doit obligatoirement être montée dans un boîtier.  L’appareil ne peut être ouvert que par des personnes qualifiés!  La protection anti-feu est à assurer par une enveloppe indépendante de l’alimentation. Consignes de sécurité  L’alimentation doit être munie d’une face avant appropriée, afin d’éviter tout contact avec des parties sous tension.  Afin d’éviter les couplages parasites, les câblages secteur et secondaires doivent cheminer séparément. Precautions!  Please read the safety instructions carefully!  Please read these operating instructions carefully before switching on.  Connect the PE conductor before operating.  The power supply should be mounted in a case to avoid risk of direct contact with live parts.  The power supply unit should be opened by authorized service personnel only!  Ensure correct installation for conformity to fire regulations. Safety instructions  To avoid interference, the mains/line and output connections must be physically separated from one another. Vorsicht!  Sicherheitsvorschriften, -bestimmungen und -hinweise beachten!  Vor dem Betrieb Bedienungsanleitung lesen.  Vor dem Betrieb PE-Leiter anschließen.  Direkter Berührschutz erfordert unbedingt den Einbau in Gehäuse, die das Berühren spannungsführender Teile ausschließt.  Das Geräte darf nur von Fachpersonal geöffnet werden!  Brandschutz ist durch das übergeordnete Gefäßsystem sicherzustellen Sicherheitshinweise  Nur mit geeigneter Frontplatte betreiben, um die Berührung spannungsführender Teile zu verhindern!  Um Störungseinkopplungen zu vermeiden müssen Netz-/ und Ausgangsleitungen getrennt verlegt werden.  Jede Unterbrechung der Schutzleitung innerhalb oder außerhalb des Gerätes oder die Abkoppelung des Schutzleiteranschlusses kann das Gerät gefährlich machen; absichtliche Unterbrechung ist untersagt!  Vor dem Sicherungswechsel Gerät vom Netz trennen.  Die Geräte sind werkseitig nur einpolig abgesichert. Bei Netzanschluß mit polverwechselbaren Steckvorrichtungen ist eine zweite Sicherung vorzusehen.  Durch Serienschaltung (Reihenschaltung) mehrerer Stromversorgungen können an den Ausgängen lebensgefährliche Spannungen (ab 60 VDC) auftreten (SELV-Spannung nur bis 60 VDC)!  Beim Einbau des Gerätes Sicherheitsmaßnahmen nach EN 60950 beachten!  Allgemeine Sicherheitsvorschriften und -bestimmungen beachten!  Operate only with suitable front panel to avoid contact with voltagebearing parts!  The power supply should be mounted in a case to avoid risk of direct contact with live parts!  Do not disconnect ground/earth inside or outside the power supply. The company cannot be held reponsible for unsafe operating conditions resulting from deliberate disconnection!  Disconnect the mains/line voltage from the unit before changing the fuse.  The units are fused for live only. A second fuse should be used for the neutral connection where the polarity of the connectors can be reversed.  When operating several power supplies in series, dangerous voltages may occur at the output terminals; SELV voltage must be limited to 60 VDC!  When mounting the unit read the safety instructions to EN 60950!  Pour obtenir une protection contre les contacts directs, l’appareil doit obligatoirement être monté dans un boîtier excluant toute possibilité de contact avec des parties sous tension.  Toute interruption de la ligne de protection à l’intérieur ou à l’extérieur de l’alimentation, de même qu’une déconnexion de cette ligne, peuvent rendre l’appareil dangereux. Tout acte intentionnel dans ce sens est strictement interdit.  Avant de remplacer le fusible, couper l’appareil du secteur  L’alimentation ne dispose que d’une protection unipolaire. Si le dispositif de connexion au secteur est de nature â favoriser une inversion polaire, il faut prévoir un second fusible.  Le couplage en série de plusieurs alimentations peut occasionner des tensions mortelles aux sorties ( à partir de 60 VDC). Limite de tension SELV = 60 VDC max.  Lors du montage de l’alimentation, respecter les mesures de sécurité prévues par la norme EN 60950.  Observer les prescriptions et règles de sécurité générales. EN 60950 Bedienungsanleitung Operating instructions Notice d’utilisation SEK single (SEK 1xx) (13100-041 – 13100-046) Vor Inbetriebnahme diese Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig lesen! Entstehen durch Nichtbeachtung Schäden, erlöschen die Garantieansprüche. Diese Dokumentation wurde mit größter Sorgfalt erstellt. Dennoch können wir für die vollständige Richtigkeit keine Garantie übernehmen. Please read these operating instructions carefully before applying power. The warranty is subject to correct input voltages being applied. Repairs or modifications made by anyone other than SCHROFF will invalidate the warranty. This documentation has been compiled with the utmost care. We cannot however guarantee its correctness in every respect. Avant la mise en service, veuillez lire attentivement la présente notice d'utilisation. Tout dommage dû à l'inobservation de nos instructions n'est pas couvert par notre garantie. La présente documentation a été réalisée avec le plus grand soin mais nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas d'erreur ou d'omission. SCHROFF GMBH www.schroff.biz D/GB/F 11/06 Langenalber Straße 96-100, D-75334 Straubenhardt, Tel. +49 (7082) 794-0, Fax +49 (7082) 794-200 73972-035 Rev. 002 11396002 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 1 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U (48 x 48 mm) New 48 x 48-mm Basic Temperature Controller with Enhanced Functions and Performance. Improved Indication Accuracy and Preventive Maintenance Function. • Indication Accuracy Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV (previous models: ±0.5%) Pt input: ±0.2% of PV (previous models: ±0.5%) Analog input: ±0.2% FS (previous models: ±0.5%) • New E5CN-U Models (Plug-in Models) with analog inputs and current outputs. • A PV/SV-status display function can be set to alternate between displaying the PV or SV and the status of the Temperature Controller (auto/manual, RUN/STOP and alarms). • Preventive maintenance for relays using a Control Output ON/OFF Counter. Main I/O Functions 48 × 48-mm E5CN 48 × 48-mm E5CN-U Refer to Safety Precautions on page 18. Event Inputs • None • Two Sensor Inputs • Universal thermocouple/Pt inputs (Models with temperature inputs) • Analog current/voltage inputs (Models with analog inputs) Indication Accuracy • Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV • Pt input: ±0.2% of PV • Analog input: ±0.2% FS Sampling Period and control update • 250 ms Control Output 1 • Relay output • Voltage output (for driving SSR) • Current output • Long-life relay output (hybrid) Control Output 2 • None • Voltage output (for driving SSR) 2 Auxiliary Outputs 2 line Display: PV and SV 4-digit, 11 segment display E5CN • Auto/manual switching • Temperature Controller status display • Simple program function • Control output ON/OFF count alarm • PV change rate alarm • Models optional with RS-485 communications This data sheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following user manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156) E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H158) 2 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Lineup Note: All models can be used for Heating, Cooling and Heating & Cooling control Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Controllers 1. Control Output 1 R: Relay output Q: Voltage output (for driving SSR) C: Current output Y: Long-life relay output (hybrid) ✽1 2. Auxiliary Outputs ✽2 2: Two outputs 3. Option M: Option Unit can be mounted. 4. Input Type T: Universal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer L: Analog current/voltage input 5. Power Supply Voltage Blank: 100 to 240 VAC D: 24 VAC/VDC 6. Case Color Blank: Black W: Silver (contact your local sales for more information) 7. Terminal Cover -500: With terminal cover Option Units 1. Applicable Controller CN: E5CN 2. Function 1 Blank: None Q: Control output 2 (voltage for driving SSR) P: Power supply for sensor 3. Function 2 Blank: None H: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) HH: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (For 3-phase heater applications, 2x CT) B: Two event inputs 03: RS-485 communications H03: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + RS-485 communications HB: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + Two event inputs HH03: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (For 3-phase heater applications, 2x CT) 4. Version N2: Applicable only to models produced after January 2008 (Box marked with N6) Note: Not all combinations of function 1 and function 2 specifications are possible for Option Units (E53-CN@@N2). ✽1. Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching the circuit. For details, check the conditions in Ratings. ✽2. Auxiliary outputs are contact outputs that can be used to output alarms, control or results of logic operations. Plug-in Terminal block E5CN Basic Type Analog input Temperature input 2 control outputs 1 control output 2 control outputs 1 control output 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs Analog input Temperature input 1 control output 1 control output 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E5CN-@2M@@-@-500 1 2 3 4 E53-CN@@N2 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 3 Ordering Information Controllers with Terminal Blocks Note: add power supply voltage to model to complete ordering code (ie. E5CN-R2MT-500 AC100-240 or E5CN-R2MTD-500 AC/DC24) Option Units One of the following Option Units can be mounted to provide the E5CN with additional functions. Note: Option Units cannot be used for plug-in models. These Option Units are applicable only to models produced after January 2008 (Box marked with N6). Size Case color Power supply voltage Input type Auxiliary outputs Control output 1 Model 1/16 DIN 48 × 48 × 78 (W × H × D) Black 100 to 240 VAC Thermocouple or Resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MT-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MT-500 Current output E5CN-C2MT-500 Long-life relay output (hybrid) E5CN-Y2MT-500 24 VAC/VDC Thermocouple or Resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MTD-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MTD-500 Current output E5CN-C2MTD-500 100 to 240 VAC Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2ML-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2ML-500 Current output E5CN-C2ML-500 Long-life relay output (hybrid) E5CN-Y2ML-500 24 VAC/VDC Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MLD-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MLD-500 Current output E5CN-C2MLD-500 Functions Model Event inputs E53-CNBN2 Event inputs Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQBN2 Event inputs Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs External power supply for ES1B E53-CNPBN2 Communications RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications RS-485 Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQ03N2 Communications RS-485 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH03N2 Communications RS-485 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHH03N2 Communications RS-485 External power supply for ES1B E53-CNP03N2 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQHN2 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQHHN2 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection External power supply for ES1B E53-CNPHN2 4 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Model Number Structure Model Number Legend (Plug-in-type Controllers) 1. Output Type R: Relay output Q: Voltage output (for driving SSR) C: Current output 2. Number of Alarms 2: Two alarms 3. Input Type T: Universal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer L: Analog Input 4. Plug-in type U: Plug-in type Ordering Information Plug-in-type Controllers Note: add power supply voltage to model to complete ordering code. (ie. E5CN-R2TU AC100-240 or E5CN-R2TDU AC/DC24) 1 2 3 4 E5CN-@2@U Size Case color Power supply voltage Input type Auxiliary outputs Control output 1 Model 1/16 DIN Black 100 to 240 VAC Thermocouple or resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2TU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2TU Current output E5CN-C2TU Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2LU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2LU Current output E5CN-C2LU 24 VAC/VDC Thermocouple or resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2TDU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2TDU Current output E5CN-C2TDU Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 5 Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Terminal Cover Note: The Terminal Cover comes with the E5CN-@@@-500 models. Waterproof Packing Note: The Waterproof Packing is included with the Controller only for models with terminal blocks. Current Transformers (CTs) Adapter Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has been previously prepared for the E5B@ (72x72 mm panel cut-out). Sockets (for Plug-in Models) CX-Thermo Support Software Model E58-CIFQ1 Connectable models Terminal block models Model E53-COV17 Model Y92S-29 Hole diameter Model 5.8 dia. E54-CT1 12.0 dia. E54-CT3 Connectable models Model Terminal block models Y92F-45 Type Model Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11 Front-connecting Socket with Finger Protection P2CF-11-E Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11 Terminal Cover for Back-connecting socket with Finger Protection Y92A-48G Model EST2-2C-MV4 6 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage No D in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption E5CN 100 to 240 VAC: 7.5 VA (max.) (E5CN-R2T at 100 VAC: 3.0 VA) 24 VAC/VDC: 5 VA/3 W (max.) (E5CN-R2TD at 24 VAC: 2.7 VA) E5CN-U 100 to 240 VAC: 6 VA (max.) 24 VAC/VDC: 3 VA/2 W (max.) (models with current output: 4 VA/2 W) Sensor input Models with temperature inputs Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor: 10 to 70° C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165° C, or 140 to 260°C Voltage input: 0 to 50 mV Models with analog inputs Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB.) Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) Control outputs Relay output E5CN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5CN-U SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN E5CN-U Output voltage: 12 VDC ±15% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit Current output E5CN 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 600 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000 Long-life relay output E5CN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 1,000,000 operations, load power supply voltage: 75 to 250 VAC (DC loads cannot be connected.), minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA, leakage current: 5 mA max. (250 VAC, 60 Hz) Auxiliary outputs Number of outputs 2 Output specifications Relay output: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Event inputs Number of inputs 2 External contact input specifications Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min. Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact External power supply for ES1B 12 VDC ±10%, 20 mA, short-circuit protection circuit provided Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11-segment digital display and individual indicators (7-segment display emulation also possible) Character height: PV: 11 mm, SV: 6.5 mm Multi SP Up to four set points (SP0 to SP3) can be saved and selected using event inputs, key operations, or serial communications. Bank switching Not supported Other functions Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout detection, 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self-tuning, temperature input shift, run/stop, protection functions, control output ON/OFF counter, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, PV/SV status display, simple program, automatic cooling coefficient adjustment Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), for 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85% Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 7 Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal Inputs) Models with Analog Inputs Shaded settings are the default settings. Input Type Platinum resistance thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature sensor Analog input Name Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PL II 10 to 70°C 60 to 120 °C 115 to 165 °C 140 to 260 °C 0 to 50 mV Temperature range (° C) 2300 1800 1700 1600 1500 1400 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 −100.0 −200.0 2300 Usable in the following ranges by scaling: −1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to 999.9 1800 1700 1700 1300 1300 1300 850 850 850 600 500.0 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 120 165 100.0 100.0 90 100 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −20.0 −100 −20.0 −100 −200 −199.9 −199.9 −200 −200 −199.9 −200 −200 −199.9 −200 Setting number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 24 25 19 20 21 22 23 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Input Type Current Voltage Input specification 4 to 20mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V Setting range Usable in the following ranges by scaling: −1999 to 9999, −199.9 to 999.9, −19.99 to 99.99 or −1.999 to 9.999 Setting number 0 1 2 3 4 8 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Alarm Outputs Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 13 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: For models with heater burnout, SSR failure, and heater overcurrent detection, alarm 1 will be an OR output of the alarm selected from the following alarm types and the alarms for heater burnout, SSR failure, and heater overcurrent. To output only a heater burnout alarm, SSR failure alarm, and heater overcurrent alarm for alarm 1, set the alarm type to 0 (i.e., no alarm function). ✽1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as “L” and “H.” ✽2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm ✽3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range ✽4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above • Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. • Case 3: Always OFF ✽5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation When X is positive When X is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF 1 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit ✽2 2 Upper limit 3 Lower limit 4 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit range ✽3 5 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit with standby sequence ✽4 6 Upper-limit with standby sequence 7 Lower-limit with standby sequence 8 Absolute-value upper-limit 9 Absolute-value lower-limit 10 Absolute-value upper-limit with standby sequence 11 Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence 12 LBA (for alarm 1 only) --- 13 PV change rate alarm --- ON OFF SP L H SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP ON X OFF SP ON X OFF SP L H ON OFF SP L H ON OFF ✽5 SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP ON X OFF 0 ON X OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 ON X OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF L H H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ < ⏐L⏐ SP Case 1 L H H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ > ⏐L⏐ SP Case 2 H L H < 0, L < 0 SP H L H < 0, L > 0 SP ⏐H⏐ ≥ ⏐L⏐ H L H > 0, L < 0 SP ⏐H⏐ ≤ ⏐L⏐ Case 3 (Always ON) L H SP Case 1 SP L H Case 2 H SP L L L H SP SPH Case 3 (Always OFF) H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ < ⏐L⏐ H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ > ⏐L⏐ H < 0, L < 0 H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ ≥ ⏐L⏐ H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ ≤ ⏐L⏐ Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 9 Characteristics ✽1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1300° C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of −100° C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is ±2° C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400° C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples in the 400 to 800° C range is ±3° C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200° C max. is ±3° C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is ±0.3 of PV or ±3° C, whichever is greater, ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is ±0.3 of PV or ±2° C, whichever is greater, ± 1 digit max. ✽2. Ambient temperature: −10° C to 23° C to 55° C, Voltage range: −15% to 10% of rated voltage ✽3. K thermocouple at −100°C max.: ±10° max. ✽4. “EU” stands for Engineering Unit and is used as the unit after scaling. For a temperature sensor, the EU is ° C or ° F. ✽5. When robust tuning (RT) is ON, the differential time is 0.0 to 999.9 (in units of 0.1 s). ✽6. External communications (RS-485) and cable communications for the Setup Tool can be used at the same time. ✽7. The E5CN-U plug-in model is certified for UL listing only when used together with the OMRON P2CF-11 Socket. Indication accuracy Thermocouple: ✽1 Terminal block models (E5CN): (±0.3% of indicated value or ±1° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1% of indicated value or ±2° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Platinum resistance thermometer input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±0.2% of indicated value or ±0.8° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Analog input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max. CT input: Terminal block models (E5CN): ±5% FS ±1 digit max. Influence of temperature ✽2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): Terminal block models (E5CN): (±1% of PV or ±10° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±2% of PV or ±10° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: ✽3 Terminal block models (E5CN): (±1% of PV or ±4° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±2% of PV or ±4° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Platinum resistance thermometer input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Analog input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1%FS) ±1 digit max. Influence of voltage ✽2 Input sampling period 250 ms Hysteresis Models with thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer input (universal input): 0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU) ✽4 Models with analog input: 0.01 to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Proportional band (P) Models with thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer input (universal input): 0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU) ✽4 Models with analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) 0 to 3999 s (in units of 1 s) Derivative time (D) 0 to 3999 s (in units of 1 s) ✽5 Control period 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range −1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Affect of signal source resistance Thermocouple: 0.1° C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.) Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1° C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.) Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz for 1 min (between terminals with different charge) Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Destruction 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm single amplitude for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock resistance Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Destruction 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight E5CN Controller: Approx. 150 g, Mounting Bracket: Approx. 10 g E5CN-U Controller: Approx. 110 g, Mounting Bracket: Approx. 10 g Degree of protection E5CN Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 E5CN-U Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.0 or higher Setup Tool port Provided on the bottom of the E5CN. Use this port to connect a computer to the E5CN when using the Setup Tool. An E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect the computer to the E5CN. ✽6 Standards Approved standards ✽7 UL 61010-1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1 Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1): Pollution level 2, overcurrent category II EMC EMI: EN 61326 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-8 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 10 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U USB-Serial Conversion Cable Note: A driver must be installed in the personal computer. Refer to installation information in the operation manual for the Conversion Cable. Communications Specifications ✽ The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings Heater Burnout Alarms, SSR Failure Alarms, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms ✽1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). ✽2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). ✽3. For heater overcurrent alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., heater overcurrent detection current value). Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Relays (Reference Values) Note: Do not connect a DC load to a Controller with a Long-life Relay Output. Applicable OS Windows 2000, XP, or Vista Applicable software Thermo Mini, CX-Thermo version 4.0 or higher Applicable models E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5CN-U/E5AN-H/ E5EN-H/E5CN-H USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 1.1. DTE speed 38400 bps Connector specifications Computer: USB (type A plug) Temperature Controller: Setup Tool port (on bottom of Controller) Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 70 mA Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature −20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 100 g Transmission line connection method RS-485: Multipoint Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization Protocol CompoWay/F, SYSWAY, or Modbus Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps Transmission code ASCII Data bit length ✽ 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length ✽ 1 or 2 bits Error detection Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Frame check sequence (FCS) with SYSWAY Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications response wait time 0 to 99 ms Default: 20 ms Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 Weight E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g, E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g Accessories (E54-CT3 only) Armatures (2) Plugs (2) CT input (for heater current detection) Models with detection for single-phase heaters: One input Models with detection for single-phase or three-phase heaters: Two inputs Maximum heater current 50 A AC Input current indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max. Heater burnout alarm setting range ✽1 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms SSR failure alarm setting range ✽2 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms Heater overcurrent alarm setting range ✽3 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms 500 300 100 50 30 10 5 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 E5CN 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cosφ = 1 Switching current (A) Life (× 104 operations) Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 11 External Connections • A voltage output (control output, for driving SSR) is not electrically insulated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (If the control output terminals are connected to ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature values as a result of leakage current.) • Consult with your OMRON representative before using the external power supply for the ES1B for any other purpose. E5CN Controllers Option Units E5CN-U Note: For the Wiring Socket, purchase the P2CF-11 or PG3A-11 separately. Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Current output 0 to 20 mA DC Load: 600 Ω max. 4 to 20 mA DC Long-life relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1 + − A B B + − Input power supply Control output 1 Auxiliary outputs (relay outputs) 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) • 100 to 240 VAC • 24 VAC/VDC (no polarity) + − + V − Auxiliary output 2 mA Auxiliary output 1 A heater burnout alarm, heater short alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, or input alarm is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned. DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE mA Volt T/c Pt Analog input Temperature input 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs and CT 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNPBN2 Event Inputs and External Power Supply E V 1 E V 2 + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNPHN2 External Power Supply and CT + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNP03N2 Communications (RS-485) and External Power Supply + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNQHN2 Control Output 2 and CT + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNQBN2 Event Inputs and Control Output 2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNHH03N2 Communications (RS-485) and CT2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNQ03N2 Communications (RS-485) and Control Output 2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications (RS-485) 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNBN2 Event inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNQHHN2 Control Output 2 and CT2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNH03N2 Communications (RS-485) and CT DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT2 CT2 Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Control output 2 A B B Auxiliary output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1 Input power supply • 100 to 240 VAC • 24 VAC/VDC (no polarity) Auxiliary output 1 (Relay outputs) V m A An input error is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned. Current output 0 to 20 mA DC Relay output (three terminals used) SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Load: 600 W max. 4 to 20 mA DC Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 (Control output (cooling side)) DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE mA Volt T/c Pt Analog input Temperature input 12 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Nomenclature Dimensions (Unit: mm) Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Operation indicators Level Key Temperature unit No.1 display No. 2 display Up Key Mode Key Down Key E5CN E5CN-U The front panel is the same for the E5CN and E5CN-U. 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. (48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted 48 × 48 Terminal Cover (E53-COV17) (Accessory) 44.8 × 44.8 48.8 6 1.5 91 78 Mounting Adapter (Accessory) 58 Waterproof Packing (Accessory) E5CN Terminal Models Note: The terminal block cannot be removed. • Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) • To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. • When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. 48 × 48 6 14.2 58 44.8 × 44.8 70.5 (84.7) Mounting Adapter (Accessory) 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. (48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0 0 Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted E5CN-U Plug-in Models • Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) • When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. (2,100) 250 1,765 USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED indicator (RD) LED indicator (SD) E58-CIFQ1 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 13 Current Transformers 48 48.8 22 9.1 Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection. (Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider one year a rough standard. OMRON shall not be liable for the level of water resistance if the customer does not perform periodic replacement.) The Waterproof Packing does not need to be attached if a waterproof structure is not required. Terminal Cover E53-COV17 Waterproof Packing Y92S-29 (for DIN 48 × 48) Note: The E53-COV10 cannot be used. E54-CT3 Accessory • Armature 30 21 15 5.8 dia. 25 3 40 10.5 2.8 7.5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 40 × 40 30 12 dia. 9 2.36 dia. 15 30 Two, M3 (depth: 4) Approx. 3 dia. 18 (22) Approx. 6 dia. Plug Armature Lead E54-CT1 E54-CT3 Connection Example • Plug E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 400±2 Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) 1 10 100 mA 1 10 100 1,000 A Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 100 V 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 100 Ω RL = 10 Ω 10 ∞ 1 100 mV 10 1 100 μV 10 1 kΩ E54-CT3 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for the Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 400±2 Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω 3% 1% 1 kΩ 100 Ω 50 Ω RL = 10 Ω 500 Ω ∞ Distortion factor 10% Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) 1 10 100 mA 1 10 100 1,000 A Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 100 V 50 Hz 10 1 100 mV 10 1 100 μV 10 14 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Adapter E5CN-U Wiring Socket Note: A model with finger protection (P2CF-11-E) is also available. Note: 1. Using any other sockets will adversely affect accuracy. Use only the specified sockets. 2. A Protective Cover for finger protection (Y92A-48G) is also available. Fixture (Accessory) 69.6 to 77.6 67 × 67 87 72 × 72 4.7 76 72 × 72 48 × 48 Panel (1 to 8 mm) 77.3 (to back of E5CN) 2.2 4.7 Y92F-45 Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for the E5B@. Mounted to E5CN 40±0.2 4.5 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 10 11 70 max. 4 Eleven, M3.5 × 7.5 sems screws 7.8 Two, 4.5-dia. holes 50 max. 3 31.2 max. 35.4 Note: Can also be mounted to a DIN track. Mounting Holes Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Top View) Two, 4.5 dia. mounting holes Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 9 1 11 10 25.6 27 dia. 45 45 4.5 16.3 6.2 4 7 3 8.7 6 Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Bottom View) Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 15 Operation Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Basic Type ✽1. You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. ✽2. It is not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. It can be done only by first turning OFF the power. ✽3. From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only. Error Displays (Troubleshooting) When an error occurs, the No.1 display shows the error code. Take necessary measure according to the error code, referring the table below. Note: If the input value exceeds the display limit (-1999 to 9999), though it is within the control range, will be displayed under -1999 and above 9999. Under these conditions, control output and alarm output will operate normally. For details on the control range, refer to the E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156). ✽These errors are displayed only when the PV/SP is displayed. Errors are not displayed for other displays. No.1 display Meaning Action Status at error Control output Alarm output s.err (S. Err) Input error ✽ Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and short-circuits and check the input type. OFF Operates as above the upper limit. e333 (E333) A/D converter error Turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. OFF OFF e111 (E111) Memory error Turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. OFF OFF Start in manual mode. 25 10 0 c 25 10 0 c a- m Power ON ✽3 Manual mode Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s. ✽4 Press the O Key for at least 3 s while a-m is displayed. (a-m will flash after 1st second.) Operation Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Input password. Input password while amoV is displayed. (Set value −169) Press the O Key less than 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 3 s. (Display will flash after 1st second.) Control stops. Press the O Key for less than 1 s. Press the O+ M Keys for at least 3 s. (Display will flash after 1st second.) Protect Level Control in progress Level change Not displayed for some models Control stopped Start in automatic mode. Adjustment Level Initial Setting Level Manual Control Level Advanced Function Setting Level Calibration Level Communications Setting Level Press the O+ M Keys for at least 1 s. *1 Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the “Move to protect level time” setting. ✽2 16 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U M M M M M M M psel cwf u-no 1 bps 9.6 len 7 sbit 2 prty even sdwt 20 Starting in manual mode. M M M M M M pmov 0 oapt 0 pmsk on prlp 0 icpt 1 wtpt off 25 M M M M M M M M M M ST (Self-tuning) M M M M in-t 5 in-h 100 in-l dp d-u sl-h 1300 sl-l -200 cntl onof s-hc stnd st on ptrn off cp 20 c-cp 20 orev or-r 0 0 c M M M l.adj cmwt off at off M M M M M M ct1 0.0 0.0 0.0 hb1 0.0 hb2 0. 0 M M 50.0 50.0 M M oc1 50.0 oc2 50.0 M M M sp-0 0 sp-1 0 sp-2 0 sp-3 0 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M of-r 50.0 soak 1 c-sc 1.00 d 40 p 8.0 i 233 c-db 0.0 hys 1.0 chys 1.0 ol-l -5.0 wt-b off mv-s 0.0 mv-e 0.0 ol-h 105.0 M M M ins 0.0 insh 0.0 insl 0. 0 sprt off sqrp 0.0 M M M a-m 25 25 0 M M M M M M M sp-m 0 ct1 0.0 ct2 0.0 lcr1 0.0 lcr2 0.0 prst rset sktr 0 M m-sp 0 r-s run M M M M M M M M M M M M c-o 0.0 al-1 0 al1h 0 al1l 0 al- 2 0 al2h 0 al2l 0 al-3 0 al3l 0 al3h 0 o 0.0 M orl 0.0 M ct2 lcr1 hs1 lcr2 hs2 0.0 0.0 alh1 0.2 M alt1 2 M Power ON Starting in automatic mode. Manual Control Level PID Control only PV/MV Press the O Key less than 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Operation Level Adjustment Level Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering adjustment level. AT Execute/Cancel Communications Writing Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Burnout Detection 1 Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Heater Burnout Detection 2 Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor HS Alarm 1 HS Alarm 2 C SP 0 C SP 1 C SP 2 SP used by multi-SP C SP 3 C C C C C C C Temperature Input Shift 1-point shift 2-point shift Set either of these parameters. Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Proportional Band Integral Time PID settings Derivative Time Cooling Coefficient Heating/cooling Dead Band Manual Reset Value Clear the offset during stabilization of P or PD control. Hysteresis (Heating) Hysteresis (Cooling) Hysteresis settings C Soak Time Wait Band MV at Stop MV at PV Error C SP Ramp Set Value MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV Change Rate Limit Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point C Process Value Added when Additional PV display is ON. C Process Value/ Set Point C C C Auto/Manual Switch PID control only. Added when auto/manual select addition is ON. Multi-SP Set Point Setting Set Point During SP Ramp Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor Program Start Soak Time Remain Press the O and M Keys for at least 3 s. Protect Level Press the O and M Keys for at least 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Communications Setting Level Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the "Move to protect level time" setting. Note: Displayed only for models with communications. Changes are effective after cycling power or after a software reset. Move to Protect Level: Displayed only when a password is set. Restricts moving to protect level. Operation/Adjustment Protect: Restricts displaying and modifying menus in operation, adjustment, and manual control levels. Initial Setting/ Communications Protect: This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting, communications setting, and advanced function setting levels. Setting Change Protect: Protects changes to setups by operating the front panel keys. Password to Move to Protect Level: Password setting Parameter Mask Enable: Displayed only when a parameter mask is set. Protocol Setting: Switches between CompoWay/F (SYSWAY) and Modbus. Communications Unit No. Communications Baud Rate CompoWay/F (SYSWAY) only Communications Data Length Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time C RUN/STOP Alarm Value 1 Set either of these parameters. Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 C C C C Alarm Value 2 Set either of these parameters. Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 C Alarm Value 3 C C Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 Set either of these parameters. MV Monitor (Heating) MV Monitor (Cooling) Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Initial Setting Level Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit Decimal Point For input type of analog C C Temperature Unit °C, °F For input type of temperature SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit Limit the set point PID ON/OFF Standard or Heating/Cooling For input type of temperature, standard control, or PID Program Pattern When assigning PID or control output to ON/OFF output Control Period (Heating) Control Period (Cooling) Set the ON/OFF output cycle. Direct/Reverse Operation C Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Hysteresis Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Parameters Basic Type Some parameters are not displayed depending on the model of the Controller and parameter settings. For details, refer to the E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156). Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 17 M M M M M M a1lt off a2lt off a3lt off prlt 3 sero off cjc on rlrv M M off colr red pv-b 5.0 M M M M M M M M M hsu on hsl off hsh 0.1 lba 0 lbal 8.0 lbab 3.0 out1 o out2 none M init off M M M M M M M M mspu off spru m rest a sb1n n-o sb2n n-o sb3n n-o hbu on hbl off hbh 0.1 M M M M ra1m 0 ra2m 0 ra2 0 ra1 0 rac 0 M M M M M spdp 4 odsl o pvdp on pvst off svst off M M cmov 0 inf 0.0 M M alfa 0.65 st-b 15.0 M M at-h 0.8 at-g 0.8 M lcma 20.0 M M M M M M a1on 0 a2on 0 a3 on 0 a1of 0 a2of 0 a3of 0 M M M M M ocu on ocl off och 0.1 M M M M M sub1 alm1 sub2 alm2 csel on t-u m alsp sp-m M pvrp 4 csca off M manl off M M M pvad off o-dp off ret off M istp ins1 M M mvse off amad off rt off M RT M M M M M M alt2 2 a lt3 2 tr-t off tr-h 100.0 tr-l 0.0 M o1-t 4-20 M M ev-m 1 ev-1 none ev-2 stop alh3 0.2 M alh2 0.2 M d. ref 0.2 5 Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level C Alarm 2 Type Alarm 3 Type Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Hysteresis C Transfer Output Type Linear output Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit Linear Current Output Linear output Number of Multi-SP Uses Two SPs: 1 Four SPs: 2 Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 M amov 0 M sqr off M Extraction of Square Root Enable Move to Advanced Function Setting Level: Displayed when initial setting/communications protect is set to 0. Move by setting password (−169). Parameter Initialization Multi-SP Uses SP Ramp Time Unit Standby Sequence Reset Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm HB ON/OFF Heater Burnout Latch C C Heater Burnout Hysteresis ST Stable Range AT Calculated Gain α C AT Hysteresis Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Input Digital Filter Additional PV Display MV Display Automatic Display Return Time Alarm 1 Latch Alarm 2 Latch Alarm 3 Latch Move to Protect Level Time Input Error Output Cold Junction Compensation Method MB Command Logic Switching PV Change Color PV Stable Band Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 1 OFF Delay Alarm 2 OFF Delay Alarm 3 OFF Delay Input Shift Type MV at Stop and Error Addition Auto/Manual Select Addition HS Alarm Use HS Alarm Latch HS Alarm Hysteresis LBA Detection Time C C LBA Level LBA Band Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Character Select Soak Time Unit Alarm SP Selection Manual MV Limit Enable PV Rate of Change Calculation Period Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment Heater Overcurrent Use Heater Overcurrent Latch Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Move to Calibration Level "PV/SP" Display Screen Selection MV Display Selection PV Decimal Point Display PV Status Display Function SV Status Display Function Display Refresh Period Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON/OFF Counter Reset 18 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Safety Precautions !CAUTION ✽1. An SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation, that does not exceed 30 V r.m.s. and 42.4 V peak or 60 VDC. ✽2. A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels. ✽3. The tightening torque for E5CN-U is 0.5 N·m. Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction or adverse affects on the performance or functionality of the product. Not doing so may occasionally result in faulty operation. 1. This product is specifically designed for indoor use only. Do not use this product in the following places: • Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment. • Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. • Places subject to direct sunlight. • Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas). • Places subject to intense temperature change. • Places subject to icing and condensation. • Places subject to vibration and large shocks. 2. Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature and humidity. Gang-mounting two or more Temperature Controllers, or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers, which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers. 3. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. Do not block the ventilation holes on the product. 4. Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals. 5. Use the specified size (M3.5, width 7.2 mm or less) crimped terminals for wiring. To connect bare wires to the terminal block, use stranded or solid copper wires with a gage of AWG24 to AWG14 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 2.081 mm2). (The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm.) Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be inserted into a single terminal. 6. Do not wire the terminals that are not used. 7. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the product’s terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to product wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils, or other equipment that have an inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product. Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. 8. Use this product within the rated load and power supply. 9. Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur. 10.Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display. Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock. Do not allow pieces of metal, wire clippings, or fine metallic shavings or filings from installation to enter the product. Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock, fire, or malfunction. Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise, minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. Do not leave the cable for the Support Software connected to the product. Malfunction may occur due to noise in the cable. Do not use the Temperature Controller or Conversion Cable if it is damaged. Doing so may occasionally result in minor electric shock or fire. Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a) This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally. b) More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the equipment before servicing the product. c) Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. ✽1 d) Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. ✽2 If the output relays are used past their life expectancy, contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur. Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions. Tighten the terminal screws to between 0.74 and 0.90 N·m. ✽3 Loose screws may occasionally result in fire. Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled. If they are not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents. A malfunction in the product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in property damage. To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the product, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line. A semiconductor is used in the output section of long-life relays. If excessive noise or surge is impressed on the output terminals, a short-circuit failure is likely to occur. If the output remains shorted, fire will occur due to overheating of the heater or other cause. Take measures in the overall system to prevent excessive temperature increase and to prevent fire from spreading. Do not allow pieces of metal or wire cuttings to get inside the cable connector for the Support Software. Failure to do so may occasionally result in minor electric shock, fire, or damage to equipment. Do not allow dust and dirt to collect between the pins in the connector on the Conversion Cable. Failure to do so may occasionally result in fire. When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case. If the body of the Temperature Controller is not inserted properly, faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or malfunction. When connecting the Control Output Unit to the socket, press it in until there is no gap between the Control Output Unit and the socket. Otherwise contact faults in the connector pins may occasionally result in fire or malfunction. Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 19 11.When executing self-tuning, turn ON power to the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the product. If power is turned ON to the product before turning ON power to the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. 12.A switch or circuit breaker must be provided close to the product. The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit. 13.Always turn OFF the power supply before pulling out the interior of the product, and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components. When inserting the interior of the product, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case. 14.Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with. Use standard grade alcohol. 15.Design the system (e.g., control panel) considering the 2 seconds of delay that the product's output to be set after power ON. 16.The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels. Take this into consideration when performing control. 17.The number of EEPROM write operations is limited. Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations. 18.Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from your body. 19.Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so may result in failure or malfunction. 20.Control outputs (for driving SSR) that are voltage outputs are not isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounded thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path, causing error in the measured temperature.) 21.When replacing the body of the Temperature Controller, check the condition of the terminals. If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire. If the terminals are corroded, replace the case as well. 22.Use suitable tools when taking the Temperature Controller apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Temperature Controller may cause injury. 23.Before connecting an Output Unit, confirm the specifications and thoroughly read relevant information in the datasheet and manual for the Temperature Controller. 24.Check the orientation of the connectors on the Conversion Cable before connecting the Conversion Cable. Do not force a connector if it does not connect smoothly. Using excessive force may damage the connector. 25.Do not place heavy object on the Conversion Cable, bend the cable past its natural bending radius, or pull on the cable with undue force. 26.Do not connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable while communications are in progress. Product faults or malfunction may occur. 27.Make sure that the Conversion Cable's metal components are not touching the external power terminals. 28.Do not touch the connectors on the Conversion Cable with wet hands. Electrical shock may result. 29.Before using infrared communications, correctly attach the enclosed Mounting Adapter to the cable for the Support Software. When connecting the infrared port on the cable to the Support Software into the Adapter, insert the connector to the specified line. Communications may not be possible if the connector is not connected properly. Precautions for Correct Use Service Life 1. Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges: Temperature: −10 to 55° C (with no icing or condensation) Humidity: 25% to 85% If the product is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature around the product. 2. The service life of electronic devices like Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components. Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller. 3. When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another, the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers. When providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors. Measurement Accuracy 1. When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. 2. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same. 3. Mount the product so that it is horizontally level. 4. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has been set correctly. Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any specification on their degree of protection or those with IP@0 are not waterproof. Front panel: IP66 Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 (E5CN-U: Front panel: IP50, rear case: IP20, terminals: IP00) Operating Precautions 1. It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON. Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Temperature Controllers in a sequence circuit. 2. When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. 3. When starting operation after the Temperature Controller has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning the Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.) 4. Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installing. These devices can cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance of the Controller. Others 1. The disk that is included with the Conversion Cable is designed for a computer CD-ROM driver. Never attempt to play the disk in a general-purpose audio player. 2. Do not connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable connector repeatedly over a short period of time. The computer may malfunction. 3. After connecting the Conversion Cable to the computer, check the COM port number before starting communications. The computer requires time to recognize the cable connection. This delay does not indicate failure. 4. Do not connect the Conversion Cable through a USB hub. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. 5. Do not use an extension cable to extend the Conversion Cable length when connecting to the computer. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. 20 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Mounting Mounting to a Panel For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function. 1. The Panel Mounting Adapter is also included with the E5CN-U. There is no waterproof packing included with the E5CN-U. 2. Insert the E5CN/E5CN-U into the mounting hole in the panel. 3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5CN/E5CN-U. 4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m. Mounting the Terminal Cover Make sure that the “UP” mark is facing up, and then attach the E53- COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Temperature Controller. Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case The Temperature Controller can be removed from the case to perform maintenance without removing the terminal leads. This is possible for only the E5CN, E5AN, and E5EN, and not for the E5CN-U. Check the specifications of the case and Temperature Controller before removing the Temperature Controller from the case. 1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks. 2. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case, and pull out the front panel slightly. Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you, without applying unnecessary force. 3. When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the E5CN toward the rear case into position. While pushing the E5CN into place, push down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place. Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case. Precautions when Wiring • Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise. • Use wires with a gage of AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm2) to AWG14 (cross-sectional area: 2.081 mm2) twistedpair cable (stripping length: 5 to 6 mm). • Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals. • Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.74 to 0.90 N·m, however the terminal screws on the E5CN-U must be tightened to a torque of 0.5 N·m. • Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5 screws. • Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so will result in malfunction or failure. E53-COV17 Terminal Cover (Accessory) Adapter (Accessory) E5CN E5CN-U Waterproof packing (Accessory) Panel Order the P2CF-11 or P3GA-11 Socket separately. For Front-mounting Socket (Panel mounting is also possible. 0.4 2.0 (1) (2) (3) (1) Flat-blade screwdriver (Unit: mm) Tool insertion hole 7.2 mm max. 7.2 mm max. Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 21 Warranty and Application Considerations Read and Understand This Catalog Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. Take all necessary steps to determine the suitability of the product for the systems, machines, and equipment with which it will be used. Know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this product. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Disclaimers PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability. CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. Consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased product. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. Cat. No. H04E-EN-01 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Phone: +31 23 568 13 00 Fax: +31 23 568 13 88 www.industrial.omron.eu ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. 02/2008 GO FOR EXPERIENCE The huge installed base of our easy-to-use control components, is proof of our experience. Our control products with a display provide the clearest visibility and a perfect read-out. Omron, your single source for all your control components needs. We have been supplying quality components for more than half a century 396 Control components 397 Control components Control components – Table of contents Temperature controllers 19 Product overview 398 Selection table 400 Basic temperature controllers K8AB-TH 402 E5L 403 E5C2 405 E5CSV 406 General purpose controllers E5_N 407 CelciuXº 410 Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers E5_N-H/E5_N-HT 412 E5_R/E5_R-T 414 Auxiliaries PRT1-SCU11/ES1B 416 ES1C 417 Power supplies 20 Product overview 418 Selection table 421 Single-phase S8VS 422 S8VM 423 S8JX-G 424 S8TS 425 S8T-DCBU-01/-02 426 Three-phase S8VT 427 Timers 21 Product overview 428 Selection table 430 Analogue solid state timers H3DS 432 H3DK 433 H3YN 434 H3CR 435 Digital timers H5CX 436 Motor timers H2C 437 Counters 22 Product overview 438 Selection table 440 Totalisers H7EC 442 H7ET 443 H7ER 444 Pre-set counters H8GN 445 H7CX 446 Cam positioners H8PS 447 Programmable relays 23 Product overview 448 Selection table 451 Programmable relays ZEN-10C 452 ZEN-20C 453 ZEN-8E 454 ZEN-PA 455 Digital panel indicators 24 Product overview 456 Selection table 458 1/32 DIN multi-function K3GN 460 1/8 DIN standard indicators K3MA-J, -L, -F 461 1/8 DIN advanced indicators – analogue input K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 462 1/8 DIN advanced indicators – digital input K3HB-C, -P, -R 464 How many loops are required? K8AB-TH E5C2 E5CSV Single digital display E5_N What type of output? No display Dual digital display Voltage (pulse) Voltage (pulse)/ relay/mA linear Relay Basic General purpose What type of output? What type of control is needed? Single loop E5L CELCIUXº – CONTROL AND CONNECTIVITY The CelciuX° is designed to handle complex temperature profiles thanks to Omron’s unique Gradient Temperature Control (GTC) algorithm and to offer easy program-less communication with Omron and third-party PLCs and HMI. Above all, the CelciuX° incorporates all “simple to use” clever temperature control technology, like 2-PID, disturbance control and various ways of tuning. • Interfaces to a wide range of industrial networks • Reduced engineering due to program-less communications, Smart Active Parts and Function Block Libraries • One unit handling various types of input, such as Pt, Thermocouple, mA, and V input Always the latest news on: www.omron-industrial.com/celciux CelciuXº – Multi Loop Temperature Controller 398 Temperature controllers Page 402 Page 405 Page 403 Page 406 Page 407 E5_N-HT SV programmer Triple digital display Advanced On-panel In-panel CelciuXº What type of mounting is required? Multi-loop E5_R Standard E5_R-T SV programmer E5_N-H Standard Triple digital display Process 399 19 Temperature controllers Page 412 Page 412 Page 414 Page 414 Page 410 400 Selection table Category Alarm controller Analogue/digital temperature controller Analogue temperature controller Compact digital temperature controller Digital temperature controller Selection criteria Model K8AB-TH E5L E5C2 E5CSV E5AN E5EN E5CN Type Basic General purpose Panel In-panel type In- & on-panel type On-panel type Loops – Single loop Size 22.5 mm wide 45x35 mm 1/16 DIN 1/16 DIN 1/4 DIN 1/8 DIN 1/16 DIN Control mode ON/OFF        PID – –  *1 *1 P only – – – – 2-PID *2 *2 2-PID is Omron´s easy to use high performance PID algorithm – – –     Operation *3 *3 H = heat, H/C = heat or cool, H & C = heat and/or cool – H/C H H/C H & C H & C H & C Valve Control *4 *4 Valve control = relay up and down – – – – – – – Features Accuracy ±2% ±1ºC – ±0.5% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% Auto-tuning – – –     Self-tuning – – –     Transfer output – – – –    Remote input – – – – – – – Number of alarms 1 – – 1 3 3 3 Heater alarm – – – – *5 *5 *5 IP rating front panel IP20 IP40 IP40 IP65 IP66 IP66 IP66 Display Rotary switch SV dial 3 digit LCD SV dial Single 3.5 digit Dual 4 digit (colour change) Dual 4 digit (colour change) Dual 4 digit (colour change) Supply voltage 110/240 VAC        24 VAC/VDC  – –     Comms *6 RS-232 – – – –   – RS-485 – – – –    Event IP  – – –    QLP port *7 – – – –    DeviceNet – – – – – – – Modbus – – – –    Control output Relay        SSR – – – – – – – Voltage (pulse) – –      Linear voltage – – – – – – – Linear current – – – –    Input type – linear mA – – – –    mV – – – –    V – – – –    Input type – thermocouple K  –      J  – –     T  – –     E  – – –    L – –      U – – –     N – – –     R  – –     S  – – –    B  – – –    W – – – –    PLII  – – –    Input type – RTD Pt100  –      JPt100 – – –     THE – sensor provided   – – – Page 402 403 405 406 407 407 407 Temperature controllers 401 19 Temperature controllers *5. Heater alarm = heater burnout & SSR failure detection *6. PROFIBUS-DP communication option via PRT1-SCU11 for E5_N(-H), E5_R, CelciuX°. More information on Page 416 *7. QLP: Quick Link Port to connected TC to PC using the smart USB cable E58-CIFQ1 *8. 3 Alarms per loop, 2 and 4 loop models are available. Digital temperature controller Digital process controller E5GN CelciuXº E5CN-H E5EN-H/AN-H E5_N-HT E5AR E5ER E5_R-T General purpose Modular Universal SV Programmer Advanced SV Programmer On-panel type In-panel type On-panel type Same specification as corresponding E5_N-H On-panel type Same specifications as corresponding E5_R. Single loop Multi-loop Single loop Multi-loop 1/32 DIN 31×96 mm 1/16 DIN 1/4, 1/8 DIN 1/4 DIN 1/8 DIN       – – – – – –       H & C H & C H & C H & C H & C H & C – – –    ±0.3% ±0.5% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1%           – –       – – –    3 3 3 3 4 4 *5 *8 *5 *5 – – IP66 – IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 Dual 4 digit (colour change) LED Dual 5 digit (colour change) Triple 5 digit (colour change) Triple 5 digit Triple 5 digit  –           –  –  – –                   –  – –          –     – –   – –       – –   – –                 – –                                                                             – –           – – – – – – – – 407 410 412 375 414 402 K8AB-TH Basic temperature controllers Protect your heating application This temperature monitoring relay was designed specially for monitoring abnormal temperatures to prevent excessive temperature increase and to protect equipment. K8AB-TH provides temperature monitoring in slim design with a width of just 22.5 mm. • Simple function settings using DIP switch • Selectable alarm latch and SV setting protection • Multi-input support for thermocouple or Pt100 sensor input • Changeover relay: fail-safe selectable • Alarm status identification with LED Ordering information Specifications Input type Temperature setting range Setting unit Supply voltage Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code Thermocouple/ Pt100 0 to 399°C/F 1°C/F 100 to 240 VAC 90x22.5x100 K8AB-TH11S AC100-240 24 VAC/VDC K8AB-TH11S AC/DC24 Thermocouple 0 to 1,800°C 0 to 3,200 °F *1 *1 Setting range depending on sensor type selected 10°C/F 100 to 240 VAC K8AB-TH12S AC100-240 24 VAC/VDC K8AB-TH12S AC/DC24 Item 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC Allowable voltage range 85 to 110% of power supply voltage Power consumption 5 VA max. 2 W max. (24 VDC), 4 VA max. (24 VAC) Sensor inputs K8AB-TH11S Thermocouple: K, J, T, E; platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100 K8AB-TH12S Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, B, R, S, PLII Output relay One SPDT relay (3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load) External inputs (for latch setting) Contact input ON: 1 k2 max., OFF: 100 k2 min. Non-contact input ON residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Leakage current: Approx. 10 mA Setting method Rotary switch setting (set of three switches) Indicators Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (ALM): Red LED Other functions Alarm mode (upper limit/lower limit), output normally ON/OFF selection, output latch, setting protection, fail-safe operation selectable, temperature unit°C/°F Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing); for 3-year guarantee: -10 to 50°C Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Setting accuracy ±2% of full scale Hysteresis width 2°C Output relay Resistive load 3 A at 250 VAC (cos= 1), 3 A at 30 VDC (L/R = 0 ms) Inductive load 1 A at 250 VAC (cos= 0.4), 1 A at 30 VDC (L/R = 7 ms) Minimum load 10 mA at 5 VDC Maximum contact voltage 250 VAC Maximum contact current 3 A AC Maximum switching capacity 1,500 VA Mechanical life 10,000,000 operations Electrical life Make: 50,000 times, break: 30,000 times Sampling cycle 500 ms Weight 130 g Degree of protection IP20 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number or writes: 200,000) Safety standards Approved standards EN 61010-1 Application standards EN 61326 and EN 61010-1 (pollution level 2, overvoltage category II) Crimp terminals Two solid wires of 2.5 mm2 or two ferrules of 1.5 mm2 with insulation sleeves can be tightened together Case colour Munsell 5Y8/1 (ivory) Case material ABS resin (self-extinguishing resin) Mounting Mounted to DIN-rail or with M4 screws Size in mm (HxWxD) 90x22.5x100 403 19 Temperature controllers E5L Basic temperature controllers Ideal for simple built-in control This compact but powerful ON/OFF controller is provided with a sensor and is available in an analogue or digital version. Mounting is in-panel with a standard PTF14A-E socket. • Available in 4 application specific ranges. • Sensor provided to enable immediate usage. • High capacity output of 10 A at 250 VAC for direct load switching. • Simple operation and setting. Even simpler with digital model. Ordering information Options (Order separately) Model Size Type Control Method Control Output Order code E5L-A_ 45×35 mm Plug-in ON/OFF operation Relay E5L-A-30-20 E5L-A-0-50 E5L-A-0-100 E5L-A-100-200 E5L-C_ 45×35 mm Plug-in ON/OFF operation Relay E5L-C-30-20 E5L-C-0-100 E5L-C-100-200 Sockets Type Order code Front-connecting Socket PTF14A PTF14A-E E5L Basic temperature controllers 404 Specifications * The accuracy of the accessory thermistor is not included. Ratings Item Model E5L-A_ E5L-C_ Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption Approx. 3 VA Inputs Element-interchangeable thermistor Control method ON/OFF control Control output SPDT contacts, 250 VAC, 10 A, cos = 1 (resistive load) SPST-NO contacts, 250 VAC, 10 A, cos = 1 (resistive load) Setting method Analogue setting Digital settings using keys on front panel Indication method No display LCD digital display (character height: 12 mm) Other functions Setting protection (key protection) Input shift Direct/reverse operation Indication accuracy – ±(1°C + 1 digit) max.* Setting accuracy – ±(1°C + 1 digit) max.* Hysteresis -30 to 20°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 2.5°C (variable) 0 to 50°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 4°C (variable) 0 to 100°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 4°C (variable) 100 to 200°C models: Approx. 0.7 to 4°C (variable) 1 to 9°C (in increments of 1°C) Repeat accuracy 1% FS max – Minimum scale (standard scale) -30 to 20°C models and 0 to 50°C models: 5°C 0 to 100°C models and 100 to 200°C models: 10°C – Influence of temperature – ±([1% of PV or 2°C, whichever is greater]+ 1 digit) max. Influence of voltage – Sampling period – 2 s Insulation resistance 100 MW max. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min (between charged terminals and uncharged metallic parts, between power supply terminals and input terminals, between power supply terminals and output terminals, and between input terminals and output terminals) Vibration (malfunction) Frequency of 10 to 55 Hz, 0.5-mm double amplitude for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration (destruction) Frequency of 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm double amplitude for 2 h each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock (malfunction) 147 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions 100 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions Shock (destruction) 294 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions Electrical life expectancy (control output relay) 100,000 operations min (at maximum applicable load) Memory protection – Non-volatile memory (100,000 write operations) Weight (Thermostat) Approx. 80 g (Thermostat only) Degree of protection Front panel: IP40, Terminals: IP00 Approved standards – Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category II EMC Directives EMI: EN61326-1 Radiated EMI: EN55011 Group 1 Class A Conducted EMI: EN55011 Group 1 Class A EMS: EN61326-1 Electrostatic discharge immunity: EN61000-4-2 Electromagnetic field strength immunity: EN61000-4-3 Burst noise immunity: EN61000-4-4 Conducted disturbance immunity: EN61000-4-6 Surge immunity: EN61000-4-5 Voltage dip and power interruption immunity: EN61000-4-11 405 19 Temperature controllers E5C2 Basic temperature controllers Easy-to-use, basic temperature controller with analogue dial setting Omron's basic ON/OFF or PD controller features an analogue setting dial. This compact, low-cost controller has a setting accuracy of 2% of full scale. It incorporates a plug-in socket allowing for DIN-rail or flush mounting. • Compact, cost-effective controller • Control mode: ON/OFF or PD • Control output: relay • Power supply: 100-120 / 200-240VAC • Thermocouple K: 0 to 1200°C, L: 0 to 400°C, Pt100: -50 to 200°C Ordering information Note: Specify either 100/110/120 VAC or 200/220/240 VAC when ordering. Accessories Specifications Setting method Indication method Control mode Output Order code Thermocouple Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 Thermistor THE K (CA) chromel vs. alumel L (IC) iron vs. constantan Analogue setting No indication ON/OFF Relay E5C2-R20K E5C2-R20L-D E5C2-R20P-D E5C2-R20G P Relay E5C2-R40K E5C2-R40L-D E5C2-R40P-D Input ranges Thermocouple *1 *1 Values in ( ) are the minimum unit. Platinum resistance thermometer Thermistor *2 *2 Values in ( ) are the thermistor resistive value. K (CA) chromel vs. alumel L (IC) iron vs. constantan Pt100 THE °C 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10), 0 to 600 (20), 0 to 800 (20), 0 to 1,000 (25), 0 to 1,200 (25) 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10) 5 to 450 (10) -50 to 50 (2), -20 to 80 (2), 0 to 50 (1), 0 to 100 (2), 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10) -50 to 50 (2) (6 k at 0°C), 0 to 100 (2) (6 k at 0°C), 50 to 150 (2) (30 k at 0°C) Functions Order code Front connecting socket with finger protection P2CF-08-E Back connecting socket (for flush mounting) P3G-08 Finger protection cover (for P3G-08) Y92A-48G Protective front cover (IP66) Y92A-48B Supply voltage 100/110/120 VAC or 200/220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Thermocouple input type K, L (with sensor break detection) RTD input type Pt100, THE Control mode ON/OFF or P control Setting method analogue setting Output Relay, SPDT, 3 A at 250 VAC Life expectancy Electrical: 100,000 operations min. Setting accuracy ±2% FS max. Hysteresis Approx. 0.5% FS (fixed) Proportional band 3% FS (fixed) Reset range 5 ±1% FS min. Control period 20 s IP Rating front panel IP40 (IP66 cover available) IP rating terminals IP00 Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x96 406 E5CSV Basic temperature controllers The easy way to perfect temperature control This multi-range 1/16 DIN controller with alarm function offers field-selectable PID control or ON/OFF control. The large, single display shows process value, direction of deviation from set point, output and alarm status. • All setting field configurable with switches • Multi-input (Thermocouple/Pt100) • Clearly visible 3.5 digit display with character height of 13.5 mm • Control output: relay, voltage (for driving SSR) • ON/OFF or 2-PID control with auto-tuning and self-tuning Ordering information Note:Other models are available on request. Accessories Specifications Size in mm Supply voltage Number of alarm points Control output Order code 1/16 DIN 48Hx48Wx78D 100 to 240 VAC 1 Relay E5CSV-R1T-500 Voltage (for driving SSR) E5CSV-Q1T-500 24 VAC/VDC 1 Relay E5CSV-R1TD-500 Voltage (for driving SSR) E5CSV-Q1TD-500 Type Order code Hard protective cover Y92A-48B Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC/VDC (depending on model) Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption 5 VA Sensor input Multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer): K, J, L, T, U, N, R, Pt100, JPt100 Control output Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA (with short-circuit protection circuit) Control method ON/OFF or 2-PID (with auto-tune and self-tune) Alarm output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 1 A (resistive load) Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys (functionality set-up with DIP switch) Indication 7-segment digital display (character height: 13.5 mm) and deviation indicators Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Setting/indication accuracy ±0.5% of indication value or ±1 °C, whichever is greater ±1 digit max. Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control) 0.2% FS (0.1% FS for multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer) models) Proportional band (P) 1 to 999°C (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Integral time (I) 0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Derivative time (D) 0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Control period 2/20 s Sampling period 500 ms Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations min. (relay output models) Weight Approx. 120 g (controller only) Degree of protection Front panel: Equivalent to IP66; rear case: IP20; terminals: IP00 Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 1,000,000) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x78 407 19 Temperature controllers E5_N General purpose controllers Compact and intelligent general purpose controllers The E5_N general purpose line of temperature controllers is available in 4 standard DIN formats. They all feature a high intensity dual LCD display with a wide viewing angle. The whole series features 3 colour PV change for easy status recognition. • Control mode: ON/OFF or 2-PID • Control output: relay, hybrid relay, voltage (pulse) or linear current • Power supply: 100/240 VAC or 24 VDC/VAC • Easy PC connection for parameter cloning, setting and tuning • Clear and intuitive set-up and operation Ordering information Note:- Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Hybrid relay (long life relay) electrical life 1,000,000 operations - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Heater alarm / HA = heater burnout + SSR short detection + SSR overcurrent - Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering E5GN Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x24 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 1 relay E5GN-R1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-R1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-R103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R103TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-R1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R1BTD-C AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) – E5GN-Q1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-Q103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q103TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-Q1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q1BTD-C AC/DC24 current (linear) – E5GN-C1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-C103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-C103TD-C-FLK AC100-240 2 Event inputs E5GN-C1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1BTD-C AC/DC24 relay – 2 relay E5GN-R2T-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-R203T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R203TD-C-FLK AC100-240 2 Event inputs E5GN-R2BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2BTD-C AC/DC24 Heater Alarm E5GN-R2HT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2HTD-C AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) – E5GN-Q2T-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-Q203T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q203TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-Q2BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2BTD-C AC/DC24 Heater Alarm E5GN-Q2HT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2HTD-C AC/DC24 analogue (mA/V) relay RS-485 communication 1 relay E5GN-R103L-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R103LD-FLK AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) RS-485 communication E5GN-Q103L-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q103LD-FLK AC/DC24 current (linear) – E5GN-C1L-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1LD-C AC/DC24 Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x48 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 2 relays E5CN-R2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-R2MTD-500 AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-Q2MTD-500 AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-C2MTD-500 AC/DC24 hybrid relay E5CN-Y2MT-500 AC100-240 – analogue (mA/V) relay E5CN-R2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-R2MLD-500 AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-Q2MLD-500 AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-C2MLD-500 AC/DC24 hybrid relay E5CN-Y2ML-500 AC100-240 n/a In-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay 2 relays E5CN-R2TU AC100-240 E5CN-R2TDU AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2TU AC100-240 E5CN-Q2TDU AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2TU AC100-240 E5CN-C2TDU AC/DC24 analogue (mA/V) relay E5CN-R2LU AC100-240 – voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2LU AC100-240 – linear current E5CN-C2LU AC100-240 – E5_N General purpose controllers 408 Accessories E5CN option boards (One slot available in each instrument; do no fit in E5CN-U types) Note: Options with "N2" in the code, only fit in E5CN produced after January 2008 (marked N6 on the box) E5CN series optional tools Option Order code 2 Event inputs – – E53-CNBN2 – voltage (pulse) E53-CNQBN2 heater alarm – E53-CNHBN2 – power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNPBN2 RS-485 serial communications (CompowayF/ Modbus RTU) – – E53-CN03N2 – voltage (pulse) E53-CNQ03N2 heater alarm – E53-CNH03N2 3-phase HA – E53-CNHH03N2 – power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNP03N2 – heater alarm voltage (pulse) E53-CNQHN2 3-phase HA voltage (pulse) E53-CNQHHN2 heater alarm power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNPHN2 Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo PC based parameter cloning software (free) ThermoMini Standard 11 pin socket for E5CN-_ _ _ U type P2CF-11-E E5_N General purpose controllers 409 19 Temperature controllers Note:- Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Hybrid relay (long life relay) electrical life 1,000,000 operations - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Heater alarm / HA = heater burnout + SSR short detection + SSR overcurrent E5AN/-EN option boards (one slot available in each instrument) E5AN/-EN series optional tools Specifications Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code (includes supply voltage indication) 48x96 mm model 96x96 mm model On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 3 relays E5EN-R3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 heater alarm E5EN-R3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 3-phase heater alarm E5EN-R3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-R3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-R3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3YMT-500-N AC100-240 power supply E5EN-R3PMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3PMT-500-N AC100-240 voltage (pulse) – E5EN-Q3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 heater alarm E5EN-Q3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 3-phase heater alarm E5EN-Q3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-Q3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-Q3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3YMT-500-N AC100-240 power supply E5EN-Q3PMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3PMT-500-N AC100-240 linear current – E5EN-C3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-C3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-C3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-C3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-C3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3YMT-500-N AC100-240 analogue (mA/V) relay – E5EN-R3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3ML-500-N AC100-240 heater alarm E5EN-R3HML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HML-500-N AC100-240 voltage (pulse) – E5EN-Q3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3ML-500-N AC100-240 heater alarm E5EN-Q3HML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HML-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-Q3YML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3YML-500-N AC100-240 linear current – E5EN-C3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3ML-500-N AC100-240 Option Order code RS-232C communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN01 RS-485 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN03 event input E53-AKB Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo PC based parameter cloning software (free) ThermoMini Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC, 50/60Hz; 24 VDC Heater alarm yes, optional, choice of 1 or 3 phase Thermocouple input type K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W or PL II RTD input type Pt100, JPt100 Linear input type mV or "T" models mA and V on "L" models Control mode ON/OFF, 2-PID (heat or heat/cool) Accuracy Thermocouple ± 0.3% (E5CN-U ± 1%) Platinum resistance ± 0.2% Analogue input ± 0.2% FS Auto-tuning yes, 40% and 100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: automatic cool gain adjustment Self-tuning yes RS-232C Only for AN/-EN: Optional, Protocol CompowayF or Modbus freely selectable RS-485 optional, CompowayF or Modbus selectable Event input optional QLP port (USB connection PC) yes Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP Rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 250 ms 410 CelciuXº General purpose controllers CelciuXº - Multi-Loop temperature control – Control and Connectivity CelciuXº is designed to handle complex temperature profiles thanks to Omron’s unique Gradient temperature Control (GTC) algorithm and to offer easy program-less communication with Omron and third-party PLCs and HMI. Above all, CelciuXº incorporates all “simple to use” clever temperature control technology, like 2-PID, disturbance control and various ways of tuning. • Interfaces to a wide range of industrial networks • Reduced engineering due to Program-less communications, Smart Active Parts and Function Block Libraries • Available with screw terminals and screw-less clamp terminals • One unit handling various types of input, such as Pt, Thermocouple, mA, and V input • Gradient Temperature Control (GTC) Ordering information Accessories Current transformer Communications and cables Type Control points Control outputs Auxiliary outputs Other functions Terminal Order code Basic unit 2 2 voltage (puls) 2 transistor (NPN) *1 *1 For heating/cooling control applications, the auxiliary outputs on the 2-point models are used for cooling control. On the 4-point models, heating/cooling control can be performed for two input points only. 2 CT input *2 + 2 event input *2 When using the heater burnout alarm, purchase a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) separately. M3 screws EJ1N-TC2A-QNHB Basic unit 2 2 voltage (puls) 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 CT input *2 + 2 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC2B-QNHB Basic unit 2 2 current 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 event input M3 screws EJ1N-TC2A-CNB Basic unit 2 2 current 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC2B-CNB Basic unit 4 4 voltage (puls) – – M3 screws EJ1N-TC4A-QQ Basic unit 4 4 voltage (puls) – – Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC4B-QQ High function unit – – 4 transistor (NPN) 4 event input M3 screws EJ1N-HFUA-NFLK High function unit – – 4 transistor (NPN) 4 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-HFUB-NFLK DeviceNet unit – – – – Screw connector EJ1N-HFUB-DRT End unit *3 *3 An End unit is always required for connection to a Basic unit or an HFU. An HFU cannot operate without a Basic unit. – – 2 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK End unit *3 – – 2 transistor (NPN) – Removable Connector EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK Type Control points Control outputs Auxiliary outputs Other functions Terminal Order code Basic unit 2 (GTC) 2 voltage (puls)*1 *1 Heating/cooling control is not supported for gradient temperature control. 2 transistor (NPN) 2 CT input*2 *2 When using the heater burnout alarm, use a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) (sold separately). M3 screws EJ1G-TC2A-QNH Basic unit 2 (GTC) 2 voltage (puls)*1 2 transistor (NPN) 2 CT input*2 Screw-less clamp EJ1G-TC2B-QNH Basic unit 4 (GTC) 4 voltage (puls)*1 – – M3 screws EJ1G-TC4A-QQ Basic unit 4 (GTC) 4 voltage (puls)*1 – – Screw-less clamp EJ1G-TC4B-QQ High function unit – (GTC) – 4 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1G-HFUA-NFLK High function unit – (GTC) – 4 transistor (NPN) – Screw-less clamp EJ1G-HFUB-NFLK End unit*3 *3 An End-unit (EDU) is always required to connect an HFU and or a Basic TC unit for Communications and Power supply. A GTC (Gradient Temperature Control) basic TC unit always requires a GTC HFU unit. – – 2 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK End unit*3 – – 2 transistor (NPN) – Removable Connector EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK Diameter Order code 5.8 dia. E54-CT1 12.0 dia. E54-CT3 Description Order code G3ZA connecting cable 5 meter EJ1C-CBLA050 USB programming cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 PROFIBUS Gateway PRT1-SCU11 CelciuXº General purpose controllers 411 19 Temperature controllers Specifications Item Type EJ1_-TC2 EJ1_-TC4 Power supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated voltage Power consumption 4 W max. (at maximum load) 5 W max. (at maximum load) Input (see note)*1 *1 Inputs are fully multi-input. Therefore, platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple, infrared thermosensor, and analogue input can be selected. Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PLII ES1B Infrared Thermosensor: 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, 140 to 260°C. Analogue input: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 Input impedance Current input: 150max., voltage input: 1 M min. Control outputs Voltage output Output voltage: 12 VDC ±15%, max. load current: 21 mA (PNP models with short-circuit protection circuit) Transistor output Max. operating voltage: 30 V, max. load current: 100 mA – Current output Current output range: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA DC Load: 500  max. (including transfer output) (Resolution: Approx: 2,800 for 4 to 20 mA DC, approx. 3,500 for 0 to 20 mA DC) – Event inputs Input points 2 – Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF. 100 k min. – Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. – Outflow current: approx. 4 mA per point – Number of input and control points Input points: 2, control points: 2 Input points: 4, control points: 4 Setting method Via communications Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID (with autotuning, selftuning, Heat & Cool autotuning and non-linear cool output selection) Other functions Two-point input shift, digital input filter, remote SP, SP ramp, manual manipulated variable, manipulated variable limiter, interference overshoot adjustment, loop burnout alarm, RUN/STOP, banks, I/O allocations, etc. Alarm output 2 points via End unit Communication RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet Size in mm (WxHxD) 31x96x109 Weight 180 g Ambient temperature range Operating -10°C to 55°C, Storage -25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity range Operating. 25% to 85% (with no condensation) 412 E5_N-H/E5_N-HT Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers Universal compact digital process controllers The E5_N-H series of process controllers take the proven concept of the general purpose E5_N series to a process level. Main features of the E5_N-H series are universal inputs, process outputs and options such as transfer output, remote setpoint and setvalue programmer. • Control mode: ON/OFF or 2-PID, Valve control on EN-H/AN-H • Control output: relay, voltage (pulse), SSR, linear current and voltage • Power supply: 100/240 VAC or 24 VDC/VAC • Easy PC connection for parameter cloning, setting and tuning • Clear and intuitive set-up and operation Ordering information Note: - Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Linear voltage output: 0 to 10 V Accessories E5CN-H option boards (One slot available in each instrument) Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x48 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel Universal TC/Pt/mV mA/V Relay output – 3 software alarms 2 SUB outputs E5CN-HR2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HR2MD-500 AC/DC24 Voltage (pulse) E5CN-HQ2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HQ2MD-500 AC/DC24 Current output E5CN-HC2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HC2MD-500 AC/DC24 Linear voltage output E5CN-HV2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HV2MD-500 AC/DC24 Relay output SV programmer (8 programs of 32 segments E5CN-HTR2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTR2MD-500 AC/DC24 Voltage (pulse) E5CN-HTQ2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTQ2MD-500 AC/DC24 Current output E5CN-HTC2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTC2MD-500 AC/DC24 Linear voltage output E5CN-HTV2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTV2MD-500 AC/DC24 Option Order code Event inputs E53-CNBN2 Event inputs Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CNQBN2 Event inputs Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs Transfer output E53-CNBFN2 Communications RS-232C Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CN01N2 Communications RS-232C E53-CNQ01N2 Communications RS-232C Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH01N2 Communications RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications RS-485 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CNQO3N2 Communications RS-485 Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH03N2 Communications RS-485 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHH03N2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) Transfer output E53-CNQFN2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNQHN2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNQHHN2 E5_N-H/E5_N-HT Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers 413 19 Temperature controllers Note: - All E5EN-H/AN-H have 2 event inputs - All E5EN-H/AN-H have Remote Setpoint 4 to 20 mA input Specifications E5CN-H/EN-H/AN-H E5AN-H/EN-H output option boards (2 slots available in E5_N-HAA__-500 models: SS models have 2 fixed SSR output modules) E5AN-H/EN-H option boards (one slot available in each instrument) E5AN-H/EN-H series optional tools Control method Auxiliary output Control output 1/2 Heater burnout Transfer output Order code (includes supply voltage indication) 96x96 mm model 48x96 mm model Basic 2 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots 1-phase E5AN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 none fitted, 2 slots 3-phase 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 3 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 Valve controller 2 alarm relays 2 relay output fitted E5AN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24 SV programmer (8 programs of 32 segments 2 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots 1-phase E5AN-HTAA2HBM-500 E5EN-HTAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HTAA2HBMD-500 E5EN-HTAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 3-phase 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HTAA2HHBFM-500 E5EN-HTAA2HHBFM-500 E5AN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500 E5EN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500 3 alarm relays E5AN-HTAA3BFM-500 E5EN-HTAA3BFM-500 E5AN-HTAA3BFMD-500 E5EN-HTAA3BFMD-500 SV programmer and valve controller 2 alarm relays 2 relay output fitted E5AN-HTPRR2BM-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BM-500 E5AN-HTPRR2BMD-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BMD-500 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HTPRR2BFM-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BFM-500 E5AN-HTPRR2BFMD-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BFMD-500 Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC, 50/60Hz; 24 VDC Sensor input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V Control mode ON/OFF, 2-PID and valve (PRR) Accuracy Thermocouple: (± 0.1% of indicated value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ± digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (± 0.1% of indicated value or ± 0.5°C, whichever is greater) ± 1 digit max. Analogue input: ± 0.1% FS ± 1 digit max. Auto-tuning yes, 40% and 100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: automatic cool gain adjustment Self-tuning yes RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 optional, CompowayF or Modbus selectable Event input Optional (Standard 2 event input in EN-H/AN-H) QLP port (USB connection PC) yes Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP Rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 60 ms Option Order code Relay E53-RN Voltage (pulse) PNP 12VDC E53-QN Voltage (pulse) NPN 12VDC E53-Q3 Voltage (pulse) NPN 24VDC E53-Q4 Linear 4 to 20 mA E53-C3N Linear 0 to 20 mA E53-C3DN Linear 0 to 10 V E53-V34N Linear 0 to 5 V E53-V35N Option Order code RS-232C communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN01 RS-422 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN02 RS-485 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN03 event input E53-AKB Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 414 E5_R/E5_R-T Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers Fast, accurate and equipped for application specific needs The E5_R series provides you with high accuracy inputs (0.01°C for Pt100) and a 50 ms sample and control cycle for all four loops. Its unique Disturbance Overshoot Reduction Adjustment ensures solid, robust control. • Easy and clear read-out thanks to bright Liquid Crystal Display • Exceptional versatility – multi-loop control, cascade control, and valve control • Easy integration with DeviceNet, PROFIBUS or Modbus • SV programmer optional, 32 programs with up to 256 segments Ordering information Note:- Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering. - Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR) - max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP - max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool - 1, 2 or 4 = number of analogue universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve - QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN Functions Loops Input Output Comms Order code analogue Event Control Alarm 96x96 mm Supply voltage standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5AR-Q4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-QC43DB-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43DW-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-QQ43DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 4 4 4 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-QQ43DWW-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5AR-C4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43DW-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 4 4 4 4 C+C+C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-CC43DWW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 4R – E5AR-PR4DF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-PRQ43DF-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-Q4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-QC4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-QQ4W-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-C4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 4 4 – 4 C+C+C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-CC4WW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 2 R+R 4R DeviceNet E5AR-PR4F-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-PRQ4F-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5AR-TQ4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5AR-TC4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-TQ43B-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-TC43B-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 2 QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQE3MB-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 2 C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TCE3MB-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 4 QC+Q+C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQCE3MB-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-TQ43DW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-TC43DW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer max 2 2 8 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQQE3MW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 4 4 8 4 C+C+C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TCCE3MWW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 4 4 8 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQQE3MWW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 4R – E5AR-TPR4DF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 8 4 R+R+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TPRQE3MF-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 E5_R/E5_R-T Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers 415 19 Temperature controllers Note:- Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering. - Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR) - max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP - max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool - 1, 2 or 4 = number of analogue universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve - QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN Accessories E5_R/E5_R-T optional tools Specifications Functions Loops Input Output Comms Order code analogue Event Control Alarm 48x96 mm Supply voltage standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5ER-Q4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-Q43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 2 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R RS-485 E5ER-QC43B-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 6 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-QT3DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-QT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5ER-C4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5ER-C43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-CT3DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-CT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 2T – E5ER-PRTDF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-PRQ43F-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 2T DeviceNet E5ER-QTB-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 2 QC+Q 2T DeviceNet E5ER-QTW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 2T DeviceNet E5ER-CTB-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 2 C+C 2T DeviceNet E5ER-CTW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 2 R+R 2T DeviceNet E5ER-PRTF-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5ER-TQ4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5ER-TC4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-TQC43B-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-TQT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-TCT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 2T – E5ER-TPRTDF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot – 3 R+R + QC 4R RS-485 E5ER-TPRQ43F-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 Terminal covers Order code Terminal cover for E5AR E53-COV14 Terminal cover for E5ER E53-COV15 Option Order code PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 Thermocouple input type K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W RTD input type Pt100 Linear input type mA, V Control mode 2-PID or ON/OFF control Accuracy ±0.1% FS Auto-tuning yes RS-485 optional Event input optional Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 50 ms Size in mm (HxWxD) E5ER: 96x48x110 E5AR: 96x96x110 416 PRT1-SCU11 Auxiliaries Omron’s intelligent PROFIBUS and CompoWay/F gateway This gateway supports all CompoWay/F equipped products, including temperature controllers, digital panel indicators, etc. It can also be used for connecting MCW151-E and E5_K series. • Cost-effectively integrates basic instruments into a PROFIBUS network • Requires no complex protocol conversion writing • Has function blocks for drag-and-drop configuration • Connects up to 15 instruments to a single PROFIBUS point Ordering information Supports all CompoWay/F equipped units, but has "drag-and-drop" function blocks for • E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5GN • E5ZN and CelciuXº (EJ1) • E5AR/E5ER • E5AK/E5EK Specifications ES1B Achieve low-cost measurements with an infrared thermosensor This infrared thermosensor provides an accurate, stable and cost-effective way to measure the temperature of objects. It behaves just like a standard K-type thermocouple, which enables it to operate with any temperature controller or alarm unit. • Cost-effective infrared thermosensor • Contactless, meaning no deterioration, unlike thermocouples • 4 temperature ranges available: 10-70°C, 60-120°C, 115-165°C and 140-260°C • Response speed 300 ms Ordering information Dimensions (unit: mm) Specifications Name Order code PROFIBUS remote terminal serial communications unit PRT1-SCU11 Storage temperature -20 to +75°C Ambient temperature 0 to 55°C Ambient humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing) EMC compliance EN 50081-2, EN 61131-2 Power supply +24 VDC (+10%/-15%) Current consumption 80 mA (typical) Weight 125 g (typical) Communication interface RS-485 based PROFIBUS-DP RS-422A Host link RS-485 CompoWay/F RS-232C Peripheral Port supporting connection to thermotools Size in mm (HxWxD) 90x40x65 Appearance and sensing characteristics Specification Order code 10 to 70°C ES1B 10-70C 60 to 120°C ES1B 60-120C 115 to 165°C ES1B 115-165C 140 to 260°C ES1B 140-260C 2 dia. 20 dia. 2 mm 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm 40 dia. 60 dia. 14.2 dia. 36.5 17.8 15 6.5 44.5 3,000 ABS resin PVC-covered (−25°C to 70°C) Polyolefin tube Screw M18×1.0 Green, output + White, output − Orange, power + Shield, power − Power supply voltage 12/24 VDC Current consumption 20 mA max. Accuracy ±5°C ±2% PV or ±2°C, whichever is larger ±10°C ±4% PV or ±4°C, whichever is larger ±30°C ±6% PV or ±6°C, whichever is larger ±40°C ±8% PV or ±8°C, whichever is larger Reproducibility ±1% PV or ±1°C, whichever is larger Temperature drift 0.4°C/°C max. Receiver element Thermopile Response speed Approximately 300 ms at response rate of 63% Operating temperature -25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation) Allowable ambient humidity 35 to 85% Degree of protection IP65 Size in mm head: 17.8 dia.×44.5 (screw M18×1.0), cable 3,000 417 19 Temperature controllers ES1C Auxiliaries Achieve Superior Environmental Resistance and a Wide Measurement Range of 0 to 400°C. This gateway supports all CompoWay/F equipped products, including temperature controllers, digital panel indicators, etc. It can also be used for connecting MCW151-E and E5_K series. • Flexible placement with slim cylindrical shape and long focus with a distance of 500 mm and area diameter of 80 mm. • The SUS body and silicon lens resist ambient operating temperatures of up to 70×C and resist dust and water to the equivalent of IP67. • Fast measurement with high-speed response of 100 ms/90%. • Strong resistance to noise with output of 4 to 20 mA. Ordering information Measurement Range Ratings and Characteristics Dimensions (unit: mm) Specification (measuring temperature range) Order code 0 to 400°C ES1C-A40 110 dia. 80 dia. 70 dia. 300 500 1000 [mm] Note: The measurement range is the measurement diameter for an optical response of 90%. Make sure that the actual object to be measured is sufficiently larger than the measurement diameters in the above figure. Item Model ES1C Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC Operating voltage range 90% to 110% of rated voltage Current consumption 70 mA max. Measuring temperature range 0 to 400C Measurement accuracy 0 to 200C: 2C, 201 to 400C: 1% (emissivity: 0.95) Response time 100 ms/90% Reproducibility 1C of reading value Measurement wavelength 8 to 14 m Light-receiving element Thermopile Emissivity 0.95 fixed Current output 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 250  max. Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 70C, Storage: 20 to 70C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity range Operating and storage: 35% to 85% Vibration resistance (destruction) 1.5-mm amplitude at 10 to 55 Hz for 2 hours each in the X, Y, and Z directions Weight 180 g Degree of protection Equivalent to IP67 12 dia. (lens diameter) M18×P1.0 (cable length) 24 120 2,000 60 (threaded section) S8VS S8JX-G Compact S8VT Single-phase Supply voltage?? Power factor correction?? Three-phase Slim S8VM Yes No PREVENT YOUR SYSTEM FROM STOPPING The buffer block prevents equipment stoppage, data loss and other problems resulting from momentary power failures. One S8TS-DCBU-02 buffer block provides a back-up time of 500 ms at an output current of 2.5 A. Can be wired to the 24 VDC output from any switch mode power supply • Connects to both single-phase and three-phase 24 VDC power supplies • Connects to an S8TS power supply via an S8T-BUS03 bus line connector • Parallel connection up to 4 units to increase back-up time and capacity S8TS-DCBU-02 – Buffer block against momentary power failures 418 Page 422 Page 427 Power supplies Page 423 Page 424 S8TS Which type of power supply you are looking for? S8T-DCBU-01 Modular S8T-DCBU-02 DC back-up S8TS DC battery back-up up to several minutes S8TS buffer block momentary up to 500 ms 419 20 Power supplies Page 425 Page 426 Page 426 420 421 20 Power supplies Selection table Power supplies Category Compact Power Supplies Slim Power Supplies Modular Selection criteria Model S8VS S8VT S8VM S8JX-G S8TS Phases Single-phase Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC Voltage 24 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V 5 V 12 V 24 V Power 3 W – – – – – – – – – – – 7.5 W – – – – – – – – – – – 10 W – – – – – – – – – – – 15 W 0.65 A –  1.3 A  0.65 A  3 A  1.3 A  1 A  0.65 A – – – 25 W – – – – – – – –  5 A – – 30 W 1.3 A –  2.5 A  1.3 A – – – – –  2.5 A – 35 W  7 A  3 A  2.4 A  1.5 A –  2.5 A – 50 W – –  4.3 A  2.2 A  10 A  4.2 A –  2.1 A – – – 60 W  2.5 A – – – – – – – –  5 A  2.5 A 90 W – – – – – – – – –  7.5 A – 100 W – –  8.5 A  4.5 A  20 A  8.5 A –  4.5 A – – – 120 W  5 A  5 A – – – – – – –  10 A  5 A 150 W – –  12.5 A  6.5 A – – –  6.5 A – – – 180 W – – – – – – – – – –  7.5 A 240 W  10 A  10 A – – – – – – – –  10 A 300 W – –  27 A  14 A – – –  14 A – – – 480 W  20 A  20 A – – – – – – – – – 600 W – –  53 A  27 A – – –  27 A – – – 960 W –  40 A – – – – – – – – – 1500 W – – –  70 A – – – – – – – Features Conforms to EN61000-3-2  with PFC    – – – –  with PFC  with PFC  with PFC DC back-up – – – – – – – –    Capacitor back-up   – – – – – – – –  Undervoltage alarm  – –  – – – –    Overvoltage protection            Overload protection            DIN-rail mounting            Screw mounting (with bracket) –  only 40 A       – – – EMI Class B – –   – – – –    UL Class 2  only 60 W – – – – – – –    N+1 redundancy – – – – – – – –    Parallel operation –  – – – – – –    Series operation            Page 422 427 423 424 425  Standard  Available – No/not available 422 S8VS Single-phase Compact power supply The S8VS is our standard industrial din-rail mounted power supply. It is built to last forever. Up to 60 W we provide them into a plastic housing, from 120 W the S8VS is built in strong metal case. The full ranges provide a very good dimension/output power ratio to optimize panel space uses. The range covers 6 models at 24 VDC with wattage of 15, 30, 60, 120, 240 and 480 W. The 15 and 30 W are also available in 5 or 12 VDC output voltage. The range withstands high vibration and shocks. The S8VS are fan-less power supplies. • Wide AC input range from 85 to 264 VAC • Micro S8VS output power range 15 and 30 W at 5, 12 and 24 VDC • Micro can mounted, standard din-rail, horizontal or facing horizontal any direction is okay • S8VS models available from 60 to 480 W at 24 VDC, 4 models Ordering information Specifications Power Output voltage Output current Under-voltage control Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 15 W 5 VDC 2 A (10 W) yes, red LED 85x22.5x96.4 S8VS-01505 12 VDC 1.2 A S8VS-01512 24 VDC 0.65 A S8VS-01524 30 W 5 VDC 4 A (20 W) yes, red LED 85x22.5x96.4 S8VS-03005 12 VDC 2.5 A S8VS-03012 24 VDC 1.3 A S8VS-03024 60 W 24 VDC 2.5 A no 95x40x108.3 S8VS-06024 120 W 24 VDC 5 A no 115x50x121.3 S8VS-12024 240 W 24 VDC 10 A no 115x100x125.3 S8VS-24024 480 W 24 VDC 20 A no 115x150x127.2 S8VS-48024 Specification 15 W 30 W 60 W 120 W 240 W 480 W Efficiency 77% min. (24 V) 80% min. (24 V) 78% min. 80% min. 80% min. 83% min. Power factor – – – 0.95 min. 0.95 min. 0.95 min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment ±10 to ±15% (with V. ADJ) min. Ripple 2% p-p max. (at rated input/output voltage) Input variation 0.5% max. (at 85 to 264 VAC input, 100% load) Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. Overload protection 105 to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes yes yes yes yes yes Input current 100 V 0.45 A max. 0.9 A max. 1.7 A max. 1.9 A max. 3.8 A max. 7.4 A max. 200 V 0.25 A max. 0.6 A max. 1.0 A max. 1.1 A max. 2.0 A max. 3.9 A max. 230 V 0.19 A (5 V: 0.14 A) 0.37 A (5 V: 0.27 A) 0.7 A typ. 0.6 A typ. 1.2 A typ. 2.4 A typ. Output indicator yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) LED Weight 160 g 180 g 330 g 550 g 1,150 g 1,700 g max. Operating temperature -10 to 60°C -10 to 60°C *1 *1 For 30 W model 24 V: No derating, 12 & 5 V: Derating beyond 50°C. -10 to 60°C, derating beyond 40°C, no icing or condensation Series operation yes (24 V only) yes yes yes yes yes 423 20 Power supplies S8VM Single-phase Slim size S8VM power supplies All models have the same height of only 84.5 mm. These ranges cover up-to 1,500 W. The output voltages are 5, 12, 15 or 24 VDC. In this series we have standard types and versions with two alarms up-to 150 W models: one for short dip in the 24 VDC supply, second one when the voltage gradually drops in time. The models form 300 W/600 W/1,500 W are equipped with an overload alarm function. • Widest range in DC-output voltage (5 V, 12 V, 15 V & 24 V) & wattage (15 up-to 1,500 W) • LED indication power ON • Transistor output & LED indication under-voltage alarm 1 & 2 or Power failure • All models can be Din-rail mounted (except 1,500W) • EMI Class B, UL Class 1 division 2, SEMI-F47 (200VAC input) Ordering information Specifications Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWXD) Order code DIN-rail mounting Undervoltage alarm type Sinking (NPN) Sourcing (PNP) 15 W 12 V 1.3 A 84.5x35.1x94.4 S8VM-01512CD – – 24 V 0.65 A S8VM-01524CD S8VM-01524AD *1 *1 No alarm output built-in. 30 W 12 V 2.5 A 84.5x35.1x109.4 S8VM-03012CD – – 24 V 1.3 A S8VM-03024CD S8VM-03024AD *1 50 W 12 V 4.3 A 84.5x35.1x124.5 S8VM-05012CD – – 24 V 2.2 A S8VM-05024CD S8VM-05024AD S8VM-05024PD 100 W 12 V 8.5 A 84.5x36.6x164.5 S8VM-10012CD – – 24 V 4.5 A S8VM-10024CD S8VM-10024AD S8VM-10024PD 150 W 12 V 12.5 A 84.5x45.6x164.5 S8VM-15012CD – – 24 V 6.5 A S8VM-15024CD S8VM-15024AD S8VM-15024PD Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWXD) Bottom mounting DIN-rail adaptor Power failure output 300 W 12 V 27 A 84.5x62.5x188 S8VM-30012C S82Y-VM30D overload, overvoltage and overheat 24 V 14 A S8VM-30024C 600 W 12 V 53 A 84.5x101.8x192 S8VM-60012C S82Y-VM60D 24 V 27 A S8VM-60024C – 1,500 W 24 V 70 A 84.5x126.5x327 S8VM-15224C – – Item 15 W 30 W 50 W 100 W 150 W 300 W 600 W 1,500 W Efficiency 12 V models 78% min. 79% min. 79% min. 81% min. 81% min. 78% min. 79% min. – 24 V models 80% min. 81% min. 80% min. 82% min. 83% min. 81% min. 81% min. 82% min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC, (85 to 264 VAC), single phase Output Voltage adjustment -20% to 20% with V. ADJ min. (S8VM-_ _ _ 24A_ /P_ : -10% to 20%) Ripple 12 V models 1.5% (p-p) max. 1.5% (p-p) max. 2.0% (p-p) max. – 24 V models 1.0% (p-p) max. 0.75% (p-p) max. 1.25% (p-p) max. 1.25% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.4% max. Temperature influence 0.02%/°C max. Overload protection 105% to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 180 g max. 220 g max. 290 g max. 460 g max. 530 g max. 1,100 g max. 1,700 g max. 3,800 g max. Series operation yes Remote sensing function no no no yes 424 S8JX-G Single-phase Slim & economic power supply The S8JX-G is Omron’s cost effective power supply delivering Omron’s quality and reliability. The range of this Power Supply covers up to 600 W, the output voltages are 5, 12 or 24 VDC. The low profile and multiple mounting options help you reduce panel space. With a minimum life expectancy of 10 years and protection against over-voltage, over-current and short circuiting, the S8JX-G is as reliable as you may expect from Omron. • Wide range in DC-output voltage (5 V, 12 V, 15 V & 24 V) & wattage (15 to 600 W) • LED indication power ON • Over-voltage, over-current, and short circuit protection • Vibration resistance 4,5 g • All models can be DIN-rail mounted • Approvals: UL, cUL, UL508 Listed, CE, SEMI F47, VDE Ordering information Specifications Power Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 15 W 5 V 3 A 91x40x90 S8JX-G01505CD 12 V 1.3 A S8JX-G01512CD 15 V 1 A S8JX-G01515CD 24 V 0.65 A S8JX-G01524CD 35 W 5 V 7 A 91x40x90 S8JX-G03505CD 12 V 3 A S8JX-G03512CD 15 V 2.4 A S8JX-G03515CD 24 V 1.5 A S8JX-G03524CD 50 W 5 V 10 A 92x40x100 S8JX-G05005CD 12 V 4.2 A S8JX-G05012CD 24 V 2.1 A S8JX-G05024CD 100 W 5 V 20 A 92x50x150 S8JX-G10005CD 12 V 8.5 A S8JX-G10012CD 24 V 4.5 A S8JX-G10024CD 150 W 24 V 6.5 A 92x50x150 S8JX-G15024CD 300 W 24 V 14 A 92x110x167 S8JX-G30024CD 600 W 24 V 27 A 92x150x160 S8JX-G60024C*1 *1 Additional accessory is required for DIN-rail mounting. Item 15 W 35 W 50 W 100 W 150 W 300 W 600 W Efficiency 100 to 240 V input 68% min. 73% min. 76% min. 76% min. 86% min. – – 100/200 V (Selected) – – – – – 82% min. 80% min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC) 100 to 120 VAC (85 to 132 VAC) 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 VAC) (Switchable) 100 to 370 VDC Note: This range is not applicable for the safety standards. Output Voltage adjustment -10% to 15% (with V. ADJ) Ripple 2% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.4% max. Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. (at rated input and output) 0.05%/°C max. Overload protection 105% to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, intermittent, automatic reset 105% of rated load current, voltage drop, intermittent, automatic reset 105% of rated load current, Inverted L voltage drop, the circuit will be shut OFF when the overload exceeds 5 s. Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 250 g max. 250 g max. 300 g max. 550 g max. 600 g max. 1,600 g max. 2,500 g max. Series operation yes (For up to two Power Supplies; external diodes required.) 425 20 Power supplies S8TS Single-phase Industrial use, modular power supply for multiple configurations The S8TS is an expandable power supply; standard units can easily be snapped together in parallel to provide you with ultimate flexibility. Expandable up to 4 units, it can deliver a total power of 240W at 24VDC or a multi-output configuration. • Improves system reliability by building up N+1 redundancy • Standard unit; 60 W at 24 VDC, 30 W at 12 VDC and 25 W at 5 VDC • Battery back-up unit protects against power outage (see accessories) • Buffer unit protects against power glitches and outage (see accessories) • EMI Class B, UL Class 2, UL Class 1 division 2 Ordering information Accessories Specifications Basic block Order code Output voltage Output current Screw terminal type Connector terminal type With bus line connectors*1 *1 One S8T-BUS01 connector and one S8T-BUS02 connector are included as accessories. Without bus line connectors*2 *2 Bus line connectors can be ordered separately if necessary. With bus line connectors*1 Without bus line connectors*2 24 V 2.5 A S8TS-06024-E1*3 *3 Conforms to EMI class B with DC minus terminal ground. S8TS-06024 S8TS-06024F-E1 S8TS-06024F 12 V 2.5 A S8TS-03012-E1 S8TS-03012 S8TS-03012F-E1 S8TS-03012F 5 V 5 A – S8TS-02505 – S8TS-02505F Bus line connector Type Number of connectors Order code AC line + DC line bus (For parallel operation) 1 connector S8T-BUS01 10 connectors*1 *1 One package contains 10 S8T-BUS01 connectors. S8T-BUS11 AC line bus (For series operation or isolated operation) 1 connector S8T-BUS02 10 connectors*2 *2 One package contains 10 S8T-BUS02 connectors. S8T-BUS12 Item 5 V models 24/12 V models Single operation Single operation Parallel operation Efficiency 62% min. 24 V models: 75%, 12 V models: 70% min. Power factor 0.8 min. 24 V models: 0.9 min., 12 V models: 0.8 min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC, (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment 5 V ±10% min. 24 V models: 22 to 28 V, 12 V models: 12 V ±10% min. Ripple 2% (p-p) max. 2% (p-p) max. 2% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.5% max. – – Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. (with rated input, 10 to 100% load) Overcurrent protection 105 to 125% of rated load current, inverted L drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes yes yes Output indicator yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) Weight 450 g max. 450 g max. 450 g max. Series operation yes yes yes Parallel operation no yes yes Size in mm (HxWxD) 120x43x120 426 S8T-DCBU-01/-02 Single-phase S8T-DCBU-01 The S8T-DCBU-01 battery backup block supplies 24 VDC for a fixed period of time during AC input outages to considerably improve system reliability. • Supplies 24 VDC for a long period of time during AC input outages • For system reliability improvement • Block power supply basic block is connected by the bus line connector • Simple system configuration • Alarms indicated on main unit and via alarm signal output Ordering information Note:The S8TS DC back-up block is for S8TS power supplies only. Specifications S8T-DCBU-02 Prevents equipment stoppage, data loss and other problems resulting from momentary power failures. One S8T-DCBU-02 buffer block provides a back-up time of 500 ms at an output current of 2.5 A. Can be wired to the 24 VDC output from any switch mode power supply. • Connects to all Omron power supplies: S8TS, S8VS, S82J, S82K, S8VM, S8PE • Connects to both single-phase and three-phase power supplies • Connects to an S8TS power supply via an S8T-BUS03 bus line connector • Parallel connection up to 4 units to increase back-up time and capacity • Complies with Semi F47-0200 standard Ordering information Accessories Specifications Product Input voltage Output voltage Output current Order code DC back-up block 24 to 28 VDC 24 V 3.7 A/8 A S8T-DCBU-01 Battery holder – – – S82Y-TS01 Product Input voltage Output voltage Output current Type Order code Basic block (use together with the DC back-up block) 100 to 240 VAC 24 V 2.5 A Screw terminal type With bus line connectors S8TS-06024-E1 Without bus line connectors S8TS-06024 Connector terminal type With bus line connectors S8TS-06024F-E1 Without bus line connectors S8TS-06024F Product Back-up time Overcurrent protection operating point selector Order code Battery 8 min./3.7 A 5.7 A (typ.) – LC-R122R2PG 4 min./8.0 A 5.7 A (typ.) 11.7 A (typ.) LC-R123R4PG Item Size in mm (HxWxD) S8T-DCBU-01 120x43x130 Battery holder 82x185.7x222.25 Input voltage Output voltage (during back-up operation) Output current Order code 24 VDC (24 to 28 VDC) 22.5 V 2.5 A S8T-DCBU-02 Type Number of connectors Order code DC bus line connector (for use with S8TS only) 1 connector S8T-BUS03 10 connectors S8T-BUS13 Item Size in mm(HxWxD) S8T-DCBU-02 120x43x120 427 20 Power supplies S8VT Three-phase Compact 3-phase input power supply To make the compact power supply range complete we have our 3-phase S8VT series, which give you the best power to footprint ratio. The range exists of 4 models with wattage of 120, 240, 480 and 960 W all at 24 VDC. This version is constructed from a very robust metal housing and all models are din-rail mounting. The input range cover 3 phase voltage input from 340 to 576 VAC and single phase DC input from 480 to 810 VDC. • 5, 10, 20 and 40A; 24VDC output • 3-phase input (340-576VAC) or 1-phase 480 to 810 VDC • Compact design with best footprint on the market • UL60950 (CSA22.2-60950), UL508 listing (CSA22.2-14) and CE • Parallel & serial operation possible (all models) Ordering information Specifications Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 120 W 24 V 5 A 125x45x130 S8VT-F12024E 240 W 24 V 10 A 170x45x130 S8VT-F24024E 480 W 24 V 20 A 170x100x130 S8VT-F48024E 960 W 24 V 40 A 170x195x130 S8VT-F96024E Item 5 A 10 A 20 A 40 A Efficiency 88% 90% 91% 91% Voltage range 340 to 576 VAC 3 AC resp, 480 to 810 VDC (1 phase) Output voltage Voltage adjustment 22.5 to 26.4 VDC min. Ripple 100 mV max. Input variation ±0.5% max. Temperature influence Less than 0.05%/°C Overload protection yes Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 750 g 1.0 kg 1.8 kg 3.3 kg Series operation yes (for 2 units) Parallel operation yes (for 2 units) H2C Motor timer WHEN TIMING ACCURACY MATTERS! The H5CX series offers multiple-functions and -timing ranges for precise timing control, as well as real twin-timing and memory function. These and other added-value features ensure that the H5CX covers almost every possible user requirement in timers. • 15 different time functions • Three colour display value, red, orange or green • Models with instantaneous contact outputs • 0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges H5CX – The most complete digital timer 428 Page 437 Timers H3DK 22.5 mm H3DS H3CR 17.5 mm Which size is required? Which mounting method is required? Which type of timer is needed? H3YN DIN-rail Plug/front Analogue H5CX 48x24 mm 48x48 mm Which size is required? Digital H8GN timer/counter 429 21 Timers Page 432 Page 433 Page 434 Page 435 Page 445 Page 436 430 Selection table Category Analogue solid state timer Selection criteria Model H3DS-M H3DS-S H3DS-A H3DS-F H3DS-G H3DS-X H3DK-M H3DK-S H3DK-F H3DK-G H3DK-H Mounting DIN-rail Size 17.5 mm 22.5 mm Type Multi-functional Twin timer Star-delta Two-wired Multi-functional Twin timer Star-delta Power OFF-delay Contact configuration Time limit            Instantaneous – – – – – –   – – – Programmable contacts – – – – – –   – – – 14 pins – – – – – – – – – – – 11 pins – – – – – – – – – – – 8 pins – – – – – – – – – – – Screw terminals            Screw-less clamp terminals       – – – – – Screw-less clamp sockets – – – – – – – – – – – Inputs Voltage input    – – –   – – – Outputs Transistor – – – – – – – – – – – Relay      –      SCR – – – – –  – – – – – Relay output type SPDT     – –     (2x)  SPST-NO – – – –  (2x) – – – – – – DPDT – – – – – –   – – – 4PDT – – – – – – – – – – – Features Time range Total time range 0.1 s to 120 h 1 s to 120 h 2 s to 120 h 0.1 s to 12 h 1 s to 120 s 0.1 s to 120 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 1 s to 120 s 0.1 s to 120 s Number of sub ranges 7 7 7 6 2 7 12 12 8 2 2 (model dependent) Supply voltage 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC, 240 to 440VAC, 12 VDC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC, 24 to 48 VAC/DC Number of operating modes 8 4 1 2 1 1 8 4 1 1 1 Functions ON-delay   – – –    – – – Flicker OFF start  – –  – –  –  – – Flicker ON start   –  – –    – – Signal ON-/OFF-delay  – – – – –  – – – – Signal OFF-delay  – – – – –  – – –  Interval (signal or power start)   – – – –   – – – One-shot output (ON-delay)   – – – –   – – – ON-delay (fixed) – –  – – – – – –  – Independent ON/OFF time setting – – – – – – – – – – – Star-delta – – – –  – – – – – – Remarks Transistor – – – – –  – – – – – Page 432 433 Timers 431 21 Timers Category Analogue solid state timer Digital timer Motor timer Selection criteria Model H3YN H3CR-A H3CR-F H3CR-G H3CR-H H5CX H8GN H2C Mounting Socket/on panel Size 21.5 mm 1/16 DIN 1/32 DIN 1/16 DIN Type Miniature Multifunctional Twin timer Star-delta Power OFF-delay Multifunctional Preset counter/ timer Motor timer Contact configuration Time limit         Instantaneous –  –    –  Programmable contacts – – – – –   – 14 pins  – – – – – – – 11 pins –      –  8 pins       –  Screw terminals – – – – –    Screw-less clamp terminals – – – – – – – – Screw-less clamp sockets  – – – – – – – Inputs Voltage input –  – – – – – – Outputs Transistor –  – – –  – – Relay         SCR – – – – – – – – Relay output type SPDT –  – –     SPST-NO – – –  (2x) – – – – DPDT    –  – – – 4PDT  – – – – – – – Features Time range Total time range 0.1 s to 10 h (model dependent) 0.05 s to 300 h, 0.1 s to 600 h (model dependent) 0.05 s to 30 h or 1.2 s to 300 h (model dependent) 0.5 s to 120 s 0.05 s to 12 s, 1.2 s to 12 min 0.001 s to 9999 h (configurable) 0.000 s to 9999 h (configurable) 0.2 s to 30 h Number of sub ranges 2 9 14 4 4 10 9 15 Supply voltage 24, 100 to 120, 200 to 230 VAC, 12, 24, 48, 100 to 110, 125 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 100 to 125 VDC, 24 to 48 VAC, 12 to 48 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC, 24 VAC/DC, 48 to 125 VDC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC, 24 VAC/DC, 48 VDC, 100 to 125 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 24 VAC, 12 to 24 VDC 24 VDC 24, 48, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 240 VAC Number of operating modes 4 6 (model dependent) – 1 1 15 6 2 Functions ON-delay   – – –    Flicker OFF start    – –   – Flicker ON start    – –  – – Signal ON-/OFF-delay –  – – –  – – Signal OFF-delay –  – –     Interval (signal or power start)   – – –   – One-shot output (ONdelay) –  – – –  – – ON-delay (fixed) – – – – –  – – Independent ON/OFF time setting – – – – –   – Star-delta – – –  – – – – Remarks Transistor –  – – –  – – Page 434 435 436 445 437  Standard  Available – No/not available 432 H3DS Analogue solid state timers DIN-rail mounted, standard 17.5 mm wide solid state timer range This broad range of timers includes many functionalities and has a wide AC/DC power supply range. Models with screwless clamp connection available. • 17.5 mm width, modular 45 mm • DIN-rail mounting • 24-48 VDC and 24-230 VAC • 0.1 s to 120 h, 7 ranges Ordering information Specifications Type Supply voltage Control output Time setting range Operating modes Order code Screw terminal type Screw-less clamp type Multi-functional timer 24 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)/ 24 to 48 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to120 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DS-ML H3DS-MLC Standard timer ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, oneshot H3DS-SL H3DS-SLC Single function timer ON-delay H3DS-AL H3DS-ALC Twin timer Relay SPDT 0.1 s to 12 h Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start H3DS-FL H3DS-FLC Star-delta timer 2x Relay SPST-NO 1 s to 120 s Star-delta H3DS-GL H3DS-GLC Two-wired timer 24 to 230 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz) SCR output 0.1 s to 120 h ON-delay H3DS-XL H3DS-XLC Terminal block Screw terminal type: Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Screw-less clamp type: Clamps two 1.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Mounting method DIN-rail mounting Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power reset Minimum power-off time: 0.1 s, 0.5 s for H3DS-G Reset voltage 2.4 VAC/VDC max., 1.0 VAC/VDC max. for H3DS-X Voltage input Max. permissible capacitance between input lines (terminals B1 and A2): 2,000 pF Load connectable in parallel with inputs (terminals B1 and A1) H-level: 20.4 to 253 VAC/20.4 to 52.8 VDC L-level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC Control output Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1) 5 A at 30 VDC with resistive load (cos = 1) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Accuracy of operating time ±1% max. of FS (±1% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Setting error ±10% ±50 ms max. of FS Influence of voltage ±0.7% max. of FS (±0.7% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Influence of temperature ±5% max. of FS (±5% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Life expectancy (not H3DS-X) Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h) Size in mm(HxWxD) 80x17.5x73 433 21 Timers H3DK Analogue solid state timers DIN-rail mounted, standard 22.5 mm wide solid state timer range The H3DK series of timers provides a wide AC/DC power supply and time range to reduce the number of items. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 79x22.5x100 • DIN-rail mounting • 12 VDC and 24-240 VAC/VDC (except -H). 240-440 VAC for -G • Wide time setting range: 0.10 s - 1,200 h (except -H and -G), 12 ranges (for -M and -S) Ordering information Specifications Type Supply voltage Control output Time setting range Operating modes Order code Multi-functional standard timers 12 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to 1200 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DK-M1A DC12 DPDT H3DK-M2A DC12 *1 *1 One output can be set to instantaneous. SPDT ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3DK-S1A DC12 DPDT H3DK-S2A DC12 *1 24 to 240 VAC/VDC SPDT ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DK-M1 AC/DC24-240 DPDT H3DK-M2 AC/DC24-240 *1 SPDT ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3DK-S1 AC/DC24-240 DPDT H3DK-S2 AC/DC24-240 *1 Twin timer 12 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to 12 h Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start H3DK-FA DC12 24 to 240 VAC/VDC H3DK-F AC/DC24-240 Star-delta timer 12 VDC 2x SPDT 1 to 120 s Star-delta H3DK-GA DC12 24 to 240 VAC/VDC H3DK-G AC/DC24-240 240 to 440 VAC H3DK-GE AC/DC240-440 Power OFF-delay timer 24 to 48 VAC/VDC SPDT 1 to 120 s Signal OFF-delay H3DK-HBL AC/DC24-48 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HBS AC/DC24-48 100 to 120 VAC 1 to 120 s H3DK-HCL AC100-120V 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HCS AC100-120V 200 to 240 VAC 1 to 120 s H3DK-HDL AC200-240V 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HDS AC200-240V Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (90 to 110% for the 12 VDC models). Power reset Minimum power-off time: H3DK-M/S, H3DK-F: 0.1 s, H3DK-G: 0.5 s. (Not for H3DK-H) Reset voltage 10% of rated voltage. (Not for H3DK-H) Voltage input (H3DK-M/-S) 24 to 240 VAC/DC: H-level 20.4 to 264 VAC/VDC, L-level 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC. 12 VDC: H-level 10.8 to 13.2 VDC, L-level 0 to 1.2 VDC. Control output Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1), 5 A at 24 VDC (30 VDC for -M/-S) with resistive load (not for H3DK-GE) Ambient temperature Operating: -20 to 55°C (with no icing), storage: -40 to 70°C (with no icing) Accuracy of operating time ±1% of FS max. (±1% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Setting error ±10% of FS ±0.05 s max. Minimum input signal width 50 ms (start input) (Only for H3DK-M/S) Influence of voltage ±0.5% of FS max. (±0.5% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range). For H3DK-G: ±0.5% of FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% of FS max. (±2% ±10 ms max. at 1.2s range). For H3DK-G: ±2% of FS max. Life expectancy Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h) Degree of protection IP30 (terminal block: IP20) Terminal block Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Size in mm (HxWxD) 79x22.5x100 434 H3YN Analogue solid state timers Miniature timer with multiple time ranges and multiple operating modes H3YN features 4 multi-operating modes: ON-delay, interval, flicker ON start and flicker OFF start. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 28x21.5x52.6 • Plug-in • All supply voltages available • 0.1 s to 10 h • DPDT (5A) or 4PDT (3A) Ordering information Accessories Connecting socket Hold-down clips Specifications Supply voltage Functions Time-limit contact Order code Short-time range model (0.1 s to 10 min) Long-time range model (0.1 min to 10 h) 12 VDC ON-delay Interval Flicker ON Flicker OFF DPDT H3YN-2 12DC H3YN-21 12DC 24 VAC H3YN-2 24AC H3YN-21 24AC 24 VDC H3YN-2 24DC H3YN-21 24DC 100 to 120 VAC H3YN-2 100-120AC H3YN-21 100-120AC 200 to 230 VAC H3YN-2 200-230AC H3YN-21 200-230AC 12 VDC 4PDT H3YN-4 12DC H3YN-41 12DC 24 VAC H3YN-4 24AC H3YN-41 24AC 24 VDC H3YN-4 24DC H3YN-41 24DC 100 to 120 VAC H3YN-4 100-120AC H3YN-41 100-120AC 200 to 230 VAC H3YN-4 200-230AC H3YN-41 200-230AC Timer DIN-rail mounting/ front-connecting socket Back-connecting socket PCB terminal H3YN-2/-21 PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E PY08-02 H3YN-4/-41 PYF14A, PYF14A-N, PYF14A-E PY14-02 Applicable socket Order code PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E, PYF14A, PYF14A-N, PYF14A-E Y92H-3 (pair) PY08, PY08-02, PY14-02 Y92H-4 Item H3YN-2/-4 H3YN-21/-41 Time ranges 0.1 s to 10 min (1 s, 10 s, 1 min, or 10 min max. selectable) 0.1 min to 10 h (1 min, 10 min, 1 h, or 10 h max. selectable) Rated supply voltage 24, 100 to 120, 200 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz) 12, 24, 48, 100 to 110, 125 VDC Pin type Plug-in Operating mode ON-delay, interval, flicker OFF start, or flicker ON start (selectable with DIP switch) Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (12 VDC: 90 to 110% of rated supply voltage) Reset voltage 10% min. of rated supply voltage Control outputs DPDT: 5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1), 4PDT: 3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1) Accuracy of operating time ±1% FS max. (1 s range: ±1% ±10 ms max.) Setting error ±10% ±50 ms FS max. Reset time Min. power-opening time: 0.1 s max. (including halfway reset) Influence of voltage ±2% FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% FS max. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 50°C (with no icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Degree of protection IP40 Size in mm (HxWxD) 28x21.5x52.6 435 21 Timers H3CR Analogue solid state timers DIN 48x48 mm multi-functional timer series This elaborate range of solid state timers provides you with a multi-functional timer, twin timer, star-delta timer and a power OFF-delay timer. • 48x48 mm front-panel/plug-in • High-/low-voltage models (except -H and -G) • 0.05 s to 300 h (except -H and -G) • DPDT, 5A at 250VAC • Transistor 100mA at 30VDC Ordering information Accessories Specifications Output Number of pins Supply voltage Time range Operating mode Order code Relay DPDT 11 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/ OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval H3CR-A 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC H3CR-A 24-48AC/12-48DC Transistor 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h H3CR-AS 24-48AC/12-48DC Relay DPDT 8 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3CR-A8 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC H3CR-A8 24-48AC/12-48DC Transistor 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h H3CR-A8S 24-48AC/12-48DC Relay SPDT 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC H3CR-A8E 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/VDC H3CR-A8E 24-48AC/DC Relay DPDT 11 100 to 240 VAC 0.05 s to 30 h Flicker OFF start H3CR-F 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F 24AC/DC 8 100 to 240 VAC H3CR-F8 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F8 24AC/DC 11 100 to 240 VAC 0.05 s to 30 h Flicker ON start H3CR-FN 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-FN 24AC/DC 8 100 to 240 VAC H3CR-F8N 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F8N 24AC/DC Time-limit contact and instantaneous contact 100 to 120 VAC Star-delta H3CR-G8EL 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-G8EL 200-240AC DPDT 8 100 to 120 VAC 0.05 to 12 s Power OFF-delay H3CR-H8LS 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-H8LS 200-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-H8LS 24AC/DC 100 to 120 VAC 0.05 to 12 m H3CR-H8LM 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-H8LM 200-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-H8LM 24AC/DC Name/specifications Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Protective cover Y92A-48B Front connecting socket 8-pin, finger-safe type, DIN-rail P2CF-08-E Front connecting socket 11-pin, finger-safe type, DIN-rail P2CF-11-E Back connecting socket 8-pin P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Name/specifications Order code Time setting ring Setting a specific time Y92S-27 Limiting the setting range Y92S-28 Panel cover Light grey (5Y7/1) Y92P-48GL Black (N1.5) Y92P-48GB Accuracy of operating time ±0.2% FS max. (±0.2% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Influence of voltage ±0.2% FS max. (±0.2% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Influence of temperature ±1% FS max. (±1% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Life expectancy Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 1,800 operations/h) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x66.6 (H3CR-A, -F), 48x48x78 (H3CR-G, -H) Setting error ±5% FS ±50 ms Degree of protection IP40 (panel surface) Weight Approx. 90 g 436 H5CX Digital timers The most complete digital standard timer on the market H5CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today. Based on extensive customer research, these new timers have been designed with value added features that users both need and appreciate. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 48x48x59 to 78 mm • Three colour display value, red, green or orange • Models with Instantaneous Contact Outputs • 0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges • Input NPN, PNP and contact Ordering information Accessories Specifications Output type Supply voltage Functions External connection Size in mm (HxWxD) Inputs Order code Contact output 100 to 240 VAC A: Signal ON-delay A-1: Signal ON-delay 2 A-2: Power ON-delay 1 A-3: Power ON-delay 2 b: Repeat cycle 1 b-1: Repeat cycle 2 d: Signal OFF-delay E: Interval F: Cumulative Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker toff: Twin timer OFF start ton: Twin timer ON start Screw terminals 48x48x84 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-A-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC 48x48x65 H5CX-AD-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC 48x48x84 H5CX-AS-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC 48x48x65 H5CX-ASD-N Contact output 100 to 240 VAC 11-pin socket 48x48x69.7 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-A11-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-A11D-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC H5CX-A11S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-A11SD-N Contact output 100 to 240 VAC 8-pin socket 48x48x69.7 Signal, Reset (NPN inputs) H5CX-L8-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8D-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC H5CX-L8S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8SD-N Contact output Models with instantaneous contact outputs 100 to 240 VAC A-2: Power ON-delay 1 b: Repeat cycle 1 E: Interval Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker toff: Twin timer OFF start 1 ton: Twin timer ON start 1 – H5CX-L8E-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8ED-N Transistor output 12 to 24 VDC A: Signal ON-delay 1 F: Cumulative Screw terminals 48x48x65 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-BWSD-N Name Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Waterproof packing Y92S-29 Front-connecting socket 8-pin, finger safe type P2CF-08-E 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 8-pin P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Hard cover Y92A-48 Soft cover Y92A-48F1 Front panels (4-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXT4G White Y92P-CXT4S Item H5CX-A_ H5CX-A11_ H5CX-L8_ Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD Present value: 12 mm high characters red, orange or green (programmable) red Set value: 6 mm high characters, green Digits 4 digits Total time range 0.001 s to 9,999 h (configurable) Timer mode Elapsed time (Up), remaining time (Down) (selectable) Input signals Signal, reset, gate Signal, reset Key protection Yes Memory backup EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (no icing or condensation), side-by-side mounting: -10 to 50°C Case colour Black (N1.5) 437 21 Timers H2C Motor timers DIN-sized (48x48) motor timer with variable time ranges This motor timer series provides you with many features, such as ON-delay, time indicator, moving pointer and synchronous motor. Moreover, the LED indicator shows the time operation, time range and the rated voltage. • DIN-sized 48x48mm • Front-panel/plug-in/DIN-rail • All supply voltages available • 0.2 s to 30 h • SPDT, 6A at 250VAC Ordering information Note: Other voltages available on request Accessories Specifications Operation/resetting system Internal connection Terminal Time-limit contact Instantaneou s contact Time range code Order code Time-limit operation/ electric resetting Separate motor and clutch connection 11-pin socket SPDT SPDT 1.25 s to 30 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSA 110AC H2C-RSA 220AC H2C-RSA 24AC 0.2 s to 6 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSB 110AC H2C-RSB 220AC H2C-RSB 24AC 0.5 s to 12 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSC 110AC H2C-RSC 220AC H2C-RSC 24AC Time-limit operation/ self-resetting Separate motor and clutch connection 11-pin socket SPDT SPDT 1.25 s to 30 h in 5 ranges H2C-SA 110AC H2C-SA 220AC H2C-SA 24AC 0.2 s to 6 h in 5 ranges H2C-SB 110AC H2C-SB 220AC H2C-SB 24AC 0.5 s to 12 h in 5 ranges H2C-SC 110AC H2C-SC 220AC H2C-SC 24AC Name/specifications Order code DIN-rail mounting/ front-connecting socket 8-pin, finger safe type P2CF-08-E 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 8-pin, screw terminal P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Name/specifications Order code Hold-down clip (pair) For PL08 and PL11 sockets Y92H-1 For PF085A socket Y92H-2 Flush mounting adapter Y92F-30 Time setting ring Y92A-Y1 Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Reset voltage 10% max. of rated supply voltage Reset time Min. power-opening time: 0.5 s, min. pulse width: 0.5 s Control outputs 6 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1) Mounting method Flush mounting (except for H2C-F/-FR models), surface-mounting, DIN-rail mounting Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical: 500,000 operations min. Motor life expectancy 20,000 h Accuracy of operating time ±0.5% FS max. (±1% max. at 0.2 to 6 s for the time range code B or at 0.5 to 12 s for the time range code C) Setting error ±2% FS max. Reset time 0.5 s max. Influence of voltage ±1% FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% FS max. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 50°C Case colour Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1) Degree of protection IP40 (panel surface) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x77.5 H7ER Speed H7EC Totalising H7ET Timer Which type of application? 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) Which size is required? Totalising MULTI-FUNCTIONAL PRESET COUNTER The H7CX series offers the ultimate in versatility and intuitive programming. • 7 basic functions in one • Switching colour on threshold, green, orange & red • Twin counter mode • 12 different outputs modes • Display 6 digits from -100 K +1 up to 1 M -1 H7CX – Designed with value added features 438 Page 442 Page 443 Page 444 Counters H7CX H8GN counter/timer 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) 48x48 mm (1/16 DIN) Which size is required? Pre-set counter time count What is the type of counting application? H8PS 96x96 mm (1/4 DIN) Which size is required? Cam positioner 439 22 Counters Page 445 Page 446 Page 447 440 Selection table Category Self-powered total Self-powered timer Self-powered tachometer Selection criteria Model H7EC H7ET H7ER Display LCD Size 1/32 DIN Outputs Control outputs – – – 5 stage – – – Total   – Time –  – Preset – – – Batch – – – Dual – – – Tachometer  –  Inputs Control inputs No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage, AC/DC multi-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage, AC/DC multi-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN Features Dual operation – – – Number of digits 8 7 4 or 5 NPN/PNP switch    Back-lit    External reset   – Manual reset   – Number of banks – – – Built-in sensor power supply – – – IP rating IP66 IP66 IP66 Terminals Screw terminals    PCB terminals – – – 11-pin socket – – – Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC – – – 12 to 24 VDC – – – 24 VDC    Comms – – – Functions Up   – Down – – – Up/down – – – Reversible – – – Speed 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 1 kHz – 1 or 10 kHz Counting range 0 to 99999999 0.0 h to 999999.9 h <--> 0.0 h to 3999 d 23.9 h or 0 s to 999 h 59 min 59 s <--> 0.0 min to 9999 h 59.9 min 1000 s-1 or 1000 min-1; 1000 s-1 or 1000 min-1 <--> 10000 min-1 Colour Beige    Black    Page 442 443 444 Counters 441 22 Counters Counter type Pre-set counter/timer Pre-set counter Cam positioner Selection criteria Model H8GN H7CX H8PS Display LCD negative transmissive LCD negative transmissive Size 1/32 DIN 1/16 DIN 1/4 DIN Outputs Control outputs 1 relay (SPDT) 1 relay (SPDT), transistor NPN or PNP, cam outputs 8/16/32, run out, tachometer 5 stage   – Total   – Time  – – Preset   – Batch   – Dual   – Tachometer –  – Inputs Control inputs No-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN Encoder Features Dual operation    Number of digits PV: 4, SV: 4 PV: 4, SV: 4 or PV: 6, SV: 6 7 NPN/PNP switch –  – Back-lit –   External reset   – Manual reset   8 (16- and 32-output models only) Number of banks 4 – – Built-in sensor power supply –  – IP rating IP66 IP66 IP40 Terminals Screw terminals    PCB terminals – –  11-pin socket –  – Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC –  – 12 to 24 VDC –  – 24 VDC  –  Comms  – – Functions Up   – Down   – Up/down –  – Reversible   – Speed 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz – Counting range -999 to 9999 -99999 to 999999 – Colour Beige – –  Black   – Page 445 446 447  Standard  Available – No/not available 442 H7EC Totalisers Self-powered LCD totaliser The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6 mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 24x48x55.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 8 digits, 8.6 mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual input speed: 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz • Short body: all models have a depth of 48.5 mm Ordering information Specifications Count input Max. counting speed Display Order code Light grey body Black body No-voltage 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable) 7-segment LCD H7EC-N H7EC-N-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable) 7-segment LCD H7EC-NV H7EC-NV-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7EC-NV-H H7EC-NV-BH AC/DC multi-voltage input 20 Hz 7-segment LCD H7EC-NFV H7EC-NFV-B Item H7EC-NV-_/H7EC-NV-_H H7EC-NFV-_ H7EC-N-_ Operating mode Up type Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals, optional wire-wrap terminals Number of digits 8 Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Max. counting speed 30 Hz/1 kHz 20 Hz 30 Hz/1 kHz Case colour Light grey or black (-B models) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (only for backlight) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Count input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) High (logic) level: 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz Low (logic) level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Reset input No voltage input Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Minimum signal width 20 Hz: 25 ms, 30 Hz: 16.7 ms, 1 KHz: 0.5 ms Reset system External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 7 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5 443 22 Counters H7ET Totalisers Self-powered time counter The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 7 digits, 8.6mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual time range 999999.9 h <-> 3999 d 23.9 h or 999 h 59 m 59 s <-> 9999 h 59.9m Ordering information Specifications Timer input Display Order code Time range 999999.9h <-> 3999d23.9h (switchable) Time range 999h59m59s <-> 9999h59.9m Light grey body Black body Light grey body Black body No-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-N H7ET-N-B H7ET-N1 H7ET-N1-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-NV H7ET-NV-B H7ET-NV1 H7ET-NV1-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7ET-NV-H H7ET-NV-BH H7ET-NV1-H H7ET-NV1-BH AC/DC multi-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-NFV H7ET-NFV-B H7ET-NFV1 H7ET-NFV1-B Item H7ET-NV_-_/H7ET-NV_-_H H7ET-NFV_-_ H7ET-N_-_ Operating mode Accumulating Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Number of digits 7 Case colour Light grey or black (-B models) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, time unit labels Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (for backlight) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Timer input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) High (logic) level: 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz Low (logic) level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Reset input No voltage input Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Minimum pulse width 1 s Reset system External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Time accuracy ±100 ppm (25°C) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 10 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5 444 H7ER Totalisers Self-powered tachometer The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x53.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 5 digits, 8.6mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual revolution display Ordering information Specifications Count input Display Order code Max. revolutions displayed (applicable encoder resolution) 1,000 s-1 (1 pulse/rev.) 1,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev.) 1,000.0 s-1 (10 pulse/rev) 1,000.0 min-1 (600 pulse/rev) <-> 10,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev) (switchable) Light grey body Black body Light grey body Black body No-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ER-N H7ER-N-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ER-NV H7ER-NV-B H7ER-NV1 H7ER-NV1-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7ER-NV-H H7ER-NV-BH H7ER-NV1-H H7ER-NV1-BH Item H7ER-NV1-_/H7ER-NV1-_H H7ER-NV-_/H7ER-NV-_H H7ER-N-_ Operating mode Up type Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals, wire-wrap terminals Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Number of digits 5 4 Max. revolutions displayed 1,000.0 s-1 (when encoder resolution of 10 pulse/rev is used) 1,000.0 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 600 pulse/rev is used) <-> 10,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used) (switchable with switch) 1,000 s-1 (when encoder resolution of 1 pulse/rev is used) 1,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, revolution unit labels Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (for backlight lit) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Count input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Max. counting speed 10 kHz 1 kHz Minimum signal width 10 kHz: 0.05 ms, 1 kHz: 0.5 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 7 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x53.5 445 22 Counters H8GN Pre-set counters World’s smallest compact preset counter/timer The H8GN is a 1/32 DIN timer and counter in one. It is simple to switch between the timer and counter functions. During operation it is also possible to switch the display to monitor the totalising count value in 8 digits. Many sophisticated functions come as standard with H8GN. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x83, 1/32 DIN size housing • 8 digit display, 4 value and 4 set value • Front mounting • -999 to 9999 • 24 VDC Ordering information Specifications Functions Supply voltage Output Order code Communications Counter Timer No communications RS-485 Counter: Up/down/reversible, 4 digits, N, F, C or K output modes Total counter: 8 digits A: ON-delay B: Flicker D: Signal OFF-delay E: Interval F: Accumulative Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker 24 VDC Contact output (SPDT) H8GN-AD H8GN-AD-FLK Rated supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption 1.5 W max. (for max. DC load) (inrush current: 15 A max.) Mounting method Flush-mounting External connections Screw terminals (M3 screws) Terminal screw tightening torque 0.5 Nm max. Attachment Waterproof packing, flush-mounting bracket Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD; time display (h, min, s); CMW, OUT, RST, TOTAL Present value (red, 7 mm high characters); set value (green, 3.4 mm high characters) Digits PV: 4 digits, SV: 4 digits, when total count value is displayed: 8 digits (zeros suppressed) Memory backup EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000 times) Counter Maximum counting speed 30 Hz or 5 kHz Counting range -999 to 9,999 Input modes Increment, decrement, individual, quadrature inputs Timer Timer modes Elapsed time (up), remaining time (down) Inputs Input signals For counter: CP1, CP2, and reset For timer: Start, gate, and reset Input method No-voltage input (contact short-circuit and open input) Short-circuit (ON) impedance: 1 k max. (approx. 2 mA runoff current at 0 ) Short-circuit (ON) residual voltage: 2 VDC max. Open (OFF) impedance: 100 k min. Applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Start, reset, gate Minimum input signal width: 1 or 20 ms (selectable) Power reset Minimum power-opening time: 0.5 s Control output SPDT contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos = 1) Minimum applied load 10 mA at 5 VDC (failure level: P, reference value) Reset system External, manual, and power supply resets (for timer in A, B, D, E, or Z modes) Sensor waiting time 260 ms max. (inputs cannot be received during sensor wait time if control outputs are turned OFF) Timer function Accuracy of operating time and setting error (including temperature and voltage effects) Signal start: ±0.03% ±30 ms max. Power-ON start: ±0.03% ±50 ms max. Ambient temperature Operating storage -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) -25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Case colour Rear section: Grey smoke; front section: N1.5 (black) Degree of protection Panel surface: IP66 and NEMA Type 4X (indoors); rear case: IP20, terminal block: IP20 Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x83 446 H7CX Pre-set counters The most complete digital standard counter on the market H7CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today. Based on extensive customer research, these new counters have been designed with value added features that users both need and appreciate. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x59 to 78mm 1/16 DIN size housing • Three colour display value, red, green or orange • Twin counter mode • 6 digit model -99,999 to 999,999, set value -99,999 to 999,999 or 0 to 999,999 • Input contact, NPN or PNP Ordering information Accessories Specifications Type External connection Sensor power supply Supply voltage Output type Digits Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 1-stage counter 1-stage counter with total counter 2-stage counter 1-stage counter with batch counter Dual counter (addition/subtraction) Tachometer Twin counter Screw terminal 12 VDC 100 to 240 VAC Contact and transistor output 6 48x48x84 H7CX-AU-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-AUD1-N Transistor output (2x) H7CX-AUSD1-N 100 to 240 VAC Contact output (2x) H7CX-AW-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-AWD1-N 1-stage counter 1-stage counter with total counter 11-pin socket 12 VDC 100 to 240 VAC Contact output 48x48x69.7 H7CX-A11-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-A11D1-N 100 to 240 VAC Transistor output H7CX-A11S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-A11SD1-N Screw terminal 100 to 240 VAC Contact output 48x48x84 H7CX-A-N 100 to 240 VAC Transistor output H7CX-AS-N Name Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Waterproof packing Y92S-29 DIN-rail mounting/front-connecting socket 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 11-pin P3GA-11 Finger safe terminal cover for P3GA-11 Y92A-48G Hard cover Y92A-48 Soft cover Y92A-48F1 Front panels (4-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXC4G White Y92P-CXC4S Front panels (6-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXC6G White Y92P-CXC6S Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD Digits 6-digits: -99,999 to 999,999, SV range: -99999 to 999999 or 0 to 999999 Max. counting speed 30 Hz or 5 kHz (selectable, ON/OFF ratio 1:1) Input modes Increment, decrement, increment/decrement (UP/DOWN A (command input), UP/DOWN B (individual inputs), or UP/DOWN C (quadrature inputs)) Control output Contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos= 1) Minimum applied load: 10 mA at 5 VDC Transistor output:NPN open collector, 100 mA at 30 VDC Residual voltage: 1.5 VDC max. (approx. 1V) Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Key protection Yes Decimal point adjustment Yes (rightmost 3 digits) Sensor waiting time 290 ms max. Memory backup EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) stores data 10 years min. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (-10 to 50°C when mounted side by side) Case colour Black (N1.5) (Optional Front Panels are available to change the Front Panel colour to light gray or white.) Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load) Degree of protection Panel surface: IP66, NEMA 4 (indoors), and UL Type 4X (indoors) 447 22 Counters H8PS Cam positioners Compact, easy-to-use cam positioner The H8PS provides high speed operation at 1,600 r/min and high-precision settings to 0.5° ensuring widespread application. H8PS features a highly visible display with back-lit negative transmissive LCD. Advance angle compensation function compensates for output delays. • 96 to 121.2Hx96Wx60.6 to 67.5D mm • Front-panel / DIN-rail • 24 VDC • 8-, 16- and 32-outputs • NPN/PNP 100 mA at 30 VDC Ordering information Encoders Accessories Encoder accessories Specifications Number of outputs Mounting method Output configuration Bank function Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 8-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output No 96x96x67.5 H8PS-8B PNP transistor output H8PS-8BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 96x96x60.6 H8PS-8BF PNP transistor output H8PS-8BFP 16-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output Yes 96x96x67.5 H8PS-16B PNP transistor output H8PS-16BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 121.2x96x60.6 H8PS-16BF PNP transistor output H8PS-16BFP 32-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output 96x96x67.5 H8PS-32B PNP transistor output H8PS-32BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 121.2x96x60.6 H8PS-32BF PNP transistor output H8PS-32BFP Type Resolution Cable length Order code Economy 256 2 m E6CP-AG5C-C 256 2M Standard 256 1 m E6C3-AG5C-C 256 1M 2 m E6C3-AG5C-C 256 2M 360 E6C3-AG5C-C 360 2M 720 E6C3-AG5C-C 720 2M Rigid 256 2 m E6F-AG5C-C 256 2M 360 E6F-AG5C-C 360 2M 720 E6F-AG5C-C 720 2M Name Specification Order code Discrete wire output cable 2 m Y92S-41-200 Connector-type output cable 2 m E5ZE-CBL200 Support software CD-ROM H8PS-SOFT-V1 USB cable A miniB, 2 m Y92S-40 Parallel input adapter Two units can operate in parallel Y92C-30 Protective cover Y92A-96B Watertight cover Y92A-96N DIN-rail mounting base Y92F-91 Name Specification Order code Shaft coupling for the E6CP Axis: 6 mm dia. E69-C06B Shaft coupling for the E6C3 Axis: 8 mm dia. E69-C08B Shaft coupling for the E6F Axis: 10 mm dia. E69-C10B Extension cable 5 m (same for E6CP, E6C3, and E6F) E69-DF5 Rated supply voltage 24 VDC Inputs Encoder input 8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input External inputs Input signals 8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input Input type No voltage inputs: ON impedance: 1 k max. (leakage current: Approx. 2 mA at 0 ) ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF impedance: 100 k min., applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Minimum input signal width: 20 ms Number of banks 8 banks (for 16-/32-output models only) Display method 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD (main display: 11 mm (red), sub-display: 5.5 mm (green)) Memory backup method EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min. Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity 25 to 85% Degree of protection Panel surface: IP40, rear case: IP20 Case colour Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1) ZEN-10C2 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 34 I/O ZEN-20C2 How many I/O points? LED type 20 (12 I, 8 O) expandable up to 44 I/O FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION EXPANDED Our range is extended with a communication model. Now you have the possibility to connect several ZEN in a network environment. This will enhance the ZEN series to solve even more applications. • RS-485 communication • To connect up to 32 units • Easy CompoWayF protocol ZEN-C4 – More flexibility with RS-485 communication 448 Page 452 Page 453 Programmable relays ZEN-10C1 What functionality is required? ZEN-20C1 ZEN-10C3 ZEN-20C3 ZEN-10C4 ZEN-8E 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 34 I/O 20 (12 I, 8 O) expandable up to 44 I/O 10 (6 I, 4 O) fixed I/O 20 (12 I, 8 O) fixed I/O 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 33 I/O with communication How many I/O points? Display type with buttons, calendar and clock Expansion unit 8 I/O (4 I, 4 O) How many extra I/O points? 449 23 Programmable relays Page 452 Page 453 Page 452 Page 453 Page 452 Page 454 450 Programmable relays 451 23 Programmable relays Model ZEN-10C ZEN-20C Type CPU unit CPU unit Features C1 With LCD Display, program/control buttons, calendar and real-time clock With LCD display, program/control buttons, calendar and real-time clock Features C2 With LED indication Logic control Programming by software With LED indication Logic control Programming by software Features C3 Same as C1 but not expandable. Same as C1 but not expandable. Features C4 Same as C1 but instead of one output relay you get RS-485 communication. – Features Starter kits Complete set with C1 CPU including software, cable and manual – Number of I / O points 10 expandable up to 34 I/O (C4 up to 33 I/O) 20 expandable up to 44 I/O Inputs 6 12 Inputs/power supply 100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC Outputs 4 relays (C4 = 3 relays) or 4 transistors 8 relays or 8 transistors Page 452 453 – No/not available Selection table 452 ZEN-10C Programmable relays Flexible automation The ZEN-10C offers simple logic control in a choice of four CPU units. Expansion is possible on three of these CPU's of up to 34 I/O whereas the fourth (C3 Units) is fixed at 10 I/O. All DC models have analogue input and a high-speed counter input up to 150 Hz. • DC input/supply units have analogue input + high speed counter • The ZEN-10C4 has RS-485 communication • Expansion available with relay output or transistor output • ZEN-Kits the best choice to start! Ordering information Specifications Accessories Name Number of I/O points Inputs (I)/ power supply Outputs (Q) Type LCD, buttons (B), calendar and clock Analogue input/ comparators (A) 8-digit counter (F)/ comparators (G) No. of bits 16 No. of bits 8 Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code CPU units 10 Expandable up to 34 I/O 6 100 to 240 VAC 4 Relays LCD yes – – Work bits (M) Holding bits (H) Timers (T) Counters (C) Weekly timers (@) LCD display (D) Timer/counter comparator (P) Holding timers (#) Button input (B) 90x70x56 ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2 LED – – – ZEN-10C2AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C2DR-D-V2 Transistors LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C1DT-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C2DT-D-V2 Fixed I/O 100 to 240 VAC Relays LCD yes – yes / 4 ZEN-10C3AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C3DR-D-V2 10 Expandable up to 33 I/O 100 to 240 VAC 3 LCD/ Comm. yes – yes / 4 ZEN-10C4AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C4DR-D-V2 ZEN kit Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2), connecting cable, ZEN support software and manual. ZEN-KIT01-EV4 Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2), connecting cable, ZEN support software and manual. ZEN-KIT02-EV4 Item Specifications ZEN-10C_AR-A-V2 ZEN-10C_D_-D-V2 Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 9 VA max. 4 W max. Inrush current 3 A max. 30 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Control method Stored program control I/O control method Cyclic scan Programming language Ladder diagram Program capacity 96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line) LCD display 12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only) Operation keys 8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only) Super-capacitor holding time 2 days min. (25°C) Battery life (ZEN-BAT01) 10 years min. (25°C) Calendar & Clock function Accuracy: ± 15 s/month (at 25°C) Name Description Order code Memory Cassette EEPROM (for data security and copying) ZEN-ME01 Battery unit Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25°C) ZEN-BAT01 Connecting Cable For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC ZEN-CIF01 USB-Serial conversion cable USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01) CS1W-CIF31 ZEN support software Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista ZEN-SOFT01-V4 453 23 Programmable relays ZEN-20C Programmable relays Extended flexible automation Ideal for small-scale control applications, the ZEN-20C provides an economical alternative to discrete timers, counters and general purpose relays. With 12 Inputs and 8 relay or transistor Outputs, and expansion possibilities of up to 44 I/O on C1 and C2 models, the ZEN-20C offers extended flexibility, with features such as calendar and real time clock functionality. • ZEN-20C1/C2 expandable up to 44 I/Os • ZEN DC units have analogue input 0-10 VDC • DC models have as well high speed counter 150 Hz • Expansion available with relay output or transistor output Ordering information Specifications Accessories Name Number of I/O points Inputs (I)/ power supply Outputs (Q) Type LCD, buttons (B), calendar and clock Analogue input/ comparators (A) 8-digit counter (F)/ comparators (G) No. of bits 16 No. of bits 8 Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code CPU units 20 12 100 to 240 VAC 8 Relays LCD yes – – Work bits (M) Holding bits (H) Timers (T) Counters (C) Weekly timers (@) LCD display (D) Timer/counter comparator (P) Holding timers (#) Button input (B) 90x122.5 x56 ZEN-20C1AR-A-V2 Expandable up to 44 I/O LED – – – ZEN-20C2AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2 Transistors LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DT-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C2DT-D-V2 Fixed I/O 100 to 240 VAC Relays LCD yes – yes / 4 ZEN-20C3AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C3DR-D-V2 Item Specifications ZEN-20C_AR-A-V2 ZEN-20C_D_-D-V2 Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 11 VA max. 5 W max. Inrush current 4 A max. 30 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-20C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-20C2 models (LED)) Control method Stored program control I/O control method Cyclic scan Programming language Ladder diagram Program capacity 96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line) LCD display 12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only) Operation keys 8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only) Super-capacitor holding time 2 days min. (25°C) Battery life (ZEN-BAT01) 10 years min. (25°C) Calendar & Clock function Accuracy: ± 15 s/month (at 25°C) if applicable Name Description Order code Memory Cassette EEPROM (for data security and copying) ZEN-ME01 Battery unit Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25°C) ZEN-BAT01 Connecting Cable For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC ZEN-CIF01 USB-Serial conversion cable USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01) CS1W-CIF31 ZEN support software Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista ZEN-SOFT01-V4 454 ZEN-8E Programmable relays ZEN Expansion units To enlarge your ZEN application we provide three different expansion units in only 35 mm width ZEN housing. All expansion units have standard 4 inputs and 4 outputs. You can add maximum 3 expansion units to one CPU. • 4 inputs, 100 to 240VAC or 12 to 24VDC • 4 outputs, either relays or transistors (only DC models) • DIN-rail mounting • Size in mm (HxWxD): 90x35x56 Ordering information Specifications Name Number of I/O points Inputs (X)/ power supply Outputs (Y) Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code Expansion I/O units 8 4 100 to 240 VAC 4 Relays 90x35x56 ZEN-8E1AR 12 to 24 VDC ZEN-8E1DR Transistors ZEN-8E1DT Item Specifications ZEN-8E1AR ZEN-8E1D_ Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5% max.) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 4 VA max. 2 W max. Inrush current 1.5 A max. 15 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) 455 23 Programmable relays ZEN-PA Programmable relays ZEN Power Supply The ZEN Power Supply has the same compact housing as our 10 I/O CPU units. With a current/wattage output of 1.3 A/30 W it covers enough power to supply the DC ZEN itself and the eventually used sensors. If needed parallel operation is possible. • Output voltage 24 VDC • Output current 1.3 A • Capacity 30 W • Allows parallel operation • Size in mm (HxWxD): 90x70x56 Ordering information Specifications Power rating Inputs voltage Output current Order code 30 W 100 to 240 VAC 1.3 A ZEN-PA03024 Item Specifications Power rating 30 W Efficiency 80% min. (24 V) Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment ±10% to ±15% (with V. ADJ) min. of rate output voltage Ripple 2% (p-p) max. (-25°C to -10°C: 4% max.) Input variation 0.5% max. Temperature 0.05% / °C max. Overload protection 105% to 135% of rated load current, inverted L drop, intermittent Overvoltage protection yes Input Current 100 V 0.8 A max. 200 V 0.45 A max. Output indicator yes (green) Weight 240 g max. Operating temperature -10°C to 60°C Parallel operation yes (2 units max.) Which size is required? K3GN K3MA-J K3MA-L K3MA-F Which application is required? Process Temperature Frequency/ rate Process/ frequency/ rate General purpose 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) LOOKING FOR PERFECT MEASURING & READ-OUT? With our K3HB series we cover a wide range of applications. One of them is the weighing indicator which performs perfect measurement in any weighing application. The instrument can be equipped with a load-cell power supply of 10 V/100 mA. Several option boards for communication, contact output boards or event inputs are also available. On top of these you can get direct DeviceNet communication. • High speed sampling 20 ms • Equipped with position meter • Two colour display for easy recognition K3HB-V – For perfect weighing 456 Page 460 Page 461 Page 461 Page 461 Digital panel indicators Which application is required? K3HB-X Process K3HB-H Temperature Advanced K3HB-V Weighing 96x48 mm (1/8 DIN) K3HB-S Linear sensor K3HB-R Rotary pulse K3HB-P Time interval K3HB-C Up/down counting pulse 457 24 Digital panel indicators Page 462 Page 462 Page 462 Page 462 Page 464 Page 464 Page 464 458 Selection table Category Multifunctional digital panel indicator Process indicator Temperature indicator Frequency/rate indicator Process indicator Selection criteria Model K3GN K3MA-J K3MA-L K3MA-F K3HB-X Size 1/32 DIN 1/8 DIN Features Colour change display      Number of digits 5 5 4 5 5 Leading zero suppression      Forced zero function      Min./max. hold function      Average processing      User selectable inputs      Start-up compensating time  – –  – Key protection      Decimal point position setting      Accuracy ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale (DC voltage & DC current), ±0.5% of full scale (AC voltage & AC current) Input range 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V or 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V Pt100, JPt100 or thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to 19.999 mA, -199.99 to 199.99 mA, 4.000 to 20.000 mA, 0.0 to 400.0 V, 0.0000 to 1.999 V, -199.99 to 199.99 V, 1.0000 to 5.0000 V Sample rate 250 ms 250 ms 500 ms – 20 ms Features Remote/local processing, parameter initialisation, programmable output configuration, process value hold Teaching, comparative output pattern selection, parameter initialisation, programmable output configuration, process value hold Programmable output configuration, process value hold Teaching, comparative output pattern selection, programmable output configuration, process value hold Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Sensor power supply – – –   Front protection IP rating IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 Supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC Inputs NPN  –    PNP  –    Temperature – – – – – Contact – – –  – Voltage pulse – – –  – Load cell – – – – – DC voltage    –  DC current   – –  AC voltage – – – –  AC current – – – –  Outputs Relay      NPN  – – –  PNP  – – –  Linear – – – –  BCD – – – – – Comms  – – –  Page 460 461 462 Digital panel indicators 459 24 Digital panel indicators Temperature indicator Weighing indicator Linear sensor indicator Up/down counting pulse indicator Time interval indicator Rotary pulse indicator K3HB-H K3HB-V K3HB-S K3HB-C K3HB-P K3HB-R 1/8 DIN – –       5 5 5 5 5 5                               – – – – –              Thermocouple: ±0.3% of full scale, Pt-100: ±0.2% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale One input: ±0.1% of full scale, two inputs: ±0.2% of full scale ±0.08% rgd ±1 digit ±0.006% rgd ±1 digit ±0.02% rgd ±1 digit Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W 0.00 to 199.99 mV, 0.000 to 19.999 mV, 100.00 mV, 199.99 mV 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz 20 ms 20 ms 0.5 ms – – – Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, 2-input calculation, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, measurement operation selection, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum/minimum hold, reset Scaling, measurement operation selection, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, teaching, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum/minimum hold, reset Scaling, measurement operation selection, averaging, previous average value comparison, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, teaching, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum /minimum hold, reset       IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC              – – – – – – – – – – – – – –    –  – – – – – –  – – – – –  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –                         – – –          462 464  Standard  Available – No/not available 460 K3GN 1/32 DIN multi-function Compact and intelligent digital panel meter The K3GN is able to cover a wide variety of applications with its 3 main functions: process meter, RPM processor/tachometer and digital data display for PC/PLC. Configuration is easy and the design is advanced and compact. • Process indicator DC voltage/current • RPM process/tachometer • Digital data display for PC/PLC • Very compact 1/32 DIN housing: Size in mm (HxWxD): 24x48x83mm • 5-digit display with programmable display colour, in red or green Ordering information Specifications Input type Supply voltage Output Order code No communications RS-485 DC voltage/current, NPN 24 VDC Dual relays (SPST-NO) K3GN-NDC 24 DC K3GN-NDC-FLK 24 DC Three NPN open collector K3GN-NDT1 24 DC K3GN-NDT1-FLK 24 DC DC voltage/current, PNP Dual relays (SPST-NO) K3GN-PDC 24 DC K3GN-PDC-FLK 24 DC Three PNP open collector K3GN-PDT2 24 DC K3GN-PDT2-FLK 24 DC Supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption 2.5 W max. (at max. DC load with all indicators lit) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Display refresh period Sampling period (sampling times multiplied by number of averaging times if average processing is selected) Max. displayed digits 5 digits (-19999 to 99999) Display 7-segment digital display, character height: 7.0 mm Polarity display “-” is displayed automatically with a negative input signal Zero display Leading zeros are not displayed Scaling function Programmable with front-panel key inputs (range of display: -19999 to 99999). The decimal point position can be set as desired. External controls HOLD: (measurement value held) ZERO: (forced-zero) Hysteresis setting Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9999) Other functions Programmable colour display Selectable output operating action Teaching set values Average processing (simple average) Lockout configuration Communications writing control (communications output models only) Output Relays: 2 SPST-NO Transistors: 3 NPN open collector 3 PNP open collector Combinations: Communications output (RS-485) + relay outputs Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs (3 PNP open collector) Communications Communications function: RS-485 Delay in comparative outputs (transistor outputs) 750 ms max. Degree of protection Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case: IEC standard IP20 Terminals: IEC standard IP20 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x80 461 24 Digital panel indicators K3MA-J, -L, -F 1/8 DIN standard indicators Highly visible LCD display with 2 colour (red and green) LEDs The K3MA series comes with a process meter, a frequency/rate meter and a temperature meter of either 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC. All are equipped with the same quality display and have the same short depth of 80 mm. • 1/8 DIN size housing • Highly visible, negative transmissive backlit LCD display • 14.2 mm high characters • 5 digits (-19,999 to 99,999), K3MA-L: 4 digits • Front-panel IP66 Ordering information Accessories Specifications Indicator Supply voltage Input type & ranges Output Order code Process meter 100 to 240 VAC DC voltage: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V DC current: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-J-A2 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-J-A2 24VAC/VDC Temperature meter 100 to 240 VAC Platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 or thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B 1 relay contact output (SPDT) K3MA-L-C 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 1 relay contact output (SPDT) K3MA-L-C 24VAC/VDC Frequency/rate meter 100 to 240 VAC Rotary pulse: No voltage: 0.05 to 30.00 Hz; open collector: 0.1 to 5000.0 Hz 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-F-A2 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-F-A2 24VAC/VDC Type Order code Splash-proof soft cover K32-49SC Hard cover K32-49HC Item 100-240 VAC models 24 VAC/VDC models Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption (under maximum load) 6 VA max. 4.5 VA max. (24 VAC) 4.5 W max. (24 VDC) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Weight Approx. 200 g Display 7-segment digital display, character height: 14.2 mm Polarity display "-" is displayed automatically with a negative input signal Zero display Leading zeros are not displayed Hold function Max. hold (maximum value), min. hold (minimum value) Hysteresis setting Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9,999) Delay in comparative outputs 1 s max. Degree of protection Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case: IEC standard IP20 Terminals: IEC standard IP00 + finger protection (VDE 0106/100) Memory protection Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x80 462 K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - analogue input Process, temperature, weighing and linear sensor indicators These indicators with analogue input feature a clear and easy-to-use colour change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB series is high speed, with a sample rate of 50 Hz, and even 2,000 Hz for K3HB-S • Position meter indication for easy monitoring • Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485 • Double display, with 5 digits, in two colours • 1/8 DIN size housing Ordering information Option boards Sensor power supply/output boards Relay/transistor output boards Event input boards *1 CPA/CPB can be combined with relay outputs only. *2 Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications. K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D. Accessories Type of indicator Input sensor type and range Supply voltage Order code Process indicator K3HB-X AC current input, from 0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to 19.999 mA 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XAA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XAA 24VAC/VDC DC current input, from ±199.99 mA, to 4.000 to 20.000 mA 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XAD 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XAD 24VAC/VDC AC voltage input, from 0.0 to 400.0 V to 0.0000 to 1.999 V 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XVA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XVA 24VAC/VDC DC voltage input, from ±199.99 V to 1.0000 to 5.0000 V 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XVD 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XVD 24VAC/VDC Temperature indicator K3HB-H Temperature input Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-HTA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-HTA 24VAC/VDC Weighing indicator K3HB-V Load cell input (DC low voltage input), 0.00 to 199.99 mV, 0.000 to 19.999 mV, 100.00 mV, 199.999 mV 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-VLC 100-240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-VLC 24VAC/VDC Linear sensor indicator K3HB-S DC process input, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-SSD AC/DC24 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-SSD AC100-240 Slot Output Sensor power supply Communications Applicable indicator types Order code B Relay PASS: SPDT 12 VDC ±10%, 80 mA – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-CPA *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-L1 A *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-L2A *2 – – – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-A *2 – – RS-232C K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-FLK1 A *2 – – RS-485 K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-FLK3A *2 Relay PASS: SPDT 10 VDC ±5%, 100 mA – K3HB-V K33-CPB *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K3HB-V K33-L1B *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K3HB-V K33-L2B *2 – – – K3HB-V K33-B *2 – – RS-232C K3HB-V K33-FLK1B *2 – – RS-485 K3HB-V K33-FLK3B *2 Slot Output Communications Order code C Relay H/L: SPDT each – K34-C1 HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each – K34-C2 Transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T1 PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T2 – – DeviceNet K34-DRT *2 Slot Input type Number of points Communications Order code D NPN open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-1 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-2 PNP open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-3 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-4 Type Order code Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector) K32-DICN K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - analogue input 463 24 Digital panel indicators Specifications Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC Power consumption 100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load) Display method Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display (character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green)) Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Display range -19,999 to 99,999 Weight Approx. 300 g (base unit only) Degree of protection Front-panel Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case IP20 Terminals IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100) Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000 Event input ratings Contact ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. No-contact ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max. Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Output ratings Transistor output Maximum load voltage 24 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Leakage current 100 μA max. Contact output (resistive load) Rated load 5 A at 250 VAC, 5 A at 30 VDC Rated through current 5 A Mechanical life expectancy 5,000,000 operations Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations Linear output Allowable load impedance 500  max. (mA); 5 k min. (V) Resolution Approx. 10,000 Output error ±0.5% FS Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x100 464 K3HB-C, -P, -R 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - digital input Rotary pulse, timer interval and up/down counting pulse indicators These indicators with analogue input feature a clear and easy-to-use colour change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB-R and -C are highspeed, with a sample rate up to 50 kHz. • Position meter indication for easy monitoring • Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485 • Double display, with 5 digits, in two colours • 1/8 DIN size housing Ordering information Option boards Sensor power supply/output boards Relay/transistor output boards Event input boards *1 CPA can be combined with relay outputs only. *2 Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications. K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D. Accessories Type of indicator Input ranges Supply voltage Input sensor Order code Rotary pulse indicator K3HB-R No voltage contact: 30 Hz max. Voltage pulse: 50 kHz max. Open collector: 50 kHz max. 100 to 240 VAC NPN input/voltage pulse K3HB-RNB 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-RNB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC PNP input K3HB-RPB 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-RPB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC NPN K3HB-PNB 100-240VAC 100 to 240 VAC PNP K3HB-PPB 100-240VAC Timer interval indicator K3HB-P 24 VAC/VDC PNP K3HB-PPB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC NPN K3HB-CNB 100-240VAC Up/down counting pulse indicator K3HB-C 24 VAC/VDC NPN K3HB-CNB 24VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC PNP K3HB-CPB 24VAC/VDC Slot Output Sensor power supply Communications Order code B Relay PASS: SPDT 12 VDC ±10%, 80 mA – K33-CPA *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K33-L1 A *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K33-L2A *2 – – – K33-A *2 – – RS-232C K33-FLK1 A *2 – – RS-485 K33-FLK3A *2 Slot Output Communications Order code C Relay H/L: SPDT each – K34-C1 HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each – K34-C2 Transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T1 PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T2 – DeviceNet K34-DRT *2 BCD + transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-BCD Slot Input type Number of points Communications Order code D NPN open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-1 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-2 PNP open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-3 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-4 Type Order code Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector) K32-DICN Special BCD output cable K32-BCD K3HB-C, -P, -R 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - digital input 465 24 Digital panel indicators Specifications Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC Power consumption 100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load) Display method Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display (character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green)) Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Display range -19,999 to 99,999 Weight Approx. 300 g (base unit only) Degree of protection Front-panel Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case IP20 Terminals IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100) Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000 Event input ratings Contact ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. No-contact ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max. Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Output ratings Transistor output Maximum load voltage 24 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Leakage current 100 μA max. Contact output (resistive load) Rated load 5 A at 250 VAC, 5 A at 30 VDC Rated through current 5 A Mechanical life expectancy 5,000,000 operations Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations Linear output Allowable load impedance 500  max. (mA); 5 k min. (V) Resolution Approx. 10,000 Output error ±0.5% FS Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x100  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E PIC18F/LF1XK50 Data Sheet 20-Pin USB Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology DS41350E-page 2 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 978-1-60932-624-1 Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 3 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Universal Serial Bus Features: • USB V2.0 Compliant SIE • Full Speed (12 Mb/s) and Low Speed (1.5 Mb/s) • Supports Control, Interrupt, Isochronous and Bulk Transfers • Supports up to 16 Endpoints (8 bidirectional) • 256-byte Dual Access RAM for USB • Input-change interrupt on D+/D- for detecting physical connection to USB host High Performance RISC CPU: • C Compiler Optimized Architecture: - Optional extended instruction set designed to optimize re-entrant code - 256 bytes, data EEPROM - Up to 16 Kbytes linear program memory addressing - Up to 768 bytes linear data memory addressing • Priority levels for Interrupts • 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier Flexible Oscillator Structure: • CPU divider to run the core slower than the USB peripheral • 16 MHz Internal Oscillator Block: - Software selectable frequencies, 31 kHz to 16 MHz - Provides a complete range of clock speeds from 31 kHz to 32 MHz when used with PLL - User tunable to compensate for frequency drift • Four Crystal modes, up to 48 MHz • External Clock modes, up to 48 MHz • 4X Phase Lock Loop (PLL) • Secondary oscillator using Timer1 at 32 kHz • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: - Allows for safe shutdown if primary or secondary oscillator stops • Two-speed Oscillator Start-up Special Microcontroller Features: • Full 5.5V Operation – PIC18F1XK50 • 1.8V-3.6V Operation – PIC18LF1XK50 • Self-programmable under Software Control • Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) - With software enable option • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT) - Programmable period from 4ms to 131s • Single-supply 3V In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via two pins Extreme Low-Power Management PIC18LF1XK50 with nanoWatt XLP: • Sleep mode: 24 nA • Watchdog Timer: 450 nA • Timer1 Oscillator: 790 nA @ 32 kHz Analog Features: • Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) module: - 10-bit resolution, 9 external channels - Auto acquisition capability - Conversion available during Sleep - Internal 1.024V Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) channel - Independent input multiplexing • Dual Analog Comparators - Rail-to-rail operation - Independent input multiplexing • Voltage Reference module: - Programmable (% of VDD), 16 steps - Two 16-level voltage ranges using VREF pins - Programmable Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR), 3 levels • On-chip 3.2V LDO Regulator – (PIC18F1XK50) Peripheral Highlights: • 14 I/O Pins plus 1 Input-only pin: - High-current sink/source 25 mA/25 mA - 7 Programmable weak pull-ups - 7 Programmable Interrupt-on-change pins - 3 programmable external interrupts - Programmable slew rate • Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) module: - One, two, three, or four PWM outputs - Selectable polarity - Programmable dead time - Auto-shutdown and Auto-restart • Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module: - 3-wire SPI (supports all 4 modes) - I2C™ Master and Slave modes (Slave mode address masking) • Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module: - Supports RS-485, RS-232 and LIN 2.0 - RS-232 operation using internal oscillator - Auto-Baud Detect - Auto-Wake-up on Break • SR Latch mode 20-Pin USB Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 4 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. - Pin Diagrams Pin Diagrams Device Program Memory Data Memory I/O(1) 10-bit A/D (ch)(2) ECCP (PWM) MSSP EUSART Comp. Timers Flash 8/16-bit USB (bytes) # Single-Word Instructions SRAM (bytes) EEPROM (bytes) SPI Master I2C™ PIC18F13K50/ PIC18LF13K50 8K 4096 512(3) 256 15 11 1 Y Y 1 2 1/3 Y PIC18F14K50/ PIC18LF14K50 16K 8192 768(3) 256 15 11 1 Y Y 1 2 1/3 Y Note 1: One pin is input only. 2: Channel count includes internal Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) and Programmable Voltage Reference (CVREF) channels. 3: Includes the dual port RAM used by the USB module which is shared with the data memory. 20-pin PDIP, SSOP, SOIC (300 MIL) 10 2 345 6 1 8 7 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 18 17 VDD RA5/IOCA5/OSC1/CLKIN RA4/AN3/IOCA3/OSC2/CLKOUT RA3/IOCA3/MCLR/VPP RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RB7/IOCB7/TX/CK VSS RA0/IOCA0/D+/PGD RA1/IOCA1/D-/PGC VUSB RC0/AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ RC1/AN5/C12IN1-/INT1/VREFRC2/ AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RB4/AN10/IOCB4/SDI/SDA RB5/AN11/IOCB5/RX/DT RB6/IOCB6/SCK/SCL PIC18F/LF1XK50 20-pin QFN (5x5) 8 9 23 1 14 15 16 10 11 6 12 13 20 19 18 17 7 5 4 PIC18F1XK50/ PIC18LF1XK50 RA3/MCLR/VPP RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RB7/TX/CK RB4/AN10/SDI/SDA RB5/AN11/RX/DT RB6/SCK/SCL RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RC1/AN1/C12IN1-/INT1/VREFRC0/ AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ VUSB RA1/D-/PGC RA0/D+/PGD Vss VDD RA4/AN3/OSC2/CLKO RA5/OSC1/CLKI  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 5 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 1: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PIN SUMMARY Pin I/O Analog Comparator Reference ECCP EUSART MSSP Timers Interrupts Pull-up USB Basic 19 RA0 IOCA0 D+ PGD 18 RA1 IOCA1 D- PGC 4 RA3(1) IOCA3 Y MCLR/VPP 3 RA4 AN3 IOCA4 Y OSC2/CLKOUT 2 RA5 IOCA5 Y OSC1/CLKIN 13 RB4 AN10 SDI/SDA IOCB4 Y 12 RB5 AN11 RX/DT IOCB5 Y 11 RB6 SCL/SCK IOCB6 Y 10 RB7 TX/CK IOCB7 Y 16 RC0 AN4 C12IN+ VREF+ INT0 15 RC1 AN5 C12IN1- VREF- INT1 14 RC2 AN6 C12IN2- CVREF P1D INT2 7 RC3 AN7 C12IN3- P1C PGM 6 RC4 C12OUT P1B SRQ 5 RC5 CCP1/P1A T0CKI 8 RC6 AN8 SS T13CKI/T1OSCI 9 RC7 AN9 SDO T1OSCO 17 VUSB 1 VDD 20 VSS Note 1: Input only. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 6 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.0 Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)....................................................................................................................... 15 3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 4.0 Flash Program Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 51 5.0 Data EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 6.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................ 65 7.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 67 8.0 Low Dropout (LDO) Voltage Regulator ...................................................................................................................................... 81 9.0 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 10.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 101 11.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 105 12.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 111 13.0 Timer3 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 113 14.0 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module................................................................................................................ 117 15.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module .................................................................................................................... 139 16.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 181 17.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module .............................................................................................................................. 209 18.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 223 19.0 Power-Managed Modes ........................................................................................................................................................... 235 20.0 SR Latch................................................................................................................................................................................... 241 21.0 Voltage References.................................................................................................................................................................. 245 22.0 Universal Serial Bus (USB) ...................................................................................................................................................... 251 23.0 Reset ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 277 24.0 Special Features of the CPU.................................................................................................................................................... 291 25.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 309 26.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 359 27.0 Electrical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................ 363 28.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables....................................................................................................................... 397 29.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 399 Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 405 Appendix B: Device Differences......................................................................................................................................................... 406 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 407 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 417 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 417 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 417 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 418 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 419  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 7 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) • The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277 When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com/cn to receive the most current information on all of our products. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 8 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 9 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW This document contains device specific information for the following devices: This family offers the advantages of all PIC18 microcontrollers – namely, high computational performance at an economical price – with the addition of high-endurance, Flash program memory. On top of these features, the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family introduces design enhancements that make these microcontrollers a logical choice for many highperformance, power sensitive applications. 1.1 New Core Features 1.1.1 nanoWatt XLP TECHNOLOGY All of the devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key items include: • Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the Timer1 source or the internal oscillator block, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. • Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation requirements. • On-the-fly Mode Switching: The powermanaged modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the user to incorporate powersaving ideas into their application’s software design. • Low Consumption in Key Modules: The power requirements for both Timer1 and the Watchdog Timer are minimized. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for values. 1.1.2 MULTIPLE OSCILLATOR OPTIONS AND FEATURES All of the devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family offer ten different oscillator options, allowing users a wide range of choices in developing application hardware. These include: • Four Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic resonators • External Clock modes, offering the option of using two pins (oscillator input and a divide-by-4 clock output) or one pin (oscillator input, with the second pin reassigned as general I/O) • External RC Oscillator modes with the same pin options as the External Clock modes • An internal oscillator block which contains a 16 MHz HFINTOSC oscillator and a 31 kHz LFINTOSC oscillator which together provide 8 user selectable clock frequencies, from 31 kHz to 16 MHz. This option frees the two oscillator pins for use as additional general purpose I/O. • A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier, available to both the high-speed crystal and internal oscillator modes, which allows clock speeds of up to 48 MHz. Used with the internal oscillator, the PLL gives users a complete selection of clock speeds, from 31 kHz to 32 MHz – all without using an external crystal or clock circuit. Besides its availability as a clock source, the internal oscillator block provides a stable reference source that gives the family additional features for robust operation: • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the LFINTOSC. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator block, allowing for continued operation or a safe application shutdown. • Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the internal oscillator to serve as the clock source from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep mode, until the primary clock source is available. • PIC18F13K50 • PIC18F14K50 • PIC18LF13K50 • PIC18LF14K50 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 10 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 1.2 Other Special Features • Memory Endurance: The Flash cells for both program memory and data EEPROM are rated to last for many thousands of erase/write cycles – up to 1K for program memory and 100K for EEPROM. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 40 years. • Self-programmability: These devices can write to their own program memory spaces under internal software control. Using a bootloader routine located in the code protected Boot Block, it is possible to create an application that can update itself in the field. • Extended Instruction Set: The PIC18F/ LF1XK50 family introduces an optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, which adds 8 new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. This extension has been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as C. • Enhanced CCP module: In PWM mode, this module provides 1, 2 or 4 modulated outputs for controlling half-bridge and full-bridge drivers. Other features include: - Auto-Shutdown, for disabling PWM outputs on interrupt or other select conditions - Auto-Restart, to reactivate outputs once the condition has cleared - Output steering to selectively enable one or more of 4 outputs to provide the PWM signal. • Enhanced Addressable USART: This serial communication module is capable of standard RS-232 operation and provides support for the LIN bus protocol. Other enhancements include automatic baud rate detection and a 16-bit Baud Rate Generator for improved resolution. • 10-bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period and thus, reduce code overhead. • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit postscaler, allowing an extended time-out range that is stable across operating voltage and temperature. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for time-out periods. 1.3 Details on Individual Family Members Devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family are available in 20-pin packages. Block diagrams for the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1. The devices are differentiated from each other in the following ways: 1. Flash program memory: • 8 Kbytes for PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50 • 16 Kbytes for PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 2. On-chip 3.2V LDO regulator for PIC18F13K50 and PIC18F14K50. All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in Table 1-1. The pinouts for all devices are listed in Table 1 and I/O description are in Table 1-2.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 11 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F/LF1XK50 (20-PIN DEVICES) Features PIC18F13K50 PIC18LF13K50 PIC18F14K50 PIC18LF14K50 LDO Regulator Yes No Yes No Program Memory (Bytes) 8K 16K Program Memory (Instructions) 4096 8192 Data Memory (Bytes) 512 768 Operating Frequency DC – 48 MHz Interrupt Sources 30 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C Timers 4 Enhanced Capture/ Compare/PWM Modules 1 Serial Communications MSSP, Enhanced USART, USB 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module 9 Input Channels Resets (and Delays) POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) Instruction Set 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages 20-Pin PDIP, SSOP, SOIC (300 mil) and QFN (5x5) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 12 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 1-1: PIC18F/LF1XK50 BLOCK DIAGRAM Instruction Decode and Control PORTA PORTB PORTC RA1 RA0 Data Latch Data Memory Address Latch Data Address<12> 12 BSR FSR0 Access FSR1 FSR2 inc/dec logic Address 4 12 4 PCH PCL PCLATH 8 31-Level Stack Program Counter PRODH PRODL 8 x 8 Multiply 8 BITOP 8 8 ALU<8> 20 8 8 Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 8 Data Bus<8> Table Latch 8 IR 12 3 ROM Latch PCLATU PCU Note 1: RA3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled. 2: OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O. Refer to Section 2.0 “Oscillator Module” for additional information. 3: PIC18F13K50/PIC18F14K50 only. Comparator MSSP EUSART 10-bit ADC Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 ECCP1 BOR Data EEPROM W Instruction Bus <16> STKPTR Bank 8 State machine control signals Decode 8 8 Power-up Timer Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer OSC1(2) OSC2(2) VDD, Internal Oscillator Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Precision Reference VSS Band Gap MCLR(1) Block LFINTOSC Oscillator 16 MHz Oscillator Single-Supply Programming T1OSO T1OSI FVR FVR FVR CVREF Address Latch Program Memory Data Latch CVREF RA3 RA4 RA5 RB4 RB5 RB6 RB7 RC0 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 RC6 RC7 (512/768 bytes) VUSB USB Module USB LDO(3) Regulator  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 13 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 1-2: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description RA0/D+/PGD RA0 D+ PGD 19 I I/O I/O TTL XCVR ST Digital input USB differential plus line (input/output) ICSP™ programming data pin RA1/D-/PGC RA1 DPGC 18 I I/O I/O TTL XCVR ST Digital input USB differential minus line (input/output) ICSP™ programming clock pin RA3/MCLR/VPP RA3 MCLR VPP 4 IIP ST ST — Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input) Digital input Active-low Master Clear with internal pull-up High voltage programming input RA4/AN3/OSC2/CLKOUT RA4 AN3 OSC2 CLKOUT 3 I/O IO O TTL Analog XTAL CMOS Digital I/O ADC channel 3 Oscillator crystal output. Connect to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKOUT which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate RA5/OSC1/CLKIN RA5 OSC1 CLKIN 2 I/O I I TTL XTAL CMOS Digital I/O Oscillator crystal input or external clock input ST buffer when configured in RC mode; analog other wise External clock source input. Always associated with the pin function OSC1 (See related OSC1/CLKIN, OSC2, CLKOUT pins RB4/AN10/SDI/SDA RB4 AN10 SDI SDA 13 I/O II I/O TTL Analog ST ST Digital I/O ADC channel 10 SPI data in I2C™ data I/O RB5/AN11/RX/DT RB5 AN11 RX DT 12 I/O II I/O TLL Analog ST ST Digital I/O ADC channel 11 EUSART asynchronous receive EUSART synchronous data (see related RX/TX) RB6/SCK/SCI RB6 SCK SCI 11 I/O I/O I/O TLL ST ST Digital I/O Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode RB7/TX/CK RB7 TX CK 10 I/O O I/O TLL CMOS ST Digital I/O EUSART asynchronous transmit EUSART synchronous clock (see related RX/DT) Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input I = Input O = Output P = Power XTAL= Crystal Oscillator XCVR = USB Differential Transceiver PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 14 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. RC0/AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ RC0 AN4 C12IN+ INT0 VREF+ 16 I/O IIII ST Analog Analog ST Analog Digital I/O ADC channel 4 Comparator C1 and C2 non-inverting input External interrupt 0 Comparator reference voltage (high) input RC1/AN5/C12IN-/INT1/VREFRC1 AN5 C12ININT1 VREF- 15 I/O IIII ST Analog Analog ST Analog Digital I/O ADC channel 5 Comparator C1 and C2 non-inverting input External interrupt 0 Comparator reference voltage (low) input RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RC2 AN6 P1D C12IN2- CVREF INT2 14 I/O IOIOI ST Analog CMOS Analog Analog ST Digital I/O ADC channel 6 Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 inverting input Comparator reference voltage output External interrupt 0 RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC3 AN7 P1C C12IN3- PGM 7 I/O IOI I/O ST Analog CMOS Analog ST Digital I/O ADC channel 7 Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 inverting input Low-Voltage ICSP Programming enable pin RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC4 P1B C12OUT SRQ 6 I/O OOO ST CMOS CMOS CMOS Digital I/O Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 output SR Latch output RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC5 CCP1 P1A T0CKI 5 I/O I/O OI ST ST CMOS ST Digital I/O Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM 1 output Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Timer0 external clock input RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC6 AN8 SS T13CKI T1OSCI 8 I/O IIII ST Analog TTL ST XTAL Digital I/O ADC channel 8 SPI slave select input Timer0 and Timer3 external clock input Timer1 oscillator input RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RC7 AN9 SDO T1OSCO 9 I/O IOO ST Analog CMOS XTAL Digital I/O ADC channel 9 SPI data out Timer1 oscillator output VSS 20 P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins VDD 1 P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins VUSB 17 P — Positive supply for USB transceiver TABLE 1-2: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input I = Input O = Output P = Power XTAL= Crystal Oscillator XCVR = USB Differential Transceiver  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 15 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.0 OSCILLATOR MODULE 2.1 Overview The oscillator module has a variety of clock sources and features that allow it to be used in a wide range of applications, maximizing performance and minimizing power consumption. Figure 2-1 illustrates a block diagram of the oscillator module. Key features of the oscillator module include: • System Clock Selection - Primary External Oscillator - Secondary External Oscillator - Internal Oscillator • Oscillator Start-up Timer • System Clock Selection • Clock Switching • 4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier • CPU Clock Divider • USB Operation - Low Speed - Full Speed • Two-Speed Start-up Mode • Fail-Safe Clock Monitoring 2.2 System Clock Selection The SCS bits of the OSCCON register select between the following clock sources: • Primary External Oscillator • Secondary External Oscillator • Internal Oscillator TABLE 2-1: SYSTEM CLOCK SELECTION The default state of the SCS bits sets the system clock to be the oscillator defined by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The system clock will always be defined by the FOSC bits until the SCS bits are modified in software. When the Internal Oscillator is selected as the system clock, the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register and the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register will select either the LFINTOSC or the HFINTOSC. The LFINTOSC is selected when the IRCF<2:0> = 000 and the INTSRC bit is clear. All other combinations of the IRCF bits and the INTSRC bit will select the HFINTOSC as the system clock. 2.3 Primary External Oscillator The Primary External Oscillator’s mode of operation is selected by setting the FOSC<3:0> bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The oscillator can be set to the following modes: • LP: Low-Power Crystal • XT: Crystal/Ceramic Resonator • HS: High-Speed Crystal Resonator • RC: External RC Oscillator • EC: External Clock Additionally, the Primary External Oscillator may be shut-down under firmware control to save power. Note: The frequency of the system clock will be referred to as FOSC throughout this document. Configuration Selection SCS <1:0> System Clock 1x Internal Oscillator 01 Secondary External Oscillator 00 (Default after Reset) Oscillator defined by FOSC<3:0> PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 16 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2-1: PIC® MCU CLOCK SOURCE BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 x PLL FOSC<3:0> OSC2 OSC1 Sleep CPU Peripherals IDLEN Postscaler MUX MUX 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 250 kHz 500 kHz IRCF<2:0> 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 31 kHz 31 kHz LFINTOSC Internal Oscillator Block Clock HFINTOSC Control SCS<1:0> 16 MHz 0 1 INTSRC Primary PIC18F/LF1XK50 Sleep Sleep System Secondary T1OSCEN Enable Oscillator T1OSI T1OSO PCLKEN PRI_SD  2 CPU Divider 0 1 1 0 USBDIV FOSC<3:0> Low Speed USB High Speed USB PLLEN SPLLEN Oscillator Watchdog Timer Oscillator Fail-Safe Clock Two-Speed Start-up Clock 00 1x 01  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 17 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.3.1 PRIMARY EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR SHUT-DOWN The Primary External Oscillator can be enabled or disabled via software. To enable software control of the Primary External Oscillator, the PCLKEN bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register must be set. With the PCLKEN bit set, the Primary External Oscillator is controlled by the PRI_SD bit of the OSCCON2 register. The Primary External Oscillator will be enabled when the PRI_SD bit is set, and disabled when the PRI_SD bit is clear. 2.3.2 LP, XT AND HS OSCILLATOR MODES The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 2-2). The mode selects a low, medium or high gain setting of the internal inverteramplifier to support various resonator types and speed. LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption is the least of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a low drive level specification, for example, tuning fork type crystals. XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode current consumption is the medium of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a medium drive level specification. HS Oscillator mode selects the highest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. HS mode current consumption is the highest of the three modes. This mode is best suited for resonators that require a high drive setting. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show typical circuits for quartz crystal and ceramic resonators, respectively. FIGURE 2-2: QUARTZ CRYSTAL OPERATION (LP, XT OR HS MODE) Note: The Primary External Oscillator cannot be shut down when it is selected as the System Clock. To shut down the oscillator, the system clock source must be either the Secondary Oscillator or the Internal Oscillator. Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according to type, package and manufacturer. The user should consult the manufacturer data sheets for specifications and recommended application. 2: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference the following Microchip Applications Notes: • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC® and PIC® Devices” (DS00826) • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design” (DS00849) • AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator Analysis and Design” (DS00943) • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work” (DS00949) Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for quartz crystals with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. C1 C2 Quartz RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU Crystal OSC2/CLKOUT PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 18 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2-3: CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (XT OR HS MODE) 2.3.3 EXTERNAL RC The External Resistor-Capacitor (RC) mode supports the use of an external RC circuit. This allows the designer maximum flexibility in frequency choice while keeping costs to a minimum when clock accuracy is not required. In RC mode, the RC circuit connects to OSC1, allowing OSC2 to be configured as an IO or as CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the RC oscillator divided by 4. Figure 2-4 shows the external RC mode connections. FIGURE 2-4: EXTERNAL RC MODES The RC oscillator frequency is a function of the supply voltage, the resistor REXT, the capacitor CEXT and the operating temperature. Other factors affecting the oscillator frequency are: • Input threshold voltage variation • Component tolerances • Variation in capacitance due to packaging 2.3.4 EXTERNAL CLOCK The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally generated logic level clock to be used as the system’s clock source. When operating in this mode, the external clock source is connected to the OSC1 allowing OSC2 to be configured as an I/O or as CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the EC oscillator divided by 4. Three different power settings are available for EC mode. The power settings allow for a reduced IDD of the device, if the EC clock is known to be in a specific range. If there is an expected range of frequencies for the EC clock, select the power mode for the highest frequency. EC Low power 0 – 250 kHz EC Medium power 250 kHz – 4 MHz EC High power 4 – 48 MHz 2.4 Secondary External Oscillator The Secondary External Oscillator is designed to drive an external 32.768 kHz crystal. This oscillator is enabled or disabled by the T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register. See Section 11.0 “Timer1 Module” for more information. Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for ceramic resonators with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. 3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP) may be required for proper ceramic resonator operation. C1 C2 Ceramic RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU RP(3) Resonator OSC2/CLKOUT OSC2/CLKOUT(1) CEXT REXT PIC® MCU OSC1/CLKIN FOSC/4 or Internal Clock VDD VSS Recommended values: 10 k  REXT  100 k CEXT > 20 pF Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in Section 1.0 “Device Overview”. 2: Output depends upon RC or RCIO clock mode. I/O(2)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 19 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.5 Internal Oscillator The internal oscillator module contains two independent oscillators which are: • LFINTOSC: Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator • HFINTOSC: High-Frequency Internal Oscillator When operating with either oscillator, OSC1 will be an I/O and OSC2 will be either an I/O or CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the Internal Oscillator divided by 4. 2.5.1 LFINTOSC The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is a 31 kHz internal clock source. The LFINTOSC oscillator is the clock source for: • Power-up Timer • Watchdog Timer • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The LFINTOSC is enabled when any of the following conditions are true: • Power-up Timer is enabled (PWRTEN = 0) • Watchdog Timer is enabled (WDTEN = 1) • Watchdog Timer is enabled by software (WDTEN = 0 and SWDTEN = 1) • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled (FCMEM = 1) • SCS1=1 and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 • FOSC<3:0> selects the internal oscillator as the primary clock and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 • IESO = 1 (Two-Speed Start-up) and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 2.5.2 HFINTOSC The High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) is a precision oscillator that is factory-calibrated to operate at 16 MHz. The output of the HFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and a multiplexer (see Figure 2-1). One of eight frequencies can be selected using the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. The following frequencies are available from the HFINTOSC: • 16 MHZ • 8 MHZ • 4 MHZ • 2 MHZ • 1 MHZ (Default after Reset) • 500 kHz • 250 kHz • 31 kHz The HFIOFS bit of the OSCCON register indicates whether the HFINTOSC is stable. The HFINTOSC is enabled if any of the following conditions are true: • SCS1 = 1 and IRCF<2:0>  000 • SCS1 = 1 and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • FOSC<3:0> selects the internal oscillator as the primary clock and - IRCF<2:0>  000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • IESO = 1 (Two-Speed Start-up) and - IRCF<2:0>  000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • FCMEM=1 (Fail Safe Clock Monitoring) and - IRCF<2:0>  000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 Note 1: Selecting 31 kHz from the HFINTOSC oscillator requires IRCF<2:0> = 000 and the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register to be set. If the INTSRC bit is clear, the system clock will come from the LFINTOSC. 2: Additional adjustments to the frequency of the HFINTOSC can made via the OSCTUNE registers. See Register 2-3 for more details PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 20 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.6 Oscillator Control The Oscillator Control (OSCCON) (Register 2-1) and the Oscillator Control 2 (OSCCON2) (Register 2-2) registers control the system clock and frequency selection options. REGISTER 2-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-q R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS(1) HFIOFS SCS1 SCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit 1 = Device enters Idle mode on SLEEP instruction 0 = Device enters Sleep mode on SLEEP instruction bit 6-4 IRCF<2:0>: Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits 111 = 16 MHz 110 = 8 MHz 101 = 4 MHz 100 = 2 MHz 011 = 1 MHz(3) 010 = 500 kHz 001 = 250 kHz 000 = 31 kHz(2) bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1) 1 = Device is running from the clock defined by FOSC<2:0> of the CONFIG1 register 0 = Device is running from the internal oscillator (HFINTOSC or LFINTOSC) bit 2 HFIOFS: HFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit 1 = HFINTOSC frequency is stable 0 = HFINTOSC frequency is not stable bit 1-0 SCS<1:0>: System Clock Select bits 1x = Internal oscillator block 01 = Secondary (Timer1) oscillator 00 = Primary clock (determined by CONFIG1H[FOSC<3:0>]). Note 1: Reset state depends on state of the IESO Configuration bit. 2: Source selected by the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register, see text. 3: Default output frequency of HFINTOSC on Reset.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 21 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 2-2: OSCCON2: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R-x — — — — — PRI_SD HFIOFL LFIOFS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 PRI_SD: Primary Oscillator Drive Circuit shutdown bit 1 = Oscillator drive circuit on 0 = Oscillator drive circuit off (zero power) bit 1 HFIOFL: HFINTOSC Frequency Locked bit 1 = HFINTOSC is in lock 0 = HFINTOSC has not yet locked bit 0 LFIOFS: LFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit 1 = LFINTOSC is stable 0 = LFINTOSC is not stable PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 22 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.6.1 OSCTUNE REGISTER The HFINTOSC is factory calibrated, but can be adjusted in software by writing to the TUN<5:0> bits of the OSCTUNE register (Register 2-3). The default value of the TUN<5:0> is ‘000000’. The value is a 6-bit two’s complement number. When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the HFINTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. Code execution continues during this shift, while giving no indication that the shift has occurred. OSCTUNE does not affect the LFINTOSC frequency. The operation of features that depend on the LFINTOSC clock source frequency, such as the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT), Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency. The OSCTUNE register also implements the INTSRC and SPLLEN bits, which control certain features of the internal oscillator block. The INTSRC bit allows users to select which internal oscillator provides the clock source when the 31 kHz frequency option is selected. This is covered in greater detail in Section 2.5.1 “LFINTOSC”. The SPLLEN bit controls the operation of the frequency multiplier. For more details about the function of the SPLLEN bit see Section 2.9 “4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier” REGISTER 2-3: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit 1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from 16 MHz HFINTOSC source (divide-by-512 enabled) 0 = 31 kHz device clock derived directly from LFINTOSC internal oscillator bit 6 SPLLEN: Software Controlled Frequency Multiplier PLL bit 1 = PLL enabled (for HFINTOSC 8 MHz only) 0 = PLL disabled bit 5-0 TUN<5:0>: Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency 011110 = • • • 000001 = 000000 = Oscillator module is running at the factory calibrated frequency. 111111 = • • • 100000 = Minimum frequency  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 23 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.7 Oscillator Start-up Timer The Primary External Oscillator, when configured for LP, XT or HS modes, incorporates an Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST). The OST ensures that the oscillator starts and provides a stable clock to the oscillator module. The OST times out when 1024 oscillations on OSC1 have occurred. During the OST period, with the system clock set to the Primary External Oscillator, the program counter does not increment suspending program execution. The OST period will occur following: • Power-on Reset (POR) • Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Wake-up from Sleep • Oscillator being enabled • Expiration of Power-up Timer (PWRT) In order to minimize latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution, the Two-Speed Start-up mode can be selected. See Section 2.12 “Two-Speed Start-up Mode” for more information. 2.8 Clock Switching The device contains circuitry to prevent clock “glitches” due to a change of the system clock source. To accomplish this, a short pause in the system clock occurs during the clock switch. If the new clock source is not stable (e.g., OST is active), the device will continue to execute from the old clock source until the new clock source becomes stable. The timing of a clock switch is as follows: 1. SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified. 2. The system clock will continue to operate from the old clock until the new clock is ready. 3. Clock switch circuitry waits for two consecutive rising edges of the old clock after the new clock is ready. 4. The system clock is held low, starting at the next falling edge of the old clock. 5. Clock switch circuitry waits for an additional two rising edges of the new clock. 6. On the next falling edge of the new clock, the low hold on the system clock is release and the new clock is switched in as the system clock. 7. Clock switch is complete. Refer to Figure 2-5 for more details. FIGURE 2-5: CLOCK SWITCH TIMING Old Clock New Clock IRCF <2:0> System Clock Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running High Speed Low Speed Select Old Select New New Clk Ready Low Speed High Speed Old Clock New Clock IRCF <2:0> System Clock Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running Select Old Select New New Clk Ready Note 1: Start-up time includes TOST (1024 TOSC) for external clocks, plus TPLL (approx. 2 ms) for HSPLL mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 24 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 2-2: EXAMPLES OF DELAYS DUE TO CLOCK SWITCHING 2.9 4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit is provided as an option for users who wish to use a lower-frequency external oscillator or to operate at 32 MHz with the HFINTOSC. The PLL is designed for an input frequency from 4 MHz to 12 MHz. The PLL multiplies its input frequency by a factor of four when the PLL is enabled. This may be useful for customers who are concerned with EMI, due to high-frequency crystals. Two bits control the PLL: the PLLEN bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register and the SPLLEN bit of the OSCTUNE register. The PLL is enabled when the PLLEN bit is set and it is under software control when the PLLEN bit is cleared. TABLE 2-3: PLL CONFIGURATION 2.9.1 32 MHZ INTERNAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY SELECTION The Internal Oscillator Block can be used with the 4X PLL associated with the External Oscillator Block to produce a 32 MHz internal system clock source. The following settings are required to use the 32 MHz internal clock source: • The FOSC bits in CONFIG1H must be set to use the INTOSC source as the device system clock (FOSC<3:0> = 1000 or 1001). • The SCS bits in the OSCCON register must be cleared to use the clock determined by FOSC<3:0> in CONFIG1H (SCS<1:0> = 00). • The IRCF bits in the OSCCON register must be set to the 8 MHz HFINTOSC set to use (IRCF<2:0> = 110). • The SPLLEN bit in the OSCTUNE register must be set to enable the 4xPLL, or the PLLEN bit of CONFIG1H must be progr mmed to a ‘1’. The 4xPLL is not available for use with the internal oscillator when the SCS bits of the OSCCON register are set to ‘1x’. The SCS bits must be set to ‘00’ to use the 4xPLL with the internal oscillator. 2.10 CPU Clock Divider The CPU Clock Divider allows the system clock to run at a slower speed than the Low/Full Speed USB module clock while sharing the same clock source. Only the oscillator defined by the settings of the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register may be used with the CPU Clock Divider. The CPU Clock Divider is controlled by the CPUDIV bits of the CONFIG1L Configuration register. Setting the CPUDIV bits will set the system clock to: • Equal the clock speed of the USB module • Half the clock speed of the USB module • One third the clock speed of the USB module • One fourth the clock speed of the USB module For more information on the CPU Clock Divider, see Figure 2-1 and Register 24-1 CONFIG1L. Switch From Switch To Oscillator Delay Sleep/POR LFINTOSC HFINTOSC Oscillator Warm-up Delay (TWARM) Sleep/POR LP, XT, HS 1024 clock cycles Sleep/POR EC, RC 8 clock cycles PLLEN SPLLEN PLL Status 1 x PLL enabled 0 1 PLL enabled 0 0 PLL disabled Note: When using the PLLEN bit of CONFIG1H, the 4xPLL cannot be disabled by software and the 8 MHz HFINTOSC option will no longer be available.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 25 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.11 USB Operation The USB module is designed to operate in two different modes: • Low Speed • Full Speed Because of timing requirements imposed by the USB specifications, the Primary External Oscillator is required for the USB module. The FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register must be set to either External Clock (EC) High-power or HS mode with a clock frequency of 6, 12 or 48 MHz. 2.11.1 LOW SPEED OPERATION For Low Speed USB operation, a 6 MHz clock is required for the USB module. To generate the 6 MHz clock, only 2 Oscillator modes are allowed: • EC High-power mode • HS mode Table 2-4 shows the recommended Clock mode for low-speed operation. 2.11.2 FULL-SPEED OPERATION For full-speed USB operation, a 48 MHz clock is required for the USB module. To generate the 48 MHz clock, only 2 Oscillator modes are allowed: • EC High-power mode • HS mode Table 2-5 shows the recommended Clock mode for fullspeed operation. Note: Users must run USB low speed operation using a CPU clock frequency of 24 MHz or slower (64 MHz is optimal). If anything higher than 24 MHz is used, a firmware delay of at least 14 instruction cycles is required. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 26 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 2-4: LOW SPEED USB CLOCK SETTINGS TABLE 2-5: FULL-SPEED USB CLOCK SETTINGS Clock Mode Clock Frequency USBDIV 4x PLL Enabled CPUDIV<1:0> System Clock Frequency (MHz) EC High/HS 12 MHz 1 Yes 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 No 00 12 01 6 10 4 11 3 6 MHz 0 Yes 00 24 01 12 10 8 11 6 No 00 6 01 3 10 2 11 1.5 Note: The system clock frequency in Table 2-4 only applies if the OSCCON register bits SCS<1:0> = 00. By changing these bits, the system clock can operate down to 31 kHz. Clock Mode Clock Frequency 4x PLL Enabled CPUDIV<1:0> System Clock Frequency (MHz) EC High 48 MHz No 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 EC High/HS 12 MHz Yes 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 Note: The system clock frequency in the above table only applies if the OSCCON register bits SCS<1:0> = 00. By changing these bits, the system clock can operate down to 31 kHz.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 27 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.12 Two-Speed Start-up Mode Two-Speed Start-up mode provides additional power savings by minimizing the latency between external Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) and code execution. In applications that make heavy use of the Sleep mode, Two-Speed Start-up will remove the OST period, which can reduce the overall power consumption of the device. Two-Speed Start-up mode is enabled by setting the IESO bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. With Two-Speed Start-up enabled, the device will execute instructions using the internal oscillator during the Primary External Oscillator OST period. When the system clock is set to the Primary External Oscillator and the oscillator is configured for LP, XT or HS modes, the device will not execute code during the OST period. The OST will suspend program execution until 1024 oscillations are counted. Two-Speed Start-up mode minimizes the delay in code execution by operating from the internal oscillator while the OST is active. The system clock will switch back to the Primary External Oscillator after the OST period has expired. Two-speed Start-up will become active after: • Power-on Reset (POR) • Power-up Timer (PWRT), if enabled • Wake-up from Sleep The OSTS bit of the OSCCON register reports which oscillator the device is currently using for operation. The device is running from the oscillator defined by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register when the OSTS bit is set. The device is running from the internal oscillator when the OSTS bit is clear. 2.13 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. The FSCM can detect oscillator failure any time after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The FSCM is applicable to all external oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, EC and RC). FIGURE 2-6: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM 2.13.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the LFINTOSC by 64. See Figure 2-6. Inside the fail detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire halfcycle of the sample clock elapses before the primary clock goes low. 2.13.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION When the external clock fails, the FSCM switches the device clock to an internal clock source and sets the bit flag OSCFIF of the PIR2 register. The OSCFIF flag will generate an interrupt if the OSCFIE bit of the PIE2 register is also set. The device firmware can then take steps to mitigate the problems that may arise from a failed clock. The system clock will continue to be sourced from the internal clock source until the device firmware successfully restarts the external oscillator and switches back to external operation. An automatic transition back to the failed clock source will not occur. The internal clock source chosen by the FSCM is determined by the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. This allows the internal oscillator to be configured before a failure occurs. External LFINTOSC ÷ 64 S R Q 31 kHz (~32 s) 488 Hz (~2 ms) Clock Monitor Latch Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Clock Q Sample Clock PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 28 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.13.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING The Fail-Safe condition is cleared by either one of the following: • Any Reset • By toggling the SCS1 bit of the OSCCON register Both of these conditions restart the OST. While the OST is running, the device continues to operate from the INTOSC selected in OSCCON. When the OST times out, the Fail-Safe condition is cleared and the device automatically switches over to the external clock source. The Fail-Safe condition need not be cleared before the OSCFIF flag is cleared. 2.13.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC or RC Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as soon as the Reset or wake-up has completed. When the FSCM is enabled, the Two-Speed Start-up is also enabled. Therefore, the device will always be executing code while the OST is operating. FIGURE 2-7: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM TABLE 2-6: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES Note: Due to the wide range of oscillator start-up times, the Fail-Safe circuit is not active during oscillator start-up (i.e., after exiting Reset or Sleep). After an appropriate amount of time, the user should check the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to verify the oscillator start-up and that the system clock switchover has successfully completed. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PCLKEN PLLEN FOSC3 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 296 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 OSCCON IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS HFIOFS SCS1 SCS0 286 OSCTUNE INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 105 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by oscillators. Note 1: Other (non Power-up) Resets include MCLR Reset and Watchdog Timer Reset during normal operation. OSCFIF System Clock Output Sample Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Failure Note: The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. (Q) Test Test Test Clock Monitor Output  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 29 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION There are three types of memory in PIC18 Enhanced microcontroller devices: • Program Memory • Data RAM • Data EEPROM As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program memories use separate busses; this allows for concurrent access of the two memory spaces. The data EEPROM, for practical purposes, can be regarded as a peripheral device, since it is addressed and accessed through a set of control registers. Additional detailed information on the operation of the Flash program memory is provided in Section 4.0 “Flash Program Memory”. Data EEPROM is discussed separately in Section 5.0 “Data EEPROM Memory”. 3.1 Program Memory Organization PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program counter, which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte program memory space. Accessing a location between the upper boundary of the physically implemented memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all ‘0’s (a NOP instruction). This family of devices contain the following: • PIC18F13K50: 8 Kbytes of Flash Memory, up to 4,096 single-word instructions • PIC18F14K50: 16 Kbytes of Flash Memory, up to 8,192 single-word instructions PIC18 devices have two interrupt vectors and one Reset vector. The Reset vector address is at 0000h and the interrupt vector addresses are at 0008h and 0018h. The program memory map for PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices is shown in Figure 3-1. Memory block details are shown in Figure 24-2. FIGURE 3-1: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC18F/LF1XK50 DEVICES PC<20:0> Stack Level 1  Stack Level 31 Reset Vector Low Priority Interrupt Vector  CALL,RCALL,RETURN RETFIE,RETLW 21 0000h 0018h High Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h User Memory Space 1FFFFFh 4000h 3FFFh 200000h On-Chip Program Memory Read ‘0’ 1FFFh 2000h On-Chip Program Memory Read ‘0’ PIC18F14K50 PIC18F13K50 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 30 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.1.1 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCH register are performed through the PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU register are performed through the PCLATU register. The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred to the program counter by any operation that writes PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed offsets to the PC (see Section 3.1.4.1 “Computed GOTO”). The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word instructions, the Least Significant bit (LSb) of PCL is fixed to a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by 2 to address sequential instructions in the program memory. The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch instructions write to the program counter directly. For these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. 3.1.2 RETURN ADDRESS STACK The return address stack allows any combination of up to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL instruction is executed or an interrupt is Acknowledged. The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction. PCLATU and PCLATH are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL instructions. The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a 5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable and writable and the address on the top of the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of- Stack (TOS) Special File Registers. Data can also be pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these registers. A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack; the Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes a pop from the stack; the contents of the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented. The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is full or has overflowed or has underflowed. 3.1.2.1 Top-of-Stack Access Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, hold the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 3-2). This allows users to implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt, the software can read the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These values can be placed on a user defined software stack. At return time, the software can return these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return. The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack corruption. FIGURE 3-2: RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS 00011 001A34h 11111 11110 11101 00010 00001 00000 00010 Return Address Stack <20:0> Top-of-Stack 000D58h TOSU TOSH TOSL 00h 1Ah 34h STKPTR<4:0> Top-of-Stack Registers Stack Pointer  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 31 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.1.2.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) The STKPTR register (Register 3-1) contains the Stack Pointer value, the STKFUL (stack full) bit and the STKUNF (stack underflow) bits. The value of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the stack and decrements after values are popped off the stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a POR. The action that takes place when the stack becomes full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for a description of the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set (default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the 31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31. Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push and STKPTR will remain at 31. When the stack has been popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero to the PC and sets the STKUNF bit, while the Stack Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs. 3.1.2.3 PUSH and POP Instructions Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off the stack without disturbing normal program execution is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit the TOS to be manipulated under software control. TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data or a return address on the stack. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads the current PC value onto the stack. The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value. Note: Returning a value of zero to the PC on an underflow has the effect of vectoring the program to the Reset vector, where the stack conditions can be verified and appropriate actions can be taken. This is not the same as a Reset, as the contents of the SFRs are not affected. REGISTER 3-1: STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER R/C-0 R/C-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 STKFUL(1) STKUNF(1) — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack became full or overflowed 0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack underflow occurred 0 = Stack underflow did not occur bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SP<4:0>: Stack Pointer Location bits Note 1: Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 32 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.1.2.4 Stack Full and Underflow Resets Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Register 4L. When STVREN is set, a full or underflow will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit but not cause a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are cleared by the user software or a Power-on Reset. 3.1.3 FAST REGISTER STACK A fast register stack is provided for the Status, WREG and BSR registers, to provide a “fast return” option for interrupts. The stack for each register is only one level deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the current value of the corresponding register when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources will push values into the stack registers. The values in the registers are then loaded back into their associated registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the interrupt. If both low and high priority interrupts are enabled, the stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from low priority interrupts. If a high priority interrupt occurs while servicing a low priority interrupt, the stack register values stored by the low priority interrupt will be overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key registers by software during a low priority interrupt. If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the fast register stack for returns from interrupt. If no interrupts are used, the fast register stack can be used to restore the Status, WREG and BSR registers at the end of a subroutine call. To use the fast register stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction must be executed to save the Status, WREG and BSR registers to the fast register stack. A RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore these registers from the fast register stack. Example 3-1 shows a source code example that uses the fast register stack during a subroutine call and return. EXAMPLE 3-1: FAST REGISTER STACK CODE EXAMPLE 3.1.4 LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM MEMORY There may be programming situations that require the creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables can be implemented in two ways: • Computed GOTO • Table Reads 3.1.4.1 Computed GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter. An example is shown in Example 3-2. A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The W register is loaded with an offset into the table before executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling function. The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of bytes that the program counter should advance and should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0). In this method, only one data byte may be stored in each instruction location and room on the return address stack is required. EXAMPLE 3-2: COMPUTED GOTO USING AN OFFSET VALUE 3.1.4.2 Table Reads and Table Writes A better method of storing data in program memory allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction location. Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per program word by using table reads and writes. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register specifies the byte address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) register contains the data that is read from or written to program memory. Data is transferred to or from program memory one byte at a time. Table read and table write operations are discussed further in Section 4.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. CALL SUB1, FAST ;STATUS, WREG, BSR ;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER ;STACK   SUB1   RETURN, FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED ;IN FAST REGISTER STACK MOVF OFFSET, W CALL TABLE ORG nn00h TABLE ADDWF PCL RETLW nnh RETLW nnh RETLW nnh . . .  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 33 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.2 PIC18 Instruction Cycle 3.2.1 CLOCKING SCHEME The microcontroller clock input, whether from an internal or external source, is internally divided by four to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks (Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched from the program memory and latched into the instruction register during Q4. The instruction is decoded and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. The clocks and instruction execution flow are shown in Figure 3-3. 3.2.2 INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles: Q1 through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take another instruction cycle. However, due to the pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to complete the instruction (Example 3-3). A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC) incrementing in Q1. In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This instruction is then decoded and executed during the Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2 (operand read) and written during Q4 (destination write). FIGURE 3-3: CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE EXAMPLE 3-3: INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PC OSC2/CLKOUT (RC mode) PC PC + 2 PC + 4 Fetch INST (PC) Execute INST (PC – 2) Fetch INST (PC + 2) Execute INST (PC) Fetch INST (PC + 4) Execute INST (PC + 2) Internal Phase Clock All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed. TCY0 TCY1 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5 1. MOVLW 55h Fetch 1 Execute 1 2. MOVWF PORTB Fetch 2 Execute 2 3. BRA SUB_1 Fetch 3 Execute 3 4. BSF PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Fetch 4 Flush (NOP) 5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 34 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY The program memory is addressed in bytes. Instructions are stored as either two bytes or four bytes in program memory. The Least Significant Byte (LSB) of an instruction word is always stored in a program memory location with an even address (LSb = 0). To maintain alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC increments in steps of 2 and the LSb will always read ‘0’ (see Section 3.1.1 “Program Counter”). Figure 3-4 shows an example of how instruction words are stored in the program memory. The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute program memory address embedded into the instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1>, which accesses the desired byte address in program memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 3-4 shows how the instruction GOTO 0006h is encoded in the program memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the number of single-word instructions that the PC will be offset by. Section 25.0 “Instruction Set Summary” provides further details of the instruction set. FIGURE 3-4: INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY 3.2.4 TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all cases, the second word of the instruction always has ‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits (MSb); the other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory address. The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is executed in proper sequence – immediately after the first word – the data in the second word is accessed and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is skipped for some reason and the second word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the PC. Example 3-4 shows how this works. EXAMPLE 3-4: TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS Word Address LSB = 1 LSB = 0  Program Memory Byte Locations  000000h 000002h 000004h 000006h Instruction 1: MOVLW 055h 0Fh 55h 000008h Instruction 2: GOTO 0006h EFh 03h 00000Ah F0h 00h 00000Ch Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h C1h 23h 00000Eh F4h 56h 000010h 000012h 000014h Note: See Section 3.6 “PIC18 Instruction Execution and the Extended Instruction Set” for information on two-word instructions in the extended instruction set. CASE 1: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word 1111 0100 0101 0110 ; Execute this word as a NOP 0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code CASE 2: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word 1111 0100 0101 0110 ; 2nd word of instruction 0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 35 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3 Data Memory Organization The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a 12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data memory. The memory space is divided into as many as 16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show the data memory organization for the PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices. The data memory contains Special Function Registers (SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The SFRs are used for control and status of the controller and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s application. Any read of an unimplemented location will read as ‘0’s. The instruction set and architecture allow operations across all banks. The entire data memory may be accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this subsection. To ensure that commonly used registers (SFRs and select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte memory space that provides fast access to SFRs and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the Bank Select Register (BSR). Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank” provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. 3.3.1 USB RAM Part of the data memory is actually mapped to a special dual access RAM. When the USB module is disabled, the GPRs in these banks are used like any other GPR in the data memory space. When the USB module is enabled, the memory in these banks is allocated as buffer RAM for USB operation. This area is shared between the microcontroller core and the USB Serial Interface Engine (SIE) and is used to transfer data directly between the two. It is theoretically possible to use the areas of USB RAM that are not allocated as USB buffers for normal scratchpad memory or other variable storage. In practice, the dynamic nature of buffer allocation makes this risky at best. Additional information on USB RAM and buffer operation is provided in Section 22.0 “Universal Serial Bus (USB)” 3.3.2 BANK SELECT REGISTER (BSR) Large areas of data memory require an efficient addressing scheme to make rapid access to any address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire address does not need to be provided for each read or write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer. Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a location’s address; the instruction itself includes the 8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the BSR are implemented (BSR<3:0>). The upper four bits are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the MOVLB instruction. The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data memory; the 8 bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between the BSRs value and the bank division in data memory is shown in Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6. Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order address, the user must always be careful to ensure that the proper bank is selected before performing a data read or write. For example, writing what should be program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR is 0Fh will end up resetting the program counter. While any bank can be selected, only those banks that are actually implemented can be read or written to. Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the operation was successful. The data memory maps in Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 indicate which banks are implemented. In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the source and target registers. This instruction ignores the BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions include only the low-order address as an operand and must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate their target registers. Note: The operation of some aspects of data memory are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 3.5 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 36 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-5: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50 DEVICES Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 14 Bank 15 BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map = 0000 = 0001 = 1111 060h 05Fh F60h FFFh 00h 5Fh 60h FFh Access Bank When ‘a’ = 0: The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When ‘a’ = 1: The BSR specifies the Bank used by the instruction. F5Fh F00h EFFh 1FFh 100h 0FFh Access RAM 000h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR GPR SFR Access RAM High Access RAM Low Bank 2 = 0110 = 0010 (SFRs) 2FFh 200h 3FFh 300h 4FFh 400h 5FFh 500h 6FFh 600h 7FFh 700h 8FFh 800h 9FFh 900h AFFh A00h BFFh B00h CFFh C00h DFFh D00h E00h Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 Bank 9 Bank 10 Bank 11 Bank 12 Bank 13 FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 Unused Read 00h Unused Unused Read 00h F53h SFR(1) Note 1: SFRs occupying F53h to F5Fh address space are not in the virtual bank (DPRAM)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 37 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 FIGURE 3-6: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 DEVICES Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 14 Bank 15 BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map = 0000 = 0001 = 1111 060h 05Fh 00h 5Fh 60h FFh Access Bank When ‘a’ = 0: The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When ‘a’ = 1: The BSR specifies the Bank used by the instruction. F00h EFFh 1FFh 100h 0FFh Access RAM 000h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR GPR Access RAM High Access RAM Low Bank 2 = 0110 = 0010 (SFRs) 2FFh 200h 3FFh 300h 4FFh 400h 5FFh 500h 6FFh 600h 7FFh 700h 8FFh 800h 9FFh 900h AFFh A00h BFFh B00h CFFh C00h DFFh D00h E00h Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 Bank 9 Bank 10 Bank 11 Bank 12 Bank 13 FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR FFh 00h = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 Unused Read 00h Note 1: SFRs occupying F53h to F5Fh address space are not in the virtual bank F60h FFFh F5Fh FFh 00h SFR Unused F53h SFR(1) (DPRAM) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 38 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-7: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING) Note 1: The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to the registers of the Access Bank. 2: The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction. Data Memory Bank Select(2) 7 0 From Opcode(2) 0 0 0 0 000h 100h 200h 300h F00h E00h FFFh Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 14 Bank 15 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh Bank 3 through Bank 13 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 0 BSR(1)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 39 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3.3 ACCESS BANK While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit address allows users to address the entire range of data memory, it also means that the user must always ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, data may be read from or written to the wrong location. This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or write to data memory can become very inefficient. To streamline access for the most commonly used data memory locations, the data memory is configured with an Access Bank, which allows users to access a mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of memory (60h-FFh) in Block 15. The lower half is known as the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. This upper half is also where the device’s SFRs are mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion by an 8-bit address (Figure 3-5 and Figure 3- 6). The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, however, the instruction is forced to use the Access Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is ignored entirely. Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to operate on a data address in a single cycle, without updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and above, this means that users can evaluate and operate on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h is a good place for data values that the user might need to access rapidly, such as immediate computational results or common program variables. Access RAM also allows for faster and more code efficient context saving and switching of variables. The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail in Section 3.5.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in Indexed Literal Offset Mode”. 3.3.4 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR area. This is data RAM, which is available for use by all instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0 (address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets. 3.3.5 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy the top portion of Bank 15 (F60h to FFFh). A list of these registers is given in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU, Resets and interrupts) and those related to the peripheral functions. The Reset and interrupt registers are described in their respective chapters, while the ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this section. Registers related to the operation of a peripheral feature are described in the chapter for that peripheral. The SFRs are typically distributed among the peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 40 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 3-1: SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18F/LF1XK50 DEVICES Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name FFFh TOSU FD7h TMR0H FAFh SPBRG F87h —(2) F5Fh UEIR FFEh TOSH FD6h TMR0L FAEh RCREG F86h —(2) F5Eh UFRMH FFDh TOSL FD5h T0CON FADh TXREG F85h —(2) F5Dh UFRML FFCh STKPTR FD4h —(2) FACh TXSTA F84h —(2) F5Ch UADDR FFBh PCLATU FD3h OSCCON FABh RCSTA F83h —(2) F5Bh UEIE FFAh PCLATH FD2h OSCCON2 FAAh — F82h PORTC F5Ah UEP7 FF9h PCL FD1h WDTCON FA9h EEADR F81h PORTB F59h UEP6 FF8h TBLPTRU FD0h RCON FA8h EEDATA F80h PORTA F58h UEP5 FF7h TBLPTRH FCFh TMR1H FA7h EECON2(1) F7Fh ANSELH F57h UEP4 FF6h TBLPTRL FCEh TMR1L FA6h EECON1 F7Eh ANSEL F56h UEP3 FF5h TABLAT FCDh T1CON FA5h —(2) F7Dh —(2) F55h UEP2 FF4h PRODH FCCh TMR2 FA4h —(2) F7Ch —(2) F54h UEP1 FF3h PRODL FCBh PR2 FA3h —(2) F7Bh —(2) F53h UEP0 FF2h INTCON FCAh T2CON FA2h IPR2 F7Ah IOCB FF1h INTCON2 FC9h SSPBUF FA1h PIR2 F79h IOCA FF0h INTCON3 FC8h SSPADD FA0h PIE2 F78h WPUB FEFh INDF0(1) FC7h SSPSTAT F9Fh IPR1 F77h WPUA FEEh POSTINC0(1) FC6h SSPCON1 F9Eh PIR1 F76h SLRCON FEDh POSTDEC0(1) FC5h SSPCON2 F9Dh PIE1 F75h —(2) FECh PREINC0(1) FC4h ADRESH F9Ch —(2) F74h —(2) FEBh PLUSW0(1) FC3h ADRESL F9Bh OSCTUNE F73h —(2) FEAh FSR0H FC2h ADCON0 F9Ah —(2) F72h —(2) FE9h FSR0L FC1h ADCON1 F99h —(2) F71h —(2) FE8h WREG FC0h ADCON2 F98h —(2) F70h —(2) FE7h INDF1(1) FBFh CCPR1H F97h —(2) F6Fh SSPMASK FE6h POSTINC1(1) FBEh CCPR1L F96h —(2) F6Eh —(2) FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FBDh CCP1CON F95h —(2) F6Dh CM1CON0 FE4h PREINC1(1) FBCh REFCON2 F94h TRISC F6Ch CM2CON1 FE3h PLUSW1(1) FBBh REFCON1 F93h TRISB F6Bh CM2CON0 FE2h FSR1H FBAh REFCON0 F92h TRISA F6Ah —(2) FE1h FSR1L FB9h PSTRCON F91h —(2) F69h SRCON1 FE0h BSR FB8h BAUDCON F90h —(2) F68h SRCON0 FDFh INDF2(1) FB7h PWM1CON F8Fh —(2) F67h —(2) FDEh POSTINC2(1) FB6h ECCP1AS F8Eh —(2) F66h —(2) FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FB5h —(2) F8Dh —(2) F65h —(2) FDCh PREINC2(1) FB4h —(2) F8Ch —(2) F64h UCON FDBh PLUSW2(1) FB3h TMR3H F8Bh LATC F63h USTAT FDAh FSR2H FB2h TMR3L F8Ah LATB F62h UIR FD9h FSR2L FB1h T3CON F89h LATA F61h UCFG FD8h STATUS FB0h SPBRGH F88h —(2) F60h UIE Note 1: This is not a physical register. 2: Unimplemented registers are read as ‘0’.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 41 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: TOSU — — — Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) ---0 0000 285, 30 TOSH Top-of-Stack, High Byte (TOS<15:8>) 0000 0000 285, 30 TOSL Top-of-Stack, Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 30 STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 00-0 0000 285, 31 PCLATU — — — Holding Register for PC<20:16> ---0 0000 285, 30 PCLATH Holding Register for PC<15:8> 0000 0000 285, 30 PCL PC, Low Byte (PC<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 30 TBLPTRU — — — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) ---0 0000 285, 54 TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer, High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 0000 0000 285, 54 TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer, Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 54 TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 0000 0000 285, 54 PRODH Product Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 65 PRODL Product Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 65 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 0000 000x 285, 70 INTCON2 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP 1111 -1-1 285, 71 INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 11-0 0-00 285, 72 INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR0 offset by W N/A 285, 47 FSR0H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, High Byte ---- 0000 285, 47 FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 47 WREG Working Register xxxx xxxx 285 INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR1 offset by W N/A 285, 47 FSR1H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, High Byte ---- 0000 286, 47 FSR1L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 47 BSR — — — — Bank Select Register ---- 0000 286, 35 INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 PLUSW2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR2 offset by W N/A 286, 47 FSR2H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, High Byte ---- 0000 286, 47 FSR2L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 47 STATUS — — — N OV Z DC C ---x xxxx 286, 45 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 42 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TMR0H Timer0 Register, High Byte 0000 0000 286, 103 TMR0L Timer0 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 103 T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 1111 1111 286, 101 OSCCON IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS IOSF SCS1 SCS0 0011 qq00 286, 20 OSCCON2 — — — — — PRI_SD HFIOFL LFIOFS ---- -10x 286, 21 WDTCON — — — — — — — SWDTEN --- ---0 286, 303 RCON IPEN SBOREN(1) — RI TO PD POR BOR 0q-1 11q0 277, 284, 79 TMR1H Timer1 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 110 TMR1L Timer1 Register, Low Bytes xxxx xxxx 286, 110 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 286, 105 TMR2 Timer2 Register 0000 0000 286, 112 PR2 Timer2 Period Register 1111 1111 286, 112 T2CON — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 286, 111 SSPBUF SSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx 286, 143, 144 SSPADD SSP Address Register in I2C™ Slave Mode. SSP Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode. 0000 0000 286, 144 SSPSTAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 286, 137, 146 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 286, 137, 146 SSPCON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0000 0000 286, 147 ADRESH A/D Result Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 221 ADRESL A/D Result Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 221 ADCON0 — — CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON --00 0000 287, 215 ADCON1 — — — — PVCFG1 PVCFG0 NVCFG1 NVCFG0 ---- 0000 287, 216 ADCON2 ADFM — ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 0-00 0000 287, 217 CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 138 CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 138 CCP1CON P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 0000 0000 287, 117 REFCON2 — — — DAC1R4 DAC1R3 DAC1R2 DAC1R1 DAC1R0 ---0 0000 287, 248 REFCON1 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 — D1NSS 000- 00-0 287, 248 REFCON0 FVR1EN FVR1ST FVR1S1 FVR1S0 — — — — 0001 00-- 287, 247 PSTRCON — — — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA ---0 0001 287, 134 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 0100 0-00 287, 192 PWM1CON PRSEN PDC6 PDC5 PDC4 PDC3 PDC2 PDC1 PDC0 0000 0000 287, 133 ECCP1AS ECCPASE ECCPAS2 ECCPAS1 ECCPAS0 PSSAC1 PSSAC0 PSSBD1 PSSBD0 0000 0000 287, 129 TMR3H Timer3 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 115 TMR3L Timer3 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 115 T3CON RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 0-00 0000 287, 113 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 43 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 0000 0000 287, 181 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 0000 0000 287, 181 RCREG EUSART Receive Register 0000 0000 287, 182 TXREG EUSART Transmit Register 0000 0000 287, 181 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010 287, 190 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x 287, 191 EEADR EEADR7 EEADR6 EEADR5 EEADR4 EEADR3 EEADR2 EEADR1 EEADR0 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EEDATA EEPROM Data Register 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD xx-0 x000 287, 53, 61 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP – 1111 111- 288, 78 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF – 0000 000- 288, 74 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE – 0000 000- 288, 76 IPR1 – ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP -111 1111 288, 77 PIR1 – ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF -000 0000 288, 73 PIE1 – ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE -000 0000 288, 75 OSCTUNE INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 0000 0000 22, 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 1111 1111 288, 94 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 – – – – 1111 ---- 288, 89 TRISA – – TRISA5 TRISA4 – – – – --11 ---- 288, 83 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 xxxx xxxx 288, 94 LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 – – – – xxxx ---- 288, 89 LATA – – LATA5 LATA4 – – – – --xx ---- 288, 83 PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 xxxx xxxx 288, 94 PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 – – – – xxxx ---- 288, 89 PORTA – – RA5 RA4 RA3(2) – RA1(3) RA0(3) --xx x-xx 288, 83 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 ---- 1111 288, 99 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 1111 1--- 288, 98 IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — 0000 ---- 288, 89 IOCA — — IOCA5 IOCA4 IOCA3 — IOCA1 IOCA0 --00 0-00 288, 83 WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 — — — — 1111 ---- 288, 89 WPUA — — WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 — — — --11 1--- 285, 89 SLRCON — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA ---- -111 288, 100 SSPMSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 1111 1111 288, 154 CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 0000 1000 288, 229 CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 0000 0000 288, 230 CM2CON0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 0000 1000 288, 230 SRCON1 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E 0000 0000 288, 243 SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK2 SRCLK1 SRCLK0 SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 0000 0000 288, 242 UCON — PPBRST SE0 PKTDIS USBEN RESUME SUSPND — -0x0 000- 288, 252 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 44 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. USTAT — ENDP3 ENDP2 ENDP1 ENDP0 DIR PPBI — -xxx xxx- 289, 256 UIR — SOFIF STALLIF IDLEIF TRNIF ACTVIF UERRIF URSTIF -000 0000 289, 266 UCFG UTEYE — — UPUEN — FSEN PPB1 PPB0 0--0 -000 289, 254 UIE — SOFIE STALLIE IDLEIE TRNIE ACTVIE UERRIE URSTIE -000 0000 289, 268 UEIR BTSEF — — BTOEF DFN8EF CRC16EF CRC5EF PIDEF 0--0 0000 289, 269 UFRMH — — — — — FRM10 FRM9 FRM8 ---- -xxx 289, 252 UFRML FRM7 FRM6 FRM5 FRM4 FRM3 FRM2 FRM1 FRM0 xxxx xxxx 289, 252 UADDR — ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 -000 0000 289, 258 UEIE BTSEE — — BTOEE DFN8EE CRC16EE CRC5EE PIDEE 0--0 0000 289, 270 UEP7 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP6 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP5 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP4 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP3 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP2 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP1 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP0 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 285, 257 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 45 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3.6 STATUS REGISTER The STATUS register, shown in Register 3-2, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU. As with any other SFR, it can be the operand for any instruction. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, the results of the instruction are not written; instead, the STATUS register is updated according to the instruction performed. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as its destination may be different than intended. As an example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit and leave the remaining Status bits unchanged (‘000u u1uu’). It is recommended that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register, because these instructions do not affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register. For other instructions that do not affect Status bits, see the instruction set summaries in Table 25-2 and Table 25-3. Note: The C and DC bits operate as the borrow and digit borrow bits, respectively, in subtraction. REGISTER 3-2: STATUS: STATUS REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — N OV Z DC(1) C(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 N: Negative bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates whether the result was negative (ALU MSB = 1). 1 = Result was negative 0 = Result was positive bit 3 OV: Overflow bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magnitude which causes the sign bit (bit 7 of the result) to change state. 1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred Note 1: For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high-order or low-order bit of the source register. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 46 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.4 Data Addressing Modes While the program memory can be addressed in only one way – through the program counter – information in the data memory space can be addressed in several ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, depending on which operands are used and whether or not the extended instruction set is enabled. The addressing modes are: • Inherent • Literal • Direct • Indirect An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, is available when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is discussed in greater detail in Section 3.5.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”. 3.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL ADDRESSING Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argument at all; they either perform an operation that globally affects the device or they operate implicitly on one register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. Other instructions work in a similar way but require an additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is known as Literal Addressing mode because they require some literal value as an argument. Examples include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit program memory address. 3.4.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING Direct addressing specifies all or part of the source and/or destination address of the operation within the opcode itself. The options are specified by the arguments accompanying the instruction. In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byteoriented instructions use some version of direct addressing by default. All of these instructions include some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant Byte. This address specifies either a register address in one of the banks of data RAM (Section 3.3.4 “General Purpose Register File”) or a location in the Access Bank (Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank”) as the data source for the instruction. The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR (Section 3.3.2 “Bank Select Register (BSR)”) are used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode. A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. The destination of the operation’s results is determined by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their destination is either the target register being operated on or the W register. 3.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING Indirect addressing allows the user to access a location in data memory without giving a fixed address in the instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers (FSRs) as pointers to the locations which are to be read or written. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as Special File Registers, they can also be directly manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs very useful in implementing data structures, such as tables and arrays in data memory. The registers for indirect addressing are also implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting with another value. This allows for efficient code, using loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM bank in Example 3-5. EXAMPLE 3-5: HOW TO CLEAR RAM (BANK 1) USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING Note: The execution of some instructions in the core PIC18 instruction set are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 3.5 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. LFSR FSR0, 100h ; NEXT CLRF POSTINC0 ; Clear INDF ; register then ; inc pointer BTFSS FSR0H, 1 ; All done with ; Bank1? BRA NEXT ; NO, clear next CONTINUE ; YES, continue  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 47 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF Operand At the core of indirect addressing are three sets of registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. Each FSR pair holds a 12-bit value, therefore the four upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used. The 12-bit FSR value can address the entire range of the data memory in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers to data memory locations. Indirect addressing is accomplished with a set of Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These can be thought of as “virtual” registers: they are mapped in the SFR space but are not physically implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF register actually accesses its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of using the pointer. Because indirect addressing uses a full 12-bit address, data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no effect on determining the target address. 3.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC, POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF, these are “virtual” registers which cannot be directly read or written. Accessing these registers actually accesses the location to which the associated FSR register pair points, and also performs a specific action on the FSR value. They are: • POSTDEC: accesses the location to which the FSR points, then automatically decrements the FSR by 1 afterwards • POSTINC: accesses the location to which the FSR points, then automatically increments the FSR by 1 afterwards • PREINC: automatically increments the FSR by 1, then uses the location to which the FSR points in the operation • PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register (range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses the location to which the result points in the operation. In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the value in the associated FSR register without changing it. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR value an offset by that in the W register; however, neither W nor the FSR is actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other virtual registers changes the value of the FSR register. FIGURE 3-8: INDIRECT ADDRESSING FSR1H:FSR1L 7 0 Data Memory 000h 100h 200h 300h F00h E00h FFFh Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 14 Bank 15 Bank 3 through Bank 13 ADDWF, INDF1, 1 7 0 Using an instruction with one of the indirect addressing registers as the operand.... ...uses the 12-bit address stored in the FSR pair associated with that register.... ...to determine the data memory location to be used in that operation. In this case, the FSR1 pair contains ECCh. This means the contents of location ECCh will be added to that of the W register and stored back in ECCh. x x x x 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 48 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of these operations do not change the value of any flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.). The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form of indexed addressing in the data memory space. By manipulating the value in the W register, users can reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addresses. In some applications, this can be used to implement some powerful program control structure, such as software stacks, inside of data memory. 3.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs Indirect addressing operations that target other FSRs or virtual registers represent special cases. For example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual registers will not result in successful operations. As a specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the value of the INDF1 using INDF0 as an operand will return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1 using INDF0 as the operand will result in a NOP. On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases, the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to either the INDF2 or POSTDEC2 register will write the same value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct operations. Users should proceed cautiously when working on these registers, particularly if their code uses indirect addressing. Similarly, operations by indirect addressing are generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change settings that might affect the operation of the device. 3.5 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core PIC18 instructions is different; this is due to the introduction of a new addressing mode for the data memory space. What does not change is just as important. The size of the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same. Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal instructions do not change at all. Indirect addressing with FSR0 and FSR1 also remain unchanged. 3.5.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH LITERAL OFFSET Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes the behavior of indirect addressing using the FSR2 register pair within Access RAM. Under the proper conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank – that is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions – can invoke a form of indexed addressing using an offset specified in the instruction. This special addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode. When using the extended instruction set, this addressing mode requires the following: • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0) and • The file address argument is less than or equal to 5Fh. Under these conditions, the file address of the instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an address (used with the BSR in direct addressing), or as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer, specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the operation. 3.5.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use direct addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are unaffected. Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions are not affected if they do not use the Access Bank (Access RAM bit is ‘1’), or include a file address of 60h or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to execute as before. A comparison of the different possible addressing modes when the extended instruction set is enabled is shown in Figure 3-9. Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode. This is described in more detail in Section 25.2.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax”.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 49 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 FIGURE 3-9: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED) EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff) When ‘a’ = 0 and f  60h: The instruction executes in Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in the Access RAM between 060h and 0FFh. This is the same as locations F60h to FFFh (Bank 15) of data memory. Locations below 60h are not available in this addressing mode. When ‘a’ = 0 and f5Fh: The instruction executes in Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as an offset to the address value in FSR2. The two are added together to obtain the address of the target register for the instruction. The address can be anywhere in the data memory space. Note that in this mode, the correct syntax is now: ADDWF [k], d where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. When ‘a’ = 1 (all values of f): The instruction executes in Direct mode (also known as Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in one of the 16 banks of the data memory space. The bank is designated by the Bank Select Register (BSR). The address can be in any implemented bank in the data memory space. 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Valid range 00h 60h FFh Data Memory Access RAM Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Data Memory Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs FSR2H FSR2L 001001da ffffffff 001001da ffffffff 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Data Memory Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs for ‘f’ BSR 00000000 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 50 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.5.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode effectively changes how the first 96 locations of Access RAM (00h to 5Fh) are mapped. Rather than containing just the contents of the bottom section of Bank 0, this mode maps the contents from a user defined “window” that can be located anywhere in the data memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower boundary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped as previously described (see Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank”). An example of Access Bank remapping in this addressing mode is shown in Figure 3-10. Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will continue to use direct addressing as before. 3.6 PIC18 Instruction Execution and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the extended instruction set adds eight additional commands to the existing PIC18 instruction set. These instructions are executed as described in Section 25.2 “Extended Instruction Set”. FIGURE 3-10: REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET ADDRESSING Data Memory 000h 100h 200h F60h F00h FFFh Bank 1 Bank 15 Bank 2 through Bank 14 SFRs ADDWF f, d, a FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h Locations in the region from the FSR2 pointer (120h) to the pointer plus 05Fh (17Fh) are mapped to the bottom of the Access RAM (000h-05Fh). Special File Registers at F60h through FFFh are mapped to 60h through FFh, as usual. Bank 0 addresses below 5Fh can still be addressed by using the BSR. Access Bank 00h 60h FFh SFRs Bank 1 “Window” Bank 0 Window Example Situation: 120h 17Fh 5Fh Bank 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 51 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 4.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY The Flash program memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. A read from program memory is executed one byte at a time. A write to program memory is executed on blocks of 16 or 8 bytes at a time depending on the specific device (See Table 4-1). Program memory is erased in blocks of 64 bytes at a time. The difference between the write and erase block sizes requires from 1 to 8 block writes to restore the contents of a single block erase. A bulk erase operation can not be issued from user code. TABLE 4-1: WRITE/ERASE BLOCK SIZES Writing or erasing program memory will cease instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The program memory cannot be accessed during the write or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal programming timer terminates program memory writes and erases. A value written to program memory does not need to be a valid instruction. Executing a program memory location that forms an invalid instruction results in a NOP. 4.1 Table Reads and Table Writes In order to read and write program memory, there are two operations that allow the processor to move bytes between the program memory space and the data RAM: • Table Read (TBLRD) • Table Write (TBLWT) The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table writes move data between these two memory spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). The table read operation retrieves one byte of data directly from program memory and places it into the TABLAT register. Figure 4-1 shows the operation of a table read. The table write operation stores one byte of data from the TABLAT register into a write block holding register. The procedure to write the contents of the holding registers into program memory is detailed in Section 4.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 4-2 shows the operation of a table write with program memory and data RAM. Table operations work with byte entities. Tables containing data, rather than program instructions, are not required to be word aligned. Therefore, a table can start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being used to write executable code into program memory, program instructions will need to be word aligned. FIGURE 4-1: TABLE READ OPERATION Device Write Block Size (bytes) Erase Block Size (bytes) PIC18F13K50 8 64 PIC18F14K50 16 64 Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit) Program Memory TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT TBLPTRU Instruction: TBLRD* Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory. Program Memory (TBLPTR) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 52 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 4-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION 4.2 Control Registers Several control registers are used in conjunction with the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the: • EECON1 register • EECON2 register • TABLAT register • TBLPTR registers 4.2.1 EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS The EECON1 register (Register 4-1) is the control register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s. The EEPGD control bit determines if the access will be a program or data EEPROM memory access. When EEPGD is clear, any subsequent operations will operate on the data EEPROM memory. When EEPGD is set, any subsequent operations will operate on the program memory. The CFGS control bit determines if the access will be to the Configuration/Calibration registers or to program memory/data EEPROM memory. When CFGS is set, subsequent operations will operate on Configuration registers regardless of EEPGD (see Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). When CFGS is clear, memory selection access is determined by EEPGD. The FREE bit allows the program memory erase operation. When FREE is set, an erase operation is initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. The WREN bit is clear on power-up. The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is set and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The WR bit cannot be cleared, only set, by firmware. Then WR bit is cleared by hardware at the completion of the write operation. Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) TBLPTRU Instruction: TBLWT* Note 1: During table writes the Table Pointer does not point directly to Program Memory. The LSBs of TBLPRTL actually point to an address within the write block holding registers. The MSBs of the Table Pointer determine where the write block will eventually be written. The process for writing the holding registers to the program memory array is discussed in Section 4.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Program Memory Holding Registers Note: During normal operation, the WRERR is read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write operation was prematurely terminated by a Reset, or a write operation was attempted improperly. Note: The EEIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR2 register is set when the write is complete. The EEIF flag stays set until cleared by firmware.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 53 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 REGISTER 4-1: EECON1: DATA EEPROM CONTROL 1 REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x U-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 R/S-0 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit S = Bit can be set by software, but not cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 EEPGD: Flash Program or Data EEPROM Memory Select bit 1 = Access Flash program memory 0 = Access data EEPROM memory bit 6 CFGS: Flash Program/Data EEPROM or Configuration Select bit 1 = Access Configuration registers 0 = Access Flash program or data EEPROM memory bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 FREE: Flash Row (Block) Erase Enable bit 1 = Erase the program memory block addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command (cleared by completion of erase operation) 0 = Perform write-only bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Error Flag bit(1) 1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal operation, or an improper write attempt) 0 = The write operation completed bit 2 WREN: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Write Enable bit 1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM 0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM bit 1 WR: Write Control bit 1 = Initiates a data EEPROM erase/write cycle or a program memory erase cycle or write cycle. (The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) by software.) 0 = Write cycle to the EEPROM is complete bit 0 RD: Read Control bit 1 = Initiates an EEPROM read (Read takes one cycle. RD is cleared by hardware. The RD bit can only be set (not cleared) by software. RD bit cannot be set when EEPGD = 1 or CFGS = 1.) 0 = Does not initiate an EEPROM read Note 1: When a WRERR occurs, the EEPGD and CFGS bits are not cleared. This allows tracing of the error condition. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 54 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.2.2 TABLAT – TABLE LATCH REGISTER The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program memory and data RAM. 4.2.3 TBLPTR – TABLE POINTER REGISTER The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three registers join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order 21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to the device ID, the user ID and the Configuration bits. The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the table operation. These operations are shown in Table 4-2. These operations on the TBLPTR affect only the low-order 21 bits. 4.2.4 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the Flash program memory. When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR determine which byte is read from program memory directly into the TABLAT register. When a TBLWT is executed the byte in the TABLAT register is written, not to Flash memory but, to a holding register in preparation for a program memory write. The holding registers constitute a write block which varies depending on the device (See Table 4-1).The 3, 4, or 5 LSbs of the TBLPTRL register determine which specific address within the holding register block is written to. The MSBs of the Table Pointer have no effect during TBLWT operations. When a program memory write is executed the entire holding register block is written to the Flash memory at the address determined by the MSbs of the TBLPTR. The 3, 4, or 5 LSBs are ignored during Flash memory writes. For more detail, see Section 4.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. When an erase of program memory is executed, the 16 MSbs of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<21:6>) point to the 64-byte block that will be erased. The Least Significant bits (TBLPTR<5:0>) are ignored. Figure 4-3 describes the relevant boundaries of TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations. TABLE 4-2: TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS FIGURE 4-3: TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION Example Operation on Table Pointer TBLRD* TBLWT* TBLPTR is not modified TBLRD*+ TBLWT*+ TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write TBLRD*- TBLWT*- TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write TBLRD+* TBLWT+* TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write 21 16 15 8 7 0 TABLE ERASE/WRITE TABLE WRITE TABLE READ – TBLPTR<21:0> TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TBLPTR<21:n+1>(1) TBLPTR(1) Note 1: n = 3, 4, 5, or 6 for block sizes of 8, 16, 32 or 64 bytes, respectively.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 55 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 4.3 Reading the Flash Program Memory The TBLRD instruction retrieves data from program memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from program memory are performed one byte at a time. TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space. Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified automatically for the next table read operation. The internal program memory is typically organized by words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 4-4 shows the interface between the internal program memory and the TABLAT. FIGURE 4-4: READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY EXAMPLE 4-1: READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD (Even Byte Address) Program Memory (Odd Byte Address) TBLRD TABLAT TBLPTR = xxxxx1 FETCH Instruction Register (IR) Read Register TBLPTR = xxxxx0 MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the word MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH MOVWF TBLPTRH MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW MOVWF TBLPTRL READ_WORD TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data MOVWF WORD_EVEN TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment MOVFW TABLAT, W ; get data MOVF WORD_ODD PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 56 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.4 Erasing Flash Program Memory The minimum erase block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Only through the use of an external programmer, or through ICSP™ control, can larger blocks of program memory be bulk erased. Word erase in the Flash array is not supported. When initiating an erase sequence from the Microcontroller itself, a block of 64 bytes of program memory is erased. The Most Significant 16 bits of the TBLPTR<21:6> point to the block being erased. The TBLPTR<5:0> bits are ignored. The EECON1 register commands the erase operation. The EEPGD bit must be set to point to the Flash program memory. The WREN bit must be set to enable write operations. The FREE bit is set to select an erase operation. The write initiate sequence for EECON2, shown as steps 4 through 6 in Section 4.4.1 “Flash Program Memory Erase Sequence”, is used to guard against accidental writes. This is sometimes referred to as a long write. A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted during the long write cycle. The long write is terminated by the internal programming timer. 4.4.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ERASE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal program memory is: 1. Load Table Pointer register with address of block being erased. 2. Set the EECON1 register for the erase operation: • set EEPGD bit to point to program memory; • clear the CFGS bit to access program memory; • set WREN bit to enable writes; • set FREE bit to enable the erase. 3. Disable interrupts. 4. Write 55h to EECON2. 5. Write 0AAh to EECON2. 6. Set the WR bit. This will begin the block erase cycle. 7. The CPU will stall for duration of the erase (about 2 ms using internal timer). 8. Re-enable interrupts. EXAMPLE 4-2: ERASING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY BLOCK MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the memory block MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH MOVWF TBLPTRH MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW MOVWF TBLPTRL ERASE_BLOCK BSF EECON1, EEPGD ; point to Flash program memory BCF EECON1, CFGS ; access Flash program memory BSF EECON1, WREN ; enable write to memory BSF EECON1, FREE ; enable block Erase operation BCF INTCON, GIE ; disable interrupts Required MOVLW 55h Sequence MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h MOVLW 0AAh MOVWF EECON2 ; write 0AAh BSF EECON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stall) BSF INTCON, GIE ; re-enable interrupts  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 57 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 4.5 Writing to Flash Program Memory The programming block size is 8 or 16 bytes, depending on the device (See Table 4-1). Word or byte programming is not supported. Table writes are used internally to load the holding registers needed to program the Flash memory. There are only as many holding registers as there are bytes in a write block (See Table 4-1). Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the TBLWT instruction may need to be executed 8, or 16 times, depending on the device, for each programming operation. All of the table write operations will essentially be short writes because only the holding registers are written. After all the holding registers have been written, the programming operation of that block of memory is started by configuring the EECON1 register for a program memory write and performing the long write sequence. The long write is necessary for programming the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted during a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. The EEPROM on-chip timer controls the write time. The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range of the device. FIGURE 4-5: TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 4.5.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for programming an internal program memory location should be: 1. Read 64 bytes into RAM. 2. Update data values in RAM as necessary. 3. Load Table Pointer register with address being erased. 4. Execute the block erase procedure. 5. Load Table Pointer register with address of first byte being written. 6. Write the 8 or 16-byte block into the holding registers with auto-increment. 7. Set the EECON1 register for the write operation: • set EEPGD bit to point to program memory; • clear the CFGS bit to access program memory; • set WREN to enable byte writes. 8. Disable interrupts. 9. Write 55h to EECON2. 10. Write 0AAh to EECON2. 11. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle. 12. The CPU will stall for duration of the write (about 2 ms using internal timer). 13. Re-enable interrupts. 14. Repeat steps 6 to 13 for each block until all 64 bytes are written. 15. Verify the memory (table read). This procedure will require about 6 ms to update each write block of memory. An example of the required code is given in Example 4-3. Note: The default value of the holding registers on device Resets and after write operations is FFh. A write of FFh to a holding register does not modify that byte. This means that individual bytes of program memory may be modified, provided that the change does not attempt to change any bit from a ‘0’ to a ‘1’. When modifying individual bytes, it is not necessary to load all holding registers before executing a long write operation. TABLAT TBLPTR = xxxx00 TBLPTR = xxxx01 TBLPTR = xxxxYY(1) Write Register TBLPTR = xxxx02 Program Memory Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register 8 8 8 8 Note 1: YY = x7, xF, or 1F for 8, 16 or 32 byte write blocks, respectively. Note: Before setting the WR bit, the Table Pointer address needs to be within the intended address range of the bytes in the holding registers. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 58 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. EXAMPLE 4-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW D'64’ ; number of bytes in erase block MOVWF COUNTER MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH ; point to buffer MOVWF FSR0H MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_LOW MOVWF FSR0L MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the memory block MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH MOVWF TBLPTRH MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW MOVWF TBLPTRL READ_BLOCK TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT, and inc MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data MOVWF POSTINC0 ; store data DECFSZ COUNTER ; done? BRA READ_BLOCK ; repeat MODIFY_WORD MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH ; point to buffer MOVWF FSR0H MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_LOW MOVWF FSR0L MOVLW NEW_DATA_LOW ; update buffer word MOVWF POSTINC0 MOVLW NEW_DATA_HIGH MOVWF INDF0 ERASE_BLOCK MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the memory block MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH MOVWF TBLPTRH MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW MOVWF TBLPTRL BSF EECON1, EEPGD ; point to Flash program memory BCF EECON1, CFGS ; access Flash program memory BSF EECON1, WREN ; enable write to memory BSF EECON1, FREE ; enable Erase operation BCF INTCON, GIE ; disable interrupts MOVLW 55h Required MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h Sequence MOVLW 0AAh MOVWF EECON2 ; write 0AAh BSF EECON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stall) BSF INTCON, GIE ; re-enable interrupts TBLRD*- ; dummy read decrement MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH ; point to buffer MOVWF FSR0H MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_LOW MOVWF FSR0L WRITE_BUFFER_BACK MOVLW BlockSize ; number of bytes in holding register MOVWF COUNTER MOVLW D’64’/BlockSize ; number of write blocks in 64 bytes MOVWF COUNTER2 WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS MOVF POSTINC0, W ; get low byte of buffer data MOVWF TABLAT ; present data to table latch TBLWT+* ; write data, perform a short write ; to internal TBLWT holding register.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 59 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 EXAMPLE 4-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (CONTINUED) 4.5.2 WRITE VERIFY Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the memory should be verified against the original value. This should be used in applications where excessive writes can stress bits near the specification limit. 4.5.3 UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF WRITE OPERATION If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory location just programmed should be verified and reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset during normal operation, the WRERR bit will be set which the user can check to decide whether a rewrite of the location(s) is needed. 4.5.4 PROTECTION AGAINST SPURIOUS WRITES To protect against spurious writes to Flash program memory, the write initiate sequence must also be followed. See Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU” for more detail. 4.6 Flash Program Operation During Code Protection See Section 24.3 “Program Verification and Code Protection” for details on code protection of Flash program memory. TABLE 4-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY DECFSZ COUNTER ; loop until holding registers are full BRA WRITE_WORD_TO_HREGS PROGRAM_MEMORY BSF EECON1, EEPGD ; point to Flash program memory BCF EECON1, CFGS ; access Flash program memory BSF EECON1, WREN ; enable write to memory BCF INTCON, GIE ; disable interrupts MOVLW 55h Required MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h Sequence MOVLW 0AAh MOVWF EECON2 ; write 0AAh BSF EECON1, WR ; start program (CPU stall) DCFSZ COUNTER2 ; repeat for remaining write blocks BRA WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS ; BSF INTCON, GIE ; re-enable interrupts BCF EECON1, WREN ; disable write to memory Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page TBLPTRU — — bit 21 Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) 285 TBPLTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 285 TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 285 TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 285 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) 287 EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 287 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during Flash/EEPROM access. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 60 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 61 PIC18F/LF1XK50 5.0 DATA EEPROM MEMORY The data EEPROM is a nonvolatile memory array, separate from the data RAM and program memory, which is used for long-term storage of program data. It is not directly mapped in either the register file or program memory space but is indirectly addressed through the Special Function Registers (SFRs). The EEPROM is readable and writable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. Four SFRs are used to read and write to the data EEPROM as well as the program memory. They are: • EECON1 • EECON2 • EEDATA • EEADR The data EEPROM allows byte read and write. When interfacing to the data memory block, EEDATA holds the 8-bit data for read/write and the EEADR register pair hold the address of the EEPROM location being accessed. The EEPROM data memory is rated for high erase/write cycle endurance. A byte write automatically erases the location and writes the new data (erase-before-write). The write time is controlled by an on-chip timer; it will vary with voltage and temperature as well as from chipto- chip. Please refer to parameter US122 (Table 27-13 in Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”) for exact limits. 5.1 EEADR Register The EEADR register is used to address the data EEPROM for read and write operations. The 8-bit range of the register can address a memory range of 256 bytes (00h to FFh). 5.2 EECON1 and EECON2 Registers Access to the data EEPROM is controlled by two registers: EECON1 and EECON2. These are the same registers which control access to the program memory and are used in a similar manner for the data EEPROM. The EECON1 register (Register 5-1) is the control register for data and program memory access. Control bit EEPGD determines if the access will be to program or data EEPROM memory. When the EEPGD bit is clear, operations will access the data EEPROM memory. When the EEPGD bit is set, program memory is accessed. Control bit, CFGS, determines if the access will be to the Configuration registers or to program memory/data EEPROM memory. When the CFGS bit is set, subsequent operations access Configuration registers. When the CFGS bit is clear, the EEPGD bit selects either program Flash or data EEPROM memory. The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is set and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit can be set but not cleared by software. It is cleared only by hardware at the completion of the write operation. Control bits, RD and WR, start read and erase/write operations, respectively. These bits are set by firmware and cleared by hardware at the completion of the operation. The RD bit cannot be set when accessing program memory (EEPGD = 1). Program memory is read using table read instructions. See Section 4.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes” regarding table reads. The EECON2 register is not a physical register. It is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s. Note: During normal operation, the WRERR may read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write operation was prematurely terminated by a Reset, or a write operation was attempted improperly. Note: The EEIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR2 register is set when the write is complete. It must be cleared by software. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 62 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 5-1: EECON1: DATA EEPROM CONTROL 1 REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x U-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 R/S-0 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit S = Bit can be set by software, but not cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 EEPGD: Flash Program or Data EEPROM Memory Select bit 1 = Access Flash program memory 0 = Access data EEPROM memory bit 6 CFGS: Flash Program/Data EEPROM or Configuration Select bit 1 = Access Configuration registers 0 = Access Flash program or data EEPROM memory bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 FREE: Flash Row (Block) Erase Enable bit 1 = Erase the program memory block addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command (cleared by completion of erase operation) 0 = Perform write-only bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Error Flag bit(1) 1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal operation, or an improper write attempt) 0 = The write operation completed bit 2 WREN: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Write Enable bit 1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM 0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM bit 1 WR: Write Control bit 1 = Initiates a data EEPROM erase/write cycle or a program memory erase cycle or write cycle. (The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) by software.) 0 = Write cycle to the EEPROM is complete bit 0 RD: Read Control bit 1 = Initiates an EEPROM read (Read takes one cycle. RD is cleared by hardware. The RD bit can only be set (not cleared) by software. RD bit cannot be set when EEPGD = 1 or CFGS = 1.) 0 = Does not initiate an EEPROM read Note 1: When a WRERR occurs, the EEPGD and CFGS bits are not cleared. This allows tracing of the error condition.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 63 PIC18F/LF1XK50 5.3 Reading the Data EEPROM Memory To read a data memory location, the user must write the address to the EEADR register, clear the EEPGD control bit of the EECON1 register and then set control bit, RD. The data is available on the very next instruction cycle; therefore, the EEDATA register can be read by the next instruction. EEDATA will hold this value until another read operation, or until it is written to by the user (during a write operation). The basic process is shown in Example 5-1. 5.4 Writing to the Data EEPROM Memory To write an EEPROM data location, the address must first be written to the EEADR register and the data written to the EEDATA register. The sequence in Example 5-2 must be followed to initiate the write cycle. The write will not begin if this sequence is not exactly followed (write 55h to EECON2, write 0AAh to EECON2, then set WR bit) for each byte. It is strongly recommended that interrupts be disabled during this code segment. Additionally, the WREN bit in EECON1 must be set to enable writes. This mechanism prevents accidental writes to data EEPROM due to unexpected code execution (i.e., runaway programs). The WREN bit should be kept clear at all times, except when updating the EEPROM. The WREN bit is not cleared by hardware. After a write sequence has been initiated, EECON1, EEADR and EEDATA cannot be modified. The WR bit will be inhibited from being set unless the WREN bit is set. Both WR and WREN cannot be set with the same instruction. At the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is cleared by hardware and the EEPROM Interrupt Flag bit, EEIF, is set. The user may either enable this interrupt or poll this bit. EEIF must be cleared by software. 5.5 Write Verify Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the memory should be verified against the original value. This should be used in applications where excessive writes can stress bits near the specification limit. EXAMPLE 5-1: DATA EEPROM READ EXAMPLE 5-2: DATA EEPROM WRITE MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR ; MOVWF EEADR ; Data Memory Address to read BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Point to DATA memory BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Access EEPROM BSF EECON1, RD ; EEPROM Read MOVF EEDATA, W ; W = EEDATA MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR_LOW ; MOVWF EEADR ; Data Memory Address to write MOVLW DATA_EE_DATA ; MOVWF EEDATA ; Data Memory Value to write BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Point to DATA memory BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Access EEPROM BSF EECON1, WREN ; Enable writes BCF INTCON, GIE ; Disable Interrupts MOVLW 55h ; Required MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 55h Sequence MOVLW 0AAh ; MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 0AAh BSF EECON1, WR ; Set WR bit to begin write BSF INTCON, GIE ; Enable Interrupts ; User code execution BCF EECON1, WREN ; Disable writes on write complete (EEIF set) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 64 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 5.6 Operation During Code-Protect Data EEPROM memory has its own code-protect bits in Configuration Words. External read and write operations are disabled if code protection is enabled. The microcontroller itself can both read and write to the internal data EEPROM, regardless of the state of the code-protect Configuration bit. Refer to Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU” for additional information. 5.7 Protection Against Spurious Write There are conditions when the user may not want to write to the data EEPROM memory. To protect against spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have been implemented. On power-up, the WREN bit is cleared. In addition, writes to the EEPROM are blocked during the Power-up Timer period (TPWRT, parameter 33). The write initiate sequence and the WREN bit together help prevent an accidental write during brown-out, power glitch or software malfunction. 5.8 Using the Data EEPROM The data EEPROM is a high-endurance, byte addressable array that has been optimized for the storage of frequently changing information (e.g., program variables or other data that are updated often). When variables in one section change frequently, while variables in another section do not change, it is possible to exceed the total number of write cycles to the EEPROM without exceeding the total number of write cycles to a single byte. If this is the case, then an array refresh must be performed. For this reason, variables that change infrequently (such as constants, IDs, calibration, etc.) should be stored in Flash program memory. EXAMPLE 5-3: DATA EEPROM REFRESH ROUTINE TABLE 5-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DATA EEPROM MEMORY Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 EEADR EEADR7 EEADR6 EEADR5 EEADR4 EEADR3 EEADR2 EEADR1 EEADR0 287 EEDATA EEPROM Data Register 287 EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) 287 EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 287 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during Flash/EEPROM access. CLRF EEADR ; Start at address 0 BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Set for memory BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Set for Data EEPROM BCF INTCON, GIE ; Disable interrupts BSF EECON1, WREN ; Enable writes Loop ; Loop to refresh array BSF EECON1, RD ; Read current address MOVLW 55h ; MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 55h MOVLW 0AAh ; MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 0AAh BSF EECON1, WR ; Set WR bit to begin write BTFSC EECON1, WR ; Wait for write to complete BRA $-2 INCFSZ EEADR, F ; Increment address BRA LOOP ; Not zero, do it again BCF EECON1, WREN ; Disable writes BSF INTCON, GIE ; Enable interrupts  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 65 PIC18F/LF1XK50 6.0 8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER 6.1 Introduction All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS register. Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the advantages of higher computational throughput and reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applications previously reserved for digital signal processors. A comparison of various hardware and software multiply operations, along with the savings in memory and execution time, is shown in Table 6-1. 6.2 Operation Example 6-1 shows the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is required when one of the arguments is already loaded in the WREG register. Example 6-2 shows the sequence to do an 8 x 8 signed multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb) is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. EXAMPLE 6-1: 8 x 8 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE EXAMPLE 6-2: 8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE TABLE 6-1: PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS MOVF ARG1, W ; MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVF ARG1, W MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> ; PRODH:PRODL BTFSC ARG2, SB ; Test Sign Bit SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH ; - ARG1 MOVF ARG2, W BTFSC ARG1, SB ; Test Sign Bit SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH ; - ARG2 Routine Multiply Method Program Memory (Words) Cycles (Max) Time @ 40 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz 8 x 8 unsigned Without hardware multiply 13 69 6.9 s 27.6 s 69 s Hardware multiply 1 1 100 ns 400 ns 1 s 8 x 8 signed Without hardware multiply 33 91 9.1 s 36.4 s 91 s Hardware multiply 6 6 600 ns 2.4 s 6 s 16 x 16 unsigned Without hardware multiply 21 242 24.2 s 96.8 s 242 s Hardware multiply 28 28 2.8 s 11.2 s 28 s 16 x 16 signed Without hardware multiply 52 254 25.4 s 102.6 s 254 s Hardware multiply 35 40 4.0 s 16.0 s 40 s PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 66 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Example 6-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 unsigned multiplication. Equation 6-1 shows the algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES<3:0>). EQUATION 6-1: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM EXAMPLE 6-3: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE Example 6-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 signed multiply. Equation 6-2 shows the algorithm used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES<3:0>). To account for the sign bits of the arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. EQUATION 6-2: 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM EXAMPLE 6-4: 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L = (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) + (ARG1H  ARG2L  28) + (ARG1L  ARG2H  28) + (ARG1L  ARG2L) MOVF ARG1L, W MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L-> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ; MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ; ; MOVF ARG1H, W MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H-> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ; MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ; ; MOVF ARG1L, W MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H-> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVF PRODL, W ; ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross MOVF PRODH, W ; products ADDWFC RES2, F ; CLRF WREG ; ADDWFC RES3, F ; ; MOVF ARG1H, W ; MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L-> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVF PRODL, W ; ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross MOVF PRODH, W ; products ADDWFC RES2, F ; CLRF WREG ; ADDWFC RES3, F ; RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L = (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) + (ARG1H  ARG2L  28) + (ARG1L  ARG2H  28) + (ARG1L  ARG2L) + (-1  ARG2H<7>  ARG1H:ARG1L  216) + (-1  ARG1H<7>  ARG2H:ARG2L  216) MOVF ARG1L, W MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L -> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ; MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ; ; MOVF ARG1H, W MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H -> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ; MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ; ; MOVF ARG1L, W MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H -> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVF PRODL, W ; ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross MOVF PRODH, W ; products ADDWFC RES2, F ; CLRF WREG ; ADDWFC RES3, F ; ; MOVF ARG1H, W ; MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L -> ; PRODH:PRODL MOVF PRODL, W ; ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross MOVF PRODH, W ; products ADDWFC RES2, F ; CLRF WREG ; ADDWFC RES3, F ; ; BTFSS ARG2H, 7 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg? BRA SIGN_ARG1 ; no, check ARG1 MOVF ARG1L, W ; SUBWF RES2 ; MOVF ARG1H, W ; SUBWFB RES3 ; SIGN_ARG1 BTFSS ARG1H, 7 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg? BRA CONT_CODE ; no, done MOVF ARG2L, W ; SUBWF RES2 ; MOVF ARG2H, W ; SUBWFB RES3 ; CONT_CODE :  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 67 PIC18F/LF1XK50 7.0 INTERRUPTS The PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices have multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high priority level or a low priority level. The high priority interrupt vector is at 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. A high priority interrupt event will interrupt a low priority interrupt that may be in progress. There are ten registers which are used to control interrupt operation. These registers are: • RCON • INTCON • INTCON2 • INTCON3 • PIR1, PIR2 • PIE1, PIE2 • IPR1, IPR2 It is recommended that the Microchip header files supplied with MPLAB® IDE be used for the symbolic bit names in these registers. This allows the assembler/ compiler to automatically take care of the placement of these bits within the specified register. In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control their operation. They are: • Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event occurred • Enable bit that allows program execution to branch to the interrupt vector address when the flag bit is set • Priority bit to select high priority or low priority 7.1 Mid-Range Compatibility When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with PIC® microcontroller mid-range devices. In Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits of the IPRx registers have no effect. The PEIE bit of the INTCON register is the global interrupt enable for the peripherals. The PEIE bit disables only the peripheral interrupt sources and enables the peripheral interrupt sources when the GIE bit is also set. The GIE bit of the INTCON register is the global interrupt enable which enables all non-peripheral interrupt sources and disables all interrupt sources, including the peripherals. All interrupts branch to address 0008h in Compatibility mode. 7.2 Interrupt Priority The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the IPEN bit of the RCON register. When interrupt priority is enabled the GIE and PEIE global interrupt enable bits of Compatibility mode are replaced by the GIEH high priority, and GIEL low priority, global interrupt enables. When set, the GIEH bit of the INTCON register enables all interrupts that have their associated IPRx register or INTCONx register priority bit set (high priority). When clear, the GIEL bit disables all interrupt sources including those selected as low priority. When clear, the GIEL bit of the INTCON register disables only the interrupts that have their associated priority bit cleared (low priority). When set, the GIEL bit enables the low priority sources when the GIEH bit is also set. When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate global interrupt enable bit are all set, the interrupt will vector immediately to address 0008h for high priority, or 0018h for low priority, depending on level of the interrupting source’s priority bit. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding interrupt enable bits. 7.3 Interrupt Response When an interrupt is responded to, the global interrupt enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. The GIE bit is the global interrupt enable when the IPEN bit is cleared. When the IPEN bit is set, enabling interrupt priority levels, the GIEH bit is the high priority global interrupt enable and the GIEL bit is the low priority global interrupt enable. High priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low priority interrupt. Low priority interrupts are not processed while high priority interrupts are in progress. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits in the INTCONx and PIRx registers. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared by software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid repeating the same interrupt. The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine and sets the GIE bit (GIEH or GIEL if priority levels are used), which re-enables interrupts. For external interrupt events, such as the INT pins or the PORTB interrupt-on-change, the interrupt latency will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact latency is the same for one-cycle or two-cycle PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 68 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set, regardless of the status of their corresponding enable bits or the global interrupt enable bit. Note: Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify any of the interrupt control registers while any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may cause erratic microcontroller behavior.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 69 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 7-1: PIC18 INTERRUPT LOGIC TMR0IE GIEH/GIE GIEL/PEIE Wake-up if in Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0008h INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RABIF RABIE RABIP IPEN TMR0IF TMR0IP INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP RABIF RABIE RABIP INT0IF INT0IE GIEL/PEIE Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location IPEN IPEN 0018h SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADIF ADIE ADIP RCIF RCIE RCIP Additional Peripheral Interrupts ADIF ADIE ADIP High Priority Interrupt Generation Low Priority Interrupt Generation RCIF RCIE RCIP Additional Peripheral Interrupts Idle or Sleep modes GIEH/GIE Note 1: The RABIF interrupt also requires the individual pin IOCA and IOCB enable. (1) (1) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 70 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 7.4 INTCON Registers The INTCON registers are readable and writable registers, which contain various enable, priority and flag bits. Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. REGISTER 7-1: INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts including peripherals When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all high priority interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts including low priority. bit 6 PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all low priority interrupts 0 = Disables all low priority interrupts bit 5 TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt bit 4 INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt bit 3 RABIE: RA and RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit(2) 1 = Enables the RA and RB port change interrupt 0 = Disables the RA and RB port change interrupt bit 2 TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared by software) 0 = TMR0 register did not overflow bit 1 INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 RABIF: RA and RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = At least one of the RA <5:3> or RB<7:4> pins changed state (must be cleared by software) 0 = None of the RA<5:3> or RB<7:4> pins have changed state Note 1: A mismatch condition will continue to set the RABIF bit. Reading PORTA and PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow the bit to be cleared. 2: RA and RB port change interrupts also require the individual pin IOCA and IOCB enable.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 71 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 7-2: INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL 2 REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RABPU: PORTA and PORTB Pull-up Enable bit 1 = All PORTA and PORTB pull-ups are disabled 0 = PORTA and PORTB pull-ups are enabled provided that the pin is an input and the corresponding WPUA and WPUB bits are set. bit 6 INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 5 INTEDG1: External Interrupt 1 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 4 INTEDG2: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 RABIP: RA and RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 72 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 7-3: INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL 3 REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 INT2IE: INT2 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT2 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT2 external interrupt bit 3 INT1IE: INT1 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT1 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT1 external interrupt bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 INT2IF: INT2 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT2 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = The INT2 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 INT1IF: INT1 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT1 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = The INT1 external interrupt did not occur Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 73 PIC18F/LF1XK50 7.5 PIR Registers The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral Interrupt Request Flag registers (PIR1 and PIR2). Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE of the INTCON register. 2: User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are cleared prior to enabling an interrupt and after servicing that interrupt. REGISTER 7-4: PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1 U-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared by software) 0 = The A/D conversion is not complete or has not been started bit 5 RCIF: EUSART Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART receive buffer, RCREG, is full (cleared when RCREG is read) 0 = The EUSART receive buffer is empty bit 4 TXIF: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART transmit buffer, TXREG, is empty (cleared when TXREG is written) 0 = The EUSART transmit buffer is full bit 3 SSPIF: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared by software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive bit 2 CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1 register capture occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = No TMR1 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1 register compare match occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = No TMR1 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode bit 1 TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred bit 0 TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared by software) 0 = TMR1 register did not overflow PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 74 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 7-5: PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to HFINTOSC (must be cleared by software) 0 = Device clock operating bit 6 C1IF: Comparator C1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator C1 output has changed (must be cleared by software) 0 = Comparator C1 output has not changed bit 5 C2IF: Comparator C2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator C2 output has changed (must be cleared by software) 0 = Comparator C2 output has not changed bit 4 EEIF: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The write operation is complete (must be cleared by software) 0 = The write operation is not complete or has not been started bit 3 BCLIF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared by software) 0 = No bus collision occurred bit 2 USBIF: USB Interrupt Flag bit 1 = USB has requested an interrupt (must be cleared in software) 0 = No USB interrupt request bit 1 TMR3IF: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared by software) 0 = TMR3 register did not overflow bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 75 PIC18F/LF1XK50 7.6 PIE Registers The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1 and PIE2). When IPEN = 0, the PEIE bit must be set to enable any of these peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 7-6: PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE (FLAG) REGISTER 1 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the A/D interrupt 0 = Disables the A/D interrupt bit 5 RCIE: EUSART Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART receive interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART receive interrupt bit 4 TXIE: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART transmit interrupt bit 3 SSPIE: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP interrupt bit 2 CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt bit 1 TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt bit 0 TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 76 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 7-7: PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE (FLAG) REGISTER 2 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 6 C1IE: Comparator C1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 5 C2IE: Comparator C2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 EEIE: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 3 BCLIE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 USBIE: USB Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 TMR3IE: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 77 PIC18F/LF1XK50 7.7 IPR Registers The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral Interrupt Priority registers (IPR1 and IPR2). Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable (IPEN) bit be set. REGISTER 7-8: IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 RCIP: EUSART Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TXIP: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 SSPIP: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 CCP1IP: CCP1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 TMR1IP: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 78 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 7-9: IPR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 2 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 C1IP: Comparator C1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 C2IP: Comparator C2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 EEIP: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 BCLIP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 USBIP: USB Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR3IP: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 79 PIC18F/LF1XK50 7.8 RCON Register The RCON register contains flag bits which are used to determine the cause of the last Reset or wake-up from Idle or Sleep modes. RCON also contains the IPEN bit which enables interrupt priorities. The operation of the SBOREN bit and the Reset flag bits is discussed in more detail in Section 23.1 “RCON Register”. REGISTER 7-10: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN SBOREN(1) — RI TO PD POR(2) BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) bit 6 SBOREN: BOR Software Enable bit(1) If BOREN<1:0> = 01: 1 = BOR is enabled 0 = BOR is disabled If BOREN<1:0> = 00, 10 or 11: Bit is disabled and read as ‘0’. bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware or Power-on Reset) 0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in firmware after a code-executed Reset occurs) bit 3 TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 2 PD: Power-down Detection Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit(2) 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit(3) 1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set by firmware after a POR or Brown-out Reset occurs) Note 1: If SBOREN is enabled, its Reset state is ‘1’; otherwise, it is ‘0’. 2: The actual Reset value of POR is determined by the type of device Reset. See the notes following this register and Section 23.6 “Reset State of Registers” for additional information. 3: See Table 23-3. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 80 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 7.9 INTn Pin Interrupts External interrupts on the RC0/INT0, RC1/INT1 and RC2/INT2 pins are edge-triggered. If the corresponding INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2 register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge; if the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge. When a valid edge appears on the RCx/INTx pin, the corresponding flag bit, INTxF, is set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing the corresponding enable bit, INTxE. Flag bit, INTxF, must be cleared by software in the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling the interrupt. All external interrupts (INT0, INT1 and INT2) can wakeup the processor from Idle or Sleep modes if bit INTxE was set prior to going into those modes. If the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE, is set, the processor will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up. Interrupt priority for INT1 and INT2 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bits, INT1IP and INT2IP of the INTCON3 register. There is no priority bit associated with INT0. It is always a high priority interrupt source. 7.10 TMR0 Interrupt In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the TMR0 register (FFh  00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L register pair (FFFFh 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, TMR0IE of the INTCON register. Interrupt priority for Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP of the INTCON2 register. See Section 10.0 “Timer0 Module” for further details on the Timer0 module. 7.11 PORTA and PORTB Interrupt-on- Change An input change on PORTA or PORTB sets flag bit, RABIF of the INTCON register. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, RABIE of the INTCON register. Pins must also be individually enabled with the IOCA and IOCB register. Interrupt priority for PORTA and PORTB interrupt-on-change is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, RABIP of the INTCON2 register. 7.12 Context Saving During Interrupts During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers are saved on the fast return stack. If a fast return from interrupt is not used (see Section 3.3 “Data Memory Organization”), the user may need to save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user’s application, other registers may also need to be saved. Example 7-1 saves and restores the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine. EXAMPLE 7-1: SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM MOVWF W_TEMP ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank MOVFF STATUS, STATUS_TEMP ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere MOVFF BSR, BSR_TEMP ; BSR_TMEP located anywhere ; ; USER ISR CODE ; MOVFF BSR_TEMP, BSR ; Restore BSR MOVF W_TEMP, W ; Restore WREG MOVFF STATUS_TEMP, STATUS ; Restore STATUS  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 81 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 8.0 LOW DROPOUT (LDO) VOLTAGE REGULATOR The PIC18F1XK50 devices differ from the PIC18LF1XK50 devices due to an internal Low Dropout (LDO) voltage regulator. The PIC18F1XK50 contain an internal LDO, while the PIC18LF1XK50 do not. The lithography of the die allows a maximum operating voltage of the nominal 3.6V on the internal digital logic. In order to continue to support 5.0V designs, a LDO voltage regulator is integrated on the die. The LDO voltage regulator allows for the internal digital logic to operate at 3.3V, while I/O’s operate at 5.0V (VDD). The LDO voltage regulator requires an external bypass capacitor for stability. The VUSB pin is required to have an external bypass capacitor. It is recommended that the capacitor be a ceramic cap between 0.22 to 0.47 μF. On power-up, the external capacitor will look like a large load on the LDO voltage regulator. To prevent erroneous operation, the device is held in Reset while a constant current source charges the external capacitor. After the cap is fully charged, the device is released from Reset. For more information, refer to Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 82 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 83 PIC18F/LF1XK50 9.0 I/O PORTS There are up to three ports available. Some pins of the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate function from the peripheral features on the device. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. Each port has three registers for its operation. These registers are: • TRIS register (data direction register) • PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the device) • LAT register (output latch) The PORTA Data Latch (LATA register) is useful for read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 9-1. FIGURE 9-1: GENERIC I/O PORT OPERATION 9.1 PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers PORTA is 5 bits wide. PORTA<5:4> bits are bidirectional ports and PORTA<3,1:0> bits are inputonly ports. The corresponding data direction register is TRISA. Setting a TRISA bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a TRISA bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Reading the PORTA register reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it, will write to the PORT latch. The PORTA Data Latch (LATA) register is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATA register read and write the latched output value for PORTA. All of the PORTA pins are individually configurable as interrupt-on-change pins. Control bits in the IOCA register enable (when set) or disable (when clear) the interrupt function for each pin. When set, the RABIE bit of the INTCON register enables interrupts on all pins which also have their corresponding IOCA bit set. When clear, the RABIE bit disables all interrupt-on-changes. Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt to occur (i.e., any pin configured as an output is excluded from the interrupt-on-change comparison). For enabled interrupt-on-change pins, the values are compared with the old value latched on the last read of PORTA. The ‘mismatch’ outputs of the last read are OR’d together to set the PORTA Change Interrupt flag bit (RABIF) in the INTCON register. This interrupt can wake the device from the Sleep mode, or any of the Idle modes. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) Any read or write of PORTA to clear the mismatch condition (except when PORTA is the source or destination of a MOVFF instruction). b) Clear the flag bit, RABIF. A mismatch condition will continue to set the RABIF flag bit. Reading or writing PORTA will end the mismatch condition and allow the RABIF bit to be cleared. The latch holding the last read value is not affected by a MCLR nor Brown-out Reset. After either one of these Resets, the RABIF flag will continue to be set if a mismatch is present. Data Bus WR LAT WR TRIS RD Port Data Latch TRIS Latch RD TRIS Input Buffer I/O pin(1) D Q CK D Q CK EN Q D EN RD LAT or Port Note 1: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 84 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for wake-up on key depression operation and operations where PORTA is only used for the interrupt-on-change feature. Polling of PORTA is not recommended while using the interrupt-on-change feature. Each of the PORTA pins has an individually controlled weak internal pull-up. When set, each bit of the WPUA register enables the corresponding pin pull-up. When cleared, the RABPU bit of the INTCON2 register enables pull-ups on all pins which also have their corresponding WPUA bit set. When set, the RABPU bit disables all weak pull-ups. The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset. RA0 and RA1 are multiplexed with the USB module and can serve as the differential data lines for the onchip USB transceiver. RA0 and RA1 do not have TRISA bits associated with them. As digital port pins, they can only function as digital inputs. When configured for USB operation, the data direction is determined by the configuration and status of the USB module at a given time. RA3 is an input only pin. Its operation is controlled by the MCLRE bit of the CONFIG3H register. When selected as a port pin (MCLRE = 0), it functions as a digital input only pin; as such, it does not have TRIS or LAT bits associated with its operation. Pins RA4 and RA5 are multiplexed with the main oscillator pins; they are enabled as oscillator or I/O pins by the selection of the main oscillator in the Configuration register (see Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for details). When they are not used as port pins, RA4 and RA5 and their associated TRIS and LAT bits read as ‘0’. Pin RA4 is multiplexed with an analog input. The operation of pin RA4 as analog is selected by setting the ANS3 bit in the ANSEL register which is the default setting after a Power-on Reset. EXAMPLE 9-1: INITIALIZING PORTA Note 1: If a change on the I/O pin should occur when the read operation is being executed (start of the Q2 cycle), then the RABIF interrupt flag may not get set. Furthermore, since a read or write on a port affects all bits of that port, care must be taken when using multiple pins in Interrupt- on-change mode. Changes on one pin may not be seen while servicing changes on another pin. 2: When configured for USB operation, interrupt-on-change functionality on RA0 and RA1 is automatically disabled. 3: In order for the digital inputs to function on the RA<1:0> port pins, the interrupton- change pins must be enabled (IOCA <1:0> = 11) and the USB module must be disabled (USBEN = 0). Note: On a Power-on Reset, RA4 is configured as analog inputs by default and read as ‘0’; RA<1:0> and RA<5:3> are configured as digital inputs. Note: On a Power-on Reset, RA3 is enabled as a digital input only if Master Clear functionality is disabled. Note: On a Power-on Reset, RA4 is configured as analog inputs and read as ‘0’. CLRF PORTA ; Initialize PORTA by ; clearing output ; data latches CLRF LATA ; Alternate method ; to clear output ; data latches MOVLW 030h ; Value used to ; initialize data ; direction MOVWF TRISA ; Set RA<5:4> as output  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 85 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 9-1: PORTA: PORTA REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R-x U-0 R/W-x R/W-x — — RA5 RA4 RA3 — RA1 RA0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-3 RA<5:3>: PORTA I/O Pin bit(1) 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 RA<1:0>: PORTA I/O Pin bit 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL Note 1: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. REGISTER 9-2: TRISA: PORTA TRI-STATE REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — TRISA5 TRISA4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 TRISA<5:4>: PORTA Tri-State Control bit 1 = PORTA pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTA pin configured as an output bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: TRISA<5:4> always reads ‘1’ in XT, HS and LP Oscillator modes. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 86 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 9-3: WPUA: WEAK PULL-UP PORTA REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 RW-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-3 WPUA<5:3>: Weak Pull-up Enable bit 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 WPUA<1:0>: Weak Pull-up Enable bit 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled REGISTER 9-4: IOCA: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE PORTA REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — IOCA5 IOCA4 IOCA3 — IOCA1 IOCA0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-3 IOCA<5:3>: PORTA I/O Pin bit 1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled 0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 IOCA<1:0>: PORTA I/O Pin bit 1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled 0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled REGISTER 9-5: LATA: PORTA DATA LATCH REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — LATA5 LATA4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 LATA<5:4>: RA<5:4> Port I/O Output Latch Register bits bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 87 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 9-1: PORTA I/O SUMMARY Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description RA0/IOCA0/D+/ PGD RA0 —(1) I TTL PORTA<0> data input; disabled when USB enabled. IOCA0 —(1) I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change; disabled when USB enabled. D+ —(1) I XCVR USB bus differential plus line input (internal transceiver). —(1) O XCVR USB bus differential plus line output (internal transceiver). PGD —(1) O DIG Serial execution data output for ICSP™. —(1) I ST Serial execution data input for ICSP™. RA1/IOCA1/D-/ PGC RA1 —(1) I TTL PORTA<1> data input; disabled when USB enabled. IOCA1 —(1) I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change; disabled when USB enabled. D- —(1) I XCVR USB bus differential minus line input (internal transceiver). —(1) O XCVR USB bus differential minus line output (internal transceiver). PGC —(1) O DIG Serial execution clock output for ICSP™. —(1) I ST Serial execution clock input for ICSP™. RA3/IOCA3/MCLR/ VPP RA3 —(2) I ST PORTA<3> data input; enabled when MCLRE Configuration bit is clear; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCA3 —(1) I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change MCLR — I ST External Master Clear input; enabled when MCLRE Configuration bit is set. VPP — I ANA High-voltage detection; used for ICSP™ mode entry detection. Always available, regardless of pin mode. RA4/IOCA4/AN3/ OSC2/CLKOUT RA4 0 O DIG LATA<4> data output. Enabled in RCIO, INTIO2 and ECIO modes only. 1 I TTL PORTA<4> data input; Programmable weak pull-up. Enabled in RCIO, INTIO2 and ECIO modes only. IOCA4 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change AN3 1 I ANA A/D input channel 3. Default configuration on POR. OSC2 x O ANA Main oscillator feedback output connection (XT, HS and LP modes). CLKOUT x O DIG System cycle clock output (FOSC/4) in RC, INTIO1 and EC Oscillator modes. RA5/IOCA5/OSC1/ CLKIN RA5 0 O DIG LATA<5> data output. Disabled in external oscillator modes. 1 I TTL PORTA<5> data input. Disabled in external oscillator modes; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCA5 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change OSC1 x I ANA Main oscillator input connection. CLKIN x I ANA Main clock input connection. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Note 1: RA0 and RA1 do not have corresponding TRISA bits. In Port mode, these pins are input only. USB data direction is determined by the USB configuration. 2: RA3 does not have a corresponding TRISA bit. This pin is always an input regardless of mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 88 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 9-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page PORTA — — RA5(1) RA4(1) RA3(2) — RA1(3) RA0(3) 288 LATA — — LATA5(1) LATA4(1) — — — — 288 TRISA — — TRISA5(1) TRISA4(1) — — — — 288 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 288 SLRCON — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA 288 IOCA — — IOCA5 IOCA4 IOCA3(2) — IOCA1(3) IOCA0(3) 288 WPUA — — WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3(2) — — — 288 UCON — PPBRST SE0 PKTDIS USBEN RESUME SUSPND — 288 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 INTCON2 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP 285 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. Note 1: RA<5:4> and their associated latch and data direction bits are enabled as I/O pins based on oscillator configuration; otherwise, they are read as ‘0’. 2: Implemented only when Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). 3: RA1 and RA0 are only available as port pins when the USB module is disabled (UCON<3> = 0).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 89 PIC18F/LF1XK50 9.2 PORTB, TRISB and LATB Registers PORTB is an 4-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISB. Setting a TRISB bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a TRISB bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The PORTB Data Latch register (LATB) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATB register read and write the latched output value for PORTB. EXAMPLE 9-2: INITIALIZING PORTB All PORTB pins are individually configurable as interrupt-on-change pins. Control bits in the IOCB register enable (when set) or disable (when clear) the interrupt function for each pin. When set, the RABIE bit of the INTCON register enables interrupts on all pins which also have their corresponding IOCB bit set. When clear, the RABIE bit disables all interrupt-on-changes. Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt to occur (i.e., any pin configured as an output is excluded from the interrupt-on-change comparison). For enabled interrupt-on-change pins, the values are compared with the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The ‘mismatch’ outputs of the last read are OR’d together to set the PORTB Change Interrupt flag bit (RABIF) in the INTCON register. This interrupt can wake the device from the Sleep mode, or any of the Idle modes. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) Any read or write of PORTB to clear the mismatch condition (except when PORTB is the source or destination of a MOVFF instruction). b) Clear the flag bit, RABIF. A mismatch condition will continue to set the RABIF flag bit. Reading or writing PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow the RABIF bit to be cleared. The latch holding the last read value is not affected by a MCLR nor Brown-out Reset. After either one of these Resets, the RABIF flag will continue to be set if a mismatch is present. The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for wake-up on key depression operation and operations where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while using the interrupt-on-change feature. All PORTB pins have individually controlled weak internal pull-up. When set, each bit of the WPUB register enables the corresponding pin pull-up. When cleared, the RABPU bit of the INTCON2 register enables pullups on all pins which also have their corresponding WPUB bit set. When set, the RABPU bit disables all weak pull-ups. The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset. CLRF PORTB ; Initialize PORTB by ; clearing output ; data latches CLRF LATB ; Alternate method ; to clear output ; data latches MOVLW 0F0h ; Value used to ; initialize data ; direction MOVWF TRISB ; Set RB<7:4> as outputs Note: If a change on the I/O pin should occur when the read operation is being executed (start of the Q2 cycle), then the RABIF interrupt flag may not get set. Furthermore, since a read or write on a port affects all bits of that port, care must be taken when using multiple pins in Interrupt-on-change mode. Changes on one pin may not be seen while servicing changes on another pin. Note: On a Power-on Reset, RB<5:4> are configured as analog inputs by default and read as ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 90 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 9-6: PORTB: PORTB REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 RB<7:4>: PORTB I/O Pin bit 1 = Port pin is >VIH 0 = Port pin is : PORTB Tri-State Control bit 1 = PORTB pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTB pin configured as an output bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 91 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 9-8: WPUB: WEAK PULL-UP PORTB REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 WPUB<7:4>: Weak Pull-up Enable bit 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ REGISTER 9-9: IOCB: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE PORTB REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 IOCB<7:4>: Interrupt-on-change bits 1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled 0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ REGISTER 9-10: LATB: PORTB DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 LATB<7:4>: RB<7:4> Port I/O Output Latch Register bits bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 92 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 9-3: PORTB I/O SUMMARY Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description RB4/IOCB4/AN10/ SDI/SDA RB4 0 O DIG LATB<4> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTB<4> data input; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCB4 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. AN10 1 I ANA ADC input channel 10. SDI 1 I ST SPI data input (MSSP module). SDA 1 I DIG I2C™ data output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. 1 O I2C I2C™ data input (MSSP module); input type depends on module setting. RB5/IOCB5/AN11/ RX/DT RB5 0 O DIG LATB<5> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<5> data input; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCB5 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. AN11 1 I ANA ADC input channel 11. RX 1 I ST Asynchronous serial receive data input (USART module). DT 1 O DIGSynchronous serial data output (USART module); takes priority over port data. 1 I STSynchronous serial data input (USART module). User must configure as an input. RB6/IOCB6/SCK/ SCL RB6 0 O DIG LATB<6> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<6> data input; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCB6 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. SCK 0 O DIG SPI clock output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST SPI clock input (MSSP module). SCL 0 O DIG I2C™ clock output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. 1 I I2C I2C™ clock input (MSSP module); input type depends on module setting. RB7/IOCB7/TX/CK RB7 0 O DIG LATB<7> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<7> data input; Programmable weak pull-up. IOCB7 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. TX 1 O DIGAsynchronous serial transmit data output (USART module); takes priority over port data. User must configure as output. CK 1 O DIGSynchronous serial clock output (USART module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST Synchronous serial clock input (USART module). Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 93 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 9-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 — — — — 288 LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 — — — — 288 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 — — — — 288 WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 — — — — 288 IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 288 SLRCON — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA 288 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 INTCON2 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP 285 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 288 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 286 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTB. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 94 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 9.3 PORTC, TRISC and LATC Registers PORTC is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISC. Setting a TRISC bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a TRISC bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The PORTC Data Latch register (LATC) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATC register read and write the latched output value for PORTC. All the pins on PORTC are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffer. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. EXAMPLE 9-3: INITIALIZING PORTC Note: On a Power-on Reset, RC<7:6> and RC<3:0> are configured as analog inputs and read as ‘0’. CLRF PORTC ; Initialize PORTC by ; clearing output ; data latches CLRF LATC ; Alternate method ; to clear output ; data latches MOVLW 0CFh ; Value used to ; initialize data ; direction MOVWF TRISC ; Set RC<3:0> as inputs ; RC<5:4> as outputs ; RC<7:6> as inputs REGISTER 9-11: PORTC: PORTC REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-0 RC<7:0>: PORTC I/O Pin bit 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL REGISTER 9-12: TRISC: PORTC TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-0 TRISC<7:0>: PORTC Tri-State Control bit 1 = PORTC pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTC pin configured as an output  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 95 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 9-13: LATC: PORTC DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-0 LATC<7:0>: RB<7:0> Port I/O Output Latch Register bits PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 96 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 9-14: PORTC I/O SUMMARY Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description RC0/AN4/ C12IN+/VREF+/ INT0 RC0 0 O DIG LATC<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<0> data input. AN4 1 I ANA A/D input channel 4. C12IN+ 1 I ANA Comparators C1 and C2 non-inverting input. Analog select is shared with ADC. VREF+ 1 I ANA ADC and comparator voltage reference high input. INT0 1 I ST External Interrupt 0 input. RC1/AN5/ C12IN1-/VREF-/ INT1 RC1 0 O DIG LATC<1> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<1> data input. AN5 1 I ANA A/D input channel 5. C12IN1- 1 I ANA Comparators C1 and C2 inverting input. Analog select is shared with ADC. VREF- 1 I ANA ADC and comparator voltage reference low input. INT1 1 I ST External Interrupt 1 input. RC2/AN6/ C12IN2-/CVREF/ P1D/INT2 RC2 0 O DIG LATC<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<2> data input. AN6 1 I ANA A/D input channel 6. C12IN2- 1 I ANA Comparators C1 and C2 inverting input, channel 2. Analog select is shared with ADC. CVREF x O ANA Voltage reference output. Enabling this feature disables digital I/O. P1D 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel D. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. INT2 1 I ST External Interrupt 2 input. RC3/AN7/ C12IN3-/P1C/ PGM RC3 0 O DIG LATC<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<3> data input. AN7 1 I ANA A/D input channel 7. C12IN3- 1 I ANA Comparators C1 and C2 inverting input, channel 3. Analog select is shared with ADC. P1C 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel C. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. PGM x I ST Single-Supply Programming mode entry (ICSP™). Enabled by LVP Configuration bit; all other pin functions disabled. RC4/C12OUT/ P1B RC4 0 O DIG LATC<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<4> data input. C12OUT 0 O DIG Comparator 1 and 2 output; takes priority over port data. P1B 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel B. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 97 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 9-5: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC RC5/CCP1/P1A/ T0CKI RC5 0 O DIG LATC<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<5> data input. CCP1 0 O DIG ECCP1 compare or PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST ECCP1 capture input. P1A 0 0 DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel A. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data T0CKI 1 I ST Timer0 counter input. RC6/AN8/SS/ T13CKI/T1OSCI RC6 0 O DIG LATC<6> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<6> data input. AN8 1 I ANA A/D input channel 8. SS 1 I TTL Slave select input for SSP (MSSP module) T13CKI 1 I ST Timer1 and Timer3 counter input. T1OSCI x O ANA Timer1 oscillator input; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled. Disables digital I/O. RC7/AN9/SDO/ T1OSCO RC7 0 O DIG LATC<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<7> data input. AN9 1 I ANA A/D input channel 9. SDO 0 I DIG SPI data output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. T1OSCO x O ANA Timer1 oscillator output; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled. Disables digital I/O. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 288 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 288 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 288 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 286 T3CON RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 287 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 286 CCP1CON P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 287 ECCP1AS ECCPASE ECCPAS2 ECCPAS1 ECCPAS0 PSSAC1 PSSAC0 PSSBD1 PSSBD0 287 PSTRCON — — — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA 287 SLRCON — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA 288 REFCON1 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 --- D1NSS 287 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 INTCON2 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP 285 INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 285 TABLE 9-14: PORTC I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 98 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 9.4 Port Analog Control Some port pins are multiplexed with analog functions such as the Analog-to-Digital Converter and comparators. When these I/O pins are to be used as analog inputs it is necessary to disable the digital input buffer to avoid excessive current caused by improper biasing of the digital input. Individual control of the digital input buffers on pins which share analog functions is provided by the ANSEL and ANSELH registers. Setting an ANSx bit high will disable the associated digital input buffer and cause all reads of that pin to return ‘0’ while allowing analog functions of that pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSx bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with the associated TRISx bit clear and ANSx bit set will still operate as a digital output but the Input mode will be analog. REGISTER 9-15: ANSEL: ANALOG SELECT REGISTER 1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ANS7: RC3 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC3 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC3 is enabled bit 6 ANS6: RC2 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC2 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC2 is enabled bit 5 ANS5: RC1 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC1 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC1 is enabled bit 4 ANS4: RC0 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC0 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC0 is enabled bit 3 ANS3: RA4 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RA4 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RA4 is enabled bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 99 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 9-16: ANSELH: ANALOG SELECT REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 ANS11: RB5 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RB5 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RB5 is enabled bit 2 ANS10: RB4 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RB4 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RB4 is enabled bit 1 ANS9: RC7 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC7 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC7 is enabled bit 0 ANS8: RC6 Analog Select Control bit 1 = Digital input buffer of RC6 is disabled 0 = Digital input buffer of RC6 is enabled PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 100 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 9.5 Port Slew Rate Control The output slew rate of each port is programmable to select either the standard transition rate or a reduced transition rate of 0.1 times the standard to minimize EMI. The reduced transition time is the default slew rate for all ports. REGISTER 9-17: SLRCON: SLEW RATE CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 SLRC: PORTC Slew Rate Control bit 1 = All outputs on PORTC slew at 0.1 times the standard rate 0 = All outputs on PORTC slew at the standard rate bit 1 SLRB: PORTB Slew Rate Control bit 1 = All outputs on PORTB slew at 0.1 times the standard rate 0 = All outputs on PORTB slew at the standard rate bit 0 SLRA: PORTA Slew Rate Control bit 1 = All outputs on PORTA slew at 0.1 times the standard rate(1) 0 = All outputs on PORTA slew at the standard rate Note 1: The slew rate of RA4 defaults to standard rate when the pin is used as CLKOUT.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 101 PIC18F/LF1XK50 10.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module incorporates the following features: • Software selectable operation as a timer or counter in both 8-bit or 16-bit modes • Readable and writable registers • Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable prescaler • Selectable clock source (internal or external) • Edge select for external clock • Interrupt-on-overflow The T0CON register (Register 10-1) controls all aspects of the module’s operation, including the prescale selection. It is both readable and writable. A simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 8-bit mode is shown in Figure 10-1. Figure 10-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16-bit mode. REGISTER 10-1: T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit 1 = Enables Timer0 0 = Stops Timer0 bit 6 T08BIT: Timer0 8-bit/16-bit Control bit 1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter 0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (CLKOUT) bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = TImer0 prescaler is NOT assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler. 0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from prescaler output. bit 2-0 T0PS<2:0>: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits 111 = 1:256 prescale value 110 = 1:128 prescale value 101 = 1:64 prescale value 100 = 1:32 prescale value 011 = 1:16 prescale value 010 = 1:8 prescale value 001 = 1:4 prescale value 000 = 1:2 prescale value PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 102 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 10.1 Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter; the mode is selected with the T0CS bit of the T0CON register. In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the module increments on every clock by default unless a different prescaler value is selected (see Section 10.3 “Prescaler”). Timer0 incrementing is inhibited for two instruction cycles following a TMR0 register write. The user can work around this by adjusting the value written to the TMR0 register to compensate for the anticipated missing increments. The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit (= 1). In this mode, Timer0 increments either on every rising or falling edge of the T0CKI pin. The incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge Select bit, T0SE of the T0CON register; clearing this bit selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external clock input are discussed below. An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0; however, it must meet certain requirements (see Table 27-6) to ensure that the external clock can be synchronized with the internal phase clock (TOSC). There is a delay between synchronization and the onset of incrementing the timer/counter. 10.2 Timer0 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-bit mode; it is actually a buffered version of the real high byte of Timer0 which is neither directly readable nor writable (refer to Figure 10-2). TMR0H is updated with the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of Timer0 without the need to verify that the read of the high and low byte were valid. Invalid reads could otherwise occur due to a rollover between successive reads of the high and low byte. Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. Writing to TMR0H does not directly affect Timer0. Instead, the high byte of Timer0 is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 to be updated at once. FIGURE 10-1: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. T0CKI pin T0SE 0 1 0 1 T0CS FOSC/4 Programmable Prescaler Sync with Internal Clocks TMR0L (2 TCY Delay) PSA Internal Data Bus T0PS<2:0> Set TMR0IF on Overflow 3 8 8  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 103 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 10-2: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE) 10.3 Prescaler An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0 module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable; its value is set by the PSA and T0PS<2:0> bits of the T0CON register which determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the Timer0 module. When the prescaler is assigned, prescale values from 1:2 through 1:256 in integer power-of-2 increments are selectable. When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF TMR0, BSF TMR0, etc.) clear the prescaler count. 10.3.1 SWITCHING PRESCALER ASSIGNMENT The prescaler assignment is fully under software control and can be changed “on-the-fly” during program execution. 10.4 Timer0 Interrupt The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-bit mode, or from FFFFh to 0000h in 16-bit mode. This overflow sets the TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked by clearing the TMR0IE bit of the INTCON register. Before re-enabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be cleared by software in the Interrupt Service Routine. Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0 interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep. TABLE 10-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. T0CKI pin T0SE 0 1 0 1 T0CS FOSC/4 Programmable Prescaler Sync with Internal Clocks TMR0L (2 TCY Delay) Internal Data Bus 8 PSA T0PS<2:0> Set TMR0IF on Overflow 3 TMR0 TMR0H High Byte 8 8 8 Read TMR0L Write TMR0L 8 Note: Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler count but will not change the prescaler assignment. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page TMR0L Timer0 Register, Low Byte 286 TMR0H Timer0 Register, High Byte 286 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 286 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by Timer0. Note 1: PORTA<7:6> and their direction bits are individually configured as port pins based on various primary oscillator modes. When disabled, these bits read as ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 104 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 105 PIC18F/LF1XK50 11.0 TIMER1 MODULE The Timer1 timer/counter module incorporates the following features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR1H and TMR1L) • Selectable internal or external clock source and Timer1 oscillator options • Interrupt-on-overflow • Reset on CCP Special Event Trigger • Device clock status flag (T1RUN) A simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module is shown in Figure 11-1. A block diagram of the module’s operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 11-2. The module incorporates its own low-power oscillator to provide an additional clocking option. The Timer1 oscillator can also be used as a low-power clock source for the microcontroller in power-managed operation. Timer1 can also be used to provide Real-Time Clock (RTC) functionality to applications with only a minimal addition of external components and code overhead. Timer1 is controlled through the T1CON Control register (Register 11-1). It also contains the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit (T1OSCEN). Timer1 can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing control bit, TMR1ON of the T1CON register. REGISTER 11-1: T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RD16: 16-bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of TImer1 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in two 8-bit operations bit 6 T1RUN: Timer1 System Clock Status bit 1 = Main system clock is derived from Timer1 oscillator 0 = Main system clock is derived from another source bit 5-4 T1CKPS<1:0>: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 3 T1OSCEN: Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit 1 = Timer1 oscillator is enabled 0 = Timer1 oscillator is shut off The oscillator inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. bit 2 T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Select bit When TMR1CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR1CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS = 0. bit 1 TMR1CS: Timer1 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock from the T13CKI pin (on the rising edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 0 TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 106 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 11.1 Timer1 Operation Timer1 can operate in one of the following modes: • Timer • Synchronous Counter • Asynchronous Counter The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR1CS of the T1CON register. When TMR1CS is cleared (= 0), Timer1 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer1 increments on every rising edge of either the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. When the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, the digital circuitry associated with the T1OSI and T1OSO pins is disabled. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as ‘0’. FIGURE 11-1: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM FIGURE 11-2: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) T1SYNC TMR1CS T1CKPS<1:0> Sleep Input T1OSCEN(1) FOSC/4 Internal Clock On/Off Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize Detect 1 0 2 T1OSI/T13CKI T1OSO 1 0 TMR1ON TMR1L Set TMR1IF on Overflow TMR1 Clear TMR1 High Byte (CCP Special Event Trigger) Timer1 Oscillator Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. On/Off Timer1 Timer1 Clock Input T1SYNC TMR1CS T1CKPS<1:0> Sleep Input T1OSCEN(1) FOSC/4 Internal Clock Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize Detect 1 0 2 T1OSI/T13CKI T1OSO Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. 1 0 TMR1L Internal Data Bus 8 Set TMR1IF on Overflow TMR1 TMR1H High Byte 8 8 8 Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 TMR1ON Clear TMR1 (CCP Special Event Trigger) Timer1 Oscillator On/Off Timer1 Timer1 Clock Input  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 107 PIC18F/LF1XK50 11.2 Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Timer1 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 11-2). When the RD16 control bit of the T1CON register is set, the address for TMR1H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer1. A read from TMR1L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer1 into the Timer1 high byte buffer. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without the need to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover or carry between reads. Writing to TMR1H does not directly affect Timer1. Instead, the high byte of Timer1 is updated with the contents of TMR1H when a write occurs to TMR1L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer1 to be updated at once. The high byte of Timer1 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR1H do not clear the Timer1 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR1L. 11.3 Timer1 Oscillator An on-chip crystal oscillator circuit is incorporated between pins T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier output). It is enabled by setting the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit, T1OSCEN of the T1CON register. The oscillator is a low-power circuit rated for 32 kHz crystals. It will continue to run during all power-managed modes. The circuit for a typical LP oscillator is shown in Figure 11-3. Table 11-1 shows the capacitor selection for the Timer1 oscillator. The user must provide a software time delay to ensure proper start-up of the Timer1 oscillator. FIGURE 11-3: EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR THE TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR TABLE 11-1: CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR THE TIMER OSCILLATOR 11.3.1 USING TIMER1 AS A CLOCK SOURCE The Timer1 oscillator is also available as a clock source in power-managed modes. By setting the clock select bits, SCS<1:0> of the OSCCON register, to ‘01’, the device switches to SEC_RUN mode; both the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. If the IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register is cleared and a SLEEP instruction is executed, the device enters SEC_IDLE mode. Additional details are available in Section 19.0 “Power-Managed Modes”. Whenever the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock source, the Timer1 system clock status flag, T1RUN of the T1CON register, is set. This can be used to determine the controller’s current clocking mode. It can also indicate which clock source is currently being used by the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. If the Clock Monitor is enabled and the Timer1 oscillator fails while providing the clock, polling the T1RUN bit will indicate whether the clock is being provided by the Timer1 oscillator or another source. Note: See the Notes with Table 11-1 for additional information about capacitor selection. C1 C2 XTAL T1OSI T1OSO 32.768 kHz 27 pF 27 pF PIC® MCU Osc Type Freq C1 C2 LP 32 kHz 27 pF(1) 27 pF(1) Note 1: Microchip suggests these values only as a starting point in validating the oscillator circuit. 2: Higher capacitance increases the stability of the oscillator but also increases the start-up time. 3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. 4: Capacitor values are for design guidance only. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 108 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 11.3.2 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS The Timer1 oscillator circuit draws very little power during operation. Due to the low-power nature of the oscillator, it may also be sensitive to rapidly changing signals in close proximity. The oscillator circuit, shown in Figure 11-3, should be located as close as possible to the microcontroller. There should be no circuits passing within the oscillator circuit boundaries other than VSS or VDD. If a high-speed circuit must be located near the oscillator (such as the CCP1 pin in Output Compare or PWM mode, or the primary oscillator using the OSC2 pin), a grounded guard ring around the oscillator circuit, as shown in Figure 11-4, may be helpful when used on a single-sided PCB or in addition to a ground plane. FIGURE 11-4: OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT WITH GROUNDED GUARD RING 11.4 Timer1 Interrupt The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. The Timer1 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow, which is latched in the TMR1IF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the TMR1IE Interrupt Enable bit of the PIE1 register. 11.5 Resetting Timer1 Using the CCP Special Event Trigger If either of the CCP modules is configured to use Timer1 and generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCP1M<3:0> or CCP2M<3:0> = 1011), this signal will reset Timer1. The trigger from CCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 14.3.4 “Special Event Trigger” for more information). The module must be configured as either a timer or a synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRH:CCPRL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer1. If Timer1 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, this Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timer1 coincides with a special Event Trigger, the write operation will take precedence. VDD OSC1 VSS OSC2 RC0 RC1 RC2 Note: Not drawn to scale. Note: The Special Event Triggers from the CCP2 module will not set the TMR1IF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 109 PIC18F/LF1XK50 11.6 Using Timer1 as a Real-Time Clock Adding an external LP oscillator to Timer1 (such as the one described in Section 11.3 “Timer1 Oscillator” above) gives users the option to include RTC functionality to their applications. This is accomplished with an inexpensive watch crystal to provide an accurate time base and several lines of application code to calculate the time. When operating in Sleep mode and using a battery or supercapacitor as a power source, it can completely eliminate the need for a separate RTC device and battery backup. The application code routine, RTCisr, shown in Example 11-1, demonstrates a simple method to increment a counter at one-second intervals using an Interrupt Service Routine. Incrementing the TMR1 register pair to overflow triggers the interrupt and calls the routine, which increments the seconds counter by one; additional counters for minutes and hours are incremented on overflows of the less significant counters. Since the register pair is 16 bits wide, a 32.768 kHz clock source will take 2 seconds to count up to overflow. To force the overflow at the required one-second intervals, it is necessary to preload it; the simplest method is to set the MSb of TMR1H with a BSF instruction. Note that the TMR1L register is never preloaded or altered; doing so may introduce cumulative error over many cycles. For this method to be accurate, Timer1 must operate in Asynchronous mode and the Timer1 overflow interrupt must be enabled (PIE1<0> = 1), as shown in the routine, RTCinit. The Timer1 oscillator must also be enabled and running at all times. EXAMPLE 11-1: IMPLEMENTING A REAL-TIME CLOCK USING A TIMER1 INTERRUPT SERVICE RTCinit MOVLW 80h ; Preload TMR1 register pair MOVWF TMR1H ; for 1 second overflow CLRF TMR1L MOVLW b’00001111’ ; Configure for external clock, MOVWF T1CON ; Asynchronous operation, external oscillator CLRF secs ; Initialize timekeeping registers CLRF mins ; MOVLW .12 MOVWF hours BSF PIE1, TMR1IE ; Enable Timer1 interrupt RETURN RTCisr BSF TMR1H, 7 ; Preload for 1 sec overflow BCF PIR1, TMR1IF ; Clear interrupt flag INCF secs, F ; Increment seconds MOVLW .59 ; 60 seconds elapsed? CPFSGT secs RETURN ; No, done CLRF secs ; Clear seconds INCF mins, F ; Increment minutes MOVLW .59 ; 60 minutes elapsed? CPFSGT mins RETURN ; No, done CLRF mins ; clear minutes INCF hours, F ; Increment hours MOVLW .23 ; 24 hours elapsed? CPFSGT hours RETURN ; No, done CLRF hours ; Reset hours RETURN ; Done PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 110 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 11-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 TMR1L Timer1 Register, Low Byte 286 TMR1H Timer1 Register, High Byte 286 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 286 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 288 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 286 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 111 PIC18F/LF1XK50 12.0 TIMER2 MODULE The Timer2 module timer incorporates the following features: • 8-bit timer and period registers (TMR2 and PR2, respectively) • Readable and writable (both registers) • Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4 and 1:16) • Software programmable postscaler (1:1 through 1:16) • Interrupt on TMR2-to-PR2 match • Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSP module The module is controlled through the T2CON register (Register 12-1), which enables or disables the timer and configures the prescaler and postscaler. Timer2 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMR2ON of the T2CON register, to minimize power consumption. A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 12-1. 12.1 Timer2 Operation In normal operation, TMR2 is incremented from 00h on each clock (FOSC/4). A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input gives direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options; these are selected by the prescaler control bits, T2CKPS<1:0> of the T2CON register. The value of TMR2 is compared to that of the period register, PR2, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator generates a match signal as the timer output. This signal also resets the value of TMR2 to 00h on the next cycle and drives the output counter/postscaler (see Section 12.2 “Timer2 Interrupt”). The TMR2 and PR2 registers are both directly readable and writable. The TMR2 register is cleared on any device Reset, whereas the PR2 register initializes to FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: • a write to the TMR2 register • a write to the T2CON register • any device Reset (Power-on Reset, MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset or Brown-out Reset) TMR2 is not cleared when T2CON is written. REGISTER 12-1: T2CON: TIMER2 CONTROL REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-3 T2OUTPS<3:0>: Timer2 Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale • • • 1111 = 1:16 Postscale bit 2 TMR2ON: Timer2 On bit 1 = Timer2 is on 0 = Timer2 is off bit 1-0 T2CKPS<1:0>: Timer2 Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 1x = Prescaler is 16 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 112 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 12.2 Timer2 Interrupt Timer2 can also generate an optional device interrupt. The Timer2 output signal (TMR2-to-PR2 match) provides the input for the 4-bit output counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMR2 match interrupt flag which is latched in TMR2IF of the PIR1 register. The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE of the PIE1 register. A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16 inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control bits, T2OUTPS<3:0> of the T2CON register. 12.3 Timer2 Output The unscaled output of TMR2 is available primarily to the CCP modules, where it is used as a time base for operations in PWM mode. Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source for the MSSP module operating in SPI mode. Additional information is provided in Section 14.0 “Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module”. FIGURE 12-1: TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM TABLE 12-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 TMR2 Timer2 Register 286 T2CON — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 286 PR2 Timer2 Period Register 286 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer2 module. Comparator TMR2 Output TMR2 Postscaler Prescaler PR2 2 FOSC/4 1:1 to 1:16 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 4 T2OUTPS<3:0> T2CKPS<1:0> Set TMR2IF Internal Data Bus 8 Reset TMR2/PR2 8 8 (to PWM or MSSP) Match  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 113 PIC18F/LF1XK50 13.0 TIMER3 MODULE The Timer3 module timer/counter incorporates these features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR3H and TMR3L) • Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options • Interrupt-on-overflow • Module Reset on CCP Special Event Trigger A simplified block diagram of the Timer3 module is shown in Figure 13-1. A block diagram of the module’s operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 13-2. The Timer3 module is controlled through the T3CON register (Register 13-1). It also selects the clock source options for the CCP modules (see Section 14.1.1 “CCP Module and Timer Resources” for more information). REGISTER 13-1: T3CON: TIMER3 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RD16: 16-bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in two 8-bit operations bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 T3CKPS<1:0>: Timer3 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 3 T3CCP1: Timer3 and Timer1 to CCP1 Enable bits 1 = Timer3 is the clock source for compare/capture of ECCP1 0 = Timer1 is the clock source for compare/capture of ECCP1 bit 2 T3SYNC: Timer3 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit (Not usable if the device clock comes from Timer1/Timer3.) When TMR3CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR3CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer3 uses the internal clock when TMR3CS = 0. bit 1 TMR3CS: Timer3 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock input from Timer1 oscillator or T13CKI (on the rising edge after the first falling edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 0 TMR3ON: Timer3 On bit 1 = Enables Timer3 0 = Stops Timer3 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 114 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 13.1 Timer3 Operation Timer3 can operate in one of three modes: • Timer • Synchronous Counter • Asynchronous Counter The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR3CS of the T3CON register. When TMR3CS is cleared (= 0), Timer3 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer3 increments on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. As with Timer1, the digital circuitry associated with the RC1/T1OSI and RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI pins is disabled when the Timer1 oscillator is enabled. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as ‘0’. FIGURE 13-1: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM T3SYNC TMR3CS T3CKPS<1:0> Sleep Input T1OSCEN(1) FOSC/4 Internal Clock Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize Detect 1 0 2 T1OSO/T13CKI T1OSI 1 0 TMR3ON TMR3L Set TMR3IF on Overflow TMR3 High Byte Timer1 Oscillator Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. On/Off Timer3 CCP1 Special Event Trigger CCP1 Select from T3CON<3> Clear TMR3 Timer1 Clock Input  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 115 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 13-2: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) 13.2 Timer3 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Timer3 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 13-2). When the RD16 control bit of the T3CON register is set, the address for TMR3H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer3. A read from TMR3L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer3 into the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. A write to the high byte of Timer3 must also take place through the TMR3H Buffer register. The Timer3 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR3H when a write occurs to TMR3L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer3 at once. The high byte of Timer3 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR3H do not clear the Timer3 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR3L. 13.3 Using the Timer1 Oscillator as the Timer3 Clock Source The Timer1 internal oscillator may be used as the clock source for Timer3. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register. To use it as the Timer3 clock source, the TMR3CS bit must also be set. As previously noted, this also configures Timer3 to increment on every rising edge of the oscillator source. The Timer1 oscillator is described in Section 11.0 “Timer1 Module”. 13.4 Timer3 Interrupt The TMR3 register pair (TMR3H:TMR3L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and overflows to 0000h. The Timer3 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow and is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR3IF of the PIR2 register. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer3 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR3IE of the PIE2 register. T3SYNC TMR3CS T3CKPS<1:0> Sleep Input T1OSCEN(1) FOSC/4 Internal Clock Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize Detect 1 0 2 T13CKI/T1OSI T1OSO Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. 1 0 TMR3L Internal Data Bus 8 Set TMR3IF on Overflow TMR3 TMR3H High Byte 8 8 8 Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 TMR3ON CCP1 Special Event Trigger Timer1 Oscillator On/Off Timer3 Timer1 Clock Input CCP1 Select from T3CON<3> Clear TMR3 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 116 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 13.5 Resetting Timer3 Using the CCP Special Event Trigger If CCP1 module is configured to use Timer3 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCP1M<3:0>), this signal will reset Timer3. It will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 17.2.8 “Special Event Trigger” for more information). The module must be configured as either a timer or synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer3. If Timer3 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, the Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timer3 coincides with a Special Event Trigger from a CCP module, the write will take precedence. TABLE 13-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER3 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 288 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 288 TMR3L Timer3 Register, Low Byte 287 TMR3H Timer3 Register, High Byte 287 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 286 T3CON RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 287 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer3 module.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 117 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.0 ENHANCED CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM (ECCP) MODULE PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices have one ECCP (Capture/Compare/PWM) module. The module contains a 16-bit register which can operate as a 16-bit Capture register, a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty Cycle register. CCP1 is implemented as a standard CCP module with enhanced PWM capabilities. These include: • Provision for 2 or 4 output channels • Output steering • Programmable polarity • Programmable dead-band control • Automatic shutdown and restart. The enhanced features are discussed in detail in Section 14.4 “PWM (Enhanced Mode)”. REGISTER 14-1: CCP1CON: ENHANCED CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 P1M<1:0>: Enhanced PWM Output Configuration bits If CCP1M<3:2> = 00, 01, 10: xx = P1A assigned as Capture/Compare input/output; P1B, P1C, P1D assigned as port pins If CCP1M<3:2> = 11: 00 = Single output: P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D controlled by steering (See Section 14.4.7 “Pulse Steering Mode”). 01 = Full-bridge output forward: P1D modulated; P1A active; P1B, P1C inactive 10 = Half-bridge output: P1A, P1B modulated with dead-band control; P1C, P1D assigned as port pins 11 = Full-bridge output reverse: P1B modulated; P1C active; P1A, P1D inactive bit 5-4 DC1B<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle bit 1 and bit 0 Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two LSbs of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs of the duty cycle are found in CCPR1L. bit 3-0 CCP1M<3:0>: Enhanced CCP Mode Select bits 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets ECCP module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode, toggle output on match 0011 = Reserved 0100 = Capture mode, every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode, every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode, every 4th rising edge 0111 = Capture mode, every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode, initialize CCP1 pin low, set output on compare match (set CCP1IF) 1001 = Compare mode, initialize CCP1 pin high, clear output on compare match (set CCP1IF) 1010 = Compare mode, generate software interrupt only, CCP1 pin reverts to I/O state 1011 = Compare mode, trigger special event (ECCP resets TMR1 or TMR3, start A/D conversion, sets CC1IF bit) 1100 = PWM mode; P1A, P1C active-high; P1B, P1D active-high 1101 = PWM mode; P1A, P1C active-high; P1B, P1D active-low 1110 = PWM mode; P1A, P1C active-low; P1B, P1D active-high 1111 = PWM mode; P1A, P1C active-low; P1B, P1D active-low PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 118 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. In addition to the expanded range of modes available through the CCP1CON register and ECCP1AS register, the ECCP module has two additional registers associated with Enhanced PWM operation and auto-shutdown features. They are: • PWM1CON (Dead-band delay) • PSTRCON (output steering) 14.1 ECCP Outputs and Configuration The enhanced CCP module may have up to four PWM outputs, depending on the selected operating mode. These outputs, designated P1A through P1D, are multiplexed with I/O pins on PORTC. The outputs that are active depend on the CCP operating mode selected. The pin assignments are summarized in Table 14-2. To configure the I/O pins as PWM outputs, the proper PWM mode must be selected by setting the P1M<1:0> and CCP1M<3:0> bits. The appropriate TRISC direction bits for the port pins must also be set as outputs. 14.1.1 CCP MODULE AND TIMER RESOURCES The CCP modules utilize Timers 1, 2 or 3, depending on the mode selected. Timer1 and Timer3 are available to modules in Capture or Compare modes, while Timer2 is available for modules in PWM mode. TABLE 14-1: CCP MODE – TIMER RESOURCE The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the Timer-to-CCP enable bits in the T3CON register (Register 13-1). The interactions between the two modules are summarized in Figure 14-1. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation will not work reliably. CCP/ECCP Mode Timer Resource Capture Timer1 or Timer3 Compare Timer1 or Timer3 PWM Timer2  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 119 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.2 Capture Mode In Capture mode, the CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 or TMR3 registers when an event occurs on the corresponding CCP1 pin. An event is defined as one of the following: • every falling edge • every rising edge • every 4th rising edge • every 16th rising edge The event is selected by the mode select bits, CCP1M<3:0> of the CCP1CON register. When a capture is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCP1IF, is set; it must be cleared by software. If another capture occurs before the value in register CCPR1 is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. 14.2.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION In Capture mode, the appropriate CCP1 pin should be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRIS direction bit. 14.2.2 TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION The timers that are to be used with the capture feature (Timer1 and/or Timer3) must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. The timer to be used with each CCP module is selected in the T3CON register (see Section 14.1.1 “CCP Module and Timer Resources”). 14.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCP1IE interrupt enable bit clear to avoid false interrupts. The interrupt flag bit, CCP1IF, should also be cleared following any such change in operating mode. 14.2.4 CCP PRESCALER There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode; they are specified as part of the operating mode selected by the mode select bits (CCP1M<3:0>). Whenever the CCP module is turned off or Capture mode is disabled, the prescaler counter is cleared. This means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Switching from one capture prescaler to another may generate an interrupt. Also, the prescaler counter will not be cleared; therefore, the first capture may be from a non-zero prescaler. Example 14-1 shows the recommended method for switching between capture prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler counter and will not generate the “false” interrupt. EXAMPLE 14-1: CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS FIGURE 14-1: CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Note: If the CCP1 pin is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. CLRF CCP1CON ; Turn CCP module off MOVLW NEW_CAPT_PS ; Load WREG with the ; new prescaler mode ; value and CCP ON MOVWF CCP1CON ; Load CCP1CON with ; this value CCPR1H CCPR1L TMR1H TMR1L Set CCP1IF TMR3 Enable Q1:Q4 CCP1CON<3:0> CCP1 pin Prescaler  1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect TMR1 Enable T3CCP1 T3CCP1 TMR3H TMR3L 4 4 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 120 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14.3 Compare Mode In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPR1 register value is constantly compared against either the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair value. When a match occurs, the CCP1 pin can be: • driven high • driven low • toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high) • remain unchanged (that is, reflects the state of the I/O latch) The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode select bits (CCP1M<3:0>). At the same time, the interrupt flag bit, CCP1IF, is set. 14.3.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION The user must configure the CCP1 pin as an output by clearing the appropriate TRIS bit. 14.3.2 TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION Timer1 and/or Timer3 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode if the CCP module is using the compare feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the compare operation will not work reliably. 14.3.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCP1M<3:0> = 1010), the CCP1 pin is not affected. Only the CCP1IF interrupt flag is affected. 14.3.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER The CCP module is equipped with a Special Event Trigger. This is an internal hardware signal generated in Compare mode to trigger actions by other modules. The Special Event Trigger is enabled by selecting the Compare Special Event Trigger mode (CCP1M<3:0> = 1011). The Special Event Trigger resets the timer register pair for whichever timer resource is currently assigned as the module’s time base. This allows the CCPR1 registers to serve as a programmable period register for either timer. The Special Event Trigger can also start an A/D conversion. In order to do this, the A/D converter must already be enabled. FIGURE 14-2: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Note: Clearing the CCP1CON register will force the CCP1 compare output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTC I/O data latch. TMR1H TMR1L TMR3H TMR3L CCPR1H CCPR1L Comparator T3CCP1 Set CCP1IF 1 0 S Q R Output Logic Special Event Trigger CCP1 pin TRIS CCP1CON<3:0> 4 Output Enable (Timer1/Timer3 Reset, A/D Trigger) Compare Match  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 121 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4 PWM (Enhanced Mode) The Enhanced PWM Mode can generate a PWM signal on up to four different output pins with up to 10-bits of resolution. It can do this through four different PWM output modes: • Single PWM • Half-Bridge PWM • Full-Bridge PWM, Forward mode • Full-Bridge PWM, Reverse mode To select an Enhanced PWM mode, the P1M bits of the CCP1CON register must be set appropriately. The PWM outputs are multiplexed with I/O pins and are designated P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D. The polarity of the PWM pins is configurable and is selected by setting the CCP1M bits in the CCP1CON register appropriately. Table 14-1 shows the pin assignments for each Enhanced PWM mode. Figure 14-3 shows an example of a simplified block diagram of the Enhanced PWM module. FIGURE 14-3: EXAMPLE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE ENHANCED PWM MODE TABLE 14-2: EXAMPLE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR VARIOUS PWM ENHANCED MODES Note: To prevent the generation of an incomplete waveform when the PWM is first enabled, the ECCP module waits until the start of a new PWM period before generating a PWM signal. CCPR1L CCPR1H (Slave) Comparator TMR2 Comparator PR2 (1) R Q S Duty Cycle Registers DC1B<1:0> Clear Timer2, toggle PWM pin and latch duty cycle Note 1: The 8-bit timer TMR2 register is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler to create the 10-bit time base. TRIS CCP1/P1A TRIS P1B TRIS P1C TRIS P1D Output Controller P1M<1:0> 2 CCP1M<3:0> 4 PWM1CON CCP1/P1A P1B P1C P1D Note 1: The TRIS register value for each PWM output must be configured appropriately. 2: Any pin not used by an Enhanced PWM mode is available for alternate pin functions. ECCP Mode P1M<1:0> CCP1/P1A P1B P1C P1D Single 00 Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1) Half-Bridge 10 Yes Yes No No Full-Bridge, Forward 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes Full-Bridge, Reverse 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1: Outputs are enabled by pulse steering in Single mode. See Register 14-4. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 122 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 14-4: EXAMPLE PWM (ENHANCED MODE) OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-HIGH STATE) 0 Period 00 10 01 11 Signal PR2+1 P1M<1:0> P1A Modulated P1A Modulated P1B Modulated P1A Active P1B Inactive P1C Inactive P1D Modulated P1A Inactive P1B Modulated P1C Active P1D Inactive Pulse Width (Single Output) (Half-Bridge) (Full-Bridge, Forward) (Full-Bridge, Reverse) Delay(1) Delay(1) Relationships: • Period = 4 * TOSC * (PR2 + 1) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPR1L<7:0>:CCP1CON<5:4>) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWM1CON<6:0>) Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the PWM1CON register (Section 14.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay mode”).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 123 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 14-5: EXAMPLE ENHANCED PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-LOW STATE) 0 Period 00 10 01 11 Signal PR2+1 P1M<1:0> P1A Modulated P1A Modulated P1B Modulated P1A Active P1B Inactive P1C Inactive P1D Modulated P1A Inactive P1B Modulated P1C Active P1D Inactive Pulse Width (Single Output) (Half-Bridge) (Full-Bridge, Forward) (Full-Bridge, Reverse) Delay(1) Delay(1) Relationships: • Period = 4 * TOSC * (PR2 + 1) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPR1L<7:0>:CCP1CON<5:4>) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWM1CON<6:0>) Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the PWM1CON register (Section 14.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay mode”). PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 124 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14.4.1 HALF-BRIDGE MODE In Half-Bridge mode, two pins are used as outputs to drive push-pull loads. The PWM output signal is output on the CCP1/P1A pin, while the complementary PWM output signal is output on the P1B pin (see Figure 14-6). This mode can be used for Half-Bridge applications, as shown in Figure 14-7, or for Full-Bridge applications, where four power switches are being modulated with two PWM signals. In Half-Bridge mode, the programmable dead-band delay can be used to prevent shoot-through current in Half-Bridge power devices. The value of the PDC<6:0> bits of the PWM1CON register sets the number of instruction cycles before the output is driven active. If the value is greater than the duty cycle, the corresponding output remains inactive during the entire cycle. See Section 14.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay mode” for more details of the dead-band delay operations. Since the P1A and P1B outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data latches, the associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure P1A and P1B as outputs. FIGURE 14-6: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT FIGURE 14-7: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS Period Pulse Width td td (1) P1A(2) P1B(2) td = Dead-Band Delay Period (1) (1) Note 1: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. 2: Output signals are shown as active-high. P1A P1B FET Driver FET Driver Load + - + - FET Driver FET Driver V+ Load FET Driver FET Driver P1A P1B Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”) Half-Bridge Output Driving a Full-Bridge Circuit  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 125 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4.2 FULL-BRIDGE MODE In Full-Bridge mode, all four pins are used as outputs. An example of Full-Bridge application is shown in Figure 14-8. In the Forward mode, pin CCP1/P1A is driven to its active state, pin P1D is modulated, while P1B and P1C will be driven to their inactive state as shown in Figure 14-9. In the Reverse mode, P1C is driven to its active state, pin P1B is modulated, while P1A and P1D will be driven to their inactive state as shown Figure 14-9. P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data latches. The associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure the P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D pins as outputs. FIGURE 14-8: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE APPLICATION P1A P1C FET Driver FET Driver V+ VLoad FET Driver FET Driver P1B P1D QA QB QD QC PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 126 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 14-9: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Period Pulse Width P1A(2) P1B(2) P1C(2) P1D(2) Forward Mode (1) Period Pulse Width P1A(2) P1C(2) P1D(2) P1B(2) Reverse Mode (1) (1) (1) Note 1: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. 2: Output signal is shown as active-high.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 127 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4.2.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Mode In the Full-Bridge mode, the P1M1 bit in the CCP1CON register allows users to control the forward/reverse direction. When the application firmware changes this direction control bit, the module will change to the new direction on the next PWM cycle. A direction change is initiated in software by changing the P1M1 bit of the CCP1CON register. The following sequence occurs prior to the end of the current PWM period: • The modulated outputs (P1B and P1D) are placed in their inactive state. • The associated unmodulated outputs (P1A and P1C) are switched to drive in the opposite direction. • PWM modulation resumes at the beginning of the next period. See Figure 14-10 for an illustration of this sequence. The Full-Bridge mode does not provide dead-band delay. As one output is modulated at a time, dead-band delay is generally not required. There is a situation where dead-band delay is required. This situation occurs when both of the following conditions are true: 1. The direction of the PWM output changes when the duty cycle of the output is at or near 100%. 2. The turn off time of the power switch, including the power device and driver circuit, is greater than the turn on time. Figure 14-11 shows an example of the PWM direction changing from forward to reverse, at a near 100% duty cycle. In this example, at time t1, the output P1A and P1D become inactive, while output P1C becomes active. Since the turn off time of the power devices is longer than the turn on time, a shoot-through current will flow through power devices QC and QD (see Figure 14-8) for the duration of ‘t’. The same phenomenon will occur to power devices QA and QB for PWM direction change from reverse to forward. If changing PWM direction at high duty cycle is required for an application, two possible solutions for eliminating the shoot-through current are: 1. Reduce PWM duty cycle for one PWM period before changing directions. 2. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off faster than they can drive them on. Other options to prevent shoot-through current may exist. FIGURE 14-10: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE Pulse Width Period(1) Signal Note 1: The direction bit P1M1 of the CCP1CON register is written any time during the PWM cycle. Period P1A (Active-High) P1B (Active-High) P1C (Active-High) P1D (Active-High) Pulse Width PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 128 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 14-11: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE 14.4.3 START-UP CONSIDERATIONS When any PWM mode is used, the application hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the PWM output pins. The CCP1M<1:0> bits of the CCP1CON register allow the user to choose whether the PWM output signals are active-high or active-low for each pair of PWM output pins (P1A/P1C and P1B/P1D). The PWM output polarities must be selected before the PWM pin output drivers are enabled. Changing the polarity configuration while the PWM pin output drivers are enable is not recommended since it may result in damage to the application circuits. The P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D output latches may not be in the proper states when the PWM module is initialized. Enabling the PWM pin output drivers at the same time as the Enhanced PWM modes may cause damage to the application circuit. The Enhanced PWM modes must be enabled in the proper Output mode and complete a full PWM cycle before enabling the PWM pin output drivers. The completion of a full PWM cycle is indicated by the TMR2IF bit of the PIR1 register being set as the second PWM period begins. Forward Period Reverse Period P1A TON TOFF T = TOFF – TON P1B P1C P1D External Switch D Potential Shoot-Through Current Note 1: All signals are shown as active-high. 2: TON is the turn on delay of power switch QC and its driver. 3: TOFF is the turn off delay of power switch QD and its driver. External Switch C t1 PW PW Note: When the microcontroller is released from Reset, all of the I/O pins are in the high-impedance state. The external circuits must keep the power switch devices in the Off state until the microcontroller drives the I/O pins with the proper signal levels or activates the PWM output(s).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 129 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4.4 ENHANCED PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN MODE The PWM mode supports an Auto-Shutdown mode that will disable the PWM outputs when an external shutdown event occurs. Auto-Shutdown mode places the PWM output pins into a predetermined state. This mode is used to help prevent the PWM from damaging the application. The auto-shutdown sources are selected using the ECCPAS<2:0> bits of the ECCPAS register. A shutdown event may be generated by: • A logic ‘0’ on the INT0 pin • A logic ‘1’ on a comparator (Cx) output A shutdown condition is indicated by the ECCPASE (Auto-Shutdown Event Status) bit of the ECCPAS register. If the bit is a ‘0’, the PWM pins are operating normally. If the bit is a ‘1’, the PWM outputs are in the shutdown state. When a shutdown event occurs, two things happen: The ECCPASE bit is set to ‘1’. The ECCPASE will remain set until cleared in firmware or an auto-restart occurs (see Section 14.4.5 “Auto-Restart Mode”). The enabled PWM pins are asynchronously placed in their shutdown states. The PWM output pins are grouped into pairs [P1A/P1C] and [P1B/P1D]. The state of each pin pair is determined by the PSSAC and PSSBD bits of the ECCPAS register. Each pin pair may be placed into one of three states: • Drive logic ‘1’ • Drive logic ‘0’ • Tri-state (high-impedance) REGISTER 14-2: ECCP1AS: ENHANCED CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ECCPASE ECCPAS2 ECCPAS1 ECCPAS0 PSSAC1 PSSAC0 PSSBD1 PSSBD0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ECCPASE: ECCP Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit 1 = A shutdown event has occurred; ECCP outputs are in shutdown state 0 = ECCP outputs are operating bit 6-4 ECCPAS<2:0>: ECCP Auto-shutdown Source Select bits 000 = Auto-Shutdown is disabled 001 = Comparator C1OUT output is high 010 = Comparator C2OUT output is high 011 = Either Comparator C1OUT or C2OUT is high 100 = VIL on INT0 pin 101 = VIL on INT0 pin or Comparator C1OUT output is high 110 = VIL on INT0 pin or Comparator C2OUT output is high 111 = VIL on INT0 pin or Comparator C1OUT or Comparator C2OUT is high bit 3-2 PSSACn: Pins P1A and P1C Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins P1A and P1C to ‘0’ 01 = Drive pins P1A and P1C to ‘1’ 1x = Pins P1A and P1C tri-state bit 1-0 PSSBDn: Pins P1B and P1D Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins P1B and P1D to ‘0’ 01 = Drive pins P1B and P1D to ‘1’ 1x = Pins P1B and P1D tri-state PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 130 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 14-12: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH FIRMWARE RESTART (PRSEN = 0) Note 1: The auto-shutdown condition is a level-based signal, not an edge-based signal. As long as the level is present, the auto-shutdown will persist. 2: Writing to the ECCPASE bit is disabled while an auto-shutdown condition persists. 3: Once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed and the PWM restarted (either through firmware or auto-restart) the PWM signal will always restart at the beginning of the next PWM period. 4: Prior to an auto-shutdown event caused by a comparator output or INT pin event, a software shutdown can be triggered in firmware by setting the CCPxASE bit to a ‘1’. The auto-restart feature tracks the active status of a shutdown caused by a comparator output or INT pin event only so, if it is enabled at this time. It will immediately clear this bit and restart the ECCP module at the beginning of the next PWM period. Shutdown PWM ECCPASE bit Activity Event Shutdown Event Occurs Shutdown Event Clears PWM Resumes Normal PWM Start of PWM Period ECCPASE Cleared by Firmware PWM Period  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 131 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4.5 AUTO-RESTART MODE The Enhanced PWM can be configured to automatically restart the PWM signal once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed. Auto-restart is enabled by setting the PRSEN bit in the PWM1CON register. If auto-restart is enabled, the ECCPASE bit will remain set as long as the auto-shutdown condition is active. When the auto-shutdown condition is removed, the ECCPASE bit will be cleared via hardware and normal operation will resume. FIGURE 14-13: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH AUTO-RESTART ENABLED (PRSEN = 1) Shutdown PWM ECCPASE bit Activity Event Shutdown Event Occurs Shutdown Event Clears PWM Resumes Normal PWM Start of PWM Period PWM Period PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 132 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14.4.6 PROGRAMMABLE DEAD-BAND DELAY MODE In Half-Bridge applications where all power switches are modulated at the PWM frequency, the power switches normally require more time to turn off than to turn on. If both the upper and lower power switches are switched at the same time (one turned on, and the other turned off), both switches may be on for a short period of time until one switch completely turns off. During this brief interval, a very high current (shoot-through current) will flow through both power switches, shorting the bridge supply. To avoid this potentially destructive shoot-through current from flowing during switching, turning on either of the power switches is normally delayed to allow the other switch to completely turn off. In Half-Bridge mode, a digitally programmable dead-band delay is available to avoid shoot-through current from destroying the bridge power switches. The delay occurs at the signal transition from the non-active state to the active state. See Figure 14-14 for illustration. The lower seven bits of the associated PWM1CON register (Register 14-3) sets the delay period in terms of microcontroller instruction cycles (TCY or 4 TOSC). FIGURE 14-14: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT FIGURE 14-15: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS Period Pulse Width td td (1) P1A(2) P1B(2) td = Dead-Band Delay Period (1) (1) Note 1: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. 2: Output signals are shown as active-high. P1A P1B FET Driver FET Driver V+ VLoad + V- + VStandard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 133 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 14-3: PWM1CON: ENHANCED PWM CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PRSEN PDC6 PDC5 PDC4 PDC3 PDC2 PDC1 PDC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PRSEN: PWM Restart Enable bit 1 = Upon auto-shutdown, the ECCPASE bit clears automatically once the shutdown event goes away; the PWM restarts automatically 0 = Upon auto-shutdown, ECCPASE must be cleared by software to restart the PWM bit 6-0 PDC<6:0>: PWM Delay Count bits PDCn = Number of FOSC/4 (4 * TOSC) cycles between the scheduled time when a PWM signal should transition active and the actual time it transitions active PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 134 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14.4.7 PULSE STEERING MODE In Single Output mode, pulse steering allows any of the PWM pins to be the modulated signal. Additionally, the same PWM signal can be simultaneously available on multiple pins. Once the Single Output mode is selected (CCP1M<3:2> = 11 and P1M<1:0> = 00 of the CCP1CON register), the user firmware can bring out the same PWM signal to one, two, three or four output pins by setting the appropriate STR bits of the PSTRCON register, as shown in Table 14-2. While the PWM Steering mode is active, CCP1M<1:0> bits of the CCP1CON register select the PWM output polarity for the P1 pins. The PWM auto-shutdown operation also applies to PWM Steering mode as described in Section 14.4.4 “Enhanced PWM Auto-shutdown mode”. An auto-shutdown event will only affect pins that have PWM outputs enabled. Note: The associated TRIS bits must be set to output (‘0’) to enable the pin output driver in order to see the PWM signal on the pin. REGISTER 14-4: PSTRCON: PULSE STEERING CONTROL REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 — — — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 STRSYNC: Steering Sync bit 1 = Output steering update occurs on next PWM period 0 = Output steering update occurs at the beginning of the instruction cycle boundary bit 3 STRD: Steering Enable bit D 1 = P1D pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCP1M<1:0> 0 = P1D pin is assigned to port pin bit 2 STRC: Steering Enable bit C 1 = P1C pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCP1M<1:0> 0 = P1C pin is assigned to port pin bit 1 STRB: Steering Enable bit B 1 = P1B pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCP1M<1:0> 0 = P1B pin is assigned to port pin bit 0 STRA: Steering Enable bit A 1 = P1A pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCP1M<1:0> 0 = P1A pin is assigned to port pin Note 1: The PWM Steering mode is available only when the CCP1CON register bits CCP1M<3:2> = 11 and P1M<1:0> = 00.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 135 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 14-16: SIMPLIFIED STEERING BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 0 TRIS P1A pin PORT Data P1A Signal STRA 1 0 TRIS P1B pin PORT Data STRB 1 0 TRIS P1C pin PORT Data STRC 1 0 TRIS P1D pin PORT Data STRD Note 1: Port outputs are configured as shown when the CCP1CON register bits P1M<1:0> = 00 and CCP1M<3:2> = 11. 2: Single PWM output requires setting at least one of the STRx bits. CCP1M1 CCP1M0 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 136 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14.4.7.1 Steering Synchronization The STRSYNC bit of the PSTRCON register gives the user two selections of when the steering event will happen. When the STRSYNC bit is ‘0’, the steering event will happen at the end of the instruction that writes to the PSTRCON register. In this case, the output signal at the P1 pins may be an incomplete PWM waveform. This operation is useful when the user firmware needs to immediately remove a PWM signal from the pin. When the STRSYNC bit is ‘1’, the effective steering update will happen at the beginning of the next PWM period. In this case, steering on/off the PWM output will always produce a complete PWM waveform. Figures 14-17 and 14-18 illustrate the timing diagrams of the PWM steering depending on the STRSYNC setting. FIGURE 14-17: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT END OF INSTRUCTION (STRSYNC = 0) FIGURE 14-18: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT BEGINNING OF INSTRUCTION (STRSYNC = 1) PWM P1n = PWM STRn P1 PORT Data PWM Period PORT Data PWM PORT Data P1n = PWM STRn P1 PORT Data  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 137 PIC18F/LF1XK50 14.4.8 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES In Sleep mode, all clock sources are disabled. Timer2 will not increment and the state of the module will not change. If the ECCP pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value. When the device wakes up, it will continue from this state. If Two-Speed Start-ups are enabled, the initial start-up frequency from HFINTOSC and the postscaler may not be stable immediately. In PRI_IDLE mode, the primary clock will continue to clock the ECCP module without change. In all other power-managed modes, the selected power-managed mode clock will clock Timer2. Other power-managed mode clocks will most likely be different than the primary clock frequency. 14.4.8.1 Operation with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor If the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled, a clock failure will force the device into the RC_RUN Power-Managed mode and the OSCFIF bit of the PIR2 register will be set. The ECCP will then be clocked from the internal oscillator clock source, which may have a different clock frequency than the primary clock. See the previous section for additional details. 14.4.9 EFFECTS OF A RESET Both Power-on Reset and subsequent Resets will force all ports to Input mode and the CCP registers to their Reset states. This forces the enhanced CCP module to reset to a state compatible with the standard CCP module. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 138 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 14-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ECCP1 MODULE AND TIMER1 TO TIMER3 Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 RCON IPEN SBOREN — RI TO PD POR BOR 284 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 TMR1L Timer1 Register, Low Byte 286 TMR1H Timer1 Register, High Byte 286 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 286 TMR2 Timer2 Register 286 T2CON — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 286 PR2 Timer2 Period Register 286 TMR3L Timer3 Register, Low Byte 287 TMR3H Timer3 Register, High Byte 287 T3CON RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 287 CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, Low Byte 287 CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, High Byte 287 CCP1CON P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 287 ECCP1AS ECCPASE ECCPAS2 ECCPAS1 ECCPAS0 PSSAC1 PSSAC0 PSSBD1 PSSBD0 287 PWM1CON PRSEN PDC6 PDC5 PDC4 PDC3 PDC2 PDC1 PDC0 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during ECCP operation.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 139 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.0 MASTER SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL PORT (MSSP) MODULE 15.1 Master SSP (MSSP) Module Overview The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module is a serial interface, useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices may be serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSP module can operate in one of two modes: • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) • Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C™) - Full Master mode - Slave mode (with general address call) The I2C interface supports the following modes in hardware: • Master mode • Multi-Master mode • Slave mode 15.2 SPI Mode The SPI mode allows 8 bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and received simultaneously. All four modes of SPI are supported. To accomplish communication, typically three pins are used: • Serial Data Out – SDO • Serial Data In – SDI • Serial Clock – SCK Additionally, a fourth pin may be used when in a Slave mode of operation: • Slave Select – SS Figure 15-1 shows the block diagram of the MSSP module when operating in SPI mode. FIGURE 15-1: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE) ( ) Read Write Internal Data Bus SSPSR Reg SSPM<3:0> bit 0 Shift Clock SS Control Enable Edge Select Clock Select TMR2 Output Prescaler TOSC 4, 16, 64 2 Edge Select 2 4 TRIS bit SDO SSPBUF Reg SDI/SDA SS SCK/SCL PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 140 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.2.1 REGISTERS The MSSP module has four registers for SPI mode operation. These are: • SSPCON1 – Control Register • SSPSTAT – STATUS register • SSPBUF – Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer • SSPSR – Shift Register (Not directly accessible) SSPCON1 and SSPSTAT are the control and STATUS registers in SPI mode operation. The SSPCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPSTAT are read/write. SSPSR is the shift register used for shifting data in and out. SSPBUF provides indirect access to the SSPSR register. SSPBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written, and from which data bytes are read. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPBUF together create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPBUF and the SSPIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPBUF will write to both SSPBUF and SSPSR. REGISTER 15-1: SSPSTAT: MSSP STATUS REGISTER (SPI MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Sample bit SPI Master mode: 1 = Input data sampled at end of data output time 0 = Input data sampled at middle of data output time SPI Slave mode: SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode. bit 6 CKE: SPI Clock Select bit(1) 1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state 0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 4 P: Stop bit Used in I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSP module is disabled, SSPEN is cleared. bit 3 S: Start bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 1 UA: Update Address bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit (Receive mode only) 1 = Receive complete, SSPBUF is full 0 = Receive not complete, SSPBUF is empty Note 1: Polarity of clock state is set by the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 141 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 15-2: SSPCON1: MSSP CONTROL 1 REGISTER (SPI MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit (Transmit mode only) 1 = The SSPBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared by software) 0 = No collision bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) SPI Slave mode: 1 = A new byte is received while the SSPBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data in SSPSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. The user must read the SSPBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow (must be cleared by software). 0 = No overflow bit 5 SSPEN: Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(2) 1 = Enables serial port and configures SCK, SDO, SDI and SS as serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins bit 4 CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit 1 = Idle state for clock is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock is a low level bit 3-0 SSPM<3:0>: Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(3) 0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCK pin, SS pin control disabled, SS can be used as I/O pin 0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCK pin, SS pin control enabled 0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2 0010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/64 0001 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/16 0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4 Note 1: In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPBUF register. 2: When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output. 3: Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in I2C mode only. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 142 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.2.2 OPERATION When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPCON1<5:0> and SSPSTAT<7:6>). These control bits allow the following to be specified: • Master mode (SCK is the clock output) • Slave mode (SCK is the clock input) • Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCK) • Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) • Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCK) • Clock Rate (Master mode only) • Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) The MSSP consists of a transmit/receive shift register (SSPSR) and a buffer register (SSPBUF). The SSPSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPSR until the received data is ready. Once the 8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full detect bit, BF of the SSPSTAT register, and the interrupt flag bit, SSPIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. Any write to the SSPBUF register during transmission/reception of data will be ignored and the write collision detect bit WCOL of the SSPCON1 register, will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit to allow the following write(s) to the SSPBUF register to complete successfully. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPBUF should be read before the next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPBUF. The Buffer Full bit, BF of the SSPSTAT register, indicates when SSPBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSP interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. Example 15-1 shows the loading of the SSPBUF (SSPSR) for data transmission. The SSPSR is not directly readable or writable and can only be accessed by addressing the SSPBUF register. Additionally, the MSSP STATUS register (SSPSTAT) indicates the various status conditions. EXAMPLE 15-1: LOADING THE SSPBUF (SSPSR) REGISTER LOOP BTFSS SSPSTAT, BF ;Has data been received (transmit complete)? BRA LOOP ;No MOVF SSPBUF, W ;WREG reg = contents of SSPBUF MOVWF RXDATA ;Save in user RAM, if data is meaningful MOVF TXDATA, W ;W reg = contents of TXDATA MOVWF SSPBUF ;New data to xmit  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 143 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.2.3 ENABLING SPI I/O To enable the serial port, SSP Enable bit, SSPEN of the SSPCON1 register, must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPEN bit, reinitialize the SSPCON registers and then set the SSPEN bit. This configures the SDI, SDO, SCK and SS pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, some must have their data direction bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as follows: • SDI is automatically controlled by the SPI module • SDO must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared • SCK (Master mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared • SCK (Slave mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit set • SS must have corresponding TRIS bit set Any serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding data direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. 15.2.4 TYPICAL CONNECTION Figure 15-2 shows a typical connection between two microcontrollers. The master controller (Processor 1) initiates the data transfer by sending the SCK signal. Data is shifted out of both shift registers on their programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. Both processors should be programmed to the same Clock Polarity (CKP), then both controllers would send and receive data at the same time. Whether the data is meaningful (or dummy data) depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: • Master sends data–Slave sends dummy data • Master sends data–Slave sends data • Master sends dummy data–Slave sends data FIGURE 15-2: TYPICAL SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION Serial Input Buffer (SSPBUF) Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb LSb SDO SDI Processor 1 SCK SPI Master SSPM<3:0> = 00xx Serial Input Buffer (SSPBUF) Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb LSb SDI SDO Processor 2 SCK SPI Slave SSPM<3:0> = 010x Serial Clock SS Slave Select General I/O (optional) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 144 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.2.5 MASTER MODE The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCK. The master determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 15-2) is to broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDO output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDI pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPBUF register as if a normal received byte (interrupts and status bits appropriately set). The clock polarity is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register. This then, would give waveforms for SPI communication as shown in Figure 15-3, Figure 15-5 and Figure 15-6, where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user programmable to be one of the following: • FOSC/4 (or TCY) • FOSC/16 (or 4 • TCY) • FOSC/64 (or 16 • TCY) • Timer2 output/2 This allows a maximum data rate (at 64 MHz) of 16.00 Mbps. Figure 15-3 shows the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDO data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCK. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. FIGURE 15-3: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE) SCK (CKP = 0 SCK (CKP = 1 SCK (CKP = 0 SCK (CKP = 1 4 Clock Modes Input Sample Input Sample SDI bit 7 bit 0 SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 7 SDI SSPIF (SMP = 1) (SMP = 0) (SMP = 1) CKE = 1) CKE = 0) CKE = 1) CKE = 0) (SMP = 0) Write to SSPBUF SSPSR to SSPBUF SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (CKE = 0) (CKE = 1) bit 0  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 145 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.2.6 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as external clock pulses appear on SCK. When the last bit is latched, the SSPIF interrupt flag bit is set. Before enabling the module in SPI Slave mode, the clock line must match the proper Idle state. The clock line can be observed by reading the SCK pin. The Idle state is determined by the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register. While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCK pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. When a byte is received, the device will wake-up from Sleep. 15.2.7 SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONIZATION The SS pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPCON1<3:0> = 0100). When the SS pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDO pin is driven. When the SS pin goes high, the SDO pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to ‘0’. This can be done by either forcing the SS pin to a high level or clearing the SSPEN bit. FIGURE 15-4: SLAVE SYNCHRONIZATION WAVEFORM Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPCON<3:0> = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SS pin is set to VDD. 2: When the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set the SS pin control must also be enabled. SCK (CKP = 1 SCK (CKP = 0 Input Sample SDI bit 7 SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 SSPIF Interrupt (SMP = 0) CKE = 0) CKE = 0) (SMP = 0) Write to SSPBUF SSPSR to SSPBUF SS Flag bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 146 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 15-5: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0) FIGURE 15-6: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1) SCK (CKP = 1 SCK (CKP = 0 Input Sample SDI bit 7 SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SSPIF Interrupt (SMP = 0) CKE = 0) CKE = 0) (SMP = 0) Write to SSPBUF SSPSR to SSPBUF SS Flag Optional bit 0 SCK (CKP = 1 SCK (CKP = 0 Input Sample SDI bit 7 bit 0 SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SSPIF Interrupt (SMP = 0) CKE = 1) CKE = 1) (SMP = 0) Write to SSPBUF SSPSR to SSPBUF SS Flag Not Optional  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 147 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.2.8 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in full power mode; in the case of the Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. In all Idle modes, a clock is provided to the peripherals. That clock could be from the primary clock source, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator at 32.768 kHz) or the INTOSC source. See Section 19.0 “Power-Managed Modes” for additional information. In most cases, the speed that the master clocks SPI data is not important; however, this should be evaluated for each system. When MSSP interrupts are enabled, after the master completes sending data, an MSSP interrupt will wake the controller: • from Sleep, in slave mode • from Idle, in slave or master mode If an exit from Sleep or Idle mode is not desired, MSSP interrupts should be disabled. In SPI master mode, when the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are halted and the transmission/ reception will remain in that state until the devices wakes. After the device returns to RUN mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in any power-managed mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all 8 bits have been received, the MSSP interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will wake the device. 15.2.9 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 15.2.10 BUS MODE COMPATIBILITY Table 15-1 shows the compatibility between the standard SPI modes and the states of the CKP and CKE control bits. TABLE 15-1: SPI BUS MODES There is also an SMP bit which controls when the data is sampled. TABLE 15-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION Standard SPI Mode Terminology Control Bits State CKP CKE 0, 0 0 1 0, 1 0 0 1, 0 1 1 1, 1 1 0 Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 — — — — 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 SSPBUF SSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register 286 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 286 SSPSTAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 286 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP in SPI mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 148 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3 I2C Mode The MSSP module in I2C mode fully implements all master and slave functions (including general call support) and provides interrupts on Start and Stop bits in hardware to determine a free bus (multi-master function). The MSSP module implements the standard mode specifications as well as 7-bit and 10-bit addressing. Two pins are used for data transfer: • Serial clock – SCL • Serial data – SDA FIGURE 15-7: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MODE) 15.3.1 REGISTERS The MSSP module has seven registers for I2C operation. These are: • MSSP Control Register 1 (SSPCON1) • MSSP Control Register 2 (SSPCON2) • MSSP Status register (SSPSTAT) • Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPBUF) • MSSP Shift Register (SSPSR) – Not directly accessible • MSSP Address Register (SSPADD) • MSSP Address Mask (SSPMSK) SSPCON1, SSPCON2 and SSPSTAT are the control and STATUS registers in I2C mode operation. The SSPCON1 and SSPCON2 registers are readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPSTAT are read/write. SSPSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. When the MSSP is configured in Master mode, the SSPADD register acts as the Baud Rate Generator reload value. When the MSSP is configured for I2C slave mode the SSPADD register holds the slave device address. The MSSP can be configured to respond to a range of addresses by qualifying selected bits of the address register with the SSPMSK register. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPBUF together create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPBUF and the SSPIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPBUF will write to both SSPBUF and SSPSR. Note: The user must configure these pins as inputs with the corresponding TRIS bits. Read Write SSPSR Reg Match Detect SSPADD Reg Start and Stop bit Detect SSPBUF Reg Internal Data Bus Addr Match Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPSTAT Reg) SCK/SCL SDI/SDA Shift Clock MSb LSb SSPMSK Reg  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 149 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 15-3: SSPSTAT: MSSP STATUS REGISTER (I2C MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 SMP CKE D/A P(1) S(1) R/W(2, 3) UA BF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Slew Rate Control bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Slew rate control disabled for standard speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) 0 = Slew rate control enabled for high-speed mode (400 kHz) bit 6 CKE: SMBus Select bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Enable SMBus specific inputs 0 = Disable SMBus specific inputs bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit In Master mode: Reserved. In Slave mode: 1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data 0 = Indicates that the last byte received was an address bit 4 P: Stop bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last 0 = Stop bit was not detected last bit 3 S: Start bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last 0 = Start bit was not detected last bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit (I2C mode only)(2, 3) In Slave mode: 1 = Read 0 = Write In Master mode: 1 = Transmit is in progress 0 = Transmit is not in progress bit 1 UA: Update Address bit (10-bit Slave mode only) 1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPADD register 0 = Address does not need to be updated bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit In Transmit mode: 1 = SSPBUF is full 0 = SSPBUF is empty In Receive mode: 1 = SSPBUF is full (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) 0 = SSPBUF is empty (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) Note 1: This bit is cleared on Reset and when SSPEN is cleared. 2: This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit or not ACK bit. 3: ORing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the Master mode is active. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 150 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 15-4: SSPCON1: MSSP CONTROL 1 REGISTER (I2C MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit In Master Transmit mode: 1 = A write to the SSPBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started (must be cleared by software) 0 = No collision In Slave Transmit mode: 1 = The SSPBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared by software) 0 = No collision In Receive mode (Master or Slave modes): This is a “don’t care” bit. bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit In Receive mode: 1 = A byte is received while the SSPBUF register is still holding the previous byte (must be cleared by software) 0 = No overflow In Transmit mode: This is a “don’t care” bit in Transmit mode. bit 5 SSPEN: Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDA and SCL pins as the serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins When enabled, the SDA and SCL pins must be properly configured as inputs. bit 4 CKP: SCK Release Control bit In Slave mode: 1 = Release clock 0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch), used to ensure data setup time In Master mode: Unused in this mode. bit 3-0 SSPM<3:0>: Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits 1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1011 = I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode (Slave Idle) 1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPADD + 1)) 0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address 0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in SPI mode only.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 151 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 15-5: SSPCON2: MSSP CONTROL REGISTER (I2C MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT(2) ACKEN(1) RCEN(1) PEN(1) RSEN(1) SEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit (Slave mode only) 1 = Generate interrupt when a general call address 0x00 or 00h is received in the SSPSR 0 = General call address disabled bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (Master Transmit mode only) 1 = Acknowledge was not received from slave 0 = Acknowledge was received from slave bit 5 ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (Master Receive mode only)(2) 1 = Not Acknowledge 0 = Acknowledge bit 4 ACKEN: Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit (Master Receive mode only)(1) 1 = Initiate Acknowledge sequence on SDA and SCL pins and transmit ACKDT data bit. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Acknowledge sequence Idle bit 3 RCEN: Receive Enable bit (Master mode only)(1) 1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C 0 = Receive Idle bit 2 PEN: Stop Condition Enable bit (Master mode only)(1) 1 = Initiate Stop condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Stop condition Idle bit 1 RSEN: Repeated Start Condition Enable bit (Master mode only)(1) 1 = Initiate Repeated Start condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Repeated Start condition Idle bit 0 SEN: Start Condition Enable/Stretch Enable bit(1) In Master mode: 1 = Initiate Start condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Start condition Idle In Slave mode: 1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled) 0 = Clock stretching is disabled Note 1: For bits ACKEN, RCEN, PEN, RSEN, SEN: If the I2C module is not in the Idle mode, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPBUF are disabled). 2: Value that will be transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 152 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.2 OPERATION The MSSP module functions are enabled by setting SSPEN bit of the SSPCON1 register. The SSPCON1 register allows control of the I2C operation. Four mode selection bits of the SSPCON1 register allow one of the following I2C modes to be selected: • I2C Master mode, clock = (FOSC/(4*(SSPADD + 1)) • I2C Slave mode (7-bit address) • I2C Slave mode (10-bit address) • I2C Slave mode (7-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I2C Slave mode (10-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode, slave is Idle Selection of any I2C mode with the SSPEN bit set, forces the SCL and SDA pins to be open-drain, provided these pins are programmed to inputs by setting the appropriate TRIS bits 15.3.3 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the SCL and SDA pins must be configured as inputs. The MSSP module will override the input state with the output data when required (slave-transmitter). The I2C Slave mode hardware will always generate an interrupt on an address match. Through the mode select bits, the user can also choose to interrupt on Start and Stop bits When an address is matched, or the data transfer after an address match is received, the hardware automatically will generate the Acknowledge (ACK) pulse and load the SSPBUF register with the received value currently in the SSPSR register. Any combination of the following conditions will cause the MSSP module not to give this ACK pulse: • The Buffer Full bit, BF bit of the SSPSTAT register, is set before the transfer is received. • The overflow bit, SSPOV bit of the SSPCON1 register, is set before the transfer is received. In this case, the SSPSR register value is not loaded into the SSPBUF, but bit SSPIF of the PIR1 register is set. The BF bit is cleared by reading the SSPBUF register, while bit SSPOV is cleared through software. The SCL clock input must have a minimum high and low for proper operation. The high and low times of the I2C specification, as well as the requirement of the MSSP module, are shown in Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. 15.3.3.1 Addressing Once the MSSP module has been enabled, it waits for a Start condition to occur. Following the Start condition, the 8 bits are shifted into the SSPSR register. All incoming bits are sampled with the rising edge of the clock (SCL) line. The value of register SSPSR<7:1> is compared to the value of the SSPADD register. The address is compared on the falling edge of the eighth clock (SCL) pulse. If the addresses match and the BF and SSPOV bits are clear, the following events occur: 1. The SSPSR register value is loaded into the SSPBUF register. 2. The Buffer Full bit, BF, is set. 3. An ACK pulse is generated. 4. MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPIF of the PIR1 register, is set (interrupt is generated, if enabled) on the falling edge of the ninth SCL pulse. In 10-bit Address mode, two address bytes need to be received by the slave. The five Most Significant bits (MSbs) of the first address byte specify if this is a 10-bit address. Bit R/W of the SSPSTAT register must specify a write so the slave device will receive the second address byte. For a 10-bit address, the first byte would equal ‘11110 A9 A8 0’, where ‘A9’ and ‘A8’ are the two MSbs of the address. The sequence of events for 10-bit address is as follows, with steps 7 through 9 for the slave-transmitter: 1. Receive first (high) byte of address (bits SSPIF, BF and UA of the SSPSTAT register are set). 2. Read the SSPBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. 3. Update the SSPADD register with second (low) byte of address (clears bit UA and releases the SCL line). 4. Receive second (low) byte of address (bits SSPIF, BF and UA are set). If the address matches then the SCL is held until the next step. Otherwise the SCL line is not held. 5. Read the SSPBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. 6. Update the SSPADD register with the first (high) byte of address. (This will clear bit UA and release a held SCL line.) 7. Receive Repeated Start condition. 8. Receive first (high) byte of address with R/W bit set (bits SSPIF, BF, R/W are set). 9. Read the SSPBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. 10. Load SSPBUF with byte the slave is to transmit, sets the BF bit. 11. Set the CKP bit to release SCL. Note: To ensure proper operation of the module, pull-up resistors must be provided externally to the SCL and SDA pins.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 153 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.3.2 Reception When the R/W bit of the address byte is clear and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPSTAT register is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPBUF register and the SDA line is held low (ACK). When the address byte overflow condition exists, then the no Acknowledge (ACK) pulse is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit BF bit of the SSPSTAT register is set, or bit SSPOV bit of the SSPCON1 register is set. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. Flag bit, SSPIF of the PIR1 register, must be cleared by software. When the SEN bit of the SSPCON2 register is set, SCL will be held low (clock stretch) following each data transfer. The clock must be released by setting the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register. See Section 15.3.4 “Clock Stretching” for more detail. 15.3.3.3 Transmission When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPSTAT register is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPBUF register. The ACK pulse will be sent on the ninth bit and pin SCK/SCL is held low regardless of SEN (see Section 15.3.4 “Clock Stretching” for more detail). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPBUF register which also loads the SSPSR register. Then pin SCK/SCL should be released by setting the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register. The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCL input. This ensures that the SDA signal is valid during the SCL high time (Figure 15-9). The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCL input pulse. If the SDA line is high (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the ACK is latched by the slave, the slave logic is reset (resets SSPSTAT register) and the slave monitors for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDA line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPBUF register. Again, pin SCK/SCL must be released by setting bit CKP. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPIF bit must be cleared by software and the SSPSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 154 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 15-8: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 P A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 R/W = 0 Receiving Data ACK Receiving Data ACK ACK Receiving Address Cleared by software SSPBUF is read Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. D2 6 (PIR1<3>) CKP (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 155 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 15-9: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF (PIR1<3>) BF (SSPSTAT<0>) A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SSPBUF is written by software Cleared by software From SSPIF ISR Data in sampled S ACK R/W = 0 Transmitting Data ACK Receiving Address A7 D7 9 1 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SSPBUF is written by software Cleared by software From SSPIF ISR Transmitting Data D7 1 CKP P ACK CKP is set by software CKP is set by software SCL held low while CPU responds to SSPIF SSPBUF is read by software Bus master terminates software PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 156 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 15-10: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 P 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 Receive Data Byte ACK R/W = 0 ACK Receive First Byte of Address Cleared by software D2 6 (PIR1<3>) Cleared by software Receive Second Byte of Address Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address UA (SSPSTAT<1>) Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag ACK CKP 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 Receive Data Byte Bus master terminates transfer D2 6 ACK Cleared by software Cleared by software SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 157 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 15-11: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 P 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 1 1 1 1 0 A8 R/W=1 ACK ACK R/W = 0 ACK Receive First Byte of Address Cleared in software Bus Master sends Stop condition A9 6 Receive Second Byte of Address Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address. UA Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address. SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Receive First Byte of Address 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 ACK D2 6 Transmitting Data Byte D0 Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Sr Cleared in software Write of SSPBUF Cleared in software Completion of clears BF flag CKP CKP is set in software, initiates transmission CKP is automatically cleared in hardware holding SCL low Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place data transmission Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ Bus Master sends Restarts condition Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 158 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.3.4 SSP Mask Register An SSP Mask (SSPMSK) register is available in I2C Slave mode as a mask for the value held in the SSPSR register during an address comparison operation. A zero (‘0’) bit in the SSPMSK register has the effect of making the corresponding bit in the SSPSR register a “don’t care”. This register is reset to all ‘1’s upon any Reset condition and, therefore, has no effect on standard SSP operation until written with a mask value. This register must be initiated prior to setting SSPM<3:0> bits to select the I2C Slave mode (7-bit or 10-bit address). The SSP Mask register is active during: • 7-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:1>. • 10-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:0> only. The SSP mask has no effect during the reception of the first (high) byte of the address. REGISTER 15-6: SSPMSK: SSP MASK REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-1 MSK<7:1>: Mask bits 1 = The received address bit n is compared to SSPADD to detect I2C address match 0 = The received address bit n is not used to detect I2C address match bit 0 MSK<0>: Mask bit for I2C Slave mode, 10-bit Address(1) I2C Slave mode, 10-bit Address (SSPM<3:0> = 0111): 1 = The received address bit 0 is compared to SSPADD<0> to detect I2C address match 0 = The received address bit 0 is not used to detect I2C address match Note 1: The MSK0 bit is used only in 10-bit slave mode. In all other modes, this bit has no effect.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 159 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 15-7: SSPADD: MSSP ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE REGISTER (I2C MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 ADD2 ADD1 ADD0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Master mode: bit 7-0 ADD<7:0>: Baud Rate Clock Divider bits SCL pin clock period = ((ADD<7:0> + 1) *4)/FOSC 10-Bit Slave mode — Most significant address byte: bit 7-3 Not used: Unused for Most Significant Address Byte. Bit state of this register is a “don’t care.” Bit pattern sent by master is fixed by I2C specification and must be equal to ‘11110’. However, those bits are compared by hardware and are not affected by the value in this register. bit 2-1 ADD<9:8>: Two Most Significant bits of 10-bit address bit 0 Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a “don’t care.” 10-Bit Slave mode — Least significant address byte: bit 7-0 ADD<7:0>: Eight Least Significant bits of 10-bit address 7-Bit Slave mode: bit 7-1 ADD<6:0>: 7-bit address bit 0 Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a “don’t care.” PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 160 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.4 CLOCK STRETCHING Both 7-bit and 10-bit Slave modes implement automatic clock stretching during a transmit sequence. The SEN bit of the SSPCON2 register allows clock stretching to be enabled during receives. Setting SEN will cause the SCL pin to be held low at the end of each data receive sequence. 15.3.4.1 Clock Stretching for 7-bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 7-bit Slave Receive mode, on the falling edge of the ninth clock at the end of the ACK sequence if the BF bit is set, the CKP bit of the SSPCON1 register is automatically cleared, forcing the SCL output to be held low. The CKP being cleared to ‘0’ will assert the SCL line low. The CKP bit must be set in the user’s ISR before reception is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and read the contents of the SSPBUF before the master device can initiate another data transfer sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring (see Figure 15-13). 15.3.4.2 Clock Stretching for 10-bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 10-bit Slave Receive mode during the address sequence, clock stretching automatically takes place but CKP is not cleared. During this time, if the UA bit is set after the ninth clock, clock stretching is initiated. The UA bit is set after receiving the upper byte of the 10-bit address and following the receive of the second byte of the 10-bit address with the R/W bit cleared to ‘0’. The release of the clock line occurs upon updating SSPADD. Clock stretching will occur on each data receive sequence as described in 7-bit mode. 15.3.4.3 Clock Stretching for 7-bit Slave Transmit Mode 7-bit Slave Transmit mode implements clock stretching by clearing the CKP bit after the falling edge of the ninth clock. This occurs regardless of the state of the SEN bit. The user’s ISR must set the CKP bit before transmission is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and load the contents of the SSPBUF before the master device can initiate another data transfer sequence (see Figure 15-9). 15.3.4.4 Clock Stretching for 10-bit Slave Transmit Mode In 10-bit Slave Transmit mode, clock stretching is controlled during the first two address sequences by the state of the UA bit, just as it is in 10-bit Slave Receive mode. The first two addresses are followed by a third address sequence which contains the high-order bits of the 10-bit address and the R/W bit set to ‘1’. After the third address sequence is performed, the UA bit is not set, the module is now configured in Transmit mode and clock stretching is automatic with the hardware clearing CKP, as in 7-bit Slave Transmit mode (see Figure 15-11). Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the SSPBUF before the falling edge of the ninth clock, thus clearing the BF bit, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set by software regardless of the state of the BF bit. The user should be careful to clear the BF bit in the ISR before the next receive sequence in order to prevent an overflow condition. Note 1: If the user loads the contents of SSPBUF, setting the BF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set by software regardless of the state of the BF bit.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 161 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.4.5 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit When the CKP bit is cleared, the SCL output is forced to ‘0’. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCL output low until the SCL output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCL line until an external I2C master device has already asserted the SCL line. The SCL output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCL. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCL (see Figure 15-12). FIGURE 15-12: CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING SDA SCL DX DX – 1 WR Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SSPCON1 CKP Master device deasserts clock Master device asserts clock PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 162 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 15-13: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 P A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 R/W = 0 Receiving Data ACK Receiving Data ACK ACK Receiving Address Cleared by software SSPBUF is read Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. D2 6 (PIR1<3>) CKP CKP written to ‘1’ in If BF is cleared prior to the falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP will not be reset to ‘0’ and no clock stretching will occur software Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ Clock is not held low because buffer full bit is clear prior to falling edge of 9th clock Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 BF is set after falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP is reset to ‘0’ and clock stretching occurs  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 163 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 15-14: I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 P 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 Receive Data Byte ACK R/W = 0 ACK Receive First Byte of Address Cleared by software D2 6 (PIR1<3>) Cleared by software Receive Second Byte of Address Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address after falling edge UA (SSPSTAT<1>) Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address after falling edge SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag ACK CKP 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 D0 Receive Data Byte Bus master terminates transfer D2 6 ACK Cleared by software Cleared by software SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) CKP written to ‘1’ Note: An update of the SSPADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. Note: An update of the SSPADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. by software Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place of ninth clock of ninth clock SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 164 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.5 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master. The exception is the general call address which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an Acknowledge. The general call address is one of eight addresses reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It consists of all ‘0’s with R/W = 0. The general call address is recognized when the GCEN bit of the SSPCON2 is set. Following a Start bit detect, 8 bits are shifted into the SSPSR and the address is compared against the SSPADD. It is also compared to the general call address and fixed in hardware. If the general call address matches, the SSPSR is transferred to the SSPBUF, the BF flag bit is set (eighth bit) and on the falling edge of the ninth bit (ACK bit), the SSPIF interrupt flag bit is set. When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the SSPBUF. The value can be used to determine if the address was device specific or a general call address. In 10-bit mode, the SSPADD is required to be updated for the second half of the address to match and the UA bit of the SSPSTAT register is set. If the general call address is sampled when the GCEN bit is set, while the slave is configured in 10-bit Address mode, then the second half of the address is not necessary, the UA bit will not be set and the slave will begin receiving data after the Acknowledge (Figure 15-15). FIGURE 15-15: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE (7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS MODE) SDA SCL S SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) Cleared by software SSPBUF is read R/W = 0 General Call Address ACK Address is compared to General Call Address GCEN (SSPCON2<7>) Receiving Data ACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 after ACK, set interrupt ‘0’ ‘1’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 165 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.6 MASTER MODE Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPM bits in SSPCON1 and by setting the SSPEN bit. In Master mode, the SCL and SDA lines are manipulated by the MSSP hardware. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit conditions. Once Master mode is enabled, the user has six options. 1. Assert a Start condition on SDA and SCL. 2. Assert a Repeated Start condition on SDA and SCL. 3. Write to the SSPBUF register initiating transmission of data/address. 4. Configure the I2C port to receive data. 5. Generate an Acknowledge condition at the end of a received byte of data. 6. Generate a Stop condition on SDA and SCL. The following events will cause the SSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPIF, to be set (SSP interrupt, if enabled): • Start condition • Stop condition • Data transfer byte transmitted/received • Acknowledge transmit • Repeated Start FIGURE 15-16: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MASTER MODE) Note: The MSSP module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queueing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPBUF did not occur. Read Write SSPSR Start bit, Stop bit, SSPBUF Internal Data Bus Set/Reset, S, P, WCOL Shift Clock MSb LSb SDA Acknowledge Generate Stop bit Detect Write Collision Detect Clock Arbitration State Counter for end of XMIT/RCV SCL SCL In Bus Collision SDA In Receive Enable Clock Cntl Clock Arbitrate/WCOL Detect (hold off clock source) SSPADD<6:0> Baud Set SSPIF, BCLIF Reset ACKSTAT, PEN Rate Generator SSPM<3:0> Start bit Detect PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 166 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.6.1 I2C Master Mode Operation The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. A Baud Rate Generator is used to set the clock frequency output on SCL. See Section 15.3.7 “Baud Rate” for more detail. A typical transmit sequence would go as follows: 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting the SEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. 2. SSPIF is set. The MSSP module will wait the required start time before any other operation takes place. 3. The user loads the SSPBUF with the slave address to transmit. 4. Address is shifted out the SDA pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 5. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPCON2 register. 6. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPIF bit. 7. The user loads the SSPBUF with eight bits of data. 8. Data is shifted out the SDA pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 9. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPCON2 register. 10. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPIF bit. 11. The user generates a Stop condition by setting the PEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. 12. Interrupt is generated once the Stop condition is complete.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 167 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.7 BAUD RATE In I2C Master mode, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value is placed in the SSPADD register (Figure 15-17). When a write occurs to SSPBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting. Once the given operation is complete (i.e., transmission of the last data bit is followed by ACK), the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the SCL pin will remain in its last state. Table 15-3 demonstrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPADD. EQUATION 15-1: FIGURE 15-17: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM TABLE 15-3: I2C™ CLOCK RATE W/BRG FSCL FOSC SSPADD + 14 = ---------------------------------------------- SSPM<3:0> CLKOUT BRG Down Counter FOSC/2 SSPADD<7:0> SSPM<3:0> SCL Reload Control Reload FOSC FCY BRG Value FSCL (2 Rollovers of BRG) 48 MHz 12 MHz 0Bh 1 MHz(1) 48 MHz 12 MHz 1Dh 400 kHz 48 MHz 12 MHz 77h 100 kHz 40 MHz 10 MHz 18h 400 kHz(1) 40 MHz 10 MHz 1Fh 312.5 kHz 40 MHz 10 MHz 63h 100 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 09h 400 kHz(1) 16 MHz 4 MHz 0Ch 308 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 27h 100 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 02h 333 kHz(1) 4 MHz 1 MHz 09h 100 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 00h 1 MHz(1) Note 1: The I2C interface does not conform to the 400 kHz I2C specification (which applies to rates greater than 100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 168 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.7.1 Clock Arbitration Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, deasserts the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high). When the SCL pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCL pin is actually sampled high. When the SCL pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and begins counting. This ensures that the SCL high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device (Figure 15-18). FIGURE 15-18: BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION SDA SCL SCL deasserted but slave holds DX DX – 1 BRG SCL is sampled high, reload takes place and BRG starts its count 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h Reload BRG Value SCL low (clock arbitration) SCL allowed to transition high BRG decrements on Q2 and Q4 cycles  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 169 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.8 I2C MASTER MODE START CONDITION TIMING To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start Enable bit, SEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. If the SDA and SCL pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and starts its count. If SCL and SDA are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDA pin is driven low. The action of the SDA being driven low while SCL is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit of the SSPSTAT1 register to be set. Following this, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<7:0> and resumes its count. When the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit of the SSPCON2 register will be automatically cleared by hardware; the Baud Rate Generator is suspended, leaving the SDA line held low and the Start condition is complete. 15.3.8.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). FIGURE 15-19: FIRST START BIT TIMING Note: If at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDA and SCL pins are already sampled low, or if during the Start condition, the SCL line is sampled low before the SDA line is driven low, a bus collision occurs, the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower 5 bits of SSPCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. SDA SCL S TBRG 1st bit 2nd bit TBRG SDA = 1, SCL = 1 At completion of Start bit, TBRG Write to SSPBUF occurs here hardware clears SEN bit TBRG Write to SEN bit occurs here Set S bit (SSPSTAT<3>) and sets SSPIF bit PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 170 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.9 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit of the SSPCON2 register is programmed high and the I2C logic module is in the Idle state. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCL pin is asserted low. When the SCL pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and begins counting. The SDA pin is released (brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count (TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out, if SDA is sampled high, the SCL pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCL is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and begins counting. SDA and SCL must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDA pin (SDA = 0) for one TBRG while SCL is high. Following this, the RSEN bit of the SSPCON2 register will be automatically cleared and the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving the SDA pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on the SDA and SCL pins, the S bit of the SSPSTAT register will be set. The SSPIF bit will not be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out. Immediately following the SSPIF bit getting set, the user may write the SSPBUF with the 7-bit address in 7-bit mode or the default first address in 10-bit mode. After the first eight bits are transmitted and an ACK is received, the user may then transmit an additional eight bits of address (10-bit mode) or eight bits of data (7-bit mode). 15.3.9.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Repeated Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). FIGURE 15-20: REPEAT START CONDITION WAVEFORM Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: • SDA is sampled low when SCL goes from low-to-high. • SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing of the lower 5 bits of SSPCON2 is disabled until the Repeated Start condition is complete. SDA SCL Sr = Repeated Start Write to SSPCON2 on falling edge of ninth clock, Write to SSPBUF occurs here end of Xmit At completion of Start bit, hardware clears RSEN bit 1st bit S bit set by hardware TBRG TBRG SDA = 1, SDA = 1, SCL (no change). SCL = 1 occurs here. TBRG TBRG TBRG and sets SSPIF RSEN bit set by hardware  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 171 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.10 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling edge of SCL is asserted (see data hold time specification parameter SP106). SCL is held low for one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCL is released high (see data setup time specification parameter SP107). When the SCL pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDA pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold time after the next falling edge of SCL. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDA. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred, or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKDT bit on the falling edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared. If not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPBUF, leaving SCL low and SDA unchanged (Figure 15-21). After the write to the SSPBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCL until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will deassert the SDA pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDA pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT status bit of the SSPCON2 register. Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPIF is set, the BF flag is cleared and the Baud Rate Generator is turned off until another write to the SSPBUF takes place, holding SCL low and allowing SDA to float. 15.3.10.1 BF Status Flag In Transmit mode, the BF bit of the SSPSTAT register is set when the CPU writes to SSPBUF and is cleared when all 8 bits are shifted out. 15.3.10.2 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). WCOL must be cleared by software before the next transmission. 15.3.10.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPCON2 register is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call), or when the slave has properly received its data. 15.3.11 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION Master mode reception is enabled by programming the Receive Enable bit, RCEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each rollover, the state of the SCL pin changes (high-to-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the SSPSR are loaded into the SSPBUF, the BF flag bit is set, the SSPIF flag bit is set and the Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting, holding SCL low. The MSSP is now in Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable, ACKEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. 15.3.11.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPBUF from SSPSR. It is cleared when the SSPBUF register is read. 15.3.11.2 SSPOV Status Flag In receive operation, the SSPOV bit is set when 8 bits are received into the SSPSR and the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 15.3.11.3 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). Note: The MSSP module must be in an Idle state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 172 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 15-21: I2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS) SDA SCL SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SEN A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK = 0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK Transmitting Data or Second Half Transmit Address to Slave R/W = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared by software service routine SSPBUF is written by software from SSP interrupt After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware S SSPBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W start transmit SCL held low while CPU responds to SSPIF SEN = 0 of 10-bit Address Write SSPCON2<0> SEN = 1 Start condition begins From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit SSPCON2<6> ACKSTAT in SSPCON2 = 1 Cleared by software SSPBUF written PEN R/W Cleared by software  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 173 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 15-22: I2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) P 5 6 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 S SDA A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 Bus master terminates transfer ACK Receiving Data from Slave Receiving Data from Slave ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmit Address to Slave R/W = 0 SSPIF BF ACK is not sent Write to SSPCON2<0> (SEN = 1), Write to SSPBUF occurs here, ACK from Slave Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) PEN bit = 1 written here Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK Cleared by software start XMIT SEN = 0 SSPOV SDA = 0, SCL = 1 while CPU (SSPSTAT<0>) ACK Cleared by software Cleared by software Set SSPIF interrupt at end of receive Set P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) and SSPIF Cleared in software ACK from Master Set SSPIF at end Set SSPIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Set SSPIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence of receive Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full SDA = ACKDT = 1 RCEN cleared automatically RCEN = 1, start next receive Write to SSPCON2<4> to start Acknowledge sequence SDA = ACKDT (SSPCON2<5>) = 0 RCEN cleared automatically responds to SSPIF ACKEN begin Start condition Cleared by software SDA = ACKDT = 0 Last bit is shifted into SSPSR and contents are unloaded into SSPBUF RCEN Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) RCEN cleared automatically ACK from Master SDA = ACKDT = 0 RCEN cleared automatically PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 174 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.12 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. When this bit is set, the SCL pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDA pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCL pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCL pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG. The SCL pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off and the MSSP module then goes into Idle mode (Figure 15-23). 15.3.12.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). 15.3.13 STOP CONDITION TIMING A Stop bit is asserted on the SDA pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable bit, PEN bit of the SSPCON2 register. At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCL line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDA line low. When the SDA line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and counts down to ‘0’. When the Baud Rate Generator times out, the SCL pin will be brought high and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count) later, the SDA pin will be deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high while SCL is high, the P bit of the SSPSTAT register is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPIF bit is set (Figure 15-24). 15.3.13.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). FIGURE 15-23: ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM FIGURE 15-24: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. SDA SCL SSPIF set at Acknowledge sequence starts here, write to SSPCON2 ACKEN automatically cleared Cleared in TBRG TBRG the end of receive 8 ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 D0 9 SSPIF software SSPIF set at the end of Acknowledge sequence Cleared in software ACK SCL SDA SDA asserted low before rising edge of clock Write to SSPCON2, set PEN Falling edge of SCL = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDA = 1 for TBRG 9th clock SCL brought high after TBRG Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. TBRG TBRG after SDA sampled high. P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) is set. TBRG to setup Stop condition ACK P TBRG PEN bit (SSPCON2<2>) is cleared by hardware and the SSPIF bit is set  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 175 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.14 SLEEP OPERATION While in Sleep mode, the I2C Slave module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSP interrupt is enabled). 15.3.15 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 15.3.16 MULTI-MASTER MODE In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the P bit of the SSPSTAT register is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the SSP interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDA line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed by hardware with the result placed in the BCLIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: • Address Transfer • Data Transfer • A Start Condition • A Repeated Start Condition • An Acknowledge Condition 15.3.17 MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA, by letting SDA float high and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDA is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLIF and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 15-25). If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the SSPBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in the SSPCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit, regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the SSPSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. FIGURE 15-25: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE SDA SCL BCLIF SDA released SDA line pulled low by another source Sample SDA. While SCL is high, data doesn’t match what is driven Bus collision has occurred. Set bus collision interrupt (BCLIF) by the master. by master Data changes while SCL = 0 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 176 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.17.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) SDA or SCL are sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 15-26). b) SCL is sampled low before SDA is asserted low (Figure 15-27). During a Start condition, both the SDA and the SCL pins are monitored. If the SDA pin is already low, or the SCL pin is already low, then all of the following occur: • the Start condition is aborted, • the BCLIF flag is set and • the MSSP module is reset to its Idle state (Figure 15-26). The Start condition begins with the SDA and SCL pins deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and counts down. If the SCL pin is sampled low while SDA is high, a bus collision occurs because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data ‘1’ during the Start condition. If the SDA pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDA line is asserted early (Figure 15-28). If, however, a ‘1’ is sampled on the SDA pin, the SDA pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then reloaded and counts down to 0; if the SCL pin is sampled as ‘0’ during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCL pin is asserted low. FIGURE 15-26: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDA ONLY) Note: The reason that bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDA before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. SDA SCL SEN SDA sampled low before SDA goes low before the SEN bit is set. S bit and SSPIF set because SSP module reset into Idle state. SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision. S bit and SSPIF set because Set SEN, enable Start condition if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SDA = 0, SCL = 1. BCLIF S SSPIF SDA = 0, SCL = 1. SSPIF and BCLIF are cleared by software SSPIF and BCLIF are cleared by software Set BCLIF, Start condition. Set BCLIF.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 177 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 15-27: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCL = 0) FIGURE 15-28: BRG RESET DUE TO SDA ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION SDA SCL SEN bus collision occurs. Set BCLIF. SCL = 0 before SDA = 0, Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 TBRG TBRG SDA = 0, SCL = 1 BCLIF S SSPIF Interrupt cleared by software bus collision occurs. Set BCLIF. SCL = 0 before BRG time-out, ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ SDA SCL SEN Set S Less than TBRG TBRG SDA = 0, SCL = 1 BCLIF S SSPIF S Interrupts cleared set SSPIF by software SDA = 0, SCL = 1, SCL pulled low after BRG time-out Set SSPIF ‘0’ SDA pulled low by other master. Reset BRG and assert SDA. Set SEN, enable START sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 178 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 15.3.17.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) A low level is sampled on SDA when SCL goes from low level to high level. b) SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. When the user deasserts SDA and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPADD and counts down to 0. The SCL pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDA pin is sampled. If SDA is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘0’, Figure 15-29). If SDA is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDA goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDA at exactly the same time. If SCL goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDA has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ during the Repeated Start condition, see Figure 15-30. If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCL and SDA are still high, the SDA pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCL pin, the SCL pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. FIGURE 15-29: BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1) FIGURE 15-30: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2) SDA SCL RSEN BCLIF S SSPIF Sample SDA when SCL goes high. If SDA = 0, set BCLIF and release SDA and SCL. Cleared by software ‘0’ ‘0’ SDA SCL BCLIF RSEN S SSPIF Interrupt cleared by software SCL goes low before SDA, set BCLIF. Release SDA and SCL. TBRG TBRG ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 179 PIC18F/LF1XK50 15.3.17.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: a) After the SDA pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDA is sampled low after the BRG has timed out. b) After the SCL pin is deasserted, SCL is sampled low before SDA goes high. The Stop condition begins with SDA asserted low. When SDA is sampled low, the SCL pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPADD and counts down to 0. After the BRG times out, SDA is sampled. If SDA is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 15-31). If the SCL pin is sampled low before SDA is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 15-32). FIGURE 15-31: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1) FIGURE 15-32: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2) SDA SCL BCLIF PEN P SSPIF TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA asserted low SDA sampled low after TBRG, set BCLIF ‘0’ ‘0’ SDA SCL BCLIF PEN P SSPIF TBRG TBRG TBRG Assert SDA SCL goes low before SDA goes high, set BCLIF ‘0’ ‘0’ PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 180 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 15-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2C™ Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 SSPADD SSP Address Register in I2C™ Slave Mode. SSP Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode. 286 SSPBUF SSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register 286 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 286 SSPCON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 286 SSPMSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 288 SSPSTAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 286 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 — — — — 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by I2C™.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 181 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (EUSART) The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is a serial I/O communications peripheral. It contains all the clock generators, shift registers and data buffers necessary to perform an input or output serial data transfer independent of device program execution. The EUSART, also known as a Serial Communications Interface (SCI), can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system or half-duplex synchronous system. Full-Duplex mode is useful for communications with peripheral systems, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. Half-Duplex Synchronous mode is intended for communications with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs or other microcontrollers. These devices typically do not have internal clocks for baud rate generation and require the external clock signal provided by a master synchronous device. The EUSART module includes the following capabilities: • Full-duplex asynchronous transmit and receive • Two-character input buffer • One-character output buffer • Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length • Address detection in 9-bit mode • Input buffer overrun error detection • Received character framing error detection • Half-duplex synchronous master • Half-duplex synchronous slave • Programmable clock and data polarity The EUSART module implements the following additional features, making it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus systems: • Automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate • Wake-up on Break reception • 13-bit Break character transmit Block diagrams of the EUSART transmitter and receiver are shown in Figure 16-1 and Figure 16-2. FIGURE 16-1: EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM TXIF TXIE Interrupt TXEN TX9D MSb LSb Data Bus TXREG Register Transmit Shift Register (TSR) (8) 0 TX9 TRMT SPEN TX/CK pin Pin Buffer and Control 8 SPBRGH SPBRG BRG16 FOSC ÷ n n + 1 Multiplier x4 x16 x64 SYNC 1 X 0 0 0 BRGH X 1 1 0 0 BRG16 X 1 0 1 0 Baud Rate Generator • • • PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 182 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 16-2: EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM The operation of the EUSART module is controlled through three registers: • Transmit Status and Control (TXSTA) • Receive Status and Control (RCSTA) • Baud Rate Control (BAUDCTL) These registers are detailed in Register 16-1, Register 16-2 and Register 16-3, respectively. For all modes of EUSART operation, the TRIS control bits corresponding to the RX/DT and TX/CK pins should be set to ‘1’. The EUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output, as needed. RX/DT pin Pin Buffer and Control SPEN Data Recovery CREN OERR FERR MSb RSR Register LSb RX9D RCREG Register FIFO RCIF Interrupt RCIE Data Bus 8 Stop (8) 7 1 0 START RX9 • • • SPBRGH SPBRG BRG16 RCIDL FOSC ÷ n + 1 Multiplier x4 x16 x64 n SYNC 1 X 0 0 0 BRGH X 1 1 0 0 BRG16 X 1 0 1 0 Baud Rate Generator  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 183 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.1 EUSART Asynchronous Mode The EUSART transmits and receives data using the standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. NRZ is implemented with two levels: a VOH mark state which represents a ‘1’ data bit, and a VOL space state which represents a ‘0’ data bit. NRZ refers to the fact that consecutively transmitted data bits of the same value stay at the output level of that bit without returning to a neutral level between each bit transmission. An NRZ transmission port idles in the mark state. Each character transmission consists of one Start bit followed by eight or nine data bits and is always terminated by one or more Stop bits. The Start bit is always a space and the Stop bits are always marks. The most common data format is 8 bits. Each transmitted bit persists for a period of 1/(Baud Rate). An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the system oscillator. See Table 16-5 for examples of baud rate configurations. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally independent, but share the same data format and baud rate. Parity is not supported by the hardware, but can be implemented in software and stored as the ninth data bit. 16.1.1 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 16-1. The heart of the transmitter is the serial Transmit Shift Register (TSR), which is not directly accessible by software. The TSR obtains its data from the transmit buffer, which is the TXREG register. 16.1.1.1 Enabling the Transmitter The EUSART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous operations by configuring the following three control bits: • TXEN = 1 • SYNC = 0 • SPEN = 1 All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. Setting the TXEN bit of the TXSTA register enables the transmitter circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the SYNC bit of the TXSTA register configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register enables the EUSART and automatically configures the TX/CK I/O pin as an output. If the TX/CK pin is shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. 16.1.1.2 Transmitting Data A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXREG register. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXREG is immediately transferred to the TSR register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character, the new character data is held in the TXREG until the Stop bit of the previous character has been transmitted. The pending character in the TXREG is then transferred to the TSR in one TCY immediately following the Stop bit transmission. The transmission of the Start bit, data bits and Stop bit sequence commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXREG. 16.1.1.3 Transmit Data Polarity The polarity of the transmit data can be controlled with the CKTXP bit of the BAUDCON register. The default state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true transmit idle and data bits. Setting the CKTXP bit to ‘1’ will invert the transmit data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The CKTXP bit controls transmit data polarity only in Asynchronous mode. In Synchronous mode the CKTXP bit has a different function. Note 1: When the SPEN bit is set the RX/DT I/O pin is automatically configured as an input, regardless of the state of the corresponding TRIS bit and whether or not the EUSART receiver is enabled. The RX/DT pin data can be read via a normal PORT read but PORT latch data output is precluded. 2: The TXIF transmitter interrupt flag is set when the TXEN enable bit is set. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 184 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.1.1.4 Transmit Interrupt Flag The TXIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register is set whenever the EUSART transmitter is enabled and no character is being held for transmission in the TXREG. In other words, the TXIF bit is only clear when the TSR is busy with a character and a new character has been queued for transmission in the TXREG. The TXIF flag bit is not cleared immediately upon writing TXREG. TXIF becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the write execution. Polling TXIF immediately following the TXREG write will return invalid results. The TXIF bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. The TXIF interrupt can be enabled by setting the TXIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1 register. However, the TXIF flag bit will be set whenever the TXREG is empty, regardless of the state of TXIE enable bit. To use interrupts when transmitting data, set the TXIE bit only when there is more data to send. Clear the TXIE interrupt enable bit upon writing the last character of the transmission to the TXREG. 16.1.1.5 TSR Status The TRMT bit of the TXSTA register indicates the status of the TSR register. This is a read-only bit. The TRMT bit is set when the TSR register is empty and is cleared when a character is transferred to the TSR register from the TXREG. The TRMT bit remains clear until all bits have been shifted out of the TSR register. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user needs to poll this bit to determine the TSR status. 16.1.1.6 Transmitting 9-Bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character transmissions. When the TX9 bit of the TXSTA register is set the EUSART will shift 9 bits out for each character transmitted. The TX9D bit of the TXSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant, data bit. When transmitting 9-bit data, the TX9D data bit must be written before writing the 8 Least Significant bits into the TXREG. All nine bits of data will be transferred to the TSR shift register immediately after the TXREG is written. A special 9-bit Address mode is available for use with multiple receivers. See Section 16.1.2.8 “Address Detection” for more information on the Address mode. 16.1.1.7 Asynchronous Transmission Set-up: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 3. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 control bit. A set ninth data bit will indicate that the 8 Least Significant data bits are an address when the receiver is set for address detection. 4. Set the CKTXP control bit if inverted transmit data polarity is desired. 5. Enable the transmission by setting the TXEN control bit. This will cause the TXIF interrupt bit to be set. 6. If interrupts are desired, set the TXIE interrupt enable bit. An interrupt will occur immediately provided that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are also set. 7. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded into the TX9D data bit. 8. Load 8-bit data into the TXREG register. This will start the transmission. Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 185 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 16-3: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION FIGURE 16-4: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK) TABLE 16-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 TXREG EUSART Transmit Register 287 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission. Word 1 Stop bit Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Write to TXREG Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) RB7/TX/CK TXIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) 1 TCY pin Transmit Shift Reg Write to TXREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) RB7/TX/CK TXIF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 Word 2 Word 1 Word 2 Start bit Stop bit Start bit Transmit Shift Reg Word 1 Word 2 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 bit 0 Note: This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. 1 TCY 1 TCY pin PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 186 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.1.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER The Asynchronous mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 16-2. The data is received on the RX/DT pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at 16 times the baud rate, whereas the serial Receive Shift Register (RSR) operates at the bit rate. When all 8 or 9 bits of the character have been shifted in, they are immediately transferred to a two character First-In-First-Out (FIFO) memory. The FIFO buffering allows reception of two complete characters and the start of a third character before software must start servicing the EUSART receiver. The FIFO and RSR registers are not directly accessible by software. Access to the received data is via the RCREG register. 16.1.2.1 Enabling the Receiver The EUSART receiver is enabled for asynchronous operation by configuring the following three control bits: • CREN = 1 • SYNC = 0 • SPEN = 1 All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. Setting the CREN bit of the RCSTA register enables the receiver circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the SYNC bit of the TXSTA register configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register enables the EUSART. The RX/DT I/O pin must be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRIS control bit. If the RX/DT pin is shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. 16.1.2.2 Receiving Data The receiver data recovery circuit initiates character reception on the falling edge of the first bit. The first bit, also known as the Start bit, is always a zero. The data recovery circuit counts one-half bit time to the center of the Start bit and verifies that the bit is still a zero. If it is not a zero then the data recovery circuit aborts character reception, without generating an error, and resumes looking for the falling edge of the Start bit. If the Start bit zero verification succeeds then the data recovery circuit counts a full bit time to the center of the next bit. The bit is then sampled by a majority detect circuit and the resulting ‘0’ or ‘1’ is shifted into the RSR. This repeats until all data bits have been sampled and shifted into the RSR. One final bit time is measured and the level sampled. This is the Stop bit, which is always a ‘1’. If the data recovery circuit samples a ‘0’ in the Stop bit position then a framing error is set for this character, otherwise the framing error is cleared for this character. See Section 16.1.2.5 “Receive Framing Error” for more information on framing errors. Immediately after all data bits and the Stop bit have been received, the character in the RSR is transferred to the EUSART receive FIFO and the RCIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register is set. The top character in the FIFO is transferred out of the FIFO by reading the RCREG register. 16.1.2.3 Receive Data Polarity The polarity of the receive data can be controlled with the DTRXP bit of the BAUDCON register. The default state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true receive idle and data bits. Setting the DTRXP bit to ‘1’ will invert the receive data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The DTRXP bit controls receive data polarity only in Asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode the DTRXP bit has a different function. Note: When the SPEN bit is set the TX/CK I/O pin is automatically configured as an output, regardless of the state of the corresponding TRIS bit and whether or not the EUSART transmitter is enabled. The PORT latch is disconnected from the output driver so it is not possible to use the TX/CK pin as a general purpose output. Note: If the receive FIFO is overrun, no additional characters will be received until the overrun condition is cleared. See Section 16.1.2.6 “Receive Overrun Error” for more information on overrun errors.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 187 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.1.2.4 Receive Interrupts The RCIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register is set whenever the EUSART receiver is enabled and there is an unread character in the receive FIFO. The RCIF interrupt flag bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. RCIF interrupts are enabled by setting the following bits: • RCIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1 register • PEIE peripheral interrupt enable bit of the INTCON register • GIE global interrupt enable bit of the INTCON register The RCIF interrupt flag bit will be set when there is an unread character in the FIFO, regardless of the state of interrupt enable bits. 16.1.2.5 Receive Framing Error Each character in the receive FIFO buffer has a corresponding framing error status bit. A framing error indicates that a Stop bit was not seen at the expected time. The framing error status is accessed via the FERR bit of the RCSTA register. The FERR bit represents the status of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. Therefore, the FERR bit must be read before reading the RCREG. The FERR bit is read-only and only applies to the top unread character in the receive FIFO. A framing error (FERR = 1) does not preclude reception of additional characters. It is not necessary to clear the FERR bit. Reading the next character from the FIFO buffer will advance the FIFO to the next character and the next corresponding framing error. The FERR bit can be forced clear by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register which resets the EUSART. Clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTA register does not affect the FERR bit. A framing error by itself does not generate an interrupt. 16.1.2.6 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated If a third character, in its entirety, is received before the FIFO is accessed. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCSTA register is set. The characters already in the FIFO buffer can be read but no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The error must be cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTA register or by resetting the EUSART by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register. 16.1.2.7 Receiving 9-bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCSTA register is set, the EUSART will shift 9 bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCSTA register is the ninth and Most Significant data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from the RCREG. 16.1.2.8 Address Detection A special Address Detection mode is available for use when multiple receivers share the same transmission line, such as in RS-485 systems. Address detection is enabled by setting the ADDEN bit of the RCSTA register. Address detection requires 9-bit character reception. When address detection is enabled, only characters with the ninth data bit set will be transferred to the receive FIFO buffer, thereby setting the RCIF interrupt bit. All other characters will be ignored. Upon receiving an address character, user software determines if the address matches its own. Upon address match, user software must disable address detection by clearing the ADDEN bit before the next Stop bit occurs. When user software detects the end of the message, determined by the message protocol used, software places the receiver back into the Address Detection mode by setting the ADDEN bit. Note: If all receive characters in the receive FIFO have framing errors, repeated reads of the RCREG will not clear the FERR bit. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 188 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.1.2.9 Asynchronous Reception Set-up: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). 2. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit and the RX/DT pin TRIS bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. 3. If interrupts are desired, set the RCIE interrupt enable bit and set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. 5. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is desired. 6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 7. The RCIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCIE interrupt enable bit was also set. 8. Read the RCSTA register to get the error flags and, if 9-bit data reception is enabled, the ninth data bit. 9. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCREG register. 10. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. 16.1.2.10 9-bit Address Detection Mode Set-up This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH, SPBRG register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). 2. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. 3. If interrupts are desired, set the RCIE interrupt enable bit and set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 4. Enable 9-bit reception by setting the RX9 bit. 5. Enable address detection by setting the ADDEN bit. 6. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is desired. 7. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 8. The RCIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character with the ninth bit set is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCIE interrupt enable bit was also set. 9. Read the RCSTA register to get the error flags. The ninth data bit will always be set. 10. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCREG register. Software determines if this is the device’s address. 11. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. 12. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and generate interrupts. FIGURE 16-5: ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit 0 bit 7/8 bit Start bit Start bit 7/8 Stop bit bit RX/DT pin Reg Rcv Buffer Reg Rcv Shift Read Rcv Buffer Reg RCREG RCIF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN Word 1 RCREG Word 2 RCREG Stop bit Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RX input. The RCREG (receive buffer) is read after the third word, causing the OERR (overrun) bit to be set. RCIDL  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 189 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 16-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 RCREG EUSART Receive Register 287 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 190 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.2 Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block output (HFINTOSC). However, the HFINTOSC frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and this directly affects the asynchronous baud rate. Two methods may be used to adjust the baud rate clock, but both require a reference clock source of some kind. The first (preferred) method uses the OSCTUNE register to adjust the HFINTOSC output. Adjusting the value in the OSCTUNE register allows for fine resolution changes to the system clock source. See Section 2.6.1 “OSCTUNE Register” for more information. The other method adjusts the value in the Baud Rate Generator. This can be done automatically with the Auto-Baud Detect feature (see Section 16.3.1 “Auto-Baud Detect”). There may not be fine enough resolution when adjusting the Baud Rate Generator to compensate for a gradual change in the peripheral clock frequency. REGISTER 16-1: TXSTA: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 CSRC TX9 TXEN(1) SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) bit 6 TX9: 9-bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission bit 5 TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit enabled 0 = Transmit disabled bit 4 SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode bit 3 SENDB: Send Break Character bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) 0 = Sync Break transmission completed Synchronous mode: Don’t care bit 2 BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode bit 1 TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR empty 0 = TSR full bit 0 TX9D: Ninth bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. Note 1: SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 191 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 16-2: RCSTA: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-x SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled (configures RX/DT and TX/CK pins as serial port pins) 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) bit 6 RX9: 9-bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception bit 5 SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care Synchronous mode – Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode – Slave Don’t care bit 4 CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive bit 3 ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enable interrupt and load the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit Asynchronous mode 8-bit (RX9 = 0): Don’t care bit 2 FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREG register and receive next valid byte) 0 = No framing error bit 1 OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN) 0 = No overrun error bit 0 RX9D: Ninth bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 192 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 16-3: BAUDCON: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER R-0 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Detect Overflow bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Auto-baud timer overflowed 0 = Auto-baud timer did not overflow Synchronous mode: Don’t care bit 6 RCIDL: Receive Idle Flag bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receiver is Idle 0 = Start bit has been detected and the receiver is active Synchronous mode: Don’t care bit 5 DTRXP: Data/Receive Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receive data (RX) is inverted (active-low) 0 = Receive data (RX) is not inverted (active-high) Synchronous mode: 1 = Data (DT) is inverted (active-low) 0 = Data (DT) is not inverted (active-high) bit 4 CKTXP: Clock/Transmit Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for transmit (TX) is low 0 = Idle state for transmit (TX) is high Synchronous mode: 1 = Data changes on the falling edge of the clock and is sampled on the rising edge of the clock 0 = Data changes on the rising edge of the clock and is sampled on the falling edge of the clock bit 3 BRG16: 16-bit Baud Rate Generator bit 1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used (SPBRGH:SPBRG) 0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator is used (SPBRG) bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 WUE: Wake-up Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receiver is waiting for a falling edge. No character will be received but RCIF will be set on the falling edge. WUE will automatically clear on the rising edge. 0 = Receiver is operating normally Synchronous mode: Don’t care bit 0 ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is enabled (clears when auto-baud is complete) 0 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is disabled Synchronous mode: Don’t care  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 193 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.3 EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is an 8-bit or 16-bit timer that is dedicated to the support of both the asynchronous and synchronous EUSART operation. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode. Setting the BRG16 bit of the BAUDCON register selects 16-bit mode. The SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair determines the period of the free running baud rate timer. In Asynchronous mode the multiplier of the baud rate period is determined by both the BRGH bit of the TXSTA register and the BRG16 bit of the BAUDCON register. In Synchronous mode, the BRGH bit is ignored. Table 16-3 contains the formulas for determining the baud rate. Example 16-1 provides a sample calculation for determining the baud rate and baud rate error. Typical baud rates and error values for various asynchronous modes have been computed for your convenience and are shown in Table 16-5. It may be advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1), or the 16-bit BRG (BRG16 = 1) to reduce the baud rate error. The 16-bit BRG mode is used to achieve slow baud rates for fast oscillator frequencies. Writing a new value to the SPBRGH, SPBRG register pair causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures that the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. If the system clock is changed during an active receive operation, a receive error or data loss may result. To avoid this problem, check the status of the RCIDL bit to make sure that the receive operation is Idle before changing the system clock. EXAMPLE 16-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR TABLE 16-3: BAUD RATE FORMULAS TABLE 16-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG: Solving for SPBRGH:SPBRG: Desired Baud Rate FOSC 64[SPBRGH:SPBRG] + 1 = -------------------------------------------------------------------- = 25.042 = 25 Calculated Baud Rate 16000000 6425 + 1 = --------------------------- = 9615 Error Calc. Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate Desired Baud Rate = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9615 – 9600 9600 = ---------------------------------- = 0.16% FOSC X = 64 * (Desired Baud Rate) ( )-1 16,000,000 = 64 * 9600 ( )-1 Configuration Bits BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula SYNC BRG16 BRGH 0 0 0 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[64 (n+1)] 0 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[16 (n+1)] 0 1 0 16-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 1 16-bit/Asynchronous 1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous FOSC/[4 (n+1)] 1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous Legend: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPBRGH, SPBRG register pair Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the BRG. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 194 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 48.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 12.000 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — — — — 1200 — — — 1200 0.00 239 1202 0.16 155 1200 0.00 143 2400 — — — 2400 0.00 119 2404 0.16 77 2400 0.00 71 9600 9615 0.16 77 9600 0.00 29 9375 -2.34 19 9600 0.00 17 10417 10417 0.00 71 10286 -1.26 27 10417 0.00 17 10165 -2.42 16 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 38 19.20k 0.00 14 18.75k -2.34 9 19.20k 0.00 8 57.6k 57.69k 0.16 12 57.60k 0.00 7 — — — 57.60k 0.00 2 115.2k — — — — — — — — — — — — BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 8.000 MHz FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 3.6864 MHz FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 300 — — — 300 0.16 207 300 0.00 191 300 0.16 51 1200 1202 0.16 103 1202 0.16 51 1200 0.00 47 1202 0.16 12 2400 2404 0.16 51 2404 0.16 25 2400 0.00 23 — — — 9600 9615 0.16 12 — — — 9600 0.00 5 — — — 10417 10417 0.00 11 10417 0.00 5 — — — — — — 19.2k — — — — — — 19.20k 0.00 2 — — — 57.6k — — — — — — 57.60k 0.00 0 — — — 115.2k — — — — — — — — — — — — BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 48.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 12.000 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — — — — 1200 — — — — — — — — — — — — 2400 — — — — — — — — — — — — 9600 — — — 9600 0.00 119 9615 0.16 77 9600 0.00 71 10417 — — — 10378 -0.37 110 10417 0.00 71 10473 0.53 65 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 155 19.20k 0.00 59 19.23k 0.16 38 19.20k 0.00 35 57.6k 57.69k 0.16 51 57.60k 0.00 19 57.69k 0.16 12 57.60k 0.00 11 115.2k 115.38k 0.16 25 115.2k 0.00 9 — — — 115.2k 0.00 5  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 195 PIC18F/LF1XK50 BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 8.000 MHz FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 3.6864 MHz FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — 300 0.16 207 1200 — — — 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51 2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25 9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — — 10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 10417 0.00 5 19.2k 19231 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.2k 0.00 11 — — — 57.6k 55556 -3.55 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — — 115.2k — — — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — — BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 FOSC = 48.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 12.000 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) 300 300.0 0.00 9999 300.0 0.00 3839 300 0.00 2499 300.0 0.00 2303 1200 1200.1 0.00 2499 1200 0.00 959 1200 0.00 624 1200 0.00 575 2400 2400 0.00 1249 2400 0.00 479 2404 0.16 311 2400 0.00 287 9600 9615 0.16 311 9600 0.00 119 9615 0.16 77 9600 0.00 71 10417 10417 0.00 287 10378 -0.37 110 10417 0.00 71 10473 0.53 65 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 155 19.20k 0.00 59 19.23k 0.16 38 19.20k 0.00 35 57.6k 57.69k 0.16 51 57.60k 0.00 19 57.69k 0.16 12 57.60k 0.00 11 115.2k 115.38k 0.16 25 115.2k 0.00 9 — — — 115.2k 0.00 5 BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 FOSC = 8.000 MHz FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 3.6864 MHz FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) 300 299.9 -0.02 1666 300.1 0.04 832 300.0 0.00 767 300.5 0.16 207 1200 1199 -0.08 416 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51 2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25 9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — — 10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 10417 0.00 5 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.20k 0.00 11 — — — 57.6k 55556 -3.55 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — — 115.2k — — — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — — TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 196 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 FOSC = 48.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 12.000 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) 300 300 0.00 39999 300.0 0.00 15359 300 0.00 9999 300.0 0.00 9215 1200 1200 0.00 9999 1200 0.00 3839 1200 0.00 2499 1200 0.00 2303 2400 2400 0.00 4999 2400 0.00 1919 2400 0.00 1249 2400 0.00 1151 9600 9600 0.00 1249 9600 0.00 479 9615 0.16 311 9600 0.00 287 10417 10417 0.00 1151 10425 0.08 441 10417 0.00 287 10433 0.16 264 19.2k 19.20k 0.00 624 19.20k 0.00 239 19.23k 0.16 155 19.20k 0.00 143 57.6k 57.69k 0.16 207 57.60k 0.00 79 57.69k 0.16 51 57.60k 0.00 47 115.2k 115.38k 0.16 103 115.2k 0.00 39 115.38k 0.16 25 115.2k 0.00 23 BAUD RATE SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 FOSC = 8.000 MHz FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 3.6864 MHz FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) Actual Rate % Error SPBRGH :SPBRG (decimal) 300 300.0 0.00 6666 300.0 0.01 3332 300.0 0.00 3071 300.1 0.04 832 1200 1200 -0.02 1666 1200 0.04 832 1200 0.00 767 1202 0.16 207 2400 2401 0.04 832 2398 0.08 416 2400 0.00 383 2404 0.16 103 9600 9615 0.16 207 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 95 9615 0.16 25 10417 10417 0.00 191 10417 0.00 95 10473 0.53 87 10417 0.00 23 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 103 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 47 19.23k 0.16 12 57.6k 57.14k -0.79 34 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 15 — — — 115.2k 117.6k 2.12 16 111.1k -3.55 8 115.2k 0.00 7 — — — TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 197 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.3.1 AUTO-BAUD DETECT The EUSART module supports automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate. In the Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RX signal, the RX signal is timing the BRG. The Baud Rate Generator is used to time the period of a received 55h (ASCII “U”) which is the Sync character for the LIN bus. The unique feature of this character is that it has five rising edges including the Stop bit edge. Setting the ABDEN bit of the BAUDCON register starts the auto-baud calibration sequence (Figure 16-6). While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. On the first rising edge of the receive line, after the Start bit, the SPBRG begins counting up using the BRG counter clock as shown in Table 16-6. The fifth rising edge will occur on the RX pin at the end of the eighth bit period. At that time, an accumulated value totaling the proper BRG period is left in the SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair, the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared, and the RCIF interrupt flag is set. A read operation on the RCREG needs to be performed to clear the RCIF interrupt. RCREG content should be discarded. When calibrating for modes that do not use the SPBRGH register the user can verify that the SPBRG register did not overflow by checking for 00h in the SPBRGH register. The BRG auto-baud clock is determined by the BRG16 and BRGH bits as shown in Table 16-6. During ABD, both the SPBRGH and SPBRG registers are used as a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 bit setting. While calibrating the baud rate period, the SPBRGH and SPBRG registers are clocked at 1/8th the BRG base clock rate. The resulting byte measurement is the average bit time when clocked at full speed. TABLE 16-6: BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES FIGURE 16-6: AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALIBRATION Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, auto-baud detection will occur on the byte following the Break character (see Section 16.3.3 “Auto-Wake-up on Break”). 2: It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible. 3: During the auto-baud process, the auto-baud counter starts counting at 1. Upon completion of the auto-baud sequence, to achieve maximum accuracy, subtract 1 from the SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair. BRG16 BRGH BRG Base Clock BRG ABD Clock 0 0 FOSC/64 FOSC/512 0 1 FOSC/16 FOSC/128 1 0 FOSC/16 FOSC/128 1 1 FOSC/4 FOSC/32 Note: During the ABD sequence, SPBRG and SPBRGH registers are both used as a 16-bit counter, independent of BRG16 setting. BRG Value RX pin ABDEN bit RCIF bit bit 0 bit 1 (Interrupt) Read RCREG BRG Clock Start Set by User Auto Cleared XXXXh 0000h Edge #1 bit 2 bit 3 Edge #2 bit 4 bit 5 Edge #3 bit 6 bit 7 Edge #4 Stop bit Edge #5 001Ch Note 1: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode. SPBRG XXh 1Ch SPBRGH XXh 00h RCIDL PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 198 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.3.2 AUTO-BAUD OVERFLOW During the course of automatic baud detection, the ABDOVF bit of the BAUDCON register will be set if the baud rate counter overflows before the fifth rising edge is detected on the RX pin. The ABDOVF bit indicates that the counter has exceeded the maximum count that can fit in the 16 bits of the SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair. After the ABDOVF has been set, the counter continues to count until the fifth rising edge is detected on the RX pin. Upon detecting the fifth RX edge, the hardware will set the RCIF Interrupt Flag and clear the ABDEN bit of the BAUDCON register. The RCIF flag can be subsequently cleared by reading the RCREG register. The ABDOVF flag of the BAUDCON register can be cleared by software directly. To terminate the auto-baud process before the RCIF flag is set, clear the ABDEN bit then clear the ABDOVF bit of the BAUDCON register. The ABDOVF bit will remain set if the ABDEN bit is not cleared first. 16.3.3 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON BREAK During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator is inactive and a proper character reception cannot be performed. The Auto-Wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up due to activity on the RX/DT line. This feature is available only in Asynchronous mode. The Auto-Wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit of the BAUDCON register. Once set, the normal receive sequence on RX/DT is disabled, and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the RX/DT line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a wake-up signal character for the LIN protocol.) The EUSART module generates an RCIF interrupt coincident with the wake-up event. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal CPU operating modes (Figure 16-7), and asynchronously if the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 16-8). The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCREG register. The WUE bit is automatically cleared by the low-to-high transition on the RX line at the end of the Break. This signals to the user that the Break event is over. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode waiting to receive the next character. 16.3.3.1 Special Considerations Break Character To avoid character errors or character fragments during a wake-up event, the wake-up character must be all zeros. When the wake-up is enabled the function works independent of the low time on the data stream. If the WUE bit is set and a valid non-zero character is received, the low time from the Start bit to the first rising edge will be interpreted as the wake-up event. The remaining bits in the character will be received as a fragmented character and subsequent characters can result in framing or overrun errors. Therefore, the initial character in the transmission must be all ‘0’s. This must be 10 or more bit times, 13-bit times recommended for LIN bus, or any number of bit times for standard RS-232 devices. Oscillator Startup Time Oscillator start-up time must be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., LP, XT or HS/PLL mode). The Sync Break (or wake-up signal) character must be of sufficient length, and be followed by a sufficient interval, to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. WUE Bit The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RCIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared by hardware by a rising edge on RX/DT. The interrupt condition is then cleared by software by reading the RCREG register and discarding its contents. To ensure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process before setting the WUE bit. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 199 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 16-7: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMING DURING NORMAL OPERATION FIGURE 16-8: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2Q3Q4 Q1Q2Q3Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3Q4 Q1Q2 Q3Q4 Q1 Q2Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3Q4 OSC1 WUE bit RX/DT Line RCIF Bit set by user Auto Cleared Cleared due to User Read of RCREG Note 1: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. Q1Q2Q3 Q4 Q1Q2Q3Q4 Q1Q2Q3Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3Q4 Q1Q2Q3 Q4 Q1Q2Q3Q4 Q1Q2Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3Q4 OSC1 WUE bit RX/DT Line RCIF Bit Set by User Auto Cleared Cleared due to User Read of RCREG Sleep Command Executed Note 1 Note 1: If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the automatic clearing of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is still active. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks. 2: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. Sleep Ends PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 200 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.3.4 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE The EUSART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN bus standard. A Break character consists of a Start bit, followed by 12 ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit. To send a Break character, set the SENDB and TXEN bits of the TXSTA register. The Break character transmission is then initiated by a write to the TXREG. The value of data written to TXREG will be ignored and all ‘0’s will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN specification). The TRMT bit of the TXSTA register indicates when the transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 16-9 for the timing of the Break character sequence. 16.3.4.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will start a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an auto-baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master. 1. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. 2. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to enable the Break sequence. 3. Load the TXREG with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). 4. Write ‘55h’ to TXREG to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. 5. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware and the Sync character is then transmitted. When the TXREG becomes empty, as indicated by the TXIF, the next data byte can be written to TXREG. 16.3.5 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER The Enhanced EUSART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method to detect a Break character uses the FERR bit of the RCSTA register and the Received data as indicated by RCREG. The Baud Rate Generator is assumed to have been initialized to the expected baud rate. A Break character has been received when; • RCIF bit is set • FERR bit is set • RCREG = 00h The second method uses the Auto-Wake-up feature described in Section 16.3.3 “Auto-Wake-up on Break”. By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RX/DT, cause an RCIF interrupt, and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit of the BAUDCON register before placing the EUSART in Sleep mode. FIGURE 16-9: SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE Write to TXREG Dummy Write BRG Output (Shift Clock) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 11 Stop bit Break TXIF bit (Transmit interrupt Flag) TX (pin) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) SENDB (send Break control bit) SENDB Sampled Here Auto Cleared  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 201 PIC18F/LF1XK50 16.4 EUSART Synchronous Mode Synchronous serial communications are typically used in systems with a single master and one or more slaves. The master device contains the necessary circuitry for baud rate generation and supplies the clock for all devices in the system. Slave devices can take advantage of the master clock by eliminating the internal clock generation circuitry. There are two signal lines in Synchronous mode: a bidirectional data line and a clock line. Slaves use the external clock supplied by the master to shift the serial data into and out of their respective receive and transmit shift registers. Since the data line is bidirectional, synchronous operation is half-duplex only. Half-duplex refers to the fact that master and slave devices can receive and transmit data but not both simultaneously. The EUSART can operate as either a master or slave device. Start and Stop bits are not used in synchronous transmissions. 16.4.1 SYNCHRONOUS MASTER MODE The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for Synchronous Master operation: • SYNC = 1 • CSRC = 1 • SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive) • CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive) • SPEN = 1 Setting the SYNC bit of the TXSTA register configures the device for synchronous operation. Setting the CSRC bit of the TXSTA register configures the device as a master. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register enables the EUSART. If the RX/DT or TX/CK pins are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bits. The TRIS bits corresponding to the RX/DT and TX/CK pins should be set. 16.4.1.1 Master Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a master transmits the clock on the TX/CK line. The TX/CK pin output driver is automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One clock cycle is generated for each data bit. Only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits. 16.4.1.2 Clock Polarity A clock polarity option is provided for Microwire compatibility. Clock polarity is selected with the CKTXP bit of the BAUDCON register. Setting the CKTXP bit sets the clock Idle state as high. When the CKTXP bit is set, the data changes on the falling edge of each clock and is sampled on the rising edge of each clock. Clearing the CKTXP bit sets the Idle state as low. When the CKTXP bit is cleared, the data changes on the rising edge of each clock and is sampled on the falling edge of each clock. 16.4.1.3 Synchronous Master Transmission Data is transferred out of the device on the RX/DT pin. The RX/DT and TX/CK pin output drivers are automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master transmit operation. A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXREG register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character the new character data is held in the TXREG until the last bit of the previous character has been transmitted. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXREG is immediately transferred to the TSR. The transmission of the character commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXREG. Each data bit changes on the leading edge of the master clock and remains valid until the subsequent leading clock edge. 16.4.1.4 Data Polarity The polarity of the transmit and receive data can be controlled with the DTRXP bit of the BAUDCON register. The default state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true transmit and receive data. Setting the DTRXP bit to ‘1’ will invert the data resulting in low true transmit and receive data. Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 202 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.4.1.5 Synchronous Master Transmission Set-up: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH, SPBRG register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). 2. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Set the TRIS bits corresponding to the RX/DT and TX/CK I/O pins. 3. Disable Receive mode by clearing bits SREN and CREN. 4. Enable Transmit mode by setting the TXEN bit. 5. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. 6. If interrupts are desired, set the TXIE, GIE and PEIE interrupt enable bits. 7. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in the TX9D bit. 8. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG register. FIGURE 16-10: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION FIGURE 16-11: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 Word 1 bit 2 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 RX/DT Write to TXREG Reg TXIF bit (Interrupt Flag) TXEN bit ‘1’ ‘1’ Word 2 TRMT bit Write Word 1 Write Word 2 Note: Sync Master mode, SPBRG = 0, continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. pin TX/CK pin TX/CK pin (SCKP = 0) (SCKP = 1) RX/DT pin TX/CK pin Write to TXREG reg TXIF bit TRMT bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 TXEN bit  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 203 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 16-7: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION 16.4.1.6 Synchronous Master Reception Data is received at the RX/DT pin. The RX/DT pin output driver must be disabled by setting the corresponding TRIS bits when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master receive operation. In Synchronous mode, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit (SREN of the RCSTA register) or the Continuous Receive Enable bit (CREN of the RCSTA register). When SREN is set and CREN is clear, only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits in a single character. The SREN bit is automatically cleared at the completion of one character. When CREN is set, clocks are continuously generated until CREN is cleared. If CREN is cleared in the middle of a character the CK clock stops immediately and the partial character is discarded. If SREN and CREN are both set, then SREN is cleared at the completion of the first character and CREN takes precedence. To initiate reception, set either SREN or CREN. Data is sampled at the RX/DT pin on the trailing edge of the TX/CK clock pin and is shifted into the Receive Shift Register (RSR). When a complete character is received into the RSR, the RCIF bit is set and the character is automatically transferred to the two character receive FIFO. The Least Significant eight bits of the top character in the receive FIFO are available in RCREG. The RCIF bit remains set as long as there are un-read characters in the receive FIFO. 16.4.1.7 Slave Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a slave receives the clock on the TX/CK line. The TX/CK pin output driver must be disabled by setting the associated TRIS bit when the device is configured for synchronous slave transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One data bit is transferred for each clock cycle. Only as many clock cycles should be received as there are data bits. 16.4.1.8 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its entirety, is received before RCREG is read to access the FIFO. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCSTA register is set. Previous data in the FIFO will not be overwritten. The two characters in the FIFO buffer can be read, however, no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The OERR bit can only be cleared by clearing the overrun condition. If the overrun error occurred when the SREN bit is set and CREN is clear then the error is cleared by reading RCREG. If the overrun occurred when the CREN bit is set then the error condition is cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 TXREG EUSART Transmit Register 287 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 204 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 16.4.1.9 Receiving 9-bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCSTA register is set the EUSART will shift 9-bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant, data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from the RCREG. 16.4.1.10 Synchronous Master Reception Set-up: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH, SPBRG register pair for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Disable RX/DT and TX/CK output drivers by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. 3. Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear. 4. If using interrupts, set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register and set RCIE. 5. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9. 6. Start reception by setting the SREN bit or for continuous reception, set the CREN bit. 7. Interrupt flag bit RCIF will be set when reception of a character is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the enable bit RCIE was set. 8. Read the RCSTA register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG register. 10. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. FIGURE 16-12: SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) CREN bit RX/DT Write to bit SREN SREN bit RCIF bit (Interrupt) Read RXREG ‘0’ bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 ‘0’ Note: Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0. TX/CK pin TX/CK pin pin (SCKP = 0) (SCKP = 1)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 205 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 16-8: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION 16.4.2 SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE MODE The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for Synchronous slave operation: • SYNC = 1 • CSRC = 0 • SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive) • CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive) • SPEN = 1 Setting the SYNC bit of the TXSTA register configures the device for synchronous operation. Clearing the CSRC bit of the TXSTA register configures the device as a slave. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTA register enables the EUSART. If the RX/DT or TX/CK pins are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bits. RX/DT and TX/CK pin output drivers must be disabled by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. 16.4.2.1 EUSART Synchronous Slave Transmit The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes are identical (see Section 16.4.1.3 “Synchronous Master Transmission”), except in the case of the Sleep mode. If two words are written to the TXREG and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: 1. The first character will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. 2. The second word will remain in TXREG register. 3. The TXIF bit will not be set. 4. After the first character has been shifted out of TSR, the TXREG register will transfer the second character to the TSR and the TXIF bit will now be set. 5. If the PEIE and TXIE bits are set, the interrupt will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will call the Interrupt Service Routine. 16.4.2.2 Synchronous Slave Transmission Set-up: 1. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Set the TRIS bits corresponding to the RX/DT and TX/CK I/O pins. 2. Clear the CREN and SREN bits. 3. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are set and set the TXIE bit. 4. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. 5. Enable transmission by setting the TXEN bit. 6. If 9-bit transmission is selected, insert the Most Significant bit into the TX9D bit. 7. Start transmission by writing the Least Significant 8 bits to the TXREG register. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 RCREG EUSART Receive Register 287 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 206 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 16-9: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION 16.4.2.3 EUSART Synchronous Slave Reception The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical (Section 16.4.1.6 “Synchronous Master Reception”), with the following exceptions: • Sleep • CREN bit is always set, therefore the receiver is never Idle • SREN bit, which is a “don't care” in Slave mode A character may be received while in Sleep mode by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCREG register. If the RCIE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 16.4.2.4 Synchronous Slave Reception Set-up: 1. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Set the TRIS bits corresponding to the RX/DT and TX/CK I/O pins. 2. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are set and set the RCIE bit. 3. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. 4. Set the CREN bit to enable reception. 5. The RCIF bit will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the RCIE bit was set. 6. If 9-bit mode is enabled, retrieve the Most Significant bit from the RX9D bit of the RCSTA register. 7. Retrieve the 8 Least Significant bits from the receive FIFO by reading the RCREG register. 8. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 TXREG EUSART Transmit Register 287 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 207 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 16-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 287 RCREG EUSART Receive Register 287 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 287 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 287 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 287 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 287 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 208 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 209 PIC18F/LF1XK50 17.0 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) MODULE The Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) allows conversion of an analog input signal to a 10-bit binary representation of that signal. This device uses analog inputs, which are multiplexed into a single sample and hold circuit. The output of the sample and hold is connected to the input of the converter. The converter generates a 10-bit binary result via successive approximation and stores the conversion result into the ADC result registers (ADRESL and ADRESH). The ADC voltage reference is software selectable to either VDD, or a voltage applied to the external reference pins. The ADC can generate an interrupt upon completion of a conversion. This interrupt can be used to wake-up the device from Sleep. Figure 17-1 shows the block diagram of the ADC. FIGURE 17-1: ADC BLOCK DIAGRAM ADC AN4 AVDD VREF+ ADON GO/DONE CHS<3:0> ADRESH ADRESL 10 10 ADFM VSS AN5 AN6 AN7 AN3 AN8 AN9 AN10 AN11 AVSS VREFNVCFG[ 1:0] = 00 FVR 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0111 0110 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Unused Unused 0 = Left Justify 1 = Right Justify Unused Unused Unused DAC NVCFG[1:0] = 01 FVR PVCFG[1:0] = 00 PVCFG[1:0] = 01 PVCFG[1:0] = 10 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 210 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 17.1 ADC Configuration When configuring and using the ADC the following functions must be considered: • Port configuration • Channel selection • ADC voltage reference selection • ADC conversion clock source • Interrupt control • Results formatting 17.1.1 PORT CONFIGURATION The ANSEL, ANSELH, TRISA, TRISB and TRISE registers all configure the A/D port pins. Any port pin needed as an analog input should have its corresponding ANSx bit set to disable the digital input buffer and TRISx bit set to disable the digital output driver. If the TRISx bit is cleared, the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. The A/D operation is independent of the state of the ANSx bits and the TRIS bits. 17.1.2 CHANNEL SELECTION The CHS bits of the ADCON0 register determine which channel is connected to the sample and hold circuit. When changing channels, a delay is required before starting the next conversion. Refer to Section 17.2 “ADC Operation” for more information. 17.1.3 ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE The PVCFG and NVCFG bits of the ADCON1 register provide independent control of the positive and negative voltage references, respectively. The positive voltage reference can be either VDD, FVR or an external voltage source. The negative voltage reference can be either VSS or an external voltage source. 17.1.4 SELECTING AND CONFIGURING ACQUISITION TIME The ADCON2 register allows the user to select an acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE bit is set. Acquisition time is set with the ACQT<2:0> bits of the ADCON2 register. Acquisition delays cover a range of 2 to 20 TAD. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D module continues to sample the input for the selected acquisition time, then automatically begins a conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed, there is no need to wait for an acquisition time between selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. Manual acquisition is selected when ACQT<2:0> = 000. When the GO/DONE bit is set, sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time has passed between selecting the desired input channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This option is also the default Reset state of the ACQT<2:0> bits and is compatible with devices that do not offer programmable acquisition times. In either case, when the conversion is completed, the GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel again. When an acquisition time is programmed, there is no indication of when the acquisition time ends and the conversion begins. 17.1.5 CONVERSION CLOCK The source of the conversion clock is software selectable via the ADCS bits of the ADCON2 register. There are seven possible clock options: • FOSC/2 • FOSC/4 • FOSC/8 • FOSC/16 • FOSC/32 • FOSC/64 • FRC (dedicated internal oscillator) The time to complete one bit conversion is defined as TAD. One full 10-bit conversion requires 11 TAD periods as shown in Figure 17-3. For correct conversion, the appropriate TAD specification must be met. See A/D conversion requirements in Table 27-9 for more information. Table 17-1 gives examples of appropriate ADC clock selections. Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins with their corresponding ANSx bit set read as cleared (a low level). However, analog conversion of pins configured as digital inputs (ANSx bit cleared and TRISx bit set) will be accurately converted. 2: Analog levels on any pin with the corresponding ANSx bit cleared may cause the digital input buffer to consume current out of the device’s specification limits. Note: Unless using the FRC, any changes in the system clock frequency will change the ADC clock frequency, which may adversely affect the ADC result.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 211 PIC18F/LF1XK50 17.1.6 INTERRUPTS The ADC module allows for the ability to generate an interrupt upon completion of an Analog-to-Digital Conversion. The ADC interrupt flag is the ADIF bit in the PIR1 register. The ADC interrupt enable is the ADIE bit in the PIE1 register. The ADIF bit must be cleared by software. This interrupt can be generated while the device is operating or while in Sleep. If the device is in Sleep, the interrupt will wake-up the device. Upon waking from Sleep, the next instruction following the SLEEP instruction is always executed. If the user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code execution, the global interrupt must be disabled. If the global interrupt is enabled, execution will switch to the Interrupt Service Routine. Please see Section 17.1.6 “Interrupts” for more information. TABLE 17-1: ADC CLOCK PERIOD (TAD) VS. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES 17.1.7 RESULT FORMATTING The 10-bit A/D conversion result can be supplied in two formats, left justified or right justified. The ADFM bit of the ADCON2 register controls the output format. Figure 17-2 shows the two output formats. FIGURE 17-2: 10-BIT A/D CONVERSION RESULT FORMAT Note: The ADIF bit is set at the completion of every conversion, regardless of whether or not the ADC interrupt is enabled. ADC Clock Period (TAD) Device Frequency (FOSC) ADC Clock Source ADCS<2:0> 48 MHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz FOSC/2 000 41.67 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 s FOSC/4 100 83.33 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 1.0 s 4.0 s FOSC/8 001 167 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 s 8.0 s(3) FOSC/16 101 333 ns(2) 1.0 s 4.0 s 16.0 s(3) FOSC/32 010 667 ns(2) 2.0 s 8.0 s(3) 32.0 s(3) FOSC/64 110 1.33 s 4.0 s 16.0 s(3) 64.0 s(3) FRC x11 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4) Legend: Shaded cells are outside of recommended range. Note 1: The FRC source has a typical TAD time of 1.7 s. 2: These values violate the minimum required TAD time. 3: For faster conversion times, the selection of another clock source is recommended. 4: When the device frequency is greater than 1 MHz, the FRC clock source is only recommended if the conversion will be performed during Sleep. ADRESH ADRESL (ADFM = 0) MSB LSB bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 10-bit A/D Result Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ (ADFM = 1) MSB LSB bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 10-bit A/D Result PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 212 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 17.2 ADC Operation 17.2.1 STARTING A CONVERSION To enable the ADC module, the ADON bit of the ADCON0 register must be set to a ‘1’. Setting the GO/ DONE bit of the ADCON0 register to a ‘1’ will, depending on the ACQT bits of the ADCON2 register, either immediately start the Analog-to-Digital conversion or start an acquisition delay followed by the Analog-to- Digital conversion. Figure 17-3 shows the operation of the A/D converter after the GO bit has been set and the ACQT<2:0> bits are cleared. A conversion is started after the following instruction to allow entry into SLEEP mode before the conversion begins. Figure 17-4 shows the operation of the A/D converter after the GO bit has been set and the ACQT<2:0> bits are set to ‘010’ which selects a 4 TAD acquisition time before the conversion starts. FIGURE 17-3: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 000, TACQ = 0) FIGURE 17-4: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD) Note: The GO/DONE bit should not be set in the same instruction that turns on the ADC. Refer to Section 17.2.9 “A/D Conversion Procedure”. TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD11 Set GO bit Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) TCY - TAD TAD9 TAD10 ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. Conversion starts b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 On the following cycle: 2 TAD Discharge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 Set GO bit (Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input) 9 10 Conversion starts 1 2 3 4 (Holding capacitor continues acquiring input) TACQT Cycles TAD Cycles Automatic Acquisition Time b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. On the following cycle: 2 TAD Discharge  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 213 PIC18F/LF1XK50 17.2.2 COMPLETION OF A CONVERSION When the conversion is complete, the ADC module will: • Clear the GO/DONE bit • Set the ADIF flag bit • Update the ADRESH:ADRESL registers with new conversion result 17.2.3 DISCHARGE The discharge phase is used to initialize the value of the capacitor array. The array is discharged after every sample. This feature helps to optimize the unity-gain amplifier, as the circuit always needs to charge the capacitor array, rather than charge/discharge based on previous measure values. 17.2.4 TERMINATING A CONVERSION If a conversion must be terminated before completion, the GO/DONE bit can be cleared by software. The ADRESH:ADRESL registers will be updated with the partially complete Analog-to-Digital conversion sample. Unconverted bits will match the last bit converted. 17.2.5 DELAY BETWEEN CONVERSIONS After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a 2 TAD wait is required before the next acquisition can be started. After this wait, the currently selected channel is reconnected to the charge holding capacitor commencing the next acquisition. 17.2.6 ADC OPERATION IN POWERMANAGED MODES The selection of the automatic acquisition time and A/D conversion clock is determined in part by the clock source and frequency while in a power-managed mode. If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in a power-managed mode, the ACQT<2:0> and ADCS<2:0> bits in ADCON2 should be updated in accordance with the clock source to be used in that mode. After entering the mode, an A/D acquisition or conversion may be started. Once started, the device should continue to be clocked by the same clock source until the conversion has been completed. If desired, the device may be placed into the corresponding Idle mode during the conversion. If the device clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D FRC clock source should be selected. 17.2.7 ADC OPERATION DURING SLEEP The ADC module can operate during Sleep. This requires the ADC clock source to be set to the FRC option. When the FRC clock source is selected, the ADC waits one additional instruction before starting the conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed, which can reduce system noise during the conversion. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device will wake-up from Sleep when the conversion completes. If the ADC interrupt is disabled, the ADC module is turned off after the conversion completes, although the ADON bit remains set. When the ADC clock source is something other than FRC, a SLEEP instruction causes the present conversion to be aborted and the ADC module is turned off, although the ADON bit remains set. 17.2.8 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER The CCP1 Special Event Trigger allows periodic ADC measurements without software intervention. When this trigger occurs, the GO/DONE bit is set by hardware and the Timer1 or Timer3 counter resets to zero. Using the Special Event Trigger does not assure proper ADC timing. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the ADC timing requirements are met. See Section 14.3.4 “Special Event Trigger” for more information. Note: A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. Thus, the ADC module is turned off and any pending conversion is terminated. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 214 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 17.2.9 A/D CONVERSION PROCEDURE This is an example procedure for using the ADC to perform an Analog-to-Digital conversion: 1. Configure Port: • Disable pin output driver (See TRIS register) • Configure pin as analog 2. Configure the ADC module: • Select ADC conversion clock • Configure voltage reference • Select ADC input channel • Select result format • Select acquisition delay • Turn on ADC module 3. Configure ADC interrupt (optional): • Clear ADC interrupt flag • Enable ADC interrupt • Enable peripheral interrupt • Enable global interrupt(1) 4. Wait the required acquisition time(2). 5. Start conversion by setting the GO/DONE bit. 6. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one of the following: • Polling the GO/DONE bit • Waiting for the ADC interrupt (interrupts enabled) 7. Read ADC Result 8. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (required if interrupt is enabled). EXAMPLE 17-1: A/D CONVERSION Note 1: The global interrupt can be disabled if the user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code execution. 2: Software delay required if ACQT bits are set to zero delay. See Section 17.3 “A/D Acquisition Requirements”. ;This code block configures the ADC ;for polling, Vdd and Vss as reference, Frc clock and AN4 input. ; ;Conversion start & polling for completion ; are included. ; MOVLW B’10101111’ ;right justify, Frc, MOVWF ADCON2 ; & 12 TAD ACQ time MOVLW B’00000000’ ;ADC ref = Vdd,Vss MOVWF ADCON1 ; BSF TRISC,0 ;Set RC0 to input BSF ANSEL,4 ;Set RC0 to analog MOVLW B’00010001’ ;AN4, ADC on MOVWF ADCON0 ; BSF ADCON0,GO ;Start conversion ADCPoll: BTFSC ADCON0,GO ;Is conversion done? BRA ADCPoll ;No, test again ; Result is complete - store 2 MSbits in ; RESULTHI and 8 LSbits in RESULTLO MOVFF ADRESH,RESULTHI MOVFF ADRESL,RESULTLO  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 215 PIC18F/LF1XK50 17.2.10 ADC REGISTER DEFINITIONS The following registers are used to control the operation of the ADC. Note: Analog pin control is performed by the ANSEL and ANSELH registers. For ANSEL and ANSELH registers, see Register 9-15 and Register 9-16, respectively. REGISTER 17-1: ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-2 CHS<3:0>: Analog Channel Select bits 0000 = Reserved 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Reserved 0011 = AN3 0100 = AN4 0101 = AN5 0110 = AN6 0111 = AN7 1000 = AN8 1001 = AN9 1010 = AN10 1011 = AN11 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = DAC 1111 = FVR bit 1 GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit 1 = A/D conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an A/D conversion cycle. This bit is automatically cleared by hardware when the A/D conversion has completed. 0 = A/D conversion completed/not in progress bit 0 ADON: ADC Enable bit 1 = ADC is enabled 0 = ADC is disabled and consumes no operating current Note 1: Selecting reserved channels will yield unpredictable results as unimplemented input channels are left floating. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 216 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 17-2: ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — PVCFG1 PVCFG0 NVCFG1 NVCFG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-2 PVCFG<1:0>: Positive Voltage Reference select bit 00 = Positive voltage reference supplied internally by VDD. 01 = Positive voltage reference supplied externally through VREF+ pin. 10 = Positive voltage reference supplied internally through FVR. 11 = Reserved. bit 1-0 NVCFG<1:0>: Negative Voltage Reference select bit 00 = Negative voltage reference supplied internally by VSS. 01 = Negative voltage reference supplied externally through VREF- pin. 10 = Reserved. 11 = Reserved.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 217 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 17-3: ADCON2: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADFM — ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ADFM: A/D Conversion Result Format Select bit 1 = Right justified 0 = Left justified bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-3 ACQT<2:0>: A/D Acquisition time select bits. Acquisition time is the duration that the A/D charge holding capacitor remains connected to A/D channel from the instant the GO/DONE bit is set until conversions begins. 000 = 0(1) 001 = 2 TAD 010 = 4 TAD 011 = 6 TAD 100 = 8 TAD 101 = 12 TAD 110 = 16 TAD 111 = 20 TAD bit 2-0 ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 000 = FOSC/2 001 = FOSC/8 010 = FOSC/32 011 = FRC(1) (clock derived from a dedicated internal oscillator = 600 kHz nominal) 100 = FOSC/4 101 = FOSC/16 110 = FOSC/64 111 = FRC(1) (clock derived from a dedicated internal oscillator = 600 kHz nominal) Note 1: When the A/D clock source is selected as FRC then the start of conversion is delayed by one instruction cycle after the GO/DONE bit is set to allow the SLEEP instruction to be executed. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 218 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 17-4: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x ADRES9 ADRES8 ADRES7 ADRES6 ADRES5 ADRES4 ADRES3 ADRES2 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-0 ADRES<9:2>: ADC Result Register bits Upper 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result REGISTER 17-5: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x ADRES1 ADRES0 — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 ADRES<1:0>: ADC Result Register bits Lower 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result bit 5-0 Reserved: Do not use. REGISTER 17-6: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 1 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — — — — ADRES9 ADRES8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-2 Reserved: Do not use. bit 1-0 ADRES<9:8>: ADC Result Register bits Upper 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result REGISTER 17-7: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 1 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x ADRES7 ADRES6 ADRES5 ADRES4 ADRES3 ADRES2 ADRES1 ADRES0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-0 ADRES<7:0>: ADC Result Register bits Lower 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 219 PIC18F/LF1XK50 17.3 A/D Acquisition Requirements For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The Analog Input model is shown in Figure 17-5. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD), see Figure 17-5. The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 k. As the source impedance is decreased, the acquisition time may be decreased. After the analog input channel is selected (or changed), an A/D acquisition must be done before the conversion can be started. To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 17-1 may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the ADC). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the ADC to meet its specified resolution. EQUATION 17-1: ACQUISITION TIME EXAMPLE TACQ Amplifier Settling Time Hold Capacitor Charging = + Time + Temperature Coefficient = TAMP + TC + TCOFF = 5μs + TC + Temperature - 25°C0.05μs/°C TC = –CHOLDRIC + RSS + RS ln(1/2047) = –13.5pF1k + 700 + 10k ln(0.0004885) = 1.20μs TACQ = 5μs + 1.20μs + 50°C- 25°C0.05μs/°C = 7.45μs VAPPLIED 1 e –Tc -R----C---- –       VAPPLIED 1 1  – -2---0---4---7- =   VAPPLIED 1 1  – -2---0---4---7-   = VCHOLD VAPPLIED 1 e –TC --R----C--- –       = VCHOLD ;[1] VCHOLD charged to within 1/2 lsb ;[2] VCHOLD charge response to VAPPLIED ;combining [1] and [2] The value for TC can be approximated with the following equations: Solving for TC: Therefore: Assumptions: Temperature = 50°C and external impedance of 10k 3.0V VDD Note 1: The reference voltage (VREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out. 2: The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is discharged after each conversion. 3: The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 k. This is required to meet the pin leakage specification. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 220 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 17-5: ANALOG INPUT MODEL FIGURE 17-6: ADC TRANSFER FUNCTION VA CPIN Rs ANx 5 pF VDD VT = 0.6V VT = 0.6V I LEAKAGE(1) RIC  1k Sampling Switch SS Rss CHOLD = 13.5 pF VSS/VREF- 2.5V Rss (k) 2.0V 1.5V .1 1 10 VDD Legend: CPIN VT I LEAKAGE RIC SS CHOLD = Input Capacitance = Threshold Voltage = Leakage current at the pin due to = Interconnect Resistance = Sampling Switch = Sample/Hold Capacitance various junctions Discharge Switch 3.0V 3.5V 100 Note 1: See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. 3FFh 3FEh ADC Output Code 3FDh 3FCh 004h 003h 002h 001h 000h Full-Scale 3FBh 1/2 LSB ideal VSS/VREF- Zero-Scale Transition VDD/VREF+ Transition 1/2 LSB ideal Full-Scale Range Analog Input Voltage  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 221 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 17-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH A/D OPERATION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR1 — ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 288 PIE1 — ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 288 IPR1 — ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 288 ADRESH A/D Result Register, High Byte 287 ADRESL A/D Result Register, Low Byte 287 ADCON0 — — CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON 287 ADCON1 — — — — PVCFG1 PVCFG0 NVCFG1 NVCFG0 287 ADCON2 ADFM — ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 287 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 288 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 288 TRISA – – TRISA5 TRISA4 – – – – 288 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 – – – – 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 222 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 223 PIC18F/LF1XK50 18.0 COMPARATOR MODULE Comparators are used to interface analog circuits to a digital circuit by comparing two analog voltages and providing a digital indication of their relative magnitudes. The comparators are very useful mixed signal building blocks because they provide analog functionality independent of the program execution. The Analog Comparator module includes the following features: • Independent comparator control • Programmable input selection • Comparator output is available internally/externally • Programmable output polarity • Interrupt-on-change • Wake-up from Sleep • Programmable Speed/Power optimization • PWM shutdown • Programmable and fixed voltage reference 18.1 Comparator Overview A single comparator is shown in Figure 18-1 along with the relationship between the analog input levels and the digital output. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is less than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital low level. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is greater than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level. FIGURE 18-1: SINGLE COMPARATOR – VIN+ + VINOutput Output VIN+ VINNote: The black areas of the output of the comparator represents the uncertainty due to input offsets and response time. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 224 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 18-2: COMPARATOR C1 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM Note 1: When C1ON = 0, the C1 comparator will produce a ‘0’ output to the XOR Gate. 2: Q1 and Q3 are phases of the four-phase system clock (FOSC). 3: Q1 is held high during Sleep mode. 4: Positive going pulse generated on both falling and rising edges of the bit. MUX C1 C1POL C1OUT To PWM Logic 0 1 2 3 C1ON(1) C1CH<1:0> 2 0 1 C1R MUX RD_CM1CON0 Set C1IF To C1VINC1VIN+ AGND C12IN1- C12IN2- C12IN3- C1IN+ D Q Q1 EN Data Bus D Q EN CL Q3*RD_CM1CON0 NReset + - 0 1 MUX VREF C1RSEL FVR C1SP C1VREF C1OE C12OUT 0 1 C1SYNC From TMR1L[0](4) D Q SYNCC1OUT C2OE  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 225 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 18-3: COMPARATOR C2 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM MUX C2 C2POL C2OUT To PWM Logic 0 1 2 3 C2ON(1) C2CH<1:0> 2 D Q EN D Q EN CL RD_CM2CON0 Q3*RD_CM2CON0 Q1 Set C2IF To NRESET C2VINC2VIN+ C12OUT pin AGND C12IN1- C12IN2- C12IN3- Data Bus Note 1: When C2ON = 0, the C2 comparator will produce a ‘0’ output to the XOR Gate. 2: Q1 and Q3 are phases of the four-phase system clock (FOSC). 3: Q1 is held high during Sleep mode. 4: Positive going pulse generated on both falling and rising edges of the bit. 0 1 C2R MUX C2IN+ 0 1 MUX VREF C2RSEL FVR C2SP C2VREF 0 1 C2SYNC C20E D Q From TMR1L[0] SYNCC2OUT (4) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 226 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 18.2 Comparator Control Each comparator has a separate control and Configuration register: CM1CON0 for Comparator C1 and CM2CON0 for Comparator C2. In addition, Comparator C2 has a second control register, CM2CON1, for controlling the interaction with Timer1 and simultaneous reading of both comparator outputs. The CM1CON0 and CM2CON0 registers (see Registers 18-1 and 18-2, respectively) contain the control and status bits for the following: • Enable • Input selection • Reference selection • Output selection • Output polarity • Speed selection 18.2.1 COMPARATOR ENABLE Setting the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register enables the comparator for operation. Clearing the CxON bit disables the comparator resulting in minimum current consumption. 18.2.2 COMPARATOR INPUT SELECTION The CxCH<1:0> bits of the CMxCON0 register direct one of four analog input pins to the comparator inverting input. 18.2.3 COMPARATOR REFERENCE SELECTION Setting the CxR bit of the CMxCON0 register directs an internal voltage reference or an analog input pin to the non-inverting input of the comparator. See Section 21.0 “VOLTAGE REFERENCES” for more information on the Internal Voltage Reference module. 18.2.4 COMPARATOR OUTPUT SELECTION The output of the comparator can be monitored by reading either the CxOUT bit of the CMxCON0 register or the MCxOUT bit of the CM2CON1 register. In order to make the output available for an external connection, the following conditions must be true: • CxOE bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set • Corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared • CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set Both comparators share the same output pin (C12OUT). Priority is determined by the states of the C1OE and C2OE bits. TABLE 18-1: COMPARATOR OUTPUT PRIORITY 18.2.5 COMPARATOR OUTPUT POLARITY Inverting the output of the comparator is functionally equivalent to swapping the comparator inputs. The polarity of the comparator output can be inverted by setting the CxPOL bit of the CMxCON0 register. Clearing the CxPOL bit results in a non-inverted output. Table 18-2 shows the output state versus input conditions, including polarity control. 18.2.6 COMPARATOR SPEED SELECTION The trade-off between speed or power can be optimized during program execution with the CxSP control bit. The default state for this bit is ‘1’ which selects the normal speed mode. Device power consumption can be optimized at the cost of slower comparator propagation delay by clearing the CxSP bit to ‘0’. 18.3 Comparator Response Time The comparator output is indeterminate for a period of time after the change of an input source or the selection of a new reference voltage. This period is referred to as the response time. The response time of the comparator differs from the settling time of the voltage reference. Therefore, both of these times must be considered when determining the total response time to a comparator input change. See the Comparator and Voltage Reference Specifications in Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for more details. Note: To use CxIN+ and C12INx- pins as analog inputs, the appropriate bits must be set in the ANSEL register and the corresponding TRIS bits must also be set to disable the output drivers. C10E C2OE C12OUT 0 0 I/O 0 1 C2OUT 1 0 C1OUT 1 1 C2OUT Note 1: The CxOE bit overrides the PORT data latch. Setting the CxON has no impact on the port override. 2: The internal output of the comparator is latched with each instruction cycle. Unless otherwise specified, external outputs are not latched. TABLE 18-2: COMPARATOR OUTPUT STATE VS. INPUT CONDITIONS Input Condition CxPOL CxOUT CxVIN- > CxVIN+ 0 0 CxVIN- < CxVIN+ 0 1 CxVIN- > CxVIN+ 1 1 CxVIN- < CxVIN+ 1 0  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 227 PIC18F/LF1XK50 18.4 Comparator Interrupt Operation The comparator interrupt flag can be set whenever there is a change in the output value of the comparator. Changes are recognized by means of a mismatch circuit which consists of two latches and an exclusiveor gate (see Figure 18-2 and Figure 18-3). One latch is updated with the comparator output level when the CMxCON0 register is read. This latch retains the value until the next read of the CMxCON0 register or the occurrence of a Reset. The other latch of the mismatch circuit is updated on every Q1 system clock. A mismatch condition will occur when a comparator output change is clocked through the second latch on the Q1 clock cycle. At this point the two mismatch latches have opposite output levels which is detected by the exclusive-or gate and fed to the interrupt circuitry. The mismatch condition persists until either the CMxCON0 register is read or the comparator output returns to the previous state. The comparator interrupt is set by the mismatch edge and not the mismatch level. This means that the interrupt flag can be reset without the additional step of reading or writing the CMxCON0 register to clear the mismatch registers. When the mismatch registers are cleared, an interrupt will occur upon the comparator’s return to the previous state, otherwise no interrupt will be generated. Software will need to maintain information about the status of the comparator output, as read from the CMxCON0 register, or CM2CON1 register, to determine the actual change that has occurred. See Figures 18-4 and 18-5. The CxIF bit of the PIR2 register is the comparator interrupt flag. This bit must be reset by software by clearing it to ‘0’. Since it is also possible to write a ‘1’ to this register, an interrupt can be generated. In mid-range Compatibility mode the CxIE bit of the PIE2 register and the PEIE and GIE bits of the INTCON register must all be set to enable comparator interrupts. If any of these bits are cleared, the interrupt is not enabled, although the CxIF bit of the PIR2 register will still be set if an interrupt condition occurs. 18.4.1 PRESETTING THE MISMATCH LATCHES The comparator mismatch latches can be preset to the desired state before the comparators are enabled. When the comparator is off the CxPOL bit controls the CxOUT level. Set the CxPOL bit to the desired CxOUT non-interrupt level while the CxON bit is cleared. Then, configure the desired CxPOL level in the same instruction that the CxON bit is set. Since all register writes are performed as a Read-Modify-Write, the mismatch latches will be cleared during the instruction Read phase and the actual configuration of the CxON and CxPOL bits will be occur in the final Write phase. FIGURE 18-4: COMPARATOR INTERRUPT TIMING W/O CMxCON0 READ FIGURE 18-5: COMPARATOR INTERRUPT TIMING WITH CMxCON0 READ Note 1: A write operation to the CMxCON0 register will also clear the mismatch condition because all writes include a read operation at the beginning of the write cycle. 2: Comparator interrupts will operate correctly regardless of the state of CxOE. Note 1: If a change in the CMxCON0 register (CxOUT) should occur when a read operation is being executed (start of the Q2 cycle), then the CxIF interrupt flag of the PIR2 register may not get set. 2: When either comparator is first enabled, bias circuitry in the Comparator module may cause an invalid output from the comparator until the bias circuitry is stable. Allow about 1 s for bias settling then clear the mismatch condition and interrupt flags before enabling comparator interrupts. Q1 Q3 CxIN+ CxOUT Set CxIF (edge) CxIF TRT Reset by Software Q1 Q3 CxIN+ CxOUT Set CxIF (edge) CxIF TRT Cleared by CMxCON0 Read Reset by Software PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 228 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 18.5 Operation During Sleep The comparator, if enabled before entering Sleep mode, remains active during Sleep. The additional current consumed by the comparator is shown separately in the Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. If the comparator is not used to wake the device, power consumption can be minimized while in Sleep mode by turning off the comparator. Each comparator is turned off by clearing the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register. A change to the comparator output can wake-up the device from Sleep. To enable the comparator to wake the device from Sleep, the CxIE bit of the PIE2 register and the PEIE bit of the INTCON register must be set. The instruction following the SLEEP instruction always executes following a wake from Sleep. If the GIE bit of the INTCON register is also set, the device will then execute the Interrupt Service Routine. 18.6 Effects of a Reset A device Reset forces the CMxCON0 and CM2CON1 registers to their Reset states. This forces both comparators and the voltage references to their Off states.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 229 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 18-1: CM1CON0: COMPARATOR 1 CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 C1ON: Comparator C1 Enable bit 1 = Comparator C1 is enabled 0 = Comparator C1 is disabled bit 6 C1OUT: Comparator C1 Output bit If C1POL = 1 (inverted polarity): C1OUT = 0 when C1VIN+ > C1VINC1OUT = 1 when C1VIN+ < C1VINIf C1POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): C1OUT = 1 when C1VIN+ > C1VINC1OUT = 0 when C1VIN+ < C1VINbit 5 C1OE: Comparator C1 Output Enable bit If C2OE = 0 (C2 output disable) 0 = C1OUT is internal only 1 = C1OUT is present on the C12OUT pin(1) If C2OE = 1 (C2 output enable) 0 = C1OUT is internal only 1 = C2OUT is present on the C12OUT pin(1) bit 4 C1POL: Comparator C1 Output Polarity Select bit 1 = C1OUT logic is inverted 0 = C1OUT logic is not inverted bit 3 C1SP: Comparator C1 Speed/Power Select bit 1 = C1 operates in normal power, higher speed mode 0 = C1 operates in low-power, low-speed mode bit 2 C1R: Comparator C1 Reference Select bit (non-inverting input) 1 = C1VIN+ connects to C1VREF output 0 = C1VIN+ connects to C12IN+ pin bit 1-0 C1CH<1:0>: Comparator C1 Channel Select bit 00 = C1VIN- connects to AGND 01 = C12IN1- pin of C1 connects to C1VIN- 10 = C12IN2- pin of C1 connects to C1VIN- 11 = C12IN3- pin of C1 connects to C1VINNote 1: Comparator output requires the following three conditions: C1OE = 1, C1ON = 1 and corresponding port TRIS bit = 0. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 230 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 18-2: CM2CON0: COMPARATOR 2 CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 C2ON: Comparator C2 Enable bit 1 = Comparator C2 is enabled 0 = Comparator C2 is disabled bit 6 C2OUT: Comparator C2 Output bit If C2POL = 1 (inverted polarity): C2OUT = 0 when C2VIN+ > C2VINC2OUT = 1 when C2VIN+ < C2VINIf C2POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): C2OUT = 1 when C2VIN+ > C2VINC2OUT = 0 when C2VIN+ < C2VINbit 5 C2OE: Comparator C2 Output Enable bit 1 = C2OUT is present on C12OUT pin(1) 0 = C2OUT is internal only bit 4 C2POL: Comparator C2 Output Polarity Select bit 1 = C2OUT logic is inverted 0 = C2OUT logic is not inverted bit 3 C2SP: Comparator C2 Speed/Power Select bit 1 = C2 operates in normal power, higher speed mode 0 = C2 operates in low-power, low-speed mode bit 2 C2R: Comparator C2 Reference Select bits (non-inverting input) 1 = C2VIN+ connects to C2VREF 0 = C2VIN+ connects to C2IN+ pin bit 1-0 C2CH<1:0>: Comparator C2 Channel Select bits 00 = C1VIN- connects to AGND 01 = C12IN1- pin of C2 connects to C2VIN- 10 = C12IN2- pin of C2 connects to C2VIN- 11 = C12IN3- pin of C2 connects to C2VINNote 1: Comparator output requires the following three conditions: C2OE = 1, C2ON = 1 and corresponding port TRIS bit = 0.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 231 PIC18F/LF1XK50 18.7 Analog Input Connection Considerations A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in Figure 18-6. Since the analog input pins share their connection with a digital input, they have reverse biased ESD protection diodes to VDD and VSS. The analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. If the input voltage deviates from this range by more than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is forward biased and a latch-up may occur. A maximum source impedance of 10 k is recommended for the analog sources. Also, any external component connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current to minimize inaccuracies introduced. FIGURE 18-6: ANALOG INPUT MODEL Note 1: When reading a PORT register, all pins configured as analog inputs will read as a ‘0’. Pins configured as digital inputs will convert as an analog input, according to the input specification. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input, may cause the input buffer to consume more current than is specified. VA Rs < 10K CPIN 5 pF VDD VT  0.6V VT  0.6V RIC ILEAKAGE(1) Vss AIN Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions RIC = Interconnect Resistance RS = Source Impedance VA = Analog Voltage VT = Threshold Voltage Note 1: See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 232 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 18.8 Additional Comparator Features There are four additional comparator features: • Simultaneous read of comparator outputs • Internal reference selection • Hysteresis selection • Output Synchronization 18.8.1 SIMULTANEOUS COMPARATOR OUTPUT READ The MC1OUT and MC2OUT bits of the CM2CON1 register are mirror copies of both comparator outputs. The ability to read both outputs simultaneously from a single register eliminates the timing skew of reading separate registers. 18.8.2 INTERNAL REFERENCE SELECTION There are two internal voltage references available to the non-inverting input of each comparator. One of these is the Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) and the other is the variable Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF). The CxRSEL bit of the CM2CON register determines which of these references is routed to the Comparator Voltage reference output (CXVREF). Further routing to the comparator is accomplished by the CxR bit of the CMxCON0 register. See Section 21.1 “Voltage Reference” and Figure 18-2 and Figure 18-3 for more detail. 18.8.3 COMPARATOR HYSTERESIS The Comparator Cx have selectable hysteresis. The hysteresis can be enable by setting the CxHYS bit of the CM2CON1 register. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for more details. 18.8.4 SYNCHRONIZING COMPARATOR OUTPUT TO TIMER 1 The Comparator Cx output can be synchronized with Timer1 by setting the CxSYNC bit of the CM2CON1 register. When enabled, the Cx output is latched on the rising edge of the Timer1 source clock. If a prescaler is used with Timer1, the comparator output is latched after the prescaling function. To prevent a race condition, the comparator output is latched on the rising edge of the Timer1 clock source and Timer1 increments on the rising edge of its clock source. See the Comparator Block Diagram (Figure 18-2 and Figure 18-3) and the Timer1 Block Diagram (Figure 18-2) for more information. Note 1: Obtaining the status of C1OUT or C2OUT by reading CM2CON1 does not affect the comparator interrupt mismatch registers.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 233 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 18-3: CM2CON1: COMPARATOR 2 CONTROL REGISTER 1 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 MC1OUT: Mirror Copy of C1OUT bit bit 6 MC2OUT: Mirror Copy of C2OUT bit bit 5 C1RSEL: Comparator C1 Reference Select bit 1 = FVR routed to C1VREF input 0 = CVREF routed to C1VREF input bit 4 C2RSEL: Comparator C2 Reference Select bit 1 = FVR routed to C2VREF input 0 = CVREF routed to C2VREF input bit 3 C1HYS: Comparator C1 Hysteresis Enable bit 1 = Comparator C1 hysteresis enabled 0 = Comparator C1 hysteresis disabled bit 2 C2HYS: Comparator C2 Hysteresis Enable bit 1 = Comparator C2 hysteresis enabled 0 = Comparator C2 hysteresis disabled bit 1 C1SYNC: C1 Output Synchronous Mode bit 1 = C1 output is synchronous to rising edge to TMR1 clock 0 = C1 output is asynchronous bit 0 C2SYNC: C2 Output Synchronous Mode bit 1 = C2 output is synchronous to rising edge to TMR1 clock 0 = C2 output is asynchronous PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 234 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 18-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 288 CM2CON0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 288 CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 288 REFCON0 FVR1EN FVR1ST FVR1S1 FVR1S0 — — — — 287 REFCON1 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 — D1NSS 287 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP — 288 PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 288 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 288 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the comparator module.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 235 PIC18F/LF1XK50 19.0 POWER-MANAGED MODES PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices offer a total of seven operating modes for more efficient power management. These modes provide a variety of options for selective power conservation in applications where resources may be limited (i.e., battery-powered devices). There are three categories of power-managed modes: • Run modes • Idle modes • Sleep mode These categories define which portions of the device are clocked and sometimes, what speed. The Run and Idle modes may use any of the three available clock sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator block); the Sleep mode does not use a clock source. The power-managed modes include several powersaving features offered on previous PIC® microcontroller devices. One is the clock switching feature which allows the controller to use the Timer1 oscillator in place of the primary oscillator. Also included is the Sleep mode, offered by all PIC® microcontroller devices, where all device clocks are stopped. 19.1 Selecting Power-Managed Modes Selecting a power-managed mode requires two decisions: • Whether or not the CPU is to be clocked • The selection of a clock source The IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register controls CPU clocking, while the SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register select the clock source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock sources and affected modules are summarized in Table 19-1. 19.1.1 CLOCK SOURCES The SCS<1:0> bits allow the selection of one of three clock sources for power-managed modes. They are: • the primary clock, as defined by the FOSC<3:0> Configuration bits • the secondary clock (the Timer1 oscillator) • the internal oscillator block 19.1.2 ENTERING POWER-MANAGED MODES Switching from one power-managed mode to another begins by loading the OSCCON register. The SCS<1:0> bits select the clock source and determine which Run or Idle mode is to be used. Changing these bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock source, assuming that it is running. The switch may also be subject to clock transition delays. Refer to Section 2.8 “Clock Switching” for more information. Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The actual mode that results depends on the status of the IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register. Depending on the current mode and the mode being switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does not always require setting all of these bits. Many transitions may be done by changing the oscillator select bits, or changing the IDLEN bit, prior to issuing a SLEEP instruction. If the IDLEN bit is already configured correctly, it may only be necessary to perform a SLEEP instruction to switch to the desired mode. TABLE 19-1: POWER-MANAGED MODES Mode OSCCON Bits Module Clocking Available Clock and Oscillator Source IDLEN(1) SCS<1:0> CPU Peripherals Sleep 0 N/A Off Off None – All clocks are disabled PRI_RUN N/A 00 Clocked Clocked Primary – LP, XT, HS, RC, EC and Internal Oscillator Block(2). This is the normal full power execution mode. SEC_RUN N/A 01 Clocked Clocked Secondary – Timer1 Oscillator RC_RUN N/A 1x Clocked Clocked Internal Oscillator Block(2) PRI_IDLE 1 00 Off Clocked Primary – LP, XT, HS, HSPLL, RC, EC SEC_IDLE 1 01 Off Clocked Secondary – Timer1 Oscillator RC_IDLE 1 1x Off Clocked Internal Oscillator Block(2) Note 1: IDLEN reflects its value when the SLEEP instruction is executed. 2: Includes HFINTOSC and HFINTOSC postscaler, as well as the LFINTOSC source. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 236 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 19.1.3 MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS OF THE SLEEP COMMAND The power-managed mode that is invoked with the SLEEP instruction is determined by the setting of the IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register at the time the instruction is executed. All clocks stop and minimum power is consumed when SLEEP is executed with the IDLEN bit cleared. The system clock continues to supply a clock to the peripherals but is disconnected from the CPU when SLEEP is executed with the IDLEN bit set. 19.2 Run Modes In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and peripherals are active. The difference between these modes is the clock source. 19.2.1 PRI_RUN MODE The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full power execution mode of the microcontroller. This is also the default mode upon a device Reset, unless Two-Speed Start-up is enabled (see Section 2.12 “Two-Speed Start-up Mode” for details). In this mode, the device operated off the oscillator defined by the FOSC bits of the CONFIGH Configuration register. 19.2.2 SEC_RUN MODE In SEC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the secondary external oscillator. This gives users the option of lower power consumption while still using a high accuracy clock source. SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register to ‘01’. When SEC_RUN mode is active all of the following are true: • The main clock source is switched to the secondary external oscillator • Primary external oscillator is shut down • T1RUN bit of the T1CON register is set • OSTS bit is cleared. 19.2.3 RC_RUN MODE In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the internal oscillator. In this mode, the primary external oscillator is shut down. RC_RUN mode provides the best power conservation of all the Run modes when the LFINTOSC is the system clock. RC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS1 bit. When the clock source is switched from the primary oscillator to the internal oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. The IRCF bits may be modified at any time to immediately change the clock speed. Note: The secondary external oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_RUN mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SCS<1:0> bits are set to ‘01’, entry to SEC_RUN mode will not occur until T1OSCEN bit is set and secondary external oscillator is ready.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 237 PIC18F/LF1XK50 19.3 Sleep Mode The Power-Managed Sleep mode in the PIC18F/ LF1XK50 devices is identical to the legacy Sleep mode offered in all other PIC® microcontroller devices. It is entered by clearing the IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts down the selected oscillator (Figure 19-1) and all clock source status bits are cleared. Entering the Sleep mode from either Run or Idle mode does not require a clock switch. This is because no clocks are needed once the controller has entered Sleep. If the WDT is selected, the LFINTOSC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt, Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked until the clock source selected by the SCS<1:0> bits becomes ready (see Figure 19-2), or it will be clocked from the internal oscillator block if either the Two-Speed Start-up or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor are enabled (see Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). In either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. 19.4 Idle Modes The Idle modes allow the controller’s CPU to be selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users to further manage power consumption. If the IDLEN bit is set to a ‘1’ when a SLEEP instruction is executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock source selected by the SCS<1:0> bits; however, the CPU will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are not affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP instruction provides a quick method of switching from a given Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode. If the WDT is selected, the LFINTOSC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT time-out, or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD while it becomes ready to execute code. When the CPU begins executing code, it resumes with the same clock source for the current Idle mode. For example, when waking from RC_IDLE mode, the internal oscillator block will clock the CPU and peripherals (in other words, RC_RUN mode). The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. While in any Idle mode or the Sleep mode, a WDT time-out will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode currently specified by the SCS<1:0> bits. FIGURE 19-1: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE FIGURE 19-2: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL) Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Peripheral Sleep Program Q1 Q1 Counter Clock CPU Clock PC PC + 2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 OSC1 Peripheral Program PC PLL Clock Q3 Q4 Output CPU Clock Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Clock Counter PC + 4 PC + 6 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Wake Event Note1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. TOST(1) TPLL(1) OSTS bit set PC + 2 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 238 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 19.4.1 PRI_IDLE MODE This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle modes, in that it does not disable the primary device clock. For timing sensitive applications, this allows for the fastest resumption of device operation with its more accurate primary clock source, since the clock source does not have to “warm-up” or transition from another oscillator. PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then clear the SCS bits and execute SLEEP. Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the primary clock source specified by the FOSC<3:0> Configuration bits. The OSTS bit remains set (see Figure 19-3). When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the primary clock source. A delay of interval TCSD is required between the wake event and when code execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to become ready to execute instructions. After the wakeup, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 19-4). 19.4.2 SEC_IDLE MODE In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set the IDLEN bit first, then set the SCS<1:0> bits to ‘01’ and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down, the OSTS bit is cleared and the T1RUN bit is set. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. After an interval of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the Timer1 oscillator. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run (see Figure 19- 4). FIGURE 19-3: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE FIGURE 19-4: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE Note: The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SLEEP instruction is executed, the main system clock will continue to operate in the previously selected mode and the corresponding IDLE mode will be entered (i.e., PRI_IDLE or RC_IDLE). Q1 Peripheral Program PC PC + 2 OSC1 Q3 Q4 Q1 CPU Clock Clock Counter Q2 OSC1 Peripheral Program PC CPU Clock Q1 Q3 Q4 Clock Counter Q2 Wake Event TCSD  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 239 PIC18F/LF1XK50 19.4.3 RC_IDLE MODE In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator block from the HFINTOSC multiplexer output. This mode allows for controllable power conservation during Idle periods. From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then set the SCS1 bit and execute SLEEP. It is recommended that SCS0 also be cleared, although its value is ignored, to maintain software compatibility with future devices. The HFINTOSC multiplexer may be used to select a higher clock frequency by modifying the IRCF bits before executing the SLEEP instruction. When the clock source is switched to the HFINTOSC multiplexer, the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. If the IRCF bits are set to any non-zero value, or the INTSRC bit is set, the HFINTOSC output is enabled. The IOSF bit becomes set, after the HFINTOSC output becomes stable, after an interval of TIOBST. Clocks to the peripherals continue while the HFINTOSC source stabilizes. If the IRCF bits were previously at a nonzero value, or INTSRC was set before the SLEEP instruction was executed and the HFINTOSC source was already stable, the IOSF bit will remain set. If the IRCF bits and INTSRC are all clear, the HFINTOSC output will not be enabled, the IOSF bit will remain clear and there will be no indication of the current clock source. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the HFINTOSC multiplexer output. After a delay of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the HFINTOSC multiplexer. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. The LFINTOSC source will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. 19.5 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes An exit from Sleep mode or any of the Idle modes is triggered by any one of the following: • an interrupt • a Reset • a Watchdog Time-out This section discusses the triggers that cause exits from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem actions are discussed in each of the power-managed modes (see Section 19.2 “Run Modes”, Section 19.3 “Sleep Mode” and Section 19.4 “Idle Modes”). 19.5.1 EXIT BY INTERRUPT Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the device to exit from an Idle mode or the Sleep mode to a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one of the INTCON or PIE registers. The PEIE bIt must also be set If the desired interrupt enable bit is in a PIE register. The exit sequence is initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set. The instruction immediately following the SLEEP instruction is executed on all exits by interrupt from Idle or Sleep modes. Code execution then branches to the interrupt vector if the GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register is set, otherwise code execution continues without branching (see Section 7.0 “Interrupts”). A fixed delay of interval TCSD following the wake event is required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes. This delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. 19.5.2 EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending on which power-managed mode the device is in when the time-out occurs. If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the power-managed mode (see Section 19.2 “Run Modes” and Section 19.3 “Sleep Mode”). If the device is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will result in a WDT Reset (see Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”). The WDT timer and postscaler are cleared by any one of the following: • executing a SLEEP instruction • executing a CLRWDT instruction • the loss of the currently selected clock source when the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled • modifying the IRCF bits in the OSCCON register when the internal oscillator block is the device clock source PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 240 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 19.5.3 EXIT BY RESET Exiting Sleep and Idle modes by Reset causes code execution to restart at address 0. See Section 23.0 “Reset” for more details. The exit delay time from Reset to the start of code execution depends on both the clock sources before and after the wake-up and the type of oscillator. Exit delays are summarized in Table 19-2. 19.5.4 EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR START-UP DELAY Certain exits from power-managed modes do not invoke the OST at all. There are two cases: • PRI_IDLE mode, where the primary clock source is not stopped and • the primary clock source is not any of the LP, XT, HS or HSPLL modes. In these instances, the primary clock source either does not require an oscillator start-up delay since it is already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not require an oscillator start-up delay (RC, EC, INTOSC, and INTOSCIO modes). However, a fixed delay of interval TCSD following the wake event is still required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. TABLE 19-2: EXIT DELAY ON WAKE-UP BY RESET FROM SLEEP MODE OR ANY IDLE MODE (BY CLOCK SOURCES) Clock Source before Wake-up Clock Source after Wake-up Exit Delay Clock Ready Status Bit (OSCCON) Primary Device Clock (PRI_IDLE mode) LP, XT, HS TCSD HSPLL (1) OSTS EC, RC HFINTOSC(2) IOSF T1OSC or LFINTOSC(1) LP, XT, HS TOST(3) HSPLL TOST + tPLL OSTS (3) EC, RC TCSD(1) HFINTOSC(1) TIOBST(4) IOSF HFINTOSC(2) LP, XT, HS TOST(4) HSPLL TOST + tPLL OSTS (3) EC, RC TCSD(1) HFINTOSC(1) None IOSF None (Sleep mode) LP, XT, HS TOST(3) HSPLL TOST + tPLL OSTS (3) EC, RC TCSD(1) HFINTOSC(1) TIOBST(4) IOSF Note 1: TCSD is a required delay when waking from Sleep and all Idle modes and runs concurrently with any other required delays (see Section 19.4 “Idle Modes”). On Reset, HFINTOSC defaults to 1 MHz. 2: Includes both the HFINTOSC 16 MHz source and postscaler derived frequencies. 3: TOST is the Oscillator Start-up Timer. tPLL is the PLL Lock-out Timer (parameter F12). 4: Execution continues during the HFINTOSC stabilization period, TIOBST.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 241 PIC18F/LF1XK50 20.0 SR LATCH The module consists of a single SR Latch with multiple Set and Reset inputs as well as selectable latch output. The SR Latch module includes the following features: • Programmable input selection • SR Latch output is available internally/externally • Selectable Q and Q output • Firmware Set and Reset 20.1 Latch Operation The latch is a Set-Reset latch that does not depend on a clock source. Each of the Set and Reset inputs are active-high. The latch can be Set or Reset by CxOUT, INT1 pin, or variable clock. Additionally the SRPS and the SRPR bits of the SRCON0 register may be used to Set or Reset the SR Latch, respectively. The latch is reset-dominant, therefore, if both Set and Reset inputs are high the latch will go to the Reset state. Both the SRPS and SRPR bits are self resetting which means that a single write to either of the bits is all that is necessary to complete a latch Set or Reset operation. 20.2 Latch Output The SRQEN and SRNQEN bits of the SRCON0 register control the latch output selection. Only one of the SR latch’s outputs may be directly output to an I/O pin at a time. Priority is determined by the state of bits SRQEN and SRNQEN in registers SRCON0. TABLE 20-1: SR LATCH OUTPUT CONTROL The applicable TRIS bit of the corresponding port must be cleared to enable the port pin output driver. 20.3 Effects of a Reset Upon any device Reset, the SR latch is not initialized. The user’s firmware is responsible to initialize the latch output before enabling it to the output pins. FIGURE 20-1: SR LATCH SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM SRLEN SRQEN SRNQEN SR Latch Output to Port I/O 0 X X I/O 1 0 0 I/O 1 0 1 Q 1 1 0 Q 1 1 1 Q SRPS S R Q Q Note 1: If R = 1 and S = 1 simultaneously, Q = 0, Q = 1 2: Pulse generator causes a 2 Q-state pulse width. 3: Output shown for reference only. See I/O port pin block diagram for more detail. 4: Name denotes the source of connection at the comparator output. Pulse Gen(2) SR Latch(1) SRNQEN SRQ pin(3) SRQEN SRNQEN SRSPE SRSC2E INT1 SRSCKE SRCLK SYNCC2OUT(4) SRSC1E SYNCC1OUT(4) SRPR Pulse Gen(2) SRRPE SRRC2E INT1 SRRCKE SRCLK SYNCC2OUT(4) SRRC1E SYNCC1OUT(4) SRLEN SRLEN PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 242 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 20-2: SRCLK FREQUENCY TABLE SRCLK Divider FOSC = 20 MHz FOSC = 16 MHz FOSC = 8 MHz FOSC = 4 MHz FOSC = 1 MHz 111 512 25.6 s 32 s 64 s 128 s 512 s 110 256 12.8 s 16 s 32 s 64 s 256 s 101 128 6.4 s 8 s 16 s 32 s 128 s 100 64 3.2 s 4 s 8 s 16 s 64 s 011 32 1.6 s 2 s 4 s 8 s 32 s 010 16 0.8 s 1 s 2 s 4 s 16 s 001 8 0.4 s 0.5 s 1 s 2 s 8 s 000 4 0.2 s 0.25 s 0.5 s 1 s 4 s REGISTER 20-1: SRCON0: SR LATCH CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SRLEN SRCLK2 SRCLK1 SRCLK0 SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SRLEN: SR Latch Enable bit(1) 1 = SR latch is enabled 0 = SR latch is disabled bit 6-4 SRCLK<2:0>(1): SR Latch Clock divider bits 000 = 1/4 Peripheral cycle clock 001 = 1/8 Peripheral cycle clock 010 = 1/16 Peripheral cycle clock 011 = 1/32 Peripheral cycle clock 100 = 1/64 Peripheral cycle clock 101 = 1/128 Peripheral cycle clock 110 = 1/256 Peripheral cycle clock 111 = 1/512 Peripheral cycle clock bit 3 SRQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit If SRNQEN = 0 1 = Q is present on the RC4 pin 0 = Q is internal only bit 2 SRNQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit 1 = Q is present on the RC4 pin 0 = Q is internal only bit 1 SRPS: Pulse Set Input of the SR Latch 1 = Pulse input 0 = Always reads back ‘0’ bit 0 SRPR: Pulse Reset Input of the SR Latch 1 = Pulse input 0 = Always reads back ‘0’ Note 1: Changing the SRCLK bits while the SR latch is enabled may cause false triggers to the set and Reset inputs of the latch.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 243 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 20-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SR LATCH REGISTER 20-2: SRCON1: SR LATCH CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SRSPE: SR Latch Peripheral Set Enable bit 1 = INT1 pin status sets SR Latch 0 = INT1pin status has no effect on SR Latch bit 6 SRSCKE: SR Latch Set Clock Enable bit 1 = Set input of SR latch is pulsed with SRCLK 0 = Set input of SR latch is not pulsed with SRCLK bit 5 SRSC2E: SR Latch C2 Set Enable bit 1 = C2 Comparator output sets SR Latch 0 = C2 Comparator output has no effect on SR Latch bit 4 SRSC1E: SR Latch C1 Set Enable bit 1 = C1 Comparator output sets SR Latch 0 = C1 Comparator output has no effect on SR Latch bit 3 SRRPE: SR Latch Peripheral Reset Enable bit 1 = INT1 pin resets SR Latch 0 = INT1 pin has no effect on SR Latch bit 2 SRRCKE: SR Latch Reset Clock Enable bit 1 = Reset input of SR latch is pulsed with SRCLK 0 = Reset input of SR latch is not pulsed with SRCLK bit 1 SRRC2E: SR Latch C2 Reset Enable bit 1 = C2 Comparator output resets SR Latch 0 = C2 Comparator output has no effect on SR Latch bit 0 SRRC1E: SR Latch C1 Reset Enable bit 1 = C1 Comparator output resets SR Latch 0 = C1 Comparator output has no effect on SR Latch Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK2 SRCLK1 SRCLK0 SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 288 SRCON1 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E 288 CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 288 INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 285 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 Legend: Shaded cells are not used with the comparator voltage reference. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 244 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 245 PIC18F/LF1XK50 21.0 VOLTAGE REFERENCES There are two independent voltage references available: • Programmable Voltage Reference • 1.024V Fixed Voltage Reference 21.1 Voltage Reference The Voltage Reference module provides an internally generated voltage reference for the comparators and the DAC module. The following features are available: • Independent from Comparator operation • Single 32-level voltage ranges • Output clamped to VSS • Ratiometric with VDD • 1.024V Fixed Reference Voltage (FVR) The REFCON1 register (Register 21-2) controls the Voltage Reference module shown in Figure 21-1. 21.1.1 INDEPENDENT OPERATION The voltage reference is independent of the comparator configuration. Setting the D1EN bit of the REFCON1 register will enable the voltage reference by allowing current to flow in the VREF voltage divider. When the D1EN bit is cleared, current flow in the VREF voltage divider is disabled minimizing the power drain of the voltage reference peripheral. 21.1.2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE SELECTION The VREF voltage reference has 32 voltage level ranges. The 32 levels are set with the DAC1R<4:0> bits of the REFCON2 register. The VREF output voltage is determined by the following equations: EQUATION 21-1: VREF OUTPUT VOLTAGE 21.1.3 OUTPUT RATIOMETRIC TO VDD The comparator voltage reference is VDD derived and therefore, the VREF output changes with fluctuations in VDD. The tested absolute accuracy of the Comparator Voltage Reference can be found in Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications”. 21.1.4 VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT The VREF voltage reference can be output to the device CVREF pin by setting the DAC1OE bit of the REFCON1 register to ‘1’. Selecting the reference voltage for output on the VREF pin automatically overrides the digital output buffer and digital input threshold detector functions of that pin. Reading the CVREF pin when it has been configured for reference voltage output will always return a ‘0’. Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must be used on the voltage reference output for external connections to CVREF. Figure 21-2 shows an example buffering technique. 21.1.5 OPERATION DURING SLEEP When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of the RECON1 register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. 21.1.6 EFFECTS OF A RESET A device Reset affects the following: • Voltage reference is disabled • Fixed voltage reference is disabled • VREF is removed from the CVREF pin • The DAC1R<4:0> range select bits are cleared VOUT VSOURCE – VSOURCE  x DAC1R[4:0] 25 -------------------------------- + VSOURCE       = - IF D1EN = 1 IF D1EN = 0 & D1LPS = 1 & DAC1R[4:0] = 11111: VOUT = VSOURCE+ IF D1EN = 0 & D1LPS = 1 & DAC1R[4:0] = 00000: VOUT = VSOURCE- + - PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 246 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 21.2 FVR Reference Module The FVR reference is a stable fixed voltage reference, independent of VDD, with a nominal output voltage of 1.024V. This reference can be enabled by setting the FVR1EN bit of the REFCON0 register to ‘1’. The FVR voltage reference can be routed to the comparators or an ADC input channel. 21.2.1 FVR STABILIZATION PERIOD When the Fixed Voltage Reference module is enabled, it will require some time for the reference and its amplifier circuits to stabilize. The user program must include a small delay routine to allow the module to settle. The FVR1ST stable bit of the REFCON0 register also indicates that the FVR reference has been operating long enough to be stable. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for the minimum delay requirement. FIGURE 21-1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM 16-to-1 MUX DAC1R<4:0> R VDD VREF+ D1PSS<1:0> = 00 D1NSS = 0 VREF- D1NSS = 1 R R R R R R 32 Steps VREF FVR1 D1PSS<1:0> = 01 D1PSS<1:0> = 10 CVREF pin DAC1OE FVR1S<1:0> X1 X2 X4 2 FVR + _ FVR1EN FVR1ST 1.024V Fixed Reference D1EN D1LPS R D1EN D1LPS  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 247 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 21-2: VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE REGISTER 21-1: REFCON0: REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 FVR1EN FVR1ST FVR1S1 FVR1S0 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 FVR1EN: Fixed Voltage Reference 1 Enable bit 0 = FVR is disabled 1 = FVR is enabled bit 6 FVR1ST: Fixed Voltage Reference 1 Stable bit 0 = FVR is not stable 1 = FVR is stable bit 5-4 FVR1S<1:0>: Fixed Voltage Reference 1 Voltage Select bits 00 = Reserved, do not use 01 = 1.024V (x1) 10 = 2.048V (x2) 11 = 4.096V (x4) bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Buffered CVREF Output +– CVREF Module Voltage Reference Output Impedance R(1) CVREF Note 1: R is dependent upon the voltage reference Configuration bits, CVR<3:0> and CVRR. PIC18F1XK50/ PIC18LF1XK50 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 248 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 21-2: REFCON1: REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 --- D1NSS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 D1EN: DAC 1 Enable bit 0 = DAC 1 is disabled 1 = DAC 1 is enabled bit 6 D1LPS: DAC 1 Low-Power Voltage State Select bit 0 = VDAC = DAC1 Negative reference source selected 1 = VDAC = DAC1 Positive reference source selected bit 5 DAC1OE: DAC 1 Voltage Output Enable bit 1 = DAC 1 voltage level is also outputed on the RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 pin 0 = DAC 1 voltage level is disconnected from RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 pin bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-2 D1PSS<1:0>: DAC 1 Positive Source Select bits 00 = VDD 01 = VREF+ 10 = FVR output 11 = Reserved, do not use bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 D1NSS: DAC1 Negative Source Select bits 0 = VSS 1 = VREFREGISTER 21-3: REFCON2: REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 --- --- --- DAC1R4 DAC1R3 DAC1R2 DAC1R1 DAC1R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 DAC1R<4:0>: DAC1 Voltage Output Select bits VOUT = ((VSOURCE+) - (VSOURCE-))*(DAC1R<4:0>/(2^5)) + VSOURCENote 1: The output select bits are always right justified to ensure that any number of bits can be used without affecting the register layout.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 249 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 21-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH VOLTAGE REFERENCE Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page REFCON0 FVR1EN FVR1ST FVR1S1 FVR1S0 — — — — 287 REFCON1 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 — D1NSS 287 REFCON2 — — — DAC1R4 DAC1R3 DAC1R2 DAC1R1 DAC1R0 287 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 288 Legend: Shaded cells are not used with the comparator voltage reference. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 250 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 251 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.0 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) This section describes the details of the USB peripheral. Because of the very specific nature of the module, knowledge of USB is expected. Some high-level USB information is provided in Section 22.10 “Overview of USB” only for application design reference. Designers are encouraged to refer to the official specification published by the USB Implementers Forum (USB-IF) for the latest information. USB Specification Revision 2.0 is the most current specification at the time of publication of this document. 22.1 Overview of the USB Peripheral PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 devices contain a full-speed and low-speed, compatible USB Serial Interface Engine (SIE) that allows fast communication between any USB host and the PIC® microcontroller. The SIE can be interfaced directly to the USB by utilizing the internal transceiver. Some special hardware features have been included to improve performance. Dual access port memory in the device’s data memory space (USB RAM) has been supplied to share direct memory access between the microcontroller core and the SIE. Buffer descriptors are also provided, allowing users to freely program endpoint memory usage within the USB RAM space. Figure 22-1 presents a general overview of the USB peripheral and its features. FIGURE 22-1: USB PERIPHERAL AND OPTIONS 256 byte USB RAM USB SIE USB Control and Transceiver P P D+ DInternal Pull-ups External 3.3V Supply FSEN UPUEN USB Clock from the Oscillator Module Optional External Pull-ups(1) (Full (Low PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 Family USB Bus FS Speed) Speed) Note 1: The internal pull-up resistors should be disabled (UPUEN = 0) if external pull-up resistors are used. 2: PIC18F13K50/PIC18F14K50 only. Configuration VUSB 3.3V LDO Regulator(2) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 252 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.2 USB Status and Control The operation of the USB module is configured and managed through three control registers. In addition, a total of 14 registers are used to manage the actual USB transactions. The registers are: • USB Control register (UCON) • USB Configuration register (UCFG) • USB Transfer Status register (USTAT) • USB Device Address register (UADDR) • Frame Number registers (UFRMH:UFRML) • Endpoint Enable registers 0 through 7 (UEPn) 22.2.1 USB CONTROL REGISTER (UCON) The USB Control register (Register 22-1) contains bits needed to control the module behavior during transfers. The register contains bits that control the following: • Main USB Peripheral Enable • Ping-Pong Buffer Pointer Reset • Control of the Suspend mode • Packet Transfer Disable In addition, the USB Control register contains a status bit, SE0 (UCON<5>), which is used to indicate the occurrence of a single-ended zero on the bus. When the USB module is enabled, this bit should be monitored to determine whether the differential data lines have come out of a single-ended zero condition. This helps to differentiate the initial power-up state from the USB Reset signal. The overall operation of the USB module is controlled by the USBEN bit (UCON<3>). Setting this bit activates the module and resets all of the PPBI bits in the Buffer Descriptor Table to ‘0’. This bit also activates the internal pull-up resistors, if they are enabled. Thus, this bit can be used as a soft attach/detach to the USB. Although all Status and control bits are ignored when this bit is clear, the module needs to be fully preconfigured prior to setting this bit. This bit cannot be set until the USB module is supplied with an active clock source. If the PLL is being used, it should be enabled at least two milliseconds (enough time for the PLL to lock) before attempting to set the USBEN bit. REGISTER 22-1: UCON: USB CONTROL REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R-x R/C-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 — PPBRST SE0 PKTDIS USBEN(1) RESUME SUSPND — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: C = Clearable bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 PPBRST: Ping-Pong Buffers Reset bit 1 = Reset all Ping-Pong Buffer Pointers to the Even Buffer Descriptor (BD) banks 0 = Ping-Pong Buffer Pointers not being reset bit 5 SE0: Live Single-Ended Zero Flag bit 1 = Single-ended zero active on the USB bus 0 = No single-ended zero detected bit 4 PKTDIS: Packet Transfer Disable bit 1 = SIE token and packet processing disabled, automatically set when a SETUP token is received 0 = SIE token and packet processing enabled bit 3 USBEN: USB Module Enable bit(1) 1 = USB module and supporting circuitry enabled (device attached) 0 = USB module and supporting circuitry disabled (device detached) bit 2 RESUME: Resume Signaling Enable bit 1 = Resume signaling activated 0 = Resume signaling disabled bit 1 SUSPND: Suspend USB bit 1 = USB module and supporting circuitry in Power Conserve mode, SIE clock inactive 0 = USB module and supporting circuitry in normal operation, SIE clock clocked at the configured rate bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: This bit cannot be set if the USB module does not have an appropriate clock source.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 253 PIC18F/LF1XK50 The PPBRST bit (UCON<6>) controls the Reset status when Double-Buffering mode (ping-pong buffering) is used. When the PPBRST bit is set, all Ping-Pong Buffer Pointers are set to the Even buffers. PPBRST has to be cleared by firmware. This bit is ignored in buffering modes not using ping-pong buffering. The PKTDIS bit (UCON<4>) is a flag indicating that the SIE has disabled packet transmission and reception. This bit is set by the SIE when a SETUP token is received to allow setup processing. This bit cannot be set by the microcontroller, only cleared; clearing it allows the SIE to continue transmission and/or reception. Any pending events within the Buffer Descriptor Table will still be available, indicated within the USTAT register’s FIFO buffer. The RESUME bit (UCON<2>) allows the peripheral to perform a remote wake-up by executing Resume signaling. To generate a valid remote wake-up, firmware must set RESUME for 10 ms and then clear the bit. For more information on “resume signaling”, see the “Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0”. The SUSPND bit (UCON<1>) places the module and supporting circuitry in a Low-Power mode. The input clock to the SIE is also disabled. This bit should be set by the software in response to an IDLEIF interrupt. It should be reset by the microcontroller firmware after an ACTVIF interrupt is observed. When this bit is active, the device remains attached to the bus but the transceiver outputs remain Idle. The voltage on the VUSB pin may vary depending on the value of this bit. Setting this bit before a IDLEIF request will result in unpredictable bus behavior. 22.2.2 USB CONFIGURATION REGISTER (UCFG) Prior to communicating over USB, the module’s associated internal and/or external hardware must be configured. Most of the configuration is performed with the UCFG register (Register 22-2).The UFCG register contains most of the bits that control the system level behavior of the USB module. These include: • Bus Speed (full speed versus low speed) • On-Chip Pull-up Resistor Enable • Ping-Pong Buffer Usage The UTEYE bit, UCFG<7>, enables eye pattern generation, which aids in module testing, debugging and USB certifications. 22.2.2.1 Internal Transceiver The USB peripheral has a built-in, USB 2.0, full-speed and low-speed capable transceiver, internally connected to the SIE. This feature is useful for low-cost, single chip applications. Enabling the USB module (USBEN = 1) will also enable the internal transceiver. The FSEN bit (UCFG<2>) controls the transceiver speed; setting the bit enables full-speed operation. The on-chip USB pull-up resistors are controlled by the UPUEN bit (UCFG<4>). They can only be selected when the on-chip transceiver is enabled. The internal USB transceiver obtains power from the VUSB pin. In order to meet USB signalling level specifications, VUSB must be supplied with a voltage source between 3.0V and 3.6V. The best electrical signal quality is obtained when a 3.3V supply is used and locally bypassed with a high quality ceramic capacitor. The capacitor should be placed as close as possible to the VUSB and VSS pins found on the same edge of the package (i.e., route ground of the capacitor to VSS pin 20 on 20-lead PDIP, SOIC, SSOP and QFN packaged parts). The D+ and D- signal lines can be routed directly to their respective pins on the USB connector or cable (for hard-wired applications). No additional resistors, capacitors, or magnetic components are required as the D+ and D- drivers have controlled slew rate and output impedance intended to match with the characteristic impedance of the USB cable. In order to meet the USB specifications, the traces should be less than 30 cm long. Ideally, these traces should be designed to have a characteristic impedance matching that of the USB cable. Note: While in Suspend mode, a typical bus-powered USB device is limited to 500 A of current. This is the complete current which may be drawn by the PIC device and its supporting circuitry. Care should be taken to assure minimum current draw when the device enters Suspend mode. Note: The USB speed, transceiver and pull-up should only be configured during the module setup phase. It is not recommended to switch these settings while the module is enabled. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 254 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 22-2: UCFG: USB CONFIGURATION REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 UTEYE — — UPUEN(1) — FSEN(1) PPB1 PPB0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 UTEYE: USB Eye Pattern Test Enable bit 1 = Eye pattern test enabled 0 = Eye pattern test disabled bit 6-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 UPUEN: USB On-Chip Pull-up Enable bit(1) 1 = On-chip pull-up enabled (pull-up on D+ with FSEN = 1 or D- with FSEN = 0) 0 = On-chip pull-up disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 FSEN: Full-Speed Enable bit(1) 1 = Full-speed device: controls transceiver edge rates; requires input clock at 48 MHz 0 = Low-speed device: controls transceiver edge rates; requires input clock at 6 MHz bit 1-0 PPB<1:0>: Ping-Pong Buffers Configuration bits 11 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffers enabled for Endpoints 1 to 15 10 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffers enabled for all endpoints 01 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffer enabled for OUT Endpoint 0 00 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffers disabled Note 1: The UPUEN, and FSEN bits should never be changed while the USB module is enabled. These values must be preconfigured prior to enabling the module.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 255 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.2.2.2 Internal Pull-up Resistors The PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 devices have built-in pull-up resistors designed to meet the requirements for low-speed and full-speed USB. The UPUEN bit (UCFG<4>) enables the internal pull-ups. Figure 22-1 shows the pull-ups and their control. 22.2.2.3 External Pull-up Resistors External pull-up may also be used. The VUSB pin may be used to pull up D+ or D-. The pull-up resistor must be 1.5 k (±5%) as required by the USB specifications. Figure 22-2 shows an example. FIGURE 22-2: EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY 22.2.2.4 Ping-Pong Buffer Configuration The usage of ping-pong buffers is configured using the PPB<1:0> bits. Refer to Section 22.4.4 “Ping-Pong Buffering” for a complete explanation of the ping-pong buffers. 22.2.2.5 Eye Pattern Test Enable An automatic eye pattern test can be generated by the module when the UCFG<7> bit is set. The eye pattern output will be observable based on module settings, meaning that the user is first responsible for configuring the SIE clock settings, pull-up resistor and Transceiver mode. In addition, the module has to be enabled. Once UTEYE is set, the module emulates a switch from a receive to transmit state and will start transmitting a J-K-J-K bit sequence (K-J-K-J for full speed). The sequence will be repeated indefinitely while the Eye Pattern Test mode is enabled. Note that this bit should never be set while the module is connected to an actual USB system. This Test mode is intended for board verification to aid with USB certification tests. It is intended to show a system developer the noise integrity of the USB signals which can be affected by board traces, impedance mismatches and proximity to other system components. It does not properly test the transition from a receive to a transmit state. Although the eye pattern is not meant to replace the more complex USB certification test, it should aid during first order system debugging. Note: The official USB specifications require that USB devices must never source any current onto the +5V VBUS line of the USB cable. Additionally, USB devices must never source any current on the D+ and D- data lines whenever the +5V VBUS line is less than 1.17V. In order to meet this requirement, applications which are not purely bus powered should monitor the VBUS line and avoid turning on the USB module and the D+ or D- pull-up resistor until VBUS is greater than 1.17V. VBUS can be connected to and monitored by any 5V tolerant I/O pin for this purpose. PIC® Microcontroller Host Controller/HUB VUSB D+ DNote: The above setting shows a typical connection for a full-speed configuration using an on-chip regulator and an external pull-up resistor. 1.5 k PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 256 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.2.3 USB STATUS REGISTER (USTAT) The USB Status register reports the transaction status within the SIE. When the SIE issues a USB transfer complete interrupt, USTAT should be read to determine the status of the transfer. USTAT contains the transfer endpoint number, direction and Ping-Pong Buffer Pointer value (if used). The USTAT register is actually a read window into a four-byte status FIFO, maintained by the SIE. It allows the microcontroller to process one transfer while the SIE processes additional endpoints (Figure 22-3). When the SIE completes using a buffer for reading or writing data, it updates the USTAT register. If another USB transfer is performed before a transaction complete interrupt is serviced, the SIE will store the status of the next transfer into the status FIFO. Clearing the transfer complete flag bit, TRNIF, causes the SIE to advance the FIFO. If the next data in the FIFO holding register is valid, the SIE will reassert the interrupt within 6 TCY of clearing TRNIF. If no additional data is present, TRNIF will remain clear; USTAT data will no longer be reliable. FIGURE 22-3: USTAT FIFO Note: The data in the USB Status register is valid two SIE clocks after the TRNIF interrupt flag is asserted. In low-speed operation with the system clock operating at 48 MHz, a delay may be required between receiving the TRNIF interrupt and processing the data in the USTAT register. Note: If an endpoint request is received while the USTAT FIFO is full, the SIE will automatically issue a NAK back to the host. Data Bus USTAT from SIE 4-Byte FIFO for USTAT Clearing TRNIF Advances FIFO REGISTER 22-3: USTAT: USB STATUS REGISTER U-0 U-0 R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x U-0 — — ENDP2 ENDP1 ENDP0 DIR PPBI(1) — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-3 ENDP<2:0>: Encoded Number of Last Endpoint Activity bits (represents the number of the BDT updated by the last USB transfer) 111 = Endpoint 7 110 = Endpoint 6 .... 001 = Endpoint 1 000 = Endpoint 0 bit 2 DIR: Last BD Direction Indicator bit 1 = The last transaction was an IN token 0 = The last transaction was an OUT or SETUP token bit 1 PPBI: Ping-Pong BD Pointer Indicator bit(1) 1 = The last transaction was to the Odd BD bank 0 = The last transaction was to the Even BD bank bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: This bit is only valid for endpoints with available Even and Odd BD registers.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 257 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.2.4 USB ENDPOINT CONTROL Each of the 8 possible bidirectional endpoints has its own independent control register, UEPn (where ‘n’ represents the endpoint number). Each register has an identical complement of control bits. The prototype is shown in Register 22-4. The EPHSHK bit (UEPn<4>) controls handshaking for the endpoint; setting this bit enables USB handshaking. Typically, this bit is always set except when using isochronous endpoints. The EPCONDIS bit (UEPn<3>) is used to enable or disable USB control operations (SETUP) through the endpoint. Clearing this bit enables SETUP transactions. Note that the corresponding EPINEN and EPOUTEN bits must be set to enable IN and OUT transactions. For Endpoint 0, this bit should always be cleared since the USB specifications identify Endpoint 0 as the default control endpoint. The EPOUTEN bit (UEPn<2>) is used to enable or disable USB OUT transactions from the host. Setting this bit enables OUT transactions. Similarly, the EPINEN bit (UEPn<1>) enables or disables USB IN transactions from the host. The EPSTALL bit (UEPn<0>) is used to indicate a STALL condition for the endpoint. If a STALL is issued on a particular endpoint, the EPSTALL bit for that endpoint pair will be set by the SIE. This bit remains set until it is cleared through firmware, or until the SIE is reset. REGISTER 22-4: UEPn: USB ENDPOINT n CONTROL REGISTER (UEP0 THROUGH UEP7) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 EPHSHK: Endpoint Handshake Enable bit 1 = Endpoint handshake enabled 0 = Endpoint handshake disabled (typically used for isochronous endpoints) bit 3 EPCONDIS: Bidirectional Endpoint Control bit If EPOUTEN = 1 and EPINEN = 1: 1 = Disable Endpoint n from control transfers; only IN and OUT transfers allowed 0 = Enable Endpoint n for control (SETUP) transfers; IN and OUT transfers also allowed bit 2 EPOUTEN: Endpoint Output Enable bit 1 = Endpoint n output enabled 0 = Endpoint n output disabled bit 1 EPINEN: Endpoint Input Enable bit 1 = Endpoint n input enabled 0 = Endpoint n input disabled bit 0 EPSTALL: Endpoint STALL Enable bit(1) 1 = Endpoint n is stalled 0 = Endpoint n is not stalled Note 1: Valid only if Endpoint n is enabled; otherwise, the bit is ignored. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 258 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.2.5 USB ADDRESS REGISTER (UADDR) The USB Address register contains the unique USB address that the peripheral will decode when active. UADDR is reset to 00h when a USB Reset is received, indicated by URSTIF, or when a Reset is received from the microcontroller. The USB address must be written by the microcontroller during the USB setup phase (enumeration) as part of the Microchip USB firmware support. 22.2.6 USB FRAME NUMBER REGISTERS (UFRMH:UFRML) The Frame Number registers contain the 11-bit frame number. The low-order byte is contained in UFRML, while the three high-order bits are contained in UFRMH. The register pair is updated with the current frame number whenever a SOF token is received. For the microcontroller, these registers are read-only. The Frame Number registers are primarily used for isochronous transfers. The contents of the UFRMH and UFRML registers are only valid when the 48 MHz SIE clock is active (i.e., contents are inaccurate when SUSPND (UCON<1>) bit = 1). 22.3 USB RAM USB data moves between the microcontroller core and the SIE through a memory space known as the USB RAM. This is a special dual access memory that is mapped into the normal data memory space in Bank 2 (200h to 2FFh) for a total of 256 bytes (Figure 22-4). Bank 2 (200h through 27Fh) is used specifically for endpoint buffer control. Depending on the type of buffering being used, all but 8 bytes of Bank 2 may also be available for use as USB buffer space. Although USB RAM is available to the microcontroller as data memory, the sections that are being accessed by the SIE should not be accessed by the microcontroller. A semaphore mechanism is used to determine the access to a particular buffer at any given time. This is discussed in Section 22.4.1.1 “Buffer Ownership”. FIGURE 22-4: IMPLEMENTATION OF USB RAM IN DATA MEMORY SPACE 200h 2FFh Buffer Descriptors, USB Data or User Data SFRs 1FFh 000h F60h FFFh Banks 2 (USB RAM) F5Fh F53h F52h 300h Banks 3 to 14 User Data Unused Banks 15 USB Data or User Data 27Fh 280h Banks 0 to 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 259 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.4 Buffer Descriptors and the Buffer Descriptor Table The registers in Bank 2 are used specifically for endpoint buffer control in a structure known as the Buffer Descriptor Table (BDT). This provides a flexible method for users to construct and control endpoint buffers of various lengths and configuration. The BDT is composed of Buffer Descriptors (BD) which are used to define and control the actual buffers in the USB RAM space. Each BD, in turn, consists of four registers, where n represents one of the 32 possible BDs (range of 0 to 31): • BDnSTAT: BD Status register • BDnCNT: BD Byte Count register • BDnADRL: BD Address Low register • BDnADRH: BD Address High register BDs always occur as a four-byte block in the sequence, BDnSTAT:BDnCNT:BDnADRL:BDnADRH. The address of BDnSTAT is always an offset of (4n – 1) (in hexadecimal) from 200h, with n being the buffer descriptor number. Depending on the buffering configuration used (Section 22.4.4 “Ping-Pong Buffering”), there are up to 16, 17 or 32 sets of buffer descriptors. At a minimum, the BDT must be at least 8 bytes long. This is because the USB specification mandates that every device must have Endpoint 0 with both input and output for initial setup. Depending on the endpoint and buffering configuration, the BDT can be as long as 128 bytes. Although they can be thought of as Special Function Registers, the Buffer Descriptor Status and Address registers are not hardware mapped, as conventional microcontroller SFRs in Bank 15 are. If the endpoint corresponding to a particular BD is not enabled, its registers are not used. Instead of appearing as unimplemented addresses, however, they appear as available RAM. Only when an endpoint is enabled by setting the UEPn<1> bit does the memory at those addresses become functional as BD registers. As with any address in the data memory space, the BD registers have an indeterminate value on any device Reset. An example of a BD for a 64-byte buffer, starting at 280h, is shown in Figure 22-5. A particular set of BD registers is only valid if the corresponding endpoint has been enabled using the UEPn register. All BD registers are available in USB RAM. The BD for each endpoint should be set up prior to enabling the endpoint. 22.4.1 BD STATUS AND CONFIGURATION Buffer descriptors not only define the size of an endpoint buffer, but also determine its configuration and control. Most of the configuration is done with the BD Status register, BDnSTAT. Each BD has its own unique and correspondingly numbered BDnSTAT register. FIGURE 22-5: EXAMPLE OF A BUFFER DESCRIPTOR Unlike other control registers, the bit configuration for the BDnSTAT register is context sensitive. There are two distinct configurations, depending on whether the microcontroller or the USB module is modifying the BD and buffer at a particular time. Only three bit definitions are shared between the two. 22.4.1.1 Buffer Ownership Because the buffers and their BDs are shared between the CPU and the USB module, a simple semaphore mechanism is used to distinguish which is allowed to update the BD and associated buffers in memory. This is done by using the UOWN bit (BDnSTAT<7>) as a semaphore to distinguish which is allowed to update the BD and associated buffers in memory. UOWN is the only bit that is shared between the two configurations of BDnSTAT. When UOWN is clear, the BD entry is “owned” by the microcontroller core. When the UOWN bit is set, the BD entry and the buffer memory are “owned” by the USB peripheral. The core should not modify the BD or its corresponding data buffer during this time. Note that the microcontroller core can still read BDnSTAT while the SIE owns the buffer and vice versa. The buffer descriptors have a different meaning based on the source of the register update. Prior to placing ownership with the USB peripheral, the user can configure the basic operation of the peripheral through the BDnSTAT bits. During this time, the byte count and buffer location registers can also be set. When UOWN is set, the user can no longer depend on the values that were written to the BDs. From this point, the SIE updates the BDs as necessary, overwriting the original BD values. The BDnSTAT register is updated by the SIE with the token PID and the transfer count, BDnCNT, is updated. 200h USB Data Buffer Buffer BD0STAT BD0CNT BD0ADRL BD0ADRH 201h 202h 203h 280h 2BFh Descriptor Note: Memory regions not to scale. 40h 00h 05h Starting Size of Block (xxh) Address Registers Contents Address PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 260 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. The BDnSTAT byte of the BDT should always be the last byte updated when preparing to arm an endpoint. The SIE will clear the UOWN bit when a transaction has completed. No hardware mechanism exists to block access when the UOWN bit is set. Thus, unexpected behavior can occur if the microcontroller attempts to modify memory when the SIE owns it. Similarly, reading such memory may produce inaccurate data until the USB peripheral returns ownership to the microcontroller. 22.4.1.2 BDnSTAT Register (CPU Mode) When UOWN = 0, the microcontroller core owns the BD. At this point, the other seven bits of the register take on control functions. The Data Toggle Sync Enable bit, DTSEN (BDnSTAT<3>), controls data toggle parity checking. Setting DTSEN enables data toggle synchronization by the SIE. When enabled, it checks the data packet’s parity against the value of DTS (BDnSTAT<6>). If a packet arrives with an incorrect synchronization, the data will essentially be ignored. It will not be written to the USB RAM and the USB transfer complete interrupt flag will not be set. The SIE will send an ACK token back to the host to Acknowledge receipt, however. The effects of the DTSEN bit on the SIE are summarized in Table 22-1. The Buffer Stall bit, BSTALL (BDnSTAT<2>), provides support for control transfers, usually one-time stalls on Endpoint 0. It also provides support for the SET_FEATURE/CLEAR_FEATURE commands specified in Chapter 9 of the USB specification; typically, continuous STALLs to any endpoint other than the default control endpoint. The BSTALL bit enables buffer stalls. Setting BSTALL causes the SIE to return a STALL token to the host if a received token would use the BD in that location. The EPSTALL bit in the corresponding UEPn control register is set and a STALL interrupt is generated when a STALL is issued to the host. The UOWN bit remains set and the BDs are not changed unless a SETUP token is received. In this case, the STALL condition is cleared and the ownership of the BD is returned to the microcontroller core. The BD<9:8> bits (BDnSTAT<1:0>) store the two Most Significant digits of the SIE byte count; the lower 8 digits are stored in the corresponding BDnCNT register. See Section 22.4.2 “BD Byte Count” for more information. TABLE 22-1: EFFECT OF DTSEN BIT ON ODD/EVEN (DATA0/DATA1) PACKET RECEPTION OUT Packet from Host BDnSTAT Settings Device Response after Receiving Packet DTSEN DTS Handshake UOWN TRNIF BDnSTAT and USTAT Status DATA0 1 0 ACK 0 1 Updated DATA1 1 0 ACK 1 0 Not Updated DATA0 1 1 ACK 1 0 Not Updated DATA1 1 1 ACK 0 1 Updated Either 0 x ACK 0 1 Updated Either, with error x x NAK 1 0 Not Updated Legend: x = don’t care  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 261 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 22-5: BDnSTAT: BUFFER DESCRIPTOR n STATUS REGISTER (BD0STAT THROUGH BD31STAT), CPU MODE (DATA IS WRITTEN TO THE SIDE) R/W-x R/W-x U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x UOWN(1) DTS(2) —(3) —(3) DTSEN BSTALL BC9 BC8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 UOWN: USB Own bit(1) 0 = The microcontroller core owns the BD and its corresponding buffer bit 6 DTS: Data Toggle Synchronization bit(2) 1 = Data 1 packet 0 = Data 0 packet bit 5-4 Unimplemented: These bits should always be programmed to ‘0’(3). bit 3 DTSEN: Data Toggle Synchronization Enable bit 1 = Data toggle synchronization is enabled; data packets with incorrect Sync value will be ignored except for a SETUP transaction, which is accepted even if the data toggle bits do not match 0 = No data toggle synchronization is performed bit 2 BSTALL: Buffer Stall Enable bit 1 = Buffer stall enabled; STALL handshake issued if a token is received that would use the BD in the given location (UOWN bit remains set, BD value is unchanged) 0 = Buffer stall disabled bit 1-0 BC<9:8>: Byte Count 9 and 8 bits The byte count bits represent the number of bytes that will be transmitted for an IN token or received during an OUT token. Together with BC<7:0>, the valid byte counts are 0-1023. Note 1: This bit must be initialized by the user to the desired value prior to enabling the USB module. 2: This bit is ignored unless DTSEN = 1. 3: If these bits are set, USB communication may not work. Hence, these bits should always be maintained as ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 262 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.4.1.3 BDnSTAT Register (SIE Mode) When the BD and its buffer are owned by the SIE, most of the bits in BDnSTAT take on a different meaning. The configuration is shown in Register 22-6. Once the UOWN bit is set, any data or control settings previously written there by the user will be overwritten with data from the SIE. The BDnSTAT register is updated by the SIE with the token Packet Identifier (PID) which is stored in BDnSTAT<5:3>. The transfer count in the corresponding BDnCNT register is updated. Values that overflow the 8-bit register carry over to the two Most Significant digits of the count, stored in BDnSTAT<1:0>. 22.4.2 BD BYTE COUNT The byte count represents the total number of bytes that will be transmitted during an IN transfer. After an IN transfer, the SIE will return the number of bytes sent to the host. For an OUT transfer, the byte count represents the maximum number of bytes that can be received and stored in USB RAM. After an OUT transfer, the SIE will return the actual number of bytes received. If the number of bytes received exceeds the corresponding byte count, the data packet will be rejected and a NAK handshake will be generated. When this happens, the byte count will not be updated. The 10-bit byte count is distributed over two registers. The lower 8 bits of the count reside in the BDnCNT register. The upper two bits reside in BDnSTAT<1:0>. This represents a valid byte range of 0 to 1023. 22.4.3 BD ADDRESS VALIDATION The BD Address register pair contains the starting RAM address location for the corresponding endpoint buffer. No mechanism is available in hardware to validate the BD address. If the value of the BD address does not point to an address in the USB RAM, or if it points to an address within another endpoint’s buffer, data is likely to be lost or overwritten. Similarly, overlapping a receive buffer (OUT endpoint) with a BD location in use can yield unexpected results. When developing USB applications, the user may want to consider the inclusion of software-based address validation in their code. REGISTER 22-6: BDnSTAT: BUFFER DESCRIPTOR n STATUS REGISTER (BD0STAT THROUGH BD31STAT), SIE MODE (DATA RETURNED BY THE SIDE TO THE MCU) R/W-x U-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x UOWN — PID3 PID2 PID1 PID0 BC9 BC8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 UOWN: USB Own bit 1 = The SIE owns the BD and its corresponding buffer bit 6 Reserved: Not written by the SIE bit 5-2 PID<3:0>: Packet Identifier bits The received token PID value of the last transfer (IN, OUT or SETUP transactions only). bit 1-0 BC<9:8>: Byte Count 9 and 8 bits These bits are updated by the SIE to reflect the actual number of bytes received on an OUT transfer and the actual number of bytes transmitted on an IN transfer.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 263 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.4.4 PING-PONG BUFFERING An endpoint is defined to have a ping-pong buffer when it has two sets of BD entries: one set for an Even transfer and one set for an Odd transfer. This allows the CPU to process one BD while the SIE is processing the other BD. Double-buffering BDs in this way allows for maximum throughput to/from the USB. The USB module supports four modes of operation: • No ping-pong support • Ping-pong buffer support for OUT Endpoint 0 only • Ping-pong buffer support for all endpoints • Ping-pong buffer support for all other Endpoints except Endpoint 0 The ping-pong buffer settings are configured using the PPB<1:0> bits in the UCFG register. The USB module keeps track of the Ping-Pong Pointer individually for each endpoint. All pointers are initially reset to the Even BD when the module is enabled. After the completion of a transaction (UOWN cleared by the SIE), the pointer is toggled to the Odd BD. After the completion of the next transaction, the pointer is toggled back to the Even BD and so on. The Even/Odd status of the last transaction is stored in the PPBI bit of the USTAT register. The user can reset all Ping-Pong Pointers to Even using the PPBRST bit. Figure 22-6 shows the four different modes of operation and how USB RAM is filled with the BDs. BDs have a fixed relationship to a particular endpoint, depending on the buffering configuration. The mapping of BDs to endpoints is detailed in Table 22-2. This relationship also means that gaps may occur in the BDT if endpoints are not enabled contiguously. This theoretically means that the BDs for disabled endpoints could be used as buffer space. In practice, users should avoid using such spaces in the BDT unless a method of validating BD addresses is implemented. FIGURE 22-6: BUFFER DESCRIPTOR TABLE MAPPING FOR BUFFERING MODES EP1 IN Even EP1 OUT Even EP1 OUT Odd EP1 IN Odd Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor EP1 IN EP7 IN EP1 OUT EP0 OUT PPB<1:0> = 00 EP0 IN EP1 IN No Ping-Pong EP7 IN EP0 IN EP0 OUT Even PPB<1:0> = 01 EP0 OUT Odd EP1 OUT Ping-Pong Buffer EP7 IN Odd EP0 IN Even EP0 OUT Even PPB<1:0> = 10 EP0 OUT Odd EP0 IN Odd Ping-Pong Buffers Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor 200h 2FFh 2FFh 2FFh 200h 200h 23Fh 243h Available as Data RAM Available as Data RAM Maximum Memory Used: 64 bytes Maximum BDs: 16 (BD0 to BD15) Maximum Memory Used: 68 bytes Maximum BDs: 17 (BD0 to BD16) Maximum Memory Used: 128 bytes Maximum BDs: 32 (BD0 to BD31) Note: Memory area not shown to scale. Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Buffers on EP0 OUT on all EPs EP1 IN Even EP1 OUT Even EP1 OUT Odd EP1 IN Odd Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor EP7 IN Odd EP0 OUT PPB<1:0> = 11 EP0 IN Ping-Pong Buffers Descriptor Descriptor Descriptor 2FFh 200h Maximum Memory Used: 120 bytes Maximum BDs: 30 (BD0 to BD29) on all other EPs except EP0 Available as Data RAM 277h 27Fh PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 264 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 22-2: ASSIGNMENT OF BUFFER DESCRIPTORS FOR THE DIFFERENT BUFFERING MODES TABLE 22-3: SUMMARY OF USB BUFFER DESCRIPTOR TABLE REGISTERS Endpoint BDs Assigned to Endpoint Mode 0 (No Ping-Pong) Mode 1 (Ping-Pong on EP0 OUT) Mode 2 (Ping-Pong on all EPs) Mode 3 (Ping-Pong on all other EPs, except EP0) Out In Out In Out In Out In 0 0 1 0 (E), 1 (O) 2 0 (E), 1 (O) 2 (E), 3 (O) 0 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 (E), 5 (O) 6 (E), 7 (O) 2 (E), 3 (O) 4 (E), 5 (O) 2 4 5 5 6 8 (E), 9 (O) 10 (E), 11 (O) 6 (E), 7 (O) 8 (E), 9 (O) 3 6 7 7 8 12 (E), 13 (O) 14 (E), 15 (O) 10 (E), 11 (O) 12 (E), 13 (O) 4 8 9 9 10 16 (E), 17 (O) 18 (E), 19 (O) 14 (E), 15 (O) 16 (E), 17 (O) 5 10 11 11 12 20 (E), 21 (O) 22 (E), 23 (O) 18 (E), 19 (O) 20 (E), 21 (O) 6 12 13 13 14 24 (E), 25 (O) 26 (E), 27 (O) 22 (E), 23 (O) 24 (E), 25 (O) 7 14 15 15 16 28 (E), 29 (O) 30 (E), 31 (O) 26 (E), 27 (O) 28 (E), 29 (O) Legend: (E) = Even transaction buffer, (O) = Odd transaction buffer Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 BDnSTAT(1) UOWN DTS(4) PID3(2) PID2(2) PID1(2) DTSEN(3) PID0(2) BSTALL(3) BC9 BC8 BDnCNT(1) Byte Count BDnADRL(1) Buffer Address Low BDnADRH(1) Buffer Address High Note 1: For buffer descriptor registers, n may have a value of 0 to 31. For the sake of brevity, all 32 registers are shown as one generic prototype. All registers have indeterminate Reset values (xxxx xxxx). 2: Bits 5 through 2 of the BDnSTAT register are used by the SIE to return PID<3:0> values once the register is turned over to the SIE (UOWN bit is set). Once the registers have been under SIE control, the values written for DTSEN and BSTALL are no longer valid. 3: Prior to turning the buffer descriptor over to the SIE (UOWN bit is cleared), bits 5 through 2 of the BDnSTAT register are used to configure the DTSEN and BSTALL settings. 4: This bit is ignored unless DTSEN = 1.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 265 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.5 USB Interrupts The USB module can generate multiple interrupt conditions. To accommodate all of these interrupt sources, the module is provided with its own interrupt logic structure, similar to that of the microcontroller. USB interrupts are enabled with one set of control registers and trapped with a separate set of flag registers. All sources are funneled into a single USB interrupt request, USBIF (PIR2<2>), in the microcontroller’s interrupt logic. Figure 22-7 shows the interrupt logic for the USB module. There are two layers of interrupt registers in the USB module. The top level consists of overall USB Status interrupts; these are enabled and flagged in the UIE and UIR registers, respectively. The second level consists of USB error conditions, which are enabled and flagged in the UEIR and UEIE registers. An interrupt condition in any of these triggers a USB Error Interrupt Flag (UERRIF) in the top level. Interrupts may be used to trap routine events in a USB transaction. Figure 22-8 shows some common events within a USB frame and their corresponding interrupts. FIGURE 22-7: USB INTERRUPT LOGIC FUNNEL FIGURE 22-8: EXAMPLE OF A USB TRANSACTION AND INTERRUPT EVENTS BTSEF BTSEE BTOEF BTOEE DFN8EF DFN8EE CRC16EF CRC16EE CRC5EF CRC5EE PIDEF PIDEE SOFIF SOFIE TRNIF TRNIE IDLEIF IDLEIE STALLIF STALLIE ACTVIF ACTVIE URSTIF URSTIE UERRIF UERRIE USBIF Second Level USB Interrupts (USB Error Conditions) UEIR (Flag) and UEIE (Enable) Registers Top Level USB Interrupts (USB Status Interrupts) UIR (Flag) and UIE (Enable) Registers USB Reset RESET SOF SETUP DATA STATUS SOF SETUPToken Data ACK Start-of-Frame (SOF) OUT Token Empty Data ACK IN Token Data ACK SOFIF URSTIF 1 ms Frame Differential Data From Host From Host To Host From Host To Host From Host From Host From Host To Host Transaction Control Transfer(1) Transaction Complete Note 1: The control transfer shown here is only an example showing events that can occur for every transaction. Typical control transfers will spread across multiple frames. Set TRNIF Set TRNIF Set TRNIF PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 266 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.5.1 USB INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (UIR) The USB Interrupt Status register (Register 22-7) contains the flag bits for each of the USB Status interrupt sources. Each of these sources has a corresponding interrupt enable bit in the UIE register. All of the USB status flags are ORed together to generate the USBIF interrupt flag for the microcontroller’s interrupt funnel. Once an interrupt bit has been set by the SIE, it must be cleared by software by writing a ‘0’. The flag bits can also be set in software which can aid in firmware debugging. REGISTER 22-7: UIR: USB INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 — SOFIF STALLIF IDLEIF(1) TRNIF(2) ACTVIF(3) UERRIF(4) URSTIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 SOFIF: Start-of-Frame Token Interrupt bit 1 = A Start-of-Frame token received by the SIE 0 = No Start-of-Frame token received by the SIE bit 5 STALLIF: A STALL Handshake Interrupt bit 1 = A STALL handshake was sent by the SIE 0 = A STALL handshake has not been sent bit 4 IDLEIF: Idle Detect Interrupt bit(1) 1 = Idle condition detected (constant Idle state of 3 ms or more) 0 = No Idle condition detected bit 3 TRNIF: Transaction Complete Interrupt bit(2) 1 = Processing of pending transaction is complete; read USTAT register for endpoint information 0 = Processing of pending transaction is not complete or no transaction is pending bit 2 ACTVIF: Bus Activity Detect Interrupt bit(3) 1 = Activity on the D+/D- lines was detected 0 = No activity detected on the D+/D- lines bit 1 UERRIF: USB Error Condition Interrupt bit(4) 1 = An unmasked error condition has occurred 0 = No unmasked error condition has occurred. bit 0 URSTIF: USB Reset Interrupt bit 1 = Valid USB Reset occurred; 00h is loaded into UADDR register 0 = No USB Reset has occurred Note 1: Once an Idle state is detected, the user may want to place the USB module in Suspend mode. 2: Clearing this bit will cause the USTAT FIFO to advance (valid only for IN, OUT and SETUP tokens). 3: This bit is typically unmasked only following the detection of a UIDLE interrupt event. 4: Only error conditions enabled through the UEIE register will set this bit. This bit is a status bit only and cannot be set or cleared by the user.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 267 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.5.1.1 Bus Activity Detect Interrupt Bit (ACTVIF) The ACTVIF bit cannot be cleared immediately after the USB module wakes up from Suspend or while the USB module is suspended. A few clock cycles are required to synchronize the internal hardware state machine before the ACTVIF bit can be cleared by firmware. Clearing the ACTVIF bit before the internal hardware is synchronized may not have an effect on the value of ACTVIF. Additionally, if the USB module uses the clock from the 48 MHz PLL source, then after clearing the SUSPND bit, the USB module may not be immediately operational while waiting for the 48 MHz PLL to lock. The application code should clear the ACTVIF flag as shown in Example 22-1. Only one ACTVIF interrupt is generated when resuming from the USB bus Idle condition. If user firmware clears the ACTVIF bit, the bit will not immediately become set again, even when there is continuous bus traffic. Bus traffic must cease long enough to generate another IDLEIF condition before another ACTVIF interrupt can be generated. EXAMPLE 22-1: CLEARING ACTVIF BIT (UIR<2>) Assembly: BCF UCON, SUSPND LOOP: BTFSS UIR, ACTVIF BRA DONE BCF UIR, ACTVIF BRA LOOP DONE: C: UCONbits.SUSPND = 0; while (UIRbits.ACTVIF) { UIRbits.ACTVIF = 0; } PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 268 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.5.2 USB INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (UIE) The USB Interrupt Enable register (Register 22-8) contains the enable bits for the USB Status interrupt sources. Setting any of these bits will enable the respective interrupt source in the UIR register. The values in this register only affect the propagation of an interrupt condition to the microcontroller’s interrupt logic. The flag bits are still set by their interrupt conditions, allowing them to be polled and serviced without actually generating an interrupt. REGISTER 22-8: UIE: USB INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — SOFIE STALLIE IDLEIE TRNIE ACTVIE UERRIE URSTIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 SOFIE: Start-of-Frame Token Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Start-of-Frame token interrupt enabled 0 = Start-of-Frame token interrupt disabled bit 5 STALLIE: STALL Handshake Interrupt Enable bit 1 = STALL interrupt enabled 0 = STALL interrupt disabled bit 4 IDLEIE: Idle Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Idle detect interrupt enabled 0 = Idle detect interrupt disabled bit 3 TRNIE: Transaction Complete Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Transaction interrupt enabled 0 = Transaction interrupt disabled bit 2 ACTVIE: Bus Activity Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Bus activity detect interrupt enabled 0 = Bus activity detect interrupt disabled bit 1 UERRIE: USB Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = USB error interrupt enabled 0 = USB error interrupt disabled bit 0 URSTIE: USB Reset Interrupt Enable bit 1 = USB Reset interrupt enabled 0 = USB Reset interrupt disabled  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 269 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.5.3 USB ERROR INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (UEIR) The USB Error Interrupt Status register (Register 22-9) contains the flag bits for each of the error sources within the USB peripheral. Each of these sources is controlled by a corresponding interrupt enable bit in the UEIE register. All of the USB error flags are ORed together to generate the USB Error Interrupt Flag (UERRIF) at the top level of the interrupt logic. Each error bit is set as soon as the error condition is detected. Thus, the interrupt will typically not correspond with the end of a token being processed. Once an interrupt bit has been set by the SIE, it must be cleared by software by writing a ‘0’. REGISTER 22-9: UEIR: USB ERROR INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER R/C-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 BTSEF — — BTOEF DFN8EF CRC16EF CRC5EF PIDEF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit C = Clearable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 BTSEF: Bit Stuff Error Flag bit 1 = A bit stuff error has been detected 0 = No bit stuff error bit 6-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 BTOEF: Bus Turnaround Time-out Error Flag bit 1 = Bus turnaround time-out has occurred (more than 16 bit times of Idle from previous EOP elapsed) 0 = No bus turnaround time-out bit 3 DFN8EF: Data Field Size Error Flag bit 1 = The data field was not an integral number of bytes 0 = The data field was an integral number of bytes bit 2 CRC16EF: CRC16 Failure Flag bit 1 = The CRC16 failed 0 = The CRC16 passed bit 1 CRC5EF: CRC5 Host Error Flag bit 1 = The token packet was rejected due to a CRC5 error 0 = The token packet was accepted bit 0 PIDEF: PID Check Failure Flag bit 1 = PID check failed 0 = PID check passed PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 270 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.5.4 USB ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (UEIE) The USB Error Interrupt Enable register (Register 22-10) contains the enable bits for each of the USB error interrupt sources. Setting any of these bits will enable the respective error interrupt source in the UEIR register to propagate into the UERR bit at the top level of the interrupt logic. As with the UIE register, the enable bits only affect the propagation of an interrupt condition to the microcontroller’s interrupt logic. The flag bits are still set by their interrupt conditions, allowing them to be polled and serviced without actually generating an interrupt. REGISTER 22-10: UEIE: USB ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 BTSEE — — BTOEE DFN8EE CRC16EE CRC5EE PIDEE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 BTSEE: Bit Stuff Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Bit stuff error interrupt enabled 0 = Bit stuff error interrupt disabled bit 6-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 BTOEE: Bus Turnaround Time-out Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Bus turnaround time-out error interrupt enabled 0 = Bus turnaround time-out error interrupt disabled bit 3 DFN8EE: Data Field Size Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Data field size error interrupt enabled 0 = Data field size error interrupt disabled bit 2 CRC16EE: CRC16 Failure Interrupt Enable bit 1 = CRC16 failure interrupt enabled 0 = CRC16 failure interrupt disabled bit 1 CRC5EE: CRC5 Host Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = CRC5 host error interrupt enabled 0 = CRC5 host error interrupt disabled bit 0 PIDEE: PID Check Failure Interrupt Enable bit 1 = PID check failure interrupt enabled 0 = PID check failure interrupt disabled  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 271 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.6 USB Power Modes Many USB applications will likely have several different sets of power requirements and configuration. The most common power modes encountered are Bus Power Only, Self-Power Only and Dual Power with Self-Power Dominance. The most common cases are presented here. Also provided is a means of estimating the current consumption of the USB transceiver. 22.6.1 BUS POWER ONLY In Bus Power Only mode, all power for the application is drawn from the USB (Figure 22-9). This is effectively the simplest power method for the device. In order to meet the inrush current requirements of the USB 2.0 specifications, the total effective capacitance appearing across VBUS and ground must be no more than 10 μF. If not, some kind of inrush liming is required. For more details, see section 7.2.4 of the USB 2.0 specification. According to the USB 2.0 specification, all USB devices must also support a Low-Power Suspend mode. In the USB Suspend mode, devices must consume no more than 500 A (or 2.5 mA for high powered devices that are remote wake-up capable) from the 5V VBUS line of the USB cable. The host signals the USB device to enter the Suspend mode by stopping all USB traffic to that device for more than 3 ms. This condition will cause the IDLEIF bit in the UIR register to become set. During the USB Suspend mode, the D+ or D- pull-up resistor must remain active, which will consume some of the allowed suspend current: 500 A/2.5 mA budget. FIGURE 22-9: BUS POWER ONLY 22.6.2 SELF-POWER ONLY In Self-Power Only mode, the USB application provides its own power, with very little power being pulled from the USB. Figure 22-10 shows an example. In order to meet compliance specifications, the USB module (and the D+ or D- pull-up resistor) should not be enabled until the host actively drives VBUS high. The application should never source any current onto the 5V VBUS pin of the USB cable. FIGURE 22-10: SELF-POWER ONLY VDD VUSB VSS VBUS VDD VUSB VSS VSELF PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 272 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.6.3 DUAL POWER WITH SELF-POWER DOMINANCE Some applications may require a dual power option. This allows the application to use internal power primarily, but switch to power from the USB when no internal power is available. Figure 22-11 shows a simple Dual Power with Self-Power Dominance mode example, which automatically switches between Self-Power Only and USB Bus Power Only modes. Dual power devices must also meet all of the special requirements for inrush current and Suspend mode current and must not enable the USB module until VBUS is driven high. See Section 22.6.1 “Bus Power Only” and Section 22.6.2 “Self-Power Only” for descriptions of those requirements. Additionally, dual power devices must never source current onto the 5V VBUS pin of the USB cable. FIGURE 22-11: DUAL POWER EXAMPLE 22.6.4 USB TRANSCEIVER CURRENT CONSUMPTION The USB transceiver consumes a variable amount of current depending on the characteristic impedance of the USB cable, the length of the cable, the VUSB supply voltage and the actual data patterns moving across the USB cable. Longer cables have larger capacitances and consume more total energy when switching output states. Data patterns that consist of “IN” traffic consume far more current than “OUT” traffic. IN traffic requires the PIC® device to drive the USB cable, whereas OUT traffic requires that the host drive the USB cable. The data that is sent across the USB cable is NRZI encoded. In the NRZI encoding scheme, ‘0’ bits cause a toggling of the output state of the transceiver (either from a “J” state to a “K” state, or vise versa). With the exception of the effects of bit-stuffing, NRZI encoded ‘1’ bits do not cause the output state of the transceiver to change. Therefore, IN traffic consisting of data bits of value, ‘0’, cause the most current consumption, as the transceiver must charge/discharge the USB cable in order to change states. More details about NRZI encoding and bit-stuffing can be found in the USB 2.0 specification’s section 7.1, although knowledge of such details is not required to make USB applications using the PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 of microcontrollers. Among other things, the SIE handles bit-stuffing/ unstuffing, NRZI encoding/decoding and CRC generation/checking in hardware. The total transceiver current consumption will be application-specific. However, to help estimate how much current actually may be required in full-speed applications, Equation 22-1 can be used. Example 22-2 shows how this equation can be used for a theoretical application. Note: Users should keep in mind the limits for devices drawing power from the USB. According to USB Specification 2.0, this cannot exceed 100 mA per low-power device or 500 mA per high-power device. VDD VUSB VSS VBUS VSELF ~5V ~5V 100 k  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 273 PIC18F/LF1XK50 EQUATION 22-1: ESTIMATING USB TRANSCEIVER CURRENT CONSUMPTION EXAMPLE 22-2: CALCULATING USB TRANSCEIVER CURRENT† IXCVR = + IPULLUP (60 mA • VUSB • PZERO • PIN • LCABLE) (3.3V • 5m) Legend: VUSB: Voltage applied to the VUSB pin in volts. (Should be 3.0V to 3.6V.) PZERO: Percentage (in decimal) of the IN traffic bits sent by the PIC® device that are a value of ‘0’. PIN: Percentage (in decimal) of total bus bandwidth that is used for IN traffic. LCABLE: Length (in meters) of the USB cable. The USB 2.0 specification requires that full-speed applications use cables no longer than 5m. IPULLUP: Current which the nominal, 1.5 k pull-up resistor (when enabled) must supply to the USB cable. On the host or hub end of the USB cable, 15 k nominal resistors (14.25 k to 24.8 k) are present which pull both the D+ and D- lines to ground. During bus Idle conditions (such as between packets or during USB Suspend mode), this results in up to 218 A of quiescent current drawn at 3.3V. IPULLUP is also dependant on bus traffic conditions and can be as high as 2.2 mA when the USB bandwidth is fully utilized (either IN or OUT traffic) for data that drives the lines to the “K” state most of the time. For this example, the following assumptions are made about the application: • 3.3V will be applied to VUSB and VDD, with the core voltage regulator enabled. • This is a full-speed application that uses one interrupt IN endpoint that can send one packet of 64 bytes every 1 ms, with no restrictions on the values of the bytes being sent. The application may or may not have additional traffic on OUT endpoints. • A regular USB “B” or “mini-B” connector will be used on the application circuit board. In this case, PZERO = 100% = 1, because there should be no restriction on the value of the data moving through the IN endpoint. All 64 kBps of data could potentially be bytes of value, 00h. Since ‘0’ bits cause toggling of the output state of the transceiver, they cause the USB transceiver to consume extra current charging/discharging the cable. In this case, 100% of the data bits sent can be of value ‘0’. This should be considered the “max” value, as normal data will consist of a fair mix of ones and zeros. This application uses 64 kBps for IN traffic out of the total bus bandwidth of 1.5 MBps (12 Mbps), therefore: Since a regular “B” or “mini-B” connector is used in this application, the end user may plug in any type of cable up to the maximum allowed 5 m length. Therefore, we use the worst-case length: LCABLE = 5 meters Assume IPULLUP = 2.2 mA. The actual value of IPULLUP will likely be closer to 218 A, but allow for the worst-case. USB bandwidth is shared between all the devices which are plugged into the root port (via hubs). If the application is plugged into a USB 1.1 hub that has other devices plugged into it, your device may see host to device traffic on the bus, even if it is not addressed to your device. Since any traffic, regardless of source, can increase the IPULLUP current above the base 218 A, it is safest to allow for the worst-case of 2.2 mA. Therefore: The calculated value should be considered an approximation and additional guardband or application-specific product testing is recommended. The transceiver current is “in addition to” the rest of the current consumed by the PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 device that is needed to run the core, drive the other I/O lines, power the various modules, etc. Pin = 64 kBps 1.5 MBps = 4.3% = 0.043 IXCVR = (60 mA • 3.3V • 1 • 0.043 • 5m) + 2.2 mA = 4.8 mA (3.3V • 5m) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 274 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 22.7 Oscillator The USB module has specific clock requirements. For full-speed operation, the clock source must be 48 MHz. Even so, the microcontroller core and other peripherals are not required to run at that clock speed. Available clocking options are described in detail in Section 2.11 “USB Operation”. 22.8 Interrupt-On-Change for D+/Dpins The PIC18F/LF1XK50 has interrupt-on-change functionality on both D+ and D- data pins. This feature allows the device to detect voltage level changes when first connected to a USB host/hub. The USB host/hub has 15K pull-down resistors on the D+ and D- pins. When the PIC18F/LF1XK50 attaches to the bus the D+ and D- pins can detect voltage changes. External resistors are needed for each pin to maintain a high state on the pins when detached. The USB module must be disable (USBEN = 0) for the interrupt-on-change to function. Enabling the USB module (USBEN = 1) will automatically disable the interrupt-on-change for D+ and D- pins. Refer to Section 7.11 “PORTA and PORTB Interrupt- on-Change” for mode detail. 22.9 USB Firmware and Drivers Microchip provides a number of application-specific resources, such as USB firmware and driver support. Refer to www.microchip.com for the latest firmware and driver support. TABLE 22-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH USB MODULE OPERATION(1) Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Details on Page: INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 70 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCL1IP USBIP TMR3IP — 78 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCL1IF USBIF TMR3IF — 74 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCL1IE USBIE TMR3IE — 76 UCON — PPBRST SE0 PKTDIS USBEN RESUME SUSPND — 252 UCFG UTEYE — — UPUEN — FSEN PPB1 PPB0 254 USTAT — ENDP3 ENDP2 ENDP1 ENDP0 DIR PPBI — 256 UADDR — ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 258 UFRML FRM7 FRM6 FRM5 FRM4 FRM3 FRM2 FRM1 FRM0 252 UFRMH — — — — — FRM10 FRM9 FRM8 252 UIR — SOFIF STALLIF IDLEIF TRNIF ACTVIF UERRIF URSTIF 266 UIE — SOFIE STALLIE IDLEIE TRNIE ACTVIE UERRIE URSTIE 268 UEIR BTSEF — — BTOEF DFN8EF CRC16EF CRC5EF PIDEF 269 UEIE BTSEE — — BTOEE DFN8EE CRC16EE CRC5EE PIDEE 270 UEP0 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP1 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP2 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP3 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP4 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP5 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP6 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 UEP7 — — — EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL 257 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the USB module. Note 1: This table includes only those hardware mapped SFRs located in Bank 15 of the data memory space. The Buffer Descriptor registers, which are mapped into Bank 4 and are not true SFRs, are listed separately in Table 22-3.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 275 PIC18F/LF1XK50 22.10 Overview of USB This section presents some of the basic USB concepts and useful information necessary to design a USB device. Although much information is provided in this section, there is a plethora of information provided within the USB specifications and class specifications. Thus, the reader is encouraged to refer to the USB specifications for more information (www.usb.org). If you are very familiar with the details of USB, then this section serves as a basic, high-level refresher of USB. 22.10.1 LAYERED FRAMEWORK USB device functionality is structured into a layered framework graphically shown in Figure 22-12. Each level is associated with a functional level within the device. The highest layer, other than the device, is the configuration. A device may have multiple configurations. For example, a particular device may have multiple power requirements based on Self-Power Only or Bus Power Only modes. For each configuration, there may be multiple interfaces. Each interface could support a particular mode of that configuration. Below the interface is the endpoint(s). Data is directly moved at this level. There can be as many as 16 bidirectional endpoints. Endpoint 0 is always a control endpoint and by default, when the device is on the bus, Endpoint 0 must be available to configure the device. 22.10.2 FRAMES Information communicated on the bus is grouped into 1 ms time slots, referred to as frames. Each frame can contain many transactions to various devices and endpoints. Figure 22-8 shows an example of a transaction within a frame. 22.10.3 TRANSFERS There are four transfer types defined in the USB specification. • Isochronous: This type provides a transfer method for large amounts of data (up to 1023 bytes) with timely delivery ensured; however, the data integrity is not ensured. This is good for streaming applications where small data loss is not critical, such as audio. • Bulk: This type of transfer method allows for large amounts of data to be transferred with ensured data integrity; however, the delivery timeliness is not ensured. • Interrupt: This type of transfer provides for ensured timely delivery for small blocks of data, plus data integrity is ensured. • Control: This type provides for device setup control. While full-speed devices support all transfer types, low-speed devices are limited to interrupt and control transfers only. 22.10.4 POWER Power is available from the Universal Serial Bus. The USB specification defines the bus power requirements. Devices may either be self-powered or bus powered. Self-powered devices draw power from an external source, while bus powered devices use power supplied from the bus. FIGURE 22-12: USB LAYERS Device Configuration Interface Endpoint Interface Endpoint Endpoint Endpoint Endpoint To other Configurations (if any) To other Interfaces (if any) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 276 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. The USB specification limits the power taken from the bus. Each device is ensured 100 mA at approximately 5V (one unit load). Additional power may be requested, up to a maximum of 500 mA. Note that power above one unit load is a request and the host or hub is not obligated to provide the extra current. Thus, a device capable of consuming more than one unit load must be able to maintain a low-power configuration of a one unit load or less, if necessary. The USB specification also defines a Suspend mode. In this situation, current must be limited to 500 A, averaged over 1 second. A device must enter a Suspend state after 3 ms of inactivity (i.e., no SOF tokens for 3 ms). A device entering Suspend mode must drop current consumption within 10 ms after Suspend. Likewise, when signaling a wake-up, the device must signal a wake-up within 10 ms of drawing current above the Suspend limit. 22.10.5 ENUMERATION When the device is initially attached to the bus, the host enters an enumeration process in an attempt to identify the device. Essentially, the host interrogates the device, gathering information such as power consumption, data rates and sizes, protocol and other descriptive information; descriptors contain this information. A typical enumeration process would be as follows: 1. USB Reset: Reset the device. Thus, the device is not configured and does not have an address (address 0). 2. Get Device Descriptor: The host requests a small portion of the device descriptor. 3. USB Reset: Reset the device again. 4. Set Address: The host assigns an address to the device. 5. Get Device Descriptor: The host retrieves the device descriptor, gathering info such as manufacturer, type of device, maximum control packet size. 6. Get configuration descriptors. 7. Get any other descriptors. 8. Set a configuration. The exact enumeration process depends on the host. 22.10.6 DESCRIPTORS There are eight different standard descriptor types of which five are most important for this device. 22.10.6.1 Device Descriptor The device descriptor provides general information, such as manufacturer, product number, serial number, the class of the device and the number of configurations. There is only one device descriptor. 22.10.6.2 Configuration Descriptor The configuration descriptor provides information on the power requirements of the device and how many different interfaces are supported when in this configuration. There may be more than one configuration for a device (i.e., low-power and high-power configurations). 22.10.6.3 Interface Descriptor The interface descriptor details the number of endpoints used in this interface, as well as the class of the interface. There may be more than one interface for a configuration. 22.10.6.4 Endpoint Descriptor The endpoint descriptor identifies the transfer type (Section 22.10.3 “Transfers”) and direction, as well as some other specifics for the endpoint. There may be many endpoints in a device and endpoints may be shared in different configurations. 22.10.6.5 String Descriptor Many of the previous descriptors reference one or more string descriptors. String descriptors provide human readable information about the layer (Section 22.10.1 “Layered Framework”) they describe. Often these strings show up in the host to help the user identify the device. String descriptors are generally optional to save memory and are encoded in a unicode format. 22.10.7 BUS SPEED Each USB device must indicate its bus presence and speed to the host. This is accomplished through a 1.5 k resistor which is connected to the bus at the time of the attachment event. Depending on the speed of the device, the resistor either pulls up the D+ or D- line to 3.3V. For a low-speed device, the pull-up resistor is connected to the D- line. For a full-speed device, the pull-up resistor is connected to the D+ line. 22.10.8 CLASS SPECIFICATIONS AND DRIVERS USB specifications include class specifications which operating system vendors optionally support. Examples of classes include Audio, Mass Storage, Communications and Human Interface (HID). In most cases, a driver is required at the host side to ‘talk’ to the USB device. In custom applications, a driver may need to be developed. Fortunately, drivers are available for most common host systems for the most common classes of devices. Thus, these drivers can be reused.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 277 PIC18F/LF1XK50 23.0 RESET The PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices differentiate between various kinds of Reset: a) Power-on Reset (POR) b) MCLR Reset during normal operation c) MCLR Reset during power-managed modes d) Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during execution) e) Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) f) RESET Instruction g) Stack Full Reset h) Stack Underflow Reset This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR, POR and BOR and covers the operation of the various start-up timers. Stack Reset events are covered in Section 3.1.2.4 “Stack Full and Underflow Resets”. WDT Resets are covered in Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”. A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown in Figure 23-1. 23.1 RCON Register Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON register (Register 23-1). The lower five bits of the register indicate that a specific Reset event has occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be cleared by the event and must be set by the application after the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together, can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just occurred. This is described in more detail in Section 23.6 “Reset State of Registers”. The RCON register also has control bits for setting interrupt priority (IPEN) and software control of the BOR (SBOREN). Interrupt priority is discussed in Section 7.0 “Interrupts”. BOR is covered in Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. FIGURE 23-1: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT External Reset MCLR VDD OSC1 WDT Time-out VDD Rise Detect OST/PWRT LFINTOSC POR Pulse OST(2) 10-bit Ripple Counter PWRT(2) 11-bit Ripple Counter Enable OST(1) Enable PWRT Note 1: See Table 23-2 for time-out situations. 2: PWRT and OST counters are reset by POR and BOR. See Sections 23.3 and 23.4. Brown-out Reset BOREN RESET Instruction Stack Pointer Stack Full/Underflow Reset Sleep ( )_IDLE 1024 Cycles 32 s 65.5 ms MCLRE S R Q Chip_Reset PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 278 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 23-1: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN SBOREN(1) — RI TO PD POR(2) BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts bit 6 SBOREN: BOR Software Enable bit(1) If BOREN<1:0> = 01: 1 = BOR is enabled 0 = BOR is disabled If BOREN<1:0> = 00, 10 or 11: Bit is disabled and read as ‘0’. bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware or Power-on Reset) 0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in firmware after a code-executed Reset occurs) bit 3 TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 2 PD: Power-down Detection Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit(2) 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit(3) 1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set by firmware after a POR or Brown-out Reset occurs) Note 1: If SBOREN is enabled, its Reset state is ‘1’; otherwise, it is ‘0’. 2: The actual Reset value of POR is determined by the type of device Reset. See the notes following this register and Section 23.6 “Reset State of Registers” for additional information. 3: See Table 23-3.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 279 PIC18F/LF1XK50 23.2 Master Clear (MCLR) The MCLR pin provides a method for triggering an external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the pin low. These devices have a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path which detects and ignores small pulses. The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets, including the WDT. In PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices, the MCLR input can be disabled with the MCLRE Configuration bit. When MCLR is disabled, the pin becomes a digital input. See Section 9.1 “PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers” for more information. 23.3 Power-on Reset (POR) A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. To take advantage of the POR circuitry, tie the MCLR pin through a resistor (1 k to 10 k) to VDD. This will eliminate external RC components usually needed to create a Power-on Reset delay. When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the Reset condition), device operating parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the device must be held in Reset until the operating conditions are met. POR events are captured by the POR bit of the RCON register. The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a POR occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. POR is not reset to ‘1’ by any hardware event. To capture multiple events, the user must manually set the bit to ‘1’ by software following any POR. FIGURE 23-2: EXTERNAL POWER-ON RESET CIRCUIT (FOR SLOW VDD POWER-UP) Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow. The diode D helps discharge the capacitor quickly when VDD powers down. 2: R < 40 k is recommended to make sure that the voltage drop across R does not violate the device’s electrical specification. 3: R1  1 k will limit any current flowing into MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown, due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). C R1 D R VDD MCLR VDD PIC® MCU PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 280 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 23.4 Brown-out Reset (BOR) PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices implement a BOR circuit that provides the user with a number of configuration and power-saving options. The BOR is controlled by the BORV<1:0> and BOREN<1:0> bits of the CONFIG2L Configuration register. There are a total of four BOR configurations which are summarized in Table 23-1. The BOR threshold is set by the BORV<1:0> bits. If BOR is enabled (any values of BOREN<1:0>, except ‘00’), any drop of VDD below VBOR for greater than TBOR will reset the device. A Reset may or may not occur if VDD falls below VBOR for less than TBOR. The chip will remain in Brown-out Reset until VDD rises above VBOR. If the Power-up Timer is enabled, it will be invoked after VDD rises above VBOR; it then will keep the chip in Reset for an additional time delay, TPWRT. If VDD drops below VBOR while the Power-up Timer is running, the chip will go back into a Brown-out Reset and the Power-up Timer will be initialized. Once VDD rises above VBOR, the Power-up Timer will execute the additional time delay. BOR and the Power-on Timer (PWRT) are independently configured. Enabling BOR Reset does not automatically enable the PWRT. 23.4.1 SOFTWARE ENABLED BOR When BOREN<1:0> = 01, the BOR can be enabled or disabled by the user in software. This is done with the SBOREN control bit of the RCON register. Setting SBOREN enables the BOR to function as previously described. Clearing SBOREN disables the BOR entirely. The SBOREN bit operates only in this mode; otherwise it is read as ‘0’. Placing the BOR under software control gives the user the additional flexibility of tailoring the application to its environment without having to reprogram the device to change BOR configuration. It also allows the user to tailor device power consumption in software by eliminating the incremental current that the BOR consumes. While the BOR current is typically very small, it may have some impact in low-power applications. 23.4.2 DETECTING BOR When BOR is enabled, the BOR bit always resets to ‘0’ on any BOR or POR event. This makes it difficult to determine if a BOR event has occurred just by reading the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR. This assumes that the POR and BOR bits are reset to ‘1’ by software immediately after any POR event. If BOR is ‘0’ while POR is ‘1’, it can be reliably assumed that a BOR event has occurred. 23.4.3 DISABLING BOR IN SLEEP MODE When BOREN<1:0> = 10, the BOR remains under hardware control and operates as previously described. Whenever the device enters Sleep mode, however, the BOR is automatically disabled. When the device returns to any other operating mode, BOR is automatically re-enabled. This mode allows for applications to recover from brown-out situations, while actively executing code, when the device requires BOR protection the most. At the same time, it saves additional power in Sleep mode by eliminating the small incremental BOR current. TABLE 23-1: BOR CONFIGURATIONS Note: Even when BOR is under software control, the BOR Reset voltage level is still set by the BORV<1:0> Configuration bits. It cannot be changed by software. BOR Configuration Status of SBOREN (RCON<6>) BOR Operation BOREN1 BOREN0 0 0 Unavailable BOR disabled; must be enabled by reprogramming the Configuration bits. 0 1 Available BOR enabled by software; operation controlled by SBOREN. 1 0 Unavailable BOR enabled by hardware in Run and Idle modes, disabled during Sleep mode. 1 1 Unavailable BOR enabled by hardware; must be disabled by reprogramming the Configuration bits.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 281 PIC18F/LF1XK50 23.5 Device Reset Timers PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices incorporate three separate on-chip timers that help regulate the Power-on Reset process. Their main function is to ensure that the device clock is stable before code is executed. These timers are: • Power-up Timer (PWRT) • Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) • PLL Lock Time-out 23.5.1 POWER-UP TIMER (PWRT) The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices is an 11-bit counter which uses the LFINTOSC source as the clock input. This yields an approximate time interval of 2048 x 32 s = 65.6ms. While the PWRT is counting, the device is held in Reset. The power-up time delay depends on the LFINTOSC clock and will vary from chip-to-chip due to temperature and process variation. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for details. The PWRT is enabled by clearing the PWRTEN Configuration bit. 23.5.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER (OST) The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) provides a 1024 oscillator cycle (from OSC1 input) delay after the PWRT delay is over. This ensures that the crystal oscillator or resonator has started and stabilized. The OST time-out is invoked only for XT, LP, HS and HSPLL modes and only on Power-on Reset, or on exit from all power-managed modes that stop the external oscillator. 23.5.3 PLL LOCK TIME-OUT With the PLL enabled in its PLL mode, the time-out sequence following a Power-on Reset is slightly different from other oscillator modes. A separate timer is used to provide a fixed time-out that is sufficient for the PLL to lock to the main oscillator frequency. This PLL lock time-out (TPLL) is typically 2 ms and follows the oscillator start-up time-out. 23.5.4 TIME-OUT SEQUENCE On power-up, the time-out sequence is as follows: 1. After the POR pulse has cleared, PWRT time-out is invoked (if enabled). 2. Then, the OST is activated. The total time-out will vary based on oscillator configuration and the status of the PWRT. Figure 23-3, Figure 23-4, Figure 23-5, Figure 23-6 and Figure 23-7 all depict time-out sequences on power-up, with the Power-up Timer enabled and the device operating in HS Oscillator mode. Figures 23-3 through 23-6 also apply to devices operating in XT or LP modes. For devices in RC mode and with the PWRT disabled, on the other hand, there will be no time-out at all. Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR is kept low long enough, all time-outs will expire, after which, bringing MCLR high will allow program execution to begin immediately (Figure 23-5). This is useful for testing purposes or to synchronize more than one PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 device operating in parallel. TABLE 23-2: TIME-OUT IN VARIOUS SITUATIONS Oscillator Configuration Power-up(2) and Brown-out Exit from PWRTEN = 0 PWRTEN = 1 Power-Managed Mode HSPLL 66 ms(1) + 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2) 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2) 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2) HS, XT, LP 66 ms(1) + 1024 TOSC 1024 TOSC 1024 TOSC EC, ECIO 66 ms(1) — — RC, RCIO 66 ms(1) — — INTIO1, INTIO2 66 ms(1) — — Note 1: 66 ms (65.5 ms) is the nominal Power-up Timer (PWRT) delay. 2: 2 ms is the nominal time required for the PLL to lock. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 282 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-3: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT) FIGURE 23-4: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1 FIGURE 23-5: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2 TPWRT TOST VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR PWRT TIME-OUT OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET TPWRT TOST VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR PWRT TIME-OUT OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR PWRT TIME-OUT OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET TPWRT TOST  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 283 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 23-6: SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT) FIGURE 23-7: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POR W/PLL ENABLED (MCLR TIED TO VDD) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR PWRT TIME-OUT OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET 0V 5V TPWRT TOST TPWRT TOST VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR PWRT TIME-OUT OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET PLL TIME-OUT TPLL Note: TOST = 1024 clock cycles. TPLL  2 ms max. First three stages of the PWRT timer. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 284 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 23.6 Reset State of Registers Some registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other Resets. All other registers are forced to a “Reset state” depending on the type of Reset that occurred. Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register, RI, TO, PD, POR and BOR, are set or cleared differently in different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 23-3. These bits are used by software to determine the nature of the Reset. Table 23-4 describes the Reset states for all of the Special Function Registers. These are categorized by Power-on and Brown-out Resets, Master Clear and WDT Resets and WDT wake-ups. TABLE 23-3: STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER Condition Program Counter RCON Register STKPTR Register SBOREN RI TO PD POR BOR STKFUL STKUNF Power-on Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 RESET Instruction 0000h u(2) 0 u u u u u u Brown-out Reset 0000h u(2) 1 1 1 u 0 u u MCLR during Power-Managed Run Modes 0000h u(2) u 1 u u u u u MCLR during Power-Managed Idle Modes and Sleep Mode 0000h u(2) u 1 0 u u u u WDT Time-out during Full Power or Power-Managed Run Mode 0000h u(2) u 0 u u u u u MCLR during Full Power Execution 0000h u(2) u u u u u u u Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u(2) u u u u u 1 u Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u(2) u u u u u u 1 Stack Underflow Error (not an actual Reset, STVREN = 0) 0000h u(2) u u u u u u 1 WDT Time-out during Power-Managed Idle or Sleep Modes PC + 2 u(2) u 0 0 u u u u Interrupt Exit from Power-Managed Modes PC + 2(1) u(2) u u 0 u u u u Legend: u = unchanged Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bits are set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (008h or 0018h). 2: Reset state is ‘1’ for POR and unchanged for all other Resets when software BOR is enabled (BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01 and SBOREN = 1). Otherwise, the Reset state is ‘0’.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 285 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 23-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS Register Address Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt TOSU FFFh ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 uuuu(3) TOSH FFEh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) TOSL FFDh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) STKPTR FFCh 00-0 0000 uu-0 0000 uu-u uuuu(3) PCLATU FFBh ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu PCLATH FFAh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PCL FF9h 0000 0000 0000 0000 PC + 2(2) TBLPTRU FF8h ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu TBLPTRH FF7h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TBLPTRL FF6h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TABLAT FF5h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PRODH FF4h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PRODL FF3h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INTCON FF2h 0000 000x 0000 000u uuuu uuuu(1) INTCON2 FF1h 1111 -1-1 1111 -1-1 uuuu -u-u(1) INTCON3 FF0h 11-0 0-00 11-0 0-00 uu-u u-uu(1) INDF0 FEFh N/A N/A N/A POSTINC0 FEEh N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC0 FEDh N/A N/A N/A PREINC0 FECh N/A N/A N/A PLUSW0 FEBh N/A N/A N/A FSR0H FEAh ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR0L FE9h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu WREG FE8h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INDF1 FE7h N/A N/A N/A POSTINC1 FE6h N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC1 FE5h N/A N/A N/A PREINC1 FE4h N/A N/A N/A PLUSW1 FE3h N/A N/A N/A Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 4: See Table 23-3 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: All bits of the ANSELH register initialize to ‘0’ if the PBADEN bit of CONFIG3H is ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 286 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FSR1H FE2h ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR1L FE1h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu BSR FE0h ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu INDF2 FDFh N/A N/A N/A POSTINC2 FDEh N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC2 FDDh N/A N/A N/A PREINC2 FDCh N/A N/A N/A PLUSW2 FDBh N/A N/A N/A FSR2H FDAh ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR2L FD9h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu STATUS FD8h ---x xxxx ---u uuuu ---u uuuu TMR0H FD7h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TMR0L FD6h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T0CON FD5h 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu OSCCON FD3h 0011 qq00 0011 qq00 uuuu uuuu OSCCON2 FD2h ---- -10x ---- -10x ---- -uuu WDTCON FD1h ---- ---0 ---- ---0 ---- ---u RCON(4) FD0h 0q-1 11q0 0q-q qquu uq-u qquu TMR1H FCFh xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR1L FCEh xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T1CON FCDh 0000 0000 u0uu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR2 FCCh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PR2 FCBh 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 T2CON FCAh -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu SSPBUF FC9h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSPADD FC8h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSPSTAT FC7h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSPCON1 FC6h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSPCON2 FC5h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TABLE 23-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Register Address Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 4: See Table 23-3 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: All bits of the ANSELH register initialize to ‘0’ if the PBADEN bit of CONFIG3H is ‘0’.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 287 PIC18F/LF1XK50 ADRESH FC4h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADRESL FC3h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADCON0 FC2h --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu ADCON1 FC1h ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu ADCON2 FC0h 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu CCPR1H FBFh xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR1L FBEh xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP1CON FBDh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu REFCON2 FBCh ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu REFCON1 FBBh 000- 00-0 000- 00-0 uuu- uu-u REFCON0 FBAh 0001 00-- 0001 00-- uuuu uu-- PSTRCON FB9h ---0 0001 ---0 0001 ---u uuuu BAUDCON FB8h 0100 0-00 0100 0-00 uuuu u-uu PWM1CON FB7h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP1AS FB6h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TMR3H FB3h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR3L FB2h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T3CON FB1h 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SPBRGH FB0h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SPBRG FAFh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCREG FAEh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXREG FADh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXSTA FACh 0000 0010 0000 0010 uuuu uuuu RCSTA FABh 0000 000x 0000 000x uuuu uuuu EEADR FAAh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu EEDATA FA8h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu EECON2 FA7h 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 EECON1 FA6h xx-0 x000 uu-0 u000 uu-0 u000 TABLE 23-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Register Address Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 4: See Table 23-3 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: All bits of the ANSELH register initialize to ‘0’ if the PBADEN bit of CONFIG3H is ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 288 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. IPR2 FA2h 1111 111- 1111 111- uuuu uuu- PIR2 FA1h 0000 000- 0000 000- uuuu uuu-(1) PIE2 FA0h 0000 000- 0000 000- uuuu uuu- IPR1 F9Fh -111 1111 -111 1111 -uuu uuuu PIR1 F9Eh -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu(1) PIE1 F9Dh -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu OSCTUNE F9Bh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TRISC F95h 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISB F94h 1111 ---- 1111 ---- uuuu ---- TRISA F93h --11 ---- --11 ---- --uu ---- LATC F8Bh xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATB F8Ah xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu ---- LATA F89h --xx ---- --uu ---- --uu ---- PORTC F82h xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTB F81h xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu ---- PORTA F80h --xx x-xx --xx x-xx --uu u-uu ANSELH(5) F7Fh ---- 1111 ---- 1111 ---- uuuu ANSEL F7Eh 1111 1--- 1111 1--- uuuu u--- IOCB F7Ah 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu ---- IOCA F79h --00 0-00 --00 0-00 --uu u-uu WPUB F78h 1111 ---- 1111 ---- uuuu ---- WPUA F77h --11 1--- --11 1--- --uu u--- SLRCON F76h ---- -111 ---- -111 ---- -uuu SSPMSK F6Fh 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu CM1CON0 F6Dh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CM2CON1 F6Ch 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CM2CON0 F6Bh 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SRCON1 F69h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SRCON0 F68h 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu UCON F64h -0x0 000- -0x0 000- -uuu uuu- TABLE 23-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Register Address Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 4: See Table 23-3 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: All bits of the ANSELH register initialize to ‘0’ if the PBADEN bit of CONFIG3H is ‘0’.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 289 PIC18F/LF1XK50 USTAT F63h -xxx xxx- -xxx xxx- -uuu uuu- UIR F62h -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu UCFG F61h 0--0 -000 0--0 -000 u--u -uuu UIE F60h -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu UEIR F5Fh 0--0 0000 0--0 0000 u--u uuuu UFRMH F5Eh ---- -xxx ---- -xxx ---- -uuu UFRML F5Dh xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu UADDR F5Ch -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu UEIE F5Bh 0--0 0000 0--0 0000 u--u uuuu UEP7 F5Ah ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP6 F59h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP5 F58h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP4 F57h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP3 F56h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP2 F55h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP1 F54h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu UEP0 F53h ----0 0000 ----0 0000 ----u uuuu TABLE 23-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Register Address Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 4: See Table 23-3 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: All bits of the ANSELH register initialize to ‘0’ if the PBADEN bit of CONFIG3H is ‘0’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 290 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 291 PIC18F/LF1XK50 24.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE CPU PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices include several features intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost through elimination of external components. These are: • Oscillator Selection • Resets: - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) - Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Interrupts • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Code Protection • ID Locations • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ The oscillator can be configured for the application depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All of the options are discussed in detail in Section 2.0 “Oscillator Module”. A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts is available in previous sections of this data sheet. In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up Timers provided for Resets, PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices have a Watchdog Timer, which is either permanently enabled via the Configuration bits or software controlled (if configured as disabled). The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for background monitoring of the peripheral clock and automatic switchover in the event of its failure. Two- Speed Start-up enables code to be executed almost immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source completes its start-up delays. All of these features are enabled and configured by setting the appropriate Configuration register bits. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 292 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 24.1 Configuration Bits The Configuration bits can be programmed (read as ‘0’) or left unprogrammed (read as ‘1’) to select various device configurations. These bits are mapped starting at program memory location 300000h. The user will note that address 300000h is beyond the user program memory space. In fact, it belongs to the configuration memory space (300000h-3FFFFFh), which can only be accessed using table reads and table writes. Programming the Configuration registers is done in a manner similar to programming the Flash memory. The WR bit in the EECON1 register starts a self-timed write to the Configuration register. In normal operation mode, a TBLWT instruction with the TBLPTR pointing to the Configuration register sets up the address and the data for the Configuration register write. Setting the WR bit starts a long write to the Configuration register. The Configuration registers are written a byte at a time. To write or erase a configuration cell, a TBLWT instruction can write a ‘1’ or a ‘0’ into the cell. For additional details on Flash programming, refer to Section 4.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. TABLE 24-1: CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Default/ Unprogrammed Value 300000h CONFIG1L — — USBDIV CPUDIV1 CPUDIV0 — — — --00 0--- 300001h CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PCLKEN PLLEN FOSC3 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 0010 0111 300002h CONFIG2L — — — BORV1 BORV0 BOREN1 BOREN0 PWRTEN ---1 1111 300003h CONFIG2H — — — WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 WDTEN ---1 1111 300005h CONFIG3H MCLRE — — — HFOFST — — — 1--- 1--- 300006h CONFIG4L BKBUG(2) ENHCPU — — BBSIZ LVP — STVREN -0-- 01-1 300008h CONFIG5L — — — — — — CP1 CP0 ---- --11 300009h CONFIG5H CPD CPB — — — — — — 11-- ---- 30000Ah CONFIG6L — — — — — — WRT1 WRT0 ---- --11 30000Bh CONFIG6H WRTD WRTB WRTC — — — — — 111- ---- 30000Ch CONFIG7L — — — — — — EBTR1 EBTR0 ---- --11 30000Dh CONFIG7H — EBTRB — — — — — — -1-- ---- 3FFFFEh DEVID1(1) DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 qqqq qqqq(1) 3FFFFFh DEVID2(1) DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 0000 1100 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’ Note 1: See Register 24-13 for DEVID1 values. DEVID registers are read-only and cannot be programmed by the user. 2: BKBUG is only used for the ICD device. Otherwise, this bit is unimplemented and reads as ‘1’.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 293 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 24-1: CONFIG1L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 LOW U-0 U-0 R/P-0 R/P-0 R/P-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — USBDIV CPUDIV1 CPUDIV0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 USBDIV: USB Clock Selection bit Selects the clock source for Low-speed USB operation 1 = USB clock comes from the OSC1/OSC2 divided by 2 0 = USB clock comes directly from the OSC1/OSC2 Oscillator block; no divide bit 4-3 CPUDIV<1:0>: CPU System Clock Selection bits 11 = CPU system clock divided by 4 10 = CPU system clock divided by 3 01 = CPU system clock divided by 2 00 = No CPU system clock divide bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 294 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 24-2: CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH R/P-0 R/P-0 R/P-1 R/P-0 R/P-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 IESO FCMEN PCLKEN PLLEN FOSC3 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IESO: Internal/External Oscillator Switchover bit 1 = Oscillator Switchover mode enabled 0 = Oscillator Switchover mode disabled bit 6 FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit 1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor enabled 0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor disabled bit 5 PCLKEN: Primary Clock Enable bit 1 = Primary Clock enabled 0 = Primary Clock is under software control bit 4 PLLEN: 4 X PLL Enable bit 1 = Oscillator multiplied by 4 0 = PLL is under software control bit 3-0 FOSC<3:0>: Oscillator Selection bits 1111 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 1110 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 1101 = EC (low) 1100 = EC, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (low) 1011 = EC (medium) 1010 = EC, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (medium) 1001 = Internal RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 1000 = Internal RC oscillator 0111 = External RC oscillator 0110 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 0101 = EC (high) 0100 = EC, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (high) 0011 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 0010 = HS oscillator 0001 = XT oscillator 0000 = LP oscillator  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 295 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 24-3: CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW U-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 — — — BORV1(1) BORV0(1) BOREN1(2) BOREN0(2) PWRTEN(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-3 BORV<1:0>: Brown-out Reset Voltage bits(1) 11 = VBOR set to 1.9V nominal 10 = VBOR set to 2.2V nominal 01 = VBOR set to 2.7V nominal 00 = VBOR set to 3.0V nominal bit 2-1 BOREN<1:0>: Brown-out Reset Enable bits(2) 11 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only (SBOREN is disabled) 10 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only and disabled in Sleep mode (SBOREN is disabled) 01 = Brown-out Reset enabled and controlled by software (SBOREN is enabled) 00 = Brown-out Reset disabled in hardware and software bit 0 PWRTEN: Power-up Timer Enable bit(2) 1 = PWRT disabled 0 = PWRT enabled Note 1: See Table 27-5 for specifications. 2: The Power-up Timer is decoupled from Brown-out Reset, allowing these features to be independently controlled. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 296 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 24-4: CONFIG2H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 HIGH U-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 — — — WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 WDTEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-1 WDTPS<3:0>: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits 1111 = 1:32,768 1110 = 1:16,384 1101 = 1:8,192 1100 = 1:4,096 1011 = 1:2,048 1010 = 1:1,024 1001 = 1:512 1000 = 1:256 0111 = 1:128 0110 = 1:64 0101 = 1:32 0100 = 1:16 0011 = 1:8 0010 = 1:4 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 bit 0 WDTEN: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 1 = WDT is always enabled. SWDTEN bit has no effect 0 = WDT is controlled by SWDTEN bit of the WDTCON register  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 297 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 24-5: CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH R/P-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 MCLRE — — — HFOFST — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7 MCLRE: MCLR Pin Enable bit 1 = MCLR pin enabled; RA3 input pin disabled 0 = RA3 input pin enabled; MCLR disabled bit 6-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 HFOFST: HFINTOSC Fast Start-up bit 1 = HFINTOSC starts clocking the CPU without waiting for the oscillator to stabilize. 0 = The system clock is held off until the HFINTOSC is stable. bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ REGISTER 24-6: CONFIG4L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 4 LOW R/W-1(1) R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-0 R/P-1 U-0 R/P-1 BKBUG ENHCPU — — BBSIZ LVP — STVREN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown bit 7 BKBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit(1) 1 = Background debugger disabled 0 = Background debugger functions enabled bit 6 ENHCPU: Enhanced CPU Enable bit 1 = Enhanced CPU enabled 0 = Enhanced CPU disabled bit 5-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BBSIZ: Boot BLock Size Select bit 1 = 2 kW boot block size for PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 (1 kW boot block size for PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50) 0 = 1 kW boot block size for PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 (512 W boot block size for PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50) bit 2 LVP: Single-Supply ICSP™ Enable bit 1 = Single-Supply ICSP enabled 0 = Single-Supply ICSP disabled bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 STVREN: Stack Full/Underflow Reset Enable bit 1 = Stack full/underflow will cause Reset 0 = Stack full/underflow will not cause Reset Note 1: BKBUG is only used for the ICD device. Otherwise, this bit is unimplemented and reads as ‘1’. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 298 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 24-7: CONFIG5L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 5 LOW U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 — — — — — — CP1 CP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 CP1: Code Protection bit 1 = Block 1 not code-protected 0 = Block 1 code-protected bit 0 CP0: Code Protection bit 1 = Block 0 not code-protected 0 = Block 0 code-protected REGISTER 24-8: CONFIG5H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 5 HIGH R/C-1 R/C-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 CPD CPB — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7 CPD: Data EEPROM Code Protection bit 1 = Data EEPROM not code-protected 0 = Data EEPROM code-protected bit 6 CPB: Boot Block Code Protection bit 1 = Boot block not code-protected 0 = Boot block code-protected bit 5-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 299 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 24-9: CONFIG6L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 6 LOW U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 — — — — — — WRT1 WRT0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 WRT1: Write Protection bit 1 = Block 1 not write-protected 0 = Block 1 write-protected bit 0 WRT0: Write Protection bit 1 = Block 0 not write-protected 0 = Block 0 write-protected REGISTER 24-10: CONFIG6H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 6 HIGH R/C-1 R/C-1 R-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 WRTD WRTB WRTC(1) — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7 WRTD: Data EEPROM Write Protection bit 1 = Data EEPROM not write-protected 0 = Data EEPROM write-protected bit 6 WRTB: Boot Block Write Protection bit 1 = Boot block not write-protected 0 = Boot block write-protected bit 5 WRTC: Configuration Register Write Protection bit(1) 1 = Configuration registers not write-protected 0 = Configuration registers write-protected bit 4-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: This bit is read-only in normal execution mode; it can be written only in Program mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 300 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 24-11: CONFIG7L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 7 LOW U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 — — — — — — EBTR1 EBTR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 EBTR1: Table Read Protection bit 1 = Block 1 not protected from table reads executed in other blocks 0 = Block 1 protected from table reads executed in other blocks bit 0 EBTR0: Table Read Protection bit 1 = Block 0 not protected from table reads executed in other blocks 0 = Block 0 protected from table reads executed in other blocks REGISTER 24-12: CONFIG7H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 7 HIGH U-0 R/C-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — EBTRB — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 EBTRB: Boot Block Table Read Protection bit 1 = Boot block not protected from table reads executed in other blocks 0 = Boot block protected from table reads executed in other blocks bit 5-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 301 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 24-13: DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1 FOR PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 R R R R R R R R DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7-5 DEV<2:0>: Device ID bits 010 = PIC18F13K50 011 = PIC18F14K50 bit 4-0 REV<4:0>: Revision ID bits These bits are used to indicate the device revision. REGISTER 24-14: DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2 FOR PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 R R R R R R R R DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit bit 7-0 DEV<10:3>: Device ID bits These bits are used with the DEV<2:0> bits in the Device ID Register 1 to identify the part number. 0010 0000 = PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 devices Note 1: These values for DEV<10:3> may be shared with other devices. The specific device is always identified by using the entire DEV<10:0> bit sequence. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 302 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 24.2 Watchdog Timer (WDT) For PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices, the WDT is driven by the LFINTOSC source. When the WDT is enabled, the clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period is 4 ms and has the same stability as the LFINTOSC oscillator. The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is selected by a multiplexer, controlled by bits in Configuration Register 2H. Available periods range from 4 ms to 131.072 seconds (2.18 minutes). The WDT and postscaler are cleared when any of the following events occur: a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction is executed, the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register are changed or a clock failure has occurred. FIGURE 24-1: WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions clear the WDT and postscaler counts when executed. 2: Changing the setting of the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register clears the WDT and postscaler counts. 3: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed, the postscaler count will be cleared. LFINTOSC Source WDT Wake-up Reset WDT Counter Programmable Postscaler 1:1 to 1:32,768 Enable WDT WDTPS<3:0> SWDTEN WDTEN CLRWDT 4 from Power Reset All Device Resets Sleep 128 Change on IRCF bits Managed Modes  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 303 PIC18F/LF1XK50 24.2.1 CONTROL REGISTER Register 24-15 shows the WDTCON register. This is a readable and writable register which contains a control bit that allows software to override the WDT enable Configuration bit, but only if the Configuration bit has disabled the WDT. TABLE 24-2: SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS 24.3 Program Verification and Code Protection The overall structure of the code protection on the PIC18 Flash devices differs significantly from other PIC® microcontroller devices. The user program memory is divided into five blocks. One of these is a boot block of 0.5K or 2K bytes, depending on the device. The remainder of the memory is divided into individual blocks on binary boundaries. Each of the five blocks has three code protection bits associated with them. They are: • Code-Protect bit (CPn) • Write-Protect bit (WRTn) • External Block Table Read bit (EBTRn) Figure 24-2 shows the program memory organization for 8, 16 and 32-Kbyte devices and the specific code protection bit associated with each block. The actual locations of the bits are summarized in Table 24-3. REGISTER 24-15: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — — SWDTEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Enable or Disable the Watchdog Timer bit(1) 1 = WDT is turned on 0 = WDT is turned off (Reset value) Note 1: This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page RCON IPEN SBOREN — RI TO PD POR BOR 278 WDTCON — — — — — — — SWDTEN 286 CONFIG2H WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 WDTEN 296 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 304 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 24-2: CODE-PROTECTED PROGRAM MEMORY FOR PIC18F/LF1XK50 Device Address (from/to) 14K50 13K50 BBSIZ = 1 BBSIZ = 0 BBSIZ = 1 BBSIZ = 0 0000h 01FFh Boot Block, 2 KW CPB, WRTB, EBTRB Boot Block, 1 KW CPB, WRTB, EBTRB Boot Block, 1 KW CPB, WRTB, EBTRB Boot Block, 0.512 KW CPB, WRTB, EBTRB 0200h 03FFh Block 0 1.512 KW 0400h CP0, WRT0, EBTR0 05FFh Block 0 3 KW CP0, WRT0, EBTR0 Block 0 1 KW 0600h CP0, WRT0, EBTR0 07FFh 0800h 0FFFh Block 0 2 KW CP0, WRT0, EBTR0 Block 1 2 KW CP1, WRT1, EBTR1 Block 1 2 KW CP1, WRT1, EBTR1 1000h 1FFFh Block 1 4 KW CP1, WRT1, EBTR1 Block 1 4 KW CP1, WRT1, EBTR1 Reads all ‘0’s Reads all ‘0’s 2000h 27FFh Reads all ‘0’s Reads all ‘0’s 2800h 2FFFh 3000h 37FFh 3800h 3FFFh 4000h 47FFh 4800h 4FFFh 5000h 57FFh 5800h 5FFFh 6000h 67FFh 6800h 6FFFh 7000h 77FFh 7800h 7FFFh 8000h FFFFh Note: Refer to the test section for requirements on test memory mapping.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 305 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 24-3: SUMMARY OF CODE PROTECTION REGISTERS 24.3.1 PROGRAM MEMORY CODE PROTECTION The program memory may be read to or written from any location using the table read and table write instructions. The device ID may be read with table reads. The Configuration registers may be read and written with the table read and table write instructions. In normal execution mode, the CPn bits have no direct effect. CPn bits inhibit external reads and writes. A block of user memory may be protected from table writes if the WRTn Configuration bit is ‘0’. The EBTRn bits control table reads. For a block of user memory with the EBTRn bit cleared to ‘0’, a table READ instruction that executes from within that block is allowed to read. A table read instruction that executes from a location outside of that block is not allowed to read and will result in reading ‘0’s. Figures 24-3 through 24-5 illustrate table write and table read protection. FIGURE 24-3: TABLE WRITE (WRTn) DISALLOWED File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 300008h CONFIG5L — — — — — — CP1 CP0 300009h CONFIG5H CPD CPB — — — — — — 30000Ah CONFIG6L — — — — — — WRT1 WRT0 30000Bh CONFIG6H WRTD WRTB WRTC — — — — — 30000Ch CONFIG7L — — — — — — EBTR1 EBTR0 30000Dh CONFIG7H — EBTRB — — — — — — Legend: Shaded cells are unimplemented. Note: Code protection bits may only be written to a ‘0’ from a ‘1’ state. It is not possible to write a ‘1’ to a bit in the ‘0’ state. Code protection bits are only set to ‘1’ by a full chip erase or block erase function. The full chip erase and block erase functions can only be initiated via ICSP or an external programmer. 000000h 0007FFh 000800h 001FFFh 002000h 003FFFh 004000h 005FFFh 006000h 007FFFh WRTB, EBTRB = 11 WRT0, EBTR0 = 01 WRT1, EBTR1 = 11 WRT2, EBTR2 = 11 WRT3, EBTR3 = 11 TBLWT* TBLPTR = 0008FFh PC = 001FFEh PC = 005FFEh TBLWT* Register Values Program Memory Configuration Bit Settings Results: All table writes disabled to Blockn whenever WRTn = 0. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 306 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 24-4: EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) DISALLOWED FIGURE 24-5: EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) ALLOWED WRTB, EBTRB = 11 WRT0, EBTR0 = 10 WRT1, EBTR1 = 11 WRT2, EBTR2 = 11 WRT3, EBTR3 = 11 TBLRD* TBLPTR = 0008FFh PC = 003FFEh Results: All table reads from external blocks to Blockn are disabled whenever EBTRn = 0. TABLAT register returns a value of ‘0’. Register Values Program Memory Configuration Bit Settings 000000h 0007FFh 000800h 001FFFh 002000h 003FFFh 004000h 005FFFh 006000h 007FFFh WRTB, EBTRB = 11 WRT0, EBTR0 = 10 WRT1, EBTR1 = 11 WRT2, EBTR2 = 11 WRT3, EBTR3 = 11 TBLRD* TBLPTR = 0008FFh PC = 001FFEh Register Values Program Memory Configuration Bit Settings Results: Table reads permitted within Blockn, even when EBTRBn = 0. TABLAT register returns the value of the data at the location TBLPTR. 000000h 0007FFh 000800h 001FFFh 002000h 003FFFh 004000h 005FFFh 006000h 007FFFh  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 307 PIC18F/LF1XK50 24.3.2 DATA EEPROM CODE PROTECTION The entire data EEPROM is protected from external reads and writes by two bits: CPD and WRTD. CPD inhibits external reads and writes of data EEPROM. WRTD inhibits internal and external writes to data EEPROM. The CPU can always read data EEPROM under normal operation, regardless of the protection bit settings. 24.3.3 CONFIGURATION REGISTER PROTECTION The Configuration registers can be write-protected. The WRTC bit controls protection of the Configuration registers. In normal execution mode, the WRTC bit is readable only. WRTC can only be written via ICSP or an external programmer. 24.4 ID Locations Eight memory locations (200000h-200007h) are designated as ID locations, where the user can store checksum or other code identification numbers. These locations are both readable and writable during normal execution through the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions or during program/verify. The ID locations can be read when the device is code-protected. 24.5 In-Circuit Serial Programming PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices can be serially programmed while in the end application circuit. This is simply done with two lines for clock and data and three other lines for power, ground and the programming voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices and then program the microcontroller just before shipping the product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a custom firmware to be programmed. 24.6 In-Circuit Debugger When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to a ‘0’, the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with MPLAB® IDE. When the microcontroller has this feature enabled, some resources are not available for general use. Table 24-4 shows which resources are required by the background debugger. TABLE 24-4: DEBUGGER RESOURCES To use the In-Circuit Debugger function of the microcontroller, the design must implement In-Circuit Serial Programming connections to the following pins: • MCLR/VPP/RA3 • VDD • VSS • RA0 • RA1 This will interface to the In-Circuit Debugger module available from Microchip or one of the third party development tool companies. 24.7 Single-Supply ICSP Programming The LVP Configuration bit enables Single-Supply ICSP Programming (formerly known as Low-Voltage ICSP Programming or LVP). When Single-Supply Programming is enabled, the microcontroller can be programmed without requiring high voltage being applied to the MCLR/VPP/RA3 pin, but the RC3/PGM pin is then dedicated to controlling Program mode entry and is not available as a general purpose I/O pin. While programming, using Single-Supply Programming mode, VDD is applied to the MCLR/VPP/RA3 pin as in normal execution mode. To enter Programming mode, VDD is applied to the PGM pin. If Single-Supply ICSP Programming mode will not be used, the LVP bit can be cleared. RC3/PGM then becomes available as the digital I/O pin, RC3. The LVP bit may be set or cleared only when using standard high-voltage programming (VIHH applied to the MCLR/ VPP/RA3 pin). Once LVP has been disabled, only the standard high-voltage programming is available and must be used to program the device. Memory that is not code-protected can be erased using either a block erase, or erased row by row, then written at any specified VDD. If code-protected memory is to be erased, a block erase is required. I/O pins: RA0, RA1 Stack: 2 levels Program Memory: 512 bytes Data Memory: 10 bytes Note 1: High-voltage programming is always available, regardless of the state of the LVP bit or the PGM pin, by applying VIHH to the MCLR pin. 2: By default, Single-Supply ICSP is enabled in unprogrammed devices (as supplied from Microchip) and erased devices. 3: When Single-Supply Programming is enabled, the RC3 pin can no longer be used as a general purpose I/O pin. 4: When LVP is enabled, externally pull the PGM pin to VSS to allow normal program execution. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 308 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 309 PIC18F/LF1XK50 25.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices incorporate the standard set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended set of 8 new instructions, for the optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The extended set is discussed later in this section. 25.1 Standard Instruction Set The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PIC® MCU instruction sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these PIC® MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (16 bits), but there are four instructions that require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands, which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into four basic categories: • Byte-oriented operations • Bit-oriented operations • Literal operations • Control operations The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 25-2 lists byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control operations. Table 25-1 shows the opcode field descriptions. Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) 2. The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’) 3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The file register designator ‘f’ specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator ‘d’ specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) 2. The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’) 3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while the file register designator ‘f’ represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. The literal instructions may use some of the following operands: • A literal value to be loaded into a file register (specified by ‘k’) • The desired FSR register to load the literal value into (specified by ‘f’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) The control instructions may use some of the following operands: • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’) • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions (specified by ‘s’) • The mode of the table read and table write instructions (specified by ‘m’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) All instructions are a single word, except for four double-word instructions. These instructions were made double-word to contain the required information in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are ‘1’s. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. All single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles, with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. The double-word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is true, or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s. Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 s. Figure 25-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. All examples use the convention ‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number. The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 25-2, lists the standard instructions recognized by the Microchip Assembler (MPASMTM). Section 25.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides a description of each instruction. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 310 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 25-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Field Description a RAM access bit a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored) a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7). BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank. C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative. d Destination select bit d = 0: store result in WREG d = 1: store result in file register f dest Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location. f 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh) or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h). fs 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address. fd 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address. GIE Global Interrupt Enable bit. k Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value). label Label name. mm The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions. Only used with table read and table write instructions: * No change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) +* Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) n The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for CALL/BRANCH and RETURN instructions. PC Program Counter. PCL Program Counter Low Byte. PCH Program Counter High Byte. PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch. PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch. PD Power-down bit. PRODH Product of Multiply High Byte. PRODL Product of Multiply Low Byte. s Fast Call/Return mode select bit s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode) TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a Program Memory location). TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch. TO Time-out bit. TOS Top-of-Stack. u Unused or unchanged. WDT Watchdog Timer. WREG Working register (accumulator). x Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. zs 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (source). zd 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (destination). { } Optional argument. [text] Indicates an indexed address. (text) The contents of text. [expr] Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr.  Assigned to. < > Register bit field.  In the set of. italics User defined term (font is Courier).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 311 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 25-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS Byte-oriented file register operations 15 10 9 8 7 0 d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register OPCODE d a f (FILE #) d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank Bit-oriented file register operations 15 12 11 9 8 7 0 OPCODE b (BIT #) a f (FILE #) b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f) Literal operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE k (literal) k = 8-bit immediate value Byte to Byte move operations (2-word) 15 12 11 0 OPCODE f (Source FILE #) CALL, GOTO and Branch operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE n<7:0> (literal) n = 20-bit immediate value a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address 15 12 11 0 1111 n<19:8> (literal) 15 12 11 0 1111 f (Destination FILE #) f = 12-bit file register address Control operations Example Instruction ADDWF MYREG, W, B MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2 BSF MYREG, bit, B MOVLW 7Fh GOTO Label 15 8 7 0 OPCODE n<7:0> (literal) 15 12 11 0 1111 n<19:8> (literal) CALL MYFUNC 15 11 10 0 OPCODE n<10:0> (literal) S = Fast bit BRA MYFUNC 15 8 7 0 OPCODE n<7:0> (literal) BC MYFUNC S PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 312 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 25-2: PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word Status Affected Notes MSb LSb BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS ADDWF ADDWFC ANDWF CLRF COMF CPFSEQ CPFSGT CPFSLT DECF DECFSZ DCFSNZ INCF INCFSZ INFSNZ IORWF MOVF MOVFF MOVWF MULWF NEGF RLCF RLNCF RRCF RRNCF SETF SUBFWB SUBWF SUBWFB SWAPF TSTFSZ XORWF f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a fs, fd f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a Add WREG and f Add WREG and CARRY bit to f AND WREG with f Clear f Complement f Compare f with WREG, skip = Compare f with WREG, skip > Compare f with WREG, skip < Decrement f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 Increment f Increment f, Skip if 0 Increment f, Skip if Not 0 Inclusive OR WREG with f Move f Move fs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move WREG to f Multiply WREG with f Negate f Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Left f (No Carry) Rotate Right f through Carry Rotate Right f (No Carry) Set f Subtract f from WREG with borrow Subtract WREG from f Subtract WREG from f with borrow Swap nibbles in f Test f, skip if 0 Exclusive OR WREG with f 11111 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 112 111111111 11 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 0010 0010 0001 0110 0001 0110 0110 0110 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 0100 0001 0101 1100 1111 0110 0000 0110 0011 0100 0011 0100 0110 0101 0101 0101 0011 0110 0001 01da0 0da 01da 101a 11da 001a 010a 000a 01da 11da 11da 10da 11da 10da 00da 00da ffff ffff 111a 001a 110a 01da 01da 00da 00da 100a 01da 11da 10da 10da 011a 10da ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z Z, N None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None Z, N Z, N None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N C, Z, N Z, N C, Z, N Z, N None C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N None None Z, N 1, 2 1, 2 1,2 2 1, 2 44 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 4 1, 2 1, 2 1 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 4 1, 2 Note 1: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. 2: If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. 3: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 4: Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 313 PIC18F/LF1XK50 BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS BCF BSF BTFSC BTFSS BTG f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, d, a Bit Clear f Bit Set f Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set Bit Toggle f 11 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1001 1000 1011 1010 0111 bbba bbba bbba bbba bbba ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff None None None None None 1, 2 1, 2 3, 4 3, 4 1, 2 CONTROL OPERATIONS BC BN BNC BNN BNOV BNZ BOV BRA BZ CALL CLRWDT DAW GOTO NOP NOP POP PUSH RCALL RESET RETFIE RETLW RETURN SLEEP nnnnnnnnn n, s ——n ————n s ks — Branch if Carry Branch if Negative Branch if Not Carry Branch if Not Negative Branch if Not Overflow Branch if Not Zero Branch if Overflow Branch Unconditionally Branch if Zero Call subroutine 1st word 2nd word Clear Watchdog Timer Decimal Adjust WREG Go to address 1st word 2nd word No Operation No Operation Pop top of return stack (TOS) Push top of return stack (TOS) Relative Call Software device Reset Return from interrupt enable Return with literal in WREG Return from Subroutine Go into Standby mode 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 2 1 (2) 2 112 1111212 221 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1101 1110 1110 1111 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0110 0011 0111 0101 0001 0100 0nnn 0000 110s kkkk 0000 0000 1111 kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 1nnn 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 nnnn 1111 0001 kkkk 0001 0000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0100 0111 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0110 0101 nnnn 1111 000s kkkk 001s 0011 None None None None None None None None None None TO, PD C None None None None None None All GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL None None TO, PD 4 TABLE 25-2: PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word Status Affected Notes MSb LSb Note 1: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. 2: If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. 3: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 4: Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 314 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. LITERAL OPERATIONS ADDLW ANDLW IORLW LFSR MOVLB MOVLW MULLW RETLW SUBLW XORLW kkk f, k kkkkkk Add literal and WREG AND literal with WREG Inclusive OR literal with WREG Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word to FSR(f) 1st word Move literal to BSR<3:0> Move literal to WREG Multiply literal with WREG Return with literal in WREG Subtract WREG from literal Exclusive OR literal with WREG 1112 111211 0000 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1011 1001 1110 0000 0001 1110 1101 1100 1000 1010 kkkk kkkk kkkk 00ff kkkk 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z, N None None None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N DATA MEMORY  PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS TBLRD* TBLRD*+ TBLRD*- TBLRD+* TBLWT* TBLWT*+ TBLWT*- TBLWT+* Table Read Table Read with post-increment Table Read with post-decrement Table Read with pre-increment Table Write Table Write with post-increment Table Write with post-decrement Table Write with pre-increment 2 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 None None None None None None None None TABLE 25-2: PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word Status Affected Notes MSb LSb Note 1: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. 2: If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. 3: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 4: Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 315 PIC18F/LF1XK50 25.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET ADDLW ADD literal to W Syntax: ADDLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: (W) + k  W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the 8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ADDLW 15h Before Instruction W = 10h After Instruction W = 25h ADDWF ADD W to f Syntax: ADDWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f)  dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0010 01da ffff ffff Description: Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction W = 17h REG = 0C2h After Instruction W = 0D9h REG = 0C2h Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 316 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ADDWFC ADD W and CARRY bit to f Syntax: ADDWFC f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f) + (C)  dest Status Affected: N,OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0010 00da ffff ffff Description: Add W, the CARRY flag and data memory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in data memory location ‘f’. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWFC REG, 0, 1 Before Instruction CARRY bit = 1 REG = 02h W = 4Dh After Instruction CARRY bit = 0 REG = 02h W = 50h ANDLW AND literal with W Syntax: ANDLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: (W) .AND. k  W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ANDLW 05Fh Before Instruction W = A3h After Instruction W = 03h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 317 PIC18F/LF1XK50 ANDWF AND W with f Syntax: ANDWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) .AND. (f)  dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 01da ffff ffff Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ANDWF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction W = 17h REG = C2h After Instruction W = 02h REG = C2h BC Branch if Carry Syntax: BC n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BC 5 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If CARRY = 1; PC = address (HERE + 12) If CARRY = 0; PC = address (HERE + 2) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 318 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BCF Bit Clear f Syntax: BCF f, b {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 0  b  7 a [0,1] Operation: 0  f Status Affected: None Encoding: 1001 bbba ffff ffff Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BCF FLAG_REG, 7, 0 Before Instruction FLAG_REG = C7h After Instruction FLAG_REG = 47h BN Branch if Negative Syntax: BN n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BN Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If NEGATIVE = 1; PC = address (Jump) If NEGATIVE = 0; PC = address (HERE + 2)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 319 PIC18F/LF1XK50 BNC Branch if Not Carry Syntax: BNC n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BNC Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If CARRY = 0; PC = address (Jump) If CARRY = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNN Branch if Not Negative Syntax: BNN n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BNN Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If NEGATIVE = 0; PC = address (Jump) If NEGATIVE = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 320 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BNOV Branch if Not Overflow Syntax: BNOV n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BNOV Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If OVERFLOW= 0; PC = address (Jump) If OVERFLOW= 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNZ Branch if Not Zero Syntax: BNZ n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BNZ Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If ZERO = 0; PC = address (Jump) If ZERO = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 321 PIC18F/LF1XK50 BRA Unconditional Branch Syntax: BRA n Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn Description: Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE BRA Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction PC = address (Jump) BSF Bit Set f Syntax: BSF f, b {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 0  b  7 a [0,1] Operation: 1  f Status Affected: None Encoding: 1000 bbba ffff ffff Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BSF FLAG_REG, 7, 1 Before Instruction FLAG_REG = 0Ah After Instruction FLAG_REG = 8Ah PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 322 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 0  b  7 a [0,1] Operation: skip if (f) = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 1011 bbba ffff ffff Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE FALSE TRUE BTFSC : : FLAG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If FLAG<1> = 0; PC = address (TRUE) If FLAG<1> = 1; PC = address (FALSE) BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 0  b < 7 a [0,1] Operation: skip if (f) = 1 Status Affected: None Encoding: 1010 bbba ffff ffff Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE FALSE TRUE BTFSS : : FLAG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If FLAG<1> = 0; PC = address (FALSE) If FLAG<1> = 1; PC = address (TRUE)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 323 PIC18F/LF1XK50 BTG Bit Toggle f Syntax: BTG f, b {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 0  b < 7 a [0,1] Operation: (f)  f Status Affected: None Encoding: 0111 bbba ffff ffff Description: Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is inverted. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BTG PORTC, 4, 0 Before Instruction: PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h] After Instruction: PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] BOV Branch if Overflow Syntax: BOV n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BOV Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If OVERFLOW= 1; PC = address (Jump) If OVERFLOW= 0; PC = address (HERE + 2) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 324 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BZ Branch if Zero Syntax: BZ n Operands: -128  n  127 Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE BZ Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If ZERO = 1; PC = address (Jump) If ZERO = 0; PC = address (HERE + 2) CALL Subroutine Call Syntax: CALL k {,s} Operands: 0  k  1048575 s [0,1] Operation: (PC) + 4  TOS, k  PC<20:1>, if s = 1 (W)  WS, (Status)  STATUSS, (BSR)  BSRS Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) 1110 1111 110s k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Description: Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte memory range. First, return address (PC + 4) is pushed onto the return stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, Status and BSR registers are also pushed into their respective shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS. If ‘s’ = 0, no update occurs (default). Then, the 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. CALL is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, PUSH PC to stack Read literal ‘k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CALL THERE, 1 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction PC = address (THERE) TOS = address (HERE + 4) WS = W BSRS = BSR STATUSS= Status  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 325 PIC18F/LF1XK50 CLRF Clear f Syntax: CLRF f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a [0,1] Operation: 000h  f 1  Z Status Affected: Z Encoding: 0110 101a ffff ffff Description: Clears the contents of the specified register. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: CLRF FLAG_REG, 1 Before Instruction FLAG_REG = 5Ah After Instruction FLAG_REG = 00h CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer Syntax: CLRWDT Operands: None Operation: 000h  WDT, 000h  WDT postscaler, 1  TO, 1  PD Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0100 Description: CLRWDT instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. It also resets the postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO and PD, are set. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data No operation Example: CLRWDT Before Instruction WDT Counter = ? After Instruction WDT Counter = 00h WDT Postscaler = 0 TO = 1 PD = 1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 326 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. COMF Complement f Syntax: COMF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f)  dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 11da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: COMF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 13h After Instruction REG = 13h W = ECh CPFSEQ Compare f with W, skip if f = W Syntax: CPFSEQ f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W), skip if (f) = (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 001a ffff ffff Description: Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CPFSEQ REG, 0 NEQUAL : EQUAL : Before Instruction PC Address = HERE W = ? REG = ? After Instruction If REG = W; PC = Address (EQUAL) If REG  W; PC = Address (NEQUAL)  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 327 PIC18F/LF1XK50 CPFSGT Compare f with W, skip if f > W Syntax: CPFSGT f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: (f) –W), skip if (f) > (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 010a ffff ffff Description: Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the contents of WREG, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CPFSGT REG, 0 NGREATER : GREATER : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) W = ? After Instruction If REG  W; PC = Address (GREATER) If REG  W; PC = Address (NGREATER) CPFSLT Compare f with W, skip if f < W Syntax: CPFSLT f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: (f) –W), skip if (f) < (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 000a ffff ffff Description: Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the contents of W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CPFSLT REG, 1 NLESS : LESS : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) W = ? After Instruction If REG < W; PC = Address (LESS) If REG  W; PC = Address (NLESS) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 328 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. DAW Decimal Adjust W Register Syntax: DAW Operands: None Operation: If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1] then (W<3:0>) + 6  W<3:0>; else (W<3:0>)  W<3:0>; If [W<7:4> + DC > 9] or [C = 1] then (W<7:4>) + 6 + DC  W<7:4>; else (W<7:4>) + DC  W<7:4> Status Affected: C Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0111 Description: DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W, resulting from the earlier addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format) and produces a correct packed BCD result. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register W Process Data Write W Example1: DAW Before Instruction W = A5h C = 0 DC = 0 After Instruction W = 05h C = 1 DC = 0 Example 2: Before Instruction W = CEh C = 0 DC = 0 After Instruction W = 34h C = 1 DC = 0 DECF Decrement f Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1  dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: 0000 01da ffff ffff Description: Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: DECF CNT, 1, 0 Before Instruction CNT = 01h Z = 0 After Instruction CNT = 00h Z = 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 329 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DECFSZ Decrement f, skip if 0 Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1  dest, skip if result = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0010 11da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE DECFSZ CNT, 1, 1 GOTO LOOP CONTINUE Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction CNT = CNT - 1 If CNT = 0; PC = Address (CONTINUE) If CNT  0; PC = Address (HERE + 2) DCFSNZ Decrement f, skip if not 0 Syntax: DCFSNZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1  dest, skip if result  0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0100 11da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE DCFSNZ TEMP, 1, 0 ZERO : NZERO : Before Instruction TEMP = ? After Instruction TEMP = TEMP – 1, If TEMP = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) If TEMP  0; PC = Address (NZERO) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 330 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. GOTO Unconditional Branch Syntax: GOTO k Operands: 0  k  1048575 Operation: k  PC<20:1> Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) 1110 1111 1111 k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch anywhere within entire 2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. GOTO is always a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, No operation Read literal ‘k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: GOTO THERE After Instruction PC = Address (THERE) INCF Increment f Syntax: INCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1  dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: 0010 10da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: INCF CNT, 1, 0 Before Instruction CNT = FFh Z = 0 C = ? DC = ? After Instruction CNT = 00h Z = 1 C = 1 DC = 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 331 PIC18F/LF1XK50 INCFSZ Increment f, skip if 0 Syntax: INCFSZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1  dest, skip if result = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0011 11da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE INCFSZ CNT, 1, 0 NZERO : ZERO : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction CNT = CNT + 1 If CNT = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) If CNT  0; PC = Address (NZERO) INFSNZ Increment f, skip if not 0 Syntax: INFSNZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1  dest, skip if result  0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0100 10da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE INFSNZ REG, 1, 0 ZERO NZERO Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction REG = REG + 1 If REG  0; PC = Address (NZERO) If REG = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 332 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. IORLW Inclusive OR literal with W Syntax: IORLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: (W) .OR. k  W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ORed with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: IORLW 35h Before Instruction W = 9Ah After Instruction W = BFh IORWF Inclusive OR W with f Syntax: IORWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (W) .OR. (f)  dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 00da ffff ffff Description: Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: IORWF RESULT, 0, 1 Before Instruction RESULT = 13h W = 91h After Instruction RESULT = 13h W = 93h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 333 PIC18F/LF1XK50 LFSR Load FSR Syntax: LFSR f, k Operands: 0  f  2 0  k  4095 Operation: k  FSRf Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1111 1110 0000 00ff k7kkk k11kkk kkkk Description: The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the File Select Register pointed to by ‘f’. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ MSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ MSB to FSRfH Decode Read literal ‘k’ LSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to FSRfL Example: LFSR 2, 3ABh After Instruction FSR2H = 03h FSR2L = ABh MOVF Move f Syntax: MOVF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: f  dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0101 00da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to a destination dependent upon the status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write W Example: MOVF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 22h W = FFh After Instruction REG = 22h W = 22h PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 334 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. MOVFF Move f to f Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd Operands: 0  fs  4095 0  fd  4095 Operation: (fs)  fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) 1100 1111 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffffs ffffd Description: The contents of source register ‘fs’ are moved to destination register ‘fd’. Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’ can also be anywhere from 000h to FFFh. Either source or destination can be W (a useful special situation). MOVFF is particularly useful for transferring a data memory location to a peripheral register (such as the transmit buffer or an I/O port). The MOVFF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 (3) Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ (src) Process Data No operation Decode No operation No dummy read No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) Example: MOVFF REG1, REG2 Before Instruction REG1 = 33h REG2 = 11h After Instruction REG1 = 33h REG2 = 33h MOVLB Move literal to low nibble in BSR Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: k  BSR Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0001 kkkk kkkk Description: The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). The value of BSR<7:4> always remains ‘0’, regardless of the value of k7:k4. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to BSR Example: MOVLB 5 Before Instruction BSR Register = 02h After Instruction BSR Register = 05h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 335 PIC18F/LF1XK50 MOVLW Move literal to W Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: k  W Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk Description: The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: MOVLW 5Ah After Instruction W = 5Ah MOVWF Move W to f Syntax: MOVWF f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: (W)  f Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 111a ffff ffff Description: Move data from W to register ‘f’. Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: MOVWF REG, 0 Before Instruction W = 4Fh REG = FFh After Instruction W = 4Fh REG = 4Fh PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 336 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. MULLW Multiply literal with W Syntax: MULLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: (W) x k  PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is placed in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. W is unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is possible in this operation. A zero result is possible but not detected. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL Example: MULLW 0C4h Before Instruction W = E2h PRODH = ? PRODL = ? After Instruction W = E2h PRODH = ADh PRODL = 08h MULWF Multiply W with f Syntax: MULWF f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: (W) x (f)  PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 001a ffff ffff Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is possible in this operation. A zero result is possible but not detected. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL Example: MULWF REG, 1 Before Instruction W = C4h REG = B5h PRODH = ? PRODL = ? After Instruction W = C4h REG = B5h PRODH = 8Ah PRODL = 94h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 337 PIC18F/LF1XK50 NEGF Negate f Syntax: NEGF f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: ( f ) + 1  f Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0110 110a ffff ffff Description: Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s complement. The result is placed in the data memory location ‘f’. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: NEGF REG, 1 Before Instruction REG = 0011 1010 [3Ah] After Instruction REG = 1100 0110 [C6h] NOP No Operation Syntax: NOP Operands: None Operation: No operation Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1111 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx Description: No operation. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation Example: None. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 338 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. POP Pop Top of Return Stack Syntax: POP Operands: None Operation: (TOS)  bit bucket Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return stack and is discarded. The TOS value then becomes the previous value that was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction is provided to enable the user to properly manage the return stack to incorporate a software stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation POP TOS value No operation Example: POP GOTO NEW Before Instruction TOS = 0031A2h Stack (1 level down) = 014332h After Instruction TOS = 014332h PC = NEW PUSH Push Top of Return Stack Syntax: PUSH Operands: None Operation: (PC + 2)  TOS Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0101 Description: The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of the return stack. The previous TOS value is pushed down on the stack. This instruction allows implementing a software stack by modifying TOS and then pushing it onto the return stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode PUSH PC + 2 onto return stack No operation No operation Example: PUSH Before Instruction TOS = 345Ah PC = 0124h After Instruction PC = 0126h TOS = 0126h Stack (1 level down) = 345Ah  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 339 PIC18F/LF1XK50 RCALL Relative Call Syntax: RCALL n Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operation: (PC) + 2  TOS, (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn Description: Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K from the current location. First, return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the stack. Then, add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ PUSH PC to stack Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE RCALL Jump Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction PC = Address (Jump) TOS = Address (HERE + 2) RESET Reset Syntax: RESET Operands: None Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are affected by a MCLR Reset. Status Affected: All Encoding: 0000 0000 1111 1111 Description: This instruction provides a way to execute a MCLR Reset by software. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Start Reset No operation No operation Example: RESET After Instruction Registers = Reset Value Flags* = Reset Value PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 340 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. RETFIE Return from Interrupt Syntax: RETFIE {s} Operands: s  [0,1] Operation: (TOS)  PC, 1  GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL, if s = 1 (WS)  W, (STATUSS)  Status, (BSRS)  BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged. Status Affected: GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 000s Description: Return from interrupt. Stack is popped and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting either the high or low priority global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, Status and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation POP PC from stack Set GIEH or GIEL No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: RETFIE 1 After Interrupt PC = TOS W = WS BSR = BSRS Status = STATUSS GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL = 1 RETLW Return literal to W Syntax: RETLW k Operands: 0  k  255 Operation: k  W, (TOS)  PC, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk Description: W is loaded with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The program counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). The high address latch (PCLATH) remains unchanged. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data POP PC from stack, Write to W No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CALL TABLE ; W contains table ; offset value ; W now has ; table value : TABLE ADDWF PCL ; W = offset RETLW k0 ; Begin table RETLW k1 ; : : RETLW kn ; End of table Before Instruction W = 07h After Instruction W = value of kn  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 341 PIC18F/LF1XK50 RETURN Return from Subroutine Syntax: RETURN {s} Operands: s  [0,1] Operation: (TOS)  PC, if s = 1 (WS)  W, (STATUSS)  Status, (BSRS)  BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 001s Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is popped and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the program counter. If ‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, Status and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data POP PC from stack No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: RETURN After Instruction: PC = TOS RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry Syntax: RLCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f)  dest, (f<7>)  C, (C)  dest<0> Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: 0011 01da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left through the CARRY flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: RLCF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1110 0110 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 1110 0110 W = 1100 1100 C = 1 C register f PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 342 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) Syntax: RLNCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f)  dest, (f<7>)  dest<0> Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0100 01da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: RLNCF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1010 1011 After Instruction REG = 0101 0111 register f RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry Syntax: RRCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f)  dest, (f<0>)  C, (C)  dest<7> Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: 0011 00da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right through the CARRY flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: RRCF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1110 0110 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 1110 0110 W = 0111 0011 C = 0 C register f  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 343 PIC18F/LF1XK50 RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) Syntax: RRNCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f)  dest, (f<0>)  dest<7> Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0100 00da ffff ffff Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be selected, overriding the BSR value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be selected as per the BSR value (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: RRNCF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1101 0111 After Instruction REG = 1110 1011 Example 2: RRNCF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction W = ? REG = 1101 0111 After Instruction W = 1110 1011 REG = 1101 0111 register f SETF Set f Syntax: SETF f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a [0,1] Operation: FFh  f Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 100a ffff ffff Description: The contents of the specified register are set to FFh. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: SETF REG, 1 Before Instruction REG = 5Ah After Instruction REG = FFh PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 344 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. SLEEP Enter Sleep mode Syntax: SLEEP Operands: None Operation: 00h  WDT, 0  WDT postscaler, 1  TO, 0  PD Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0011 Description: The Power-down Status bit (PD) is cleared. The Time-out Status bit (TO) is set. Watchdog Timer and its postscaler are cleared. The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data Go to Sleep Example: SLEEP Before Instruction TO = ? PD = ? After Instruction TO = 1 † PD = 0 † If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared. SUBFWB Subtract f from W with borrow Syntax: SUBFWB f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 f 255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0101 01da ffff ffff Description: Subtract register ‘f’ and CARRY flag (borrow) from W (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 3 W = 2 C = 1 After Instruction REG = FF W = 2 C = 0 Z = 0 N = 1 ; result is negative Example 2: SUBFWB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 2 W = 5 C = 1 After Instruction REG = 2 W = 3 C = 1 Z = 0 N = 0 ; result is positive Example 3: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 0 W = 2 C = 1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N = 0  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 345 PIC18F/LF1XK50 SUBLW Subtract W from literal Syntax: SUBLW k Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: k – (W) W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk Description W is subtracted from the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example 1: SUBLW 02h Before Instruction W = 01h C = ? After Instruction W = 01h C = 1 ; result is positive Z = 0 N = 0 Example 2: SUBLW 02h Before Instruction W = 02h C = ? After Instruction W = 00h C = 1 ; result is zero Z = 1 N = 0 Example 3: SUBLW 02h Before Instruction W = 03h C = ? After Instruction W = FFh ; (2’s complement) C = 0 ; result is negative Z = 0 N = 1 SUBWF Subtract W from f Syntax: SUBWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 f 255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0101 11da ffff ffff Description: Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: SUBWF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 3 W = 2 C = ? After Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = 1 ; result is positive Z = 0 N = 0 Example 2: SUBWF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 2 W = 2 C = ? After Instruction REG = 2 W = 0 C = 1 ; result is zero Z = 1 N = 0 Example 3: SUBWF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = ? After Instruction REG = FFh ;(2’s complement) W = 2 C = 0 ; result is negative Z = 0 N = 1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 346 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow Syntax: SUBWFB f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0101 10da ffff ffff Description: Subtract W and the CARRY flag (borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 19h (0001 1001) W = 0Dh (0000 1101) C = 1 After Instruction REG = 0Ch (0000 1011) W = 0Dh (0000 1101) C = 1 Z = 0 N = 0 ; result is positive Example 2: SUBWFB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1Bh (0001 1011) W = 1Ah (0001 1010) C = 0 After Instruction REG = 1Bh (0001 1011) W = 00h C = 1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N = 0 Example 3: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 03h (0000 0011) W = 0Eh (0000 1101) C = 1 After Instruction REG = F5h (1111 0100) ; [2’s comp] W = 0Eh (0000 1101) C = 0 Z = 0 N = 1 ; result is negative SWAPF Swap f Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (f<3:0>)  dest<7:4>, (f<7:4>)  dest<3:0> Status Affected: None Encoding: 0011 10da ffff ffff Description: The upper and lower nibbles of register ‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: SWAPF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 53h After Instruction REG = 35h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 347 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TBLRD Table Read Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Operands: None Operation: if TBLRD *, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLRD *+, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; (TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; if TBLRD *-, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; (TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; if TBLRD +*, (TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; (Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 10nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *- =3 +* Description: This instruction is used to read the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the program memory, a pointer called Table Pointer (TBLPTR) is used. The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLRD instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • no change • post-increment • post-decrement • pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read Program Memory) No operation No operation (Write TABLAT) TBLRD Table Read (Continued) Example1: TBLRD *+ ; Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h MEMORY (00A356h) = 34h After Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 00A357h Example2: TBLRD +* ; Before Instruction TABLAT = AAh TBLPTR = 01A357h MEMORY (01A357h) = 12h MEMORY (01A358h) = 34h After Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01A358h PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 348 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TBLWT Table Write Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Operands: None Operation: if TBLWT*, (TABLAT)  Holding Register; TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLWT*+, (TABLAT)  Holding Register; (TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; if TBLWT*-, (TABLAT)  Holding Register; (TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; if TBLWT+*, (TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; (TABLAT)  Holding Register; Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 11nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *- =3 +* Description: This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of TBLPTR to determine which of the 8 holding registers the TABLAT is written to. The holding registers are used to program the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer to Section 4.0 “Flash Program Memory” for additional details on programming Flash memory.) The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-MByte address range. The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which byte of the program memory location to access. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLWT instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • no change • post-increment • post-decrement • pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read TABLAT) No operation No operation (Write to Holding Register ) TBLWT Table Write (Continued) Example1: TBLWT *+; Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = FFh After Instructions (table write completion) TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A357h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = 55h Example 2: TBLWT +*; Before Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Ah HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = FFh After Instruction (table write completion) TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Bh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = 34h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 349 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TSTFSZ Test f, skip if 0 Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Operands: 0  f  255 a  [0,1] Operation: skip if f = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 011a ffff ffff Description: If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE TSTFSZ CNT, 1 NZERO : ZERO : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction If CNT = 00h, PC = Address (ZERO) If CNT  00h, PC = Address (NZERO) XORLW Exclusive OR literal with W Syntax: XORLW k Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (W) .XOR. k W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are XORed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: XORLW 0AFh Before Instruction W = B5h After Instruction W = 1Ah PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 350 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. XORWF Exclusive OR W with f Syntax: XORWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0  f  255 d  [0,1] a  [0,1] Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 10da ffff ffff Description: Exclusive OR the contents of W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in the register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: XORWF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = AFh W = B5h After Instruction REG = 1Ah W = B5h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 351 PIC18F/LF1XK50 25.2 Extended Instruction Set In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 instruction set, PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices also provide an optional extension to the core CPU functionality. The added features include eight additional instructions that augment indirect and indexed addressing operations and the implementation of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode for many of the standard PIC18 instructions. The additional features of the extended instruction set are disabled by default. To enable them, users must set the XINST Configuration bit. The instructions in the extended set can all be classified as literal operations, which either manipulate the File Select Registers, or use them for indexed addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution. The extended instructions are specifically implemented to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in high-level languages, particularly C. Among other things, they allow users working in high-level languages to perform certain operations on data structures more efficiently. These include: • dynamic allocation and deallocation of software stack space when entering and leaving subroutines • function pointer invocation • software Stack Pointer manipulation • manipulation of variables located in a software stack A summary of the instructions in the extended instruction set is provided in Table 25-3. Detailed descriptions are provided in Section 25.2.2 “Extended Instruction Set”. The opcode field descriptions in Table 25-1 (page 310) apply to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets. 25.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX Most of the extended instructions use indexed arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and some offset to specify a source or destination register. When an argument for an instruction serves as part of indexed addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used as an index or offset. MPASM™ Assembler will flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value is not bracketed. When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets are also used to indicate index arguments in byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see Section 25.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”. TABLE 25-3: EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET Note: The instruction set extension and the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode were designed for optimizing applications written in C; the user may likely never use these instructions directly in assembler. The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be reviewing code that has been generated by a compiler. Note: In the past, square brackets have been used to denote optional arguments in the PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this text and going forward, optional arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”). Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word Status MSb LSb Affected ADDFSR ADDULNK CALLW MOVSF MOVSS PUSHL SUBFSR SUBULNK f, k k zs, fd zs, zd k f, k k Add literal to FSR Add literal to FSR2 and return Call subroutine using WREG Move zs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move zs (source) to 1st word zd (destination) 2nd word Store literal at FSR2, decrement FSR2 Subtract literal from FSR Subtract literal from FSR2 and return 1222 2 1 12 1110 1110 0000 1110 1111 1110 1111 1110 1110 1110 1000 1000 0000 1011 ffff 1011 xxxx 1010 1001 1001 ffkk 11kk 0001 0zzz ffff 1zzz xzzz kkkk ffkk 11kk kkkk kkkk 0100 zzzz ffff zzzz zzzz kkkk kkkk kkkk None None None None None None None None PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 352 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 25.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR Syntax: ADDFSR f, k Operands: 0  k  63 f  [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR(f) + k  FSR(f) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR Example: ADDFSR 2, 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh After Instruction FSR2 = 0422h ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Syntax: ADDULNK k Operands: 0  k  63 Operation: FSR2 + k  FSR2, (TOS) PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1000 11kk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the ADDFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: ADDULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh PC = 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = 0422h PC = (TOS) Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction syntax then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 353 PIC18F/LF1XK50 CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG Syntax: CALLW Operands: None Operation: (PC + 2)  TOS, (W)  PCL, (PCLATH)  PCH, (PCLATU)  PCU Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 0100 Description First, the return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the return stack. Next, the contents of W are written to PCL; the existing value is discarded. Then, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are latched into PCH and PCU, respectively. The second cycle is executed as a NOP instruction while the new next instruction is fetched. Unlike CALL, there is no option to update W, Status or BSR. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read WREG PUSH PC to stack No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CALLW Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) PCLATH = 10h PCLATU = 00h W = 06h After Instruction PC = 001006h TOS = address (HERE + 2) PCLATH = 10h PCLATU = 00h W = 06h MOVSF Move Indexed to f Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd Operands: 0  zs  127 0  fd  4095 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) 1110 1111 1011 ffff 0zzz ffff zzzzs ffffd Description: The contents of the source register are moved to destination register ‘fd’. The actual address of the source register is determined by adding the 7-bit literal offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of FSR2. The address of the destination register is specified by the 12-bit literal ‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an indirect addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Determine source addr Determine source addr Read source reg Decode No operation No dummy read No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) Example: MOVSF [05h], REG2 Before Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h REG2 = 11h After Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h REG2 = 33h PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 354 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Operands: 0  zs  127 0  zd  127 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  ((FSR2) + zd) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (dest.) 1110 1111 1011 xxxx 1zzz xzzz zzzzs zzzzd Description The contents of the source register are moved to the destination register. The addresses of the source and destination registers are determined by adding the 7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both registers can be located anywhere in the 4096-byte data memory space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSS instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an indirect addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. If the resultant destination address points to an indirect addressing register, the instruction will execute as a NOP. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Determine source addr Determine source addr Read source reg Decode Determine dest addr Determine dest addr Write to dest reg Example: MOVSS [05h], [06h] Before Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h Contents of 86h = 11h After Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h Contents of 86h = 33h PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Syntax: PUSHL k Operands: 0k  255 Operation: k  (FSR2), FSR2 – 1  FSR2 Status Affected: None Encoding: 1111 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2 is decremented by 1 after the operation. This instruction allows users to push values onto a software stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process data Write to destination Example: PUSHL 08h Before Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L = 01ECh Memory (01ECh) = 00h After Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L = 01EBh Memory (01ECh) = 08h  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 355 PIC18F/LF1XK50 SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR Syntax: SUBFSR f, k Operands: 0  k  63 f  [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR(f) – k  FSRf Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: SUBFSR 2, 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh After Instruction FSR2 = 03DCh SUBULNK Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return Syntax: SUBULNK k Operands: 0  k  63 Operation: FSR2 – k  FSR2 (TOS) PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1001 11kk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: SUBULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh PC = 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = 03DCh PC = (TOS) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 356 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 25.2.3 BYTE-ORIENTED AND BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, enabling the extended instruction set also enables Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode (Section 3.5.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has a significant impact on the way that many commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. When the extended set is disabled, addresses embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (‘a’ = 0), or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (‘a’ = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled and ‘a’ = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit as an argument – that is, all byte-oriented and bitoriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 instructions – may behave differently when the extended instruction set is enabled. When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original values. This may be useful in creating backward compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it when moving back and forth between C and assembly routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the extended instruction set (see Section 25.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”). Although the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 programming must keep in mind that, when the extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode are provided on the following page to show how execution is affected. The operand conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all instructions of these types. 25.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a value greater than 5Fh within brackets, will generate an error in the MPASM™ assembler. If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended instruction set disabled) when ‘a’ is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM assembler. The destination argument, ‘d’, functions as before. In the latest versions of the MPASM assembler, language support for the extended instruction set must be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the source listing. 25.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN ENABLING THE EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET It is important to note that the extensions to the instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular, users who are not writing code that uses a software stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the instruction set. Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode may create issues with legacy applications written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2 when the instruction set extension is enabled, the application may read or write to the wrong data addresses. When porting an application to the PIC18F/LF1XK50, it is very important to consider the type of code. A large, re-entrant application that is written in ‘C’ and would benefit from efficient compilation will do well when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely not benefit from using the extended instruction set. Note: Enabling the PIC18 instruction set extension may cause legacy applications to behave erratically or fail entirely.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 357 PIC18F/LF1XK50 ADDWF ADD W to Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: ADDWF [k] {,d} Operands: 0  k  95 d  [0,1] Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k)  dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0010 01d0 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF [OFST] , 0 Before Instruction W = 17h OFST = 2Ch FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A2Ch = 20h After Instruction W = 37h Contents of 0A2Ch = 20h BSF Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: BSF [k], b Operands: 0  f  95 0  b  7 Operation: 1  ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’, is set. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: BSF [FLAG_OFST], 7 Before Instruction FLAG_OFST = 0Ah FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A0Ah = 55h After Instruction Contents of 0A0Ah = D5h SETF Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: SETF [k] Operands: 0  k  95 Operation: FFh  ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write register Example: SETF [OFST] Before Instruction OFST = 2Ch FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A2Ch = 00h After Instruction Contents of 0A2Ch = FFh PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 358 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 25.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have been designed to fully support the extended instruction set of the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family of devices. This includes the MPLAB® C18 C compiler, MPASM assembly language and MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). When selecting a target device for software development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. For proper execution of applications developed to take advantage of the extended instruction set, XINST must be set during programming. To develop software for the extended instruction set, the user must enable support for the instructions and the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s). Depending on the environment being used, this may be done in several ways: • A menu option, or dialog box within the environment, that allows the user to configure the language tool and its settings for the project • A command line option • A directive in the source code These options vary between different compilers, assemblers and development environments. Users are encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate information.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 359 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 26.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT The PIC® microcontrollers and dsPIC® digital signal controllers are supported with a full range of software and hardware development tools: • Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB® IDE Software • Compilers/Assemblers/Linkers - MPLAB C Compiler for Various Device Families - HI-TECH C for Various Device Families - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB Assembler/Linker/Librarian for Various Device Families • Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator • Emulators - MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator • In-Circuit Debuggers - MPLAB ICD 3 - PICkit™ 3 Debug Express • Device Programmers - PICkit™ 2 Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer • Low-Cost Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits 26.1 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16/32-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows® operating system-based application that contains: • A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - In-Circuit Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) • A full-featured editor with color-coded context • A multiple project manager • Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents • High-level source code debugging • Mouse over variable inspection • Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows • Extensive on-line help • Integration of select third party tools, such as IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: • Edit your source files (either C or assembly) • One-touch compile or assemble, and download to emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) • Debug using: - Source files (C or assembly) - Mixed C and assembly - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 360 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 26.2 MPLAB C Compilers for Various Device Families The MPLAB C Compiler code development systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC18, PIC24 and PIC32 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 families of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. 26.3 HI-TECH C for Various Device Families The HI-TECH C Compiler code development systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC family of microcontrollers and the dsPIC family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, omniscient code generation and ease of use. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. The compilers include a macro assembler, linker, preprocessor, and one-step driver, and can run on multiple platforms. 26.4 MPASM Assembler The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for PIC10/12/16/18 MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: • Integration into MPLAB IDE projects • User-defined macros to streamline assembly code • Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files • Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process 26.5 MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: • Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together • Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction 26.6 MPLAB Assembler, Linker and Librarian for Various Device Families MPLAB Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for PIC24, PIC32 and dsPIC devices. MPLAB C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: • Support for the entire device instruction set • Support for fixed-point and floating-point data • Command line interface • Rich directive set • Flexible macro language • MPLAB IDE compatibility  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 361 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 26.7 MPLAB SIM Software Simulator The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. 26.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC® Flash MCUs and dsPIC® Flash DSCs with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), included with each kit. The emulator is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with incircuit debugger systems (RJ11) or with the new highspeed, noise tolerant, Low-Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). The emulator is field upgradable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation, run-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. 26.9 MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System is Microchip's most cost effective high-speed hardware debugger/programmer for Microchip Flash Digital Signal Controller (DSC) and microcontroller (MCU) devices. It debugs and programs PIC® Flash microcontrollers and dsPIC® DSCs with the powerful, yet easyto- use graphical user interface of MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger probe is connected to the design engineer's PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with a connector compatible with the MPLAB ICD 2 or MPLAB REAL ICE systems (RJ-11). MPLAB ICD 3 supports all MPLAB ICD 2 headers. 26.10 PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/ Programmer and PICkit 3 Debug Express The MPLAB PICkit 3 allows debugging and programming of PIC® and dsPIC® Flash microcontrollers at a most affordable price point using the powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). The MPLAB PICkit 3 is connected to the design engineer's PC using a full speed USB interface and can be connected to the target via an Microchip debug (RJ-11) connector (compatible with MPLAB ICD 3 and MPLAB REAL ICE). The connector uses two device I/O pins and the reset line to implement in-circuit debugging and In-Circuit Serial Programming ™. The PICkit 3 Debug Express include the PICkit 3, demo board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and MPLAB IDE software. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 362 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 26.11 PICkit 2 Development Programmer/Debugger and PICkit 2 Debug Express The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer/Debugger is a low-cost development tool with an easy to use interface for programming and debugging Microchip’s Flash families of microcontrollers. The full featured Windows® programming interface supports baseline (PIC10F, PIC12F5xx, PIC16F5xx), midrange (PIC12F6xx, PIC16F), PIC18F, PIC24, dsPIC30, dsPIC33, and PIC32 families of 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit microcontrollers, and many Microchip Serial EEPROM products. With Microchip’s powerful MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE) the PICkit™ 2 enables in-circuit debugging on most PIC® microcontrollers. In-Circuit-Debugging runs, halts and single steps the program while the PIC microcontroller is embedded in the application. When halted at a breakpoint, the file registers can be examined and modified. The PICkit 2 Debug Express include the PICkit 2, demo board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and MPLAB IDE software. 26.12 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an MMC card for file storage and data applications. 26.13 Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/ development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA®, PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL® evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Also available are starter kits that contain everything needed to experience the specified device. This usually includes a single application and debug capability, all on one board. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 363 PIC18F/LF1XK50 27.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Absolute Maximum Ratings(†) Ambient temperature under bias....................................................................................................... -40°C to +125°C Storage temperature ........................................................................................................................ -65°C to +150°C Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS, PIC18F1XK50 .......................................................................... -0.3V to +6.0V Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS, PIC18LF1XK50 ........................................................................ -0.3V to +4.0V Voltage on MCLR with respect to Vss ................................................................................................. -0.3V to +9.0V Voltage on VUSB pin with respect to VSS ............................................................................................ -0.3V to +4.0V Voltage on D+ and D- pins with respect to VSS ...................................................................... -0.3V to (VUSB + 0.3V) Voltage on all other pins with respect to VSS ........................................................................... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Total power dissipation(1) ...............................................................................................................................800 mW Maximum current out of VSS pin ...................................................................................................................... 95 mA Maximum current into VDD pin ......................................................................................................................... 95 mA Clamp current, IK (VPIN < 0 or VPIN > VDD)20 mA Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin.................................................................................................... 25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin .............................................................................................. 25 mA Maximum current sunk by all ports ................................................................................................................... 90 mA Maximum current sourced by all ports ............................................................................................................. 90 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: PDIS = VDD x {IDD –  IOH} +  {(VDD – VOH) x IOH} + (VOl x IOL). 2: Vusb must always be  VDD + 0.3V † NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure above maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 364 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.1 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param. No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions D001 VDD Supply Voltage PIC18LF1XK50 1.8 2.7 —— 3.6 3.6 VV FOSC < = 20 MHz FOSC < = 48 MHz D001 PIC18F1XK50 1.8 2.7 —— 5.5 5.5 VV FOSC < = 20 MHz FOSC < = 48 MHz D002* VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) PIC18LF1XK50 1.5 — — V Device in Sleep mode D002* PIC18F1XK50 1.7 — — V Device in Sleep mode VPOR* Power-on Reset Release Voltage — 1.6 — V VPORR* Power-on Reset Rearm Voltage — 0.8 — V D004* SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal 0.05 — — V/ms * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode without losing RAM data.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 365 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 27-1: POR AND POR REARM WITH SLOW RISING VDD VDD VPOR VPORR VSS VSS NPOR TPOR(3) POR REARM Note 1: When NPOR is low, the device is held in Reset. 2: TPOR 1 s typical. 3: TVLOW 2.7 s typical. TVLOW(2) PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 366 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D009 LDO Regulator — 30 — A — — 5 — A — LP Clock mode and Sleep (requires FVR and BOR to be disabled) D010 — 6.0 9 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator(4), -40°C  TA  +85°C — 7 12 A 3.0 D010 — 6 11 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator(4), -40°C  TA  +85°C — 7 17 A 3.0 — 12 20 A 5.0 D011* — 6.0 12 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator -40°C  TA  +125°C — 9.0 16 A 3.0 D011* — 8.0 15 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator (4) -40°C  TA  +125°C — 11 25 A 3.0 — 12 35 A 5.0 D011* — 170 220 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz — 280 370 A 3.0 XT Oscillator D011* — 200 250 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz — 310 400 A 3.0 XT Oscillator — 380 490 A 5.0 D011* — 75 110 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz XT Oscillator CPU Idle — 130 190 A 3.0 D011* — 90 130 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz XT Oscillator CPU Idle — 140 210 A 3.0 — 160 250 A 5.0 * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 367 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D012 — 300 700 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz — 500 1200 A 3.0 XT Oscillator D012 — 330 700 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz — 530 1200 A 3.0 XT Oscillator — 730 1400 A 5.0 D012A — 240 300 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz, XT Oscillator CPU Idle — 440 550 A 3.0 D012A — 230 300 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz XT Oscillator CPU Idle — 400 550 A 3.0 — 470 640 A 5.0 D013 — 140 180 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz — 230 300 A 3.0 EC Oscillator (medium power) D013 — 160 210 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power)(5) — 250 310 A 3.0 — 290 380 A 5.0 D013A — 50 64 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power) CPU Idle — 86 110 A 3.0 D013A — 70 100 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power) CPU Idle(5) — 100 150 A 3.0 — 120 170 A 5.0 D014 — 500 640 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz — 830 1100 A 3.0 EC Oscillator (medium power) D014 — 520 770 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power)(5) — 860 1200 A 3.0 — 1000 1370 A 5.0 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 368 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D014A — 200 250 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power) CPU Idle — 340 440 A 3.0 D014A — 210 303 A 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz EC Oscillator (medium power) CPU Idle(5) — 360 520 A 3.0 — 430 670 A 5.0 D015 — 820 1000 A 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz — 1500 1900 A 3.0 EC Oscillator (high power) D015 — 830 1100 A 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power)(5) — 1500 1900 A 3.0 — 1700 2300 A 5.0 D015A — 300 370 A 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) CPU Idle — 510 660 A 3.0 D015A — 320 430 A 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) CPU Idle(5) — 530 690 A 3.0 — 640 840 A 5.0 D015B — 4.7 6.0 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled D015B — 4.7 6.1 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled(5) — 5.6 7.4 mA 5.0 D015C — 2.0 2.5 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled, CPU Idle D015C — 2.0 2.5 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled, CPU Idle(5) — 2.3 3.0 mA 5.0 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 369 PIC18F/LF1XK50 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D016 — 2.6 3.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) D016 — 2.6 3.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power)(5) — 3.1 4.1 mA 5.0 D017 — 1.0 1.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) CPU Idle D017 — 1.0 1.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) CPU Idle(5) — 1.2 1.6 mA 5.0 D017A — 9 12 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled D017A — 8.9 12 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled(5) — 11 14 mA 5.0 D017B — 3.9 5.0 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled, CPU Idle D017B — 3.9 5.0 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz 12 MHz EC Oscillator (high power) PLL enabled, CPU Idle(5) — 4.7 6.0 mA 5.0 D018 — 19 38 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC Oscillator mode(3, 5) — 23 44 A 3.0 D018 — 21 40 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC Oscillator mode(3, 5) — 25 46 A 3.0 — 26 48 A 5.0 D019 — 16 33 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle — 18 38 A 3.0 D019 — 18 35 A 1.8 FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle — 20 40 A 3.0 (5) — 21 42 A 5.0 Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 370 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. D020 — 320 470 A 1.8 FOSC = 500 kHz — 460 670 A 3.0 LFINTOSC Oscillator D020 — 350 500 A 1.8 FOSC = 500 kHz LFINTOSC Oscillator(5) — 490 700 A 3.0 — 540 780 A 5.0 D021 — 380 600 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz — 550 870 A 3.0 HFINTOSC Oscillator D021 — 410 600 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator(5) — 580 870 A 3.0 — 650 970 A 5.0 D021A — 290 600 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle — 410 760 A 3.0 D021A — 320 620 A 1.8 FOSC = 1 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle(5) — 440 770 A 3.0 — 490 880 A 5.0 D022 — 1.2 1.6 mA 1.8 FOSC = 8 MHz — 2.1 2.9 mA 3.0 HFINTOSC Oscillator D022 — 1.2 1.6 mA 1.8 FOSC = 8 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator(5) — 2.1 2.9 mA 3.0 — 2.4 3.5 mA 5.0 D023 — 2.0 2.7 mA 1.8 FOSC = 16 MHz — 3.5 4.8 mA 3.0 HFINTOSC Oscillator D023 — 2.0 2.7 mA 1.8 FOSC = 16 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator(5) — 3.5 4.8 mA 3.0 — 4.0 6.0 mA 5.0 D023A — 0.9 1.3 mA 1.8 FOSC = 16 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle — 1.5 2.1 mA 3.0 D023A — 0.9 1.3 mA 1.8 FOSC = 16 MHz HFINTOSC Oscillator CPU Idle(5) — 1.5 2.1 mA 3.0 — 1.7 2.6 mA 5.0 Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 371 PIC18F/LF1XK50 D024 — 0.5 0.7 mA 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz — 0.9 1.1 mA 3.0 EXTRC Oscillator mode D024 — 0.5 0.7 mA 1.8 FOSC = 4 MHz EXTRC Oscillator mode(5) — 0.9 1.1 mA 3.0 — 1.0 1.4 mA 5.0 D025 — 1.0 1.5 mA 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz — 1.7 2.1 mA 3.0 HS Oscillator D025 — 1.0 1.5 mA 1.8 FOSC = 6 MHz HS Oscillator(5) — 1.7 2.1 mA 3.0 — 2.1 2.5 mA 5.0 D025A — 5.4 6.0 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz HS Oscillator PLL enabled D025A — 5.4 6.0 mA 3.0 FOSC = 24 MHz 6 MHz HS Oscillator PLL enabled(5) — 7.4 7.6 mA 5.0 D026 — 3.2 3.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz HS Oscillator D026 — 3.2 3.3 mA 3.0 FOSC = 12 MHz HS Oscillator(5) — 4.8 4.2 mA 5.0 D026A — 10 12 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz, 12 MHz HS Oscillator PLL enabled D026A — 10 12 mA 3.0 FOSC = 48 MHz, 12 MHz HS Oscillator PLL enabled(5) — 13 15 mA 5.0 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VDD Note * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k 4: FVR and BOR are disabled. 5: 330 nF capacitor on VUSB pin. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 372 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.3 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Power-Down) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max +85°C Max +125°C Units Conditions VDD Note Power-down Base Current (IPD)(2) D027 — 0.024 0.7 6.7 A 1.8 WDT, BOR, FVR, Voltage Regulator and T1OSC disabled, all Peripherals Inactive — 0.078 1.9 8.5 A 3.0 D027 — 6.0 7.0 13 A 1.8 WDT, BOR, FVR and T1OSC — 7.0 10 15 A 3.0 disabled, all Peripherals Inactive — 8.0 12 19 A 5.0 Power-down Module Current D028 — 0.45 1.3 4.4 A 1.8 LPWDT Current(1) — 0.75 2.0 6.0 A 3.0 D028 — 6.5 7.0 10.5 A 1.8 LPWDT Current(1) — 9.6 10.6 17.6 A 3.0 — 10.5 16.5 20 A 5.0 D029 — 12 17 23 A 1.8 FVR current (3) — 22 19 25 A 3.0 D029 — 28 42 50 A 1.8 FVR current(3, 5) — 35.6 45.6 55 A 3.0 — 38.5 49 60 A 5.0 D030 — — 21 27 A 3.0 BOR Current(1, 3) D030 — 27 48 51 A 3.0 BOR Current(1, 3, 5) — 36.5 51 55 A 5.0 D031 — 0.79 3.6 5.3 A 1.8 T1OSC Current(1) — 1.8 2.9 6.9 A 3.0 D031 — 8.0 7.5 10 A 1.8 T1OSC Current(1) — 8.5 10.5 15 A 3.0 — 10.5 12.5 24 A 5.0 * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD or IPD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral  current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPD current from this limit. Max values should be used when calculating total current consumption. 2: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD. 3: Fixed Voltage Reference is automatically enabled whenever the BOR is enabled 4: A/D oscillator source is FRC 5: 330 f capacitor on VUSB pin.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 373 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Power-down Module Current D032 — — 1.8 8 A 1.8 A/D Current(1, 4), no conversion in — — 3 10 A 3.0 progress D032 — — 6 12 A 1.8 A/D Current(1, 4), no conversion in — — 10 17 A 3.0 progress — — 11.5 22 A 5.0 D033 — — 38 44 A 1.8 Comparator Current, low power — — 40 47 A 3.0 D033 — 30 40 49 A 2.0 Comparator Current, low power — 34 44 53 A 3.0 — 36 50 60 A 5.0 D033A — — 239 244 A 1.8 Comparator Current, high power — — 242 249 A 3.0 D033A — 144 243 250 A 2.0 Comparator Current, high power — 146 247 256 A 3.0 — 151 253 264 A 5.0 D034 — — 18 23 A 1.8 Voltage Reference Current — — 30 35 A 3.0 D034 — 35 36 44 A 2.0 Voltage Reference Current — 43 44 60 A 3.0 — 55 65 74 A 5.0 27.3 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Power-Down) (Continued) PIC18LF1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended PIC18F1XK50 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Device Characteristics Min Typ† Max +85°C Max +125°C Units Conditions VDD Note * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD or IPD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral  current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPD current from this limit. Max values should be used when calculating total current consumption. 2: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD. 3: Fixed Voltage Reference is automatically enabled whenever the BOR is enabled 4: A/D oscillator source is FRC 5: 330 f capacitor on VUSB pin. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 374 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.4 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E DC CHARACTERISTICS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions VIL Input Low Voltage I/O PORT: D036 with TTL buffer — — 0.8 V 4.5V  VDD  5.5V D036A — — 0.15 VDD V 1.8V  VDD  4.5V D037 with Schmitt Trigger buffer — — 0.2 VDD V 1.8V  VDD  5.5V with I2C levels — — 0.3 VDD V D038 MCLR, OSC1 (RC mode)(1) — — 0.2 VDD V D039A OSC1 (HS mode) — — 0.3 VDD V VIH Input High Voltage I/O ports: — — D040 with TTL buffer 2.0 — — V 4.5V  VDD 5.5V D040A 0.25 VDD + 0.8 — — V 1.8V  VDD  4.5V D041 with Schmitt Trigger buffer 0.8 VDD — — V 1.8V  VDD  5.5V with I2C levels 0.7 VDD — — V D042 MCLR 0.8 VDD — — V D043A OSC1 (HS mode) 0.7 VDD — — V D043B OSC1 (RC mode) 0.9 VDD — — V (Note 1) IIL Input Leakage Current(2) D060 I/O ports — ± 5 ± 100 nA VSS  VPIN  VDD, Pin at high-impedance D061 MCLR(3) — ± 50 ± 200 nA VSS  VPIN  VDD IPUR PORTB Weak Pull-up Current D070* 50 250 400 A VDD = 5.0V, VPIN = VSS VOL Output Low Voltage(4) D080 I/O ports — — VSS+0.6 VSS+0.6 VSS+0.6 V IOH = 8mA, VDD = 5V IOH = 6mA, VDD = 3.3V IOH = 1.8mA, VDD = 1.8V VOH Output High Voltage(4) D090 I/O ports VDD-0.7 VDD-0.7 VDD-0.7 — — V IOL = 3.5mA, VDD = 5V IOL = 3mA, VDD = 3.3V IOL = 1mA, VDD = 1.8V * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended to use an external clock in RC mode. 2: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. 3: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. 4: Including OSC2 in CLKOUT mode.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 375 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins D101* COSC2 OSC2 pin — — 15 pF In XT, HS and LP modes when external clock is used to drive OSC1 D101A* CIO All I/O pins — — 50 pF Flash Memory D130 EP Cell Endurance 10K 100K — — E/W Program Flash Memory Data Flash Memory D131 VDD for Read VMIN — — V Voltage on MCLR/VPP during Erase/Program 8.0 — 9.0 V Temperature during programming: -40°C  TA  85°C VDD for Bulk Erase 2.7 — VDD Max V Temperature during programming: 10°C  TA  40°C D132 VPEW VDD for Write or Row Erase VDD Min — VDD Max V VMIN = Minimum operating voltage VMAX = Maximum operating voltage IPPPGM Current on MCLR/VPP during Erase/Write — — 1.0 mA IDDPGM Current on VDD during Erase/Write — 5.0 mA D133 TPEW Erase/Write cycle time — 4.0 5.0 ms D134 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 — — Year Provided no other specifications are violated VUSB Capacitor Charging D135 Charging current — 200 — A D135A Source/sink capability when charging complete — 0.0 — mA 27.4 DC Characteristics: PIC18F/LF1XK50-I/E (Continued) DC CHARACTERISTICS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial -40°C  TA  +125°C for extended Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended to use an external clock in RC mode. 2: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. 3: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. 4: Including OSC2 in CLKOUT mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 376 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.5 USB Module Specifications Operating Conditions-40°C  TA  +85°C (unless otherwise state) Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions D313 VUSB USB Voltage 3.0 — 3.6 V Voltage on VUSB pin must be in this range for proper USB operation D314 IIL Input Leakage on pin — — ± 1 A VSS VPIN VDD pin athigh impedance D315 VILUSB Input Low Voltage for USB Buffer — — 0.8 V For VUSB range D316 VIHUSB Input High Voltage for USB Buffer 2.0 — — V For VUSB range D318 VDIFS Differential Input Sensitivity — — 0.2 V The difference between D+ and D- must exceed this value while VCM is met D319 VCM Differential Common Mode Range 0.8 — 2.5 V D320 ZOUT Driver Output Impedance(1) 28 — 44  D321 VOL Voltage Output Low 0.0 — 0.3 V 1.5 kload connected to 3.6V D322 VOH Voltage Output High 2.8 — 3.6 V 1.5 kload connected to ground Note 1: The D+ and D- signal lines have been built-in impedance matching resistors. No external resistors, capacitors or magnetic components are necessary on the D+/D- signal paths between the PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 family device and USB cable.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 377 PIC18F/LF1XK50 27.6 Thermal Considerations Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Typ Units Conditions TH01 JA Thermal Resistance Junction to Ambient 62.4 C/W 20-pin PDIP package 85.2 C/W 20-pin SOIC package 108.1 C/W 20-pin SSOP package TBD C/W 20-pin QFN 5x5mm package TH02 JC Thermal Resistance Junction to Case 31.4 C/W 20-pin PDIP package 24 C/W 20-pin SOIC package 24 C/W 20-pin SSOP package TH03 TJMAX Maximum Junction Temperature 150 C TH04 PD Power Dissipation — W PD = PINTERNAL + PI/O TH05 PINTERNAL Internal Power Dissipation — W PINTERNAL = IDD x VDD(1) TH06 PI/O I/O Power Dissipation — W PI/O =  (IOL * VOL) +  (IOH * (VDD - VOH)) TH07 PDER Derated Power — W PDER = PDMAX (TJ - TA)/JA(2) Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: IDD is current to run the chip alone without driving any load on the output pins. 2: TA = Ambient Temperature 3: TJ = Junction Temperature PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 378 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.7 Timing Parameter Symbology The timing parameter symbols have been created with one of the following formats: FIGURE 27-2: LOAD CONDITIONS 1. TppS2ppS 2. TppS T F Frequency T Time Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings: pp cc CCP1 osc OSC1 ck CLKOUT rd RD cs CS rw RD or WR di SDI sc SCK do SDO ss SS dt Data in t0 T0CKI io I/O PORT t1 T1CKI mc MCLR wr WR Uppercase letters and their meanings: S F Fall P Period H High R Rise I Invalid (High-impedance) V Valid L Low Z High-impedance VSS CL Legend: CL = 50 pF for all pins, 15 pF for OSC2 output Load Condition Pin  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 379 PIC18F/LF1XK50 27.8 AC Characteristics: PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50-I/E FIGURE 27-3: CLOCK TIMING FIGURE 27-4: PIC18F1XK50 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40°C  TA +85°C OSC1/CLKIN OSC2/CLKOUT Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OS02 OS03 OS04 OS04 OSC2/CLKOUT (LP,XT,HS Modes) (CLKOUT Mode) 1.8 0 Frequency (MHz) VDD (V) Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2: Refer to Table 27-1 for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies. 10 20 40 48 5.5 3.6 2.7 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 380 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-5: PIC18LF1XK50 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40°C  TA +125°C FIGURE 27-6: HFINTOSC FREQUENCY ACCURACY OVER DEVICE VDD AND TEMPERATURE 1.8 2.7 0 Frequency (MHz) VDD (V) Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2: Refer to Table 27-1 for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies. 10 20 40 48 3.6 125 25 2.0 0 60 85 VDD (V) 4.0 4.5 5.0 Temperature (°C) 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.5 5.5 Note 1: This chart covers both regulator enabled and regulator disabled states. 2: Regulator Nominal voltage 3.3(2) -40 -20 ± 5% ± 2% ± 3% ± 5% ± 5%  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 381 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 27-1: CLOCK OSCILLATOR TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions OS01 FOSC External CLKIN Frequency(1) DC — 37 kHz EC Oscillator mode (low) DC — 4 MHz EC Oscillator mode (medium) DC — 48 MHz EC Oscillator mode (high) Oscillator Frequency(1) — 32.768 — kHz LP Oscillator mode 0.1 — 4 MHz XT Oscillator mode 1 — 20 MHz HS Oscillator mode DC — 4 MHz RC Oscillator mode OS02 TOSC External CLKIN Period(1) 27 —  s LP Oscillator mode 250 —  ns XT Oscillator mode 50 —  ns HS Oscillator mode 20.80 —  ns EC Oscillator mode Oscillator Period(1) — — — s LP Oscillator mode 250 — 10,000 ns XT Oscillator mode 50 — 1,000 ns HS Oscillator mode 250 — — ns RC Oscillator mode OS03 TCY Instruction Cycle Time(1) 83 TCY DC ns TCY = 4/FOSC OS04* TosH, TosL External CLKIN High, External CLKIN Low 2 — — s LP oscillator 100 — — ns XT oscillator 20 — — ns HS oscillator OS05* TosR, TosF External CLKIN Rise, External CLKIN Fall 0 —  ns LP oscillator 0 —  ns XT oscillator 0 —  ns HS oscillator * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 382 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 27-2: OSCILLATOR PARAMETERS TABLE 27-3: PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 42.7V TO 5.5V) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Freq. Tolerance Min Typ† Max Units Conditions OS08 HFOSC Internal Calibrated HFINTOSC Frequency(2) 2% 3% —— 16.0 16.0 —— MHz MHz 0°C  TA  +60°C 60°C  TA  +85°C 5% — 16.0 — MHz -40°C  TA  +125°C OS10* TIOSC ST HFINTOSC Wake-up from Sleep Start-up Time — — 5 8 s VDD = 2.0V, -40°C to +85°C — — 5 8 s VDD = 3.0V, -40°C to +85°C — — 5 8 s VDD = 5.0V, -40°C to +85°C * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. 2: To ensure these oscillator frequency tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible. 0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended. 3: By design. Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions F10 FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range 4 — 12 MHz F11 FSYS On-Chip VCO System Frequency 16 — 48 MHz F12 trc PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) — — 2 ms F13* CLK CLKOUT Stability (Jitter) -0.25% — +0.25% % * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 383 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 27-7: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING TABLE 27-4: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING PARAMETERS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions OS11 TosH2ckL Fosc to CLKOUT (1) — — 70 ns VDD = 3.0-5.0V OS12 TosH2ckH Fosc to CLKOUT (1) — — 72 ns VDD = 3.0-5.0V OS13 TckL2ioV CLKOUT to Port out valid(1) — — 20 ns OS14 TioV2ckH Port input valid before CLKOUT(1) TOSC + 200 ns — — ns OS15 TosH2ioV Fosc (Q1 cycle) to Port out valid — 50 70* ns VDD = 3.0-5.0V OS16 TosH2ioI Fosc (Q2 cycle) to Port input invalid (I/O in hold time) 50 — — ns VDD = 3.0-5.0V OS17 TioV2osH Port input valid to Fosc(Q2 cycle) (I/O in setup time) 20 — — ns OS18 TioR Port output rise time — — 90 55 140 80 ns VDD = 2.0V VDD = 3.3-5.0V OS19 TioF Port output fall time — — 60 44 80 60 ns VDD = 2.0V VDD = 3.3-5.0V OS20* Tinp INT pin input high or low time 25 — — ns OS21* Trbp PORTB interrupt-on-change new input level time TCY — — ns * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. Note 1: Measurements are taken in RC mode where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC. FOSC CLKOUT I/O pin (Input) I/O pin (Output) Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 OS11 OS19 OS13 OS15 OS18, OS19 OS20 OS21 OS17 OS16 OS14 OS12 OS18 Old Value New Value Cycle Write Fetch Read Execute PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 384 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-8: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING FIGURE 27-9: BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING AND CHARACTERISTICS VDD MCLR Internal POR PWRT Time-out OSC Start-Up Time Internal Reset(1) Watchdog Timer 33 32 30 31/ 34 I/O pins 34 Note 1: Asserted low. Reset(1) 31A VBOR VDD (Device in Brown-out Reset) (Device not in Brown-out Reset) 33(1) 37 Note 1: 64 ms delay only if PWRTE bit in the Configuration Word register is programmed to ‘0’. 2 ms delay if PWRTE = 0. Reset (due to BOR) VBOR and VHYST TBORREJ  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 385 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 27-5: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER, AND BROWN-OUT RESET PARAMETERS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions 30 TMCL MCLR Pulse Width (low) 2 5 —— —— s s VDD = 3.3-5V, -40°C to +85°C VDD = 3.3-5V 31 TWDT Standard Watchdog Timer Time-out Period(5) 10 10 17 17 27 30 ms ms VDD = 3.3V-5V, -40°C to +85°C VDD = 3.3V-5V 31A TWDTLP Low Power Watchdog Timer Time-out Period 10 10 18 18 27 33 ms ms VDD = 3.3V-5V, -40°C to +85°C VDD = 3.3V-5V 32 TOST Oscillator Start-up Timer Period(1), (2) — 1024 — Tosc (Note 3) 33* TPWRT Power-up Timer Period, PWRTE = 0 40 65 140 ms 34* TIOZ I/O high-impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset — — 2.0 s 35 VBOR Brown-out Reset Voltage 1.8 2.09 2.57 2.71 1.9 2.2 2.7 2.85 2.05 2.35 2.85 3.0 VVVV BORV = 1.9V BORV = 2.2V BORV = 2.7V BORV = 2.85V 36* VHYST Brown-out Reset Hysteresis 25 50 75 mV -40°C to +85°C 37* TBORDC Brown-out Reset DC Response Time 0 1 40 s VDD  VBOR Legend: TBD = To Be Determined * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. 2: By design. 3: Period of the slower clock. 4: To ensure these voltage tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible. 0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended. 5: Design Target. If unable to meet this target, the maximum can be increased, but the minimum cannot be changed. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 386 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-10: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS TABLE 27-6: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions 40* TT0H T0CKI High Pulse Width No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns With Prescaler 10 — — ns 41* TT0L T0CKI Low Pulse Width No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns With Prescaler 10 — — ns 42* TT0P T0CKI Period Greater of: 20 or TCY + 40 N — — ns N = prescale value (2, 4, ..., 256) 45* TT1H T1CKI High Time Synchronous, No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns Asynchronous 30 — — ns 46* TT1L T1CKI Low Time Synchronous, No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns Asynchronous 30 — — ns 47* TT1P T1CKI Input Period Synchronous Greater of: 30 or TCY + 40 N — — ns N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) Asynchronous 60 — — ns 48 FT1 Timer1 Oscillator Input Frequency Range (oscillator enabled by setting bit T1OSCEN) 32.4 32.768 33.1 kHz 49* TCKEZTMR1 Delay from External Clock Edge to Timer Increment 2 TOSC — 7 TOSC — Timers in Sync mode * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. T0CKI T1CKI 40 41 42 45 46 47 49 TMR0 or TMR1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 387 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 27-11: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (CCP) TABLE 27-7: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (CCP) TABLE 27-8: PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 A/D CONVERTER (ADC) CHARACTERISTICS: Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C  TA  +125°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions CC01* TccL CCPx Input Low Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns With Prescaler 20 — — ns CC02* TccH CCPx Input High Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns With Prescaler 20 — — ns CC03* TccP CCPx Input Period 3TCY + 40 N — — ns N = prescale value (1, 4 or 16) * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature TA  25°C Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions AD01 NR Resolution — — 10 bit AD02 EIL Integral Error — — ±2 LSb VREF = 3.0V AD03 EDL Differential Error — — 1.5 LSb No missing codes VREF = 3.0V AD04 EOFF Offset Error — — ±3 LSb VREF = 3.0V AD05 EGN Gain Error — — ±3 LSb VREF = 3.0V AD06 VREF Change in Reference Voltage = VREF+ - VREF-(3) 1.8 — VDD V 1.8 VREF+ VDD + 0.3V VSS - 0.3V VREF- VREF+ - 1.8V AD07 VAIN Full-Scale Range VSS — VREF V AD08 ZAIN Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source — — 2.5 k Can go higher if external 0.01F capacitor is present on input pin. AD09* IREF VREF Input Current(3) 10 — 1000 A During VAIN acquisition. Based on differential of VHOLD to VAIN. — — 10 A During A/D conversion cycle. * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Total Absolute Error includes integral, differential, offset and gain errors. 2: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing codes. 3: ADC VREF is from external VREF, VDD pin or FVR, whichever is selected as reference input. 4: When ADC is off, it will not consume any current other than leakage current. The power-down current specification includes any such leakage from the ADC module. Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. (Capture mode) CC01 CC02 CC03 CCPx PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 388 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-12: A/D CONVERSION TIMING TABLE 27-9: A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions 130 TAD A/D Clock Period 0.7 25.0(1) s TOSC based, VREF  3.0V 0.7 1 s A/D RC mode 131 TCNV Conversion Time (not including acquisition time)(2) 11 12 TAD 132 TACQ Acquisition Time(3) 1.4 TBD —— s s -40C to +85C 0C  to  +85C 135 TSWC Switching Time from Convert  Sample — (Note 4) TBD TDIS Discharge Time 0.2 — s Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: The time of the A/D clock period is dependent on the device frequency and the TAD clock divider. 2: ADRES register may be read on the following TCY cycle. 3: The time for the holding capacitor to acquire the “New” input voltage when the voltage changes full scale after the conversion (VDD to VSS or VSS to VDD). The source impedance (RS) on the input channels is 50 . 4: On the following cycle of the device clock. 131 130 132 BSF ADCON0, GO Q4 A/D CLK A/D DATA ADRES ADIF GO SAMPLE OLD_DATA SAMPLING STOPPED DONE NEW_DATA (Note 2) 9 8 7 2 1 0 Note 1: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. 2: This is a minimal RC delay (typically 100 ns), which also disconnects the holding capacitor from the analog input. .. . . . . TCY  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 389 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 27-10: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 27-11: CVREF VOLTAGE REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 27-12: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE (FVR) SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +125°C (unless otherwise stated). Param No. Sym Characteristics Min Typ Max Units Comments CM01 VIOFF Input Offset Voltage —— ±7.5 — ±50 ±80 mV mV High Power Mode Low Power Mode CM02 VICM Input Common Mode Voltage 0 — VDD V CM03 CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio 55 — — dB CM04 TRESP Response Time — 150 400 ns Note 1 CM05 TMC2OV Comparator Mode Change to Output Valid* — — 10 s CM06 CHYSTER Comparator Hysteresis — 65 — mV * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: Response time measured with one comparator input at VDD/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD. Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +125°C (unless otherwise stated). Param No. Sym Characteristics Min Typ Max Units Comments CV01* CLSB Step Size(2) —— VDD/24 VDD/32 —— VV Low Range (VRR = 1) High Range (VRR = 0) CV02* CACC Absolute Accuracy — — ——  1/4 1/2 LSb LSb Low Range (VRR = 1) High Range (VRR = 0) CV03* CR Unit Resistor Value (R) — 2k —  CV04* CST Settling Time(1) — — 10 s * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: Settling time measured while CVRR = 1 and CVR3:CVR0 transitions from ‘0000’ to ‘1111’. Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 5.5V, -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated). VR Voltage Reference Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C -40°C  TA  +125°C Param No. Sym. Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Units Comments D003 VADFVR Fixed Voltage Reference Voltage -7 -8 -7 -8 -7 -8 —————— 666666 % 1.024V, VDD  2.5V, 85°C 1.024V, VDD  2.5V, 125°C 2.048V, VDD  2.5V, 85°C 2.048V, VDD  2.5V, 125°C 4.096V, VDD  4.75V, 85°C 4.096V, VDD  4.75V, 125°C D003C* TCVFVR Temperature Coefficient, Fixed Voltage Reference — -114 — ppm/°C D003D* VFVR/ VIN Line Regulation, Fixed Voltage Reference — 0.225 — %/V D004* SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal 0.05 — — V/ms See Section 6.1 “Power-on Reset (POR)” for details. * These parameters are characterized but not tested. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 390 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-13: USART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING TABLE 27-13: USART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS FIGURE 27-14: USART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING TABLE 27-14: USART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Max. Units Conditions US120 TCKH2DTV SYNC XMIT (Master and Slave) Clock high to data-out valid 3.0-5.5V — 80 ns 1.8-5.5V — 100 ns US121 TCKRF Clock out rise time and fall time (Master mode) 3.0-5.5V — 45 ns 1.8-5.5V — 50 ns US122 TDTRF Data-out rise time and fall time 3.0-5.5V — 45 ns 1.8-5.5V — 50 ns Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Max. Units Conditions US125 TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (Master and Slave) Data-hold before CK  (DT hold time) 10 — ns US126 TCKL2DTL Data-hold after CK  (DT hold time) 15 — ns Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. US121 US121 US120 US122 CK DT Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. US125 US126 CK DT  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 391 PIC18F/LF1XK50 FIGURE 27-15: SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0, SMP = 0) FIGURE 27-16: SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1, SMP = 1) SS SCK (CKP = 0) SCK (CKP = 1) SDO SDI SP70 SP71 SP72 SP73 SP74 SP75, SP76 SP79 SP78 SP80 SP78 SP79 MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. SS SCK (CKP = 0) SCK (CKP = 1) SDO SDI SP81 SP71 SP72 SP74 SP75, SP76 SP78 SP80 MSb SP79 SP73 MSb In bit 6 - - - - - -1 bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In LSb Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 392 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 27-17: SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) FIGURE 27-18: SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) SS SCK (CKP = 0) SCK (CKP = 1) SDO SDI SP70 SP71 SP72 SP73 SP74 SP75, SP76 SP77 SP79 SP78 SP80 SP78 SP79 MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP83 Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. SS SCK (CKP = 0) SCK (CKP = 1) SDO SDI SP70 SP71 SP72 SP82 SP74 SP75, SP76 MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb SP77 MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP80 SP83 Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions.  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 393 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 27-15: SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS FIGURE 27-19: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions SP70* TSSL2SCH, TSSL2SCL SS to SCK or SCK input TCY — — ns SP71* TSCH SCK input high time (Slave mode) TCY + 20 — — ns SP72* TSCL SCK input low time (Slave mode) TCY + 20 — — ns SP73* TDIV2SCH, TDIV2SCL Setup time of SDI data input to SCK edge 100 — — ns SP74* TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL Hold time of SDI data input to SCK edge 100 — — ns SP75* TDOR SDO data output rise time 3.0-5.5V — 10 25 ns 1.8-5.5V — 25 50 ns SP76* TDOF SDO data output fall time — 10 25 ns SP77* TSSH2DOZ SS to SDO output high-impedance 10 — 50 ns SP78* TSCR SCK output rise time (Master mode) 3.0-5.5V — 10 25 ns 1.8-5.5V — 25 50 ns SP79* TSCF SCK output fall time (Master mode) — 10 25 ns SP80* TSCH2DOV, TSCL2DOV SDO data output valid after SCK edge 3.0-5.5V — — 50 ns 1.8-5.5V — — 145 ns SP81* TDOV2SCH, TDOV2SCL SDO data output setup to SCK edge Tcy — — ns SP82* TSSL2DOV SDO data output valid after SS edge — — 50 ns SP83* TSCH2SSH, TSCL2SSH SS after SCK edge 1.5TCY + 40 — — ns * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. SP91 SP92 SP93 SCL SDA Start Condition Stop Condition SP90 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 394 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 27-16: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS FIGURE 27-20: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions SP90* TSU:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — — ns Only relevant for Repeated Setup time 400 kHz mode 600 — — Start condition SP91* THD:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — — ns After this period, the first Hold time 400 kHz mode 600 — — clock pulse is generated SP92* TSU:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — — ns Setup time 400 kHz mode 600 — — SP93 THD:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — — ns Hold time 400 kHz mode 600 — — * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note: Refer to Figure 27-2 for load conditions. SP90 SP91 SP92 SP100 SP101 SP103 SP106 SP107 SP109 SP109 SP110 SP102 SCL SDA In SDA Out  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 395 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 27-17: I2C™ BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions SP100* THIGH Clock high time 100 kHz mode 4.0 — s Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz SSP Module 1.5TCY — SP101* TLOW Clock low time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz 400 kHz mode 1.3 — s Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz SSP Module 1.5TCY — SP102* TR SDA and SCL rise time 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1CB 300 ns CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF SP103* TF SDA and SCL fall time 100 kHz mode — 250 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1CB 250 ns CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF SP90* TSU:STA Start condition setup time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Only relevant for 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s Repeated Start condition SP91* THD:STA Start condition hold time 100 kHz mode 4.0 — s After this period the first 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s clock pulse is generated SP106* THD:DAT Data input hold time 100 kHz mode 0 — ns 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 s SP107* TSU:DAT Data input setup time 100 kHz mode 250 — ns (Note 2) 400 kHz mode 100 — ns SP92* TSU:STO Stop condition setup time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s SP109* TAA Output valid from clock 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns (Note 1) 400 kHz mode — — ns SP110* TBUF Bus free time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start 400 kHz mode 1.3 — s SP CB Bus capacitive loading — 400 pF * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions. 2: A Fast mode (400 kHz) I2C bus device can be used in a Standard mode (100 kHz) I2C bus system, but the requirement TSU:DAT 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the low period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the low period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL line is released. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 396 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 397 PIC18F/LF1XK50 28.0 DC AND AC CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS AND TABLES Graphs and tables are not available at this time. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 398 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 399 PIC18F/LF1XK50 29.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION 29.1 Package Marking Information Legend: XX...X Customer-specific information Y Year code (last digit of calendar year) YY Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) WW Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) NNN Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) * This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. Note: In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. e3 e3 20-Lead PDIP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Example PICXXFXXXX-I/P 0810017 20-Lead SSOP XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Example PICXXFXXXX -I/SS 0810017 20-Lead SOIC (.300”) XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Example PICXXFXXXX-I /SO 0810017 XXXXXXX 20-Lead QFN XXXXXXX YYWWNNN 18F14K50 Example -I/ML 0810017 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 400 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 29.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages.                    !" #$% &"'  ()"&'"!&) &#*&& &#    + % &,  &!& - '!! #.#&"#'#% ! &"!!#% ! &"!!! &$#/ !#  '!  #&   .0 1,2 1 !'!& $ & "!**&"&& !  3&'!&"& 4 # * !(  !!&  4   % & &# & && 255***' '5 4  6&! 7,8. '!9'&! 7 7: ; 7"')%! 7  & 1,  & &    < <  ## 4 4!!   -  1 !& &     < < "#&"#=#& . - - - ## 4 =#& .   > :  9 &  > - ?  & &   9  -  9 #4!!  >   6 9 #=#& )  ?  9*9 #=#& )  >  :  *  + 1 < < - N NOTE 1 E1 D 1 2 3 A A1 A2 L e b1 b E c eB     * , 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 401 PIC18F/LF1XK50    !"#  $     %&    $      !" #$% &"'  ()"&'"!&) &#*&& &#    '!! #.#&"#'#% ! &"!!#% ! &"!!! &$#'' !# - '!  #&   .0 1,2 1 !'!& $ & "!**&"&& ! .32 %'!("!" *&"&& (%%' & " !!  3&'!&"& 4 # * !(  !!&  4   % & &# & && 255***' '5 4  6&! 99.. '!9'&! 7 7: ; 7"')%! 7  & ?1, :  8 &  < <  ## 4 4!!  ?  > & #%%   < < :  =#& .  > > ## 4 =#& .  - ? :  9 &  ?   3&9 & 9    3& & 9 .3 9 #4!!   <  3&   @ @ >@ 9 #=#& )  < -> φ L1 L A2 c e b A1 A 1 2 NOTE 1 E1 E D N     * , 1 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 402 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.     $   $  '( )&%    $*     !" #$% &"'  ()"&'"!&) &#*&& &#    + % &,  &!& - '!! #.#&"#'#% ! &"!!#% ! &"!!! &$#'' !#  '!  #&   .0 1,2 1 !'!& $ & "!**&"&& ! .32 %'!("!" *&"&& (%%' & " !!  3&'!&"& 4 # * !(  !!&  4   % & &# & && 255***' '5 4  6&! 99.. '!9'&! 7 7: ; 7"')%! 7  & 1, :  8 &  < < ? ## 4 4!!   < < & #%%+   < - :  =#& . -1, ## 4 =#& . 1, :  9 &  >1, , '%A & B   <  3&9 & 9  <  3& & 9 .3 3&   @ < >@ 9 #4!!   < -- 9 #=#& ) - <  # %&   @ < @ # %& 1&&'  @ < @ β D E E1 e b 1 2 3 NOTE 1 A A1 A2 h h c L1 L φ α N     * , 1  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 403 PIC18F/LF1XK50 20-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (MQ) – 5x5x0.9 mm Body [QFN] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging Microchip Technology Drawing C04-120A PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 404 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 405 PIC18F/LF1XK50 APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY Revision A (May 2008) Original data sheet for PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 devices. Revision B (June 2008) Revised 27.4 DC Characteristics table. Revision C (04/2009) Revised data sheet title; Revised Features section; Revised Table 1-2; Revised Table 3-1, Table 3-2; Added Note 3 in Section 9.1; Revised Register 14-1; Revised Example 16-1; Revised Section 18.8.4; Revised Register 18-3; Revised Table 20-2; Revised Sections 22.2.1, 22.2.2, 22.5.1.1, 22.7; Revised Tables 23-4, 27-1, 27-2, 27-3 27-4, 27-8. Revision D (05/2010) Revised the 20-pin PDIP, SSOP, SOIC Diagram; Added the 20-pin QFN Diagram; Revised Table 1, Table 1-1; Revised Figure 2-1; Added Note below Section 2.11.1 (Low Speed Operation); Revised Table 3-1, Table 3-2; Revised Section 4 (Flash Program Memory) and Section 5 (Data EEPROM Memory); Revised Example 5-2, Table 5-1; Deleted Note 1 from Registers 7-4, 7-8; Revised Tables 9-1, 9-3; Revised Sections 14.1 (ECCP Outputs and Configuration), 14.4.4 (Enhanced PWM Auto-Shutdown Mode); Added Note 4 below Register 14-2; Revised Figure 14-10; Revised Equation 17-1; Revised Table 18-3 and Table 20-3; Revised Equation 21-1; Deleted Section 21.1.3 (Output Clamped to VSS); Revised Figure 21-1; Revised Table 21-1, Table 23-4 and Table 24-1; Added Note 2 to Table 24-1; Revised Register 24-6; Deleted Note 1 from Table 24-3; Revised Section 27 (tables); Added 20- Lead QFN Package Marking Information and Package Details; Revised the Product Identification System Section; Other minor corrections. Revision E (10/2010) Updated Section 27.0 Electrical Specifications. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 406 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. APPENDIX B: DEVICE DIFFERENCES The differences between the devices listed in this data sheet are shown in Table B-1. TABLE B-1: DEVICE DIFFERENCES Features PIC18F13K50 PIC18F14K50 PIC18LF13K50 PIC18F26K20 PIC18LF14K50 PIC18F44K20 PIC18F45K20 PIC18F46K20 Program Memory (Bytes) 8192 16384 32768 65536 8192 16384 32768 65536 Program Memory (Instructions) 4096 8192 16384 32768 4096 8192 16384 32768 Interrupt Sources 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C, (E) Ports A, B, C, (E) Ports A, B, C, (E) Ports A, B, C, (E) Ports A, B, C, D, E Ports A, B, C, D, E Ports A, B, C, D, E Ports A, B, C, D, E Capture/Compare/ PWM Modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Enhanced Capture/Compare/ PWM Modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Parallel Communications (PSP) No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 10-bit Analog-to- Digital Module 11 input channels 11 input channels 11 input channels 11 input channels 14 input channels 14 input channels 14 input channels 14 input channels Packages 20-pin PDIP 20-pin SOIC 20-pin SSOP 20-pin QFN 20-pin PDIP 20-pin SOIC 20-pin SSOP 20-pin QFN 20-pin PDIP 20-pin SOIC 20-pin SSOP 20-pin QFN 28-pin PDIP 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SSOP 28-pin QFN 20-pin PDIP 20-pin SOIC 20-pin SSOP 20-pin QFN 40-pin PDIP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin QFN 40-pin PDIP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin QFN 40-pin PDIP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin QFN  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 407 PIC18F/LF1XK50 INDEX A A/D Analog Port Pins, Configuring .................................. 221 Associated Registers ............................................... 221 Conversions ............................................................. 212 Discharge ................................................................. 213 Selecting and Configuring Acquisition Time ............ 210 Specifications ........................................................... 387 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................. 363 AC Characteristics Industrial and Extended ........................................... 379 Load Conditions ....................................................... 378 Access Bank Mapping with Indexed Literal Offset Mode ................. 50 ACKSTAT ........................................................................ 171 ACKSTAT Status Flag ..................................................... 171 ADC ................................................................................. 209 Acquisition Requirements ........................................ 219 Block Diagram .......................................................... 209 Calculating Acquisition Time .................................... 219 Channel Selection .................................................... 210 Configuration ............................................................ 210 Conversion Clock ..................................................... 210 Conversion Procedure ............................................. 214 Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) IMPEDANCE ............. 219 Interrupts .................................................................. 211 Operation ................................................................. 212 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 213 Port Configuration .................................................... 210 Power Management ................................................. 213 Reference Voltage (VREF) ........................................ 210 Result Formatting ..................................................... 211 Source Impedance ................................................... 219 Special Event Trigger ............................................... 213 Starting an A/D Conversion ..................................... 211 ADCON0 Register ............................................................ 215 ADCON1 Register .................................................... 216, 217 ADDFSR .......................................................................... 352 ADDLW ............................................................................ 315 ADDULNK ........................................................................ 352 ADDWF ............................................................................ 315 ADDWFC ......................................................................... 316 ADRESH Register (ADFM = 0) ........................................ 218 ADRESH Register (ADFM = 1) ........................................ 218 ADRESL Register (ADFM = 0) ......................................... 218 ADRESL Register (ADFM = 1) ......................................... 218 Analog Input Connection Considerations ......................... 231 Analog-to-Digital Converter. See ADC ANDLW ............................................................................ 316 ANDWF ............................................................................ 317 ANSEL (PORT Analog Control) ......................................... 98 ANSEL Register ................................................................. 98 ANSELH Register .............................................................. 99 Assembler MPASM Assembler .................................................. 360 B Bank Select Register (BSR) ............................................... 35 Baud Rate Generator ....................................................... 167 BAUDCON Register ......................................................... 192 BC .................................................................................... 317 BCF .................................................................................. 318 BF .................................................................................... 171 BF Status Flag ................................................................. 171 Block Diagrams ADC ......................................................................... 209 ADC Transfer Function ............................................ 220 Analog Input Model .......................................... 220, 231 Baud Rate Generator .............................................. 167 Capture Mode Operation ......................................... 119 Clock Source ............................................................. 16 Comparator 1 ........................................................... 224 Comparator 2 ........................................................... 225 Crystal Operation ....................................................... 17 EUSART Receive .................................................... 182 EUSART Transmit ................................................... 181 External POR Circuit (Slow VDD Power-up) ............ 279 External RC Mode ..................................................... 18 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) ................................ 26 Generic I/O Port ......................................................... 83 Interrupt Logic ............................................................ 69 MSSP (I2C Master Mode) ........................................ 165 MSSP (I2C Mode) .................................................... 148 MSSP (SPI Mode) ................................................... 139 On-Chip Reset Circuit .............................................. 277 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 .................................. 12 PWM (Enhanced) .................................................... 121 Reads from Flash Program Memory ......................... 55 Resonator Operation ................................................. 18 Table Read Operation ............................................... 51 Table Write Operation ............................................... 52 Table Writes to Flash Program Memory .................... 57 Timer0 in 16-Bit Mode ............................................. 103 Timer0 in 8-Bit Mode ............................................... 102 Timer1 ..................................................................... 106 Timer1 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode) ............................ 106 Timer2 ..................................................................... 112 Timer3 ..................................................................... 114 Timer3 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode) ............................ 115 USB Interrupt Logic ................................................. 265 USB Peripheral and Options ................................... 251 Voltage Reference ................................................... 246 Voltage Reference Output Buffer Example ............. 247 Watchdog Timer ...................................................... 302 BN .................................................................................... 318 BNC ................................................................................. 319 BNN ................................................................................. 319 BNOV .............................................................................. 320 BNZ ................................................................................. 320 BOR. See Brown-out Reset. BOV ................................................................................. 323 BRA ................................................................................. 321 Break Character (12-bit) Transmit and Receive .............. 200 BRG. See Baud Rate Generator. Brown-out Reset (BOR) ................................................... 280 Detecting ................................................................. 280 Disabling in Sleep Mode .......................................... 280 Software Enabled .................................................... 280 Specifications .......................................................... 385 Timing and Characteristics ...................................... 384 BSF .................................................................................. 321 BTFSC ............................................................................. 322 BTFSS ............................................................................. 322 BTG ................................................................................. 323 BZ .................................................................................... 324 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 408 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. C C Compilers MPLAB C18 ............................................................. 360 CALL ................................................................................ 324 CALLW ............................................................................. 353 Capture (CCP Module) ..................................................... 119 CCP Pin Configuration ............................................. 119 CCPRxH:CCPRxL Registers ................................... 119 Prescaler .................................................................. 119 Software Interrupt .................................................... 119 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection ................................ 119 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Capture Mode. See Capture. CCP Mode and Timer Resources ............................118 Compare Mode. See Compare. CCP1CON Register ......................................................... 117 Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation ................ 190 Clock Sources Associated registers ...................................................27 External Modes HS ......................................................................17 LP ....................................................................... 17 XT ......................................................................17 CLRF ................................................................................ 325 CLRWDT .......................................................................... 325 CM1CON0 Register ......................................................... 229 CM2CON0 Register ......................................................... 230 CM2CON1 Register ......................................................... 233 Code Examples 16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine ................................66 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine ............................66 8 x 8 Signed Multiply Routine .................................... 65 8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Routine ................................65 A/D Conversion ........................................................ 214 Changing Between Capture Prescalers ................... 119 Clearing RAM Using Indirect Addressing ................... 46 Computed GOTO Using an Offset Value ................... 32 Data EEPROM Read .................................................63 Data EEPROM Refresh Routine ................................64 Data EEPROM Write .................................................63 Erasing a Flash Program Memory Row ..................... 56 Fast Register Stack .................................................... 32 Implementing a Timer1 Real-Time Clock ................. 109 Initializing PORTA ...................................................... 84 Initializing PORTB ...................................................... 89 Initializing PORTC ...................................................... 94 Loading the SSPBUF (SSPSR) Register ................. 142 Reading a Flash Program Memory Word .................. 55 Saving Status, WREG and BSR Registers in RAM ... 80 Writing to Flash Program Memory ....................... 58–59 Code Protection ............................................................... 291 COMF ............................................................................... 326 Comparator Associated Registers ...............................................234 Operation ................................................................. 223 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 228 Response Time ........................................................ 226 Comparator Module ......................................................... 223 C1 Output State Versus Input Conditions ................ 226 Comparator Specifications ...............................................389 Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF) Associated Registers ...............................................249 Effects of a Reset ............................................. 228, 245 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 245 Overview .................................................................. 245 Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF) Response Time ........................................................ 226 Comparators Effects of a Reset .................................................... 228 Compare (CCP Module) .................................................. 120 CCPRx Register ...................................................... 120 Pin Configuration ..................................................... 120 Software Interrupt .................................................... 120 Special Event Trigger ...................................... 116, 120 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection ................................ 120 Computed GOTO ............................................................... 32 CONFIG1H Register ................................................ 293, 294 CONFIG1L Register ........................................................ 293 CONFIG2H Register ........................................................ 296 CONFIG2L Register ........................................................ 295 CONFIG3H Register ........................................................ 297 CONFIG4L Register ........................................................ 297 CONFIG5H Register ........................................................ 298 CONFIG5L Register ........................................................ 298 CONFIG6H Register ........................................................ 299 CONFIG6L Register ........................................................ 299 CONFIG7H Register ........................................................ 300 CONFIG7L Register ........................................................ 300 Configuration Bits ............................................................ 292 Configuration Register Protection .................................... 307 Context Saving During Interrupts ....................................... 80 CPFSEQ .......................................................................... 326 CPFSGT .......................................................................... 327 CPFSLT ........................................................................... 327 Customer Change Notification Service ............................ 417 Customer Notification Service ......................................... 417 Customer Support ............................................................ 417 CVREF Voltage Reference Specifications ........................ 389 D Data Addressing Modes .................................................... 46 Comparing Addressing Modes with the Extended Instruction Set Enabled ........................................ 49 Direct ......................................................................... 46 Indexed Literal Offset ................................................ 48 Instructions Affected .......................................... 48 Indirect ....................................................................... 46 Inherent and Literal .................................................... 46 Data EEPROM Code Protection ....................................................... 307 Data EEPROM Memory ..................................................... 61 Associated Registers ................................................. 64 EEADR Register ........................................................ 61 EECON1 and EECON2 Registers ............................. 61 Operation During Code-Protect ................................. 64 Protection Against Spurious Write ............................. 64 Reading ..................................................................... 63 Using ......................................................................... 64 Write Verify ................................................................ 63 Writing ....................................................................... 63 Data Memory ..................................................................... 35 Access Bank .............................................................. 39 and the Extended Instruction Set .............................. 48 Bank Select Register (BSR) ...................................... 35 General Purpose Registers ....................................... 39 Map for PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50 ..................... 36 Map for PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 ..................... 37 Special Function Registers ........................................ 39 USB RAM .................................................................. 35 DAW ................................................................................ 328 DC and AC Characteristics  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 409 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Graphs and Tables .................................................. 397 DC Characteristics Extended and Industrial ........................................... 374 Industrial and Extended ........................................... 364 DCFSNZ .......................................................................... 329 DECF ............................................................................... 328 DECFSZ ........................................................................... 329 Development Support ...................................................... 359 Device Differences ........................................................... 406 Device Overview .................................................................. 9 Details on Individual Family Members ....................... 10 Features (28-Pin Devices) ......................................... 11 New Core Features ...................................................... 9 Other Special Features .............................................. 10 Device Reset Timers ........................................................ 281 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ............................... 281 PLL Lock Time-out ................................................... 281 Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 281 Time-out Sequence .................................................. 281 DEVID1 Register .............................................................. 301 DEVID2 Register .............................................................. 301 Direct Addressing ............................................................... 47 E ECCPAS Register ............................................................ 129 EECON1 Register ........................................................ 53, 62 Effect on Standard PIC Instructions ................................. 356 Electrical Specifications ................................................... 363 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) .................... 117 Associated Registers ............................................... 138 Enhanced PWM Mode ............................................. 121 Auto-Restart ..................................................... 131 Auto-shutdown ................................................. 129 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Output Mode . 127 Full-Bridge Application ..................................... 125 Full-Bridge Mode ............................................. 125 Half-Bridge Application .................................... 124 Half-Bridge Application Examples ................... 132 Half-Bridge Mode ............................................. 124 Output Relationships (Active-High and Active-Low) .................................................................. 122 Output Relationships Diagram ......................... 123 Programmable Dead Band Delay .................... 132 Shoot-through Current ..................................... 132 Start-up Considerations ................................... 128 Outputs and Configuration ....................................... 118 Specifications ........................................................... 387 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................. 181 Equations Estimating USB Transceiver Current Consumption . 273 Errata ................................................................................... 7 EUSART .......................................................................... 181 Asynchronous Mode ................................................ 183 12-bit Break Transmit and Receive ................. 200 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 189 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 185 Auto-Wake-up on Break .................................. 198 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ........................... 193 Clock Accuracy ................................................ 190 Receiver ........................................................... 186 Setting up 9-bit Mode with Address Detect ...... 188 Transmitter ....................................................... 183 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) Associated Registers ....................................... 193 Auto Baud Rate Detect .................................... 197 Baud Rate Error, Calculating ........................... 193 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes ................. 194 Formulas .......................................................... 193 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) ................. 193 Clock polarity Synchronous Mode .......................................... 201 Data polarity Asynchronous Receive .................................... 186 Asynchronous Transmit ................................... 183 Synchronous Mode .......................................... 201 Interrupts Asynchronous Receive .................................... 187 Asynchronous Transmit ................................... 184 Synchronous Master Mode .............................. 201, 205 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 205 Associated Registers, Transmit ............... 203, 206 Reception ........................................................ 203 Transmission ................................................... 201 Synchronous Slave Mode Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 207 Reception ........................................................ 206 Transmission ................................................... 205 Extended Instruction Set ADDFSR .................................................................. 352 ADDULNK ............................................................... 352 and Using MPLAB Tools ......................................... 358 CALLW .................................................................... 353 Considerations for Use ............................................ 356 MOVSF .................................................................... 353 MOVSS .................................................................... 354 PUSHL ..................................................................... 354 SUBFSR .................................................................. 355 SUBULNK ................................................................ 355 Syntax ...................................................................... 351 F Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................. 26, 291 Fail-Safe Condition Clearing ...................................... 27 Fail-Safe Detection .................................................... 26 Fail-Safe Operation ................................................... 26 Reset or Wake-up from Sleep ................................... 27 Fast Register Stack ........................................................... 32 Firmware Instructions ...................................................... 309 Flash Program Memory ..................................................... 51 Associated Registers ................................................. 59 Control Registers ....................................................... 52 EECON1 and EECON2 ..................................... 52 TABLAT (Table Latch) Register ........................ 54 TBLPTR (Table Pointer) Register ...................... 54 Erase Sequence ........................................................ 56 Erasing ...................................................................... 56 Operation During Code-Protect ................................. 59 Reading ..................................................................... 55 Table Pointer Boundaries Based on Operation ....................... 54 Table Pointer Boundaries .......................................... 54 Table Reads and Table Writes .................................. 51 Write Sequence ......................................................... 57 Writing To .................................................................. 57 Protection Against Spurious Writes ................... 59 Unexpected Termination ................................... 59 Write Verify ........................................................ 59 G General Call Address Support ......................................... 164 GOTO .............................................................................. 330 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 410 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. H Hardware Multiplier ............................................................ 65 Introduction ................................................................ 65 Operation ................................................................... 65 Performance Comparison .......................................... 65 I I/O Ports ............................................................................. 83 I2C Associated Registers ...............................................180 I2C Mode (MSSP) Acknowledge Sequence Timing ............................... 174 Baud Rate Generator ...............................................167 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition .................. 178 During a Stop Condition ................................... 179 Clock Arbitration ....................................................... 168 Clock Stretching ....................................................... 160 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) ............. 160 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode ............................. 160 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) ............... 160 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode ............................... 160 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit (SEN = 1) .. 161 Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 175 General Call Address Support ................................. 164 I2C Clock Rate w/BRG ............................................. 167 Master Mode ............................................................ 165 Operation ......................................................... 166 Reception ......................................................... 171 Repeated Start Condition Timing ..................... 170 Start Condition Timing ..................................... 169 Transmission .................................................... 171 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and Arbitration ................................................................... 175 Multi-Master Mode ...................................................175 Operation ................................................................. 152 Read/Write Bit Information (R/W Bit) ............... 152, 153 Registers .................................................................. 148 Serial Clock (RC3/SCK/SCL) ................................... 153 Slave Mode .............................................................. 152 Addressing ....................................................... 152 Reception ......................................................... 153 Transmission .................................................... 153 Sleep Operation ....................................................... 175 Stop Condition Timing .............................................. 174 ID Locations ............................................................. 291, 307 INCF ................................................................................. 330 INCFSZ ............................................................................ 331 In-Circuit Debugger .......................................................... 307 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ...................... 291, 307 Indexed Literal Offset Addressing and Standard PIC18 Instructions ............................. 356 Indexed Literal Offset Mode ............................................. 356 Indirect Addressing ............................................................ 47 INFSNZ ............................................................................ 331 Initialization Conditions for all Registers .................. 285–289 Instruction Cycle ................................................................. 33 Clocking Scheme ....................................................... 33 Instruction Flow/Pipelining .................................................33 Instruction Set .................................................................. 309 ADDLW ....................................................................315 ADDWF ....................................................................315 ADDWF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .................... 357 ADDWFC ................................................................. 316 ANDLW ....................................................................316 ANDWF .................................................................... 317 BC ............................................................................ 317 BCF ......................................................................... 318 BN ............................................................................ 318 BNC ......................................................................... 319 BNN ......................................................................... 319 BNOV ...................................................................... 320 BNZ ......................................................................... 320 BOV ......................................................................... 323 BRA ......................................................................... 321 BSF .......................................................................... 321 BSF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .......................... 357 BTFSC ..................................................................... 322 BTFSS ..................................................................... 322 BTG ......................................................................... 323 BZ ............................................................................ 324 CALL ........................................................................ 324 CLRF ....................................................................... 325 CLRWDT ................................................................. 325 COMF ...................................................................... 326 CPFSEQ .................................................................. 326 CPFSGT .................................................................. 327 CPFSLT ................................................................... 327 DAW ........................................................................ 328 DCFSNZ .................................................................. 329 DECF ....................................................................... 328 DECFSZ .................................................................. 329 Extended Instruction Set ......................................... 351 General Format ........................................................ 311 GOTO ...................................................................... 330 INCF ........................................................................ 330 INCFSZ .................................................................... 331 INFSNZ .................................................................... 331 IORLW ..................................................................... 332 IORWF ..................................................................... 332 LFSR ....................................................................... 333 MOVF ...................................................................... 333 MOVFF .................................................................... 334 MOVLB .................................................................... 334 MOVLW ................................................................... 335 MOVWF ................................................................... 335 MULLW .................................................................... 336 MULWF .................................................................... 336 NEGF ....................................................................... 337 NOP ......................................................................... 337 Opcode Field Descriptions ....................................... 310 POP ......................................................................... 338 PUSH ....................................................................... 338 RCALL ..................................................................... 339 RESET ..................................................................... 339 RETFIE .................................................................... 340 RETLW .................................................................... 340 RETURN .................................................................. 341 RLCF ....................................................................... 341 RLNCF ..................................................................... 342 RRCF ....................................................................... 342 RRNCF .................................................................... 343 SETF ....................................................................... 343 SETF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ........................ 357 SLEEP ..................................................................... 344 SUBFWB ................................................................. 344 SUBLW .................................................................... 345 SUBWF .................................................................... 345 SUBWFB ................................................................. 346 SWAPF .................................................................... 346  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 411 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TBLRD ..................................................................... 347 TBLWT ..................................................................... 348 TSTFSZ ................................................................... 349 XORLW .................................................................... 349 XORWF .................................................................... 350 INTCON Register ............................................................... 70 INTCON Registers ....................................................... 70–72 INTCON2 Register ............................................................. 71 INTCON3 Register ............................................................. 72 Inter-Integrated Circuit. See I2C. Internal Oscillator Block INTOSC Specifications ........................................... 382, 383 Internal RC Oscillator Use with WDT .......................................................... 302 Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) IMPEDANCE ..................... 219 Internet Address ............................................................... 417 Interrupt Sources ............................................................. 291 ADC ......................................................................... 211 Capture Complete (CCP) ......................................... 119 Compare Complete (CCP) ....................................... 120 Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) .......................... 83, 89 INTn Pin ..................................................................... 80 PORTB, Interrupt-on-Change .................................... 80 TMR0 ......................................................................... 80 TMR0 Overflow ........................................................ 103 TMR1 Overflow ........................................................ 105 TMR3 Overflow ................................................ 113, 115 Interrupts ............................................................................ 67 INTOSC Specifications ............................................ 382, 383 IOCA Register .................................................................... 86 IOCB Register .................................................................... 91 IORLW ............................................................................. 332 IORWF ............................................................................. 332 IPR Registers ..................................................................... 77 IPR1 Register ..................................................................... 77 IPR2 Register ..................................................................... 78 L LATA Register .................................................................... 86 LATB Register .................................................................... 91 LATC Register ................................................................... 95 LFSR ................................................................................ 333 Load Conditions ............................................................... 378 Low-Voltage ICSP Programming. See Single-Supply ICSP Programming M Master Clear (MCLR) ....................................................... 279 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP). See MSSP. Memory Organization ......................................................... 29 Data Memory ............................................................. 35 Program Memory ....................................................... 29 Microchip Internet Web Site ............................................. 417 MOVF ............................................................................... 333 MOVFF ............................................................................ 334 MOVLB ............................................................................ 334 MOVLW ........................................................................... 335 MOVSF ............................................................................ 353 MOVSS ............................................................................ 354 MOVWF ........................................................................... 335 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian .................. 360 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software . 359 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer ................................... 362 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System ................ 361 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ............... 360 MSSP ACK Pulse ....................................................... 152, 153 I2C Mode. See I2C Mode. Module Overview ..................................................... 139 SPI Mode. See SPI Mode. SSPBUF Register .................................................... 144 SSPSR Register ...................................................... 144 MULLW ............................................................................ 336 MULWF ............................................................................ 336 N NEGF ............................................................................... 337 NOP ................................................................................. 337 O OSCCON Register ....................................................... 20, 21 Oscillator Module ............................................................... 15 Oscillator Parameters ...................................................... 382 Oscillator Selection .......................................................... 291 Oscillator Specifications ................................................... 381 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ....................................... 281 Specifications .......................................................... 385 Oscillator Switching Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................. 26 Oscillator, Timer1 ..................................................... 105, 115 Oscillator, Timer3 ............................................................. 113 OSCTUNE Register ........................................................... 22 P P1A/P1B/P1C/P1D.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) .................................................................... 121 Packaging Information ..................................................... 399 Marking .................................................................... 399 PIE Registers ..................................................................... 75 PIE1 Register .................................................................... 75 PIE2 Register .................................................................... 76 Pinout Descriptions PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 .................................. 13 PIR Registers ..................................................................... 73 PIR1 Register .................................................................... 73 PIR2 Register .................................................................... 74 POP ................................................................................. 338 POR. See Power-on Reset. PORTA Associated Registers ................................................. 88 LATA Register ........................................................... 83 PORTA Register ........................................................ 83 Specifications .......................................................... 383 TRISA Register .......................................................... 83 PORTA Register ................................................................ 85 PORTB Associated Registers ................................................. 93 LATB Register ........................................................... 89 PORTB Register ........................................................ 89 TRISB Register .......................................................... 89 PORTB Register .......................................................... 90, 94 PORTC Associated Registers ................................................. 97 LATC Register ........................................................... 94 PORTC Register ........................................................ 94 RC3/SCK/SCL Pin ................................................... 153 Specifications .......................................................... 383 TRISC Register ......................................................... 94 Power Managed Modes ................................................... 235 and A/D Operation ................................................... 213 and PWM Operation ................................................ 137 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 412 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. and SPI Operation ...................................................147 Entering ....................................................................235 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes .................................. 239 by Interrupt ....................................................... 239 by Reset ........................................................... 240 by WDT Time-out ............................................. 239 Without a Start-up Delay .................................. 240 Idle Modes ............................................................... 237 PRI_IDLE ......................................................... 238 RC_IDLE .......................................................... 239 SEC_IDLE ........................................................ 238 Multiple Sleep Functions .......................................... 236 Run Modes ............................................................... 236 PRI_RUN ......................................................... 236 RC_RUN .......................................................... 236 SEC_RUN ........................................................ 236 Selecting .................................................................. 235 Sleep Mode .............................................................. 237 Summary (table) ...................................................... 235 Power-on Reset (POR) .................................................... 279 Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 281 Time-out Sequence .................................................. 281 Power-up Timer (PWRT) Specifications ........................................................... 385 Precision Internal Oscillator Parameters ..........................383 Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................. 103 PRI_IDLE Mode ............................................................... 238 PRI_RUN Mode ............................................................... 236 Program Counter ................................................................ 30 PCL, PCH and PCU Registers ................................... 30 PCLATH and PCLATU Registers ..............................30 Program Memory and Extended Instruction Set ..................................... 50 Code Protection ....................................................... 305 Instructions ................................................................. 34 Two-Word .......................................................... 34 Interrupt Vector .......................................................... 29 Look-up Tables .......................................................... 32 Map and Stack (diagram) ........................................... 29 Reset Vector .............................................................. 29 Program Verification and Code Protection ....................... 303 Associated Registers ...............................................305 Programming, Device Instructions ................................... 309 PSTRCON Register ......................................................... 134 Pulse Steering .................................................................. 134 PUSH ............................................................................... 338 PUSH and POP Instructions .............................................. 31 PUSHL ............................................................................. 354 PWM (ECCP Module) Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 137 Operation in Power Managed Modes ...................... 137 Operation with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ................... 137 Pulse Steering .......................................................... 134 Steering Synchronization ......................................... 136 PWM Mode. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM .....121 PWM1CON Register ........................................................ 133 R RAM. See Data Memory. RC_IDLE Mode ................................................................ 239 RC_RUN Mode ................................................................ 236 RCALL .............................................................................. 339 RCON Register .......................................................... 79, 278 Bit Status During Initialization .................................. 284 RCREG ............................................................................ 188 RCSTA Register ............................................................... 191 Reader Response ............................................................ 418 RECON0 (Reference Control 0) Register ........................ 247 RECON1 (Reference Control 1) Register ........................ 248 RECON2 (Reference Control 2) Register ........................ 248 Register RCREG Register ..................................................... 197 Register File ....................................................................... 39 Register File Summary ...................................................... 41 Registers ADCON0 (ADC Control 0) ....................................... 215 ADCON1 (ADC Control 1) ............................... 216, 217 ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 0) ......... 218 ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 1) ......... 218 ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 0) ........... 218 ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 1) ........... 218 ANSEL (Analog Select 1) .......................................... 98 ANSEL (PORT Analog Control) ................................. 98 ANSELH (Analog Select 2) ........................................ 99 ANSELH (PORT Analog Control) .............................. 99 BAUDCON (EUSART Baud Rate Control) .............. 192 BDnSTAT (Buffer Descriptor n Status, CPU Mode) 261 BDnSTAT (Buffer Descriptor n Status, SIE Mode) .. 262 CCP1CON (Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM Control) .......................................................................... 117 CM1CON0 (C1 Control) ........................................... 229 CM2CON0 (C2 Control) ........................................... 230 CM2CON1 (C2 Control) ........................................... 233 CONFIG1H (Configuration 1 High) .................. 293, 294 CONFIG1L (Configuration 1 Low) ........................... 293 CONFIG2H (Configuration 2 High) .......................... 296 CONFIG2L (Configuration 2 Low) ........................... 295 CONFIG3H (Configuration 3 High) .......................... 297 CONFIG4L (Configuration 4 Low) ........................... 297 CONFIG5H (Configuration 5 High) .......................... 298 CONFIG5L (Configuration 5 Low) ........................... 298 CONFIG6H (Configuration 6 High) .......................... 299 CONFIG6L (Configuration 6 Low) ........................... 299 CONFIG7H (Configuration 7 High) .......................... 300 CONFIG7L (Configuration 7 Low) ........................... 300 DEVID1 (Device ID 1) .............................................. 301 DEVID2 (Device ID 2) .............................................. 301 ECCPAS (Enhanced CCP Auto-shutdown Control) 129 EECON1 (Data EEPROM Control 1) ................... 53, 62 INTCON (Interrupt Control) ........................................ 70 INTCON2 (Interrupt Control 2) ................................... 71 INTCON3 (Interrupt Control 3) ................................... 72 IOCA (Interrupt-on-Change PORTA) ......................... 86 IOCB (Interrupt-on-Change PORTB) ......................... 91 IPR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 1) ......................... 77 IPR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 2) ......................... 78 LATA (PORTA Data Latch) ........................................ 86 LATB (PORTB Data Latch) ........................................ 91 LATC (PORTC Data Latch) ....................................... 95 OSCCON (Oscillator Control) .............................. 20, 21 OSCTUNE (Oscillator Tuning) ................................... 22 PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1) .......................... 75 PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2) .......................... 76 PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 1) ....................... 73 PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 2) ....................... 74 PORTA ...................................................................... 85 PORTB ................................................................ 90, 94 PSTRCON (Pulse Steering Control) ........................ 134 PWM1CON (Enhanced PWM Control) .................... 133 RCON (Reset Control) ....................................... 79, 278 RCSTA (Receive Status and Control) ..................... 191  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 413 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REFCON0 ................................................................ 247 REFCON1 ................................................................ 248 REFCON2 ................................................................ 248 SLRCON (PORT Slew Rate Control) ....................... 100 SRCON0 (SR Latch Control 0) ................................ 242 SRCON1 (SR Latch Control 1) ................................ 243 SSPADD (MSSP Address and Baud Rate, SPI Mode) .. 159 SSPCON1 (MSSP Control 1, I2C Mode) ................. 150 SSPCON1 (MSSP Control 1, SPI Mode) ................. 141 SSPCON2 (MSSP Control 2, I2C Mode) ................. 151 SSPMSK (SSP Mask) .............................................. 158 SSPSTAT (MSSP Status, SPI Mode) .............. 140, 149 STATUS ..................................................................... 45 STKPTR (Stack Pointer) ............................................ 31 T0CON (Timer0 Control) .......................................... 101 T1CON (Timer1 Control) .......................................... 105 T2CON (Timer2 Control) .......................................... 111 T3CON (Timer3 Control) .......................................... 113 TRISA (Tri-State PORTA) .......................................... 85 TRISB (Tri-State PORTB) .................................... 90, 94 TXSTA (Transmit Status and Control) ..................... 190 UCFG (USB Configuration) ...................................... 254 UCON (USB Control) ............................................... 252 UEIE (USB Error Interrupt Enable) .......................... 270 UEIR (USB Error Interrupt Status) ........................... 269 UEPn (USB Endpoint n Control) .............................. 257 UIE (USB Interrupt Enable) ...................................... 268 UIR (USB Interrupt Status) ...................................... 266 USTAT (USB Status) ............................................... 256 WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control) ...................... 303 WPUA (Weak Pull-up PORTA) .................................. 86 WPUB (Weak Pull-up PORTB) .................................. 91 RESET ............................................................................. 339 Reset State of Registers .................................................. 284 Resets ...................................................................... 277, 291 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 291 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ............................... 291 Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................ 291 Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 291 RETFIE ............................................................................ 340 RETLW ............................................................................ 340 RETURN .......................................................................... 341 Return Address Stack ........................................................ 30 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) ........................................ 31 Revision History ............................................................... 405 RLCF ................................................................................ 341 RLNCF ............................................................................. 342 RRCF ............................................................................... 342 RRNCF ............................................................................ 343 S SCK .................................................................................. 139 SDI ................................................................................... 139 SDO ................................................................................. 139 SEC_IDLE Mode .............................................................. 238 SEC_RUN Mode .............................................................. 236 Serial Clock, SCK ............................................................ 139 Serial Data In (SDI) .......................................................... 139 Serial Data Out (SDO) ..................................................... 139 Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI Mode. SETF ................................................................................ 343 Shoot-through Current ..................................................... 132 Single-Supply ICSP Programming. Slave Select (SS) ............................................................. 139 Slave Select Synchronization .......................................... 145 SLEEP ............................................................................. 344 Sleep Mode ..................................................................... 237 SLRCON Register ........................................................... 100 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) ................................... 361 SPBRG ............................................................................ 193 SPBRGH ......................................................................... 193 Special Event Trigger ...................................................... 213 Special Event Trigger. See Compare (ECCP Mode). Special Features of the CPU ........................................... 291 Special Function Registers ................................................ 39 Map ............................................................................ 40 SPI Mode Typical Master/Slave Connection ............................ 143 SPI Mode (MSSP) Associated Registers ............................................... 147 Bus Mode Compatibility ........................................... 147 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 147 Enabling SPI I/O ...................................................... 143 Master Mode ............................................................ 144 Operation ................................................................. 142 Operation in Power Managed Modes ...................... 147 Serial Clock ............................................................. 139 Serial Data In ........................................................... 139 Serial Data Out ........................................................ 139 Slave Mode .............................................................. 145 Slave Select ............................................................. 139 Slave Select Synchronization .................................. 145 SPI Clock ................................................................. 144 Typical Connection .................................................. 143 SR Latch .......................................................................... 241 Associated Registers ............................................... 243 SRCON0 Register ........................................................... 242 SRCON1 Register ........................................................... 243 SS .................................................................................... 139 SSP Typical SPI Master/Slave Connection ..................... 143 SSPADD Register ............................................................ 159 SSPCON1 Register ................................................. 141, 150 SSPCON2 Register ......................................................... 151 SSPMSK Register ........................................................... 158 SSPOV ............................................................................ 171 SSPOV Status Flag ......................................................... 171 SSPSTAT Register .................................................. 140, 149 R/W Bit ............................................................ 152, 153 Stack Full/Underflow Resets .............................................. 32 Standard Instructions ....................................................... 309 STATUS Register .............................................................. 45 STKPTR Register .............................................................. 31 SUBFSR .......................................................................... 355 SUBFWB ......................................................................... 344 SUBLW ............................................................................ 345 SUBULNK ........................................................................ 355 SUBWF ............................................................................ 345 SUBWFB ......................................................................... 346 SWAPF ............................................................................ 346 T T0CON Register .............................................................. 101 T1CON Register .............................................................. 105 T2CON Register .............................................................. 111 T3CON Register .............................................................. 113 Table Pointer Operations (table) ........................................ 54 Table Reads/Table Writes ................................................. 32 TBLRD ............................................................................. 347 TBLWT ............................................................................ 348 Thermal Considerations ................................................... 377 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 414 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Time-out in Various Situations (table) ..............................281 Timer0 .............................................................................. 101 Associated Registers ...............................................103 Operation ................................................................. 102 Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 103 Prescaler .................................................................. 103 Prescaler Assignment (PSA Bit) ..............................103 Prescaler Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ..................... 103 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0. Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode ............................102 Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit) ................................ 102 Source Select (T0CS Bit) ......................................... 102 Specifications ........................................................... 386 Switching Prescaler Assignment ..............................103 Timer1 .............................................................................. 105 16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 107 Associated Registers ...............................................110 Interrupt ....................................................................108 Operation ................................................................. 106 Oscillator .......................................................... 105, 107 Oscillator Layout Considerations ............................. 108 Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 105 Resetting, Using the CCP Special Event Trigger .....108 Specifications ........................................................... 386 TMR1H Register ...................................................... 105 TMR1L Register ....................................................... 105 Use as a Real-Time Clock ....................................... 109 Timer2 .............................................................................. 111 Associated Registers ...............................................112 Interrupt ....................................................................112 Operation ................................................................. 111 Output ......................................................................112 Timer3 .............................................................................. 113 16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 115 Associated Registers ...............................................116 Operation ................................................................. 114 Oscillator .......................................................... 113, 115 Overflow Interrupt ............................................ 113, 115 Special Event Trigger (CCP) .................................... 116 TMR3H Register ...................................................... 113 TMR3L Register ....................................................... 113 Timing Diagrams A/D Conversion ........................................................ 388 Acknowledge Sequence .......................................... 174 Asynchronous Reception ......................................... 188 Asynchronous Transmission .................................... 185 Asynchronous Transmission (Back to Back) ........... 185 Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Normal Operation 199 Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep ................... 199 Automatic Baud Rate Calculator ..............................197 Baud Rate Generator with Clock Arbitration ............ 168 BRG Reset Due to SDA Arbitration During Start Condition ................................................................... 177 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 384 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 1) ......................................................................178 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 2) ......................................................................178 Bus Collision During a Start Condition (SCL = 0) .... 177 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) ...... 179 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) ...... 179 Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDA only) .....176 Bus Collision for Transmit and Acknowledge ........... 175 CLKOUT and I/O ...................................................... 383 Clock Synchronization ............................................. 161 Clock Timing ............................................................ 379 Clock/Instruction Cycle .............................................. 33 Comparator Output .................................................. 223 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) ............ 387 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) ................................ 27 First Start Bit Timing ................................................ 169 Full-Bridge PWM Output .......................................... 126 Half-Bridge PWM Output ................................. 124, 132 I2C Bus Data ............................................................ 394 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ............................................ 393 I2C Master Mode (7 or 10-Bit Transmission) ........... 172 I2C Master Mode (7-Bit Reception) .......................... 173 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 0) .......... 156 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) .......... 163 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Transmission) .................... 157 I2C Slave Mode (7-bit Reception, SEN = 0) ............ 154 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) ............ 162 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Transmission) ...................... 155 I2C Slave Mode General Call Address Sequence (7 or 10-Bit Address Mode) ...................................... 164 I2C Stop Condition Receive or Transmit Mode ........ 174 Internal Oscillator Switch Timing ............................... 23 PWM Auto-shutdown Auto-restart Enabled ........................................ 131 Firmware Restart ............................................. 130 PWM Direction Change ........................................... 127 PWM Direction Change at Near 100% Duty Cycle .. 128 PWM Output (Active-High) ...................................... 122 PWM Output (Active-Low) ....................................... 123 Repeat Start Condition ............................................ 170 Reset, WDT, OST and Power-up Timer .................. 384 Send Break Character Sequence ............................ 200 Slave Synchronization ............................................. 145 Slow Rise Time (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise > TPWRT) .......................................................................... 283 SPI Master Mode (CKE = 1, SMP = 1) .................... 391 SPI Mode (Master Mode) ......................................... 144 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) ........................... 146 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 1) ........................... 146 SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 392 SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 392 Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) ...... 204 Synchronous Transmission ..................................... 202 Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) .......... 202 Time-out Sequence on POR w/PLL Enabled (MCLR Tied to VDD) ............................................................. 283 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD, Case 1) ................................................... 282 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD, Case 2) ................................................... 282 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise < TPWRT) .......................................... 282 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock .......................... 386 Transition for Entry to Sleep Mode .......................... 237 Transition for Wake from Sleep (HSPLL) ................ 237 Transition Timing for Entry to Idle Mode .................. 238 Transition Timing for Wake from Idle to Run Mode . 238 USART Synchronous Receive (Master/Slave) ........ 390 USART Synchronous Transmission (Master/Slave) 390 Timing Diagrams and Specifications A/D Conversion Requirements ................................ 388 PLL Clock ................................................................ 382 Timing Parameter Symbology ......................................... 378 Timing Requirements I2C Bus Data ............................................................ 395  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 415 PIC18F/LF1XK50 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ............................................ 394 SPI Mode ................................................................. 393 Top-of-Stack Access .......................................................... 30 TRISA Register .................................................................. 85 TRISB Register ............................................................ 90, 94 TSTFSZ ........................................................................... 349 Two-Speed Start-up ......................................................... 291 Two-Word Instructions Example Cases .......................................................... 34 TXREG ............................................................................. 183 TXSTA Register ............................................................... 190 BRGH Bit ................................................................. 193 U Universal Serial Bus Address Register (UADDR) ..................................... 258 Associated Registers ............................................... 274 Buffer Descriptor Table ............................................ 259 Buffer Descriptors .................................................... 259 Address Validation ........................................... 262 Assignment in Different Buffering Modes ........ 264 BDnSTAT Register (CPU Mode) ..................... 260 BDnSTAT Register (SIE Mode) ....................... 262 Byte Count ....................................................... 262 Example ........................................................... 259 Memory Map .................................................... 263 Ownership ........................................................ 259 Ping-Pong Buffering ......................................... 263 Register Summary ........................................... 264 Status and Configuration ................................. 259 Class Specifications and Drivers ............................. 276 Descriptors ............................................................... 276 Endpoint Control ...................................................... 257 Enumeration ............................................................. 276 External Pull-up Resistors ........................................ 255 Eye Pattern Test Enable .......................................... 255 Firmware and Drivers ............................................... 274 Frame Number Registers ......................................... 258 Frames ..................................................................... 275 Internal Pull-up Resistors ......................................... 255 Internal Transceiver ................................................. 253 Interrupts .................................................................. 265 and USB Transactions ..................................... 265 Layered Framework ................................................. 275 Oscillator Requirements ........................................... 274 Overview .......................................................... 251, 275 Ping-Pong Buffer Configuration ............................... 255 Power ....................................................................... 275 Power Modes ........................................................... 271 Bus Power Only ............................................... 271 Dual Power with Self-Power Dominance ......... 272 Self-Power Only ............................................... 271 RAM ......................................................................... 258 Memory Map .................................................... 258 Speed ....................................................................... 276 Status and Control ................................................... 252 Transfer Types ......................................................... 275 UFRMH:UFRML Registers ...................................... 258 USART Synchronous Master Mode Requirements, Synchronous Receive ............. 390 Requirements, Synchronous Transmission ..... 390 Timing Diagram, Synchronous Receive .......... 390 Timing Diagram, Synchronous Transmission .. 390 USB Module Electrical Specifications .............................. 376 USB RAM Serial Interface Engine (SIE) ..................................... 35 USB. See Universal Serial Bus. V Voltage Reference (VR) Specifications .......................................................... 389 Voltage Reference. See Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF) Voltage References Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) .............................. 246 VR Stabilization ....................................................... 246 VREF. SEE ADC Reference Voltage W Wake-up on Break ........................................................... 198 Watchdog Timer (WDT) ........................................... 291, 302 Associated Registers ............................................... 303 Control Register ....................................................... 303 Programming Considerations .................................. 302 Specifications .......................................................... 385 WCOL ...................................................... 169, 170, 171, 174 WCOL Status Flag ................................... 169, 170, 171, 174 WDTCON Register .......................................................... 303 WPUA Register .................................................................. 86 WPUB Register .................................................................. 91 WWW Address ................................................................ 417 WWW, On-Line Support ...................................................... 7 X XORLW ........................................................................... 349 XORWF ........................................................................... 350 PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 416 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES:  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 417 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com. Under “Support”, click on “Customer Change Notification” and follow the registration instructions. CUSTOMER SUPPORT Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Distributor or Representative • Local Sales Office • Field Application Engineer (FAE) • Technical Support • Development Systems Information Line Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 418 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. TO: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y N Device: Literature Number: Questions: FAX: (______) _________ - _________ PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document?  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 419 PIC18F/LF1XK50 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. X /XX XXX Temperature Package Pattern Range Device Device: PIC18F13K50(1), PIC18F14K50(1), PIC18LF13K50(1), PIC18LF14K50 Packaging Option: Blank = Standard packaging (tube or tray) T = Tape and Reel(1) Temperature Range: E = -40C to +125C (Extended) I = -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) Package: P = PDIP SO = SOIC SS = SSOP MQ = QFN Pattern: QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements (blank otherwise) Examples: a) PIC18F14K50-E/P 301 = Extended temp., PDIP package, Extended VDD limits, QTP pattern #301. b) PIC18LF14K50-E/SO = Extended temp., SOIC package. c) PIC18LF14K50-E/P = Extended temp., PDIP package. d) PIC18LF14K50-E/MQ = Extended temp., QFN package. e) PIC18F14K50-I/P = Industrial temp., PDIP package. Note 1: Tape and Reel option is available for ML, MV, PT, SO and SS packages with industrial Temperature Range only. X Packaging Option DS41350E-page 420 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc. AMERICAS Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Cleveland Independence, OH Tel: 216-447-0464 Fax: 216-447-0643 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 ASIA/PACIFIC Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Harbour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Chongqing Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Fax: 86-23-8980-9500 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 Fax: 86-592-2388130 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 Fax: 86-756-3210049 ASIA/PACIFIC India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Fax: 91-80-3090-4123 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Fax: 82-53-744-4302 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Fax: 60-4-227-4068 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-6578-300 Fax: 886-3-6578-370 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-213-7830 Fax: 886-7-330-9305 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 EUROPE Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 Worldwide Sales and Service 08/04/10 ULINKpro Debug and Trace Unit The Keil ULINKpro Debug and Trace Unit connects your PC's USB port to your target system (via a JTAG, Cortex Debug, or Cortex Debug+ETM connector). It allows you to program, debug, and analyze your applications using its unique streaming trace technology. ULINKpro, together with MDK-ARM, provides extended on-the-fly debug capabilities for Cortex-M devices. You are able to control the processor, set breakpoints, and read/write memory contents, all while the processor is running at full speed. High-Speed data and instruction trace are streamed directly to your PC enabling you to analyze detailed program behaviour. Features  Supports ARM7, ARM9, Cortex-M0, Cortex-M1, Cortex-M3, and Cortex-M4 devices  JTAG support for ARM7, ARM9, and Cortex-M  Serial Wire Debug (SWD) support for Cortex-M  Serial Wire Viewer (SWV) Data and Event Trace for Cortex-M up to 100Mbit/s (Manchester mode)  Instruction Trace (ETM) for Cortex-M3 and Cortex-M4 up to 800Mbit/s  Unique Streaming Trace direct to your PC, provides unlimited trace buffer  JTAG Clock Speed up to 50MHz  Supports Cortex-M devices running at up to 200MHz  High-Speed Memory Read/Write up to 1MBytes/sec  Seamless integration with the Keil μVision IDE & Debugger  Wide target voltage range: 1.2V - 3.3V, 5V tolerant  Support for 5V only devices using optional 5V Adapter  Optional Isolation Adapter provides electrical isolation from the target system  USB 2.0 High-Speed connection  USB powered (no power supply required)  Target Connectors  10-pin (0.05") - Cortex Debug Connector  20-pin (0.10") - ARM Standard JTAG Connector  20-pin (0.05") - Cortex Debug+ETM Connector The unique streaming trace capabilities of ULINKpro delivers sophisticated analysis features such as:  Complete Code Coverage information about your program's execution ensures thorough application testing and verification  Performance Analysis using the Execution Profiler and Performance Analyzer enable you to identify program bottlenecks, optimize your application, and to isolate problems  Streaming instruction trace requires the target device to have ETM (Embedded Trace Macrocell) www.element14.com www.farnell.com www.newark.com Page <1> V1.0 30/07/13 Raspberry PI Heat Sink Kit The Farnell Raspberry PI heat sink kit will ensure your Raspberry PI remains cool with no need for Fans. They will also help extend the life of your Raspberry PI and thereby reduce hardware failures. The heat sink kit comprises of 3 high quality Pressfin heat sinks which are designed to fit the 3 main heat sources on the Raspberry PI. Included in the kit is a 30mm × 30mm piece of thermal adhesive tape to securely fix the heat sinks in place and to ensure a good thermal transfer bond. Dimensions : Millimetres Important Notice : This data sheet and its contents (the “Information”) belong to the members of the Premier Farnell group of companies (the “Group”) or are licensed to it. No licence is granted for the use of it other than for information purposes in connection with the products to which it relates. No licence of any intellectual property rights is granted. The Information is subject to change without notice and replaces all data sheets previously supplied. The Information supplied is believed to be accurate but the Group assumes no responsibility for its accuracy or completeness, any error in or omission from it or for any use made of it. Users of this data sheet should check for themselves the Information and the suitability of the products for their purpose and not make any assumptions based on information included or omitted. Liability for loss or damage resulting from any reliance on the Information or use of it (including liability resulting from negligence or where the Group was aware of the possibility of such loss or damage arising) is excluded. This will not operate to limit or restrict the Group’s liability for death or personal injury resulting from its negligence. Multicomp is the registered trademark of the Group. © Premier Farnell plc 2012. Part Number Table Description Part Number Raspberry PI Heat Sink Kit 2319947 Raspberry Pi Power Supply UK version Features: Built specifically for use with Raspberry Pi Class II design 5vdc 1A output via Micro USB Energy efficienct to ErP stage 2 ĞƐĐƌŝƉƟŽŶ͗ This 5vdc 1A UK Micro USB power supply is manufactured specifically for use with the Raspberry Pi device. It offers a highly efficient output ŵĞĞƟŶŐ ůĂƚĞƐƚ ƌW ƐƚĂŐĞ Ϯ ƌĞƋƵŝƌĞŵĞŶƚƐ ĂŶĚ ŝƐ ƐĂĨĞƚLJ ĂƉƉƌŽǀ ĞĚ͘ dŚŝƐ unit has a fixed UK pin and a 1.8 metre output cable and features ƐŚŽƌƚ ĐŝƌĐƵŝƚ ĂŶĚ Žǀ Ğƌ ĐƵƌƌĞŶƚ ƉƌŽƚĞĐƟŽŶ ĂƐ ƐƚĂŶĚĂƌĚ͘ dŚŝƐ ZĂƐƉďĞƌƌLJ Pi power supply has M.T.B.F of 50K hours at 25 degrees C. Part Number PW03060 Output 5vdc 1A maximum Current Min. 0.01A WŽǁ Ğƌ ;ǁ ĂƩ ƐͿ 5W Line Reg +/-5% at rated load dŽƚĂů K ƵƚƉƵƚ ZĞŐƵůĂƟŽŶ +/-5 % at 0—100% load Ripple & Noise (mV p-p) 200mV P-P WƌŽƚĞĐƟŽŶƐ Over Current and Short Circuit Case Size 54 x 50 x 42mm Weight (approx.) 70g DC Cord 1.8 Metres DC Plug Micro USB Rated Input Voltage 100-240Vac Full Input Voltage Range 90-264Vac Rated Frequency 50-60Hz Full Frequency Range 47-63Hz Efficiency 68.17% Leakage Current shall not exceed 0.25mA Input Power 7.72W max Input Current (RMS Max.) 0.18A max Hi-Pot Spec 3000Vac 10mA 1 min. (I.P. to O.P.) E Ž ůŽĂĚ ƉŽǁ Ğƌ ĐŽŶƐƵŵƉƟŽŶ 0.3W max K ƉĞƌĂƟŶŐ dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ 0 to 40 degrees C Storage Temperature -20 to 80 degrees C K ƉĞƌĂƟŶŐ , ƵŵŝĚŝƚLJ 10% to 90% Safety Approvals BS EN60950-1 / CE marked EMC Standards EN55022:2006+A1:2007 / EN6100-3-2 / EN6100-3-3 Pb-free Yes RoHS Compliant MTBF 50K Hours at 25 degrees C See mechanical drawing and DC cable drawing on page 2. Full spec sheet on this PSU is available on request. Premier Farnell Ltd accepts ŶŽ ƌĞƐƉŽŶƐŝďŝůŝƚLJ ĨŽƌ ƚLJƉŽŐƌĂƉŚŝĐĂů ĞƌƌŽƌƐ ŝŶ ƚŚĞ ƉƌŽĚƵĐƟŽŶ ŽĨ ƚŚŝƐ ůĞĂŇĞƚ͘ WƌŽĚƵĐƚ ƐƉĞĐŝĮ ĐĂƟŽŶƐ ĂƌĞ ƐƵďũĞĐƚ ƚŽ ĐŚĂŶŐĞ ǁ ŝƚŚŽƵƚ ŶŽƟĐĞ Raspberry Pi Power Supply UK version Mechanical drawing: Output connector Keyboard, Mouse and Cable Bundles for the Raspberry Pi Kit Contents: HDMI Bundle DVI Bundle RPI-CABLE+ACC/HDMI RPI-CABLE+ACC/DVI Mini QWERTY Keyboard Optical USB Mouse 3.5mm Stereo Jack Plug Cable – 2m Stereo Phono (RCA) to 3.5mm Stereo Jack Plug Cable – 1.8m Cat5e Patch Cable, RJ45 Plug to RJ45 Plug – 3m High Speed HDMI Cable – 2m HDMI to DVI Cable – 2m LM3S6952 Microcontroller DATA SHEET DS-LM3S6952-1972 Copyright © 2007 Luminary Micro, Inc. PRELIMINARY Legal Disclaimers and Trademark Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH LUMINARY MICRO PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN LUMINARY MICRO'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, LUMINARY MICRO ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND LUMINARY MICRO DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF LUMINARY MICRO'S PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. LUMINARY MICRO'S PRODUCTS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING, OR LIFE-SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS. Luminary Micro may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Contact your local Luminary Micro sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications before placing your product order. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Luminary Micro reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. Copyright © 2007 Luminary Micro, Inc. All rights reserved. Stellaris, Luminary Micro, and the Luminary Micro logo are registered trademarks of Luminary Micro, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ARM and Thumb are registered trademarks and Cortex is a trademark of ARM Limited. Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Luminary Micro, Inc. 108 Wild Basin, Suite 350 Austin, TX 78746 Main: +1-512-279-8800 Fax: +1-512-279-8879 http://www.luminarymicro.com 2 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents About This Document .................................................................................................................... 20 Audience .............................................................................................................................................. 20 About This Manual ................................................................................................................................ 20 Related Documents ............................................................................................................................... 20 Documentation Conventions .................................................................................................................. 20 1 Architectural Overview ...................................................................................................... 22 1.1 Product Features ...................................................................................................................... 22 1.2 Target Applications .................................................................................................................... 28 1.3 High-Level Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 29 1.4 Functional Overview .................................................................................................................. 29 1.4.1 ARM Cortex™-M3 ..................................................................................................................... 30 1.4.2 Motor Control Peripherals .......................................................................................................... 30 1.4.3 Analog Peripherals .................................................................................................................... 31 1.4.4 Serial Communications Peripherals ............................................................................................ 32 1.4.5 System Peripherals ................................................................................................................... 33 1.4.6 Memory Peripherals .................................................................................................................. 34 1.4.7 Additional Features ................................................................................................................... 35 1.4.8 Hardware Details ...................................................................................................................... 35 2 ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core ...................................................................................... 37 2.1 Block Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 38 2.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 38 2.2.1 Serial Wire and JTAG Debug ..................................................................................................... 38 2.2.2 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) ............................................................................................. 39 2.2.3 Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) ................................................................................................. 39 2.2.4 ROM Table ............................................................................................................................... 39 2.2.5 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) ................................................................................................... 39 2.2.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) ................................................................................ 39 3 Memory Map ....................................................................................................................... 43 4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 45 5 JTAG Interface .................................................................................................................... 48 5.1 Block Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 49 5.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 49 5.2.1 JTAG Interface Pins .................................................................................................................. 50 5.2.2 JTAG TAP Controller ................................................................................................................. 51 5.2.3 Shift Registers .......................................................................................................................... 52 5.2.4 Operational Considerations ........................................................................................................ 52 5.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................... 55 5.4 Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 55 5.4.1 Instruction Register (IR) ............................................................................................................. 55 5.4.2 Data Registers .......................................................................................................................... 57 6 System Control ................................................................................................................... 59 6.1 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 59 6.1.1 Device Identification .................................................................................................................. 59 6.1.2 Reset Control ............................................................................................................................ 59 November 30, 2007 3 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 6.1.3 Power Control ........................................................................................................................... 62 6.1.4 Clock Control ............................................................................................................................ 62 6.1.5 System Control ......................................................................................................................... 64 6.2 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................... 65 6.3 Register Map ............................................................................................................................ 65 6.4 Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 66 7 Hibernation Module .......................................................................................................... 120 7.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 121 7.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 121 7.2.1 Register Access Timing ........................................................................................................... 121 7.2.2 Clock Source .......................................................................................................................... 122 7.2.3 Battery Management ............................................................................................................... 122 7.2.4 Real-Time Clock ...................................................................................................................... 122 7.2.5 Non-Volatile Memory ............................................................................................................... 123 7.2.6 Power Control ......................................................................................................................... 123 7.2.7 Interrupts and Status ............................................................................................................... 123 7.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 124 7.3.1 Initialization ............................................................................................................................. 124 7.3.2 RTC Match Functionality (No Hibernation) ................................................................................ 124 7.3.3 RTC Match/Wake-Up from Hibernation ..................................................................................... 124 7.3.4 External Wake-Up from Hibernation .......................................................................................... 125 7.3.5 RTC/External Wake-Up from Hibernation .................................................................................. 125 7.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 125 7.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 126 8 Internal Memory ............................................................................................................... 139 8.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 139 8.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 139 8.2.1 SRAM Memory ........................................................................................................................ 139 8.2.2 Flash Memory ......................................................................................................................... 140 8.3 Flash Memory Initialization and Configuration ........................................................................... 141 8.3.1 Flash Programming ................................................................................................................. 141 8.3.2 Nonvolatile Register Programming ........................................................................................... 142 8.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 142 8.5 Flash Register Descriptions (Flash Control Offset) ..................................................................... 143 8.6 Flash Register Descriptions (System Control Offset) .................................................................. 150 9 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) ....................................................................... 163 9.1 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 163 9.1.1 Data Control ........................................................................................................................... 164 9.1.2 Interrupt Control ...................................................................................................................... 165 9.1.3 Mode Control .......................................................................................................................... 166 9.1.4 Commit Control ....................................................................................................................... 166 9.1.5 Pad Control ............................................................................................................................. 166 9.1.6 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 166 9.2 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 166 9.3 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 168 9.4 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 169 4 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents 10 General-Purpose Timers ................................................................................................. 204 10.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 204 10.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 205 10.2.1 GPTM Reset Conditions .......................................................................................................... 205 10.2.2 32-Bit Timer Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 206 10.2.3 16-Bit Timer Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 207 10.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 211 10.3.1 32-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 211 10.3.2 32-Bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) Mode ......................................................................................... 212 10.3.3 16-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 212 10.3.4 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode ................................................................................................. 213 10.3.5 16-Bit Input Edge Timing Mode ................................................................................................ 213 10.3.6 16-Bit PWM Mode ................................................................................................................... 214 10.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 214 10.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 215 11 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................................... 240 11.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 240 11.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 240 11.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 241 11.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 241 11.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 242 12 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ................................................................................. 263 12.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 264 12.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 264 12.2.1 Sample Sequencers ................................................................................................................ 264 12.2.2 Module Control ........................................................................................................................ 265 12.2.3 Hardware Sample Averaging Circuit ......................................................................................... 266 12.2.4 Analog-to-Digital Converter ...................................................................................................... 266 12.2.5 Test Modes ............................................................................................................................. 266 12.2.6 Internal Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................... 266 12.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 267 12.3.1 Module Initialization ................................................................................................................. 267 12.3.2 Sample Sequencer Configuration ............................................................................................. 267 12.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 268 12.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 269 13 Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) ......................................... 296 13.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 297 13.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 297 13.2.1 Transmit/Receive Logic ........................................................................................................... 297 13.2.2 Baud-Rate Generation ............................................................................................................. 298 13.2.3 Data Transmission .................................................................................................................. 299 13.2.4 Serial IR (SIR) ......................................................................................................................... 299 13.2.5 FIFO Operation ....................................................................................................................... 300 13.2.6 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 300 13.2.7 Loopback Operation ................................................................................................................ 301 13.2.8 IrDA SIR block ........................................................................................................................ 301 13.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 301 13.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 302 November 30, 2007 5 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 13.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 303 14 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ................................................................................ 337 14.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 337 14.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 337 14.2.1 Bit Rate Generation ................................................................................................................. 338 14.2.2 FIFO Operation ....................................................................................................................... 338 14.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 338 14.2.4 Frame Formats ....................................................................................................................... 339 14.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 346 14.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 347 14.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 348 15 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface ............................................................................ 374 15.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 374 15.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 374 15.2.1 I2C Bus Functional Overview .................................................................................................... 375 15.2.2 Available Speed Modes ........................................................................................................... 377 15.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 378 15.2.4 Loopback Operation ................................................................................................................ 378 15.2.5 Command Sequence Flow Charts ............................................................................................ 379 15.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 385 15.4 I2C Register Map ..................................................................................................................... 386 15.5 Register Descriptions (I2C Master) ........................................................................................... 387 15.6 Register Descriptions (I2C Slave) ............................................................................................. 400 16 Ethernet Controller .......................................................................................................... 409 16.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 410 16.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 410 16.2.1 Internal MII Operation .............................................................................................................. 410 16.2.2 PHY Configuration/Operation ................................................................................................... 411 16.2.3 MAC Configuration/Operation .................................................................................................. 412 16.2.4 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 414 16.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 415 16.4 Ethernet Register Map ............................................................................................................. 415 16.5 Ethernet MAC Register Descriptions ......................................................................................... 417 16.6 MII Management Register Descriptions ..................................................................................... 434 17 Analog Comparators ....................................................................................................... 453 17.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 454 17.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 454 17.2.1 Internal Reference Programming .............................................................................................. 456 17.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 457 17.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 457 17.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 458 18 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) ........................................................................................ 466 18.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 466 18.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 466 18.2.1 PWM Timer ............................................................................................................................. 466 18.2.2 PWM Comparators .................................................................................................................. 467 18.2.3 PWM Signal Generator ............................................................................................................ 468 6 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents 18.2.4 Dead-Band Generator ............................................................................................................. 469 18.2.5 Interrupt/ADC-Trigger Selector ................................................................................................. 469 18.2.6 Synchronization Methods ......................................................................................................... 469 18.2.7 Fault Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 470 18.2.8 Output Control Block ............................................................................................................... 470 18.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 470 18.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 471 18.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 472 19 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) ............................................................................... 501 19.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 501 19.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 502 19.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 504 19.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 504 19.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 505 20 Pin Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 518 21 Signal Tables .................................................................................................................... 519 22 Operating Characteristics ............................................................................................... 533 23 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................................................ 534 23.1 DC Characteristics .................................................................................................................. 534 23.1.1 Maximum Ratings ................................................................................................................... 534 23.1.2 Recommended DC Operating Conditions .................................................................................. 534 23.1.3 On-Chip Low Drop-Out (LDO) Regulator Characteristics ............................................................ 535 23.1.4 Power Specifications ............................................................................................................... 535 23.1.5 Flash Memory Characteristics .................................................................................................. 537 23.2 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 537 23.2.1 Load Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 537 23.2.2 Clocks .................................................................................................................................... 537 23.2.3 Analog-to-Digital Converter ...................................................................................................... 538 23.2.4 Analog Comparator ................................................................................................................. 539 23.2.5 I2C ......................................................................................................................................... 539 23.2.6 Ethernet Controller .................................................................................................................. 540 23.2.7 Hibernation Module ................................................................................................................. 543 23.2.8 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ........................................................................................... 543 23.2.9 JTAG and Boundary Scan ........................................................................................................ 545 23.2.10 General-Purpose I/O ............................................................................................................... 546 23.2.11 Reset ..................................................................................................................................... 547 24 Package Information ........................................................................................................ 549 A Serial Flash Loader .......................................................................................................... 551 A.1 Serial Flash Loader ................................................................................................................. 551 A.2 Interfaces ............................................................................................................................... 551 A.2.1 UART ..................................................................................................................................... 551 A.2.2 SSI ......................................................................................................................................... 551 A.3 Packet Handling ...................................................................................................................... 552 A.3.1 Packet Format ........................................................................................................................ 552 A.3.2 Sending Packets ..................................................................................................................... 552 A.3.3 Receiving Packets ................................................................................................................... 552 November 30, 2007 7 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller A.4 Commands ............................................................................................................................. 553 A.4.1 COMMAND_PING (0X20) ........................................................................................................ 553 A.4.2 COMMAND_GET_STATUS (0x23) ........................................................................................... 553 A.4.3 COMMAND_DOWNLOAD (0x21) ............................................................................................. 553 A.4.4 COMMAND_SEND_DATA (0x24) ............................................................................................. 554 A.4.5 COMMAND_RUN (0x22) ......................................................................................................... 554 A.4.6 COMMAND_RESET (0x25) ..................................................................................................... 554 B Register Quick Reference ............................................................................................... 556 C Ordering and Contact Information ................................................................................. 575 C.1 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................ 575 C.2 Kits ......................................................................................................................................... 575 C.3 Company Information .............................................................................................................. 575 C.4 Support Information ................................................................................................................. 576 8 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1-1. Stellaris® 6000 Series High-Level Block Diagram ............................................................... 29 Figure 2-1. CPU Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 38 Figure 2-2. TPIU Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 39 Figure 5-1. JTAG Module Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 49 Figure 5-2. Test Access Port State Machine ....................................................................................... 52 Figure 5-3. IDCODE Register Format ................................................................................................. 57 Figure 5-4. BYPASS Register Format ................................................................................................ 58 Figure 5-5. Boundary Scan Register Format ....................................................................................... 58 Figure 6-1. External Circuitry to Extend Reset .................................................................................... 60 Figure 7-1. Hibernation Module Block Diagram ................................................................................. 121 Figure 8-1. Flash Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 139 Figure 9-1. GPIO Port Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 164 Figure 9-2. GPIODATA Write Example ............................................................................................. 165 Figure 9-3. GPIODATA Read Example ............................................................................................. 165 Figure 10-1. GPTM Module Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 205 Figure 10-2. 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode Example .......................................................................... 209 Figure 10-3. 16-Bit Input Edge Time Mode Example ........................................................................... 210 Figure 10-4. 16-Bit PWM Mode Example ............................................................................................ 211 Figure 11-1. WDT Module Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 240 Figure 12-1. ADC Module Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 264 Figure 12-2. Internal Temperature Sensor Characteristic ..................................................................... 267 Figure 13-1. UART Module Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 297 Figure 13-2. UART Character Frame ................................................................................................. 298 Figure 13-3. IrDA Data Modulation ..................................................................................................... 300 Figure 14-1. SSI Module Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 337 Figure 14-2. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Single Transfer) .................................................... 339 Figure 14-3. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) ............................................ 340 Figure 14-4. Freescale SPI Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 ...................................... 341 Figure 14-5. Freescale SPI Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 .............................. 341 Figure 14-6. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=0 and SPH=1 ..................................................... 342 Figure 14-7. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 ........................... 343 Figure 14-8. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 .................... 343 Figure 14-9. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=1 and SPH=1 ..................................................... 344 Figure 14-10. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Single Frame) .................................................................... 345 Figure 14-11. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) ......................................................... 346 Figure 14-12. MICROWIRE Frame Format, SSIFss Input Setup and Hold Requirements ........................ 346 Figure 15-1. I2C Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 374 Figure 15-2. I2C Bus Configuration .................................................................................................... 375 Figure 15-3. START and STOP Conditions ......................................................................................... 375 Figure 15-4. Complete Data Transfer with a 7-Bit Address ................................................................... 376 Figure 15-5. R/S Bit in First Byte ........................................................................................................ 376 Figure 15-6. Data Validity During Bit Transfer on the I2C Bus ............................................................... 376 Figure 15-7. Master Single SEND ...................................................................................................... 379 Figure 15-8. Master Single RECEIVE ................................................................................................. 380 Figure 15-9. Master Burst SEND ....................................................................................................... 381 November 30, 2007 9 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 15-10. Master Burst RECEIVE .................................................................................................. 382 Figure 15-11. Master Burst RECEIVE after Burst SEND ........................................................................ 383 Figure 15-12. Master Burst SEND after Burst RECEIVE ........................................................................ 384 Figure 15-13. Slave Command Sequence ............................................................................................ 385 Figure 16-1. Ethernet Controller Block Diagram .................................................................................. 410 Figure 16-2. Ethernet Controller ......................................................................................................... 410 Figure 16-3. Ethernet Frame ............................................................................................................. 412 Figure 17-1. Analog Comparator Module Block Diagram ..................................................................... 454 Figure 17-2. Structure of Comparator Unit .......................................................................................... 455 Figure 17-3. Comparator Internal Reference Structure ........................................................................ 456 Figure 18-1. PWM Module Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 466 Figure 18-2. PWM Count-Down Mode ................................................................................................ 467 Figure 18-3. PWM Count-Up/Down Mode .......................................................................................... 468 Figure 18-4. PWM Generation Example In Count-Up/Down Mode ....................................................... 468 Figure 18-5. PWM Dead-Band Generator ........................................................................................... 469 Figure 19-1. QEI Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 501 Figure 19-2. Quadrature Encoder and Velocity Predivider Operation .................................................... 503 Figure 20-1. Pin Connection Diagram ................................................................................................ 518 Figure 23-1. Load Conditions ............................................................................................................ 537 Figure 23-2. I2C Timing ..................................................................................................................... 540 Figure 23-3. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics ......................................................................... 542 Figure 23-4. Hibernation Module Timing ............................................................................................. 543 Figure 23-5. SSI Timing for TI Frame Format (FRF=01), Single Transfer Timing Measurement .............. 544 Figure 23-6. SSI Timing for MICROWIRE Frame Format (FRF=10), Single Transfer ............................. 544 Figure 23-7. SSI Timing for SPI Frame Format (FRF=00), with SPH=1 ................................................. 545 Figure 23-8. JTAG Test Clock Input Timing ......................................................................................... 546 Figure 23-9. JTAG Test Access Port (TAP) Timing .............................................................................. 546 Figure 23-10. JTAG TRST Timing ........................................................................................................ 546 Figure 23-11. External Reset Timing (RST) .......................................................................................... 547 Figure 23-12. Power-On Reset Timing ................................................................................................. 548 Figure 23-13. Brown-Out Reset Timing ................................................................................................ 548 Figure 23-14. Software Reset Timing ................................................................................................... 548 Figure 23-15. Watchdog Reset Timing ................................................................................................. 548 Figure 24-1. 100-Pin LQFP Package .................................................................................................. 549 10 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1. Documentation Conventions ............................................................................................ 20 Table 3-1. Memory Map ................................................................................................................... 43 Table 4-1. Exception Types .............................................................................................................. 45 Table 4-2. Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 46 Table 5-1. JTAG Port Pins Reset State ............................................................................................. 50 Table 5-2. JTAG Instruction Register Commands ............................................................................... 55 Table 6-1. System Control Register Map ........................................................................................... 65 Table 7-1. Hibernation Module Register Map ................................................................................... 125 Table 8-1. Flash Protection Policy Combinations ............................................................................. 141 Table 8-2. Flash Resident Registers ............................................................................................... 142 Table 8-3. Flash Register Map ........................................................................................................ 142 Table 9-1. GPIO Pad Configuration Examples ................................................................................. 167 Table 9-2. GPIO Interrupt Configuration Example ............................................................................ 167 Table 9-3. GPIO Register Map ....................................................................................................... 168 Table 10-1. Available CCP Pins ........................................................................................................ 205 Table 10-2. 16-Bit Timer With Prescaler Configurations ..................................................................... 208 Table 10-3. Timers Register Map ...................................................................................................... 214 Table 11-1. Watchdog Timer Register Map ........................................................................................ 241 Table 12-1. Samples and FIFO Depth of Sequencers ........................................................................ 264 Table 12-2. ADC Register Map ......................................................................................................... 268 Table 13-1. UART Register Map ....................................................................................................... 302 Table 14-1. SSI Register Map .......................................................................................................... 347 Table 15-1. Examples of I2C Master Timer Period versus Speed Mode ............................................... 377 Table 15-2. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register Map ......................................................... 386 Table 15-3. Write Field Decoding for I2CMCS[3:0] Field (Sheet 1 of 3) ................................................ 391 Table 16-1. TX & RX FIFO Organization ........................................................................................... 413 Table 16-2. Ethernet Register Map ................................................................................................... 416 Table 17-1. Comparator 0 Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 455 Table 17-2. Comparator 1 Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 455 Table 17-3. Comparator 2 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 456 Table 17-4. Internal Reference Voltage and ACREFCTL Field Values ................................................. 456 Table 17-5. Analog Comparators Register Map ................................................................................. 458 Table 18-1. PWM Register Map ........................................................................................................ 471 Table 19-1. QEI Register Map .......................................................................................................... 504 Table 21-1. Signals by Pin Number ................................................................................................... 519 Table 21-2. Signals by Signal Name ................................................................................................. 523 Table 21-3. Signals by Function, Except for GPIO ............................................................................. 527 Table 21-4. GPIO Pins and Alternate Functions ................................................................................. 531 Table 22-1. Temperature Characteristics ........................................................................................... 533 Table 22-2. Thermal Characteristics ................................................................................................. 533 Table 23-1. Maximum Ratings .......................................................................................................... 534 Table 23-2. Recommended DC Operating Conditions ........................................................................ 534 Table 23-3. LDO Regulator Characteristics ....................................................................................... 535 Table 23-4. Detailed Power Specifications ........................................................................................ 536 Table 23-5. Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................ 537 Table 23-6. Phase Locked Loop (PLL) Characteristics ....................................................................... 537 November 30, 2007 11 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Table 23-7. Clock Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 537 Table 23-8. Crystal Characteristics ................................................................................................... 538 Table 23-9. ADC Characteristics ....................................................................................................... 538 Table 23-10. Analog Comparator Characteristics ................................................................................. 539 Table 23-11. Analog Comparator Voltage Reference Characteristics .................................................... 539 Table 23-12. I2C Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 539 Table 23-13. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristics ........................................................................ 540 Table 23-14. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristics (informative) ..................................................... 540 Table 23-15. 100BASE-TX Receiver Characteristics ............................................................................ 540 Table 23-16. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristics ............................................................................ 540 Table 23-17. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristics (informative) ......................................................... 541 Table 23-18. 10BASE-T Receiver Characteristics ................................................................................ 541 Table 23-19. Isolation Transformers ................................................................................................... 541 Table 23-20. Ethernet Reference Crystal ............................................................................................ 542 Table 23-21. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics ......................................................................... 542 Table 23-22. Hibernation Module Characteristics ................................................................................. 543 Table 23-23. SSI Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 543 Table 23-24. JTAG Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 545 Table 23-25. GPIO Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 547 Table 23-26. Reset Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 547 Table C-1. Part Ordering Information ............................................................................................... 575 12 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Registers System Control .............................................................................................................................. 59 Register 1: Device Identification 0 (DID0), offset 0x000 ....................................................................... 67 Register 2: Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL), offset 0x030 .......................................................... 69 Register 3: LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL), offset 0x034 ................................................................... 70 Register 4: Raw Interrupt Status (RIS), offset 0x050 ........................................................................... 71 Register 5: Interrupt Mask Control (IMC), offset 0x054 ........................................................................ 72 Register 6: Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC), offset 0x058 .................................................... 73 Register 7: Reset Cause (RESC), offset 0x05C .................................................................................. 74 Register 8: Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC), offset 0x060 .......................................................... 75 Register 9: XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG), offset 0x064 .............................................................. 79 Register 10: Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2), offset 0x070 ...................................................... 80 Register 11: Deep Sleep Clock Configuration (DSLPCLKCFG), offset 0x144 .......................................... 82 Register 12: Device Identification 1 (DID1), offset 0x004 ....................................................................... 83 Register 13: Device Capabilities 0 (DC0), offset 0x008 ......................................................................... 85 Register 14: Device Capabilities 1 (DC1), offset 0x010 ......................................................................... 86 Register 15: Device Capabilities 2 (DC2), offset 0x014 ......................................................................... 88 Register 16: Device Capabilities 3 (DC3), offset 0x018 ......................................................................... 90 Register 17: Device Capabilities 4 (DC4), offset 0x01C ......................................................................... 92 Register 18: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (RCGC0), offset 0x100 .................................... 94 Register 19: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (SCGC0), offset 0x110 .................................. 96 Register 20: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (DCGC0), offset 0x120 ......................... 98 Register 21: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (RCGC1), offset 0x104 ................................... 100 Register 22: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (SCGC1), offset 0x114 ................................. 103 Register 23: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (DCGC1), offset 0x124 ....................... 106 Register 24: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (RCGC2), offset 0x108 ................................... 109 Register 25: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (SCGC2), offset 0x118 ................................. 111 Register 26: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (DCGC2), offset 0x128 ....................... 113 Register 27: Software Reset Control 0 (SRCR0), offset 0x040 ............................................................. 115 Register 28: Software Reset Control 1 (SRCR1), offset 0x044 ............................................................. 116 Register 29: Software Reset Control 2 (SRCR2), offset 0x048 ............................................................. 118 Hibernation Module ..................................................................................................................... 120 Register 1: Hibernation RTC Counter (HIBRTCC), offset 0x000 ......................................................... 127 Register 2: Hibernation RTC Match 0 (HIBRTCM0), offset 0x004 ....................................................... 128 Register 3: Hibernation RTC Match 1 (HIBRTCM1), offset 0x008 ....................................................... 129 Register 4: Hibernation RTC Load (HIBRTCLD), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 130 Register 5: Hibernation Control (HIBCTL), offset 0x010 ..................................................................... 131 Register 6: Hibernation Interrupt Mask (HIBIM), offset 0x014 ............................................................. 133 Register 7: Hibernation Raw Interrupt Status (HIBRIS), offset 0x018 .................................................. 134 Register 8: Hibernation Masked Interrupt Status (HIBMIS), offset 0x01C ............................................ 135 Register 9: Hibernation Interrupt Clear (HIBIC), offset 0x020 ............................................................. 136 Register 10: Hibernation RTC Trim (HIBRTCT), offset 0x024 ............................................................... 137 Register 11: Hibernation Data (HIBDATA), offset 0x030-0x12C ............................................................ 138 Internal Memory ........................................................................................................................... 139 Register 1: Flash Memory Address (FMA), offset 0x000 .................................................................... 144 Register 2: Flash Memory Data (FMD), offset 0x004 ......................................................................... 145 November 30, 2007 13 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: Flash Memory Control (FMC), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 146 Register 4: Flash Controller Raw Interrupt Status (FCRIS), offset 0x00C ............................................ 148 Register 5: Flash Controller Interrupt Mask (FCIM), offset 0x010 ........................................................ 149 Register 6: Flash Controller Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (FCMISC), offset 0x014 ..................... 150 Register 7: USec Reload (USECRL), offset 0x140 ............................................................................ 151 Register 8: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 (FMPRE0), offset 0x130 and 0x200 ................... 152 Register 9: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 (FMPPE0), offset 0x134 and 0x400 ............... 153 Register 10: User Debug (USER_DBG), offset 0x1D0 ......................................................................... 154 Register 11: User Register 0 (USER_REG0), offset 0x1E0 .................................................................. 155 Register 12: User Register 1 (USER_REG1), offset 0x1E4 .................................................................. 156 Register 13: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 1 (FMPRE1), offset 0x204 .................................... 157 Register 14: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 2 (FMPRE2), offset 0x208 .................................... 158 Register 15: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 3 (FMPRE3), offset 0x20C ................................... 159 Register 16: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 1 (FMPPE1), offset 0x404 ............................... 160 Register 17: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 2 (FMPPE2), offset 0x408 ............................... 161 Register 18: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 3 (FMPPE3), offset 0x40C ............................... 162 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) ................................................................................... 163 Register 1: GPIO Data (GPIODATA), offset 0x000 ............................................................................ 170 Register 2: GPIO Direction (GPIODIR), offset 0x400 ......................................................................... 171 Register 3: GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS), offset 0x404 .................................................................. 172 Register 4: GPIO Interrupt Both Edges (GPIOIBE), offset 0x408 ........................................................ 173 Register 5: GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV), offset 0x40C ................................................................ 174 Register 6: GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM), offset 0x410 ................................................................... 175 Register 7: GPIO Raw Interrupt Status (GPIORIS), offset 0x414 ........................................................ 176 Register 8: GPIO Masked Interrupt Status (GPIOMIS), offset 0x418 ................................................... 177 Register 9: GPIO Interrupt Clear (GPIOICR), offset 0x41C ................................................................ 178 Register 10: GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL), offset 0x420 ............................................ 179 Register 11: GPIO 2-mA Drive Select (GPIODR2R), offset 0x500 ........................................................ 181 Register 12: GPIO 4-mA Drive Select (GPIODR4R), offset 0x504 ........................................................ 182 Register 13: GPIO 8-mA Drive Select (GPIODR8R), offset 0x508 ........................................................ 183 Register 14: GPIO Open Drain Select (GPIOODR), offset 0x50C ......................................................... 184 Register 15: GPIO Pull-Up Select (GPIOPUR), offset 0x510 ................................................................ 185 Register 16: GPIO Pull-Down Select (GPIOPDR), offset 0x514 ........................................................... 186 Register 17: GPIO Slew Rate Control Select (GPIOSLR), offset 0x518 ................................................ 187 Register 18: GPIO Digital Enable (GPIODEN), offset 0x51C ................................................................ 188 Register 19: GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK), offset 0x520 ............................................................................ 189 Register 20: GPIO Commit (GPIOCR), offset 0x524 ............................................................................ 190 Register 21: GPIO Peripheral Identification 4 (GPIOPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ....................................... 192 Register 22: GPIO Peripheral Identification 5 (GPIOPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ....................................... 193 Register 23: GPIO Peripheral Identification 6 (GPIOPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ....................................... 194 Register 24: GPIO Peripheral Identification 7 (GPIOPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ...................................... 195 Register 25: GPIO Peripheral Identification 0 (GPIOPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ....................................... 196 Register 26: GPIO Peripheral Identification 1 (GPIOPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ....................................... 197 Register 27: GPIO Peripheral Identification 2 (GPIOPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ....................................... 198 Register 28: GPIO Peripheral Identification 3 (GPIOPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ...................................... 199 Register 29: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 0 (GPIOPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 .......................................... 200 Register 30: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 1 (GPIOPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 .......................................... 201 Register 31: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 2 (GPIOPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 .......................................... 202 14 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents Register 32: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 3 (GPIOPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ......................................... 203 General-Purpose Timers ............................................................................................................. 204 Register 1: GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG), offset 0x000 .............................................................. 216 Register 2: GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR), offset 0x004 ............................................................ 217 Register 3: GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR), offset 0x008 ............................................................ 219 Register 4: GPTM Control (GPTMCTL), offset 0x00C ........................................................................ 221 Register 5: GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR), offset 0x018 .............................................................. 224 Register 6: GPTM Raw Interrupt Status (GPTMRIS), offset 0x01C ..................................................... 226 Register 7: GPTM Masked Interrupt Status (GPTMMIS), offset 0x020 ................................................ 227 Register 8: GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR), offset 0x024 .............................................................. 228 Register 9: GPTM TimerA Interval Load (GPTMTAILR), offset 0x028 ................................................. 230 Register 10: GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR), offset 0x02C ................................................ 231 Register 11: GPTM TimerA Match (GPTMTAMATCHR), offset 0x030 ................................................... 232 Register 12: GPTM TimerB Match (GPTMTBMATCHR), offset 0x034 .................................................. 233 Register 13: GPTM TimerA Prescale (GPTMTAPR), offset 0x038 ........................................................ 234 Register 14: GPTM TimerB Prescale (GPTMTBPR), offset 0x03C ....................................................... 235 Register 15: GPTM TimerA Prescale Match (GPTMTAPMR), offset 0x040 ........................................... 236 Register 16: GPTM TimerB Prescale Match (GPTMTBPMR), offset 0x044 ........................................... 237 Register 17: GPTM TimerA (GPTMTAR), offset 0x048 ........................................................................ 238 Register 18: GPTM TimerB (GPTMTBR), offset 0x04C ....................................................................... 239 Watchdog Timer ........................................................................................................................... 240 Register 1: Watchdog Load (WDTLOAD), offset 0x000 ...................................................................... 243 Register 2: Watchdog Value (WDTVALUE), offset 0x004 ................................................................... 244 Register 3: Watchdog Control (WDTCTL), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 245 Register 4: Watchdog Interrupt Clear (WDTICR), offset 0x00C .......................................................... 246 Register 5: Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status (WDTRIS), offset 0x010 .................................................. 247 Register 6: Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status (WDTMIS), offset 0x014 ............................................. 248 Register 7: Watchdog Test (WDTTEST), offset 0x418 ....................................................................... 249 Register 8: Watchdog Lock (WDTLOCK), offset 0xC00 ..................................................................... 250 Register 9: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 4 (WDTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ................................. 251 Register 10: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 5 (WDTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ................................. 252 Register 11: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 6 (WDTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ................................. 253 Register 12: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 7 (WDTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ................................ 254 Register 13: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 0 (WDTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ................................. 255 Register 14: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 1 (WDTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ................................. 256 Register 15: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 2 (WDTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ................................. 257 Register 16: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 3 (WDTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ................................. 258 Register 17: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 0 (WDTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 .................................... 259 Register 18: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 1 (WDTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 .................................... 260 Register 19: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 2 (WDTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 .................................... 261 Register 20: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 3 (WDTPCellID3 ), offset 0xFFC .................................. 262 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ............................................................................................. 263 Register 1: ADC Active Sample Sequencer (ADCACTSS), offset 0x000 ............................................. 270 Register 2: ADC Raw Interrupt Status (ADCRIS), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 271 Register 3: ADC Interrupt Mask (ADCIM), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 272 Register 4: ADC Interrupt Status and Clear (ADCISC), offset 0x00C .................................................. 273 Register 5: ADC Overflow Status (ADCOSTAT), offset 0x010 ............................................................ 274 Register 6: ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX), offset 0x014 ................................................. 275 November 30, 2007 15 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: ADC Underflow Status (ADCUSTAT), offset 0x018 ........................................................... 278 Register 8: ADC Sample Sequencer Priority (ADCSSPRI), offset 0x020 ............................................. 279 Register 9: ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate (ADCPSSI), offset 0x028 ................................. 280 Register 10: ADC Sample Averaging Control (ADCSAC), offset 0x030 ................................................. 281 Register 11: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 0 (ADCSSMUX0), offset 0x040 ............... 282 Register 12: ADC Sample Sequence Control 0 (ADCSSCTL0), offset 0x044 ........................................ 284 Register 13: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 0 (ADCSSFIFO0), offset 0x048 ................................ 287 Register 14: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 1 (ADCSSFIFO1), offset 0x068 ................................ 287 Register 15: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 2 (ADCSSFIFO2), offset 0x088 ................................ 287 Register 16: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 3 (ADCSSFIFO3), offset 0x0A8 ............................... 287 Register 17: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 0 Status (ADCSSFSTAT0), offset 0x04C ............................. 288 Register 18: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 1 Status (ADCSSFSTAT1), offset 0x06C ............................. 288 Register 19: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 2 Status (ADCSSFSTAT2), offset 0x08C ............................ 288 Register 20: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 3 Status (ADCSSFSTAT3), offset 0x0AC ............................ 288 Register 21: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 1 (ADCSSMUX1), offset 0x060 ............... 289 Register 22: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 2 (ADCSSMUX2), offset 0x080 ............... 289 Register 23: ADC Sample Sequence Control 1 (ADCSSCTL1), offset 0x064 ........................................ 290 Register 24: ADC Sample Sequence Control 2 (ADCSSCTL2), offset 0x084 ........................................ 290 Register 25: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 3 (ADCSSMUX3), offset 0x0A0 ............... 292 Register 26: ADC Sample Sequence Control 3 (ADCSSCTL3), offset 0x0A4 ........................................ 293 Register 27: ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB), offset 0x100 ....................................................... 294 Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) ..................................................... 296 Register 1: UART Data (UARTDR), offset 0x000 ............................................................................... 304 Register 2: UART Receive Status/Error Clear (UARTRSR/UARTECR), offset 0x004 ........................... 306 Register 3: UART Flag (UARTFR), offset 0x018 ................................................................................ 308 Register 4: UART IrDA Low-Power Register (UARTILPR), offset 0x020 ............................................. 310 Register 5: UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTIBRD), offset 0x024 ............................................ 311 Register 6: UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTFBRD), offset 0x028 ....................................... 312 Register 7: UART Line Control (UARTLCRH), offset 0x02C ............................................................... 313 Register 8: UART Control (UARTCTL), offset 0x030 ......................................................................... 315 Register 9: UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select (UARTIFLS), offset 0x034 ........................................... 317 Register 10: UART Interrupt Mask (UARTIM), offset 0x038 ................................................................. 319 Register 11: UART Raw Interrupt Status (UARTRIS), offset 0x03C ...................................................... 321 Register 12: UART Masked Interrupt Status (UARTMIS), offset 0x040 ................................................. 322 Register 13: UART Interrupt Clear (UARTICR), offset 0x044 ............................................................... 323 Register 14: UART Peripheral Identification 4 (UARTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ..................................... 325 Register 15: UART Peripheral Identification 5 (UARTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ..................................... 326 Register 16: UART Peripheral Identification 6 (UARTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ..................................... 327 Register 17: UART Peripheral Identification 7 (UARTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ..................................... 328 Register 18: UART Peripheral Identification 0 (UARTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ...................................... 329 Register 19: UART Peripheral Identification 1 (UARTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ...................................... 330 Register 20: UART Peripheral Identification 2 (UARTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ...................................... 331 Register 21: UART Peripheral Identification 3 (UARTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ..................................... 332 Register 22: UART PrimeCell Identification 0 (UARTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 ........................................ 333 Register 23: UART PrimeCell Identification 1 (UARTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 ........................................ 334 Register 24: UART PrimeCell Identification 2 (UARTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 ........................................ 335 Register 25: UART PrimeCell Identification 3 (UARTPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ........................................ 336 16 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ............................................................................................ 337 Register 1: SSI Control 0 (SSICR0), offset 0x000 .............................................................................. 349 Register 2: SSI Control 1 (SSICR1), offset 0x004 .............................................................................. 351 Register 3: SSI Data (SSIDR), offset 0x008 ...................................................................................... 353 Register 4: SSI Status (SSISR), offset 0x00C ................................................................................... 354 Register 5: SSI Clock Prescale (SSICPSR), offset 0x010 .................................................................. 356 Register 6: SSI Interrupt Mask (SSIIM), offset 0x014 ......................................................................... 357 Register 7: SSI Raw Interrupt Status (SSIRIS), offset 0x018 .............................................................. 359 Register 8: SSI Masked Interrupt Status (SSIMIS), offset 0x01C ........................................................ 360 Register 9: SSI Interrupt Clear (SSIICR), offset 0x020 ....................................................................... 361 Register 10: SSI Peripheral Identification 4 (SSIPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ............................................. 362 Register 11: SSI Peripheral Identification 5 (SSIPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ............................................. 363 Register 12: SSI Peripheral Identification 6 (SSIPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ............................................. 364 Register 13: SSI Peripheral Identification 7 (SSIPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ............................................ 365 Register 14: SSI Peripheral Identification 0 (SSIPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ............................................. 366 Register 15: SSI Peripheral Identification 1 (SSIPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ............................................. 367 Register 16: SSI Peripheral Identification 2 (SSIPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ............................................. 368 Register 17: SSI Peripheral Identification 3 (SSIPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ............................................ 369 Register 18: SSI PrimeCell Identification 0 (SSIPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 ............................................... 370 Register 19: SSI PrimeCell Identification 1 (SSIPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 ............................................... 371 Register 20: SSI PrimeCell Identification 2 (SSIPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 ............................................... 372 Register 21: SSI PrimeCell Identification 3 (SSIPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ............................................... 373 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface ........................................................................................ 374 Register 1: I2C Master Slave Address (I2CMSA), offset 0x000 ........................................................... 388 Register 2: I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 389 Register 3: I2C Master Data (I2CMDR), offset 0x008 ......................................................................... 393 Register 4: I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 394 Register 5: I2C Master Interrupt Mask (I2CMIMR), offset 0x010 ......................................................... 395 Register 6: I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status (I2CMRIS), offset 0x014 ................................................. 396 Register 7: I2C Master Masked Interrupt Status (I2CMMIS), offset 0x018 ........................................... 397 Register 8: I2C Master Interrupt Clear (I2CMICR), offset 0x01C ......................................................... 398 Register 9: I2C Master Configuration (I2CMCR), offset 0x020 ............................................................ 399 Register 10: I2C Slave Own Address (I2CSOAR), offset 0x000 ............................................................ 401 Register 11: I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 402 Register 12: I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR), offset 0x008 ........................................................................... 404 Register 13: I2C Slave Interrupt Mask (I2CSIMR), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 405 Register 14: I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status (I2CSRIS), offset 0x010 ................................................... 406 Register 15: I2C Slave Masked Interrupt Status (I2CSMIS), offset 0x014 .............................................. 407 Register 16: I2C Slave Interrupt Clear (I2CSICR), offset 0x018 ............................................................ 408 Ethernet Controller ...................................................................................................................... 409 Register 1: Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status (MACRIS), offset 0x000 ............................................ 418 Register 2: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Acknowledge (MACIACK), offset 0x000 ....................................... 420 Register 3: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Mask (MACIM), offset 0x004 ....................................................... 421 Register 4: Ethernet MAC Receive Control (MACRCTL), offset 0x008 ................................................ 422 Register 5: Ethernet MAC Transmit Control (MACTCTL), offset 0x00C ............................................... 423 Register 6: Ethernet MAC Data (MACDATA), offset 0x010 ................................................................. 424 Register 7: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 0 (MACIA0), offset 0x014 ............................................. 426 November 30, 2007 17 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 1 (MACIA1), offset 0x018 ............................................. 427 Register 9: Ethernet MAC Threshold (MACTHR), offset 0x01C .......................................................... 428 Register 10: Ethernet MAC Management Control (MACMCTL), offset 0x020 ........................................ 429 Register 11: Ethernet MAC Management Divider (MACMDV), offset 0x024 .......................................... 430 Register 12: Ethernet MAC Management Transmit Data (MACMTXD), offset 0x02C ............................. 431 Register 13: Ethernet MAC Management Receive Data (MACMRXD), offset 0x030 .............................. 432 Register 14: Ethernet MAC Number of Packets (MACNP), offset 0x034 ............................................... 433 Register 15: Ethernet MAC Transmission Request (MACTR), offset 0x038 ........................................... 434 Register 16: Ethernet PHY Management Register 0 – Control (MR0), address 0x00 ............................. 435 Register 17: Ethernet PHY Management Register 1 – Status (MR1), address 0x01 .............................. 437 Register 18: Ethernet PHY Management Register 2 – PHY Identifier 1 (MR2), address 0x02 ................. 439 Register 19: Ethernet PHY Management Register 3 – PHY Identifier 2 (MR3), address 0x03 ................. 440 Register 20: Ethernet PHY Management Register 4 – Auto-Negotiation Advertisement (MR4), address 0x04 ............................................................................................................................. 441 Register 21: Ethernet PHY Management Register 5 – Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability (MR5), address 0x05 ..................................................................................................... 443 Register 22: Ethernet PHY Management Register 6 – Auto-Negotiation Expansion (MR6), address 0x06 ............................................................................................................................. 444 Register 23: Ethernet PHY Management Register 16 – Vendor-Specific (MR16), address 0x10 ............. 445 Register 24: Ethernet PHY Management Register 17 – Interrupt Control/Status (MR17), address 0x11 .............................................................................................................................. 447 Register 25: Ethernet PHY Management Register 18 – Diagnostic (MR18), address 0x12 ..................... 449 Register 26: Ethernet PHY Management Register 19 – Transceiver Control (MR19), address 0x13 ....... 450 Register 27: Ethernet PHY Management Register 23 – LED Configuration (MR23), address 0x17 ......... 451 Register 28: Ethernet PHY Management Register 24 –MDI/MDIX Control (MR24), address 0x18 .......... 452 Analog Comparators ................................................................................................................... 453 Register 1: Analog Comparator Masked Interrupt Status (ACMIS), offset 0x00 .................................... 459 Register 2: Analog Comparator Raw Interrupt Status (ACRIS), offset 0x04 ......................................... 460 Register 3: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable (ACINTEN), offset 0x08 ........................................... 461 Register 4: Analog Comparator Reference Voltage Control (ACREFCTL), offset 0x10 ......................... 462 Register 5: Analog Comparator Status 0 (ACSTAT0), offset 0x20 ....................................................... 463 Register 6: Analog Comparator Status 1 (ACSTAT1), offset 0x40 ....................................................... 463 Register 7: Analog Comparator Status 2 (ACSTAT2), offset 0x60 ....................................................... 463 Register 8: Analog Comparator Control 0 (ACCTL0), offset 0x24 ....................................................... 464 Register 9: Analog Comparator Control 1 (ACCTL1), offset 0x44 ....................................................... 464 Register 10: Analog Comparator Control 2 (ACCTL2), offset 0x64 ...................................................... 464 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) .................................................................................................... 466 Register 1: PWM Master Control (PWMCTL), offset 0x000 ................................................................ 473 Register 2: PWM Time Base Sync (PWMSYNC), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 474 Register 3: PWM Output Enable (PWMENABLE), offset 0x008 .......................................................... 475 Register 4: PWM Output Inversion (PWMINVERT), offset 0x00C ....................................................... 476 Register 5: PWM Output Fault (PWMFAULT), offset 0x010 ................................................................ 477 Register 6: PWM Interrupt Enable (PWMINTEN), offset 0x014 ........................................................... 478 Register 7: PWM Raw Interrupt Status (PWMRIS), offset 0x018 ........................................................ 479 Register 8: PWM Interrupt Status and Clear (PWMISC), offset 0x01C ................................................ 480 Register 9: PWM Status (PWMSTATUS), offset 0x020 ...................................................................... 481 Register 10: PWM0 Control (PWM0CTL), offset 0x040 ....................................................................... 482 Register 11: PWM1 Control (PWM1CTL), offset 0x080 ....................................................................... 482 18 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Table of Contents Register 12: PWM0 Interrupt and Trigger Enable (PWM0INTEN), offset 0x044 .................................... 484 Register 13: PWM1 Interrupt and Trigger Enable (PWM1INTEN), offset 0x084 .................................... 484 Register 14: PWM0 Raw Interrupt Status (PWM0RIS), offset 0x048 .................................................... 486 Register 15: PWM1 Raw Interrupt Status (PWM1RIS), offset 0x088 .................................................... 486 Register 16: PWM0 Interrupt Status and Clear (PWM0ISC), offset 0x04C ........................................... 487 Register 17: PWM1 Interrupt Status and Clear (PWM1ISC), offset 0x08C ........................................... 487 Register 18: PWM0 Load (PWM0LOAD), offset 0x050 ....................................................................... 488 Register 19: PWM1 Load (PWM1LOAD), offset 0x090 ....................................................................... 488 Register 20: PWM0 Counter (PWM0COUNT), offset 0x054 ................................................................ 489 Register 21: PWM1 Counter (PWM1COUNT), offset 0x094 ................................................................ 489 Register 22: PWM0 Compare A (PWM0CMPA), offset 0x058 ............................................................. 490 Register 23: PWM1 Compare A (PWM1CMPA), offset 0x098 ............................................................. 490 Register 24: PWM0 Compare B (PWM0CMPB), offset 0x05C ............................................................. 491 Register 25: PWM1 Compare B (PWM1CMPB), offset 0x09C ............................................................. 491 Register 26: PWM0 Generator A Control (PWM0GENA), offset 0x060 ................................................ 492 Register 27: PWM1 Generator A Control (PWM1GENA), offset 0x0A0 ................................................ 492 Register 28: PWM0 Generator B Control (PWM0GENB), offset 0x064 ................................................ 495 Register 29: PWM1 Generator B Control (PWM1GENB), offset 0x0A4 ................................................ 495 Register 30: PWM0 Dead-Band Control (PWM0DBCTL), offset 0x068 ................................................ 498 Register 31: PWM1 Dead-Band Control (PWM1DBCTL), offset 0x0A8 ................................................. 498 Register 32: PWM0 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay (PWM0DBRISE), offset 0x06C ............................. 499 Register 33: PWM1 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay (PWM1DBRISE), offset 0x0AC ............................. 499 Register 34: PWM0 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay (PWM0DBFALL), offset 0x070 ............................. 500 Register 35: PWM1 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay (PWM1DBFALL), offset 0x0B0 ............................. 500 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) .......................................................................................... 501 Register 1: QEI Control (QEICTL), offset 0x000 ................................................................................ 506 Register 2: QEI Status (QEISTAT), offset 0x004 ................................................................................ 508 Register 3: QEI Position (QEIPOS), offset 0x008 .............................................................................. 509 Register 4: QEI Maximum Position (QEIMAXPOS), offset 0x00C ....................................................... 510 Register 5: QEI Timer Load (QEILOAD), offset 0x010 ....................................................................... 511 Register 6: QEI Timer (QEITIME), offset 0x014 ................................................................................. 512 Register 7: QEI Velocity Counter (QEICOUNT), offset 0x018 ............................................................. 513 Register 8: QEI Velocity (QEISPEED), offset 0x01C .......................................................................... 514 Register 9: QEI Interrupt Enable (QEIINTEN), offset 0x020 ............................................................... 515 Register 10: QEI Raw Interrupt Status (QEIRIS), offset 0x024 ............................................................. 516 Register 11: QEI Interrupt Status and Clear (QEIISC), offset 0x028 ..................................................... 517 November 30, 2007 19 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller About This Document This data sheet provides reference information for the LM3S6952 microcontroller, describing the functional blocks of the system-on-chip (SoC) device designed around the ARM® Cortex™-M3 core. Audience This manual is intended for system software developers, hardware designers, and application developers. About This Manual This document is organized into sections that correspond to each major feature. Related Documents The following documents are referenced by the data sheet, and available on the documentation CD or from the Luminary Micro web site at www.luminarymicro.com: ■ ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual ■ ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual ■ ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual The following related documents are also referenced: ■ IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture This documentation list was current as of publication date. Please check the Luminary Micro web site for additional documentation, including application notes and white papers. Documentation Conventions This document uses the conventions shown in Table 1 on page 20. Table 1. Documentation Conventions Notation Meaning General Register Notation APB registers are indicated in uppercase bold. For example, PBORCTL is the Power-On and Brown-Out Reset Control register. If a register name contains a lowercase n, it represents more than one register. For example, SRCRn represents any (or all) of the three Software Reset Control registers: SRCR0, SRCR1 , and SRCR2. REGISTER bit A single bit in a register. bit field Two or more consecutive and related bits. A hexadecimal increment to a register's address, relative to that module's base address as specified in “Memory Map” on page 43. offset 0xnnn Registers are numbered consecutively throughout the document to aid in referencing them. The register number has no meaning to software. Register N 20 November 30, 2007 Preliminary About This Document Notation Meaning Register bits marked reserved are reserved for future use. In most cases, reserved bits are set to 0; however, user software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide software compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. reserved The range of register bits inclusive from xx to yy. For example, 31:15 means bits 15 through 31 in that register. yy:xx This value in the register bit diagram indicates whether software running on the controller can change the value of the bit field. Register Bit/Field Types RC Software can read this field. The bit or field is cleared by hardware after reading the bit/field. RO Software can read this field. Always write the chip reset value. R/W Software can read or write this field. Software can read or write this field. A write of a 0 to a W1C bit does not affect the bit value in the register. A write of a 1 clears the value of the bit in the register; the remaining bits remain unchanged. This register type is primarily used for clearing interrupt status bits where the read operation provides the interrupt status and the write of the read value clears only the interrupts being reported at the time the register was read. R/W1C Software can write this field. A write of a 0 to a W1C bit does not affect the bit value in the register. A write of a 1 clears the value of the bit in the register; the remaining bits remain unchanged. A read of the register returns no meaningful data. This register is typically used to clear the corresponding bit in an interrupt register. W1C WO Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. Register Bit/Field This value in the register bit diagram shows the bit/field value after any reset, unless noted. Reset Value 0 Bit cleared to 0 on chip reset. 1 Bit set to 1 on chip reset. - Nondeterministic. Pin/Signal Notation [ ] Pin alternate function; a pin defaults to the signal without the brackets. pin Refers to the physical connection on the package. signal Refers to the electrical signal encoding of a pin. Change the value of the signal from the logically False state to the logically True state. For active High signals, the asserted signal value is 1 (High); for active Low signals, the asserted signal value is 0 (Low). The active polarity (High or Low) is defined by the signal name (see SIGNAL and SIGNAL below). assert a signal deassert a signal Change the value of the signal from the logically True state to the logically False state. Signal names are in uppercase and in the Courier font. An overbar on a signal name indicates that it is active Low. To assert SIGNAL is to drive it Low; to deassert SIGNAL is to drive it High. SIGNAL Signal names are in uppercase and in the Courier font. An active High signal has no overbar. To assert SIGNAL is to drive it High; to deassert SIGNAL is to drive it Low. SIGNAL Numbers An uppercase X indicates any of several values is allowed, where X can be any legal pattern. For example, a binary value of 0X00 can be either 0100 or 0000, a hex value of 0xX is 0x0 or 0x1, and so on. X Hexadecimal numbers have a prefix of 0x. For example, 0x00FF is the hexadecimal number FF. All other numbers within register tables are assumed to be binary. Within conceptual information, binary numbers are indicated with a b suffix, for example, 1011b, and decimal numbers are written without a prefix or suffix. 0x November 30, 2007 21 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 1 Architectural Overview The Luminary Micro Stellaris® family of microcontrollers—the first ARM® Cortex™-M3 based controllers—brings high-performance 32-bit computing to cost-sensitive embedded microcontroller applications. These pioneering parts deliver customers 32-bit performance at a cost equivalent to legacy 8- and 16-bit devices, all in a package with a small footprint. The Stellaris® family offers efficient performance and extensive integration, favorably positioning the device into cost-conscious applications requiring significant control-processing and connectivity capabilities. The Stellaris® LM3S1000 series extends the Stellaris® family with larger on-chip memories, enhanced power management, and expanded I/O and control capabilities. The Stellaris® LM3S2000 series, designed for Controller Area Network (CAN) applications, extends the Stellaris family with Bosch CAN networking technology, the golden standard in short-haul industrial networks. The Stellaris® LM3S2000 series also marks the first integration of CAN capabilities with the revolutionary Cortex-M3 core. The Stellaris® LM3S6000 series combines both a 10/100 Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY) layer, marking the first time that integrated connectivity is available with an ARM Cortex-M3 MCU and the only integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY available in an ARM architecture MCU. The Stellaris® LM3S8000 series combines Bosch Controller Area Network technology with both a 10/100 Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY) layer. The LM3S6952 microcontroller is targeted for industrial applications, including remote monitoring, electronic point-of-sale machines, test and measurement equipment, network appliances and switches, factory automation, HVAC and building control, gaming equipment, motion control, medical instrumentation, and fire and security. For applications requiring extreme conservation of power, the LM3S6952 microcontroller features a Battery-backed Hibernation module to efficiently power down the LM3S6952 to a low-power state during extended periods of inactivity. With a power-up/power-down sequencer, a continuous time counter (RTC), a pair of match registers, an APB interface to the system bus, and dedicated non-volatile memory, the Hibernation module positions the LM3S6952 microcontroller perfectly for battery applications. In addition, the LM3S6952 microcontroller offers the advantages of ARM's widely available development tools, System-on-Chip (SoC) infrastructure IP applications, and a large user community. Additionally, the microcontroller uses ARM's Thumb®-compatible Thumb-2 instruction set to reduce memory requirements and, thereby, cost. Finally, the LM3S6952 microcontroller is code-compatible to all members of the extensive Stellaris® family; providing flexibility to fit our customers' precise needs. Luminary Micro offers a complete solution to get to market quickly, with evaluation and development boards, white papers and application notes, an easy-to-use peripheral driver library, and a strong support, sales, and distributor network. 1.1 Product Features The LM3S6952 microcontroller includes the following product features: ■ 32-Bit RISC Performance – 32-bit ARM® Cortex™-M3 v7M architecture optimized for small-footprint embedded applications 22 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview – System timer (SysTick), providing a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism – Thumb®-compatible Thumb-2-only instruction set processor core for high code density – 50-MHz operation – Hardware-division and single-cycle-multiplication – Integrated Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) providing deterministic interrupt handling – 34 interrupts with eight priority levels – Memory protection unit (MPU), providing a privileged mode for protected operating system functionality – Unaligned data access, enabling data to be efficiently packed into memory – Atomic bit manipulation (bit-banding), delivering maximum memory utilization and streamlined peripheral control ■ Internal Memory – 256 KB single-cycle flash • User-managed flash block protection on a 2-KB block basis • User-managed flash data programming • User-defined and managed flash-protection block – 64 KB single-cycle SRAM ■ General-Purpose Timers – Three General-Purpose Timer Modules (GPTM), each of which provides two 16-bit timers. Each GPTM can be configured to operate independently: • As a single 32-bit timer • As one 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) to event capture • For Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) • To trigger analog-to-digital conversions – 32-bit Timer modes • Programmable one-shot timer • Programmable periodic timer • Real-Time Clock when using an external 32.768-KHz clock as the input November 30, 2007 23 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller • User-enabled stalling in periodic and one-shot mode when the controller asserts the CPU Halt flag during debug • ADC event trigger – 16-bit Timer modes • General-purpose timer function with an 8-bit prescaler • Programmable one-shot timer • Programmable periodic timer • User-enabled stalling when the controller asserts CPU Halt flag during debug • ADC event trigger – 16-bit Input Capture modes • Input edge count capture • Input edge time capture – 16-bit PWM mode • Simple PWM mode with software-programmable output inversion of the PWM signal ■ ARM FiRM-compliant Watchdog Timer – 32-bit down counter with a programmable load register – Separate watchdog clock with an enable – Programmable interrupt generation logic with interrupt masking – Lock register protection from runaway software – Reset generation logic with an enable/disable – User-enabled stalling when the controller asserts the CPU Halt flag during debug ■ 10/100 Ethernet Controller – Conforms to the IEEE 802.3-2002 Specification – Full- and half-duplex for both 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps operation – Integrated 10/100 Mbps Transceiver (PHY) – Automatic MDI/MDI-X cross-over correction – Programmable MAC address – Power-saving and power-down modes ■ Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) 24 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview – Master or slave operation – Programmable clock bit rate and prescale – Separate transmit and receive FIFOs, 16 bits wide, 8 locations deep – Programmable interface operation for Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or Texas Instruments synchronous serial interfaces – Programmable data frame size from 4 to 16 bits – Internal loopback test mode for diagnostic/debug testing ■ UART – Three fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs with IrDA support – Separate 16x8 transmit (TX) and 16x12 receive (RX) FIFOs to reduce CPU interrupt service loading – Programmable baud-rate generator with fractional divider – Programmable FIFO length, including 1-byte deep operation providing conventional double-buffered interface – FIFO trigger levels of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 – Standard asynchronous communication bits for start, stop, and parity – False-start-bit detection – Line-break generation and detection ■ ADC – Single- and differential-input configurations – Three 10-bit channels (inputs) when used as single-ended inputs – Sample rate of 500 thousand samples/second – Flexible, configurable analog-to-digital conversion – Four programmable sample conversion sequences from one to eight entries long, with corresponding conversion result FIFOs – Each sequence triggered by software or internal event (timers, analog comparators, PWM or GPIO) – On-chip temperature sensor ■ Analog Comparators – Three independent integrated analog comparators November 30, 2007 25 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller – Configurable for output to: drive an output pin, generate an interrupt, or initiate an ADC sample sequence – Compare external pin input to external pin input or to internal programmable voltage reference ■ I2C – Master and slave receive and transmit operation with transmission speed up to 100 Kbps in Standard mode and 400 Kbps in Fast mode – Interrupt generation – Master with arbitration and clock synchronization, multimaster support, and 7-bit addressing mode ■ PWM – Two PWM generator blocks, each with one 16-bit counter, two comparators, a PWM generator, and a dead-band generator – One 16-bit counter • Runs in Down or Up/Down mode • Output frequency controlled by a 16-bit load value • Load value updates can be synchronized • Produces output signals at zero and load value – Two PWM comparators • Comparator value updates can be synchronized • Produces output signals on match – PWM generator • Output PWM signal is constructed based on actions taken as a result of the counter and PWM comparator output signals • Produces two independent PWM signals – Dead-band generator • Produces two PWM signals with programmable dead-band delays suitable for driving a half-H bridge • Can be bypassed, leaving input PWM signals unmodified – Flexible output control block with PWM output enable of each PWM signal • PWM output enable of each PWM signal • Optional output inversion of each PWM signal (polarity control) 26 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview • Optional fault handling for each PWM signal • Synchronization of timers in the PWM generator blocks • Synchronization of timer/comparator updates across the PWM generator blocks • Interrupt status summary of the PWM generator blocks – Can initiate an ADC sample sequence ■ QEI – Hardware position integrator tracks the encoder position – Velocity capture using built-in timer – Interrupt generation on index pulse, velocity-timer expiration, direction change, and quadrature error detection ■ GPIOs – 6-43 GPIOs, depending on configuration – 5-V-tolerant input/outputs – Programmable interrupt generation as either edge-triggered or level-sensitive – Bit masking in both read and write operations through address lines – Can initiate an ADC sample sequence – Programmable control for GPIO pad configuration: • Weak pull-up or pull-down resistors • 2-mA, 4-mA, and 8-mA pad drive • Slew rate control for the 8-mA drive • Open drain enables • Digital input enables ■ Power – On-chip Low Drop-Out (LDO) voltage regulator, with programmable output user-adjustable from 2.25 V to 2.75 V – Hibernation module handles the power-up/down 3.3 V sequencing and control for the core digital logic and analog circuits – Low-power options on controller: Sleep and Deep-sleep modes – Low-power options for peripherals: software controls shutdown of individual peripherals – User-enabled LDO unregulated voltage detection and automatic reset November 30, 2007 27 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller – 3.3-V supply brown-out detection and reporting via interrupt or reset ■ Flexible Reset Sources – Power-on reset (POR) – Reset pin assertion – Brown-out (BOR) detector alerts to system power drops – Software reset – Watchdog timer reset – Internal low drop-out (LDO) regulator output goes unregulated ■ Additional Features – Six reset sources – Programmable clock source control – Clock gating to individual peripherals for power savings – IEEE 1149.1-1990 compliant Test Access Port (TAP) controller – Debug access via JTAG and Serial Wire interfaces – Full JTAG boundary scan ■ Industrial-range 100-pin RoHS-compliant LQFP package 1.2 Target Applications ■ Remote monitoring ■ Electronic point-of-sale (POS) machines ■ Test and measurement equipment ■ Network appliances and switches ■ Factory automation ■ HVAC and building control ■ Gaming equipment ■ Motion control ■ Medical instrumentation ■ Fire and security ■ Power and energy ■ Transportation 28 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview 1.3 High-Level Block Diagram Figure 1-1 on page 29 represents the full set of features in the Stellaris® 6000 series of devices; not all features may be available on the LM3S6952 microcontroller. Figure 1-1. Stellaris® 6000 Series High-Level Block Diagram 1.4 Functional Overview The following sections provide an overview of the features of the LM3S6952 microcontroller. The page number in parenthesis indicates where that feature is discussed in detail. Ordering and support information can be found in “Ordering and Contact Information” on page 575. November 30, 2007 29 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 1.4.1 ARM Cortex™-M3 1.4.1.1 Processor Core (see page 37) All members of the Stellaris® product family, including the LM3S6952 microcontroller, are designed around an ARM Cortex™-M3 processor core. The ARM Cortex-M3 processor provides the core for a high-performance, low-cost platform that meets the needs of minimal memory implementation, reduced pin count, and low-power consumption, while delivering outstanding computational performance and exceptional system response to interrupts. “ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core” on page 37 provides an overview of the ARM core; the core is detailed in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 1.4.1.2 System Timer (SysTick) Cortex-M3 includes an integrated system timer, SysTick. SysTick provides a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism. The counter can be used in several different ways, for example: ■ An RTOS tick timer which fires at a programmable rate (for example, 100 Hz) and invokes a SysTick routine. ■ A high-speed alarm timer using the system clock. ■ A variable rate alarm or signal timer—the duration is range-dependent on the reference clock used and the dynamic range of the counter. ■ A simple counter. Software can use this to measure time to completion and time used. ■ An internal clock source control based on missing/meeting durations. The COUNTFLAG bit-field in the control and status register can be used to determine if an action completed within a set duration, as part of a dynamic clock management control loop. 1.4.1.3 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) The LM3S6952 controller includes the ARM Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) on the ARM Cortex-M3 core. The NVIC and Cortex-M3 prioritize and handle all exceptions. All exceptions are handled in Handler Mode. The processor state is automatically stored to the stack on an exception, and automatically restored from the stack at the end of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). The vector is fetched in parallel to the state saving, which enables efficient interrupt entry. The processor supports tail-chaining, which enables back-to-back interrupts to be performed without the overhead of state saving and restoration. Software can set eight priority levels on 7 exceptions (system handlers) and 34 interrupts. “Interrupts” on page 45 provides an overview of the NVIC controller and the interrupt map. Exceptions and interrupts are detailed in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 1.4.2 Motor Control Peripherals To enhance motor control, the LM3S6952 controller features Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) outputs and the Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI). 1.4.2.1 PWM Pulse width modulation (PWM) is a powerful technique for digitally encoding analog signal levels. High-resolution counters are used to generate a square wave, and the duty cycle of the square 30 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview wave is modulated to encode an analog signal. Typical applications include switching power supplies and motor control. On the LM3S6952, PWM motion control functionality can be achieved through: ■ Dedicated, flexible motion control hardware using the PWM pins ■ The motion control features of the general-purpose timers using the CCP pins PWM Pins (see page 466) The LM3S6952 PWM module consists of two PWM generator blocks and a control block. Each PWM generator block contains one timer (16-bit down or up/down counter), two comparators, a PWM signal generator, a dead-band generator, and an interrupt/ADC-trigger selector. The control block determines the polarity of the PWM signals, and which signals are passed through to the pins. Each PWM generator block produces two PWM signals that can either be independent signals or a single pair of complementary signals with dead-band delays inserted. The output of the PWM generation blocks are managed by the output control block before being passed to the device pins. CCP Pins (see page 210) The General-Purpose Timer Module's CCP (Capture Compare PWM) pins are software programmable to support a simple PWM mode with a software-programmable output inversion of the PWM signal. 1.4.2.2 QEI (see page 501) A quadrature encoder, also known as a 2-channel incremental encoder, converts linear displacement into a pulse signal. By monitoring both the number of pulses and the relative phase of the two signals, you can track the position, direction of rotation, and speed. In addition, a third channel, or index signal, can be used to reset the position counter. The Stellaris quadrature encoder with index (QEI) module interprets the code produced by a quadrature encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In addition, it can capture a running estimate of the velocity of the encoder wheel. 1.4.3 Analog Peripherals To handle analog signals, the LM3S6952 microcontroller offers an Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC). For support of analog signals, the LM3S6952 microcontroller offers three analog comparators. 1.4.3.1 ADC (see page 263) An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is a peripheral that converts a continuous analog voltage to a discrete digital number. The LM3S6952 ADC module features 10-bit conversion resolution and supports three input channels, plus an internal temperature sensor. Four buffered sample sequences allow rapid sampling of up to eight analog input sources without controller intervention. Each sample sequence provides flexible programming with fully configurable input source, trigger events, interrupt generation, and sequence priority. 1.4.3.2 Analog Comparators (see page 453) An analog comparator is a peripheral that compares two analog voltages, and provides a logical output that signals the comparison result. November 30, 2007 31 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller The LM3S6952 microcontroller provides three independent integrated analog comparators that can be configured to drive an output or generate an interrupt or ADC event. A comparator can compare a test voltage against any one of these voltages: ■ An individual external reference voltage ■ A shared single external reference voltage ■ A shared internal reference voltage The comparator can provide its output to a device pin, acting as a replacement for an analog comparator on the board, or it can be used to signal the application via interrupts or triggers to the ADC to cause it to start capturing a sample sequence. The interrupt generation and ADC triggering logic is separate. This means, for example, that an interrupt can be generated on a rising edge and the ADC triggered on a falling edge. 1.4.4 Serial Communications Peripherals The LM3S6952 controller supports both asynchronous and synchronous serial communications with: ■ Three fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs ■ One SSI module ■ One I2C module ■ Ethernet controller 1.4.4.1 UART (see page 296) A Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) is an integrated circuit used for RS-232C serial communications, containing a transmitter (parallel-to-serial converter) and a receiver (serial-to-parallel converter), each clocked separately. The LM3S6952 controller includes three fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs that support data transfer speeds up to 460.8 Kbps. (Although similar in functionality to a 16C550 UART, it is not register-compatible.) In addition, each UART is capable of supporting IrDA. Separate 16x8 transmit (TX) and 16x12 receive (RX) FIFOs reduce CPU interrupt service loading. The UART can generate individually masked interrupts from the RX, TX, modem status, and error conditions. The module provides a single combined interrupt when any of the interrupts are asserted and are unmasked. 1.4.4.2 SSI (see page 337) Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) is a four-wire bi-directional communications interface. The LM3S6952 controller includes one SSI module that provides the functionality for synchronous serial communications with peripheral devices, and can be configured to use the Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or TI synchronous serial interface frame formats. The size of the data frame is also configurable, and can be set between 4 and 16 bits, inclusive. The SSI module performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device, and parallel-to-serial conversion on data transmitted to a peripheral device. The TX and RX paths are buffered with internal FIFOs, allowing up to eight 16-bit values to be stored independently. 32 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview The SSI module can be configured as either a master or slave device. As a slave device, the SSI module can also be configured to disable its output, which allows a master device to be coupled with multiple slave devices. The SSI module also includes a programmable bit rate clock divider and prescaler to generate the output serial clock derived from the SSI module's input clock. Bit rates are generated based on the input clock and the maximum bit rate is determined by the connected peripheral. 1.4.4.3 I2C (see page 374) The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus provides bi-directional data transfer through a two-wire design (a serial data line SDA and a serial clock line SCL). The I2C bus interfaces to external I2C devices such as serial memory (RAMs and ROMs), networking devices, LCDs, tone generators, and so on. The I2C bus may also be used for system testing and diagnostic purposes in product development and manufacture. The LM3S6952 controller includes one I2C module that provides the ability to communicate to other IC devices over an I2C bus. The I2C bus supports devices that can both transmit and receive (write and read) data. Devices on the I2C bus can be designated as either a master or a slave. The I2C module supports both sending and receiving data as either a master or a slave, and also supports the simultaneous operation as both a master and a slave. The four I2C modes are: Master Transmit, Master Receive, Slave Transmit, and Slave Receive. A Stellaris® I2C module can operate at two speeds: Standard (100 Kbps) and Fast (400 Kbps). Both the I2C master and slave can generate interrupts. The I2C master generates interrupts when a transmit or receive operation completes (or aborts due to an error). The I2C slave generates interrupts when data has been sent or requested by a master. 1.4.4.4 Ethernet Controller (see page 409) Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Ethernet has been standardized as IEEE 802.3. It defines a number of wiring and signaling standards for the physical layer, two means of network access at the Media Access Control (MAC)/Data Link Layer, and a common addressing format. The Stellaris® Ethernet Controller consists of a fully integrated media access controller (MAC) and network physical (PHY) interface device. The Ethernet Controller conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications and fully supports 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX standards. In addition, the Ethernet Controller supports automatic MDI/MDI-X cross-over correction. 1.4.5 System Peripherals 1.4.5.1 Programmable GPIOs (see page 163) General-purpose input/output (GPIO) pins offer flexibility for a variety of connections. The Stellaris® GPIO module is composed of seven physical GPIO blocks, each corresponding to an individual GPIO port. The GPIO module is FiRM-compliant (compliant to the ARM Foundation IP for Real-Time Microcontrollers specification) and supports 6-43 programmable input/output pins. The number of GPIOs available depends on the peripherals being used (see “Signal Tables” on page 519 for the signals available to each GPIO pin). November 30, 2007 33 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller The GPIO module features programmable interrupt generation as either edge-triggered or level-sensitive on all pins, programmable control for GPIO pad configuration, and bit masking in both read and write operations through address lines. 1.4.5.2 Three Programmable Timers (see page 204) Programmable timers can be used to count or time external events that drive the Timer input pins. The Stellaris® General-Purpose Timer Module (GPTM) contains three GPTM blocks. Each GPTM block provides two 16-bit timers/counters that can be configured to operate independently as timers or event counters, or configured to operate as one 32-bit timer or one 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC). Timers can also be used to trigger analog-to-digital (ADC) conversions. When configured in 32-bit mode, a timer can run as a Real-Time Clock (RTC), one-shot timer or periodic timer. When in 16-bit mode, a timer can run as a one-shot timer or periodic timer, and can extend its precision by using an 8-bit prescaler. A 16-bit timer can also be configured for event capture or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) generation. 1.4.5.3 Watchdog Timer (see page 240) A watchdog timer can generate nonmaskable interrupts (NMIs) or a reset when a time-out value is reached. The watchdog timer is used to regain control when a system has failed due to a software error or to the failure of an external device to respond in the expected way. The Stellaris® Watchdog Timer module consists of a 32-bit down counter, a programmable load register, interrupt generation logic, and a locking register. The Watchdog Timer can be configured to generate an interrupt to the controller on its first time-out, and to generate a reset signal on its second time-out. Once the Watchdog Timer has been configured, the lock register can be written to prevent the timer configuration from being inadvertently altered. 1.4.6 Memory Peripherals The LM3S6952 controller offers both single-cycle SRAM and single-cycle Flash memory. 1.4.6.1 SRAM (see page 139) The LM3S6952 static random access memory (SRAM) controller supports 64 KB SRAM. The internal SRAM of the Stellaris® devices is located at offset 0x0000.0000 of the device memory map. To reduce the number of time-consuming read-modify-write (RMW) operations, ARM has introduced bit-banding technology in the new Cortex-M3 processor. With a bit-band-enabled processor, certain regions in the memory map (SRAM and peripheral space) can use address aliases to access individual bits in a single, atomic operation. 1.4.6.2 Flash (see page 140) The LM3S6952 Flash controller supports 256 KB of flash memory. The flash is organized as a set of 1-KB blocks that can be individually erased. Erasing a block causes the entire contents of the block to be reset to all 1s. These blocks are paired into a set of 2-KB blocks that can be individually protected. The blocks can be marked as read-only or execute-only, providing different levels of code protection. Read-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, protecting the contents of those blocks from being modified. Execute-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, and can only be read by the controller instruction fetch mechanism, protecting the contents of those blocks from being read by either the controller or by a debugger. 34 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview 1.4.7 Additional Features 1.4.7.1 Memory Map (see page 43) A memory map lists the location of instructions and data in memory. The memory map for the LM3S6952 controller can be found in “Memory Map” on page 43. Register addresses are given as a hexadecimal increment, relative to the module's base address as shown in the memory map. The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual provides further information on the memory map. 1.4.7.2 JTAG TAP Controller (see page 48) The Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) port provides a standardized serial interface for controlling the Test Access Port (TAP) and associated test logic. The TAP, JTAG instruction register, and JTAG data registers can be used to test the interconnects of assembled printed circuit boards, obtain manufacturing information on the components, and observe and/or control the inputs and outputs of the controller during normal operation. The JTAG port provides a high degree of testability and chip-level access at a low cost. The JTAG port is comprised of the standard five pins: TRST, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Data is transmitted serially into the controller on TDI and out of the controller on TDO. The interpretation of this data is dependent on the current state of the TAP controller. For detailed information on the operation of the JTAG port and TAP controller, please refer to the IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture. The Luminary Micro JTAG controller works with the ARM JTAG controller built into the Cortex-M3 core. This is implemented by multiplexing the TDO outputs from both JTAG controllers. ARM JTAG instructions select the ARM TDO output while Luminary Micro JTAG instructions select the Luminary Micro TDO outputs. The multiplexer is controlled by the Luminary Micro JTAG controller, which has comprehensive programming for the ARM, Luminary Micro, and unimplemented JTAG instructions. 1.4.7.3 System Control and Clocks (see page 59) System control determines the overall operation of the device. It provides information about the device, controls the clocking of the device and individual peripherals, and handles reset detection and reporting. 1.4.7.4 Hibernation Module (see page 120) The Hibernation module provides logic to switch power off to the main processor and peripherals, and to wake on external or time-based events. The Hibernation module includes power-sequencing logic, a real-time clock with a pair of match registers, low-battery detection circuitry, and interrupt signalling to the processor. It also includes 64 32-bit words of non-volatile memory that can be used for saving state during hibernation. 1.4.8 Hardware Details Details on the pins and package can be found in the following sections: ■ “Pin Diagram” on page 518 ■ “Signal Tables” on page 519 ■ “Operating Characteristics” on page 533 ■ “Electrical Characteristics” on page 534 November 30, 2007 35 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller ■ “Package Information” on page 549 36 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Architectural Overview 2 ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core The ARM Cortex-M3 processor provides the core for a high-performance, low-cost platform that meets the needs of minimal memory implementation, reduced pin count, and low power consumption, while delivering outstanding computational performance and exceptional system response to interrupts. Features include: ■ Compact core. ■ Thumb-2 instruction set, delivering the high-performance expected of an ARM core in the memory size usually associated with 8- and 16-bit devices; typically in the range of a few kilobytes of memory for microcontroller class applications. ■ Rapid application execution through Harvard architecture characterized by separate buses for instruction and data. ■ Exceptional interrupt handling, by implementing the register manipulations required for handling an interrupt in hardware. ■ Memory protection unit (MPU) to provide a privileged mode of operation for complex applications. ■ Migration from the ARM7™ processor family for better performance and power efficiency. ■ Full-featured debug solution with a: – Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP) – Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) unit for implementing breakpoints – Data Watchpoint and Trigger (DWT) unit for implementing watchpoints, trigger resources, and system profiling – Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) for support of printf style debugging – Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) for bridging to a Trace Port Analyzer The Stellaris® family of microcontrollers builds on this core to bring high-performance 32-bit computing to cost-sensitive embedded microcontroller applications, such as factory automation and control, industrial control power devices, building and home automation, and stepper motors. For more information on the ARM Cortex-M3 processor core, see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. For information on SWJ-DP, see the ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual. November 30, 2007 37 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 2.1 Block Diagram Figure 2-1. CPU Block Diagram Private Peripheral Bus (internal) Data Watchpoint and Trace Interrupts Debug Sleep Instrumentation Trace Macrocell Trace Port Interface Unit CM3 Core Instructions Data Flash Patch and Breakpoint Memory Protection Unit Adv. High- Perf. Bus Access Port Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port Bus Matrix Adv. Peripheral Bus I-code bus D-code bus System bus ROM Table Private Peripheral Bus (external) Serial Wire Output Trace Port (SWO) ARM Cortex-M3 2.2 Functional Description Important: The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual describes all the features of an ARM Cortex-M3 in detail. However, these features differ based on the implementation. This section describes the Stellaris® implementation. Luminary Micro has implemented the ARM Cortex-M3 core as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 38. As noted in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual, several Cortex-M3 components are flexible in their implementation: SW/JTAG-DP, ETM, TPIU, the ROM table, the MPU, and the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC). Each of these is addressed in the sections that follow. 2.2.1 Serial Wire and JTAG Debug Luminary Micro has replaced the ARM SW-DP and JTAG-DP with the ARM CoreSight™-compliant Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP) interface. This means Chapter 12, “Debug Port,” of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual does not apply to Stellaris® devices. The SWJ-DP interface combines the SWD and JTAG debug ports into one module. See the CoreSight™ Design Kit Technical Reference Manual for details on SWJ-DP. 38 November 30, 2007 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core 2.2.2 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) ETM was not implemented in the Stellaris® devices. This means Chapters 15 and 16 of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual can be ignored. 2.2.3 Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) The TPIU acts as a bridge between the Cortex-M3 trace data from the ITM, and an off-chip Trace Port Analyzer. The Stellaris® devices have implemented TPIU as shown in Figure 2-2 on page 39. This is similar to the non-ETM version described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual, however, SWJ-DP only provides SWV output for the TPIU. Figure 2-2. TPIU Block Diagram ATB Interface Asynchronous FIFO APB Interface Trace Out (serializer) Debug ATB Slave Port APB Slave Port Serial Wire Trace Port (SWO) 2.2.4 ROM Table The default ROM table was implemented as described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 2.2.5 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) The Memory Protection Unit (MPU) is included on the LM3S6952 controller and supports the standard ARMv7 Protected Memory System Architecture (PMSA) model. The MPU provides full support for protection regions, overlapping protection regions, access permissions, and exporting memory attributes to the system. 2.2.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) The Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC): ■ Facilitates low-latency exception and interrupt handling ■ Controls power management ■ Implements system control registers November 30, 2007 39 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller The NVIC supports up to 240 dynamically reprioritizable interrupts each with up to 256 levels of priority. The NVIC and the processor core interface are closely coupled, which enables low latency interrupt processing and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts. The NVIC maintains knowledge of the stacked (nested) interrupts to enable tail-chaining of interrupts. You can only fully access the NVIC from privileged mode, but you can pend interrupts in user-mode if you enable the Configuration Control Register (see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual). Any other user-mode access causes a bus fault. All NVIC registers are accessible using byte, halfword, and word unless otherwise stated. All NVIC registers and system debug registers are little endian regardless of the endianness state of the processor. 2.2.6.1 Interrupts The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual describes the maximum number of interrupts and interrupt priorities. The LM3S6952 microcontroller supports 34 interrupts with eight priority levels. 2.2.6.2 System Timer (SysTick) Cortex-M3 includes an integrated system timer, SysTick. SysTick provides a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism. The counter can be used in several different ways, for example: ■ An RTOS tick timer which fires at a programmable rate (for example, 100 Hz) and invokes a SysTick routine. ■ A high-speed alarm timer using the system clock. ■ A variable rate alarm or signal timer—the duration is range-dependent on the reference clock used and the dynamic range of the counter. ■ A simple counter. Software can use this to measure time to completion and time used. ■ An internal clock source control based on missing/meeting durations. The COUNTFLAG bit-field in the control and status register can be used to determine if an action completed within a set duration, as part of a dynamic clock management control loop. Functional Description The timer consists of three registers: ■ A control and status counter to configure its clock, enable the counter, enable the SysTick interrupt, and determine counter status. ■ The reload value for the counter, used to provide the counter's wrap value. ■ The current value of the counter. A fourth register, the SysTick Calibration Value Register, is not implemented in the Stellaris® devices. When enabled, the timer counts down from the reload value to zero, reloads (wraps) to the value in the SysTick Reload Value register on the next clock edge, then decrements on subsequent clocks. Writing a value of zero to the Reload Value register disables the counter on the next wrap. When the counter reaches zero, the COUNTFLAG status bit is set. The COUNTFLAG bit clears on reads. 40 November 30, 2007 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core Writing to the Current Value register clears the register and the COUNTFLAG status bit. The write does not trigger the SysTick exception logic. On a read, the current value is the value of the register at the time the register is accessed. If the core is in debug state (halted), the counter will not decrement. The timer is clocked with respect to a reference clock. The reference clock can be the core clock or an external clock source. SysTick Control and Status Register Use the SysTick Control and Status Register to enable the SysTick features. The reset is 0x0000.0000. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:17 reserved RO 0 Returns 1 if timer counted to 0 since last time this was read. Clears on read by application. If read by the debugger using the DAP, this bit is cleared on read-only if the MasterType bit in the AHB-AP Control Register is set to 0. Otherwise, the COUNTFLAG bit is not changed by the debugger read. 16 COUNTFLAG R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:3 reserved RO 0 0 = external reference clock. (Not implemented for Stellaris microcontrollers.) 1 = core clock. If no reference clock is provided, it is held at 1 and so gives the same time as the core clock. The core clock must be at least 2.5 times faster than the reference clock. If it is not, the count values are unpredictable. 2 CLKSOURCE R/W 0 1 = counting down to 0 pends the SysTick handler. 0 = counting down to 0 does not pend the SysTick handler. Software can use the COUNTFLAG to determine if ever counted to 0. 1 TICKINT R/W 0 1 = counter operates in a multi-shot way. That is, counter loads with the Reload value and then begins counting down. On reaching 0, it sets the COUNTFLAG to 1 and optionally pends the SysTick handler, based on TICKINT. It then loads the Reload value again, and begins counting. 0 = counter disabled. 0 ENABLE R/W 0 SysTick Reload Value Register Use the SysTick Reload Value Register to specify the start value to load into the current value register when the counter reaches 0. It can be any value between 1 and 0x00FF.FFFF. A start value of 0 is possible, but has no effect because the SysTick interrupt and COUNTFLAG are activated when counting from 1 to 0. Therefore, as a multi-shot timer, repeated over and over, it fires every N+1 clock pulse, where N is any value from 1 to 0x00FF.FFFF. So, if the tick interrupt is required every 100 clock pulses, 99 must be written into the RELOAD. If a new value is written on each tick interrupt, so treated as single shot, then the actual count down must be written. For example, if a tick is next required after 400 clock pulses, 400 must be written into the RELOAD. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:24 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 41 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 23:0 RELOAD W1C - Value to load into the SysTick Current Value Register when the counter reaches 0. SysTick Current Value Register Use the SysTick Current Value Register to find the current value in the register. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:24 reserved RO 0 Current value at the time the register is accessed. No read-modify-write protection is provided, so change with care. This register is write-clear. Writing to it with any value clears the register to 0. Clearing this register also clears the COUNTFLAG bit of the SysTick Control and Status Register. 23:0 CURRENT W1C - SysTick Calibration Value Register The SysTick Calibration Value register is not implemented. 42 November 30, 2007 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core 3 Memory Map The memory map for the LM3S6952 controller is provided in Table 3-1 on page 43. In this manual, register addresses are given as a hexadecimal increment, relative to the module’s base address as shown in the memory map. See also Chapter 4, “Memory Map” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. Important: In Table 3-1 on page 43, addresses not listed are reserved. Table 3-1. Memory Mapa For details on registers, see page ... Start End Description Memory 0x0000.0000 0x0003.FFFF On-chip flash b 143 0x2000.0000 0x2000.FFFF Bit-banded on-chip SRAMc 143 0x2010.0000 0x21FF.FFFF Reserved non-bit-banded SRAM space - 0x2200.0000 0x23FF.FFFF Bit-band alias of 0x2000.0000 through 0x200F.FFFF 139 0x2400.0000 0x3FFF.FFFF Reserved non-bit-banded SRAM space - FiRM Peripherals 0x4000.0000 0x4000.0FFF Watchdog timer 242 0x4000.4000 0x4000.4FFF GPIO Port A 169 0x4000.5000 0x4000.5FFF GPIO Port B 169 0x4000.6000 0x4000.6FFF GPIO Port C 169 0x4000.7000 0x4000.7FFF GPIO Port D 169 0x4000.8000 0x4000.8FFF SSI0 348 0x4000.C000 0x4000.CFFF UART0 303 0x4000.D000 0x4000.DFFF UART1 303 0x4000.E000 0x4000.EFFF UART2 303 Peripherals 0x4002.0000 0x4002.07FF I2C Master 0 387 0x4002.0800 0x4002.0FFF I2C Slave 0 400 0x4002.4000 0x4002.4FFF GPIO Port E 169 0x4002.5000 0x4002.5FFF GPIO Port F 169 0x4002.6000 0x4002.6FFF GPIO Port G 169 0x4002.8000 0x4002.8FFF PWM 472 0x4002.C000 0x4002.CFFF QEI0 505 0x4003.0000 0x4003.0FFF Timer0 215 0x4003.1000 0x4003.1FFF Timer1 215 0x4003.2000 0x4003.2FFF Timer2 215 0x4003.8000 0x4003.8FFF ADC 269 0x4003.C000 0x4003.CFFF Analog Comparators 453 0x4004.8000 0x4004.8FFF Ethernet Controller 417 0x400F.C000 0x400F.CFFF Hibernation Module 126 November 30, 2007 43 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller For details on registers, see page ... Start End Description 0x400F.D000 0x400F.DFFF Flash control 143 0x400F.E000 0x400F.EFFF System control 66 0x4200.0000 0x43FF.FFFF Bit-banded alias of 0x4000.0000 through 0x400F.FFFF - Private Peripheral Bus ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual 0xE000.0000 0xE000.0FFF Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) 0xE000.1000 0xE000.1FFF Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT) 0xE000.2000 0xE000.2FFF Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) 0xE000.3000 0xE000.DFFF Reserved 0xE000.E000 0xE000.EFFF Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) 0xE000.F000 0xE003.FFFF Reserved 0xE004.0000 0xE004.0FFF Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) 0xE004.1000 0xE004.1FFF Reserved - 0xE004.2000 0xE00F.FFFF Reserved - 0xE010.0000 0xFFFF.FFFF Reserved for vendor peripherals - a. All reserved space returns a bus fault when read or written. b. The unavailable flash will bus fault throughout this range. c. The unavailable SRAM will bus fault throughout this range. 44 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Memory Map 4 Interrupts The ARM Cortex-M3 processor and the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) prioritize and handle all exceptions. All exceptions are handled in Handler Mode. The processor state is automatically stored to the stack on an exception, and automatically restored from the stack at the end of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). The vector is fetched in parallel to the state saving, which enables efficient interrupt entry. The processor supports tail-chaining, which enables back-to-back interrupts to be performed without the overhead of state saving and restoration. Table 4-1 on page 45 lists all the exceptions. Software can set eight priority levels on seven of these exceptions (system handlers) as well as on 34 interrupts (listed in Table 4-2 on page 46). Priorities on the system handlers are set with the NVIC System Handler Priority registers. Interrupts are enabled through the NVIC Interrupt Set Enable register and prioritized with the NVIC Interrupt Priority registers. You can also group priorities by splitting priority levels into pre-emption priorities and subpriorities. All the interrupt registers are described in Chapter 8, “Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. Internally, the highest user-settable priority (0) is treated as fourth priority, after a Reset, NMI, and a Hard Fault. Note that 0 is the default priority for all the settable priorities. If you assign the same priority level to two or more interrupts, their hardware priority (the lower the position number) determines the order in which the processor activates them. For example, if both GPIO Port A and GPIO Port B are priority level 1, then GPIO Port A has higher priority. See Chapter 5, “Exceptions” and Chapter 8, “Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more information on exceptions and interrupts. Note: In Table 4-2 on page 46 interrupts not listed are reserved. Table 4-1. Exception Types Exception Type Position Prioritya Description - 0 - Stack top is loaded from first entry of vector table on reset. Invoked on power up and warm reset. On first instruction, drops to lowest priority (and then is called the base level of activation). This is asynchronous. Reset 1 -3 (highest) Cannot be stopped or preempted by any exception but reset. This is asynchronous. An NMI is only producible by software, using the NVIC Interrupt Control State register. Non-Maskable 2 -2 Interrupt (NMI) All classes of Fault, when the fault cannot activate due to priority or the configurable fault handler has been disabled. This is synchronous. Hard Fault 3 -1 MPU mismatch, including access violation and no match. This is synchronous. The priority of this exception can be changed. Memory Management 4 settable Pre-fetch fault, memory access fault, and other address/memory related faults. This is synchronous when precise and asynchronous when imprecise. You can enable or disable this fault. Bus Fault 5 settable Usage fault, such as undefined instruction executed or illegal state transition attempt. This is synchronous. Usage Fault 6 settable - 7-10 - Reserved. SVCall 11 settable System service call with SVC instruction. This is synchronous. November 30, 2007 45 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Exception Type Position Prioritya Description Debug monitor (when not halting). This is synchronous, but only active when enabled. It does not activate if lower priority than the current activation. Debug Monitor 12 settable - 13 - Reserved. Pendable request for system service. This is asynchronous and only pended by software. PendSV 14 settable SysTick 15 settable System tick timer has fired. This is asynchronous. Asserted from outside the ARM Cortex-M3 core and fed through the NVIC (prioritized). These are all asynchronous. Table 4-2 on page 46 lists the interrupts on the LM3S6952 controller. 16 and settable above Interrupts a. 0 is the default priority for all the settable priorities. Table 4-2. Interrupts Interrupt (Bit in Interrupt Registers) Description 0 GPIO Port A 1 GPIO Port B 2 GPIO Port C 3 GPIO Port D 4 GPIO Port E 5 UART0 6 UART1 7 SSI0 8 I2C0 9 PWM Fault 10 PWM Generator 0 11 PWM Generator 1 13 QEI0 14 ADC Sequence 0 15 ADC Sequence 1 16 ADC Sequence 2 17 ADC Sequence 3 18 Watchdog timer 19 Timer0 A 20 Timer0 B 21 Timer1 A 22 Timer1 B 23 Timer2 A 24 Timer2 B 25 Analog Comparator 0 26 Analog Comparator 1 27 Analog Comparator 2 28 System Control 29 Flash Control 30 GPIO Port F 46 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Interrupts Interrupt (Bit in Interrupt Registers) Description 31 GPIO Port G 33 UART2 42 Ethernet Controller 43 Hibernation Module November 30, 2007 47 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 5 JTAG Interface The Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) port is an IEEE standard that defines a Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture for digital integrated circuits and provides a standardized serial interface for controlling the associated test logic. The TAP, Instruction Register (IR), and Data Registers (DR) can be used to test the interconnections of assembled printed circuit boards and obtain manufacturing information on the components. The JTAG Port also provides a means of accessing and controlling design-for-test features such as I/O pin observation and control, scan testing, and debugging. The JTAG port is comprised of the standard five pins: TRST, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Data is transmitted serially into the controller on TDI and out of the controller on TDO. The interpretation of this data is dependent on the current state of the TAP controller. For detailed information on the operation of the JTAG port and TAP controller, please refer to the IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture. The Luminary Micro JTAG controller works with the ARM JTAG controller built into the Cortex-M3 core. This is implemented by multiplexing the TDO outputs from both JTAG controllers. ARM JTAG instructions select the ARM TDO output while Luminary Micro JTAG instructions select the Luminary Micro TDO outputs. The multiplexer is controlled by the Luminary Micro JTAG controller, which has comprehensive programming for the ARM, Luminary Micro, and unimplemented JTAG instructions. The JTAG module has the following features: ■ IEEE 1149.1-1990 compatible Test Access Port (TAP) controller ■ Four-bit Instruction Register (IR) chain for storing JTAG instructions ■ IEEE standard instructions: – BYPASS instruction – IDCODE instruction – SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction – EXTEST instruction – INTEST instruction ■ ARM additional instructions: – APACC instruction – DPACC instruction – ABORT instruction ■ Integrated ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) See the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more information on the ARM JTAG controller. 48 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.1 Block Diagram Figure 5-1. JTAG Module Block Diagram Instruction Register (IR) TAP Controller BYPASS Data Register Boundary Scan Data Register IDCODE Data Register ABORT Data Register DPACC Data Register APACC Data Register TRST TCK TMS TDI TDO Cortex-M3 Debug Port 5.2 Functional Description A high-level conceptual drawing of the JTAG module is shown in Figure 5-1 on page 49. The JTAG module is composed of the Test Access Port (TAP) controller and serial shift chains with parallel update registers. The TAP controller is a simple state machine controlled by the TRST, TCK and TMS inputs. The current state of the TAP controller depends on the current value of TRST and the sequence of values captured on TMS at the rising edge of TCK. The TAP controller determines when the serial shift chains capture new data, shift data from TDI towards TDO, and update the parallel load registers. The current state of the TAP controller also determines whether the Instruction Register (IR) chain or one of the Data Register (DR) chains is being accessed. The serial shift chains with parallel load registers are comprised of a single Instruction Register (IR) chain and multiple Data Register (DR) chains. The current instruction loaded in the parallel load register determines which DR chain is captured, shifted, or updated during the sequencing of the TAP controller. Some instructions, like EXTEST and INTEST, operate on data currently in a DR chain and do not capture, shift, or update any of the chains. Instructions that are not implemented decode to the BYPASS instruction to ensure that the serial path between TDI and TDO is always connected (see Table 5-2 on page 55 for a list of implemented instructions). See “JTAG and Boundary Scan” on page 545 for JTAG timing diagrams. November 30, 2007 49 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 5.2.1 JTAG Interface Pins The JTAG interface consists of five standard pins: TRST, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. These pins and their associated reset state are given in Table 5-1 on page 50. Detailed information on each pin follows. Table 5-1. JTAG Port Pins Reset State Pin Name Data Direction Internal Pull-Up Internal Pull-Down Drive Strength Drive Value TRST Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TCK Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TMS Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TDI Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TDO Output Enabled Disabled 2-mA driver High-Z 5.2.1.1 Test Reset Input (TRST) The TRST pin is an asynchronous active Low input signal for initializing and resetting the JTAG TAP controller and associated JTAG circuitry. When TRST is asserted, the TAP controller resets to the Test-Logic-Reset state and remains there while TRST is asserted. When the TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state, the JTAG Instruction Register (IR) resets to the default instruction, IDCODE. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TRST pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port B should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PB7/TRST; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.2 Test Clock Input (TCK) The TCK pin is the clock for the JTAG module. This clock is provided so the test logic can operate independently of any other system clocks. In addition, it ensures that multiple JTAG TAP controllers that are daisy-chained together can synchronously communicate serial test data between components. During normal operation, TCK is driven by a free-running clock with a nominal 50% duty cycle. When necessary, TCK can be stopped at 0 or 1 for extended periods of time. While TCK is stopped at 0 or 1, the state of the TAP controller does not change and data in the JTAG Instruction and Data Registers is not lost. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TCK pin is enabled after reset. This assures that no clocking occurs if the pin is not driven from an external source. The internal pull-up and pull-down resistors can be turned off to save internal power as long as the TCK pin is constantly being driven by an external source. 5.2.1.3 Test Mode Select (TMS) The TMS pin selects the next state of the JTAG TAP controller. TMS is sampled on the rising edge of TCK. Depending on the current TAP state and the sampled value of TMS, the next state is entered. Because the TMS pin is sampled on the rising edge of TCK, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TMS to change on the falling edge of TCK. Holding TMS high for five consecutive TCK cycles drives the TAP controller state machine to the Test-Logic-Reset state. When the TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state, the JTAG Instruction Register (IR) resets to the default instruction, IDCODE. Therefore, this sequence can be used as a reset mechanism, similar to asserting TRST. The JTAG Test Access Port state machine can be seen in its entirety in Figure 5-2 on page 52. 50 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TMS pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port C should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PC1/TMS; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.4 Test Data Input (TDI) The TDI pin provides a stream of serial information to the IR chain and the DR chains. TDI is sampled on the rising edge of TCK and, depending on the current TAP state and the current instruction, presents this data to the proper shift register chain. Because the TDI pin is sampled on the rising edge of TCK, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TDI to change on the falling edge of TCK. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TDI pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port C should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PC2/TDI; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.5 Test Data Output (TDO) The TDO pin provides an output stream of serial information from the IR chain or the DR chains. The value of TDO depends on the current TAP state, the current instruction, and the data in the chain being accessed. In order to save power when the JTAG port is not being used, the TDO pin is placed in an inactive drive state when not actively shifting out data. Because TDO can be connected to the TDI of another controller in a daisy-chain configuration, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TDO to change on the falling edge of TCK. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TDO pin is enabled after reset. This assures that the pin remains at a constant logic level when the JTAG port is not being used. The internal pull-up and pull-down resistors can be turned off to save internal power if a High-Z output value is acceptable during certain TAP controller states. 5.2.2 JTAG TAP Controller The JTAG TAP controller state machine is shown in Figure 5-2 on page 52. The TAP controller state machine is reset to the Test-Logic-Reset state on the assertion of a Power-On-Reset (POR) or the assertion of TRST. Asserting the correct sequence on the TMS pin allows the JTAG module to shift in new instructions, shift in data, or idle during extended testing sequences. For detailed information on the function of the TAP controller and the operations that occur in each state, please refer to IEEE Standard 1149.1. November 30, 2007 51 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 5-2. Test Access Port State Machine Test Logic Reset Run Test Idle Select DR Scan Select IR Scan Capture DR Capture IR Shift DR Shift IR Exit 1 DR Exit 1 IR Exit 2 DR Exit 2 IR Pause DR Pause IR Update DR Update IR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5.2.3 Shift Registers The Shift Registers consist of a serial shift register chain and a parallel load register. The serial shift register chain samples specific information during the TAP controller’s CAPTURE states and allows this information to be shifted out of TDO during the TAP controller’s SHIFT states. While the sampled data is being shifted out of the chain on TDO, new data is being shifted into the serial shift register on TDI. This new data is stored in the parallel load register during the TAP controller’s UPDATE states. Each of the shift registers is discussed in detail in “Register Descriptions” on page 55. 5.2.4 Operational Considerations There are certain operational considerations when using the JTAG module. Because the JTAG pins can be programmed to be GPIOs, board configuration and reset conditions on these pins must be considered. In addition, because the JTAG module has integrated ARM Serial Wire Debug, the method for switching between these two operational modes is described below. 52 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.2.4.1 GPIO Functionality When the controller is reset with either a POR or RST, the JTAG/SWD port pins default to their JTAG/SWD configurations. The default configuration includes enabling digital functionality (setting GPIODEN to 1), enabling the pull-up resistors (setting GPIOPUR to 1), and enabling the alternate hardware function (setting GPIOAFSEL to 1) for the PB7 and PC[3:0] JTAG/SWD pins. It is possible for software to configure these pins as GPIOs after reset by writing 0s to PB7 and PC[3:0] in the GPIOAFSEL register. If the user does not require the JTAG/SWD port for debugging or board-level testing, this provides five more GPIOs for use in the design. Caution – If the JTAG pins are used as GPIOs in a design, PB7 and PC2 cannot have external pull-down resistors connected to both of them at the same time. If both pins are pulled Low during reset, the controller has unpredictable behavior. If this happens, remove one or both of the pull-down resistors, and apply RST or power-cycle the part. In addition, it is possible to create a software sequence that prevents the debugger from connecting to the Stellaris® microcontroller. If the program code loaded into flash immediately changes the JTAG pins to their GPIO functionality, the debugger may not have enough time to connect and halt the controller before the JTAG pin functionality switches. This may lock the debugger out of the part. This can be avoided with a software routine that restores JTAG functionality based on an external or software trigger. The commit control registers provide a layer of protection against accidental programming of critical hardware peripherals. Writes to protected bits of the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register (see page 179) are not committed to storage unless the GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK) register (see page 189) has been unlocked and the appropriate bits of the GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) register (see page 190) have been set to 1. Recovering a "Locked" Device If software configures any of the JTAG/SWD pins as GPIO and loses the ability to communicate with the debugger, there is a debug sequence that can be used to recover the device. Performing a total of ten JTAG-to-SWD and SWD-to-JTAG switch sequences while holding the device in reset mass erases the flash memory. The sequence to recover the device is: 1. Assert and hold the RST signal. 2. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 3. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 4. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 5. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 6. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 7. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 8. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 9. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 10. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 11. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. November 30, 2007 53 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 12. Release the RST signal. The JTAG-to-SWD and SWD-to-JTAG switch sequences are described in “ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD)” on page 54. When performing switch sequences for the purpose of recovering the debug capabilities of the device, only steps 1 and 2 of the switch sequence need to be performed. 5.2.4.2 ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) In order to seamlessly integrate the ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) functionality, a serial-wire debugger must be able to connect to the Cortex-M3 core without having to perform, or have any knowledge of, JTAG cycles. This is accomplished with a SWD preamble that is issued before the SWD session begins. The preamble used to enable the SWD interface of the SWJ-DP module starts with the TAP controller in the Test-Logic-Reset state. From here, the preamble sequences the TAP controller through the following states: Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, Test Logic Reset, Test Logic Reset, Run Test Idle, Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, Test Logic Reset, Test Logic Reset, Run Test Idle, Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, and Test Logic Reset states. Stepping through this sequences of the TAP state machine enables the SWD interface and disables the JTAG interface. For more information on this operation and the SWD interface, see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual and the ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual. Because this sequence is a valid series of JTAG operations that could be issued, the ARM JTAG TAP controller is not fully compliant to the IEEE Standard 1149.1. This is the only instance where the ARM JTAG TAP controller does not meet full compliance with the specification. Due to the low probability of this sequence occurring during normal operation of the TAP controller, it should not affect normal performance of the JTAG interface. JTAG-to-SWD Switching To switch the operating mode of the Debug Access Port (DAP) from JTAG to SWD mode, the external debug hardware must send a switch sequence to the device. The 16-bit switch sequence for switching to SWD mode is defined as b1110011110011110, transmitted LSB first. This can also be represented as 16'hE79E when transmitted LSB first. The complete switch sequence should consist of the following transactions on the TCK/SWCLK and TMS/SWDIO signals: 1. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that both JTAG and SWD are in their reset/idle states. 2. Send the 16-bit JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence, 16'hE79E. 3. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that if SWJ-DP was already in SWD mode, before sending the switch sequence, the SWD goes into the line reset state. SWD-to-JTAG Switching To switch the operating mode of the Debug Access Port (DAP) from SWD to JTAG mode, the external debug hardware must send a switch sequence to the device. The 16-bit switch sequence for switching to JTAG mode is defined as b1110011110011110, transmitted LSB first. This can also be represented as 16'hE73C when transmitted LSB first. The complete switch sequence should consist of the following transactions on the TCK/SWCLK and TMS/SWDIO signals: 1. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that both JTAG and SWD are in their reset/idle states. 54 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface 2. Send the 16-bit SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence, 16'hE73C. 3. Send at least 5 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that if SWJ-DP was already in JTAG mode, before sending the switch sequence, the JTAG goes into the Test Logic Reset state. 5.3 Initialization and Configuration After a Power-On-Reset or an external reset (RST), the JTAG pins are automatically configured for JTAG communication. No user-defined initialization or configuration is needed. However, if the user application changes these pins to their GPIO function, they must be configured back to their JTAG functionality before JTAG communication can be restored. This is done by enabling the five JTAG pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]) for their alternate function using the GPIOAFSEL register. 5.4 Register Descriptions There are no APB-accessible registers in the JTAG TAP Controller or Shift Register chains. The registers within the JTAG controller are all accessed serially through the TAP Controller. The registers can be broken down into two main categories: Instruction Registers and Data Registers. 5.4.1 Instruction Register (IR) The JTAG TAP Instruction Register (IR) is a four-bit serial scan chain with a parallel load register connected between the JTAG TDI and TDO pins. When the TAP Controller is placed in the correct states, bits can be shifted into the Instruction Register. Once these bits have been shifted into the chain and updated, they are interpreted as the current instruction. The decode of the Instruction Register bits is shown in Table 5-2 on page 55. A detailed explanation of each instruction, along with its associated Data Register, follows. Table 5-2. JTAG Instruction Register Commands IR[3:0] Instruction Description Drives the values preloaded into the Boundary Scan Chain by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction onto the pads. 0000 EXTEST Drives the values preloaded into the Boundary Scan Chain by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction into the controller. 0001 INTEST Captures the current I/O values and shifts the sampled values out of the Boundary Scan Chain while new preload data is shifted in. 0010 SAMPLE / PRELOAD 1000 ABORT Shifts data into the ARM Debug Port Abort Register. 1010 DPACC Shifts data into and out of the ARM DP Access Register. 1011 APACC Shifts data into and out of the ARM AC Access Register. Loads manufacturing information defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 into the IDCODE chain and shifts it out. 1110 IDCODE 1111 BYPASS Connects TDI to TDO through a single Shift Register chain. All Others Reserved Defaults to the BYPASS instruction to ensure that TDI is always connected to TDO. 5.4.1.1 EXTEST Instruction The EXTEST instruction does not have an associated Data Register chain. The EXTEST instruction uses the data that has been preloaded into the Boundary Scan Data Register using the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction. When the EXTEST instruction is present in the Instruction Register, the preloaded data in the Boundary Scan Data Register associated with the outputs and output enables are used to drive the GPIO pads rather than the signals coming from the core. This allows November 30, 2007 55 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller tests to be developed that drive known values out of the controller, which can be used to verify connectivity. 5.4.1.2 INTEST Instruction The INTEST instruction does not have an associated Data Register chain. The INTEST instruction uses the data that has been preloaded into the Boundary Scan Data Register using the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction. When the INTEST instruction is present in the Instruction Register, the preloaded data in the Boundary Scan Data Register associated with the inputs are used to drive the signals going into the core rather than the signals coming from the GPIO pads. This allows tests to be developed that drive known values into the controller, which can be used for testing. It is important to note that although the RST input pin is on the Boundary Scan Data Register chain, it is only observable. 5.4.1.3 SAMPLE/PRELOAD Instruction The SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction connects the Boundary Scan Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction samples the current state of the pad pins for observation and preloads new test data. Each GPIO pad has an associated input, output, and output enable signal. When the TAP controller enters the Capture DR state during this instruction, the input, output, and output-enable signals to each of the GPIO pads are captured. These samples are serially shifted out of TDO while the TAP controller is in the Shift DR state and can be used for observation or comparison in various tests. While these samples of the inputs, outputs, and output enables are being shifted out of the Boundary Scan Data Register, new data is being shifted into the Boundary Scan Data Register from TDI. Once the new data has been shifted into the Boundary Scan Data Register, the data is saved in the parallel load registers when the TAP controller enters the Update DR state. This update of the parallel load register preloads data into the Boundary Scan Data Register that is associated with each input, output, and output enable. This preloaded data can be used with the EXTEST and INTEST instructions to drive data into or out of the controller. Please see “Boundary Scan Data Register” on page 58 for more information. 5.4.1.4 ABORT Instruction The ABORT instruction connects the associated ABORT Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the ABORT Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this Data Register clears various error bits or initiates a DAP abort of a previous request. Please see the “ABORT Data Register” on page 58 for more information. 5.4.1.5 DPACC Instruction The DPACC instruction connects the associated DPACC Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the DPACC Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this register and reading the data output from this register allows read and write access to the ARM debug and status registers. Please see “DPACC Data Register” on page 58 for more information. 5.4.1.6 APACC Instruction The APACC instruction connects the associated APACC Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the APACC Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this register and reading the data output from this register allows read and write access to internal components and buses through the Debug Port. Please see “APACC Data Register” on page 58 for more information. 56 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.4.1.7 IDCODE Instruction The IDCODE instruction connects the associated IDCODE Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides information on the manufacturer, part number, and version of the ARM core. This information can be used by testing equipment and debuggers to automatically configure their input and output data streams. IDCODE is the default instruction that is loaded into the JTAG Instruction Register when a power-on-reset (POR) is asserted, TRST is asserted, or the Test-Logic-Reset state is entered. Please see “IDCODE Data Register” on page 57 for more information. 5.4.1.8 BYPASS Instruction The BYPASS instruction connects the associated BYPASS Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction is used to create a minimum length serial path between the TDI and TDO ports. The BYPASS Data Register is a single-bit shift register. This instruction improves test efficiency by allowing components that are not needed for a specific test to be bypassed in the JTAG scan chain by loading them with the BYPASS instruction. Please see “BYPASS Data Register” on page 57 for more information. 5.4.2 Data Registers The JTAG module contains six Data Registers. These include: IDCODE, BYPASS, Boundary Scan, APACC, DPACC, and ABORT serial Data Register chains. Each of these Data Registers is discussed in the following sections. 5.4.2.1 IDCODE Data Register The format for the 32-bit IDCODE Data Register defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 is shown in Figure 5-3 on page 57. The standard requires that every JTAG-compliant device implement either the IDCODE instruction or the BYPASS instruction as the default instruction. The LSB of the IDCODE Data Register is defined to be a 1 to distinguish it from the BYPASS instruction, which has an LSB of 0. This allows auto configuration test tools to determine which instruction is the default instruction. The major uses of the JTAG port are for manufacturer testing of component assembly, and program development and debug. To facilitate the use of auto-configuration debug tools, the IDCODE instruction outputs a value of 0x3BA00477. This value indicates an ARM Cortex-M3, Version 1 processor. This allows the debuggers to automatically configure themselves to work correctly with the Cortex-M3 during debug. Figure 5-3. IDCODE Register Format 5.4.2.2 BYPASS Data Register The format for the 1-bit BYPASS Data Register defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 is shown in Figure 5-4 on page 58. The standard requires that every JTAG-compliant device implement either the BYPASS instruction or the IDCODE instruction as the default instruction. The LSB of the BYPASS Data Register is defined to be a 0 to distinguish it from the IDCODE instruction, which has an LSB of 1. This allows auto configuration test tools to determine which instruction is the default instruction. November 30, 2007 57 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 5-4. BYPASS Register Format 5.4.2.3 Boundary Scan Data Register The format of the Boundary Scan Data Register is shown in Figure 5-5 on page 58. Each GPIO pin, in a counter-clockwise direction from the JTAG port pins, is included in the Boundary Scan Data Register. Each GPIO pin has three associated digital signals that are included in the chain. These signals are input, output, and output enable, and are arranged in that order as can be seen in the figure. In addition to the GPIO pins, the controller reset pin, RST, is included in the chain. Because the reset pin is always an input, only the input signal is included in the Data Register chain. When the Boundary Scan Data Register is accessed with the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction, the input, output, and output enable from each digital pad are sampled and then shifted out of the chain to be verified. The sampling of these values occurs on the rising edge of TCK in the Capture DR state of the TAP controller. While the sampled data is being shifted out of the Boundary Scan chain in the Shift DR state of the TAP controller, new data can be preloaded into the chain for use with the EXTEST and INTEST instructions. These instructions either force data out of the controller, with the EXTEST instruction, or into the controller, with the INTEST instruction. Figure 5-5. Boundary Scan Register Format O TDO TDI O IN E UT O O IN U E T O O IN E UT O O IN U E T I N ... ... GPIO PB6 GPIO m RST GPIO m+1 GPIO n For detailed information on the order of the input, output, and output enable bits for each of the GPIO ports, please refer to the Stellaris® Family Boundary Scan Description Language (BSDL) files, downloadable from www.luminarymicro.com. 5.4.2.4 APACC Data Register The format for the 35-bit APACC Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 5.4.2.5 DPACC Data Register The format for the 35-bit DPACC Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 5.4.2.6 ABORT Data Register The format for the 35-bit ABORT Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 58 November 30, 2007 Preliminary JTAG Interface 6 System Control System control determines the overall operation of the device. It provides information about the device, controls the clocking to the core and individual peripherals, and handles reset detection and reporting. 6.1 Functional Description The System Control module provides the following capabilities: ■ Device identification, see “Device Identification” on page 59 ■ Local control, such as reset (see “Reset Control” on page 59), power (see “Power Control” on page 62) and clock control (see “Clock Control” on page 62) ■ System control (Run, Sleep, and Deep-Sleep modes), see “System Control” on page 64 6.1.1 Device Identification Seven read-only registers provide software with information on the microcontroller, such as version, part number, SRAM size, flash size, and other features. See the DID0, DID1, and DC0-DC4 registers. 6.1.2 Reset Control This section discusses aspects of hardware functions during reset as well as system software requirements following the reset sequence. 6.1.2.1 CMOD0 and CMOD1 Test-Mode Control Pins Two pins, CMOD0 and CMOD1, are defined for use by Luminary Micro for testing the devices during manufacture. They have no end-user function and should not be used. The CMOD pins should be connected to ground. 6.1.2.2 Reset Sources The controller has five sources of reset: 1. External reset input pin (RST) assertion, see “RST Pin Assertion” on page 59. 2. Power-on reset (POR), see “Power-On Reset (POR)” on page 60. 3. Internal brown-out (BOR) detector, see “Brown-Out Reset (BOR)” on page 60. 4. Software-initiated reset (with the software reset registers), see “Software Reset” on page 61. 5. A watchdog timer reset condition violation, see “Watchdog Timer Reset” on page 61. After a reset, the Reset Cause (RESC) register is set with the reset cause. The bits in this register are sticky and maintain their state across multiple reset sequences, except when an internal POR is the cause, and then all the other bits in the RESC register are cleared except for the POR indicator. 6.1.2.3 RST Pin Assertion The external reset pin (RST) resets the controller. This resets the core and all the peripherals except the JTAG TAP controller (see “JTAG Interface” on page 48). The external reset sequence is as follows: November 30, 2007 59 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 1. The external reset pin (RST) is asserted and then de-asserted. 2. The internal reset is released and the core loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. A few clocks cycles from RST de-assertion to the start of the reset sequence is necessary for synchronization. The external reset timing is shown in Figure 23-11 on page 547. 6.1.2.4 Power-On Reset (POR) The Power-On Reset (POR) circuit monitors the power supply voltage (VDD). The POR circuit generates a reset signal to the internal logic when the power supply ramp reaches a threshold value (VTH). If the application only uses the POR circuit, the RST input needs to be connected to the power supply (VDD) through a pull-up resistor (1K to 10K Ω). The device must be operating within the specified operating parameters at the point when the on-chip power-on reset pulse is complete. The 3.3-V power supply to the device must reach 3.0 V within 10 msec of it crossing 2.0 V to guarantee proper operation. For applications that require the use of an external reset to hold the device in reset longer than the internal POR, the RST input may be used with the circuit as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 60. Figure 6-1. External Circuitry to Extend Reset R1 C1 R2 RST Stellaris D1 The R1 and C1 components define the power-on delay. The R2 resistor mitigates any leakage from the RST input. The diode (D1) discharges C1 rapidly when the power supply is turned off. The Power-On Reset sequence is as follows: 1. The controller waits for the later of external reset (RST) or internal POR to go inactive. 2. The internal reset is released and the core loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. The internal POR is only active on the initial power-up of the controller. The Power-On Reset timing is shown in Figure 23-12 on page 548. Note: The power-on reset also resets the JTAG controller. An external reset does not. 6.1.2.5 Brown-Out Reset (BOR) A drop in the input voltage resulting in the assertion of the internal brown-out detector can be used to reset the controller. This is initially disabled and may be enabled by software. The system provides a brown-out detection circuit that triggers if the power supply (VDD) drops below a brown-out threshold voltage (VBTH). If a brown-out condition is detected, the system may generate a controller interrupt or a system reset. 60 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Brown-out resets are controlled with the Power-On and Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL) register. The BORIOR bit in the PBORCTL register must be set for a brown-out condition to trigger a reset. The brown-out reset is equivelent to an assertion of the external RST input and the reset is held active until the proper VDD level is restored. The RESC register can be examined in the reset interrupt handler to determine if a Brown-Out condition was the cause of the reset, thus allowing software to determine what actions are required to recover. The internal Brown-Out Reset timing is shown in Figure 23-13 on page 548. 6.1.2.6 Software Reset Software can reset a specific peripheral or generate a reset to the entire system . Peripherals can be individually reset by software via three registers that control reset signals to each peripheral (see the SRCRn registers). If the bit position corresponding to a peripheral is set and subsequently cleared, the peripheral is reset. The encoding of the reset registers is consistent with the encoding of the clock gating control for peripherals and on-chip functions (see “System Control” on page 64). Note that all reset signals for all clocks of the specified unit are asserted as a result of a software-initiated reset. The entire system can be reset by software by setting the SYSRESETREQ bit in the Cortex-M3 Application Interrupt and Reset Control register resets the entire system including the core. The software-initiated system reset sequence is as follows: 1. A software system reset is initiated by writing the SYSRESETREQ bit in the ARM Cortex-M3 Application Interrupt and Reset Control register. 2. An internal reset is asserted. 3. The internal reset is deasserted and the controller loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, and the first instruction designated by the program counter, and then begins execution. The software-initiated system reset timing is shown in Figure 23-14 on page 548. 6.1.2.7 Watchdog Timer Reset The watchdog timer module's function is to prevent system hangs. The watchdog timer can be configured to generate an interrupt to the controller on its first time-out, and to generate a reset signal on its second time-out. After the first time-out event, the 32-bit counter is reloaded with the value of the Watchdog Timer Load (WDTLOAD) register, and the timer resumes counting down from that value. If the timer counts down to its zero state again before the first time-out interrupt is cleared, and the reset signal has been enabled, the watchdog timer asserts its reset signal to the system. The watchdog timer reset sequence is as follows: 1. The watchdog timer times out for the second time without being serviced. 2. An internal reset is asserted. 3. The internal reset is released and the controller loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. November 30, 2007 61 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller The watchdog reset timing is shown in Figure 23-15 on page 548. 6.1.3 Power Control The Stellaris® microcontroller provides an integrated LDO regulator that may be used to provide power to the majority of the controller's internal logic. The LDO regulator provides software a mechanism to adjust the regulated value, in small increments (VSTEP), over the range of 2.25 V to 2.75 V (inclusive)—or 2.5 V ± 10%. The adjustment is made by changing the value of the VADJ field in the LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL) register. Note: The use of the LDO is optional. The internal logic may be supplied by the on-chip LDO or by an external regulator. If the LDO is used, the LDO output pin is connected to the VDD25 pins on the printed circuit board. The LDO requires decoupling capacitors on the printed circuit board. If an external regulator is used, it is strongly recommended that the external regulator supply the controller only and not be shared with other devices on the printed circuit board. 6.1.4 Clock Control System control determines the control of clocks in this part. 6.1.4.1 Fundamental Clock Sources There are four clock sources for use in the device: ■ Internal Oscillator (IOSC): The internal oscillator is an on-chip clock source. It does not require the use of any external components. The frequency of the internal oscillator is 12 MHz ± 30%. Applications that do not depend on accurate clock sources may use this clock source to reduce system cost. The internal oscillator is the clock source the device uses during and following POR. If the main oscillator is required, software must enable the main oscillator following reset and allow the main oscillator to stabilize before changing the clock reference. ■ Main Oscillator: The main oscillator provides a frequency-accurate clock source by one of two means: an external single-ended clock source is connected to the OSC0 input pin, or an external crystal is connected across the OSC0 input and OSC1 output pins. The crystal value allowed depends on whether the main oscillator is used as the clock reference source to the PLL. If so, the crystal must be one of the supported frequencies between 3.579545 MHz through 8.192 MHz (inclusive). If the PLL is not being used, the crystal may be any one of the supported frequencies between 1 MHz and 8.192 MHz. The single-ended clock source range is from DC through the specified speed of the device. The supported crystals are listed in the XTAL bit in the RCC register (see page 75). ■ Internal 30-kHz Oscillator: The internal 30-kHz oscillator is similar to the internal oscillator, except that it provides an operational frequency of 30 kHz ± 30%. It is intended for use during Deep-Sleep power-saving modes. This power-savings mode benefits from reduced internal switching and also allows the main oscillator to be powered down. ■ External Real-Time Oscillator: The external real-time oscillator provides a low-frequency, accurate clock reference. It is intended to provide the system with a real-time clock source. The real-time oscillator is part of the Hibernation Module (“Hibernation Module” on page 120) and may also provide an accurate source of Deep-Sleep or Hibernate mode power savings. The internal system clock (sysclk), is derived from any of the four sources plus two others: the output of the internal PLL, and the internal oscillator divided by four (3 MHz ± 30%). The frequency of the PLL clock reference must be in the range of 3.579545 MHz to 8.192 MHz (inclusive). 62 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control The Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) and Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2) registers provide control for the system clock. The RCC2 register is provided to extend fields that offer additional encodings over the RCC register. When used, the RCC2 register field values are used by the logic over the corresponding field in the RCC register. In particular, RCC2 provides for a larger assortment of clock configuration options. 6.1.4.2 Crystal Configuration for the Main Oscillator (MOSC) The main oscillator supports the use of a select number of crystals. If the main oscillator is used by the PLL as a reference clock, the supported range of crystals is 3.579545 to 8.192 MHz, otherwise, the range of supported crystals is 1 to 8.192 MHz. The XTAL bit in the RCC register (see page 75) describes the available crystal choices and default programming values. Software configures the RCC register XTAL field with the crystal number. If the PLL is used in the design, the XTAL field value is internally translated to the PLL settings. 6.1.4.3 PLL Frequency Configuration The PLL is disabled by default during power-on reset and is enabled later by software if required. Software configures the PLL input reference clock source, specifies the output divisor to set the system clock frequency, and enables the PLL to drive the output. If the main oscillator provides the clock reference to the PLL, the translation provided by hardware and used to program the PLL is available for software in the XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG) register (see page 79). The internal translation provides a translation within ± 1% of the targeted PLL VCO frequency. The Crystal Value field (XTAL) on page 75 describes the available crystal choices and default programming of the PLLCFG register. The crystal number is written into the XTAL field of the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register. Any time the XTAL field changes, the new settings are translated and the internal PLL settings are updated. 6.1.4.4 PLL Modes The PLL has two modes of operation: Normal and Power-Down ■ Normal: The PLL multiplies the input clock reference and drives the output. ■ Power-Down: Most of the PLL internal circuitry is disabled and the PLL does not drive the output. The modes are programmed using the RCC/RCC2 register fields (see page 75 and page 80). 6.1.4.5 PLL Operation If the PLL configuration is changed, the PLL output frequency is unstable until it reconverges (relocks) to the new setting. The time between the configuration change and relock is TREADY (see Table 23-6 on page 537). During this time, the PLL is not usable as a clock reference. The PLL is changed by one of the following: ■ Change to the XTAL value in the RCC register—writes of the same value do not cause a relock. ■ Change in the PLL from Power-Down to Normal mode. A counter is defined to measure the TREADY requirement. The counter is clocked by the main oscillator. The range of the main oscillator has been taken into account and the down counter is set November 30, 2007 63 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller to 0x1200 (that is, ~600 μs at an 8.192 MHz external oscillator clock). . Hardware is provided to keep the PLL from being used as a system clock until the TREADY condition is met after one of the two changes above. It is the user's responsibility to have a stable clock source (like the main oscillator) before the RCC/RCC2 register is switched to use the PLL. 6.1.5 System Control For power-savings purposes, the RCGCn , SCGCn , and DCGCn registers control the clock gating logic for each peripheral or block in the system while the controller is in Run, Sleep, and Deep-Sleep mode, respectively. In Run mode, the processor executes code. In Sleep mode, the clock frequency of the active peripherals is unchanged, but the processor is not clocked and therefore no longer executes code. In Deep-Sleep mode, the clock frequency of the active peripherals may change (depending on the Run mode clock configuration) in addition to the processor clock being stopped. An interrupt returns the device to Run mode from one of the sleep modes; the sleep modes are entered on request from the code. Each mode is described in more detail below. There are four levels of operation for the device defined as: ■ Run Mode. Run mode provides normal operation of the processor and all of the peripherals that are currently enabled by the RCGCn registers. The system clock can be any of the available clock sources including the PLL. ■ Sleep Mode. Sleep mode is entered by the Cortex-M3 core executing a WFI (Wait for Interrupt) instruction. Any properly configured interrupt event in the system will bring the processor back into Run mode. See the system control NVIC section of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more details. In Sleep mode, the Cortex-M3 processor core and the memory subsystem are not clocked. Peripherals are clocked that are enabled in the SCGCn register when auto-clock gating is enabled (see the RCC register) or the RCGCn register when the auto-clock gating is disabled. The system clock has the same source and frequency as that during Run mode. ■ Deep-Sleep Mode. Deep-Sleep mode is entered by first writing the Deep Sleep Enable bit in the ARM Cortex-M3 NVIC system control register and then executing a WFI instruction. Any properly configured interrupt event in the system will bring the processor back into Run mode. See the system control NVIC section of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more details. The Cortex-M3 processor core and the memory subsystem are not clocked. Peripherals are clocked that are enabled in the DCGCn register when auto-clock gating is enabled (see the RCC register) or the RCGCn register when auto-clock gating is disabled. The system clock source is the main oscillator by default or the internal oscillator specified in the DSLPCLKCFG register if one is enabled. When the DSLPCLKCFG register is used, the internal oscillator is powered up, if necessary, and the main oscillator is powered down. If the PLL is running at the time of the WFI instruction, hardware will power the PLL down and override the SYSDIV field of the active RCC/RCC2 register to be /16 or /64, respectively. When the Deep-Sleep exit event occurs, hardware brings the system clock back to the source and frequency it had at the onset of Deep-Sleep mode before enabling the clocks that had been stopped during the Deep-Sleep duration. ■ Hibernate Mode. In this mode, the power supplies are turned off to the main part of the device and only the Hibernation module's circuitry is active. An external wake event or RTC event is required to bring the device back to Run mode. The Cortex-M3 processor and peripherals outside 64 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control of the Hibernation module see a normal "power on" sequence and the processor starts running code. It can determine that it has been restarted from Hibernate mode by inspecting the Hibernation module registers. 6.2 Initialization and Configuration The PLL is configured using direct register writes to the RCC/RCC2 register. If the RCC2 register is being used, the USERCC2 bit must be set and the appropriate RCC2 bit/field is used. The steps required to successfully change the PLL-based system clock are: 1. Bypass the PLL and system clock divider by setting the BYPASS bit and clearing the USESYS bit in the RCC register. This configures the system to run off a “raw” clock source (using the main oscillator or internal oscillator) and allows for the new PLL configuration to be validated before switching the system clock to the PLL. 2. Select the crystal value (XTAL) and oscillator source (OSCSRC), and clear the PWRDN bit in RCC/RCC2. Setting the XTAL field automatically pulls valid PLL configuration data for the appropriate crystal, and clearing the PWRDN bit powers and enables the PLL and its output. 3. Select the desired system divider (SYSDIV) in RCC/RCC2 and set the USESYS bit in RCC. The SYSDIV field determines the system frequency for the microcontroller. 4. Wait for the PLL to lock by polling the PLLLRIS bit in the Raw Interrupt Status (RIS) register. 5. Enable use of the PLL by clearing the BYPASS bit in RCC/RCC2. 6.3 Register Map Table 6-1 on page 65 lists the System Control registers, grouped by function. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. Note: Spaces in the System Control register space that are not used are reserved for future or internal use by Luminary Micro, Inc. Software should not modify any reserved memory address. Table 6-1. System Control Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 DID0 RO - Device Identification 0 67 0x004 DID1 RO - Device Identification 1 83 0x008 DC0 RO 0x00FF.007F Device Capabilities 0 85 0x010 DC1 RO 0x0011.32FF Device Capabilities 1 86 0x014 DC2 RO 0x0707.1117 Device Capabilities 2 88 0x018 DC3 RO 0x0F07.BFCF Device Capabilities 3 90 0x01C DC4 RO 0x5000.007F Device Capabilities 4 92 0x030 PBORCTL R/W 0x0000.7FFD Brown-Out Reset Control 69 0x034 LDOPCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 LDO Power Control 70 November 30, 2007 65 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x040 SRCR0 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 0 115 0x044 SRCR1 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 1 116 0x048 SRCR2 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 2 118 0x050 RIS RO 0x0000.0000 Raw Interrupt Status 71 0x054 IMC R/W 0x0000.0000 Interrupt Mask Control 72 0x058 MISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 Masked Interrupt Status and Clear 73 0x05C RESC R/W - Reset Cause 74 0x060 RCC R/W 0x07AE.3AD1 Run-Mode Clock Configuration 75 0x064 PLLCFG RO - XTAL to PLL Translation 79 0x070 RCC2 R/W 0x0780.2800 Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 80 0x100 RCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 94 0x104 RCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 100 0x108 RCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 109 0x110 SCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 96 0x114 SCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 103 0x118 SCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 111 0x120 DCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 98 0x124 DCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 106 0x128 DCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 113 0x144 DSLPCLKCFG R/W 0x0780.0000 Deep Sleep Clock Configuration 82 6.4 Register Descriptions All addresses given are relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. 66 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 1: Device Identification 0 (DID0), offset 0x000 This register identifies the version of the device. Device Identification 0 (DID0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x000 Type RO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved VER reserved CLASS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MAJOR MINOR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 DID0 Version This field defines the DID0 register format version. The version number is numeric. The value of the VER field is encoded as follows: Value Description First revision of the DID0 register format, for Stellaris® Fury-class devices . 0x1 30:28 VER RO 0x1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:24 reserved RO 0x0 Device Class The CLASS field value identifies the internal design from which all mask sets are generated for all devices in a particular product line. The CLASS field value is changed for new product lines, for changes in fab process (for example, a remap or shrink), or any case where the MAJOR or MINOR fields require differentiation from prior devices. The value of the CLASS field is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x0 Stellaris® Sandstorm-class devices. 0x1 Stellaris® Fury-class devices. 23:16 CLASS RO 0x1 November 30, 2007 67 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Major Revision This field specifies the major revision number of the device. The major revision reflects changes to base layers of the design. The major revision number is indicated in the part number as a letter (A for first revision, B for second, and so on). This field is encoded as follows: Value Description 0x0 Revision A (initial device) 0x1 Revision B (first base layer revision) 0x2 Revision C (second base layer revision) and so on. 15:8 MAJOR RO - Minor Revision This field specifies the minor revision number of the device. The minor revision reflects changes to the metal layers of the design. The MINOR field value is reset when the MAJOR field is changed. This field is numeric and is encoded as follows: Value Description 0x0 Initial device, or a major revision update. 0x1 First metal layer change. 0x2 Second metal layer change. and so on. 7:0 MINOR RO - 68 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 2: Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL), offset 0x030 This register is responsible for controlling reset conditions after initial power-on reset. Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.7FFD 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved BORIOR reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x0 BOR Interrupt or Reset This bit controls how a BOR event is signaled to the controller. If set, a reset is signaled. Otherwise, an interrupt is signaled. 1 BORIOR R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 69 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL), offset 0x034 The VADJ field in this register adjusts the on-chip output voltage (VOUT). LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x034 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved VADJ Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0 LDO Output Voltage This field sets the on-chip output voltage. The programming values for the VADJ field are provided below. Value VOUT (V) 0x00 2.50 0x01 2.45 0x02 2.40 0x03 2.35 0x04 2.30 0x05 2.25 0x06-0x3F Reserved 0x1B 2.75 0x1C 2.70 0x1D 2.65 0x1E 2.60 0x1F 2.55 5:0 VADJ R/W 0x0 70 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 4: Raw Interrupt Status (RIS), offset 0x050 Central location for system control raw interrupts. These are set and cleared by hardware. Raw Interrupt Status (RIS) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x050 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLRIS reserved BORRIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Raw Interrupt Status This bit is set when the PLL TREADY Timer asserts. 6 PLLLRIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 Brown-Out Reset Raw Interrupt Status This bit is the raw interrupt status for any brown-out conditions. If set, a brown-out condition is currently active. This is an unregistered signal from the brown-out detection circuit. An interrupt is reported if the BORIM bit in the IMC register is set and the BORIOR bit in the PBORCTL register is cleared. 1 BORRIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 71 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 5: Interrupt Mask Control (IMC), offset 0x054 Central location for system control interrupt masks. Interrupt Mask Control (IMC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x054 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLIM reserved BORIM reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO RO R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Interrupt Mask This bit specifies whether a current limit detection is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, an interrupt is generated if PLLLRIS in RIS is set; otherwise, an interrupt is not generated. 6 PLLLIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 Brown-Out Reset Interrupt Mask This bit specifies whether a brown-out condition is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, an interrupt is generated if BORRIS is set; otherwise, an interrupt is not generated. 1 BORIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 72 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 6: Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC), offset 0x058 Central location for system control result of RIS AND IMC to generate an interrupt to the controller. All of the bits are R/W1C and this action also clears the corresponding raw interrupt bit in the RIS register (see page 71). Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x058 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLMIS reserved BORMIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C RO RO RO RO R/W1C RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Masked Interrupt Status This bit is set when the PLL TREADY timer asserts. The interrupt is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. 6 PLLLMIS R/W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 BOR Masked Interrupt Status The BORMIS is simply the BORRIS ANDed with the mask value, BORIM. 1 BORMIS R/W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 73 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: Reset Cause (RESC), offset 0x05C This register is set with the reset cause after reset. The bits in this register are sticky and maintain their state across multiple reset sequences, except when an external reset is the cause, and then all the other bits in the RESC register are cleared. Reset Cause (RESC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x05C Type R/W, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved LDO SW WDT BOR POR EXT Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0 LDO Reset When set, indicates the LDO circuit has lost regulation and has generated a reset event. 5 LDO R/W - Software Reset When set, indicates a software reset is the cause of the reset event. 4 SW R/W - Watchdog Timer Reset When set, indicates a watchdog reset is the cause of the reset event. 3 WDT R/W - Brown-Out Reset When set, indicates a brown-out reset is the cause of the reset event. 2 BOR R/W - Power-On Reset When set, indicates a power-on reset is the cause of the reset event. 1 POR R/W - External Reset When set, indicates an external reset (RST assertion) is the cause of the reset event. 0 EXT R/W - 74 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 8: Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC), offset 0x060 This register is defined to provide source control and frequency speed. Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x060 Type R/W, reset 0x07AE.3AD1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved ACG SYSDIV USESYSDIV reserved USEPWMDIV PWMDIV reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PWRDN reserved BYPASS reserved XTAL OSCSRC reserved IOSCDIS MOSCDIS Type RO RO R/W RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:28 reserved RO 0x0 Auto Clock Gating This bit specifies whether the system uses the Sleep-Mode Clock Gating Control (SCGCn) registers and Deep-Sleep-Mode Clock Gating Control (DCGCn) registers if the controller enters a Sleep or Deep-Sleep mode (respectively). If set, the SCGCn or DCGCn registers are used to control the clocks distributed to the peripherals when the controller is in a sleep mode. Otherwise, the Run-Mode Clock Gating Control (RCGCn) registers are used when the controller enters a sleep mode. The RCGCn registers are always used to control the clocks in Run mode. This allows peripherals to consume less power when the controller is in a sleep mode and the peripheral is unused. 27 ACG R/W 0 November 30, 2007 75 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description System Clock Divisor Specifies which divisor is used to generate the system clock from the PLL output. The PLL VCO frequency is 400 MHz. Value Divisor (BYPASS=1) Frequency (BYPASS=0) 0x0 reserved reserved 0x1 /2 reserved 0x2 /3 reserved 0x3 /4 50 MHz 0x4 /5 40 MHz 0x5 /6 33.33 MHz 0x6 /7 28.57 MHz 0x7 /8 25 MHz 0x8 /9 22.22 MHz 0x9 /10 20 MHz 0xA /11 18.18 MHz 0xB /12 16.67 MHz 0xC /13 15.38 MHz 0xD /14 14.29 MHz 0xE /15 13.33 MHz 0xF /16 12.5 MHz (default) When reading the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register (see page 75), the SYSDIV value is MINSYSDIV if a lower divider was requested and the PLL is being used. This lower value is allowed to divide a non-PLL source. 26:23 SYSDIV R/W 0xF Enable System Clock Divider Use the system clock divider as the source for the system clock. The system clock divider is forced to be used when the PLL is selected as the source. 22 USESYSDIV R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 21 reserved RO 0 Enable PWM Clock Divisor Use the PWM clock divider as the source for the PWM clock. 20 USEPWMDIV R/W 0 76 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description PWM Unit Clock Divisor This field specifies the binary divisor used to predivide the system clock down for use as the timing reference for the PWM module. This clock is only power 2 divide and rising edge is synchronous without phase shift from the system clock. Value Divisor 0x0 /2 0x1 /4 0x2 /8 0x3 /16 0x4 /32 0x5 /64 0x6 /64 0x7 /64 (default) 19:17 PWMDIV R/W 0x7 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 16:14 reserved RO 0 PLL Power Down This bit connects to the PLL PWRDN input. The reset value of 1 powers down the PLL. 13 PWRDN R/W 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 12 reserved RO 1 PLL Bypass Chooses whether the system clock is derived from the PLL output or the OSC source. If set, the clock that drives the system is the OSC source. Otherwise, the clock that drives the system is the PLL output clock divided by the system divider. Note: The ADC must be clocked from the PLL or directly from a 14-MHz to 18-MHz clock source to operate properly. While the ADC works in a 14-18 MHz range, to maintain a 1 M sample/second rate, the ADC must be provided a 16-MHz clock source. 11 BYPASS R/W 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 10 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 77 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Crystal Value This field specifies the crystal value attached to the main oscillator. The encoding for this field is provided below. Crystal Frequency (MHz) Using the PLL Crystal Frequency (MHz) Not Using the PLL Value 0x0 1.000 reserved 0x1 1.8432 reserved 0x2 2.000 reserved 0x3 2.4576 reserved 0x4 3.579545 MHz 0x5 3.6864 MHz 0x6 4 MHz 0x7 4.096 MHz 0x8 4.9152 MHz 0x9 5 MHz 0xA 5.12 MHz 0xB 6 MHz (reset value) 0xC 6.144 MHz 0xD 7.3728 MHz 0xE 8 MHz 0xF 8.192 MHz 9:6 XTAL R/W 0xB Oscillator Source Picks among the four input sources for the OSC. The values are: Value Input Source 0x0 Main oscillator (default) 0x1 Internal oscillator (default) 0x2 Internal oscillator / 4 (this is necessary if used as input to PLL) 0x3 reserved 5:4 OSCSRC R/W 0x1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:2 reserved RO 0x0 Internal Oscillator Disable 0: Internal oscillator (IOSC) is enabled. 1: Internal oscillator is disabled. 1 IOSCDIS R/W 0 Main Oscillator Disable 0: Main oscillator is enabled. 1: Main oscillator is disabled (default). 0 MOSCDIS R/W 1 78 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 9: XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG), offset 0x064 This register provides a means of translating external crystal frequencies into the appropriate PLL settings. This register is initialized during the reset sequence and updated anytime that the XTAL field changes in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register (see page 75). The PLL frequency is calculated using the PLLCFG field values, as follows: PLLFreq = OSCFreq * F / (R + 1) XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x064 Type RO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved F R Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:14 reserved RO 0x0 PLL F Value This field specifies the value supplied to the PLL’s F input. 13:5 F RO - PLL R Value This field specifies the value supplied to the PLL’s R input. 4:0 R RO - November 30, 2007 79 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2), offset 0x070 This register overrides the RCC equivalent register fields when the USERCC2 bit is set. This allows RCC2 to be used to extend the capabilities, while also providing a means to be backward-compatible to previous parts. The fields within the RCC2 register occupy the same bit positions as they do within the RCC register as LSB-justified. The SYSDIV2 field is wider so that additional larger divisors are possible. This allows a lower system clock frequency for improved Deep Sleep power consumption. Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x070 Type R/W, reset 0x0780.2800 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 USERCC2 reserved SYSDIV2 reserved Type R/W RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PWRDN2 reserved BYPASS2 reserved OSCSRC2 reserved Type RO RO R/W RO R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Use RCC2 When set, overrides the RCC register fields. 31 USERCC2 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 30:29 reserved RO 0x0 System Clock Divisor Specifies which divisor is used to generate the system clock from the PLL output. The PLL VCO frequency is 400 MHz. This field is wider than the RCC register SYSDIV field in order to provide additional divisor values. This permits the system clock to be run at much lower frequencies during Deep Sleep mode. For example, where the RCC register SYSDIV encoding of 1111 provides /16, the RCC2 register SYSDIV2 encoding of 111111 provides /64. 28:23 SYSDIV2 R/W 0x0F Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 22:14 reserved RO 0x0 Power-Down PLL When set, powers down the PLL. 13 PWRDN2 R/W 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 12 reserved RO 0 Bypass PLL When set, bypasses the PLL for the clock source. 11 BYPASS2 R/W 1 80 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 10:7 reserved RO 0x0 System Clock Source Value Description 0x0 Main oscillator (MOSC) 0x1 Internal oscillator (IOSC) 0x2 Internal oscillator / 4 0x3 30 kHz internal oscillator 0x7 32 kHz external oscillator 6:4 OSCSRC2 R/W 0x0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 81 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: Deep Sleep Clock Configuration (DSLPCLKCFG), offset 0x144 This register provides configuration information for the hardware control of Deep Sleep Mode. Deep Sleep Clock Configuration (DSLPCLKCFG) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x144 Type R/W, reset 0x0780.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved DSDIVORIDE reserved Type RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DSOSCSRC reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:29 reserved RO 0x0 Divider Field Override 6-bit system divider field to override when Deep-Sleep occurs with PLL running. 28:23 DSDIVORIDE R/W 0x0F Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 22:7 reserved RO 0x0 Clock Source When set, forces IOSC to be clock source during Deep Sleep mode. Value Name Description 0x0 NOORIDE No override to the oscillator clock source is done 0x1 IOSC Use internal 12 MHz oscillator as source 0x3 30kHz Use 30 kHz internal oscillator 0x7 32kHz Use 32 kHz external oscillator 6:4 DSOSCSRC R/W 0x0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0x0 82 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 12: Device Identification 1 (DID1), offset 0x004 This register identifies the device family, part number, temperature range, pin count, and package type. Device Identification 1 (DID1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 VER FAM PARTNO Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PINCOUNT reserved TEMP PKG ROHS QUAL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description DID1 Version This field defines the DID1 register format version. The version number is numeric. The value of the VER field is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description First revision of the DID1 register format, indicating a Stellaris Fury-class device. 0x1 31:28 VER RO 0x1 Family This field provides the family identification of the device within the Luminary Micro product portfolio. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description Stellaris family of microcontollers, that is, all devices with external part numbers starting with LM3S. 0x0 27:24 FAM RO 0x0 Part Number This field provides the part number of the device within the family. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x78 LM3S6952 23:16 PARTNO RO 0x78 Package Pin Count This field specifies the number of pins on the device package. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x2 100-pin package 15:13 PINCOUNT RO 0x2 November 30, 2007 83 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 12:8 reserved RO 0 Temperature Range This field specifies the temperature rating of the device. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x1 Industrial temperature range (-40°C to 85°C) 7:5 TEMP RO 0x1 Package Type This field specifies the package type. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x1 LQFP package 4:3 PKG RO 0x1 RoHS-Compliance This bit specifies whether the device is RoHS-compliant. A 1 indicates the part is RoHS-compliant. 2 ROHS RO 1 Qualification Status This field specifies the qualification status of the device. The value is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x0 Engineering Sample (unqualified) 0x1 Pilot Production (unqualified) 0x2 Fully Qualified 1:0 QUAL RO - 84 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 13: Device Capabilities 0 (DC0), offset 0x008 This register is predefined by the part and can be used to verify features. Device Capabilities 0 (DC0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x008 Type RO, reset 0x00FF.007F 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 SRAMSZ Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLASHSZ Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SRAM Size Indicates the size of the on-chip SRAM memory. Value Description 0x00FF 64 KB of SRAM 31:16 SRAMSZ RO 0x00FF Flash Size Indicates the size of the on-chip flash memory. Value Description 0x007F 256 KB of Flash 15:0 FLASHSZ RO 0x007F November 30, 2007 85 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: Device Capabilities 1 (DC1), offset 0x010 This register provides a list of features available in the system. The Stellaris family uses this register format to indicate the availability of the following family features in the specific device: CANs, PWM, ADC, Watchdog timer, Hibernation module, and debug capabilities. This register also indicates the maximum clock frequency and maximum ADC sample rate. The format of this register is consistent with the RCGC0, SCGC0, and DCGC0 clock control registers and the SRCR0 software reset control register. Device Capabilities 1 (DC1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x010 Type RO, reset 0x0011.32FF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved PWM reserved ADC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MINSYSDIV MAXADCSPD MPU HIB TEMPSNS PLL WDT SWO SWD JTAG Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:21 reserved RO 0 PWM Module Present When set, indicates that the PWM module is present. 20 PWM RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:17 reserved RO 0 ADC Module Present When set, indicates that the ADC module is present. 16 ADC RO 1 System Clock Divider Minimum 4-bit divider value for system clock. The reset value is hardware-dependent. See the RCC register for how to change the system clock divisor using the SYSDIV bit. Value Description 0x3 Specifies a 50-MHz CPU clock with a PLL divider of 4. 15:12 MINSYSDIV RO 0x3 Max ADC Speed Indicates the maximum rate at which the ADC samples data. Value Description 0x2 500K samples/second 11:8 MAXADCSPD RO 0x2 86 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description MPU Present When set, indicates that the Cortex-M3 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) module is present. See the ARM Cortex-M3 Technical Reference Manual for details on the MPU. 7 MPU RO 1 Hibernation Module Present When set, indicates that the Hibernation module is present. 6 HIB RO 1 Temp Sensor Present When set, indicates that the on-chip temperature sensor is present. 5 TEMPSNS RO 1 PLL Present When set, indicates that the on-chip Phase Locked Loop (PLL) is present. 4 PLL RO 1 Watchdog Timer Present When set, indicates that a watchdog timer is present. 3 WDT RO 1 SWO Trace Port Present When set, indicates that the Serial Wire Output (SWO) trace port is present. 2 SWO RO 1 SWD Present When set, indicates that the Serial Wire Debugger (SWD) is present. 1 SWD RO 1 JTAG Present When set, indicates that the JTAG debugger interface is present. 0 JTAG RO 1 November 30, 2007 87 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 15: Device Capabilities 2 (DC2), offset 0x014 This register provides a list of features available in the system. The Stellaris family uses this register format to indicate the availability of the following family features in the specific device: Analog Comparators, General-Purpose Timers, I2Cs, QEIs, SSIs, and UARTs. The format of this register is consistent with the RCGC1, SCGC1, and DCGC1 clock control registers and the SRCR1 software reset control register. Device Capabilities 2 (DC2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x014 Type RO, reset 0x0707.1117 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 reserved TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved I2C0 reserved QEI0 reserved SSI0 reserved UART2 UART1 UART0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:27 reserved RO 0 Analog Comparator 2 Present When set, indicates that analog comparator 2 is present. 26 COMP2 RO 1 Analog Comparator 1 Present When set, indicates that analog comparator 1 is present. 25 COMP1 RO 1 Analog Comparator 0 Present When set, indicates that analog comparator 0 is present. 24 COMP0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 Timer 2 Present When set, indicates that General-Purpose Timer module 2 is present. 18 TIMER2 RO 1 Timer 1 Present When set, indicates that General-Purpose Timer module 1 is present. 17 TIMER1 RO 1 Timer 0 Present When set, indicates that General-Purpose Timer module 0 is present. 16 TIMER0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 I2C Module 0 Present When set, indicates that I2C module 0 is present. 12 I2C0 RO 1 88 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0 QEI0 Present When set, indicates that QEI module 0 is present. 8 QEI0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:5 reserved RO 0 SSI0 Present When set, indicates that SSI module 0 is present. 4 SSI0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0 UART2 Present When set, indicates that UART module 2 is present. 2 UART2 RO 1 UART1 Present When set, indicates that UART module 1 is present. 1 UART1 RO 1 UART0 Present When set, indicates that UART module 0 is present. 0 UART0 RO 1 November 30, 2007 89 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: Device Capabilities 3 (DC3), offset 0x018 This register provides a list of features available in the system. The Stellaris family uses this register format to indicate the availability of the following family features in the specific device: Analog Comparator I/Os, CCP I/Os, ADC I/Os, and PWM I/Os. Device Capabilities 3 (DC3) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0F07.BFCF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved CCP3 CCP2 CCP1 CCP0 reserved ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWMFAULT reserved C2PLUS C2MINUS C1O C1PLUS C1MINUS C0O C0PLUS C0MINUS reserved PWM3 PWM2 PWM1 PWM0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:28 reserved RO 0 CCP3 Pin Present When set, indicates that Capture/Compare/PWM pin 3 is present. 27 CCP3 RO 1 CCP2 Pin Present When set, indicates that Capture/Compare/PWM pin 2 is present. 26 CCP2 RO 1 CCP1 Pin Present When set, indicates that Capture/Compare/PWM pin 1 is present. 25 CCP1 RO 1 CCP0 Pin Present When set, indicates that Capture/Compare/PWM pin 0 is present. 24 CCP0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 ADC2 Pin Present When set, indicates that ADC pin 2 is present. 18 ADC2 RO 1 ADC1 Pin Present When set, indicates that ADC pin 1 is present. 17 ADC1 RO 1 ADC0 Pin Present When set, indicates that ADC pin 0 is present. 16 ADC0 RO 1 PWM Fault Pin Present When set, indicates that the PWM Fault pin is present. 15 PWMFAULT RO 1 90 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 14 reserved RO 0 C2+ Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 2 (+) input pin is present. 13 C2PLUS RO 1 C2- Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 2 (-) input pin is present. 12 C2MINUS RO 1 C1o Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 1 output pin is present. 11 C1O RO 1 C1+ Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 1 (+) input pin is present. 10 C1PLUS RO 1 C1- Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 1 (-) input pin is present. 9 C1MINUS RO 1 C0o Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 0 output pin is present. 8 C0O RO 1 C0+ Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 0 (+) input pin is present. 7 C0PLUS RO 1 C0- Pin Present When set, indicates that the analog comparator 0 (-) input pin is present. 6 C0MINUS RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:4 reserved RO 0 PWM3 Pin Present When set, indicates that the PWM pin 3 is present. 3 PWM3 RO 1 PWM2 Pin Present When set, indicates that the PWM pin 2 is present. 2 PWM2 RO 1 PWM1 Pin Present When set, indicates that the PWM pin 1 is present. 1 PWM1 RO 1 PWM0 Pin Present When set, indicates that the PWM pin 0 is present. 0 PWM0 RO 1 November 30, 2007 91 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 17: Device Capabilities 4 (DC4), offset 0x01C This register provides a list of features available in the system. The Stellaris family uses this register format to indicate the availability of the following family features in the specific device: Ethernet MAC and PHY, GPIOs, and CCP I/Os. The format of this register is consistent with the RCGC2, SCGC2, and DCGC2 clock control registers and the SRCR2 software reset control register. Device Capabilities 4 (DC4) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x01C Type RO, reset 0x5000.007F 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved EPHY0 reserved EMAC0 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 Ethernet PHY0 Present When set, indicates that Ethernet PHY module 0 is present. 30 EPHY0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 29 reserved RO 0 Ethernet MAC0 Present When set, indicates that Ethernet MAC module 0 is present. 28 EMAC0 RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:7 reserved RO 0 GPIO Port G Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port G is present. 6 GPIOG RO 1 GPIO Port F Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port F is present. 5 GPIOF RO 1 GPIO Port E Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port E is present. 4 GPIOE RO 1 GPIO Port D Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port D is present. 3 GPIOD RO 1 GPIO Port C Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port C is present. 2 GPIOC RO 1 92 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPIO Port B Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port B is present. 1 GPIOB RO 1 GPIO Port A Present When set, indicates that GPIO Port A is present. 0 GPIOA RO 1 November 30, 2007 93 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (RCGC0), offset 0x100 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC0 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC0 for Sleep operation, and DCGC0 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (RCGC0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x100 Type R/W, reset 0x00000040 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved PWM reserved ADC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MAXADCSPD reserved HIB reserved WDT reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W RO RO R/W RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:21 reserved RO 0 PWM Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the PWM module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 20 PWM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:17 reserved RO 0 ADC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SAR ADC module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 16 ADC R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:12 reserved RO 0 94 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description ADC Sample Speed This field sets the rate at which the ADC samples data. You cannot set the rate higher than the maximum rate. You can set the sample rate by setting the MAXADCSPD bit as follows: Value Description 0x2 500K samples/second 0x1 250K samples/second 0x0 125K samples/second 11:8 MAXADCSPD R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7 reserved RO 0 HIB Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the Hibernation module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. 6 HIB R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:4 reserved RO 0 WDT Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the WDT module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 3 WDT R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 95 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 19: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (SCGC0), offset 0x110 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC0 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC0 for Sleep operation, and DCGC0 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (SCGC0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x110 Type R/W, reset 0x00000040 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved PWM reserved ADC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MAXADCSPD reserved HIB reserved WDT reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W RO RO R/W RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:21 reserved RO 0 PWM Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the PWM module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 20 PWM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:17 reserved RO 0 ADC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SAR ADC module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 16 ADC R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:12 reserved RO 0 96 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description ADC Sample Speed This field sets the rate at which the ADC samples data. You cannot set the rate higher than the maximum rate. You can set the sample rate by setting the MAXADCSPD bit as follows: Value Description 0x2 500K samples/second 0x1 250K samples/second 0x0 125K samples/second 11:8 MAXADCSPD R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7 reserved RO 0 HIB Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the Hibernation module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. 6 HIB R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:4 reserved RO 0 WDT Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the WDT module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 3 WDT R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 97 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 20: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (DCGC0), offset 0x120 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC0 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC0 for Sleep operation, and DCGC0 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (DCGC0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x120 Type R/W, reset 0x00000040 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved PWM reserved ADC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MAXADCSPD reserved HIB reserved WDT reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W RO RO R/W RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:21 reserved RO 0 PWM Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the PWM module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 20 PWM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:17 reserved RO 0 ADC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SAR ADC module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 16 ADC R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:12 reserved RO 0 98 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description ADC Sample Speed This field sets the rate at which the ADC samples data. You cannot set the rate higher than the maximum rate. You can set the sample rate by setting the MAXADCSPD bit as follows: Value Description 0x2 500K samples/second 0x1 250K samples/second 0x0 125K samples/second 11:8 MAXADCSPD R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7 reserved RO 0 HIB Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the Hibernation module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. 6 HIB R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:4 reserved RO 0 WDT Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for the WDT module. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, a read or write to the unit generates a bus fault. 3 WDT R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 99 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 21: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (RCGC1), offset 0x104 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC1 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC1 for Sleep operation, and DCGC1 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (RCGC1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x104 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 reserved TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved I2C0 reserved QEI0 reserved SSI0 reserved UART2 UART1 UART0 Type RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:27 reserved RO 0 Analog Comparator 2 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 26 COMP2 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 1 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 25 COMP1 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 0 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 24 COMP0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 100 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Timer 2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 18 TIMER2 R/W 0 Timer 1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 17 TIMER1 R/W 0 Timer 0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 16 TIMER0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 I2C0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for I2C module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 12 I2C0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0 QEI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for QEI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 8 QEI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:5 reserved RO 0 SSI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SSI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 SSI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0 UART2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 UART2 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 101 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 UART1 R/W 0 UART0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 UART0 R/W 0 102 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 22: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (SCGC1), offset 0x114 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC1 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC1 for Sleep operation, and DCGC1 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (SCGC1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x114 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 reserved TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved I2C0 reserved QEI0 reserved SSI0 reserved UART2 UART1 UART0 Type RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:27 reserved RO 0 Analog Comparator 2 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 26 COMP2 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 1 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 25 COMP1 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 0 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 24 COMP0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 103 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Timer 2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 18 TIMER2 R/W 0 Timer 1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 17 TIMER1 R/W 0 Timer 0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 16 TIMER0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 I2C0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for I2C module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 12 I2C0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0 QEI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for QEI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 8 QEI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:5 reserved RO 0 SSI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SSI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 SSI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0 UART2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 UART2 R/W 0 104 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 UART1 R/W 0 UART0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 UART0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 105 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 23: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (DCGC1), offset 0x124 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC1 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC1 for Sleep operation, and DCGC1 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (DCGC1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x124 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 reserved TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved I2C0 reserved QEI0 reserved SSI0 reserved UART2 UART1 UART0 Type RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:27 reserved RO 0 Analog Comparator 2 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 26 COMP2 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 1 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 25 COMP1 R/W 0 Analog Comparator 0 Clock Gating This bit controls the clock gating for analog comparator 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 24 COMP0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 106 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Timer 2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 18 TIMER2 R/W 0 Timer 1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 17 TIMER1 R/W 0 Timer 0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for General-Purpose Timer module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 16 TIMER0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 I2C0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for I2C module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 12 I2C0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0 QEI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for QEI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 8 QEI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:5 reserved RO 0 SSI0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for SSI module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 SSI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0 UART2 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 2. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 UART2 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 107 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART1 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 1. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 UART1 R/W 0 UART0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for UART module 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 UART0 R/W 0 108 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 24: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (RCGC2), offset 0x108 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC2 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC2 for Sleep operation, and DCGC2 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (RCGC2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x108 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved EPHY0 reserved EMAC0 reserved Type RO R/W RO R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 PHY0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet PHY unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 30 EPHY0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 29 reserved RO 0 MAC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet MAC unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 28 EMAC0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:7 reserved RO 0 Port G Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port G. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 6 GPIOG R/W 0 November 30, 2007 109 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Port F Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port F. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 5 GPIOF R/W 0 Port E Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port E. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 GPIOE R/W 0 Port D Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port D. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 3 GPIOD R/W 0 Port C Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port C. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 GPIOC R/W 0 Port B Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port B. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 GPIOB R/W 0 Port A Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port A. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 GPIOA R/W 0 110 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 25: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (SCGC2), offset 0x118 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC2 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC2 for Sleep operation, and DCGC2 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (SCGC2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x118 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved EPHY0 reserved EMAC0 reserved Type RO R/W RO R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 PHY0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet PHY unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 30 EPHY0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 29 reserved RO 0 MAC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet MAC unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 28 EMAC0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:7 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 111 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Port G Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port G. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 6 GPIOG R/W 0 Port F Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port F. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 5 GPIOF R/W 0 Port E Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port E. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 GPIOE R/W 0 Port D Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port D. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 3 GPIOD R/W 0 Port C Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port C. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 GPIOC R/W 0 Port B Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port B. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 GPIOB R/W 0 Port A Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port A. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 GPIOA R/W 0 112 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 26: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (DCGC2), offset 0x128 This register controls the clock gating logic. Each bit controls a clock enable for a given interface, function, or unit. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled (saving power). If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. The reset state of these bits is 0 (unclocked) unless otherwise noted, so that all functional units are disabled. It is the responsibility of software to enable the ports necessary for the application. Note that these registers may contain more bits than there are interfaces, functions, or units to control. This is to assure reasonable code compatibility with other family and future parts. RCGC2 is the clock configuration register for running operation, SCGC2 for Sleep operation, and DCGC2 for Deep-Sleep operation. Setting the ACG bit in the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register specifies that the system uses sleep modes. Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (DCGC2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x128 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved EPHY0 reserved EMAC0 reserved Type RO R/W RO R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 PHY0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet PHY unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 30 EPHY0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 29 reserved RO 0 MAC0 Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Ethernet MAC unit 0. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 28 EMAC0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:7 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 113 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Port G Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port G. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 6 GPIOG R/W 0 Port F Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port F. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 5 GPIOF R/W 0 Port E Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port E. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 4 GPIOE R/W 0 Port D Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port D. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 3 GPIOD R/W 0 Port C Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port C. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 2 GPIOC R/W 0 Port B Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port B. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 1 GPIOB R/W 0 Port A Clock Gating Control This bit controls the clock gating for Port A. If set, the unit receives a clock and functions. Otherwise, the unit is unclocked and disabled. If the unit is unclocked, reads or writes to the unit will generate a bus fault. 0 GPIOA R/W 0 114 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Register 27: Software Reset Control 0 (SRCR0), offset 0x040 Writes to this register are masked by the bits in the Device Capabilities 1 (DC1) register. Software Reset Control 0 (SRCR0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x040 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved PWM reserved ADC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved HIB reserved WDT reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO R/W RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:21 reserved RO 0 PWM Reset Control Reset control for PWM module. 20 PWM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:17 reserved RO 0 ADC0 Reset Control Reset control for SAR ADC module 0. 16 ADC R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:7 reserved RO 0 HIB Reset Control Reset control for the Hibernation module. 6 HIB R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:4 reserved RO 0 WDT Reset Control Reset control for Watchdog unit. 3 WDT R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 115 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 28: Software Reset Control 1 (SRCR1), offset 0x044 Writes to this register are masked by the bits in the Device Capabilities 2 (DC2) register. Software Reset Control 1 (SRCR1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x044 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 reserved TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved I2C0 reserved QEI0 reserved SSI0 reserved UART2 UART1 UART0 Type RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:27 reserved RO 0 Analog Comp 2 Reset Control Reset control for analog comparator 2. 26 COMP2 R/W 0 Analog Comp 1 Reset Control Reset control for analog comparator 1. 25 COMP1 R/W 0 Analog Comp 0 Reset Control Reset control for analog comparator 0. 24 COMP0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:19 reserved RO 0 Timer 2 Reset Control Reset control for General-Purpose Timer module 2. 18 TIMER2 R/W 0 Timer 1 Reset Control Reset control for General-Purpose Timer module 1. 17 TIMER1 R/W 0 Timer 0 Reset Control Reset control for General-Purpose Timer module 0. 16 TIMER0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 I2C0 Reset Control Reset control for I2C unit 0. 12 I2C0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0 116 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description QEI0 Reset Control Reset control for QEI unit 0. 8 QEI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:5 reserved RO 0 SSI0 Reset Control Reset control for SSI unit 0. 4 SSI0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0 UART2 Reset Control Reset control for UART unit 2. 2 UART2 R/W 0 UART1 Reset Control Reset control for UART unit 1. 1 UART1 R/W 0 UART0 Reset Control Reset control for UART unit 0. 0 UART0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 117 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 29: Software Reset Control 2 (SRCR2), offset 0x048 Writes to this register are masked by the bits in the Device Capabilities 4 (DC4) register. Software Reset Control 2 (SRCR2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x048 Type R/W, reset 0x00000000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved EPHY0 reserved EMAC0 reserved Type RO R/W RO R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 PHY0 Reset Control Reset control for Ethernet PHY unit 0. 30 EPHY0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 29 reserved RO 0 MAC0 Reset Control Reset control for Ethernet MAC unit 0. 28 EMAC0 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:7 reserved RO 0 Port G Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port G. 6 GPIOG R/W 0 Port F Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port F. 5 GPIOF R/W 0 Port E Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port E. 4 GPIOE R/W 0 Port D Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port D. 3 GPIOD R/W 0 Port C Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port C. 2 GPIOC R/W 0 Port B Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port B. 1 GPIOB R/W 0 118 November 30, 2007 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Port A Reset Control Reset control for GPIO Port A. 0 GPIOA R/W 0 November 30, 2007 119 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 7 Hibernation Module The Hibernation Module manages removal and restoration of power to the rest of the microcontroller to provide a means for reducing power consumption. When the processor and peripherals are idle, power can be completely removed with only the Hibernation Module remaining powered. Power can be restored based on an external signal, or at a certain time using the built-in real-time clock (RTC). The Hibernation module can be independently supplied from a battery or an auxiliary power supply. The Hibernation module has the following features: ■ Power-switching logic to discrete external regulator ■ Dedicated pin for waking from an external signal ■ Low-battery detection, signaling, and interrupt generation ■ 32-bit real-time counter (RTC) ■ Two 32-bit RTC match registers for timed wake-up and interrupt generation ■ Clock source from a 32.768-kHz external oscillator or a 4.194304-MHz crystal ■ RTC predivider trim for making fine adjustments to the clock rate ■ 64 32-bit words of non-volatile memory ■ Programmable interrupts for RTC match, external wake, and low battery events 120 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module 7.1 Block Diagram Figure 7-1. Hibernation Module Block Diagram HIBIM HIBRIS HIBMIS HIBIC HIBRTCT Pre-Divider /128 XOSC0 XOSC1 HIBCTL.CLK32EN HIBCTL.CLKSEL HIBRTCC HIBRTCLD HIBRTCM0 HIBRTCM1 RTC Interrupts Power Sequence Logic MATCH0/1 WAKE Interrupts to CPU Low Battery Detect LOWBAT VDD VBAT HIB HIBCTL.LOWBATEN HIBCTL.PWRCUT HIBCTL.EXTWEN HIBCTL.RTCWEN HIBCTL.VABORT Non-Volatile Memory HIBDATA 7.2 Functional Description The Hibernation module controls the power to the processor with an enable signal (HIB) that signals an external voltage regulator to turn off. The Hibernation module power is determined dynamically. The supply voltage of the Hibernation module is the larger of the main voltage source (VDD) or the battery/auxilliary voltage source (VBAT). A voting circuit indicates the larger and an internal power switch selects the appropriate voltage source. The Hibernation module also has a separate clock source to maintain a real-time clock (RTC). Once in hibernation, the module signals an external voltage regulator to turn back on the power when an external pin (WAKE) is asserted, or when the internal RTC reaches a certain value. The Hibernation module can also detect when the battery voltage is low, and optionally prevent hibernation when this occurs. Power-up from a power cut to code execution is defined as the regulator turn-on time (specifed at tHIB_TO_VDD maximum) plus the normal chip POR (see “Hibernation Module” on page 543). 7.2.1 Register Access Timing Because the Hibernation module has an independent clocking domain, certain registers must be written only with a timing gap between accesses. The delay time is tHIB_REG_WRITE, therefore software must guarantee that a delay of tHIB_REG_WRITE is inserted between back-to-back writes to certain Hibernation registers, or between a write followed by a read to those same registers. There is no November 30, 2007 121 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller restriction on timing for back-to-back reads from the Hibernation module. Refer to “Register Descriptions” on page 126 for details about which registers are subject to this timing restriction. 7.2.2 Clock Source The Hibernation module must be clocked by an external source, even if the RTC feature will not be used. An external oscillator or crystal can be used for this purpose. To use a crystal, a 4.194304-MHz crystal is connected to the XOSC0 and XOSC1 pins. This clock signal is divided by 128 internally to produce the 32.768-kHz clock reference. To use a more precise clock source, a 32.768-kHz oscillator can be connected to the XOSC0 pin. The clock source is enabled by setting the CLK32EN bit of the HIBCTL register. The type of clock source is selected by setting the CLKSEL bit to 0 for a 4.194304-MHz clock source, and to 1 for a 32.768-kHz clock source. If the bit is set to 0, the input clock is divided by 128, resulting in a 32.768-kHz clock source. If a crystal is used for the clock source, the software must leave a delay of tXOSC_SETTLE after setting the CLK32EN bit and before any other accesses to the Hibernation module registers. The delay allows the crystal to power up and stabilize. If an oscillator is used for the clock source, no delay is needed. 7.2.3 Battery Management The Hibernation module can be independently powered by a battery or an auxiliary power source. The module can monitor the voltage level of the battery and detect when the voltage becomes too low. When this happens, an interrupt can be generated. The module can also be configured so that it will not go into Hibernate mode if the battery voltage is too low. Note that the Hibernation module draws power from whichever source (VBAT or VDD) has the higher voltage. Therefore, it is important to design the circuit to ensure that VDD is higher that VBAT under nominal conditions or else the Hibernation module draws power from the battery even when VDD is available. The Hibernation module can be configured to detect a low battery condition by setting the LOWBATEN bit of the HIBCTL register. In this configuration, the LOWBAT bit of the HIBRIS register will be set when the battery level is low. If the VABORT bit is also set, then the module is prevented from entering Hibernation mode when a low battery is detected. The module can also be configured to generate an interrupt for the low-battery condition (see “Interrupts and Status” on page 123). 7.2.4 Real-Time Clock The Hibernation module includes a 32-bit counter that increments once per second with a proper clock source and configuration (see “Clock Source” on page 122). The 32.768-kHz clock signal is fed into a predivider register which counts down the 32.768-kHz clock ticks to achieve a once per second clock rate for the RTC. The rate can be adjusted to compensate for inaccuracies in the clock source by using the predivider trim register. This register has a nominal value of 0x7FFF, and is used for one second out of every 64 seconds to divide the input clock. This allows the software to make fine corrections to the clock rate by adjusting the predivider trim register up or down from 0x7FFF. The predivider trim should be adjusted up from 0x7FFF in order to slow down the RTC rate, and down from 0x7FFF in order to speed up the RTC rate. The Hibernation module includes two 32-bit match registers that are compared to the value of the RTC counter. The match registers can be used to wake the processor from hibernation mode, or to generate an interrupt to the processor if it is not in hibernation. The RTC must be enabled with the RTCEN bit of the HIBCTL register. The value of the RTC can be set at any time by writing to the HIBRTCLD register. The predivider trim can be adjusted by reading and writing the HIBRTCT register. The predivider uses this register once every 64 seconds to adjust 122 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module the clock rate. The two match registers can be set by writing to the HIBRTCM0 and HIBRTCM1 registers. The RTC can be configured to generate interrupts by using the interrupt registers (see “Interrupts and Status” on page 123). 7.2.5 Non-Volatile Memory The Hibernation module contains 64 32-bit words of memory which are retained during hibernation. This memory is powered from the battery or auxiliary power supply during hibernation. The processor software can save state information in this memory prior to hibernation, and can then recover the state upon waking. The non-volatile memory can be accessed through the HIBDATA registers. 7.2.6 Power Control The Hibernation module controls power to the processor through the use of the HIB pin, which is intended to be connected to the enable signal of the external regulator(s) providing 3.3 V and/or 2.5 V to the microcontroller. When the HIB signal is asserted by the Hibernation module, the external regulator is turned off and no longer powers the microcontroller. The Hibernation module remains powered from the VBAT supply, which could be a battery or an auxiliary power source. Hibernation mode is initiated by the microcontroller setting the HIBREQ bit of the HIBCTL register. Prior to doing this, a wake-up condition must be configured, either from the external WAKE pin, or by using an RTC match. The Hibernation module is configured to wake from the external WAKE pin by setting the PINWEN bit of the HIBCTL register. It is configured to wake from RTC match by setting the RTCWEN bit. Either one or both of these bits can be set prior to going into hibernation. The WAKE pin includes a weak internal pull-up. Note that both the HIB and WAKE pins use the Hibernation module's internal power supply as the logic 1 reference. When the Hibernation module wakes, the microcontroller will see a normal power-on reset. It can detect that the power-on was due to a wake from hibernation by examining the raw interrupt status register (see “Interrupts and Status” on page 123) and by looking for state data in the non-volatile memory (see “Non-Volatile Memory” on page 123). When the HIB signal deasserts, enabling the external regulator, the external regulator must reach the operating voltage within tHIB_TO_VDD. 7.2.7 Interrupts and Status The Hibernation module can generate interrupts when the following conditions occur: ■ Assertion of WAKE pin ■ RTC match ■ Low battery detected All of the interrupts are ORed together before being sent to the interrupt controller, so the Hibernate module can only generate a single interrupt request to the controller at any given time. The software interrupt handler can service multiple interrupt events by reading the HIBMIS register. Software can also read the status of the Hibernation module at any time by reading the HIBRIS register which shows all of the pending events. This register can be used at power-on to see if a wake condition is pending, which indicates to the software that a hibernation wake occurred. The events that can trigger an interrupt are configured by setting the appropriate bits in the HIBIM register. Pending interrupts can be cleared by writing the corresponding bit in the HIBIC register. November 30, 2007 123 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 7.3 Initialization and Configuration The Hibernation module can be configured in several different combinations. The following sections show the recommended programming sequence for various scenarios. The examples below assume that a 32.768-kHz oscillator is used, and thus always show bit 2 (CLKSEL) of the HIBCTL register set to 1. If a 4.194304-MHz crystal is used instead, then the CLKSEL bit remains cleared. Because the Hibernation module runs at 32 kHz and is asynchronous to the rest of the system, software must allow a delay of tHIB_REG_WRITE after writes to certain registers (see “Register Access Timing” on page 121). The registers that require a delay are denoted with a footnote in Table 7-1 on page 125. 7.3.1 Initialization The clock source must be enabled first, even if the RTC will not be used. If a 4.194304-MHz crystal is used, perform the following steps: 1. Write 0x40 to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x10 to enable the crystal and select the divide-by-128 input path. 2. Wait for a time of tXOSC_SETTLE for the crystal to power up and stabilize before performing any other operations with the Hibernation module. If a 32.678-kHz oscillator is used, then perform the following steps: 1. Write 0x44 to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x10 to enable the oscillator input. 2. No delay is necessary. The above is only necessary when the entire system is initialized for the first time. If the processor is powered due to a wake from hibernation, then the Hibernation module has already been powered up and the above steps are not necessary. The software can detect that the Hibernation module and clock are already powered by examining the CLK32EN bit of the HIBCTL register. 7.3.2 RTC Match Functionality (No Hibernation) The following steps are needed to use the RTC match functionality of the Hibernation module: 1. Write the required RTC match value to one of the HIBRTCMn registers at offset 0x004 or 0x008. 2. Write the required RTC load value to the HIBRTCLD register at offset 0x00C. 3. Set the required RTC match interrupt mask in the RTCALT0 and RTCALT1 bits (bits 1:0) in the HIBIM register at offset 0x014. 4. Write 0x0000.0041 to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x010 to enable the RTC to begin counting. 7.3.3 RTC Match/Wake-Up from Hibernation The following steps are needed to use the RTC match and wake-up functionality of the Hibernation module: 1. Write the required RTC match value to the HIBRTCMn registers at offset 0x004 or 0x008. 2. Write the required RTC load value to the HIBRTCLD register at offset 0x00C. 3. Write any data to be retained during power cut to the HIBDATA register at offsets 0x030-0x12C. 124 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module 4. Set the RTC Match Wake-Up and start the hibernation sequence by writing 0x0000.004F to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x010. 7.3.4 External Wake-Up from Hibernation The following steps are needed to use the Hibernation module with the external WAKE pin as the wake-up source for the microcontroller: 1. Write any data to be retained during power cut to the HIBDATA register at offsets 0x030-0x12C. 2. Enable the external wake and start the hibernation sequence by writing 0x0000.0056 to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x010. 7.3.5 RTC/External Wake-Up from Hibernation 1. Write the required RTC match value to the HIBRTCMn registers at offset 0x004 or 0x008. 2. Write the required RTC load value to the HIBRTCLD register at offset 0x00C. 3. Write any data to be retained during power cut to the HIBDATA register at offsets 0x030-0x12C. 4. Set the RTC Match/External Wake-Up and start the hibernation sequence by writing 0x0000.005F to the HIBCTL register at offset 0x010. 7.4 Register Map Table 7-1 on page 125 lists the Hibernation registers. All addresses given are relative to the Hibernation Module base address at 0x400F.C000. Note: HIBRTCC, HIBRTCM0, HIBRTCM1, HIBRTCLD, HIBRTCT, and HIBDATA are on the Hibernation module clock domain and require a delay of tHIB_REG_WRITE between write accesses. See “Register Access Timing” on page 121. Table 7-1. Hibernation Module Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 HIBRTCC RO 0x0000.0000 Hibernation RTC Counter 127 0x004 HIBRTCM0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Hibernation RTC Match 0 128 0x008 HIBRTCM1 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Hibernation RTC Match 1 129 0x00C HIBRTCLD R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Hibernation RTC Load 130 0x010 HIBCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Control 131 0x014 HIBIM R/W 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Interrupt Mask 133 0x018 HIBRIS RO 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Raw Interrupt Status 134 0x01C HIBMIS RO 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Masked Interrupt Status 135 0x020 HIBIC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Interrupt Clear 136 0x024 HIBRTCT R/W 0x0000.7FFF Hibernation RTC Trim 137 0x030- HIBDATA R/W 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Data 138 0x12C November 30, 2007 125 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 7.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the Hibernation module registers, in numerical order by address offset. 126 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 1: Hibernation RTC Counter (HIBRTCC), offset 0x000 This register is the current 32-bit value of the RTC counter. Hibernation RTC Counter (HIBRTCC) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x000 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RTCC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description RTC Counter A read returns the 32-bit counter value. This register is read-only. To change the value, use the HIBRTCLD register. 31:0 RTCC RO 0x0000.0000 November 30, 2007 127 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: Hibernation RTC Match 0 (HIBRTCM0), offset 0x004 This register is the 32-bit match 0 register for the RTC counter. Hibernation RTC Match 0 (HIBRTCM0) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RTCM0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCM0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description RTC Match 0 A write loads the value into the RTC match register. A read returns the current match value. 31:0 RTCM0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF 128 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 3: Hibernation RTC Match 1 (HIBRTCM1), offset 0x008 This register is the 32-bit match 1 register for the RTC counter. Hibernation RTC Match 1 (HIBRTCM1) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RTCM1 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCM1 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description RTC Match 1 A write loads the value into the RTC match register. A read returns the current match value. 31:0 RTCM1 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF November 30, 2007 129 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: Hibernation RTC Load (HIBRTCLD), offset 0x00C This register is the 32-bit value loaded into the RTC counter. Hibernation RTC Load (HIBRTCLD) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RTCLD Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCLD Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description RTC Load A write loads the current value into the RTC counter (RTCC). A read returns the 32-bit load value. 31:0 RTCLD R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF 130 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 5: Hibernation Control (HIBCTL), offset 0x010 This register is the control register for the Hibernation module. Hibernation Control (HIBCTL) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved VABORT CLK32EN LOWBATEN PINWEN RTCWEN CLKSEL HIBREQ RTCEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Power Cut Abort Enable 0: Power cut occurs during a low-battery alert 1: Power cut is aborted 7 VABORT R/W 0 32-kHz Oscillator Enable 0: Disabled 1: Enabled This bit must be enabled to use the Hibernation module. If a crystal is used, then software should wait 20 ms after setting this bit to allow the crystal to power up and stabilize. 6 CLK32EN R/W 0 Low Battery Monitoring Enable 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When set, low battery voltage detection is enabled. 5 LOWBATEN R/W 0 External WAKE Pin Enable 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When set, an external event on the WAKE pin will re-power the device. 4 PINWEN R/W 0 RTC Wake-up Enable 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When set, an RTC match event (RTCM0 or RTCM1) will re-power the device based on the RTC counter value matching the corresponding match register 0 or 1. 3 RTCWEN R/W 0 November 30, 2007 131 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Hibernation Module Clock Select 0: Use Divide by 128 output. Use this value for a 4-MHz crystal. 1: Use raw output. Use this value for a 32-kHz oscillator. 2 CLKSEL R/W 0 Hibernation Request 0: Disabled 1: Hibernation initiated After a wake-up event, this bit is cleared by hardware. 1 HIBREQ R/W 0 RTC Timer Enable 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0 RTCEN R/W 0 132 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 6: Hibernation Interrupt Mask (HIBIM), offset 0x014 This register is the interrupt mask register for the Hibernation module interrupt sources. Hibernation Interrupt Mask (HIBIM) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x000.0000 External Wake-Up Interrupt Mask 0: Masked 1: Unmasked 3 EXTW R/W 0 Low Battery Voltage Interrupt Mask 0: Masked 1: Unmasked 2 LOWBAT R/W 0 RTC Alert1 Interrupt Mask 0: Masked 1: Unmasked 1 RTCALT1 R/W 0 RTC Alert0 Interrupt Mask 0: Masked 1: Unmasked 0 RTCALT0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 133 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: Hibernation Raw Interrupt Status (HIBRIS), offset 0x018 This register is the raw interrupt status for the Hibernation module interrupt sources. Hibernation Raw Interrupt Status (HIBRIS) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x000.0000 3 EXTW RO 0 External Wake-Up Raw Interrupt Status 2 LOWBAT RO 0 Low Battery Voltage Raw Interrupt Status 1 RTCALT1 RO 0 RTC Alert1 Raw Interrupt Status 0 RTCALT0 RO 0 RTC Alert0 Raw Interrupt Status 134 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 8: Hibernation Masked Interrupt Status (HIBMIS), offset 0x01C This register is the masked interrupt status for the Hibernation module interrupt sources. Hibernation Masked Interrupt Status (HIBMIS) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x01C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x000.0000 3 EXTW RO 0 External Wake-Up Masked Interrupt Status 2 LOWBAT RO 0 Low Battery Voltage Masked Interrupt Status 1 RTCALT1 RO 0 RTC Alert1 Masked Interrupt Status 0 RTCALT0 RO 0 RTC Alert0 Masked Interrupt Status November 30, 2007 135 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 9: Hibernation Interrupt Clear (HIBIC), offset 0x020 This register is the interrupt write-one-to-clear register for the Hibernation module interrupt sources. Hibernation Interrupt Clear (HIBIC) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x000.0000 External Wake-Up Masked Interrupt Clear Reads return an indeterminate value. 3 EXTW R/W1C 0 Low Battery Voltage Masked Interrupt Clear Reads return an indeterminate value. 2 LOWBAT R/W1C 0 RTC Alert1 Masked Interrupt Clear Reads return an indeterminate value. 1 RTCALT1 R/W1C 0 RTC Alert0 Masked Interrupt Clear Reads return an indeterminate value. 0 RTCALT0 R/W1C 0 136 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module Register 10: Hibernation RTC Trim (HIBRTCT), offset 0x024 This register contains the value that is used to trim the RTC clock predivider. It represents the computed underflow value that is used during the trim cycle. It is represented as 0x7FFF ± N clock cycles. Hibernation RTC Trim (HIBRTCT) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x024 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.7FFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRIM Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0000 RTC Trim Value This value is loaded into the RTC predivider every 64 seconds. It is used to adjust the RTC rate to account for drift and inaccuracy in the clock source. The compensation is made by software by adjusting the default value of 0x7FFF up or down. 15:0 TRIM R/W 0x7FFF November 30, 2007 137 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: Hibernation Data (HIBDATA), offset 0x030-0x12C This address space is implemented as a 64x32-bit memory (256 bytes). It can be loaded by the system processor in order to store any non-volatile state data and will not lose power during a power cut operation. Hibernation Data (HIBDATA) Base 0x400F.C000 Offset 0x030-0x12C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RTD Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTD Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 31:0 RTD R/W 0x0000.0000 Hibernation Module NV Registers[63:0] 138 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Hibernation Module 8 Internal Memory The LM3S6952 microcontroller comes with 64 KB of bit-banded SRAM and 256 KB of flash memory. The flash controller provides a user-friendly interface, making flash programming a simple task. Flash protection can be applied to the flash memory on a 2-KB block basis. 8.1 Block Diagram Figure 8-1. Flash Block Diagram Flash Control FMA FCMISC FCIM FCRIS FMC FMD Flash Timing USECRL Flash Protection FMPREn FMPPEn Flash Array SRAM Array Bridge Cortex-M3 ICode DCode System Bus APB User Registers USER_REG0 USER_REG1 USER_DBG 8.2 Functional Description This section describes the functionality of both the flash and SRAM memories. 8.2.1 SRAM Memory The internal SRAM of the Stellaris® devices is located at address 0x2000.0000 of the device memory map. To reduce the number of time consuming read-modify-write (RMW) operations, ARM has introduced bit-banding technology in the Cortex-M3 processor. With a bit-band-enabled processor, certain regions in the memory map (SRAM and peripheral space) can use address aliases to access individual bits in a single, atomic operation. The bit-band alias is calculated by using the formula: November 30, 2007 139 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller bit-band alias = bit-band base + (byte offset * 32) + (bit number * 4) For example, if bit 3 at address 0x2000.1000 is to be modified, the bit-band alias is calculated as: 0x2200.0000 + (0x1000 * 32) + (3 * 4) = 0x2202.000C With the alias address calculated, an instruction performing a read/write to address 0x2202.000C allows direct access to only bit 3 of the byte at address 0x2000.1000. For details about bit-banding, please refer to Chapter 4, “Memory Map” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 8.2.2 Flash Memory The flash is organized as a set of 1-KB blocks that can be individually erased. Erasing a block causes the entire contents of the block to be reset to all 1s. An individual 32-bit word can be programmed to change bits that are currently 1 to a 0. These blocks are paired into a set of 2-KB blocks that can be individually protected. The protection allows blocks to be marked as read-only or execute-only, providing different levels of code protection. Read-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, protecting the contents of those blocks from being modified. Execute-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, and can only be read by the controller instruction fetch mechanism, protecting the contents of those blocks from being read by either the controller or by a debugger. See also “Serial Flash Loader” on page 551 for a preprogrammed flash-resident utility used to download code to the flash memory of a device without the use of a debug interface. 8.2.2.1 Flash Memory Timing The timing for the flash is automatically handled by the flash controller. However, in order to do so, it must know the clock rate of the system in order to time its internal signals properly. The number of clock cycles per microsecond must be provided to the flash controller for it to accomplish this timing. It is software's responsibility to keep the flash controller updated with this information via the USec Reload (USECRL) register. On reset, the USECRL register is loaded with a value that configures the flash timing so that it works with the maximum clock rate of the part. If software changes the system operating frequency, the new operating frequency minus 1 (in MHz) must be loaded into USECRL before any flash modifications are attempted. For example, if the device is operating at a speed of 20 MHz, a value of 0x13 (20-1) must be written to the USECRL register. 8.2.2.2 Flash Memory Protection The user is provided two forms of flash protection per 2-KB flash blocks in four pairs of 32-bit wide registers. The protection policy for each form is controlled by individual bits (per policy per block) in the FMPPEn and FMPREn registers. ■ Flash Memory Protection Program Enable (FMPPEn): If set, the block may be programmed (written) or erased. If cleared, the block may not be changed. ■ Flash Memory Protection Read Enable (FMPREn): If set, the block may be executed or read by software or debuggers. If cleared, the block may only be executed. The contents of the memory block are prohibited from being accessed as data and traversing the DCode bus. The policies may be combined as shown in Table 8-1 on page 141. 140 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Table 8-1. Flash Protection Policy Combinations FMPPEn FMPREn Protection Execute-only protection. The block may only be executed and may not be written or erased. This mode is used to protect code. 0 0 1 0 The block may be written, erased or executed, but not read. This combination is unlikely to be used. Read-only protection. The block may be read or executed but may not be written or erased. This mode is used to lock the block from further modification while allowing any read or execute access. 0 1 1 1 No protection. The block may be written, erased, executed or read. An access that attempts to program or erase a PE-protected block is prohibited. A controller interrupt may be optionally generated (by setting the AMASK bit in the FIM register) to alert software developers of poorly behaving software during the development and debug phases. An access that attempts to read an RE-protected block is prohibited. Such accesses return data filled with all 0s. A controller interrupt may be optionally generated to alert software developers of poorly behaving software during the development and debug phases. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This implements a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. Details on programming these bits are discussed in “Nonvolatile Register Programming” on page 142. 8.3 Flash Memory Initialization and Configuration 8.3.1 Flash Programming The Stellaris® devices provide a user-friendly interface for flash programming. All erase/program operations are handled via three registers: FMA, FMD, and FMC. 8.3.1.1 To program a 32-bit word 1. Write source data to the FMD register. 2. Write the target address to the FMA register. 3. Write the flash write key and the WRITE bit (a value of 0xA442.0001) to the FMC register. 4. Poll the FMC register until the WRITE bit is cleared. 8.3.1.2 To perform an erase of a 1-KB page 1. Write the page address to the FMA register. 2. Write the flash write key and the ERASE bit (a value of 0xA442.0002) to the FMC register. 3. Poll the FMC register until the ERASE bit is cleared. 8.3.1.3 To perform a mass erase of the flash 1. Write the flash write key and the MERASE bit (a value of 0xA442.0004) to the FMC register. 2. Poll the FMC register until the MERASE bit is cleared. November 30, 2007 141 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 8.3.2 Nonvolatile Register Programming This section discusses how to update registers that are resident within the flash memory itself. These registers exist in a separate space from the main flash array and are not affected by an ERASE or MASS ERASE operation. These nonvolatile registers are updated by using the COMT bit in the FMC register to activate a write operation. For the USER_DBG register, the data to be written must be loaded into the FMD register before it is "committed". All other registers are R/W and can have their operation tried before committing them to nonvolatile memory. Important: These registers can only have bits changed from 1 to 0 by the user and there is no mechanism for the user to erase them back to a 1 value. In addition, the USER_REG0, USER_REG1, and USER_DBG use bit 31 (NW) of their respective registers to indicate that they are available for user write. These three registers can only be written once whereas the flash protection registers may be written multiple times. Table 8-2 on page 142 provides the FMA address required for commitment of each of the registers and the source of the data to be written when the COMT bit of the FMC register is written with a value of 0xA442.0008. After writing the COMT bit, the user may poll the FMC register to wait for the commit operation to complete. Table 8-2. Flash Resident Registersa Register to be Committed FMA Value Data Source FMPRE0 0x0000.0000 FMPRE0 FMPRE1 0x0000.0002 FMPRE1 FMPRE2 0x0000.0004 FMPRE2 FMPRE3 0x0000.0008 FMPRE3 FMPPE0 0x0000.0001 FMPPE0 FMPPE1 0x0000.0003 FMPPE1 FMPPE2 0x0000.0005 FMPPE2 FMPPE3 0x0000.0007 FMPPE3 USER_REG0 0x8000.0000 USER_REG0 USER_REG1 0x8000.0001 USER_REG1 USER_DBG 0x7510.0000 FMD a. Which FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are available depend on the flash size of your particular Stellaris® device. 8.4 Register Map Table 8-3 on page 142 lists the Flash memory and control registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register's address. The FMA, FMD, FMC, FCRIS, FCIM, and FCMISC registers are relative to the Flash control base address of 0x400F.D000. The FMPREn, FMPPEn, USECRL, USER_DBG, and USER_REGn registers are relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. Table 8-3. Flash Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page Flash Control Offset 0x000 FMA R/W 0x0000.0000 Flash Memory Address 144 142 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x004 FMD R/W 0x0000.0000 Flash Memory Data 145 0x008 FMC R/W 0x0000.0000 Flash Memory Control 146 0x00C FCRIS RO 0x0000.0000 Flash Controller Raw Interrupt Status 148 0x010 FCIM R/W 0x0000.0000 Flash Controller Interrupt Mask 149 0x014 FCMISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 Flash Controller Masked Interrupt Status and Clear 150 System Control Offset 0x130 FMPRE0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 152 0x200 FMPRE0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 152 0x134 FMPPE0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 153 0x400 FMPPE0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 153 0x140 USECRL R/W 0x31 USec Reload 151 0x1D0 USER_DBG R/W 0xFFFF.FFFE User Debug 154 0x1E0 USER_REG0 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF User Register 0 155 0x1E4 USER_REG1 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF User Register 1 156 0x204 FMPRE1 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 1 157 0x208 FMPRE2 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 2 158 0x20C FMPRE3 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 3 159 0x404 FMPPE1 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 1 160 0x408 FMPPE2 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 2 161 0x40C FMPPE3 R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 3 162 8.5 Flash Register Descriptions (Flash Control Offset) The remainder of this section lists and describes the Flash Memory registers, in numerical order by address offset. Registers in this section are relative to the Flash control base address of 0x400F.D000. November 30, 2007 143 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: Flash Memory Address (FMA), offset 0x000 During a write operation, this register contains a 4-byte-aligned address and specifies where the data is written. During erase operations, this register contains a 1 KB-aligned address and specifies which page is erased. Note that the alignment requirements must be met by software or the results of the operation are unpredictable. Flash Memory Address (FMA) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved OFFSET Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OFFSET Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:18 reserved RO 0x0 Address Offset Address offset in flash where operation is performed, except for nonvolatile registers (see “Nonvolatile Register Programming” on page 142 for details on values for this field). 17:0 OFFSET R/W 0x0 144 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 2: Flash Memory Data (FMD), offset 0x004 This register contains the data to be written during the programming cycle or read during the read cycle. Note that the contents of this register are undefined for a read access of an execute-only block. This register is not used during the erase cycles. Flash Memory Data (FMD) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Data Value Data value for write operation. 31:0 DATA R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 145 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: Flash Memory Control (FMC), offset 0x008 When this register is written, the flash controller initiates the appropriate access cycle for the location specified by the Flash Memory Address (FMA) register (see page 144). If the access is a write access, the data contained in the Flash Memory Data (FMD) register (see page 145) is written. This is the final register written and initiates the memory operation. There are four control bits in the lower byte of this register that, when set, initiate the memory operation. The most used of these register bits are the ERASE and WRITE bits. It is a programming error to write multiple control bits and the results of such an operation are unpredictable. Flash Memory Control (FMC) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 WRKEY Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved COMT MERASE ERASE WRITE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Write Key This field contains a write key, which is used to minimize the incidence of accidental flash writes. The value 0xA442 must be written into this field for a write to occur. Writes to the FMC register without this WRKEY value are ignored. A read of this field returns the value 0. 31:16 WRKEY WO 0x0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:4 reserved RO 0x0 Commit Register Value Commit (write) of register value to nonvolatile storage. A write of 0 has no effect on the state of this bit. If read, the state of the previous commit access is provided. If the previous commit access is complete, a 0 is returned; otherwise, if the commit access is not complete, a 1 is returned. This can take up to 50 μs. 3 COMT R/W 0 Mass Erase Flash Memory If this bit is set, the flash main memory of the device is all erased. A write of 0 has no effect on the state of this bit. If read, the state of the previous mass erase access is provided. If the previous mass erase access is complete, a 0 is returned; otherwise, if the previous mass erase access is not complete, a 1 is returned. This can take up to 250 ms. 2 MERASE R/W 0 146 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Erase a Page of Flash Memory If this bit is set, the page of flash main memory as specified by the contents of FMA is erased. A write of 0 has no effect on the state of this bit. If read, the state of the previous erase access is provided. If the previous erase access is complete, a 0 is returned; otherwise, if the previous erase access is not complete, a 1 is returned. This can take up to 25 ms. 1 ERASE R/W 0 Write a Word into Flash Memory If this bit is set, the data stored in FMD is written into the location as specified by the contents of FMA. A write of 0 has no effect on the state of this bit. If read, the state of the previous write update is provided. If the previous write access is complete, a 0 is returned; otherwise, if the write access is not complete, a 1 is returned. This can take up to 50 μs. 0 WRITE R/W 0 November 30, 2007 147 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: Flash Controller Raw Interrupt Status (FCRIS), offset 0x00C This register indicates that the flash controller has an interrupt condition. An interrupt is only signaled if the corresponding FCIM register bit is set. Flash Controller Raw Interrupt Status (FCRIS) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x00C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PRIS ARIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Programming Raw Interrupt Status This bit indicates the current state of the programming cycle. If set, the programming cycle completed; if cleared, the programming cycle has not completed. Programming cycles are either write or erase actions generated through the Flash Memory Control (FMC) register bits (see page 146). 1 PRIS RO 0 Access Raw Interrupt Status This bit indicates if the flash was improperly accessed. If set, the program tried to access the flash counter to the policy as set in the Flash Memory Protection Read Enable (FMPREn) and Flash Memory Protection Program Enable (FMPPEn) registers. Otherwise, no access has tried to improperly access the flash. 0 ARIS RO 0 148 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 5: Flash Controller Interrupt Mask (FCIM), offset 0x010 This register controls whether the flash controller generates interrupts to the controller. Flash Controller Interrupt Mask (FCIM) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PMASK AMASK Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Programming Interrupt Mask This bit controls the reporting of the programming raw interrupt status to the controller. If set, a programming-generated interrupt is promoted to the controller. Otherwise, interrupts are recorded but suppressed from the controller. 1 PMASK R/W 0 Access Interrupt Mask This bit controls the reporting of the access raw interrupt status to the controller. If set, an access-generated interrupt is promoted to the controller. Otherwise, interrupts are recorded but suppressed from the controller. 0 AMASK R/W 0 November 30, 2007 149 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: Flash Controller Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (FCMISC), offset 0x014 This register provides two functions. First, it reports the cause of an interrupt by indicating which interrupt source or sources are signalling the interrupt. Second, it serves as the method to clear the interrupt reporting. Flash Controller Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (FCMISC) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PMISC AMISC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Programming Masked Interrupt Status and Clear This bit indicates whether an interrupt was signaled because a programming cycle completed and was not masked. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. The PRIS bit in the FCRIS register (see page 148) is also cleared when the PMISC bit is cleared. 1 PMISC R/W1C 0 Access Masked Interrupt Status and Clear This bit indicates whether an interrupt was signaled because an improper access was attempted and was not masked. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. The ARIS bit in the FCRIS register is also cleared when the AMISC bit is cleared. 0 AMISC R/W1C 0 8.6 Flash Register Descriptions (System Control Offset) The remainder of this section lists and describes the Flash Memory registers, in numerical order by address offset. Registers in this section are relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. 150 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 7: USec Reload (USECRL), offset 0x140 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400F.E000 This register is provided as a means of creating a 1-μs tick divider reload value for the flash controller. The internal flash has specific minimum and maximum requirements on the length of time the high voltage write pulse can be applied. It is required that this register contain the operating frequency (in MHz -1) whenever the flash is being erased or programmed. The user is required to change this value if the clocking conditions are changed for a flash erase/program operation. USec Reload (USECRL) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x140 Type R/W, reset 0x31 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved USEC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Microsecond Reload Value MHz -1 of the controller clock when the flash is being erased or programmed. USEC should be set to 0x31 (50 MHz) whenever the flash is being erased or programmed. 7:0 USEC R/W 0x31 November 30, 2007 151 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 (FMPRE0), offset 0x130 and 0x200 Note: This register is aliased for backwards compatability. Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the read-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPPEn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 (FMPRE0) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x130 and 0x200 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Read Enable Enables 2-KB flash blocks to be executed or read. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 READ_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF 152 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 9: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 (FMPPE0), offset 0x134 and 0x400 Note: This register is aliased for backwards compatability. Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the execute-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPREn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 (FMPPE0) Base 0x400F.D000 Offset 0x134 and 0x400 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Programming Enable Configures 2-KB flash blocks to be execute only. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 PROG_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF November 30, 2007 153 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: User Debug (USER_DBG), offset 0x1D0 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register provides a write-once mechanism to disable external debugger access to the device in addition to 27 additional bits of user-defined data. The DBG0 bit (bit 0) is set to 0 from the factory and the DBG1 bit (bit 1) is set to 1, which enables external debuggers. Changing the DBG1 bit to 0 disables any external debugger access to the device permanently, starting with the next power-up cycle of the device. The NOTWRITTEN bit (bit 31) indicates that the register is available to be written and is controlled through hardware to ensure that the register is only written once. User Debug (USER_DBG) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x1D0 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFE 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 NW DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DATA DBG1 DBG0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description User Debug Not Written Specifies that this 32-bit dword has not been written. 31 NW R/W 1 User Data Contains the user data value. This field is initialized to all 1s and can only be written once. 30:2 DATA R/W 0x1FFFFFFF Debug Control 1 The DBG1 bit must be 1 and DBG0 must be 0 for debug to be available. 1 DBG1 R/W 1 Debug Control 0 The DBG1 bit must be 1 and DBG0 must be 0 for debug to be available. 0 DBG0 R/W 0 154 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 11: User Register 0 (USER_REG0), offset 0x1E0 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register provides 31 bits of user-defined data that is non-volatile and can only be written once. Bit 31 indicates that the register is available to be written and is controlled through hardware to ensure that the register is only written once. The write-once characteristics of this register are useful for keeping static information like communication addresses that need to be unique per part and would otherwise require an external EEPROM or other non-volatile device. User Register 0 (USER_REG0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x1E0 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 NW DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Not Written Specifies that this 32-bit dword has not been written. 31 NW R/W 1 User Data Contains the user data value. This field is initialized to all 1s and can only be written once. 30:0 DATA R/W 0x7FFFFFFF November 30, 2007 155 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: User Register 1 (USER_REG1), offset 0x1E4 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register provides 31 bits of user-defined data that is non-volatile and can only be written once. Bit 31 indicates that the register is available to be written and is controlled through hardware to ensure that the register is only written once. The write-once characteristics of this register are useful for keeping static information like communication addresses that need to be unique per part and would otherwise require an external EEPROM or other non-volatile device. User Register 1 (USER_REG1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x1E4 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 NW DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Not Written Specifies that this 32-bit dword has not been written. 31 NW R/W 1 User Data Contains the user data value. This field is initialized to all 1s and can only be written once. 30:0 DATA R/W 0x7FFFFFFF 156 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 13: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 1 (FMPRE1), offset 0x204 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the read-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPPEn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 1 (FMPRE1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x204 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Read Enable Enables 2-KB flash blocks to be executed or read. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 READ_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF November 30, 2007 157 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 2 (FMPRE2), offset 0x208 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the read-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPPEn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 2 (FMPRE2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x208 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Read Enable Enables 2-KB flash blocks to be executed or read. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 READ_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF 158 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 15: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 3 (FMPRE3), offset 0x20C Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the read-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPPEn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 3 (FMPRE3) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x20C Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Read Enable Enables 2-KB flash blocks to be executed or read. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 READ_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF November 30, 2007 159 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 1 (FMPPE1), offset 0x404 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the execute-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPREn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 1 (FMPPE1) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x404 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Programming Enable Configures 2-KB flash blocks to be execute only. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 PROG_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF 160 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory Register 17: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 2 (FMPPE2), offset 0x408 Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the execute-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPREn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 2 (FMPPE2) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x408 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Programming Enable Configures 2-KB flash blocks to be execute only. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 PROG_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF November 30, 2007 161 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 3 (FMPPE3), offset 0x40C Note: Offset is relative to System Control base address of 0x400FE000. This register stores the execute-only protection bits for each 2-KB flash block (FMPREn stores the execute-only bits). This register is loaded during the power-on reset sequence. The factory settings for the FMPREn and FMPPEn registers are a value of 1 for all implemented banks. This achieves a policy of open access and programmability. The register bits may be changed by writing the specific register bit. However, this register is R/W0; the user can only change the protection bit from a 1 to a 0 (and may NOT change a 0 to a 1). The changes are not permanent until the register is committed (saved), at which point the bit change is permanent. If a bit is changed from a 1 to a 0 and not committed, it may be restored by executing a power-on reset sequence. For additional information, see the "Flash Memory Protection" section. Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 3 (FMPPE3) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x40C Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PROG_ENABLE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Flash Programming Enable Configures 2-KB flash blocks to be execute only. The policies may be combined as shown in the table “Flash Protection Policy Combinations”. Value Description 0xFFFFFFFF Enables 256 KB of flash. 31:0 PROG_ENABLE R/W 0xFFFFFFFF 162 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Internal Memory 9 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) The GPIO module is composed of seven physical GPIO blocks, each corresponding to an individual GPIO port (Port A, Port B, Port C, Port D, Port E, Port F, and Port G, ). The GPIO module is FiRM-compliant and supports 6-43 programmable input/output pins, depending on the peripherals being used. The GPIO module has the following features: ■ Programmable control for GPIO interrupts – Interrupt generation masking – Edge-triggered on rising, falling, or both – Level-sensitive on High or Low values ■ 5-V-tolerant input/outputs ■ Bit masking in both read and write operations through address lines ■ Programmable control for GPIO pad configuration – Weak pull-up or pull-down resistors – 2-mA, 4-mA, and 8-mA pad drive – Slew rate control for the 8-mA drive – Open drain enables – Digital input enables 9.1 Functional Description Important: All GPIO pins are tri-stated by default (GPIOAFSEL=0, GPIODEN=0, GPIOPDR=0, and GPIOPUR=0), with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). The JTAG/SWD pins default to their JTAG/SWD functionality (GPIOAFSEL=1, GPIODEN=1 and GPIOPUR=1). A Power-On-Reset (POR) or asserting RST puts both groups of pins back to their default state. Each GPIO port is a separate hardware instantiation of the same physical block (see Figure 9-1 on page 164). The LM3S6952 microcontroller contains seven ports and thus seven of these physical GPIO blocks. November 30, 2007 163 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 9-1. GPIO Port Block Diagram Alternate Input Alternate Output Alternate Output Enable Interrupt GPIO Input GPIO Output GPIO Output Enable Pad Output Pad Output Enable Package I/O Pin GPIODATA GPIODIR Data Control GPIOIS GPIOIBE GPIOIEV GPIOIM GPIORIS GPIOMIS GPIOICR Interrupt Control GPIODR2R GPIODR4R GPIODR8R GPIOSLR GPIOPUR GPIOPDR GPIOODR GPIODEN Pad Control GPIOPeriphID0 GPIOPeriphID1 GPIOPeriphID2 GPIOPeriphID3 GPIOPeriphID4 GPIOPeriphID5 GPIOPeriphID6 GPIOPeriphID7 GPIOPCellID0 GPIOPCellID1 GPIOPCellID2 GPIOPCellID3 Identification Registers GPIOAFSEL Mode Control DEMUX MUX MUX Digital I/O Pad Pad Input GPIOLOCK Commit Control GPIOCR 9.1.1 Data Control The data control registers allow software to configure the operational modes of the GPIOs. The data direction register configures the GPIO as an input or an output while the data register either captures incoming data or drives it out to the pads. 9.1.1.1 Data Direction Operation The GPIO Direction (GPIODIR) register (see page 171) is used to configure each individual pin as an input or output. When the data direction bit is set to 0, the GPIO is configured as an input and the corresponding data register bit will capture and store the value on the GPIO port. When the data direction bit is set to 1, the GPIO is configured as an output and the corresponding data register bit will be driven out on the GPIO port. 9.1.1.2 Data Register Operation To aid in the efficiency of software, the GPIO ports allow for the modification of individual bits in the GPIO Data (GPIODATA) register (see page 170) by using bits [9:2] of the address bus as a mask. This allows software drivers to modify individual GPIO pins in a single instruction, without affecting the state of the other pins. This is in contrast to the "typical" method of doing a read-modify-write operation to set or clear an individual GPIO pin. To accommodate this feature, the GPIODATA register covers 256 locations in the memory map. During a write, if the address bit associated with that data bit is set to 1, the value of the GPIODATA register is altered. If it is cleared to 0, it is left unchanged. 164 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) For example, writing a value of 0xEB to the address GPIODATA + 0x098 would yield as shown in Figure 9-2 on page 165, where u is data unchanged by the write. Figure 9-2. GPIODATA Write Example 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 u u 1 u u 0 1 u 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GPIODATA 0xEB 0x098 ADDR[9:2] During a read, if the address bit associated with the data bit is set to 1, the value is read. If the address bit associated with the data bit is set to 0, it is read as a zero, regardless of its actual value. For example, reading address GPIODATA + 0x0C4 yields as shown in Figure 9-3 on page 165. Figure 9-3. GPIODATA Read Example 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Returned Value GPIODATA 0x0C4 ADDR[9:2] 9.1.2 Interrupt Control The interrupt capabilities of each GPIO port are controlled by a set of seven registers. With these registers, it is possible to select the source of the interrupt, its polarity, and the edge properties. When one or more GPIO inputs cause an interrupt, a single interrupt output is sent to the interrupt controller for the entire GPIO port. For edge-triggered interrupts, software must clear the interrupt to enable any further interrupts. For a level-sensitive interrupt, it is assumed that the external source holds the level constant for the interrupt to be recognized by the controller. Three registers are required to define the edge or sense that causes interrupts: ■ GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS) register (see page 172) ■ GPIO Interrupt Both Edges (GPIOIBE) register (see page 173) ■ GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV) register (see page 174) Interrupts are enabled/disabled via the GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM) register (see page 175). When an interrupt condition occurs, the state of the interrupt signal can be viewed in two locations: the GPIO Raw Interrupt Status (GPIORIS) and GPIO Masked Interrupt Status (GPIOMIS) registers (see page 176 and page 177). As the name implies, the GPIOMIS register only shows interrupt conditions that are allowed to be passed to the controller. The GPIORIS register indicates that a GPIO pin meets the conditions for an interrupt, but has not necessarily been sent to the controller. November 30, 2007 165 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller In addition to providing GPIO functionality, PB4 can also be used as an external trigger for the ADC. If PB4 is configured as a non-masked interrupt pin (GPIOIM is set to 1), not only is an interrupt for PortB generated, but an external trigger signal is sent to the ADC. If the ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX) register is configured to use the external trigger, an ADC conversion is initiated. If no other PortB pins are being used to generate interrupts, the ARM Integrated Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) Interrupt Set Enable (SETNA) register can disable the PortB interrupts and the ADC interrupt can be used to read back the converted data. Otherwise, the PortB interrupt handler needs to ignore and clear interrupts on B4, and wait for the ADC interrupt or the ADC interrupt needs to be disabled in the SETNA register and the PortB interrupt handler polls the ADC registers until the conversion is completed. Interrupts are cleared by writing a 1 to the GPIO Interrupt Clear (GPIOICR) register (see page 178). When programming the following interrupt control registers, the interrupts should be masked (GPIOIM set to 0). Writing any value to an interrupt control register (GPIOIS, GPIOIBE, or GPIOIEV) can generate a spurious interrupt if the corresponding bits are enabled. 9.1.3 Mode Control The GPIO pins can be controlled by either hardware or software. When hardware control is enabled via the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register (see page 179), the pin state is controlled by its alternate function (that is, the peripheral). Software control corresponds to GPIO mode, where the GPIODATA register is used to read/write the corresponding pins. 9.1.4 Commit Control The commit control registers provide a layer of protection against accidental programming of critical hardware peripherals. Writes to protected bits of the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register (see page 179) are not committed to storage unless the GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK) register (see page 189) has been unlocked and the appropriate bits of the GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) register (see page 190) have been set to 1. 9.1.5 Pad Control The pad control registers allow for GPIO pad configuration by software based on the application requirements. The pad control registers include the GPIODR2R, GPIODR4R, GPIODR8R, GPIOODR, GPIOPUR, GPIOPDR, GPIOSLR, and GPIODEN registers. 9.1.6 Identification The identification registers configured at reset allow software to detect and identify the module as a GPIO block. The identification registers include the GPIOPeriphID0-GPIOPeriphID7 registers as well as the GPIOPCellID0-GPIOPCellID3 registers. 9.2 Initialization and Configuration To use the GPIO, the peripheral clock must be enabled by setting the appropriate GPIO Port bit field (GPIOn) in the RCGC2 register. On reset, all GPIO pins (except for the five JTAG pins) are configured out of reset to be undriven (tristate): GPIOAFSEL=0, GPIODEN=0, GPIOPDR=0, and GPIOPUR=0. Table 9-1 on page 167 shows all possible configurations of the GPIO pads and the control register settings required to achieve them. Table 9-2 on page 167 shows how a rising edge interrupt would be configured for pin 2 of a GPIO port. 166 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Table 9-1. GPIO Pad Configuration Examples Configuration GPIO Register Bit Valuea AFSEL DIR ODR DEN PUR PDR DR2R DR4R DR8R SLR Digital Input (GPIO) 0 0 0 1 ? ? X X X X Digital Output (GPIO) 0 1 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? Open Drain Input 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X (GPIO) Open Drain Output 0 1 1 1 X X ? ? ? ? (GPIO) Open Drain 1 X 1 1 X X ? ? ? ? Input/Output (I2C) Digital Input (Timer 1 X 0 1 ? ? X X X X CCP) Digital Input (QEI) 1 X 0 1 ? ? X X X X Digital Output (PWM) 1 X 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? Digital Output (Timer 1 X 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? PWM) Digital Input/Output 1 X 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? (SSI) Digital Input/Output 1 X 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? (UART) Analog Input 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X (Comparator) Digital Output 1 X 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? (Comparator) a. X=Ignored (don’t care bit) ?=Can be either 0 or 1, depending on the configuration Table 9-2. GPIO Interrupt Configuration Example Desired Pin 2 Bit Valuea Interrupt Event Trigger Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0=edge X X X X X 0 X X 1=level GPIOIS 0=single X X X X X 0 X X edge 1=both edges GPIOIBE 0=Low level, X X X X X 1 X X or negative edge 1=High level, or positive edge GPIOIEV 0=masked 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1=not masked GPIOIM a. X=Ignored (don’t care bit) November 30, 2007 167 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 9.3 Register Map Table 9-3 on page 168 lists the GPIO registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to that GPIO port’s base address: ■ GPIO Port A: 0x4000.4000 ■ GPIO Port B: 0x4000.5000 ■ GPIO Port C: 0x4000.6000 ■ GPIO Port D: 0x4000.7000 ■ GPIO Port E: 0x4002.4000 ■ GPIO Port F: 0x4002.5000 ■ GPIO Port G: 0x4002.6000 Important: The GPIO registers in this chapter are duplicated in each GPIO block, however, depending on the block, all eight bits may not be connected to a GPIO pad. In those cases, writing to those unconnected bits has no effect and reading those unconnected bits returns no meaningful data. Note: The default reset value for the GPIOAFSEL, GPIOPUR, and GPIODEN registers are 0x0000.0000 for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins default to JTAG/SWD functionality. Because of this, the default reset value of these registers for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.0080 while the default reset value for Port C is 0x0000.000F. The default register type for the GPIOCR register is RO for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins are currently the only GPIOs that are protected by the GPIOCR register. Because of this, the register type for GPIO Port B7 and GPIO Port C[3:0] is R/W. The default reset value for the GPIOCR register is 0x0000.00FF for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). To ensure that the JTAG port is not accidentally programmed as a GPIO, these five pins default to non-commitable. Because of this, the default reset value of GPIOCR for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.007F while the default reset value of GPIOCR for Port C is 0x0000.00F0. Table 9-3. GPIO Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 GPIODATA R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Data 170 0x400 GPIODIR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Direction 171 0x404 GPIOIS R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Interrupt Sense 172 0x408 GPIOIBE R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Interrupt Both Edges 173 0x40C GPIOIEV R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Interrupt Event 174 0x410 GPIOIM R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Interrupt Mask 175 168 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x414 GPIORIS RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Raw Interrupt Status 176 0x418 GPIOMIS RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Masked Interrupt Status 177 0x41C GPIOICR W1C 0x0000.0000 GPIO Interrupt Clear 178 0x420 GPIOAFSEL R/W - GPIO Alternate Function Select 179 0x500 GPIODR2R R/W 0x0000.00FF GPIO 2-mA Drive Select 181 0x504 GPIODR4R R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO 4-mA Drive Select 182 0x508 GPIODR8R R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO 8-mA Drive Select 183 0x50C GPIOODR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Open Drain Select 184 0x510 GPIOPUR R/W - GPIO Pull-Up Select 185 0x514 GPIOPDR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Pull-Down Select 186 0x518 GPIOSLR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPIO Slew Rate Control Select 187 0x51C GPIODEN R/W - GPIO Digital Enable 188 0x520 GPIOLOCK R/W 0x0000.0001 GPIO Lock 189 0x524 GPIOCR - - GPIO Commit 190 0xFD0 GPIOPeriphID4 RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Peripheral Identification 4 192 0xFD4 GPIOPeriphID5 RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Peripheral Identification 5 193 0xFD8 GPIOPeriphID6 RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Peripheral Identification 6 194 0xFDC GPIOPeriphID7 RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Peripheral Identification 7 195 0xFE0 GPIOPeriphID0 RO 0x0000.0061 GPIO Peripheral Identification 0 196 0xFE4 GPIOPeriphID1 RO 0x0000.0000 GPIO Peripheral Identification 1 197 0xFE8 GPIOPeriphID2 RO 0x0000.0018 GPIO Peripheral Identification 2 198 0xFEC GPIOPeriphID3 RO 0x0000.0001 GPIO Peripheral Identification 3 199 0xFF0 GPIOPCellID0 RO 0x0000.000D GPIO PrimeCell Identification 0 200 0xFF4 GPIOPCellID1 RO 0x0000.00F0 GPIO PrimeCell Identification 1 201 0xFF8 GPIOPCellID2 RO 0x0000.0005 GPIO PrimeCell Identification 2 202 0xFFC GPIOPCellID3 RO 0x0000.00B1 GPIO PrimeCell Identification 3 203 9.4 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the GPIO registers, in numerical order by address offset. November 30, 2007 169 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: GPIO Data (GPIODATA), offset 0x000 The GPIODATA register is the data register. In software control mode, values written in the GPIODATA register are transferred onto the GPIO port pins if the respective pins have been configured as outputs through the GPIO Direction (GPIODIR) register (see page 171). In order to write to GPIODATA, the corresponding bits in the mask, resulting from the address bus bits [9:2], must be High. Otherwise, the bit values remain unchanged by the write. Similarly, the values read from this register are determined for each bit by the mask bit derived from the address used to access the data register, bits [9:2]. Bits that are 1 in the address mask cause the corresponding bits in GPIODATA to be read, and bits that are 0 in the address mask cause the corresponding bits in GPIODATA to be read as 0, regardless of their value. A read from GPIODATA returns the last bit value written if the respective pins are configured as outputs, or it returns the value on the corresponding input pin when these are configured as inputs. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Data (GPIODATA) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Data This register is virtually mapped to 256 locations in the address space. To facilitate the reading and writing of data to these registers by independent drivers, the data read from and the data written to the registers are masked by the eight address lines ipaddr[9:2]. Reads from this register return its current state. Writes to this register only affect bits that are not masked by ipaddr[9:2] and are configured as outputs. See “Data Register Operation” on page 164 for examples of reads and writes. 7:0 DATA R/W 0x00 170 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 2: GPIO Direction (GPIODIR), offset 0x400 The GPIODIR register is the data direction register. Bits set to 1 in the GPIODIR register configure the corresponding pin to be an output, while bits set to 0 configure the pins to be inputs. All bits are cleared by a reset, meaning all GPIO pins are inputs by default. GPIO Direction (GPIODIR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x400 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DIR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Data Direction The DIR values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Pins are inputs. 1 Pins are outputs. 7:0 DIR R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 171 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS), offset 0x404 The GPIOIS register is the interrupt sense register. Bits set to 1 in GPIOIS configure the corresponding pins to detect levels, while bits set to 0 configure the pins to detect edges. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x404 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Sense The IS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Edge on corresponding pin is detected (edge-sensitive). 1 Level on corresponding pin is detected (level-sensitive). 7:0 IS R/W 0x00 172 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 4: GPIO Interrupt Both Edges (GPIOIBE), offset 0x408 The GPIOIBE register is the interrupt both-edges register. When the corresponding bit in the GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS) register (see page 172) is set to detect edges, bits set to High in GPIOIBE configure the corresponding pin to detect both rising and falling edges, regardless of the corresponding bit in the GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV) register (see page 174). Clearing a bit configures the pin to be controlled by GPIOIEV. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Interrupt Both Edges (GPIOIBE) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x408 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IBE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Both Edges The IBE values are defined as follows: Value Description Interrupt generation is controlled by the GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV) register (see page 174). 0 1 Both edges on the corresponding pin trigger an interrupt. Note: Single edge is determined by the corresponding bit in GPIOIEV. 7:0 IBE R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 173 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 5: GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV), offset 0x40C The GPIOIEV register is the interrupt event register. Bits set to High in GPIOIEV configure the corresponding pin to detect rising edges or high levels, depending on the corresponding bit value in the GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS) register (see page 172). Clearing a bit configures the pin to detect falling edges or low levels, depending on the corresponding bit value in GPIOIS. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x40C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IEV Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Event The IEV values are defined as follows: Value Description Falling edge or Low levels on corresponding pins trigger interrupts. 0 Rising edge or High levels on corresponding pins trigger interrupts. 1 7:0 IEV R/W 0x00 174 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 6: GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM), offset 0x410 The GPIOIM register is the interrupt mask register. Bits set to High in GPIOIM allow the corresponding pins to trigger their individual interrupts and the combined GPIOINTR line. Clearing a bit disables interrupt triggering on that pin. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x410 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IME Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Mask Enable The IME values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Corresponding pin interrupt is masked. 1 Corresponding pin interrupt is not masked. 7:0 IME R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 175 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: GPIO Raw Interrupt Status (GPIORIS), offset 0x414 The GPIORIS register is the raw interrupt status register. Bits read High in GPIORIS reflect the status of interrupt trigger conditions detected (raw, prior to masking), indicating that all the requirements have been met, before they are finally allowed to trigger by the GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM) register (see page 175). Bits read as zero indicate that corresponding input pins have not initiated an interrupt. All bits are cleared by a reset. GPIO Raw Interrupt Status (GPIORIS) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x414 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Raw Status Reflects the status of interrupt trigger condition detection on pins (raw, prior to masking). The RIS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Corresponding pin interrupt requirements not met. 1 Corresponding pin interrupt has met requirements. 7:0 RIS RO 0x00 176 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 8: GPIO Masked Interrupt Status (GPIOMIS), offset 0x418 The GPIOMIS register is the masked interrupt status register. Bits read High in GPIOMIS reflect the status of input lines triggering an interrupt. Bits read as Low indicate that either no interrupt has been generated, or the interrupt is masked. In addition to providing GPIO functionality, PB4 can also be used as an external trigger for the ADC. If PB4 is configured as a non-masked interrupt pin (GPIOIM is set to 1), not only is an interrupt for PortB generated, but an external trigger signal is sent to the ADC. If the ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX) register is configured to use the external trigger, an ADC conversion is initiated. If no other PortB pins are being used to generate interrupts, the ARM Integrated Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) Interrupt Set Enable (SETNA) register can disable the PortB interrupts and the ADC interrupt can be used to read back the converted data. Otherwise, the PortB interrupt handler needs to ignore and clear interrupts on B4, and wait for the ADC interrupt or the ADC interrupt needs to be disabled in the SETNA register and the PortB interrupt handler polls the ADC registers until the conversion is completed. GPIOMIS is the state of the interrupt after masking. GPIO Masked Interrupt Status (GPIOMIS) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x418 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Masked Interrupt Status Masked value of interrupt due to corresponding pin. The MIS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Corresponding GPIO line interrupt not active. 1 Corresponding GPIO line asserting interrupt. 7:0 MIS RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 177 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 9: GPIO Interrupt Clear (GPIOICR), offset 0x41C The GPIOICR register is the interrupt clear register. Writing a 1 to a bit in this register clears the corresponding interrupt edge detection logic register. Writing a 0 has no effect. GPIO Interrupt Clear (GPIOICR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x41C Type W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Interrupt Clear The IC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Corresponding interrupt is unaffected. 1 Corresponding interrupt is cleared. 7:0 IC W1C 0x00 178 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 10: GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL), offset 0x420 The GPIOAFSEL register is the mode control select register. Writing a 1 to any bit in this register selects the hardware control for the corresponding GPIO line. All bits are cleared by a reset, therefore no GPIO line is set to hardware control by default. The commit control registers provide a layer of protection against accidental programming of critical hardware peripherals. Writes to protected bits of the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register (see page 179) are not committed to storage unless the GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK) register (see page 189) has been unlocked and the appropriate bits of the GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) register (see page 190) have been set to 1. Important: All GPIO pins are tri-stated by default (GPIOAFSEL=0, GPIODEN=0, GPIOPDR=0, and GPIOPUR=0), with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). The JTAG/SWD pins default to their JTAG/SWD functionality (GPIOAFSEL=1, GPIODEN=1 and GPIOPUR=1). A Power-On-Reset (POR) or asserting RST puts both groups of pins back to their default state. Caution – If the JTAG pins are used as GPIOs in a design, PB7 and PC2 cannot have external pull-down resistors connected to both of them at the same time. If both pins are pulled Low during reset, the controller has unpredictable behavior. If this happens, remove one or both of the pull-down resistors, and apply RST or power-cycle the part. In addition, it is possible to create a software sequence that prevents the debugger from connecting to the Stellaris® microcontroller. If the program code loaded into flash immediately changes the JTAG pins to their GPIO functionality, the debugger may not have enough time to connect and halt the controller before the JTAG pin functionality switches. This may lock the debugger out of the part. This can be avoided with a software routine that restores JTAG functionality based on an external or software trigger. GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x420 Type R/W, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved AFSEL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 179 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPIO Alternate Function Select The AFSEL values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Software control of corresponding GPIO line (GPIO mode). Hardware control of corresponding GPIO line (alternate hardware function). 1 Note: The default reset value for the GPIOAFSEL, GPIOPUR, and GPIODEN registers are 0x0000.0000 for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins default to JTAG/SWD functionality. Because of this, the default reset value of these registers for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.0080 while the default reset value for Port C is 0x0000.000F. 7:0 AFSEL R/W - 180 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 11: GPIO 2-mA Drive Select (GPIODR2R), offset 0x500 The GPIODR2R register is the 2-mA drive control register. It allows for each GPIO signal in the port to be individually configured without affecting the other pads. When writing a DRV2 bit for a GPIO signal, the corresponding DRV4 bit in the GPIODR4R register and the DRV8 bit in the GPIODR8R register are automatically cleared by hardware. GPIO 2-mA Drive Select (GPIODR2R) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x500 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.00FF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DRV2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Output Pad 2-mA Drive Enable A write of 1 to either GPIODR4[n] or GPIODR8[n] clears the corresponding 2-mA enable bit. The change is effective on the second clock cycle after the write. 7:0 DRV2 R/W 0xFF November 30, 2007 181 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: GPIO 4-mA Drive Select (GPIODR4R), offset 0x504 The GPIODR4R register is the 4-mA drive control register. It allows for each GPIO signal in the port to be individually configured without affecting the other pads. When writing the DRV4 bit for a GPIO signal, the corresponding DRV2 bit in the GPIODR2R register and the DRV8 bit in the GPIODR8R register are automatically cleared by hardware. GPIO 4-mA Drive Select (GPIODR4R) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x504 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DRV4 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Output Pad 4-mA Drive Enable A write of 1 to either GPIODR2[n] or GPIODR8[n] clears the corresponding 4-mA enable bit. The change is effective on the second clock cycle after the write. 7:0 DRV4 R/W 0x00 182 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 13: GPIO 8-mA Drive Select (GPIODR8R), offset 0x508 The GPIODR8R register is the 8-mA drive control register. It allows for each GPIO signal in the port to be individually configured without affecting the other pads. When writing the DRV8 bit for a GPIO signal, the corresponding DRV2 bit in the GPIODR2R register and the DRV4 bit in the GPIODR4R register are automatically cleared by hardware. GPIO 8-mA Drive Select (GPIODR8R) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x508 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DRV8 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Output Pad 8-mA Drive Enable A write of 1 to either GPIODR2[n] or GPIODR4[n] clears the corresponding 8-mA enable bit. The change is effective on the second clock cycle after the write. 7:0 DRV8 R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 183 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: GPIO Open Drain Select (GPIOODR), offset 0x50C The GPIOODR register is the open drain control register. Setting a bit in this register enables the open drain configuration of the corresponding GPIO pad. When open drain mode is enabled, the corresponding bit should also be set in the GPIO Digital Input Enable (GPIODEN) register (see page 188). Corresponding bits in the drive strength registers (GPIODR2R, GPIODR4R, GPIODR8R, and GPIOSLR ) can be set to achieve the desired rise and fall times. The GPIO acts as an open drain input if the corresponding bit in the GPIODIR register is set to 0; and as an open drain output when set to 1. When using the I2C module, the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register bit for PB2 and PB3 should be set to 1 (see examples in “Initialization and Configuration” on page 166). GPIO Open Drain Select (GPIOODR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x50C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ODE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Output Pad Open Drain Enable The ODE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Open drain configuration is disabled. 1 Open drain configuration is enabled. 7:0 ODE R/W 0x00 184 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 15: GPIO Pull-Up Select (GPIOPUR), offset 0x510 The GPIOPUR register is the pull-up control register. When a bit is set to 1, it enables a weak pull-up resistor on the corresponding GPIO signal. Setting a bit in GPIOPUR automatically clears the corresponding bit in the GPIO Pull-Down Select (GPIOPDR) register (see page 186). GPIO Pull-Up Select (GPIOPUR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x510 Type R/W, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PUE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Pad Weak Pull-Up Enable A write of 1 to GPIOPDR[n] clears the corresponding GPIOPUR[n] enables. The change is effective on the second clock cycle after the write. Note: The default reset value for the GPIOAFSEL, GPIOPUR, and GPIODEN registers are 0x0000.0000 for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins default to JTAG/SWD functionality. Because of this, the default reset value of these registers for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.0080 while the default reset value for Port C is 0x0000.000F. 7:0 PUE R/W - November 30, 2007 185 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: GPIO Pull-Down Select (GPIOPDR), offset 0x514 The GPIOPDR register is the pull-down control register. When a bit is set to 1, it enables a weak pull-down resistor on the corresponding GPIO signal. Setting a bit in GPIOPDR automatically clears the corresponding bit in the GPIO Pull-Up Select (GPIOPUR) register (see page 185). GPIO Pull-Down Select (GPIOPDR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x514 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PDE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Pad Weak Pull-Down Enable A write of 1 to GPIOPUR[n] clears the corresponding GPIOPDR[n] enables. The change is effective on the second clock cycle after the write. 7:0 PDE R/W 0x00 186 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 17: GPIO Slew Rate Control Select (GPIOSLR), offset 0x518 The GPIOSLR register is the slew rate control register. Slew rate control is only available when using the 8-mA drive strength option via the GPIO 8-mA Drive Select (GPIODR8R) register (see page 183). GPIO Slew Rate Control Select (GPIOSLR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x518 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SRL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Slew Rate Limit Enable (8-mA drive only) The SRL values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Slew rate control disabled. 1 Slew rate control enabled. 7:0 SRL R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 187 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: GPIO Digital Enable (GPIODEN), offset 0x51C The GPIODEN register is the digital enable register. By default, with the exception of the GPIO signals used for JTAG/SWD function, all other GPIO signals are configured out of reset to be undriven (tristate). Their digital function is disabled; they do not drive a logic value on the pin and they do not allow the pin voltage into the GPIO receiver. To use the pin in a digital function (either GPIO or alternate function), the corresponding GPIODEN bit must be set. GPIO Digital Enable (GPIODEN) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x51C Type R/W, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Digital Enable The DEN values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Digital functions disabled. 1 Digital functions enabled. Note: The default reset value for the GPIOAFSEL, GPIOPUR, and GPIODEN registers are 0x0000.0000 for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins default to JTAG/SWD functionality. Because of this, the default reset value of these registers for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.0080 while the default reset value for Port C is 0x0000.000F. 7:0 DEN R/W - 188 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 19: GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK), offset 0x520 The GPIOLOCK register enables write access to the GPIOCR register (see page 190). Writing 0x1ACCE551 to the GPIOLOCK register will unlock the GPIOCR register. Writing any other value to the GPIOLOCK register re-enables the locked state. Reading the GPIOLOCK register returns the lock status rather than the 32-bit value that was previously written. Therefore, when write accesses are disabled, or locked, reading the GPIOLOCK register returns 0x00000001. When write accesses are enabled, or unlocked, reading the GPIOLOCK register returns 0x00000000. GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x520 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 LOCK Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOCK Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPIO Lock A write of the value 0x1ACCE551 unlocks the GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) register for write access. A write of any other value reapplies the lock, preventing any register updates. A read of this register returns the following values: Value Description 0x0000.0001 locked 0x0000.0000 unlocked 31:0 LOCK R/W 0x0000.0001 November 30, 2007 189 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 20: GPIO Commit (GPIOCR), offset 0x524 The GPIOCR register is the commit register. The value of the GPIOCR register determines which bits of the GPIOAFSEL register will be committed when a write to the GPIOAFSEL register is performed. If a bit in the GPIOCR register is a zero, the data being written to the corresponding bit in the GPIOAFSEL register will not be committed and will retain its previous value. If a bit in the GPIOCR register is a one, the data being written to the corresponding bit of the GPIOAFSEL register will be committed to the register and will reflect the new value. The contents of the GPIOCR register can only be modified if the GPIOLOCK register is unlocked. Writes to the GPIOCR register will be ignored if the GPIOLOCK register is locked. Important: This register is designed to prevent accidental programming of the GPIOAFSEL registers that control connectivity to the JTAG/SWD debug hardware. By initializing the bits of the GPIOCR register to 0 for PB7 and PC[3:0], the JTAG/SWD debug port can only be converted to GPIOs through a deliberate set of writes to the GPIOLOCK, GPIOCR, and GPIOAFSEL registers. Because this protection is currently only implemented on the JTAG/SWD pins on PB7 and PC[3:0], all of the other bits in the GPIOCR registers cannot be written with 0x0. These bits are hardwired to 0x1, ensuring that it is always possible to commit new values to the GPIOAFSEL register bits of these other pins. GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0x524 Type -, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO - - - - - - - - Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 190 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPIO Commit On a bit-wise basis, any bit set allows the corresponding GPIOAFSEL bit to be set to its alternate function. Note: The default register type for the GPIOCR register is RO for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). These five pins are currently the only GPIOs that are protected by the GPIOCR register. Because of this, the register type for GPIO Port B7 and GPIO Port C[3:0] is R/W. The default reset value for the GPIOCR register is 0x0000.00FF for all GPIO pins, with the exception of the five JTAG/SWD pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]). To ensure that the JTAG port is not accidentally programmed as a GPIO, these five pins default to non-commitable. Because of this, the default reset value of GPIOCR for GPIO Port B is 0x0000.007F while the default reset value of GPIOCR for Port C is 0x0000.00F0. 7:0 CR - - November 30, 2007 191 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 21: GPIO Peripheral Identification 4 (GPIOPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 The GPIOPeriphID4, GPIOPeriphID5, GPIOPeriphID6, and GPIOPeriphID7 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 4 (GPIOPeriphID4) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFD0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID4 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID4 RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[7:0] 192 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 22: GPIO Peripheral Identification 5 (GPIOPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 The GPIOPeriphID4, GPIOPeriphID5, GPIOPeriphID6, and GPIOPeriphID7 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 5 (GPIOPeriphID5) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFD4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID5 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID5 RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[15:8] November 30, 2007 193 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 23: GPIO Peripheral Identification 6 (GPIOPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 The GPIOPeriphID4, GPIOPeriphID5, GPIOPeriphID6, and GPIOPeriphID7 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 6 (GPIOPeriphID6) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFD8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID6 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID6 RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[23:16] 194 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 24: GPIO Peripheral Identification 7 (GPIOPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC The GPIOPeriphID4, GPIOPeriphID5, GPIOPeriphID6, and GPIOPeriphID7 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 7 (GPIOPeriphID7) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFDC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID7 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID7 RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[31:24] November 30, 2007 195 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 25: GPIO Peripheral Identification 0 (GPIOPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 The GPIOPeriphID0, GPIOPeriphID1, GPIOPeriphID2, and GPIOPeriphID3 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 0 (GPIOPeriphID0) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFE0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0061 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[7:0] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID0 RO 0x61 196 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 26: GPIO Peripheral Identification 1 (GPIOPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 The GPIOPeriphID0, GPIOPeriphID1, GPIOPeriphID2, and GPIOPeriphID3 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 1 (GPIOPeriphID1) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFE4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[15:8] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID1 RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 197 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 27: GPIO Peripheral Identification 2 (GPIOPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 The GPIOPeriphID0, GPIOPeriphID1, GPIOPeriphID2, and GPIOPeriphID3 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 2 (GPIOPeriphID2) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFE8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0018 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[23:16] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID2 RO 0x18 198 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 28: GPIO Peripheral Identification 3 (GPIOPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC The GPIOPeriphID0, GPIOPeriphID1, GPIOPeriphID2, and GPIOPeriphID3 registers can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register; each register contains eight bits of the 32-bit register, used by software to identify the peripheral. GPIO Peripheral Identification 3 (GPIOPeriphID3) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFEC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO Peripheral ID Register[31:24] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID3 RO 0x01 November 30, 2007 199 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 29: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 0 (GPIOPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 The GPIOPCellID0, GPIOPCellID1, GPIOPCellID2, and GPIOPCellID3 registers are four 8-bit wide registers, that can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register. The register is used as a standard cross-peripheral identification system. GPIO PrimeCell Identification 0 (GPIOPCellID0) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFF0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.000D 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO PrimeCell ID Register[7:0] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID0 RO 0x0D 200 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 30: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 1 (GPIOPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 The GPIOPCellID0, GPIOPCellID1, GPIOPCellID2, and GPIOPCellID3 registers are four 8-bit wide registers, that can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register. The register is used as a standard cross-peripheral identification system. GPIO PrimeCell Identification 1 (GPIOPCellID1) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFF4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.00F0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO PrimeCell ID Register[15:8] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID1 RO 0xF0 November 30, 2007 201 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 31: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 2 (GPIOPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 The GPIOPCellID0, GPIOPCellID1, GPIOPCellID2, and GPIOPCellID3 registers are four 8-bit wide registers, that can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register. The register is used as a standard cross-peripheral identification system. GPIO PrimeCell Identification 2 (GPIOPCellID2) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFF8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0005 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO PrimeCell ID Register[23:16] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID2 RO 0x05 202 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) Register 32: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 3 (GPIOPCellID3), offset 0xFFC The GPIOPCellID0, GPIOPCellID1, GPIOPCellID2, and GPIOPCellID3 registers are four 8-bit wide registers, that can conceptually be treated as one 32-bit register. The register is used as a standard cross-peripheral identification system. GPIO PrimeCell Identification 3 (GPIOPCellID3) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 Offset 0xFFC Type RO, reset 0x0000.00B1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPIO PrimeCell ID Register[31:24] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID3 RO 0xB1 November 30, 2007 203 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 10 General-Purpose Timers Programmable timers can be used to count or time external events that drive the Timer input pins. The Stellaris® General-Purpose Timer Module (GPTM) contains three GPTM blocks (Timer0, Timer1, and Timer 2). Each GPTM block provides two 16-bit timers/counters (referred to as TimerA and TimerB) that can be configured to operate independently as timers or event counters, or configured to operate as one 32-bit timer or one 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC). Timers can also be used to trigger analog-to-digital (ADC) conversions. The trigger signals from all of the general-purpose timers are ORed together before reaching the ADC module, so only one timer should be used to trigger ADC events. Note: Timer2 is an internal timer and can only be used to generate internal interrupts or trigger ADC events. The General-Purpose Timer Module is one timing resource available on the Stellaris® microcontrollers. Other timer resources include the System Timer (SysTick) (see “System Timer (SysTick)” on page 40) and the PWM timer in the PWM module (see “PWM Timer” on page 466). The following modes are supported: ■ 32-bit Timer modes – Programmable one-shot timer – Programmable periodic timer – Real-Time Clock using 32.768-KHz input clock – Software-controlled event stalling (excluding RTC mode) ■ 16-bit Timer modes – General-purpose timer function with an 8-bit prescaler (for one-shot and periodic modes only) – Programmable one-shot timer – Programmable periodic timer – Software-controlled event stalling ■ 16-bit Input Capture modes – Input edge count capture – Input edge time capture ■ 16-bit PWM mode – Simple PWM mode with software-programmable output inversion of the PWM signal 10.1 Block Diagram Note: In Figure 10-1 on page 205, the specific CCP pins available depend on the Stellaris® device. See Table 10-1 on page 205 for the available CCPs. 204 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Figure 10-1. GPTM Module Block Diagram TA Comparator TB Comparator GPTMTBR GPTMAR Clock / Edge Detect RTC Divider Clock / Edge Detect TimerA Interrupt TimerB Interrupt System Clock 0x0000 (Down Counter Modes) 0x0000 (Down Counter Modes) 32 KHz or Even CCP Pin Odd CCP Pin En En TimerA Control GPTMTAPMR GPTMTAILR GPTMTAMATCHR GPTMTAPR GPTMTAMR TimerB Control GPTMTBPMR GPTMTBILR GPTMTBMATCHR GPTMTBPR GPTMTBMR Interrupt / Config GPTMCFG GPTMRIS GPTMICR GPTMMIS GPTMIMR GPTMCTL Table 10-1. Available CCP Pins Timer 16-Bit Up/Down Counter Even CCP Pin Odd CCP Pin Timer 0 TimerA CCP0 - TimerB - CCP1 Timer 1 TimerA CCP2 - TimerB - CCP3 Timer 2 TimerA - - TimerB - - 10.2 Functional Description The main components of each GPTM block are two free-running 16-bit up/down counters (referred to as TimerA and TimerB), two 16-bit match registers, two prescaler match registers, and two 16-bit load/initialization registers and their associated control functions. The exact functionality of each GPTM is controlled by software and configured through the register interface. Software configures the GPTM using the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register (see page 216), the GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR) register (see page 217), and the GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR) register (see page 219). When in one of the 32-bit modes, the timer can only act as a 32-bit timer. However, when configured in 16-bit mode, the GPTM can have its two 16-bit timers configured in any combination of the 16-bit modes. 10.2.1 GPTM Reset Conditions After reset has been applied to the GPTM module, the module is in an inactive state, and all control registers are cleared and in their default states. Counters TimerA and TimerB are initialized to 0xFFFF, along with their corresponding load registers: the GPTM TimerA Interval Load November 30, 2007 205 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller (GPTMTAILR) register (see page 230) and the GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR) register (see page 231). The prescale counters are initialized to 0x00: the GPTM TimerA Prescale (GPTMTAPR) register (see page 234) and the GPTM TimerB Prescale (GPTMTBPR) register (see page 235). 10.2.2 32-Bit Timer Operating Modes This section describes the three GPTM 32-bit timer modes (One-Shot, Periodic, and RTC) and their configuration. The GPTM is placed into 32-bit mode by writing a 0 (One-Shot/Periodic 32-bit timer mode) or a 1 (RTC mode) to the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register. In both configurations, certain GPTM registers are concatenated to form pseudo 32-bit registers. These registers include: ■ GPTM TimerA Interval Load (GPTMTAILR) register [15:0], see page 230 ■ GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR) register [15:0], see page 231 ■ GPTM TimerA (GPTMTAR) register [15:0], see page 238 ■ GPTM TimerB (GPTMTBR) register [15:0], see page 239 In the 32-bit modes, the GPTM translates a 32-bit write access to GPTMTAILR into a write access to both GPTMTAILR and GPTMTBILR. The resulting word ordering for such a write operation is: GPTMTBILR[15:0]:GPTMTAILR[15:0] Likewise, a read access to GPTMTAR returns the value: GPTMTBR[15:0]:GPTMTAR[15:0] 10.2.2.1 32-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode In 32-bit one-shot and periodic timer modes, the concatenated versions of the TimerA and TimerB registers are configured as a 32-bit down-counter. The selection of one-shot or periodic mode is determined by the value written to the TAMR field of the GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR) register (see page 217), and there is no need to write to the GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR) register. When software writes the TAEN bit in the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register (see page 221), the timer begins counting down from its preloaded value. Once the 0x0000.0000 state is reached, the timer reloads its start value from the concatenated GPTMTAILR on the next cycle. If configured to be a one-shot timer, the timer stops counting and clears the TAEN bit in the GPTMCTL register. If configured as a periodic timer, it continues counting. In addition to reloading the count value, the GPTM generates interrupts and output triggers when it reaches the 0x0000000 state. The GPTM sets the TATORIS bit in the GPTM Raw Interrupt Status (GPTMRIS) register (see page 226), and holds it until it is cleared by writing the GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR) register (see page 228). If the time-out interrupt is enabled in the GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTIMR) register (see page 224), the GPTM also sets the TATOMIS bit in the GPTM Masked Interrupt Status (GPTMMIS) register (see page 227). The output trigger is a one-clock-cycle pulse that is asserted when the counter hits the 0x0000.0000 state, and deasserted on the following clock cycle. It is enabled by setting the TAOTE bit in GPTMCTL, and can trigger SoC-level events such as ADC conversions. If software reloads the GPTMTAILR register while the counter is running, the counter loads the new value on the next clock cycle and continues counting from the new value. 206 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers If the TASTALL bit in the GPTMCTL register is asserted, the timer freezes counting until the signal is deasserted. 10.2.2.2 32-Bit Real-Time Clock Timer Mode In Real-Time Clock (RTC) mode, the concatenated versions of the TimerA and TimerB registers are configured as a 32-bit up-counter. When RTC mode is selected for the first time, the counter is loaded with a value of 0x0000.0001. All subsequent load values must be written to the GPTM TimerA Match (GPTMTAMATCHR) register (see page 232) by the controller. The input clock on the CCP0, CCP2, or CCP4 pins is required to be 32.768 KHz in RTC mode. The clock signal is then divided down to a 1 Hz rate and is passed along to the input of the 32-bit counter. When software writes the TAEN bit inthe GPTMCTL register, the counter starts counting up from its preloaded value of 0x0000.0001. When the current count value matches the preloaded value in the GPTMTAMATCHR register, it rolls over to a value of 0x0000.0000 and continues counting until either a hardware reset, or it is disabled by software (clearing the TAEN bit). When a match occurs, the GPTM asserts the RTCRIS bit in GPTMRIS. If the RTC interrupt is enabled in GPTIMR, the GPTM also sets the RTCMIS bit in GPTMISR and generates a controller interrupt. The status flags are cleared by writing the RTCCINT bit in GPTMICR. If the TASTALL and/or TBSTALL bits in the GPTMCTL register are set, the timer does not freeze if the RTCEN bit is set in GPTMCTL. 10.2.3 16-Bit Timer Operating Modes The GPTM is placed into global 16-bit mode by writing a value of 0x4 to the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register (see page 216). This section describes each of the GPTM 16-bit modes of operation. TimerA and TimerB have identical modes, so a single description is given using an n to reference both. 10.2.3.1 16-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode In 16-bit one-shot and periodic timer modes, the timer is configured as a 16-bit down-counter with an optional 8-bit prescaler that effectively extends the counting range of the timer to 24 bits. The selection of one-shot or periodic mode is determined by the value written to the TnMR field of the GPTMTnMR register. The optional prescaler is loaded into the GPTM Timern Prescale (GPTMTnPR) register. When software writes the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register, the timer begins counting down from its preloaded value. Once the 0x0000 state is reached, the timer reloads its start value from GPTMTnILR and GPTMTnPR on the next cycle. If configured to be a one-shot timer, the timer stops counting and clears the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register. If configured as a periodic timer, it continues counting. In addition to reloading the count value, the timer generates interrupts and output triggers when it reaches the 0x0000 state. The GPTM sets the TnTORIS bit in the GPTMRIS register, and holds it until it is cleared by writing the GPTMICR register. If the time-out interrupt is enabled in GPTIMR, the GPTM also sets the TnTOMIS bit in GPTMISR and generates a controller interrupt. The output trigger is a one-clock-cycle pulse that is asserted when the counter hits the 0x0000 state, and deasserted on the following clock cycle. It is enabled by setting the TnOTE bit in the GPTMCTL register, and can trigger SoC-level events such as ADC conversions. If software reloads the GPTMTAILR register while the counter is running, the counter loads the new value on the next clock cycle and continues counting from the new value. November 30, 2007 207 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller If the TnSTALL bit in the GPTMCTL register is enabled, the timer freezes counting until the signal is deasserted. The following example shows a variety of configurations for a 16-bit free running timer while using the prescaler. All values assume a 50-MHz clock with Tc=20 ns (clock period). Table 10-2. 16-Bit Timer With Prescaler Configurations Prescale #Clock (T c)a Max Time Units 00000000 1 1.3107 mS 00000001 2 2.6214 mS 00000010 3 3.9321 mS ------------ -- -- -- 11111100 254 332.9229 mS 11111110 255 334.2336 mS 11111111 256 335.5443 mS a. Tc is the clock period. 10.2.3.2 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode In Edge Count mode, the timer is configured as a down-counter capable of capturing three types of events: rising edge, falling edge, or both. To place the timer in Edge Count mode, the TnCMR bit of the GPTMTnMR register must be set to 0. The type of edge that the timer counts is determined by the TnEVENT fields of the GPTMCTL register. During initialization, the GPTM Timern Match (GPTMTnMATCHR) register is configured so that the difference between the value in the GPTMTnILR register and the GPTMTnMATCHR register equals the number of edge events that must be counted. When software writes the TnEN bit in the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register, the timer is enabled for event capture. Each input event on the CCP pin decrements the counter by 1 until the event count matches GPTMTnMATCHR. When the counts match, the GPTM asserts the CnMRIS bit in the GPTMRIS register (and the CnMMIS bit, if the interrupt is not masked). The counter is then reloaded using the value in GPTMTnILR, and stopped since the GPTM automatically clears the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register. Once the event count has been reached, all further events are ignored until TnEN is re-enabled by software. Figure 10-2 on page 209 shows how input edge count mode works. In this case, the timer start value is set to GPTMnILR =0x000A and the match value is set to GPTMnMATCHR =0x0006 so that four edge events are counted. The counter is configured to detect both edges of the input signal. Note that the last two edges are not counted since the timer automatically clears the TnEN bit after the current count matches the value in the GPTMnMR register. 208 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Figure 10-2. 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode Example 0x000A 0x0006 0x0007 0x0008 0x0009 Input Signal Timer stops, flags asserted Timer reload Count on next cycle Ignored Ignored 10.2.3.3 16-Bit Input Edge Time Mode Note: The prescaler is not available in 16-Bit Input Edge Time mode. In Edge Time mode, the timer is configured as a free-running down-counter initialized to the value loaded in the GPTMTnILR register (or 0xFFFF at reset). This mode allows for event capture of both rising and falling edges. The timer is placed into Edge Time mode by setting the TnCMR bit in the GPTMTnMR register, and the type of event that the timer captures is determined by the TnEVENT fields of the GPTMCnTL register. When software writes the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register, the timer is enabled for event capture. When the selected input event is detected, the current Tn counter value is captured in the GPTMTnR register and is available to be read by the controller. The GPTM then asserts the CnERIS bit (and the CnEMIS bit, if the interrupt is not masked). After an event has been captured, the timer does not stop counting. It continues to count until the TnEN bit is cleared. When the timer reaches the 0x0000 state, it is reloaded with the value from the GPTMnILR register. Figure 10-3 on page 210 shows how input edge timing mode works. In the diagram, it is assumed that the start value of the timer is the default value of 0xFFFF, and the timer is configured to capture rising edge events. Each time a rising edge event is detected, the current count value is loaded into the GPTMTnR register, and is held there until another rising edge is detected (at which point the new count value is loaded into GPTMTnR). November 30, 2007 209 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 10-3. 16-Bit Input Edge Time Mode Example GPTMTnR=Y Input Signal Time Count GPTMTnR=X GPTMTnR=Z Z X Y 0xFFFF 10.2.3.4 16-Bit PWM Mode The GPTM supports a simple PWM generation mode. In PWM mode, the timer is configured as a down-counter with a start value (and thus period) defined by GPTMTnILR. PWM mode is enabled with the GPTMTnMR register by setting the TnAMS bit to 0x1, the TnCMR bit to 0x0, and the TnMR field to 0x2. When software writes the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register, the counter begins counting down until it reaches the 0x0000 state. On the next counter cycle, the counter reloads its start value from GPTMTnILR (and GPTMTnPR if using a prescaler) and continues counting until disabled by software clearing the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register. No interrupts or status bits are asserted in PWM mode. The output PWM signal asserts when the counter is at the value of the GPTMTnILR register (its start state), and is deasserted when the counter value equals the value in the GPTM Timern Match Register (GPTMnMATCHR). Software has the capability of inverting the output PWM signal by setting the TnPWML bit in the GPTMCTL register. Figure 10-4 on page 211 shows how to generate an output PWM with a 1-ms period and a 66% duty cycle assuming a 50-MHz input clock and TnPWML =0 (duty cycle would be 33% for the TnPWML =1 configuration). For this example, the start value is GPTMnIRL=0xC350 and the match value is GPTMnMR=0x411A. 210 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Figure 10-4. 16-Bit PWM Mode Example Output Signal Time Count GPTMTnR=GPTMnMR GPTMTnR=GPTMnMR 0xC350 0x411A TnPWML = 0 TnPWML = 1 TnEN set 10.3 Initialization and Configuration To use the general-purpose timers, the peripheral clock must be enabled by setting the TIMER0, TIMER1, and TIMER2 bits in the RCGC1 register. This section shows module initialization and configuration examples for each of the supported timer modes. 10.3.1 32-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode The GPTM is configured for 32-bit One-Shot and Periodic modes by the following sequence: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TAEN bit in the GPTMCTL register is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration Register (GPTMCFG) with a value of 0x0. 3. Set the TAMR field in the GPTM TimerA Mode Register (GPTMTAMR): a. Write a value of 0x1 for One-Shot mode. b. Write a value of 0x2 for Periodic mode. 4. Load the start value into the GPTM TimerA Interval Load Register (GPTMTAILR). 5. If interrupts are required, set the TATOIM bit in the GPTM Interrupt Mask Register (GPTMIMR). 6. Set the TAEN bit in the GPTMCTL register to enable the timer and start counting. November 30, 2007 211 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 7. Poll the TATORIS bit in the GPTMRIS register or wait for the interrupt to be generated (if enabled). In both cases, the status flags are cleared by writing a 1 to the TATOCINT bit of the GPTM Interrupt Clear Register (GPTMICR). In One-Shot mode, the timer stops counting after step 7 on page 212. To re-enable the timer, repeat the sequence. A timer configured in Periodic mode does not stop counting after it times out. 10.3.2 32-Bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) Mode To use the RTC mode, the timer must have a 32.768-KHz input signal on its CCP0, CCP2, or CCP4 pins. To enable the RTC feature, follow these steps: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TAEN bit is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration Register (GPTMCFG) with a value of 0x1. 3. Write the desired match value to the GPTM TimerA Match Register (GPTMTAMATCHR). 4. Set/clear the RTCEN bit in the GPTM Control Register (GPTMCTL) as desired. 5. If interrupts are required, set the RTCIM bit in the GPTM Interrupt Mask Register (GPTMIMR). 6. Set the TAEN bit in the GPTMCTL register to enable the timer and start counting. When the timer count equals the value in the GPTMTAMATCHR register, the counter is re-loaded with 0x0000.0000 and begins counting. If an interrupt is enabled, it does not have to be cleared. 10.3.3 16-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode A timer is configured for 16-bit One-Shot and Periodic modes by the following sequence: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TnEN bit is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration Register (GPTMCFG) with a value of 0x4. 3. Set the TnMR field in the GPTM Timer Mode (GPTMTnMR) register: a. Write a value of 0x1 for One-Shot mode. b. Write a value of 0x2 for Periodic mode. 4. If a prescaler is to be used, write the prescale value to the GPTM Timern Prescale Register (GPTMTnPR). 5. Load the start value into the GPTM Timer Interval Load Register (GPTMTnILR). 6. If interrupts are required, set the TnTOIM bit in the GPTM Interrupt Mask Register (GPTMIMR). 7. Set the TnEN bit in the GPTM Control Register (GPTMCTL) to enable the timer and start counting. 8. Poll the TnTORIS bit in the GPTMRIS register or wait for the interrupt to be generated (if enabled). In both cases, the status flags are cleared by writing a 1 to the TnTOCINT bit of the GPTM Interrupt Clear Register (GPTMICR). 212 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers In One-Shot mode, the timer stops counting after step 8 on page 212. To re-enable the timer, repeat the sequence. A timer configured in Periodic mode does not stop counting after it times out. 10.3.4 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode A timer is configured to Input Edge Count mode by the following sequence: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TnEN bit is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register with a value of 0x4. 3. In the GPTM Timer Mode (GPTMTnMR) register, write the TnCMR field to 0x0 and the TnMR field to 0x3. 4. Configure the type of event(s) that the timer captures by writing the TnEVENT field of the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register. 5. Load the timer start value into the GPTM Timern Interval Load (GPTMTnILR) register. 6. Load the desired event count into the GPTM Timern Match (GPTMTnMATCHR) register. 7. If interrupts are required, set the CnMIM bit in the GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR) register. 8. Set the TnEN bit in the GPTMCTL register to enable the timer and begin waiting for edge events. 9. Poll the CnMRIS bit in the GPTMRIS register or wait for the interrupt to be generated (if enabled). In both cases, the status flags are cleared by writing a 1 to the CnMCINT bit of the GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR) register. In Input Edge Count Mode, the timer stops after the desired number of edge events has been detected. To re-enable the timer, ensure that the TnEN bit is cleared and repeat step 4 on page 213 through step 9 on page 213. 10.3.5 16-Bit Input Edge Timing Mode A timer is configured to Input Edge Timing mode by the following sequence: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TnEN bit is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register with a value of 0x4. 3. In the GPTM Timer Mode (GPTMTnMR) register, write the TnCMR field to 0x1 and the TnMR field to 0x3. 4. Configure the type of event that the timer captures by writing the TnEVENT field of the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register. 5. Load the timer start value into the GPTM Timern Interval Load (GPTMTnILR) register. 6. If interrupts are required, set the CnEIM bit in the GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR) register. 7. Set the TnEN bit in the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register to enable the timer and start counting. 8. Poll the CnERIS bit in the GPTMRIS register or wait for the interrupt to be generated (if enabled). In both cases, the status flags are cleared by writing a 1 to the CnECINT bit of the GPTM November 30, 2007 213 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR) register. The time at which the event happened can be obtained by reading the GPTM Timern (GPTMTnR) register. In Input Edge Timing mode, the timer continues running after an edge event has been detected, but the timer interval can be changed at any time by writing the GPTMTnILR register. The change takes effect at the next cycle after the write. 10.3.6 16-Bit PWM Mode A timer is configured to PWM mode using the following sequence: 1. Ensure the timer is disabled (the TnEN bit is cleared) before making any changes. 2. Write the GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) register with a value of 0x4. 3. In the GPTM Timer Mode (GPTMTnMR) register, set the TnAMS bit to 0x1, the TnCMR bit to 0x0, and the TnMR field to 0x2. 4. Configure the output state of the PWM signal (whether or not it is inverted) in the TnEVENT field of the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register. 5. Load the timer start value into the GPTM Timern Interval Load (GPTMTnILR) register. 6. Load the GPTM Timern Match (GPTMTnMATCHR) register with the desired value. 7. If a prescaler is going to be used, configure the GPTM Timern Prescale (GPTMTnPR) register and the GPTM Timern Prescale Match (GPTMTnPMR) register. 8. Set the TnEN bit in the GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) register to enable the timer and begin generation of the output PWM signal. In PWM Timing mode, the timer continues running after the PWM signal has been generated. The PWM period can be adjusted at any time by writing the GPTMTnILR register, and the change takes effect at the next cycle after the write. 10.4 Register Map Table 10-3 on page 214 lists the GPTM registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to that timer’s base address: ■ Timer0: 0x4003.0000 ■ Timer1: 0x4003.1000 ■ Timer2: 0x4003.2000 Table 10-3. Timers Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 GPTMCFG R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM Configuration 216 0x004 GPTMTAMR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerA Mode 217 0x008 GPTMTBMR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerB Mode 219 214 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x00C GPTMCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM Control 221 0x018 GPTMIMR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM Interrupt Mask 224 0x01C GPTMRIS RO 0x0000.0000 GPTM Raw Interrupt Status 226 0x020 GPTMMIS RO 0x0000.0000 GPTM Masked Interrupt Status 227 0x024 GPTMICR W1C 0x0000.0000 GPTM Interrupt Clear 228 GPTM TimerA Interval Load 230 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 0x028 GPTMTAILR R/W 0x02C GPTMTBILR R/W 0x0000.FFFF GPTM TimerB Interval Load 231 GPTM TimerA Match 232 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 0x030 GPTMTAMATCHR R/W 0x034 GPTMTBMATCHR R/W 0x0000.FFFF GPTM TimerB Match 233 0x038 GPTMTAPR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerA Prescale 234 0x03C GPTMTBPR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerB Prescale 235 0x040 GPTMTAPMR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerA Prescale Match 236 0x044 GPTMTBPMR R/W 0x0000.0000 GPTM TimerB Prescale Match 237 GPTM TimerA 238 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 0x048 GPTMTAR RO 0x04C GPTMTBR RO 0x0000.FFFF GPTM TimerB 239 10.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the GPTM registers, in numerical order by address offset. November 30, 2007 215 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG), offset 0x000 This register configures the global operation of the GPTM module. The value written to this register determines whether the GPTM is in 32- or 16-bit mode. GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GPTMCFG Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM Configuration The GPTMCFG values are defined as follows: Value Description 0x0 32-bit timer configuration. 0x1 32-bit real-time clock (RTC) counter configuration. 0x2 Reserved. 0x3 Reserved. 16-bit timer configuration, function is controlled by bits 1:0 of GPTMTAMR and GPTMTBMR. 0x4-0x7 2:0 GPTMCFG R/W 0x0 216 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 2: GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR), offset 0x004 This register configures the GPTM based on the configuration selected in the GPTMCFG register. When in 16-bit PWM mode, set the TAAMS bit to 0x1, the TACMR bit to 0x0, and the TAMR field to 0x2. GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TAAMS TACMR TAMR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerA Alternate Mode Select The TAAMS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Capture mode is enabled. 1 PWM mode is enabled. Note: To enable PWM mode, you must also clear the TACMR bit and set the TAMR field to 0x2. 3 TAAMS R/W 0 GPTM TimerA Capture Mode The TACMR values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Edge-Count mode. 1 Edge-Time mode. 2 TACMR R/W 0 November 30, 2007 217 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerA Mode The TAMR values are defined as follows: Value Description 0x0 Reserved. 0x1 One-Shot Timer mode. 0x2 Periodic Timer mode. 0x3 Capture mode. The Timer mode is based on the timer configuration defined by bits 2:0 in the GPTMCFG register (16-or 32-bit). In 16-bit timer configuration, TAMR controls the 16-bit timer modes for TimerA. In 32-bit timer configuration, this register controls the mode and the contents of GPTMTBMR are ignored. 1:0 TAMR R/W 0x0 218 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 3: GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR), offset 0x008 This register configures the GPTM based on the configuration selected in the GPTMCFG register. When in 16-bit PWM mode, set the TBAMS bit to 0x1, the TBCMR bit to 0x0, and the TBMR field to 0x2. GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TBAMS TBCMR TBMR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerB Alternate Mode Select The TBAMS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Capture mode is enabled. 1 PWM mode is enabled. Note: To enable PWM mode, you must also clear the TBCMR bit and set the TBMR field to 0x2. 3 TBAMS R/W 0 GPTM TimerB Capture Mode The TBCMR values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Edge-Count mode. 1 Edge-Time mode. 2 TBCMR R/W 0 November 30, 2007 219 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerB Mode The TBMR values are defined as follows: Value Description 0x0 Reserved. 0x1 One-Shot Timer mode. 0x2 Periodic Timer mode. 0x3 Capture mode. The timer mode is based on the timer configuration defined by bits 2:0 in the GPTMCFG register. In 16-bit timer configuration, these bits control the 16-bit timer modes for TimerB. In 32-bit timer configuration, this register’s contents are ignored and GPTMTAMR is used. 1:0 TBMR R/W 0x0 220 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 4: GPTM Control (GPTMCTL), offset 0x00C This register is used alongside the GPTMCFG and GMTMTnMR registers to fine-tune the timer configuration, and to enable other features such as timer stall and the output trigger. The output trigger can be used to initiate transfers on the ADC module. GPTM Control (GPTMCTL) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TBPWML TBOTE reserved TBEVENT TBSTALL TBEN reserved TAPWML TAOTE RTCEN TAEVENT TASTALL TAEN Type RO R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:15 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerB PWM Output Level The TBPWML values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Output is unaffected. 1 Output is inverted. 14 TBPWML R/W 0 GPTM TimerB Output Trigger Enable The TBOTE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The output TimerB trigger is disabled. 1 The output TimerB trigger is enabled. 13 TBOTE R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 12 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 221 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerB Event Mode The TBEVENT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0x0 Positive edge. 0x1 Negative edge. 0x2 Reserved 0x3 Both edges. 11:10 TBEVENT R/W 0x0 GPTM TimerB Stall Enable The TBSTALL values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 TimerB stalling is disabled. 1 TimerB stalling is enabled. 9 TBSTALL R/W 0 GPTM TimerB Enable The TBEN values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 TimerB is disabled. TimerB is enabled and begins counting or the capture logic is enabled based on the GPTMCFG register. 1 8 TBEN R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7 reserved RO 0 GPTM TimerA PWM Output Level The TAPWML values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Output is unaffected. 1 Output is inverted. 6 TAPWML R/W 0 GPTM TimerA Output Trigger Enable The TAOTE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The output TimerA trigger is disabled. 1 The output TimerA trigger is enabled. 5 TAOTE R/W 0 222 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM RTC Enable The RTCEN values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 RTC counting is disabled. 1 RTC counting is enabled. 4 RTCEN R/W 0 GPTM TimerA Event Mode The TAEVENT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0x0 Positive edge. 0x1 Negative edge. 0x2 Reserved 0x3 Both edges. 3:2 TAEVENT R/W 0x0 GPTM TimerA Stall Enable The TASTALL values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 TimerA stalling is disabled. 1 TimerA stalling is enabled. 1 TASTALL R/W 0 GPTM TimerA Enable The TAEN values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 TimerA is disabled. TimerA is enabled and begins counting or the capture logic is enabled based on the GPTMCFG register. 1 0 TAEN R/W 0 November 30, 2007 223 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 5: GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR), offset 0x018 This register allows software to enable/disable GPTM controller-level interrupts. Writing a 1 enables the interrupt, while writing a 0 disables it. GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x018 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CBEIM CBMIM TBTOIM reserved RTCIM CAEIM CAMIM TATOIM Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM CaptureB Event Interrupt Mask The CBEIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 10 CBEIM R/W 0 GPTM CaptureB Match Interrupt Mask The CBMIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 9 CBMIM R/W 0 GPTM TimerB Time-Out Interrupt Mask The TBTOIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 8 TBTOIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:4 reserved RO 0 224 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM RTC Interrupt Mask The RTCIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 3 RTCIM R/W 0 GPTM CaptureA Event Interrupt Mask The CAEIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 2 CAEIM R/W 0 GPTM CaptureA Match Interrupt Mask The CAMIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 1 CAMIM R/W 0 GPTM TimerA Time-Out Interrupt Mask The TATOIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Interrupt is disabled. 1 Interrupt is enabled. 0 TATOIM R/W 0 November 30, 2007 225 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: GPTM Raw Interrupt Status (GPTMRIS), offset 0x01C This register shows the state of the GPTM's internal interrupt signal. These bits are set whether or not the interrupt is masked in the GPTMIMR register. Each bit can be cleared by writing a 1 to its corresponding bit in GPTMICR. GPTM Raw Interrupt Status (GPTMRIS) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x01C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CBERIS CBMRIS TBTORIS reserved RTCRIS CAERIS CAMRIS TATORIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM CaptureB Event Raw Interrupt This is the CaptureB Event interrupt status prior to masking. 10 CBERIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureB Match Raw Interrupt This is the CaptureB Match interrupt status prior to masking. 9 CBMRIS RO 0 GPTM TimerB Time-Out Raw Interrupt This is the TimerB time-out interrupt status prior to masking. 8 TBTORIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:4 reserved RO 0x0 GPTM RTC Raw Interrupt This is the RTC Event interrupt status prior to masking. 3 RTCRIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureA Event Raw Interrupt This is the CaptureA Event interrupt status prior to masking. 2 CAERIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureA Match Raw Interrupt This is the CaptureA Match interrupt status prior to masking. 1 CAMRIS RO 0 GPTM TimerA Time-Out Raw Interrupt This the TimerA time-out interrupt status prior to masking. 0 TATORIS RO 0 226 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 7: GPTM Masked Interrupt Status (GPTMMIS), offset 0x020 This register show the state of the GPTM's controller-level interrupt. If an interrupt is unmasked in GPTMIMR, and there is an event that causes the interrupt to be asserted, the corresponding bit is set in this register. All bits are cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit in GPTMICR. GPTM Masked Interrupt Status (GPTMMIS) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x020 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CBEMIS CBMMIS TBTOMIS reserved RTCMIS CAEMIS CAMMIS TATOMIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM CaptureB Event Masked Interrupt This is the CaptureB event interrupt status after masking. 10 CBEMIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureB Match Masked Interrupt This is the CaptureB match interrupt status after masking. 9 CBMMIS RO 0 GPTM TimerB Time-Out Masked Interrupt This is the TimerB time-out interrupt status after masking. 8 TBTOMIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:4 reserved RO 0x0 GPTM RTC Masked Interrupt This is the RTC event interrupt status after masking. 3 RTCMIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureA Event Masked Interrupt This is the CaptureA event interrupt status after masking. 2 CAEMIS RO 0 GPTM CaptureA Match Masked Interrupt This is the CaptureA match interrupt status after masking. 1 CAMMIS RO 0 GPTM TimerA Time-Out Masked Interrupt This is the TimerA time-out interrupt status after masking. 0 TATOMIS RO 0 November 30, 2007 227 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR), offset 0x024 This register is used to clear the status bits in the GPTMRIS and GPTMMIS registers. Writing a 1 to a bit clears the corresponding bit in the GPTMRIS and GPTMMIS registers. GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x024 Type W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CBECINT CBMCINT TBTOCINT reserved RTCCINT CAECINT CAMCINT TATOCINT Type RO RO RO RO RO W1C W1C W1C RO RO RO RO W1C W1C W1C W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM CaptureB Event Interrupt Clear The CBECINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 10 CBECINT W1C 0 GPTM CaptureB Match Interrupt Clear The CBMCINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 9 CBMCINT W1C 0 GPTM TimerB Time-Out Interrupt Clear The TBTOCINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 8 TBTOCINT W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:4 reserved RO 0x0 228 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM RTC Interrupt Clear The RTCCINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 3 RTCCINT W1C 0 GPTM CaptureA Event Interrupt Clear The CAECINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 2 CAECINT W1C 0 GPTM CaptureA Match Raw Interrupt This is the CaptureA match interrupt status after masking. 1 CAMCINT W1C 0 GPTM TimerA Time-Out Raw Interrupt The TATOCINT values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 The interrupt is unaffected. 1 The interrupt is cleared. 0 TATOCINT W1C 0 November 30, 2007 229 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 9: GPTM TimerA Interval Load (GPTMTAILR), offset 0x028 This register is used to load the starting count value into the timer. When GPTM is configured to one of the 32-bit modes, GPTMTAILR appears as a 32-bit register (the upper 16-bits correspond to the contents of the GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR) register). In 16-bit mode, the upper 16 bits of this register read as 0s and have no effect on the state of GPTMTBILR. GPTM TimerA Interval Load (GPTMTAILR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x028 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TAILRH Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TAILRL Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerA Interval Load Register High When configured for 32-bit mode via the GPTMCFG register, the GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR) register loads this value on a write. A read returns the current value of GPTMTBILR. In 16-bit mode, this field reads as 0 and does not have an effect on the state of GPTMTBILR. 0xFFFF (32-bit mode) 0x0000 (16-bit mode) 31:16 TAILRH R/W GPTM TimerA Interval Load Register Low For both 16- and 32-bit modes, writing this field loads the counter for TimerA. A read returns the current value of GPTMTAILR. 15:0 TAILRL R/W 0xFFFF 230 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 10: GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR), offset 0x02C This register is used to load the starting count value into TimerB. When the GPTM is configured to a 32-bit mode, GPTMTBILR returns the current value of TimerB and ignores writes. GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x02C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TBILRL Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0000 GPTM TimerB Interval Load Register When the GPTM is not configured as a 32-bit timer, a write to this field updates GPTMTBILR. In 32-bit mode, writes are ignored, and reads return the current value of GPTMTBILR. 15:0 TBILRL R/W 0xFFFF November 30, 2007 231 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: GPTM TimerA Match (GPTMTAMATCHR), offset 0x030 This register is used in 32-bit Real-Time Clock mode and 16-bit PWM and Input Edge Count modes. GPTM TimerA Match (GPTMTAMATCHR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TAMRH Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TAMRL Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerA Match Register High When configured for 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) mode via the GPTMCFG register, this value is compared to the upper half of GPTMTAR, to determine match events. In 16-bit mode, this field reads as 0 and does not have an effect on the state of GPTMTBMATCHR. 0xFFFF (32-bit mode) 0x0000 (16-bit mode) 31:16 TAMRH R/W GPTM TimerA Match Register Low When configured for 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) mode via the GPTMCFG register, this value is compared to the lower half of GPTMTAR, to determine match events. When configured for PWM mode, this value along with GPTMTAILR, determines the duty cycle of the output PWM signal. When configured for Edge Count mode, this value along with GPTMTAILR, determines how many edge events are counted. The total number of edge events counted is equal to the value in GPTMTAILR minus this value. 15:0 TAMRL R/W 0xFFFF 232 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 12: GPTM TimerB Match (GPTMTBMATCHR), offset 0x034 This register is used in 32-bit Real-Time Clock mode and 16-bit PWM and Input Edge Count modes. GPTM TimerB Match (GPTMTBMATCHR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x034 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TBMRL Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0000 GPTM TimerB Match Register Low When configured for PWM mode, this value along with GPTMTBILR, determines the duty cycle of the output PWM signal. When configured for Edge Count mode, this value along with GPTMTBILR, determines how many edge events are counted. The total number of edge events counted is equal to the value in GPTMTBILR minus this value. 15:0 TBMRL R/W 0xFFFF November 30, 2007 233 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 13: GPTM TimerA Prescale (GPTMTAPR), offset 0x038 This register allows software to extend the range of the 16-bit timers when operating in one-shot or periodic mode. GPTM TimerA Prescale (GPTMTAPR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x038 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TAPSR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerA Prescale The register loads this value on a write. A read returns the current value of the register. Refer to Table 10-2 on page 208 for more details and an example. 7:0 TAPSR R/W 0x00 234 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 14: GPTM TimerB Prescale (GPTMTBPR), offset 0x03C This register allows software to extend the range of the 16-bit timers when operating in one-shot or periodic mode. GPTM TimerB Prescale (GPTMTBPR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x03C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TBPSR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerB Prescale The register loads this value on a write. A read returns the current value of this register. Refer to Table 10-2 on page 208 for more details and an example. 7:0 TBPSR R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 235 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 15: GPTM TimerA Prescale Match (GPTMTAPMR), offset 0x040 This register effectively extends the range of GPTMTAMATCHR to 24 bits when operating in 16-bit one-shot or periodic mode. GPTM TimerA Prescale Match (GPTMTAPMR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x040 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TAPSMR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerA Prescale Match This value is used alongside GPTMTAMATCHR to detect timer match events while using a prescaler. 7:0 TAPSMR R/W 0x00 236 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 16: GPTM TimerB Prescale Match (GPTMTBPMR), offset 0x044 This register effectively extends the range of GPTMTBMATCHR to 24 bits when operating in 16-bit one-shot or periodic mode. GPTM TimerB Prescale Match (GPTMTBPMR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x044 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TBPSMR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 GPTM TimerB Prescale Match This value is used alongside GPTMTBMATCHR to detect timer match events while using a prescaler. 7:0 TBPSMR R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 237 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 17: GPTM TimerA (GPTMTAR), offset 0x048 This register shows the current value of the TimerA counter in all cases except for Input Edge Count mode. When in this mode, this register contains the time at which the last edge event took place. GPTM TimerA (GPTMTAR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x048 Type RO, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TARH Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TARL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description GPTM TimerA Register High If the GPTMCFG is in a 32-bit mode, TimerB value is read. If the GPTMCFG is in a 16-bit mode, this is read as zero. 0xFFFF (32-bit mode) 0x0000 (16-bit mode) 31:16 TARH RO GPTM TimerA Register Low A read returns the current value of the GPTM TimerA Count Register, except in Input Edge Count mode, when it returns the timestamp from the last edge event. 15:0 TARL RO 0xFFFF 238 November 30, 2007 Preliminary General-Purpose Timers Register 18: GPTM TimerB (GPTMTBR), offset 0x04C This register shows the current value of the TimerB counter in all cases except for Input Edge Count mode. When in this mode, this register contains the time at which the last edge event took place. GPTM TimerB (GPTMTBR) Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 Offset 0x04C Type RO, reset 0x0000.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TBRL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0000 GPTM TimerB A read returns the current value of the GPTM TimerB Count Register, except in Input Edge Count mode, when it returns the timestamp from the last edge event. 15:0 TBRL RO 0xFFFF November 30, 2007 239 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 11 Watchdog Timer A watchdog timer can generate nonmaskable interrupts (NMIs) or a reset when a time-out value is reached. The watchdog timer is used to regain control when a system has failed due to a software error or due to the failure of an external device to respond in the expected way. The Stellaris® Watchdog Timer module consists of a 32-bit down counter, a programmable load register, interrupt generation logic, a locking register, and user-enabled stalling. The Watchdog Timer can be configured to generate an interrupt to the controller on its first time-out, and to generate a reset signal on its second time-out. Once the Watchdog Timer has been configured, the lock register can be written to prevent the timer configuration from being inadvertently altered. 11.1 Block Diagram Figure 11-1. WDT Module Block Diagram Control / Clock / Interrupt Generation WDTCTL WDTICR WDTRIS WDTMIS WDTLOCK WDTTEST WDTLOAD WDTVALUE Comparator 32-Bit Down Counter 0x00000000 Interrupt System Clock Identification Registers WDTPCellID0 WDTPeriphID0 WDTPeriphID4 WDTPCellID1 WDTPeriphID1 WDTPeriphID5 WDTPCellID2 WDTPeriphID2 WDTPeriphID6 WDTPCellID3 WDTPeriphID3 WDTPeriphID7 11.2 Functional Description The Watchdog Timer module generates the first time-out signal when the 32-bit counter reaches the zero state after being enabled; enabling the counter also enables the watchdog timer interrupt. After the first time-out event, the 32-bit counter is re-loaded with the value of the Watchdog Timer Load (WDTLOAD) register, and the timer resumes counting down from that value. Once the 240 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Watchdog Timer has been configured, the Watchdog Timer Lock (WDTLOCK) register is written, which prevents the timer configuration from being inadvertently altered by software. If the timer counts down to its zero state again before the first time-out interrupt is cleared, and the reset signal has been enabled (via the WatchdogResetEnable function), the Watchdog timer asserts its reset signal to the system. If the interrupt is cleared before the 32-bit counter reaches its second time-out, the 32-bit counter is loaded with the value in the WDTLOAD register, and counting resumes from that value. If WDTLOAD is written with a new value while the Watchdog Timer counter is counting, then the counter is loaded with the new value and continues counting. Writing to WDTLOAD does not clear an active interrupt. An interrupt must be specifically cleared by writing to the Watchdog Interrupt Clear (WDTICR) register. The Watchdog module interrupt and reset generation can be enabled or disabled as required. When the interrupt is re-enabled, the 32-bit counter is preloaded with the load register value and not its last state. 11.3 Initialization and Configuration To use the WDT, its peripheral clock must be enabled by setting the WDT bit in the RCGC0 register. The Watchdog Timer is configured using the following sequence: 1. Load the WDTLOAD register with the desired timer load value. 2. If the Watchdog is configured to trigger system resets, set the RESEN bit in the WDTCTL register. 3. Set the INTEN bit in the WDTCTL register to enable the Watchdog and lock the control register. If software requires that all of the watchdog registers are locked, the Watchdog Timer module can be fully locked by writing any value to the WDTLOCK register. To unlock the Watchdog Timer, write a value of 0x1ACC.E551. 11.4 Register Map Table 11-1 on page 241 lists the Watchdog registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the Watchdog Timer base address of 0x4000.0000. Table 11-1. Watchdog Timer Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 WDTLOAD R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Watchdog Load 243 0x004 WDTVALUE RO 0xFFFF.FFFF Watchdog Value 244 0x008 WDTCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Control 245 0x00C WDTICR WO - Watchdog Interrupt Clear 246 0x010 WDTRIS RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status 247 0x014 WDTMIS RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status 248 0x418 WDTTEST R/W 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Test 249 0xC00 WDTLOCK R/W 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Lock 250 November 30, 2007 241 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0xFD0 WDTPeriphID4 RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 4 251 0xFD4 WDTPeriphID5 RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 5 252 0xFD8 WDTPeriphID6 RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 6 253 0xFDC WDTPeriphID7 RO 0x0000.0000 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 7 254 0xFE0 WDTPeriphID0 RO 0x0000.0005 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 0 255 0xFE4 WDTPeriphID1 RO 0x0000.0018 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 1 256 0xFE8 WDTPeriphID2 RO 0x0000.0018 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 2 257 0xFEC WDTPeriphID3 RO 0x0000.0001 Watchdog Peripheral Identification 3 258 0xFF0 WDTPCellID0 RO 0x0000.000D Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 0 259 0xFF4 WDTPCellID1 RO 0x0000.00F0 Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 1 260 0xFF8 WDTPCellID2 RO 0x0000.0005 Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 2 261 0xFFC WDTPCellID3 RO 0x0000.00B1 Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 3 262 11.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the WDT registers, in numerical order by address offset. 242 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 1: Watchdog Load (WDTLOAD), offset 0x000 This register is the 32-bit interval value used by the 32-bit counter. When this register is written, the value is immediately loaded and the counter restarts counting down from the new value. If the WDTLOAD register is loaded with 0x0000.0000, an interrupt is immediately generated. Watchdog Load (WDTLOAD) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 WDTLoad Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTLoad Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 31:0 WDTLoad R/W 0xFFFF.FFFF Watchdog Load Value November 30, 2007 243 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: Watchdog Value (WDTVALUE), offset 0x004 This register contains the current count value of the timer. Watchdog Value (WDTVALUE) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 WDTValue Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTValue Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Watchdog Value Current value of the 32-bit down counter. 31:0 WDTValue RO 0xFFFF.FFFF 244 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 3: Watchdog Control (WDTCTL), offset 0x008 This register is the watchdog control register. The watchdog timer can be configured to generate a reset signal (on second time-out) or an interrupt on time-out. When the watchdog interrupt has been enabled, all subsequent writes to the control register are ignored. The only mechanism that can re-enable writes is a hardware reset. Watchdog Control (WDTCTL) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RESEN INTEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Watchdog Reset Enable The RESEN values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Disabled. 1 Enable the Watchdog module reset output. 1 RESEN R/W 0 Watchdog Interrupt Enable The INTEN values are defined as follows: Value Description Interrupt event disabled (once this bit is set, it can only be cleared by a hardware reset). 0 1 Interrupt event enabled. Once enabled, all writes are ignored. 0 INTEN R/W 0 November 30, 2007 245 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: Watchdog Interrupt Clear (WDTICR), offset 0x00C This register is the interrupt clear register. A write of any value to this register clears the Watchdog interrupt and reloads the 32-bit counter from the WDTLOAD register. Value for a read or reset is indeterminate. Watchdog Interrupt Clear (WDTICR) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x00C Type WO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 WDTIntClr Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTIntClr Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 31:0 WDTIntClr WO - Watchdog Interrupt Clear 246 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 5: Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status (WDTRIS), offset 0x010 This register is the raw interrupt status register. Watchdog interrupt events can be monitored via this register if the controller interrupt is masked. Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status (WDTRIS) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x010 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved WDTRIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of WDTINTR. 0 WDTRIS RO 0 November 30, 2007 247 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status (WDTMIS), offset 0x014 This register is the masked interrupt status register. The value of this register is the logical AND of the raw interrupt bit and the Watchdog interrupt enable bit. Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status (WDTMIS) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x014 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved WDTMIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state (after masking) of the WDTINTR interrupt. 0 WDTMIS RO 0 248 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 7: Watchdog Test (WDTTEST), offset 0x418 This register provides user-enabled stalling when the microcontroller asserts the CPU halt flag during debug. Watchdog Test (WDTTEST) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0x418 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved STALL reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:9 reserved RO 0x00 Watchdog Stall Enable When set to 1, if the Stellaris® microcontroller is stopped with a debugger, the watchdog timer stops counting. Once the microcontroller is restarted, the watchdog timer resumes counting. 8 STALL R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:0 reserved RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 249 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: Watchdog Lock (WDTLOCK), offset 0xC00 Writing 0x1ACC.E551 to the WDTLOCK register enables write access to all other registers. Writing any other value to the WDTLOCK register re-enables the locked state for register writes to all the other registers. Reading the WDTLOCK register returns the lock status rather than the 32-bit value written. Therefore, when write accesses are disabled, reading the WDTLOCK register returns 0x0000.0001 (when locked; otherwise, the returned value is 0x0000.0000 (unlocked)). Watchdog Lock (WDTLOCK) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xC00 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 WDTLock Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTLock Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Watchdog Lock A write of the value 0x1ACC.E551 unlocks the watchdog registers for write access. A write of any other value reapplies the lock, preventing any register updates. A read of this register returns the following values: Value Description 0x0000.0001 Locked 0x0000.0000 Unlocked 31:0 WDTLock R/W 0x0000 250 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 9: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 4 (WDTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 4 (WDTPeriphID4) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFD0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID4 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID4 RO 0x00 WDT Peripheral ID Register[7:0] November 30, 2007 251 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 5 (WDTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 5 (WDTPeriphID5) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFD4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID5 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID5 RO 0x00 WDT Peripheral ID Register[15:8] 252 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 11: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 6 (WDTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 6 (WDTPeriphID6) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFD8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID6 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID6 RO 0x00 WDT Peripheral ID Register[23:16] November 30, 2007 253 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 7 (WDTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 7 (WDTPeriphID7) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFDC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID7 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID7 RO 0x00 WDT Peripheral ID Register[31:24] 254 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 13: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 0 (WDTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 0 (WDTPeriphID0) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFE0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0005 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID0 RO 0x05 Watchdog Peripheral ID Register[7:0] November 30, 2007 255 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 1 (WDTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 1 (WDTPeriphID1) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFE4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0018 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID1 RO 0x18 Watchdog Peripheral ID Register[15:8] 256 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 15: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 2 (WDTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 2 (WDTPeriphID2) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFE8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0018 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID2 RO 0x18 Watchdog Peripheral ID Register[23:16] November 30, 2007 257 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 3 (WDTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC The WDTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog Peripheral Identification 3 (WDTPeriphID3) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFEC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 PID3 RO 0x01 Watchdog Peripheral ID Register[31:24] 258 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 17: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 0 (WDTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 The WDTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 0 (WDTPCellID0) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFF0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.000D 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 CID0 RO 0x0D Watchdog PrimeCell ID Register[7:0] November 30, 2007 259 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 1 (WDTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 The WDTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 1 (WDTPCellID1) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFF4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.00F0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 CID1 RO 0xF0 Watchdog PrimeCell ID Register[15:8] 260 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer Register 19: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 2 (WDTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 The WDTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 2 (WDTPCellID2) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFF8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0005 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 CID2 RO 0x05 Watchdog PrimeCell ID Register[23:16] November 30, 2007 261 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 20: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 3 (WDTPCellID3 ), offset 0xFFC The WDTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 3 (WDTPCellID3) Base 0x4000.0000 Offset 0xFFC Type RO, reset 0x0000.00B1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 7:0 CID3 RO 0xB1 Watchdog PrimeCell ID Register[31:24] 262 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Watchdog Timer 12 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is a peripheral that converts a continuous analog voltage to a discrete digital number. The Stellaris® ADC module features 10-bit conversion resolution and supports three input channels, plus an internal temperature sensor. The ADC module contains a programmable sequencer which allows for the sampling of multiple analog input sources without controller intervention. Each sample sequence provides flexible programming with fully configurable input source, trigger events, interrupt generation, and sequence priority. The Stellaris® ADC provides the following features: ■ Three analog input channels ■ Single-ended and differential-input configurations ■ Internal temperature sensor ■ Sample rate of 500 thousand samples/second ■ Four programmable sample conversion sequences from one to eight entries long, with corresponding conversion result FIFOs ■ Flexible trigger control – Controller (software) – Timers – Analog Comparators – PWM – GPIO ■ Hardware averaging of up to 64 samples for improved accuracy November 30, 2007 263 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 12.1 Block Diagram Figure 12-1. ADC Module Block Diagram Analog-to-Digital Converter ADCSSFIFO0 ADCSSFIFO1 ADCSSFIFO2 ADCSSFIFO3 FIFO Block ADCSSFSTAT0 ADCSSCTL0 ADCSSMUX0 Sample Sequencer 0 ADCSSFSTAT1 ADCSSCTL1 ADCSSMUX1 Sample Sequencer 1 ADCSSFSTAT2 ADCSSCTL2 ADCSSMUX2 Sample Sequencer 2 ADCSSFSTAT3 ADCSSCTL3 ADCSSMUX3 Sample Sequencer 3 ADCUSTAT ADCOSTAT ADCACTSS Control/Status ADCSSPRI ADCISC ADCRIS ADCIM Interrupt Control SS0 Interrupt Analog Inputs SS1 Interrupt SS2 Interrupt SS3 Interrupt ADCEMUX ADCPSSI Trigger Events SS0 SS1 SS2 SS3 Comparator GPIO (PB4) Timer PWM Comparator GPIO (PB4) Timer PWM Comparator GPIO (PB4) Timer PWM Comparator GPIO (PB4) Timer PWM Hardware Averager ADCSAC 12.2 Functional Description The Stellaris® ADC collects sample data by using a programmable sequence-based approach instead of the traditional single or double-sampling approach found on many ADC modules. Each sample sequence is a fully programmed series of consecutive (back-to-back) samples, allowing the ADC to collect data from multiple input sources without having to be re-configured or serviced by the controller. The programming of each sample in the sample sequence includes parameters such as the input source and mode (differential versus single-ended input), interrupt generation on sample completion, and the indicator for the last sample in the sequence. 12.2.1 Sample Sequencers The sampling control and data capture is handled by the Sample Sequencers. All of the sequencers are identical in implementation except for the number of samples that can be captured and the depth of the FIFO. Table 12-1 on page 264 shows the maximum number of samples that each Sequencer can capture and its corresponding FIFO depth. In this implementation, each FIFO entry is a 32-bit word, with the lower 10 bits containing the conversion result. Table 12-1. Samples and FIFO Depth of Sequencers Sequencer Number of Samples Depth of FIFO SS3 1 1 SS2 4 4 SS1 4 4 SS0 8 8 264 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) For a given sample sequence, each sample is defined by two 4-bit nibbles in the ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select (ADCSSMUXn) and ADC Sample Sequence Control (ADCSSCTLn) registers, where "n" corresponds to the sequence number. The ADCSSMUXn nibbles select the input pin, while the ADCSSCTLn nibbles contain the sample control bits corresponding to parameters such as temperature sensor selection, interrupt enable, end of sequence, and differential input mode. Sample Sequencers are enabled by setting the respective ASENn bit in the ADC Active Sample Sequencer (ADCACTSS) register, but can be configured before being enabled. When configuring a sample sequence, multiple uses of the same input pin within the same sequence is allowed. In the ADCSSCTLn register, the Interrupt Enable (IE) bits can be set for any combination of samples, allowing interrupts to be generated after every sample in the sequence if necessary. Also, the END bit can be set at any point within a sample sequence. For example, if Sequencer 0 is used, the END bit can be set in the nibble associated with the fifth sample, allowing Sequencer 0 to complete execution of the sample sequence after the fifth sample. After a sample sequence completes execution, the result data can be retrieved from the ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO (ADCSSFIFOn) registers. The FIFOs are simple circular buffers that read a single address to "pop" result data. For software debug purposes, the positions of the FIFO head and tail pointers are visible in the ADC Sample Sequence FIFO Status (ADCSSFSTATn) registers along with FULL and EMPTY status flags. Overflow and underflow conditions are monitored using the ADCOSTAT and ADCUSTAT registers. 12.2.2 Module Control Outside of the Sample Sequencers, the remainder of the control logic is responsible for tasks such as interrupt generation, sequence prioritization, and trigger configuration. Most of the ADC control logic runs at the ADC clock rate of 14-18 MHz. The internal ADC divider is configured automatically by hardware when the system XTAL is selected. The automatic clock divider configuration targets 16.667 MHz operation for all Stellaris® devices. 12.2.2.1 Interrupts The Sample Sequencers dictate the events that cause interrupts, but they don't have control over whether the interrupt is actually sent to the interrupt controller. The ADC module's interrupt signal is controlled by the state of the MASK bits in the ADC Interrupt Mask (ADCIM) register. Interrupt status can be viewed at two locations: the ADC Raw Interrupt Status (ADCRIS) register, which shows the raw status of a Sample Sequencer's interrupt signal, and the ADC Interrupt Status and Clear (ADCISC) register, which shows the logical AND of the ADCRIS register’s INR bit and the ADCIM register’s MASK bits. Interrupts are cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding IN bit in ADCISC. 12.2.2.2 Prioritization When sampling events (triggers) happen concurrently, they are prioritized for processing by the values in the ADC Sample Sequencer Priority (ADCSSPRI) register. Valid priority values are in the range of 0-3, with 0 being the highest priority and 3 being the lowest. Multiple active Sample Sequencer units with the same priority do not provide consistent results, so software must ensure that all active Sample Sequencer units have a unique priority value. 12.2.2.3 Sampling Events Sample triggering for each Sample Sequencer is defined in the ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX) register. The external peripheral triggering sources vary by Stellaris® family member, November 30, 2007 265 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller but all devices share the "Controller" and "Always" triggers. Software can initiate sampling by setting the CH bits in the ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate (ADCPSSI) register. When using the "Always" trigger, care must be taken. If a sequence's priority is too high, it is possible to starve other lower priority sequences. 12.2.3 Hardware Sample Averaging Circuit Higher precision results can be generated using the hardware averaging circuit, however, the improved results are at the cost of throughput. Up to 64 samples can be accumulated and averaged to form a single data entry in the sequencer FIFO. Throughput is decreased proportionally to the number of samples in the averaging calculation. For example, if the averaging circuit is configured to average 16 samples, the throughput is decreased by a factor of 16. By default the averaging circuit is off and all data from the converter passes through to the sequencer FIFO. The averaging hardware is controlled by the ADC Sample Averaging Control (ADCSAC) register (see page 281). There is a single averaging circuit and all input channels receive the same amount of averaging whether they are single-ended or differential. 12.2.4 Analog-to-Digital Converter The converter itself generates a 10-bit output value for selected analog input. Special analog pads are used to minimize the distortion on the input. 12.2.5 Test Modes There is a user-available test mode that allows for loopback operation within the digital portion of the ADC module. This can be useful for debugging software without having to provide actual analog stimulus. This mode is available through the ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB) register (see page 294). 12.2.6 Internal Temperature Sensor The internal temperature sensor provides an analog temperature reading as well as a reference voltage. The voltage at the output terminal SENSO is given by the following equation: SENSO = 2.7 - ((T + 55) / 75) This relation is shown in Figure 12-2 on page 267. 266 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Figure 12-2. Internal Temperature Sensor Characteristic 12.3 Initialization and Configuration In order for the ADC module to be used, the PLL must be enabled and using a supported crystal frequency (see the RCC register). Using unsupported frequencies can cause faulty operation in the ADC module. 12.3.1 Module Initialization Initialization of the ADC module is a simple process with very few steps. The main steps include enabling the clock to the ADC and reconfiguring the Sample Sequencer priorities (if needed). The initialization sequence for the ADC is as follows: 1. Enable the ADC clock by writing a value of 0x0001.0000 to the RCGC1 register (see page 100). 2. If required by the application, reconfigure the Sample Sequencer priorities in the ADCSSPRI register. The default configuration has Sample Sequencer 0 with the highest priority, and Sample Sequencer 3 as the lowest priority. 12.3.2 Sample Sequencer Configuration Configuration of the Sample Sequencers is slightly more complex than the module initialization since each sample sequence is completely programmable. The configuration for each Sample Sequencer should be as follows: 1. Ensure that the Sample Sequencer is disabled by writing a 0 to the corresponding ASEN bit in the ADCACTSS register. Programming of the Sample Sequencers is allowed without having them enabled. Disabling the Sequencer during programming prevents erroneous execution if a trigger event were to occur during the configuration process. 2. Configure the trigger event for the Sample Sequencer in the ADCEMUX register. 3. For each sample in the sample sequence, configure the corresponding input source in the ADCSSMUXn register. November 30, 2007 267 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 4. For each sample in the sample sequence, configure the sample control bits in the corresponding nibble in the ADCSSCTLn register. When programming the last nibble, ensure that the END bit is set. Failure to set the END bit causes unpredictable behavior. 5. If interrupts are to be used, write a 1 to the corresponding MASK bit in the ADCIM register. 6. Enable the Sample Sequencer logic by writing a 1 to the corresponding ASEN bit in the ADCACTSS register. 12.4 Register Map Table 12-2 on page 268 lists the ADC registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the ADC base address of 0x4003.8000. Table 12-2. ADC Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 ADCACTSS R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Active Sample Sequencer 270 0x004 ADCRIS RO 0x0000.0000 ADC Raw Interrupt Status 271 0x008 ADCIM R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Interrupt Mask 272 0x00C ADCISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 ADC Interrupt Status and Clear 273 0x010 ADCOSTAT R/W1C 0x0000.0000 ADC Overflow Status 274 0x014 ADCEMUX R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Event Multiplexer Select 275 0x018 ADCUSTAT R/W1C 0x0000.0000 ADC Underflow Status 278 0x020 ADCSSPRI R/W 0x0000.3210 ADC Sample Sequencer Priority 279 0x028 ADCPSSI WO - ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate 280 0x030 ADCSAC R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Averaging Control 281 0x040 ADCSSMUX0 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 0 282 0x044 ADCSSCTL0 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Control 0 284 0x048 ADCSSFIFO0 RO 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 0 287 0x04C ADCSSFSTAT0 RO 0x0000.0100 ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 0 Status 288 0x060 ADCSSMUX1 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 1 289 0x064 ADCSSCTL1 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Control 1 290 0x068 ADCSSFIFO1 RO 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 1 287 0x06C ADCSSFSTAT1 RO 0x0000.0100 ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 1 Status 288 0x080 ADCSSMUX2 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 2 289 0x084 ADCSSCTL2 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Control 2 290 0x088 ADCSSFIFO2 RO 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 2 287 0x08C ADCSSFSTAT2 RO 0x0000.0100 ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 2 Status 288 0x0A0 ADCSSMUX3 R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 3 292 268 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x0A4 ADCSSCTL3 R/W 0x0000.0002 ADC Sample Sequence Control 3 293 0x0A8 ADCSSFIFO3 RO 0x0000.0000 ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 3 287 0x0AC ADCSSFSTAT3 RO 0x0000.0100 ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 3 Status 288 0x100 ADCTMLB R/W 0x0000.0000 ADC Test Mode Loopback 294 12.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the ADC registers, in numerical order by address offset. November 30, 2007 269 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: ADC Active Sample Sequencer (ADCACTSS), offset 0x000 This register controls the activation of the Sample Sequencers. Each Sample Sequencer can be enabled/disabled independently. ADC Active Sample Sequencer (ADCACTSS) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ASEN3 ASEN2 ASEN1 ASEN0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 ADC SS3 Enable Specifies whether Sample Sequencer 3 is enabled. If set, the sample sequence logic for Sequencer 3 is active. Otherwise, the Sequencer is inactive. 3 ASEN3 R/W 0 ADC SS2 Enable Specifies whether Sample Sequencer 2 is enabled. If set, the sample sequence logic for Sequencer 2 is active. Otherwise, the Sequencer is inactive. 2 ASEN2 R/W 0 ADC SS1 Enable Specifies whether Sample Sequencer 1 is enabled. If set, the sample sequence logic for Sequencer 1 is active. Otherwise, the Sequencer is inactive. 1 ASEN1 R/W 0 ADC SS0 Enable Specifies whether Sample Sequencer 0 is enabled. If set, the sample sequence logic for Sequencer 0 is active. Otherwise, the Sequencer is inactive. 0 ASEN0 R/W 0 270 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 2: ADC Raw Interrupt Status (ADCRIS), offset 0x004 This register shows the status of the raw interrupt signal of each Sample Sequencer. These bits may be polled by software to look for interrupt conditions without having to generate controller interrupts. ADC Raw Interrupt Status (ADCRIS) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved INR3 INR2 INR1 INR0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 Raw Interrupt Status Set by hardware when a sample with its respective ADCSSCTL3 IE bit has completed conversion. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the ADCISC IN3 bit. 3 INR3 RO 0 SS2 Raw Interrupt Status Set by hardware when a sample with its respective ADCSSCTL2 IE bit has completed conversion. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the ADCISC IN2 bit. 2 INR2 RO 0 SS1 Raw Interrupt Status Set by hardware when a sample with its respective ADCSSCTL1 IE bit has completed conversion. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the ADCISC IN1 bit. 1 INR1 RO 0 SS0 Raw Interrupt Status Set by hardware when a sample with its respective ADCSSCTL0 IE bit has completed conversion. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the ADCISC IN0 bit. 0 INR0 RO 0 November 30, 2007 271 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: ADC Interrupt Mask (ADCIM), offset 0x008 This register controls whether the Sample Sequencer raw interrupt signals are promoted to controller interrupts. The raw interrupt signal for each Sample Sequencer can be masked independently. ADC Interrupt Mask (ADCIM) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MASK3 MASK2 MASK1 MASK0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 Interrupt Mask Specifies whether the raw interrupt signal from Sample Sequencer 3 (ADCRIS register INR3 bit) is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the raw interrupt signal is promoted to a controller interrupt. Otherwise, it is not. 3 MASK3 R/W 0 SS2 Interrupt Mask Specifies whether the raw interrupt signal from Sample Sequencer 2 (ADCRIS register INR2 bit) is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the raw interrupt signal is promoted to a controller interrupt. Otherwise, it is not. 2 MASK2 R/W 0 SS1 Interrupt Mask Specifies whether the raw interrupt signal from Sample Sequencer 1 (ADCRIS register INR1 bit) is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the raw interrupt signal is promoted to a controller interrupt. Otherwise, it is not. 1 MASK1 R/W 0 SS0 Interrupt Mask Specifies whether the raw interrupt signal from Sample Sequencer 0 (ADCRIS register INR0 bit) is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the raw interrupt signal is promoted to a controller interrupt. Otherwise, it is not. 0 MASK0 R/W 0 272 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 4: ADC Interrupt Status and Clear (ADCISC), offset 0x00C This register provides the mechanism for clearing interrupt conditions, and shows the status of controller interrupts generated by the Sample Sequencers. When read, each bit field is the logical AND of the respective INR and MASK bits. Interrupts are cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position. If software is polling the ADCRIS instead of generating interrupts, the INR bits are still cleared via the ADCISC register, even if the IN bit is not set. ADC Interrupt Status and Clear (ADCISC) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 Interrupt Status and Clear This bit is set by hardware when the MASK3 and INR3 bits are both 1, providing a level-based interrupt to the controller. It is cleared by writing a 1, and also clears the INR3 bit. 3 IN3 R/W1C 0 SS2 Interrupt Status and Clear This bit is set by hardware when the MASK2 and INR2 bits are both 1, providing a level based interrupt to the controller. It is cleared by writing a 1, and also clears the INR2 bit. 2 IN2 R/W1C 0 SS1 Interrupt Status and Clear This bit is set by hardware when the MASK1 and INR1 bits are both 1, providing a level based interrupt to the controller. It is cleared by writing a 1, and also clears the INR1 bit. 1 IN1 R/W1C 0 SS0 Interrupt Status and Clear This bit is set by hardware when the MASK0 and INR0 bits are both 1, providing a level based interrupt to the controller. It is cleared by writing a 1, and also clears the INR0 bit. 0 IN0 R/W1C 0 November 30, 2007 273 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 5: ADC Overflow Status (ADCOSTAT), offset 0x010 This register indicates overflow conditions in the Sample Sequencer FIFOs. Once the overflow condition has been handled by software, the condition can be cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position. ADC Overflow Status (ADCOSTAT) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OV3 OV2 OV1 OV0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 FIFO Overflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 3 has hit an overflow condition where the FIFO is full and a write was requested. When an overflow is detected, the most recent write is dropped and this bit is set by hardware to indicate the occurrence of dropped data. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 3 OV3 R/W1C 0 SS2 FIFO Overflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 2 has hit an overflow condition where the FIFO is full and a write was requested. When an overflow is detected, the most recent write is dropped and this bit is set by hardware to indicate the occurrence of dropped data. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 2 OV2 R/W1C 0 SS1 FIFO Overflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 1 has hit an overflow condition where the FIFO is full and a write was requested. When an overflow is detected, the most recent write is dropped and this bit is set by hardware to indicate the occurrence of dropped data. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 1 OV1 R/W1C 0 SS0 FIFO Overflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 0 has hit an overflow condition where the FIFO is full and a write was requested. When an overflow is detected, the most recent write is dropped and this bit is set by hardware to indicate the occurrence of dropped data. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 0 OV0 R/W1C 0 274 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 6: ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX), offset 0x014 The ADCEMUX selects the event (trigger) that initiates sampling for each Sample Sequencer. Each Sample Sequencer can be configured with a unique trigger source. ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 Trigger Select This field selects the trigger source for Sample Sequencer 3. The valid configurations for this field are: Value Event 0x0 Controller (default) 0x1 Analog Comparator 0 0x2 Analog Comparator 1 0x3 Analog Comparator 2 0x4 External (GPIO PB4) 0x5 Timer 0x6 PWM0 0x7 PWM1 0x8 PWM2 0x9-0xE reserved 0xF Always (continuously sample) 15:12 EM3 R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 275 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SS2 Trigger Select This field selects the trigger source for Sample Sequencer 2. The valid configurations for this field are: Value Event 0x0 Controller (default) 0x1 Analog Comparator 0 0x2 Analog Comparator 1 0x3 Analog Comparator 2 0x4 External (GPIO PB4) 0x5 Timer 0x6 PWM0 0x7 PWM1 0x8 PWM2 0x9-0xE reserved 0xF Always (continuously sample) 11:8 EM2 R/W 0x00 SS1 Trigger Select This field selects the trigger source for Sample Sequencer 1. The valid configurations for this field are: Value Event 0x0 Controller (default) 0x1 Analog Comparator 0 0x2 Analog Comparator 1 0x3 Analog Comparator 2 0x4 External (GPIO PB4) 0x5 Timer 0x6 PWM0 0x7 PWM1 0x8 PWM2 0x9-0xE reserved 0xF Always (continuously sample) 7:4 EM1 R/W 0x00 276 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SS0 Trigger Select This field selects the trigger source for Sample Sequencer 0. The valid configurations for this field are: Value Event 0x0 Controller (default) 0x1 Analog Comparator 0 0x2 Analog Comparator 1 0x3 Analog Comparator 2 0x4 External (GPIO PB4) 0x5 Timer 0x6 PWM0 0x7 PWM1 0x8 PWM2 0x9-0xE reserved 0xF Always (continuously sample) 3:0 EM0 R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 277 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: ADC Underflow Status (ADCUSTAT), offset 0x018 This register indicates underflow conditions in the Sample Sequencer FIFOs. The corresponding underflow condition can be cleared by writing a 1 to the relevant bit position. ADC Underflow Status (ADCUSTAT) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x018 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved UV3 UV2 UV1 UV0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 FIFO Underflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 3 has hit an underflow condition where the FIFO is empty and a read was requested. The problematic read does not move the FIFO pointers, and 0s are returned. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 3 UV3 R/W1C 0 SS2 FIFO Underflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 2 has hit an underflow condition where the FIFO is empty and a read was requested. The problematic read does not move the FIFO pointers, and 0s are returned. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 2 UV2 R/W1C 0 SS1 FIFO Underflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 1 has hit an underflow condition where the FIFO is empty and a read was requested. The problematic read does not move the FIFO pointers, and 0s are returned. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 1 UV1 R/W1C 0 SS0 FIFO Underflow This bit specifies that the FIFO for Sample Sequencer 0 has hit an underflow condition where the FIFO is empty and a read was requested. The problematic read does not move the FIFO pointers, and 0s are returned. This bit is cleared by writing a 1. 0 UV0 R/W1C 0 278 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 8: ADC Sample Sequencer Priority (ADCSSPRI), offset 0x020 This register sets the priority for each of the Sample Sequencers. Out of reset, Sequencer 0 has the highest priority, and sample sequence 3 has the lowest priority. When reconfiguring sequence priorities, each sequence must have a unique priority or the ADC behavior is inconsistent. ADC Sample Sequencer Priority (ADCSSPRI) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.3210 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SS3 reserved SS2 reserved SS1 reserved SS0 Type RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:14 reserved RO 0x00 SS3 Priority The SS3 field contains a binary-encoded value that specifies the priority encoding of Sample Sequencer 3. A priority encoding of 0 is highest and 3 is lowest. The priorities assigned to the Sequencers must be uniquely mapped. ADC behavior is not consistent if two or more fields are equal. 13:12 SS3 R/W 0x3 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:10 reserved RO 0x0 SS2 Priority The SS2 field contains a binary-encoded value that specifies the priority encoding of Sample Sequencer 2. 9:8 SS2 R/W 0x2 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:6 reserved RO 0x0 SS1 Priority The SS1 field contains a binary-encoded value that specifies the priority encoding of Sample Sequencer 1. 5:4 SS1 R/W 0x1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:2 reserved RO 0x0 SS0 Priority The SS0 field contains a binary-encoded value that specifies the priority encoding of Sample Sequencer 0. 1:0 SS0 R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 279 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 9: ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate (ADCPSSI), offset 0x028 This register provides a mechanism for application software to initiate sampling in the Sample Sequencers. Sample sequences can be initiated individually or in any combination. When multiple sequences are triggered simultaneously, the priority encodings in ADCSSPRI dictate execution order. ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate (ADCPSSI) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x028 Type WO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SS3 SS2 SS1 SS0 Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved WO - SS3 Initiate Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. When set by software, sampling is triggered on Sample Sequencer 3, assuming the Sequencer is enabled in the ADCACTSS register. 3 SS3 WO - SS2 Initiate Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. When set by software, sampling is triggered on Sample Sequencer 2, assuming the Sequencer is enabled in the ADCACTSS register. 2 SS2 WO - SS1 Initiate Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. When set by software, sampling is triggered on Sample Sequencer 1, assuming the Sequencer is enabled in the ADCACTSS register. 1 SS1 WO - SS0 Initiate Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. When set by software, sampling is triggered on Sample Sequencer 0, assuming the Sequencer is enabled in the ADCACTSS register. 0 SS0 WO - 280 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 10: ADC Sample Averaging Control (ADCSAC), offset 0x030 This register controls the amount of hardware averaging applied to conversion results. The final conversion result stored in the FIFO is averaged from 2 AVG consecutive ADC samples at the specified ADC speed. If AVG is 0, the sample is passed directly through without any averaging. If AVG=6, then 64 consecutive ADC samples are averaged to generate one result in the sequencer FIFO. An AVG = 7 provides unpredictable results. ADC Sample Averaging Control (ADCSAC) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved AVG Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 Hardware Averaging Control Specifies the amount of hardware averaging that will be applied to ADC samples. The AVG field can be any value between 0 and 6. Entering a value of 7 creates unpredictable results. Value Description 0x0 No hardware oversampling 0x1 2x hardware oversampling 0x2 4x hardware oversampling 0x3 8x hardware oversampling 0x4 16x hardware oversampling 0x5 32x hardware oversampling 0x6 64x hardware oversampling 0x7 Reserved 2:0 AVG R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 281 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 0 (ADCSSMUX0), offset 0x040 This register defines the analog input configuration for each sample in a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 0. This register is 32-bits wide and contains information for eight possible samples. ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 0 (ADCSSMUX0) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x040 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved MUX7 reserved MUX6 reserved MUX5 reserved MUX4 Type RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MUX3 reserved MUX2 reserved MUX1 reserved MUX0 Type RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:30 reserved RO 0 8th Sample Input Select The MUX7 field is used during the eighth sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer. It specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. The value set here indicates the corresponding pin, for example, a value of 1 indicates the input is ADC1. 29:28 MUX7 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:26 reserved RO 0 7th Sample Input Select The MUX6 field is used during the seventh sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 25:24 MUX6 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 23:22 reserved RO 0 6th Sample Input Select The MUX5 field is used during the sixth sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 21:20 MUX5 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 19:18 reserved RO 0 282 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 5th Sample Input Select The MUX4 field is used during the fifth sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 17:16 MUX4 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:14 reserved RO 0 4th Sample Input Select The MUX3 field is used during the fourth sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 13:12 MUX3 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:10 reserved RO 0 3rd Sample Input Select The MUX2 field is used during the third sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 9:8 MUX2 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:6 reserved RO 0 2nd Sample Input Select The MUX1 field is used during the second sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 5:4 MUX1 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:2 reserved RO 0 1st Sample Input Select The MUX0 field is used during the first sample of a sequence executed with the Sample Sequencer and specifies which of the analog inputs is sampled for the analog-to-digital conversion. 1:0 MUX0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 283 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: ADC Sample Sequence Control 0 (ADCSSCTL0), offset 0x044 This register contains the configuration information for each sample for a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 0. When configuring a sample sequence, the END bit must be set at some point, whether it be after the first sample, last sample, or any sample in between. This register is 32-bits wide and contains information for eight possible samples. ADC Sample Sequence Control 0 (ADCSSCTL0) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x044 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TS7 IE7 END7 D7 TS6 IE6 END6 D6 TS5 IE5 END5 D5 TS4 IE4 END4 D4 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS3 IE3 END3 D3 TS2 IE2 END2 D2 TS1 IE1 END1 D1 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 8th Sample Temp Sensor Select The TS7 bit is used during the eighth sample of the sample sequence and specifies the input source of the sample. If set, the temperature sensor is read. Otherwise, the input pin specified by the ADCSSMUX register is read. 31 TS7 R/W 0 8th Sample Interrupt Enable The IE7 bit is used during the eighth sample of the sample sequence and specifies whether the raw interrupt signal (INR0 bit) is asserted at the end of the sample's conversion. If the MASK0 bit in the ADCIM register is set, the interrupt is promoted to a controller-level interrupt. When this bit is set, the raw interrupt is asserted, otherwise it is not. It is legal to have multiple samples within a sequence generate interrupts. 30 IE7 R/W 0 8th Sample is End of Sequence The END7 bit indicates that this is the last sample of the sequence. It is possible to end the sequence on any sample position. Samples defined after the sample containing a set END are not requested for conversion even though the fields may be non-zero. It is required that software write the END bit somewhere within the sequence. (Sample Sequencer 3, which only has a single sample in the sequence, is hardwired to have the END0 bit set.) Setting this bit indicates that this sample is the last in the sequence. 29 END7 R/W 0 8th Sample Diff Input Select The D7 bit indicates that the analog input is to be differentially sampled. The corresponding ADCSSMUXx nibble must be set to the pair number "i", where the paired inputs are "2i and 2i+1". The temperature sensor does not have a differential option. When set, the analog inputs are differentially sampled. 28 D7 R/W 0 7th Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the seventh sample. 27 TS6 R/W 0 284 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 7th Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the seventh sample. 26 IE6 R/W 0 7th Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the seventh sample. 25 END6 R/W 0 7th Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the seventh sample. 24 D6 R/W 0 6th Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the sixth sample. 23 TS5 R/W 0 6th Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the sixth sample. 22 IE5 R/W 0 6th Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the sixth sample. 21 END5 R/W 0 6th Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the sixth sample. 20 D5 R/W 0 5th Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the fifth sample. 19 TS4 R/W 0 5th Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the fifth sample. 18 IE4 R/W 0 5th Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the fifth sample. 17 END4 R/W 0 5th Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the fifth sample. 16 D4 R/W 0 4th Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the fourth sample. 15 TS3 R/W 0 4th Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the fourth sample. 14 IE3 R/W 0 4th Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the fourth sample. 13 END3 R/W 0 4th Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the fourth sample. 12 D3 R/W 0 3rd Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the third sample. 11 TS2 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 285 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 3rd Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the third sample. 10 IE2 R/W 0 3rd Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the third sample. 9 END2 R/W 0 3rd Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the third sample. 8 D2 R/W 0 2nd Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the second sample. 7 TS1 R/W 0 2nd Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the second sample. 6 IE1 R/W 0 2nd Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the second sample. 5 END1 R/W 0 2nd Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the second sample. 4 D1 R/W 0 1st Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the first sample. 3 TS0 R/W 0 1st Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the first sample. 2 IE0 R/W 0 1st Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the first sample. Since this sequencer has only one entry, this bit must be set. 1 END0 R/W 0 1st Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the first sample. 0 D0 R/W 0 286 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 13: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 0 (ADCSSFIFO0), offset 0x048 Register 14: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 1 (ADCSSFIFO1), offset 0x068 Register 15: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 2 (ADCSSFIFO2), offset 0x088 Register 16: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 3 (ADCSSFIFO3), offset 0x0A8 This register contains the conversion results for samples collected with the Sample Sequencer (the ADCSSFIFO0 register is used for Sample Sequencer 0, ADCSSFIFO1 for Sequencer 1, ADCSSFIFO2 for Sequencer 2, and ADCSSFIFO3 for Sequencer 3). Reads of this register return conversion result data in the order sample 0, sample 1, and so on, until the FIFO is empty. If the FIFO is not properly handled by software, overflow and underflow conditions are registered in the ADCOSTAT and ADCUSTAT registers. ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 0 (ADCSSFIFO0) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x048 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:10 reserved RO 0x00 9:0 DATA RO 0x00 Conversion Result Data November 30, 2007 287 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 17: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 0 Status (ADCSSFSTAT0), offset 0x04C Register 18: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 1 Status (ADCSSFSTAT1), offset 0x06C Register 19: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 2 Status (ADCSSFSTAT2), offset 0x08C Register 20: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 3 Status (ADCSSFSTAT3), offset 0x0AC This register provides a window into the Sample Sequencer, providing full/empty status information as well as the positions of the head and tail pointers. The reset value of 0x100 indicates an empty FIFO. The ADCSSFSTAT0 register provides status on FIF0, ADCSSFSTAT1 on FIFO1, ADCSSFSTAT2 on FIFO2, and ADCSSFSTAT3 on FIFO3. ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 0 Status (ADCSSFSTAT0) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x04C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0100 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved FULL reserved EMPTY HPTR TPTR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:13 reserved RO 0x00 FIFO Full When set, indicates that the FIFO is currently full. 12 FULL RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:9 reserved RO 0x00 FIFO Empty When set, indicates that the FIFO is currently empty. 8 EMPTY RO 1 FIFO Head Pointer This field contains the current "head" pointer index for the FIFO, that is, the next entry to be written. 7:4 HPTR RO 0x00 FIFO Tail Pointer This field contains the current "tail" pointer index for the FIFO, that is, the next entry to be read. 3:0 TPTR RO 0x00 288 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 21: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 1 (ADCSSMUX1), offset 0x060 Register 22: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 2 (ADCSSMUX2), offset 0x080 This register defines the analog input configuration for each sample in a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 1 or 2. These registers are 16-bits wide and contain information for four possible samples. See the ADCSSMUX0 register on page 282 for detailed bit descriptions. ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 1 (ADCSSMUX1) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x060 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MUX3 reserved MUX2 reserved MUX1 reserved MUX0 Type RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:14 reserved RO 0x00 13:12 MUX3 R/W 0 4th Sample Input Select Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 11:10 reserved RO 0 9:8 MUX2 R/W 0 3rd Sample Input Select Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:6 reserved RO 0 5:4 MUX1 R/W 0 2nd Sample Input Select Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:2 reserved RO 0 1:0 MUX0 R/W 0 1st Sample Input Select November 30, 2007 289 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 23: ADC Sample Sequence Control 1 (ADCSSCTL1), offset 0x064 Register 24: ADC Sample Sequence Control 2 (ADCSSCTL2), offset 0x084 These registers contain the configuration information for each sample for a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 1 or 2. When configuring a sample sequence, the END bit must be set at some point, whether it be after the first sample, last sample, or any sample in between. This register is 16-bits wide and contains information for four possible samples. See the ADCSSCTL0 register on page 284 for detailed bit descriptions. ADC Sample Sequence Control 1 (ADCSSCTL1) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x064 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS3 IE3 END3 D3 TS2 IE2 END2 D2 TS1 IE1 END1 D1 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 4th Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the fourth sample. 15 TS3 R/W 0 4th Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the fourth sample. 14 IE3 R/W 0 4th Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the fourth sample. 13 END3 R/W 0 4th Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the fourth sample. 12 D3 R/W 0 3rd Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the third sample. 11 TS2 R/W 0 3rd Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the third sample. 10 IE2 R/W 0 3rd Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the third sample. 9 END2 R/W 0 3rd Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the third sample. 8 D2 R/W 0 290 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description 2nd Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the second sample. 7 TS1 R/W 0 2nd Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the second sample. 6 IE1 R/W 0 2nd Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the second sample. 5 END1 R/W 0 2nd Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the second sample. 4 D1 R/W 0 1st Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the first sample. 3 TS0 R/W 0 1st Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the first sample. 2 IE0 R/W 0 1st Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the first sample. Since this sequencer has only one entry, this bit must be set. 1 END0 R/W 0 1st Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the first sample. 0 D0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 291 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 25: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 3 (ADCSSMUX3), offset 0x0A0 This register defines the analog input configuration for each sample in a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 3. This register is 4-bits wide and contains information for one possible sample. See the ADCSSMUX0 register on page 282 for detailed bit descriptions. ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 3 (ADCSSMUX3) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x0A0 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MUX0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 1:0 MUX0 R/W 0 1st Sample Input Select 292 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register 26: ADC Sample Sequence Control 3 (ADCSSCTL3), offset 0x0A4 This register contains the configuration information for each sample for a sequence executed with Sample Sequencer 3. The END bit is always set since there is only one sample in this sequencer. This register is 4-bits wide and contains information for one possible sample. See the ADCSSCTL0 register on page 284 for detailed bit descriptions. ADC Sample Sequence Control 3 (ADCSSCTL3) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x0A4 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0002 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TS0 IE0 END0 D0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 1st Sample Temp Sensor Select Same definition as TS7 but used during the first sample. 3 TS0 R/W 0 1st Sample Interrupt Enable Same definition as IE7 but used during the first sample. 2 IE0 R/W 0 1st Sample is End of Sequence Same definition as END7 but used during the first sample. Since this sequencer has only one entry, this bit must be set. 1 END0 R/W 1 1st Sample Diff Input Select Same definition as D7 but used during the first sample. 0 D0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 293 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 27: ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB), offset 0x100 This register provides loopback operation within the digital logic of the ADC, which can be useful in debugging software without having to provide actual analog stimulus. This test mode is entered by writing a value of 0x0000.0001 to this register. When data is read from the FIFO in loopback mode, the read-only portion of this register is returned. Read-Only Register ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x100 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CNT CONT DIFF TS MUX Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:10 reserved RO 0x00 Continuous Sample Counter Continuous sample counter that is initialized to 0 and counts each sample as it processed. This helps provide a unique value for the data received. 9:6 CNT RO 0x0 Continuation Sample Indicator When set, indicates that this is a continuation sample. For example, if two sequencers were to run back-to-back, this indicates that the controller kept continuously sampling at full rate. 5 CONT RO 0 Differential Sample Indicator When set, indicates that this is a differential sample. 4 DIFF RO 0 Temp Sensor Sample Indicator When set, indicates that this is a temperature sensor sample. 3 TS RO 0 Analog Input Indicator Indicates which analog input is to be sampled. 2:0 MUX RO 0x0 294 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Write-Only Register ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB) Base 0x4003.8000 Offset 0x100 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved LB Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Loopback Mode Enable When set, forces a loopback within the digital block to provide information on input and unique numbering. The 10-bit loopback data is defined as shown in the read for bits 9:0 above. 0 LB WO 0 November 30, 2007 295 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 13 Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) The Stellaris® Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) provides fully programmable, 16C550-type serial interface characteristics. The LM3S6952 controller is equipped with three UART modules. Each UART has the following features: ■ Separate transmit and receive FIFOs ■ Programmable FIFO length, including 1-byte deep operation providing conventional double-buffered interface ■ FIFO trigger levels of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 ■ Programmable baud-rate generator allowing rates up to 3.125 Mbps ■ Standard asynchronous communication bits for start, stop, and parity ■ False start bit detection ■ Line-break generation and detection ■ Fully programmable serial interface characteristics: – 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits – Even, odd, stick, or no-parity bit generation/detection – 1 or 2 stop bit generation ■ IrDA serial-IR (SIR) encoder/decoder providing: – Programmable use of IrDA Serial InfraRed (SIR) or UART input/output – Support of IrDA SIR encoder/decoder functions for data rates up to 115.2 Kbps half-duplex – Support of normal 3/16 and low-power (1.41-2.23 μs) bit durations – Programmable internal clock generator enabling division of reference clock by 1 to 256 for low-power mode bit duration 296 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) 13.1 Block Diagram Figure 13-1. UART Module Block Diagram Receiver Transmitter System Clock Control / Status UARTRSR/ECR UARTFR UARTLCRH UARTCTL UARTILPR Interrupt Control UARTIFLS UARTIM UARTMIS UARTRIS UARTICR Baud Rate Generator UARTIBRD UARTFBRD Identification Registers UARTPCellID0 UARTPCellID1 UARTPCellID2 UARTPCellID3 UARTPeriphID0 UARTPeriphID1 UARTPeriphID2 UARTPeriphID3 UART PeriphID4 UARTPeriphID5 UARTPeriphID6 UARTPeriphID7 UARTDR TXFIFO 16x8 ... RXFIFO 16x8 ... Interrupt UnTx UnRx 13.2 Functional Description Each Stellaris® UART performs the functions of parallel-to-serial and serial-to-parallel conversions. It is similar in functionality to a 16C550 UART, but is not register compatible. The UART is configured for transmit and/or receive via the TXE and RXE bits of the UART Control (UARTCTL) register (see page 315). Transmit and receive are both enabled out of reset. Before any control registers are programmed, the UART must be disabled by clearing the UARTEN bit in UARTCTL. If the UART is disabled during a TX or RX operation, the current transaction is completed prior to the UART stopping. The UART peripheral also includes a serial IR (SIR) encoder/decoder block that can be connected to an infrared transceiver to implement an IrDA SIR physical layer. The SIR function is programmed using the UARTCTL register. 13.2.1 Transmit/Receive Logic The transmit logic performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the data read from the transmit FIFO. The control logic outputs the serial bit stream beginning with a start bit, and followed by the data November 30, 2007 297 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller bits (LSB first), parity bit, and the stop bits according to the programmed configuration in the control registers. See Figure 13-2 on page 298 for details. The receive logic performs serial-to-parallel conversion on the received bit stream after a valid start pulse has been detected. Overrun, parity, frame error checking, and line-break detection are also performed, and their status accompanies the data that is written to the receive FIFO. Figure 13-2. UART Character Frame 1 0 5-8 data bits LSB MSB Parity bit if enabled 1-2 stop bits UnTX n Start 13.2.2 Baud-Rate Generation The baud-rate divisor is a 22-bit number consisting of a 16-bit integer and a 6-bit fractional part. The number formed by these two values is used by the baud-rate generator to determine the bit period. Having a fractional baud-rate divider allows the UART to generate all the standard baud rates. The 16-bit integer is loaded through the UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTIBRD) register (see page 311) and the 6-bit fractional part is loaded with the UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTFBRD) register (see page 312). The baud-rate divisor (BRD) has the following relationship to the system clock (where BRDI is the integer part of the BRD and BRDF is the fractional part, separated by a decimal place.): BRD = BRDI + BRDF = SysClk / (16 * Baud Rate) The 6-bit fractional number (that is to be loaded into the DIVFRAC bit field in the UARTFBRD register) can be calculated by taking the fractional part of the baud-rate divisor, multiplying it by 64, and adding 0.5 to account for rounding errors: UARTFBRD[DIVFRAC] = integer(BRDF * 64 + 0.5) The UART generates an internal baud-rate reference clock at 16x the baud-rate (referred to as Baud16). This reference clock is divided by 16 to generate the transmit clock, and is used for error detection during receive operations. Along with the UART Line Control, High Byte (UARTLCRH) register (see page 313), the UARTIBRD and UARTFBRD registers form an internal 30-bit register. This internal register is only updated when a write operation to UARTLCRH is performed, so any changes to the baud-rate divisor must be followed by a write to the UARTLCRH register for the changes to take effect. To update the baud-rate registers, there are four possible sequences: ■ UARTIBRD write, UARTFBRD write, and UARTLCRH write ■ UARTFBRD write, UARTIBRD write, and UARTLCRH write ■ UARTIBRD write and UARTLCRH write ■ UARTFBRD write and UARTLCRH write 298 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) 13.2.3 Data Transmission Data received or transmitted is stored in two 16-byte FIFOs, though the receive FIFO has an extra four bits per character for status information. For transmission, data is written into the transmit FIFO. If the UART is enabled, it causes a data frame to start transmitting with the parameters indicated in the UARTLCRH register. Data continues to be transmitted until there is no data left in the transmit FIFO. The BUSY bit in the UART Flag (UARTFR) register (see page 308) is asserted as soon as data is written to the transmit FIFO (that is, if the FIFO is non-empty) and remains asserted while data is being transmitted. The BUSY bit is negated only when the transmit FIFO is empty, and the last character has been transmitted from the shift register, including the stop bits. The UART can indicate that it is busy even though the UART may no longer be enabled. When the receiver is idle (the UnRx is continuously 1) and the data input goes Low (a start bit has been received), the receive counter begins running and data is sampled on the eighth cycle of Baud16 (described in “Transmit/Receive Logic” on page 297). The start bit is valid if UnRx is still low on the eighth cycle of Baud16, otherwise a false start bit is detected and it is ignored. Start bit errors can be viewed in the UART Receive Status (UARTRSR) register (see page 306). If the start bit was valid, successive data bits are sampled on every 16th cycle of Baud16 (that is, one bit period later) according to the programmed length of the data characters. The parity bit is then checked if parity mode was enabled. Data length and parity are defined in the UARTLCRH register. Lastly, a valid stop bit is confirmed if UnRx is High, otherwise a framing error has occurred. When a full word is received, the data is stored in the receive FIFO, with any error bits associated with that word. 13.2.4 Serial IR (SIR) The UART peripheral includes an IrDA serial-IR (SIR) encoder/decoder block. The IrDA SIR block provides functionality that converts between an asynchronous UART data stream, and half-duplex serial SIR interface. No analog processing is performed on-chip. The role of the SIR block is to provide a digital encoded output, and decoded input to the UART. The UART signal pins can be connected to an infrared transceiver to implement an IrDA SIR physical layer link. The SIR block has two modes of operation: ■ In normal IrDA mode, a zero logic level is transmitted as high pulse of 3/16th duration of the selected baud rate bit period on the output pin, while logic one levels are transmitted as a static LOW signal. These levels control the driver of an infrared transmitter, sending a pulse of light for each zero. On the reception side, the incoming light pulses energize the photo transistor base of the receiver, pulling its output LOW. This drives the UART input pin LOW. ■ In low-power IrDA mode, the width of the transmitted infrared pulse is set to three times the period of the internally generated IrLPBaud16 signal (1.63 μs, assuming a nominal 1.8432 MHz frequency) by changing the appropriate bit in the UARTCR register. Figure 13-3 on page 300 shows the UART transmit and receive signals, with and without IrDA modulation. November 30, 2007 299 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 13-3. IrDA Data Modulation 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Data bits 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Start Data bits bit Start Stop Bit period Bit period 3 16 UnTx UnTx with IrDA UnRx with IrDA UnRx Stop bit In both normal and low-power IrDA modes: ■ During transmission, the UART data bit is used as the base for encoding ■ During reception, the decoded bits are transferred to the UART receive logic The IrDA SIR physical layer specifies a half-duplex communication link, with a minimum 10 ms delay between transmission and reception. This delay must be generated by software because it is not automatically supported by the UART. The delay is required because the infrared receiver electronics might become biased, or even saturated from the optical power coupled from the adjacent transmitter LED. This delay is known as latency, or receiver setup time. 13.2.5 FIFO Operation The UART has two 16-entry FIFOs; one for transmit and one for receive. Both FIFOs are accessed via the UART Data (UARTDR) register (see page 304). Read operations of the UARTDR register return a 12-bit value consisting of 8 data bits and 4 error flags while write operations place 8-bit data in the transmit FIFO. Out of reset, both FIFOs are disabled and act as 1-byte-deep holding registers. The FIFOs are enabled by setting the FEN bit in UARTLCRH (page 313). FIFO status can be monitored via the UART Flag (UARTFR) register (see page 308) and the UART Receive Status (UARTRSR) register. Hardware monitors empty, full and overrun conditions. The UARTFR register contains empty and full flags (TXFE, TXFF, RXFE, and RXFF bits) and the UARTRSR register shows overrun status via the OE bit. The trigger points at which the FIFOs generate interrupts is controlled via the UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select (UARTIFLS) register (see page 317). Both FIFOs can be individually configured to trigger interrupts at different levels. Available configurations include 1/8, ¼, ½, ¾, and 7/8. For example, if the ¼ option is selected for the receive FIFO, the UART generates a receive interrupt after 4 data bytes are received. Out of reset, both FIFOs are configured to trigger an interrupt at the ½ mark. 13.2.6 Interrupts The UART can generate interrupts when the following conditions are observed: ■ Overrun Error ■ Break Error 300 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) ■ Parity Error ■ Framing Error ■ Receive Timeout ■ Transmit (when condition defined in the TXIFLSEL bit in the UARTIFLS register is met) ■ Receive (when condition defined in the RXIFLSEL bit in the UARTIFLS register is met) All of the interrupt events are ORed together before being sent to the interrupt controller, so the UART can only generate a single interrupt request to the controller at any given time. Software can service multiple interrupt events in a single interrupt service routine by reading the UART Masked Interrupt Status (UARTMIS) register (see page 322). The interrupt events that can trigger a controller-level interrupt are defined in the UART Interrupt Mask (UARTIM ) register (see page 319) by setting the corresponding IM bit to 1. If interrupts are not used, the raw interrupt status is always visible via the UART Raw Interrupt Status (UARTRIS) register (see page 321). Interrupts are always cleared (for both the UARTMIS and UARTRIS registers) by setting the corresponding bit in the UART Interrupt Clear (UARTICR) register (see page 323). The receive timeout interrupt is asserted when the receive FIFO is not empty, and no further data is received over a 32-bit period. The receive timeout interrupt is cleared either when the FIFO becomes empty through reading all the data (or by reading the holding register), or when a 1 is written to the corresponding bit in the UARTICR register. 13.2.7 Loopback Operation The UART can be placed into an internal loopback mode for diagnostic or debug work. This is accomplished by setting the LBE bit in the UARTCTL register (see page 315). In loopback mode, data transmitted on UnTx is received on the UnRx input. 13.2.8 IrDA SIR block The IrDA SIR block contains an IrDA serial IR (SIR) protocol encoder/decoder. When enabled, the SIR block uses the UnTx and UnRx pins for the SIR protocol, which should be connected to an IR transceiver. The SIR block can receive and transmit, but it is only half-duplex so it cannot do both at the same time. Transmission must be stopped before data can be received. The IrDA SIR physical layer specifies a minimum 10-ms delay between transmission and reception. 13.3 Initialization and Configuration To use the UARTs, the peripheral clock must be enabled by setting the UART0, UART1, or UART2 bits in the RCGC1 register. This section discusses the steps that are required for using a UART module. For this example, the system clock is assumed to be 20 MHz and the desired UART configuration is: ■ 115200 baud rate ■ Data length of 8 bits ■ One stop bit November 30, 2007 301 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller ■ No parity ■ FIFOs disabled ■ No interrupts The first thing to consider when programming the UART is the baud-rate divisor (BRD), since the UARTIBRD and UARTFBRD registers must be written before the UARTLCRH register. Using the equation described in “Baud-Rate Generation” on page 298, the BRD can be calculated: BRD = 20,000,000 / (16 * 115,200) = 10.8507 which means that the DIVINT field of the UARTIBRD register (see page 311) should be set to 10. The value to be loaded into the UARTFBRD register (see page 312) is calculated by the equation: UARTFBRD[DIVFRAC] = integer(0.8507 * 64 + 0.5) = 54 With the BRD values in hand, the UART configuration is written to the module in the following order: 1. Disable the UART by clearing the UARTEN bit in the UARTCTL register. 2. Write the integer portion of the BRD to the UARTIBRD register. 3. Write the fractional portion of the BRD to the UARTFBRD register. 4. Write the desired serial parameters to the UARTLCRH register (in this case, a value of 0x0000.0060). 5. Enable the UART by setting the UARTEN bit in the UARTCTL register. 13.4 Register Map Table 13-1 on page 302 lists the UART registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to that UART’s base address: ■ UART0: 0x4000.C000 ■ UART1: 0x4000.D000 ■ UART2: 0x4000.E000 Note: The UART must be disabled (see the UARTEN bit in the UARTCTL register on page 315) before any of the control registers are reprogrammed. When the UART is disabled during a TX or RX operation, the current transaction is completed prior to the UART stopping. Table 13-1. UART Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 UARTDR R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Data 304 0x004 UARTRSR/UARTECR R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Receive Status/Error Clear 306 0x018 UARTFR RO 0x0000.0090 UART Flag 308 0x020 UARTILPR R/W 0x0000.0000 UART IrDA Low-Power Register 310 302 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x024 UARTIBRD R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor 311 0x028 UARTFBRD R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor 312 0x02C UARTLCRH R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Line Control 313 0x030 UARTCTL R/W 0x0000.0300 UART Control 315 0x034 UARTIFLS R/W 0x0000.0012 UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select 317 0x038 UARTIM R/W 0x0000.0000 UART Interrupt Mask 319 0x03C UARTRIS RO 0x0000.000F UART Raw Interrupt Status 321 0x040 UARTMIS RO 0x0000.0000 UART Masked Interrupt Status 322 0x044 UARTICR W1C 0x0000.0000 UART Interrupt Clear 323 0xFD0 UARTPeriphID4 RO 0x0000.0000 UART Peripheral Identification 4 325 0xFD4 UARTPeriphID5 RO 0x0000.0000 UART Peripheral Identification 5 326 0xFD8 UARTPeriphID6 RO 0x0000.0000 UART Peripheral Identification 6 327 0xFDC UARTPeriphID7 RO 0x0000.0000 UART Peripheral Identification 7 328 0xFE0 UARTPeriphID0 RO 0x0000.0011 UART Peripheral Identification 0 329 0xFE4 UARTPeriphID1 RO 0x0000.0000 UART Peripheral Identification 1 330 0xFE8 UARTPeriphID2 RO 0x0000.0018 UART Peripheral Identification 2 331 0xFEC UARTPeriphID3 RO 0x0000.0001 UART Peripheral Identification 3 332 0xFF0 UARTPCellID0 RO 0x0000.000D UART PrimeCell Identification 0 333 0xFF4 UARTPCellID1 RO 0x0000.00F0 UART PrimeCell Identification 1 334 0xFF8 UARTPCellID2 RO 0x0000.0005 UART PrimeCell Identification 2 335 0xFFC UARTPCellID3 RO 0x0000.00B1 UART PrimeCell Identification 3 336 13.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the UART registers, in numerical order by address offset. November 30, 2007 303 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: UART Data (UARTDR), offset 0x000 This register is the data register (the interface to the FIFOs). When FIFOs are enabled, data written to this location is pushed onto the transmit FIFO. If FIFOs are disabled, data is stored in the transmitter holding register (the bottom word of the transmit FIFO). A write to this register initiates a transmission from the UART. For received data, if the FIFO is enabled, the data byte and the 4-bit status (break, frame, parity, and overrun) is pushed onto the 12-bit wide receive FIFO. If FIFOs are disabled, the data byte and status are stored in the receiving holding register (the bottom word of the receive FIFO). The received data can be retrieved by reading this register. UART Data (UARTDR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OE BE PE FE DATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0 UART Overrun Error The OE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 There has been no data loss due to a FIFO overrun. New data was received when the FIFO was full, resulting in data loss. 1 11 OE RO 0 UART Break Error This bit is set to 1 when a break condition is detected, indicating that the receive data input was held Low for longer than a full-word transmission time (defined as start, data, parity, and stop bits). In FIFO mode, this error is associated with the character at the top of the FIFO. When a break occurs, only one 0 character is loaded into the FIFO. The next character is only enabled after the received data input goes to a 1 (marking state) and the next valid start bit is received. 10 BE RO 0 304 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Parity Error This bit is set to 1 when the parity of the received data character does not match the parity defined by bits 2 and 7 of the UARTLCRH register. In FIFO mode, this error is associated with the character at the top of the FIFO. 9 PE RO 0 UART Framing Error This bit is set to 1 when the received character does not have a valid stop bit (a valid stop bit is 1). 8 FE RO 0 Data Transmitted or Received When written, the data that is to be transmitted via the UART. When read, the data that was received by the UART. 7:0 DATA R/W 0 November 30, 2007 305 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: UART Receive Status/Error Clear (UARTRSR/UARTECR), offset 0x004 The UARTRSR/UARTECR register is the receive status register/error clear register. In addition to the UARTDR register, receive status can also be read from the UARTRSR register. If the status is read from this register, then the status information corresponds to the entry read from UARTDR prior to reading UARTRSR. The status information for overrun is set immediately when an overrun condition occurs. The UARTRSR register cannot be written. A write of any value to the UARTECR register clears the framing, parity, break, and overrun errors. All the bits are cleared to 0 on reset. Read-Only Receive Status (UARTRSR) Register UART Receive Status/Error Clear (UARTRSR/UARTECR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OE BE PE FE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0 UART Overrun Error When this bit is set to 1, data is received and the FIFO is already full. This bit is cleared to 0 by a write to UARTECR. The FIFO contents remain valid since no further data is written when the FIFO is full, only the contents of the shift register are overwritten. The CPU must now read the data in order to empty the FIFO. 3 OE RO 0 UART Break Error This bit is set to 1 when a break condition is detected, indicating that the received data input was held Low for longer than a full-word transmission time (defined as start, data, parity, and stop bits). This bit is cleared to 0 by a write to UARTECR. In FIFO mode, this error is associated with the character at the top of the FIFO. When a break occurs, only one 0 character is loaded into the FIFO. The next character is only enabled after the receive data input goes to a 1 (marking state) and the next valid start bit is received. 2 BE RO 0 306 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Parity Error This bit is set to 1 when the parity of the received data character does not match the parity defined by bits 2 and 7 of the UARTLCRH register. This bit is cleared to 0 by a write to UARTECR. 1 PE RO 0 UART Framing Error This bit is set to 1 when the received character does not have a valid stop bit (a valid stop bit is 1). This bit is cleared to 0 by a write to UARTECR. In FIFO mode, this error is associated with the character at the top of the FIFO. 0 FE RO 0 Write-Only Error Clear (UARTECR) Register UART Receive Status/Error Clear (UARTRSR/UARTECR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x004 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DATA Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved WO 0 Error Clear A write to this register of any data clears the framing, parity, break, and overrun flags. 7:0 DATA WO 0 November 30, 2007 307 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 3: UART Flag (UARTFR), offset 0x018 The UARTFR register is the flag register. After reset, the TXFF, RXFF, and BUSY bits are 0, and TXFE and RXFE bits are 1. UART Flag (UARTFR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0090 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TXFE RXFF TXFF RXFE BUSY reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0 UART Transmit FIFO Empty The meaning of this bit depends on the state of the FEN bit in the UARTLCRH register. If the FIFO is disabled (FEN is 0), this bit is set when the transmit holding register is empty. If the FIFO is enabled (FEN is 1), this bit is set when the transmit FIFO is empty. 7 TXFE RO 1 UART Receive FIFO Full The meaning of this bit depends on the state of the FEN bit in the UARTLCRH register. If the FIFO is disabled, this bit is set when the receive holding register is full. If the FIFO is enabled, this bit is set when the receive FIFO is full. 6 RXFF RO 0 UART Transmit FIFO Full The meaning of this bit depends on the state of the FEN bit in the UARTLCRH register. If the FIFO is disabled, this bit is set when the transmit holding register is full. If the FIFO is enabled, this bit is set when the transmit FIFO is full. 5 TXFF RO 0 308 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Receive FIFO Empty The meaning of this bit depends on the state of the FEN bit in the UARTLCRH register. If the FIFO is disabled, this bit is set when the receive holding register is empty. If the FIFO is enabled, this bit is set when the receive FIFO is empty. 4 RXFE RO 1 UART Busy When this bit is 1, the UART is busy transmitting data. This bit remains set until the complete byte, including all stop bits, has been sent from the shift register. This bit is set as soon as the transmit FIFO becomes non-empty (regardless of whether UART is enabled). 3 BUSY RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2:0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 309 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: UART IrDA Low-Power Register (UARTILPR), offset 0x020 The UARTILPR register is an 8-bit read/write register that stores the low-power counter divisor value used to generate the IrLPBaud16 signal by dividing down the system clock (SysClk). All the bits are cleared to 0 when reset. The IrLPBaud16 internal signal is generated by dividing down the UARTCLK signal according to the low-power divisor value written to UARTILPR. The low-power divisor value is calculated as follows: ILPDVSR = SysClk / FIrLPBaud16 where FIrLPBaud16 is nominally 1.8432 MHz. IrLPBaud16 is an internal signal used for SIR pulse generation when low-power mode is used. You must choose the divisor so that 1.42 MHz < FIrLPBaud16 < 2.12 MHz, which results in a low-power pulse duration of 1.41–2.11 μs (three times the period of IrLPBaud16). The minimum frequency of IrLPBaud16 ensures that pulses less than one period of IrLPBaud16 are rejected, but that pulses greater than 1.4 μs are accepted as valid pulses. Note: Zero is an illegal value. Programming a zero value results in no IrLPBaud16 pulses being generated. UART IrDA Low-Power Register (UARTILPR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ILPDVSR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0 IrDA Low-Power Divisor This is an 8-bit low-power divisor value. 7:0 ILPDVSR R/W 0x00 310 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 5: UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTIBRD), offset 0x024 The UARTIBRD register is the integer part of the baud-rate divisor value. All the bits are cleared on reset. The minimum possible divide ratio is 1 (when UARTIBRD=0), in which case the UARTFBRD register is ignored. When changing the UARTIBRD register, the new value does not take effect until transmission/reception of the current character is complete. Any changes to the baud-rate divisor must be followed by a write to the UARTLCRH register. See “Baud-Rate Generation” on page 298 for configuration details. UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTIBRD) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x024 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIVINT Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0 15:0 DIVINT R/W 0x0000 Integer Baud-Rate Divisor November 30, 2007 311 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTFBRD), offset 0x028 The UARTFBRD register is the fractional part of the baud-rate divisor value. All the bits are cleared on reset. When changing the UARTFBRD register, the new value does not take effect until transmission/reception of the current character is complete. Any changes to the baud-rate divisor must be followed by a write to the UARTLCRH register. See “Baud-Rate Generation” on page 298 for configuration details. UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTFBRD) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x028 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DIVFRAC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 5:0 DIVFRAC R/W 0x000 Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor 312 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 7: UART Line Control (UARTLCRH), offset 0x02C The UARTLCRH register is the line control register. Serial parameters such as data length, parity, and stop bit selection are implemented in this register. When updating the baud-rate divisor (UARTIBRD and/or UARTIFRD), the UARTLCRH register must also be written. The write strobe for the baud-rate divisor registers is tied to the UARTLCRH register. UART Line Control (UARTLCRH) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x02C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SPS WLEN FEN STP2 EPS PEN BRK Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0 UART Stick Parity Select When bits 1, 2, and 7 of UARTLCRH are set, the parity bit is transmitted and checked as a 0. When bits 1 and 7 are set and 2 is cleared, the parity bit is transmitted and checked as a 1. When this bit is cleared, stick parity is disabled. 7 SPS R/W 0 UART Word Length The bits indicate the number of data bits transmitted or received in a frame as follows: Value Description 0x3 8 bits 0x2 7 bits 0x1 6 bits 0x0 5 bits (default) 6:5 WLEN R/W 0 UART Enable FIFOs If this bit is set to 1, transmit and receive FIFO buffers are enabled (FIFO mode). When cleared to 0, FIFOs are disabled (Character mode). The FIFOs become 1-byte-deep holding registers. 4 FEN R/W 0 November 30, 2007 313 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Two Stop Bits Select If this bit is set to 1, two stop bits are transmitted at the end of a frame. The receive logic does not check for two stop bits being received. 3 STP2 R/W 0 UART Even Parity Select If this bit is set to 1, even parity generation and checking is performed during transmission and reception, which checks for an even number of 1s in data and parity bits. When cleared to 0, then odd parity is performed, which checks for an odd number of 1s. This bit has no effect when parity is disabled by the PEN bit. 2 EPS R/W 0 UART Parity Enable If this bit is set to 1, parity checking and generation is enabled; otherwise, parity is disabled and no parity bit is added to the data frame. 1 PEN R/W 0 UART Send Break If this bit is set to 1, a Low level is continually output on the UnTX output, after completing transmission of the current character. For the proper execution of the break command, the software must set this bit for at least two frames (character periods). For normal use, this bit must be cleared to 0. 0 BRK R/W 0 314 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 8: UART Control (UARTCTL), offset 0x030 The UARTCTL register is the control register. All the bits are cleared on reset except for the Transmit Enable (TXE) and Receive Enable (RXE) bits, which are set to 1. To enable the UART module, the UARTEN bit must be set to 1. If software requires a configuration change in the module, the UARTEN bit must be cleared before the configuration changes are written. If the UART is disabled during a transmit or receive operation, the current transaction is completed prior to the UART stopping. UART Control (UARTCTL) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0300 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RXE TXE LBE reserved SIRLP SIREN UARTEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:10 reserved RO 0 UART Receive Enable If this bit is set to 1, the receive section of the UART is enabled. When the UART is disabled in the middle of a receive, it completes the current character before stopping. Note: To enable reception, the UARTEN bit must also be set. 9 RXE R/W 1 UART Transmit Enable If this bit is set to 1, the transmit section of the UART is enabled. When the UART is disabled in the middle of a transmission, it completes the current character before stopping. Note: To enable transmission, the UARTEN bit must also be set. 8 TXE R/W 1 UART Loop Back Enable If this bit is set to 1, the UnTX path is fed through the UnRX path. 7 LBE R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 6:3 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 315 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART SIR Low Power Mode This bit selects the IrDA encoding mode. If this bit is cleared to 0, low-level bits are transmitted as an active High pulse with a width of 3/16th of the bit period. If this bit is set to 1, low-level bits are transmitted with a pulse width which is 3 times the period of the IrLPBaud16 input signal, regardless of the selected bit rate. Setting this bit uses less power, but might reduce transmission distances. See page 310 for more information. 2 SIRLP R/W 0 UART SIR Enable If this bit is set to 1, the IrDA SIR block is enabled, and the UART will transmit and receive data using SIR protocol. 1 SIREN R/W 0 UART Enable If this bit is set to 1, the UART is enabled. When the UART is disabled in the middle of transmission or reception, it completes the current character before stopping. 0 UARTEN R/W 0 316 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 9: UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select (UARTIFLS), offset 0x034 The UARTIFLS register is the interrupt FIFO level select register. You can use this register to define the FIFO level at which the TXRIS and RXRIS bits in the UARTRIS register are triggered. The interrupts are generated based on a transition through a level rather than being based on the level. That is, the interrupts are generated when the fill level progresses through the trigger level. For example, if the receive trigger level is set to the half-way mark, the interrupt is triggered as the module is receiving the 9th character. Out of reset, the TXIFLSEL and RXIFLSEL bits are configured so that the FIFOs trigger an interrupt at the half-way mark. UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select (UARTIFLS) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x034 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0012 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RXIFLSEL TXIFLSEL Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 UART Receive Interrupt FIFO Level Select The trigger points for the receive interrupt are as follows: Value Description 0x0 RX FIFO ≥ 1/8 full 0x1 RX FIFO ≥ ¼ full 0x2 RX FIFO ≥ ½ full (default) 0x3 RX FIFO ≥ ¾ full 0x4 RX FIFO ≥ 7/8 full 0x5-0x7 Reserved 5:3 RXIFLSEL R/W 0x2 November 30, 2007 317 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Transmit Interrupt FIFO Level Select The trigger points for the transmit interrupt are as follows: Value Description 0x0 TX FIFO ≤ 1/8 full 0x1 TX FIFO ≤ ¼ full 0x2 TX FIFO ≤ ½ full (default) 0x3 TX FIFO ≤ ¾ full 0x4 TX FIFO ≤ 7/8 full 0x5-0x7 Reserved 2:0 TXIFLSEL R/W 0x2 318 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 10: UART Interrupt Mask (UARTIM), offset 0x038 The UARTIM register is the interrupt mask set/clear register. On a read, this register gives the current value of the mask on the relevant interrupt. Writing a 1 to a bit allows the corresponding raw interrupt signal to be routed to the interrupt controller. Writing a 0 prevents the raw interrupt signal from being sent to the interrupt controller. UART Interrupt Mask (UARTIM) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x038 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OEIM BEIM PEIM FEIM RTIM TXIM RXIM reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 UART Overrun Error Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the OEIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the OEIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 10 OEIM R/W 0 UART Break Error Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the BEIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the BEIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 9 BEIM R/W 0 UART Parity Error Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the PEIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the PEIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 8 PEIM R/W 0 UART Framing Error Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the FEIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the FEIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 7 FEIM R/W 0 UART Receive Time-Out Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the RTIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the RTIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 6 RTIM R/W 0 UART Transmit Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the TXIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the TXIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 5 TXIM R/W 0 November 30, 2007 319 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description UART Receive Interrupt Mask On a read, the current mask for the RXIM interrupt is returned. Setting this bit to 1 promotes the RXIM interrupt to the interrupt controller. 4 RXIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0x00 320 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 11: UART Raw Interrupt Status (UARTRIS), offset 0x03C The UARTRIS register is the raw interrupt status register. On a read, this register gives the current raw status value of the corresponding interrupt. A write has no effect. UART Raw Interrupt Status (UARTRIS) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x03C Type RO, reset 0x0000.000F 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OERIS BERIS PERIS FERIS RTRIS TXRIS RXRIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 UART Overrun Error Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 10 OERIS RO 0 UART Break Error Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 9 BERIS RO 0 UART Parity Error Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 8 PERIS RO 0 UART Framing Error Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 7 FERIS RO 0 UART Receive Time-Out Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 6 RTRIS RO 0 UART Transmit Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 5 TXRIS RO 0 UART Receive Raw Interrupt Status Gives the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of this interrupt. 4 RXRIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0xF November 30, 2007 321 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: UART Masked Interrupt Status (UARTMIS), offset 0x040 The UARTMIS register is the masked interrupt status register. On a read, this register gives the current masked status value of the corresponding interrupt. A write has no effect. UART Masked Interrupt Status (UARTMIS) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x040 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OEMIS BEMIS PEMIS FEMIS RTMIS TXMIS RXMIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 UART Overrun Error Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 10 OEMIS RO 0 UART Break Error Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 9 BEMIS RO 0 UART Parity Error Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 8 PEMIS RO 0 UART Framing Error Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 7 FEMIS RO 0 UART Receive Time-Out Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 6 RTMIS RO 0 UART Transmit Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 5 TXMIS RO 0 UART Receive Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. 4 RXMIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0 322 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 13: UART Interrupt Clear (UARTICR), offset 0x044 The UARTICR register is the interrupt clear register. On a write of 1, the corresponding interrupt (both raw interrupt and masked interrupt, if enabled) is cleared. A write of 0 has no effect. UART Interrupt Clear (UARTICR) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0x044 Type W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OEIC BEIC PEIC FEIC RTIC TXIC RXIC reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:11 reserved RO 0x00 Overrun Error Interrupt Clear The OEIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 10 OEIC W1C 0 Break Error Interrupt Clear The BEIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 9 BEIC W1C 0 Parity Error Interrupt Clear The PEIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 8 PEIC W1C 0 November 30, 2007 323 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Framing Error Interrupt Clear The FEIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 7 FEIC W1C 0 Receive Time-Out Interrupt Clear The RTIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 6 RTIC W1C 0 Transmit Interrupt Clear The TXIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 5 TXIC W1C 0 Receive Interrupt Clear The RXIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on the interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 4 RXIC W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:0 reserved RO 0x00 324 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 14: UART Peripheral Identification 4 (UARTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 4 (UARTPeriphID4) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFD0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID4 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[7:0] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID4 RO 0x0000 November 30, 2007 325 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 15: UART Peripheral Identification 5 (UARTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 5 (UARTPeriphID5) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFD4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID5 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[15:8] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID5 RO 0x0000 326 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 16: UART Peripheral Identification 6 (UARTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 6 (UARTPeriphID6) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFD8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID6 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[23:16] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID6 RO 0x0000 November 30, 2007 327 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 17: UART Peripheral Identification 7 (UARTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 7 (UARTPeriphID7) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFDC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID7 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0 UART Peripheral ID Register[31:24] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID7 RO 0x0000 328 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 18: UART Peripheral Identification 0 (UARTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 0 (UARTPeriphID0) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFE0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0011 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[7:0] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID0 RO 0x11 November 30, 2007 329 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 19: UART Peripheral Identification 1 (UARTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 1 (UARTPeriphID1) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFE4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[15:8] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID1 RO 0x00 330 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 20: UART Peripheral Identification 2 (UARTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 2 (UARTPeriphID2) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFE8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0018 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[23:16] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID2 RO 0x18 November 30, 2007 331 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 21: UART Peripheral Identification 3 (UARTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC The UARTPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART Peripheral Identification 3 (UARTPeriphID3) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFEC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART Peripheral ID Register[31:24] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID3 RO 0x01 332 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 22: UART PrimeCell Identification 0 (UARTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 The UARTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART PrimeCell Identification 0 (UARTPCellID0) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFF0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.000D 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART PrimeCell ID Register[7:0] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID0 RO 0x0D November 30, 2007 333 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 23: UART PrimeCell Identification 1 (UARTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 The UARTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART PrimeCell Identification 1 (UARTPCellID1) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFF4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.00F0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART PrimeCell ID Register[15:8] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID1 RO 0xF0 334 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) Register 24: UART PrimeCell Identification 2 (UARTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 The UARTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART PrimeCell Identification 2 (UARTPCellID2) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFF8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0005 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART PrimeCell ID Register[23:16] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID2 RO 0x05 November 30, 2007 335 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 25: UART PrimeCell Identification 3 (UARTPCellID3), offset 0xFFC The UARTPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the registers determine the reset values. UART PrimeCell Identification 3 (UARTPCellID3) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 Offset 0xFFC Type RO, reset 0x0000.00B1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 UART PrimeCell ID Register[31:24] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID3 RO 0xB1 336 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) 14 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) The Stellaris® Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) is a master or slave interface for synchronous serial communication with peripheral devices that have either Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or Texas Instruments synchronous serial interfaces. The Stellaris® SSI module has the following features: ■ Master or slave operation ■ Programmable clock bit rate and prescale ■ Separate transmit and receive FIFOs, 16 bits wide, 8 locations deep ■ Programmable interface operation for Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or Texas Instruments synchronous serial interfaces ■ Programmable data frame size from 4 to 16 bits ■ Internal loopback test mode for diagnostic/debug testing 14.1 Block Diagram Figure 14-1. SSI Module Block Diagram Transmit/ Receive Logic Clock Prescaler SSICPSR Control / Status SSICR0 SSICR1 SSISR Interrupt Control SSIIM SSIMIS SSIRIS SSIICR SSIDR TxFIFO 8 x 16 ... RxFIFO 8 x 16 ... System Clock SSITx SSIRx SSIClk SSIFss Interrupt Identification Registers SSIPCellID0 SSIPeriphID0 SSIPeriphID4 SSIPCellID1 SSIPeriphID1 SSIPeriphID5 SSIPCellID2 SSIPeriphID2 SSIPeriphID6 SSIPCellID3 SSIPeriphID3 SSIPeriphID7 14.2 Functional Description The SSI performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device. The CPU accesses data, control, and status information. The transmit and receive paths are buffered with November 30, 2007 337 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller internal FIFO memories allowing up to eight 16-bit values to be stored independently in both transmit and receive modes. 14.2.1 Bit Rate Generation The SSI includes a programmable bit rate clock divider and prescaler to generate the serial output clock. Bit rates are supported to 2 MHz and higher, although maximum bit rate is determined by peripheral devices. The serial bit rate is derived by dividing down the 50-MHz input clock. The clock is first divided by an even prescale value CPSDVSR from 2 to 254, which is programmed in the SSI Clock Prescale (SSICPSR) register (see page 356). The clock is further divided by a value from 1 to 256, which is 1 + SCR, where SCR is the value programmed in the SSI Control0 (SSICR0) register (see page 349). The frequency of the output clock SSIClk is defined by: FSSIClk = FSysClk / (CPSDVSR * (1 + SCR)) Note that although the SSIClk transmit clock can theoretically be 25 MHz, the module may not be able to operate at that speed. For master mode, the system clock must be at least two times faster than the SSIClk. For slave mode, the system clock must be at least 12 times faster than the SSIClk. See “Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI)” on page 543 to view SSI timing parameters. 14.2.2 FIFO Operation 14.2.2.1 Transmit FIFO The common transmit FIFO is a 16-bit wide, 8-locations deep, first-in, first-out memory buffer. The CPU writes data to the FIFO by writing the SSI Data (SSIDR) register (see page 353), and data is stored in the FIFO until it is read out by the transmission logic. When configured as a master or a slave, parallel data is written into the transmit FIFO prior to serial conversion and transmission to the attached slave or master, respectively, through the SSITx pin. 14.2.2.2 Receive FIFO The common receive FIFO is a 16-bit wide, 8-locations deep, first-in, first-out memory buffer. Received data from the serial interface is stored in the buffer until read out by the CPU, which accesses the read FIFO by reading the SSIDR register. When configured as a master or slave, serial data received through the SSIRx pin is registered prior to parallel loading into the attached slave or master receive FIFO, respectively. 14.2.3 Interrupts The SSI can generate interrupts when the following conditions are observed: ■ Transmit FIFO service ■ Receive FIFO service ■ Receive FIFO time-out ■ Receive FIFO overrun All of the interrupt events are ORed together before being sent to the interrupt controller, so the SSI can only generate a single interrupt request to the controller at any given time. You can mask each 338 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) of the four individual maskable interrupts by setting the appropriate bits in the SSI Interrupt Mask (SSIIM) register (see page 357). Setting the appropriate mask bit to 1 enables the interrupt. Provision of the individual outputs, as well as a combined interrupt output, allows use of either a global interrupt service routine, or modular device drivers to handle interrupts. The transmit and receive dynamic dataflow interrupts have been separated from the status interrupts so that data can be read or written in response to the FIFO trigger levels. The status of the individual interrupt sources can be read from the SSI Raw Interrupt Status (SSIRIS) and SSI Masked Interrupt Status (SSIMIS) registers (see page 359 and page 360, respectively). 14.2.4 Frame Formats Each data frame is between 4 and 16 bits long, depending on the size of data programmed, and is transmitted starting with the MSB. There are three basic frame types that can be selected: ■ Texas Instruments synchronous serial ■ Freescale SPI ■ MICROWIRE For all three formats, the serial clock (SSIClk) is held inactive while the SSI is idle, and SSIClk transitions at the programmed frequency only during active transmission or reception of data. The idle state of SSIClk is utilized to provide a receive timeout indication that occurs when the receive FIFO still contains data after a timeout period. For Freescale SPI and MICROWIRE frame formats, the serial frame (SSIFss ) pin is active Low, and is asserted (pulled down) during the entire transmission of the frame. For Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format, the SSIFss pin is pulsed for one serial clock period starting at its rising edge, prior to the transmission of each frame. For this frame format, both the SSI and the off-chip slave device drive their output data on the rising edge of SSIClk, and latch data from the other device on the falling edge. Unlike the full-duplex transmission of the other two frame formats, the MICROWIRE format uses a special master-slave messaging technique, which operates at half-duplex. In this mode, when a frame begins, an 8-bit control message is transmitted to the off-chip slave. During this transmit, no incoming data is received by the SSI. After the message has been sent, the off-chip slave decodes it and, after waiting one serial clock after the last bit of the 8-bit control message has been sent, responds with the requested data. The returned data can be 4 to 16 bits in length, making the total frame length anywhere from 13 to 25 bits. 14.2.4.1 Texas Instruments Synchronous Serial Frame Format Figure 14-2 on page 339 shows the Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format for a single transmitted frame. Figure 14-2. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Single Transfer) SSIClk 4 to 16 bits SSIFss SSITx/SSIRx MSB LSB November 30, 2007 339 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller In this mode, SSIClk and SSIFss are forced Low, and the transmit data line SSITx is tristated whenever the SSI is idle. Once the bottom entry of the transmit FIFO contains data, SSIFss is pulsed High for one SSIClk period. The value to be transmitted is also transferred from the transmit FIFO to the serial shift register of the transmit logic. On the next rising edge of SSIClk, the MSB of the 4 to 16-bit data frame is shifted out on the SSITx pin. Likewise, the MSB of the received data is shifted onto the SSIRx pin by the off-chip serial slave device. Both the SSI and the off-chip serial slave device then clock each data bit into their serial shifter on the falling edge of each SSIClk. The received data is transferred from the serial shifter to the receive FIFO on the first rising edge of SSIClk after the LSB has been latched. Figure 14-3 on page 340 shows the Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format when back-to-back frames are transmitted. Figure 14-3. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) MSB LSB 4 to 16 bits SSIClk SSIFss SSITx/SSIRx 14.2.4.2 Freescale SPI Frame Format The Freescale SPI interface is a four-wire interface where the SSIFss signal behaves as a slave select. The main feature of the Freescale SPI format is that the inactive state and phase of the SSIClk signal are programmable through the SPO and SPH bits within the SSISCR0 control register. SPO Clock Polarity Bit When the SPO clock polarity control bit is Low, it produces a steady state Low value on the SSIClk pin. If the SPO bit is High, a steady state High value is placed on the SSIClk pin when data is not being transferred. SPH Phase Control Bit The SPH phase control bit selects the clock edge that captures data and allows it to change state. It has the most impact on the first bit transmitted by either allowing or not allowing a clock transition before the first data capture edge. When the SPH phase control bit is Low, data is captured on the first clock edge transition. If the SPH bit is High, data is captured on the second clock edge transition. 14.2.4.3 Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=0 and SPH=0 Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for Freescale SPI format with SPO=0 and SPH=0 are shown in Figure 14-4 on page 341 and Figure 14-5 on page 341. 340 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Figure 14-4. Freescale SPI Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 4 to 16 bits SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx Q SSITx MSB MSB LSB LSB Note: Q is undefined. Figure 14-5. Freescale SPI Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx LSB SSITx MSB LSB 4 to 16 bits LSB MSB MSB MSB LSB In this configuration, during idle periods: ■ SSIClk is forced Low ■ SSIFss is forced High ■ The transmit data line SSITx is arbitrarily forced Low ■ When the SSI is configured as a master, it enables the SSIClk pad ■ When the SSI is configured as a slave, it disables the SSIClk pad If the SSI is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSIFss master signal being driven Low. This causes slave data to be enabled onto the SSIRx input line of the master. The master SSITx output pad is enabled. One half SSIClk period later, valid master data is transferred to the SSITx pin. Now that both the master and slave data have been set, the SSIClk master clock pin goes High after one further half SSIClk period. The data is now captured on the rising and propagated on the falling edges of the SSIClk signal. In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word have been transferred, the SSIFss line is returned to its idle High state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSIFss signal must be pulsed High between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the SPH bit is logic zero. Therefore, the master device must raise the SSIFss pin of the slave device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On completion of the continuous transfer, the SSIFss pin is returned to its idle state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. November 30, 2007 341 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 14.2.4.4 Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=0 and SPH=1 The transfer signal sequence for Freescale SPI format with SPO=0 and SPH=1 is shown in Figure 14-6 on page 342, which covers both single and continuous transfers. Figure 14-6. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=0 and SPH=1 4 to 16 bits SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx SSITx Q MSB Q MSB LSB LSB Note: Q is undefined. In this configuration, during idle periods: ■ SSIClk is forced Low ■ SSIFss is forced High ■ The transmit data line SSITx is arbitrarily forced Low ■ When the SSI is configured as a master, it enables the SSIClk pad ■ When the SSI is configured as a slave, it disables the SSIClk pad If the SSI is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSIFss master signal being driven Low. The master SSITx output is enabled. After a further one half SSIClk period, both master and slave valid data is enabled onto their respective transmission lines. At the same time, the SSIClk is enabled with a rising edge transition. Data is then captured on the falling edges and propagated on the rising edges of the SSIClk signal. In the case of a single word transfer, after all bits have been transferred, the SSIFss line is returned to its idle High state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. For continuous back-to-back transfers, the SSIFss pin is held Low between successive data words and termination is the same as that of the single word transfer. 14.2.4.5 Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=1 and SPH=0 Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for Freescale SPI format with SPO=1 and SPH=0 are shown in Figure 14-7 on page 343 and Figure 14-8 on page 343. 342 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Figure 14-7. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 4 to 16 bits SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx SSITx MSB Q MSB LSB LSB Note: Q is undefined. Figure 14-8. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 SSIClk SSIFss SSITx/SSIRx MSB LSB 4 to 16 bits LSB MSB In this configuration, during idle periods: ■ SSIClk is forced High ■ SSIFss is forced High ■ The transmit data line SSITx is arbitrarily forced Low ■ When the SSI is configured as a master, it enables the SSIClk pad ■ When the SSI is configured as a slave, it disables the SSIClk pad If the SSI is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSIFss master signal being driven Low, which causes slave data to be immediately transferred onto the SSIRx line of the master. The master SSITx output pad is enabled. One half period later, valid master data is transferred to the SSITx line. Now that both the master and slave data have been set, the SSIClk master clock pin becomes Low after one further half SSIClk period. This means that data is captured on the falling edges and propagated on the rising edges of the SSIClk signal. In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word are transferred, the SSIFss line is returned to its idle High state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSIFss signal must be pulsed High between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the SPH bit is logic zero. Therefore, the master device must raise the SSIFss pin of the slave device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On completion of the continuous transfer, the SSIFss pin is returned to its idle state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. November 30, 2007 343 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 14.2.4.6 Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=1 and SPH=1 The transfer signal sequence for Freescale SPI format with SPO=1 and SPH=1 is shown in Figure 14-9 on page 344, which covers both single and continuous transfers. Figure 14-9. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=1 and SPH=1 4 to 16 bits SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx SSITx Q Q MSB MSB LSB LSB Note: Q is undefined. In this configuration, during idle periods: ■ SSIClk is forced High ■ SSIFss is forced High ■ The transmit data line SSITx is arbitrarily forced Low ■ When the SSI is configured as a master, it enables the SSIClk pad ■ When the SSI is configured as a slave, it disables the SSIClk pad If the SSI is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSIFss master signal being driven Low. The master SSITx output pad is enabled. After a further one-half SSIClk period, both master and slave data are enabled onto their respective transmission lines. At the same time, SSIClk is enabled with a falling edge transition. Data is then captured on the rising edges and propagated on the falling edges of the SSIClk signal. After all bits have been transferred, in the case of a single word transmission, the SSIFss line is returned to its idle high state one SSIClk period after the last bit has been captured. For continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSIFss pin remains in its active Low state, until the final bit of the last word has been captured, and then returns to its idle state as described above. For continuous back-to-back transfers, the SSIFss pin is held Low between successive data words and termination is the same as that of the single word transfer. 14.2.4.7 MICROWIRE Frame Format Figure 14-10 on page 345 shows the MICROWIRE frame format, again for a single frame. Figure 14-11 on page 346 shows the same format when back-to-back frames are transmitted. 344 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Figure 14-10. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Single Frame) SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx MSB LSB 4 to 16 bits output data 0 SSITx MSB LSB 8-bit control MICROWIRE format is very similar to SPI format, except that transmission is half-duplex instead of full-duplex, using a master-slave message passing technique. Each serial transmission begins with an 8-bit control word that is transmitted from the SSI to the off-chip slave device. During this transmission, no incoming data is received by the SSI. After the message has been sent, the off-chip slave decodes it and, after waiting one serial clock after the last bit of the 8-bit control message has been sent, responds with the required data. The returned data is 4 to 16 bits in length, making the total frame length anywhere from 13 to 25 bits. In this configuration, during idle periods: ■ SSIClk is forced Low ■ SSIFss is forced High ■ The transmit data line SSITx is arbitrarily forced Low A transmission is triggered by writing a control byte to the transmit FIFO. The falling edge of SSIFss causes the value contained in the bottom entry of the transmit FIFO to be transferred to the serial shift register of the transmit logic, and the MSB of the 8-bit control frame to be shifted out onto the SSITx pin. SSIFss remains Low for the duration of the frame transmission. The SSIRx pin remains tristated during this transmission. The off-chip serial slave device latches each control bit into its serial shifter on the rising edge of each SSIClk. After the last bit is latched by the slave device, the control byte is decoded during a one clock wait-state, and the slave responds by transmitting data back to the SSI. Each bit is driven onto the SSIRx line on the falling edge of SSIClk. The SSI in turn latches each bit on the rising edge of SSIClk. At the end of the frame, for single transfers, the SSIFss signal is pulled High one clock period after the last bit has been latched in the receive serial shifter, which causes the data to be transferred to the receive FIFO. Note: The off-chip slave device can tristate the receive line either on the falling edge of SSIClk after the LSB has been latched by the receive shifter, or when the SSIFss pin goes High. For continuous transfers, data transmission begins and ends in the same manner as a single transfer. However, the SSIFss line is continuously asserted (held Low) and transmission of data occurs back-to-back. The control byte of the next frame follows directly after the LSB of the received data from the current frame. Each of the received values is transferred from the receive shifter on the falling edge of SSIClk, after the LSB of the frame has been latched into the SSI. November 30, 2007 345 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 14-11. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) 8-bit control SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx MSB LSB 4 to 16 bits output data 0 SSITx LSB MSB LSB MSB In the MICROWIRE mode, the SSI slave samples the first bit of receive data on the rising edge of SSIClk after SSIFss has gone Low. Masters that drive a free-running SSIClk must ensure that the SSIFss signal has sufficient setup and hold margins with respect to the rising edge of SSIClk. Figure 14-12 on page 346 illustrates these setup and hold time requirements. With respect to the SSIClk rising edge on which the first bit of receive data is to be sampled by the SSI slave, SSIFss must have a setup of at least two times the period of SSIClk on which the SSI operates. With respect to the SSIClk rising edge previous to this edge, SSIFss must have a hold of at least one SSIClk period. Figure 14-12. MICROWIRE Frame Format, SSIFss Input Setup and Hold Requirements SSIClk SSIFss SSIRx First RX data to be sampled by SSI slave tSetup=(2*tSSIClk) tHold=tSSIClk 14.3 Initialization and Configuration To use the SSI, its peripheral clock must be enabled by setting the SSI bit in the RCGC1 register. For each of the frame formats, the SSI is configured using the following steps: 1. Ensure that the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register is disabled before making any configuration changes. 2. Select whether the SSI is a master or slave: a. For master operations, set the SSICR1 register to 0x0000.0000. b. For slave mode (output enabled), set the SSICR1 register to 0x0000.0004. c. For slave mode (output disabled), set the SSICR1 register to 0x0000.000C. 3. Configure the clock prescale divisor by writing the SSICPSR register. 346 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) 4. Write the SSICR0 register with the following configuration: ■ Serial clock rate (SCR) ■ Desired clock phase/polarity, if using Freescale SPI mode (SPH and SPO) ■ The protocol mode: Freescale SPI, TI SSF, MICROWIRE (FRF) ■ The data size (DSS) 5. Enable the SSI by setting the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register. As an example, assume the SSI must be configured to operate with the following parameters: ■ Master operation ■ Freescale SPI mode (SPO=1, SPH=1) ■ 1 Mbps bit rate ■ 8 data bits Assuming the system clock is 20 MHz, the bit rate calculation would be: FSSIClk = FSysClk / (CPSDVSR * (1 + SCR)) 1x106 = 20x106 / (CPSDVSR * (1 + SCR)) In this case, if CPSDVSR=2, SCR must be 9. The configuration sequence would be as follows: 1. Ensure that the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register is disabled. 2. Write the SSICR1 register with a value of 0x0000.0000. 3. Write the SSICPSR register with a value of 0x0000.0002. 4. Write the SSICR0 register with a value of 0x0000.09C7. 5. The SSI is then enabled by setting the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register to 1. 14.4 Register Map Table 14-1 on page 347 lists the SSI registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to that SSI module’s base address: ■ SSI0: 0x4000.8000 Note: The SSI must be disabled (see the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register) before any of the control registers are reprogrammed. Table 14-1. SSI Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 SSICR0 R/W 0x0000.0000 SSI Control 0 349 November 30, 2007 347 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x004 SSICR1 R/W 0x0000.0000 SSI Control 1 351 0x008 SSIDR R/W 0x0000.0000 SSI Data 353 0x00C SSISR RO 0x0000.0003 SSI Status 354 0x010 SSICPSR R/W 0x0000.0000 SSI Clock Prescale 356 0x014 SSIIM R/W 0x0000.0000 SSI Interrupt Mask 357 0x018 SSIRIS RO 0x0000.0008 SSI Raw Interrupt Status 359 0x01C SSIMIS RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Masked Interrupt Status 360 0x020 SSIICR W1C 0x0000.0000 SSI Interrupt Clear 361 0xFD0 SSIPeriphID4 RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Peripheral Identification 4 362 0xFD4 SSIPeriphID5 RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Peripheral Identification 5 363 0xFD8 SSIPeriphID6 RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Peripheral Identification 6 364 0xFDC SSIPeriphID7 RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Peripheral Identification 7 365 0xFE0 SSIPeriphID0 RO 0x0000.0022 SSI Peripheral Identification 0 366 0xFE4 SSIPeriphID1 RO 0x0000.0000 SSI Peripheral Identification 1 367 0xFE8 SSIPeriphID2 RO 0x0000.0018 SSI Peripheral Identification 2 368 0xFEC SSIPeriphID3 RO 0x0000.0001 SSI Peripheral Identification 3 369 0xFF0 SSIPCellID0 RO 0x0000.000D SSI PrimeCell Identification 0 370 0xFF4 SSIPCellID1 RO 0x0000.00F0 SSI PrimeCell Identification 1 371 0xFF8 SSIPCellID2 RO 0x0000.0005 SSI PrimeCell Identification 2 372 0xFFC SSIPCellID3 RO 0x0000.00B1 SSI PrimeCell Identification 3 373 14.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the SSI registers, in numerical order by address offset. 348 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 1: SSI Control 0 (SSICR0), offset 0x000 SSICR0 is control register 0 and contains bit fields that control various functions within the SSI module. Functionality such as protocol mode, clock rate, and data size are configured in this register. SSI Control 0 (SSICR0) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SCR SPH SPO FRF DSS Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Serial Clock Rate The value SCR is used to generate the transmit and receive bit rate of the SSI. The bit rate is: BR=FSSIClk/(CPSDVSR * (1 + SCR)) where CPSDVSR is an even value from 2-254 programmed in the SSICPSR register, and SCR is a value from 0-255. 15:8 SCR R/W 0x0000 SSI Serial Clock Phase This bit is only applicable to the Freescale SPI Format. The SPH control bit selects the clock edge that captures data and allows it to change state. It has the most impact on the first bit transmitted by either allowing or not allowing a clock transition before the first data capture edge. When the SPH bit is 0, data is captured on the first clock edge transition. If SPH is 1, data is captured on the second clock edge transition. 7 SPH R/W 0 SSI Serial Clock Polarity This bit is only applicable to the Freescale SPI Format. When the SPO bit is 0, it produces a steady state Low value on the SSIClk pin. If SPO is 1, a steady state High value is placed on the SSIClk pin when data is not being transferred. 6 SPO R/W 0 November 30, 2007 349 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SSI Frame Format Select The FRF values are defined as follows: Value Frame Format 0x0 Freescale SPI Frame Format 0x1 Texas Intruments Synchronous Serial Frame Format 0x2 MICROWIRE Frame Format 0x3 Reserved 5:4 FRF R/W 0x0 SSI Data Size Select The DSS values are defined as follows: Value Data Size 0x0-0x2 Reserved 0x3 4-bit data 0x4 5-bit data 0x5 6-bit data 0x6 7-bit data 0x7 8-bit data 0x8 9-bit data 0x9 10-bit data 0xA 11-bit data 0xB 12-bit data 0xC 13-bit data 0xD 14-bit data 0xE 15-bit data 0xF 16-bit data 3:0 DSS R/W 0x00 350 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 2: SSI Control 1 (SSICR1), offset 0x004 SSICR1 is control register 1 and contains bit fields that control various functions within the SSI module. Master and slave mode functionality is controlled by this register. SSI Control 1 (SSICR1) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SOD MS SSE LBM Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Slave Mode Output Disable This bit is relevant only in the Slave mode (MS=1). In multiple-slave systems, it is possible for the SSI master to broadcast a message to all slaves in the system while ensuring that only one slave drives data onto the serial output line. In such systems, the TXD lines from multiple slaves could be tied together. To operate in such a system, the SOD bit can be configured so that the SSI slave does not drive the SSITx pin. The SOD values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 SSI can drive SSITx output in Slave Output mode. 1 SSI must not drive the SSITx output in Slave mode. 3 SOD R/W 0 SSI Master/Slave Select This bit selects Master or Slave mode and can be modified only when SSI is disabled (SSE=0). The MS values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Device configured as a master. 1 Device configured as a slave. 2 MS R/W 0 November 30, 2007 351 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SSI Synchronous Serial Port Enable Setting this bit enables SSI operation. The SSE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 SSI operation disabled. 1 SSI operation enabled. Note: This bit must be set to 0 before any control registers are reprogrammed. 1 SSE R/W 0 SSI Loopback Mode Setting this bit enables Loopback Test mode. The LBM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Normal serial port operation enabled. Output of the transmit serial shift register is connected internally to the input of the receive serial shift register. 1 0 LBM R/W 0 352 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 3: SSI Data (SSIDR), offset 0x008 SSIDR is the data register and is 16-bits wide. When SSIDR is read, the entry in the receive FIFO (pointed to by the current FIFO read pointer) is accessed. As data values are removed by the SSI receive logic from the incoming data frame, they are placed into the entry in the receive FIFO (pointed to by the current FIFO write pointer). When SSIDR is written to, the entry in the transmit FIFO (pointed to by the write pointer) is written to. Data values are removed from the transmit FIFO one value at a time by the transmit logic. It is loaded into the transmit serial shifter, then serially shifted out onto the SSITx pin at the programmed bit rate. When a data size of less than 16 bits is selected, the user must right-justify data written to the transmit FIFO. The transmit logic ignores the unused bits. Received data less than 16 bits is automatically right-justified in the receive buffer. When the SSI is programmed for MICROWIRE frame format, the default size for transmit data is eight bits (the most significant byte is ignored). The receive data size is controlled by the programmer. The transmit FIFO and the receive FIFO are not cleared even when the SSE bit in the SSICR1 register is set to zero. This allows the software to fill the transmit FIFO before enabling the SSI. SSI Data (SSIDR) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DATA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0000 SSI Receive/Transmit Data A read operation reads the receive FIFO. A write operation writes the transmit FIFO. Software must right-justify data when the SSI is programmed for a data size that is less than 16 bits. Unused bits at the top are ignored by the transmit logic. The receive logic automatically right-justifies the data. 15:0 DATA R/W 0x0000 November 30, 2007 353 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: SSI Status (SSISR), offset 0x00C SSISR is a status register that contains bits that indicate the FIFO fill status and the SSI busy status. SSI Status (SSISR) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x00C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0003 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved BSY RFF RNE TNF TFE Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R0 Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:5 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Busy Bit The BSY values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 SSI is idle. SSI is currently transmitting and/or receiving a frame, or the transmit FIFO is not empty. 1 4 BSY RO 0 SSI Receive FIFO Full The RFF values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Receive FIFO is not full. 1 Receive FIFO is full. 3 RFF RO 0 SSI Receive FIFO Not Empty The RNE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Receive FIFO is empty. 1 Receive FIFO is not empty. 2 RNE RO 0 SSI Transmit FIFO Not Full The TNF values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Transmit FIFO is full. 1 Transmit FIFO is not full. 1 TNF RO 1 354 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SSI Transmit FIFO Empty The TFE values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Transmit FIFO is not empty. 1 Transmit FIFO is empty. 0 TFE R0 1 November 30, 2007 355 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 5: SSI Clock Prescale (SSICPSR), offset 0x010 SSICPSR is the clock prescale register and specifies the division factor by which the system clock must be internally divided before further use. The value programmed into this register must be an even number between 2 and 254. The least-significant bit of the programmed number is hard-coded to zero. If an odd number is written to this register, data read back from this register has the least-significant bit as zero. SSI Clock Prescale (SSICPSR) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CPSDVSR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Clock Prescale Divisor This value must be an even number from 2 to 254, depending on the frequency of SSIClk. The LSB always returns 0 on reads. 7:0 CPSDVSR R/W 0x00 356 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 6: SSI Interrupt Mask (SSIIM), offset 0x014 The SSIIM register is the interrupt mask set or clear register. It is a read/write register and all bits are cleared to 0 on reset. On a read, this register gives the current value of the mask on the relevant interrupt. A write of 1 to the particular bit sets the mask, enabling the interrupt to be read. A write of 0 clears the corresponding mask. SSI Interrupt Mask (SSIIM) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TXIM RXIM RTIM RORIM Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Transmit FIFO Interrupt Mask The TXIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 TX FIFO half-full or less condition interrupt is masked. 1 TX FIFO half-full or less condition interrupt is not masked. 3 TXIM R/W 0 SSI Receive FIFO Interrupt Mask The RXIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 RX FIFO half-full or more condition interrupt is masked. 1 RX FIFO half-full or more condition interrupt is not masked. 2 RXIM R/W 0 SSI Receive Time-Out Interrupt Mask The RTIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 RX FIFO time-out interrupt is masked. 1 RX FIFO time-out interrupt is not masked. 1 RTIM R/W 0 November 30, 2007 357 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description SSI Receive Overrun Interrupt Mask The RORIM values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 RX FIFO overrun interrupt is masked. 1 RX FIFO overrun interrupt is not masked. 0 RORIM R/W 0 358 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 7: SSI Raw Interrupt Status (SSIRIS), offset 0x018 The SSIRIS register is the raw interrupt status register. On a read, this register gives the current raw status value of the corresponding interrupt prior to masking. A write has no effect. SSI Raw Interrupt Status (SSIRIS) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0008 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TXRIS RXRIS RTRIS RORRIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Transmit FIFO Raw Interrupt Status Indicates that the transmit FIFO is half full or less, when set. 3 TXRIS RO 1 SSI Receive FIFO Raw Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive FIFO is half full or more, when set. 2 RXRIS RO 0 SSI Receive Time-Out Raw Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive time-out has occurred, when set. 1 RTRIS RO 0 SSI Receive Overrun Raw Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive FIFO has overflowed, when set. 0 RORRIS RO 0 November 30, 2007 359 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: SSI Masked Interrupt Status (SSIMIS), offset 0x01C The SSIMIS register is the masked interrupt status register. On a read, this register gives the current masked status value of the corresponding interrupt. A write has no effect. SSI Masked Interrupt Status (SSIMIS) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x01C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TXMIS RXMIS RTMIS RORMIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0 SSI Transmit FIFO Masked Interrupt Status Indicates that the transmit FIFO is half full or less, when set. 3 TXMIS RO 0 SSI Receive FIFO Masked Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive FIFO is half full or more, when set. 2 RXMIS RO 0 SSI Receive Time-Out Masked Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive time-out has occurred, when set. 1 RTMIS RO 0 SSI Receive Overrun Masked Interrupt Status Indicates that the receive FIFO has overflowed, when set. 0 RORMIS RO 0 360 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 9: SSI Interrupt Clear (SSIICR), offset 0x020 The SSIICR register is the interrupt clear register. On a write of 1, the corresponding interrupt is cleared. A write of 0 has no effect. SSI Interrupt Clear (SSIICR) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0x020 Type W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RTIC RORIC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO W1C W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Receive Time-Out Interrupt Clear The RTIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 1 RTIC W1C 0 SSI Receive Overrun Interrupt Clear The RORIC values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 No effect on interrupt. 1 Clears interrupt. 0 RORIC W1C 0 November 30, 2007 361 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: SSI Peripheral Identification 4 (SSIPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 4 (SSIPeriphID4) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFD0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID4 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register[7:0] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID4 RO 0x00 362 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 11: SSI Peripheral Identification 5 (SSIPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 5 (SSIPeriphID5) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFD4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID5 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register[15:8] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID5 RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 363 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: SSI Peripheral Identification 6 (SSIPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 6 (SSIPeriphID6) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFD8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID6 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register[23:16] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID6 RO 0x00 364 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 13: SSI Peripheral Identification 7 (SSIPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 7 (SSIPeriphID7) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFDC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID7 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register[31:24] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID7 RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 365 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: SSI Peripheral Identification 0 (SSIPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 0 (SSIPeriphID0) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFE0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0022 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0 SSI Peripheral ID Register[7:0] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID0 RO 0x22 366 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 15: SSI Peripheral Identification 1 (SSIPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 1 (SSIPeriphID1) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFE4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register [15:8] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID1 RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 367 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: SSI Peripheral Identification 2 (SSIPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 2 (SSIPeriphID2) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFE8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0018 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register [23:16] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID2 RO 0x18 368 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 17: SSI Peripheral Identification 3 (SSIPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC The SSIPeriphIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI Peripheral Identification 3 (SSIPeriphID3) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFEC Type RO, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI Peripheral ID Register [31:24] Can be used by software to identify the presence of this peripheral. 7:0 PID3 RO 0x01 November 30, 2007 369 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: SSI PrimeCell Identification 0 (SSIPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 The SSIPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI PrimeCell Identification 0 (SSIPCellID0) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFF0 Type RO, reset 0x0000.000D 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI PrimeCell ID Register [7:0] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID0 RO 0x0D 370 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 19: SSI PrimeCell Identification 1 (SSIPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 The SSIPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI PrimeCell Identification 1 (SSIPCellID1) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFF4 Type RO, reset 0x0000.00F0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID1 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI PrimeCell ID Register [15:8] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID1 RO 0xF0 November 30, 2007 371 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 20: SSI PrimeCell Identification 2 (SSIPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 The SSIPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI PrimeCell Identification 2 (SSIPCellID2) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFF8 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0005 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID2 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI PrimeCell ID Register [23:16] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID2 RO 0x05 372 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Register 21: SSI PrimeCell Identification 3 (SSIPCellID3), offset 0xFFC The SSIPCellIDn registers are hard-coded and the fields within the register determine the reset value. SSI PrimeCell Identification 3 (SSIPCellID3) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 Offset 0xFFC Type RO, reset 0x0000.00B1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CID3 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SSI PrimeCell ID Register [31:24] Provides software a standard cross-peripheral identification system. 7:0 CID3 RO 0xB1 November 30, 2007 373 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 15 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus provides bi-directional data transfer through a two-wire design (a serial data line SDA and a serial clock line SCL), and interfaces to external I2C devices such as serial memory (RAMs and ROMs), networking devices, LCDs, tone generators, and so on. The I2C bus may also be used for system testing and diagnostic purposes in product development and manufacture. The LM3S6952 microcontroller includes one I2C module, providing the ability to interact (both send and receive) with other I2C devices on the bus. Devices on the I2C bus can be designated as either a master or a slave. The Stellaris® I2C module supports both sending and receiving data as either a master or a slave, and also supports the simultaneous operation as both a master and a slave. There are a total of four I2C modes: Master Transmit, Master Receive, Slave Transmit, and Slave Receive. The Stellaris® I2C module can operate at two speeds: Standard (100 Kbps) and Fast (400 Kbps). Both the I2C master and slave can generate interrupts; the I2C master generates interrupts when a transmit or receive operation completes (or aborts due to an error) and the I2C slave generates interrupts when data has been sent or requested by a master. 15.1 Block Diagram Figure 15-1. I2C Block Diagram I2C I/O Select I2C Master Core Interrupt I2C Slave Core I2CSCL I2CSDA I2CSDA I2CSCL I2CSDA I2CSCL I2CMSA I2CMCS I2CMDR I2CMTPR I2CMIMR I2CMRIS I2CMICR I2CMCR I2CSOAR I2CSCSR I2CSDR I2CSIM I2CSRIS I2CSMIS I2CMMIS I2CSICR I2C Control 15.2 Functional Description The I2C module is comprised of both master and slave functions which are implemented as separate peripherals. For proper operation, the SDA and SCL pins must be connected to bi-directional open-drain pads. A typical I2C bus configuration is shown in Figure 15-2 on page 375. See “I2C” on page 539 for I2C timing diagrams. 374 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Figure 15-2. I2C Bus Configuration RPUP StellarisTM I2CSCL I2CSDA RPUP 3rd Party Device with I2C Interface SCL SDA I2C Bus SCL SDA 3rd Party Device with I2C Interface SCL SDA 15.2.1 I2C Bus Functional Overview The I2C bus uses only two signals: SDA and SCL, named I2CSDA and I2CSCL on Stellaris® microcontrollers. SDA is the bi-directional serial data line and SCL is the bi-directional serial clock line. The bus is considered idle when both lines are high. Every transaction on the I2C bus is nine bits long, consisting of eight data bits and a single acknowledge bit. The number of bytes per transfer (defined as the time between a valid START and STOP condition, described in “START and STOP Conditions” on page 375) is unrestricted, but each byte has to be followed by an acknowledge bit, and data must be transferred MSB first. When a receiver cannot receive another complete byte, it can hold the clock line SCL Low and force the transmitter into a wait state. The data transfer continues when the receiver releases the clock SCL. 15.2.1.1 START and STOP Conditions The protocol of the I2C bus defines two states to begin and end a transaction: START and STOP. A high-to-low transition on the SDA line while the SCL is high is defined as a START condition, and a low-to-high transition on the SDA line while SCL is high is defined as a STOP condition. The bus is considered busy after a START condition and free after a STOP condition. See Figure 15-3 on page 375. Figure 15-3. START and STOP Conditions START condition SDA SCL STOP condition SDA SCL 15.2.1.2 Data Format with 7-Bit Address Data transfers follow the format shown in Figure 15-4 on page 376. After the START condition, a slave address is sent. This address is 7-bits long followed by an eighth bit, which is a data direction bit (R/S bit in the I2CMSA register). A zero indicates a transmit operation (send), and a one indicates a request for data (receive). A data transfer is always terminated by a STOP condition generated by the master, however, a master can initiate communications with another device on the bus by generating a repeated START condition and addressing another slave without first generating a STOP condition. Various combinations of receive/send formats are then possible within a single transfer. November 30, 2007 375 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 15-4. Complete Data Transfer with a 7-Bit Address Slave address Data SDA MSB LSB R/S ACK MSB LSB ACK SCL 1 2 7 8 9 1 2 7 8 9 The first seven bits of the first byte make up the slave address (see Figure 15-5 on page 376). The eighth bit determines the direction of the message. A zero in the R/S position of the first byte means that the master will write (send) data to the selected slave, and a one in this position means that the master will receive data from the slave. Figure 15-5. R/S Bit in First Byte R/S LSB Slave address MSB 15.2.1.3 Data Validity The data on the SDA line must be stable during the high period of the clock, and the data line can only change when SCL is low (see Figure 15-6 on page 376). Figure 15-6. Data Validity During Bit Transfer on the I2C Bus Change of data allowed Dataline stable SDA SCL 15.2.1.4 Acknowledge All bus transactions have a required acknowledge clock cycle that is generated by the master. During the acknowledge cycle, the transmitter (which can be the master or slave) releases the SDA line. To acknowledge the transaction, the receiver must pull down SDA during the acknowledge clock cycle. The data sent out by the receiver during the acknowledge cycle must comply with the data validity requirements described in “Data Validity” on page 376. When a slave receiver does not acknowledge the slave address, SDA must be left high by the slave so that the master can generate a STOP condition and abort the current transfer. If the master device is acting as a receiver during a transfer, it is responsible for acknowledging each transfer made by the slave. Since the master controls the number of bytes in the transfer, it signals the end of data to the slave transmitter by not generating an acknowledge on the last data byte. The slave transmitter must then release SDA to allow the master to generate the STOP or a repeated START condition. 376 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface 15.2.1.5 Arbitration A master may start a transfer only if the bus is idle. It's possible for two or more masters to generate a START condition within minimum hold time of the START condition. In these situations, an arbitration scheme takes place on the SDA line, while SCL is high. During arbitration, the first of the competing master devices to place a '1' (high) on SDA while another master transmits a '0' (low) will switch off its data output stage and retire until the bus is idle again. Arbitration can take place over several bits. Its first stage is a comparison of address bits, and if both masters are trying to address the same device, arbitration continues on to the comparison of data bits. 15.2.2 Available Speed Modes The I2C clock rate is determined by the parameters: CLK_PRD, TIMER_PRD, SCL_LP, and SCL_HP. where: CLK_PRD is the system clock period SCL_LP is the low phase of SCL (fixed at 6) SCL_HP is the high phase of SCL (fixed at 4) TIMER_PRD is the programmed value in the I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR) register (see page 394). The I2C clock period is calculated as follows: SCL_PERIOD = 2*(1 + TIMER_PRD)*(SCL_LP + SCL_HP)*CLK_PRD For example: CLK_PRD = 50 ns TIMER_PRD = 2 SCL_LP=6 SCL_HP=4 yields a SCL frequency of: 1/T = 333 Khz Table 15-1 on page 377 gives examples of timer period, system clock, and speed mode (Standard or Fast). Table 15-1. Examples of I2C Master Timer Period versus Speed Mode System Clock Timer Period Standard Mode Timer Period Fast Mode 4 Mhz 0x01 100 Kbps - - 6 Mhz 0x02 100 Kbps - - 12.5 Mhz 0x06 89 Kbps 0x01 312 Kbps 16.7 Mhz 0x08 93 Kbps 0x02 278 Kbps 20 Mhz 0x09 100 Kbps 0x02 333 Kbps 25 Mhz 0x0C 96.2 Kbps 0x03 312 Kbps 33Mhz 0x10 97.1 Kbps 0x04 330 Kbps 40Mhz 0x13 100 Kbps 0x04 400 Kbps November 30, 2007 377 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller System Clock Timer Period Standard Mode Timer Period Fast Mode 50Mhz 0x18 100 Kbps 0x06 357 Kbps 15.2.3 Interrupts The I2C can generate interrupts when the following conditions are observed: ■ Master transaction completed ■ Master transaction error ■ Slave transaction received ■ Slave transaction requested There is a separate interrupt signal for the I2C master and I2C modules. While both modules can generate interrupts for multiple conditions, only a single interrupt signal is sent to the interrupt controller. 15.2.3.1 I2C Master Interrupts The I2C master module generates an interrupt when a transaction completes (either transmit or receive), or when an error occurs during a transaction. To enable the I2C master interrupt, software must write a '1' to the I2C Master Interrupt Mask (I2CMIMR) register. When an interrupt condition is met, software must check the ERROR bit in the I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS) register to verify that an error didn't occur during the last transaction. An error condition is asserted if the last transaction wasn't acknowledge by the slave or if the master was forced to give up ownership of the bus due to a lost arbitration round with another master. If an error is not detected, the application can proceed with the transfer. The interrupt is cleared by writing a '1' to the I2C Master Interrupt Clear (I2CMICR) register. If the application doesn't require the use of interrupts, the raw interrupt status is always visible via the I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status (I2CMRIS) register. 15.2.3.2 I2C Slave Interrupts The slave module generates interrupts as it receives requests from an I2C master. To enable the I2C slave interrupt, write a '1' to the I2C Slave Interrupt Mask (I2CSIMR) register. Software determines whether the module should write (transmit) or read (receive) data from the I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR) register, by checking the RREQ and TREQ bits of the I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR) register. If the slave module is in receive mode and the first byte of a transfer is received, the FBR bit is set along with the RREQ bit. The interrupt is cleared by writing a '1' to the I2C Slave Interrupt Clear (I2CSICR) register. If the application doesn't require the use of interrupts, the raw interrupt status is always visible via the I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status (I2CSRIS) register. 15.2.4 Loopback Operation The I2C modules can be placed into an internal loopback mode for diagnostic or debug work. This is accomplished by setting the LPBK bit in the I2C Master Configuration (I2CMCR) register. In loopback mode, the SDA and SCL signals from the master and slave modules are tied together. 378 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface 15.2.5 Command Sequence Flow Charts This section details the steps required to perform the various I2C transfer types in both master and slave mode. 15.2.5.1 I2C Master Command Sequences The figures that follow show the command sequences available for the I2C master. Figure 15-7. Master Single SEND Idle Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Write data to I2CMDR Read I2CMCS Sequence may be omitted in a Single Master system BUSBSY bit=0? NO Write ---0-111 to I2CMCS YES Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? ERROR bit=0? YES Error Service Idle YES NO NO November 30, 2007 379 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 15-8. Master Single RECEIVE Idle Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Read I2CMCS Sequence may be omitted in a Single Master system BUSBSY bit=0? NO Write ---00111 to I2CMCS YES Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? ERROR bit=0? YES Error Service Idle NO NO Read data from I2CMDR YES 380 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Figure 15-9. Master Burst SEND Idle Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Write data to I2CMDR Read I2CMCS BUSBSY bit=0? YES Write ---0-011 to I2CMCS NO Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? YES ERROR bit=0? YES Write data to ARBLST bit=1? I2CMDR Write ---0-100 to Index=n? I2CMCS NO Error Service Idle YES Write ---0-001 to I2CMCS Write ---0-101 to I2CMCS YES Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? ERROR bit=0? YES NO Idle YES Error Service NO NO NO NO Sequence may be omitted in a Single Master system November 30, 2007 381 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 15-10. Master Burst RECEIVE Idle Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Read I2CMCS BUSBSY bit=0? NO Write ---01011 to I2CMCS YES Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? NO ERROR bit=0? YES ARBLST bit=1? Write ---0-100 to I2CMCS NO Error Service YES Idle Read data from I2CMDR Index=m-1? Write ---00101 to I2CMCS YES Idle Read data from Error Service I2CMDR ERROR bit=0? YES Write ---01001 to I2CMCS Read I2CMCS BUSY bit=0? NO YES Sequence may be omitted in a Single Master system NO NO NO 382 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Figure 15-11. Master Burst RECEIVE after Burst SEND Idle Master operates in Master Transmit mode STOP condition is not generated Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Write ---01011 to I2CMCS Master operates in Master Receive mode Idle Repeated START condition is generated with changing data direction November 30, 2007 383 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 15-12. Master Burst SEND after Burst RECEIVE Idle Master operates in Master Receive mode STOP condition is not generated Write Slave Address to I2CMSA Write ---0-011 to I2CMCS Master operates in Master Transmit mode Idle Repeated START condition is generated with changing data direction 15.2.5.2 I2C Slave Command Sequences Figure 15-13 on page 385 presents the command sequence available for the I2C slave. 384 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Figure 15-13. Slave Command Sequence Idle Write OWN Slave Address to I2CSOAR Write -------1 to I2CSCSR Read I2CSCSR RREQ bit=1? Read data from I2CSDR YES TREQ bit=1? NO Write data to I2CSDR YES NO FBR is also valid 15.3 Initialization and Configuration The following example shows how to configure the I2C module to send a single byte as a master. This assumes the system clock is 20 MHz. 1. Enable the I2C clock by writing a value of 0x0000.1000 to the RCGC1 register in the System Control module. 2. Enable the clock to the appropriate GPIO module via the RCGC2 register in the System Control module. 3. In the GPIO module, enable the appropriate pins for their alternate function using the GPIOAFSEL register. Also, be sure to enable the same pins for Open Drain operation. 4. Initialize the I2C Master by writing the I2CMCR register with a value of 0x0000.0020. 5. Set the desired SCL clock speed of 100 Kbps by writing the I2CMTPR register with the correct value. The value written to the I2CMTPR register represents the number of system clock periods in one SCL clock period. The TPR value is determined by the following equation: November 30, 2007 385 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller TPR = (System Clock / (2 * (SCL_LP + SCL_HP) * SCL_CLK)) - 1; TPR = (20MHz / (2 * (6 + 4) * 100000)) - 1; TPR = 9 Write the I2CMTPR register with the value of 0x0000.0009. 6. Specify the slave address of the master and that the next operation will be a Send by writing the I2CMSA register with a value of 0x0000.0076. This sets the slave address to 0x3B. 7. Place data (byte) to be sent in the data register by writing the I2CMDR register with the desired data. 8. Initiate a single byte send of the data from Master to Slave by writing the I2CMCS register with a value of 0x0000.0007 (STOP, START, RUN). 9. Wait until the transmission completes by polling the I2CMCS register’s BUSBSY bit until it has been cleared. 15.4 I2C Register Map Table 15-2 on page 386 lists the I2C registers. All addresses given are relative to the I2C base addresses for the master and slave: ■ I2C Master 0: 0x4002.0000 ■ I2C Slave 0: 0x4002.0800 Table 15-2. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page I2C Master 0x000 I2CMSA R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Slave Address 388 0x004 I2CMCS R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Control/Status 389 0x008 I2CMDR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Data 393 0x00C I2CMTPR R/W 0x0000.0001 I2C Master Timer Period 394 0x010 I2CMIMR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Interrupt Mask 395 0x014 I2CMRIS RO 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status 396 0x018 I2CMMIS RO 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Masked Interrupt Status 397 0x01C I2CMICR WO 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Interrupt Clear 398 0x020 I2CMCR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Master Configuration 399 I2C Slave 0x000 I2CSOAR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Own Address 401 0x004 I2CSCSR RO 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Control/Status 402 0x008 I2CSDR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Data 404 0x00C I2CSIMR R/W 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Interrupt Mask 405 386 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x010 I2CSRIS RO 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status 406 0x014 I2CSMIS RO 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Masked Interrupt Status 407 0x018 I2CSICR WO 0x0000.0000 I2C Slave Interrupt Clear 408 15.5 Register Descriptions (I2C Master) The remainder of this section lists and describes the I2C master registers, in numerical order by address offset. See also “Register Descriptions (I2C Slave)” on page 400. November 30, 2007 387 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: I2C Master Slave Address (I2CMSA), offset 0x000 This register consists of eight bits: seven address bits (A6-A0), and a Receive/Send bit, which determines if the next operation is a Receive (High), or Send (Low). I2C Master Slave Address (I2CMSA) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SA R/S Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 I2C Slave Address This field specifies bits A6 through A0 of the slave address. 7:1 SA R/W 0 Receive/Send The R/S bit specifies if the next operation is a Receive (High) or Send (Low). Value Description 0 Send. 1 Receive. 0 R/S R/W 0 388 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 2: I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS), offset 0x004 This register accesses four control bits when written, and accesses seven status bits when read. The status register consists of seven bits, which when read determine the state of the I2C bus controller. The control register consists of four bits: the RUN, START, STOP, and ACK bits. The START bit causes the generation of the START, or REPEATED START condition. The STOP bit determines if the cycle stops at the end of the data cycle, or continues on to a burst. To generate a single send cycle, the I2C Master Slave Address (I2CMSA) register is written with the desired address, the R/S bit is set to 0, and the Control register is written with ACK=X (0 or 1), STOP=1, START=1, and RUN=1 to perform the operation and stop. When the operation is completed (or aborted due an error), the interrupt pin becomes active and the data may be read from the I2CMDR register. When the I2C module operates in Master receiver mode, the ACK bit must be set normally to logic 1. This causes the I2C bus controller to send an acknowledge automatically after each byte. This bit must be reset when the I2C bus controller requires no further data to be sent from the slave transmitter. Read-Only Status Register I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved BUSBSY IDLE ARBLST DATACK ADRACK ERROR BUSY Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0x00 Bus Busy This bit specifies the state of the I2C bus. If set, the bus is busy; otherwise, the bus is idle. The bit changes based on the START and STOP conditions. 6 BUSBSY RO 0 I2C Idle This bit specifies the I2C controller state. If set, the controller is idle; otherwise the controller is not idle. 5 IDLE RO 0 Arbitration Lost This bit specifies the result of bus arbitration. If set, the controller lost arbitration; otherwise, the controller won arbitration. 4 ARBLST RO 0 November 30, 2007 389 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Acknowledge Data This bit specifies the result of the last data operation. If set, the transmitted data was not acknowledged; otherwise, the data was acknowledged. 3 DATACK RO 0 Acknowledge Address This bit specifies the result of the last address operation. If set, the transmitted address was not acknowledged; otherwise, the address was acknowledged. 2 ADRACK RO 0 Error This bit specifies the result of the last bus operation. If set, an error occurred on the last operation; otherwise, no error was detected. The error can be from the slave address not being acknowledged, the transmit data not being acknowledged, or because the controller lost arbitration. 1 ERROR RO 0 I2C Busy This bit specifies the state of the controller. If set, the controller is busy; otherwise, the controller is idle. When the BUSY bit is set, the other status bits are not valid. 0 BUSY RO 0 Write-Only Control Register I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x004 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ACK STOP START RUN Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved WO 0x00 Data Acknowledge Enable When set, causes received data byte to be acknowledged automatically by the master. See field decoding in Table 15-3 on page 391. 3 ACK WO 0 Generate STOP When set, causes the generation of the STOP condition. See field decoding in Table 15-3 on page 391. 2 STOP WO 0 390 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Generate START When set, causes the generation of a START or repeated START condition. See field decoding in Table 15-3 on page 391. 1 START WO 0 I2C Master Enable When set, allows the master to send or receive data. See field decoding in Table 15-3 on page 391. 0 RUN WO 0 Table 15-3. Write Field Decoding for I2CMCS[3:0] Field (Sheet 1 of 3) Current I2CMSA[0] I2CMCS[3:0] Description State R/S ACK STOP START RUN START condition followed by SEND (master goes to the Master Transmit state). Idle 0 Xa 0 1 1 START condition followed by a SEND and STOP condition (master remains in Idle state). 0 X 1 1 1 START condition followed by RECEIVE operation with negative ACK (master goes to the Master Receive state). 1 0 0 1 1 START condition followed by RECEIVE and STOP condition (master remains in Idle state). 1 0 1 1 1 START condition followed by RECEIVE (master goes to the Master Receive state). 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Illegal. All other combinations not listed are non-operations. NOP. SEND operation (master remains in Master Transmit state). Master X X 0 0 1 Transmit X X 1 0 0 STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). SEND followed by STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). X X 1 0 1 Repeated START condition followed by a SEND (master remains in Master Transmit state). 0 X 0 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by SEND and STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). 0 X 1 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by a RECEIVE operation with a negative ACK (master goes to Master Receive state). 1 0 0 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by a SEND and STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). 1 0 1 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by RECEIVE (master goes to Master Receive state). 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Illegal. All other combinations not listed are non-operations. NOP. November 30, 2007 391 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Current I2CMSA[0] I2CMCS[3:0] Description State R/S ACK STOP START RUN RECEIVE operation with negative ACK (master remains in Master Receive state). Master X 0 0 0 1 Receive X X 1 0 0 STOP condition (master goes to Idle state).b RECEIVE followed by STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). X 0 1 0 1 RECEIVE operation (master remains in Master Receive state). X 1 0 0 1 X 1 1 0 1 Illegal. Repeated START condition followed by RECEIVE operation with a negative ACK (master remains in Master Receive state). 1 0 0 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by RECEIVE and STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). 1 0 1 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by RECEIVE (master remains in Master Receive state). 1 1 0 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by SEND (master goes to Master Transmit state). 0 X 0 1 1 Repeated START condition followed by SEND and STOP condition (master goes to Idle state). 0 X 1 1 1 All other combinations not listed are non-operations. NOP. a. An X in a table cell indicates the bit can be 0 or 1. b. In Master Receive mode, a STOP condition should be generated only after a Data Negative Acknowledge executed by the master or an Address Negative Acknowledge executed by the slave. 392 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 3: I2C Master Data (I2CMDR), offset 0x008 This register contains the data to be transmitted when in the Master Transmit state, and the data received when in the Master Receive state. I2C Master Data (I2CMDR) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Data Transferred Data transferred during transaction. 7:0 DATA R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 393 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR), offset 0x00C This register specifies the period of the SCL clock. I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TPR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 SCL Clock Period This field specifies the period of the SCL clock. SCL_PRD = 2*(1 + TPR)*(SCL_LP + SCL_HP)*CLK_PRD where: SCL_PRD is the SCL line period (I2C clock). TPR is the Timer Period register value (range of 1 to 255). SCL_LP is the SCL Low period (fixed at 6). SCL_HP is the SCL High period (fixed at 4). 7:0 TPR R/W 0x1 394 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 5: I2C Master Interrupt Mask (I2CMIMR), offset 0x010 This register controls whether a raw interrupt is promoted to a controller interrupt. I2C Master Interrupt Mask (I2CMIMR) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IM Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Interrupt Mask This bit controls whether a raw interrupt is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the interrupt is not masked and the interrupt is promoted; otherwise, the interrupt is masked. 0 IM R/W 0 November 30, 2007 395 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status (I2CMRIS), offset 0x014 This register specifies whether an interrupt is pending. I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status (I2CMRIS) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x014 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Raw Interrupt Status This bit specifies the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of the I2C master block. If set, an interrupt is pending; otherwise, an interrupt is not pending. 0 RIS RO 0 396 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 7: I2C Master Masked Interrupt Status (I2CMMIS), offset 0x018 This register specifies whether an interrupt was signaled. I2C Master Masked Interrupt Status (I2CMMIS) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Masked Interrupt Status This bit specifies the raw interrupt state (after masking) of the I2C master block. If set, an interrupt was signaled; otherwise, an interrupt has not been generated since the bit was last cleared. 0 MIS RO 0 November 30, 2007 397 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: I2C Master Interrupt Clear (I2CMICR), offset 0x01C This register clears the raw interrupt. I2C Master Interrupt Clear (I2CMICR) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x01C Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Interrupt Clear This bit controls the clearing of the raw interrupt. A write of 1 clears the interrupt; otherwise, a write of 0 has no affect on the interrupt state. A read of this register returns no meaningful data. 0 IC WO 0 398 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 9: I2C Master Configuration (I2CMCR), offset 0x020 This register configures the mode (Master or Slave) and sets the interface for test mode loopback. I2C Master Configuration (I2CMCR) I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved SFE MFE reserved LPBK Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 I2C Slave Function Enable This bit specifies whether the interface may operate in Slave mode. If set, Slave mode is enabled; otherwise, Slave mode is disabled. 5 SFE R/W 0 I2C Master Function Enable This bit specifies whether the interface may operate in Master mode. If set, Master mode is enabled; otherwise, Master mode is disabled and the interface clock is disabled. 4 MFE R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:1 reserved RO 0x00 I2C Loopback This bit specifies whether the interface is operating normally or in Loopback mode. If set, the device is put in a test mode loopback configuration; otherwise, the device operates normally. 0 LPBK R/W 0 November 30, 2007 399 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 15.6 Register Descriptions (I2C Slave) The remainder of this section lists and describes the I2C slave registers, in numerical order by address offset. See also “Register Descriptions (I2C Master)” on page 387. 400 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 10: I2C Slave Own Address (I2CSOAR), offset 0x000 This register consists of seven address bits that identify the Stellaris® I2C device on the I2C bus. I2C Slave Own Address (I2CSOAR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OAR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0x00 I2C Slave Own Address This field specifies bits A6 through A0 of the slave address. 6:0 OAR R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 401 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR), offset 0x004 This register accesses one control bit when written, and three status bits when read. The read-only Status register consists of three bits: the FBR, RREQ, and TREQ bits. The First Byte Received (FBR) bit is set only after the Stellaris® device detects its own slave address and receives the first data byte from the I2C master. The Receive Request (RREQ) bit indicates that the Stellaris® I2C device has received a data byte from an I2C master. Read one data byte from the I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR) register to clear the RREQ bit. The Transmit Request (TREQ) bit indicates that the Stellaris® I2C device is addressed as a Slave Transmitter. Write one data byte into the I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR) register to clear the TREQ bit. The write-only Control register consists of one bit: the DA bit. The DA bit enables and disables the Stellaris® I2C slave operation. Read-Only Status Register I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved FBR TREQ RREQ Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 First Byte Received Indicates that the first byte following the slave’s own address is received. This bit is only valid when the RREQ bit is set, and is automatically cleared when data has been read from the I2CSDR register. Note: This bit is not used for slave transmit operations. 2 FBR RO 0 Transmit Request This bit specifies the state of the I2C slave with regards to outstanding transmit requests. If set, the I2C unit has been addressed as a slave transmitter and uses clock stretching to delay the master until data has been written to the I2CSDR register. Otherwise, there is no outstanding transmit request. 1 TREQ RO 0 Receive Request This bit specifies the status of the I2C slave with regards to outstanding receive requests. If set, the I2C unit has outstanding receive data from the I2C master and uses clock stretching to delay the master until the data has been read from the I2CSDR register. Otherwise, no receive data is outstanding. 0 RREQ RO 0 402 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Write-Only Control Register I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x004 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Device Active Value Description 0 Disables the I2C slave operation. 1 Enables the I2C slave operation. 0 DA WO 0 November 30, 2007 403 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR), offset 0x008 This register contains the data to be transmitted when in the Slave Transmit state, and the data received when in the Slave Receive state. I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x00 Data for Transfer This field contains the data for transfer during a slave receive or transmit operation. 7:0 DATA R/W 0x0 404 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 13: I2C Slave Interrupt Mask (I2CSIMR), offset 0x00C This register controls whether a raw interrupt is promoted to a controller interrupt. I2C Slave Interrupt Mask (I2CSIMR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IM Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Interrupt Mask This bit controls whether a raw interrupt is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, the interrupt is not masked and the interrupt is promoted; otherwise, the interrupt is masked. 0 IM R/W 0 November 30, 2007 405 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status (I2CSRIS), offset 0x010 This register specifies whether an interrupt is pending. I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status (I2CSRIS) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x010 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Raw Interrupt Status This bit specifies the raw interrupt state (prior to masking) of the I2C slave block. If set, an interrupt is pending; otherwise, an interrupt is not pending. 0 RIS RO 0 406 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register 15: I2C Slave Masked Interrupt Status (I2CSMIS), offset 0x014 This register specifies whether an interrupt was signaled. I2C Slave Masked Interrupt Status (I2CSMIS) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x014 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved MIS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Masked Interrupt Status This bit specifies the raw interrupt state (after masking) of the I2C slave block. If set, an interrupt was signaled; otherwise, an interrupt has not been generated since the bit was last cleared. 0 MIS RO 0 November 30, 2007 407 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 16: I2C Slave Interrupt Clear (I2CSICR), offset 0x018 This register clears the raw interrupt. I2C Slave Interrupt Clear (I2CSICR) I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 Offset 0x018 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IC Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Clear Interrupt This bit controls the clearing of the raw interrupt. A write of 1 clears the interrupt; otherwise a write of 0 has no affect on the interrupt state. A read of this register returns no meaningful data. 0 IC WO 0 408 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface 16 Ethernet Controller The Stellaris® Ethernet Controller consists of a fully integrated media access controller (MAC) and network physical (PHY) interface device. The Ethernet Controller conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications and fully supports 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX standards. The Ethernet Controller module has the following features: ■ Conforms to the IEEE 802.3-2002 specification – 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX IEEE-802.3 compliant. Requires only a dual 1:1 isolation transformer interface to the line – 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ENDEC, 100BASE-TX scrambler/descrambler – Full-featured auto-negotiation ■ Multiple operational modes – Full- and half-duplex 100 Mbps – Full- and half-duplex 10 Mbps – Power-saving and power-down modes ■ Highly configurable – Programmable MAC address – LED activity selection – Promiscuous mode support – CRC error-rejection control – User-configurable interrupts ■ Physical media manipulation – Automatic MDI/MDI-X cross-over correction – Register-programmable transmit amplitude – Automatic polarity correction and 10BASE-T signal reception November 30, 2007 409 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 16.1 Block Diagram Figure 16-1. Ethernet Controller Block Diagram MACISR MACIACK MACIMR Interrupt Control MACRCR MACNPR Receive Control MACTCR MACITHR MACTRR Transmit Control Transmit FIFO Receive FIFO MACIAR0 MACIAR1 Individual Address MACMDTX MACMCR MACMDVR MACMAR MACMDRX MII Control MACDR Data Access TXOP TXON RXIP RXIN XTLP XTLN MDIX Clock Reference Transmit Encoding Pulse Shaping Receive Decoding Clock Recovery Auto Negotiation Carrier Sense MR3 MR0 MR1 MR2 MR4 Media Independent Interface Management Register Set MR5 MR18 MR6 MR16 MR17 MR19 MR23 MR24 Collision Detect System Clock Interrupt 16.2 Functional Description As shown in Figure 16-2 on page 410, the Ethernet Controller is functionally divided into two layers or modules: the Media Access Controller (MAC) layer and the Network Physical (PHY) layer. These correspond to the OSI model layers 2 and 1. The primary interface to the Ethernet Controller is a simple bus interface to the MAC layer. The MAC layer provides transmit and receive processing for Ethernet frames. The MAC layer also provides the interface to the PHY module via an internal Media Independent Interface (MII). Figure 16-2. Ethernet Controller Cortex M3 Media Access Controller MAC (Layer 2) Physical Layer Entity PHY (Layer 1) Magnetics RJ45 Ethernet Controller 16.2.1 Internal MII Operation For the MII management interface to function properly, the MDIO signal must be connected through a 10k Ω pull-up resistor to the +3.3 V supply. Failure to connect this pull-up resistor will prevent management transactions on this internal MII to function. Note that it is possible for data transmission across the MII to still function since the PHY layer will auto-negotiate the link parameters by default. 410 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller For the MII management interface to function properly, the internal clock must be divided down from the system clock to a frequency no greater than 2.5 MHz. The MACMDV register contains the divider used for scaling down the system clock. See page 430 for more details about the use of this register. 16.2.2 PHY Configuration/Operation The Physical Layer (PHY) in the Ethernet Controller includes integrated ENDECs, scrambler/descrambler, dual-speed clock recovery, and full-featured auto-negotiation functions. The transmitter includes an on-chip pulse shaper and a low-power line driver. The receiver has an adaptive equalizer and a baseline restoration circuit required for accurate clock and data recovery. The transceiver interfaces to Category-5 unshielded twisted pair (Cat-5 UTP) cabling for 100BASE-TX applications, and Category-3 unshielded twisted pair (Cat-3 UTP) for 10BASE-T applications. The Ethernet Controller is connected to the line media via dual 1:1 isolation transformers. No external filter is required. 16.2.2.1 Clock Selection The PHY has an on-chip crystal oscillator which can also be driven by an external oscillator. In this mode of operation, a 25-MHz crystal should be connected between the XTALPPHY and XTALNPHY pins. Alternatively, an external 25-MHz clock input can be connected to the XTALPPHY pin. In this mode of operation, a crystal is not required and the XTALNPHY pin must be tied to ground. 16.2.2.2 Auto-Negotiation The PHY supports the auto-negotiation functions of Clause 28 of the IEEE 802.3 standard for 10/100 Mbps operation over copper wiring. This function can be enabled via register settings. The auto-negotiation function defaults to On and the ANEGEN bit in the MR0 register is High after reset. Software can disable the auto-negotiation function by writing to the ANEGEN bit. The contents of the MR4 register are sent to the PHY’s link partner during auto-negotiation via fast-link pulse coding. Once auto-negotiation is complete, the DPLX and RATE bits in the MR18 register reflect the actual speed and duplex that was chosen. If auto-negotiation fails to establish a link for any reason, the ANEGF bit in the MR18 register reflects this and auto-negotiation restarts from the beginning. Writing a 1 to the RANEG bit in the MR0 register also causes auto-negotiation to restart. 16.2.2.3 Polarity Correction The PHY is capable of either automatic or manual polarity reversal for 10BASE-T and auto-negotiation functions. Bits 4 and 5 (RVSPOL and APOL) in the MR16 register control this feature. The default is automatic mode, where APOL is Low and RVSPOL indicates if the detection circuitry has inverted the input signal. To enter manual mode, APOL should be set High and RVSPOL then controls the signal polarity. 16.2.2.4 MDI/MDI-X Configuration The PHY supports the automatic MDI/MDI-X configuration as defined in IEEE 802.3-2002 specification. This eliminates the need for cross-over cables when connecting to another device, such as a hub. The algorithm is controlled via settings in the MR24 register. Refer to page 452 for additional details about these settings. 16.2.2.5 LED Indicators The PHY supports two LED signals that can be used to indicate various states of operation of the Ethernet Controller. These signals are mapped to the LED0 and LED1 pins. By default, these pins are configured as GPIO signals (PF3 and PF2). For the PHY layer to drive these signals, they must be reconfigured to their hardware function. See “General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs)” on page November 30, 2007 411 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 163 for additional details. The function of these pins is programmable via the PHY layer MR23 register. Refer to page 451 for additonal details on how to program these LED functions. 16.2.3 MAC Configuration/Operation 16.2.3.1 Ethernet Frame Format Ethernet data is carried by Ethernet frames. The basic frame format is shown in Figure 16-3 on page 412. Figure 16-3. Ethernet Frame Preamble SFD Destination Address Source Address Length/ Type Data FCS 7 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 4 Bytes 46 - 1500 Bytes The seven fields of the frame are transmitted from left to right. The bits within the frame are transmitted from least to most significant bit. ■ Preamble The Preamble field is used by the physical layer signaling circuitry to synchronize with the received frame’s timing. The preamble is 7 octets long. ■ Start Frame Delimiter (SFD) The SFD field follows the preamble pattern and indicates the start of the frame. Its value is 1010.1011. ■ Destination Address (DA) This field specifies destination addresses for which the frame is intended. The LSB of the DA determines whether the address is an individual (0), or group/multicast (1) address. ■ Source Address (SA) The source address field identifies the station from which the frame was initiated. ■ Length/Type Field The meaning of this field depends on its numeric value. The first of two octets is most significant. This field can be interpreted as length or type code. The maximum length of the data field is 1500 octets. If the value of the Length/Type field is less than or equal to 1500 decimal, it indicates the number of MAC client data octets. If the value of this field is greater than or equal to 1536 decimal, then it is type interpretation. The meaning of the Length/Type field when the value is between 1500 and 1536 decimal is unspecified by the standard. The MAC module assumes type interpretation if the value of the Length/Type field is greater than 1500 decimal. ■ Data The data field is a sequence of 0 to 1500 octets. Full data transparency is provided so any values can appear in this field. A minimum frame size is required to properly meet the IEEE standard. If necessary, the data field is extended by appending extra bits (a pad). The pad field can have a size of 0 to 46 octets. The sum of the data and pad lengths must be a minimum of 46 octets. The MAC module automatically inserts pads if required, though it can be disabled by a register 412 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller write. For the MAC module core, data sent/received can be larger than 1500 bytes, and no Frame Too Long error is reported. Instead, a FIFO Overrun error is reported when the frame received is too large to fit into the Ethernet Controller’s RAM. ■ Frame Check Sequence (FCS) The frame check sequence carries the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value. The value of this field is computed over destination address, source address, length/type, data, and pad fields using the CRC-32 algorithm. The MAC module computes the FCS value one nibble at a time. For transmitted frames, this field is automatically inserted by the MAC layer, unless disabled by the CRC bit in the MACTCTL register. For received frames, this field is automatically checked. If the FCS does not pass, the frame will not be placed in the RX FIFO, unless the FCS check is disabled by the BADCRC bit in the MACRCTL register. 16.2.3.2 MAC Layer FIFOs For Ethernet frame transmission, a 2 KB TX FIFO is provided that can be used to store a single frame. While the IEEE 802.3 specification limits the size of an Ethernet frame's payload section to 1500 Bytes, the Ethernet Controller places no such limit. The full buffer can be used, for a payload of up to 2032 bytes. For Ethernet frame reception, a 2-KB RX FIFO is provided that can be used to store multiple frames, up to a maximum of 31 frames. If a frame is received and there is insufficient space in the RX FIFO, an overflow error will be indicated. For details regarding the TX and RX FIFO layout, refer to Table 16-1 on page 413. Please note the following difference between TX and RX FIFO layout. For the TX FIFO, the Data Length field in the first FIFO word refers to the Ethernet frame data payload, as shown in the 5th to nth FIFO positions. For the RX FIFO, the Frame Length field is the total length of the received Ethernet frame, including the FCS and Frame Length bytes. Also note that if FCS generation is disabled with the CRC bit in the MACTCTL register, the last word in the FIFO must be the FCS bytes for the frame that has been written to the FIFO. Also note that if the length of the data payload section is not a multiple of 4, the FCS field will overlap words in the FIFO. However, for the RX FIFO, the beginning of the next frame will always be on a word boundary. Table 16-1. TX & RX FIFO Organization FIFO Word Read/Write Word Bit Fields TX FIFO (Write) RX FIFO (Read) Sequence 1st 7:0 Data Length LSB Frame Length LSB 15:8 Data Length MSB Frame Length MSB 23:16 DA oct 1 31:24 DA oct 2 2nd 7:0 DA oct 3 15:8 DA oct 4 23:16 DA oct 5 31:24 DA oct 6 3rd 7:0 SA oct 1 15:8 SA oct 2 23:16 SA oct 3 31:24 SA oct 4 November 30, 2007 413 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller FIFO Word Read/Write Word Bit Fields TX FIFO (Write) RX FIFO (Read) Sequence 4th 7:0 SA oct 5 15:8 SA oct 6 23:16 Len/Type MSB 31:24 Len/Type LSB 5th to nth 7:0 data oct n 15:8 data oct n+1 23:16 data oct n+2 31:24 data oct n+3 FCS 1 (if the CRC bit in FCS 1 MACCTL is 0) last 7:0 FCS 2 (if the CRC bit in FCS 2 MACCTL is 0) 15:8 FCS 3 (if the CRC bit in FCS 3 MACCTL is 0) 23:16 FCS 4 (if the CRC bit in FCS 4 MACCTL is 0) 31:24 16.2.3.3 Ethernet Transmission Options The Ethernet Controller can automatically generate and insert the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) at the end of the transmit frame. This is controlled by the CRC bit in the MACTCTL register. For test purposes, in order to generate a frame with an invalid CRC, this feature can be disabled. The IEEE 802.3 specification requires that the Ethernet frame payload section be a minimum of 46 bytes. The Ethernet Controller can be configured to automatically pad the data section if the payload data section loaded into the FIFO is less than the minimum 46 bytes. This feature is controlled by the PADEN bit in the MACTCTL register. At the MAC layer, the transmitter can be configured for both full-duplex and half-duplex operation by using the DUPLEX bit in the MACTCTL register. 16.2.3.4 Ethernet Reception Options Using the BADCRC bit in the MACRCTL register, the Ethernet Controller can be configured to reject incoming Ethernet frames with an invalid FCS field. The Ethernet receiver can also be configured for Promiscuous and Multicast modes using the PRMS and AMUL fields in the MACRCTL register. If these modes are not enabled, only Ethernet frames with a broadcast address, or frames matching the MAC address programmed into the MACIA0 and MACIA1 register will be placed into the RX FIFO. 16.2.4 Interrupts The Ethernet Controller can generate an interrupt for one or more of the following conditions: ■ A frame has been received into an empty RX FIFO ■ A frame transmission error has occurred ■ A frame has been transmitted successfully ■ A frame has been received with no room in the RX FIFO (overrun) 414 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller ■ A frame has been received with one or more error conditions (for example, FCS failed) ■ An MII management transaction between the MAC and PHY layers has completed ■ One or more of the following PHY layer conditions occurs: – Auto-Negotiate Complete – Remote Fault – Link Status Change – Link Partner Acknowledge – Parallel Detect Fault – Page Received – Receive Error – Jabber Event Detected 16.3 Initialization and Configuration To use the Ethernet Controller, the peripheral must be enabled by setting the EPHY0 and EMAC0 bits in the RCGC2 register. The following steps can then be used to configure the Ethernet Controller for basic operation. 1. Program the MACDIV register to obtain a 2.5 MHz clock (or less) on the internal MII. Assuming a 20-MHz system clock, the MACDIV value would be 4. 2. Program the MACIA0 and MACIA1 register for address filtering. 3. Program the MACTCTL register for Auto CRC generation, padding, and full-duplex operation using a value of 0x16. 4. Program the MACRCTL register to reject frames with bad FCS using a value of 0x08. 5. Enable both the Transmitter and Receive by setting the LSB in both the MACTCTL and MACRCTL registers. 6. To transmit a frame, write the frame into the TX FIFO using the MACDATA register. Then set the NEWTX bit in the MACTR register to initiate the transmit process. When the NEWTX bit has been cleared, the TX FIFO will be available for the next transmit frame. 7. To receive a frame, wait for the NPR field in the MACNP register to be non-zero. Then begin reading the frame from the RX FIFO by using the MACDATA register. When the frame (including the FCS field) has been read, the NPR field should decrement by one. When there are no more frames in the RX FIFO, the NPR field will read 0. 16.4 Ethernet Register Map Table 16-2 on page 416 lists the Ethernet MAC registers. All addresses given are relative to the Ethernet MAC base address of 0x4004.8000. November 30, 2007 415 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller The IEEE 802.3 standard specifies a register set for controlling and gathering status from the PHY. The registers are collectively known as the MII Management registers and are detailed in Section 22.2.4 of the IEEE 802.3 specification. Table 16-2 on page 416 also lists these MII Management registers. All addresses given are absolute and are written directly to the REGADR field of the MACMCTL register. The format of registers 0 to 15 are defined by the IEEE specification and are common to all PHY implementations. The only variance allowed is for features that may or may not be supported by a specific PHY. Registers 16 to 31 are vendor-specific registers, used to support features that are specific to a vendors PHY implementation. Vendor-specific registers not listed are reserved. Table 16-2. Ethernet Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page Ethernet MAC 0x000 MACRIS RO 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status 418 0x000 MACIACK W1C 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Interrupt Acknowledge 420 0x004 MACIM R/W 0x0000.007F Ethernet MAC Interrupt Mask 421 0x008 MACRCTL R/W 0x0000.0008 Ethernet MAC Receive Control 422 0x00C MACTCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Transmit Control 423 0x010 MACDATA R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Data 424 0x014 MACIA0 R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Individual Address 0 426 0x018 MACIA1 R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Individual Address 1 427 0x01C MACTHR R/W 0x0000.003F Ethernet MAC Threshold 428 0x020 MACMCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Management Control 429 0x024 MACMDV R/W 0x0000.0080 Ethernet MAC Management Divider 430 0x02C MACMTXD R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Management Transmit Data 431 0x030 MACMRXD R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Management Receive Data 432 0x034 MACNP RO 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Number of Packets 433 0x038 MACTR R/W 0x0000.0000 Ethernet MAC Transmission Request 434 MII Management - MR0 R/W 0x3100 Ethernet PHY Management Register 0 – Control 435 - MR1 RO 0x7849 Ethernet PHY Management Register 1 – Status 437 Ethernet PHY Management Register 2 – PHY Identifier 439 - MR2 RO 0x000E 1 Ethernet PHY Management Register 3 – PHY Identifier 440 - MR3 RO 0x7237 2 Ethernet PHYManagement Register 4 – Auto-Negotiation 441 - MR4 R/W 0x01E1 Advertisement Ethernet PHYManagement Register 5 – Auto-Negotiation 443 - MR5 RO 0x0000 Link Partner Base Page Ability 416 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller See Offset Name Type Reset Description page Ethernet PHYManagement Register 6 – Auto-Negotiation 444 - MR6 RO 0x0000 Expansion Ethernet PHY Management Register 16 – 445 - MR16 R/W 0x0140 Vendor-Specific Ethernet PHY Management Register 17 – Interrupt 447 - MR17 R/W 0x0000 Control/Status - MR18 RO 0x0000 Ethernet PHY Management Register 18 – Diagnostic 449 Ethernet PHY Management Register 19 – Transceiver 450 - MR19 R/W 0x4000 Control Ethernet PHY Management Register 23 – LED 451 - MR23 R/W 0x0010 Configuration Ethernet PHY Management Register 24 –MDI/MDIX 452 - MR24 R/W 0x00C0 Control 16.5 Ethernet MAC Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the Ethernet MAC registers, in numerical order by address offset. Also see “MII Management Register Descriptions” on page 434. November 30, 2007 417 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status (MACRIS), offset 0x000 The MACRIS register is the interrupt status register. On a read, this register gives the current status value of the corresponding interrupt prior to masking. Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status (MACRIS) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x000 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PHYINT MDINT RXER FOV TXEMP TXER RXINT Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0x0 PHY Interrupt When set, indicates that an enabled interrupt in the PHY layer has occured. MR17 in the PHY must be read to determine the specific PHY event that triggered this interrupt. 6 PHYINT RO 0x0 MII Transaction Complete When set, indicates that a transaction (read or write) on the MII interface has completed successfully. 5 MDINT RO 0x0 Receive Error This bit indicates that an error was encountered on the receiver. The possible errors that can cause this interrupt bit to be set are: ■ A receive error occurs during the reception of a frame (100 Mb/s only). ■ The frame is not an integer number of bytes (dribble bits) due to an alignment error. ■ The CRC of the frame does not pass the FCS check. ■ The length/type field is inconsistent with the frame data size when interpreted as a length field. 4 RXER RO 0x0 FIFO Overrrun When set, indicates that an overrun was encountered on the receive FIFO. 3 FOV RO 0x0 Transmit FIFO Empty When set, indicates that the packet was transmitted and that the TX FIFO is empty. 2 TXEMP RO 0x0 418 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Transmit Error When set, indicates that an error was encountered on the transmitter. The possible errors that can cause this interrupt bit to be set are: ■ The data length field stored in the TX FIFO exceeds 2032. The frame is not sent when this error occurs. ■ The retransmission attempts during the backoff process have exceeded the maximum limit of 16. 1 TXER RO 0x0 Packet Received When set, indicates that at least one packet has been received and is stored in the receiver FIFO. 0 RXINT RO 0x0 November 30, 2007 419 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Acknowledge (MACIACK), offset 0x000 A write of a 1 to any bit position of this register clears the corresponding interrupt bit in the Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status (MACRIS) register. Ethernet MAC Interrupt Acknowledge (MACIACK) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x000 Type W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PHYINT MDINT RXER FOV TXEMP TXER RXINT Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0x0 Clear PHY Interrupt A write of a 1 clears the PHYINT interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 6 PHYINT W1C 0x0 Clear MII Transaction Complete A write of a 1 clears the MDINT interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 5 MDINT W1C 0x0 Clear Receive Error A write of a 1 clears the RXER interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 4 RXER W1C 0x0 Clear FIFO Overrun A write of a 1 clears the FOV interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 3 FOV W1C 0x0 Clear Transmit FIFO Empty A write of a 1 clears the TXEMP interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 2 TXEMP W1C 0x0 Clear Transmit Error A write of a 1 clears the TXER interrupt read from the MACRIS register and resets the TX FIFO write pointer. 1 TXER W1C 0x0 Clear Packet Received A write of a 1 clears the RXINT interrupt read from the MACRIS register. 0 RXINT W1C 0x0 420 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 3: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Mask (MACIM), offset 0x004 This register allows software to enable/disable Ethernet MAC interrupts. Writing a 0 disables the interrupt, while writing a 1 enables it. Ethernet MAC Interrupt Mask (MACIM) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.007F 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PHYINTM MDINTM RXERM FOVM TXEMPM TXERM RXINTM Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0x0 Mask PHY Interrupt This bit masks the PHYINT bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 6 PHYINTM R/W 1 Mask MII Transaction Complete This bit masks the MDINT bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 5 MDINTM R/W 1 Mask Receive Error This bit masks the RXER bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 4 RXERM R/W 1 Mask FIFO Overrrun This bit masks the FOV bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 3 FOVM R/W 1 Mask Transmit FIFO Empty This bit masks the TXEMP bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 2 TXEMPM R/W 1 Mask Transmit Error This bit masks the TXER bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 1 TXERM R/W 1 Mask Packet Received This bit masks the RXINT bit in the MACRIS register from being asserted. 0 RXINTM R/W 1 November 30, 2007 421 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: Ethernet MAC Receive Control (MACRCTL), offset 0x008 This register enables software to configure the receive module and control the types of frames that are received from the physical medium. It is important to note that when the receive module is enabled, all valid frames with a broadcast address of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF in the Destination Address field will be received and stored in the RX FIFO, even if the AMUL bit is not set. Ethernet MAC Receive Control (MACRCTL) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0008 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RSTFIFO BADCRC PRMS AMUL RXEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:5 reserved RO 0x0 Clear Receive FIFO When set, clears the receive FIFO. This should be done when software initialization is performed. It is recommended that the receiver be disabled (RXEN = 0), and then the reset initiated (RSTFIFO = 1). This sequence will flush and reset the RX FIFO. 4 RSTFIFO R/W 0x0 Enable Reject Bad CRC The BADCRC bit enables the rejection of frames with an incorrectly calculated CRC. 3 BADCRC R/W 0x1 Enable Promiscuous Mode The PRMS bit enables Promiscuous mode, which accepts all valid frames, regardless of the Destination Address. 2 PRMS R/W 0x0 Enable Multicast Frames The AMUL bit enables the reception of multicast frames from the physical medium. 1 AMUL R/W 0x0 Enable Receiver The RXEN bit enables the Ethernet receiver. When this bit is Low, the receiver is disabled and all frames on the physical medium are ignored. 0 RXEN R/W 0x0 422 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 5: Ethernet MAC Transmit Control (MACTCTL), offset 0x00C This register enables software to configure the transmit module, and control frames are placed onto the physical medium. Ethernet MAC Transmit Control (MACTCTL) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DUPLEX reserved CRC PADEN TXEN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:5 reserved RO 0x0 Enable Duplex Mode When set, enables Duplex mode, allowing simultaneous transmission and reception. 4 DUPLEX R/W 0x0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3 reserved RO 0x0 Enable CRC Generation When set, enables the automatic generation of the CRC and the placement at the end of the packet. If this bit is not set, the frames placed in the TX FIFO will be sent exactly as they are written into the FIFO. 2 CRC R/W 0x0 Enable Packet Padding When set, enables the automatic padding of packets that do not meet the minimum frame size. 1 PADEN R/W 0x0 Enable Transmitter When set, enables the transmitter. When this bit is 0, the transmitter is disabled. 0 TXEN R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 423 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: Ethernet MAC Data (MACDATA), offset 0x010 This register enables software to access the TX and RX FIFOs. Reads from this register return the data stored in the RX FIFO from the location indicated by the read pointer. Writes to this register store the data in the TX FIFO at the location indicated by the write pointer. The write pointer is then auto-incremented to the next TX FIFO location. There is no mechanism for randomly accessing bytes in either the RX or TX FIFOs. Data must be read from the RX FIFO sequentially and stored in a buffer for further processing. Once a read has been performed, the data in the FIFO cannot be re-read. Data must be written to the TX FIFO sequentially. If an error is made in placing the frame into the TX FIFO, the write pointer can be reset to the start of the TX FIFO by writing the TXER bit of the MACIACK register and then the data re-written. Read-Only Register Ethernet MAC Data (MACDATA) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x010 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RXDATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXDATA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Receive FIFO Data The RXDATA bits represent the next four bytes of data stored in the RX FIFO. 31:0 RXDATA RO 0x0 Write-Only Register Ethernet MAC Data (MACDATA) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x010 Type WO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TXDATA Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TXDATA Type WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 424 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Transmit FIFO Data The TXDATA bits represent the next four bytes of data to place in the TX FIFO for transmission. 31:0 TXDATA WO 0x0 November 30, 2007 425 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 7: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 0 (MACIA0), offset 0x014 This register enables software to program the first four bytes of the hardware MAC address of the Network Interface Card (NIC). (The last two bytes are in MACIA1). The 6-byte IAR is compared against the incoming Destination Address fields to determine whether the frame should be received. Ethernet MAC Individual Address 0 (MACIA0) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 MACOCT4 MACOCT3 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MACOCT2 MACOCT1 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description MAC Address Octet 4 The MACOCT4 bits represent the fourth octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 31:24 MACOCT4 R/W 0x0 MAC Address Octet 3 The MACOCT3 bits represent the third octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 23:16 MACOCT3 R/W 0x0 MAC Address Octet 2 The MACOCT2 bits represent the second octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 15:8 MACOCT2 R/W 0x0 MAC Address Octet 1 The MACOCT1 bits represent the first octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 7:0 MACOCT1 R/W 0x0 426 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 8: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 1 (MACIA1), offset 0x018 This register enables software to program the last two bytes of the hardware MAC address of the Network Interface Card (NIC). (The first four bytes are in MACIA0). The 6-byte IAR is compared against the incoming Destination Address fields to determine whether the frame should be received. Ethernet MAC Individual Address 1 (MACIA1) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x018 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MACOCT6 MACOCT5 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0 MAC Address Octet 6 The MACOCT6 bits represent the sixth octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 15:8 MACOCT6 R/W 0x0 MAC Address Octet 5 The MACOCT5 bits represent the fifth octet of the MAC address used to uniquely identify each Ethernet Controller. 7:0 MACOCT5 R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 427 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 9: Ethernet MAC Threshold (MACTHR), offset 0x01C This register enables software to set the threshold level at which the transmission of the frame begins. If the THRESH bits are set to 0x3F, which is the reset value, transmission does not start until the NEWTX bit is set in the MACTR register. This effectively disables the early transmission feature. Writing the THRESH bits to any value besides all 1s enables the early transmission feature. Once the byte count of data in the TX FIFO reaches this level, transmission of the frame begins. When THRESH is set to all 0s, transmission of the frame begins after 4 bytes (a single write) are stored in the TX FIFO. Each increment of the THRESH bit field waits for an additional 32 bytes of data (eight writes) to be stored in the TX FIFO. Therefore, a value of 0x01 would wait for 36 bytes of data to be written while a value of 0x02 would wait for 68 bytes to be written. In general, early transmission starts when: Number of Bytes >= 4 (THRESH x 8 + 1) Reaching the threshold level has the same effect as setting the NEWTX bit in the MACTR register. Transmission of the frame begins and then the number of bytes indicated by the Data Length field is sent out on the physical medium. Because under-run checking is not performed, it is possible that the tail pointer may reach and pass the write pointer in the TX FIFO. This causes indeterminate values to be written to the physical medium rather than the end of the frame. Therefore, sufficient bus bandwidth for writing to the TX FIFO must be guaranteed by the software. If a frame smaller than the threshold level needs to be sent, the NEWTX bit in the MACTR register must be set with an explicit write. This initiates the transmission of the frame even though the threshold limit has not been reached. If the threshold level is set too small, it is possible for the transmitter to underrun. If this occurs, the transmit frame is aborted, and a transmit error occurs. Ethernet MAC Threshold (MACTHR) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x01C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.003F 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved THRESH Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x0 Threshold Value The THRESH bits represent the early transmit threshold. Once the amount of data in the TX FIFO exceeds this value, transmission of the packet begins. 5:0 THRESH R/W 0x3F 428 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 10: Ethernet MAC Management Control (MACMCTL), offset 0x020 This register enables software to control the transfer of data to and from the MII Management registers in the Ethernet PHY. The address, name, type, reset configuration, and functional description of each of these registers can be found in Table 16-2 on page 416 and in “MII Management Register Descriptions” on page 434. In order to initiate a read transaction from the MII Management registers, the WRITE bit must be written with a 0 during the same cycle that the START bit is written with a 1. In order to initiate a write transaction to the MII Management registers, the WRITE bit must be written with a 1 during the same cycle that the START bit is written with a 1. Ethernet MAC Management Control (MACMCTL) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved REGADR reserved WRITE START Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x0 MII Register Address The REGADR bit field represents the MII Management register address for the next MII management interface transaction. 7:3 REGADR R/W 0x0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2 reserved RO 0x0 MII Register Transaction Type The WRITE bit represents the operation of the next MII management interface transaction. If WRITE is set, the next operation will be a write; otherwise, it will be a read. 1 WRITE R/W 0x0 MII Register Transaction Enable The START bit represents the initiation of the next MII management interface transaction. When a 1 is written to this bit, the MII register located at REGADR will be read (WRITE=0) or written (WRITE=1). 0 START R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 429 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 11: Ethernet MAC Management Divider (MACMDV), offset 0x024 This register enables software to set the clock divider for the Management Data Clock (MDC). This clock is used to synchronize read and write transactions between the system and the MII Management registers. The frequency of the MDC clock can be calculated from the following formula: Fmdc = Fipclk / (2 * (MACMDVR + 1 )) The clock divider must be written with a value that ensures that the MDC clock will not exceed a frequency of 2.5 MHz. Ethernet MAC Management Divider (MACMDV) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x024 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0080 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved DIV Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:8 reserved RO 0x0 Clock Divider The DIV bits are used to set the clock divider for the MDC clock used to transmit data between the MAC and PHY over the serial MII interface. 7:0 DIV R/W 0x80 430 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 12: Ethernet MAC Management Transmit Data (MACMTXD), offset 0x02C This register holds the next value to be written to the MII Management registers. Ethernet MAC Management Transmit Data (MACMTXD) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x02C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MDTX Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0 MII Register Transmit Data The MDTX bits represent the data that will be written in the next MII management transaction. 15:0 MDTX R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 431 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 13: Ethernet MAC Management Receive Data (MACMRXD), offset 0x030 This register holds the last value read from the MII Management registers. Ethernet MAC Management Receive Data (MACMRXD) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MDRX Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x0 MII Register Receive Data The MDRX bits represent the data that was read in the previous MII management transaction. 15:0 MDRX R/W 0x0 432 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 14: Ethernet MAC Number of Packets (MACNP), offset 0x034 This register holds the number of frames that are currently in the RX FIFO. When NPR is 0, there are no frames in the RX FIFO and the RXINT bit is not set. When NPR is any other value, there is at least one frame in the RX FIFO and the RXINT bit in the MACRIS register is set. Ethernet MAC Number of Packets (MACNP) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x034 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved NPR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x0 Number of Packets in Receive FIFO The NPR bits represent the number of packets stored in the RX FIFO. While the NPR field is greater than 0, the RXINT interrupt in the MACRIS register will be asserted. 5:0 NPR RO 0x0 November 30, 2007 433 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 15: Ethernet MAC Transmission Request (MACTR), offset 0x038 This register enables software to initiate the transmission of the frame currently located in the TX FIFO to the physical medium. Once the frame has been transmitted to the medium from the TX FIFO or a transmission error has been encountered, the NEWTX bit is auto-cleared by the hardware. Ethernet MAC Transmission Request (MACTR) Base 0x4004.8000 Offset 0x038 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved NEWTX Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x0 New Transmission When set, the NEWTX bit initiates an Ethernet transmission once the packet has been placed in the TX FIFO. This bit is cleared once the transmission has been completed. If early transmission is being used (see the MACTHR register), this bit does not need to be set. 0 NEWTX R/W 0x0 16.6 MII Management Register Descriptions The IEEE 802.3 standard specifies a register set for controlling and gathering status from the PHY. The registers are collectively known as the MII Management registers. All addresses given are absolute. Addresses not listed are reserved. Also see “Ethernet MAC Register Descriptions” on page 417. 434 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 16: Ethernet PHY Management Register 0 – Control (MR0), address 0x00 This register enables software to configure the operation of the PHY. The default settings of these registers are designed to initialize the PHY to a normal operational mode without configuration. Ethernet PHY Management Register 0 – Control (MR0) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x00 Type R/W, reset 0x3100 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RESET LOOPBK SPEEDSL ANEGEN PWRDN ISO RANEG DUPLEX COLT reserved Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Reset Registers When set, resets the registers to their default state and reinitializes internal state machines. Once the reset operation has completed, this bit is cleared by hardware. 15 RESET R/W 0 Loopback Mode When set, enables the Loopback mode of operation. The receive circuitry is isolated from the physical medium and transmissions are sent back through the receive circuitry instead of the medium. 14 LOOPBK R/W 0 Speed Select 1: Enables the 100 Mb/s mode of operation (100BASE-TX). 0: Enables the 10 Mb/s mode of operation (10BASE-T). 13 SPEEDSL R/W 1 Auto-Negotiation Enable When set, enables the Auto-Negotiation process. 12 ANEGEN R/W 1 Power Down When set, places the PHY into a low-power consuming state. 11 PWRDN R/W 0 Isolate When set, isolates transmit and receive data paths and ignores all signaling on these buses. 10 ISO R/W 0 Restart Auto-Negotiation When set, restarts the Auto-Negotiation process. Once the restart has initiated, this bit is cleared by hardware. 9 RANEG R/W 0 Set Duplex Mode 1: Enables the Full-Duplex mode of operation. This bit can be set by software in a manual configuration process or by the Auto-Negotiation process. 0: Enables the Half-Duplex mode of operation. 8 DUPLEX R/W 1 November 30, 2007 435 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Collision Test When set, enables the Collision Test mode of operation. The COLT bit asserts after the initiation of a transmission and de-asserts once the transmission is halted. 7 COLT R/W 0 6:0 reserved R/W 0x00 Write as 0, ignore on read. 436 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 17: Ethernet PHY Management Register 1 – Status (MR1), address 0x01 This register enables software to determine the capabilities of the PHY and perform its initialization and operation appropriately. Ethernet PHY Management Register 1 – Status (MR1) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x01 Type RO, reset 0x7849 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved 100X_F 100X_H 10T_F 10T_H reserved MFPS ANEGC RFAULT ANEGA LINK JAB EXTD Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RC RO RO RC RO Reset 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15 reserved RO 0 100BASE-TX Full-Duplex Mode When set, indicates that the PHY is capable of supporting 100BASE-TX Full-Duplex mode. 14 100X_F RO 1 100BASE-TX Half-Duplex Mode When set, indicates that the PHY is capable of supporting 100BASE-TX Half-Duplex mode. 13 100X_H RO 1 10BASE-T Full-Duplex Mode When set, indicates that the PHY is capable of 10BASE-T Full-Duplex mode. 12 10T_F RO 1 10BASE-T Half-Duplex Mode When set, indicates that the PHY is capable of supporting 10BASE-T Half-Duplex mode. 11 10T_H RO 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 10:7 reserved RO 0 Management Frames with Preamble Suppressed When set, indicates that the Management Interface is capable of receiving management frames with the preamble suppressed. 6 MFPS RO 1 Auto-Negotiation Complete When set, indicates that the Auto-Negotiation process has been completed and that the extended registers defined by the Auto-Negotiation protocol are valid. 5 ANEGC RO 0 Remote Fault When set, indicates that a remote fault condition has been detected. This bit remains set until it is read, even if the condition no longer exists. 4 RFAULT RC 0 November 30, 2007 437 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Auto-Negotiation When set, indicates that the PHY has the ability to perform Auto-Negotiation. 3 ANEGA RO 1 Link Made When set, indicates that a valid link has been established by the PHY. 2 LINK RO 0 Jabber Condition When set, indicates that a jabber condition has been detected by the PHY. This bit remains set until it is read, even if the jabber condition no longer exists. 1 JAB RC 0 Extended Capabilities When set, indicates that the PHY provides an extended set of capabilities that can be accessed through the extended register set. 0 EXTD RO 1 438 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 18: Ethernet PHY Management Register 2 – PHY Identifier 1 (MR2), address 0x02 This register, along with MR3, provides a 32-bit value indicating the manufacturer, model, and revision information. Ethernet PHY Management Register 2 – PHY Identifier 1 (MR2) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x02 Type RO, reset 0x000E 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OUI[21:6] Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Organizationally Unique Identifier[21:6] This field, along with the OUI[5:0] field in MR3, makes up the Organizationally Unique Identifier indicating the PHY manufacturer. 15:0 OUI[21:6] RO 0x000E November 30, 2007 439 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 19: Ethernet PHY Management Register 3 – PHY Identifier 2 (MR3), address 0x03 This register, along with MR2, provides a 32-bit value indicating the manufacturer, model, and revision information. Ethernet PHY Management Register 3 – PHY Identifier 2 (MR3) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x03 Type RO, reset 0x7237 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OUI[5:0] MN RN Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Organizationally Unique Identifier[5:0] This field, along with the OUI[21:6] field in MR2, makes up the Organizationally Unique Identifier indicating the PHY manufacturer. 15:10 OUI[5:0] RO 0x1C Model Number The MN field represents the Model Number of the PHY. 9:4 MN RO 0x23 Revision Number The RN field represents the Revision Number of the PHY. 3:0 RN RO 0x7 440 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 20: Ethernet PHY Management Register 4 – Auto-Negotiation Advertisement (MR4), address 0x04 This register provides the advertised abilities of the PHY used during Auto-Negotiation. Bits 8:5 represent the Technology Ability Field bits. This field can be overwritten by software to Auto-Negotiate to an alternate common technology. Writing to this register has no effect until Auto-Negotiation is re-initiated. Ethernet PHY Management Register 4 – Auto-Negotiation Advertisement (MR4) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x04 Type R/W, reset 0x01E1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NP reserved RF reserved A3 A2 A1 A0 S[4:0] Type RO RO R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Next Page When set, indicates the PHY is capable of Next Page exchanges to provide more detailed information on the PHY’s capabilities. 15 NP RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 14 reserved RO 0 Remote Fault When set, indicates to the link partner that a Remote Fault condition has been encountered. 13 RF R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 12:9 reserved RO 0 Technology Ability Field[3] When set, indicates that the PHY supports the 100Base-TX full-duplex signaling protocol. If software wants to ensure that this mode is not used, this bit can be written to 0 and Auto-Negotiation re-initiated with the RANEG bit in the MR0 register. 8 A3 R/W 1 Technology Ability Field[2] When set, indicates that the PHY supports the 100Base-T half-duplex signaling protocol. If software wants to ensure that this mode is not used, this bit can be written to 0 and Auto-Negotiation re-initiated. 7 A2 R/W 1 Technology Ability Field[1] When set, indicates that the PHY supports the 10Base-T full-duplex signaling protocol. If software wants to ensure that this mode is not used, this bit can be written to 0 and Auto-Negotiation re-initiated. 6 A1 R/W 1 Technology Ability Field[0] When set, indicates that the PHY supports the 10Base-T half-duplex signaling protocol. If software wants to ensure that this mode is not used, this bit can be written to 0 and Auto-Negotiation re-initiated. 5 A0 R/W 1 November 30, 2007 441 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Selector Field The S[4:0] field encodes 32 possible messages for communicating between PHYs. This field is hard-coded to 0x01, indicating that the Stellaris® PHY is IEEE 802.3 compliant. 4:0 S[4:0] RO 0x01 442 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 21: Ethernet PHY Management Register 5 – Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability (MR5), address 0x05 This register provides the advertised abilities of the link partner’s PHY that are received and stored during Auto-Negotiation. Ethernet PHY Management Register 5 – Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability (MR5) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x05 Type RO, reset 0x0000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NP ACK RF A[7:0] S[4:0] Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Next Page When set, indicates that the link partner’s PHY is capable of Next page exchanges to provide more detailed information on the PHY’s capabilities. 15 NP RO 0 Acknowledge When set, indicates that the device has successfully received the link partner’s advertised abilities during Auto-Negotiation. 14 ACK RO 0 Remote Fault Used as a standard transport mechanism for transmitting simple fault information. 13 RF RO 0 Technology Ability Field The A[7:0] field encodes individual technologies that are supported by the PHY. See the MR4 register. 12:5 A[7:0] RO 0x00 Selector Field The S[4:0] field encodes possible messages for communicating between PHYs. Value Description 0x00 Reserved 0x01 IEEE Std 802.3 0x02 IEEE Std 802.9 ISLAN-16T 0x03 IEEE Std 802.5 0x04 IEEE Std 1394 0x05–0x1F Reserved 4:0 S[4:0] RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 443 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 22: Ethernet PHY Management Register 6 – Auto-Negotiation Expansion (MR6), address 0x06 This register enables software to determine the Auto-Negotiation and Next Page capabilities of the PHY and the link partner after Auto-Negotiation. Ethernet PHY Management Register 6 – Auto-Negotiation Expansion (MR6) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x06 Type RO, reset 0x0000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PDF LPNPA reserved PRX LPANEGA Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RC RO RO RC RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:5 reserved RO 0x000 Parallel Detection Fault When set, indicates that more than one technology has been detected at link up. This bit is cleared when read. 4 PDF RC 0 Link Partner is Next Page Able When set, indicates that the link partner is Next Page Able. 3 LPNPA RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 2 reserved RO 0x000 New Page Received When set, indicates that a New Page has been received from the link partner and stored in the appropriate location. This bit remains set until the register is read. 1 PRX RC 0 Link Partner is Auto-Negotiation Able When set, indicates that the Link partner is Auto-Negotiation Able. 0 LPANEGA RO 0 444 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 23: Ethernet PHY Management Register 16 – Vendor-Specific (MR16), address 0x10 This register enables software to configure the operation of vendor-specific modes of the PHY. Ethernet PHY Management Register 16 – Vendor-Specific (MR16) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x10 Type R/W, reset 0x0140 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RPTR INPOL reserved TXHIM SQEI NL10 reserved APOL RVSPOL reserved PCSBP RXCC Type R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Repeater Mode When set, enables the repeater mode of operation. In this mode, full-duplex is not allowed and the Carrier Sense signal only responds to receive activity. If the PHY is configured to 10Base-T mode, the SQE test function is disabled. 15 RPTR R/W 0 Interrupt Polarity 1: Sets the polarity of the PHY interrupt to be active High. 0: Sets the polarity of the PHY interrupt to active Low. Important: Because the Media Access Controller expects active Low interrupts from the PHY, this bit must always be written with a 0 to ensure proper operation. 14 INPOL R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 13 reserved RO 0 Transmit High Impedance Mode When set, enables the transmitter High Impedance mode. In this mode, the TXOP and TXON transmitter pins are put into a high impedance state. The RXIP and RXIN pins remain fully functional. 12 TXHIM R/W 0 SQE Inhibit Testing When set, prohibits 10Base-T SQE testing. When 0, the SQE testing is performed by generating a Collision pulse following the completion of the transmission of a frame. 11 SQEI R/W 0 Natural Loopback Mode When set, enables the 10Base-T Natural Loopback mode. This causes the transmission data received by the PHY to be looped back onto the receive data path when 10Base-T mode is enabled. 10 NL10 R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 9:6 reserved RO 0x05 November 30, 2007 445 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Auto-Polarity Disable When set, disables the PHY’s auto-polarity function. If this bit is 0, the PHY automatically inverts the received signal due to a wrong polarity connection during Auto-Negotiation if the PHY is in 10Base-T mode. 5 APOL R/W 0 Receive Data Polarity This bit indicates whether the receive data pulses are being inverted. If the APOL bit is 0, then the RVSPOL bit is read-only and indicates whether the auto-polarity circuitry is reversing the polarity. In this case, a 1 in the RVSPOL bit indicates that the receive data is inverted while a 0 indicates that the receive data is not inverted. If the APOL bit is 1, then the RVSPOL bit is writable and software can force the receive data to be inverted. Setting RVSPOL to 1 forces the receive data to be inverted while a 0 does not invert the receive data. 4 RVSPOL R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 3:2 reserved RO 0 PCS Bypass When set, enables the bypass of the PCS and scrambling/descrambling functions in 100Base-TX mode. This mode is only valid when Auto-Negotiation is disabled and 100Base-T mode is enabled. 1 PCSBP R/W 0 Receive Clock Control When set, enables the Receive Clock Control power saving mode if the PHY is configured in 100Base-TX mode. This mode shuts down the receive clock when no data is being received from the physical medium to save power. This mode should not be used when PCSBP is enabled and is automatically disabled when the LOOPBK bit in the MR0 register is set. 0 RXCC R/W 0 446 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 24: Ethernet PHY Management Register 17 – Interrupt Control/Status (MR17), address 0x11 This register provides the means for controlling and observing the events, which trigger a PHY interrupt in the MACRIS register. This register can also be used in a polling mode via the MII Serial Interface as a means to observe key events within the PHY via one register address. Bits 0 through 7 are status bits, which are each set to logic 1 based on an event. These bits are cleared after the register is read. Bits 8 through 15 of this register, when set to logic 1, enable their corresponding bit in the lower byte to signal a PHY interrupt in the MACRIS register. Ethernet PHY Management Register 17 – Interrupt Control/Status (MR17) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x11 Type R/W, reset 0x0000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JABBER_IE RXER_IE PRX_IE PDF_IE LPACK_IELSCHG_IE RFAULT_IE ANEGCOMP_IE JABBER_INTRXER_INT PRX_INT PDF_INT LPACK_INT LSCHG_INT RFAULT_INT ANEGCOMP_INT Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RC RC RC RC RC RC RC RC Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Jabber Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when a Jabber condition is detected by the PHY. 15 JABBER_IE R/W 0 Receive Error Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when a receive error is detected by the PHY. 14 RXER_IE R/W 0 Page Received Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when a new page is received by the PHY. 13 PRX_IE R/W 0 Parallel Detection Fault Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when a Parallel Detection Fault is detected by the PHY. 12 PDF_IE R/W 0 LP Acknowledge Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when FLP bursts are received with the Acknowledge bit during Auto-Negotiation. 11 LPACK_IE R/W 0 Link Status Change Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when the Link Status changes from OK to FAIL. 10 LSCHG_IE R/W 0 Remote Fault Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when a Remote Fault condition is signaled by the link partner. 9 RFAULT_IE R/W 0 Auto-Negotiation Complete Interrupt Enable When set, enables system interrupts when the Auto-Negotiation sequence has completed successfully. 8 ANEGCOMP_IE R/W 0 November 30, 2007 447 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Jabber Event Interrupt When set, indicates that a Jabber event has been detected by the 10Base-T circuitry. 7 JABBER_INT RC 0 Receive Error Interrupt When set, indicates that a receive error has been detected by the PHY. 6 RXER_INT RC 0 Page Receive Interrupt When set, indicates that a new page has been received from the link partner during Auto-Negotiation. 5 PRX_INT RC 0 Parallel Detection Fault Interrupt When set, indicates that a Parallel Detection Fault has been detected by the PHY during the Auto-Negotiation process. 4 PDF_INT RC 0 LP Acknowledge Interrupt When set, indicates that an FLP burst has been received with the Acknowledge bit set during Auto-Negotiation. 3 LPACK_INT RC 0 Link Status Change Interrupt When set, indicates that the link status has changed from OK to FAIL. 2 LSCHG_INT RC 0 Remote Fault Interrupt When set, indicates that a Remote Fault condition has been signaled by the link partner. 1 RFAULT_INT RC 0 Auto-Negotiation Complete Interrupt When set, indicates that the Auto-Negotiation sequence has completed successfully. 0 ANEGCOMP_INT RC 0 448 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 25: Ethernet PHY Management Register 18 – Diagnostic (MR18), address 0x12 This register enables software to diagnose the results of the previous Auto-Negotiation. Ethernet PHY Management Register 18 – Diagnostic (MR18) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x12 Type RO, reset 0x0000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ANEGF DPLX RATE RXSD RX_LOCK reserved Type RO RO RO RC RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:13 reserved RO 0 Auto-Negotiation Failure When set, indicates that no common technology was found during Auto-Negotiation and has failed. This bit remains set until read. 12 ANEGF RC 0 Duplex Mode When set, indicates that Full-Duplex was the highest common denominator found during the Auto-Negotiation process. Otherwise, Half-Duplex was the highest common denominator found. 11 DPLX RO 0 Rate When set, indicates that 100Base-TX was the highest common denominator found during the Auto-Negotiation process. Otherwise, 10Base-TX was the highest common denominator found. 10 RATE RO 0 Receive Detection When set, indicates that receive signal detection has occurred (in 100Base-TX mode) or that Manchester-encoded data has been detected (in 10Base-T mode). 9 RXSD RO 0 Receive PLL Lock When set, indicates that the Receive PLL has locked onto the receive signal for the selected speed of operation (10Base-T or 100Base-TX). 8 RX_LOCK RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:0 reserved RO 00 November 30, 2007 449 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 26: Ethernet PHY Management Register 19 – Transceiver Control (MR19), address 0x13 This register enables software to set the gain of the transmit output to compensate for transformer loss. Ethernet PHY Management Register 19 – Transceiver Control (MR19) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x13 Type R/W, reset 0x4000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TXO[1:0] reserved Type R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Transmit Amplitude Selection The TXO[1:0] field sets the transmit output amplitude to account for transmit transformer insertion loss. Value Description 0x0 Gain set for 0.0dB of insertion loss 0x1 Gain set for 0.4dB of insertion loss 0x2 Gain set for 0.8dB of insertion loss 0x3 Gain set for 1.2dB of insertion loss 15:14 TXO[1:0] R/W 1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 13:0 reserved RO 0x0 450 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller Register 27: Ethernet PHY Management Register 23 – LED Configuration (MR23), address 0x17 This register enables software to select the source that will cause the LEDs to toggle. Ethernet PHY Management Register 23 – LED Configuration (MR23) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x17 Type R/W, reset 0x0010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved LED1[3:0] LED0[3:0] Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:8 reserved RO 0x0 LED1 Source The LED1 field selects the source that will toggle the LED1 signal. Value Description 0x0 Link OK 0x1 RX or TX Activity (Default LED1) 0x2 TX Activity 0x3 RX Activity 0x4 Collision 0x5 100BASE-TX mode 0x6 10BASE-T mode 0x7 Full-Duplex 0x8 Link OK & Blink=RX or TX Activity 7:4 LED1[3:0] R/W 1 LED0 Source The LED0 field selects the source that will toggle the LED0 signal. Value Description 0x0 Link OK (Default LED0) 0x1 RX or TX Activity 0x2 TX Activity 0x3 RX Activity 0x4 Collision 0x5 100BASE-TX mode 0x6 10BASE-T mode 0x7 Full-Duplex 0x8 Link OK & Blink=RX or TX Activity 3:0 LED0[3:0] R/W 0 November 30, 2007 451 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 28: Ethernet PHY Management Register 24 –MDI/MDIX Control (MR24), address 0x18 This register enables software to control the behavior of the MDI/MDIX mux and its switching capabilities. Ethernet PHY Management Register 24 –MDI/MDIX Control (MR24) Base 0x4004.8000 Address 0x18 Type R/W, reset 0x00C0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PD_MODEAUTO_SW MDIX MDIX_CM MDIX_SD Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:8 reserved RO 0x0 Parallel Detection Mode When set, enables the Parallel Detection mode and allows auto-switching to work when Auto-Negotiation is not enabled. 7 PD_MODE R/W 0 Auto-Switching Enable When set, enables Auto-Switching of the MDI/MDIX mux. 6 AUTO_SW R/W 0 Auto-Switching Configuration When set, indicates that the MDI/MDIX mux is in the crossover (MDIX) configuration. When 0, it indicates that the mux is in the pass-through (MDI) configuration. When the AUTO_SW bit is 1, the MDIX bit is read-only. When the AUTO_SW bit is 0, the MDIX bit is read/write and can be configured manually. 5 MDIX R/W 0 Auto-Switching Complete When set, indicates that the auto-switching sequence has completed. If 0, it indicates that the sequence has not completed or that auto-switching is disabled. 4 MDIX_CM RO 0 Auto-Switching Seed This field provides the initial seed for the switching algorithm. This seed directly affects the number of attempts [5,4] respectively to write bits [3:0]. A 0 sets the seed to 0x5. 3:0 MDIX_SD R/W 0 452 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ethernet Controller 17 Analog Comparators An analog comparator is a peripheral that compares two analog voltages, and provides a logical output that signals the comparison result. The LM3S6952 controller provides three independent integrated analog comparators that can be configured to drive an output or generate an interrupt or ADC event. Note: Not all comparators have the option to drive an output pin. See the Comparator Operating Mode tables for more information. A comparator can compare a test voltage against any one of these voltages: ■ An individual external reference voltage ■ A shared single external reference voltage ■ A shared internal reference voltage The comparator can provide its output to a device pin, acting as a replacement for an analog comparator on the board, or it can be used to signal the application via interrupts or triggers to the ADC to cause it to start capturing a sample sequence. The interrupt generation and ADC triggering logic is separate. This means, for example, that an interrupt can be generated on a rising edge and the ADC triggered on a falling edge. November 30, 2007 453 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 17.1 Block Diagram Figure 17-1. Analog Comparator Module Block Diagram interrupt C2+ C2- output +ve input (alternate) +ve input interrupt -ve input reference input Comparator 2 ACSTAT2 ACCTL2 interrupt C1- C1+ output +ve input (alternate) +ve input interrupt -ve input reference input Comparator 1 ACSTAT1 ACCTL1 C1o Voltage Ref ACREFCTL output +ve input (alternate) +ve input interrupt -ve input reference input Comparator 0 ACSTAT0 ACCTL0 C0+ internal bus interrupt C0- C0o trigger trigger trigger trigger trigger trigger 17.2 Functional Description Important: It is recommended that the Digital-Input enable (the GPIODEN bit in the GPIO module) for the analog input pin be disabled to prevent excessive current draw from the I/O pads. The comparator compares the VIN- and VIN+ inputs to produce an output, VOUT. VIN- < VIN+, VOUT = 1 VIN- > VIN+, VOUT = 0 As shown in Figure 17-2 on page 455, the input source for VIN- is an external input. In addition to an external input, input sources for VIN+ can be the +ve input of comparator 0 or an internal reference. 454 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators Figure 17-2. Structure of Comparator Unit ACCTL ACSTAT IntGen 2 TrigGen 1 0 CINV output -ve input +ve input interrupt internal bus trigger +ve input (alternate) reference input A comparator is configured through two status/control registers (ACCTL and ACSTAT ). The internal reference is configured through one control register (ACREFCTL). Interrupt status and control is configured through three registers (ACMIS, ACRIS, and ACINTEN). The operating modes of the comparators are shown in the Comparator Operating Mode tables. Typically, the comparator output is used internally to generate controller interrupts. It may also be used to drive an external pin or generate an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) trigger. Important: Certain register bit values must be set before using the analog comparators. The proper pad configuration for the comparator input and output pins are described in the Comparator Operating Mode tables. Table 17-1. Comparator 0 Operating Modes ACCNTL0 Comparator 0 ASRCP VIN- VIN+ Output Interrupt ADCTrigger 00 C0- C0+ C0o yes yes 01 C0- C0+ C0o yes yes 10 C0- Vref C0o yes yes 11 C0- reserved C0o yes yes Table 17-2. Comparator 1 Operating Modes ACCNTL1 Comparator 1 ASRCP VIN- VIN+ Output Interrupt ADCTrigger 00 C1- C1o/C1+ C1o/C1+ yes yes 01 C1- C0+ C1o/C1+ yes yes 10 C1- Vref C1o/C1+ yes yes 11 C1- reserved C1o/C1+ yes yes November 30, 2007 455 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Table 17-3. Comparator 2 Operating Modes ACCNTL2 Comparator 2 ASRCP VIN- VIN+ Output Interrupt ADCTrigger 00 C2- C2+ n/a yes yes 01 C2- C0+ n/a yes yes 10 C2- Vref n/a yes yes 11 C2- reserved n/a yes yes 17.2.1 Internal Reference Programming The structure of the internal reference is shown in Figure 17-3 on page 456. This is controlled by a single configuration register (ACREFCTL). Table 17-4 on page 456 shows the programming options to develop specific internal reference values, to compare an external voltage against a particular voltage generated internally. Figure 17-3. Comparator Internal Reference Structure 8R R R 8R R R ••• ••• 0 Decoder 15 14 1 AVDD EN internal reference VREF RNG Table 17-4. Internal Reference Voltage and ACREFCTL Field Values ACREFCTL Register Output Reference Voltage Based on VREF Field Value EN Bit Value RNG Bit Value 0 V (GND) for any value of VREF; however, it is recommended that RNG=1 and VREF=0 for the least noisy ground reference. EN=0 RNG=X 456 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators ACREFCTL Register Output Reference Voltage Based on VREF Field Value EN Bit Value RNG Bit Value Total resistance in ladder is 32 R. VREF AVDD R V REF RT = × ---------------- VREF AVDD (VREF + 8) 32 = × ------------------------------ VR EF = 0.825 + 0.103 VREF The range of internal reference in this mode is 0.825-2.37 V. EN=1 RNG=0 Total resistance in ladder is 24 R. VREF AVDD R V REF RT = × ---------------- VREF AVDD (VREF) 24 = × -------------------- VREF = 0.1375 x VREF The range of internal reference for this mode is 0.0-2.0625 V. RNG=1 17.3 Initialization and Configuration The following example shows how to configure an analog comparator to read back its output value from an internal register. 1. Enable the analog comparator 0 clock by writing a value of 0x0010.0000 to the RCGC1 register in the System Control module. 2. In the GPIO module, enable the GPIO port/pin associated with C0- as a GPIO input. 3. Configure the internal voltage reference to 1.65 V by writing the ACREFCTL register with the value 0x0000.030C. 4. Configure comparator 0 to use the internal voltage reference and to not invert the output on the C0o pin by writing the ACCTL0 register with the value of 0x0000.040C. 5. Delay for some time. 6. Read the comparator output value by reading the ACSTAT0 register’s OVAL value. Change the level of the signal input on C0- to see the OVAL value change. 17.4 Register Map Table 17-5 on page 458 lists the comparator registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the Analog Comparator base address of 0x4003.C000. November 30, 2007 457 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Table 17-5. Analog Comparators Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x00 ACMIS R/W1C 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Masked Interrupt Status 459 0x04 ACRIS RO 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Raw Interrupt Status 460 0x08 ACINTEN R/W 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable 461 0x10 ACREFCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Reference Voltage Control 462 0x20 ACSTAT0 RO 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Status 0 463 0x24 ACCTL0 R/W 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Control 0 464 0x40 ACSTAT1 RO 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Status 1 463 0x44 ACCTL1 R/W 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Control 1 464 0x60 ACSTAT2 RO 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Status 2 463 0x64 ACCTL2 R/W 0x0000.0000 Analog Comparator Control 2 464 17.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the Analog Comparator registers, in numerical order by address offset. 458 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators Register 1: Analog Comparator Masked Interrupt Status (ACMIS), offset 0x00 This register provides a summary of the interrupt status (masked) of the comparator. Analog Comparator Masked Interrupt Status (ACMIS) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x00 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IN2 IN1 IN0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator 2 Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. Write 1 to this bit to clear the pending interrupt. 2 IN2 R/W1C 0 Comparator 1 Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. Write 1 to this bit to clear the pending interrupt. 1 IN1 R/W1C 0 Comparator 0 Masked Interrupt Status Gives the masked interrupt state of this interrupt. Write 1 to this bit to clear the pending interrupt. 0 IN0 R/W1C 0 November 30, 2007 459 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: Analog Comparator Raw Interrupt Status (ACRIS), offset 0x04 This register provides a summary of the interrupt status (raw) of the comparator. Analog Comparator Raw Interrupt Status (ACRIS) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x04 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IN2 IN1 IN0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator 2 Interrupt Status When set, indicates that an interrupt has been generated by comparator 2. 2 IN2 RO 0 Comparator 1 Interrupt Status When set, indicates that an interrupt has been generated by comparator 1. 1 IN1 RO 0 Comparator 0 Interrupt Status When set, indicates that an interrupt has been generated by comparator 0. 0 IN0 RO 0 460 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators Register 3: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable (ACINTEN), offset 0x08 This register provides the interrupt enable for the comparator. Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable (ACINTEN) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x08 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IN2 IN1 IN0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:3 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator 2 Interrupt Enable When set, enables the controller interrupt from the comparator 2 output 2 IN2 R/W 0 Comparator 1 Interrupt Enable When set, enables the controller interrupt from the comparator 1 output. 1 IN1 R/W 0 Comparator 0 Interrupt Enable When set, enables the controller interrupt from the comparator 0 output. 0 IN0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 461 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: Analog Comparator Reference Voltage Control (ACREFCTL), offset 0x10 This register specifies whether the resistor ladder is powered on as well as the range and tap. Analog Comparator Reference Voltage Control (ACREFCTL) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x10 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved EN RNG reserved VREF Type RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:10 reserved RO 0x00 Resistor Ladder Enable The EN bit specifies whether the resistor ladder is powered on. If 0, the resistor ladder is unpowered. If 1, the resistor ladder is connected to the analog VDD. This bit is reset to 0 so that the internal reference consumes the least amount of power if not used and programmed. 9 EN R/W 0 Resistor Ladder Range The RNG bit specifies the range of the resistor ladder. If 0, the resistor ladder has a total resistance of 32 R. If 1, the resistor ladder has a total resistance of 24 R. 8 RNG R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:4 reserved RO 0x00 Resistor Ladder Voltage Ref The VREF bit field specifies the resistor ladder tap that is passed through an analog multiplexer. The voltage corresponding to the tap position is the internal reference voltage available for comparison. See Table 17-4 on page 456 for some output reference voltage examples. 3:0 VREF R/W 0x00 462 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators Register 5: Analog Comparator Status 0 (ACSTAT0), offset 0x20 Register 6: Analog Comparator Status 1 (ACSTAT1), offset 0x40 Register 7: Analog Comparator Status 2 (ACSTAT2), offset 0x60 These registers specify the current output value of the comparator. Analog Comparator Status 0 (ACSTAT0) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x20 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved OVAL reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator Output Value The OVAL bit specifies the current output value of the comparator. 1 OVAL RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 463 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: Analog Comparator Control 0 (ACCTL0), offset 0x24 Register 9: Analog Comparator Control 1 (ACCTL1), offset 0x44 Register 10: Analog Comparator Control 2 (ACCTL2), offset 0x64 These registers configure the comparator’s input and output. Analog Comparator Control 0 (ACCTL0) Base 0x4003.C000 Offset 0x24 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TOEN ASRCP reserved TSLVAL TSEN ISLVAL ISEN CINV reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0x00 Trigger Output Enable The TOEN bit enables the ADC event transmission to the ADC. If 0, the event is suppressed and not sent to the ADC. If 1, the event is transmitted to the ADC. 11 TOEN R/W 0 Analog Source Positive The ASRCP field specifies the source of input voltage to the VIN+ terminal of the comparator. The encodings for this field are as follows: Value Function 0x0 Pin value 0x1 Pin value of C0+ 0x2 Internal voltage reference 0x3 Reserved 10:9 ASRCP R/W 0x00 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 8 reserved RO 0 Trigger Sense Level Value The TSLVAL bit specifies the sense value of the input that generates an ADC event if in Level Sense mode. If 0, an ADC event is generated if the comparator output is Low. Otherwise, an ADC event is generated if the comparator output is High. 7 TSLVAL R/W 0 464 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Analog Comparators Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Trigger Sense The TSEN field specifies the sense of the comparator output that generates an ADC event. The sense conditioning is as follows: Value Function 0x0 Level sense, see TSLVAL 0x1 Falling edge 0x2 Rising edge 0x3 Either edge 6:5 TSEN R/W 0x0 Interrupt Sense Level Value The ISLVAL bit specifies the sense value of the input that generates an interrupt if in Level Sense mode. If 0, an interrupt is generated if the comparator output is Low. Otherwise, an interrupt is generated if the comparator output is High. 4 ISLVAL R/W 0 Interrupt Sense The ISEN field specifies the sense of the comparator output that generates an interrupt. The sense conditioning is as follows: Value Function 0x0 Level sense, see ISLVAL 0x1 Falling edge 0x2 Rising edge 0x3 Either edge 3:2 ISEN R/W 0x0 Comparator Output Invert The CINV bit conditionally inverts the output of the comparator. If 0, the output of the comparator is unchanged. If 1, the output of the comparator is inverted prior to being processed by hardware. 1 CINV R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 November 30, 2007 465 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 18 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Pulse width modulation (PWM) is a powerful technique for digitally encoding analog signal levels. High-resolution counters are used to generate a square wave, and the duty cycle of the square wave is modulated to encode an analog signal. Typical applications include switching power supplies and motor control. The Stellaris® PWM module consists of two PWM generator blocks and a control block. Each PWM generator block contains one timer (16-bit down or up/down counter), two PWM comparators, a PWM signal generator, a dead-band generator, and an interrupt/ADC-trigger selector. The control block determines the polarity of the PWM signals, and which signals are passed through to the pins. Each PWM generator block produces two PWM signals that can either be independent signals (other than being based on the same timer and therefore having the same frequency) or a single pair of complementary signals with dead-band delays inserted. The output of the PWM generation blocks are managed by the output control block before being passed to the device pins. The Stellaris® PWM module provides a great deal of flexibility. It can generate simple PWM signals, such as those required by a simple charge pump. It can also generate paired PWM signals with dead-band delays, such as those required by a half-H bridge driver. 18.1 Block Diagram Figure 18-1 on page 466 provides a block diagram of a Stellaris® PWM module. The LM3S6952 controller contains two generator blocks (PWM0 and PWM1) and generates four independent PWM signals or two paired PWM signals with dead-band delays inserted. Figure 18-1. PWM Module Block Diagram Interrupt and Trigger Generate PWMnINTEN PWMnRIS PWMnISC PWM Clock Interrupt Dead-Band Generator PWMnDBCTL PWMnDBRISE PWMnDBFALL PWM Output Control PWMENABLE PWMINVERT PWMFAULT PWM Generator PWMnGENA PWMnGENB pwma pwmb Timer PWMnLOAD PWMnCOUNT Comparator A PWMnCMPA Comparator B PWMnCMPB zero load dir 16 cmpA cmpB Fault PWM Generator Block 18.2 Functional Description 18.2.1 PWM Timer The timer in each PWM generator runs in one of two modes: Count-Down mode or Count-Up/Down mode. In Count-Down mode, the timer counts from the load value to zero, goes back to the load value, and continues counting down. In Count-Up/Down mode, the timer counts from zero up to the load value, back down to zero, back up to the load value, and so on. Generally, Count-Down mode 466 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) is used for generating left- or right-aligned PWM signals, while the Count-Up/Down mode is used for generating center-aligned PWM signals. The timers output three signals that are used in the PWM generation process: the direction signal (this is always Low in Count-Down mode, but alternates between Low and High in Count-Up/Down mode), a single-clock-cycle-width High pulse when the counter is zero, and a single-clock-cycle-width High pulse when the counter is equal to the load value. Note that in Count-Down mode, the zero pulse is immediately followed by the load pulse. 18.2.2 PWM Comparators There are two comparators in each PWM generator that monitor the value of the counter; when either match the counter, they output a single-clock-cycle-width High pulse. When in Count-Up/Down mode, these comparators match both when counting up and when counting down; they are therefore qualified by the counter direction signal. These qualified pulses are used in the PWM generation process. If either comparator match value is greater than the counter load value, then that comparator never outputs a High pulse. Figure 18-2 on page 467 shows the behavior of the counter and the relationship of these pulses when the counter is in Count-Down mode. Figure 18-3 on page 468 shows the behavior of the counter and the relationship of these pulses when the counter is in Count-Up/Down mode. Figure 18-2. PWM Count-Down Mode Load Zero CompB CompA Load Zero B A Dir ADown BDown November 30, 2007 467 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 18-3. PWM Count-Up/Down Mode Load Zero CompB CompA Load Zero B A Dir BUp AUp ADown BDown 18.2.3 PWM Signal Generator The PWM generator takes these pulses (qualified by the direction signal), and generates two PWM signals. In Count-Down mode, there are four events that can affect the PWM signal: zero, load, match A down, and match B down. In Count-Up/Down mode, there are six events that can affect the PWM signal: zero, load, match A down, match A up, match B down, and match B up. The match A or match B events are ignored when they coincide with the zero or load events. If the match A and match B events coincide, the first signal, PWMA, is generated based only on the match A event, and the second signal, PWMB, is generated based only on the match B event. For each event, the effect on each output PWM signal is programmable: it can be left alone (ignoring the event), it can be toggled, it can be driven Low, or it can be driven High. These actions can be used to generate a pair of PWM signals of various positions and duty cycles, which do or do not overlap. Figure 18-4 on page 468 shows the use of Count-Up/Down mode to generate a pair of center-aligned, overlapped PWM signals that have different duty cycles. Figure 18-4. PWM Generation Example In Count-Up/Down Mode Load Zero CompB CompA PWMB PWMA In this example, the first generator is set to drive High on match A up, drive Low on match A down, and ignore the other four events. The second generator is set to drive High on match B up, drive Low on match B down, and ignore the other four events. Changing the value of comparator A 468 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) changes the duty cycle of the PWMA signal, and changing the value of comparator B changes the duty cycle of the PWMB signal. 18.2.4 Dead-Band Generator The two PWM signals produced by the PWM generator are passed to the dead-band generator. If disabled, the PWM signals simply pass through unmodified. If enabled, the second PWM signal is lost and two PWM signals are generated based on the first PWM signal. The first output PWM signal is the input signal with the rising edge delayed by a programmable amount. The second output PWM signal is the inversion of the input signal with a programmable delay added between the falling edge of the input signal and the rising edge of this new signal. This is therefore a pair of active High signals where one is always High, except for a programmable amount of time at transitions where both are Low. These signals are therefore suitable for driving a half-H bridge, with the dead-band delays preventing shoot-through current from damaging the power electronics. Figure 18-5 on page 469 shows the effect of the dead-band generator on an input PWM signal. Figure 18-5. PWM Dead-Band Generator Input PWMA PWMB Rising Edge Delay Falling Edge Delay 18.2.5 Interrupt/ADC-Trigger Selector The PWM generator also takes the same four (or six) counter events and uses them to generate an interrupt or an ADC trigger. Any of these events or a set of these events can be selected as a source for an interrupt; when any of the selected events occur, an interrupt is generated. Additionally, the same event, a different event, the same set of events, or a different set of events can be selected as a source for an ADC trigger; when any of these selected events occur, an ADC trigger pulse is generated. The selection of events allows the interrupt or ADC trigger to occur at a specific position within the PWM signal. Note that interrupts and ADC triggers are based on the raw events; delays in the PWM signal edges caused by the dead-band generator are not taken into account. 18.2.6 Synchronization Methods There is a global reset capability that can synchronously reset any or all of the counters in the PWM generators. If multiple PWM generators are configured with the same counter load value, this can be used to guarantee that they also have the same count value (this does imply that the PWM generators must be configured before they are synchronized). With this, more than two PWM signals can be produced with a known relationship between the edges of those signals since the counters always have the same values. The counter load values and comparator match values of the PWM generator can be updated in two ways. The first is immediate update mode, where a new value is used as soon as the counter reaches zero. By waiting for the counter to reach zero, a guaranteed behavior is defined, and overly short or overly long output PWM pulses are prevented. The other update method is synchronous, where the new value is not used until a global synchronized update signal is asserted, at which point the new value is used as soon as the counter reaches zero. This second mode allows multiple items in multiple PWM generators to be updated November 30, 2007 469 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller simultaneously without odd effects during the update; everything runs from the old values until a point at which they all run from the new values. The Update mode of the load and comparator match values can be individually configured in each PWM generator block. It typically makes sense to use the synchronous update mechanism across PWM generator blocks when the timers in those blocks are synchronized, though this is not required in order for this mechanism to function properly. 18.2.7 Fault Conditions There are two external conditions that affect the PWM block; the signal input on the Fault pin and the stalling of the controller by a debugger. There are two mechanisms available to handle such conditions: the output signals can be forced into an inactive state and/or the PWM timers can be stopped. Each output signal has a fault bit. If set, a fault input signal causes the corresponding output signal to go into the inactive state. If the inactive state is a safe condition for the signal to be in for an extended period of time, this keeps the output signal from driving the outside world in a dangerous manner during the fault condition. A fault condition can also generate a controller interrupt. Each PWM generator can also be configured to stop counting during a stall condition. The user can select for the counters to run until they reach zero then stop, or to continue counting and reloading. A stall condition does not generate a controller interrupt. 18.2.8 Output Control Block With each PWM generator block producing two raw PWM signals, the output control block takes care of the final conditioning of the PWM signals before they go to the pins. Via a single register, the set of PWM signals that are actually enabled to the pins can be modified; this can be used, for example, to perform commutation of a brushless DC motor with a single register write (and without modifying the individual PWM generators, which are modified by the feedback control loop). Similarly, fault control can disable any of the PWM signals as well. A final inversion can be applied to any of the PWM signals, making them active Low instead of the default active High. 18.3 Initialization and Configuration The following example shows how to initialize the PWM Generator 0 with a 25-KHz frequency, and with a 25% duty cycle on the PWM0 pin and a 75% duty cycle on the PWM1 pin. This example assumes the system clock is 20 MHz. 1. Enable the PWM clock by writing a value of 0x0010.0000 to the RCGC0 register in the System Control module. 2. Enable the clock to the appropriate GPIO module via the RCGC2 register in the System Control module. 3. In the GPIO module, enable the appropriate pins for their alternate function using the GPIOAFSEL register. 4. Configure the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register in the System Control module to use the PWM divide (USEPWMDIV) and set the divider (PWMDIV) to divide by 2 (000). 5. Configure the PWM generator for countdown mode with immediate updates to the parameters. ■ Write the PWM0CTL register with a value of 0x0000.0000. ■ Write the PWM0GENA register with a value of 0x0000.008C. 470 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) ■ Write the PWM0GENB register with a value of 0x0000.080C. 6. Set the period. For a 25-KHz frequency, the period = 1/25,000, or 40 microseconds. The PWM clock source is 10 MHz; the system clock divided by 2. This translates to 400 clock ticks per period. Use this value to set the PWM0LOAD register. In Count-Down mode, set the Load field in the PWM0LOAD register to the requested period minus one. ■ Write the PWM0LOAD register with a value of 0x0000.018F. 7. Set the pulse width of the PWM0 pin for a 25% duty cycle. ■ Write the PWM0CMPA register with a value of 0x0000.012B. 8. Set the pulse width of the PWM1 pin for a 75% duty cycle. ■ Write the PWM0CMPB register with a value of 0x0000.0063. 9. Start the timers in PWM generator 0. ■ Write the PWM0CTL register with a value of 0x0000.0001. 10. Enable PWM outputs. ■ Write the PWMENABLE register with a value of 0x0000.0003. 18.4 Register Map Table 18-1 on page 471 lists the PWM registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the PWM base address of 0x4002.8000. Table 18-1. PWM Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 PWMCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Master Control 473 0x004 PWMSYNC R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Time Base Sync 474 0x008 PWMENABLE R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Output Enable 475 0x00C PWMINVERT R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Output Inversion 476 0x010 PWMFAULT R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Output Fault 477 0x014 PWMINTEN R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM Interrupt Enable 478 0x018 PWMRIS RO 0x0000.0000 PWM Raw Interrupt Status 479 0x01C PWMISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 PWM Interrupt Status and Clear 480 0x020 PWMSTATUS RO 0x0000.0000 PWM Status 481 0x040 PWM0CTL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Control 482 0x044 PWM0INTEN R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Interrupt and Trigger Enable 484 0x048 PWM0RIS RO 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Raw Interrupt Status 486 0x04C PWM0ISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Interrupt Status and Clear 487 November 30, 2007 471 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x050 PWM0LOAD R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Load 488 0x054 PWM0COUNT RO 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Counter 489 0x058 PWM0CMPA R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Compare A 490 0x05C PWM0CMPB R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Compare B 491 0x060 PWM0GENA R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Generator A Control 492 0x064 PWM0GENB R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Generator B Control 495 0x068 PWM0DBCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Dead-Band Control 498 0x06C PWM0DBRISE R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay 499 0x070 PWM0DBFALL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM0 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay 500 0x080 PWM1CTL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Control 482 0x084 PWM1INTEN R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Interrupt and Trigger Enable 484 0x088 PWM1RIS RO 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Raw Interrupt Status 486 0x08C PWM1ISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Interrupt Status and Clear 487 0x090 PWM1LOAD R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Load 488 0x094 PWM1COUNT RO 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Counter 489 0x098 PWM1CMPA R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Compare A 490 0x09C PWM1CMPB R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Compare B 491 0x0A0 PWM1GENA R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Generator A Control 492 0x0A4 PWM1GENB R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Generator B Control 495 0x0A8 PWM1DBCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Dead-Band Control 498 0x0AC PWM1DBRISE R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay 499 0x0B0 PWM1DBFALL R/W 0x0000.0000 PWM1 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay 500 18.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the PWM registers, in numerical order by address offset. 472 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 1: PWM Master Control (PWMCTL), offset 0x000 This register provides master control over the PWM generation blocks. PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved GlobalSync1 GlobalSync0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Update PWM Generator 1 Same as GlobalSync0 but for PWM generator 1. 1 GlobalSync1 R/W 0 Update PWM Generator 0 Setting this bit causes any queued update to a load or comparator register in PWM generator 0 to be applied the next time the corresponding counter becomes zero. This bit automatically clears when the updates have completed; it cannot be cleared by software. 0 GlobalSync0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 473 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: PWM Time Base Sync (PWMSYNC), offset 0x004 This register provides a method to perform synchronization of the counters in the PWM generation blocks. Writing a bit in this register to 1 causes the specified counter to reset back to 0; writing multiple bits resets multiple counters simultaneously. The bits auto-clear after the reset has occurred; reading them back as zero indicates that the synchronization has completed. PWM Time Base Sync (PWMSYNC) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x004 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved Sync1 Sync0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Reset Generator 1 Counter Performs a reset of the PWM generator 1 counter. 1 Sync1 R/W 0 Reset Generator 0 Counter Performs a reset of the PWM generator 0 counter. 0 Sync0 R/W 0 474 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 3: PWM Output Enable (PWMENABLE), offset 0x008 This register provides a master control of which generated PWM signals are output to device pins. By disabling a PWM output, the generation process can continue (for example, when the time bases are synchronized) without driving PWM signals to the pins. When bits in this register are set, the corresponding PWM signal is passed through to the output stage, which is controlled by the PWMINVERT register. When bits are not set, the PWM signal is replaced by a zero value which is also passed to the output stage. PWM Output Enable (PWMENABLE) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PWM3En PWM2En PWM1En PWM0En Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 PWM3 Output Enable When set, allows the generated PWM3 signal to be passed to the device pin. 3 PWM3En R/W 0 PWM2 Output Enable When set, allows the generated PWM2 signal to be passed to the device pin. 2 PWM2En R/W 0 PWM1 Output Enable When set, allows the generated PWM1 signal to be passed to the device pin. 1 PWM1En R/W 0 PWM0 Output Enable When set, allows the generated PWM0 signal to be passed to the device pin. 0 PWM0En R/W 0 November 30, 2007 475 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: PWM Output Inversion (PWMINVERT), offset 0x00C This register provides a master control of the polarity of the PWM signals on the device pins. The PWM signals generated by the PWM generator are active High; they can optionally be made active Low via this register. Disabled PWM channels are also passed through the output inverter (if so configured) so that inactive channels maintain the correct polarity. PWM Output Inversion (PWMINVERT) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PWM3Inv PWM2Inv PWM1Inv PWM0Inv Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 Invert PWM3 Signal When set, the generated PWM3 signal is inverted. 3 PWM3Inv R/W 0 Invert PWM2 Signal When set, the generated PWM2 signal is inverted. 2 PWM2Inv R/W 0 Invert PWM1 Signal When set, the generated PWM1 signal is inverted. 1 PWM1Inv R/W 0 Invert PWM0 Signal When set, the generated PWM0 signal is inverted. 0 PWM0Inv R/W 0 476 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 5: PWM Output Fault (PWMFAULT), offset 0x010 This register controls the behavior of the PWM outputs in the presence of fault conditions. Both the fault input and debug events are considered fault conditions. On a fault condition, each PWM signal can either be passed through unmodified or driven Low. For outputs that are configured for pass-through, the debug event handling on the corresponding PWM generator also determines if the PWM signal continues to be generated. Fault condition control happens before the output inverter, so PWM signals driven Low on fault are inverted if the channel is configured for inversion (therefore, the pin is driven High on a fault condition). PWM Output Fault (PWMFAULT) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved Fault3 Fault2 Fault1 Fault0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 PWM3 Driven Low on Fault When set, the PWM3 output signal is driven Low on a fault condition. 3 Fault3 R/W 0 PWM2 Driven Low on Fault When set, the PWM2 output signal is driven Low on a fault condition. 2 Fault2 R/W 0 PWM1 Driven Low on Fault When set, the PWM1 output signal is driven Low on a fault condition. 1 Fault1 R/W 0 PWM0 Driven Low on Fault When set, the PWM0 output signal is driven Low on a fault condition. 0 Fault0 R/W 0 November 30, 2007 477 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: PWM Interrupt Enable (PWMINTEN), offset 0x014 This register controls the global interrupt generation capabilities of the PWM module. The events that can cause an interrupt are the fault input and the individual interrupts from the PWM generators. PWM Interrupt Enable (PWMINTEN) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x014 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved IntFault Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntPWM1 IntPWM0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:17 reserved RO 0x00 Fault Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the fault input is asserted. 16 IntFault R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:2 reserved RO 0x00 PWM1 Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the PWM generator 1 block asserts an interrupt. 1 IntPWM1 R/W 0 PWM0 Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the PWM generator 0 block asserts an interrupt. 0 IntPWM0 R/W 0 478 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 7: PWM Raw Interrupt Status (PWMRIS), offset 0x018 This register provides the current set of interrupt sources that are asserted, regardless of whether they cause an interrupt to be asserted to the controller. The fault interrupt is latched on detection; it must be cleared through the PWM Interrupt Status and Clear (PWMISC) register (see page 480). The PWM generator interrupts simply reflect the status of the PWM generators; they are cleared via the interrupt status register in the PWM generator blocks. Bits set to 1 indicate the events that are active; a zero bit indicates that the event in question is not active. PWM Raw Interrupt Status (PWMRIS) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved IntFault Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntPWM1 IntPWM0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:17 reserved RO 0x00 Fault Interrupt Asserted Indicates that the fault input has been asserted. 16 IntFault RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:2 reserved RO 0x00 PWM1 Interrupt Asserted Indicates that the PWM generator 1 block is asserting its interrupt. 1 IntPWM1 RO 0 PWM0 Interrupt Asserted Indicates that the PWM generator 0 block is asserting its interrupt. 0 IntPWM0 RO 0 November 30, 2007 479 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: PWM Interrupt Status and Clear (PWMISC), offset 0x01C This register provides a summary of the interrupt status of the individual PWM generator blocks. A bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding generator block is asserting an interrupt. The individual interrupt status registers in each block must be consulted to determine the reason for the interrupt, and used to clear the interrupt. For the fault interrupt, a write of 1 to that bit position clears the latched interrupt status. PWM Interrupt Status and Clear (PWMISC) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x01C Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved IntFault Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntPWM1 IntPWM0 Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:17 reserved RO 0x00 Fault Interrupt Asserted Indicates if the fault input is asserting an interrupt. 16 IntFault R/W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:2 reserved RO 0x00 PWM1 Interrupt Status Indicates if the PWM generator 1 block is asserting an interrupt. 1 IntPWM1 RO 0 PWM0 Interrupt Status Indicates if the PWM generator 0 block is asserting an interrupt. 0 IntPWM0 RO 0 480 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 9: PWM Status (PWMSTATUS), offset 0x020 This register provides the status of the Fault input signal. PWM Status (PWMSTATUS) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x020 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved Fault Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Fault Interrupt Status When set to 1, indicates the fault input is asserted. 0 Fault RO 0 November 30, 2007 481 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: PWM0 Control (PWM0CTL), offset 0x040 Register 11: PWM1 Control (PWM1CTL), offset 0x080 These registers configure the PWM signal generation blocks (PWM0CTL controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). The Register Update mode, Debug mode, Counting mode, and Block Enable mode are all controlled via these registers. The blocks produce the PWM signals, which can be either two independent PWM signals (from the same counter), or a paired set of PWM signals with dead-band delays added. The PWM0 block produces the PWM0 and PWM1 outputs, and the PWM1 block produces the PWM2 and PWM3 outputs. PWM0 Control (PWM0CTL) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x040 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved CmpBUpdCmpAUpd LoadUpd Debug Mode Enable Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator B Update Mode Same as CmpAUpd but for the comparator B register. 5 CmpBUpd R/W 0 Comparator A Update Mode The Update mode for the comparator A register. If 0, updates to the register are reflected to the comparator the next time the counter is 0. If 1, updates to the register are delayed until the next time the counter is 0 after a synchronous update has been requested through the PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) register (see page 473). 4 CmpAUpd R/W 0 Load Register Update Mode The Update mode for the load register. If 0, updates to the register are reflected to the counter the next time the counter is 0. If 1, updates to the register are delayed until the next time the counter is 0 after a synchronous update has been requested through the PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) register. 3 LoadUpd R/W 0 Debug Mode The behavior of the counter in Debug mode. If 0, the counter stops running when it next reaches 0, and continues running again when no longer in Debug mode. If 1, the counter always runs. 2 Debug R/W 0 482 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Counter Mode The mode for the counter. If 0, the counter counts down from the load value to 0 and then wraps back to the load value (Count-Down mode). If 1, the counter counts up from 0 to the load value, back down to 0, and then repeats (Count-Up/Down mode). 1 Mode R/W 0 PWM Block Enable Master enable for the PWM generation block. If 0, the entire block is disabled and not clocked. If 1, the block is enabled and produces PWM signals. 0 Enable R/W 0 November 30, 2007 483 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 12: PWM0 Interrupt and Trigger Enable (PWM0INTEN), offset 0x044 Register 13: PWM1 Interrupt and Trigger Enable (PWM1INTEN), offset 0x084 These registers control the interrupt and ADC trigger generation capabilities of the PWM generators (PWM0INTEN controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). The events that can cause an interrupt or an ADC trigger are: ■ The counter being equal to the load register ■ The counter being equal to zero ■ The counter being equal to the comparator A register while counting up ■ The counter being equal to the comparator A register while counting down ■ The counter being equal to the comparator B register while counting up ■ The counter being equal to the comparator B register while counting down Any combination of these events can generate either an interruptor an ADC trigger, though no determination can be made as to the actual event that caused an ADC trigger if more than one is specified. PWM0 Interrupt and Trigger Enable (PWM0INTEN) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x044 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved TrCmpBD TrCmpBU TrCmpAD TrCmpAU TrCntLoad TrCntZero reserved IntCmpBDIntCmpBUIntCmpADIntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero Type RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:14 reserved RO 0x00 Trigger for Counter=Comparator B Down When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter matches the comparator B value and the counter is counting down. 13 TrCmpBD R/W 0 Trigger for Counter=Comparator B Up When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter matches the comparator B value and the counter is counting up. 12 TrCmpBU R/W 0 Trigger for Counter=Comparator A Down When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter matches the comparator A value and the counter is counting down. 11 TrCmpAD R/W 0 484 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Trigger for Counter=Comparator A Up When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter matches the comparator A value and the counter is counting up. 10 TrCmpAU R/W 0 Trigger for Counter=Load When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter matches the PWMnLOAD register. 9 TrCntLoad R/W 0 Trigger for Counter=0 When 1, a trigger pulse is output when the counter is 0. 8 TrCntZero R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 7:6 reserved RO 0x0 Interrupt for Counter=Comparator B Down When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter matches the comparator B value and the counter is counting down. 5 IntCmpBD R/W 0 Interrupt for Counter=Comparator B Up When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter matches the comparator B value and the counter is counting up. 4 IntCmpBU R/W 0 Interrupt for Counter=Comparator A Down When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter matches the comparator A value and the counter is counting down. 3 IntCmpAD R/W 0 Interrupt for Counter=Comparator A Up When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter matches the comparator A value and the counter is counting up. 2 IntCmpAU R/W 0 Interrupt for Counter=Load When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter matches the PWMnLOAD register. 1 IntCntLoad R/W 0 Interrupt for Counter=0 When 1, an interrupt occurs when the counter is 0. 0 IntCntZero R/W 0 November 30, 2007 485 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 14: PWM0 Raw Interrupt Status (PWM0RIS), offset 0x048 Register 15: PWM1 Raw Interrupt Status (PWM1RIS), offset 0x088 These registers provide the current set of interrupt sources that are asserted, regardless of whether they cause an interrupt to be asserted to the controller (PWM0RIS controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). Bits set to 1 indicate the latched events that have occurred; a 0 bit indicates that the event in question has not occurred. PWM0 Raw Interrupt Status (PWM0RIS) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x048 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntCmpBDIntCmpBUIntCmpADIntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator B Down Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator B value while counting down. 5 IntCmpBD RO 0 Comparator B Up Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator B value while counting up. 4 IntCmpBU RO 0 Comparator A Down Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator A value while counting down. 3 IntCmpAD RO 0 Comparator A Up Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator A value while counting up. 2 IntCmpAU RO 0 Counter=Load Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched the PWMnLOAD register. 1 IntCntLoad RO 0 Counter=0 Interrupt Status Indicates that the counter has matched 0. 0 IntCntZero RO 0 486 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 16: PWM0 Interrupt Status and Clear (PWM0ISC), offset 0x04C Register 17: PWM1 Interrupt Status and Clear (PWM1ISC), offset 0x08C These registers provide the current set of interrupt sources that are asserted to the controller (PWM0ISC controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). Bits set to 1 indicate the latched events that have occurred; a 0 bit indicates that the event in question has not occurred. These are R/W1C registers; writing a 1 to a bit position clears the corresponding interrupt reason. PWM0 Interrupt Status and Clear (PWM0ISC) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x04C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntCmpBDIntCmpBUIntCmpADIntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator B Down Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator B value while counting down. 5 IntCmpBD R/W1C 0 Comparator B Up Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator B value while counting up. 4 IntCmpBU R/W1C 0 Comparator A Down Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator A value while counting down. 3 IntCmpAD R/W1C 0 Comparator A Up Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched the comparator A value while counting up. 2 IntCmpAU R/W1C 0 Counter=Load Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched the PWMnLOAD register. 1 IntCntLoad R/W1C 0 Counter=0 Interrupt Indicates that the counter has matched 0. 0 IntCntZero R/W1C 0 November 30, 2007 487 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 18: PWM0 Load (PWM0LOAD), offset 0x050 Register 19: PWM1 Load (PWM1LOAD), offset 0x090 These registers contain the load value for the PWM counter (PWM0LOAD controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). Based on the counter mode, either this value is loaded into the counter after it reaches zero, or it is the limit of up-counting after which the counter decrements back to zero. If the Load Value Update mode is immediate, this value is used the next time the counter reaches zero; if the mode is synchronous, it is used the next time the counter reaches zero after a synchronous update has been requested through the PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) register (see page 473). If this register is re-written before the actual update occurs, the previous value is never used and is lost. PWM0 Load (PWM0LOAD) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x050 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 Counter Load Value The counter load value. 15:0 Load R/W 0 488 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 20: PWM0 Counter (PWM0COUNT), offset 0x054 Register 21: PWM1 Counter (PWM1COUNT), offset 0x094 These registers contain the current value of the PWM counter (PWM0COUNT is the value of the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). When this value matches the load register, a pulse is output; this can drive the generation of a PWM signal (via the PWMnGENA/PWMnGENB registers, see page 492 and page 495) or drive an interrupt or ADC trigger (via the PWMnINTEN register, see page 484). A pulse with the same capabilities is generated when this value is zero. PWM0 Counter (PWM0COUNT) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x054 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Count Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 Counter Value The current value of the counter. 15:0 Count RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 489 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 22: PWM0 Compare A (PWM0CMPA), offset 0x058 Register 23: PWM1 Compare A (PWM1CMPA), offset 0x098 These registers contain a value to be compared against the counter (PWM0CMPA controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). When this value matches the counter, a pulse is output; this can drive the generation of a PWM signal (via the PWMnGENA/PWMnGENB registers) or drive an interrupt or ADC trigger (via the PWMnINTEN register). If the value of this register is greater than the PWMnLOAD register (see page 488), then no pulse is ever output. If the comparator A update mode is immediate (based on the CmpAUpd bit in the PWMnCTL register), then this 16-bit CompA value is used the next time the counter reaches zero. If the update mode is synchronous, it is used the next time the counter reaches zero after a synchronous update has been requested through the PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) register (see page 473). If this register is rewritten before the actual update occurs, the previous value is never used and is lost. PWM0 Compare A (PWM0CMPA) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x058 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CompA Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator A Value The value to be compared against the counter. 15:0 CompA R/W 0x00 490 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 24: PWM0 Compare B (PWM0CMPB), offset 0x05C Register 25: PWM1 Compare B (PWM1CMPB), offset 0x09C These registers contain a value to be compared against the counter (PWM0CMPB controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). When this value matches the counter, a pulse is output; this can drive the generation of a PWM signal (via the PWMnGENA/PWMnGENB registers) or drive an interrupt or ADC trigger (via the PWMnINTEN register). If the value of this register is greater than the PWMnLOAD register, then no pulse is ever output. IF the comparator B update mode is immediate (based on the CmpBUpd bit in the PWMnCTL register), then this 16-bit CompB value is used the next time the counter reaches zero. If the update mode is synchronous, it is used the next time the counter reaches zero after a synchronous update has been requested through the PWM Master Control (PWMCTL) register (see page 473). If this register is rewritten before the actual update occurs, the previous value is never used and is lost. PWM0 Compare B (PWM0CMPB) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x05C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CompB Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:16 reserved RO 0x00 Comparator B Value The value to be compared against the counter. 15:0 CompB R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 491 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 26: PWM0 Generator A Control (PWM0GENA), offset 0x060 Register 27: PWM1 Generator A Control (PWM1GENA), offset 0x0A0 These registers control the generation of the PWMnA signal based on the load and zero output pulses from the counter, as well as the compare A and compare B pulses from the comparators (PWM0GENA controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). When the counter is running in Count-Down mode, only four of these events occur; when running in Count-Up/Down mode, all six occur. These events provide great flexibility in the positioning and duty cycle of the PWM signal that is produced. The PWM0GENA register controls generation of the PWM0A signal; PWM1GENA, the PWM1A signal. If a zero or load event coincides with a compare A or compare B event, the zero or load action is taken and the compare A or compare B action is ignored. If a compare A event coincides with a compare B event, the compare A action is taken and the compare B action is ignored. PWM0 Generator A Control (PWM0GENA) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x060 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0x00 Action for Comparator B Down The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator B while counting down. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 11:10 ActCmpBD R/W 0x0 492 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Action for Comparator B Up The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator B while counting up. Occurs only when the Mode bit in the PWMnCTL register (see page 482) is set to 1. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 9:8 ActCmpBU R/W 0x0 Action for Comparator A Down The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator A while counting down. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 7:6 ActCmpAD R/W 0x0 Action for Comparator A Up The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator A while counting up. Occurs only when the Mode bit in the PWMnCTL register is set to 1. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 5:4 ActCmpAU R/W 0x0 Action for Counter=Load The action to be taken when the counter matches the load value. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 3:2 ActLoad R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 493 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Action for Counter=0 The action to be taken when the counter is zero. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 1:0 ActZero R/W 0x0 494 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 28: PWM0 Generator B Control (PWM0GENB), offset 0x064 Register 29: PWM1 Generator B Control (PWM1GENB), offset 0x0A4 These registers control the generation of the PWMnB signal based on the load and zero output pulses from the counter, as well as the compare A and compare B pulses from the comparators (PWM0GENB controls the PWM generator 0 block, and so on). When the counter is running in Down mode, only four of these events occur; when running in Up/Down mode, all six occur. These events provide great flexibility in the positioning and duty cycle of the PWM signal that is produced. The PWM0GENB register controls generation of the PWM0B signal; PWM1GENB, the PWM1B signal. If a zero or load event coincides with a compare A or compare B event, the zero or load action is taken and the compare A or compare B action is ignored. If a compare A event coincides with a compare B event, the compare B action is taken and the compare A action is ignored. PWM0 Generator B Control (PWM0GENB) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x064 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0x00 Action for Comparator B Down The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator B while counting down. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 11:10 ActCmpBD R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 495 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Action for Comparator B Up The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator B while counting up. Occurs only when the Mode bit in the PWMnCTL register is set to 1. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 9:8 ActCmpBU R/W 0x0 Action for Comparator A Down The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator A while counting down. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 7:6 ActCmpAD R/W 0x0 Action for Comparator A Up The action to be taken when the counter matches comparator A while counting up. Occurs only when the Mode bit in the PWMnCTL register is set to 1. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 5:4 ActCmpAU R/W 0x0 Action for Counter=Load The action to be taken when the counter matches the load value. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 3:2 ActLoad R/W 0x0 496 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Action for Counter=0 The action to be taken when the counter is 0. The table below defines the effect of the event on the output signal. Value Description 0x0 Do nothing. 0x1 Invert the output signal. 0x2 Set the output signal to 0. 0x3 Set the output signal to 1. 1:0 ActZero R/W 0x0 November 30, 2007 497 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 30: PWM0 Dead-Band Control (PWM0DBCTL), offset 0x068 Register 31: PWM1 Dead-Band Control (PWM1DBCTL), offset 0x0A8 The PWM0DBCTL register controls the dead-band generator, which produces the PWM0 and PWM1 signals based on the PWM0A and PWM0B signals. When disabled, the PWM0A signal passes through to the PWM0 signal and the PWM0B signal passes through to the PWM1 signal. When enabled and inverting the resulting waveform, the PWM0B signal is ignored; the PWM0 signal is generated by delaying the rising edge(s) of the PWM0A signal by the value in the PWM0DBRISE register (see page 499), and the PWM1 signal is generated by delaying the falling edge(s) of the PWM0A signal by the value in the PWM0DBFALL register (see page 500). In a similar manner, PWM2 and PWM3 are produced from the PWM1A and PWM1B signals. PWM0 Dead-Band Control (PWM0DBCTL) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x068 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved Enable Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:1 reserved RO 0x00 Dead-Band Generator Enable When set, the dead-band generator inserts dead bands into the output signals; when clear, it simply passes the PWM signals through. 0 Enable R/W 0 498 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Register 32: PWM0 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay (PWM0DBRISE), offset 0x06C Register 33: PWM1 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay (PWM1DBRISE), offset 0x0AC The PWM0DBRISE register contains the number of clock ticks to delay the rising edge of the PWM0A signal when generating the PWM0 signal. If the dead-band generator is disabled through the PWMnDBCTL register, the PWM0DBRISE register is ignored. If the value of this register is larger than the width of a High pulse on the input PWM signal, the rising-edge delay consumes the entire High time of the signal, resulting in no High time on the output. Care must be taken to ensure that the input High time always exceeds the rising-edge delay. In a similar manner, PWM2 is generated from PWM1A with its rising edge delayed. PWM0 Dead-Band Rising-Edge Delay (PWM0DBRISE) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x06C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved RiseDelay Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0x00 Dead-Band Rise Delay The number of clock ticks to delay the rising edge. 11:0 RiseDelay R/W 0 November 30, 2007 499 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 34: PWM0 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay (PWM0DBFALL), offset 0x070 Register 35: PWM1 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay (PWM1DBFALL), offset 0x0B0 The PWM0DBFALL register contains the number of clock ticks to delay the falling edge of the PWM0A signal when generating the PWM1 signal. If the dead-band generator is disabled, this register is ignored. If the value of this register is larger than the width of a Low pulse on the input PWM signal, the falling-edge delay consumes the entire Low time of the signal, resulting in no Low time on the output. Care must be taken to ensure that the input Low time always exceeds the falling-edge delay. In a similar manner, PWM3 is generated from PWM1A with its falling edge delayed. PWM0 Dead-Band Falling-Edge-Delay (PWM0DBFALL) Base 0x4002.8000 Offset 0x070 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved FallDelay Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:12 reserved RO 0x00 Dead-Band Fall Delay The number of clock ticks to delay the falling edge. 11:0 FallDelay R/W 0x00 500 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) 19 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) A quadrature encoder, also known as a 2-channel incremental encoder, converts linear displacement into a pulse signal. By monitoring both the number of pulses and the relative phase of the two signals, you can track the position, direction of rotation, and speed. In addition, a third channel, or index signal, can be used to reset the position counter. The Stellaris® quadrature encoder interface (QEI) module interprets the code produced by a quadrature encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In addition, it can capture a running estimate of the velocity of the encoder wheel. The Stellaris® quadrature encoder has the following features: ■ Position integrator that tracks the encoder position ■ Velocity capture using built-in timer ■ Interrupt generation on: – Index pulse – Velocity-timer expiration – Direction change – Quadrature error detection 19.1 Block Diagram Figure 19-1 on page 501 provides a block diagram of a Stellaris® QEI module. Figure 19-1. QEI Block Diagram Quadrature Encoder Velocity Predivider Interrupt Control QEIINTEN QEIRIS QEIISC Position Integrator QEIMAXPOS QEIPOS Velocity Accumulator QEICOUNT QEISPEED Velocity Timer QEILOAD QEITIME PhA PhB IDX clk dir Interrupt Control & Status QEICTL QEISTAT November 30, 2007 501 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 19.2 Functional Description The QEI module interprets the two-bit gray code produced by a quadrature encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In addition, it can capture a running estimate of the velocity of the encoder wheel. The position integrator and velocity capture can be independently enabled, though the position integrator must be enabled before the velocity capture can be enabled. The two phase signals, PhA and PhB, can be swapped before being interpreted by the QEI module to change the meaning of forward and backward, and to correct for miswiring of the system. Alternatively, the phase signals can be interpreted as a clock and direction signal as output by some encoders. The QEI module supports two modes of signal operation: quadrature phase mode and clock/direction mode. In quadrature phase mode, the encoder produces two clocks that are 90 degrees out of phase; the edge relationship is used to determine the direction of rotation. In clock/direction mode, the encoder produces a clock signal to indicate steps and a direction signal to indicate the direction of rotation. This mode is determined by the SigMode bit of the QEI Control (QEICTL) register (see page 506). When the QEI module is set to use the quadrature phase mode (SigMode bit equals zero), the capture mode for the position integrator can be set to update the position counter on every edge of the PhA signal or to update on every edge of both PhA and PhB. Updating the position counter on every PhA and PhB provides more positional resolution at the cost of less range in the positional counter. When edges on PhA lead edges on PhB , the position counter is incremented. When edges on PhB lead edges on PhA , the position counter is decremented. When a rising and falling edge pair is seen on one of the phases without any edges on the other, the direction of rotation has changed. The positional counter is automatically reset on one of two conditions: sensing the index pulse or reaching the maximum position value. Which mode is determined by the ResMode bit of the QEI Control (QEICTL) register. When ResMode is 0, the positional counter is reset when the index pulse is sensed. This limits the positional counter to the values [0:N-1], where N is the number of phase edges in a full revolution of the encoder wheel. The QEIMAXPOS register must be programmed with N-1 so that the reverse direction from position 0 can move the position counter to N-1. In this mode, the position register contains the absolute position of the encoder relative to the index (or home) position once an index pulse has been seen. When ResMode is 1, the positional counter is constrained to the range [0:M], where M is the programmable maximum value. The index pulse is ignored by the positional counter in this mode. The velocity capture has a configurable timer and a count register. It counts the number of phase edges (using the same configuration as for the position integrator) in a given time period. The edge count from the previous time period is available to the controller via the QEISPEED register, while the edge count for the current time period is being accumulated in the QEICOUNT register. As soon as the current time period is complete, the total number of edges counted in that time period is made available in the QEISPEED register (losing the previous value), the QEICOUNT is reset to 0, and counting commences on a new time period. The number of edges counted in a given time period is directly proportional to the velocity of the encoder. Figure 19-2 on page 503 shows how the Stellaris® quadrature encoder converts the phase input signals into clock pulses, the direction signal, and how the velocity predivider operates (in Divide by 4 mode). 502 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Figure 19-2. Quadrature Encoder and Velocity Predivider Operation -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 PhA PhB clk clkdiv dir pos rel The period of the timer is configurable by specifying the load value for the timer in the QEILOAD register. When the timer reaches zero, an interrupt can be triggered, and the hardware reloads the timer with the QEILOAD value and continues to count down. At lower encoder speeds, a longer timer period is needed to be able to capture enough edges to have a meaningful result. At higher encoder speeds, both a shorter timer period and/or the velocity predivider can be used. The following equation converts the velocity counter value into an rpm value: rpm = (clock * (2 ^ VelDiv) * Speed * 60) ÷ (Load * ppr * edges) where: clock is the controller clock rate ppr is the number of pulses per revolution of the physical encoder edges is 2 or 4, based on the capture mode set in the QEICTL register (2 for CapMode set to 0 and 4 for CapMode set to 1) For example, consider a motor running at 600 rpm. A 2048 pulse per revolution quadrature encoder is attached to the motor, producing 8192 phase edges per revolution. With a velocity predivider of ÷1 (VelDiv set to 0) and clocking on both PhA and PhB edges, this results in 81,920 pulses per second (the motor turns 10 times per second). If the timer were clocked at 10,000 Hz, and the load value was 2,500 (¼ of a second), it would count 20,480 pulses per update. Using the above equation: rpm = (10000 * 1 * 20480 * 60) ÷ (2500 * 2048 * 4) = 600 rpm Now, consider that the motor is sped up to 3000 rpm. This results in 409,600 pulses per second, or 102,400 every ¼ of a second. Again, the above equation gives: rpm = (10000 * 1 * 102400 * 60) ÷ (2500 * 2048 * 4) = 3000 rpm Care must be taken when evaluating this equation since intermediate values may exceed the capacity of a 32-bit integer. In the above examples, the clock is 10,000 and the divider is 2,500; both could be predivided by 100 (at compile time if they are constants) and therefore be 100 and 25. In fact, if they were compile-time constants, they could also be reduced to a simple multiply by 4, cancelled by the ÷4 for the edge-count factor. Important: Reducing constant factors at compile time is the best way to control the intermediate values of this equation, as well as reducing the processing requirement of computing this equation. The division can be avoided by selecting a timer load value such that the divisor is a power of 2; a simple shift can therefore be done in place of the division. For encoders with a power of 2 pulses per revolution, this is a simple matter of selecting a power of 2 load value. For other encoders, a load value must be selected such that the product is very close to a power of two. For example, a 100 pulse per revolution encoder could use a load value of 82, resulting in 32,800 as the divisor, November 30, 2007 503 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller which is 0.09% above 214; in this case a shift by 15 would be an adequate approximation of the divide in most cases. If absolute accuracy were required, the controller’s divide instruction could be used. The QEI module can produce a controller interrupt on several events: phase error, direction change, reception of the index pulse, and expiration of the velocity timer. Standard masking, raw interrupt status, interrupt status, and interrupt clear capabilities are provided. 19.3 Initialization and Configuration The following example shows how to configure the Quadrature Encoder module to read back an absolute position: 1. Enable the QEI clock by writing a value of 0x0000.0100 to the RCGC1 register in the System Control module. 2. Enable the clock to the appropriate GPIO module via the RCGC2 register in the System Control module. 3. In the GPIO module, enable the appropriate pins for their alternate function using the GPIOAFSEL register. 4. Configure the quadrature encoder to capture edges on both signals and maintain an absolute position by resetting on index pulses. Using a 1000-line encoder at four edges per line, there are 4000 pulses per revolution; therefore, set the maximum position to 3999 (0xF9F) since the count is zero-based. ■ Write the QEICTL register with the value of 0x0000.0018. ■ Write the QEIMAXPOS register with the value of 0x0000.0F9F. 5. Enable the quadrature encoder by setting bit 0 of the QEICTL register. 6. Delay for some time. 7. Read the encoder position by reading the QEIPOS register value. 19.4 Register Map Table 19-1 on page 504 lists the QEI registers. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the module’s base address: ■ QEI0: 0x4002.C000 Table 19-1. QEI Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 QEICTL R/W 0x0000.0000 QEI Control 506 0x004 QEISTAT RO 0x0000.0000 QEI Status 508 0x008 QEIPOS R/W 0x0000.0000 QEI Position 509 0x00C QEIMAXPOS R/W 0x0000.0000 QEI Maximum Position 510 0x010 QEILOAD R/W 0x0000.0000 QEI Timer Load 511 504 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x014 QEITIME RO 0x0000.0000 QEI Timer 512 0x018 QEICOUNT RO 0x0000.0000 QEI Velocity Counter 513 0x01C QEISPEED RO 0x0000.0000 QEI Velocity 514 0x020 QEIINTEN R/W 0x0000.0000 QEI Interrupt Enable 515 0x024 QEIRIS RO 0x0000.0000 QEI Raw Interrupt Status 516 0x028 QEIISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 QEI Interrupt Status and Clear 517 19.5 Register Descriptions The remainder of this section lists and describes the QEI registers, in numerical order by address offset. November 30, 2007 505 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 1: QEI Control (QEICTL), offset 0x000 This register contains the configuration of the QEI module. Separate enables are provided for the quadrature encoder and the velocity capture blocks; the quadrature encoder must be enabled in order to capture the velocity, but the velocity does not need to be captured in applications that do not need it. The phase signal interpretation, phase swap, Position Update mode, Position Reset mode, and velocity predivider are all set via this register. QEI Control (QEICTL) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x000 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved STALLEN INVI INVB INVA VelDiv VelEn ResMode CapMode SigMode Swap Enable Type RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:13 reserved RO 0x00 Stall QEI When set, the QEI stalls when the microcontroller asserts Halt. 12 STALLEN R/W 0 Invert Index Pulse When set , the input Index Pulse is inverted. 11 INVI R/W 0 Invert PhB When set, the PhB input is inverted. 10 INVB R/W 0 Invert PhA When set, the PhA input is inverted. 9 INVA R/W 0 Predivide Velocity A predivider of the input quadrature pulses before being applied to the QEICOUNT accumulator. This field can be set to the following values: Value Predivider 0x0 ÷1 0x1 ÷2 0x2 ÷4 0x3 ÷8 0x4 ÷16 0x5 ÷32 0x6 ÷64 0x7 ÷128 8:6 VelDiv R/W 0x0 506 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Capture Velocity When set, enables capture of the velocity of the quadrature encoder. 5 VelEn R/W 0 Reset Mode The Reset mode for the position counter. When 0, the position counter is reset when it reaches the maximum; when 1, the position counter is reset when the index pulse is captured. 4 ResMode R/W 0 Capture Mode The Capture mode defines the phase edges that are counted in the position. When 0, only the PhA edges are counted; when 1, the PhA and PhB edges are counted, providing twice the positional resolution but half the range. 3 CapMode R/W 0 Signal Mode When 1, the PhA and PhB signals are clock and direction; when 0, they are quadrature phase signals. 2 SigMode R/W 0 Swap Signals Swaps the PhA and PhB signals. 1 Swap R/W 0 Enable QEI Enables the quadrature encoder module. 0 Enable R/W 0 November 30, 2007 507 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 2: QEI Status (QEISTAT), offset 0x004 This register provides status about the operation of the QEI module. QEI Status (QEISTAT) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x004 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved Direction Error Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x00 Direction of Rotation Indicates the direction the encoder is rotating. The Direction values are defined as follows: Value Description 0 Forward rotation 1 Reverse rotation 1 Direction RO 0 Error Detected Indicates that an error was detected in the gray code sequence (that is, both signals changing at the same time). 0 Error RO 0 508 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Register 3: QEI Position (QEIPOS), offset 0x008 This register contains the current value of the position integrator. Its value is updated by inputs on the QEI phase inputs, and can be set to a specific value by writing to it. QEI Position (QEIPOS) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x008 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Position Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Position Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Current Position Integrator Value The current value of the position integrator. 31:0 Position R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 509 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 4: QEI Maximum Position (QEIMAXPOS), offset 0x00C This register contains the maximum value of the position integrator. When moving forward, the position register resets to zero when it increments past this value. When moving backward, the position register resets to this value when it decrements from zero. QEI Maximum Position (QEIMAXPOS) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x00C Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 MaxPos Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MaxPos Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Maximum Position Integrator Value The maximum value of the position integrator. 31:0 MaxPos R/W 0x00 510 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Register 5: QEI Timer Load (QEILOAD), offset 0x010 This register contains the load value for the velocity timer. Since this value is loaded into the timer the clock cycle after the timer is zero, this value should be one less than the number of clocks in the desired period. So, for example, to have 2000 clocks per timer period, this register should contain 1999. QEI Timer Load (QEILOAD) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x010 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Load Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Velocity Timer Load Value The load value for the velocity timer. 31:0 Load R/W 0x00 November 30, 2007 511 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 6: QEI Timer (QEITIME), offset 0x014 This register contains the current value of the velocity timer. This counter does not increment when VelEn in QEICTL is 0. QEI Timer (QEITIME) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x014 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Time Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Time Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Velocity Timer Current Value The current value of the velocity timer. 31:0 Time RO 0x00 512 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Register 7: QEI Velocity Counter (QEICOUNT), offset 0x018 This register contains the running count of velocity pulses for the current time period. Since this is a running total, the time period to which it applies cannot be known with precision (that is, a read of this register does not necessarily correspond to the time returned by the QEITIME register since there is a small window of time between the two reads, during which time either value may have changed). The QEISPEED register should be used to determine the actual encoder velocity; this register is provided for information purposes only. This counter does not increment when VelEn in QEICTL is 0. QEI Velocity Counter (QEICOUNT) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x018 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Count Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Count Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Velocity Pulse Count The running total of encoder pulses during this velocity timer period. 31:0 Count RO 0x00 November 30, 2007 513 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 8: QEI Velocity (QEISPEED), offset 0x01C This register contains the most recently measured velocity of the quadrature encoder. This corresponds to the number of velocity pulses counted in the previous velocity timer period. This register does not update when VelEn in QEICTL is 0. QEI Velocity (QEISPEED) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x01C Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Speed Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Speed Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Velocity The measured speed of the quadrature encoder in pulses per period. 31:0 Speed RO 0x00 514 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Register 9: QEI Interrupt Enable (QEIINTEN), offset 0x020 This register contains enables for each of the QEI module’s interrupts. An interrupt is asserted to the controller if its corresponding bit in this register is set to 1. QEI Interrupt Enable (QEIINTEN) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x020 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 Phase Error Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when a phase error is detected. 3 IntError R/W 0 Direction Change Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the direction changes. 2 IntDir R/W 0 Timer Expires Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the velocity timer expires. 1 IntTimer R/W 0 Index Pulse Detected Interrupt Enable When 1, an interrupt occurs when the index pulse is detected. 0 IntIndex R/W 0 November 30, 2007 515 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Register 10: QEI Raw Interrupt Status (QEIRIS), offset 0x024 This register provides the current set of interrupt sources that are asserted, regardless of whether they cause an interrupt to be asserted to the controller (this is set through the QEIINTEN register). Bits set to 1 indicate the latched events that have occurred; a zero bit indicates that the event in question has not occurred. QEI Raw Interrupt Status (QEIRIS) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x024 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 Phase Error Detected Indicates that a phase error was detected. 3 IntError RO 0 Direction Change Detected Indicates that the direction has changed. 2 IntDir RO 0 Velocity Timer Expired Indicates that the velocity timer has expired. 1 IntTimer RO 0 Index Pulse Asserted Indicates that the index pulse has occurred. 0 IntIndex RO 0 516 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) Register 11: QEI Interrupt Status and Clear (QEIISC), offset 0x028 This register provides the current set of interrupt sources that are asserted to the controller. Bits set to 1 indicate the latched events that have occurred; a zero bit indicates that the event in question has not occurred. This is a R/W1C register; writing a 1 to a bit position clears the corresponding interrupt reason. QEI Interrupt Status and Clear (QEIISC) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 Offset 0x028 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C R/W1C Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:4 reserved RO 0x00 Phase Error Interrupt Indicates that a phase error was detected. 3 IntError R/W1C 0 Direction Change Interrupt Indicates that the direction has changed. 2 IntDir R/W1C 0 Velocity Timer Expired Interrupt Indicates that the velocity timer has expired. 1 IntTimer R/W1C 0 Index Pulse Interrupt Indicates that the index pulse has occurred. 0 IntIndex R/W1C 0 November 30, 2007 517 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 20 Pin Diagram Figure 20-1 on page 518 shows the pin diagram and pin-to-signal-name mapping. Figure 20-1. Pin Connection Diagram LM3S6952 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 75 26 100 2 27 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 9 10 99 28 98 29 97 30 96 31 95 32 94 33 93 34 92 35 91 36 90 73 72 74 71 69 68 70 67 65 66 12 13 14 17 18 15 16 19 20 23 21 22 24 25 64 37 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 63 61 60 62 59 57 56 58 55 53 54 52 51 ADC0 ADC1 VDDA GNDA ADC2 PE4 LDO VDD GND PD0/PWM0 PD1/PWM1 PD2/U1Rx PD3/U1Tx VDD25 GND XTALPPHY XTALNPHY PG1/U2Tx PG0/U2Rx VDD GND PC7/C2- PC6/C2+ PC5/C1+/C1o PC4/PhA0 PA0/U0Rx PA1/U0Tx PA2/SSI0Clk PA3/SSI0Fss PA4/SSI0Rx PA5/SSI0Tx VDD GND PA6/CCP1 PA7 VCCPHY RXIN VDD25 GND RXIP GNDPHY GNDPHY TXOP VDD GND TXON PF0/PhB0 OSC0 OSC1 WAKE HIB XOSC0 XOSC1 GND VBAT VDD GND MDIO PF3/LED0 PF2/LED1 PF1 VDD25 GND RST CMOD0 PB0/PWM2 PB1/PWM3 VDD GND PB2/I2C0SCL PB3/I2C0SDA PE0/CCP3 PE1 PE2 PE3 CMOD1 PC3/TDO/SWO PC2/TDI PC1/TMS/SWDIO PC0/TCK/SWCLK VDD GND VCCPHY VCCPHY GNDPHY GNDPHY GND VDD25 PB7/TRST PB6/C0+/C0o PB5/C1- PB4/C0- VDD GND PD4/CCP0 PD5/CCP2 GNDA VDDA PD6/Fault PD7/IDX0 518 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Pin Diagram 21 Signal Tables The following tables list the signals available for each pin. Functionality is enabled by software with the GPIOAFSEL register. Important: All multiplexed pins are GPIOs by default, with the exception of the five JTAG pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]) which default to the JTAG functionality. Table 21-1 on page 519 shows the pin-to-signal-name mapping, including functional characteristics of the signals. Table 21-2 on page 523 lists the signals in alphabetical order by signal name. Table 21-3 on page 527 groups the signals by functionality, except for GPIOs. Table 21-4 on page 531 lists the GPIO pins and their alternate functionality. Table 21-1. Signals by Pin Number Pin Number Pin Name Pin Type Buffer Type Description 1 ADC0 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 0. 2 ADC1 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 1. The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. 3 VDDA - Power The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. 4 GNDA - Power 5 ADC2 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 2. 6 PE4 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 4 Low drop-out regulator output voltage. This pin requires an external capacitor between the pin and GND of 1 μF or greater. When the on-chip LDO is used to provide power to the logic, the LDO pin must also be connected to the VDD25 pins at the board level in addition to the decoupling capacitor(s). 7 LDO - Power 8 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 9 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 10 PD0 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 0 PWM0 O TTL PWM 0 11 PD1 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 1 PWM1 O TTL PWM 1 12 PD2 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 2 UART module 1 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Rx I TTL 13 PD3 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 3 UART module 1 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Tx O TTL November 30, 2007 519 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Pin Number Pin Name Pin Type Buffer Type Description Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. 14 VDD25 - Power 15 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 16 XTALPPHY O TTL XTALP of the Ethernet PHY 17 XTALNPHY I TTL XTALN of the Ethernet PHY 18 PG1 I/O TTL GPIO port G bit 1 UART 2 Transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Tx O TTL 19 PG0 I/O TTL GPIO port G bit 0 UART 2 Receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Rx I TTL 20 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 21 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 22 PC7 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 7 C2- I Analog Analog comparator 2 negative input 23 PC6 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 6 C2+ I Analog Analog comparator positive input 24 PC5 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 5 C1+ I Analog Analog comparator positive input C1o O TTL Analog comparator 1 output 25 PC4 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 4 PhA0 I TTL QEI module 0 Phase A 26 PA0 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 0 UART module 0 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U0Rx I TTL 27 PA1 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 1 UART module 0 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U0Tx O TTL 28 PA2 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 2 SSI0Clk I/O TTL SSI module 0 clock 29 PA3 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 3 SSI0Fss I/O TTL SSI module 0 frame 30 PA4 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 4 SSI0Rx I TTL SSI module 0 receive 31 PA5 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 5 SSI0Tx O TTL SSI module 0 transmit 32 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 33 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 34 PA6 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 6 CCP1 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 1 35 PA7 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 7 36 VCCPHY I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY 37 RXIN I Analog RXIN of the Ethernet PHY 520 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Pin Number Pin Name Pin Type Buffer Type Description Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. 38 VDD25 - Power 39 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 40 RXIP I Analog RXIP of the Ethernet PHY 41 GNDPHY I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY 42 GNDPHY I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY 43 TXOP O Analog TXOP of the Ethernet PHY 44 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 45 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 46 TXON O Analog TXON of the Ethernet PHY 47 PF0 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 0 PhB0 I TTL QEI module 1 Phase B Main oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. 48 OSC0 I Analog 49 OSC1 I Analog Main oscillator crystal output. An external input that brings the processor out of hibernate mode when asserted. 50 WAKE I OD An output that indicates the processor is in hibernate mode. 51 HIB O TTL Hibernation Module oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. Note that this is either a 4.19-MHz crystal or a 32.768-kHz oscillator for the Hibernation Module RTC. See the CLKSEL bit in the HIBCTL register. 52 XOSC0 I Analog 53 XOSC1 I Analog Hibernation Module oscillator crystal output. 54 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. Power source for the Hibernation Module. It is normally connected to the positive terminal of a battery and serves as the battery backup/Hibernation Module power-source supply. 55 VBAT - Power 56 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 57 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 58 MDIO I/O TTL MDIO of the Ethernet PHY 59 PF3 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 3 LED0 O TTL MII LED 0 60 PF2 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 2 LED1 O TTL MII LED 1 61 PF1 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 1 Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. 62 VDD25 - Power 63 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 64 RST I TTL System reset input. CPU Mode bit 0. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. 65 CMOD0 I/O TTL November 30, 2007 521 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Pin Number Pin Name Pin Type Buffer Type Description 66 PB0 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 0 PWM2 O TTL PWM 2 67 PB1 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 1 PWM3 O TTL PWM 3 68 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 69 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 70 PB2 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 2 I2C0SCL I/O OD I2C module 0 clock 71 PB3 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 3 I2C0SDA I/O OD I2C module 0 data 72 PE0 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 0 CCP3 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 3 73 PE1 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 1 74 PE2 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 2 75 PE3 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 3 CPU Mode bit 1. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. 76 CMOD1 I/O TTL 77 PC3 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 3 TDO O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO SWO O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO 78 PC2 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 2 TDI I TTL JTAG TDI 79 PC1 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 1 TMS I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO SWDIO I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO 80 PC0 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 0 TCK I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK SWCLK I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK 81 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 82 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 83 VCCPHY I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY 84 VCCPHY I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY 85 GNDPHY I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY 86 GNDPHY I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY 87 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. 88 VDD25 - Power 89 PB7 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 7 TRST I TTL JTAG TRSTn 90 PB6 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 6 C0+ I Analog Analog comparator 0 positive input C0o O TTL Analog comparator 0 output 522 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Pin Number Pin Name Pin Type Buffer Type Description 91 PB5 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 5 C1- I Analog Analog comparator 1 negative input 92 PB4 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 4 C0- I Analog Analog comparator 0 negative input 93 VDD - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 94 GND - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 95 PD4 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 4 CCP0 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 0 96 PD5 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 5 CCP2 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 2 The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. 97 GNDA - Power The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. 98 VDDA - Power 99 PD6 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 6 Fault I TTL PWM Fault 100 PD7 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 7 IDX0 I TTL QEI module 0 index Table 21-2. Signals by Signal Name Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description ADC0 1 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 0. ADC1 2 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 1. ADC2 5 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 2. C0+ 90 I Analog Analog comparator 0 positive input C0- 92 I Analog Analog comparator 0 negative input C0o 90 O TTL Analog comparator 0 output C1+ 24 I Analog Analog comparator positive input C1- 91 I Analog Analog comparator 1 negative input C1o 24 O TTL Analog comparator 1 output C2+ 23 I Analog Analog comparator positive input C2- 22 I Analog Analog comparator 2 negative input CCP0 95 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 0 CCP1 34 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 1 CCP2 96 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 2 CCP3 72 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 3 CPU Mode bit 0. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. CMOD0 65 I/O TTL November 30, 2007 523 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description CPU Mode bit 1. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. CMOD1 76 I/O TTL Fault 99 I TTL PWM Fault GND 9 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 15 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 21 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 33 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 39 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 45 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 54 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 57 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 63 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 69 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 82 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 87 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 94 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. GNDA 4 - Power The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. GNDA 97 - Power GNDPHY 41 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 42 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 85 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 86 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY An output that indicates the processor is in hibernate mode. HIB 51 O TTL I2C0SCL 70 I/O OD I2C module 0 clock I2C0SDA 71 I/O OD I2C module 0 data IDX0 100 I TTL QEI module 0 index Low drop-out regulator output voltage. This pin requires an external capacitor between the pin and GND of 1 μF or greater. When the on-chip LDO is used to provide power to the logic, the LDO pin must also be connected to the VDD25 pins at the board level in addition to the decoupling capacitor(s). LDO 7 - Power LED0 59 O TTL MII LED 0 LED1 60 O TTL MII LED 1 MDIO 58 I/O TTL MDIO of the Ethernet PHY Main oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. OSC0 48 I Analog OSC1 49 I Analog Main oscillator crystal output. 524 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description PA0 26 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 0 PA1 27 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 1 PA2 28 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 2 PA3 29 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 3 PA4 30 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 4 PA5 31 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 5 PA6 34 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 6 PA7 35 I/O TTL GPIO port A bit 7 PB0 66 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 0 PB1 67 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 1 PB2 70 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 2 PB3 71 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 3 PB4 92 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 4 PB5 91 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 5 PB6 90 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 6 PB7 89 I/O TTL GPIO port B bit 7 PC0 80 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 0 PC1 79 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 1 PC2 78 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 2 PC3 77 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 3 PC4 25 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 4 PC5 24 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 5 PC6 23 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 6 PC7 22 I/O TTL GPIO port C bit 7 PD0 10 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 0 PD1 11 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 1 PD2 12 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 2 PD3 13 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 3 PD4 95 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 4 PD5 96 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 5 PD6 99 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 6 PD7 100 I/O TTL GPIO port D bit 7 PE0 72 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 0 PE1 73 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 1 PE2 74 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 2 PE3 75 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 3 PE4 6 I/O TTL GPIO port E bit 4 PF0 47 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 0 PF1 61 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 1 PF2 60 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 2 PF3 59 I/O TTL GPIO port F bit 3 PG0 19 I/O TTL GPIO port G bit 0 November 30, 2007 525 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description PG1 18 I/O TTL GPIO port G bit 1 PhA0 25 I TTL QEI module 0 Phase A PhB0 47 I TTL QEI module 1 Phase B PWM0 10 O TTL PWM 0 PWM1 11 O TTL PWM 1 PWM2 66 O TTL PWM 2 PWM3 67 O TTL PWM 3 RST 64 I TTL System reset input. RXIN 37 I Analog RXIN of the Ethernet PHY RXIP 40 I Analog RXIP of the Ethernet PHY SSI0Clk 28 I/O TTL SSI module 0 clock SSI0Fss 29 I/O TTL SSI module 0 frame SSI0Rx 30 I TTL SSI module 0 receive SSI0Tx 31 O TTL SSI module 0 transmit SWCLK 80 I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK SWDIO 79 I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO SWO 77 O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO TCK 80 I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK TDI 78 I TTL JTAG TDI TDO 77 O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO TMS 79 I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO TRST 89 I TTL JTAG TRSTn TXON 46 O Analog TXON of the Ethernet PHY TXOP 43 O Analog TXOP of the Ethernet PHY UART module 0 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U0Rx 26 I TTL UART module 0 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U0Tx 27 O TTL UART module 1 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Rx 12 I TTL UART module 1 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Tx 13 O TTL UART 2 Receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Rx 19 I TTL UART 2 Transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Tx 18 O TTL Power source for the Hibernation Module. It is normally connected to the positive terminal of a battery and serves as the battery backup/Hibernation Module power-source supply. VBAT 55 - Power VCCPHY 36 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY VCCPHY 83 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY VCCPHY 84 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY VDD 8 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 20 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. 526 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description VDD 32 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 44 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 56 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 68 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 81 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 93 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 14 - Power Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 38 - Power Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 62 - Power Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 88 - Power The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. VDDA 3 - Power The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. VDDA 98 - Power An external input that brings the processor out of hibernate mode when asserted. WAKE 50 I OD Hibernation Module oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. Note that this is either a 4.19-MHz crystal or a 32.768-kHz oscillator for the Hibernation Module RTC. See the CLKSEL bit in the HIBCTL register. XOSC0 52 I Analog XOSC1 53 I Analog Hibernation Module oscillator crystal output. XTALNPHY 17 I TTL XTALN of the Ethernet PHY XTALPPHY 16 O TTL XTALP of the Ethernet PHY Table 21-3. Signals by Function, Except for GPIO Buffer Description Type Pin Pin Type Number Function Pin Name ADC ADC0 1 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 0. ADC1 2 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 1. ADC2 5 I Analog Analog-to-digital converter input 2. November 30, 2007 527 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Buffer Description Type Pin Pin Type Number Function Pin Name Analog C0+ 90 I Analog Analog comparator 0 positive input Comparators C0- 92 I Analog Analog comparator 0 negative input C0o 90 O TTL Analog comparator 0 output C1+ 24 I Analog Analog comparator positive input C1- 91 I Analog Analog comparator 1 negative input C1o 24 O TTL Analog comparator 1 output C2+ 23 I Analog Analog comparator positive input C2- 22 I Analog Analog comparator 2 negative input Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 41 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 42 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 85 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY GNDPHY 86 I TTL GND of the Ethernet PHY LED0 59 O TTL MII LED 0 LED1 60 O TTL MII LED 1 MDIO 58 I/O TTL MDIO of the Ethernet PHY RXIN 37 I Analog RXIN of the Ethernet PHY RXIP 40 I Analog RXIP of the Ethernet PHY TXON 46 O Analog TXON of the Ethernet PHY TXOP 43 O Analog TXOP of the Ethernet PHY VCCPHY 36 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY VCCPHY 83 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY VCCPHY 84 I TTL VCC of the Ethernet PHY XTALNPHY 17 I TTL XTALN of the Ethernet PHY XTALPPHY 16 O TTL XTALP of the Ethernet PHY General-Purpose CCP0 95 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 0 Timers CCP1 34 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 1 CCP2 96 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 2 CCP3 72 I/O TTL Capture/Compare/PWM 3 I2C I2C0SCL 70 I/O OD I2C module 0 clock I2C0SDA 71 I/O OD I2C module 0 data JTAG/SWD/SWO SWCLK 80 I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK SWDIO 79 I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO SWO 77 O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO TCK 80 I TTL JTAG/SWD CLK TDI 78 I TTL JTAG TDI TDO 77 O TTL JTAG TDO and SWO TMS 79 I/O TTL JTAG TMS and SWDIO PWM Fault 99 I TTL PWM Fault PWM0 10 O TTL PWM 0 PWM1 11 O TTL PWM 1 PWM2 66 O TTL PWM 2 PWM3 67 O TTL PWM 3 528 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Buffer Description Type Pin Pin Type Number Function Pin Name Power GND 9 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 15 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 21 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 33 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 39 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 45 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 54 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 57 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 63 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 69 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 82 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 87 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. GND 94 - Power Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. GNDA 4 - Power The ground reference for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from GND to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. GNDA 97 - Power An output that indicates the processor is in hibernate mode. HIB 51 O TTL Low drop-out regulator output voltage. This pin requires an external capacitor between the pin and GND of 1 μF or greater. When the on-chip LDO is used to provide power to the logic, the LDO pin must also be connected to the VDD25 pins at the board level in addition to the decoupling capacitor(s). LDO 7 - Power Power source for the Hibernation Module. It is normally connected to the positive terminal of a battery and serves as the battery backup/Hibernation Module power-source supply. VBAT 55 - Power VDD 8 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 20 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 32 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 44 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 56 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 68 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 81 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. VDD 93 - Power Positive supply for I/O and some logic. Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 14 - Power Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 38 - Power Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. VDD25 62 - Power November 30, 2007 529 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Buffer Description Type Pin Pin Type Number Function Pin Name VDD25 Positive supply for most of the logic function, including the processor core and most peripherals. 88 - Power The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. VDDA 3 - Power The positive supply (3.3 V) for the analog circuits (ADC, Analog Comparators, etc.). These are separated from VDD to minimize the electrical noise contained on VDD from affecting the analog functions. VDDA 98 - Power An external input that brings the processor out of hibernate mode when asserted. WAKE 50 I OD QEI IDX0 100 I TTL QEI module 0 index PhA0 25 I TTL QEI module 0 Phase A PhB0 47 I TTL QEI module 1 Phase B SSI SSI0Clk 28 I/O TTL SSI module 0 clock SSI0Fss 29 I/O TTL SSI module 0 frame SSI0Rx 30 I TTL SSI module 0 receive SSI0Tx 31 O TTL SSI module 0 transmit CPU Mode bit 0. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. System Control & CMOD0 65 I/O TTL Clocks CPU Mode bit 1. Input must be set to logic 0 (grounded); other encodings reserved. CMOD1 76 I/O TTL Main oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. OSC0 48 I Analog OSC1 49 I Analog Main oscillator crystal output. RST 64 I TTL System reset input. TRST 89 I TTL JTAG TRSTn Hibernation Module oscillator crystal input or an external clock reference input. Note that this is either a 4.19-MHz crystal or a 32.768-kHz oscillator for the Hibernation Module RTC. See the CLKSEL bit in the HIBCTL register. XOSC0 52 I Analog XOSC1 53 I Analog Hibernation Module oscillator crystal output. UART module 0 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. UART U0Rx 26 I TTL UART module 0 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U0Tx 27 O TTL UART module 1 receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Rx 12 I TTL UART module 1 transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U1Tx 13 O TTL UART 2 Receive. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Rx 19 I TTL UART 2 Transmit. When in IrDA mode, this signal has IrDA modulation. U2Tx 18 O TTL 530 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables Table 21-4. GPIO Pins and Alternate Functions GPIO Pin Pin Number Multiplexed Function Multiplexed Function PA0 26 U0Rx PA1 27 U0Tx PA2 28 SSI0Clk PA3 29 SSI0Fss PA4 30 SSI0Rx PA5 31 SSI0Tx PA6 34 CCP1 PA7 35 PB0 66 PWM2 PB1 67 PWM3 PB2 70 I2C0SCL PB3 71 I2C0SDA PB4 92 C0- PB5 91 C1- PB6 90 C0+ C0o PB7 89 TRST PC0 80 TCK SWCLK PC1 79 TMS SWDIO PC2 78 TDI PC3 77 TDO SWO PC4 25 PhA0 PC5 24 C1+ C1o PC6 23 C2+ PC7 22 C2- PD0 10 PWM0 PD1 11 PWM1 PD2 12 U1Rx PD3 13 U1Tx PD4 95 CCP0 PD5 96 CCP2 PD6 99 Fault PD7 100 IDX0 PE0 72 CCP3 PE1 73 PE2 74 PE3 75 PE4 6 PF0 47 PhB0 PF1 61 PF2 60 LED1 PF3 59 LED0 November 30, 2007 531 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller GPIO Pin Pin Number Multiplexed Function Multiplexed Function PG0 19 U2Rx PG1 18 U2Tx 532 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Signal Tables 22 Operating Characteristics Table 22-1. Temperature Characteristics Characteristic Symbol Value Unit Operating temperature rangea TA -40 to +85 °C a. Maximum storage temperature is 150°C. Table 22-2. Thermal Characteristics Characteristic Symbol Value Unit Thermal resistance (junction to ambient)a ΘJA 55.3 °C/W Average junction temperatureb TJ TA + (PAVG • ΘJA) °C a. Junction to ambient thermal resistance θJA numbers are determined by a package simulator. b. Power dissipation is a function of temperature. November 30, 2007 533 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 23 Electrical Characteristics 23.1 DC Characteristics 23.1.1 Maximum Ratings The maximum ratings are the limits to which the device can be subjected without permanently damaging the device. Note: The device is not guaranteed to operate properly at the maximum ratings. Table 23-1. Maximum Ratings Characteristic Symbol Value Unit a Min Max I/O supply voltage (VDD) VDD 0 4 V Core supply voltage (VDD25) VDD25 0 4 V Analog supply voltage (VDDA) VDDA 0 4 V Battery supply voltage (VBAT) VBAT 0 4 V Ethernet PHY supply voltage (VCCPHY) VCCPHY 0 4 V Input voltage VIN -0.3 5.5 V Maximum current per output pins I - 25 mA a. Voltages are measured with respect to GND. Important: This device contains circuitry to protect the inputs against damage due to high-static voltages or electric fields; however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltage higher than maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (for example, either GND or VDD). 23.1.2 Recommended DC Operating Conditions Table 23-2. Recommended DC Operating Conditions Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit VDD I/O supply voltage 3.0 3.3 3.6 V VDD25 Core supply voltage 2.25 2.5 2.75 V VDDA Analog supply voltage 3.0 3.3 3.6 V VBAT Battery supply voltage 2.3 3.0 3.6 V VCCPHY Ethernet PHY supply voltage 3.0 3.3 3.6 V VIH High-level input voltage 2.0 - 5.0 V VIL Low-level input voltage -0.3 - 1.3 V VSIH High-level input voltage for Schmitt trigger inputs 0.8 * VDD - VDD V VSIL Low-level input voltage for Schmitt trigger inputs 0 - 0.2 * VDD V VOH High-level output voltage 2.4 - - V VOL Low-level output voltage - - 0.4 V 534 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit IOH High-level source current, VOH=2.4 V 2-mA Drive 2.0 - - mA 4-mA Drive 4.0 - - mA 8-mA Drive 8.0 - - mA IOL Low-level sink current, VOL=0.4 V 2-mA Drive 2.0 - - mA 4-mA Drive 4.0 - - mA 8-mA Drive 8.0 - - mA 23.1.3 On-Chip Low Drop-Out (LDO) Regulator Characteristics Table 23-3. LDO Regulator Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit VLDOOUT Programmable internal (logic) power supply output value 2.25 2.5 2.75 V Output voltage accuracy - 2% - % tPON Power-on time - - 100 μs tON Time on - - 200 μs tOFF Time off - - 100 μs VSTEP Step programming incremental voltage - 50 - mV CLDO External filter capacitor size for internal power supply 1.0 - 3.0 μF 23.1.4 Power Specifications The power measurements specified in the tables that follow are run on the core processor using SRAM with the following specifications (except as noted): ■ VDD = 3.3 V ■ VDD25 = 2.50 V ■ VBAT = 3.0 V ■ VDDA = 3.3 V ■ VDDPHY = 3.3 V ■ Temperature = 25°C ■ Clock Source (MOSC) =3.579545 MHz Crystal Oscillator ■ Main oscillator (MOSC) = enabled ■ Internal oscillator (IOSC) = disabled November 30, 2007 535 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Table 23-4. Detailed Power Specifications 3.3 V VDD, VDDA, 2.5 V VDD25 3.0 V VBAT Unit VDDPHY Parameter Conditions Name Parameter Nom Max Nom Max Nom Max VDD25 = 2.50 V 48 pendinga 108 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Code= while(1){} executed in Flash Peripherals = All ON System Clock = 50 MHz (with PLL) Run mode 1 (Flash loop) IDD_RUN VDD25 = 2.50 V 5 pendinga 52 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Code= while(1){} executed in Flash Peripherals = All OFF System Clock = 50 MHz (with PLL) Run mode 2 (Flash loop) VDD25 = 2.50 V 48 pendinga 100 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Code= while(1){} executed in SRAM Peripherals = All ON System Clock = 50 MHz (with PLL) Run mode 1 (SRAM loop) VDD25 = 2.50 V 5 pendinga 45 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Code= while(1){} executed in SRAM Peripherals = All OFF System Clock = 50 MHz (with PLL) Run mode 2 (SRAM loop) VDD25 = 2.50 V 5 pendinga 16 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Peripherals = All OFF System Clock = 50 MHz (with PLL) IDD_SLEEP Sleep mode LDO = 2.25 V 4.6 pendinga 0.21 pendinga 0 pendinga mA Peripherals = All OFF System Clock = IOSC30KHZ/64 Deep-Sleep mode IDD_DEEPSLEEP VBAT = 3.0 V 0 pendinga 0 pendinga 16 pendinga μA VDD = 0 V VDD25 = 0 V VDDA = 0 V VDDPHY = 0 V Peripherals = All OFF System Clock = OFF Hibernate Module = 32 kHz Hibernate mode IDD_HIBERNATE a. Pending characterization completion. 536 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics 23.1.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 23-5. Flash Memory Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit PECYC Number of guaranteed program/erase cycles before failurea 10,000 100,000 - cycles TRET Data retention at average operating temperature of 85˚C 10 - - years TPROG Word program time 20 - - μs TERASE Page erase time 20 - - ms TME Mass erase time 200 - - ms a. A program/erase cycle is defined as switching the bits from 1-> 0 -> 1. 23.2 AC Characteristics 23.2.1 Load Conditions Unless otherwise specified, the following conditions are true for all timing measurements. Timing measurements are for 4-mA drive strength. Figure 23-1. Load Conditions CL = 50 pF GND pin 23.2.2 Clocks Table 23-6. Phase Locked Loop (PLL) Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit fref_crystal Crystal referencea 3.579545 - 8.192 MHz fref_ext External clock referencea 3.579545 - 8.192 MHz fpll PLL frequencyb - 400 - MHz TREADY PLL lock time - - 0.5 ms a. The exact value is determined by the crystal value programmed into the XTAL field of the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register. b. PLL frequency is automatically calculated by the hardware based on the XTAL field of the RCC register. Table 23-7. Clock Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit fIOSC Internal 12 MHz oscillator frequency 8.4 12 15.6 MHz fIOSC30KHZ Internal 30 KHz oscillator frequency 21 30 39 KHz fXOSC Hibernation module oscillator frequency - 4.194304 - MHz fXOSC_XTAL Crystal reference for hibernation oscillator - 4.194304 - MHz fXOSC_EXT External clock reference for hibernation module - 32.768 - KHz November 30, 2007 537 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit fMOSC Main oscillator frequency 1 - 8 MHz tMOSC_per Main oscillator period 125 - 1000 ns Crystal reference using the main oscillator (PLL in BYPASS mode) 1 - 8 MHz a fref_crystal_bypass fref_ext_bypass External clock reference (PLL in BYPASS mode)a 0 - 50 MHz fsystem_clock System clock 0 - 50 MHz a. The ADC must be clocked from the PLL or directly from a 14-MHz to 18-MHz clock source to operate properly. Table 23-8. Crystal Characteristics Parameter Name Value Units Frequency 8 6 4 3.5 MHz Frequency tolerance ±50 ±50 ±50 ±50 ppm Aging ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ppm/yr Oscillation mode Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel Temperature stability (0 - 85 °C) ±25 ±25 ±25 ±25 ppm Motional capacitance (typ) 27.8 37.0 55.6 63.5 pF Motional inductance (typ) 14.3 19.1 28.6 32.7 mH Equivalent series resistance (max) 120 160 200 220 Ω Shunt capacitance (max) 10 10 10 10 pF Load capacitance (typ) 16 16 16 16 pF Drive level (typ) 100 100 100 100 μW 23.2.3 Analog-to-Digital Converter Table 23-9. ADC Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit VADCIN Maximum single-ended, full-scale analog input voltage - - 3.0 V Minimum single-ended, full-scale analog input voltage - - 0 V Maximum differential, full-scale analog input voltage - - 1.5 V Minimum differential, full-scale analog input voltage - - -1.5 V CADCIN Equivalent input capacitance - 1 - pF N Resolution - 10 - bits fADC ADC internal clock frequency 7 8 9 MHz tADCCONV Conversion time - - 16 tADCcyclesa f ADCCONV Conversion rate 438 500 563 k samples/s INL Integral nonlinearity - - ±1 LSB DNL Differential nonlinearity - - ±1 LSB OFF Offset - - ±1 LSB GAIN Gain - - ±1 LSB a. tADC= 1/fADC clock 538 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics 23.2.4 Analog Comparator Table 23-10. Analog Comparator Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit VOS Input offset voltage - ±10 ±25 mV VCM Input common mode voltage range 0 - VDD-1.5 V CMRR Common mode rejection ratio 50 - - dB TRT Response time - - 1 μs TMC Comparator mode change to Output Valid - - 10 μs Table 23-11. Analog Comparator Voltage Reference Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit RHR Resolution high range - VDD/32 - LSB RLR Resolution low range - VDD/24 - LSB AHR Absolute accuracy high range - - ±1/2 LSB ALR Absolute accuracy low range - - ±1/4 LSB 23.2.5 I2C Table 23-12. I2C Characteristics Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit I1a tSCH Start condition hold time 36 - - system clocks I2a tLP Clock Low period 36 - - system clocks I3b tSRT I2CSCL/I2CSDA rise time (VIL =0.5 V to V IH =2.4 V) - - (see note b) ns I4a tDH Data hold time 2 - - system clocks I5c tSFT I2CSCL/I2CSDA fall time (VIH =2.4 V to V IL =0.5 V) - 9 10 ns I6a tHT Clock High time 24 - - system clocks I7a tDS Data setup time 18 - - system clocks Start condition setup time (for repeated start condition 36 - - system clocks only) I8a tSCSR I9a tSCS Stop condition setup time 24 - - system clocks a. Values depend on the value programmed into the TPR bit in the I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR) register; a TPR programmed for the maximum I2CSCL frequency (TPR=0x2) results in a minimum output timing as shown in the table above. The I 2C interface is designed to scale the actual data transition time to move it to the middle of the I2CSCL Low period. The actual position is affected by the value programmed into the TPR; however, the numbers given in the above values are minimum values. b. Because I2CSCL and I2CSDA are open-drain-type outputs, which the controller can only actively drive Low, the time I2CSCL or I2CSDA takes to reach a high level depends on external signal capacitance and pull-up resistor values. c. Specified at a nominal 50 pF load. November 30, 2007 539 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 23-2. I2C Timing I2CSCL I2CSDA I1 I2 I4 I6 I7 I8 I5 I3 I9 23.2.6 Ethernet Controller Table 23-13. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristicsa Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit Peak output amplitude 950 - 1050 mVpk Output amplitude symmetry 0.98 - 1.02 mVpk Output overshoot - - 5 % Rise/Fall time 3 - 5 ns Rise/Fall time imbalance - - 500 ps Duty cycle distortion - - - ps Jitter - - 1.4 ns a. Measured at the line side of the transformer. Table 23-14. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristics (informative)a Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit Return loss 16 - - dB Open-circuit inductance 350 - - μs a. The specifications in this table are included for information only. They are mainly a function of the external transformer and termination resistors used for measurements. Table 23-15. 100BASE-TX Receiver Characteristics Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit Signal detect assertion threshold 600 700 mVppd Signal detect de-assertion threshold 350 425 - mVppd Differential input resistance 20 - - kΩ Jitter tolerance (pk-pk) 4 - - ns Baseline wander tracking -75 - +75 % Signal detect assertion time - - 1000 μs Signal detect de-assertion time - - 4 μs Table 23-16. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristicsa Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit Peak differential output signal 2.2 - 2.8 V Harmonic content 27 - - dB Link pulse width - 100 - ns 540 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit 300 - ns 350 Start-of-idle pulse width - a. The Manchester-encoded data pulses, the link pulse and the start-of-idle pulse are tested against the templates and using the procedures found in Clause 14 of IEEE 802.3. Table 23-17. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristics (informative)a Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit Output return loss 15 - - dB Output impedance balance 29-17log(f/10) - - dB Peak common-mode output voltage - - 50 mV Common-mode rejection - - 100 mV Common-mode rejection jitter - - 1 ns a. The specifications in this table are included for information only. They are mainly a function of the external transformer and termination resistors used for measurements. Table 23-18. 10BASE-T Receiver Characteristics Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit DLL phase acquisition time - 10 - BT Jitter tolerance (pk-pk) 30 - - ns Input squelched threshold 500 600 700 mVppd Input unsquelched threshold 275 350 425 mVppd Differential input resistance - 20 - kΩ Bit error ratio - 10-10 - - Common-mode rejection 25 - - V Table 23-19. Isolation Transformersa Name Value Condition Turns ratio 1 CT : 1 CT +/- 5% Open-circuit inductance 350 uH (min) @ 10 mV, 10 kHz Leakage inductance 0.40 uH (max) @ 1 MHz (min) Inter-winding capacitance 25 pF (max) DC resistance 0.9 Ohm (max) Insertion loss 0.4 dB (typ) 0-65 MHz HIPOT 1500 Vrms a. Two simple 1:1 isolation transformers are required at the line interface. Transformers with integrated common-mode chokes are recommended for exceeding FCC requirements. This table gives the recommended line transformer characteristics. Note: The 100Base-TX amplitude specifications assume a transformer loss of 0.4 dB. For the transmit line transformer with higher insertion losses, up to 1.2 dB of insertion loss can be compensated by selecting the appropriate setting in the Transmit Amplitude Selection (TXO) bits in the MR19 register. November 30, 2007 541 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Table 23-20. Ethernet Reference Crystala Name Value Condition Frequency 25.00000 MHz Load capacitanceb 4c pF Frequency tolerance ±50 PPM Aging ±2 PPM/yr Temperature stability (0° to 70°) ±5 PPM Oscillation mode Parallel resonance, fundamental mode Parameters at 25° C ±2° C; Drive level = 0.5 mW Drive level (typ) 50-100 μW Shunt capacitance (max) 10 pF Motional capacitance (min) 10 fF Serious resistance (max) 60 Ω Spurious response (max) > 5 dB below main within 500 kHz a. If the internal crystal oscillator is used, select a crystal with the following characteristics. b. Equivalent differential capacitance across XTLP/XTLN. c. If crystal with a larger load is used, external shunt capacitors to ground should be added to make up the equivalent capacitance difference. Figure 23-3. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics Tclkper Tr Tclkhi Tclklo Tf Table 23-21. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics Parameter Name Symbol Min Nom Max Unit XTLN Input Low Voltage XTLNILV - - 0.8 - XTLP Frequencya XTLPf - 25.0 - - XTLP Periodb Tclkper - 40 - - 60 % 60 40 - 40 XTLPDC XTLP Duty Cycle Rise/Fall Time Tr , Tf - - 4.0 ns Absolute Jitter - - 0.1 ns a. IEEE 802.3 frequency tolerance ±50 ppm. 542 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics b. IEEE 802.3 frequency tolerance ±50 ppm. 23.2.7 Hibernation Module The Hibernation Module requires special system implementation considerations since it is intended to power-down all other sections of its host device. The system power-supply distribution and interfaces of the system must be driven to 0 VDC or powered down with the same regulator controlled by HIB. The regulators controlled by HIB are expected to have a settling time of 250 μs or less. Table 23-22. Hibernation Module Characteristics Parameter No Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit H1 tHIB_LOW Internal 32.768 KHz clock reference rising edge to /HIB asserted - 200 - μs H2 tHIB_HIGH Internal 32.768 KHz clock reference rising edge to /HIB deasserted - 30 - μs H3 tWAKE_ASSERT /WAKE assertion time 62 - - μs H4 tWAKETOHIB /WAKE assert to /HIB desassert 62 - 124 μs H5 tXOSC_SETTLE XOSC settling timea 20 - - ms H6 tHIB_REG_WRITE Time for a write to non-volatile registers in HIB module to complete 92 - - μs H7 tHIB_TO_VDD HIB deassert to VDD and VDD25 at minimum operational level - - 250 μs a. This parameter is highly sensitive to PCB layout and trace lengths, which may make this parameter time longer. Care must be taken in PCB design to minimize trace lengths and RLC (resistance, inductance, capacitance). Figure 23-4. Hibernation Module Timing 32.768 KHz (internal) /HIB H4 H1 /WAKE H2 H3 23.2.8 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Table 23-23. SSI Characteristics Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit S1 tclk_per SSIClk cycle time 2 - 65024 system clocks S2 tclk_high SSIClk high time - 1/2 - t clk_per S3 tclk_low SSIClk low time - 1/2 - t clk_per S4 tclkrf SSIClk rise/fall time - 7.4 26 ns S5 tDMd Data from master valid delay time 0 - 20 ns S6 tDMs Data from master setup time 20 - - ns S7 tDMh Data from master hold time 40 - - ns November 30, 2007 543 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit S8 tDSs Data from slave setup time 20 - - ns S9 tDSh Data from slave hold time 40 - - ns Figure 23-5. SSI Timing for TI Frame Format (FRF=01), Single Transfer Timing Measurement SSIClk SSIFss SSITx SSIRx MSB LSB S2 S3 S1 S4 4 to 16 bits Figure 23-6. SSI Timing for MICROWIRE Frame Format (FRF=10), Single Transfer 0 SSIClk SSIFss SSITx SSIRx MSB LSB MSB LSB S2 S3 S1 8-bit control 4 to 16 bits output data 544 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics Figure 23-7. SSI Timing for SPI Frame Format (FRF=00), with SPH=1 SSIClk (SPO=1) SSITx (master) SSIRx (slave) LSB SSIClk (SPO=0) S2 S1 S4 SSIFss LSB S3 MSB S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 MSB 23.2.9 JTAG and Boundary Scan Table 23-24. JTAG Characteristics Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit J1 fTCK TCK operational clock frequency 0 - 10 MHz J2 tTCK TCK operational clock period 100 - - ns J3 tTCK_LOW TCK clock Low time - tTCK - ns J4 tTCK_HIGH TCK clock High time - tTCK - ns J5 tTCK_R TCK rise time 0 - 10 ns J6 tTCK_F TCK fall time 0 - 10 ns J7 tTMS_SU TMS setup time to TCK rise 20 - - ns J8 tTMS_HLD TMS hold time from TCK rise 20 - - ns J9 tTDI_SU TDI setup time to TCK rise 25 - - ns J10 tTDI_HLD TDI hold time from TCK rise 25 - - ns J11 TCK fall to Data Valid from High-Z 2-mA drive - 23 35 ns t TDO_ZDV 4-mA drive 15 26 ns 8-mA drive 14 25 ns 8-mA drive with slew rate control 18 29 ns J12 TCK fall to Data Valid from Data Valid 2-mA drive - 21 35 ns t TDO_DV 4-mA drive 14 25 ns 8-mA drive 13 24 ns 8-mA drive with slew rate control 18 28 ns November 30, 2007 545 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit J13 TCK fall to High-Z from Data Valid 2-mA drive - 9 11 ns t TDO_DVZ 4-mA drive 7 9 ns 8-mA drive 6 8 ns 8-mA drive with slew rate control 7 9 ns J14 tTRST TRST assertion time 100 - - ns J15 tTRST_SU TRST setup time to TCK rise 10 - - ns Figure 23-8. JTAG Test Clock Input Timing TCK J6 J5 J3 J4 J2 Figure 23-9. JTAG Test Access Port (TAP) Timing TDO Output Valid TCK TDO Output Valid J12 TDO TDI TMS TDI Input Valid TDI Input Valid J13 J9 J10 TMS Input Valid J9 J10 TMS Input Valid J11 J7 J8 J7 J8 Figure 23-10. JTAG TRST Timing TCK J14 J15 TRST 23.2.10 General-Purpose I/O Note: All GPIOs are 5 V-tolerant. 546 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics Table 23-25. GPIO Characteristics Parameter Parameter Name Condition Min Nom Max Unit tGPIOR GPIO Rise Time (from 20% to 80% of VDD) 2-mA drive - 17 26 ns 4-mA drive 9 13 ns 8-mA drive 6 9 ns 8-mA drive with slew rate control 10 12 ns tGPIOF GPIO Fall Time (from 80% to 20% of VDD) 2-mA drive - 17 25 ns 4-mA drive 8 12 ns 8-mA drive 6 10 ns 8-mA drive with slew rate control 11 13 ns 23.2.11 Reset Table 23-26. Reset Characteristics Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Name Min Nom Max Unit R1 VTH Reset threshold - 2.0 - V R2 VBTH Brown-Out threshold 2.85 2.9 2.95 V R3 TPOR Power-On Reset timeout - 10 - ms R4 TBOR Brown-Out timeout - 500 - μs R5 TIRPOR Internal reset timeout after POR 6 - 11 ms R6 TIRBOR Internal reset timeout after BORa 0 - 1 μs R7 TIRHWR Internal reset timeout after hardware reset (RST pin) 0 - 1 ms R8 TIRSWR Internal reset timeout after software-initiated system reset a 2.5 - 20 μs R9 TIRWDR Internal reset timeout after watchdog reseta 2.5 - 20 μs R10 TVDDRISE Supply voltage (VDD) rise time (0V-3.3V) - - 100 ms R11 TMIN Minimum RST pulse width 2 - - μs a. 20 * t MOSC_per Figure 23-11. External Reset Timing (RST) RST /Reset (Internal) R11 R7 November 30, 2007 547 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Figure 23-12. Power-On Reset Timing VDD /POR (Internal) /Reset (Internal) R3 R1 R5 Figure 23-13. Brown-Out Reset Timing VDD /BOR (Internal) /Reset (Internal) R2 R4 R6 Figure 23-14. Software Reset Timing R8 SW Reset /Reset (Internal) Figure 23-15. Watchdog Reset Timing WDOG Reset (Internal) /Reset (Internal) R9 548 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Electrical Characteristics 24 Package Information Figure 24-1. 100-Pin LQFP Package Note: The following notes apply to the package drawing. 1. All dimensions shown in mm. 2. Dimensions shown are nominal with tolerances indicated. 3. Foot length 'L' is measured at gage plane 0.25 mm above seating plane. November 30, 2007 549 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Body +2.00 mm Footprint, 1.4 mm package thickness Symbols Leads 100L A Max. 1.60 A1 0.05 Min./0.15 Max. A2 ±0.05 1.40 D ±0.20 16.00 D1 ±0.05 14.00 E ±0.20 16.00 E1 ±0.05 14.00 L ±0.15/-0.10 0.60 e BASIC 0.50 b ±0.05 0.22 θ === 0˚~7˚ ddd Max. 0.08 ccc Max. 0.08 JEDEC Reference Drawing MS-026 Variation Designator BED 550 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Package Information A Serial Flash Loader A.1 Serial Flash Loader The Stellaris® serial flash loader is a preprogrammed flash-resident utility used to download code to the flash memory of a device without the use of a debug interface. The serial flash loader uses a simple packet interface to provide synchronous communication with the device. The flash loader runs off the crystal and does not enable the PLL, so its speed is determined by the crystal used. The two serial interfaces that can be used are the UART0 and SSI0 interfaces. For simplicity, both the data format and communication protocol are identical for both serial interfaces. A.2 Interfaces Once communication with the flash loader is established via one of the serial interfaces, that interface is used until the flash loader is reset or new code takes over. For example, once you start communicating using the SSI port, communications with the flash loader via the UART are disabled until the device is reset. A.2.1 UART The Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UART) communication uses a fixed serial format of 8 bits of data, no parity, and 1 stop bit. The baud rate used for communication is automatically detected by the flash loader and can be any valid baud rate supported by the host and the device. The auto detection sequence requires that the baud rate should be no more than 1/32 the crystal frequency of the board that is running the serial flash loader. This is actually the same as the hardware limitation for the maximum baud rate for any UART on a Stellaris® device which is calculated as follows: Max Baud Rate = System Clock Frequency / 16 In order to determine the baud rate, the serial flash loader needs to determine the relationship between its own crystal frequency and the baud rate. This is enough information for the flash loader to configure its UART to the same baud rate as the host. This automatic baud-rate detection allows the host to use any valid baud rate that it wants to communicate with the device. The method used to perform this automatic synchronization relies on the host sending the flash loader two bytes that are both 0x55. This generates a series of pulses to the flash loader that it can use to calculate the ratios needed to program the UART to match the host’s baud rate. After the host sends the pattern, it attempts to read back one byte of data from the UART. The flash loader returns the value of 0xCC to indicate successful detection of the baud rate. If this byte is not received after at least twice the time required to transfer the two bytes, the host can resend another pattern of 0x55, 0x55, and wait for the 0xCC byte again until the flash loader acknowledges that it has received a synchronization pattern correctly. For example, the time to wait for data back from the flash loader should be calculated as at least 2*(20(bits/sync)/baud rate (bits/sec)). For a baud rate of 115200, this time is 2*(20/115200) or 0.35 ms. A.2.2 SSI The Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) port also uses a fixed serial format for communications, with the framing defined as Motorola format with SPH set to 1 and SPO set to 1. See “Frame Formats” on page 339 in the SSI chapter for more information on formats for this transfer protocol. Like the UART, this interface has hardware requirements that limit the maximum speed that the SSI clock can run. This allows the SSI clock to be at most 1/12 the crystal frequency of the board running November 30, 2007 551 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller the flash loader. Since the host device is the master, the SSI on the flash loader device does not need to determine the clock as it is provided directly by the host. A.3 Packet Handling All communications, with the exception of the UART auto-baud, are done via defined packets that are acknowledged (ACK) or not acknowledged (NAK) by the devices. The packets use the same format for receiving and sending packets, including the method used to acknowledge successful or unsuccessful reception of a packet. A.3.1 Packet Format All packets sent and received from the device use the following byte-packed format. struct { unsigned char ucSize; unsigned char ucCheckSum; unsigned char Data[]; }; ucSize The first byte received holds the total size of the transfer including the size and checksum bytes. ucChecksum This holds a simple checksum of the bytes in the data buffer only. The algorithm is Data[0]+Data[1]+…+ Data[ucSize-3]. Data This is the raw data intended for the device, which is formatted in some form of command interface. There should be ucSize–2 bytes of data provided in this buffer to or from the device. A.3.2 Sending Packets The actual bytes of the packet can be sent individually or all at once; the only limitation is that commands that cause flash memory access should limit the download sizes to prevent losing bytes during flash programming. This limitation is discussed further in the section that describes the serial flash loader command, COMMAND_SEND_DATA (see “COMMAND_SEND_DATA (0x24)” on page 554). Once the packet has been formatted correctly by the host, it should be sent out over the UART or SSI interface. Then the host should poll the UART or SSI interface for the first non-zero data returned from the device. The first non-zero byte will either be an ACK (0xCC) or a NAK (0x33) byte from the device indicating the packet was received successfully (ACK) or unsuccessfully (NAK). This does not indicate that the actual contents of the command issued in the data portion of the packet were valid, just that the packet was received correctly. A.3.3 Receiving Packets The flash loader sends a packet of data in the same format that it receives a packet. The flash loader may transfer leading zero data before the first actual byte of data is sent out. The first non-zero byte is the size of the packet followed by a checksum byte, and finally followed by the data itself. There is no break in the data after the first non-zero byte is sent from the flash loader. Once the device communicating with the flash loader receives all the bytes, it must either ACK or NAK the packet to indicate that the transmission was successful. The appropriate response after sending a NAK to the flash loader is to resend the command that failed and request the data again. If needed, the host may send leading zeros before sending down the ACK/NAK signal to the flash loader, as the 552 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Serial Flash Loader flash loader only accepts the first non-zero data as a valid response. This zero padding is needed by the SSI interface in order to receive data to or from the flash loader. A.4 Commands The next section defines the list of commands that can be sent to the flash loader. The first byte of the data should always be one of the defined commands, followed by data or parameters as determined by the command that is sent. A.4.1 COMMAND_PING (0X20) This command simply accepts the command and sets the global status to success. The format of the packet is as follows: Byte[0] = 0x03; Byte[1] = checksum(Byte[2]); Byte[2] = COMMAND_PING; The ping command has 3 bytes and the value for COMMAND_PING is 0x20 and the checksum of one byte is that same byte, making Byte[1] also 0x20. Since the ping command has no real return status, the receipt of an ACK can be interpreted as a successful ping to the flash loader. A.4.2 COMMAND_GET_STATUS (0x23) This command returns the status of the last command that was issued. Typically, this command should be sent after every command to ensure that the previous command was successful or to properly respond to a failure. The command requires one byte in the data of the packet and should be followed by reading a packet with one byte of data that contains a status code. The last step is to ACK or NAK the received data so the flash loader knows that the data has been read. Byte[0] = 0x03 Byte[1] = checksum(Byte[2]) Byte[2] = COMMAND_GET_STATUS A.4.3 COMMAND_DOWNLOAD (0x21) This command is sent to the flash loader to indicate where to store data and how many bytes will be sent by the COMMAND_SEND_DATA commands that follow. The command consists of two 32-bit values that are both transferred MSB first. The first 32-bit value is the address to start programming data into, while the second is the 32-bit size of the data that will be sent. This command also triggers an erase of the full area to be programmed so this command takes longer than other commands. This results in a longer time to receive the ACK/NAK back from the board. This command should be followed by a COMMAND_GET_STATUS to ensure that the Program Address and Program size are valid for the device running the flash loader. The format of the packet to send this command is a follows: Byte[0] = 11 Byte[1] = checksum(Bytes[2:10]) Byte[2] = COMMAND_DOWNLOAD Byte[3] = Program Address [31:24] Byte[4] = Program Address [23:16] Byte[5] = Program Address [15:8] Byte[6] = Program Address [7:0] Byte[7] = Program Size [31:24] November 30, 2007 553 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Byte[8] = Program Size [23:16] Byte[9] = Program Size [15:8] Byte[10] = Program Size [7:0] A.4.4 COMMAND_SEND_DATA (0x24) This command should only follow a COMMAND_DOWNLOAD command or another COMMAND_SEND_DATA command if more data is needed. Consecutive send data commands automatically increment address and continue programming from the previous location. The caller should limit transfers of data to a maximum 8 bytes of packet data to allow the flash to program successfully and not overflow input buffers of the serial interfaces. The command terminates programming once the number of bytes indicated by the COMMAND_DOWNLOAD command has been received. Each time this function is called it should be followed by a COMMAND_GET_STATUS to ensure that the data was successfully programmed into the flash. If the flash loader sends a NAK to this command, the flash loader does not increment the current address to allow retransmission of the previous data. Byte[0] = 11 Byte[1] = checksum(Bytes[2:10]) Byte[2] = COMMAND_SEND_DATA Byte[3] = Data[0] Byte[4] = Data[1] Byte[5] = Data[2] Byte[6] = Data[3] Byte[7] = Data[4] Byte[8] = Data[5] Byte[9] = Data[6] Byte[10] = Data[7] A.4.5 COMMAND_RUN (0x22) This command is used to tell the flash loader to execute from the address passed as the parameter in this command. This command consists of a single 32-bit value that is interpreted as the address to execute. The 32-bit value is transmitted MSB first and the flash loader responds with an ACK signal back to the host device before actually executing the code at the given address. This allows the host to know that the command was received successfully and the code is now running. Byte[0] = 7 Byte[1] = checksum(Bytes[2:6]) Byte[2] = COMMAND_RUN Byte[3] = Execute Address[31:24] Byte[4] = Execute Address[23:16] Byte[5] = Execute Address[15:8] Byte[6] = Execute Address[7:0] A.4.6 COMMAND_RESET (0x25) This command is used to tell the flash loader device to reset. This is useful when downloading a new image that overwrote the flash loader and wants to start from a full reset. Unlike the COMMAND_RUN command, this allows the initial stack pointer to be read by the hardware and set up for the new code. It can also be used to reset the flash loader if a critical error occurs and the host device wants to restart communication with the flash loader. 554 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Serial Flash Loader Byte[0] = 3 Byte[1] = checksum(Byte[2]) Byte[2] = COMMAND_RESET The flash loader responds with an ACK signal back to the host device before actually executing the software reset to the device running the flash loader. This allows the host to know that the command was received successfully and the part will be reset. November 30, 2007 555 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller B Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 System Control Base 0x400F.E000 DID0, type RO, offset 0x000, reset - VER CLASS MAJOR MINOR PBORCTL, type R/W, offset 0x030, reset 0x0000.7FFD BORIOR LDOPCTL, type R/W, offset 0x034, reset 0x0000.0000 VADJ RIS, type RO, offset 0x050, reset 0x0000.0000 PLLLRIS BORRIS IMC, type R/W, offset 0x054, reset 0x0000.0000 PLLLIM BORIM MISC, type R/W1C, offset 0x058, reset 0x0000.0000 PLLLMIS BORMIS RESC, type R/W, offset 0x05C, reset - LDO SW WDT BOR POR EXT RCC, type R/W, offset 0x060, reset 0x07AE.3AD1 ACG SYSDIV USESYSDIV USEPWMDIV PWMDIV PWRDN BYPASS XTAL OSCSRC IOSCDIS MOSCDIS PLLCFG, type RO, offset 0x064, reset - F R RCC2, type R/W, offset 0x070, reset 0x0780.2800 USERCC2 SYSDIV2 PWRDN2 BYPASS2 OSCSRC2 DSLPCLKCFG, type R/W, offset 0x144, reset 0x0780.0000 DSDIVORIDE DSOSCSRC DID1, type RO, offset 0x004, reset - VER FAM PARTNO PINCOUNT TEMP PKG ROHS QUAL DC0, type RO, offset 0x008, reset 0x00FF.007F SRAMSZ FLASHSZ DC1, type RO, offset 0x010, reset 0x0011.32FF PWM ADC MINSYSDIV MAXADCSPD MPU HIB TEMPSNS PLL WDT SWO SWD JTAG DC2, type RO, offset 0x014, reset 0x0707.1117 COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 I2C0 QEI0 SSI0 UART2 UART1 UART0 DC3, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0F07.BFCF CCP3 CCP2 CCP1 CCP0 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 PWMFAULT C2PLUS C2MINUS C1O C1PLUS C1MINUS C0O C0PLUS C0MINUS PWM3 PWM2 PWM1 PWM0 556 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DC4, type RO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x5000.007F EPHY0 EMAC0 GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA RCGC0, type R/W, offset 0x100, reset 0x00000040 PWM ADC MAXADCSPD HIB WDT SCGC0, type R/W, offset 0x110, reset 0x00000040 PWM ADC MAXADCSPD HIB WDT DCGC0, type R/W, offset 0x120, reset 0x00000040 PWM ADC MAXADCSPD HIB WDT RCGC1, type R/W, offset 0x104, reset 0x00000000 COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 I2C0 QEI0 SSI0 UART2 UART1 UART0 SCGC1, type R/W, offset 0x114, reset 0x00000000 COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 I2C0 QEI0 SSI0 UART2 UART1 UART0 DCGC1, type R/W, offset 0x124, reset 0x00000000 COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 I2C0 QEI0 SSI0 UART2 UART1 UART0 RCGC2, type R/W, offset 0x108, reset 0x00000000 EPHY0 EMAC0 GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA SCGC2, type R/W, offset 0x118, reset 0x00000000 EPHY0 EMAC0 GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA DCGC2, type R/W, offset 0x128, reset 0x00000000 EPHY0 EMAC0 GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA SRCR0, type R/W, offset 0x040, reset 0x00000000 PWM ADC HIB WDT SRCR1, type R/W, offset 0x044, reset 0x00000000 COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 TIMER2 TIMER1 TIMER0 I2C0 QEI0 SSI0 UART2 UART1 UART0 SRCR2, type R/W, offset 0x048, reset 0x00000000 EPHY0 EMAC0 GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA Hibernation Module Base 0x400F.C000 HIBRTCC, type RO, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 RTCC RTCC HIBRTCM0, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF RTCM0 RTCM0 HIBRTCM1, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF RTCM1 RTCM1 HIBRTCLD, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF RTCLD RTCLD November 30, 2007 557 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HIBCTL, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 VABORT CLK32EN LOWBATEN PINWEN RTCWEN CLKSEL HIBREQ RTCEN HIBIM, type R/W, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 HIBRIS, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 HIBMIS, type RO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 HIBIC, type R/W1C, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 EXTW LOWBAT RTCALT1 RTCALT0 HIBRTCT, type R/W, offset 0x024, reset 0x0000.7FFF TRIM HIBDATA, type R/W, offset 0x030-0x12C, reset 0x0000.0000 RTD RTD Internal Memory Flash Control Offset Base 0x400F.D000 FMA, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 OFFSET OFFSET FMD, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA DATA FMC, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 WRKEY COMT MERASE ERASE WRITE FCRIS, type RO, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 PRIS ARIS FCIM, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 PMASK AMASK FCMISC, type R/W1C, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 PMISC AMISC Internal Memory System Control Offset Base 0x400F.E000 USECRL, type R/W, offset 0x140, reset 0x31 USEC FMPRE0, type R/W, offset 0x130 and 0x200, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF READ_ENABLE READ_ENABLE 558 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FMPPE0, type R/W, offset 0x134 and 0x400, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF PROG_ENABLE PROG_ENABLE USER_DBG, type R/W, offset 0x1D0, reset 0xFFFF.FFFE NW DATA DATA DBG1 DBG0 USER_REG0, type R/W, offset 0x1E0, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF NW DATA DATA USER_REG1, type R/W, offset 0x1E4, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF NW DATA DATA FMPRE1, type R/W, offset 0x204, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF READ_ENABLE READ_ENABLE FMPRE2, type R/W, offset 0x208, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF READ_ENABLE READ_ENABLE FMPRE3, type R/W, offset 0x20C, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF READ_ENABLE READ_ENABLE FMPPE1, type R/W, offset 0x404, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF PROG_ENABLE PROG_ENABLE FMPPE2, type R/W, offset 0x408, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF PROG_ENABLE PROG_ENABLE FMPPE3, type R/W, offset 0x40C, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF PROG_ENABLE PROG_ENABLE General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) GPIO Port A base: 0x4000.4000 GPIO Port B base: 0x4000.5000 GPIO Port C base: 0x4000.6000 GPIO Port D base: 0x4000.7000 GPIO Port E base: 0x4002.4000 GPIO Port F base: 0x4002.5000 GPIO Port G base: 0x4002.6000 GPIODATA, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA GPIODIR, type R/W, offset 0x400, reset 0x0000.0000 DIR GPIOIS, type R/W, offset 0x404, reset 0x0000.0000 IS GPIOIBE, type R/W, offset 0x408, reset 0x0000.0000 IBE GPIOIEV, type R/W, offset 0x40C, reset 0x0000.0000 IEV November 30, 2007 559 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GPIOIM, type R/W, offset 0x410, reset 0x0000.0000 IME GPIORIS, type RO, offset 0x414, reset 0x0000.0000 RIS GPIOMIS, type RO, offset 0x418, reset 0x0000.0000 MIS GPIOICR, type W1C, offset 0x41C, reset 0x0000.0000 IC GPIOAFSEL, type R/W, offset 0x420, reset - AFSEL GPIODR2R, type R/W, offset 0x500, reset 0x0000.00FF DRV2 GPIODR4R, type R/W, offset 0x504, reset 0x0000.0000 DRV4 GPIODR8R, type R/W, offset 0x508, reset 0x0000.0000 DRV8 GPIOODR, type R/W, offset 0x50C, reset 0x0000.0000 ODE GPIOPUR, type R/W, offset 0x510, reset - PUE GPIOPDR, type R/W, offset 0x514, reset 0x0000.0000 PDE GPIOSLR, type R/W, offset 0x518, reset 0x0000.0000 SRL GPIODEN, type R/W, offset 0x51C, reset - DEN GPIOLOCK, type R/W, offset 0x520, reset 0x0000.0001 LOCK LOCK GPIOCR, type -, offset 0x524, reset - CR GPIOPeriphID4, type RO, offset 0xFD0, reset 0x0000.0000 PID4 GPIOPeriphID5, type RO, offset 0xFD4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID5 560 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GPIOPeriphID6, type RO, offset 0xFD8, reset 0x0000.0000 PID6 GPIOPeriphID7, type RO, offset 0xFDC, reset 0x0000.0000 PID7 GPIOPeriphID0, type RO, offset 0xFE0, reset 0x0000.0061 PID0 GPIOPeriphID1, type RO, offset 0xFE4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID1 GPIOPeriphID2, type RO, offset 0xFE8, reset 0x0000.0018 PID2 GPIOPeriphID3, type RO, offset 0xFEC, reset 0x0000.0001 PID3 GPIOPCellID0, type RO, offset 0xFF0, reset 0x0000.000D CID0 GPIOPCellID1, type RO, offset 0xFF4, reset 0x0000.00F0 CID1 GPIOPCellID2, type RO, offset 0xFF8, reset 0x0000.0005 CID2 GPIOPCellID3, type RO, offset 0xFFC, reset 0x0000.00B1 CID3 General-Purpose Timers Timer0 base: 0x4003.0000 Timer1 base: 0x4003.1000 Timer2 base: 0x4003.2000 GPTMCFG, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 GPTMCFG GPTMTAMR, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 TAAMS TACMR TAMR GPTMTBMR, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 TBAMS TBCMR TBMR GPTMCTL, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 TBPWML TBOTE TBEVENT TBSTALL TBEN TAPWML TAOTE RTCEN TAEVENT TASTALL TAEN GPTMIMR, type R/W, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 CBEIM CBMIM TBTOIM RTCIM CAEIM CAMIM TATOIM GPTMRIS, type RO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 CBERIS CBMRIS TBTORIS RTCRIS CAERIS CAMRIS TATORIS November 30, 2007 561 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GPTMMIS, type RO, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 CBEMIS CBMMIS TBTOMIS RTCMIS CAEMIS CAMMIS TATOMIS GPTMICR, type W1C, offset 0x024, reset 0x0000.0000 CBECINT CBMCINT TBTOCINT RTCCINT CAECINT CAMCINT TATOCINT GPTMTAILR, type R/W, offset 0x028, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) TAILRH TAILRL GPTMTBILR, type R/W, offset 0x02C, reset 0x0000.FFFF TBILRL GPTMTAMATCHR, type R/W, offset 0x030, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) TAMRH TAMRL GPTMTBMATCHR, type R/W, offset 0x034, reset 0x0000.FFFF TBMRL GPTMTAPR, type R/W, offset 0x038, reset 0x0000.0000 TAPSR GPTMTBPR, type R/W, offset 0x03C, reset 0x0000.0000 TBPSR GPTMTAPMR, type R/W, offset 0x040, reset 0x0000.0000 TAPSMR GPTMTBPMR, type R/W, offset 0x044, reset 0x0000.0000 TBPSMR GPTMTAR, type RO, offset 0x048, reset 0x0000.FFFF (16-bit mode) and 0xFFFF.FFFF (32-bit mode) TARH TARL GPTMTBR, type RO, offset 0x04C, reset 0x0000.FFFF TBRL Watchdog Timer Base 0x4000.0000 WDTLOAD, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF WDTLoad WDTLoad WDTVALUE, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0xFFFF.FFFF WDTValue WDTValue WDTCTL, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 RESEN INTEN WDTICR, type WO, offset 0x00C, reset - WDTIntClr WDTIntClr WDTRIS, type RO, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 WDTRIS 562 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTMIS, type RO, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 WDTMIS WDTTEST, type R/W, offset 0x418, reset 0x0000.0000 STALL WDTLOCK, type R/W, offset 0xC00, reset 0x0000.0000 WDTLock WDTLock WDTPeriphID4, type RO, offset 0xFD0, reset 0x0000.0000 PID4 WDTPeriphID5, type RO, offset 0xFD4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID5 WDTPeriphID6, type RO, offset 0xFD8, reset 0x0000.0000 PID6 WDTPeriphID7, type RO, offset 0xFDC, reset 0x0000.0000 PID7 WDTPeriphID0, type RO, offset 0xFE0, reset 0x0000.0005 PID0 WDTPeriphID1, type RO, offset 0xFE4, reset 0x0000.0018 PID1 WDTPeriphID2, type RO, offset 0xFE8, reset 0x0000.0018 PID2 WDTPeriphID3, type RO, offset 0xFEC, reset 0x0000.0001 PID3 WDTPCellID0, type RO, offset 0xFF0, reset 0x0000.000D CID0 WDTPCellID1, type RO, offset 0xFF4, reset 0x0000.00F0 CID1 WDTPCellID2, type RO, offset 0xFF8, reset 0x0000.0005 CID2 WDTPCellID3, type RO, offset 0xFFC, reset 0x0000.00B1 CID3 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Base 0x4003.8000 ADCACTSS, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 ASEN3 ASEN2 ASEN1 ASEN0 ADCRIS, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 INR3 INR2 INR1 INR0 November 30, 2007 563 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADCIM, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 MASK3 MASK2 MASK1 MASK0 ADCISC, type R/W1C, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 ADCOSTAT, type R/W1C, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 OV3 OV2 OV1 OV0 ADCEMUX, type R/W, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0 ADCUSTAT, type R/W1C, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 UV3 UV2 UV1 UV0 ADCSSPRI, type R/W, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.3210 SS3 SS2 SS1 SS0 ADCPSSI, type WO, offset 0x028, reset - SS3 SS2 SS1 SS0 ADCSAC, type R/W, offset 0x030, reset 0x0000.0000 AVG ADCSSMUX0, type R/W, offset 0x040, reset 0x0000.0000 MUX7 MUX6 MUX5 MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADCSSCTL0, type R/W, offset 0x044, reset 0x0000.0000 TS7 IE7 END7 D7 TS6 IE6 END6 D6 TS5 IE5 END5 D5 TS4 IE4 END4 D4 TS3 IE3 END3 D3 TS2 IE2 END2 D2 TS1 IE1 END1 D1 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 ADCSSFIFO0, type RO, offset 0x048, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA ADCSSFIFO1, type RO, offset 0x068, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA ADCSSFIFO2, type RO, offset 0x088, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA ADCSSFIFO3, type RO, offset 0x0A8, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA ADCSSFSTAT0, type RO, offset 0x04C, reset 0x0000.0100 FULL EMPTY HPTR TPTR ADCSSFSTAT1, type RO, offset 0x06C, reset 0x0000.0100 FULL EMPTY HPTR TPTR ADCSSFSTAT2, type RO, offset 0x08C, reset 0x0000.0100 FULL EMPTY HPTR TPTR 564 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADCSSFSTAT3, type RO, offset 0x0AC, reset 0x0000.0100 FULL EMPTY HPTR TPTR ADCSSMUX1, type RO, offset 0x060, reset 0x0000.0000 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADCSSMUX2, type RO, offset 0x080, reset 0x0000.0000 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADCSSCTL1, type RO, offset 0x064, reset 0x0000.0000 TS3 IE3 END3 D3 TS2 IE2 END2 D2 TS1 IE1 END1 D1 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 ADCSSCTL2, type RO, offset 0x084, reset 0x0000.0000 TS3 IE3 END3 D3 TS2 IE2 END2 D2 TS1 IE1 END1 D1 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 ADCSSMUX3, type R/W, offset 0x0A0, reset 0x0000.0000 MUX0 ADCSSCTL3, type R/W, offset 0x0A4, reset 0x0000.0002 TS0 IE0 END0 D0 ADCTMLB, type RO, offset 0x100, reset 0x0000.0000 CNT CONT DIFF TS MUX ADCTMLB, type WO, offset 0x100, reset 0x0000.0000 LB Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) UART0 base: 0x4000.C000 UART1 base: 0x4000.D000 UART2 base: 0x4000.E000 UARTDR, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 OE BE PE FE DATA UARTRSR/UARTECR, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 OE BE PE FE UARTRSR/UARTECR, type WO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA UARTFR, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0090 TXFE RXFF TXFF RXFE BUSY UARTILPR, type R/W, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 ILPDVSR UARTIBRD, type R/W, offset 0x024, reset 0x0000.0000 DIVINT UARTFBRD, type R/W, offset 0x028, reset 0x0000.0000 DIVFRAC November 30, 2007 565 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UARTLCRH, type R/W, offset 0x02C, reset 0x0000.0000 SPS WLEN FEN STP2 EPS PEN BRK UARTCTL, type R/W, offset 0x030, reset 0x0000.0300 RXE TXE LBE SIRLP SIREN UARTEN UARTIFLS, type R/W, offset 0x034, reset 0x0000.0012 RXIFLSEL TXIFLSEL UARTIM, type R/W, offset 0x038, reset 0x0000.0000 OEIM BEIM PEIM FEIM RTIM TXIM RXIM UARTRIS, type RO, offset 0x03C, reset 0x0000.000F OERIS BERIS PERIS FERIS RTRIS TXRIS RXRIS UARTMIS, type RO, offset 0x040, reset 0x0000.0000 OEMIS BEMIS PEMIS FEMIS RTMIS TXMIS RXMIS UARTICR, type W1C, offset 0x044, reset 0x0000.0000 OEIC BEIC PEIC FEIC RTIC TXIC RXIC UARTPeriphID4, type RO, offset 0xFD0, reset 0x0000.0000 PID4 UARTPeriphID5, type RO, offset 0xFD4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID5 UARTPeriphID6, type RO, offset 0xFD8, reset 0x0000.0000 PID6 UARTPeriphID7, type RO, offset 0xFDC, reset 0x0000.0000 PID7 UARTPeriphID0, type RO, offset 0xFE0, reset 0x0000.0011 PID0 UARTPeriphID1, type RO, offset 0xFE4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID1 UARTPeriphID2, type RO, offset 0xFE8, reset 0x0000.0018 PID2 UARTPeriphID3, type RO, offset 0xFEC, reset 0x0000.0001 PID3 UARTPCellID0, type RO, offset 0xFF0, reset 0x0000.000D CID0 UARTPCellID1, type RO, offset 0xFF4, reset 0x0000.00F0 CID1 566 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UARTPCellID2, type RO, offset 0xFF8, reset 0x0000.0005 CID2 UARTPCellID3, type RO, offset 0xFFC, reset 0x0000.00B1 CID3 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) SSI0 base: 0x4000.8000 SSICR0, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 SCR SPH SPO FRF DSS SSICR1, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 SOD MS SSE LBM SSIDR, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA SSISR, type RO, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0003 BSY RFF RNE TNF TFE SSICPSR, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 CPSDVSR SSIIM, type R/W, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 TXIM RXIM RTIM RORIM SSIRIS, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0008 TXRIS RXRIS RTRIS RORRIS SSIMIS, type RO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 TXMIS RXMIS RTMIS RORMIS SSIICR, type W1C, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 RTIC RORIC SSIPeriphID4, type RO, offset 0xFD0, reset 0x0000.0000 PID4 SSIPeriphID5, type RO, offset 0xFD4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID5 SSIPeriphID6, type RO, offset 0xFD8, reset 0x0000.0000 PID6 SSIPeriphID7, type RO, offset 0xFDC, reset 0x0000.0000 PID7 SSIPeriphID0, type RO, offset 0xFE0, reset 0x0000.0022 PID0 SSIPeriphID1, type RO, offset 0xFE4, reset 0x0000.0000 PID1 November 30, 2007 567 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SSIPeriphID2, type RO, offset 0xFE8, reset 0x0000.0018 PID2 SSIPeriphID3, type RO, offset 0xFEC, reset 0x0000.0001 PID3 SSIPCellID0, type RO, offset 0xFF0, reset 0x0000.000D CID0 SSIPCellID1, type RO, offset 0xFF4, reset 0x0000.00F0 CID1 SSIPCellID2, type RO, offset 0xFF8, reset 0x0000.0005 CID2 SSIPCellID3, type RO, offset 0xFFC, reset 0x0000.00B1 CID3 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface I2C Master I2C Master 0 base: 0x4002.0000 I2CMSA, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 SA R/S I2CMCS, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 BUSBSY IDLE ARBLST DATACK ADRACK ERROR BUSY I2CMCS, type WO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 ACK STOP START RUN I2CMDR, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA I2CMTPR, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0001 TPR I2CMIMR, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 IM I2CMRIS, type RO, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 RIS I2CMMIS, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 MIS I2CMICR, type WO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 IC I2CMCR, type R/W, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 SFE MFE LPBK Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface 568 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I2C Slave I2C Slave 0 base: 0x4002.0800 I2CSOAR, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 OAR I2CSCSR, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 FBR TREQ RREQ I2CSCSR, type WO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 DA I2CSDR, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 DATA I2CSIMR, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 IM I2CSRIS, type RO, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 RIS I2CSMIS, type RO, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 MIS I2CSICR, type WO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 IC Ethernet Controller Ethernet MAC Base 0x4004.8000 MACRIS, type RO, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 PHYINT MDINT RXER FOV TXEMP TXER RXINT MACIACK, type W1C, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 PHYINT MDINT RXER FOV TXEMP TXER RXINT MACIM, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.007F PHYINTM MDINTM RXERM FOVM TXEMPM TXERM RXINTM MACRCTL, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0008 RSTFIFO BADCRC PRMS AMUL RXEN MACTCTL, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 DUPLEX CRC PADEN TXEN MACDATA, type RO, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 RXDATA RXDATA MACDATA, type WO, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 TXDATA TXDATA November 30, 2007 569 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MACIA0, type R/W, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 MACOCT4 MACOCT3 MACOCT2 MACOCT1 MACIA1, type R/W, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 MACOCT6 MACOCT5 MACTHR, type R/W, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.003F THRESH MACMCTL, type R/W, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 REGADR WRITE START MACMDV, type R/W, offset 0x024, reset 0x0000.0080 DIV MACMTXD, type R/W, offset 0x02C, reset 0x0000.0000 MDTX MACMRXD, type R/W, offset 0x030, reset 0x0000.0000 MDRX MACNP, type RO, offset 0x034, reset 0x0000.0000 NPR MACTR, type R/W, offset 0x038, reset 0x0000.0000 NEWTX Ethernet Controller MII Management Base 0x4004.8000 MR0, type R/W, address 0x00, reset 0x3100 RESET LOOPBK SPEEDSL ANEGEN PWRDN ISO RANEG DUPLEX COLT MR1, type RO, address 0x01, reset 0x7849 100X_F 100X_H 10T_F 10T_H MFPS ANEGC RFAULT ANEGA LINK JAB EXTD MR2, type RO, address 0x02, reset 0x000E OUI[21:6] MR3, type RO, address 0x03, reset 0x7237 OUI[5:0] MN RN MR4, type R/W, address 0x04, reset 0x01E1 NP RF A3 A2 A1 A0 S[4:0] MR5, type RO, address 0x05, reset 0x0000 NP ACK RF A[7:0] S[4:0] MR6, type RO, address 0x06, reset 0x0000 PDF LPNPA PRX LPANEGA MR16, type R/W, address 0x10, reset 0x0140 RPTR INPOL TXHIM SQEI NL10 APOL RVSPOL PCSBP RXCC MR17, type R/W, address 0x11, reset 0x0000 JABBER_IE RXER_IE PRX_IE PDF_IE LPACK_IE LSCHG_IE RFAULT_IE ANEGCOMP_IE JABBER_INT RXER_INT PRX_INT PDF_INT LPACK_INT LSCHG_INT RFAULT_INT ANEGCOMP_INT MR18, type RO, address 0x12, reset 0x0000 ANEGF DPLX RATE RXSD RX_LOCK MR19, type R/W, address 0x13, reset 0x4000 TXO[1:0] 570 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MR23, type R/W, address 0x17, reset 0x0010 LED1[3:0] LED0[3:0] MR24, type R/W, address 0x18, reset 0x00C0 PD_MODE AUTO_SW MDIX MDIX_CM MDIX_SD Analog Comparators Base 0x4003.C000 ACMIS, type R/W1C, offset 0x00, reset 0x0000.0000 IN2 IN1 IN0 ACRIS, type RO, offset 0x04, reset 0x0000.0000 IN2 IN1 IN0 ACINTEN, type R/W, offset 0x08, reset 0x0000.0000 IN2 IN1 IN0 ACREFCTL, type R/W, offset 0x10, reset 0x0000.0000 EN RNG VREF ACSTAT0, type RO, offset 0x20, reset 0x0000.0000 OVAL ACSTAT1, type RO, offset 0x40, reset 0x0000.0000 OVAL ACSTAT2, type RO, offset 0x60, reset 0x0000.0000 OVAL ACCTL0, type R/W, offset 0x24, reset 0x0000.0000 TOEN ASRCP TSLVAL TSEN ISLVAL ISEN CINV ACCTL1, type R/W, offset 0x44, reset 0x0000.0000 TOEN ASRCP TSLVAL TSEN ISLVAL ISEN CINV ACCTL2, type R/W, offset 0x64, reset 0x0000.0000 TOEN ASRCP TSLVAL TSEN ISLVAL ISEN CINV Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Base 0x4002.8000 PWMCTL, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 GlobalSync1 GlobalSync0 PWMSYNC, type R/W, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 Sync1 Sync0 PWMENABLE, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 PWM3En PWM2En PWM1En PWM0En PWMINVERT, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 PWM3Inv PWM2Inv PWM1Inv PWM0Inv November 30, 2007 571 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWMFAULT, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 Fault3 Fault2 Fault1 Fault0 PWMINTEN, type R/W, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 IntFault IntPWM1 IntPWM0 PWMRIS, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 IntFault IntPWM1 IntPWM0 PWMISC, type R/W1C, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 IntFault IntPWM1 IntPWM0 PWMSTATUS, type RO, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 Fault PWM0CTL, type RO, offset 0x040, reset 0x0000.0000 CmpBUpd CmpAUpd LoadUpd Debug Mode Enable PWM1CTL, type RO, offset 0x080, reset 0x0000.0000 CmpBUpd CmpAUpd LoadUpd Debug Mode Enable PWM0INTEN, type RO, offset 0x044, reset 0x0000.0000 TrCmpBD TrCmpBU TrCmpAD TrCmpAU TrCntLoad TrCntZero IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM1INTEN, type RO, offset 0x084, reset 0x0000.0000 TrCmpBD TrCmpBU TrCmpAD TrCmpAU TrCntLoad TrCntZero IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM0RIS, type RO, offset 0x048, reset 0x0000.0000 IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM1RIS, type RO, offset 0x088, reset 0x0000.0000 IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM0ISC, type RO, offset 0x04C, reset 0x0000.0000 IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM1ISC, type RO, offset 0x08C, reset 0x0000.0000 IntCmpBD IntCmpBU IntCmpAD IntCmpAU IntCntLoad IntCntZero PWM0LOAD, type RO, offset 0x050, reset 0x0000.0000 Load PWM1LOAD, type RO, offset 0x090, reset 0x0000.0000 Load PWM0COUNT, type RO, offset 0x054, reset 0x0000.0000 Count PWM1COUNT, type RO, offset 0x094, reset 0x0000.0000 Count 572 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWM0CMPA, type RO, offset 0x058, reset 0x0000.0000 CompA PWM1CMPA, type RO, offset 0x098, reset 0x0000.0000 CompA PWM0CMPB, type RO, offset 0x05C, reset 0x0000.0000 CompB PWM1CMPB, type RO, offset 0x09C, reset 0x0000.0000 CompB PWM0GENA, type RO, offset 0x060, reset 0x0000.0000 ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero PWM1GENA, type RO, offset 0x0A0, reset 0x0000.0000 ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero PWM0GENB, type RO, offset 0x064, reset 0x0000.0000 ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero PWM1GENB, type RO, offset 0x0A4, reset 0x0000.0000 ActCmpBD ActCmpBU ActCmpAD ActCmpAU ActLoad ActZero PWM0DBCTL, type RO, offset 0x068, reset 0x0000.0000 Enable PWM1DBCTL, type RO, offset 0x0A8, reset 0x0000.0000 Enable PWM0DBRISE, type RO, offset 0x06C, reset 0x0000.0000 RiseDelay PWM1DBRISE, type RO, offset 0x0AC, reset 0x0000.0000 RiseDelay PWM0DBFALL, type RO, offset 0x070, reset 0x0000.0000 FallDelay PWM1DBFALL, type RO, offset 0x0B0, reset 0x0000.0000 FallDelay Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) QEI0 base: 0x4002.C000 QEICTL, type R/W, offset 0x000, reset 0x0000.0000 STALLEN INVI INVB INVA VelDiv VelEn ResMode CapMode SigMode Swap Enable QEISTAT, type RO, offset 0x004, reset 0x0000.0000 Direction Error QEIPOS, type R/W, offset 0x008, reset 0x0000.0000 Position Position November 30, 2007 573 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 QEIMAXPOS, type R/W, offset 0x00C, reset 0x0000.0000 MaxPos MaxPos QEILOAD, type R/W, offset 0x010, reset 0x0000.0000 Load Load QEITIME, type RO, offset 0x014, reset 0x0000.0000 Time Time QEICOUNT, type RO, offset 0x018, reset 0x0000.0000 Count Count QEISPEED, type RO, offset 0x01C, reset 0x0000.0000 Speed Speed QEIINTEN, type R/W, offset 0x020, reset 0x0000.0000 IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex QEIRIS, type RO, offset 0x024, reset 0x0000.0000 IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex QEIISC, type R/W1C, offset 0x028, reset 0x0000.0000 IntError IntDir IntTimer IntIndex 574 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Register Quick Reference C Ordering and Contact Information C.1 Ordering Information L M 3 S n n n n – g p p s s – r r m Part Number Temperature Package Speed Revision Shipping Medium I = -40 C to 85 C T = Tape-and-reel Omitted = Default shipping (tray or tube) Omitted = Default to current shipping revision A0 = First all-layer mask A1 = Metal layers update to A0 A2 = Metal layers update to A1 B0 = Second all-layer mask revision RN = 28-pin SOIC QN = 48-pin LQFP QC = 100-pin LQFP 20 = 20 MHz 25 = 25 MHz 50 = 50 MHz Table C-1. Part Ordering Information Orderable Part Number Description Stellaris® LM3S6952-IQC50 LM3S6952 Microcontroller Stellaris® LM3S6952-IQC50(T) LM3S6952 Microcontroller C.2 Kits The Luminary Micro Stellaris® Family provides the hardware and software tools that engineers need to begin development quickly. ■ Reference Design Kits accelerate product development by providing ready-to-run hardware, and comprehensive documentation including hardware design files: http://www.luminarymicro.com/products/reference_design_kits/ ■ Evaluation Kits provide a low-cost and effective means of evaluating Stellaris® microcontrollers before purchase: http://www.luminarymicro.com/products/evaluation_kits/ ■ Development Kits provide you with all the tools you need to develop and prototype embedded applications right out of the box: http://www.luminarymicro.com/products/boards.html See the Luminary Micro website for the latest tools available or ask your Luminary Micro distributor. C.3 Company Information Luminary Micro, Inc. designs, markets, and sells ARM Cortex-M3-based microcontrollers (MCUs). Austin, Texas-based Luminary Micro is the lead partner for the Cortex-M3 processor, delivering the world's first silicon implementation of the Cortex-M3 processor. Luminary Micro's introduction of the November 30, 2007 575 Preliminary LM3S6952 Microcontroller Stellaris® family of products provides 32-bit performance for the same price as current 8- and 16-bit microcontroller designs. With entry-level pricing at $1.00 for an ARM technology-based MCU, Luminary Micro's Stellaris product line allows for standardization that eliminates future architectural upgrades or software tool changes. Luminary Micro, Inc. 108 Wild Basin, Suite 350 Austin, TX 78746 Main: +1-512-279-8800 Fax: +1-512-279-8879 http://www.luminarymicro.com sales@luminarymicro.com C.4 Support Information For support on Luminary Micro products, contact: support@luminarymicro.com +1-512-279-8800, ext. 3 576 November 30, 2007 Preliminary Ordering and Contact Information Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 One Technology Way • P.O. Box 9106 • Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A. • Tel: 781.329.4700 • Fax: 781.461.3113 • www.analog.com Evaluating the ADE7878 Energy Metering IC PLEASE SEE THE LAST PAGE FOR AN IMPORTANT WARNING AND LEGAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS. Rev. 0 | Page 1 of 36 FEATURES Evaluation board designed to be used with accompanying software to implement a fully functional 3-phase energy meter Easy connection of external transducers via screw terminals Easy modification of signal conditioning components using PCB sockets LED indicators on the CF1, CF2, CF3, IRQ0, and IRQ1 logic outputs Optically isolated metering components and USB-based communication with a PC External voltage reference option available for on-chip reference evaluation PC COM port-based firmware updates GENERAL DESCRIPTION The ADE7878 is a high accuracy, 3-phase electrical energy measurement IC with serial interfaces and three flexible pulse outputs. The ADE7878 incorporates seven ADCs, reference circuitry, and all signal processing required to perform total (fundamental and harmonic) active, reactive, and apparent energy measurement, fundamental active and reactive energy measurement, and rms calculations. This user guide describes the ADE7878 evaluation kit hardware, firmware, and software functionality. The evaluation board contains an ADE7878 and a LPC2368 microcontroller (from NXP Semiconductors). The ADE7878 and its associated metering components are optically isolated from the microcontroller. The microcontroller communicates with the PC using a USB interface. Firmware updates can be loaded using one PC com port and a regular serial cable. The ADE7878 evaluation board and this user guide, together with the ADE7878 data sheet, provide a complete evaluation platform for the ADE7878. The evaluation board has been designed so that the ADE7878 can be evaluated in an energy meter. Using appropriate current transducers, the evaluation board can be connected to a test bench or high voltage (240 V rms) test circuit. On-board resistor divider networks provide the attenuation for the line voltages. This user guide describes how the current transducers should be connected for the best performance. The evaluation board requires two external 3.3 V power supplies and the appropriate current transducers. EVALUATION BOARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM ADE78xxP1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P9IAPIANIBPIBNICPICNINPINNGNDVNGNDVCPGNDVBPGNDVAPGNDVDDFILTERNETWORKFILTER NETWORKAND ATTENUATIONADR280OPTIONAL EXTERNAL1.2V REFERENCEOPTIONALEXTERNALCLOCK INDIGITALISOLATORSLPC2368P10GND2VDD2P12MCU_GNDMCU_VDDUSB PORTJ2J3J4CF3CF2CF1P13JTAGINTERFACEP15CONNECTOR TOPC COM PORT09078-001 Figure 1. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 2 of 36 TABLE OF CONTENTS Features .............................................................................................. 1 General Description ......................................................................... 1 Evaluation Board Connection Diagram ........................................ 1 Revision History ............................................................................... 2 Evaluation Board Hardware ............................................................ 3 Power Supplies .............................................................................. 3 Analog Inputs (P1 to P4 and P5 to P8) ...................................... 3 Setting Up the Evaluation Board as an Energy Meter ............. 6 Evaluation Board Software .............................................................. 8 Installing and Uninstalling the ADE7878 Software ................. 8 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8 PSM0 Mode—Normal Power Mode .......................................... 9 PSM1 Mode ................................................................................. 17 PSM2 Mode ................................................................................. 17 PSM3 Mode ................................................................................. 18 Managing the Communication Protocol Between the Microcontroller and the ADE7878 .............................................. 19 Acquiring HSDC Data Continuously ...................................... 21 Starting the ADE7878 DSP ....................................................... 22 Stopping the ADE7878 DSP ..................................................... 22 Upgrading Microcontroller Firmware ......................................... 23 Control Registers Data File ....................................................... 23 Evaluation Board Schematics and Layout ................................... 25 Schematic..................................................................................... 25 Layout .......................................................................................... 32 Ordering Information .................................................................... 34 Bill of Materials ........................................................................... 34 REVISION HISTORY 8/10—Revision 0: Initial Version Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 3 of 36 EVALUATION BOARD HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES The evaluation board has three power domains: one that supplies the microcontroller and one side of the isocouplers, one that supplies the other side of the optocouplers, and one that supplies the ADE7878. The ground of the microcontroller’s power domain is connected to the ground of the PC through the USB cable. The ground of the ADE7878 power domain is determined by the ground of the phase voltages, VAP, VBP, VCP, and VN, and must be different from the ground of the micro-controller’s power domain. The microcontroller 3.3 V supply is provided at the P12 connector. The ADE7878 3.3 V supply is provided at the P9 connector. Close jumper JP2 to ensure that the same 3.3 V supply from ADE7878 is also provided at the isocouplers. ANALOG INPUTS (P1 TO P4 AND P5 TO P8) Current and voltage signals are connected at the screw terminal, P1 to P4 and P5 to P8, respectively. All analog input signals are filtered using the on-board antialiasing filters before the signals are connected to the ADE7878. The components used on the board are the recommended values to be used with the ADE7878. Current Sense Inputs (P1, P2, P3, and P4) The ADE7878 measures three phase currents and the neutral current. Current transformers or Rogowski coils can be used to sense the current but should not be mixed together. The ADE7878 contains different internal PGA gains on phase currents and on the neutral current; therefore, sensors with different ratios can be used. The only requirement is to have the same scale signals at the PGA outputs; otherwise, the mismatch functionality of the ADE7878 is compromised (see the ADE7878 data sheet for more details about neutral current mismatch). Figure 2 shows the structure used for the Phase A current; the sensor outputs are connected to the P1 connector. The R1 and R2 resistors are the burden resistors and, by default, they are not populated. They can also be disabled using the JP1A and JP2A jumpers. The R9/C9 and R10/C10 RC networks are used in conjunction with Rogowski coils. They can be disabled using the JP3A and JP4A jumpers. The R17/C17 and R18/C18 RC networks are the antialiasing filters. The default corner frequency of these low pass filters is 7.2 kHz (1 kΩ/22 nF). These filters can easily be adjusted by replacing the components on the evaluation board. All the other current channels (that is, Phase B, Phase C, and the neutral current) have a similar input structure. Using a Current Transformer as the Current Sensor Figure 3 shows how a current transformer can be used as a current sensor in one phase of a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system (Phase A). The other two phases and the neutral current require similar connections. P1IAPIANJP1AJP2AR1R2R17R10R18100Ω1kΩ100Ω1kΩC922,000pFC1022,000pFC1722,000pFC1822,000pFR9JP4AJP5AJP3AJP6AIAPIANADE78xxTP1TP209078-002 Figure 2. Phase A Current Input Structure on the Evaluation Board IMAX = 6A rmsCT1:2000P1JP1AJP2AR150ΩR250ΩR17R10R18100Ω1kΩ100Ω1kΩC922,000pFC1022,000pFC1722,000pFC1822,000pFR9JP4AJP5AJP3AJP6AIAPIANADE78xxTP1TP209078-003 Figure 3. Example of a Current Transformer Connection The R1 and R2 burden resistors must be defined as functions of the current transformer ratio and maximum current of the system, using the following formula: R1 = R2 = 1/2 × 0.5/sqrt(2) × N/IFS where: 0.5/sqrt(2) is the rms value of the full-scale voltage accepted at the ADC input. N is the input-to-output ratio of the current transformer. IFS is the maximum rms current to be measured. The JP1A and JP2A jumpers should be opened if R1 and R2 are used. The antialiasing filters should be enabled by opening the J5A and J6A jumpers (see Figure 3). The secondary current of the transformer is converted to a voltage by using a burden resistor across the secondary winding outputs. Care should be taken when using a current transformer as the current sensor. If the secondary is left open (that is, no burden is connected), a large voltage may be present at the secondary outputs. This can cause an electric shock hazard and potentially damage electronic components. Most current transformers introduce a phase shift that the manufacturer indicates in the data sheet. This phase shift can lead to significant energy measurement errors, especially at low power factors. The ADE7878 can correct the phase error using the APHCAL[9:0], BPHCAL[9:0], and CPHCAL[9:0] phase calibration registers as long as the error stays between −6.732° and +1.107° at 50 Hz (see the ADE7878 data sheet for more UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 4 of 36 details). The software supplied with the ADE7878 evaluation board allows user adjustment of phase calibration registers. For this particular example, burden resistors of 50 Ω signify an input current of 7.05 A rms at the ADE7878 ADC full-scale input (0.5 V). In addition, the PGA gains for the current channel must be set at 1. For more information about setting PGA gains, see the ADE7878 data sheet. The evaluation software allows the user to configure the current channel gain. Using a Rogowski Coil as the Current Sensor Figure 4 shows how a Rogowski coil can be used as a current sensor in one phase of a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system (Phase A). The other two phases and the neutral current require similar connections. The Rogowski coil does not require any burden resistors; therefore, R1 and R2 should not be populated. The antialiasing filters should be enabled by opening the J5A and J6A jumpers. To account for the high frequency noise introduced by the coil, an additional antialiasing filter must be introduced by opening the JP3A and JP4A jumpers. Then, to compensate for the 20 dB/dec gain introduced by the di/dt sensor, the integrator of the ADE7878 must be enabled by setting Bit 0 (INTEN) of the CONFIG register. The integrator has a −20 dB/dec attenuation and an approximately −90° phase shift and, when combined with the di/dt sensor, results in a magnitude and phase response with a flat gain over the frequency band of interest. ROGOWSKICOILP1JP1AJP2AR1R2R17R10R18100Ω1kΩ100Ω1kΩC922,000pFC1022,000pFC1722,000pFC1822,000pFR9JP4AJP5AJP3AJP6AIAPIANADE78xxTP1TP209078-004 Figure 4. Example of a Rogowski Coil Connection Voltage Sense Inputs (P5, P6, P7, and P8 Connectors) The voltage input connections on the ADE7878 evaluation board can be directly connected to the line voltage sources. The line voltages are attenuated using a simple resistor divider network before they are supplied to the ADE7878. The attenuation network on the voltage channels is designed so that the corner frequency (3 dB frequency) of the network matches that of the antialiasing filters in the current channel inputs. This prevents the occurrence of large energy errors at low power factors. Figure 5 shows a typical connection of the Phase A voltage inputs; the resistor divider is enabled by opening the JP7A jumper. The antialiasing filter on the VN data path is enabled by opening the JP7N jumper. JP8A and JP8N are also opened. The VN analog input is connected to AGND via the R25/C25 antialiasing filter using the JP8N connector. The attenuation networks can be easily modified by the user to accommodate any input level. However, the value of R32 (1 kΩ), should be modified only together with the corresponding resistors in the current channel (R17 and R18 on the Phase A current data path). P8JP8AVAPVNR291MΩ100kΩR321kΩC3222,000pFC2522,000pFR26JP7AVAPADE78xxTP12JP9AVNPHASE ANEUTRALP5JP8N1kΩR25JP7NVNTP9ACOMB12309078-005 Figure 5. Phase A Voltage Input Structure on the Evaluation Board The maximum signal level permissible at the VAP, VBP, and VCP pins of the ADE7878 is 0.5 V peak. Although the ADE7878 analog inputs can withstand ±2 V without risk of permanent damage, the signal range should not exceed ±0.5 V with respect to AGND for a specified operation. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 5 of 36 Table 1. Recommended Settings for Evaluation Board Connectors Jumper Option Description JP1 Soldered Connects AGND to ground. By default, it is soldered. JP1A, JP1B, JP1C, JP1N, Open Connect IAP, IBP, IC, and INP to AGND. By default, they are open. JP2 Closed Connects the ADE7878 VDD power supply (VDD_F at the P9 connector) to the power supply of the isocouplers (VDD2 at the P10 connector). By default, it is closed. JP2A, JP2B, JP2C, JP2N Open Connect IAN, IBN, ICN, and INN to AGND. By default, they are open. JP3 Unsoldered Connects the pad metal below the ADE7878 to AGND. By default, it is unsoldered. JP3A, JP3B, JP3C, JP3N Closed Disable the phase compensation network in the IAP, IBP, ICP, and INP data path. By default, they are closed. JP4 Soldered Connects C3 to DVDD. By default, it is soldered. JP4A, JP4B, JP4C, JP4N Closed Disable the phase compensation network in the IAN, IBN, ICN, and INN data path. By default, they are closed. JP5 Soldered Connects C5 to AVDD. By default, it is soldered. JP5A, JP5B, JP5C, JP5N Open Disable the phase antialiasing filter in the IAP, IBP, ICP, and INP data path. By default, they are open. JP6 Soldered Connects C41 to the REF pin of the ADE7878. By default, it is soldered. JP6A, JP6B, JP6C, JP6N Open Disable the phase antialiasing filter in the IAN, IBN, ICN, and INN data path. By default, they are open. JP7 Closed Enables the supply to the microcontroller. When open, takes out the supply to the microcontroller. By default, it is closed. JP7A, JP7B, JP7C Open Disable the resistor divider in the VAP, VBP, and VCP data path. By default, they are open. JP7N Open Disables the antialiasing filter in the VN data path. By default, it is open. JP8 Open Sets the microcontroller in flash memory programming mode. By default, it is open. JP8A, JP8B, JP8C Open Connect VAP, VBP, and VCP to AGND. By default, they are open. JP8N Closed Connects VN to AGND. By default, it is closed. JP9 Open When closed, signals the microcontroller to declare all I/O pins as outputs. It is used when another microcontroller is used to manage the ADE7878 through the P38 socket. By default, it is open. JP9A, JP9B, JP9C Soldered to Pin 1 (AGND) Connect the ground of antialiasing filters in the VAP, VB, and VCP data path to AGND or VN. By default, they are soldered to AGND. JP10 Open Connects the external voltage reference to ADE7878. By default, it is open. JP11 Soldered to Pin 1 Connects the CLKIN pin of the ADE7878 to a 16,384 MHz crystal (Pin 1 of JP11) or to an external clock input provided at J1. By default, it is soldered to Pin 1. JP12 Soldered to Pin 3 (AGND) Connects DGND (Pin 2 of JP12) of the ADE7878 to ground (Pin 1 of JP12) or to AGND (Pin 3 of JP12). JP35, JP33 Open If I2C communication between the NXP LPC2368 and the ADE7878 is used, these connectors should be closed with 0 Ω resistors, and the JP36 and JP34 connectors should be opened. By default, the SPI is the communication used between the NXP LPC2368 and the ADE7878; therefore, these connectors are open. JP31, JP37 Open If HSDC communication is used, these connectors should be closed with 0 Ω resistors, and the JP35 and JP33 connectors should also be closed. By default, the SPI is the communication used between the NXP LPC2368 and the ADE7878; therefore, these connectors are open. JP36, JP34, JP32, JP38 Closed with 0 Ω resistors If SPI communication is used between the NXP LPC2368 and the ADE7878, these connectors should be closed and JP35, JP33, JP31, and JP37 should be opened. By default, the SPI is the communication used between the NXP LPC2368 and the ADE7878; therefore, these connectors are closed. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 6 of 36 SETTING UP THE EVALUATION BOARD AS AN ENERGY METER Figure 6 shows a typical setup for the ADE7878 evaluation board. In this example, an energy meter for a 4-wire, 3-phase distribution system is shown. Current transformers are used to sense the phase and neutral currents and are connected as shown in Figure 6. The line voltages are connected directly to the evaluation board as shown. Note that the state of all jumpers must match the states shown in Figure 6, keeping in mind that the board is supplied from two different 3.3 V power supplies, one for the ADE7878 domain, VDD, and one for the NXP LPC2368 domain, MCU_VDD. Because the two domains are isolated to ensure that there is no electrical connection between the high voltage test circuit and the control circuit, the power supplies should have floating voltage outputs. The evaluation board is connected to the PC using a regular USB cable supplied with the board. When the evaluation board is powered up and connected to the PC, the enumeration process begins and the PC recognizes new hardware and asks to install the appropriate driver. The drive can be found in the VirCOM_ Driver_XP folder of the CD. After the driver is installed, the supplied evaluation software can be launched. The next section describes the ADE7878 evaluation software in detail and how it can be installed and uninstalled. Activating Serial Communication Between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 The ADE7878 evaluation board is supplied with communica-tion between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 that is set through the SPI ports. The JP32, JP34, JP36, and JP38 jumpers are closed using 0 Ω resistors, and the JP31, JP33, JP35, and JP37 jumpers are open. The SPI port should be chosen as the active port in the ADE7878 control panel. Communication between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 is also possible using the I2C ports. To accomplish this, the JP31, JP33, JP35, and JP37 jumpers should be closed using 0 Ω resistors, and the JP32, JP34, JP36, and JP38 jumpers should be open. In this case, the I2C port should be chosen as the active port in the ADE7878 control panel (see Table 2). Table 2. Jumper State to Activate SPI or I2C Communication Active Communication Jumpers Closed with 0 Ω Resistors Jumpers Open SPI (Default) JP32, JP34, JP36, JP38 JP31, JP33, JP35, JP37 I2C JP31, JP33, JP35, JP37 JP32, JP34, JP36, JP38 Using the Evaluation Board with Another Microcontroller It is possible to manage the ADE7878 mounted on the evalua-tion board with a different microcontroller mounted on another board. The ADE7878 can be connected to this second board through one of two connectors: P11 or P38. P11 is placed on the same power domain as the ADE7878. P38 is placed on the power domain of the NXP LPC2368 and communicates with the ADE7878 through the isocouplers. If P11 is used, the power domain of the NXP LPC2368 should not be supplied at P12. If P38 is used, a conflict may arise with the NXP LPC2368 I/O ports. The following two options are provided to deal with this situation: • One option is to keep the NXP LPC2368 running and close JP9. This tells the NXP LPC2368 to set all of its I/Os high to allow the other microcontroller to communicate with the ADE7878. After JP9 is closed, the S2 reset button should be pressed low to force the NXP LPC2368 to reset. This is necessary because the state of JP9 is checked inside the NXP LPC2368 program only once after reset. • The other option is to cut the power supply of the NXP LPC2368 by disconnecting JP7. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 7 of 36 P1IAPIANIAPIANVAPVOLTAGE SOURCEGNDP9VDDJP1A, JP2A = OPENJP3A, JP4A = CLOSEDJP5A, JP6A = OPENNEUTRALPHASE BPHASE CLOADNEUTRALVOLTAGE SOURCEMCU_GNDP12MCU_VDDJP1, JP2 = CLOSEDR1R2P2IBPIBNIBPIBNJP1B, JP2B = OPENJP3B, JP4B = CLOSEDJP5B, JP6B = OPENR3R4P3ICPICNICPICNJP1C, JP2C = OPENJP3C, JP4C = CLOSEDJP5C, JP6C = OPENR5R6P4INPINNINPINNJP1N, JP2N = OPENJP3N, JP4N = CLOSEDJP5N, JP6N = OPENJP7A, JP8A = OPENR7R8P8VAPR26R29R32C32VBPJP7B, JP8B = OPENP7VBPR27R30R33C33VCPJP7C, JP8C = OPENJP7N = OPENJP8N = CLOSEDP6VCPR28R31R34C34C34VNP5VNR2509078-006 Figure 6. Typical Setup for the ADE7878 Evaluation Board UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 8 of 36 EVALUATION BOARD SOFTWARE The ADE7878 evaluation board is supported by Windows® based software that allows the user to access all the functionality of the ADE7878. The software communicates with the NXP LPC2368 microcontroller using the USB as a virtual COM port. The NXP LPC2368 communicates with the ADE7878 to process the requests that are sent from the PC. INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE ADE7878 SOFTWARE The ADE7878 software is supplied on one CD-ROM. It contains two projects: one that represents the NXP LPC2368 project and one LabVIEW™ based program that runs on the PC. The NXP LPC2368 project is already loaded into the processor, but the LabVIEW based program must be installed. 1. To install the ADE7878 software, place the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM reader and double-click LabView_project\installation_files\setup.exe. This launches the setup program that automatically installs all the software components, including the uninstall program, and creates the required directories. 2. To launch the software, go to the Start/Programs/ ADE7878 Eval Software menu and click ADE7878 Eval Software. Both the ADE7878 evaluation software program and the NI run-time engine are easily uninstalled by using the Add/ Remove Programs option in the control panel. 1. Before installing a new version of the ADE7878 evaluation software, first uninstall the previous version. 2. Select the Add/Remove Programs option in the Windows control panel. 3. Select the program to uninstall and click the Add/Remove button. FRONT PANEL When the software is launched, the Front Panel is opened. This panel contains three areas: the main menu at the left, the sub- menu at the right, and a box that displays the name of the communication port used by the PC to connect to the evaluation port, also at the right (see Figure 7). The COM port used to connect the PC with the evaluation board must be selected first. The program displays a list of the active COM ports, allowing you to select the right one. To learn what COM port is used by the evaluation board, launch the Windows Device Manager (the devmgmt.msc file) in the Run window on the Windows Start menu. By default, the program offers the option of searching for the COM port. Serial communication between the microcontroller and the ADE7878 is introduced using a switch. By default, the SPI port is used. Note that the active serial port must first be set in the hardware. See the Activating Serial Communication Between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 section for details on how to set it up. The main menu has only one choice, other than Exit, enabled, Find COM Port. Clicking it starts a process in which the PC tries to connect to the evaluation board using the port indicated in the Start menu. It uses the echo function of the communica- tion protocol (see the Managing the Communication Protocol Between the Microcontroller and the ADE7878 section). It displays the port that matches the protocol and then sets it to 115,200 baud, eight data bits, no parity, no flow control, one stop bit. 09078-007 Figure 7. Front Panel of ADE7878 Software If the evaluation board is not connected, the port is displayed as XXXXX. In this case, the evaluation software is still accessible, but no communication can be executed. In both cases, whether the search for the COM port is successful or not, the cursor is positioned back at Please select from the following options in the main menu, Find COM Port is grayed out, and the next main menu options are enabled (see Figure 8). These options allow you to command the ADE7878 in either the PSM0 or PSM3 power mode. The other power modes, PSM1 and PSM2, are not available because initializations have to be made in PSM0 before the ADE7878 can be used in one of these other modes. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 9 of 36 09078-008 Figure 8. Front Panel After the COM Port Is Identified PSM0 MODE—NORMAL POWER MODE Enter PSM0 Mode When the evaluation board is powered up, the ADE7878 is in PSM3 sleep mode. When Enter PSM0 mode is selected, the microcontroller manipulates the PM0 and PM1 pins of the ADE7878 to switch it into PSM0 mode. It waits 50 ms for the circuit to power up and, if SPI communication is activated on the board, it executes three SPI write operations to Address 0xEBFF of the ADE7878 to activate the SPI port. If the operation has been correctly executed or I2C communi-cation is used, the message Configuring LPC2368 – ADE7878 communication was successful is displayed, and you must click OK to continue. The only error that may occur during this operation is communication related; if this happens, the following message is displayed: Configuring LPC2368 – ADE7878 communication was not successful. Please check the communication between the PC and ADE7878 evaluation board and between LPC2368 and ADE78xx. Bit 1 (I2C_LOCK) of the CONFIG2[7:0] register is now set to 1 to lock in the serial port choice. Then the DICOEFF register is initialized with 0xFF8000, and the DSP of the ADE7878 is started when the software program writes RUN = 0x1. At the end of this process, the entire main menu is grayed out, and the submenu is enabled. You can now manage all functionality of the ADE7878 in PSM0 mode. To switch the ADE7878 to another power mode, click the Exit button on the submenu. The state of the Front Panel is shown in Figure 9. 09078-009 Figure 9. Front Panel After the ADE7878 Enters PSM0 Mode Reset ADE7878 When Reset ADE78xx is selected on the Front Panel, the RESET pin of the ADE7878 is kept low for 20 ms and then is set high. If the operation is correctly executed, the message ADE7878 was reset successfully is displayed, and you must click OK to continue. The only error that may occur during this operation is communication related; if this happens, the following message is displayed: The communication between PC and ADE7878 evaluation board or between LPC2368 and ADE78xx did not function correctly. There is no guarantee the reset of ADE7878 has been performed. Configure Communication When Configure Communication is selected on the Front Panel, the panel shown in Figure 10 is opened. This panel is useful if an ADE7878 reset has been performed and the SPI is no longer the active serial port. Select the SPI port by clicking the I2C/SPI Selector button and then click OK to update the selection and lock the port. If the port selection is successful, the message, Configuring LPC2368 – ADE7878 communica-tion was successful, is displayed, and you must click OK to continue. If a communication error occurs, the message, Configuring LPC2368 – ADE7878 communication was not successful. Please check the communication between the PC and ADE7878 evaluation board, is displayed. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 10 of 36 09078-010 Figure 10. Configure Communication Panel The CONFIG2[7:0] register is written with Bit 1 (I2C_LOCK) set to 1 so that you do not need to remember to set it once the communication is set. The contents of CONFIG2[7:0] are then read back and displayed with Bit 1 (I2C_LOCK). To close the panel, click the Exit button; the cursor is positioned at Please select from the following options in the submenu of the Front Panel. Total Active Power When Total Active Power is selected on the Front Panel, the panel shown in Figure 11 is opened. The screen has an upper half and a lower half: the lower half shows the total active power data path of one phase, and the upper half shows bits, registers, and commands necessary to power management. 09078-011 Figure 11. Total Active Power Panel The Active Data Path button manages which data path is shown in the bottom half. Some registers or bits, like the WTHR0[23:0] register or Bit 0 (INTEN) of the CONFIG[15:0] register, are common to all data paths, independent of the phase shown. When these registers are updated, all the values in all data paths are updated. The HPFDIS[23:0] register is included twice in the data path, but only the register value from the current data path is written into the ADE7878. All the other instances take this value directly. 1. Click the Read Configuration button to cause all registers that manage the total active power to be read and displayed. Registers from the inactive data paths are also read and updated. 2. Click the Write Configuration button to cause all registers that manage the total active power to be written into the ADE7878. Registers from the inactive data paths are also written. The ADE78xx status box shows the power mode that the ADE7878 is in (it should always be PSM0 in this window), the active serial port (it should always be SPI), and the CHECKSUM[31:0] register. After every read and write operation, the CHECKSUM[31:0] register is read and its contents displayed. 3. Click the CFx Configuration button to open a new panel (see Figure 12). This panel gives access to all bits and registers that configure the CF1, CF2, and CF3 outputs of the ADE7878. The Read Setup and Write Setup buttons update and display the CF1, CF2, and CF3 output values. 09078-012 Figure 12. CFx Configuration Panel Like the Total Active Power panel, the CHECKSUM[31:0] register is read back whenever a read or write operation is executed in the CFx Configuration panel. To select more than one option for a TERMSELx bit in the COMPMODE [15:0] register, press the CTRL key while clicking the options you want. Clicking the Exit button closes the panel and redisplays the Total Active Power panel. When the Read Energy Registers button in the Total Active Power panel is clicked, a new panel is opened (see Figure 13). This panel gives access to bits and registers that configure the energy accumulation. The Read Setup and Write Setup buttons update and display the bit and register values. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 11 of 36 The CHECKSUM[31:0] register is read back whenever a read or write operation is executed in the Read Energy Registers panel. Clicking the Read all energy registers button causes all energy registers to be read immediately, without regard to the modes in which they function. 09078-013 Figure 13. Read Energy Registers Panel The panel also gives the choice of reading the energy registers synchronous to CFx interrupts (pulses) or using line cycle accumulation mode. When the Read energy registers synchronous with CF1 pulses button is clicked, the following happens: 1. The STATUS0[31:0] register is read and then written back to so that all nonzero interrupt flag bits are cancelled. 2. Bit 14 (CF1) in the MASK0[31:0] register is set to 1, and the interrupt protocol is started (see the Managing the Communication Protocol Between the Microcontroller and the ADE7878 section for protocol details). 3. The microcontroller then waits until the IRQ0 pin goes low. If the wait is longer than the timeout you indicate in 3 sec increments, the following error message is displayed: No CF1 pulse was generated. Verify all the settings before attempting to read energy registers in this mode! 4. When the IRQ0 pin goes low, the STATUS0[31:0] register is read and written back to cancel Bit 14 (CF1); then the energy registers involved in the CF1 signal are read and their contents are displayed. A timer in 10 ms increments can be used to measure the reaction time after the IRQ0 pin goes low. 5. The operation is repeated until the button is clicked again. The process is similar when the other CF2, CF3, and line accum-ulation (Read Energy Registers panel) buttons are clicked. It is recommended to always use a timeout when dealing with interrupts. By default, the timeout is set to 10 (indicating a 30 sec timeout), and the timer is set to 0 (indicating that the STATUSx[31:0] and energy registers are read immediately after the IRQ0 pin goes low). When clicked on the Front Panel, the Total Reactive Power, Fundamental Active Power, and Fundamental Reactive Power buttons open panels that are very similar to the Total Active Power panel. These panels are shown in Figure 14, Figure 15, and Figure 16. 09078-014 Figure 14. Total Reactive Power Panel 09078-015 Figure 15. Fundamental Active Power Panel 09078-016 Figure 16. Fundamental Reactive Power Panel UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 12 of 36 Apparent Power When Apparent Power is selected on the Front Panel, a new panel is opened (see Figure 17). Similar to the other panels that deal with power measurement, this panel is divided into two parts: the lower half shows the apparent power data path of one phase and the ADE7878 status; the upper half shows the bits, registers, and commands necessary to power management. 09078-017 Figure 17. Apparent Power Panel Current RMS When RMS Current is selected on the Front Panel, a new panel is opened (see Figure 18). All data paths of all phases are available. 09078-018 Figure 18. Current RMS panel Clicking the Read Setup button causes a read of all registers shown in the panel. Clicking the Write Setup button causes writes to the xIRMSOS[23:0] registers. You can use the Start Digital Signal Processor and Stop Digital Signal Processor buttons to manage the Run[15:0] register and the Read xIRMS registers button, which uses the ZXIA, ZXIB, and ZXIC interrupts at the IRQ1 pin, to read the xIRMS[23:0]registers 500 consecutive times and then compute and display their average. If no interrupt occurs for the time indicated by the timeout (in 3 sec increments), the following message is displayed: No ZXIA, ZXIB or ZXIC interrupt was generated. Verify at least one sinusoidal signal is provided between IAP-IAN, IBP-IBN or ICP-ICN pins. A delay can be introduced (in 10 ms increments) between the time the IRQ1 pin goes low and the moment the xIRMS registers are read. The operation is repeated until the button is clicked again. Mean Absolute Value Current When Mean Absolute Value Current is selected on the Front Panel, a new panel is opened (see Figure 19). When the Read xIMAV registers button is clicked, the xIMAV[19:0] registers are read 10 consecutive times, and their average is computed and displayed. After this operation, the button is returned to high automatically. The ADE7878 status is also displayed. 09078-019 Figure 19. Mean Absolute Value Current Panel Voltage RMS When RMS Voltage is selected on the Front Panel, the Voltage RMS panel is opened (see Figure 20). This panel is very similar to the Current RMS panel. Clicking the Read Setup button executes a read of the xVRMSOS[23:0] and xVRMS[23:0] registers. Clicking Write Setup writes the xVRMSOS[23:0] registers into the ADE7878. The Start Digital Signal Processor and Stop Digital Signal Processor buttons manage the Run[15:0] register. When the Read xVRMS registers button is clicked, the xVRMS[23:0] registers are read 500 consecutive times and the average is displayed. The operation is repeated until the button is clicked again. Note that the ZXVA, ZXVB, and ZXVC zero-crossing interrupts are not used in this case because they are disabled when the voltages go below 10% of full scale. This allows rms voltage registers to be read even when the phase voltages are very low. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 13 of 36 09078-020 Figure 20. Voltage RMS Panel Power Quality The Power Quality panel is accessible from the Front Panel and is divided into two parts (see Figure 21). The lower part displays registers that manage the power quality measurement functions for the Active Measurement button in the upper part of the panel. The upper part also displays the ADE7878 status and the buttons that manage the measurements. When the READ CONFIGURATION button is clicked, all power quality registers (MASK1[31:0], STATUS1[31:0], PERIOD[15:0], MMODE[7:0], ISUM[27:0], OVLVL[23:0], OILVL[23:0], PHSTATUS[15:0], IPEAK[31:0], VPEAK[31:0], SAGLVL[23:0], SAGCYC[7:0], ANGLE0[15:0], ANGLE1[15:0], ANGLE2[15:0], COMPMODE[15:0], CHECKSUM[31:0], and PEAKCYC[7:0]) are read, and the ones belonging to the active panel are displayed. Based on the PERIOD[15:0] register, the line frequency is computed and displayed in the lower part of the panel, in Zero Crossing Measurements. Based on the ANGLEx[15:0] registers, cos(ANGLEx) is computed and displayed in the Time Intervals Between Phases panel that is accessible from the Active Measurement Zero Crossing dropdown box (see Figure 21). When the WRITE CONFIGURATION button is clicked, MMODE[7:0], OVLVL[23:0], OILVL[23:0], SAGLVL[23:0], SAGCYC[7:0], COMPMODE[15:0], and PEAKCYC[7:0] are written into the ADE7878, and CHECKSUM[31:0] is read back and displayed in the CHECKSUM[31:0] box at the top of the upper part of the panel. 09078-021 Figure 21. Power Quality Zero-Crossing Measurements Panel When the WAIT FOR INTERRUPTS button is clicked, the interrupts that you have enabled in the MASK1[31:0] register are monitored. When the IRQ1 pin goes low, the STATUS1[31:0] register is read and its bits are displayed. The ISUM[27:0], PHSTATUS[15:0], IPEAK[31:0], VPEAK[31:0], ANGLE0[15:0], ANGLE1[15:0], and ANGLE2[15:0] registers are also read and displayed. A timeout should be introduced in 3 sec increments to ensure that the program does not wait indefinitely for interrupts. A timer (in 10 ms increments) is provided to allow reading of the registers with a delay from the moment the interrupt is triggered. The Active Measurement Zero Crossing button gives access to the Zero Crossing, Neutral Current Mismatch, Overvoltage and Overcurrent Measurement, Peak Detection, and Time Intervals Between Phases panels (see Figure 21 through Figure 25). The line frequency is computed using the PERIOD[15:0] register, based on the following formula: ][000,256HzPeriodf= The cosine of the ANGLE0[15:0], ANGLE1[15:0], and ANGLE2[15:0] measurements is computed using the following formula: =000,256×360×)(fANGLExcosANGLExcos UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 14 of 36 09078-022 Figure 22. Neutral Current Mismatch Panel 09078-023 Figure 23. Overvoltage and Overcurrent Measurements Panel 09078-024 Figure 24. Peak Detection Panel 09078-025 Figure 25. Time Intervals Between Phases Panel Waveform Sampling The Waveform Sampling panel (see Figure 26) is accessible from the Front Panel and uses the HSDC port to acquire data from the ADE7878 and display it. It can be accessed only if the communication between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 is through the I2C. See the Activating Serial Communication Between the ADE7878 and the NXP LPC2368 section for details on how to set I2C communication on the ADE7878 evaluation board. 09078-026 Figure 26. Waveform Sampling Panel Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 15 of 36 The HSDC transmits data to the NXP LPC2368 at 4 MHz because this is the maximum speed at which the slave SPI of the NXP LPC2368 can receive data. The panel contains some switches that must be set before acquiring data. • One switch chooses the quantities that are displayed: phase currents and voltages or phase powers. For every set of quantities, only one can be acquired at a time. This choice is made using the Select Waveform button. • A second switch allows acquired data to be stored in files for further use. This switch is set with the ACQUIRE DATA button. • The acquisition time should also be set before an acquis-ition is ordered. By default, this time is 150 ms. It is unlimited for phase currents and voltages and for phase powers. The NXP LPC2368 executes in real time three tasks using the ping pong buffer method: continuously receiving data from HSDC, storing the data into its USB memory, and sending the data to the PC. Transmitting seven phase currents and voltages at 4 MHz takes 103.25 μs (which is less than 125 μs); therefore, the HSDC update rate is 8 kHz (HSDC_CFG = 0x0F). Transmitting nine phase powers takes 72 μs (again, less than 125 μs); therefore, the HSDC update rate is also 8 kHz (HSDC_CGF = 0x11). To start the acquisition, click the ACQUIRE DATA button. The data is displayed on one plot. If you click the Write waveforms to file?/No writing to files switch to enable the writing of waveforms to a file, the program asks for the name and location of the files before storing the waveform. Checksum Register The Checksum Register panel is accessible from the Front Panel and gives access to all ADE7878 registers that are used to compute the CHECKSUM[31:0] register (see Figure 27). You can read/write the values of these registers by clicking the Read and Write buttons. The LabView program estimates the value of the CHECKSUM[31:0] register and displays it whenever one of the registers is changed. When the Read button is pressed, the registers are read and the CHECKSUM[31:0] register is read and its values displayed. This allows you to compare the value of the CHECKSUM[31:0] register estimated by LabView with the value read from the ADE7878. The values should always be identical. 09078-027 Figure 27. Checksum Register Panel All Registers Access The All Registers Access panel is accessible from the Front Panel and gives read/write access to all ADE7878 registers. Because there are many, the panel can scroll up and down and has multiple read, write, and exit buttons (see Figure 28 and Figure 29). The registers are listed in columns in alphabetical order, starting at the upper left. The panel also allows you to save all control registers into a data file by clicking the Save All Regs into a file button. By clicking the Load All Regs from a file button, you can load all control registers from a data file. Then, by clicking the Write All Regs button, you can load these values into the ADE7878. The order in which the registers are stored into a file is shown in the Control Registers Data File section. 09078-028 Figure 28. Panel Giving Access to All ADE7878 Registers (1) UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 16 of 36 09078-029 Figure 29. Panel Giving Access to All ADE7878 Registers (2) Quick Startup The Quick Startup panel is accessible from the Front Panel and can be used to rapidly initialize a 3-phase meter (see Figure 30). 09078-030 Figure 30. Panel Used to Quickly Set Up the 3-Phase Meter The meter constant (MC, in impulses/kWh), the nominal voltage (Un, in V rms units), the nominal current (In, in A rms units), and the nominal line frequency (fn, in either 50 Hz or 60 Hz) must be introduced in the panel controls. Then phase voltages and phase currents must be provided through the relative sensors. Clicking the Begin Computations button starts the program that reads rms voltages and currents and calculates the full-scale voltage and currents used to further initialize the meter. This process takes 7 sec as the program reads the rms voltages 100 times and the rms currents 100 times and then averages them (this is because the PC reads the rms values directly and cannot synchronize the readings with the zero crossings). The program then computes the full-scale voltages and currents and the constants that are important for setting up the ADE7878: nominal values (n), CFDEN, WTHR1, VARTHR1, VATHR1 and WTHR0, VARTHR0, and VATHR0. At this point, you can overwrite these values. You can also click the Update Registers button to cause the program to do the following: • Initialize the CFxDEN and xTHR registers • Enable the CF1 pin to provide a signal proportional to the total active power, the CF2 pin to provide a signal proportional to the total reactive power, and the CF3 pin to provide a signal proportional to the apparent power. Throughout the program, it is assumed that PGA gains are 1 (for simplicity) and that the Rogowski coil integrators are disabled. You can enter and modify the PGAs and enable the integrators before executing this quick startup if necessary. At this point, the evaluation board is set up as a 3-phase meter, and calibration can be executed. To store the register initializa-tions, click the Save All Regs into a file button in the All Registers Access panel. After the board is powered down and then powered up again, the registers can be loaded into the ADE7878 by simply loading back the content of the data file. To do this, click the Load All Regs from a file button in the All Registers Access panel. PSM2 Settings The PSM2 Settings panel, which is accessible from the Front Panel, gives access to the LPOILVL[7:0] register that is used to access PSM2 low power mode (see Figure 31). You can manipulate its LPOIL[2:0] and LPLINE[4:0] bits. The value shown in the LPOILVL[7:0] register is composed from these bits and then displayed. Note that you cannot write a value into the register by writing a value in the LPOILVL[7:0] register box. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 17 of 36 09078-031 Figure 31. PSM2 Settings Panel PSM1 MODE Enter PSM1 Mode When Enter PSM1 mode is selected on the Front Panel, the microcontroller manipulates the PM0 and PM1 pins of the ADE7878 to switch the ADE7878 into PSM1 reduced power mode. Then, the submenu allows access only to the Mean Absolute Value Current function because this is the only ADE7878 functionality available in this reduced power mode (see Figure 32). 09078-032 Figure 32. Front Panel After the ADE7878 Enters PSM1 Mode Mean Absolute Value Current in PSM1 Mode The Mean Absolute Value Current panel, which is accessible from the Front Panel when Enter PSM1 mode is selected, is very similar to the panel accessible in PSM0 mode (see the Mean Absolute Value Current section for details). The only difference is that ADE7878 status does not show the CHECKSUM[31:0] register because it is not available in PSM1 mode (see Figure 33) 09078-033 Figure 33. Mean Absolute Value Currents Panel in PSM1 Mode PSM2 MODE Enter PSM2 Mode When Enter PSM2 mode is selected on the Front Panel, the microcontroller manipulates the PM0 and PM1 pins of the ADE7878 to switch the ADE7878 into PSM2 low power mode. Then the submenu allows access only to the Phase Current Monitoring function because this is the only ADE7878 functionality available in this low power mode. 09078-034 Figure 34. Front Panel After the ADE7878 Enters PSM2 Mode UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 18 of 36 Phase Current Monitoring The Phase Current Monitoring panel is accessible from the Front Panel when Enter PSM2 mode is selected; it allows you to display the state of the IRQ0and IRQ1 pins because, in PSM2 low power mode, the ADE7878 compares the phase currents against a threshold determined by the LPOILVL[7:0] register (see Figure 35). Clicking the READ STATUS OF IRQ0 AND IRQ1 PINS button reads the status of these pins and displays and interprets the status. This operation is managed by the LPOILVL[7:0] register and can be modified only in PSM0 mode. The panel offers this option by switching the ADE7878 into PSM0 mode and then back to PSM2 mode when one of the READ LPOILVL/WRITE LPOILVL buttons is clicked. To avoid toggling both the PM0 and PM1 pins at the same time during this switch, the ADE7878 is set to PSM3 when changing modes. 09078-035 Figure 35. Panel Managing Current Monitoring in PSM2 Mode PSM3 MODE Enter PSM3 Mode In PSM3 sleep mode, most of the internal circuits of the ADE7878 are turned off. Therefore, no submenu is activated while in this mode. You can click the Enter PSM0 mode, Enter PSM1 mode, or Enter PSM2 mode button to set the ADE7878 to one of these power modes. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 19 of 36 MANAGING THE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL BETWEEN THE MICROCONTROLLER AND THE ADE7878 In this section, the protocol commands are listed that have been implemented to manage the ADE7878 from the PC using the microcontroller. The microcontroller is a pure slave during the communication process. It receives a command from the PC, executes the command, and sends an answer to the PC. The PC should wait for the answer before sending a new command to the micro- controller. Table 3. Echo Command—Message from the PC to the Micro- controller Byte Description 0 A = 0x41 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte 2 Data Byte N − 1 (MSB) 3 Data Byte N − 2 4 Data Byte N − 3 … … N Data Byte 1 N + 1 Data Byte 0 (LSB) Table 4. Echo Command—Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 A = 0x41 2 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte 3 Data byte N − 1 (MSB) 4 Data byte N − 2 … … N + 1 Data Byte 1 N + 2 Data Byte 0 (LB) Table 5. Power Mode Select—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 B = 0x42, change PSM mode 1 N = 1 2 Data Byte 0: 0x00 = PSM0 0x01 = PSM1 0x02 = PSM2 0x03 = PSM3 Table 6. Power Mode Select—Answer from the Microcon- troller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E, to acknowledge that the operation was successful Table 7. Reset—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 C = 0x43, toggle the RESET pin and keep it low for at least 10 ms 1 N = 1 2 Data Byte 0: this byte can have any value Table 8. Reset—Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E, to acknowledge that the operation was successful Table 9. I2C/SPI Select (Configure Communication)— Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 D = 0x44, select I2C and SPI and initialize them; then set CONFIG2[7:0] = 0x2 to lock in the port choice. When I2C is selected, also enable SSP0 of the LPC2368 (used for HSDC). 1 N = 1. 2 Data Byte 0: 0x00 = I2C, 0x01 = SPI. Table 10. I2C/SPI Select (Configure Communication)— Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E, to acknowledge that the operation was successful Table 11. Data Write—Message from the PC to the Micro- controller Byte Description 0 E = 0x45. 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte. N can be 1 + 2, 2 + 2, 4 + 2, or 6 + 2. 2 MSB of the address. 3 LSB of the address. 4 Data Byte N − 3 (MSN). 5 Data Byte N − 4. 6 Data Byte N − 5. … … N + 2 Data Byte 1. N + 3 Data Byte 0 (LSB). Table 12. Data Write—Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E, to acknowledge that the operation was successful UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 20 of 36 Table 13. Data Read—Message from the PC to the Micro- controller Byte Description 0 F = 0x46. 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte; N = 3. 2 MSB of the address. 3 LSB of the address. 4 M = number of bytes to be read from the address above. M can be 1, 2, 4, or 6. Table 14. Data Read—Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52. 1 MSB of the address. 2 LSB of the address. 3 Byte 5, Byte 3, Byte 1, or Byte 0 (MSB) read at the location indicated by the address. The location may contain 6, 4, 2, or 1 byte. The content is transmitted MSB first. 4 Byte 4, Byte 2, or Byte 0. 5 Byte 3, Byte 1. 6 Byte 2, Byte 0. 7 Byte 1. 8 Byte 0. Table 15. Interrupt Setup—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 J = 0x4A. 1 N = 8, number of bytes transmitted after this byte. 2 MSB of the MASK1[31:0] or MASK0[31:0] register. 3 LSB of the MASK1[31:0] or MASK0[31:0] register. 4 Byte 3 of the desired value of the MASK0[31:0] or MASK1[31:0] register. 5 Byte 2. 6 Byte 1. 7 Byte 0. 8 Time out byte: time the MCU must wait for the interrupt to be triggered. It is measured in 3 sec increments. Time out byte (TOB) = 0 means that timeout is disabled. 9 IRQ timer: time the MCU leaves the IRQx pin low before writing back to clear the interrupt flag. It is measured in 10 ms increments. Timer = 0 means that timeout is disabled. Table 16. Interrupt Setup—Message from the Microcon- troller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52. 1 Byte 3 of the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register. If the program waited for TOB × 3 sec and the interrupt was not triggered, then Byte 3 = Byte 2 = Byte 1 = Byte 0 = 0xFF. 2 Byte 2 of the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register. 3 Byte 1 of the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register. 4 Byte 0 of the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register. The microcontroller executes the following operations once the interrupt setup command is received: 1. Reads the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register (depending on the address received from the PC) and, if it shows an interrupt already triggered (one of its bits is equal to 1), it erases the interrupt by writing it back. 2. Writes to the MASK0[31:0] or MASK1[31:0] register with the value received from the PC. 3. Waits for the interrupt to be triggered. If the wait is more than the timeout specified in the command, 0xFFFFFFFF is sent back. 4. If the interrupt is triggered, the STATUS0[31:0] or STATUS1[31:0] register is read and then written back to clear it. The value read at this point is the value sent back to the PC so that you can see the source of the interrupts. 5. Sends back the answer. Table 17. Interrupt Pins Status—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 H = 0x48. 1 N = 1, number of bytes transmitted after this byte. 2 Any byte. This value is not used by the program but it is used in the communication because N must not be equal to 0. Table 18. Interrupt Pins Status—Answer from the Micro- controller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52. 1 A number representing the status of the IRQ0 and IRQ1 pins. 0: IRQ0 = low, IRQ1 = low 1: IRQ0 = low, IRQ1 = high. 2: IRQ0 = high, IRQ1 = low. 3: IRQ0 = high, IRQ1 = high. The reason for the IRQ0 and IRQ1 order is that on the microcontroller IO port, IRQ0= P0.1 and IRQ1 = P0.0. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 21 of 36 ACQUIRING HSDC DATA CONTINUOUSLY This function acquires data from the HSDC continuously for a defined time period and for up to two variables. The microcon-troller sends data in packages of 4 kB. Table 19 describes the protocol when two instantaneous phase currents or voltages are acquired. Table 19. Acquire HSDC Data Continuously—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller If Phase Currents and Voltages Are Acquired Byte Description 0 G = 0x47. 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte. N = 32. 2 0: corresponds to Byte 3 of IA. Because this byte is only a sign extension of Byte 2, it is not sent back by the microcontroller. 3 Increment_IA_Byte2. If IA is to be acquired, Byte 3, Byte 4, and Byte 5 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 4 Increment_IA_Byte1. 5 Increment_IA_Byte2. 6 0. 7 Increment_VA_Byte2. If VA is to be acquired, Byte 7, Byte 8, and Byte 9 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 8 Increment_VA_Byte1. 9 Increment_VA_Byte0. 10 0. 11 Increment_IB_Byte2. If IB is to be acquired, Byte 11, Byte 12, and Byte 13 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 12 Increment_IB_Byte1. 13 Increment_IB_Byte0. 14 0. 15 Increment_VB_Byte2. If VB is to be acquired, Byte 15, Byte 16, and Byte 17 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 16 Increment_VB_Byte1. 17 Increment_VB_Byte0. 18 0. 19 Increment_IC_Byte2. If IC is to be acquired, Byte 19, Byte 20, and Byte 21 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 20 Increment_IC_Byte1. 21 Increment_IC_Byte0. 22 0. 23 Increment_VC_Byte2. If VC is to be acquired, Byte 23, Byte 24, and Byte 25 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 24 Increment_VC_Byte1. 25 Increment_VC_Byte0. 26 0. 27 Increment_IN_Byte2. If IN is to be acquired, Byte 27, Byte 28, and Byte 29 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 28 Increment_IN_Byte1. 29 Increment_IN_Byte0. 30 Byte 1 of M. M is a 16-bit number. The number of 32-bit samples acquired by the microcontroller is (2 × M + 1) × 67 per channel. 31 Byte 0 of M. If two of the phase powers are to be acquired, the protocol changes (see Table 20). Table 20. Acquire HSDC Data Continuously—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller If Phase Powers Are Acquired Byte Description 0 G = 0x47 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte. N = 38. 2 0: corresponds to Byte 3 of AVA. Because this byte is only a sign extension of Byte 2, it is not sent back by the microcontroller. 3 Increment_AVA_Byte2. If AVA is to be acquired, Byte 3, Byte 4, and Byte 5 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 4 Increment_AVA_Byte1. 5 Increment_AVA_Byte2. 6 0. 7 Increment_BVA_Byte2. If BVA is to be acquired, Byte 7, Byte 8, and Byte 9 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 8 Increment_BVA_Byte1. 9 Increment_BVA_Byte0. 10 0. 11 Increment_CVA_Byte2. If CVA is to be acquired, Byte 11, Byte 12, and Byte 13 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 12 Increment_CVA_Byte1. 13 Increment_CVA_Byte0. 14 0. 15 Increment_AWATT_Byte2. If AWATT is to be acquired, Byte 15, Byte 16, and Byte 17 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 16 Increment_AWATT_Byte1. 17 Increment_AWATT_Byte0. 18 0. 19 Increment_BWATT_Byte2. If BWATT is to be acquired, then Byte 19, Byte 20, and Byte 21 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 20 Increment_BWATT_Byte1. 21 Increment_BWATT_Byte0. 22 0. 23 Increment_CWATT_Byte2. If CWATT is to be acquired, Byte 23, Byte 24, and Byte 25 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 24 Increment_CWATT_Byte1. 25 Increment_CWATT_Byte0. 26 0. 27 Increment_AVAR_Byte2. If AVAR is to be acquired, Byte 27, Byte 28, and Byte 29 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 28 Increment_AVAR_Byte1. 29 Increment_AVAR_Byte0. 30 0. 31 Increment_BVAR_Byte2. If BVAR is to be acquired, then Byte 31, Byte 32, and Byte 33 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. 32 Increment_BVAR_Byte1. 33 Increment_BVAR_Byte0. 34 0. 35 Increment_CVAR_Byte2. If CVAR is to be acquired, Byte 35, Byte 36, and Byte 37 are 1. Otherwise, they are 0. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 22 of 36 Byte Description 36 Increment_CVAR_Byte1. 37 Increment_CVAR_Byte0. 38 Byte 1 of M. M is a 16-bit number. The number of 32-bit samples acquired by the microcontroller is (2 × M + 1) × 67 per channel. 39 Byte 0 of M. After receiving the command, the microcontroller enables the HSDC port and acquires 67 × 7 × 4 = 1876 bytes into BUFFER0. As soon as BUFFER0 is filled, data is acquired in BUFFER1 (equal in size to BUFFER0), while 2 × 3 × 67 = 402 bytes (134 24-bit words) from BUFFER0 are transmitted to the PC. As soon as BUFFER1 is filled, data is acquired into BUFFER0 while 402 bytes from BUFFER1 are transmitted to the PC. Only the less significant 24 bits of every 32-bit instantaneous value are sent to the PC to decrease the size of the buffer sent to the PC. The most significant eight bits are only an extension of a 24-bit signed word; therefore, no information is lost. The protocol used by the microcontroller to send data to the PC is shown in Table 21. Table 21. Acquire HSDC Data Continuously—Answer from the Microcontroller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 Byte 2 (MSB) of Word 1 2 Byte 1 of Word 1 3 Byte 0 (LSB) of Word 1 4 Byte 2 (MSB) of Word 2 5 Byte 1 (MSB) of Word 2 … … 402 Byte 0 (LSB) of Word 134 STARTING THE ADE7878 DSP This function orders the microcontroller to start the DSP. The microcontroller writes to the run register with 0x1. Table 22. Start ADE7878 DSP—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 N = 0x4E 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte; N = 1 2 Any byte Table 23. Start ADE7878 DSP—Answer from the Micro-controller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E, to acknowledge that the operation was successful STOPPING THE ADE7878 DSP This function orders the microcontroller to stop the DSP. The microcontroller writes to the run register with 0x0. Table 24. Stop ADE7878 DSP—Message from the PC to the Microcontroller Byte Description 0 O = 0x4F 1 N = number of bytes transmitted after this byte; N = 1 2 Any byte Table 25. Stop ADE7878 DSP—Answer from the Micro-controller to the PC Byte Description 0 R = 0x52 1 ~ = 0x7E to acknowledge that the operation was successful Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 23 of 36 UPGRADING MICROCONTROLLER FIRMWARE Although the evaluation board is supplied with the microcontroller firmware already installed, the ADE7878 evaluation software CD provides the NXP LPC2368 microcontroller project developed under the IAR embedded workbench environment for ARM. Users in possession of this tool can modify the project at will and can download it using an IAR J-link debugger. As an alternative, the executable can be downloaded using a program called Flash Magic, available on the evaluation software CD or at the following website: http://www.flashmagictool.com/. Flash Magic uses the PC COM port to download the micro-controller firmware. The procedure for using Flash Magic is as follows: 1. Plug a serial cable into connector P15 of the ADE7878 evaluation board and into a PC COM port. As an alternative, use the ADE8052Z-DWDL1 ADE downloader from Analog Devices, Inc., together with a USB cable. 2. Launch the Device Manager under Windows XP by writing devmgmt.msc into the Start/Run box. This helps to identify which COM port is used by the serial cable. 3. Plug the USB2UART board into the P15 connector of the ADE7878 evaluation board with the VDD pin of the USB2UART aligned at Pin 1 of P15. 4. Connect Jumper JP8. The P2.10/EINT0 pin of the microcontroller is now connected to ground. 5. Supply the board with two 3.3 V supplies at the P10 and P12 connectors. 6. Press and release the reset button, S2, on the ADE7878 evaluation board. 7. Launch Flash Magic and do the following: a. Select a COM port (COMx as seen in the Device Manager). b. Set the baud rate to 115,200. c. Select the NXP LPC2368 device. d. Set the interface to none (ISP). e. Set the DOscillator frequency (MHz) to 12.0. f. Select Erase all Flash + Code Rd Block. g. Choose ADE7878_Eval_Board.hex from the \Debug\Exe project folder. h. Select Verify after programming. The Flash Magic settings are shown in Figure 36. 09078-036 Figure 36. Flash Magic Settings 8. Click Start to begin the download process. 9. After the process finishes, extract the JP8 jumper. 10. Reset the ADE7878 evaluation board by pressing and releasing the S2 reset button. At this point, the program should be functional, and a USB cable can be connected to the board. When the PC recognizes the evaluation board and asks for a driver, point it to the project \VirCOM_Driver_XP folder. The ADE7878_eval_board_ vircomport.inf file is the driver. CONTROL REGISTERS DATA FILE Table 26 shows the order in which the control registers of the ADE7878 are stored into a data file when you click the Save All Regs into a file button in the All Registers Access panel. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 24 of 36 Table 26. Control Register Data File Content Line Number Register 1 AIGAIN 2 AVGAIN 3 BIGAIN 4 BVGAIN 5 CIGAIN 6 CVGAIN 7 NIGAIN 8 AIRMSOS 9 AVRMSOS 10 BIRMSOS 11 BVRMSOS 12 CIRMSOS 13 CVRMSOS 14 NIRMSOS 15 AVAGAIN 16 BVAGAIN 17 CVAGAIN 18 AWGAIN 19 AWATTOS 20 BWGAIN 21 BWATTOS 22 CWGAIN 23 CWATTOS 24 AVARGAIN 25 AVAROS 26 BVARGAIN 27 BVAROS 28 CVARGAIN 29 CVAROS 30 AFWGAIN 31 AFWATTOS 32 BFWGAIN 33 BFWATTOS 34 CFWGAIN 35 CFWATTOS 36 AFVARGAIN 37 AFVAROS 38 BFVARGAIN 39 BFVAROS 40 CFVARGAIN 41 CFVAROS Line Number Register 42 VATHR1 43 VATHR0 44 WTHR1 45 WTHR0 46 VARTHR1 47 VARTHR0 48 VANOLOAD 49 APNOLOAD 50 VARNOLOAD 51 VLEVEL 52 DICOEFF 53 HPFDIS 54 ISUMLVL 55 RUN 56 OILVL 57 OVLVL 58 SAGLVL 59 MASK0 60 MASK1 61 VNOM 62 LINECYC 63 ZXTOUT 64 COMPMODE 65 Gain 66 CFMODE 67 CF1DEN 68 CF2DEN 69 CF3DEN 70 APHCAL 71 BPHCAL 72 CPHCAL 73 CONFIG 74 MMODE 75 ACCMODE 76 LCYCMODE 77 PEAKCYC 78 SAGCYC 79 CFCYC 80 HSDC_CFG 81 LPOILVL 82 CONFIG2 Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 25 of 36 EVALUATION BOARD SCHEMATICS AND LAYOUT SCHEMATIC 09078-037NOTE:MOUNT JP? DIRECTLY BELOWPAD METAL. CONNECT TO PADWITH MULTIPLE VIAS.REPEAT VIA GRID TO AGND PLANEEXTRA GROUND TP FOR PROBINGOUTPUT LED CIRCUITIRQ1BCF1CF2IRQ0BCF3DEVICE INTERFACE HEADERREFERENCE DECOUPLING AND EXTERNAL REFRESONANT CIRCUIT. THIS OPTION SHOULD BE PLACED ASXTAL CKTBY DEFAULT SELECT OPTION A TO COMPLETE PARALLELCLOSE TO DEVICE AS POSSIBLE.C27C26C25C6C4NPC41NPC5NPC321C38C43C42C40C7C2NPC8NPC1NPC44ACCR5ACCR4ACCR3ACCR2ACCR1RSBR43R42R41R40R3921E8NR69R84R85R70R68231JP12R35R361TP293421S121JP321JP421JP521JP621JP101TP49231A11TP511TP501TP341TP361TP381TP371TP391TP351TP331TP321TP311TP301TP281TP271TP261TP251TP241TP231TP2221JP221P10R371TP151TP141TP139876543231303292827262524232221202191817161514131211101P111826192223393641732PAD3837322915161314912785628273534332425U1213Q5213Q2213Q4213Q3213Q121JP121P9R381TP921P521JP7NR2521JP8N54321CLKIN21Y1231JP11DGND_DCLKOUTIRQ0B20PF20PF3PIN_SOLDER_JUMPERBLKCLKINAMP227699-2BLK1.0UFIBP10KCF2CMD28-21VGCTR8T1BLKVDD_FBLKVDD_F10UFVDD0.1UF0.1UF0.1UFBLKBLKBLKVDD2VDD0BLKJPR04021500 OHMSVNBERG69157-1021KBERG69157-102BLKBLKREFEXT_CLKINBLKBLKBLKBLKCF1SSB/HSAMOSI/SDACF3/HSCLKIRQ0B16.384MHZIRQ1BPM0PM1RESETBCLKOUTEXT_CLKINSAMTSW-1-30-08-GDSCLK/SCLCF2MISO/HSDFDV302P10KCF3/HSCLKFDV302PFDV302P10KVDD2CF1JPR0402JPR0402BLKWEILAND25.161.0253VDD2DVDDAVDD3PIN_SOLDER_JUMPERBLKBLKB3S1000BLKBLKBLKBLKPAD_CNVDD_FICNPM0PM1VCPVBPVAPCLKININPINNVNCF2IRQ0BBERG69157-102BLKJPR0402ADR280ARTZ10K499499499ICPIANIAPRESETBFDV302P4994992VDD2FDV302PIRQ1B10KCMD28-21VGCTR8T1CMD28-21VGCTR8T1CMD28-21VGCTR8T1CMD28-21VGCTR8T1XREF10UFVDD_F10UFVDD_F10KJPR04024.7UFMOSI/SDAIBNADE7858CPZSCLK/SCLPAD_CNBLKSSB/HSAMISO/HSD0.1UF4.7UFCF3/HSCLKCF1IRQ1BDVDDCLKOUTREFAVDDBERG69157-102BLK0.22UF0.22UF10KVDD20.1UFVDDBLK4.7UFDGND_DWEILAND25.161.025310KWEILAND25.161.0253VN_IN22NFAGNDDGNDBCOMADGNDDGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDDGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDV-V+VODGNDSCLK_SCLSS_N_HSAMISO_HSDMOSI_SDAIRQ1_N_SBSDAIRQ0_N_SBSCLRESET_NCF3_HSCLKCF2VNINNINPCF1CLKOUTCLKINVDDVAPVBPVCPREFIN_OUTDVDDPM1PM0PADAVDDAGNDDGNDICNICPIBNIBPIANIAPDGNDGDSDGNDGDSDGNDGDSDGNDGDSDGNDGDSDGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDBCOMA Figure 37. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 26 of 36 INPUT ANTI-ALIAS AND DEVICE CONNECTIONC12C11C20C19C24C23C16C15C22C14C13C18C17C10C9C2121E2N21E1N21E2C21E1C21E1A21E2A21E1B21E2B21JP2N21JP1N21JP2C21JP1C21JP2B21JP1B21JP1A21JP2A21JP6N21JP4N21JP5N21JP3N21JP6C21JP5C21JP4C21JP3C21JP6B21JP4B21JP5B21JP3B21JP6A21JP4A21JP5A21JP3A21P421P321P121P21TP7R71TP8R23R24R15R16R81TP5R51TP6R21R22R13R14R6R4R3R12R11R20R191TP41TP31TP21TP1R17R18R2R1R10R9TBD12061500 OHMSBERG69157-102100TBD1206INN_INWEILAND25.161.0253TBD1206BERG69157-102BERG69157-102BERG69157-102WEILAND25.161.0253IBP_INIBN_INBERG69157-102BERG69157-102100TBD12061001K1KBERG69157-102BLKBERG69157-102BERG69157-102BERG69157-1021001KBLKBERG69157-102IBNIAPBERG69157-102BLK1KBLK100TBD12061KBLKBERG69157-102BERG69157-102TBD1206100INPINN1500 OHMS1500 OHMSTBD12061500 OHMSIAP_INICP100BERG69157-102IBPBERG69157-102TBD1206BERG69157-102ICN100BERG69157-102BLK1KBERG69157-1021500 OHMSIAN_IN1500 OHMSICP_INBLK1KBERG69157-1021500 OHMSICN_INWEILAND25.161.0253BERG69157-102BERG69157-102WEILAND25.161.02531500 OHMS1KBLKIAN22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NFBERG69157-102BERG69157-102INP_IN22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NF22NFAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGND09078-043 Figure 38. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 27 of 36 PHASE A VOLTAGEPHASE C VOLTAGEPHASE B VOLTAGEC34C33C32R26R28R2721E8C21E8B21E8A1TP10231JP9C21P621JP8CR3121JP7CR3421P721JP8BR3021JP7BR331TP11231JP9B21JP8A1TP1221JP7A21P8231JP9AR32R2922NF3PIN_SOLDER_JUMPERBERG69157-1021K1500 OHMSWEILAND25.161.0253WEILAND25.161.0253BERG69157-1021KBLK3PIN_SOLDER_JUMPERVBP1500 OHMSVCP_INVBP_INVN100KBERG69157-1021500 OHMS1KBERG69157-102VNBLK100KBERG69157-1021M1MWEILAND25.161.02531M3PIN_SOLDER_JUMPER100KBERG69157-102VCPVNBLKVAPVAP_IN22NF22NFBCOMAAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDAGNDBCOMAAGNDAGNDAGNDBCOMA09078-044 Figure 39. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 28 of 36 BYPASSING CONTROLLER(OPTIONAL; CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)TP FOR EVAL PROBE - DISTRIBUTE AROUND ISOLATED CIRCUITSNCD-D+GNDVBUS(5V)USB IFMRESETMCU CIRCUITUARTSHIELD D+, D-, VREF_MCU WITH GNDFROM CONN TO MCUISOLATED PSU CONNECTIONSP2_11P2_12PM0_CTRLP1_29P1_28P1_27P1_19CF3_HSCLK_ISOP2_9P2_8P2_7P2_6PM1_CTRLMCU_XT2P1_15SSB_ISOCF2_ISOP4_29IRQ1B_ISOP1_26P1_25P1_0P1_4P1_8MCU_XT1TMSP1_22P0_24P0_26MOSI_ISOGNDGNDGNDAMP227699-2CF1_ISOCF2_ISOAMP227699-2AMP227699-2CF3_HSCLK_ISOP0_20SML-LXT0805GW-TRBLK680CF3_HSCLK_ISOIRQ0B_ISOP2_1310KRTCK0.1UFWEILAND25.161.0253MCU_VDD_ISO10KBERG69157-102P2_2SAMTSW-1-30-08-GDRXDTXD10KBLKP1_31MCU_RSTSAMTECTSW10608GS4PINMCU_VDD10K27BLKMCU_VDD10UF0.1UF1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF1.5KP1_23MCU_VDDMCU_VDD10KLPC2368FBD100P0_22MCU_VDDD+D-D-_MCUD+_MCUVBUS274-1734376-8RSTOUT_NRTCX2P1_1USB_UPP4_28P3_26P3_25D+_MCUSDA_ISOIRQ_OUT_EN_ISOIRQ_IN_ENMISO_ISOSCLK_ISORESB_CTRLPM0_CTRLIRQ1B_ISOPM1_CTRLSBENB_ISOSSB_ISOTCLKTRST_NTDI10K10KP0_21P0_19P0_5D-_MCURXDTXDWPP0_4P0_9BLKBLKBLKBLKBLKBLKBLKBLKBLKBLKVBUSP2_1P2_0P2_3P2_5HSDATA_ISOMCU_XT120PFMCU_XT220PF12.000MHZMCU_RSTMCU_VDDB3S100010KP1_9P1_17P1_14P1_10P1_16MCU_VDDSAMTECTSW11008GDTMS10K10KTDITCLKRTCKTDOMCU_RST10KTDOSCL_ISOTRST_NHSA_ISOBLKBLKBLKP2_4IRQ0B_ISOMCU_RSTRESB_CTRLHSA_ISOMOSI_ISOSDA_ISOMISO_HSD_ISOSCLK_ISOSCL_ISOCF1_ISOR79R80R81TP461TP421TP431TP411P151234R82P1212C78PNC79TP161TP171TP181CF312345CF212345CF112345C72U8464849626361605947585756987625242998309981807978777695908988878632339434353637383940434445212093929175535251507473706968676665642726828517141001618521341928547196134284101215314155728397112223C75C73C76C77C83C84C80C81C82R78P131101112131415161718192203456789R44R45R75R73R72R71R83TP521TP441TP541TP451TP551TP531TP481TP471TP401S21243R74C74Y212C70C71CR6CAR77P14123456R76JP712P381101112131415161718192202122232425262728293303132456789P2_10TRST_NTCKP1_18_USB_UP_LED_PWM1_1VBATVREFVDDAVDD_DCDC_3V3_3VDD_DCDC_3V3_2VDD_DCDC_3V3_1VDD_3V3_4VDD_3V3_3VDD_3V3_2VDD_3V3_1VSSAVSSP1_0_ENET_TXD0P2_12_EINT2_MCIDAT2_I2STX_WSP2_11_EINT1_MCIDAT1_I2STX_CLKP2_10_EINT0P2_9_USB_CONNECT_RXD2_EXTIN0P2_8_TD2_TXD2_TRACEPKT3P2_7_RD2_RTS1_TRACEPKT2P2_6_PCAP1_0_RI1_TRACEPKT1P2_5_PWM1_6_DTR1_TRACEPKT0P2_4_PWM1_5_DSR1_TRACESYNCP2_3_PWM1_4_DCD1_PIPESTAT2P2_2_PWM1_3_CTS1_PIPESTAT1P2_1_PWM1_2_RXD1_PIPESTAT0P2_0_PWM1_1_TXD1_TRACECLKP1_31_SCK1_AD0_5P1_30_VBUS_AD0_4P1_29_PCAP1_1_MAT0_1P1_28_PCAP1_0_MAT0_0P1_27_CAP0_1P1_26_PWM1_6_CAP0_0P1_25_MAT1_1P1_24_PWM1_5_MOSI0P1_23_PWM1_4_MISO0P1_22_MAT1_0P1_21_PWM1_3_SSEL0P1_20_PWM1_2_SCK0P1_19_CAP1_1P1_17_ENET_MDIOP1_16_ENET_MDCP1_15_ENET_REF_CLKP1_14_ENET_RX_ERP1_10_ENET_RXD1P1_9_ENET_RXD0P1_8_ENET_CRSP1_4_ENET_TX_ENP1_1_ENET_TXD1RTCX2XTAL2RSTOUT_NTDORTCKP2_13_EINT3_MCIDAT3_I2STX_SDAP4_29_MAT2_1_RXD3P4_28_MAT2_0_TXD3P3_26_MAT0_1_PWM1_3P3_25_MAT0_0_PWM1_2P0_30_USB_DNP0_29_USB_DPP0_28_SCL0P0_27_SDA0P0_26_AD0_3_AOUT_RXD3P0_25_AD0_2_I2SRX_SDA_TXD3P0_24_AD0_1_I2SRX_WS_CAP3_1P0_23_AD0_0_I2SRX_CLK_CAP3_0P0_22_RTS1_MCIDAT0_TD1P0_21_RI1_MCIPWR_RD1P0_20_DTR1_MCICMD_SCL1P0_19_DSR1_MCICLK_SDA1P0_18_DCD1_MOSI0_MOSIP0_17_CTS1_MISO0_MISOP0_16_RXD1_SSEL0_SSELP0_15_TXD1_SCK0_SCKP0_11_RXD2_SCL2_MAT3_1P0_10_TXD2_SDA2_MAT3_0P0_9_I2STX_SDA_MOSI1_MAT2_3P0_8_I2STX_WS_MISO1_MAT2_2P0_7_I2STX_CLK_SCK1_MAT2_1P0_6_I2SRX_SDA_SSEL1_MAT2_0P0_5_I2SRX_WS_TD2_CAP2_1P0_4_I2SRX_CLK_RD2_CAP2_0P0_3_RXD0P0_2_TXD0P0_1_TD1_RXD3_SCL1P0_0_RD1_TXD3_SDA1RTCX1XTAL1RESET_NTMSTDI09078-038 Figure 40. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 29 of 36 <- DUTISOLATION CIRCUITI2C/HSDC CONFIGSPI CONFIGSPI CONFIGI2C/HSDC CONFIGMCU ->0SDA_ISOSDA_ISO0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UF0.1UFSB_ENBSCL_ISOSCLSDASCLKSSBMOSISCLK_ISOMOSI_ISOSSB_ISOIRQ_OUT_ENMISO_HSD_ISOCF3_HSCLK_ISOHSA_ISOVE2_U6MISO/HSDCF3/HSCLKHSACTIVEIRQ_OUT_EN_ISOIRQ1BWP_UXIRQ0BIRQ1BCF2IRQ_IN_ENSBENB_ISOCF1_ISORESETBPM0PM1RESB_CTRLPM1_CTRLCF1ADUM1401BRWZ10KVE2_U310KADUM1401BRWZHSDATA_ISOSCLK/SCLSDAVDD2MCU_VDDSCLIRQ1B_ISOIRQ1B_ISOIRQ0B_ISO10KVE2_U610KADUM1401BRWZ10KHSACTIVESSB/HSASCLSSBSCLK00MISO_ISOMISO_HSD_ISO00SCL_ISO10K10KADUM1401BRWZ10K10K10KADUM1401BRWZIRQ_IN_ENCF2_ISOIRQ0B_ISO10K10KPM0_CTRLVE2_U3WPIRQ0B0.1UF10KIRQ_OUT_EN0.1UFADUM1250ARZMOSI/SDA0SDADNIDNIDNIDNIMOSI010K0A245362718U428915116710345111413126U328915116710345111413126U628915116710345111413126R48R49R51R55R54JP35JP33JP37JP3612JP3412JP3812JP3212JP31C58C59R58BR58AR59BR59AC56C57U728915116710345111413126R57R53U528915116710345111413126R50R46R47C55C54C53C52C51C50C49C48GND2VDD2VOAVOBVICVIDVE2GND1VE1VODVOCVIBVIAVDD1GND2VDD2VOAVOBVICVIDVE2GND1VE1VODVOCVIBVIAVDD1GND2VDD2VOAVOBVICVIDVE2GND1VE1VODVOCVIBVIAVDD1DGNDGNDSCL2SCL1SDA2SDA1VDD1VDD2GND1GND2GND2VDD2VOAVOBVICVIDVE2GND1VE1VODVOCVIBVIAVDD1GND2VDD2VOAVOBVICVIDVE2GND1VE1VODVOCVIBVIAVDD109078-045 Figure 41. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 30 of 36 09078-039LEFT MOST PINS SHOULD BE FURTHEST FROM DUT26ALIGN PORTS AS DRAWN NEXT TO MCUSIDE WITH PINS76 - 100100755025DO NOT INSTALLSIDE WITH PINS1 - 25DO NOT INSTALLSIDE WITH PINS51 - 75DO NOT INSTALLDO NOT INSTALLALIGN PORTS AS DRAWN NEXT TO MCUALIGN PORTS AS DRAWN NEXT TO MCU1SIDE WITH PINS26 - 50ALIGN PORTS AS DRAWN NEXT TO MCU5176R5221JP9R5621JP8R8654321P1954321P2154321P2554321P2954321P3354321P3754321P2054321P2454321P2854321P3254321P3654321P2354321P2754321P3554321P3154321P2654321P3054321P3454321P2254321P18P1_29SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINBERG69157-102SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP3_25D+_MCUP2_10SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP0_20SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNIDNITDOSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINMISO_ISOSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP1_28P1_22SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINHSA_ISOP1_19USB_UPP0_19P0_21TDISAMTECTSW10608GS5PINSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP0_5PM1_CTRLP3_26P2_12P0_9SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINMCU_XT2SCL_ISOVBUSMCU_XT1SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP1_31WPIRQ0B_ISOIRQ1B_ISOP2_13P2_0P2_1P2_2SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP1_27P2_6P2_4P2_5RXDTXDRTCKSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP1_8P1_0RSTOUT_NP1_26P1_25P1_23P2_8P2_9SSB_ISOSCLK_ISOSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINP1_16P1_17P1_10P1_15P1_14P1_4P1_1P1_9CF3_HSCLK_ISOSDA_ISOMCU_RSTRTCX2PM0_CTRLSBENB_ISOD-_MCUP4_29MOSI_ISOP2_3TMSP0_26IRQ_OUT_EN_ISOSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINSAMTECTSW10608GS5PINDNITRST_NTCLKIRQ_IN_ENP2_11P0_22P0_4P4_28RESB_CTRL10KBERG69157-10210K10KP0_24MCU_VDDP2_7HSDATA_ISOP0_24SAMTECTSW10608GS5PINGNDGND Figure 42. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 31 of 36 DO NOT POPULATE U2SELF BOOT EEPROMFACTORY USE ONLYCURRENT MEASUREMENT - DO NOT INSTALLC61C62C63R66R651TP611TP6221P17482631A3R6221JP6021JP61R61R63R6074295310186A4321P16R6474856321U20.1UFVDD2VDD210KMICRO24LC128-I-SN0.1UFWP_UXSBSCLDNIDNIBLKBLKISNS_OUTWEILAND25.161.0253AD8553ARMZDNIDNI560PFVDD_F200KIRQ0BDNIDNI4.02KDNIDNIDO NOT INSTALLDNI100K100KVREF_ISNSVDDDNI10KVDD2SBSCLVDD200SBSDAIRQ1B10KSBCONSBCONSB_ENBMOLEX22-03-2031SBSDAADG820BRMZDNIDGNDDGNDDGNDDGNDVDDS2S1INGNDDVFBGNDVREFENVCCVORGBRGASCLA1A2A0WPSDAVSSVCC09078-046 Figure 43. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 32 of 36 LAYOUT 09078-040 Figure 44. 09078-041 Figure 45. Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 33 of 36 09078-042 Figure 46. 09078-043 Figure 47. UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 34 of 36 ORDERING INFORMATION BILL OF MATERIALS Table 27. Qty Designator Description Manufacturer/Part Number 1 A1 IC-ADI, 1.2 V, ultralow power, high PSRR voltage reference Analog Devices, Inc./ADR280ARTZ 1 A2 IC swappable dual isolator Analog Devices, Inc./ADUM1250ARZ 4 C1, C8, C44, C78 Capacitor, tantalum, 10 μF AVX 20 C9 to C25, C32 to C34 Capacitor, ceramic, 22 nF AVX 30 C2, C7, C40, C42, C43, C48 to C59, C61, C62, C72, C73, C75 to C77, C79 to C84 Capacitor, chip, X7R 0805, 0.1 μF Murata 4 C26, C27, C70, C71 Capacitor, mono, ceramic, C0G, 0402, 20 pF Murata 3 C3, C5, C41 Capacitor, tantalum, 4.7 μF AVX 2 C38, C74 Capacitor, ceramic chip, 1206, X7R, 1.0 μF Taiyo Yuden 2 C4, C6 Capacitor, ceramic, X7R, 0.22 μF Phycomp (Yageo) 4 CF1 to CF3, CLKIN Connector, PCB coax, BNC, ST AMP (Tyco)/227699-2 5 CR1 to CR5 Diode, LED, green, SMD Chicago Mini Lamp (CML Innovative Technologies)/CMD28-21VGCTR8T1 1 CR6 LED, green, surface mount LUMEX/SML-LXT0805GW-TR 12 E1A, E1B, E1C, E1N, E2A, E2B, E2C, E2N, E8A, E8B, E8C, E8N Inductor, chip, ferrite bead, 0805, 1500 Ω Murata 37 JP2, JP7 to JP10, JP1A to JP8A, JP1B to JP8B, JP1C to JP8C, JP1N to JP8N Connector, PCB Berg jumper, ST, male 2-pin Berg/69157-102 5 JP11, JP12, JP9A, JP9B, JP9C 3-pin solder jumper N/A 6 JP32, JP34, JP36, JP38, JP60, JP61 Resistor jumper, SMD 0805 (open), 0 Ω Panasonic 11 P1 to P10, P12 Connector, PCB TERM, black, 2-pin, ST WeilandD/25.161.0253 2 P11, P38 Connector, PCB, header, SHRD, ST, male 32-pin Samtec/TSW-1-30-08-G-D 1 P13 Connector, PCB, Berg, header, ST, male 20-pin Samtec/TSW-110-08-G-D 1 P14 Connector, PCB, USB, Type B, R/A, through hole AMP (Tyco)/4-1734376-8 1 P15 Connector, PCB, Berg, header, ST, male 4-pin Samtec/TSW106-08-G-S 1 P16 Connector, PCB straight header 3-pin Molex/22-03-2031 5 Q1 to Q5 Trans digital FET P channel Fairchild/FDV302P 8 R1 to R8 Do not install (TBD_R1206) N/A 8 R9 to R16 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R1206, 100 Ω Panasonic 12 R17 to R25, R32 to R34 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R0805, 1 kΩ Panasonic 3 R26 to R28 Resistor, MF, RN55, 1 M Vishay-Dale 3 R29 to R31 Resistor, MF, RN5, 100 kΩ Vishay-Dale 39 R35, R36, R38, R44 to R57, R64 to R66, R68 to R76, R78, R82 to R86, R58A, R58B, R59A, R59B Resistor PREC thick film chip, R0805, 10 kΩ Panasonic 1 R37 Resistor, film, SMD 0805, 2 Ω Panasonic 5 R39 to R43 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R1206, 499 Panasonic 1 R77 Resistor, film, SMD, 0805, 680 Ω Multicomp 2 R79, R80 Resistor, film, SMD, 1206, 27 Ω Yageo-Phycomp 1 R81 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R1206, 1.5 kΩ Panasonic 1 RSB Resistor, jumper, SMD, 1206 (open), 0 Panasonic 2 S1, S2 SW SM mechanical key switch Omron/B3S1000 52 TP1 to TP18, TP22 to TP55 Connector, PCB, test point, black Components Corporation 1 U1 IC-ADI, polyphase, multifunction, energy metering IC Analog Devices, Inc./ADE7878CPZ 5 U3 to U7 IC-ADI quad channel digital isolator Analog Devices, Inc./ADum1401BRWZ 1 U8 IC ARM7, MCU, flash, 512 kΩ, 100 LQFP NXP/LPC2368FBD100 Evaluation Board User Guide UG-146 Rev. 0 | Page 35 of 36 Qty Designator Description Manufacturer/Part Number 1 Y1 IC crystal, 16.384 MHz Valpey Fisher Corporation 1 Y2 IC crystal quartz, 12.000 MHz ECS 1 A3 IC-ADI 1.8 V to 5.5 V 2:1 MUX/SPDT switches Analog Devices, Inc./ADG820BRMZ 1 A4 IC-ADI 1.8 V to 5 V auto-zero in amp with shutdown Analog Devices, Inc./AD8553ARMZ 1 C63 Capacitor, ceramic, NP0, 560 pF Phycomp (Yageo) 4 JP31, JP33, JP35, JP37 Resistor, jumper, SMD, 0805 (SHRT), 0 Panasonic 1 P17 Connector, PCB, TERM, black, 2-pin, ST Weiland/25.161.0253 20 P18 to P37 Connector, PCB, Berg, header, ST, male 5-pin Samtec/TSW106-08-G-S 1 R60 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R0805, 4.02 kΩ Panasonic 2 R61, R62 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R0805, 100 kΩ Panasonic 1 R63 Resistor, PREC, thick film chip, R1206, 200 kΩ Panasonic 2 TP61, TP62 Connector, PCB test point, black Components Corporation 1 U2 IC, serial EEPROM, 128 kΩ, 2.5 V Microchip/24LC128-I-SN UG-146 Evaluation Board User Guide Rev. 0 | Page 36 of 36 NOTES I2C refers to a communications protocol originally developed by Philips Semiconductors (now NXP Semiconductors). ESD Caution ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive device. Charged devices and circuit boards can discharge without detection. Although this product features patented or proprietary protection circuitry, damage may occur on devices subjected to high energy ESD. Therefore, proper ESD precautions should be taken to avoid performance degradation or loss of functionality. Legal Terms and Conditions By using the evaluation board discussed herein (together with any tools, components documentation or support materials, the “Evaluation Board”), you are agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions set forth below (“Agreement”) unless you have purchased the Evaluation Board, in which case the Analog Devices Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale shall govern. Do not use the Evaluation Board until you have read and agreed to the Agreement. Your use of the Evaluation Board shall signify your acceptance of the Agreement. This Agreement is made by and between you (“Customer”) and Analog Devices, Inc. (“ADI”), with its principal place of business at One Technology Way, Norwood, MA 02062, USA. Subject to the terms and conditions of the Agreement, ADI hereby grants to Customer a free, limited, personal, temporary, non-exclusive, non-sublicensable, non-transferable license to use the Evaluation Board FOR EVALUATION PURPOSES ONLY. Customer understands and agrees that the Evaluation Board is provided for the sole and exclusive purpose referenced above, and agrees not to use the Evaluation Board for any other purpose. Furthermore, the license granted is expressly made subject to the following additional limitations: Customer shall not (i) rent, lease, display, sell, transfer, assign, sublicense, or distribute the Evaluation Board; and (ii) permit any Third Party to access the Evaluation Board. As used herein, the term “Third Party” includes any entity other than ADI, Customer, their employees, affiliates and in-house consultants. The Evaluation Board is NOT sold to Customer; all rights not expressly granted herein, including ownership of the Evaluation Board, are reserved by ADI. CONFIDENTIALITY. This Agreement and the Evaluation Board shall all be considered the confidential and proprietary information of ADI. Customer may not disclose or transfer any portion of the Evaluation Board to any other party for any reason. Upon discontinuation of use of the Evaluation Board or termination of this Agreement, Customer agrees to promptly return the Evaluation Board to ADI. ADDITIONAL RESTRICTIONS. Customer may not disassemble, decompile or reverse engineer chips on the Evaluation Board. Customer shall inform ADI of any occurred damages or any modifications or alterations it makes to the Evaluation Board, including but not limited to soldering or any other activity that affects the material content of the Evaluation Board. Modifications to the Evaluation Board must comply with applicable law, including but not limited to the RoHS Directive. TERMINATION. ADI may terminate this Agreement at any time upon giving written notice to Customer. Customer agrees to return to ADI the Evaluation Board at that time. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. THE EVALUATION BOARD PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ADI MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO IT. ADI SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATIONS, ENDORSEMENTS, GUARANTEES, OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, RELATED TO THE EVALUATION BOARD INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, TITLE, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT WILL ADI AND ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM CUSTOMER’S POSSESSION OR USE OF THE EVALUATION BOARD, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, DELAY COSTS, LABOR COSTS OR LOSS OF GOODWILL. ADI’S TOTAL LIABILITY FROM ANY AND ALL CAUSES SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT OF ONE HUNDRED US DOLLARS ($100.00). EXPORT. Customer agrees that it will not directly or indirectly export the Evaluation Board to another country, and that it will comply with all applicable United States federal laws and regulations relating to exports. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts (excluding conflict of law rules). Any legal action regarding this Agreement will be heard in the state or federal courts having jurisdiction in Suffolk County, Massachusetts, and Customer hereby submits to the personal jurisdiction and venue of such courts. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement and is expressly disclaimed. ©2010 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. UG09078-0-8/10(0) UCD3138 Highly Integrated Digital Controller for Isolated Power Data Manual PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. Literature Number: SLUSAP2B March 2012–Revised July 2012 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Contents 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 6 1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 Applications .................................................................................................................. 7 2 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 7 2.1 Description ................................................................................................................... 7 2.2 Ordering Information ........................................................................................................ 8 2.3 Product Selection Matrix ................................................................................................... 8 2.4 Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 9 2.5 UCD3138 64 QFN – Pin Assignments ................................................................................. 10 2.6 Pin Functions .............................................................................................................. 11 2.7 UCD3138 40 QFN – Pin Assignments ................................................................................. 13 2.8 Pin Functions .............................................................................................................. 14 3 Electrical Specifications ..................................................................................................... 15 3.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ...................................................................................... 15 3.2 THERMAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................. 15 3.3 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS ....................................................................... 15 3.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................... 16 3.5 PMBus/SMBus/I2C Timing ............................................................................................... 19 3.6 Power On Reset (POR) / Brown Out Reset (BOR) ................................................................... 20 3.7 Typical Clock Gating Power Savings ................................................................................... 21 3.8 Typical Temperature Characteristics ................................................................................... 22 4 Functional Overview .......................................................................................................... 23 4.1 ARM Processor ............................................................................................................ 23 4.2 Memory ..................................................................................................................... 23 4.2.1 CPU Memory Map and Interrupts ............................................................................ 23 4.2.1.1 Memory Map (After Reset Operation) ........................................................... 23 4.2.1.2 Memory Map (Normal Operation) ................................................................ 24 4.2.1.3 Memory Map (System and Peripherals Blocks) ................................................ 24 4.2.2 Boot ROM ....................................................................................................... 24 4.2.3 Customer Boot Program ....................................................................................... 25 4.2.4 Flash Management ............................................................................................. 25 4.3 System Module ............................................................................................................ 25 4.3.1 Address Decoder (DEC) ....................................................................................... 25 4.3.2 Memory Management Controller (MMC) .................................................................... 25 4.3.3 System Management (SYS) ................................................................................... 25 4.3.4 Central Interrupt Module (CIM) ............................................................................... 26 4.4 Peripherals ................................................................................................................. 27 4.4.1 Digital Power Peripherals ...................................................................................... 27 4.4.1.1 Front End ............................................................................................ 27 4.4.1.2 DPWM Module ..................................................................................... 28 4.4.1.3 DPWM Events ...................................................................................... 29 4.4.1.4 High Resolution DPWM ........................................................................... 31 4.4.1.5 Over Sampling ...................................................................................... 31 4.4.1.6 DPWM Interrupt Generation ...................................................................... 31 4.4.1.7 DPWM Interrupt Scaling/Range .................................................................. 31 4.5 DPWM Modes of Operation .............................................................................................. 32 4.5.1 Normal Mode .................................................................................................... 32 4.6 Phase Shifting ............................................................................................................. 34 4.7 DPWM Multiple Output Mode ............................................................................................ 35 4.8 DPWM Resonant Mode .................................................................................................. 36 4.9 Triangular Mode ........................................................................................................... 38 2 Contents Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.10 Leading Edge Mode ....................................................................................................... 39 4.11 Sync FET Ramp and IDE Calculation .................................................................................. 41 4.12 Automatic Mode Switching ............................................................................................... 41 4.12.1 Phase Shifted Full Bridge Example .......................................................................... 41 4.12.2 LLC Example .................................................................................................... 42 4.12.3 Mechanism for Automatic Mode Switching .................................................................. 44 4.13 DPWMC, Edge Generation, IntraMux .................................................................................. 45 4.14 Filter ......................................................................................................................... 46 4.14.1 Loop Multiplexer ................................................................................................ 48 4.14.2 Fault Multiplexer ................................................................................................ 49 4.15 Communication Ports ..................................................................................................... 51 4.15.1 SCI (UART) Serial Communication Interface ............................................................... 51 4.15.2 PMBUS .......................................................................................................... 51 4.15.3 General Purpose ADC12 ...................................................................................... 52 4.15.4 Timers ............................................................................................................ 53 4.15.4.1 24-bit PWM Timer .................................................................................. 53 4.15.4.2 16-Bit PWM Timers ................................................................................ 54 4.15.4.3 Watchdog Timer .................................................................................... 54 4.16 Miscellaneous Analog ..................................................................................................... 54 4.17 Package ID Information ................................................................................................... 54 4.18 Brownout ................................................................................................................... 54 4.19 Global I/O ................................................................................................................... 55 4.20 Temperature Sensor Control ............................................................................................. 56 4.21 I/O Mux Control ............................................................................................................ 56 4.21.1 JTAG Use for I/O and JTAG Security ........................................................................ 57 4.22 Current Sharing Control .................................................................................................. 57 4.23 Temperature Reference .................................................................................................. 58 5 IC Grounding and Layout Recommendations ........................................................................ 59 6 Tools and Documentation ................................................................................................... 60 7 References ....................................................................................................................... 62 Revision History ......................................................................................................................... 63 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Contents 3 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com List of Figures 3-1 I2C/SMBus/PMBus Timing Diagram ........................................................................................... 20 3-2 Bus Timing in Extended Mode.................................................................................................. 20 3-3 Power On Reset (POR) / Brown Out Reset (BOR) .......................................................................... 20 3-4 EADC LSB Size with 4X Gain (mV) vs. Temperature ....................................................................... 22 3-5 ADC12 Measurement Temperature Sensor Voltage vs. Temperature.................................................... 22 3-6 ADC12 2.5-V Reference vs. Temperature .................................................................................... 22 3-7 ADC12 Temperature Sensor Measurement Error vs. Temperature....................................................... 22 3-8 UCD3138 Oscillator Frequency (2MHz Reference, Divided Down from 250MHz) vs. Temperature.................. 22 4-1 Input Stage of EADC Module ................................................................................................... 28 4-2 Front End Module ................................................................................................................ 28 4-3 Secondary-Referenced Phase-Shifted Full Bridge Control With Synchronous Rectification ................................................................................................ 42 4-4 Secondary-Referenced Half-Bridge Resonant LLC Control With Synchronous Rectification ................................................................................................ 43 4-5 Fault Mux Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 51 4-6 PMBus Address Detection Method ............................................................................................ 52 4-7 ADC12 Control Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 53 4-8 Internal Temp Sensor............................................................................................................ 56 4-9 Simplified Current Sharing Circuitry ........................................................................................... 57 4 List of Figures Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 List of Tables 2-1 Pin Functions ..................................................................................................................... 11 2-2 Pin Functions ..................................................................................................................... 14 3-1 I2C/SMBus/PMBus Timing Characteristics.................................................................................... 19 4-1 Interrupt Priority Table ........................................................................................................... 26 4-2 DPWM Interrupt Divide Ratio ................................................................................................... 31 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated List of Tables 5 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Highly Integrated Digital Controller for Isolated Power Check for Samples: UCD3138 1 Introduction 1.1 Features 1 • Digital Control of up to 3 Independent – Synchronous Rectifier Soft On/Off Feedback Loops – Low IC Standby Power – Dedicated PID based hardware • Soft Start / Stop with and without Pre-bias – 2-pole/2-zero configurable • Fast Input Voltage Feed Forward Hardware – Non-Linear Control • Primary Side Voltage Sensing • Up to 16MHz Error Analog to Digital Converter • Copper Trace Current Sensing (EADC) • Flux and Phase Current Balancing for Non- – Configurable Resolution as Small as Peak Current Mode Control Applications 1mV/LSB • Current Share Bus Support – Automatic Resolution Selection – Analog Average – Up to 8x Oversampling – Master/Slave – Hardware Based Averaging (up to 8x) • Feature Rich Fault Protection Options – 14 bit Effective DAC – 7 High Speed Analog Comparators – Adaptive Sample Trigger Positioning – Cycle-by-Cycle Current Limiting • Up to 8 High Resolution Digital Pulse Width – Programmable Fault Counting Modulated (DPWM) Outputs – External Fault Inputs – 250ps Pulse Width Resolution – 10 Digital Comparators – 4ns Frequency Resolution – Programmable blanking time – 4ns Phase Resolution • Synchronization of DPWM waveforms between – Adjustable Phase Shift Between Outputs multiple UCD3138 devices – Adjustable Dead-band Between Pairs • 14 channel, 12 bit, 267 ksps General Purpose – Cycle-by-Cycle Duty Cycle Matching ADC with integrated – Up to 2MHz Switching Frequency – Programmable averaging filters • Configurable PWM Edge Movement – Dual sample and hold – Trailing Modulation • Internal Temperature Sensor – Leading Modulation • Fully Programmable High-Performance – Triangular Modulation 31.25MHz, 32-bit ARM7TDMI-S Processor • Configurable Feedback Control – 32 kByte (kB) Program Flash – Voltage Mode – 2 kB Data Flash with ECC – Average Current Mode – 4 kB Data RAM – Peak Current Mode Control – 4 kB Boot ROM Enables Firmware Boot-Load – Constant Current in the Field via I2C or UART – Constant Power • Communication Peripherals • Configurable Modulation Methods – I2C/PMBus – Frequency Modulation – 2 UARTs on UCD3138RGC (64-pin QFN) – Phase Shift Modulation – 1 UART on UCD3138RHA (40-pin QFN) – Pulse Width Modulation • JTAG Debug Port • Fast, Automatic and Smooth Mode Switching • Timer capture with selectable input pins – Frequency Modulation and PWM • Up to 5 Additional General Purpose Timers – Phase Shift Modulation and PWM • Built In Watchdog: BOD and POR • High Efficiency and Light Load Management • 64-pin QFN and 40-pin QFN packages – Burst Mode • Operating Temperature: –40°C to 125°C – Ideal Diode Emulation • Fusion_Digital_Power_Designer GUI Support 1 Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 1.2 Applications • Power Supplies and Telecom Rectifiers • Power Factor Correction • Isolated dc-dc Modules 2 Overview 2.1 Description The UCD3138 is a digital power supply controller from Texas Instruments offering superior levels of integration and performance in a single chip solution. The flexible nature of the UCD3138 makes it suitable for a wide variety of power conversion applications. In addition, multiple peripherals inside the device have been specifically optimized to enhance the performance of ac/dc and isolated dc/dc applications and reduce the solution component count in the IT and network infrastructure space. The UCD3138 is a fully programmable solution offering customers complete control of their application, along with ample ability to differentiate their solution. At the same time, TI is committed to simplifying our customer’s development effort through offering best in class development tools, including application firmware, Code Composer Studio™ software development environment, and TI’s power development GUI which enables customers to configure and monitor key system parameters. At the core of the UCD3138 controller are the digital control loop peripherals, also known as Digital Power Peripherals (DPP). Each DPP implements a high speed digital control loop consisting of a dedicated Error Analog to Digital Converter (EADC), a PID based 2 pole–2 zero digital compensator and DPWM outputs with 250 ps pulse width resolution. The device also contains a 12-bit, 267ksps general purpose ADC with up to 14 channels, timers, interrupt control, JTAG debug and PMBus and UART communications ports. The device is based on a 32-bit ARM7TDMI-S RISC microcontroller that performs real-time monitoring, configures peripherals and manages communications. The ARM microcontroller executes its program out of programmable flash memory as well as on-chip RAM and ROM. In addition to the FDPP, specific power management peripherals have been added to enable high efficiency across the entire operating range, high integration for increased power density, reliability, and lowest overall system cost and high flexibility with support for the widest number of control schemes and topologies. Such peripherals include: light load burst mode, synchronous rectification, LLC and phase shifted full bridge mode switching, input voltage feed forward, copper trace current sense, ideal diode emulation, constant current constant power control, synchronous rectification soft on and off, peak current mode control, flux balancing, secondary side input voltage sensing, high resolution current sharing, hardware configurable soft start with pre bias, as well as several other features. Topology support has been optimized for voltage mode and peak current mode controlled phase shifted full bridge, single and dual phase PFC, bridgeless PFC, hard switched full bridge and half bridge, and LLC half bridge and full bridge. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Overview 7 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 2.2 Ordering Information PART NUMBER PIN COUNT PACKAGE SUPPLY TOP SIDE MARKING OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE, TA UCD3138RGCT 64 QFN 250 (Small Reel) UCD3138 –40°C to 125°C UCD3138RGCR 64 QFN 2000 (Large Reel) UCD3138 –40°C to 125°C UCD3138RHAT 40 QFN 250 (Small Reel) UCD3138 –40°C to 125°C UCD3138RHAR 40 QFN 2500 (large Reel) UCD3138 –40°C to 125°C 2.3 Product Selection Matrix FEATURE UCD3138 64 PIN UCD3138 40 PIN ARM7TDMI-S Core Processor 31.25 MHz 31.25 MHz High Resolution DPWM Outputs (250ps Resolution) 8 8 Number of High Speed Independent Feedback Loops (# Regulated Output 3 3 Voltages) 12-bit, 267ksps, General Purpose ADC Channels 14 7 Digital Comparators at ADC Outputs 4 4 Flash Memory (Program) 32 KB 32 KB Flash Memory (Data) 2 KB 2 KB Flash Security √ √ RAM 4 KB 4 KB DPWM Switching Frequency up to 2 MHz up to 2 MHz Programmable Fault Inputs 4 1 + 2(1) High Speed Analog Comparators with Cycle-by-Cycle Current Limiting 7(2) 6(2) UART (SCI) 2 1(1) PMBus √ √ Timers 4 (16 bit) and 1 (24 bit) 4 (16 bit) and 1 (24 bit) Timer PWM Outputs 2 1 Timer Capture Inputs 1 1(1) Watchdog √ √ On Chip Oscillator √ √ Power-On Reset and Brown-Out Reset √ √ JTAG √ √ Package Offering 64 Pin QFN (9mm x 9mm) 40 Pin QFN (6mm x 6mm) Sync IN and Sync OUT Functions √ √ Total GPIO (includes all pins with multiplexed functions such as, DPWM, Fault 30 18 Inputs, SCI, etc.) External Interrupts 1 0 (1) This number represents an alternate pin out that is programmable via firmware. See the UCD3138 Digital Power Peripherals Programmer’s Manual for details. (2) To facilitate simple OVP and UVP connections both comparators B and C are connected to the AD03 pin. 8 Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Front End 2 Analog Comparators Power and 1.8 V Voltage Regulator AD07 AD06 AD04 V33DIO /RESET SCI_RX0 SCI_TX0 PMBUS_CLK PMBUS_DATA AGND V33D BP18 FAULT3 FAULT2 TCAP TMS TDI TDO TCK EXT_INT FAULT1 FAULT0 PWM1 PWM0 SCI_RX1 SCI_TX1 PMBUS_CTRL PMBUS_ALERT SYNC DGND DPWM3B DPWM3A DPWM2B DPWM2A DPWM1B DPWM1A DPWM0B DPWM0A EAP0 EAN0 EAP1 EAN1 V33 A AD00 AD01 AD0 2 AD1 3 PID Based Filter 0 DPWM0 DPWM1 DPWM2 DPWM3 PID Based Filter 1 PID Based Filter 2 ADC_EXT_ TRIG ADC12 ADC12 Control Sequencing, Averaging, Digital Compare, Dual Sample and hold AD[13:0 ] A B C D E F G Current Share Analog, Average, Master/Slave AD03 AD0 2 AD1 3 AGND PMBus Timers 4 – 16 bit (PWM) 1 – 24 bit UART0 UART1 GPIO Control JTAG Loop MUX ARM7TDMI-S 32 bit, 31.25 MHz Memory PFLASH 32 kB DFLASH 2 kB RAM 4 kB ROM 4 kB Power On Reset Brown Out Detection Oscillator Internal Temperature Sensor Advanced Power Control Mode Switching, Burst Mode, IDE, Synchronous Rectification soft on & off Front End 1 Constant Power Constant Current Input Voltage Feed Forward Front End Averaging Digital Comparators Fault MUX & Control Cycle by Cycle Current Limit Digital Comparators DAC0 EADC X AFE Value Dither ! CPCC Filter x Ramp SAR/Prebias Abs() 2 Avg() AFE 23-AFE Peak Current Mode Control Comparator A0 EAP2 EAN2 Front End 0 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 2.4 Functional Block Diagram Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Overview 9 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 (64 QFN) AGND 1 AD13 2 AD12 3 AD10 4 AD07 5 AD06 6 AD04 7 AD03 8 V33DIO 9 10 /RESET 11 ADC_EXT_TRIG/TCAP/SYNC/PWM0 12 SCI_RX0 13 SCI_TX0 14 DGND PMBUS_CLK/SCI_TX0 15 PMBUS_DATA/SCI_RX0 16 48 AGND 47 V33D 46 BP18 45 V33DIO 44 DGND 43 FAULT3 42 FAULT2 41 TCAP 40 TMS 39 TDI/SCI_RX0/PMBUS_CTRL/FAULT1 38 TDO/SCI_TX0/PMBUS_ALERT/FAULT0 37 TCK/TCAP/SYNC/PWM0 36 FAULT1 35 FAULT0 34 INT_EXT 33 DGND 32 PWM1 31 PWM0 30 SCI_RX1/PMBUS_CTRL 29 SCI_TX1/PMBUS_ALERT 28 PMBUS_CTRL 27 PMBUS_ALERT 26 SYNC/TCAP/ADC_EXT_TRIG/PWM0 25 DGND 24 DPWM3B 23 DPWM3A 22 DPWM2B 21 DPWM2A 20 DPWM1B 19 DPWM1A 18 DPWM0B 17 DPWM0A 64 AGND 63 EAP0 62 EAN0 61 EAP1 60 EAN1 59 EAP2 58 EAN2 57 AGND 56 V33A 55 AD00 54 AD01 53 AD02 52 AD05 51 AD08 50 AD09 49 AD11 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 2.5 UCD3138 64 QFN – Pin Assignments 10 Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 2.6 Pin Functions Additional pin functionality is specified in the following table. Table 2-1. Pin Functions ALTERNATE ASSIGNMENT PIN NAME PRIMARY ASSIGNMENT CONFIGURABLE NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 AS A GPIO? 1 AGND Analog ground 2 AD13 12-bit ADC, Ch 13, comparator E, I-share DAC output 3 AD12 12-bit ADC, Ch 12 4 AD10 12-bit ADC, Ch 10 5 AD07 12-bit ADC, Ch 7, Connected to comparator F and reference DAC output to comparator G 6 AD06 12-bit ADC, Ch 6, Connected to comparator F DAC output 7 AD04 12-bit ADC, Ch 4, Connected to comparator D DAC output 8 AD03 12-bit ADC, Ch 3, Connected to comparator B and C 9 V33DIO Digital I/O 3.3V core supply 10 DGND Digital ground 11 RESET Device Reset Input, active low 12 ADC_EXT_TRIG ADC conversion external trigger input TCAP SYNC PWM0 Yes 13 SCI_RX0 SCI RX 0 Yes 14 SCI_TX0 SCI TX 0 Yes 15 PMBUS_CLK PMBUS Clock (Open Drain) SCI TX 0 Yes 16 PMBUS_DATA PMBus data (Open Drain) SCI RX 0 Yes 17 DPWM0A DPWM 0A output Yes 18 DPWM0B DPWM 0B output Yes 19 DPWM1A DPWM 1A output Yes 20 DPWM1B DPWM 1B output Yes 21 DPWM2A DPWM 2A output Yes 22 DPWM2B DPWM 2B output Yes 23 DPWM3A DPWM 3A output Yes 24 DPWM3B DPWM 3B output Yes 25 DGND Digital ground 26 SYNC DPWM Synchronize pin TCAP ADC_EXT_ PWM0 Yes TRIG 27 PMBUS_ALERT PMBus Alert (Open Drain) Yes 28 PMBUS_CTRL PMBus Control (Open Drain) Yes 29 SCI_TX1 SCI TX 1 PMBUS_AL Yes ERT 30 SCI_RX1 SCI RX 1 PMBUS_CT Yes RL 31 PWM0 General purpose PWM 0 Yes 32 PWM1 General purpose PWM 1 Yes 33 DGND Digital ground 34 INT_EXT External Interrupt Yes 35 FAULT0 External fault input 0 Yes 36 FAULT1 External fault input 1 Yes 37 TCK JTAG TCK TCAP SYNC PWM0 Yes 38 TDO JTAG TDO SCI_TX0 PMBUS_AL FAULT0 Yes ERT 39 TDI JTAG TDI SCI_RX0 PMBUS_CT FAULT1 Yes RL 40 TMS JTAG TMS Yes 41 TCAP Timer capture input Yes 42 FAULT2 External fault input 2 Yes 43 FAULT3 External fault input 3 Yes Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Overview 11 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Table 2-1. Pin Functions (continued) ALTERNATE ASSIGNMENT PIN NAME PRIMARY ASSIGNMENT CONFIGURABLE NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 AS A GPIO? 44 DGND Digital ground 45 V33DIO Digital I/O 3.3V core supply 46 BP18 1.8V Bypass 47 V33D Digital 3.3V core supply 48 AGND Substrate analog ground 49 AGND Analog ground 50 EAP0 Channel #0, differential analog voltage, positive input 51 EAN0 Channel #0, differential analog voltage, negative input 52 EAP1 Channel #1, differential analog voltage, positive input 53 EAN1 Channel #1, differential analog voltage, negative input 54 EAP2 Channel #2, differential analog voltage, positive input 55 EAN2 Channel #2, differential analog voltage, negative input 56 AGND Analog ground 57 V33A Analog 3.3V supply 58 AD00 12-bit ADC, Ch 0, Connected to current source 59 AD01 12-bit ADC, Ch 1, Connected to current source 60 AD02 12-bit ADC, Ch 2, Connected to comparator A, I-share 61 AD05 12-bit ADC, Ch 5 62 AD08 12-bit ADC, Ch 8 63 AD09 12-bit ADC, Ch 9 64 AD11 12-bit ADC, Ch 11 12 Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 (40 QFN) AGND 1 2 3 4 5 AD13 6 AD06 7 AD04 8 AD03 9 DGND 10 /RESET 11 ADC_EXT_TRIG/TCAP/SYNC/PWM0 12 13 14 15 PMBUS_CLK/SCI_TX0 16 PMBUS_DATA/SCI_RX0 AGND BP18 DGND V33D 40 39 TMS 38 TDI/SCI_RX0/PMBUS_CTRL/FAULT1 37 TDO/SCI_TX0/PMBUS_ALERT/FAULT0 36 TCK/TCAP/SYNC/PWM0 35 34 33 FAULT2 32 31 AGND 30 29 28 27 26 DPWM3B 25 DPWM3A 24 PMBUS_CTRL 23 PMBUS_ALERT 22 DPWM2B 21 DPWM2A 20 DPWM1B 19 DPWM1A 18 DPWM0B 17 DPWM0A EAP0 EAN0 EAP1 EAN1 EAP2 AGND V33A AD00 AD01 AD02 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 2.7 UCD3138 40 QFN – Pin Assignments Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Overview 13 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 2.8 Pin Functions Additional pin functionality is specified in the following table. Table 2-2. Pin Functions ALTERNATE ASSIGNMENT PIN NAME PRIMARY ASSIGNMENT CONFIGURABLE NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 AS A GPIO? 1 AGND Analog ground 2 AD13 12-bit ADC, Ch 13, Connected to comparator E, I-share 3 AD06 12-bit ADC, Ch 6, Connected to comparator F 4 AD04 12-bit ADC, Ch 4, Connected to comparator D 5 AD03 12-bit ADC, Ch 3, Connected to comparator B & C 6 DGND Digital ground 7 RESET Device Reset Input, active low 8 ADC_EXT_TRIG ADC conversion external trigger input TCAP SYNC PWM0 Yes 9 PMBUS_CLK PMBUS Clock (Open Drain) SCI_TX0 Yes 10 PMBUS_DATA PMBus data (Open Drain) SCI_RX0 Yes 11 DPWM0A DPWM 0A output Yes 12 DPWM0B DPWM 0B output Yes 13 DPWM1A DPWM 1A output Yes 14 DPWM1B DPWM 1B output Yes 15 DPWM2A DPWM 2A output Yes 16 DPWM2B DPWM 2B output Yes 17 DWPM3A DPWM 3A output Yes 18 DPWM3B DPWM 3B output Yes 19 PMBUS_ALERT PMBus Alert (Open Drain) Yes 20 PMBUS_CTRL PMBus Control (Open Drain) Yes 21 TCK JTAG TCK TCAP SYNC PWM0 Yes 22 TDO JTAG TDO SCI_TX0 PMBUS_A FAULT0 Yes LERT 23 TDI JTAG TDI SCI_RX0 PMBUS_C FAULT1 Yes TRL 24 TMS JTAG TMS Yes 25 FAULT2 External fault input 2 Yes 26 DGND Digital ground 27 V33D Digital 3.3V core supply 28 BP18 1.8V Bypass 29 AGND Substrate analog ground 30 AGND Analog ground 31 EAP0 Channel #0, differential analog voltage, positive input 32 EAN0 Channel #0, differential analog voltage, negative input 33 EAP1 Channel #1, differential analog voltage, positive input 34 EAN1 Channel #1, differential analog voltage, negative input 35 EAP2 Channel #2, differential analog voltage, positive input 36 AGND Analog ground 37 V33A Analog 3.3V supply 38 AD00 12-bit ADC, Ch 0, Connected to current source 39 AD01 12-bit ADC, Ch 1, Connected to current source 40 AD02 12-bit ADC, Ch 2, Connected to comparator A, I-share 14 Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 3 Electrical Specifications 3.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (1) over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) VALUE UNIT MIN MAX V33D V33D to DGND –0.3 3.8 V V33DIO V33DIO to DGND –0.3 3.8 V V33A V33A to AGND –0.3 3.8 V |DGND – AGND| Ground difference 0.3 V All Pins, excluding AGND(2) Voltage applied to any pin –0.3 3.8 V TOPT Junction Temperature –40 125 °C TSTG Storage temperature –55 150 °C (1) Stresses beyond those listed under absolute maximum ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under recommended operating conditions is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. (2) Referenced to DGND 3.2 THERMAL INFORMATION UCD3138 UCD3138 THERMAL METRIC(1) 64 PIN QFN 40 PIN UNITS QFN θJA Junction-to-ambient thermal resistance (2) 25.1 31.8 θJCtop Junction-to-case (top) thermal resistance (3) 10.5 18.5 θJB Junction-to-board thermal resistance (4) 4.6 6.8 °C/W ψJT Junction-to-top characterization parameter(5) 0.2 0.2 ψJB Junction-to-board characterization parameter (6) 4.6 6.7 θJCbot Junction-to-case (bottom) thermal resistance (7) 1.2 1.8 (1) For more information about traditional and new thermal metrics, see the IC Package Thermal Metrics application report, SPRA953 (2) The junction-to-ambient thermal resistance under natural convection is obtained in a simulation on a JEDEC-standard, high-K board, as specified in JESD51-7, in an environment described in JESD51-2a. (3) The junction-to-case (top) thermal resistance is obtained by simulating a cold plate test on the package top. No specific JEDECstandard test exists, but a close description can be found in the ANSI SEMI standard G30-88. (4) The junction-to-board thermal resistance is obtained by simulating in an environment with a ring cold plate fixture to control the PCB temperature, as described in JESD51-8. (5) The junction-to-top characterization parameter, ψJT, estimates the junction temperature of a device in a real system and is extracted from the simulation data for obtaining θJA, using a procedure described in JESD51-2a (sections 6 and 7). (6) The junction-to-board characterization parameter, ψJB, estimates the junction temperature of a device in a real system and is extracted from the simulation data for obtaining θJA , using a procedure described in JESD51-2a (sections 6 and 7). (7) The junction-to-case (bottom) thermal resistance is obtained by simulating a cold plate test on the exposed (power) pad. No specific JEDEC standard test exists, but a close description can be found in the ANSI SEMI standard G30-88. Spacer 3.3 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) MIN TYP MAX UNIT V33D Digital power 3.0 3.3 3.6 V V33DIO Digital I/O power 3.0 3.3 3.6 V33A Analog power 3.0 3.3 3.6 V TJ Junction temperature -40 - 125 °C Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Electrical Specifications 15 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 3.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS V33A = V33D = V33DIO = 3.3V; 1μF from BP18 to DGND, TJ = –40°C to 125°C (unless otherwise noted) PARAMETER TEST CONDITION MIN TYP MAX UNIT SUPPLY CURRENT Measured on V33A. The device is I33A powered up but all ADC12 and EADC 6.3 mA sampling is disabled I33DIO All GPIO and communication pins are 0.35 mA open I33D ROM program execution 60 mA I33D Flash programming in ROM mode 70 mA The device is in ROM mode with all I33 DPWMs enabled and switching at 2 100 mA MHz. The DPWMs are all unloaded. ERROR ADC INPUTS EAP, EAN EAP – AGND –0.15 1.998 V EAP – EAN –0.256 1.848 V Typical error range AFE = 0 –256 248 mV AFE = 3 0.8 1 1.20 mV AFE = 2 1.7 2 2.30 mV EAP – EAN Error voltage digital resolution AFE = 1 3.55 4 4.45 mV AFE = 0 6.90 8 9.10 mV REA Input impedance (See Figure 4-1) AGND reference 0.5 MΩ IOFFSET Input offset current (See Figure 4-1) –5 5 μA Input voltage = 0 V at AFE = 0 –2 2 LSB Input voltage = 0 V at AFE = 1 –2.5 2.5 LSB EADC Offset Input voltage = 0 V at AFE = 2 –3 -3 LSB Input voltage = 0 V at AFE = 3 –4 4 LSB Sample Rate 16 MHz Analog Front End Amplifier Bandwidth 100 MHz Gain See Figure 4-2 1 V/V A0 Minimum output voltage 100 mV EADC DAC DAC range 0 1.6 V VREF DAC reference resolution 10 bit, No dithering enabled 1.56 mV VREF DAC reference resolution With 4 bit dithering enabled 97.6 μV INL –3.0 3.0 LSB DNL Does not include MSB transition –2.1 1.6 LSB DNL at MSB transition -1.4 LSB DAC reference voltage 1.58 1.61 V τ Settling Time From 10% to 90% 250 ns ADC12 IBIAS Bias current for PMBus address pins 9.5 10.5 μA Measurement range for voltage monitoring 0 2.5 V Internal ADC reference voltage –40°C to 125°C 2.475 2.500 2.525 V –40°C to 25°C –0.4 Change in Internal ADC reference from 25°C to 85°C –1.8 mV 25°C reference voltage(1) 25°C to 125°C –4.2 (1) As designed and characterized. Not 100% tested in production. 16 Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (continued) V33A = V33D = V33DIO = 3.3V; 1μF from BP18 to DGND, TJ = –40°C to 125°C (unless otherwise noted) PARAMETER TEST CONDITION MIN TYP MAX UNIT ADC12 INL integral nonlinearity(1) +/-2.5 LSB ADC12 DNL differential nonlinearity(1) ADC_SAMPLINGSEL = 6 for all ADC12 –0.7/+2.5 LSB ADC Zero Scale Error data, 25 °C to 125 °C –7 7 mV ADC Full Scale Error –35 35 mV Input bias 2.5 V applied to pin 400 nA Input leakage resistance(1) ADC_SAMPLINGSEL= 6 or 0 1 MΩ Input Capacitance(1) 10 pF ADC single sample conversion time(1) ADC_SAMPLINGSEL= 6 or 0 3.9 μs DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS(2) (3) V DGND OL Low-level output voltage(4) IOH = 4 mA, V33DIO = 3 V + 0.25 V V V33DIO OH High-level output voltage (4) IOH = –4 mA, V33DIO = 3 V – 0.6 V VIH High-level input voltage V33DIO = 3 V 2.1 V VIL Low-level input voltage V33DIO = 3 V 1.1 V IOH Output sinking current 4 mA IOL Output sourcing current –4 mA SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TWD Watchdog time out range Total time is: TWD x 14.6 17 20.5 ms (WDCTRL.PERIOD+1) Time to disable DPWM output based on High level on FAULT pin 70 ns active FAULT pin signal Processor master clock (MCLK) 31.25 MHz tDelay Digital compensator delay(5) (1 clock = 32ns) 6 clocks VDD Slew minimum VDD slew rate(6) VDD slew rate between 2.3 V and 2.9 V 0.25 V/ms t(reset) Pulse width needed at reset(6) 10 μs Retention period of flash content (data TJ = 25°C 100 years retention and program) Program time to erase one page or block in 20 ms data flash or program flash Program time to write one word in data 20 μs flash or program flash f(PCLK) Internal oscillator frequency 240 250 260 MHz Sync-in/sync-out pulse width Sync pin 256 ns Flash Read 1 MCLKs Flash Write 20 μs I Current share current source (See SHARE Figure 4-9) 238 259 μA RSHARE Current share resistor (See Figure 4-9) 9.75 10.3 kΩ POWER ON RESET AND BROWN OUT (V33D pin, See Figure 3-3) VGH Voltage good High 2.7 V VGL Voltage good Low 2.5 V Vres Voltage at which IReset signal is valid 0.8 V (2) DPWM outputs are low after reset. Other GPIO pins are configured as inputs after reset. (3) On the 40 pin package V33DIO is connected to V33D internally. (4) The maximum total current, IOHmax and IOLmax for all outputs combined, should not exceed 12 mA to hold the maximum voltage drop specified. Maximum sink current per pin = –6 mA at VOL; maximum source current per pin = 6 mA at VOH. (5) Time from close of error ADC sample window to time when digitally calculated control effort (duty cycle) is available. This delay, which has no variation associated with it, must be accounted for when calculating the system dynamic response. (6) As designed and characterized. Not 100% tested in production. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Electrical Specifications 17 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (continued) V33A = V33D = V33DIO = 3.3V; 1μF from BP18 to DGND, TJ = –40°C to 125°C (unless otherwise noted) PARAMETER TEST CONDITION MIN TYP MAX UNIT T Time delay after Power is good or POR RESET* relinquished 1 ms Brownout Internal signal warning of brownout 2.9 V conditions TEMPERATURE SENSOR(7) VTEMP Voltage range of sensor 1.46 2.44 V Voltage resolution Volts/°C 5.9 mV/ºC Temperature resolution Degree C per bit 0.1034 ºC/LSB Accuracy(7) (8) -40°C to 125°C –10 ±5 10 ºC Temperature range -40°C to 125°C –40 125 ºC ITEMP Current draw of sensor when active 30 μA TON Turn on time / settling time of sensor 100 μs VAMB Ambient temperature Trimmed 25°C reading 1.85 V ANALOG COMPARATOR DAC Reference DAC Range 0 2.5 V Reference Voltage 2.478 2.5 2.513 V Bits 7 bits INL(7) –0.42 0.21 LSB DNL(7) 0.06 0.12 LSB Offset –5.5 19.5 mV Time to disable DPWM output based on 0 V to 2.5 V step input on the analog 150 ns comparator.(9) Reference DAC buffered output load(10) 0.5 1 mA Buffer offset (-0.5 mA) 4.6 8.3 mV Buffer offset (1.0 mA) –0.05 17 mV (7) Characterized by design and not production tested. (8) Ambient temperature offset value should be used from the TEMPSENCTRL register to meet accuracy. (9) As designed and characterized. Not 100% tested in production. (10) Available from reference DACs for comparators D, E, F and G. 18 Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 3.5 PMBus/SMBus/I2C Timing The timing characteristics and timing diagram for the communications interface that supports I2C, SMBus, and PMBus in Slave or Master mode are shown in Table 3-1, Figure 3-1, and Figure 3-2. The numbers in Table 3-1 are for 400 kHz operating frequency. However, the device supports all three speeds, standard (100 kHz), fast (400 kHz), and fast mode plus (1 MHz). Table 3-1. I2C/SMBus/PMBus Timing Characteristics PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Typical values at TA = 25°C and VCC = 3.3 V (unless otherwise noted) fSMB SMBus/PMBus operating frequency Slave mode, SMBC 50% duty cycle 100 1000 kHz fI2C I2C operating frequency Slave mode, SCL 50% duty cycle 100 1000 kHz t(BUF) Bus free time between start and stop 1.3 ms t(HD:STA) Hold time after (repeated) start 0.6 ms t(SU:STA) Repeated start setup time 0.6 ms t(SU:STO) Stop setup time 0.6 ms t(HD:DAT) Data hold time Receive mode 0 ns t(SU:DAT) Data setup time 100 ns t(TIMEOUT) Error signal/detect(1) 35 ms t(LOW) Clock low period 1.3 ms t(HIGH) Clock high period(2) 0.6 ms t Cumulative clock low slave extend (LOW:SEXT) time(3) 25 ms t 20 + 0.1 f Clock/data fall time Rise time tr = (VILmax – 0.15) to (VIHmin + 0.15) Cb(4) 300 ns t 20 + 0.1 r Clock/data rise time Fall time tf = 0.9 VDD to (VILmax – 0.15) Cb(4) 300 ns Cb Total capacitance of one bus line 400 pF (1) The device times out when any clock low exceeds t(TIMEOUT). (2) t(HIGH), Max, is the minimum bus idle time. SMBC = SMBD = 1 for t > 50 ms causes reset of any transaction that is in progress. This specification is valid when the NC_SMB control bit remains in the default cleared state (CLK[0] = 0). (3) t(LOW:SEXT) is the cumulative time a slave device is allowed to extend the clock cycles in one message from initial start to the stop. (4) Cb (pF) Figure 3-1. I2C/SMBus/PMBus Timing Diagram Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Electrical Specifications 19 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 TPOR undefined V33D IReset 3.3 V TPOR VGH VGL Vres t t Brown Out UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Figure 3-2. Bus Timing in Extended Mode 3.6 Power On Reset (POR) / Brown Out Reset (BOR) Figure 3-3. Power On Reset (POR) / Brown Out Reset (BOR) VGH – This is the V33D threshold where the internal power is declared good. The UCD3138 comes out of reset when above this threshold. VGL – This is the V33D threshold where the internal power is declared bad. The device goes into reset when below this threshold. Vres – This is the V33D threshold where the internal reset signal is no longer valid. Below this threshold the device is in an indeterminate state. IReset – This is the internal reset signal. When low, the device is held in reset. This is equivalent to holding the reset pin on the IC high. TPOR – The time delay from when VGH is exceeded to when the device comes out of reset. Brown – This is the V33D voltage threshold at which the device sets the brown out status bit. In Out addition an interrupt can be triggered if enabled. 20 Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 DPWM FE_CTRL PCM ADC12 PMBUS TIMER CPCC FILTER SCI SCI GIO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 UCD3138 Function Power Savings (mA) G001 4.9 2.57 1.2 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 3.7 Typical Clock Gating Power Savings Power disable control register provides control bits that can enable or disable arrival of clock to several peripherals such as, PCM, CPCC, digital filters, front ends, DPWMs, UARTs, ADC-12 and more. All these controls are enabled as default. If a specific peripheral is not used in a specific application the clock gate can be disabled in order to block the propagation of clock signal to that peripheral and therefore reduce the overall current consumption of the device. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Electrical Specifications 21 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 2.475 2.480 2.485 2.490 2.495 2.500 2.505 2.510 2.515 −40 −20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) ADC12 Reference G003b ADC12 2.5-V Reference 1.92 1.96 2 2.04 2.08 −40 −20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) 2-MHZ Reference G004b UCD3138 Oscillator Frequency −4 −2 0 2 4 6 8 −40 −20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) ADC12 Error (LSB) G002b ADC12 Temperature Sensor Measurement Error 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 −60 −40 −20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Temperature (°C) Sensor Voltage (V) G006b ADC12 Measurement Temperature Sensor Voltage 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 −40 −20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) EADC LSB Size (mV) G005a UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 3.8 Typical Temperature Characteristics Figure 3-4. EADC LSB Size with 4X Gain (mV) vs. Temperature Figure 3-5. ADC12 Measurement Temperature Figure 3-7. ADC12 Temperature Sensor Sensor Voltage vs. Temperature Measurement Error vs. Temperature Figure 3-6. ADC12 2.5-V Reference vs. Figure 3-8. UCD3138 Oscillator Frequency (2MHz Temperature Reference, Divided Down from 250MHz) vs. Temperature 22 Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4 Functional Overview 4.1 ARM Processor The ARM7TDMI-S processor is a synthesizable member of the ARM family of general purpose 32-bit microprocessors. The ARM architecture is based on RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) principles where two instruction sets are available. The 32-bit ARM instruction set and the 16-bit Thumb instruction set. The Thumb instruction allows for higher code density equivalent to a 16-bit microprocessor, with the performance of the 32-bit microprocessor. The three-staged pipelined ARM processor has fetch, decode and execute stage architecture. Major blocks in the ARM processor include a 32-bit ALU, 32 x 8 multiplier, and a barrel shifter. A JTAG port is also available for firmware debugging. 4.2 Memory The UCD3138 (ARM7TDMI-S) is a Von-Neumann architecture, where a single bus provides access to all of the memory modules. All of the memory module addresses are sequentially aligned along the same address range. This applies to program flash, data flash, ROM and all other peripherals. Within the UCD3138 architecture, there is a 1024x32-bit Boot ROM that contains the initial firmware startup routines for PMBUS communication and non-volatile (FLASH) memory download. This boot ROM is executed after power-up-reset checks if there is a valid FLASH program written. If a valid program is present, the ROM code branches to the main FLASH-program execution. UCD3138 also supports customization of the boot program by allowing an alternative boot routine to be executed from program FLASH. This feature enables assignment of a unique address to each device; therefore, enabling firmware reprogramming even when several devices are connected on the same communication bus. Two separate FLASH memory areas are present inside the device. The 32 kB Program FLASH is organized as an 8 k x 32 bit memory block and is intended to be for the firmware program. The block is configured with page erase capability for erasing blocks as small as 1kB per page, or with a mass erase for erasing the entire program FLASH array. The FLASH endurance is specified at 1000 erase/write cycles and the data retention is good for 100 years. The 2 kB data FLASH array is organized as a 512 x 32 bit memory (32 byte page size). The Data FLASH is intended for firmware data value storage and data logging. Thus, the Data FLASH is specified as a high endurance memory of 20 k cycles with embedded error correction code (ECC). For run time data storage and scratchpad memory, a 4 kB RAM is available. The RAM is organized as a 1 k x 32 bit array. 4.2.1 CPU Memory Map and Interrupts When the device comes out of power-on-reset, the data memories are mapped to the processor as follows: 4.2.1.1 Memory Map (After Reset Operation) Address Size Module 0x0000_0000 – 0x0000_FFFF In 16 repeated blocks of 4K each 16 X 4K Boot ROM 0x0001_0000 – 0x0001_7FFF 32K Program Flash 0x0001_8800 – 0x0001_8FFF 2K Data Flash 0x0001_9000 – 0x0001_9FFF 4K Data RAM Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 23 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.2.1.2 Memory Map (Normal Operation) Just before the boot ROM program gives control to FLASH program, the ROM configures the memory as follows: Address Size Module 0x0000_0000 – 0x0000_7FFF 32K Program Flash 0x0001_0000 – 0x0001_AFFF 4K Boot ROM 0x0001_8800 – 0x0001_8FFF 2K Data Flash 0x0001_9000 – 0x0001_9FFF 4K Data RAM 4.2.1.3 Memory Map (System and Peripherals Blocks) Address Size Module 0x0002_0000 - 0x0002_00FF 256 Loop Mux 0x0003_0000 - 0x0003_00FF 256 Fault Mux 0x0004_0000 - 0x0004_00FF 256 ADC 0x0005_0000 - 0x0005_00FF 256 DPWM 3 0x0006_0000 - 0x0006_00FF 256 Filter 2 0x0007_0000 - 0x0007_00FF 256 DPWM 2 0x0008_0000 - 0x0008_00FF 256 Front End/Ramp I/F 2 0x0009_0000 - 0x0009_00FF 256 Filter 1 0x000A_0000 - 0x000A_00FF 256 DPWM 1 0x000B_0000 – 0x000B_00FF 256 Front End/Ramp I/F 1 0x000C_0000 - 0x000C_00FF 256 Filter 0 0x000D_0000 - 0x000D_00FF 256 DPWM 0 0x000E_0000 - 0x000E_00FF 256 Front End/Ramp I/F 0 0xFFF7_EC00 - 0xFFF7_ECFF 256 UART 0 0xFFF7_ED00 - 0xFFF7_EDFF 256 UART 1 0xFFF7_F000 - 0xFFF7_F0FF 256 Miscellaneous Analog Control 0xFFF7_F600 - 0xFFF7_F6FF 256 PMBus Interface 0xFFF7_FA00 - 0xFFF7_FAFF 256 GIO 0xFFF7_FD00 - 0xFFF7_FDFF 256 Timer 0xFFFF_FD00 - 0xFFFF_FDFF 256 MMC 0xFFFF_FE00 - 0xFFFF_FEFF 256 DEC 0xFFFF_FF20 - 0xFFFF_FF37 23 CIM 0xFFFF_FF40 - 0xFFFF_FF50 16 PSA 0xFFFF_FFD0 - 0xFFFF_FFEC 28 SYS The registers and bit definitions inside the System and Peripheral blocks are detailed in the programmer’s guide for each peripheral. 4.2.2 Boot ROM The UCD3138 incorporates a 4k boot ROM. This boot ROM includes support for: • Program download through the PMBus • Device initialization • Examining and modifying registers and memory • Verifying and executing program FLASH automatically • Jumping to a customer defined boot program 24 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 The Boot ROM is entered automatically on device reset. It initializes the device and then performs checksums on the Program FLASH. If the first 2 kB of program FLASH has a valid checksum, the program jumps to location 0 in the Program FLASH. This permits the use of a customer boot program. If the first checksum fails, it performs a checksum on the complete 32 kB of program flash. If this is valid, it also jumps to location 0 in the program flash. This permits full automated program memory checking, when there is no need for a custom boot program. If neither checksum is valid, the Boot ROM stays in control, and accepts commands via the PMBus interface These functions can be used to read and write to all memory locations in the UCD3138. Typically they are used to download a program to Program Flash, and to command its execution 4.2.3 Customer Boot Program As described above, it is possible to generate a user boot program using 2 kB or more of the Program Flash. This can support things which the Boot ROM does not support, including: • Program download via UART – useful especially for applications where the UCD3138 is isolated from the host (e.g., PFC) • Encrypted download – useful for code security in field updates. 4.2.4 Flash Management The UCD3138 offers a variety of features providing for easy prototyping and easy flash programming. At the same time, high levels of security are possible for production code, even with field updates. Standard firmware will be provided for storing multiple copies of system parameters in data flash. This is minimizes the risk of losing information if programming is interrupted. 4.3 System Module The System Module contains the interface logic and configuration registers to control and configure all the memory, peripherals and interrupt mechanisms. The blocks inside the system module are the address decoder, memory management controller, system management unit, central interrupt unit, and clock control unit. 4.3.1 Address Decoder (DEC) The Address Decoder generates the memory selects for the FLASH, ROM and RAM arrays. The memory map addresses are selectable through configurable register settings. These memory selects can be configured from 1 kB to 16 MB. Power on reset uses the default addresses in the memory map for ROM execution, which is then configured by the ROM code to the application setup. During access to the DEC registers, a wait state is asserted to the CPU. DEC registers are only writable in the ARM privilege mode for user mode protection. 4.3.2 Memory Management Controller (MMC) The MMC manages the interface to the peripherals by controlling the interface bus for extending the read and write accesses to each peripheral. The unit generates eight peripheral select lines with 1 kB of address space decoding. 4.3.3 System Management (SYS) The SYS unit contains the software access protection by configuring user privilege levels to memory or peripherals modules. It contains the ability to generate fault or reset conditions on decoding of illegal address or access conditions. A clock control setup for the processor clock (MCLK) speed, is also available. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 25 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.3.4 Central Interrupt Module (CIM) The CIM accepts 32 interrupt requests for meeting firmware timing requirements. The ARM processor supports two interrupt levels: FIQ and IRQ. FIQ is the highest priority interrupt. The CIM provides hardware expansion of interrupts by use of FIQ/IRQ vector registers for providing the offset index in a vector table. This numerical index value indicates the highest precedence channel with a pending interrupt and is used to locate the interrupt vector address from the interrupt vector table. Interrupt channel 0 has the lowest precedence and interrupt channel 31 has the highest precedence. To remove the interrupt request, the firmware should clear the request as the first action in the interrupt service routine. The request channels are maskable, allowing individual channels to be selectively disabled or enabled. Table 4-1. Interrupt Priority Table NAME MODULE COMPONENT OR DESCRIPTION PRIORITY REGISTER BRN_OUT_INT Brownout Brownout interrupt 0 (Lowest) EXT_INT External Interrupts Interrupt on external input pin 1 WDRST_INT Watchdog Control Interrupt from watchdog exceeded (reset) 2 WDWAKE_INT Watchdog Control Wakeup interrupt when watchdog equals half of set 3 watch time SCI_ERR_INT UART or SCI Control UART or SCI error Interrupt. Frame, parity or overrun 4 SCI_RX_0_INT UART or SCI Control UART0 RX buffer has a byte 5 SCI_TX_0_INT UART or SCI Control UART0 TX buffer empty 6 SCI_RX_1_INT UART or SCI Control UART1 RX buffer has a byte 7 SCI_TX_1_INT UART or SCI Control UART1 TX buffer empty 8 PMBUS_INT PMBus related interrupt 9 DIG_COMP_INT 12-bit ADC Control Digital comparator interrupt 10 “Prebias complete”, “Ramp Delay Complete”, “Ramp FE0_INT Front End 0 Complete”, “Load Step Detected”, 11 “Over-Voltage Detected”, “EADC saturated” “Prebias complete”, “Ramp Delay Complete”, “Ramp FE1_INT Front End 1 Complete”, “Load Step Detected”, 12 “Over-Voltage Detected”, “EADC saturated” “Prebias complete”, “Ramp Delay Complete”, “Ramp FE2_INT Front End 2 Complete”, “Load Step Detected”, 13 “Over-Voltage Detected”, “EADC saturated” PWM3_INT 16-bit Timer PWM 3 16-bit Timer PWM3 counter overflow or compare interrupt 14 PWM2_INT 16-bit Timer PWM 2 16-bit Timer PWM2 counter Overflow or compare 15 interrupt PWM1_INT 16-bit Timer PWM 1 16-bit Timer PWM1 counter overflow or compare interrupt 16 PWM0_INT 16-bit timer PWM 0 16-bit Timer PWM1 counter overflow or compare interrupt 17 OVF24_INT 24-bit Timer Control 24-bit Timer counter overflow interrupt 18 CAPTURE_1_INT 24-bit Timer Control 24-bit Timer capture 1 interrupt 19 COMP_1_INT 24-bit Timer Control 24-bit Timer compare 1 interrupt 20 CAPTURE_0_INT 24-bit Timer Control 24-bit Timer capture 0 interrupt 21 COMP_0_INT 24-bit Timer Control 24-bit Timer compare 0 interrupt 22 CPCC_INT Constant Power Constant Current Mode switched in CPCC module Flag needs to be read 23 for details ADC_CONV_INT 12-bit ADC Control ADC end of conversion interrupt 24 Analog comparator interrupts, Over-Voltage detection, FAULT_INT Fault Mux Interrupt Under-Voltage detection, 25 LLM load step detection 26 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Error ADC (Front End) Filter Digital PWM EAP EAN DPWMA DPWMB UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Table 4-1. Interrupt Priority Table (continued) NAME MODULE COMPONENT OR DESCRIPTION PRIORITY REGISTER DPWM3 DPWM3 Same as DPWM1 26 DPWM2 DPWM2 Same as DPWM1 27 1) Every (1-256) switching cycles DPWM1 DPWM1 2) Fault Detection 28 3) Mode switching DPWM0 DPWM0 Same as DPWM1 29 EXT_FAULT_INT External Faults Fault pin interrupt 30 SYS_SSI_INT System Software System software interrupt 31 (highest) 4.4 Peripherals 4.4.1 Digital Power Peripherals At the core of the UCD3138 controller are 3 Digital Power Peripherals (DPP). Each DPP can be configured to drive from one to eight DPWM outputs. Each DPP consists of: • Differential input error ADC (EADC) with sophisticated controls • Hardware accelerated digital 2-pole/2-zero PID based compensator • Digital PWM module with support for a variety of topologies These can be connected in many different combinations, with multiple filters and DPWMs. They are capable of supporting functions like input voltage feed forward, current mode control, and constant current/constant power, etc.. The simplest configuration is shown in the following figure: 4.4.1.1 Front End Figure 4-1 shows the block diagram of the front end module. It consists of a differential amplifier, an adjustable gain error amplifier, a high speed flash analog to digital converter (EADC), digital averaging filters and a precision high resolution set point DAC reference. The programmable gain amplifier in concert with the EADC and the adjustable digital gain on the EADC output work together to provide 9 bits of range with 6 bits of resolution on the EADC output. The output of the Front End module is a 9 bit sign extended result with a gain of 1 LSB / mV. Depending on the value of AFE selected, the resolution of this output could be either 1, 2, 4 or 8 LSBs. In addition Front End 0 has the ability to automatically select the AFE value such that the minimum resolution is maintained that still allows the voltage to fit within the range of the measurement. The EADC control logic receives the sample request from the DPWM module for initiating an EADC conversion. EADC control circuitry captures the EADC-9-bit-code and strobes the digital compensator for processing of the representative error. The set point DAC has 10 bits with an additional 4 bits of dithering resulting in an effective resolution of 14 bits. This DAC can be driven from a variety of sources to facilitate things like soft start, nested loops, etc. Some additional features include the ability to change the polarity of the error measurement and an absolute value mode which automatically adds the DAC value to the error. It is possible to operate the controller in a peak current mode control configuration. In this mode topologies like the phase shifted full bridge converter can be controlled to maintain transformer flux balance. The internal DAC can be ramped at a synchronously controlled slew rate to achieve a programmable slope compensation. This eliminates the sub-harmonic oscillation as well as improves input voltage feed-forward performance. A0 is a unity gain buffer used to isolate the peak current mode comparator. The offset of this buffer is specified in the Electrical Characteristics table. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 27 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 EAP0 EAN0 DAC0 EADC 4 bit dithering gives 14 bits of effective resolution 97.65625 μV/LSB effective resolution X 6 bit ADC 8 mV/LSB Signed 9 bit result (error) 1 mV /LSB AFE_GAIN 10 bit DAC 1.5625 mV/LSB Value Dither S CPCC Filter x Ramp SAR/Prebias Absolute Value Calculation Averaging 10 bit result 1.5625 mV/LSB 2 3-AFE_GAIN Peak Current Mode Comparator Peak Current Detected A0 2 AFE_GAIN IOFFSET REA EAP EAN AGND AGND IOFFSET REA Front End Differential Amplifier UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Figure 4-1. Input Stage of EADC Module Figure 4-2. Front End Module 4.4.1.2 DPWM Module The DPWM module represents one complete DPWM channel with 2 independent outputs, A and B. Multiple DPWM modules within the UCD3138 system can be configured to support all key power topologies. DPWM modules can be used as independent DPWM outputs, each controlling one power supply output voltage rail. It can also be used as a synchronized DPWM—with user selectable phase shift between the DPWM channels to control power supply outputs with multiphase or interleaved DPWM configurations. 28 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 The output of the filter feeds the high resolution DPWM module. The DPWM module produces the pulse width modulated outputs for the power stage switches. The compensator calculates the necessary duty ratio as a 24-bit number in Q23 fixed point format (23 bit integer with 1 sign bit). This represents a value within the range 0.0 to 1.0. This duty ratio value is used to generate the corresponding DPWM output ON time. The resolution of the DPWM ON time is 250 psec. Each DPWM module can be synchronized to another module or to an external sync signal. An input SYNC signal causes a DPWM ramp timer to reset. The SYNC signal outputs—from each of the four DPWM modules—occur when the ramp timer crosses a programmed threshold. In this way the phase of the DPWM outputs for multiple power stages can be tightly controlled. The DPWM logic is probably the most complex of the Digital Peripherals. It takes the output of the compensator and converts it into the correct DPWM output for several power supply topologies. It provides for programmable dead times and cycle adjustments for current balancing between phases. It controls the triggering of the EADC. It can synchronize to other DPWMs or to external sources. It can provide synchronization information to other DPWMs or to external recipients. In addition, it interfaces to several fault handling circuits. Some of the control for these fault handling circuits is in the DPWM registers. Fault handling is covered in the Fault Mux section. Each DPWM module supports the following features: • Dedicated 14 bit time-base with period and frequency control • Shadow period register for end of period updates. • Quad-event control registers (A and B, rising and falling) (Events 1-4) – Used for on/off DPWM duty ratio updates. • Phase control relative to other DPWM modules • Sample trigger placement for output voltage sensing at any point during the DPWM cycle. • Support for 2 independent edge placement DPWM outputs (same frequency or period setting) • Dead-time between DPWM A and B outputs • High Resolution capabilities – 250 ps • Pulse cycle adjustment of up to ±8.192 μs ( 32768 × 250 ps) • Active high/ active low output polarity selection • Provides events to trigger both CPU interrupts and start of ADC12 conversions. 4.4.1.3 DPWM Events Each DPWM can control the following timing events: 1. Sample Trigger Count–This register defines where the error voltage is sampled by the EADC in relationship to the DPWM period. The programmed value set in the register should be one fourth of the value calculated based on the DPWM clock. As the DCLK (DCLK = 62.5 MHz max) controlling the circuitry runs at one fourth of the DPWM clock (PCLK = 250MHz max). When this sample trigger count is equal to the DPWM Counter, it initiates a front end calculation by triggering the EADC, resulting in a CLA calculation, and a DPWM update. Over-sampling can be set for 2, 4 or 8 times the sampling rate. 2. Phase Trigger Count–count offset for slaving another DPWM (Multi-Phase/Interleaved operation). 3. Period–low resolution switching period count. (count of PCLK cycles) 4. Event 1–count offset for rising DPWM A event. (PCLK cycles) 5. Event 2–DPWM count for falling DPWM A event that sets the duty ratio. Last 4 bits of the register are for high resolution control. Upper 14 bits are the number of PCLK cycle counts. 6. Event 3–DPWM count for rising DPWM B event. Last 4 bits of the register are for high resolution control. Upper 14 bits are the number of PCLK cycle counts. 7. Event 4–DPWM count for falling DPWM B event. Last 4 bits of the register are for high resolution control. Upper 14 bits are the number of PCLK cycle counts. 8. Cycle Adjust–Constant offset for Event 2 and Event 4 adjustments. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 29 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Period Sample Trigger 1 DPWM Output A Cycle Adjust A (High Resolution) Event 2 (High Resolution) Event 1 Event 3 (High Resolution) Cycle Adjust B (High Resolution) Event 4 (High Resolution) DPWM Output B Blanking A Begin Blanking A End Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules To Other Modules Multi Mode Open Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: DPWM A Rising Edge = Event 1 DPWM A Falling Edge = Event 2 + Cycle Adjust A DPWM B Rising Edge = Event 3 DPWM B Falling Edge = Event 4 + Cycle Adjust B Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Basic comparisons between the programmed registers and the DPWM counter can create the desired edge placements in the DPWM. High resolution edge capability is available on Events 2, 3 and 4. The drawing above is for multi-mode, open loop. Open loop means that the DPWM is controlled entirely by its own registers, not by the filter output. In other words, the power supply control loop is not closed. 30 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 The Sample Trigger signals are used to trigger the Front End to sample input signals. The Blanking signals are used to blank fault measurements during noisy events, such as FET turn on and turn off. Additional DPWM modes are described below. 4.4.1.4 High Resolution DPWM Unlike conventional PWM controllers where the frequency of the clock dictates the maximum resolution of PWM edges, the UCD3138 DPWM can generate waveforms with resolutions as small as 250 ps. This is 16 times the resolution of the clock driving the DPWM module. This is achieved by providing the DPWM mechanism with 16 phase shifted clock signals of 250 MHz each. The high resolution section of DPWM can be enabled or disabled, also the resolution can be defined in several steps between 4ns to 250ps. This is done by setting the values of PWM_HR_MULTI_OUT_EN , HIRES_SCALE and ALL_PHASE_CLK_ENA inside the DPWM Control Register 1. See the Power Peripherals programmer’s manual for details. 4.4.1.5 Over Sampling The DPWM module has the capability to trigger an over sampling event by initiating the EADC to sample the error voltage. The default “00” configuration has the DPWM trigger the EADC once based on the sample trigger register value. The over sampling register has the ability to trigger the sampling 2, 4 or 8 times per PWM period. Thus the time the over sample happens is at the divide by 2, 4, or 8 time set in the sampling register. The “01” setting triggers 2X over sampling, the “10” setting triggers 4X over sampling, and the “11” triggers over sampling at 8X. 4.4.1.6 DPWM Interrupt Generation The DPWM has the capability to generate a CPU interrupt based on the PWM frequency programmed in the period register. The interrupt can be scaled by a divider ratio of up to 255 for developing a slower interrupt service execution loop. This interrupt can be fed to the ADC circuitry for providing an ADC12 trigger for sequence synchronization. Table 4-2 outlines the divide ratios that can be programmed. 4.4.1.7 DPWM Interrupt Scaling/Range Table 4-2. DPWM Interrupt Divide Ratio Interrupt Divide Interrupt Divide Interrupt Divide Switching Period Number of 32 MHz Setting Count Count (hex) Frames (assume 1MHz Processor Cycles loop) 1 0 00 1 32 2 1 01 2 64 3 3 03 4 128 4 7 07 8 256 5 15 0F 16 512 6 31 1F 32 1024 7 47 2F 48 1536 8 63 3F 64 2048 9 79 4F 80 2560 10 95 5F 96 3072 11 127 7F 128 4096 12 159 9F 160 5120 13 191 BF 192 6144 14 223 DF 224 7168 15 255 FF 256 8192 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 31 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.5 DPWM Modes of Operation The DPWM is a complex logic system which is highly configurable to support several different power supply topologies. The discussion below will focus primarily on waveforms, timing and register settings, rather than on logic design. The DPWM is centered on a period counter, which counts up from 0 to PRD, and then is reset and starts over again. The DPWM logic causes transitions in many digital signals when the period counter hits the target value for that signal. 4.5.1 Normal Mode In Normal mode, the Filter output determines the pulse width on DPWM A. DPWM B fits into the rest of the switching period, with a dead time separating it from the DPWM A on-time. It is useful for buck topologies, among others. Here is a drawing of the Normal Mode waveforms: 32 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Period DPWM Output A Cycle Adjust A (High Resolution) Filter Duty (High Resolution) Event 1 Event 3 – Event 2 (High Res) Event 4 (High Res) DPWM Output B Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules Normal Mode Closed Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: DPWM A Rising Edge = Event 1 DPWM A Falling Edge = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust A Adaptive Sample Trigger A = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Adaptive Sample Register or Adaptive Sample Trigger B = Event 1 + Filter Duty/2 + Adaptive Sample Register DPWM B Rising Edge = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust A + (Event 3 – Event 2) DPWM B Falling Edge = Event 4 Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End Filter controlled edge Sample Trigger 1 Blanking A Begin Blanking A End To Other Modules Adaptive Sample Trigger A Adaptive Sample Trigger B UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Cycle adjust A can be used to adjust pulse widths on individual phases of a multi-phase system. This can be used for functions like current balancing. The Adaptive Sample Triggers can be used to sample in the middle of the on-time (for an average output), or at the end of the on-time (to minimize phase delay) The Adaptive Sample Register provides an offset from the center of the on-time. This can compensate for external delays, such as MOSFET and gate driver turn on times. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 33 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Phase Shift Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty DPWM0 Start of Period Period Counter DPWM0 Start of Period DPWM1 Start of Period Period Counter DPWM1 Start of Period UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Blanking A-Begin and Blanking A-End can be used to blank out noise from the MOSFET turn on at the beginning of the period (DPWMA rising edge). Blanking B could be used at the turn off time of DPWMB. The other edges are dynamic, so blanking is more difficult. Cycle Adjust B has no effect in Normal Mode. 4.6 Phase Shifting In most modes, it is possible to synchronize multiple DPWM modules using the phase shift signal. The phase shift signal has two possible sources. It can come from the Phase Shift Register. This provides a fixed value, which is useful for an interleaved PFC, for example. The phase shift value can also come from the filter output. In this case, the changes in the filter output causes changes in the phase relationship of two DPWM modules. This is useful for phase shifted full bridge topologies. The following figure shows the mechanism of phase shift: 34 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Adaptive Sample Trigger B Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Period Adaptive Sample Trigger A DPWM Output A Cycle Adjust A (High Resolution) Filter Duty (High Resolution) Event 1 To Other Modules Multi Mode Closed Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: DPWM A Rising Edge = Event 1 DPWM A Falling Edge = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust A Adaptive Sample Trigger A = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Adaptive Sample Register or Adaptive Sample Trigger B = Event 1 + Filter Duty/2 + Adaptive Sample Register DPWM B Rising Edge = Event 3 DPWM B Falling Edge = Event 3 + Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust B Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End Filter controlled edge Event 3 (High Resolution) Cycle Adjust B (High Resolution) Filter Duty (High Resolution) DPWM Output B Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules Sample Trigger 1 Blanking A Begin Blanking A End UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.7 DPWM Multiple Output Mode Multi mode is used for systems where each phase has only one driver signal. It enables each DPWM peripheral to drive two phases with the same pulse width, but with a time offset between the phases, and with different cycle adjusts for each phase. Here is a diagram for Multi-Mode: Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 35 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Event 2 and Event 4 are not relevant in Multi mode. DPWMB can cross over the period boundary safely, and still have the proper pulse width, so full 100% pulse width operation is possible. DPWMA cannot cross over the period boundary. Since the rising edge on DPWM B is also fixed, Blanking B-Begin and Blanking B-End can be used for blanking this rising edge. And, of course, Cycle Adjust B is usable on DPWM B. 4.8 DPWM Resonant Mode This mode provides a symmetrical waveform where DPWMA and DPWMB have the same pulse width. As the switching frequency changes, the dead times between the pulses remain the same. The equations for this mode are designed for a smooth transition from PWM mode to resonant mode, as described in the LLC Example section. Here is a diagram of this mode: 36 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Filter Period Adaptive Sample Trigger A Sample Trigger 1 DPWM Output A Filter Duty – Average Dead Time Event 1 Event 3 - Event 2 Period Register – Event 4 DPWM Output B Blanking A Begin Blanking A End Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules To Other Modules Resonant Symmetrical Closed Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: Dead Time 1 = Event 3 – Event 2 Dead Time 2 = Event 1 + Period Register – Event 4) Average Dead Time = (Dead Time 1 + Dead Time 2)/2 DPWM A Rising Edge = Event 1 DPWM A Falling Edge = Event 1 + Filter Duty – Average Dead Time Adaptive Sample Trigger A = Event 1 + Filter Duty + Adaptive Sample Register Adaptive Sample Trigger B = Event 1 + Filter Duty/2 + Adaptive Sample Register DPWM B Rising Edge = Event 1 + Filter Duty – Average Dead Time + (Event 3 – Event 2) DPWM B Falling Edge = Filter Period – (Period Register – Event 4) Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End Filter controlled edge Adaptive Sample Trigger B UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 The Filter has two outputs, Filter Duty and Filter Period. In this case, the Filter is configured so that the Filter Period is twice the Filter Duty. So if there were no dead times, each DPWM pin would be on for half of the period. For dead time handling, the average of the two dead times is subtracted from the Filter Duty for both DPWM pins. Therefore, both pins will have the same on-time, and the dead times will be fixed regardless of the period. The only edge which is fixed relative to the start of the period is the rising edge of DPWM A. This is the only edge for which the blanking signals can be used easily. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 37 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Period Sample Trigger 1 DPWM Output A Filter Duty/2 (High Resolution) Period/2 DPWM Output B Blanking A Begin Blanking A End Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules To Other Modules Triangular Mode Closed Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: DPWM A Rising Edge = None DPWM A Falling Edge = None Adaptive Sample Trigger = None DPWM B Rising Edge = Period/2 - Filter Duty/2 + Cycle Adjust A DPWM B Falling Edge = Period/2 + Filter Duty/2 + Cycle Adjust B Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End Filter controlled edge Cycle Adjust A (High Resolution) Cycle Adjust B (High Resolution) UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.9 Triangular Mode Triangular mode provides a stable phase shift in interleaved PFC and similar topologies. In this case, the PWM pulse is centered in the middle of the period, rather than starting at one end or the other. In Triangular Mode, only DPWM-B is available. Here is a diagram for Triangular Mode: All edges are dynamic in triangular mode, so fixed blanking is not that useful. The adaptive sample trigger is not needed. It is very easy to put a fixed sample trigger exactly in the center of the FET on-time, because the center of the on-time does not move in this mode. 38 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.10 Leading Edge Mode Leading edge mode is very similar to Normal mode, reversed in time. The DPWM A falling edge is fixed, and the rising edge moves to the left, or backwards in time, as the filter output increases. The DPWM B falling edge stays ahead of the DPWMA rising edge by a fixed dead time. Here is a diagram of the Leading Edge Mode: Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 39 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Start of Period Period Counter Start of Period Period Adaptive Sample Trigger B Sample Trigger 1 DPWM Output A Cycle Adjust A (High Resolution) Filter Duty (High Resolution) Event 1 Event 2 - Event 3 (High Resolution) Event 4 (High Resolution) DPWM Output B Blanking A Begin Blanking A End Blanking B Begin Blanking B End Phase Trigger Sample Trigger 2 To Other Modules To Other Modules Leading Edge Closed Loop Events which change with DPWM mode: DPWM A Falling Edge = Event 1 DPWM A Rising Edge = Event 1 - Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust A Adaptive Sample Trigger A = Event 1 - Filter Duty + Adaptive Sample Register or Adaptive Sample Trigger B = Event 1 - Filter Duty/2 + Adaptive Sample Register DPWM B Rising Edge = Event 4 DPWM B Falling Edge = Event 1 - Filter Duty + Cycle Adjust A -(Event 2 – Event 3) Phase Trigger = Phase Trigger Register value or Filter Duty Events always set by their registers, regardless of mode: Sample Trigger 1, Sample Trigger 2, Blanking A Begin, Blanking A End, Blanking B Begin, Blanking B End Adaptive Sample Trigger A UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com As in the Normal mode, the two edges in the middle of the period are dynamic, so the fixed blanking intervals are mainly useful for the edges at the beginning and end of the period. 40 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 DPWM3B (QT1) DPWM2A (QT2) DPWM2B (QB2) VTrans DPWM0B (QSYN2,4) DPWM1B (QSYN1,3) IPRI DPWM3A (QB1) UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.11 Sync FET Ramp and IDE Calculation The UCD3138 has built in logic for controlling MOSFETs for synchronous rectification (Sync FETs). This comes in two forms: • Sync FET ramp • Ideal Diode Emulation (IDE) calculation When starting up a power supply, sometimes there is already a voltage on the output – this is called prebias. It is very difficult to calculate the ideal Sync FET on-time for this case. If it is not calculated correctly, it may pull down the pre-bias voltage, causing the power supply to sink current. To avoid this, Sync FETs are not turned on until after the power supply has ramped up to the nominal voltage. The Sync FETs are turned on gradually in order to avoid an output voltage glitch. The Sync FET Ramp logic can be used to turn them on at a rate below the bandwidth of the filter. In discontinuous mode, the ideal on-time for the Sync FETs is a function of Vin, Vout, and the primary side duty cycle (D). The IDE logic in the UCD3138 takes Vin and Vout data from the firmware and combines it with D data from the filter hardware. It uses this information to calculate the ideal on-time for the Sync FETs. 4.12 Automatic Mode Switching Automatic Mode switching enables the DPWM module to switch between modes automatically, with no firmware intervention. This is useful to increase efficiency and power range. The following paragraphs describe phase-shifted full bridge and LLC examples: 4.12.1 Phase Shifted Full Bridge Example In phase shifted full bridge topologies, efficiency can be increased by using pulse width modulation, rather than phase shift, at light load. This is shown below: Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 41 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Q1B Q1T QSR1 QSR2 fs< fr fr fs= fr_max fs> fr PWM Mode LLC Mode Tr= 1/fr Tr= 1/fr ISEC(t ) SynFET Primary QT1 QB1 Lr ISOLATED GATE Transformer SYNCHRONOUS GATE DRIVE PRIM CURRENT VOUT +12V T1 T1 ORING CTL VA VBUS QT2 QB2 D1 D2 T2 L1 Q5 C1 RL C2 R2 Q6 Q7 I_SHARE Vout Iout I_pri temp Vin VA UCD 3138 ARM7 FAULT 0 AD01 AD02/CMP0 AD03/CMP1/CMP2 AD04/CMP3 AD05/CMP4 AD00 AD06/CMP5 FAULT 1 FAULT 2 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO1 AD07/CMP6 AD08 AD09 DPWM0B DPWM1B DPWM2A DPWM2B ORING_CRTL P_GOOD DPWM3A DPWM3B Vout ON/OFF FAILURE ACFAIL_OUT ACFAIL_IN I_pri Iout EADC0 EADC1 CLA0 CLA1 EADC2 DPWM0 DPWM1 DPWM2 DPWM3 Duty for mode switching Vref Load Current PCM CBC < DPWM3A DPWM3B DPWM2A DPWM2B DPWM0B DPWM1B CPCC PMBus UART1 UART0 Primary OSC WD RST Memory FAULT Current Sensing I_pri UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Figure 4-3. Secondary-Referenced Phase-Shifted Full Bridge Control With Synchronous Rectification 4.12.2 LLC Example In LLC, three modes are used. At the highest frequency, a pulse width modulated mode (Multi Mode) is used. As the frequency decreases, resonant mode is used. As the frequency gets still lower, the synchronous MOSFET drive changes so that the on-time is fixed and does not increase. In addition, the LLC control supports cycle-by-cycle current limiting. This protection function operates by a comparator monitoring the maximum current during the DPWMA conduction time. Any time this current exceeds the programmable comparator reference the pulse is immediately terminated. Due to classic instability issues associated with half-bridge topologies it is also possible to force DPWMB to match the truncated pulse width of DPWMA. Here are the waveforms for the LLC: 42 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Q1T CRES CRES LM LK Q1B VBUS VBUS Transformer COUT1 QSR1 QSR2 LRES DPWM0A DPWM0B DPWM1A DPWM1B Driver Driver Driver Driver RS RS1 RS2 CS RF2 CF RF1 RLRES ESR1 COUT2 ESR2 EAP0 EAN0 NP NS NS AD04 ADC13 EAP1 AD03 Oring Circuitry VOUT ILR(t) ILM(t) ISEC(t) VCR(t) VOUT(t) Rectifier and filter UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Figure 4-4. Secondary-Referenced Half-Bridge Resonant LLC Control With Synchronous Rectification Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 43 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Filter Duty Low – Lower Threshold High – Lower Threshold Control Register 1 Auto Config High Auto Config Mid High – Upper Threshold Low – Upper Threshold 0 Full Range Automatic Mode Switching With Hysteresis UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.12.3 Mechanism for Automatic Mode Switching The UCD3138 allows the customer to enable up to two distinct levels of automatic mode switching. These different modes are used to enhance light load operation, short circuit operation and soft start. Many of the configuration parameters for the DPWM are in DPWM Control Register 1. For automatic mode switching, some of these parameters are duplicated in the Auto Config Mid and Auto Config High registers. If automatic mode switching is enabled, the filter duty signal is used to select which of these three registers is used. There are 4 registers which are used to select the points at which the mode switching takes place. They are used as shown below. As shown, the registers are used in pairs for hysteresis. The transition from Control Register 1 to Auto Config Mid only takes place when the Filter Duty goes above the Low Upper threshold. It does not go back to Auto Config Mid until the Low Lower Threshold is passed. This prevents oscillation between modes if the filter duty is close to a mode switching point. 44 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 A ON SELECT A OFF SELECT B ON SELECT B OFF SELECT EGEN A EGEN B EDGE GEN PWM A PWM B B SELECT A SELECT INTRAMUX A/B/C (N) A/B/C (N+1) C (N+2) C (N+3) A(N) B(N) A(N+1) B(N+1) UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.13 DPWMC, Edge Generation, IntraMux The UCD3138 has hardware for generating complex waveforms beyond the simple DPWMA and DPWMB waveforms already discussed – DPWMC, the Edge Generation Module, and the IntraMux. DPWMC is a signal inside the DPWM logic. It goes high at the Blanking A begin time, and low at the Blanking A end time. The Edge Gen module takes DPWMA and DPWMB from its own DPWM module, and the next one, and uses them to generate edges for two outputs. For DPWM3, the DPWM0 is considered to be the next DPWM. Each edge (rising and falling for DPWMA and DPWMB) has 8 options which can cause it. The options are: 0 = DPWM(n) A Rising edge 1 = DPWM(n) A Falling edge 2 = DPWM(n) B Rising edge 3 = DPWM(n) B Falling edge 4 = DPWM(n+1) A Rising edge 5 = DPWM(n+1) A Falling edge 6 = DPWM(n+1) B Rising edge 7 = DPWM(n+1) B Falling edge Where “n" is the numerical index of the DPWM module of interest. For example n=1 refers to DPWM1. The Edge Gen is controlled by the DPWMEDGEGEN register. It also has an enable/disable bit. The IntraMux is controlled by the Auto Config registers. Intra Mux is short for intra multiplexer. The IntraMux takes signals from multiple DPWMs and from the Edge Gen and combines them logically to generate DPWMA and DPWMB signals This is useful for topologies like phase-shifted full bridge, especially when they are controlled with automatic mode switching. Of course, it can all be disabled, and DPWMA and DPWMB will be driven as described in the sections above. If the Intra Mux is enabled, high resolution must be disabled, and DPWM edge resolution goes down to 4 ns. Here is a drawing of the Edge Gen/Intra Mux: Here is a list of the IntraMux modes for DPWMA: 0 = DPWMA(n) pass through (default) 1 = Edge-gen output, DPWMA(n) 2 = DPWNC(n) 3 = DPWMB(n) (Crossover) 4 = DPWMA(n+1) Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 45 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 5 = DPWMB(n+1) 6 = DPWMC(n+1) 7 = DPWMC(n+2) 8 = DPWMC(n+3) and for DPWMB: 0 = DPWMB(n) pass through (default) 1 = Edge-gen output, DPWMB(n) 2 = DPWNC(n) 3 = DPWMA(n) (Crossover) 4 = DPWMA(n+1) 5 = DPWMB(n+1) 6 = DPWMC(n+1) 7 = DPWMC(n+2) 8 = DPWMC(n+3) The DPWM number wraps around just like the Edge Gen unit. For DPWM3 the following definitions apply: DPWM(n) DPWM3 DPWM(n+1) DPWM0 DPWM(n+2) DPWM1 DPWM(n+3) DPWM2 4.14 Filter The UCD3138 filter is a PID filter with many enhancements for power supply control. Some of its features include: • Traditional PID Architecture • Programmable non-linear limits for automated modification of filter coefficients based on received EADC error • Multiple coefficient sets fully configurable by firmware • Full 24-bit precision throughout filter calculations • Programmable clamps on integrator branch and filter output • Ability to load values into internal filter registers while system is running • Ability to stall calculations on any of the individual filter branches • Ability to turn off calculations on any of the individual filter branches • Duty cycle, resonant period, or phase shift generation based on filter output. • Flux balancing • Voltage feed forward 46 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 P I 26 D 24 All are S0.23 24 + 24 Saturate Yn S2.23 S0.23 24 Shifter S0.23 24 Yn Scale Clamp S0.23 24 Filter Yn Clamp High Filter Yn Clamp Low Filter Yn X 24 24 24 Ki_yn reg Kp Coef Xn-1 Reg Xn 16 24 <> 9 9 16 24 24 24 24 24 24 Clamp Kd yn_reg Kd alpha 9 16 9 24 24 24 24 P I D Limit Comparator PID Filter Branch Stages Ki High EADC_DATA 9 9 9 9 24 32 Ki Coef Kd coef Limit 5 9 9 Limit 6 ….. Limit 0 Coefficient select Ki Low Optional Selected by KI_ADDER_ MODE Clamp X X X + - + + Round X X +1 n n – UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Here is the first section of the Filter : The filter input, Xn, generally comes from a front end. Then there are three branches, P, I. and D. Note that the D branch also has a pole, Kd Alpha. Clamps are provided both on the I branch and on the D alpha pole. The filter also supports a nonlinear mode, where up to 7 different sets of coefficients can be selected depending on the magnitude of the error input Xn. This can be used to increase the filter gain for higher errors to improve transient response. Here is the output section of the filter (S0.23 means that there is 1 sign bit, 0 integer bits and 23 fractional bits).: This section combines the P, I, and D sections, and provides for saturation, scaling, and clamping. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 47 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 18 24 14 38 18 KCompx DPWMx Period Loop_VFF Filter YN (Duty %) Filter Duty S0.23 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 S14.23 Resonant Duty 14.0 Round to 18 bits, Clamp to Positive Clamp Filter Output Clamp High Filter Output Clamp Low X 14.4 14.4 OUTPUT_MULT_SEL 14 Bits [17:4] Filter Period 24 14 38 18 KCompx DPWMx Period Filter YN S0.23 14.0 14.0 14.0 S14.23 Round to 18 bits, Clamp to Positive Truncate X low 4 bits 14.0 PERIOD_MULT_SEL 14.4 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com There is a final section for the filter, which permits its output to be matched to the DPWM: This permits the filter output to be multiplied by a variety of correction factors to match the DPWM Period, to provide for Voltage Feed Forward, or for other purposes. After this, there is another clamp. For resonant mode, the filter can be used to generate both period and duty cycle. 4.14.1 Loop Multiplexer The Loop Mux controls interconnections between the filters, front ends, and DPWMs. Any filter, front end, and DPWM can be combined with each other in many configurations. It also controls the following connections: • DPWM to Front End • Front End DAC control from Filters or Constant Current/Constant Power Module • Filter Special Coefficients and Feed Forward • DPWM synchronization • Filter to DPWM The following control modules are configured in the Loop Mux: • Constant Power/Constant Current • Cycle Adjustment (Current and flux balancing) • Global Period • Light Load (Burst Mode) • Analog Peak Current Mode 48 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 FAULT - CBC FAULT - AB FAULT -A DCOMP– 4X EXT GPIO– 4X ACOMP– 7X FAULT -B FAULT MODULE FAULT MODULE FAULT MODULE CYCLE BY CYCLE AB FLAG AB FLAG A FLAG B FLAG FAULT MUX ALL_FAULT_EN DPWM_EN DPWM CBC_FAULT_EN CBC_PWM_AB_EN FAULT MODULE ANALOG PCM Bit20 in DPWMCTRL0 Bit30 in DPWMFLTCTRL Bit 31 in DPWMFLTCTRL Bit0 in DPWMCTRL0 DISABLE PWM A AND B DISABLE PWM A AND B DISABLE PWM A ONLY DISABLE PWM B ONLY UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.14.2 Fault Multiplexer In order to allow a flexible way of mapping several fault triggering sources to all the DPWMs channels, the UCD3138 provides an extensive array of multiplexers that are united under the name Fault Mux module. The Fault Mux Module supports the following types of mapping between all the sources of fault and all different fault response mechanism inside each DPWM module. • Many fault sources mapped to a single fault response mechanism. For instance an analog comparator in charge of over voltage protection, a digital comparator in charge of over current protection and an external digital fault pin can be all mapped to a fault-A signal connected to a single FAULT MODULE and shut down DPWM1-A. • A single fault source can be mapped to many fault response mechanisms inside many DPWM modules. For instance an analog comparator in charge of over current protection can be mapped to DPWM-0 through DPWM-3 by way of several fault modules. • Many fault sources can be mapped to many fault modules inside many DPWM modules. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 49 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 CYCLE BY CYCLE FAULT - CBC CLIM FAULT MODULE FAULT IN FAULT FLAG MAX COUNT FAULT EN DPWM EN UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com The Fault Mux Module provides a multitude of fault protection functions within the UCD3138 high-speed loop (Front End Control, Filter, DPWM and Loop Mux modules). The Fault Mux Module allows highly configurable fault generation based on digital comparators, high-speed analog comparators and external fault pins. Each of the fault inputs to the DPWM modules can be configured to one or any combination of the fault events provided in the Fault Mux Module. Each one of the DPWM engines has four fault modules. The modules are called CBC fault module, AB fault module, A fault module and B fault module. The internal circuitry in all the four fault modules is identical, and the difference between the modules is limited to the way the modules are attached to the DPWMs. All fault modules provide immediate fault detection but only once per DPWM switching cycle. Each one of the fault modules own a separate max_count and the fault flag will be set only if sequential cycle-by-cycle faults count exceeds max_count. Once the fault flag is set DPWMs need to be disabled by DPWM_EN going low in order to clear the fault flags. Please note, all four Fault Modules share the same DPWM_EN control, all fault flags (output of Fault Modules) will be cleared simultaneously. All four Fault Modules share the same global FAULT_EN as well. Therefore a specific Fault Module cannot be enabled/ disabled separately. Unlike Fault Modules, only one Cycle by Cycle block is available in each DPWM module. The Cycle by Cycle block works in conjunction with CBC Fault Module and enables DPWM reaction to signals arriving from Analog Peak current mode (PCM) module. The Fault Mux Module supports the following basic functions: • 4 digital comparators with programmable thresholds and fault generation • Configuration for 7 high speed analog comparators with programmable thresholds and fault generation • External GPIO detection control with programmable fault generation • Configurable DPWM fault generation for DPWM Current Limit Fault, DPWM Over-Voltage Detection Fault, DPWM A External Fault, DPWM B External Fault and DPWM IDE Flag • Clock Failure Detection for High and Low Frequency Oscillator blocks • Discontinuous Conduction Mode Detection 50 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Digital Comparator 0 Control Digital Comparator 1 Control Digital Comparator 2 Control Digital Comparator 3 Control Front End Control 0 Front End Control 1 Front End Control 2 Analog Comparator 0 Analog Comparator 0 Control Analog Comparator 1 Analog Comparator 1 Control Analog Comparator 2 Analog Comparator 2 Control Analog Comparator 3 Analog Comparator 3 Control Analog Comparator 4 Analog Comparator 4 Control Analog Comparator 5 Analog Comparator 5 Control Analog Comparator 6 Analog Comparator 6 Control External GPIO Detection fault[2:0] DPWM 0 DPWM 1 DPWM 2 DPWM 3 DPWM 0 Fault Control DPWM 1 Fault Control DPWM 2 Fault Control DPWM 3 Fault Control Analog Comparator Automated Ramp DCM Detection HFO/LFO Fail Detect UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Figure 4-5. Fault Mux Block Diagram 4.15 Communication Ports 4.15.1 SCI (UART) Serial Communication Interface A maximum of two independent Serial Communication Interface (SCI) or Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter pre-scaler (UART) interfaces are included within the device for asynchronous startstop serial data communication (see the pin out sections for details) Each interface has a 24 bit for supporting programmable baud rates and has programmable data word and stop bit options. Half or full duplex operation is configurable through register bits. A loop back feature can also be setup for firmware verification. Both SCI-TX and SCI-RX pin sets can be used as GPIO pins when the peripheral is not being used. 4.15.2 PMBUS The PMBus Interface supports independent master and slave modes controlled directly by firmware through a processor bus interface. Individual control and status registers enable firmware to send or receive I2C, SMBus or PMBus messages in any of the accepted protocols, in accordance with the I2C Specification, SMBus Specification (Version 2.0) and the PMBUS Power System Management Protocol Specification. The PMBus interface is controlled through a processor bus interface, utilizing a 32-bit data bus and 6-bit address bus. The PMBus interface is connected to the expansion bus, which features 4 byte write enables, a peripheral select dedicated for the PMBus interface, separated 32-bit data buses for reading and writing of data and active-low write and output enable control signals. In addition, the PMBus Interface connects directly to the I2C/SMBus/PMBus Clock, Data, Alert, and Control signals. Example: PMBus Address Decode via ADC12 Reading The user can allocate 2 pins of the 12-bit ADC input channels, AD_00 and AD_01, for PMBus address decoding. At power-up the device applies IBIAS to each address detect pin and the voltage on that pin is captured by the internal 12-bit ADC. Where bin(VAD0x) is the address bin for one of 12 address as shown in Figure 4-6. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 51 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Vdd IBIAS To ADC Mux On/Off Control AD00, AD01 pin Resistor to set PMBus Address UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com Figure 4-6. PMBus Address Detection Method 4.15.3 General Purpose ADC12 The ADC12 is a 12 bit, high speed analog to digital converter, equipped with the following options: • Typical conversion speed of 267 ksps • Conversions can consist from 1 to 16 ADC channel conversions in any desired sequence • Post conversion averaging capability, ranging from 4X, 8X, 16X or 32X samples • Configurable triggering for ADC conversions from the following sources: firmware, DPWM rising edge, ADC_EXT_TRIG pin or Analog Comparator results • Interrupt capability to embedded processor at completion of ADC conversion • Six digital comparators on the first 6 channels of the conversion sequence using either raw ADC data or averaged ADC data • Two 10 μA current sources for excitation of PMBus addressing resistors • Dual sample and hold for accurate power measurement • Internal temperature sensor for temperature protection and monitoring The control module ( ADC12 Contol Block Diagram) contains the control and conversion logic for autosequencing a series of conversions. The sequencing is fully configurable for any combination of 16 possible ADC channels through an analog multiplexer embedded in the ADC12 block. Once converted, the selected channel value is stored in the result register associated with the sequence number. Input channels can be sampled in any desired order or programmed to repeat conversions on the same channel multiple times during a conversion sequence. Selected channel conversions are also stored in the result registers in order of conversion, where the result 0 register is the first conversion of a 16-channel sequence and result 15 register is the last conversion of a 16-channel sequence. The number of channels converted in a sequence can vary from 1 to 16. Unlike EADC0 through EADC2, which are primarily designed for closing high speed compensation loops, the ADC12 is not usually used for loop compensation purposes. The EADC converters have a substantially faster conversion rate, thus making them more attractive for closed loop control. The ADC12 features make it best suited for monitoring and detection of currents, voltages, temperatures and faults. Please see the Typical Characteristics plots for the temperature variation associated with this function. 52 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 ADC Channels S/H 12-bit SAR ADC ADC12 Block ADC12 Control ADC Channel ADC Averaging Digital Comparators DPWM Modules ADC12 Registers Analog Comparators ADC External Trigger (from pin) UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Figure 4-7. ADC12 Control Block Diagram 4.15.4 Timers External to the Digital Power Peripherals there are 3 different types of timers in UCD3138. They are the 24-bit timer, 16-bit timer and the Watchdog timer 4.15.4.1 24-bit PWM Timer There is one 24 bit counter PWM timer which runs off the Interface Clock and can further be divided down by an 8-bit pre-scalar to generate a slower PWM time period. The timer has two compare registers (Data Registers) for generating the PWM set/unset events. Additionally, the timer has a shadow register (Data Buffer register) which can be used to store CPU updates of the compare events while still using the timer. The selected shadow register update mode happens after the compare event matches. The two capture pins TCMP0 and TCMP1 are inputs for recording a capture event. A capture event can be set either to rising, falling, or both edges of the capture pin. Upon this event, the counter value is stored in the corresponding capture data register. The counter reset can be configured to happen on a counter roll over, a compare equal event, or by software controlled register. Five Interrupts from the PWM timer can be set, which are the counter rollover event (overflow), either capture event 0 or 1, or the two comparison match events. Each interrupt can be disabled or enabled. Upon an event comparison on only the second event, the TCMP pin can be configured to set, clear, toggle or have no action at the output. The value of PWM pin output can be read for status or simply configured as general purpose I/O for reading the value of the input at the pin. The first compare event can only be used as an interrupt. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 53 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 4.15.4.2 16-Bit PWM Timers There are four 16 bit counter PWM timers which run off the Interface Clock and can further be divided down by a 8-bit pre-scaler to generate slower PWM time periods. Each timer has two compare registers (Data Registers) for generating the PWM set/unset events. Additionally, each timer has a shadow register (Data Buffer register) which can be used to store CPU updates of compare events while still using the timer. The selected shadow register update mode happens after the compare event matches. The counter reset can be configured to happen on a counter roll over, a compare equal event, or by a software controlled register. Interrupts from the PWM timer can be set due to the counter rollover event (overflow) or by the two comparison match events. Each comparison match and the overflow interrupts can be disabled or enabled. Upon an event comparison, the PWM pin can be configured to set, clear, toggle or have no action at the output. The value of PWM pin output can be read for status or simply configured as General Purpose I/O for reading the value of the input at the pin. 4.15.4.3 Watchdog Timer A watchdog timer is provided on the device for ensuring proper firmware loop execution. The timer is clocked off of a separate low speed oscillator source. If the timer is allowed to expire, a reset condition is issued to the ARM processor. The watchdog is reset by a simple CPU write bit to the watchdog key register by the firmware routine. On device power-up the watchdog is disabled. Yet after it is enabled, the watchdog cannot be disabled by firmware. Only a device reset can put this bit back to the default disabled state. A half timer flag is also provided for status monitoring of the watchdog. 4.16 Miscellaneous Analog The Miscellaneous Analog Control (MAC) Registers are a catch-all of registers that control and monitor a wide variety of functions. These functions include device supervisory features such as Brown-Out and power saving configuration, general purpose input/output configuration and interfacing, internal temperature sensor control and current sharing control. The MAC module also provides trim signals to the oscillator and AFE blocks. These controls are usually used at the time of trimming at manufacturing; therefore this document will not cover these trim controls. The MAC registers and peripherals are all available in the UCD3138 (64 pin version). Other UCD3138 devices may have reduced resources. See the device pin out description for details. 4.17 Package ID Information Package ID register includes information regarding the package type of the device and can be read by firmware for reporting through PMBus or for other package sensitive decisions. BIT NUMBER 1:0 Bit Name PKG_ID Access R/W Default 0 – UCD3138RGC, 1 – UCD3138RHA 4.18 Brownout Brownout function is used to determine if the device supply voltage is lower than a threshold voltage, a condition that may be considered unsafe for proper operation of the device. The brownout threshold is higher than the reset threshold voltage; therefore, when the supply voltage is lower than brownout threshold, it still does not necessarily trigger a device reset. The brownout interrupt flag can be polled or alternatively can trigger an interrupt to service such case by an interrupt service routine. Please see the Power On Reset (POR) / Brown Out Reset (BOR) section. 54 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.19 Global I/O Up to 30 pins in UCD3138 can be configured to serve as a general purpose input or output pin (GPIO). This includes all digital input or output pins except for the RESET pin. The pins that cannot be configured as GPIO pins are the supply pins, ground pins, ADC-12 analog input pins, EADC analog input pins and the RESET pin. There are two ways to configure and use the digital pins as GPIO pins: 1. Through the centralized Global I/O control registers. 2. Through the distributed control registers in the specific peripheral that shares it pins with the standard GPIO functionality. The Global I/O registers offer full control of: 1. Configuring each pin as a GPIO. 2. Setting each pin as input or output. 3. Reading the pin’s logic state, if it is configured as an input pin. 4. Setting the logic state of the pin, if it is configured as an output pin. 5. Connecting pin/pins to high rail through internal pull up resistors. The Global I/O registers include Global I/O EN register, Global I/O OE Register, Global I/O Open Drain Control Register, Global I/O Value Register and Global I/O Read Register. The following is showing the format of Global I/O EN Register (GLBIOEN) as an example: BIT NUMBER 29:0 Bit Name GLOBAL_IO_EN Access R/W Default 00_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000 Bits 29-0: GLOBAL_IO_EN – This register enables the global control of digital I/O pins 0 = Control of IO is done by the functional block assigned to the IO (Default) 1 = Control of IO is done by Global IO registers. PIN NUMBER BIT PIN_NAME UCD3138-64 PIN UCD3138-40 PIN 29 FAULT[3] 43 NA 28 ADC_EXT_TRIG 12, 26 8 27 TCK 37 21 26 TDO 38 20 25 TMS 40 24 24 TDI 39 23 23 SCI_TX[1] 29 NA 22 SCI_TX[0] 14 22 21 SCI_RX[1] 30 NA 20 SCI_RX[0] 13 23 19 TMR_CAP 12, 26, 41 8, 21 18 TMR_PWM[1] 32 NA 17 TMR_PWM[0] 12, 26, 31, 37 21 16 PMBUS-CLK 15 9 15 PMBUS-DATA 16 10 14 CONTROL 30 20 13 ALERT 29 19 12 EXT_INT 26, 34 NA Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 55 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 Temperature Sensor Ch14 ADC 12 Temp Cal UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com PIN NUMBER BIT PIN_NAME UCD3138-64 PIN UCD3138-40 PIN 11 FAULT[2] 42 25 10 FAULT[1] 36 23 9 FAULT[0] 35, 39 22 8 SYNC 12, 26,37 8, 21 7 DPWM3B 24 18 6 DPWM3A 23 17 5 DPWM2B 22 16 4 DPWM2A 21 15 3 DPWM1B 20 14 2 DPWM1A 19 13 1 DPWM0B 18 12 0 DPWM0A 17 11 4.20 Temperature Sensor Control Temperature sensor control register provides internal temperature sensor enabling and trimming capabilities. The internal temperature sensor is disabled as default. Figure 4-8. Internal Temp Sensor Temperature sensor is calibrated at room temperature (25 °C) via a calibration register value. The temperature sensor is measured using ADC12 (via Ch14). The temperature is then calculated using a mathematical formula involving the calibration register (this effectively adds a delta to the ADC measurement). The temperature sensor can be enabled or disabled. 4.21 I/O Mux Control In different packages of UCD3138 several I/O functions are multiplexed and routed toward a single physical pin. I/O Mux Control register may be used in order to choose a single specific functionality that is desired to be assigned to a physical device pin for your application. 56 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 EXT CAP AD02 400 Ω Digital RSHARE 250 Ω 3.3 V ISHARE ADC12 and CMP ESD ESD 3.2 kΩ 250 Ω ESD AD13 3.3V SW2 SW1 SW3 3.3 V ADC12 and CMP UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 4.21.1 JTAG Use for I/O and JTAG Security The UCD3138 provides a JTAG interface for debugging and for uploading data and programs. The pins are multiplexed with other pins, and will not be available in certain topologies. For power supplies, other debugging techniques (PMBus, UART, code instrumentation) are often superior to JTAG. Code downloading is much faster via PMBus, or with a user boot program via UART. PMBus support is available from TI. JTAG for debugging has limited support from TI’s Code Composer Studio. JTAG parameter download may be supported by third parties. 4.22 Current Sharing Control UCD3138 provides three separate modes of current sharing operation. • Analog bus current sharing • PWM bus current sharing • Master/Slave current sharing • AD02 has a special ESD protection mechanism that prevents the pin from pulling down the currentshare bus if power is missing from the UCD3138 The simplified current sharing circuitry is shown in the drawing below: Figure 4-9. Simplified Current Sharing Circuitry CURRENT SHARING MODE FOR TEST ONLY, CS_MODE EN_SW1 EN_SW2 DPWM ALWAYS KEEP 00 Off or Slave Mode (3-state) 00 00 (default) 0 0 0 PWM Bus 00 01 1 0 ACTIVE Off or Slave Mode (3-state) 00 10 0 0 0 Analog Bus or Master 00 11 0 1 0 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Functional Overview 57 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com The period and the duty of 8-bit PWM current source and the state of the SW1 and SW2 switches can be controlled through the current sharing control register (CSCTRL). 4.23 Temperature Reference The temperature reference register (TEMPREF) provides the ADC12 count when ADC12 measures the internal temperature sensor (channel 14) during the factory trim and calibration. This information can be used by different periodic temperature compensation routines implemented in the firmware. But it should not be overwritten by firmware, otherwise this factory written value will be lost. 58 Functional Overview Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 2 .2 μF 1 .0 μF BPCAP DGND V33D UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 5 IC Grounding and Layout Recommendations • Two grounds are recommended: AGND (analog) and DGND (digital). – AGND plane should be on a different layer than DGND, and right under the UCD3138 device. – UCD3138 power pad should be tied to AGND plane by at least 4 vias – AGND plane should be just large enough to connect to all required components. – Power ground (PGND) can be independent or combined with DGND – The power pad of the driver IC should be tied to DGND • Both 3.3VD and 3.3VA should have a local 4.7μF capacitor placed as close as possible to the device pins • BPCAP decoupling (2.2 μF typically) MUST be connected to DGND • All analog signal filter capacitors should be tied to AGND – If the gate driver device, such as UCD27524 or UCD27511/7 driver is used, the filter capacitor for the current sensing pin can be tied to DGND for easy layout • All digital signals, such as GPIO, PMBus and PWM are referenced to DGND. • The RESET pin capacitor (0.1μF) should be connected to either DGND or AGND locally. A 10kΩ pullup resistor to 3.3V is recommended. • All filter and decoupling capacitors should be placed close to UCD3138 as possible – Resistor placement is less critical and can be moved a little further away • The DGND and AGND net-short resistor MUST be placed right between one UCD3138’s DGND pin and one AGND pin. Ground connections to the net short element should be made by a large via (or multiple paralleled vias) for each terminal of the net-short element. • If a gate driver device such as UCC27524 or UCC27511/7 is on the control card and there is a PGND connection, a net-short resistor should be tied to the DGND plane and PGND plane by multiple vias. In addition the net-short element should be close to the driver IC. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated IC Grounding and Layout Recommendations 59 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 6 Tools and Documentation The application firmware for UCD3138 is developed on Texas Instruments Code Composer Studio (CCS) integrated development environment (v3.3 recommended). Monitoring and Configuration of key device parameters and real time debug capabilities are offered through Texas Instruments’ FUSION_DIGITAL_POWER_DESIGNER Graphical User Interface (GUI), http://www.ti.com/tool/fusion_digital_power_designer. The FUSION_DIGITAL_POWER_DESIGNER software application uses PMBus protocol to communicate with the device over serial bus by way of a interface adaptor known as USB-TO-GPIO, available as an EVM from Texas Instruments (http://www.ti.com/tool/usb-to-gpio). The software application can also be used to program the devices, with a version of the tool known as FUSION_MFR_GUI optimized for manufacturing environments (http://www.ti.com/tool/fusion_mfr_gui). The FUSION_MFR_GUI tool supports multiple devices on a board, and includes built-in logging and reporting capabilities. In terms of reference documentation, the following 3 programmer’s manuals are available offering detailed information regarding the application and usage of UCD3138 digital controller: 1. UCD3138 Digital Power Peripheral Programmer's Manual Key topics covered in this manual include: – Digital Pulse Width Modulator (DPWM) – Modes of Operation (Normal/Multi/Phase-shift/Resonant etc) – Automatic Mode Switching – DPWMC, Edge Generation & Intra-Mux – Front End – Analog Front End – Error ADC or EADC – Front End DAC – Ramp Module – Successive Approximation Register Module – Filter – Filter Math – Loop Mux – Analog Peak Current Mode – Constant Current/Constant Power (CCCP) – Automatic Cycle Adjustment – Fault Mux – Analog Comparators – Digital Comparators – Fault Pin functions – DPWM Fault Action – Ideal Diode Emulation (IDE), DCM Detection – Oscillator Failure Detection – Register Map for all of the above peripherals in UCD3138 2. UCD3138 Monitoring and Communications Programmer’s Manual Key topics covered in this manual include: – ADC12 – Control, Conversion, Sequencing & Averaging – Digital Comparators – Temperature Sensor – PMBUS Addressing – Dual Sample & Hold – Miscellaneous Analog Controls (Current Sharing, Brown-Out, Clock-Gating) – PMBUS Interface – General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) 60 Tools and Documentation Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 – Timer Modules – PMBus – Register Map for all of the above peripherals in UCD3138 3. UCD3138 ARM and Digital System Programmer’s Manual Key topics covered in this manual include: – Boot ROM & Boot Flash – BootROM Function – Memory Read/Write Functions – Checksum Functions – Flash Functions – Avoiding Program Flash Lock-Up – ARM7 Architecture – Modes of Operation – Hardware/Software Interrupts – Instruction Set – Dual State Inter-working (Thumb 16-bit Mode/ARM 32-bit Mode) – Memory & System Module – Address Decoder, DEC (Memory Mapping) – Memory Controller (MMC) – Central Interrupt Module – Register Map for all of the above peripherals in UCD3138 In addition to the tools and documentation described above, for the most up to date information regarding evaluation modules, reference application firmware and application notes/design tips, please visit http://www.ti.com/product/ucd3138. Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Tools and Documentation 61 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 www.ti.com 7 References 1. UCD3138 Digital Power Peripherals Programmer’s Manual (Literature Number:SLUU995) 2. UCD3138 Monitoring & Communications Programmer’s Manual (Literature Number:SLUU996) 3. UCD3138 ARM and Digital System Programmer’s Manual (Literature Number:SLUU994) 4. Code Composer Studio Development Tools v3.3 – Getting Started Guide, (Literature Number: SPRU509H) 5. ARM7TDMI-S Technical Reference Manual 6. System Management Bus (SMBus) Specification 7. PMBusTM Power System Management Prototcol Specification (1) (1) PMBus is a trademark of SMIF, Inc. 62 References Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 UCD3138 www.ti.com SLUSAP2B –MARCH 2012–REVISED JULY 2012 Revision History NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version. Changes from Original (March 2012) to Revision A Page • Added Production Data statement to footnote and removed "Product Preview" banner ........................... 6 Changes from Revision A (March 2012) to Revision B Page • Added Feature bullets ............................................................................................................. 6 • Changed "Dual Edge Modulation" to "Triangular Modulation" in Features section ................................. 6 • Changed "265 ksps" to "267 ksps" in Features section ................................................................... 6 • Clarified number of UARTs in Feature section ............................................................................... 6 • Changed "FDPP" to "DDP" throughout. ....................................................................................... 7 • Changed Total GPIO pin count for the UCD3138 40-pin device from "17" to "18" in the Product Selection Matrix table. .......................................................................................................................... 8 • Changed "VREG" to "BP18" in conditions statement for Electrical Characteristics table. ....................... 16 • Changed EAP – EAN Error voltage digital resolution MIN values for AFE=3, AFE=2, AFE=1, AFE=0 from 0.95, 1.90, 3.72, and 7.3 respectively; to, 0.8, 1.7, 3.55, and 6.90 respectively. ....................................... 16 • Changed "VREG" to "BP18" in conditions statement for Electrical Characteristics table. ....................... 17 • Changed conditions for VOL and VOH specs in the Electrical Characteristics table ................................. 17 • Added TWD spec to Electrical Characteristics table ...................................................................... 17 • Changed "VREG" to "BP18" in conditions statement for Electrical Characteristics table. ....................... 18 • Changed "PWM" to "DPWM" in DPWM Module. ............................................................................ 29 • Changed "PWMA" and "PWMB" to "DPWMA" and "DPWMB" in . ...................................................... 34 • Changed waveforms graphic for "Phase Shifted Full Bridge Example" for clarification .......................... 41 • Added text to section LLC Example .......................................................................................... 42 • Changed typical conversion speed from "268 ksps" to "267 ksps" in the General Purpose ADC12 section. .............................................................................................................................. 52 • Added package ID information for the UCD3138RGC and UCD3138RHA devices. ................................. 54 • Added bullet "AD02 has a special ESD protection mechanism that prevents the pin from pulling down the current-share bus if power is missing from the UCD3138" to Current Sharing Control. ..................... 57 • Added sub-bullet "The power pad of the driver IC should be tied to DGND" and changed capacitor value from "0.1 μF" to "4.7 μF" in IC Grounding and Layout Recommendations ........................................... 59 • Added "Tools and Documentation" section ................................................................................. 60 • Changed " Mechanical Data" section to "References" section ......................................................... 62 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated References 63 Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Link(s): UCD3138 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 26-Jul-2012 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/ Ball Finish MSL Peak Temp (3) Samples (Requires Login) UCD3138RGCR ACTIVE VQFN RGC 64 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168 HR UCD3138RGCT ACTIVE VQFN RGC 64 250 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168 HR UCD3138RHAR ACTIVE VQFN RHA 40 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168 HR UCD3138RHAT ACTIVE VQFN RHA 40 250 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168 HR (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant UCD3138RGCR VQFN RGC 64 2000 330.0 16.4 9.3 9.3 1.5 12.0 16.0 Q2 UCD3138RGCT VQFN RGC 64 250 180.0 16.4 9.3 9.3 1.5 12.0 16.0 Q2 UCD3138RHAR VQFN RHA 40 2500 330.0 16.4 6.3 6.3 1.5 12.0 16.0 Q2 UCD3138RHAT VQFN RHA 40 250 180.0 16.4 6.3 6.3 1.5 12.0 16.0 Q2 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 26-Jul-2012 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) UCD3138RGCR VQFN RGC 64 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 UCD3138RGCT VQFN RGC 64 250 210.0 185.0 35.0 UCD3138RHAR VQFN RHA 40 2500 367.0 367.0 38.0 UCD3138RHAT VQFN RHA 40 250 210.0 185.0 35.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 26-Jul-2012 Pack Materials-Page 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46C and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48B. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components which meet ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. Components which have not been so designated are neither designed nor intended for automotive use; and TI will not be responsible for any failure of such components to meet such requirements. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Mobile Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 1 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 Power Electronics R&D Center Wireless Connectivity Panasonic Industrial Devices Europe GmbH APPROVED CHECKED DESIGNED Specification for Production Panasonic Industrial Devices Europe GmbH Zeppelinstrasse 19 21337 Lüneburg Applicant / Manufacturer Hardware Germany Not applikable Applicant / Manufacturer Software Software Version Not applikable Contents Approval for Mass Production Customer Bluetooth QDL ID Qualified Design Listing (QDL) ID: B019784 As Controller Sub-System Listing for PAN13xx Series. By purchase of any products described in this document the customer accepts the document's validity and declares their agreement and understanding of its contents and recommendations. Panasonic reserves the right to make changes as required without notification. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 2 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Scope of this Document..................................................................................................5 1.1 New PAN1315A, PAN1325A.................................................................................5 2 Key Features...................................................................................................................6 2.1 Software Block Diagram........................................................................................6 3 Applications for the Module.............................................................................................7 4 Description for the Module..............................................................................................7 5 Detailed Description........................................................................................................8 5.1 Terminal Layout.....................................................................................................8 5.1.1 5.1.1. Terminal Layout PAN131x without antenna...................................8 5.1.2 5.1.2. Terminal Layout PAN132x with antenna........................................9 5.2 Pin Description.....................................................................................................10 5.3 Device Power Supply...........................................................................................11 5.4 Clock Inputs.........................................................................................................12 6 Bluetooth Features........................................................................................................12 7 Block Diagram...............................................................................................................13 8 Test Conditions.............................................................................................................14 9 General Device Requirements and Operation..............................................................14 9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings.................................................................................14 9.2 Recommended Operating Conditions..................................................................15 9.3 Current Consumption...........................................................................................15 9.4 General Electrical Characteristics........................................................................16 9.5 nSHUTD Requirements.......................................................................................16 9.6 External Digital Slow Clock Requirements (–20°C to +70°C)..............................16 10 Host Controller Interface...............................................................................................17 11 Audio/Voice Codec Interface.........................................................................................18 11.1 PCM Hardware Interface.....................................................................................18 11.2 Data Format.........................................................................................................18 11.3 Frame Idle Period................................................................................................19 11.4 Clock-Edge Operation.........................................................................................20 11.5 Two-Channel PCM Bus Example........................................................................20 11.6 Audio Encoding....................................................................................................20 11.7 Improved Algorithm For Lost Packets..................................................................21 11.8 Bluetooth/PCM Clock Mismatch Handling...........................................................21 11.9 Bluetooth Inter-IC Sound (I2S)............................................................................21 11.10Current Consumption for Different Bluetooth Scenarios......................................22 12 Bluetooth RF Performance............................................................................................22 13 Soldering Temperature-Time Profile (for reflow soldering)...........................................25 13.1 For lead solder.....................................................................................................25 13.2 For leadfree solder...............................................................................................26 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 3 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 14 Module Dimension........................................................................................................27 14.1 Module Dimensions PAN131X without Antenna..................................................27 14.2 Module Dimensions PAN132X with Antenna.......................................................28 15 Footprint of the Module.................................................................................................29 15.1 Footprint PAN131x without antenna....................................................................29 15.2 Footprint PAN132x with antenna.........................................................................30 16 Labeling Drawing..........................................................................................................31 17 Mechanical Requirements.............................................................................................31 18 Recommended Foot Pattern.........................................................................................32 18.1 recommended foot pattern PAN131x without antenna........................................32 18.2 recommended foot pattern PAN132x with antenna.............................................33 19 Layout Recommendations with Antenna (PAN132x)....................................................34 20 Bluetooth LE (LOW ENERGY) PAN1316/26................................................................34 20.1 Network Topology................................................................................................34 20.2 module features...................................................................................................35 20.3 Current consumption for different LE scenarios..................................................36 21 ANT PAN1317/27..........................................................................................................36 21.1 Network topology.................................................................................................36 21.2 module features..................................................................................................37 21.3 ANT Current consumption...................................................................................37 22 Triple mode (BR/EDR + Bluetooth low energy + ANT) PAN1323................................38 22.1 Triple Mode Current consumption.......................................................................38 23 Development of Applications.........................................................................................39 23.1 Tools to be needed..............................................................................................39 24 List of Profiles...............................................................................................................40 25 Reliability Tests.............................................................................................................40 26 Cautions........................................................................................................................41 26.1 Design Notes.......................................................................................................41 26.2 Installation Notes.................................................................................................41 26.3 Usage Conditions Notes......................................................................................42 26.4 Storage Notes......................................................................................................42 26.5 Safety Cautions...................................................................................................43 26.6 Other cautions.....................................................................................................43 27 Packaging.....................................................................................................................44 27.1 Packaging of PAN131x without antenna.............................................................44 27.2 Packaging for PAN132x with antenna.................................................................47 28 Ordering Information.....................................................................................................48 29 RoHS Declaration.........................................................................................................49 30 Data Sheet Status.........................................................................................................49 31 History for this Document..............................................................................................50 32 Related Documents.......................................................................................................50 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 4 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 33 General Information......................................................................................................52 34 Regulatory Information..................................................................................................52 34.1 FCC for US..........................................................................................................52 34.1.1 FCC Notice.............................................................................................52 34.1.2 Caution...................................................................................................53 34.1.3 Labeling Requirements..........................................................................53 34.1.4 Antenna Warning....................................................................................53 34.1.5 Approved Antenna List...........................................................................53 34.1.6 RF Exposure PAN13xx..........................................................................54 34.2 Industry Canada Certification..............................................................................54 34.3 European R&TTE Declaration of Conformity.......................................................54 34.4 NCC for Taiwan...................................................................................................56 34.4.1 Labeling Requirements..........................................................................56 34.4.2 NCC Statement......................................................................................56 34.5 Bluetooth SIG Statement.....................................................................................56 35 Life Support Policy........................................................................................................56 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 5 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 1 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This product specification describes Panasonic’s HCI, Class 1.5 , TI based, Bluetooth®1 modules, series number 13xx. For detailed family overview that includes part numbers see Chapter 28, Ordering Information. Non-antenna versions will be refered to as PAN131x, versions with antenna will be refered to as PAN132x in this document. Fore information and features on Bluetooth Low Energy 4.0 refer to Chapter 19, for information on ANT refer to Chapter 21. 1.1 NEW PAN1315A, PAN1325A The PAN1315A/1325A Series is based on Texas Instruments’ NEW CC2560A controller. A ROM update from Texas Instruments to the CC2560 IC has allowed Panasonic to improve PAN1315/1325 Series. The NEW PAN1315A/1325A Series Modules has increased power and system efficiency resulting from reduced initialization script size, start-up time and decreased system memory requirements. Compatibility: PAN1315, PAN1315A, PAN1316 and PAN1317 are 100% footprint compatible PAN1325, PAN1325A, PAN1326 and PAN1327 are 100% footprint compatible As an updated initialization script resident on the application microcontroller is required for modules based on the CC2560A, compatibility between the PAN1315/PAN1325 and PAN1315A/PAN1325A is dependant on the Bluetooth stack. Stacks are available that will operate with all PAN1315/1325 variations. BT-Stack solutions provided by software development partners are available for most processors, including linux based host systems.. For detailed family overview that includes part numbers see Chapter 28 Ordering Information. Contact your stack provider or local Panasonic sales company for currently available Bluetooth Profiles. 1 Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth Special Interest Group. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 6 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 2 KEY FEATURES • Bluetooth specification v2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate) • Surface mount type 6.5(9.5 w. Ant.) x 9.0 x 1.8 mm³ • Up to 10.5dBm Tx power (typical) with transmit power control • High sensitivity (-93 dBm typ.) • Texas Instrument’s CC256X BlueLink 7.0 inside • Fast Connection Setup • Extended SCO Link • Supports convenient direct connection to battery (2.2-4.8 V), or connect to DC/DC (1.7-1.98 V) for improved power efficiency • Internal crystal oscillator (26MHz) • Fully shielded for immunity • Full Bluetooth data rate up to 2,178kbps asymmetric • Support for Bluetooth power saving modes (Sniff, Hold) • Support for very low-power modes (deep sleep and power down) • Optional support for ultra-low-power mode. Standby with Battery-Backup • PCM Interface Master / Slave supporting 13 or 16 bit linear, 8 bit μ-law or A-law Codecs and CVSD transcoders on up to 3 SCO channels • Full 8- to 128-bit encryption • UART, I²C and PCM Interface • IO operating voltage = 1.8 V nominal • 3 Channel ADC and 1 Channel DAC • Bluetooth profiles such as SPP, A2DP and others are available. Refer to Panasonic’s RF module website for a listing of the most current releases. • Manufactured in conformance with RoHS 2.1 SOFTWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM PAN13xxHost ProcessorApplicationBD/EDRBLEANTHCIL2CAPHCIRF BlockPAN13xxHost Block CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 7 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 3 APPLICATIONS FOR THE MODULE All Embedded Wireless Applications • Smart Phones • Cable Replacement • Industrial Control • Automotive • Medical • Access Points • Scanners • Consumer Electronics • Wireless Sensors • Monitoring and Control • Low Power • Access Points 4 DESCRIPTION FOR THE MODULE The PAN1315 and PAN1315A are short-range, Class 1 or 2, HCI modules for implementing Bluetooth functionality into various electronic devices. A block diagram can be found in Chapter 7. Communication between the module and the host controller is carried out via UART. New designs can be completed quickly by mating the PAN13xx series modules with Texas Instruments’ MSP430BT5190 that contains Mindtree’s EtherMind Bluetooth Protocol Stack and serial port profile, additional computing power can be achieved by choosing TI’s Stellaris ARM7 controller that includes StoneStreet One's A2DP profile. Other BT profiles are available on custom development basis. Additional controllers are also supported by the PAN13xx series by using a TI/Panasonic software development partner to port the Bluetooth stack and profiles. Mindtree's Software Development Kit (SDK) is available on TI's website -- www.ti.com/connectivity.com Contact your local sales office for further details on additional options and services, by visiting www.panasonic.com/rfmodules or write an e-mail to wireless@eu.panasonic.com. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 8 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 5.1 TERMINAL LAYOUT 5.1.1 5.1.1. Terminal Layout PAN131x without antenna No Pin Name Pull at Reset Def. Dir. 2 I/O Type 3 Description of Options (Common) 1 GND Connect to Ground 2 TX_DBG PU O 2 mA Logger output 3 HCI_CTS PU I 8 mA HCI UART clear-to-send. 4 HCI_RTS PU O 8 mA HCI UART request-to-send. 5 HCI_RX PU I 8 mA HCI UART data receive 6 HCI_TX PU O 8 mA HCI UART data transmit 7 AUD_FSYNC PD IO 4 mA PCM frame synch. (NC if not used) Fail safe4 8 SLOW_CLK_IN I 32.768-kHz clock in Fail safe 9 NC IO Not connected 10 MLDO_OUT O Main LDO output (1.8 V nom.) 11 CL1.5_LDO_IN I PA LDO input 12 GND Connect to Ground 13 RF IO Bluetooth RF IO 14 GND Connect to Ground 15 MLDO_IN I Main LDO input 16 nSHUTD PD I Shutdown input (active low). 17 AUD_OUT PD O 4 mA PCM data output. (NC if not used) Fail safe 18 AUD_IN PD I 4 mA PCM data input. (NC if not used) Fail safe 19 AUD_CLK PD IO HY, 4 mA PCM clock. (NC if not used) Fail safe 20 GND Connect to Ground 21 NC EEPROM I²C SDA (Internal) 22 VDD_IO PI I/O power supply 1.8 V Nom 23 NC EEPROM I²C SCL (Internal) 24 NC IO Not connected 2 I = input; O = output; IO = bidirectional; P = power; PU = pulled up; PD = pulled down 3 I/O Type: Digital I/O cells. HY = input hysteresis, current = typ. output current 4 No signals are allowed on the IO pins if no VDD_IO (Pin 22) power supplied, except pin 7, 8, 17-19. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 9 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 5.1.2 5.1.2. Terminal Layout PAN132x with antenna No Pin Name Pull at Reset Def. Dir. 5 I/O Type 6 Description of Options (Common) A GND Connect to Ground B GND Connect to Ground C GND Connect to Ground D GND Connect to Ground No 1-24 see above in Chapter 5.1.1. Except PIN 13 is not connected. For RF conducted measurements, either use the PAN1323ETU or de-solder the antenna and solder an antenna connector to the hot pin. 5 I = input; O = output; IO = bidirectional; P = power; PU = pulled up; PD = pulled down 6 I/O Type: Digital I/O cells. HY = input hysteresis, current = typ. output current CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 10 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 5.2 PIN DESCRIPTION Pin Name No ESD 7 (V) Pull at Reset Def. Dir. 8 I/O Type 9 Description of Options Bluetooth IO SIGNALS HCI_RX 5 750 PU I 8 mA HCI UART data receive HCI_TX 6 750 PU O 8 mA HCI UART data transmit HCI_RTS 4 750 PU O 8 mA HCI UART request-to-send. HCI_CTS 3 750 PU I 8 mA HCI UART clear-to-send. AUD_FYSNC 7 500 PD IO 4 mA PCM frame synch (NC if not used) Fail safe AUD_CLK 19 500 PD IO HY, 4 mS PCM clock (NC if not used) Fail safe AUD_IN 18 500 PD I 4 mA PCM data input (NC if not used) Fail safe AUD_OUT 17 500 PD O 4 mA PCM data output (NC if not used) Fail safe Logger output TX_DBG 2 1000 PU O 2 mA OPTION: nTX_DBG – logger out (low = 1) CLOCK SIGNALS SLOW_CLK_IN 8 1000 I 32.768-kHz clock in Fail safe Bluetooth ANALOG SIGNALS RF 13 1000 IO Bluetooth RF IO (not connected with antenna) nSHUTD 16 1000 PD I Shutdown input (active low). Bluetooth POWER AND GND SIGNALS VDD_IO 22 1000 PI I/O power supply 1.8 V Nom MLDO_IN 15 1000 I Main LDO inputConnect directly to battery or to a pre-regulated 1.8-V supply MLDO_OUT 10 1000 O Main LDO output (1.8 V nom.) Can not be used as 1.8V supply due to internal connection to the RF part. CL1.5_LDO_IN 11 1000 I PA LDO input Connect directly to battery or to a pre-regulated 1.8-V supply GND 1 P Connect to Ground GND 12 P Connect to Ground GND 14 P Connect to Ground GND 20 P Connect to Ground EEPROM IO SIGNALS (EEPROM is optional in PAN13x product line) NC 23 1000 PU/PD I HY, 4mA EEPROM I²C SCL (Internal) NC 21 1000 PU/PD IO HY, 4mA EEPROM I²C IRQ (Internal) Remark: HCI_CTS is an input signal to the CC256X device: - When HCI_CTS is low, then CC256X is allowed to send data to Host device. - When HCI_CTS is high, then CC256X is not allowed to send data to Host device. 7 ESD: Human Body Model (HBM). JEDEC 22-A114 8 I = input; O = output; IO = bidirectional; P = power; PU = pulled up; PD = pulled down 9 I/O Type: Digital I/O cells. HY = input hysteresis, current = typ output current CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 11 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 5.3 DEVICE POWER SUPPLY The PAN13XX Bluetooth radio solution is intended to work in devices with a limited power budget such as cellular phones, headsets, hand-held PC’s and other battery-operated devices. One of the main differentiators of the PAN13XX is its power management – its ability to draw as little current as possible. The PAN13XX device requires two kinds of power sources: • Main power supply for the Bluetooth - VDD_IN = VBAT • Power source for the 1.8 V I/O ring - VDD_IO The PAN13XX includes several on-chip voltage regulators for increased noise immunity. The PAN13XX can be connected either directly to the battery or to an external 1.8-V DC to DC converter. There are three ways to supply power: • Full-VBAT system: Maximum RF output power, but not optimum system power: • Full-DC2DC system: Lower RF output power, but optimum system power: CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 12 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de • Mixed DC2DC-VBAT system: Maximum RF output power and optimum system power, but requires routing of VBAT: 5.4 CLOCK INPUTS The slow clock is always supplied from an external source. It is connected to the SLOW_CLK_IN pin number 8 and can be a digital signal with peak to peak of 0-1.8 V. The slow clock's frequency accuracy must be 32.768 kHz ±250 ppm for Bluetooth usage (according to the Bluetooth specification). The Slow Clock 32.768 kHz is mandatory to start the internal controller, otherwise the module does not start up. 6 BLUETOOTH FEATURES • Support of Bluetooth2.1+EDR (Lisbon Release) up to HCI level. • Very fast AFH algorithm for both ACL and eSCO. • Supports typically 4 dBm Class 2 TX power w/o external PA, improving Bluetooth link robustness. Adjusting the host settings, the TX power can be increased to 10 dBm. However it is important, that the national regulations and Bluetooth specification are met. • Digital Radio Processor (DRP) single-ended 50 ohm. • Internal temperature detection and compensation ensures minimal variation in the RF performance over temperature. • Flexible PCM and I2S digital audio/voice interfaces: Full flexibility of data-format (Linear, a-Law, μ-Law), data-width, data order, sampling and slot positioning, master/slave modes, high clock rates up to 15 MHz for slave mode (or 4.096 MHz for Master Mode). Lost packet concealment for improved audio. • Proprietary low-power scan method for page and inquiry scans, achieves page and inquiry scans at 1/3rd normal power. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 13 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 7 BLOCK DIAGRAM Note: The Slow Clock 32.768 kHz is mandatory, otherwise the module does not start up, refer to Chapter 5.4 for additional information. Note: The IO are 1.8V driven and might need external level shifter and LDO. The MLDO_OUT PIN can not be used as reference due to RF internal connection. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 14 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 8 TEST CONDITIONS Measurements shall be made under room temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. 9 GENERAL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATION Temperature 25 ± 10°C Humidity 40 to 85%RH SW-Patch V2.30 Supply Voltage 3.3V All specifications are over temperature and process, unless indicated otherwise. 9.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted). Note All parameters are measured as follows unless stated otherwise: VDD_IN 10 = 3.3 V, VDD_IO = 1.8 V. No See 11 Value Unit Ratings Over Operating Free-Air Temperature Range 1 VDD_IN Supply voltage range –0.5 to 5.5 V 12 2 VDDIO_1.8V –0.5 to 2.145 V 3 Input voltage to RF (Pin 13) –0.5 to 2.1 V 4 Operating ambient temperature range –20 to 70 °C 5 Storage temperature range –40 to 125 °C 6 Bluetooth RF inputs (Pin 13) 10 dBm 7 ESD: Human Body Model (HBM). JEDEC 22-A114 500 V 10 VDD_IN is supplied to MLDO_IN (Pin 15) and CL1.5_LDO_IN (Pin 11), other options are described in Chapter 5.3. 11 Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 12 Maximum allowed depends on accumulated time at that voltage: VDD_IN is defined in Reference schematics. When DC2DC supply is used, maximum voltage into MLDO_OUT and LDO_IN = 2.145 V. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 15 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 9.2 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS No Rating Condition Symbol Min Max Unit 1 Power supply voltage 13 VDD_IN 1.7 4.8 V 2 IO power supply voltage VDD_IO 1.62 1.92 V 3 High-level input voltage Default VIH 0.65 x VDD_IO VDD_IO V 4 Low-level input voltage Default VIL 0 0.35 x VDD_IO V 5 IO Input rise/fall times, 10% to 90% 14 Tr/Tf 1 10 ns 0 to 0.1 MHz 60 0.1 to 0.5 MHz 50 0.5 to 2.5 MHz 30 2.5 to 3.0 MHz 15 6 Maximum ripple on VDD_IN (Sine wave) for 1.8 V (DC2DC) mode > 3.0 MHz 5 mVp-p 7 Voltage dips on VDD_IN (VBAT) (duration = 577 μs to2.31 ms, period = 4.6 ms) 400 mV 8 Maximum ambient operating temperature 15 70 °C 9 Minimum ambient operating temperature 16 -20 C 9.3 CURRENT CONSUMPTION No Characteristics Min 25°C Typ 25°C Max 25°C Min -20°C Typ -20°C Max -20°C Min +70°C Typ +70°C Max +70°C Unit 1 Current consumption in shutdown mode 17 1 3 7 μA 2 Current consumption in deep sleep mode 18 40 105 700 μA 3 Total IO current consumption for active mode 1 1 1 mA 4 Current consumption during transmit DH5 full throughput 40 mA 13 Excluding 1.98 < VDD_IN < 2.2 V range – not allowed. 14 Asynchronous mode. 15 The device can be reliably operated for 7 years at Tambient of 70°C, assuming 25% active mode and 75% sleep mode (15,400 cumulative active power-on hours). 16 The device can be reliably operated for 7 years at Tambient of 70°C, assuming 25% active mode and 75% sleep mode (15,400 cumulative active power-on hours). 17 Vbat + Vio 18 Vbat + Vio + Vsd (shutdown) CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 16 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 9.4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS No Rating Condition Min Max Value at 2/4/8 mA 0.8 x VDD_IO VDD_IO V 1 High-level output voltage, VOH at 0.1 mA VDD_IO – 0.2 VDD_IO V at 2/4/8 mA 0 0.2 x VDD_IO V 2 Low-level output voltage, VOL at 0.1 mA 0 0.2 V Resistance 1 MΩ 3 IO input impedance Capacitance 5 pF 4 Output rise/fall times,10% to 90% (Digital pins) CL = 20 pF 10 Ns PU typ = 6.5 3.5 9.7 TX_DBG, us PCM b PD typ = 27 9.5 55 μA PU typ = 100 100 300 5 IO pull currents All others PD typ = 100 100 360 μA 9.5 NSHUTD REQUIREMENTS No Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit 1 Operation mode level 19 V IH 1.42 1.98 V 2 Shutdown mode level VIL 0 0.4 V 3 Minimum time for nSHUT_DOWN low to reset the device 5 ms 4 Rise/fall times Tr/Tf 20 μs 9.6 EXTERNAL DIGITAL SLOW CLOCK REQUIREMENTS (–20°C TO +70°C) No Characteristics Condition Symbol Min Typ Max Unit 1 Input slow clock frequency 32768 Hz 2 Input slow clock accuracy (Initial + temp + aging) Bluetooth ±250 Ppm 3 Input transition time Tr/Tf – 10% to 90% Tr/Tf 100 Ns 4 Frequency input duty cycle 15% 50% 85% 5 Phase noise at 1 kHz -125 dBc/Hz 6 Jitter Integrated over 300 to 15000 Hz 1 Hz VIH 0.65 x VDD_IO VDD_IO 7 Slow clock input voltage limits Square wave, DC coupled VIL 0 0.35 x VDD_IO V peak 8 Input impedance 1 MΩ 9 Input capacitance 5 pF 19 Internal pull down retains shut down mode when no external signal is applied to this pin. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 17 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 10 HOST CONTROLLER INTERFACE The CC256X incorporates one UART module dedicated to the host controller interface (HCI) transport layer. The HCI interface transports commands, events, ACL, and synchronous data between the Bluetooth device and its host using HCI data packets. The UART module supports H4 (4-wires) protocol with maximum baud rate of 4 Mbps for all fast clock frequencies. After power up the baud rate is set for 115.2 kbps, irrespective of fast clock frequency. The baud rate can thereafter be changed with a vendor specific command. The CC256X responds with a Command Complete Event (still at 115.2 kbps), after which the baud rate change takes place. HCI hardware includes the following features: • Receiver detection of break, idle, framing, FIFO overflow, and parity error conditions • Transmitter underflow detection • CTS/RTS hardware flow control The interface includes four signals: TXD, RXD, CTS, and RTS. Flow control between the host and the CC256X is byte-wise by hardware. Flow control is obtained by the following: When the UART RX buffer of the CC256X passes the “flow control” threshold, it will set the UART_RTS signal high to stop transmission from the host. When the UART_CTS signal is set high, the CC256X will stop its transmission on the interface. In case HCI_CTS is set high in the middle of transmitting a byte, the CC256X will finish transmitting the byte and stop the transmission. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 18 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 11 AUDIO/VOICE CODEC INTERFACE The codec interface is a fully-dedicated programmable serial port that provides the logic to interface to several kinds of PCM or I2S codec’s. PAN13XX supports all voice coding schemes required by Bluetooth specification – Log PCM (A-Law or μ-Law) and Linear (CVSD). In addition, module also supports transparent scheme: • Two voice channels • Master / slave modes • μ-Law, A-Law, Linear, Transparent coding schemes • Long and short frames • Different data sizes, order, and positions. • High rate PCM interface for EDR • Enlarged interface options to support a wider variety of codecs • PCM bus sharing 11.1 PCM HARDWARE INTERFACE The PCM interface is one implementation of the codec interface. It contains the following four lines: • Clock—configurable direction (input or output) • Frame Sync—configurable direction (input or output) • Data In—Input • Data Out—Output/3-state The Bluetooth device can be either the master of the interface where it generates the clock and the frame-sync signals, or slave where it receives these two signals. The PCM interface is fully configured by a vendor specific command. For slave mode, clock input frequencies of up to 16 MHz are supported. At clock rates above 12 MHz, the maximum data burst size is 32 bits. For master mode, the CC256X can generate any clock frequency between 64 kHz and 6 MHz. Please contact your sales representative if using the I2S bus over PCM. We strongly recommend adding a low pass filter (series resistor and capacitor to GND) to the bus for better noise suppression. It is not recommended to directly contact the host μController/DSP with the PCM interface. 11.2 DATA FORMAT The data format is fully configurable: • The data length can be from 8 to 320 bits, in 1-bit increments, when working with two channels, or up to 640 bits when using 1 channel. The Data length can be set independently for each channel. • The data position within a frame is also configurable in with 1 clock (bit) resolution and can be set independently (relative to the edge of the Frame Sync signal) for each channel. • The Data_In and Data_Out bit order can be configured independently. For example; Data_In can start with the MSB while Data_Out starts with LSB. Each channel is separately configurable. The inverse bit order (that is, LSB first) is supported only for sample sizes up to 24 bits. • It is not necessary for the data in and data out size to be the same length. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 19 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de • The Data_Out line is configured to ‘high-Z’ output between data words. Data_Out can also be set for permanent high-Z, irrespective of data out. This allows the CC256X to be a bus slave in a multi-slave PCM environment. At powerup, Data Out is configured as high-Z. 11.3 FRAME IDLE PERIOD The codec interface has the capability for frame idle periods, where the PCM clock can “take a break” and become ‘0’ at the end of the PCM frame, after all data has been transferred. The CC256X supports frame idle periods both as master and slave of the PCM bus. When CC256X is the master of the interface, the frame idle period is configurable. There are two configurable parameters: • Clk_Idle_Start – Indicates the number of PCM clock cycles from the beginning of the frame until the beginning of the idle period. After Clk_Idle_Start clock cycles, the clock will become ‘0’. • Clk_Idle_End – Indicates the time from the beginning of the frame till the end of the idle period. This time is given in multiples of PCM clock periods. The delta between Clk_Idle_Start and Clk_Idle_End is the clock idle period. For example, for PCM clock rate = 1 MHz, frame sync period = 10 kHz, Clk_Idle_Start = 60, Clk_Idle_End = 90. Between each two frame syncs there are 70 clock cycles (instead of 100). The clock idle period starts 60 clock cycles after the beginning of the frame, and lasts 90 – 60 = 30 clock cycles. This means that the idle period ends 100 – 90 = 10 clock cycles before the end of the frame. The data transmission must end prior to the beginning of the idle period. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 20 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 11.4 CLOCK-EDGE OPERATION The codec interface of the CC256X can work on the rising or the falling edge of the clock. It also has the ability to sample the frame sync and the data at inversed polarity. This is the operation of a falling-edge-clock type of codec. The codec is the master of the PCM bus. The frame sync signal is updated (by the codec) on the falling clock edge and therefore shall be sampled (by the CC256X) on the next rising clock. The data from the codec is sampled (by the CC256X) on the clock falling edge. 11.5 TWO-CHANNEL PCM BUS EXAMPLE In below figure, a 2-channel PCM bus is shown where the two channels have different word sizes and arbitrary positions in the bus frame. (FT stands for Frame Timer) 11.6 AUDIO ENCODING The CC256X codec interface can use one of four audio-coding patterns: • A-Law (8-bit) • μ-Law (8-bit) • Linear (8- or 16-bit) CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 21 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 11.7 IMPROVED ALGORITHM FOR LOST PACKETS The CC256X features an improved algorithm for improving voice quality when received voice data packets are lost. There are two options: • Repeat the last sample – possible only for sample sizes up to 24 bits. For sample sizes >24 bits, the last byte is repeated. • Repeat a configurable sample of 8 to 24 bits (depends on the real sample size), in order to simulate silence (or anything else) in the PCM bus. The configured sample will be written in a specific register for each channel. The choice between those two options is configurable separately for each channel. 11.8 BLUETOOTH/PCM CLOCK MISMATCH HANDLING In Bluetooth RX, the CC256X receives RF voice packets and writes these to the codec I/F. If the CC256X receives data faster than the codec I/F output allows, an overflow will occur. In this case, the Bluetooth has two possible behaviour modes: ‘allow overflow’ and ‘don’t allow overflow’. • If overflow is allowed, the Bluetooth will continue receiving data and will overwrite any data not yet sent to the codec. • If overflow is not allowed, RF voice packets received when buffer is full will be discarded. 11.9 BLUETOOTH INTER-IC SOUND (I2S) The CC256X can be configured as an Inter-IC Sound (I2S) serial interface to an I2S codec device. In this mode, the CC256X audio codec interface is configured as a bi-directional, full-duplex interface, with two time slots per frame: Time slot 0 is used for the left channel audio data and time slot 1 for the right channel audio data. Each time slot is configurable up to 40 serial clock cycles in length and the frame is configurable up to 80 serial clock cycles in length. Do not connect the the microcontroller/DSP directly to the module's PCM interface, a simple RC low pass filter is recommended to improve noise suppression. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 22 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 11.10 CURRENT CONSUMPTION FOR DIFFERENT BLUETOOTH SCENARIOS The following table gives average current consumption for different Bluetooth scenarios. Conditions: VDD_IN = 3.6 V, 25°C, 26-MHz fast clock, nominal unit, 4 dBm output power. 12 BLUETOOTH RF PERFORMANCE No Characteristics Typ BT Spec Max BT Spec Min Class1 Class1 1 Average Power Hopping DH5 [dBm] 21, 22 7.2 20 4 2 Average Power: Ch0 [dBm] 21, 22 7.5 20 4 3 Peak Power: Ch0 [dBm] 21, 22 7.7 23 4 Average Power: Ch39 [dBm] 21, 22 7.0 20 4 5 Peak Power: Ch39 [dBm] 21, 22 7.2 23 6 Average Power: Ch78 [dBm] 21, 22 6.7 20 4 7 Peak Power: Ch78 [dBm] 21, 22 7.0 23 8 Max. Frequency Tolerance: Ch0 [kHz] -2.6 75 -75 9 Max. Frequency Tolerance: Ch39 [kHz] -2.2 75 -75 10 Max. Frequency Tolerance: Ch78 [kHz] -2.1 75 -75 11 Max. Drift: Ch0_DH1 [kHz] 3.6 25 -25 12 Max. Drift: Ch0_DH3 [kHz] 3.7 40 -40 13 Max. Drift: Ch0_DH5 [kHz] 4.0 40 -40 14 Max. Drift Rate: Ch0_DH1 [kHz] -2.6 20 -20 15 Max. Drift Rate: Ch0_DH3 [kHz] -3.2 20 -20 16 Max. Drift Rate: Ch0_DH5 [kHz] -3.3 20 -20 17 Max. Drift: Ch39_DH1 [kHz] 4.0 25 -25 18 Max. Drift: Ch39_DH3 [kHz] 4.3 40 -40 19 Max. Drift: Ch39_DH5 [kHz] 4.3 40 -40 20 Max. Drift Rate: Ch39_DH1 [kHz] -3.1 20 -20 21 Max. Drift Rate: Ch39_DH3 [kHz] -3.6 20 -20 22 Max. Drift Rate: Ch39_DH5 [kHz] -3.7 20 -20 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 23 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de No Characteristics Typ BT Spec Max BT Spec Min Class1 Class1 23 Max. Drift: Ch78_DH1 [kHz] 4.1 25 -25 24 Max. Drift: Ch78_DH3 [kHz] 4.5 40 -40 25 Max. Drift: Ch78_DH5 [kHz] 4.4 40 -40 26 Max. Drift Rate: Ch78_DH1 [kHz] -3.4 20 -20 27 Max. Drift Rate: Ch78_DH3 [kHz] -3.9 20 -20 28 Max. Drift Rate: Ch78_DH5 [kHz] -4.1 20 -20 29 Delta F1 Avg: Ch0 [kHz] 159.5 175 140 30 Delta F2 Max.: Ch0 [%] 100.0 99.9 31 Delta F2 Avg/Delta F1 Avg: Ch0 0.9 0.8 32 Delta F1 Avg: Ch39 [kHz] 159.8 175 140 33 Delta F2 Max.: Ch39 [%] 100.0 99.9 34 Delta F2 Avg/Delta F1 Avg: Ch39 0.9 0.8 35 Delta F1 Avg: Ch78 [kHz] 159.1 175 140 36 Delta F2 Max.: Ch78 [%] 100.0 99.9 37 Delta F2 Avg/Delta F1 Avg: Ch78 0.9 0.8 45 Sensitivity -93.0 -81 46 f(H)-f(L): Ch0 [kHz] 918.4 1000 47 f(H)-f(L): Ch39 [kHz] 918.3 1000 48 f(H)-f(L): Ch78 [kHz] 918.2 1000 49 ACPower -3: Ch3 [dBm] -51.5 -40 50 ACPower -2: Ch3 [dBm] -50.4 -40 51 ACPower -1: Ch3 [dBm] -18.5 52 ACPower Center: Ch3 [dBm] 8.1 20 4 53 ACPower +1: Ch3 [dBm] -19.2 54 ACPower +2: Ch3 [dBm] -50.7 -40 55 ACPower +3: Ch3 [dBm] -53.3 -40 56 ACPower -3: Ch39 [dBm] -51.6 -40 57 ACPower -2: Ch39 [dBm] -50.7 -40 58 ACPower -1: Ch39 [dBm] -19.0 59 ACPower Center: Ch39 [dBm] 7.7 20 4 60 ACPower +1: Ch39 [dBm] -19.7 61 ACPower +2: Ch39 [dBm] -50.9 -40 62 ACPower +3: Ch39 [dBm] -53.2 -40 63 ACPower -3: Ch75 [dBm] -51.7 -40 64 ACPower -2: Ch75 [dBm] -50.7 -40 65 ACPower -1: Ch75 [dBm] -19.2 66 ACPower Center: Ch75 [dBm] 7.5 20 4 67 ACPower +1: Ch75 [dBm] -20.0 68 ACPower +2: Ch75 [dBm] -51.0 -40 69 ACPower +3: Ch75 [dBm] -53.4 -40 70 omega i 2-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -4.7 75 -75 71 omega o + omega i 2-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -6.0 75 -75 72 omega o 2-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -1.5 10 -10 73 DEVM RMS 2-DH5: Ch0 [%] 0.0 0.2 74 DEVM Peak 2-DH5: Ch0 [%] 0.1 0.35 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 24 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de No Characteristics Typ BT Spec Max BT Spec Min Class1 Class1 75 DEVM 99% 2-DH5: Ch0 [%] 100.0 99 76 omega i 3-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -3.7 75 -75 77 omega o + omega i 3-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -5.8 75 -75 78 omega o 3-DH5: Ch0 [kHz] -2.6 10 -10 79 DEVM RMS 3-DH5: Ch0 [%] 0.0 0.13 80 DEVM Peak 3-DH5: Ch0 [%] 0.1 0.25 81 DEVM 99% 3-DH5: Ch0 [%] 100.0 99 82 omega i 2-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -4.8 75 -75 83 omega o + omega i 2-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -6.1 75 -75 84 omega o 2-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -1.4 10 -10 85 DEVM RMS 2-DH5: Ch39 [%] 0.0 0.2 86 DEVM Peak 2-DH5: Ch39 [%] 0.1 0.35 87 DEVM 99% 2-DH5: Ch39 [%] 100.0 99 88 omega i 3-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -3.8 75 -75 89 omega o + omega i 3-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -5.9 75 -75 90 omega o 3-DH5: Ch39 [kHz] -2.6 10 -10 91 DEVM RMS 3-DH5: Ch39 [%] 0.0 0.13 92 DEVM Peak 3-DH5: Ch39 [%] 0.1 0.25 93 DEVM 99% 3-DH5: Ch39 [%] 100.0 99 94 omega i 2-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -4.9 75 -75 95 omega o + omega i 2-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -6.2 75 -75 96 omega o 2-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -1.4 10 -10 97 DEVM RMS 2-DH5: Ch78 [%] 0.0 0.2 98 DEVM Peak 2-DH5: Ch78 [%] 0.1 0.35 99 DEVM 99% 2-DH5: Ch78 [%] 100.0 99 100 omega i 3-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -3.8 75 -75 101 omega o + omega i 3-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -6.0 75 -75 102 omega o 3-DH5: Ch78 [kHz] -2.7 10 -10 103 DEVM RMS 3-DH5: Ch78 [%] 0.0 0.13 104 DEVM Peak 3-DH5: Ch78 [%] 0.1 0.25 105 DEVM 99% 3-DH5: Ch78 [%] 100.0 99 No Characteristics Condition Min Typ Max BT Spec Unit 1 Operation frequency range 2402 2480 MHz 2 Channel spacing 1 MHz 3 Input impedance 50 Ω GFSK, BER = 0.1% -93.0 -70 Pi/4-DQPSK, BER = 0.01% -92.5 -70 4 Sensitivity, Dirty Tx on 8DPSK, BER = 0.01% -85.5 -70 dBm CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 25 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de No Characteristics Condition Typ Max Unit 30 kHz to 1 GHz 20, 21, 22 -30 1 Tx and Rx out-of-band emissions Output signal = 7dBm 1 to 12.75 GHz 20, 21, 22 -30 dBm 2 2nd harmonic at 7dBm output power 20, 21, 22 -30 dBm 3 3rd harmonic at 7dBm output power 20, 21, 22 -30 dBm The values are measured conducted. Better suppression of the spurious emissions with an antenna can be expected as, antenna frequently have band pass filter characteristics. 13 SOLDERING TEMPERATURE-TIME PROFILE (FOR REFLOW SOLDERING) 13.1 FOR LEAD SOLDER Recommended temp. profile for reflow soldering Temp.[°C] Time [s] 235°C max. 220 ±5°C 200°C150 ±10°C 90 ±30s 10 ±1s 30 +20/-10s 20 Includes effects of frequency hopping 21 Average according FCC, IC and ETSI requirements. Above +7dBm output power (refer also to 22) the customer has to verify the final product against national regulations. 22 +7dBm related to power register value 18, according to TI service pack 2.30 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 26 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 13.2 FOR LEADFREE SOLDER Our used temp. profile for reflow soldering Temp.[°C] Time [s] 230°C -250°C max. 220°C150°C – 190°C 90 ±30s 30 +20/-10s Reflow permissible cycle: 2 Opposite side reflow is prohibited due to module weight. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 27 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 14 MODULE DIMENSION 14.1 MODULE DIMENSIONS PAN131X WITHOUT ANTENNA No. Item Dimension Tolerance Remark 1 Width 6.50 ± 0.20 2 Lenght 9.00 ± 0.20 3 Height 1.80 ± 0.20 With case PAN131X Module Drawing CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 28 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 14.2 MODULE DIMENSIONS PAN132X WITH ANTENNA No. Item Dimension Tolerance Remark 1 Width 9.50 ± 0.20 2 Lenght 9.00 ± 0.20 3 Height 1.80 ± 0.20 With case PAN132X Module Drawing CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 29 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 15 FOOTPRINT OF THE MODULE 15.1 FOOTPRINT PAN131X WITHOUT ANTENNA All dimensions are in millimeters. The outer dimensions have a tolerance of ± 0.2mm. The layout is symetric to center. The inner pins (2,4,6,9,11,14,16,18,21,23) are shifted to the center by 1mm. 0.901.706,500.901.809,00171513141211987653212324211819202210416Pad = 24 x 0.60mm x 0.60mmTop View1.802.702.953.95 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 30 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 15.2 FOOTPRINT PAN132X WITH ANTENNA All dimensions are in millimeters. The outer dimensions have a tolerance of ± 0.2mm. The layout is symetric to center. The inner pins (2,4,6,9,11,14,16,18,21,23) are shifted to the center by 1mm. 2.700.901.709.50171513141211987653212324211819202210416Pad = 28 x 0.60mm x 0.60mm1.80ACBD1.800.551.001.80 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 31 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 16 LABELING DRAWING The above pictures show the laser marking on the top case, this is only an example from PAN1315. 17 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS No. Item Limit Condition 1 Solderability More than 75% of the soldering area shall be coated by solder Reflow soldering with recommendable temperature profile 2 Resistance to soldering heat It shall be satisfied electrical requirements and not be mechanical damage See Chapter 13.2 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 32 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 18 RECOMMENDED FOOT PATTERN 18.1 RECOMMENDED FOOT PATTERN PAN131X WITHOUT ANTENNA Dimensions in mm. 171513141211987653212324211819202210416Pad = 24 x 0.60mm x 0.60mmTop View9,00 6,008,50 The land pattern dimensions above are meant to serve only as a guide. This information is provided without any legal liability. For the solder paste screen, use as a first guideline the same foot print as shown in the figure above. Solder paste screen cutouts (with slightly different dimensions) might be optimum depending on your soldering process. For example, the solder paste screen thickness chosen might have an effect. The solder screen thickness depends on your production standard 120μm to 150μm is recommended. IMPORTANT: Although the bottom side of PAN131X is fully coated, no copper such as through hole vias, planes or tracks on the board component layer should be located below the PAN131X to avoid creating a short. In cases where a track or through hole via has to be located under the module, it must be kept away from PAN131X bottom pads. The PAN131X multilayer pcb contains an inner RF shielding plane, therefore no pcb shielding plane below the module is needed. When using an onboard ceramic antenna, place the antenna on the edge of your carrier board (if allowable). If you have any questions on these points, contact your local Panasonic representative. Schematics and layouts may be sent to wireless@eu.panasonic.com for final review. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 33 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 18.2 RECOMMENDED FOOT PATTERN PAN132X WITH ANTENNA Dimensions in mm. The land pattern dimensions above are meant to serve only as a guide. For the solder paste screen, use as a first guideline the same foot print as shown in the Figure above. Solder paste screen cutouts (with slightly different dimensions) might be optimum depending on your soldering process. For example, the solder paste screen thickness chosen might have an effect. The solder screen thickness depends on your production standard 120μm to 150μm is recommended. IMPORTANT: In cases where a track or through hole via has to be located under the module, it must be kept away from PAN132X bottom pads. The PAN132X multilayer pcb contains an inner RF shielding plane, therefore no pcb shielding plane below the module is needed. If you have any questions on these points, contact your local Panasonic representative. Schematics and layouts may be sent to wireless@eu.panasonic.com for final review. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 34 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 19 LAYOUT RECOMMENDATIONS WITH ANTENNA (PAN132X) 20 BLUETOOTH LE (LOW ENERGY) PAN1316/26 20.1 NETWORK TOPOLOGY Bluetooth Low Energy is designed to reduce power consumption. It can be put into a sleep mode and is only activated for event activities such as sending files to a gateway, PC or mobile phone. Furthermore the maximum power consumption is set to less than 15 mA and the average power consumption is about 1 uA. The benefit of low energy consumption are short messages and establishing very fast connections (few ms). Using these techniques, energy consumption is reduced to a tenth of a Classic Bluetooth unit. Thus, a small coin cell – such as a CR2032 – is capable of powering a device for up to 10 years of operation. T o be backwards compatible with Classic Bluetooth and to be able to offer an affordable solution for very inexpensive devices, Panasonic Low Energy Bluetooth modules are offered in two versions: CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 35 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de Dual-mode: Bluetooth Low Energy technology combined with Classic Bluetooth functionality on a single module. Dual mode devices act as gateways between these two technologies. Single Mode: Bluetooth Low Energy technology to optimize power consumption, which is particularly useful for products powered by small batteries. These modules have embedded controllers allowing the module to operate autonomously in low cost applications that lack intelligence. This data sheet describes dual-mode Bluetooth Low Energy technology combined with Classic Bluetooth functionality on a single module. Additional information on Panasonic’s single mode products can be found by visiting www.panasonic.com/rfmodules or write an e-mail to wireless@eu.panasonic.com. 20.2 MODULE FEATURES Fully compliant with Bluetooth 4.0: • Optimized for proximity and sports use • Supports up to 10 simultaneous connections • Multiple sniff instances are tightly coupled to minimize power consumption • Independent buffering allows a large number of multiple connections without affecting BR/EDR performance • Includes built-in coexistence and prioritization handling for BR/EDR and LE CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 36 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 20.3 CURRENT CONSUMPTION FOR DIFFERENT LE SCENARIOS Conditions: VDD_IN = 3.6 V, 25°C, 26-MHz fast clock, nominal unit, 10 dBm output power Mode Description Average Current Unit Advertising, non-connectable Advertising in all 3 channels 1.28msec advertising interval 15Bytes advertise Data 104 μA Advertising, discoverable Advertising in all 3 channels 1.28msec advertising interval 15Bytes advertise Data 121 μA Scanning Listening to a single frequency per window 1.28msec scan interval 11.25msec scan window 302 μA Connected (master role) 500msec connection interval 0msec Slave connection latency Empty Tx/Rx LL packets 169 μA 21 ANT PAN1317/27 ANT+ (sometimes ANT + or ANT Plus) is an interoperability function that can be added to the base ANT protocol (a proprietary wireless sensor network technology).[ 21.1 NETWORK TOPOLOGY ANT™ is a wireless sensor network protocol operating in the 2.4 GHz spectrum. Designed for ultra-low power, ease of use, efficiency and scalability, ANT supports peer-to-peer, star, tree and fixed mesh topologies. It provides reliable data communications, flexible and adaptive network operation and cross-talk immunity. The ANT protocol stack is compact, requiring minimal microcontroller resources to reduce system costs, lighten the computational burden and improve efficiency. Low-level security is implemented to allow user-defined network security. PAN1317/1327 provides the first wireless, single-chip solution with dual-mode ANT and Bluetooth connectivity with inclusion of TI’s CC2567 device. This solution wirelessly connects 13 million ANT-based devices to the more than 3 billion Bluetooth endpoint devices used by people every day, creating new market opportunities for companies building ANT products and Bluetooth products alike. CC2567 requires 80% less board area than a design with two single-mode solutions (one ANT+, one Bluetooth) and increases the wireless transmission range up to two times the distance of a single-mode ANT+ solution. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 37 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 21.2 MODULE FEATURES Fully compliant with ANT protocol: • ANT solution optimized for fitness, health and consumers use cases • Supports up to eight simultaneous connections, various network topologies and high-resolution proximity pairing • Includes built-in coexistence and prioritization handling for BR/EDR and ANT Features Benefits Dual-mode ANT+ and Bluetooth (Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR) on a single chip - Requires 80% less board area than any dual module or device design - Reduces costs associated with incorporating two wireless technologies Fully validated optimized single antenna solution - Enables simultaneous operation of ANT+ and Bluetooth without the need for two devices or modules - Includes built-in coexistence Best-in-class Bluetooth and ANT RF performance: - +10 dBm Tx power with transmit power control - -93 dBm sensitivity - Delivers twice the distance between the aggregator and ANT sensor device than competitive single-mode ANT solutions - Enables a robust and high-throughput connection with extended range Support for: - ANT+ ultra low power (master and slave devices) - Bluetooth power saving modes (park, sniff, hold) - Bluetooth ultra low power modes (deep sleep, power down) - Improves battery life and power efficiency of the finished product Turnkey solution: - Fully integrated module - Complete development kit with software and documentation - TI MSP430 hardware and software platform integration (optional) - Ease of integration into system allows quick time to market - Reduces costs and time associated with certification 21.3 ANT CURRENT CONSUMPTION Mode Description Average Current Unit Rx message mode 250msec interval 380 μA Rx message mode 500msec interval 205 μA Rx message mode 1000msec interval 118 μA CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 38 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 22 TRIPLE MODE (BR/EDR + BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY + ANT) PAN1323 The PAN1323 has been engineered to give designers the flexibility to implement Bluetooth Classic (BR/EDR), Bluetooth Low Energy and ANT into an application using a single module, reducing cost and footprint area. Refer to the paragraphs above for complete descriptions on each of the three protocols. The module is fully hardware compatible with the PAN1315, 15A, 16, 17, 25, 25A, 26 and 27. A highly efficent single RF block serves all three protocols. Protocols access the RF block using time division multiplexing. The application layer determines the priority and timing of the RF block.Customers interested in this unique module are encouraged to contact StoneStreetOne for a Bluetooth SIG certified stack. 22.1 TRIPLE MODE CURRENT CONSUMPTION The current consumption of the PAN1326 is a function of the protocol that the module is running at any point in time. Refer to the paragraphs above for details on current consumption for each of the three protocols or software vendor. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 39 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 23 DEVELOPMENT OF APPLICATIONS Mindtree Ltd. has developed a Bluetooth SPP freeware for TIs MSP430 and Panasonics PAN1315(A) and PAN1325(A). For other software refer to Chapter 24 or visit the following link www.panasonic.com/rfmodules. 23.1 TOOLS TO BE NEEDED PAN1323ETU Tool Source TI - MSP-EXP430F5438 - Experimenter Board MSP-EXP430F5438 TI - MSP-FET430UIF430 - Debugging Interface MSP-FET430UIF430 TI PAN1323EMK PAN1323EMK - Bluetooth Evaluation Module Kit for MSP430 Panasonic PAN1323ETU CC2567-PAN1327ANT-BTKIT For information on Bluetooth + ANT kit for PAN1327 CC2567 + PAN1327 wiki In addition you need the software development environment, e.g. IAR Embedded Workbench, refer to: http://wiki.msp430.com/index.php/MSP430_Bluetooth_Platform Evaluation kits and modules are available through Panasonic’s network of authorized distributors. For any additional information, please visit www.panasonic.com/rfmodules. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 40 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 24 LIST OF PROFILES Profile Software Developer Controller Availability Bluetooth SPP and others MindTree TI, MSP430 Now SPP Seeran STM32, MSP430 Now HDP, SPP Stollmann TI, MSP430 Now A2DP, AVRCP, SPP StoneStreetOne TI, Stellaris Now SPP and others ARS Multiple Now Bluetooth LE All ARS, MindTree, StoneStreetOne, Stollmann TI, MSP430 and others Upon request ANT Protocoll ANT Dynastream MSP430 and others Now Triple Mode Stack SPP StoneStreetOne MSP430 and others Now For all other profiles contact your local sales representative. 25 RELIABILITY TESTS The measurement should be done after being exposed to room temperature and humidity for 1 hour. No. Item Limit Condition 1 Vibration test Electrical parameter should be in specification a) Freq.:10~50Hz,Amplitude:1.5mm a) 20min. / cycle,1hrs. each of XYZ axis b) Freq.:30~100Hz, 6G b) 20min. / cycle,1hrs. each of XYZ axis 2 Shock test the same as above Dropped onto hard wood from height of 50cm for 3 times 3 Heat cycle test the same as above -40°C for 30min. and +85°C for 30min.; each temperature 300 cycles 4 Moisture test the same as above +60°C, 90% RH, 300h 5 Low temp. test the same as above -40°C, 300h 6 High temp. test the same as above +85°C, 300h CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 41 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 26 CAUTIONS Failure to follow the guidelines set forth in this document may result in degrading of the product’s functions and damage to the product. 26.1 DESIGN NOTES (1) Follow the conditions written in this specification, especially the control signals of this module. (2) The supply voltage has to be free of AC ripple voltage (for example from a battery or a low noise regulator output). For noisy supply voltages, provide a decoupling circuit (for example a ferrite in series connection and a bypass capacitor to ground of at least 47uF directly at the module). (3) This product should not be mechanically stressed when installed. (4) Keep this product away from heat. Heat is the major cause of decreasing the life of these products. (5) Avoid assembly and use of the target equipment in conditions where the products' temperature may exceed the maximum tolerance. (6) The supply voltage should not be exceedingly high or reversed. It should not carry noise and/or spikes. (7) Keep this product away from other high frequency circuits. 26.2 INSTALLATION NOTES (1) Reflow soldering is possible twice based on the conditions in Chapter 15. Set up the temperature at the soldering portion of this product according to this reflow profile. (2) Carefully position the products so that their heat will not burn into printed circuit boards or affect the other components that are susceptible to heat. (3) Carefully locate these products so that their temperatures will not increase due to the effects of heat generated by neighboring components. (4) If a vinyl-covered wire comes into contact with the products, then the cover will melt and generate toxic gas, damaging the insulation. Never allow contact between the cover and these products to occur. (5) This product should not be mechanically stressed or vibrated when reflowed. (6) To repair a board by hand soldering, keep the conditions of this chapter. (7) Do not wash this product. (8) Refer to the recommended pattern when designing a board. (9) Pressing on parts of the metal cover or fastening objects to the metal will cause damage to the unit. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 42 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 26. 3 USAGE CONDITIONS NOTES (1) T ake measures to protect the unit against static electricity. If pulses or other transient loads (a large load applied in a short time) are applied to the products, check and evaluate their operation befor assembly on the final products. (2) Do not use dropped products. (3) Do not touch, damage or soil the pins. (4) Follow the recommended condition ratings about the power supply applied to this product. (5) Electrode peeling strength: Do not add pressure of more than 4.9N when soldered on PCB. (6) Pressing on parts of the metal cover or fastening objects to the metal cover will cause damage. (7) These products are intended for general purpose and standard use in general electronic equipment, such as home appliances, office equipment, information and communication equipment. 26. 4 STORAGE NOTES (1) T he module should not be stressed mechanically during storage. (2) Do not store these products in the following conditions or the performance characteristics of the product, such as RF performance will be adversely affected: • St orage in salty air or in an environment with a high concentration of corrosive gas, such as Cl2, H2S, NH3, SO2, or NOX • Storage in direct sunlight • Storage in an environment where the temperature may be outside the range of 5°C to 35°C range, or where the humidity may be outside the 45 to 85% range. • Storage of the products for more than one year after the date of delivery Storage period: check the adhesive strength of the embossed tape and soldering after 6 months of storage. ( 3) Keep this product away from water, poisonous gas and corrosive gas. (4) This product should not be stressed or shocked when transported. (5) Follow the specification when stacking packed crates (max. 10). CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 43 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 26. 5 SAFETY CAUTIONS These specifications are intended to preserve the quality assurance of products and individual components. Before use, check and evaluate the operation when mounted on your products. Abide by these specifications, without deviation when using the products. These products may short-circuit. If electrical shocks, smoke, fire, and/or accidents involving human life are anticipated when a short circuit occurs, then provide the following failsafe functions, as a minimum. (1) Ensure the safety of the whole system by installing a protection circuit and a protection device. (2) Ensure the safety of the whole system by installing a redundant circuit or another system to prevent a single fault causing an unsafe status. 26. 6 OTHER CAUTIONS (1) T his specification sheet is copyrighted. (2) Do not use the products for other purposes than those listed. (3) Be sure to provide an appropriate fail-safe function on your product to prevent an additional damage that may be caused by the abnormal function or the failure of the product. (4) This product has been manufactured without any ozone chemical controlled under the Montreal Protocol. (5) These products are not intended for other uses, other than under the special conditions shown below. Before using these products under such special conditions, check their performance and reliability under the said special conditions carefully to determine whether or not they can be used in such a manner. • In liquid, such as water, salt water, oil, alkali, or organic solvent, or in places where liquid may splash. • In direct sunlight, outdoors, or in a dusty environment • In an environment where condensation occurs. • In an environment with a high concentration of harmful gas (e.g. salty air, HCl, Cl2, SO2, H2S, NH3, and NOX) ( 6) If an abnormal voltage is applied due to a problem occurring in other components or circuits, replace these products with new products because they may not be able to provide normal performance even if their electronic characteristics and appearances appear satisfactory. (7) When you have any question or uncertainty, contact Panasonic. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 44 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 27 PACKAGING 27 .1 PACKAGING OF PAN131X WITHOUT ANTENNA Tape Dimension Packing in Tape trailer (empty)1 x circumference /hub(min 160mm)component packed areastandard 1500pcsleader (empty)minimum 10 pitchTop cover tape more than 1 x circumference plus 100mm to avoid fixing of tape end on sealed modules.Direction of unreeling (for customer)PAN1315 01/01ENW89809M5AYYWWDLLFCC ID: T7V1315Machine readable 2D-BarcodePAN1315 01/01ENW89809M5AYYWWDLLFCC ID: T7V1315Machine readable 2D-Barcode Empty spaces in component packed area shall be less than two per reel and those spaces shall not be consecutive. Top cover tape shall not be found on reel holes and shall not stick out from reel. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 45 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de Component direction PAN1315 01/01ENW89809M5AYYWWDLLFCC ID: T7V1315Machine readable 2D-Barcode Reel dimension A BD NW2MAXMINMIN±1.0MAX13 +0.525.0 +2.024.4 +3.0 -0.2 -0.0 -0.5*Latch (2PC)All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise stated Assembly Method24mm330.01.520.2100.030.4*LatchTAPE SIZECW1W3 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 46 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de Label for Package PAN1315Customer CodeENW89818C2JF105 mm (1T) Lotcode [YYWWDLL] Example from above: YY year printed 08 WW normal calendar week printed 01 D day printed 5 (Friday) L line identifier, if more as one printed 1 L lot identifier per day printed 1 (1P) Customer Order Code, if any, otherwise company name will be printed (2P) Panasonic Order Code fix as ENW89818C2JF (9D) Datecode as [YYWW] (Q) Quantity [XXXX], variable max. 1500 (HW/SW) Hardware /Software Release Total Package CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 47 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 27.2 PACKAGING FOR PAN132X WITH ANTENNA Tape Dimension Measured from centreline of sprocket holeMeasured holeCumulative tolerance of 10 sprocketMeasured from centreline of sprocketto centreline of pocket.holes is ± 0.20 .hole to centreline of pocket.(I)(II)(III)(IV)Other material available.ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.WFP1+/-0.10+/-0.10+/-0.307.5012.0016.00K12.00+/-0.102.80+/-0.10+/-0.109.40BoKo9.90Ao+/-0.10 Tooling code: Flatbed -9 Estimated Max Length: 72m per 22B3 YYXXSECTION Y-Y SCALE 3.5 : 1SECTION X-X SCALE 3.5 : 1 Packing in Tape All other packaging information is similar to Chapter 27.1 Pin1 Marking CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 48 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 28 O RDERING INFORMATION Version Function Controller Part number Antenna on board Notes MOQ (1) PAN1315(2) CC2560 ENW89818C2JF NO PAN1315A Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR CC2560A ENW89829C2JF NO CC2560A offers reductions in init script size over CC2560 and is recommended for all new designs 1500 PAN1325(2) CC2560 ENW89818A2JF YES PAN1325A Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR CC2560A ENW89829A2JF YES CC2560A offers reductions in init script size over CC2560 and is recommended for all new designs. 1500 PAN1316 Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR BLE 4.0 CC2564 ENW89823C2JF NO 1500 PAN1326 Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR BLE 4.0 CC2564 ENW89823C2JF YES 1500 PAN1317 Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR ANT CC2567 ENW89827C2JF NO 1500 PAN1327 Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR ANT CC2567 ENW89827A2JF YES 1500 PAN1323 Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR BLE 4.0 ANT CC2569 ENW89842A2JF YES Check with your software developer for details on triple mode functionality. 1500 PAN1323ETU Bluetooth v2.1 + EDR BLE 4.0 ANT CC25xx ENW89825A2JF YES Evaluation kit for the whole series. PAN1315-PAN1327. 1 Notes: (1 ) Abbreviation for Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ). The standard MOQ for mass production are 1500 pieces, fewer only on customer demand. Samples for evaluation can be delivered at any quantity. (2) Not recommended for new designs, please refer to Chapter 1.1 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 49 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 29 ROHS DECLARATION Declaration of environmental compatibility for supplied products: Hereby we declare to our best present knowledge based on declaration of our suppliers that this product do not contain by now the following substances which are banned by Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) or if contain a maximum concentration of 0,1% by weight in homogeneous materials for • Le ad and lead compounds • M ercury and mercury compounds • Chromium (VI) • PBB (polybrominated biphenyl) category • PBDE (polybrominated biphenyl ether) category And a maximum concentration of 0,01% by weight in homogeneous materials for • Cadmium and cadmium compounds 3 0 DATA SHEET STATUS This data sheet contains the final specification (RELEASE). Panasonic reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice in order to improve design and supply the best possible product. Supplementary data will be published at a later date. Consult the most recently issued data sheet before initiating or completing a design. Use this URL to search for the most recent version of this data sheet: PAN13xx Latest Data Sheet! CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 50 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 3 1 HISTORY FOR THIS DOCUMENT Revision Date Modification / Remarks 0.90 18.12.2009 1st preliminary version 0.95 01.03.2010 Updated Chapter 14.2 and 28. 0.96 Not released Change ESD Information on foot note 7 in chapter Pin Description 0.97 25.03.2010 Various updates. Deleted links to TI Datasheet. 0.98 21.04.2010 Updated Links Some minor changes in Chapter 8 and 9.1 and change the base for the values in Chapter 9. 0.99 22.10.2010 Adopted changes according to CC2560 Datasheet. Included Interface Description, performance values. Not released. 1.00 04.11.2010 1st internal Release. 1.01 03.12.2010 Included reference to PAN1325 Application Note. AN-1325-2420-111.pdf 1.02 10.01.2011 Changed wording in Chapter 34.2 ” Industry Canada Certification ”. 1.03 23.05.2011 Included DOC for PAN1315 series. Included PAN13xx ANT and BLE Addendum Rev1.x.pdf reference. Included Note for IO voltage and MLD_OUT pin. 1.04 02.07.2011 Corrected wording in Chapter 34.3 Europ ean R&TTE Declaration of Conformity . 1.05 28.10.2011 Including CC2560A silicon PAN1315A HW40 at Chapter 1.1, Chapter and Chapter 0. Deleted ES label in Chapter 1.06 15.11.2011 Added overview for the core specification and their addendums. Updated front page. Updated Related Documents. 3.00 11.01.2012 Merging PAN13xx documents into this specification and correct some format 3.10 16.01.2012 Minor mistakes fixed 3.20 29.05.2012 DoC replaced with revised version 3.30 11.06.2012 Added triple mode stack Module PAN1323, add PAN1323 to ordering and software information overview, Software Block Diagram added, Bluetooth Inter IC-Sound chapter information added Layout Recommandations with Antenna added, Application Note LGA added 3.31 27.06.2012 Added design information to use low pass filter (chapter 11.1 / 11.9) for better noise surpression when using PCM interface 3.40 18.07.2012 Re-organize chapter Re gulatory Information and added 2 chapters 1. NCC St atement (only valid for PAN1325) 2. Blu etooth SIG Statement 3. Chapter 11.9, Second Paragraph was updated 4. Link in Chapter 34.1.1. was fixed 32 RELATED DOCUMENTS For an update, search in the suitable homepage. [1 ] PAN1323ETU Design-Guide: http://www.panasonic.com/industrial/includes/pdf/PAN1323ETUDesignGuide.pdf [2 ] CC2560 Product Bulletin: http://focus.ti.com/pdfs/wtbu/cc2560_slyt377.pdf [3] Bluetooth SW for MSP430 is supported by IAR IDE service pack 5.10.6 and later. Use full IAR version edition (not the kick-start version). You can find info on IAR at http://www.iar.com/website1/1.0.1.0/3/1/ and www.MSP430.com . Note, that there is an option for a 30-day free version of IAR evaluation edition. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 51 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de [4] PAN13xx CAD data: http://www.pedeu.panasonic.de/pdf/174ext.zip [5] Application Note Land Grid Array: http://www.pedeu.panasonic.de/pdf/184ext.pdf CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 52 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 33 GENERAL INFORMATION © Panasonic Industrial Devices Europe GmbH. All rights reserved. This document may contain errors. Panasonic reserves the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its literature at any time. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to Panasonic’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. If we deliver ES samples to the customer, these samples have the status Engineering Samples. This means, the design of this product is not yet concluded. Engineering Samples may be partially or fully functional, and there may be differences to be published Data Sheet. Engineering Samples are not qualified and are not to be used for reliability testing or series production. Disclaimer: Customer acknowledges that samples may deviate from the Data Sheet and may bear defects due to their status of development and the lack of qualification mentioned above. Panasonic rejects any liability or product warranty for Engineering Samples. In particular, Panasonic disclaims liability for damages caused by • th e use of the Engineering Sample other than for Evaluation Purposes, particularly the installation or integration in an other product to be sold by Customer, • de viation or lapse in function of Engineering Sample, • im proper use of Engineering Samples. Panasonic disclaimes any liability for consequential and incidental damages. Panasonic assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using Panasonic components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. In case of any questions, contact your local sales representative. 34 REGULATORY INFORMATION 34 .1 FCC FOR US 3 4.1.1 FCC Notice The devices PAN13xx, for details refer to Chapter 28 in this document, including the antennas, which are listed in Chapter 34.5 of this data sheet, complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The device meets the requirements for modular transmitter approval as detailed in FCC public Notice DA00-1407.transmitter. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 53 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 3 4.1.2 Caution The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Panasonic Industrial Devices Europe GmbH may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • I ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Con nect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consu lt the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 34.1.3 Labeling Requirements The Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) must ensure that FCC labeling requirements are met. This includes a clearly visible label on the outside of the OEM enclosure specifying the appropriate Panasonic FCC identifier for this product as well as the FCC Notice above. The FCC identifier are FCC ID: T7V1315. This FCC identifier is valid for all PAN13xx modules, for details, see the Chapter 28. Ordering Information. In any case the end product must be labelled exterior with "Contains FCC ID: T7V1315" 3 4.1.4 Antenna Warning For the related part number of PAN13xx refer to Chapter 28. Ordering Information. This devices are tested with a standard SMA connector and with the antennas listed below. When integrated in the OEMs product, these fixed antennas require installation preventing end-users from replacing them with non-approved antennas. Any antenna not in the following table must be tested to comply with FCC Section 15.203 for unique antenna connectors and Section 15.247 for emissions. The FCC identifier for this device with the antenna listed in item 1 are the same (FCC ID: T7V1315). 3 4.1.5 Approved Antenna List Note: We are able to qualify your antenna and will add to this list as that process is completed. Item Part Number Manufacturer Frequency Band Type Gain (dBi) 1 2450AT43B100 Johanson Technologies 2.4GHz Chip-Antenna +1.3 2 LDA212G3110K Murata 2.4GHz Chip-Antenna +0.9 3 4788930245 Würth Elektronik 2.4GHz Chip-Antenna +0.5 CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 54 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 3 4.1.6 RF Exposure PAN13xx To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements, the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) must ensure that the approved antenna in the previous table must be installed. The preceding statement must be included as a CAUTION statement in manuals for products operating with the approved antennas in the previous table to alert users on FCC RF Exposure compliance. Any notification to the end user of installation or removal instructions about the integrated radio module is not allowed. The radiated output power of PAN13xx with mounted ceramic antenna (FCC ID: T7V1315) is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the PAN13xx shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. End users may not be provided with the module installation instructions. OEM integrators and end users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. 34.2 INDUSTRY CANADA CERTIFICATION PAN1315 is licensed to meet the regulatory requirements of Industry Canada (IC), license: IC: 216Q-1315 Manufacturers of mobile, fixed or portable devices incorporating this module are advised to clarify any regulatory questions and ensure compliance for SAR and/or RF exposure limits. Users can obtain Canadian information on RF exposure and compliance from www.ic.gc.ca. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 20 above, having a maximum gain of 1.3 dBi. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 1.3 dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. due to the model size the IC identifier is displayed in the installation instruction. 34.3 EUROPEAN R&TTE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, Panasonic Industrial Devices Europe GmbH, declares that the Bluetooth module PAN1315 and their versions is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. As a result of the conformity assessment procedure described in Annex III of the Directive 1999/5/EC, the end-customer equipment should be labelled as follows: PAN13xx and their versions in the specified reference design can be used in the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, The Netherlands, the United Kingdom, Switzerland, and Norway. CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 55 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 56 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de 34.4 N CC FOR TAIWAN 34.4.1 Labeling Requirements Due to the limited size on the module, the NCC ID is not visible on the module. When the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: “Contains Transmitter Module NCC ID:” or “Contains NCC ID:” CCAJ11LPxxxxTx Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. Panasonic is able to provide the above content from the label as a vector graphic, please ask at wireless@eu.panasonic.com. 34.4.2 NCC Statement Due to the national rule from Taiwan we have to print the below statement in Chinese language. 􀀒􀀏􀀒􀭋􀉤􀉚􀫢􀀒􀀏􀀔􀭋􀉤􀌬􀫢􀀒􀀏􀀓􀺾􀛨􀏌􁂩􁗇􀎥􀣸􀊘􀐭􀌌􀬟􀢛􁎖􀽥􁋚􀁤􀚢􀺾􀮢􀌙􀁤􀊮􀌡􀁥􀨠􀻮􀗐􀔴􀍜􀙫􀑩􀊔􀩻􁊸􀐆􁜊􀒻􁎖􀬟􀁥􀌋􀉽􀌌􀬟􀗐􁜊􀒻􀡡􀮣􀠇􀊘􀤤􀗌􀊿􀌌􀦐􀁦􀀒􀀏􀀕􀐭􀌌􀬟􀢛􁎖􀽥􁋚􀊘􀔴􀍜􀊔􀩻􁅂􁚤􀠭􀦘􀏄􀎌􀊿􀊍􁓔􀎥􀘬􀮷􀚦􀁩􀺾􀳯􀬤􀏞􀊍􁓔􀬤􀵥􀣛􀁤􁏐􀍭􀑃􀧾􀍜􀁤􀔨􀒷􀴛􀐇􀳌􀊍􁓔􀣛􀋙􀩻􁘱􁚃􀔴􀍜􀁦􀛃􀶰􀎥􀘬􀮷􀚦􀁤􀜸􀔱􀽥􀚦􀘬􀮝􀖛􀐪􀸸􀊘􀳌􁇞􀽥􀮷􀚦􀁦􀐭􀌌􀬟􀢛􁎖􀽥􁋚􀶲􀒜􀕡􀎥􀘬􀮷􀚦􀗐􀊈􀸸􀁥􀟅􁊪􀊿􁔼􁐕􀍜􀽥􀘪􁍧􀢛􀗌􀽥􁋚􀮣􀯪􀊘􀊍􁓔􀁦􀣬􁊽􀀯􀀤􀀤􀐭􀌌􀬟􀽥􀘪􁍧􀢛􀗌􀽥􁋚􁁍􀬣􁍬􀘬􀀁􀮝􀖛􀀛 34.5 BLUETOOTH SIG STATEMENT 35 L IFE SUPPORT POLICY This Panasonic product is not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction can reasonably be expected to result in a significant personal injury to the user, or as a critical component in any life support device or system whose failure to perform can be reasonably expected to cause the failure of the CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT SPECIFICATION No. DS-13xx-2400-102 REV. 3.40 SUBJECT CLASS 1 or 2 BLUETOOTH MODULE PAGE 57 of 57 CUSTOMER’S CODE PAN13XX Core Specification PANASONIC’S CODE See Chapter 28. Ordering Information DATE 18.07.2012 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES EUROPE GMBH www.pedeu.pansonic.de life support device or system, or to affect its safety or effectiveness. Panasonic customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Panasonic for any damages resulting. LM3S8933 Microcontroller DATA SHEET DS-LM3S8933-2550 Copyright © 2007-2008 Luminary Micro, Inc. PRELIMINARY Legal Disclaimers and Trademark Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH LUMINARY MICRO PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN LUMINARY MICRO'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, LUMINARY MICRO ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND LUMINARY MICRO DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF LUMINARY MICRO'S PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. LUMINARY MICRO'S PRODUCTS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING, OR LIFE-SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS. Luminary Micro may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Contact your local Luminary Micro sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications before placing your product order. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Luminary Micro reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. Copyright © 2007-2008 Luminary Micro, Inc. All rights reserved. Stellaris, Luminary Micro, and the Luminary Micro logo are registered trademarks of Luminary Micro, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ARM and Thumb are registered trademarks and Cortex is a trademark of ARM Limited. Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Luminary Micro, Inc. 108 Wild Basin, Suite 350 ® Austin, TX 78746 Main: +1-512-279-8800 Fax: +1-512-279-8879 http://www.luminarymicro.com 2 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents About This Document .................................................................................................................... 20 Audience .............................................................................................................................................. 20 About This Manual ................................................................................................................................ 20 Related Documents ............................................................................................................................... 20 Documentation Conventions .................................................................................................................. 20 1 Architectural Overview ...................................................................................................... 22 1.1 Product Features ...................................................................................................................... 22 1.2 Target Applications .................................................................................................................... 27 1.3 High-Level Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 28 1.4 Functional Overview .................................................................................................................. 28 1.4.1 ARM Cortex™-M3 ..................................................................................................................... 29 1.4.2 Motor Control Peripherals .......................................................................................................... 29 1.4.3 Analog Peripherals .................................................................................................................... 30 1.4.4 Serial Communications Peripherals ............................................................................................ 30 1.4.5 System Peripherals ................................................................................................................... 32 1.4.6 Memory Peripherals .................................................................................................................. 33 1.4.7 Additional Features ................................................................................................................... 33 1.4.8 Hardware Details ...................................................................................................................... 34 2 ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core ...................................................................................... 35 2.1 Block Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 36 2.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 36 2.2.1 Serial Wire and JTAG Debug ..................................................................................................... 36 2.2.2 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) ............................................................................................. 37 2.2.3 Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) ................................................................................................. 37 2.2.4 ROM Table ............................................................................................................................... 37 2.2.5 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) ................................................................................................... 37 2.2.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) ................................................................................ 37 3 Memory Map ....................................................................................................................... 41 4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 43 5 JTAG Interface .................................................................................................................... 46 5.1 Block Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 47 5.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 47 5.2.1 JTAG Interface Pins .................................................................................................................. 48 5.2.2 JTAG TAP Controller ................................................................................................................. 49 5.2.3 Shift Registers .......................................................................................................................... 50 5.2.4 Operational Considerations ........................................................................................................ 50 5.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................... 53 5.4 Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 53 5.4.1 Instruction Register (IR) ............................................................................................................. 53 5.4.2 Data Registers .......................................................................................................................... 55 6 System Control ................................................................................................................... 57 6.1 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 57 6.1.1 Device Identification .................................................................................................................. 57 6.1.2 Reset Control ............................................................................................................................ 57 March 17, 2008 3 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 6.1.3 Power Control ........................................................................................................................... 60 6.1.4 Clock Control ............................................................................................................................ 60 6.1.5 System Control ......................................................................................................................... 62 6.2 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................... 63 6.3 Register Map ............................................................................................................................ 64 6.4 Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 65 7 Hibernation Module .......................................................................................................... 119 7.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 120 7.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 120 7.2.1 Register Access Timing ........................................................................................................... 120 7.2.2 Clock Source .......................................................................................................................... 121 7.2.3 Battery Management ............................................................................................................... 121 7.2.4 Real-Time Clock ...................................................................................................................... 121 7.2.5 Non-Volatile Memory ............................................................................................................... 122 7.2.6 Power Control ......................................................................................................................... 122 7.2.7 Interrupts and Status ............................................................................................................... 122 7.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 123 7.3.1 Initialization ............................................................................................................................. 123 7.3.2 RTC Match Functionality (No Hibernation) ................................................................................ 123 7.3.3 RTC Match/Wake-Up from Hibernation ..................................................................................... 123 7.3.4 External Wake-Up from Hibernation .......................................................................................... 124 7.3.5 RTC/External Wake-Up from Hibernation .................................................................................. 124 7.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 124 7.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 125 8 Internal Memory ............................................................................................................... 138 8.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 138 8.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 138 8.2.1 SRAM Memory ........................................................................................................................ 138 8.2.2 Flash Memory ......................................................................................................................... 139 8.3 Flash Memory Initialization and Configuration ........................................................................... 140 8.3.1 Flash Programming ................................................................................................................. 140 8.3.2 Nonvolatile Register Programming ........................................................................................... 141 8.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 141 8.5 Flash Register Descriptions (Flash Control Offset) ..................................................................... 142 8.6 Flash Register Descriptions (System Control Offset) .................................................................. 149 9 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) ....................................................................... 162 9.1 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 162 9.1.1 Data Control ........................................................................................................................... 163 9.1.2 Interrupt Control ...................................................................................................................... 164 9.1.3 Mode Control .......................................................................................................................... 165 9.1.4 Commit Control ....................................................................................................................... 165 9.1.5 Pad Control ............................................................................................................................. 165 9.1.6 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 165 9.2 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 165 9.3 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 167 9.4 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 169 4 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents 10 General-Purpose Timers ................................................................................................. 204 10.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 204 10.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 205 10.2.1 GPTM Reset Conditions .......................................................................................................... 206 10.2.2 32-Bit Timer Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 206 10.2.3 16-Bit Timer Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 207 10.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 211 10.3.1 32-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 211 10.3.2 32-Bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) Mode ......................................................................................... 212 10.3.3 16-Bit One-Shot/Periodic Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 212 10.3.4 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode ................................................................................................. 213 10.3.5 16-Bit Input Edge Timing Mode ................................................................................................ 213 10.3.6 16-Bit PWM Mode ................................................................................................................... 214 10.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 214 10.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 215 11 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................................... 240 11.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 240 11.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 240 11.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 241 11.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 241 11.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 242 12 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ................................................................................. 263 12.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 264 12.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 264 12.2.1 Sample Sequencers ................................................................................................................ 264 12.2.2 Module Control ........................................................................................................................ 265 12.2.3 Hardware Sample Averaging Circuit ......................................................................................... 266 12.2.4 Analog-to-Digital Converter ...................................................................................................... 266 12.2.5 Differential Sampling ............................................................................................................... 266 12.2.6 Test Modes ............................................................................................................................. 268 12.2.7 Internal Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................... 268 12.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 269 12.3.1 Module Initialization ................................................................................................................. 269 12.3.2 Sample Sequencer Configuration ............................................................................................. 269 12.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 269 12.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 270 13 Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) ......................................... 296 13.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 297 13.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 297 13.2.1 Transmit/Receive Logic ........................................................................................................... 297 13.2.2 Baud-Rate Generation ............................................................................................................. 298 13.2.3 Data Transmission .................................................................................................................. 299 13.2.4 Serial IR (SIR) ......................................................................................................................... 299 13.2.5 FIFO Operation ....................................................................................................................... 300 13.2.6 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 300 13.2.7 Loopback Operation ................................................................................................................ 301 13.2.8 IrDA SIR block ........................................................................................................................ 301 13.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 301 March 17, 2008 5 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 13.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 302 13.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 303 14 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ................................................................................ 337 14.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 337 14.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 337 14.2.1 Bit Rate Generation ................................................................................................................. 338 14.2.2 FIFO Operation ....................................................................................................................... 338 14.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 338 14.2.4 Frame Formats ....................................................................................................................... 339 14.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 346 14.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 347 14.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 348 15 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface ............................................................................ 374 15.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 374 15.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 374 15.2.1 I2C Bus Functional Overview .................................................................................................... 375 15.2.2 Available Speed Modes ........................................................................................................... 377 15.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 378 15.2.4 Loopback Operation ................................................................................................................ 378 15.2.5 Command Sequence Flow Charts ............................................................................................ 379 15.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 385 15.4 I2C Register Map ..................................................................................................................... 386 15.5 Register Descriptions (I2C Master) ........................................................................................... 387 15.6 Register Descriptions (I2C Slave) ............................................................................................. 400 16 Controller Area Network (CAN) Module ......................................................................... 409 16.1 Controller Area Network Overview ............................................................................................ 409 16.2 Controller Area Network Features ............................................................................................ 409 16.3 Controller Area Network Block Diagram .................................................................................... 410 16.4 Controller Area Network Functional Description ......................................................................... 410 16.4.1 Initialization ............................................................................................................................. 411 16.4.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................... 411 16.4.3 Transmitting Message Objects ................................................................................................. 412 16.4.4 Configuring a Transmit Message Object .................................................................................... 412 16.4.5 Updating a Transmit Message Object ....................................................................................... 413 16.4.6 Accepting Received Message Objects ...................................................................................... 413 16.4.7 Receiving a Data Frame .......................................................................................................... 413 16.4.8 Receiving a Remote Frame ...................................................................................................... 413 16.4.9 Receive/Transmit Priority ......................................................................................................... 414 16.4.10 Configuring a Receive Message Object .................................................................................... 414 16.4.11 Handling of Received Message Objects .................................................................................... 415 16.4.12 Handling of Interrupts .............................................................................................................. 415 16.4.13 Bit Timing Configuration Error Considerations ........................................................................... 416 16.4.14 Bit Time and Bit Rate ............................................................................................................... 416 16.4.15 Calculating the Bit Timing Parameters ...................................................................................... 418 16.5 Controller Area Network Register Map ...................................................................................... 420 16.6 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 421 6 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents 17 Ethernet Controller .......................................................................................................... 449 17.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 450 17.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 450 17.2.1 Internal MII Operation .............................................................................................................. 450 17.2.2 PHY Configuration/Operation ................................................................................................... 451 17.2.3 MAC Configuration/Operation .................................................................................................. 452 17.2.4 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 455 17.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 455 17.4 Ethernet Register Map ............................................................................................................. 456 17.5 Ethernet MAC Register Descriptions ......................................................................................... 457 17.6 MII Management Register Descriptions ..................................................................................... 475 18 Analog Comparators ....................................................................................................... 494 18.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 495 18.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................. 495 18.2.1 Internal Reference Programming .............................................................................................. 497 18.3 Initialization and Configuration ................................................................................................. 498 18.4 Register Map .......................................................................................................................... 498 18.5 Register Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 499 19 Pin Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 507 20 Signal Tables .................................................................................................................... 509 20.1 100-Pin LQFP Package Pin Tables ........................................................................................... 509 20.2 108-Pin BGA Package Pin Tables ............................................................................................ 520 21 Operating Characteristics ............................................................................................... 534 22 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................................................ 535 22.1 DC Characteristics .................................................................................................................. 535 22.1.1 Maximum Ratings ................................................................................................................... 535 22.1.2 Recommended DC Operating Conditions .................................................................................. 535 22.1.3 On-Chip Low Drop-Out (LDO) Regulator Characteristics ............................................................ 536 22.1.4 Power Specifications ............................................................................................................... 536 22.1.5 Flash Memory Characteristics .................................................................................................. 538 22.2 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 538 22.2.1 Load Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 538 22.2.2 Clocks .................................................................................................................................... 538 22.2.3 Analog-to-Digital Converter ...................................................................................................... 539 22.2.4 Analog Comparator ................................................................................................................. 540 22.2.5 I2C ......................................................................................................................................... 540 22.2.6 Ethernet Controller .................................................................................................................. 541 22.2.7 Hibernation Module ................................................................................................................. 544 22.2.8 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ........................................................................................... 544 22.2.9 JTAG and Boundary Scan ........................................................................................................ 546 22.2.10 General-Purpose I/O ............................................................................................................... 547 22.2.11 Reset ..................................................................................................................................... 548 23 Package Information ........................................................................................................ 550 A Serial Flash Loader .......................................................................................................... 554 A.1 Serial Flash Loader ................................................................................................................. 554 A.2 Interfaces ............................................................................................................................... 554 March 17, 2008 7 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller A.2.1 UART ..................................................................................................................................... 554 A.2.2 SSI ......................................................................................................................................... 554 A.3 Packet Handling ...................................................................................................................... 555 A.3.1 Packet Format ........................................................................................................................ 555 A.3.2 Sending Packets ..................................................................................................................... 555 A.3.3 Receiving Packets ................................................................................................................... 555 A.4 Commands ............................................................................................................................. 556 A.4.1 COMMAND_PING (0X20) ........................................................................................................ 556 A.4.2 COMMAND_GET_STATUS (0x23) ........................................................................................... 556 A.4.3 COMMAND_DOWNLOAD (0x21) ............................................................................................. 556 A.4.4 COMMAND_SEND_DATA (0x24) ............................................................................................. 557 A.4.5 COMMAND_RUN (0x22) ......................................................................................................... 557 A.4.6 COMMAND_RESET (0x25) ..................................................................................................... 557 B Register Quick Reference ............................................................................................... 559 C Ordering and Contact Information ................................................................................. 578 C.1 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................ 578 C.2 Kits ......................................................................................................................................... 578 C.3 Company Information .............................................................................................................. 579 C.4 Support Information ................................................................................................................. 579 8 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1-1. Stellaris® 8000 Series High-Level Block Diagram ............................................................... 28 Figure 2-1. CPU Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 36 Figure 2-2. TPIU Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 37 Figure 5-1. JTAG Module Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 47 Figure 5-2. Test Access Port State Machine ....................................................................................... 50 Figure 5-3. IDCODE Register Format ................................................................................................. 55 Figure 5-4. BYPASS Register Format ................................................................................................ 56 Figure 5-5. Boundary Scan Register Format ....................................................................................... 56 Figure 6-1. External Circuitry to Extend Reset .................................................................................... 58 Figure 6-2. Main Clock Tree .............................................................................................................. 61 Figure 7-1. Hibernation Module Block Diagram ................................................................................. 120 Figure 8-1. Flash Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 138 Figure 9-1. GPIO Port Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 163 Figure 9-2. GPIODATA Write Example ............................................................................................. 164 Figure 9-3. GPIODATA Read Example ............................................................................................. 164 Figure 10-1. GPTM Module Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 205 Figure 10-2. 16-Bit Input Edge Count Mode Example .......................................................................... 209 Figure 10-3. 16-Bit Input Edge Time Mode Example ........................................................................... 210 Figure 10-4. 16-Bit PWM Mode Example ............................................................................................ 211 Figure 11-1. WDT Module Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 240 Figure 12-1. ADC Module Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 264 Figure 12-2. Differential Sampling Range, Vin(-) = 1.5 V ...................................................................... 267 Figure 12-3. Differential Sampling Range, Vin(-) = 0.75 V .................................................................... 267 Figure 12-4. Differential Sampling Range, Vin(-) = 2.25 V .................................................................... 268 Figure 12-5. Internal Temperature Sensor Characteristic ..................................................................... 268 Figure 13-1. UART Module Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 297 Figure 13-2. UART Character Frame ................................................................................................. 298 Figure 13-3. IrDA Data Modulation ..................................................................................................... 300 Figure 14-1. SSI Module Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 337 Figure 14-2. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Single Transfer) .................................................... 340 Figure 14-3. TI Synchronous Serial Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) ............................................ 340 Figure 14-4. Freescale SPI Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 ...................................... 341 Figure 14-5. Freescale SPI Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=0 and SPH=0 .............................. 341 Figure 14-6. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=0 and SPH=1 ..................................................... 342 Figure 14-7. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Single Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 ........................... 343 Figure 14-8. Freescale SPI Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) with SPO=1 and SPH=0 .................... 343 Figure 14-9. Freescale SPI Frame Format with SPO=1 and SPH=1 ..................................................... 344 Figure 14-10. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Single Frame) .................................................................... 345 Figure 14-11. MICROWIRE Frame Format (Continuous Transfer) ......................................................... 346 Figure 14-12. MICROWIRE Frame Format, SSIFss Input Setup and Hold Requirements ........................ 346 Figure 15-1. I2C Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 374 Figure 15-2. I2C Bus Configuration .................................................................................................... 375 Figure 15-3. START and STOP Conditions ......................................................................................... 375 Figure 15-4. Complete Data Transfer with a 7-Bit Address ................................................................... 376 Figure 15-5. R/S Bit in First Byte ........................................................................................................ 376 March 17, 2008 9 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Figure 15-6. Data Validity During Bit Transfer on the I2C Bus ............................................................... 376 Figure 15-7. Master Single SEND ...................................................................................................... 379 Figure 15-8. Master Single RECEIVE ................................................................................................. 380 Figure 15-9. Master Burst SEND ....................................................................................................... 381 Figure 15-10. Master Burst RECEIVE .................................................................................................. 382 Figure 15-11. Master Burst RECEIVE after Burst SEND ........................................................................ 383 Figure 15-12. Master Burst SEND after Burst RECEIVE ........................................................................ 384 Figure 15-13. Slave Command Sequence ............................................................................................ 385 Figure 16-1. CAN Module Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 410 Figure 16-2. CAN Bit Time ................................................................................................................ 417 Figure 17-1. Ethernet Controller Block Diagram .................................................................................. 450 Figure 17-2. Ethernet Controller ......................................................................................................... 450 Figure 17-3. Ethernet Frame ............................................................................................................. 452 Figure 18-1. Analog Comparator Module Block Diagram ..................................................................... 495 Figure 18-2. Structure of Comparator Unit .......................................................................................... 496 Figure 18-3. Comparator Internal Reference Structure ........................................................................ 497 Figure 19-1. 100-Pin LQFP Package Pin Diagram .............................................................................. 507 Figure 19-2. 108-Ball BGA Package Pin Diagram (Top View) ............................................................... 508 Figure 22-1. Load Conditions ............................................................................................................ 538 Figure 22-2. I2C Timing ..................................................................................................................... 541 Figure 22-3. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics ......................................................................... 543 Figure 22-4. Hibernation Module Timing ............................................................................................. 544 Figure 22-5. SSI Timing for TI Frame Format (FRF=01), Single Transfer Timing Measurement .............. 545 Figure 22-6. SSI Timing for MICROWIRE Frame Format (FRF=10), Single Transfer ............................. 545 Figure 22-7. SSI Timing for SPI Frame Format (FRF=00), with SPH=1 ................................................. 546 Figure 22-8. JTAG Test Clock Input Timing ......................................................................................... 547 Figure 22-9. JTAG Test Access Port (TAP) Timing .............................................................................. 547 Figure 22-10. JTAG TRST Timing ........................................................................................................ 547 Figure 22-11. External Reset Timing (RST) .......................................................................................... 548 Figure 22-12. Power-On Reset Timing ................................................................................................. 549 Figure 22-13. Brown-Out Reset Timing ................................................................................................ 549 Figure 22-14. Software Reset Timing ................................................................................................... 549 Figure 22-15. Watchdog Reset Timing ................................................................................................. 549 Figure 23-1. 100-Pin LQFP Package .................................................................................................. 550 Figure 23-2. 100-Ball BGA Package .................................................................................................. 552 10 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1. Documentation Conventions ............................................................................................ 20 Table 3-1. Memory Map ................................................................................................................... 41 Table 4-1. Exception Types .............................................................................................................. 43 Table 4-2. Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 44 Table 5-1. JTAG Port Pins Reset State ............................................................................................. 48 Table 5-2. JTAG Instruction Register Commands ............................................................................... 53 Table 6-1. System Control Register Map ........................................................................................... 64 Table 7-1. Hibernation Module Register Map ................................................................................... 124 Table 8-1. Flash Protection Policy Combinations ............................................................................. 140 Table 8-2. Flash Resident Registers ............................................................................................... 141 Table 8-3. Flash Register Map ........................................................................................................ 141 Table 9-1. GPIO Pad Configuration Examples ................................................................................. 166 Table 9-2. GPIO Interrupt Configuration Example ............................................................................ 166 Table 9-3. GPIO Register Map ....................................................................................................... 168 Table 10-1. Available CCP Pins ........................................................................................................ 205 Table 10-2. 16-Bit Timer With Prescaler Configurations ..................................................................... 208 Table 10-3. Timers Register Map ...................................................................................................... 214 Table 11-1. Watchdog Timer Register Map ........................................................................................ 241 Table 12-1. Samples and FIFO Depth of Sequencers ........................................................................ 264 Table 12-2. Differential Sampling Pairs ............................................................................................. 266 Table 12-3. ADC Register Map ......................................................................................................... 269 Table 13-1. UART Register Map ....................................................................................................... 302 Table 14-1. SSI Register Map .......................................................................................................... 347 Table 15-1. Examples of I2C Master Timer Period versus Speed Mode ............................................... 377 Table 15-2. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface Register Map ......................................................... 386 Table 15-3. Write Field Decoding for I2CMCS[3:0] Field (Sheet 1 of 3) ................................................ 391 Table 16-1. Transmit Message Object Bit Settings ............................................................................. 412 Table 16-2. Receive Message Object Bit Settings .............................................................................. 414 Table 16-3. CAN Protocol Ranges .................................................................................................... 417 Table 16-4. CAN Register Map ......................................................................................................... 420 Table 17-1. TX & RX FIFO Organization ........................................................................................... 453 Table 17-2. Ethernet Register Map ................................................................................................... 456 Table 18-1. Comparator 0 Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 496 Table 18-2. Comparator 1 Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 496 Table 18-3. Comparator 2 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 497 Table 18-4. Internal Reference Voltage and ACREFCTL Field Values ................................................. 497 Table 18-5. Analog Comparators Register Map ................................................................................. 499 Table 20-1. Signals by Pin Number ................................................................................................... 509 Table 20-2. Signals by Signal Name ................................................................................................. 513 Table 20-3. Signals by Function, Except for GPIO ............................................................................. 517 Table 20-4. GPIO Pins and Alternate Functions ................................................................................. 519 Table 20-5. Signals by Pin Number ................................................................................................... 520 Table 20-6. Signals by Signal Name ................................................................................................. 525 Table 20-7. Signals by Function, Except for GPIO ............................................................................. 529 Table 20-8. GPIO Pins and Alternate Functions ................................................................................. 532 Table 21-1. Temperature Characteristics ........................................................................................... 534 March 17, 2008 11 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Table 21-2. Thermal Characteristics ................................................................................................. 534 Table 22-1. Maximum Ratings .......................................................................................................... 535 Table 22-2. Recommended DC Operating Conditions ........................................................................ 535 Table 22-3. LDO Regulator Characteristics ....................................................................................... 536 Table 22-4. Detailed Power Specifications ........................................................................................ 537 Table 22-5. Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................ 538 Table 22-6. Phase Locked Loop (PLL) Characteristics ....................................................................... 538 Table 22-7. Clock Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 538 Table 22-8. Crystal Characteristics ................................................................................................... 539 Table 22-9. ADC Characteristics ....................................................................................................... 539 Table 22-10. Analog Comparator Characteristics ................................................................................. 540 Table 22-11. Analog Comparator Voltage Reference Characteristics .................................................... 540 Table 22-12. I2C Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 540 Table 22-13. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristics ........................................................................ 541 Table 22-14. 100BASE-TX Transmitter Characteristics (informative) ..................................................... 541 Table 22-15. 100BASE-TX Receiver Characteristics ............................................................................ 541 Table 22-16. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristics ............................................................................ 541 Table 22-17. 10BASE-T Transmitter Characteristics (informative) ......................................................... 542 Table 22-18. 10BASE-T Receiver Characteristics ................................................................................ 542 Table 22-19. Isolation Transformers ................................................................................................... 542 Table 22-20. Ethernet Reference Crystal ............................................................................................ 543 Table 22-21. External XTLP Oscillator Characteristics ......................................................................... 543 Table 22-22. Hibernation Module Characteristics ................................................................................. 544 Table 22-23. SSI Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 544 Table 22-24. JTAG Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 546 Table 22-25. GPIO Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 548 Table 22-26. Reset Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 548 Table C-1. Part Ordering Information ............................................................................................... 578 12 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents List of Registers System Control .............................................................................................................................. 57 Register 1: Device Identification 0 (DID0), offset 0x000 ....................................................................... 66 Register 2: Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL), offset 0x030 .......................................................... 68 Register 3: LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL), offset 0x034 ................................................................... 69 Register 4: Raw Interrupt Status (RIS), offset 0x050 ........................................................................... 70 Register 5: Interrupt Mask Control (IMC), offset 0x054 ........................................................................ 71 Register 6: Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC), offset 0x058 .................................................... 72 Register 7: Reset Cause (RESC), offset 0x05C .................................................................................. 73 Register 8: Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC), offset 0x060 .......................................................... 74 Register 9: XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG), offset 0x064 .............................................................. 78 Register 10: Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2), offset 0x070 ...................................................... 79 Register 11: Deep Sleep Clock Configuration (DSLPCLKCFG), offset 0x144 .......................................... 81 Register 12: Device Identification 1 (DID1), offset 0x004 ....................................................................... 82 Register 13: Device Capabilities 0 (DC0), offset 0x008 ......................................................................... 84 Register 14: Device Capabilities 1 (DC1), offset 0x010 ......................................................................... 85 Register 15: Device Capabilities 2 (DC2), offset 0x014 ......................................................................... 87 Register 16: Device Capabilities 3 (DC3), offset 0x018 ......................................................................... 89 Register 17: Device Capabilities 4 (DC4), offset 0x01C ......................................................................... 91 Register 18: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (RCGC0), offset 0x100 .................................... 93 Register 19: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (SCGC0), offset 0x110 .................................. 95 Register 20: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 (DCGC0), offset 0x120 ......................... 97 Register 21: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (RCGC1), offset 0x104 .................................... 99 Register 22: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (SCGC1), offset 0x114 ................................. 102 Register 23: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 (DCGC1), offset 0x124 ....................... 105 Register 24: Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (RCGC2), offset 0x108 ................................... 108 Register 25: Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (SCGC2), offset 0x118 ................................. 110 Register 26: Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 (DCGC2), offset 0x128 ....................... 112 Register 27: Software Reset Control 0 (SRCR0), offset 0x040 ............................................................. 114 Register 28: Software Reset Control 1 (SRCR1), offset 0x044 ............................................................. 115 Register 29: Software Reset Control 2 (SRCR2), offset 0x048 ............................................................. 117 Hibernation Module ..................................................................................................................... 119 Register 1: Hibernation RTC Counter (HIBRTCC), offset 0x000 ......................................................... 126 Register 2: Hibernation RTC Match 0 (HIBRTCM0), offset 0x004 ....................................................... 127 Register 3: Hibernation RTC Match 1 (HIBRTCM1), offset 0x008 ....................................................... 128 Register 4: Hibernation RTC Load (HIBRTCLD), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 129 Register 5: Hibernation Control (HIBCTL), offset 0x010 ..................................................................... 130 Register 6: Hibernation Interrupt Mask (HIBIM), offset 0x014 ............................................................. 132 Register 7: Hibernation Raw Interrupt Status (HIBRIS), offset 0x018 .................................................. 133 Register 8: Hibernation Masked Interrupt Status (HIBMIS), offset 0x01C ............................................ 134 Register 9: Hibernation Interrupt Clear (HIBIC), offset 0x020 ............................................................. 135 Register 10: Hibernation RTC Trim (HIBRTCT), offset 0x024 ............................................................... 136 Register 11: Hibernation Data (HIBDATA), offset 0x030-0x12C ............................................................ 137 Internal Memory ........................................................................................................................... 138 Register 1: Flash Memory Address (FMA), offset 0x000 .................................................................... 143 Register 2: Flash Memory Data (FMD), offset 0x004 ......................................................................... 144 March 17, 2008 13 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 3: Flash Memory Control (FMC), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 145 Register 4: Flash Controller Raw Interrupt Status (FCRIS), offset 0x00C ............................................ 147 Register 5: Flash Controller Interrupt Mask (FCIM), offset 0x010 ........................................................ 148 Register 6: Flash Controller Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (FCMISC), offset 0x014 ..................... 149 Register 7: USec Reload (USECRL), offset 0x140 ............................................................................ 150 Register 8: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 0 (FMPRE0), offset 0x130 and 0x200 ................... 151 Register 9: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 0 (FMPPE0), offset 0x134 and 0x400 ............... 152 Register 10: User Debug (USER_DBG), offset 0x1D0 ......................................................................... 153 Register 11: User Register 0 (USER_REG0), offset 0x1E0 .................................................................. 154 Register 12: User Register 1 (USER_REG1), offset 0x1E4 .................................................................. 155 Register 13: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 1 (FMPRE1), offset 0x204 .................................... 156 Register 14: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 2 (FMPRE2), offset 0x208 .................................... 157 Register 15: Flash Memory Protection Read Enable 3 (FMPRE3), offset 0x20C ................................... 158 Register 16: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 1 (FMPPE1), offset 0x404 ............................... 159 Register 17: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 2 (FMPPE2), offset 0x408 ............................... 160 Register 18: Flash Memory Protection Program Enable 3 (FMPPE3), offset 0x40C ............................... 161 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs) ................................................................................... 162 Register 1: GPIO Data (GPIODATA), offset 0x000 ............................................................................ 170 Register 2: GPIO Direction (GPIODIR), offset 0x400 ......................................................................... 171 Register 3: GPIO Interrupt Sense (GPIOIS), offset 0x404 .................................................................. 172 Register 4: GPIO Interrupt Both Edges (GPIOIBE), offset 0x408 ........................................................ 173 Register 5: GPIO Interrupt Event (GPIOIEV), offset 0x40C ................................................................ 174 Register 6: GPIO Interrupt Mask (GPIOIM), offset 0x410 ................................................................... 175 Register 7: GPIO Raw Interrupt Status (GPIORIS), offset 0x414 ........................................................ 176 Register 8: GPIO Masked Interrupt Status (GPIOMIS), offset 0x418 ................................................... 177 Register 9: GPIO Interrupt Clear (GPIOICR), offset 0x41C ................................................................ 178 Register 10: GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL), offset 0x420 ............................................ 179 Register 11: GPIO 2-mA Drive Select (GPIODR2R), offset 0x500 ........................................................ 181 Register 12: GPIO 4-mA Drive Select (GPIODR4R), offset 0x504 ........................................................ 182 Register 13: GPIO 8-mA Drive Select (GPIODR8R), offset 0x508 ........................................................ 183 Register 14: GPIO Open Drain Select (GPIOODR), offset 0x50C ......................................................... 184 Register 15: GPIO Pull-Up Select (GPIOPUR), offset 0x510 ................................................................ 185 Register 16: GPIO Pull-Down Select (GPIOPDR), offset 0x514 ........................................................... 186 Register 17: GPIO Slew Rate Control Select (GPIOSLR), offset 0x518 ................................................ 187 Register 18: GPIO Digital Enable (GPIODEN), offset 0x51C ................................................................ 188 Register 19: GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK), offset 0x520 ............................................................................ 189 Register 20: GPIO Commit (GPIOCR), offset 0x524 ............................................................................ 190 Register 21: GPIO Peripheral Identification 4 (GPIOPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ....................................... 192 Register 22: GPIO Peripheral Identification 5 (GPIOPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ....................................... 193 Register 23: GPIO Peripheral Identification 6 (GPIOPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ....................................... 194 Register 24: GPIO Peripheral Identification 7 (GPIOPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ...................................... 195 Register 25: GPIO Peripheral Identification 0 (GPIOPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ....................................... 196 Register 26: GPIO Peripheral Identification 1 (GPIOPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ....................................... 197 Register 27: GPIO Peripheral Identification 2 (GPIOPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ....................................... 198 Register 28: GPIO Peripheral Identification 3 (GPIOPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ...................................... 199 Register 29: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 0 (GPIOPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 .......................................... 200 Register 30: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 1 (GPIOPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 .......................................... 201 Register 31: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 2 (GPIOPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 .......................................... 202 14 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents Register 32: GPIO PrimeCell Identification 3 (GPIOPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ......................................... 203 General-Purpose Timers ............................................................................................................. 204 Register 1: GPTM Configuration (GPTMCFG), offset 0x000 .............................................................. 216 Register 2: GPTM TimerA Mode (GPTMTAMR), offset 0x004 ............................................................ 217 Register 3: GPTM TimerB Mode (GPTMTBMR), offset 0x008 ............................................................ 219 Register 4: GPTM Control (GPTMCTL), offset 0x00C ........................................................................ 221 Register 5: GPTM Interrupt Mask (GPTMIMR), offset 0x018 .............................................................. 224 Register 6: GPTM Raw Interrupt Status (GPTMRIS), offset 0x01C ..................................................... 226 Register 7: GPTM Masked Interrupt Status (GPTMMIS), offset 0x020 ................................................ 227 Register 8: GPTM Interrupt Clear (GPTMICR), offset 0x024 .............................................................. 228 Register 9: GPTM TimerA Interval Load (GPTMTAILR), offset 0x028 ................................................. 230 Register 10: GPTM TimerB Interval Load (GPTMTBILR), offset 0x02C ................................................ 231 Register 11: GPTM TimerA Match (GPTMTAMATCHR), offset 0x030 ................................................... 232 Register 12: GPTM TimerB Match (GPTMTBMATCHR), offset 0x034 .................................................. 233 Register 13: GPTM TimerA Prescale (GPTMTAPR), offset 0x038 ........................................................ 234 Register 14: GPTM TimerB Prescale (GPTMTBPR), offset 0x03C ....................................................... 235 Register 15: GPTM TimerA Prescale Match (GPTMTAPMR), offset 0x040 ........................................... 236 Register 16: GPTM TimerB Prescale Match (GPTMTBPMR), offset 0x044 ........................................... 237 Register 17: GPTM TimerA (GPTMTAR), offset 0x048 ........................................................................ 238 Register 18: GPTM TimerB (GPTMTBR), offset 0x04C ....................................................................... 239 Watchdog Timer ........................................................................................................................... 240 Register 1: Watchdog Load (WDTLOAD), offset 0x000 ...................................................................... 243 Register 2: Watchdog Value (WDTVALUE), offset 0x004 ................................................................... 244 Register 3: Watchdog Control (WDTCTL), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 245 Register 4: Watchdog Interrupt Clear (WDTICR), offset 0x00C .......................................................... 246 Register 5: Watchdog Raw Interrupt Status (WDTRIS), offset 0x010 .................................................. 247 Register 6: Watchdog Masked Interrupt Status (WDTMIS), offset 0x014 ............................................. 248 Register 7: Watchdog Test (WDTTEST), offset 0x418 ....................................................................... 249 Register 8: Watchdog Lock (WDTLOCK), offset 0xC00 ..................................................................... 250 Register 9: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 4 (WDTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ................................. 251 Register 10: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 5 (WDTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ................................. 252 Register 11: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 6 (WDTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ................................. 253 Register 12: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 7 (WDTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ................................ 254 Register 13: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 0 (WDTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ................................. 255 Register 14: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 1 (WDTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ................................. 256 Register 15: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 2 (WDTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ................................. 257 Register 16: Watchdog Peripheral Identification 3 (WDTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ................................. 258 Register 17: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 0 (WDTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 .................................... 259 Register 18: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 1 (WDTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 .................................... 260 Register 19: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 2 (WDTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 .................................... 261 Register 20: Watchdog PrimeCell Identification 3 (WDTPCellID3 ), offset 0xFFC .................................. 262 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ............................................................................................. 263 Register 1: ADC Active Sample Sequencer (ADCACTSS), offset 0x000 ............................................. 271 Register 2: ADC Raw Interrupt Status (ADCRIS), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 272 Register 3: ADC Interrupt Mask (ADCIM), offset 0x008 ..................................................................... 273 Register 4: ADC Interrupt Status and Clear (ADCISC), offset 0x00C .................................................. 274 Register 5: ADC Overflow Status (ADCOSTAT), offset 0x010 ............................................................ 275 Register 6: ADC Event Multiplexer Select (ADCEMUX), offset 0x014 ................................................. 276 March 17, 2008 15 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 7: ADC Underflow Status (ADCUSTAT), offset 0x018 ........................................................... 279 Register 8: ADC Sample Sequencer Priority (ADCSSPRI), offset 0x020 ............................................. 280 Register 9: ADC Processor Sample Sequence Initiate (ADCPSSI), offset 0x028 ................................. 281 Register 10: ADC Sample Averaging Control (ADCSAC), offset 0x030 ................................................. 282 Register 11: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 0 (ADCSSMUX0), offset 0x040 ............... 283 Register 12: ADC Sample Sequence Control 0 (ADCSSCTL0), offset 0x044 ........................................ 285 Register 13: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 0 (ADCSSFIFO0), offset 0x048 ................................ 288 Register 14: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 1 (ADCSSFIFO1), offset 0x068 ................................ 288 Register 15: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 2 (ADCSSFIFO2), offset 0x088 ................................ 288 Register 16: ADC Sample Sequence Result FIFO 3 (ADCSSFIFO3), offset 0x0A8 ............................... 288 Register 17: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 0 Status (ADCSSFSTAT0), offset 0x04C ............................. 289 Register 18: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 1 Status (ADCSSFSTAT1), offset 0x06C ............................. 289 Register 19: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 2 Status (ADCSSFSTAT2), offset 0x08C ............................ 289 Register 20: ADC Sample Sequence FIFO 3 Status (ADCSSFSTAT3), offset 0x0AC ............................ 289 Register 21: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 1 (ADCSSMUX1), offset 0x060 ............... 290 Register 22: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 2 (ADCSSMUX2), offset 0x080 ............... 290 Register 23: ADC Sample Sequence Control 1 (ADCSSCTL1), offset 0x064 ........................................ 291 Register 24: ADC Sample Sequence Control 2 (ADCSSCTL2), offset 0x084 ........................................ 291 Register 25: ADC Sample Sequence Input Multiplexer Select 3 (ADCSSMUX3), offset 0x0A0 ............... 293 Register 26: ADC Sample Sequence Control 3 (ADCSSCTL3), offset 0x0A4 ........................................ 294 Register 27: ADC Test Mode Loopback (ADCTMLB), offset 0x100 ....................................................... 295 Universal Asynchronous Receivers/Transmitters (UARTs) ..................................................... 296 Register 1: UART Data (UARTDR), offset 0x000 ............................................................................... 304 Register 2: UART Receive Status/Error Clear (UARTRSR/UARTECR), offset 0x004 ........................... 306 Register 3: UART Flag (UARTFR), offset 0x018 ................................................................................ 308 Register 4: UART IrDA Low-Power Register (UARTILPR), offset 0x020 ............................................. 310 Register 5: UART Integer Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTIBRD), offset 0x024 ............................................ 311 Register 6: UART Fractional Baud-Rate Divisor (UARTFBRD), offset 0x028 ....................................... 312 Register 7: UART Line Control (UARTLCRH), offset 0x02C ............................................................... 313 Register 8: UART Control (UARTCTL), offset 0x030 ......................................................................... 315 Register 9: UART Interrupt FIFO Level Select (UARTIFLS), offset 0x034 ........................................... 317 Register 10: UART Interrupt Mask (UARTIM), offset 0x038 ................................................................. 319 Register 11: UART Raw Interrupt Status (UARTRIS), offset 0x03C ...................................................... 321 Register 12: UART Masked Interrupt Status (UARTMIS), offset 0x040 ................................................. 322 Register 13: UART Interrupt Clear (UARTICR), offset 0x044 ............................................................... 323 Register 14: UART Peripheral Identification 4 (UARTPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ..................................... 325 Register 15: UART Peripheral Identification 5 (UARTPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ..................................... 326 Register 16: UART Peripheral Identification 6 (UARTPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ..................................... 327 Register 17: UART Peripheral Identification 7 (UARTPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ..................................... 328 Register 18: UART Peripheral Identification 0 (UARTPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ...................................... 329 Register 19: UART Peripheral Identification 1 (UARTPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ...................................... 330 Register 20: UART Peripheral Identification 2 (UARTPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ...................................... 331 Register 21: UART Peripheral Identification 3 (UARTPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ..................................... 332 Register 22: UART PrimeCell Identification 0 (UARTPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 ........................................ 333 Register 23: UART PrimeCell Identification 1 (UARTPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 ........................................ 334 Register 24: UART PrimeCell Identification 2 (UARTPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 ........................................ 335 Register 25: UART PrimeCell Identification 3 (UARTPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ........................................ 336 16 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) ............................................................................................ 337 Register 1: SSI Control 0 (SSICR0), offset 0x000 .............................................................................. 349 Register 2: SSI Control 1 (SSICR1), offset 0x004 .............................................................................. 351 Register 3: SSI Data (SSIDR), offset 0x008 ...................................................................................... 353 Register 4: SSI Status (SSISR), offset 0x00C ................................................................................... 354 Register 5: SSI Clock Prescale (SSICPSR), offset 0x010 .................................................................. 356 Register 6: SSI Interrupt Mask (SSIIM), offset 0x014 ......................................................................... 357 Register 7: SSI Raw Interrupt Status (SSIRIS), offset 0x018 .............................................................. 359 Register 8: SSI Masked Interrupt Status (SSIMIS), offset 0x01C ........................................................ 360 Register 9: SSI Interrupt Clear (SSIICR), offset 0x020 ....................................................................... 361 Register 10: SSI Peripheral Identification 4 (SSIPeriphID4), offset 0xFD0 ............................................. 362 Register 11: SSI Peripheral Identification 5 (SSIPeriphID5), offset 0xFD4 ............................................. 363 Register 12: SSI Peripheral Identification 6 (SSIPeriphID6), offset 0xFD8 ............................................. 364 Register 13: SSI Peripheral Identification 7 (SSIPeriphID7), offset 0xFDC ............................................ 365 Register 14: SSI Peripheral Identification 0 (SSIPeriphID0), offset 0xFE0 ............................................. 366 Register 15: SSI Peripheral Identification 1 (SSIPeriphID1), offset 0xFE4 ............................................. 367 Register 16: SSI Peripheral Identification 2 (SSIPeriphID2), offset 0xFE8 ............................................. 368 Register 17: SSI Peripheral Identification 3 (SSIPeriphID3), offset 0xFEC ............................................ 369 Register 18: SSI PrimeCell Identification 0 (SSIPCellID0), offset 0xFF0 ............................................... 370 Register 19: SSI PrimeCell Identification 1 (SSIPCellID1), offset 0xFF4 ............................................... 371 Register 20: SSI PrimeCell Identification 2 (SSIPCellID2), offset 0xFF8 ............................................... 372 Register 21: SSI PrimeCell Identification 3 (SSIPCellID3), offset 0xFFC ............................................... 373 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface ........................................................................................ 374 Register 1: I2C Master Slave Address (I2CMSA), offset 0x000 ........................................................... 388 Register 2: I2C Master Control/Status (I2CMCS), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 389 Register 3: I2C Master Data (I2CMDR), offset 0x008 ......................................................................... 393 Register 4: I2C Master Timer Period (I2CMTPR), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 394 Register 5: I2C Master Interrupt Mask (I2CMIMR), offset 0x010 ......................................................... 395 Register 6: I2C Master Raw Interrupt Status (I2CMRIS), offset 0x014 ................................................. 396 Register 7: I2C Master Masked Interrupt Status (I2CMMIS), offset 0x018 ........................................... 397 Register 8: I2C Master Interrupt Clear (I2CMICR), offset 0x01C ......................................................... 398 Register 9: I2C Master Configuration (I2CMCR), offset 0x020 ............................................................ 399 Register 10: I2C Slave Own Address (I2CSOAR), offset 0x000 ............................................................ 401 Register 11: I2C Slave Control/Status (I2CSCSR), offset 0x004 ........................................................... 402 Register 12: I2C Slave Data (I2CSDR), offset 0x008 ........................................................................... 404 Register 13: I2C Slave Interrupt Mask (I2CSIMR), offset 0x00C ........................................................... 405 Register 14: I2C Slave Raw Interrupt Status (I2CSRIS), offset 0x010 ................................................... 406 Register 15: I2C Slave Masked Interrupt Status (I2CSMIS), offset 0x014 .............................................. 407 Register 16: I2C Slave Interrupt Clear (I2CSICR), offset 0x018 ............................................................ 408 Controller Area Network (CAN) Module ..................................................................................... 409 Register 1: CAN Control (CANCTL), offset 0x000 ............................................................................. 422 Register 2: CAN Status (CANSTS), offset 0x004 ............................................................................... 424 Register 3: CAN Error Counter (CANERR), offset 0x008 ................................................................... 427 Register 4: CAN Bit Timing (CANBIT), offset 0x00C .......................................................................... 428 Register 5: CAN Interrupt (CANINT), offset 0x010 ............................................................................. 430 Register 6: CAN Test (CANTST), offset 0x014 .................................................................................. 431 Register 7: CAN Baud Rate Prescalar Extension (CANBRPE), offset 0x018 ....................................... 433 March 17, 2008 17 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 8: CAN IF1 Command Request (CANIF1CRQ), offset 0x020 ................................................ 434 Register 9: CAN IF2 Command Request (CANIF2CRQ), offset 0x080 ................................................ 434 Register 10: CAN IF1 Command Mask (CANIF1CMSK), offset 0x024 .................................................. 435 Register 11: CAN IF2 Command Mask (CANIF2CMSK), offset 0x084 .................................................. 435 Register 12: CAN IF1 Mask 1 (CANIF1MSK1), offset 0x028 ................................................................ 438 Register 13: CAN IF2 Mask 1 (CANIF2MSK1), offset 0x088 ................................................................ 438 Register 14: CAN IF1 Mask 2 (CANIF1MSK2), offset 0x02C ................................................................ 439 Register 15: CAN IF2 Mask 2 (CANIF2MSK2), offset 0x08C ................................................................ 439 Register 16: CAN IF1 Arbitration 1 (CANIF1ARB1), offset 0x030 ......................................................... 440 Register 17: CAN IF2 Arbitration 1 (CANIF2ARB1), offset 0x090 ......................................................... 440 Register 18: CAN IF1 Arbitration 2 (CANIF1ARB2), offset 0x034 ......................................................... 441 Register 19: CAN IF2 Arbitration 2 (CANIF2ARB2), offset 0x094 ......................................................... 441 Register 20: CAN IF1 Message Control (CANIF1MCTL), offset 0x038 .................................................. 442 Register 21: CAN IF2 Message Control (CANIF2MCTL), offset 0x098 .................................................. 442 Register 22: CAN IF1 Data A1 (CANIF1DA1), offset 0x03C ................................................................. 444 Register 23: CAN IF1 Data A2 (CANIF1DA2), offset 0x040 ................................................................. 444 Register 24: CAN IF1 Data B1 (CANIF1DB1), offset 0x044 ................................................................. 444 Register 25: CAN IF1 Data B2 (CANIF1DB2), offset 0x048 ................................................................. 444 Register 26: CAN IF2 Data A1 (CANIF2DA1), offset 0x09C ................................................................. 444 Register 27: CAN IF2 Data A2 (CANIF2DA2), offset 0x0A0 ................................................................. 444 Register 28: CAN IF2 Data B1 (CANIF2DB1), offset 0x0A4 ................................................................. 444 Register 29: CAN IF2 Data B2 (CANIF2DB2), offset 0x0A8 ................................................................. 444 Register 30: CAN Transmission Request 1 (CANTXRQ1), offset 0x100 ................................................ 445 Register 31: CAN Transmission Request 2 (CANTXRQ2), offset 0x104 ................................................ 445 Register 32: CAN New Data 1 (CANNWDA1), offset 0x120 ................................................................. 446 Register 33: CAN New Data 2 (CANNWDA2), offset 0x124 ................................................................. 446 Register 34: CAN Message 1 Interrupt Pending (CANMSG1INT), offset 0x140 ..................................... 447 Register 35: CAN Message 2 Interrupt Pending (CANMSG2INT), offset 0x144 ..................................... 447 Register 36: CAN Message 1 Valid (CANMSG1VAL), offset 0x160 ....................................................... 448 Register 37: CAN Message 2 Valid (CANMSG2VAL), offset 0x164 ....................................................... 448 Ethernet Controller ...................................................................................................................... 449 Register 1: Ethernet MAC Raw Interrupt Status (MACRIS), offset 0x000 ............................................ 458 Register 2: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Acknowledge (MACIACK), offset 0x000 ....................................... 460 Register 3: Ethernet MAC Interrupt Mask (MACIM), offset 0x004 ....................................................... 461 Register 4: Ethernet MAC Receive Control (MACRCTL), offset 0x008 ................................................ 462 Register 5: Ethernet MAC Transmit Control (MACTCTL), offset 0x00C ............................................... 463 Register 6: Ethernet MAC Data (MACDATA), offset 0x010 ................................................................. 464 Register 7: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 0 (MACIA0), offset 0x014 ............................................. 466 Register 8: Ethernet MAC Individual Address 1 (MACIA1), offset 0x018 ............................................. 467 Register 9: Ethernet MAC Threshold (MACTHR), offset 0x01C .......................................................... 468 Register 10: Ethernet MAC Management Control (MACMCTL), offset 0x020 ........................................ 469 Register 11: Ethernet MAC Management Divider (MACMDV), offset 0x024 .......................................... 470 Register 12: Ethernet MAC Management Transmit Data (MACMTXD), offset 0x02C ............................. 471 Register 13: Ethernet MAC Management Receive Data (MACMRXD), offset 0x030 .............................. 472 Register 14: Ethernet MAC Number of Packets (MACNP), offset 0x034 ............................................... 473 Register 15: Ethernet MAC Transmission Request (MACTR), offset 0x038 ........................................... 474 Register 16: Ethernet MAC Timer Support (MACTS), offset 0x03C ...................................................... 475 Register 17: Ethernet PHY Management Register 0 – Control (MR0), address 0x00 ............................. 476 18 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Table of Contents Register 18: Ethernet PHY Management Register 1 – Status (MR1), address 0x01 .............................. 478 Register 19: Ethernet PHY Management Register 2 – PHY Identifier 1 (MR2), address 0x02 ................. 480 Register 20: Ethernet PHY Management Register 3 – PHY Identifier 2 (MR3), address 0x03 ................. 481 Register 21: Ethernet PHY Management Register 4 – Auto-Negotiation Advertisement (MR4), address 0x04 ............................................................................................................................. 482 Register 22: Ethernet PHY Management Register 5 – Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability (MR5), address 0x05 ..................................................................................................... 484 Register 23: Ethernet PHY Management Register 6 – Auto-Negotiation Expansion (MR6), address 0x06 ............................................................................................................................. 485 Register 24: Ethernet PHY Management Register 16 – Vendor-Specific (MR16), address 0x10 ............. 486 Register 25: Ethernet PHY Management Register 17 – Interrupt Control/Status (MR17), address 0x11 .............................................................................................................................. 488 Register 26: Ethernet PHY Management Register 18 – Diagnostic (MR18), address 0x12 ..................... 490 Register 27: Ethernet PHY Management Register 19 – Transceiver Control (MR19), address 0x13 ....... 491 Register 28: Ethernet PHY Management Register 23 – LED Configuration (MR23), address 0x17 ......... 492 Register 29: Ethernet PHY Management Register 24 –MDI/MDIX Control (MR24), address 0x18 .......... 493 Analog Comparators ................................................................................................................... 494 Register 1: Analog Comparator Masked Interrupt Status (ACMIS), offset 0x00 .................................... 500 Register 2: Analog Comparator Raw Interrupt Status (ACRIS), offset 0x04 ......................................... 501 Register 3: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable (ACINTEN), offset 0x08 ........................................... 502 Register 4: Analog Comparator Reference Voltage Control (ACREFCTL), offset 0x10 ......................... 503 Register 5: Analog Comparator Status 0 (ACSTAT0), offset 0x20 ....................................................... 504 Register 6: Analog Comparator Status 1 (ACSTAT1), offset 0x40 ....................................................... 504 Register 7: Analog Comparator Status 2 (ACSTAT2), offset 0x60 ....................................................... 504 Register 8: Analog Comparator Control 0 (ACCTL0), offset 0x24 ....................................................... 505 Register 9: Analog Comparator Control 1 (ACCTL1), offset 0x44 ....................................................... 505 Register 10: Analog Comparator Control 2 (ACCTL2), offset 0x64 ...................................................... 505 March 17, 2008 19 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller About This Document This data sheet provides reference information for the LM3S8933 microcontroller, describing the functional blocks of the system-on-chip (SoC) device designed around the ARM® Cortex™-M3 core. Audience This manual is intended for system software developers, hardware designers, and application developers. About This Manual This document is organized into sections that correspond to each major feature. Related Documents The following documents are referenced by the data sheet, and available on the documentation CD or from the Luminary Micro web site at www.luminarymicro.com: ■ ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual ■ ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual ■ ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual The following related documents are also referenced: ■ IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture This documentation list was current as of publication date. Please check the Luminary Micro web site for additional documentation, including application notes and white papers. Documentation Conventions This document uses the conventions shown in Table 1 on page 20. Table 1. Documentation Conventions Notation Meaning General Register Notation APB registers are indicated in uppercase bold. For example, PBORCTL is the Power-On and Brown-Out Reset Control register. If a register name contains a lowercase n, it represents more than one register. For example, SRCRn represents any (or all) of the three Software Reset Control registers: SRCR0, SRCR1 , and SRCR2. REGISTER bit A single bit in a register. bit field Two or more consecutive and related bits. A hexadecimal increment to a register's address, relative to that module's base address as specified in “Memory Map” on page 41. offset 0xnnn Registers are numbered consecutively throughout the document to aid in referencing them. The register number has no meaning to software. Register N 20 March 17, 2008 Preliminary About This Document Notation Meaning Register bits marked reserved are reserved for future use. In most cases, reserved bits are set to 0; however, user software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide software compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. reserved The range of register bits inclusive from xx to yy. For example, 31:15 means bits 15 through 31 in that register. yy:xx This value in the register bit diagram indicates whether software running on the controller can change the value of the bit field. Register Bit/Field Types RC Software can read this field. The bit or field is cleared by hardware after reading the bit/field. RO Software can read this field. Always write the chip reset value. R/W Software can read or write this field. Software can read or write this field. A write of a 0 to a W1C bit does not affect the bit value in the register. A write of a 1 clears the value of the bit in the register; the remaining bits remain unchanged. This register type is primarily used for clearing interrupt status bits where the read operation provides the interrupt status and the write of the read value clears only the interrupts being reported at the time the register was read. R/W1C Software can read or write a 1 to this field. A write of a 0 to a R/W1S bit does not affect the bit value in the register. R/W1S Software can write this field. A write of a 0 to a W1C bit does not affect the bit value in the register. A write of a 1 clears the value of the bit in the register; the remaining bits remain unchanged. A read of the register returns no meaningful data. This register is typically used to clear the corresponding bit in an interrupt register. W1C WO Only a write by software is valid; a read of the register returns no meaningful data. Register Bit/Field This value in the register bit diagram shows the bit/field value after any reset, unless noted. Reset Value 0 Bit cleared to 0 on chip reset. 1 Bit set to 1 on chip reset. - Nondeterministic. Pin/Signal Notation [ ] Pin alternate function; a pin defaults to the signal without the brackets. pin Refers to the physical connection on the package. signal Refers to the electrical signal encoding of a pin. Change the value of the signal from the logically False state to the logically True state. For active High signals, the asserted signal value is 1 (High); for active Low signals, the asserted signal value is 0 (Low). The active polarity (High or Low) is defined by the signal name (see SIGNAL and SIGNAL below). assert a signal deassert a signal Change the value of the signal from the logically True state to the logically False state. Signal names are in uppercase and in the Courier font. An overbar on a signal name indicates that it is active Low. To assert SIGNAL is to drive it Low; to deassert SIGNAL is to drive it High. SIGNAL Signal names are in uppercase and in the Courier font. An active High signal has no overbar. To assert SIGNAL is to drive it High; to deassert SIGNAL is to drive it Low. SIGNAL Numbers An uppercase X indicates any of several values is allowed, where X can be any legal pattern. For example, a binary value of 0X00 can be either 0100 or 0000, a hex value of 0xX is 0x0 or 0x1, and so on. X Hexadecimal numbers have a prefix of 0x. For example, 0x00FF is the hexadecimal number FF. All other numbers within register tables are assumed to be binary. Within conceptual information, binary numbers are indicated with a b suffix, for example, 1011b, and decimal numbers are written without a prefix or suffix. 0x March 17, 2008 21 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 1 Architectural Overview The Luminary Micro Stellaris® family of microcontrollers—the first ARM® Cortex™-M3 based controllers—brings high-performance 32-bit computing to cost-sensitive embedded microcontroller applications. These pioneering parts deliver customers 32-bit performance at a cost equivalent to legacy 8- and 16-bit devices, all in a package with a small footprint. The Stellaris® family offers efficient performance and extensive integration, favorably positioning the device into cost-conscious applications requiring significant control-processing and connectivity capabilities. The Stellaris® LM3S8000 series combines Bosch Controller Area Network technology with both a 10/100 Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY) layer. The LM3S8933 microcontroller is targeted for industrial applications, including remote monitoring, electronic point-of-sale machines, test and measurement equipment, network appliances and switches, factory automation, HVAC and building control, gaming equipment, motion control, medical instrumentation, and fire and security. For applications requiring extreme conservation of power, the LM3S8933 microcontroller features a Battery-backed Hibernation module to efficiently power down the LM3S8933 to a low-power state during extended periods of inactivity. With a power-up/power-down sequencer, a continuous time counter (RTC), a pair of match registers, an APB interface to the system bus, and dedicated non-volatile memory, the Hibernation module positions the LM3S8933 microcontroller perfectly for battery applications. In addition, the LM3S8933 microcontroller offers the advantages of ARM's widely available development tools, System-on-Chip (SoC) infrastructure IP applications, and a large user community. Additionally, the microcontroller uses ARM's Thumb®-compatible Thumb-2 instruction set to reduce memory requirements and, thereby, cost. Finally, the LM3S8933 microcontroller is code-compatible to all members of the extensive Stellaris® family; providing flexibility to fit our customers' precise needs. Luminary Micro offers a complete solution to get to market quickly, with evaluation and development boards, white papers and application notes, an easy-to-use peripheral driver library, and a strong support, sales, and distributor network. See “Ordering and Contact Information” on page 578 for ordering information for Stellaris® family devices. 1.1 Product Features The LM3S8933 microcontroller includes the following product features: ■ 32-Bit RISC Performance – 32-bit ARM® Cortex™-M3 v7M architecture optimized for small-footprint embedded applications – System timer (SysTick), providing a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism – Thumb®-compatible Thumb-2-only instruction set processor core for high code density – 50-MHz operation – Hardware-division and single-cycle-multiplication 22 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview – Integrated Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) providing deterministic interrupt handling – 32 interrupts with eight priority levels – Memory protection unit (MPU), providing a privileged mode for protected operating system functionality – Unaligned data access, enabling data to be efficiently packed into memory – Atomic bit manipulation (bit-banding), delivering maximum memory utilization and streamlined peripheral control ■ Internal Memory – 256 KB single-cycle flash • User-managed flash block protection on a 2-KB block basis • User-managed flash data programming • User-defined and managed flash-protection block – 64 KB single-cycle SRAM ■ General-Purpose Timers – Four General-Purpose Timer Modules (GPTM), each of which provides two 16-bit timers. Each GPTM can be configured to operate independently: • As a single 32-bit timer • As one 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC) to event capture • For Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) • To trigger analog-to-digital conversions – 32-bit Timer modes • Programmable one-shot timer • Programmable periodic timer • Real-Time Clock when using an external 32.768-KHz clock as the input • User-enabled stalling in periodic and one-shot mode when the controller asserts the CPU Halt flag during debug • ADC event trigger – 16-bit Timer modes • General-purpose timer function with an 8-bit prescaler • Programmable one-shot timer March 17, 2008 23 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller • Programmable periodic timer • User-enabled stalling when the controller asserts CPU Halt flag during debug • ADC event trigger – 16-bit Input Capture modes • Input edge count capture • Input edge time capture – 16-bit PWM mode • Simple PWM mode with software-programmable output inversion of the PWM signal ■ ARM FiRM-compliant Watchdog Timer – 32-bit down counter with a programmable load register – Separate watchdog clock with an enable – Programmable interrupt generation logic with interrupt masking – Lock register protection from runaway software – Reset generation logic with an enable/disable – User-enabled stalling when the controller asserts the CPU Halt flag during debug ■ Controller Area Network (CAN) – Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 part A/B – Bit rates up to 1Mb/s – 32 message objects, each with its own identifier mask – Maskable interrupt – Disable automatic retransmission mode for TTCAN – Programmable loop-back mode for self-test operation ■ 10/100 Ethernet Controller – Conforms to the IEEE 802.3-2002 Specification – Hardware assistance for IEEE 1588-2002 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) – Full- and half-duplex for both 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps operation – Integrated 10/100 Mbps Transceiver (PHY) – Automatic MDI/MDI-X cross-over correction – Programmable MAC address 24 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview – Power-saving and power-down modes ■ Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) – Master or slave operation – Programmable clock bit rate and prescale – Separate transmit and receive FIFOs, 16 bits wide, 8 locations deep – Programmable interface operation for Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or Texas Instruments synchronous serial interfaces – Programmable data frame size from 4 to 16 bits – Internal loopback test mode for diagnostic/debug testing ■ UART – Two fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs with IrDA support – Separate 16x8 transmit (TX) and 16x12 receive (RX) FIFOs to reduce CPU interrupt service loading – Programmable baud-rate generator allowing speeds up to 3.125 Mbps – Programmable FIFO length, including 1-byte deep operation providing conventional double-buffered interface – FIFO trigger levels of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 – Standard asynchronous communication bits for start, stop, and parity – False-start-bit detection – Line-break generation and detection ■ ADC – Single- and differential-input configurations – Four 10-bit channels (inputs) when used as single-ended inputs – Sample rate of one million samples/second – Flexible, configurable analog-to-digital conversion – Four programmable sample conversion sequences from one to eight entries long, with corresponding conversion result FIFOs – Each sequence triggered by software or internal event (timers, analog comparators, or GPIO) – On-chip temperature sensor ■ Analog Comparators – Three independent integrated analog comparators March 17, 2008 25 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller – Configurable for output to: drive an output pin, generate an interrupt, or initiate an ADC sample sequence – Compare external pin input to external pin input or to internal programmable voltage reference ■ I2C – Master and slave receive and transmit operation with transmission speed up to 100 Kbps in Standard mode and 400 Kbps in Fast mode – Interrupt generation – Master with arbitration and clock synchronization, multimaster support, and 7-bit addressing mode ■ GPIOs – 6-36 GPIOs, depending on configuration – 5-V-tolerant input/outputs – Programmable interrupt generation as either edge-triggered or level-sensitive – Bit masking in both read and write operations through address lines – Can initiate an ADC sample sequence – Programmable control for GPIO pad configuration: • Weak pull-up or pull-down resistors • 2-mA, 4-mA, and 8-mA pad drive • Slew rate control for the 8-mA drive • Open drain enables • Digital input enables ■ Power – On-chip Low Drop-Out (LDO) voltage regulator, with programmable output user-adjustable from 2.25 V to 2.75 V – Hibernation module handles the power-up/down 3.3 V sequencing and control for the core digital logic and analog circuits – Low-power options on controller: Sleep and Deep-sleep modes – Low-power options for peripherals: software controls shutdown of individual peripherals – User-enabled LDO unregulated voltage detection and automatic reset – 3.3-V supply brown-out detection and reporting via interrupt or reset ■ Flexible Reset Sources 26 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview – Power-on reset (POR) – Reset pin assertion – Brown-out (BOR) detector alerts to system power drops – Software reset – Watchdog timer reset – Internal low drop-out (LDO) regulator output goes unregulated ■ Additional Features – Six reset sources – Programmable clock source control – Clock gating to individual peripherals for power savings – IEEE 1149.1-1990 compliant Test Access Port (TAP) controller – Debug access via JTAG and Serial Wire interfaces – Full JTAG boundary scan ■ Industrial and extended temperature 100-pin RoHS-compliant LQFP package ■ Industrial-range 108-ball RoHS-compliant BGA package 1.2 Target Applications ■ Remote monitoring ■ Electronic point-of-sale (POS) machines ■ Test and measurement equipment ■ Network appliances and switches ■ Factory automation ■ HVAC and building control ■ Gaming equipment ■ Motion control ■ Medical instrumentation ■ Fire and security ■ Power and energy ■ Transportation March 17, 2008 27 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 1.3 High-Level Block Diagram Figure 1-1 on page 28 represents the full set of features in the Stellaris® 8000 series of devices; not all features may be available on the LM3S8933 microcontroller. Figure 1-1. Stellaris® 8000 Series High-Level Block Diagram 1.4 Functional Overview The following sections provide an overview of the features of the LM3S8933 microcontroller. The page number in parenthesis indicates where that feature is discussed in detail. Ordering and support information can be found in “Ordering and Contact Information” on page 578. 28 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview 1.4.1 ARM Cortex™-M3 1.4.1.1 Processor Core (see page 35) All members of the Stellaris® product family, including the LM3S8933 microcontroller, are designed around an ARM Cortex™-M3 processor core. The ARM Cortex-M3 processor provides the core for a high-performance, low-cost platform that meets the needs of minimal memory implementation, reduced pin count, and low-power consumption, while delivering outstanding computational performance and exceptional system response to interrupts. “ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core” on page 35 provides an overview of the ARM core; the core is detailed in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 1.4.1.2 System Timer (SysTick) Cortex-M3 includes an integrated system timer, SysTick. SysTick provides a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism. The counter can be used in several different ways, for example: ■ An RTOS tick timer which fires at a programmable rate (for example, 100 Hz) and invokes a SysTick routine. ■ A high-speed alarm timer using the system clock. ■ A variable rate alarm or signal timer—the duration is range-dependent on the reference clock used and the dynamic range of the counter. ■ A simple counter. Software can use this to measure time to completion and time used. ■ An internal clock source control based on missing/meeting durations. The COUNTFLAG bit-field in the control and status register can be used to determine if an action completed within a set duration, as part of a dynamic clock management control loop. 1.4.1.3 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) The LM3S8933 controller includes the ARM Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) on the ARM Cortex-M3 core. The NVIC and Cortex-M3 prioritize and handle all exceptions. All exceptions are handled in Handler Mode. The processor state is automatically stored to the stack on an exception, and automatically restored from the stack at the end of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). The vector is fetched in parallel to the state saving, which enables efficient interrupt entry. The processor supports tail-chaining, which enables back-to-back interrupts to be performed without the overhead of state saving and restoration. Software can set eight priority levels on 7 exceptions (system handlers) and 32 interrupts. “Interrupts” on page 43 provides an overview of the NVIC controller and the interrupt map. Exceptions and interrupts are detailed in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 1.4.2 Motor Control Peripherals To enhance motor control, the LM3S8933 controller features Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) outputs. 1.4.2.1 PWM Pulse width modulation (PWM) is a powerful technique for digitally encoding analog signal levels. High-resolution counters are used to generate a square wave, and the duty cycle of the square wave is modulated to encode an analog signal. Typical applications include switching power supplies and motor control. March 17, 2008 29 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller On the LM3S8933, PWM motion control functionality can be achieved through: ■ The motion control features of the general-purpose timers using the CCP pins CCP Pins (see page 210) The General-Purpose Timer Module's CCP (Capture Compare PWM) pins are software programmable to support a simple PWM mode with a software-programmable output inversion of the PWM signal. 1.4.3 Analog Peripherals To handle analog signals, the LM3S8933 microcontroller offers an Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC). For support of analog signals, the LM3S8933 microcontroller offers three analog comparators. 1.4.3.1 ADC (see page 263) An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is a peripheral that converts a continuous analog voltage to a discrete digital number. The LM3S8933 ADC module features 10-bit conversion resolution and supports four input channels, plus an internal temperature sensor. Four buffered sample sequences allow rapid sampling of up to eight analog input sources without controller intervention. Each sample sequence provides flexible programming with fully configurable input source, trigger events, interrupt generation, and sequence priority. 1.4.3.2 Analog Comparators (see page 494) An analog comparator is a peripheral that compares two analog voltages, and provides a logical output that signals the comparison result. The LM3S8933 microcontroller provides three independent integrated analog comparators that can be configured to drive an output or generate an interrupt or ADC event. A comparator can compare a test voltage against any one of these voltages: ■ An individual external reference voltage ■ A shared single external reference voltage ■ A shared internal reference voltage The comparator can provide its output to a device pin, acting as a replacement for an analog comparator on the board, or it can be used to signal the application via interrupts or triggers to the ADC to cause it to start capturing a sample sequence. The interrupt generation and ADC triggering logic is separate. This means, for example, that an interrupt can be generated on a rising edge and the ADC triggered on a falling edge. 1.4.4 Serial Communications Peripherals The LM3S8933 controller supports both asynchronous and synchronous serial communications with: ■ Two fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs ■ One SSI module ■ One I2C module 30 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview ■ One CAN unit ■ Ethernet controller 1.4.4.1 UART (see page 296) A Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) is an integrated circuit used for RS-232C serial communications, containing a transmitter (parallel-to-serial converter) and a receiver (serial-to-parallel converter), each clocked separately. The LM3S8933 controller includes two fully programmable 16C550-type UARTs that support data transfer speeds up to 3.125 Mbps. (Although similar in functionality to a 16C550 UART, it is not register-compatible.) In addition, each UART is capable of supporting IrDA. Separate 16x8 transmit (TX) and 16x12 receive (RX) FIFOs reduce CPU interrupt service loading. The UART can generate individually masked interrupts from the RX, TX, modem status, and error conditions. The module provides a single combined interrupt when any of the interrupts are asserted and are unmasked. 1.4.4.2 SSI (see page 337) Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) is a four-wire bi-directional communications interface. The LM3S8933 controller includes one SSI module that provides the functionality for synchronous serial communications with peripheral devices, and can be configured to use the Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE, or TI synchronous serial interface frame formats. The size of the data frame is also configurable, and can be set between 4 and 16 bits, inclusive. The SSI module performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device, and parallel-to-serial conversion on data transmitted to a peripheral device. The TX and RX paths are buffered with internal FIFOs, allowing up to eight 16-bit values to be stored independently. The SSI module can be configured as either a master or slave device. As a slave device, the SSI module can also be configured to disable its output, which allows a master device to be coupled with multiple slave devices. The SSI module also includes a programmable bit rate clock divider and prescaler to generate the output serial clock derived from the SSI module's input clock. Bit rates are generated based on the input clock and the maximum bit rate is determined by the connected peripheral. 1.4.4.3 I2C (see page 374) The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus provides bi-directional data transfer through a two-wire design (a serial data line SDA and a serial clock line SCL). The I2C bus interfaces to external I2C devices such as serial memory (RAMs and ROMs), networking devices, LCDs, tone generators, and so on. The I2C bus may also be used for system testing and diagnostic purposes in product development and manufacture. The LM3S8933 controller includes one I2C module that provides the ability to communicate to other IC devices over an I2C bus. The I2C bus supports devices that can both transmit and receive (write and read) data. Devices on the I2C bus can be designated as either a master or a slave. The I2C module supports both sending and receiving data as either a master or a slave, and also supports the simultaneous operation as both a master and a slave. The four I2C modes are: Master Transmit, Master Receive, Slave Transmit, and Slave Receive. A Stellaris® I2C module can operate at two speeds: Standard (100 Kbps) and Fast (400 Kbps). March 17, 2008 31 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Both the I2C master and slave can generate interrupts. The I2C master generates interrupts when a transmit or receive operation completes (or aborts due to an error). The I2C slave generates interrupts when data has been sent or requested by a master. 1.4.4.4 Controller Area Network (see page 409) Controller Area Network (CAN) is a multicast shared serial-bus standard for connecting electronic control units (ECUs). CAN was specifically designed to be robust in electromagnetically noisy environments and can utilize a differential balanced line like RS-485 or a more robust twisted-pair wire. Originally created for automotive purposes, now it is used in many embedded control applications (for example, industrial or medical). Bit rates up to 1Mb/s are possible at network lengths below 40 meters. Decreased bit rates allow longer network distances (for example, 125 Kb/s at 500m). A transmitter sends a message to all CAN nodes (broadcasting). Each node decides on the basis of the identifier received whether it should process the message. The identifier also determines the priority that the message enjoys in competition for bus access. Each CAN message can transmit from 0 to 8 bytes of user information. The LM3S8933 includes one CAN units. 1.4.4.5 Ethernet Controller (see page 449) Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Ethernet has been standardized as IEEE 802.3. It defines a number of wiring and signaling standards for the physical layer, two means of network access at the Media Access Control (MAC)/Data Link Layer, and a common addressing format. The Stellaris® Ethernet Controller consists of a fully integrated media access controller (MAC) and network physical (PHY) interface device. The Ethernet Controller conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications and fully supports 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX standards. In addition, the Ethernet Controller supports automatic MDI/MDI-X cross-over correction. 1.4.5 System Peripherals 1.4.5.1 Programmable GPIOs (see page 162) General-purpose input/output (GPIO) pins offer flexibility for a variety of connections. The Stellaris® GPIO module is comprised of seven physical GPIO blocks, each corresponding to an individual GPIO port. The GPIO module is FiRM-compliant (compliant to the ARM Foundation IP for Real-Time Microcontrollers specification) and supports 6-36 programmable input/output pins. The number of GPIOs available depends on the peripherals being used (see “Signal Tables” on page 509 for the signals available to each GPIO pin). The GPIO module features programmable interrupt generation as either edge-triggered or level-sensitive on all pins, programmable control for GPIO pad configuration, and bit masking in both read and write operations through address lines. 1.4.5.2 Four Programmable Timers (see page 204) Programmable timers can be used to count or time external events that drive the Timer input pins. The Stellaris® General-Purpose Timer Module (GPTM) contains four GPTM blocks. Each GPTM block provides two 16-bit timers/counters that can be configured to operate independently as timers or event counters, or configured to operate as one 32-bit timer or one 32-bit Real-Time Clock (RTC). Timers can also be used to trigger analog-to-digital (ADC) conversions. When configured in 32-bit mode, a timer can run as a Real-Time Clock (RTC), one-shot timer or periodic timer. When in 16-bit mode, a timer can run as a one-shot timer or periodic timer, and can 32 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview extend its precision by using an 8-bit prescaler. A 16-bit timer can also be configured for event capture or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) generation. 1.4.5.3 Watchdog Timer (see page 240) A watchdog timer can generate nonmaskable interrupts (NMIs) or a reset when a time-out value is reached. The watchdog timer is used to regain control when a system has failed due to a software error or to the failure of an external device to respond in the expected way. The Stellaris® Watchdog Timer module consists of a 32-bit down counter, a programmable load register, interrupt generation logic, and a locking register. The Watchdog Timer can be configured to generate an interrupt to the controller on its first time-out, and to generate a reset signal on its second time-out. Once the Watchdog Timer has been configured, the lock register can be written to prevent the timer configuration from being inadvertently altered. 1.4.6 Memory Peripherals The LM3S8933 controller offers both single-cycle SRAM and single-cycle Flash memory. 1.4.6.1 SRAM (see page 138) The LM3S8933 static random access memory (SRAM) controller supports 64 KB SRAM. The internal SRAM of the Stellaris® devices is located at offset 0x0000.0000 of the device memory map. To reduce the number of time-consuming read-modify-write (RMW) operations, ARM has introduced bit-banding technology in the new Cortex-M3 processor. With a bit-band-enabled processor, certain regions in the memory map (SRAM and peripheral space) can use address aliases to access individual bits in a single, atomic operation. 1.4.6.2 Flash (see page 139) The LM3S8933 Flash controller supports 256 KB of flash memory. The flash is organized as a set of 1-KB blocks that can be individually erased. Erasing a block causes the entire contents of the block to be reset to all 1s. These blocks are paired into a set of 2-KB blocks that can be individually protected. The blocks can be marked as read-only or execute-only, providing different levels of code protection. Read-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, protecting the contents of those blocks from being modified. Execute-only blocks cannot be erased or programmed, and can only be read by the controller instruction fetch mechanism, protecting the contents of those blocks from being read by either the controller or by a debugger. 1.4.7 Additional Features 1.4.7.1 Memory Map (see page 41) A memory map lists the location of instructions and data in memory. The memory map for the LM3S8933 controller can be found in “Memory Map” on page 41. Register addresses are given as a hexadecimal increment, relative to the module's base address as shown in the memory map. The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual provides further information on the memory map. 1.4.7.2 JTAG TAP Controller (see page 46) The Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) port is an IEEE standard that defines a Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture for digital integrated circuits and provides a standardized serial interface for controlling the associated test logic. The TAP, Instruction Register (IR), and Data Registers (DR) can be used to test the interconnections of assembled printed circuit boards and obtain manufacturing March 17, 2008 33 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller information on the components. The JTAG Port also provides a means of accessing and controlling design-for-test features such as I/O pin observation and control, scan testing, and debugging. The JTAG port is composed of the standard five pins: TRST, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Data is transmitted serially into the controller on TDI and out of the controller on TDO. The interpretation of this data is dependent on the current state of the TAP controller. For detailed information on the operation of the JTAG port and TAP controller, please refer to the IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture. The Luminary Micro JTAG controller works with the ARM JTAG controller built into the Cortex-M3 core. This is implemented by multiplexing the TDO outputs from both JTAG controllers. ARM JTAG instructions select the ARM TDO output while Luminary Micro JTAG instructions select the Luminary Micro TDO outputs. The multiplexer is controlled by the Luminary Micro JTAG controller, which has comprehensive programming for the ARM, Luminary Micro, and unimplemented JTAG instructions. 1.4.7.3 System Control and Clocks (see page 57) System control determines the overall operation of the device. It provides information about the device, controls the clocking of the device and individual peripherals, and handles reset detection and reporting. 1.4.7.4 Hibernation Module (see page 119) The Hibernation module provides logic to switch power off to the main processor and peripherals, and to wake on external or time-based events. The Hibernation module includes power-sequencing logic, a real-time clock with a pair of match registers, low-battery detection circuitry, and interrupt signalling to the processor. It also includes 64 32-bit words of non-volatile memory that can be used for saving state during hibernation. 1.4.8 Hardware Details Details on the pins and package can be found in the following sections: ■ “Pin Diagram” on page 507 ■ “Signal Tables” on page 509 ■ “Operating Characteristics” on page 534 ■ “Electrical Characteristics” on page 535 ■ “Package Information” on page 550 34 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Architectural Overview 2 ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core The ARM Cortex-M3 processor provides the core for a high-performance, low-cost platform that meets the needs of minimal memory implementation, reduced pin count, and low power consumption, while delivering outstanding computational performance and exceptional system response to interrupts. Features include: ■ Compact core. ■ Thumb-2 instruction set, delivering the high-performance expected of an ARM core in the memory size usually associated with 8- and 16-bit devices; typically in the range of a few kilobytes of memory for microcontroller class applications. ■ Rapid application execution through Harvard architecture characterized by separate buses for instruction and data. ■ Exceptional interrupt handling, by implementing the register manipulations required for handling an interrupt in hardware. ■ Deterministic, fast interrupt processing: always 12 cycles, or just 6 cycles with tail-chaining ■ Memory protection unit (MPU) to provide a privileged mode of operation for complex applications. ■ Migration from the ARM7™ processor family for better performance and power efficiency. ■ Full-featured debug solution with a: – Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP) – Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) unit for implementing breakpoints – Data Watchpoint and Trigger (DWT) unit for implementing watchpoints, trigger resources, and system profiling – Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) for support of printf style debugging – Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) for bridging to a Trace Port Analyzer ■ Optimized for single-cycle flash usage ■ Three sleep modes with clock gating for low power ■ Single-cycle multiply instruction and hardware divide ■ Atomic operations ■ ARM Thumb2 mixed 16-/32-bit instruction set ■ 1.25 DMIPS/MHz The Stellaris® family of microcontrollers builds on this core to bring high-performance 32-bit computing to cost-sensitive embedded microcontroller applications, such as factory automation and control, industrial control power devices, building and home automation, and stepper motors. March 17, 2008 35 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller For more information on the ARM Cortex-M3 processor core, see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. For information on SWJ-DP, see the ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual. 2.1 Block Diagram Figure 2-1. CPU Block Diagram Private Peripheral Bus (internal) Data Watchpoint and Trace Interrupts Debug Sleep Instrumentation Trace Macrocell Trace Port Interface Unit CM3 Core Instructions Data Flash Patch and Breakpoint Memory Protection Unit Adv. High- Perf. Bus Access Port Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port Bus Matrix Adv. Peripheral Bus I-code bus D-code bus System bus ROM Table Private Peripheral Bus (external) Serial Wire Output Trace Port (SWO) ARM Cortex-M3 2.2 Functional Description Important: The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual describes all the features of an ARM Cortex-M3 in detail. However, these features differ based on the implementation. This section describes the Stellaris® implementation. Luminary Micro has implemented the ARM Cortex-M3 core as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 36. As noted in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual, several Cortex-M3 components are flexible in their implementation: SW/JTAG-DP, ETM, TPIU, the ROM table, the MPU, and the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC). Each of these is addressed in the sections that follow. 2.2.1 Serial Wire and JTAG Debug Luminary Micro has replaced the ARM SW-DP and JTAG-DP with the ARM CoreSight™-compliant Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP) interface. This means Chapter 12, “Debug Port,” of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual does not apply to Stellaris® devices. 36 March 17, 2008 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core The SWJ-DP interface combines the SWD and JTAG debug ports into one module. See the CoreSight™ Design Kit Technical Reference Manual for details on SWJ-DP. 2.2.2 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) ETM was not implemented in the Stellaris® devices. This means Chapters 15 and 16 of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual can be ignored. 2.2.3 Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) The TPIU acts as a bridge between the Cortex-M3 trace data from the ITM, and an off-chip Trace Port Analyzer. The Stellaris® devices have implemented TPIU as shown in Figure 2-2 on page 37. This is similar to the non-ETM version described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual, however, SWJ-DP only provides SWV output for the TPIU. Figure 2-2. TPIU Block Diagram ATB Interface Asynchronous FIFO APB Interface Trace Out (serializer) Debug ATB Slave Port APB Slave Port Serial Wire Trace Port (SWO) 2.2.4 ROM Table The default ROM table was implemented as described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 2.2.5 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) The Memory Protection Unit (MPU) is included on the LM3S8933 controller and supports the standard ARMv7 Protected Memory System Architecture (PMSA) model. The MPU provides full support for protection regions, overlapping protection regions, access permissions, and exporting memory attributes to the system. 2.2.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) The Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC): ■ Facilitates low-latency exception and interrupt handling March 17, 2008 37 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller ■ Controls power management ■ Implements system control registers The NVIC supports up to 240 dynamically reprioritizable interrupts each with up to 256 levels of priority. The NVIC and the processor core interface are closely coupled, which enables low latency interrupt processing and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts. The NVIC maintains knowledge of the stacked (nested) interrupts to enable tail-chaining of interrupts. You can only fully access the NVIC from privileged mode, but you can pend interrupts in user-mode if you enable the Configuration Control Register (see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual). Any other user-mode access causes a bus fault. All NVIC registers are accessible using byte, halfword, and word unless otherwise stated. 2.2.6.1 Interrupts The ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual describes the maximum number of interrupts and interrupt priorities. The LM3S8933 microcontroller supports 32 interrupts with eight priority levels. 2.2.6.2 System Timer (SysTick) Cortex-M3 includes an integrated system timer, SysTick. SysTick provides a simple, 24-bit clear-on-write, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism. The counter can be used in several different ways, for example: ■ An RTOS tick timer which fires at a programmable rate (for example, 100 Hz) and invokes a SysTick routine. ■ A high-speed alarm timer using the system clock. ■ A variable rate alarm or signal timer—the duration is range-dependent on the reference clock used and the dynamic range of the counter. ■ A simple counter. Software can use this to measure time to completion and time used. ■ An internal clock source control based on missing/meeting durations. The COUNTFLAG bit-field in the control and status register can be used to determine if an action completed within a set duration, as part of a dynamic clock management control loop. Functional Description The timer consists of three registers: ■ A control and status counter to configure its clock, enable the counter, enable the SysTick interrupt, and determine counter status. ■ The reload value for the counter, used to provide the counter's wrap value. ■ The current value of the counter. A fourth register, the SysTick Calibration Value Register, is not implemented in the Stellaris® devices. When enabled, the timer counts down from the reload value to zero, reloads (wraps) to the value in the SysTick Reload Value register on the next clock edge, then decrements on subsequent clocks. Writing a value of zero to the Reload Value register disables the counter on the next wrap. When the counter reaches zero, the COUNTFLAG status bit is set. The COUNTFLAG bit clears on reads. 38 March 17, 2008 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core Writing to the Current Value register clears the register and the COUNTFLAG status bit. The write does not trigger the SysTick exception logic. On a read, the current value is the value of the register at the time the register is accessed. If the core is in debug state (halted), the counter will not decrement. The timer is clocked with respect to a reference clock. The reference clock can be the core clock or an external clock source. SysTick Control and Status Register Use the SysTick Control and Status Register to enable the SysTick features. The reset is 0x0000.0000. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:17 reserved RO 0 Count Flag Returns 1 if timer counted to 0 since last time this was read. Clears on read by application. If read by the debugger using the DAP, this bit is cleared on read-only if the MasterType bit in the AHB-AP Control Register is set to 0. Otherwise, the COUNTFLAG bit is not changed by the debugger read. 16 COUNTFLAG R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 15:3 reserved RO 0 Clock Source Value Description 0 External reference clock. (Not implemented for Stellaris microcontrollers.) 1 Core clock If no reference clock is provided, it is held at 1 and so gives the same time as the core clock. The core clock must be at least 2.5 times faster than the reference clock. If it is not, the count values are unpredictable. 2 CLKSOURCE R/W 0 Tick Int Value Description Counting down to 0 does not pend the SysTick handler. Software can use the COUNTFLAG to determine if ever counted to 0. 0 1 Counting down to 0 pends the SysTick handler. 1 TICKINT R/W 0 Enable Value Description 0 Counter disabled. Counter operates in a multi-shot way. That is, counter loads with the Reload value and then begins counting down. On reaching 0, it sets the COUNTFLAG to 1 and optionally pends the SysTick handler, based on TICKINT. It then loads the Reload value again, and begins counting. 1 0 ENABLE R/W 0 SysTick Reload Value Register Use the SysTick Reload Value Register to specify the start value to load into the current value register when the counter reaches 0. It can be any value between 1 and 0x00FF.FFFF. A start value March 17, 2008 39 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller of 0 is possible, but has no effect because the SysTick interrupt and COUNTFLAG are activated when counting from 1 to 0. Therefore, as a multi-shot timer, repeated over and over, it fires every N+1 clock pulse, where N is any value from 1 to 0x00FF.FFFF. So, if the tick interrupt is required every 100 clock pulses, 99 must be written into the RELOAD. If a new value is written on each tick interrupt, so treated as single shot, then the actual count down must be written. For example, if a tick is next required after 400 clock pulses, 400 must be written into the RELOAD. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:24 reserved RO 0 Reload Value to load into the SysTick Current Value Register when the counter reaches 0. 23:0 RELOAD W1C - SysTick Current Value Register Use the SysTick Current Value Register to find the current value in the register. Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:24 reserved RO 0 Current Value Current value at the time the register is accessed. No read-modify-write protection is provided, so change with care. This register is write-clear. Writing to it with any value clears the register to 0. Clearing this register also clears the COUNTFLAG bit of the SysTick Control and Status Register. 23:0 CURRENT W1C - SysTick Calibration Value Register The SysTick Calibration Value register is not implemented. 40 March 17, 2008 Preliminary ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Core 3 Memory Map The memory map for the LM3S8933 controller is provided in Table 3-1 on page 41. In this manual, register addresses are given as a hexadecimal increment, relative to the module’s base address as shown in the memory map. See also Chapter 4, “Memory Map” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. Important: In Table 3-1 on page 41, addresses not listed are reserved. Table 3-1. Memory Mapa For details on registers, see page ... Start End Description Memory 0x0000.0000 0x0003.FFFF On-chip flash b 142 0x0004.0000 0x00FF.FFFF Reserved - 0x0100.0000 0x1FFF.FFFF Reserved - 0x2000.0000 0x2000.FFFF Bit-banded on-chip SRAMc 142 0x2001.0000 0x200F.FFFF Reserved - 0x2010.0000 0x21FF.FFFF Reserved - 0x2200.0000 0x221F.FFFF Bit-band alias of 0x2000.0000 through 0x200F.FFFF 138 0x2220.0000 0x3FFF.FFFF Reserved - FiRM Peripherals 0x4000.0000 0x4000.0FFF Watchdog timer 242 0x4000.1000 0x4000.3FFF Reserved - 0x4000.4000 0x4000.4FFF GPIO Port A 169 0x4000.5000 0x4000.5FFF GPIO Port B 169 0x4000.6000 0x4000.6FFF GPIO Port C 169 0x4000.7000 0x4000.7FFF GPIO Port D 169 0x4000.8000 0x4000.8FFF SSI0 348 0x4000.A000 0x4000.BFFF Reserved - 0x4000.C000 0x4000.CFFF UART0 303 0x4000.D000 0x4000.DFFF UART1 303 0x4000.F000 0x4000.FFFF Reserved - 0x4001.0000 0x4001.FFFF Reserved - Peripherals 0x4002.0000 0x4002.07FF I2C Master 0 387 0x4002.0800 0x4002.0FFF I2C Slave 0 400 0x4002.2000 0x4002.3FFF Reserved - 0x4002.4000 0x4002.4FFF GPIO Port E 169 0x4002.5000 0x4002.5FFF GPIO Port F 169 0x4002.6000 0x4002.6FFF GPIO Port G 169 0x4002.9000 0x4002.BFFF Reserved - 0x4002.E000 0x4002.FFFF Reserved - March 17, 2008 41 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller For details on registers, see page ... Start End Description 0x4003.0000 0x4003.0FFF Timer0 215 0x4003.1000 0x4003.1FFF Timer1 215 0x4003.2000 0x4003.2FFF Timer2 215 0x4003.3000 0x4003.3FFF Timer3 215 0x4003.4000 0x4003.7FFF Reserved - 0x4003.8000 0x4003.8FFF ADC 270 0x4003.9000 0x4003.BFFF Reserved - 0x4003.C000 0x4003.CFFF Analog Comparators 494 0x4003.D000 0x4003.FFFF Reserved - 0x4004.0000 0x4004.0FFF CAN0 Controller 421 0x4004.3000 0x4004.7FFF Reserved - 0x4004.8000 0x4004.8FFF Ethernet Controller 457 0x4004.9000 0x4004.BFFF Reserved - 0x4004.C000 0x4004.FFFF Reserved - 0x4005.1000 0x4005.3FFF Reserved - 0x4005.4000 0x4005.7FFF Reserved - 0x4006.0000 0x400F.BFFF Reserved - 0x400F.C000 0x400F.CFFF Hibernation Module 125 0x400F.D000 0x400F.DFFF Flash control 142 0x400F.E000 0x400F.EFFF System control 65 0x4010.0000 0x41FF.FFFF Reserved - 0x4200.0000 0x43FF.FFFF Bit-banded alias of 0x4000.0000 through 0x400F.FFFF - 0x4400.0000 0x5FFF.FFFF Reserved - 0x6000.0000 0xDFFF.FFFF Reserved - Private Peripheral Bus ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual 0xE000.0000 0xE000.0FFF Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) 0xE000.1000 0xE000.1FFF Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT) 0xE000.2000 0xE000.2FFF Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) 0xE000.3000 0xE000.DFFF Reserved 0xE000.E000 0xE000.EFFF Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) 0xE000.F000 0xE003.FFFF Reserved 0xE004.0000 0xE004.0FFF Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU) 0xE004.1000 0xFFFF.FFFF Reserved - a. All reserved space returns a bus fault when read or written. b. The unavailable flash will bus fault throughout this range. c. The unavailable SRAM will bus fault throughout this range. 42 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Memory Map 4 Interrupts The ARM Cortex-M3 processor and the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) prioritize and handle all exceptions. All exceptions are handled in Handler Mode. The processor state is automatically stored to the stack on an exception, and automatically restored from the stack at the end of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). The vector is fetched in parallel to the state saving, which enables efficient interrupt entry. The processor supports tail-chaining, which enables back-to-back interrupts to be performed without the overhead of state saving and restoration. Table 4-1 on page 43 lists all exception types. Software can set eight priority levels on seven of these exceptions (system handlers) as well as on 32 interrupts (listed in Table 4-2 on page 44). Priorities on the system handlers are set with the NVIC System Handler Priority registers. Interrupts are enabled through the NVIC Interrupt Set Enable register and prioritized with the NVIC Interrupt Priority registers. You also can group priorities by splitting priority levels into pre-emption priorities and subpriorities. All of the interrupt registers are described in Chapter 8, “Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. Internally, the highest user-settable priority (0) is treated as fourth priority, after a Reset, NMI, and a Hard Fault. Note that 0 is the default priority for all the settable priorities. If you assign the same priority level to two or more interrupts, their hardware priority (the lower position number) determines the order in which the processor activates them. For example, if both GPIO Port A and GPIO Port B are priority level 1, then GPIO Port A has higher priority. See Chapter 5, “Exceptions” and Chapter 8, “Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller” in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more information on exceptions and interrupts. Note: In Table 4-2 on page 44 interrupts not listed are reserved. Table 4-1. Exception Types Exception Type Position Prioritya Description - 0 - Stack top is loaded from first entry of vector table on reset. Invoked on power up and warm reset. On first instruction, drops to lowest priority (and then is called the base level of activation). This is asynchronous. Reset 1 -3 (highest) Cannot be stopped or preempted by any exception but reset. This is asynchronous. An NMI is only producible by software, using the NVIC Interrupt Control State register. Non-Maskable 2 -2 Interrupt (NMI) All classes of Fault, when the fault cannot activate due to priority or the configurable fault handler has been disabled. This is synchronous. Hard Fault 3 -1 MPU mismatch, including access violation and no match. This is synchronous. The priority of this exception can be changed. Memory Management 4 settable Pre-fetch fault, memory access fault, and other address/memory related faults. This is synchronous when precise and asynchronous when imprecise. You can enable or disable this fault. Bus Fault 5 settable Usage fault, such as undefined instruction executed or illegal state transition attempt. This is synchronous. Usage Fault 6 settable - 7-10 - Reserved. SVCall 11 settable System service call with SVC instruction. This is synchronous. March 17, 2008 43 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Exception Type Position Prioritya Description Debug monitor (when not halting). This is synchronous, but only active when enabled. It does not activate if lower priority than the current activation. Debug Monitor 12 settable - 13 - Reserved. Pendable request for system service. This is asynchronous and only pended by software. PendSV 14 settable SysTick 15 settable System tick timer has fired. This is asynchronous. Asserted from outside the ARM Cortex-M3 core and fed through the NVIC (prioritized). These are all asynchronous. Table 4-2 on page 44 lists the interrupts on the LM3S8933 controller. 16 and settable above Interrupts a. 0 is the default priority for all the settable priorities. Table 4-2. Interrupts Interrupt (Bit in Interrupt Registers) Description 0 GPIO Port A 1 GPIO Port B 2 GPIO Port C 3 GPIO Port D 4 GPIO Port E 5 UART0 6 UART1 7 SSI0 8 I2C0 14 ADC Sequence 0 15 ADC Sequence 1 16 ADC Sequence 2 17 ADC Sequence 3 18 Watchdog timer 19 Timer0 A 20 Timer0 B 21 Timer1 A 22 Timer1 B 23 Timer2 A 24 Timer2 B 25 Analog Comparator 0 26 Analog Comparator 1 27 Analog Comparator 2 28 System Control 29 Flash Control 30 GPIO Port F 31 GPIO Port G 35 Timer3 A 36 Timer3 B 39 CAN0 44 March 17, 2008 Preliminary Interrupts Interrupt (Bit in Interrupt Registers) Description 42 Ethernet Controller 43 Hibernation Module March 17, 2008 45 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 5 JTAG Interface The Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) port is an IEEE standard that defines a Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture for digital integrated circuits and provides a standardized serial interface for controlling the associated test logic. The TAP, Instruction Register (IR), and Data Registers (DR) can be used to test the interconnections of assembled printed circuit boards and obtain manufacturing information on the components. The JTAG Port also provides a means of accessing and controlling design-for-test features such as I/O pin observation and control, scan testing, and debugging. The JTAG port is comprised of five pins: TRST, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Data is transmitted serially into the controller on TDI and out of the controller on TDO. The interpretation of this data is dependent on the current state of the TAP controller. For detailed information on the operation of the JTAG port and TAP controller, please refer to the IEEE Standard 1149.1-Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture. The Luminary Micro JTAG controller works with the ARM JTAG controller built into the Cortex-M3 core. This is implemented by multiplexing the TDO outputs from both JTAG controllers. ARM JTAG instructions select the ARM TDO output while Luminary Micro JTAG instructions select the Luminary Micro TDO outputs. The multiplexer is controlled by the Luminary Micro JTAG controller, which has comprehensive programming for the ARM, Luminary Micro, and unimplemented JTAG instructions. The JTAG module has the following features: ■ IEEE 1149.1-1990 compatible Test Access Port (TAP) controller ■ Four-bit Instruction Register (IR) chain for storing JTAG instructions ■ IEEE standard instructions: – BYPASS instruction – IDCODE instruction – SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction – EXTEST instruction – INTEST instruction ■ ARM additional instructions: – APACC instruction – DPACC instruction – ABORT instruction ■ Integrated ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) See the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more information on the ARM JTAG controller. 46 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.1 Block Diagram Figure 5-1. JTAG Module Block Diagram Instruction Register (IR) TAP Controller BYPASS Data Register Boundary Scan Data Register IDCODE Data Register ABORT Data Register DPACC Data Register APACC Data Register TCK TMS TDI TDO Cortex-M3 Debug Port TRST 5.2 Functional Description A high-level conceptual drawing of the JTAG module is shown in Figure 5-1 on page 47. The JTAG module is composed of the Test Access Port (TAP) controller and serial shift chains with parallel update registers. The TAP controller is a simple state machine controlled by the TRST, TCK and TMS inputs. The current state of the TAP controller depends on the current value of TRST and the sequence of values captured on TMS at the rising edge of TCK. The TAP controller determines when the serial shift chains capture new data, shift data from TDI towards TDO, and update the parallel load registers. The current state of the TAP controller also determines whether the Instruction Register (IR) chain or one of the Data Register (DR) chains is being accessed. The serial shift chains with parallel load registers are comprised of a single Instruction Register (IR) chain and multiple Data Register (DR) chains. The current instruction loaded in the parallel load register determines which DR chain is captured, shifted, or updated during the sequencing of the TAP controller. Some instructions, like EXTEST and INTEST, operate on data currently in a DR chain and do not capture, shift, or update any of the chains. Instructions that are not implemented decode to the BYPASS instruction to ensure that the serial path between TDI and TDO is always connected (see Table 5-2 on page 53 for a list of implemented instructions). See “JTAG and Boundary Scan” on page 546 for JTAG timing diagrams. March 17, 2008 47 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 5.2.1 JTAG Interface Pins The JTAG interface consists of five standard pins: TRST,TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. These pins and their associated reset state are given in Table 5-1 on page 48. Detailed information on each pin follows. Table 5-1. JTAG Port Pins Reset State Pin Name Data Direction Internal Pull-Up Internal Pull-Down Drive Strength Drive Value TRST Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TCK Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TMS Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TDI Input Enabled Disabled N/A N/A TDO Output Enabled Disabled 2-mA driver High-Z 5.2.1.1 Test Reset Input (TRST) The TRST pin is an asynchronous active Low input signal for initializing and resetting the JTAG TAP controller and associated JTAG circuitry. When TRST is asserted, the TAP controller resets to the Test-Logic-Reset state and remains there while TRST is asserted. When the TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state, the JTAG Instruction Register (IR) resets to the default instruction, IDCODE. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TRST pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port B should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PB7/TRST; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.2 Test Clock Input (TCK) The TCK pin is the clock for the JTAG module. This clock is provided so the test logic can operate independently of any other system clocks. In addition, it ensures that multiple JTAG TAP controllers that are daisy-chained together can synchronously communicate serial test data between components. During normal operation, TCK is driven by a free-running clock with a nominal 50% duty cycle. When necessary, TCK can be stopped at 0 or 1 for extended periods of time. While TCK is stopped at 0 or 1, the state of the TAP controller does not change and data in the JTAG Instruction and Data Registers is not lost. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TCK pin is enabled after reset. This assures that no clocking occurs if the pin is not driven from an external source. The internal pull-up and pull-down resistors can be turned off to save internal power as long as the TCK pin is constantly being driven by an external source. 5.2.1.3 Test Mode Select (TMS) The TMS pin selects the next state of the JTAG TAP controller. TMS is sampled on the rising edge of TCK. Depending on the current TAP state and the sampled value of TMS, the next state is entered. Because the TMS pin is sampled on the rising edge of TCK, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TMS to change on the falling edge of TCK. Holding TMS high for five consecutive TCK cycles drives the TAP controller state machine to the Test-Logic-Reset state. When the TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state, the JTAG Instruction Register (IR) resets to the default instruction, IDCODE. Therefore, this sequence can be used as a reset mechanism, similar to asserting TRST. The JTAG Test Access Port state machine can be seen in its entirety in Figure 5-2 on page 50. 48 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TMS pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port C should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PC1/TMS; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.4 Test Data Input (TDI) The TDI pin provides a stream of serial information to the IR chain and the DR chains. TDI is sampled on the rising edge of TCK and, depending on the current TAP state and the current instruction, presents this data to the proper shift register chain. Because the TDI pin is sampled on the rising edge of TCK, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TDI to change on the falling edge of TCK. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TDI pin is enabled after reset. Changes to the pull-up resistor settings on GPIO Port C should ensure that the internal pull-up resistor remains enabled on PC2/TDI; otherwise JTAG communication could be lost. 5.2.1.5 Test Data Output (TDO) The TDO pin provides an output stream of serial information from the IR chain or the DR chains. The value of TDO depends on the current TAP state, the current instruction, and the data in the chain being accessed. In order to save power when the JTAG port is not being used, the TDO pin is placed in an inactive drive state when not actively shifting out data. Because TDO can be connected to the TDI of another controller in a daisy-chain configuration, the IEEE Standard 1149.1 expects the value on TDO to change on the falling edge of TCK. By default, the internal pull-up resistor on the TDO pin is enabled after reset. This assures that the pin remains at a constant logic level when the JTAG port is not being used. The internal pull-up and pull-down resistors can be turned off to save internal power if a High-Z output value is acceptable during certain TAP controller states. 5.2.2 JTAG TAP Controller The JTAG TAP controller state machine is shown in Figure 5-2 on page 50. The TAP controller state machine is reset to the Test-Logic-Reset state on the assertion of a Power-On-Reset (POR) or the assertion of TRST. Asserting the correct sequence on the TMS pin allows the JTAG module to shift in new instructions, shift in data, or idle during extended testing sequences. For detailed information on the function of the TAP controller and the operations that occur in each state, please refer to IEEE Standard 1149.1. March 17, 2008 49 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Figure 5-2. Test Access Port State Machine Test Logic Reset Run Test Idle Select DR Scan Select IR Scan Capture DR Capture IR Shift DR Shift IR Exit 1 DR Exit 1 IR Exit 2 DR Exit 2 IR Pause DR Pause IR Update DR Update IR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5.2.3 Shift Registers The Shift Registers consist of a serial shift register chain and a parallel load register. The serial shift register chain samples specific information during the TAP controller’s CAPTURE states and allows this information to be shifted out of TDO during the TAP controller’s SHIFT states. While the sampled data is being shifted out of the chain on TDO, new data is being shifted into the serial shift register on TDI. This new data is stored in the parallel load register during the TAP controller’s UPDATE states. Each of the shift registers is discussed in detail in “Register Descriptions” on page 53. 5.2.4 Operational Considerations There are certain operational considerations when using the JTAG module. Because the JTAG pins can be programmed to be GPIOs, board configuration and reset conditions on these pins must be considered. In addition, because the JTAG module has integrated ARM Serial Wire Debug, the method for switching between these two operational modes is described below. 50 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.2.4.1 GPIO Functionality When the controller is reset with either a POR or RST, the JTAG/SWD port pins default to their JTAG/SWD configurations. The default configuration includes enabling digital functionality (setting GPIODEN to 1), enabling the pull-up resistors (setting GPIOPUR to 1), and enabling the alternate hardware function (setting GPIOAFSEL to 1) for the PB7 and PC[3:0] JTAG/SWD pins. It is possible for software to configure these pins as GPIOs after reset by writing 0s to PB7 and PC[3:0] in the GPIOAFSEL register. If the user does not require the JTAG/SWD port for debugging or board-level testing, this provides five more GPIOs for use in the design. Caution – If the JTAG pins are used as GPIOs in a design, PB7 and PC2 cannot have external pull-down resistors connected to both of them at the same time. If both pins are pulled Low during reset, the controller has unpredictable behavior. If this happens, remove one or both of the pull-down resistors, and apply RST or power-cycle the part. In addition, it is possible to create a software sequence that prevents the debugger from connecting to the Stellaris® microcontroller. If the program code loaded into flash immediately changes the JTAG pins to their GPIO functionality, the debugger may not have enough time to connect and halt the controller before the JTAG pin functionality switches. This may lock the debugger out of the part. This can be avoided with a software routine that restores JTAG functionality based on an external or software trigger. The commit control registers provide a layer of protection against accidental programming of critical hardware peripherals. Writes to protected bits of the GPIO Alternate Function Select (GPIOAFSEL) register (see page 179) are not committed to storage unless the GPIO Lock (GPIOLOCK) register (see page 189) has been unlocked and the appropriate bits of the GPIO Commit (GPIOCR) register (see page 190) have been set to 1. Recovering a "Locked" Device If software configures any of the JTAG/SWD pins as GPIO and loses the ability to communicate with the debugger, there is a debug sequence that can be used to recover the device. Performing a total of ten JTAG-to-SWD and SWD-to-JTAG switch sequences while holding the device in reset mass erases the flash memory. The sequence to recover the device is: 1. Assert and hold the RST signal. 2. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 3. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 4. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 5. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 6. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 7. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 8. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 9. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. 10. Perform the JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence. 11. Perform the SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence. March 17, 2008 51 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 12. Release the RST signal. The JTAG-to-SWD and SWD-to-JTAG switch sequences are described in “ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD)” on page 52. When performing switch sequences for the purpose of recovering the debug capabilities of the device, only steps 1 and 2 of the switch sequence need to be performed. 5.2.4.2 ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) In order to seamlessly integrate the ARM Serial Wire Debug (SWD) functionality, a serial-wire debugger must be able to connect to the Cortex-M3 core without having to perform, or have any knowledge of, JTAG cycles. This is accomplished with a SWD preamble that is issued before the SWD session begins. The preamble used to enable the SWD interface of the SWJ-DP module starts with the TAP controller in the Test-Logic-Reset state. From here, the preamble sequences the TAP controller through the following states: Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, Test Logic Reset, Test Logic Reset, Run Test Idle, Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, Test Logic Reset, Test Logic Reset, Run Test Idle, Run Test Idle, Select DR, Select IR, and Test Logic Reset states. Stepping through this sequences of the TAP state machine enables the SWD interface and disables the JTAG interface. For more information on this operation and the SWD interface, see the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual and the ARM® CoreSight Technical Reference Manual. Because this sequence is a valid series of JTAG operations that could be issued, the ARM JTAG TAP controller is not fully compliant to the IEEE Standard 1149.1. This is the only instance where the ARM JTAG TAP controller does not meet full compliance with the specification. Due to the low probability of this sequence occurring during normal operation of the TAP controller, it should not affect normal performance of the JTAG interface. JTAG-to-SWD Switching To switch the operating mode of the Debug Access Port (DAP) from JTAG to SWD mode, the external debug hardware must send a switch sequence to the device. The 16-bit switch sequence for switching to SWD mode is defined as b1110011110011110, transmitted LSB first. This can also be represented as 16'hE79E when transmitted LSB first. The complete switch sequence should consist of the following transactions on the TCK/SWCLK and TMS/SWDIO signals: 1. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that both JTAG and SWD are in their reset/idle states. 2. Send the 16-bit JTAG-to-SWD switch sequence, 16'hE79E. 3. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that if SWJ-DP was already in SWD mode, before sending the switch sequence, the SWD goes into the line reset state. SWD-to-JTAG Switching To switch the operating mode of the Debug Access Port (DAP) from SWD to JTAG mode, the external debug hardware must send a switch sequence to the device. The 16-bit switch sequence for switching to JTAG mode is defined as b1110011110011110, transmitted LSB first. This can also be represented as 16'hE73C when transmitted LSB first. The complete switch sequence should consist of the following transactions on the TCK/SWCLK and TMS/SWDIO signals: 1. Send at least 50 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that both JTAG and SWD are in their reset/idle states. 52 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface 2. Send the 16-bit SWD-to-JTAG switch sequence, 16'hE73C. 3. Send at least 5 TCK/SWCLK cycles with TMS/SWDIO set to 1. This ensures that if SWJ-DP was already in JTAG mode, before sending the switch sequence, the JTAG goes into the Test Logic Reset state. 5.3 Initialization and Configuration After a Power-On-Reset or an external reset (RST), the JTAG pins are automatically configured for JTAG communication. No user-defined initialization or configuration is needed. However, if the user application changes these pins to their GPIO function, they must be configured back to their JTAG functionality before JTAG communication can be restored. This is done by enabling the five JTAG pins (PB7 and PC[3:0]) for their alternate function using the GPIOAFSEL register. 5.4 Register Descriptions There are no APB-accessible registers in the JTAG TAP Controller or Shift Register chains. The registers within the JTAG controller are all accessed serially through the TAP Controller. The registers can be broken down into two main categories: Instruction Registers and Data Registers. 5.4.1 Instruction Register (IR) The JTAG TAP Instruction Register (IR) is a four-bit serial scan chain with a parallel load register connected between the JTAG TDI and TDO pins. When the TAP Controller is placed in the correct states, bits can be shifted into the Instruction Register. Once these bits have been shifted into the chain and updated, they are interpreted as the current instruction. The decode of the Instruction Register bits is shown in Table 5-2 on page 53. A detailed explanation of each instruction, along with its associated Data Register, follows. Table 5-2. JTAG Instruction Register Commands IR[3:0] Instruction Description Drives the values preloaded into the Boundary Scan Chain by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction onto the pads. 0000 EXTEST Drives the values preloaded into the Boundary Scan Chain by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction into the controller. 0001 INTEST Captures the current I/O values and shifts the sampled values out of the Boundary Scan Chain while new preload data is shifted in. 0010 SAMPLE / PRELOAD 1000 ABORT Shifts data into the ARM Debug Port Abort Register. 1010 DPACC Shifts data into and out of the ARM DP Access Register. 1011 APACC Shifts data into and out of the ARM AC Access Register. Loads manufacturing information defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 into the IDCODE chain and shifts it out. 1110 IDCODE 1111 BYPASS Connects TDI to TDO through a single Shift Register chain. All Others Reserved Defaults to the BYPASS instruction to ensure that TDI is always connected to TDO. 5.4.1.1 EXTEST Instruction The EXTEST instruction does not have an associated Data Register chain. The EXTEST instruction uses the data that has been preloaded into the Boundary Scan Data Register using the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction. When the EXTEST instruction is present in the Instruction Register, the preloaded data in the Boundary Scan Data Register associated with the outputs and output enables are used to drive the GPIO pads rather than the signals coming from the core. This allows March 17, 2008 53 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller tests to be developed that drive known values out of the controller, which can be used to verify connectivity. 5.4.1.2 INTEST Instruction The INTEST instruction does not have an associated Data Register chain. The INTEST instruction uses the data that has been preloaded into the Boundary Scan Data Register using the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction. When the INTEST instruction is present in the Instruction Register, the preloaded data in the Boundary Scan Data Register associated with the inputs are used to drive the signals going into the core rather than the signals coming from the GPIO pads. This allows tests to be developed that drive known values into the controller, which can be used for testing. It is important to note that although the RST input pin is on the Boundary Scan Data Register chain, it is only observable. 5.4.1.3 SAMPLE/PRELOAD Instruction The SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction connects the Boundary Scan Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction samples the current state of the pad pins for observation and preloads new test data. Each GPIO pad has an associated input, output, and output enable signal. When the TAP controller enters the Capture DR state during this instruction, the input, output, and output-enable signals to each of the GPIO pads are captured. These samples are serially shifted out of TDO while the TAP controller is in the Shift DR state and can be used for observation or comparison in various tests. While these samples of the inputs, outputs, and output enables are being shifted out of the Boundary Scan Data Register, new data is being shifted into the Boundary Scan Data Register from TDI. Once the new data has been shifted into the Boundary Scan Data Register, the data is saved in the parallel load registers when the TAP controller enters the Update DR state. This update of the parallel load register preloads data into the Boundary Scan Data Register that is associated with each input, output, and output enable. This preloaded data can be used with the EXTEST and INTEST instructions to drive data into or out of the controller. Please see “Boundary Scan Data Register” on page 56 for more information. 5.4.1.4 ABORT Instruction The ABORT instruction connects the associated ABORT Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the ABORT Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this Data Register clears various error bits or initiates a DAP abort of a previous request. Please see the “ABORT Data Register” on page 56 for more information. 5.4.1.5 DPACC Instruction The DPACC instruction connects the associated DPACC Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the DPACC Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this register and reading the data output from this register allows read and write access to the ARM debug and status registers. Please see “DPACC Data Register” on page 56 for more information. 5.4.1.6 APACC Instruction The APACC instruction connects the associated APACC Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides read and write access to the APACC Register of the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP). Shifting the proper data into this register and reading the data output from this register allows read and write access to internal components and buses through the Debug Port. Please see “APACC Data Register” on page 56 for more information. 54 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface 5.4.1.7 IDCODE Instruction The IDCODE instruction connects the associated IDCODE Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction provides information on the manufacturer, part number, and version of the ARM core. This information can be used by testing equipment and debuggers to automatically configure their input and output data streams. IDCODE is the default instruction that is loaded into the JTAG Instruction Register when a power-on-reset (POR) is asserted, TRST is asserted, or the Test-Logic-Reset state is entered. Please see “IDCODE Data Register” on page 55 for more information. 5.4.1.8 BYPASS Instruction The BYPASS instruction connects the associated BYPASS Data Register chain between TDI and TDO. This instruction is used to create a minimum length serial path between the TDI and TDO ports. The BYPASS Data Register is a single-bit shift register. This instruction improves test efficiency by allowing components that are not needed for a specific test to be bypassed in the JTAG scan chain by loading them with the BYPASS instruction. Please see “BYPASS Data Register” on page 55 for more information. 5.4.2 Data Registers The JTAG module contains six Data Registers. These include: IDCODE, BYPASS, Boundary Scan, APACC, DPACC, and ABORT serial Data Register chains. Each of these Data Registers is discussed in the following sections. 5.4.2.1 IDCODE Data Register The format for the 32-bit IDCODE Data Register defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 is shown in Figure 5-3 on page 55. The standard requires that every JTAG-compliant device implement either the IDCODE instruction or the BYPASS instruction as the default instruction. The LSB of the IDCODE Data Register is defined to be a 1 to distinguish it from the BYPASS instruction, which has an LSB of 0. This allows auto configuration test tools to determine which instruction is the default instruction. The major uses of the JTAG port are for manufacturer testing of component assembly, and program development and debug. To facilitate the use of auto-configuration debug tools, the IDCODE instruction outputs a value of 0x3BA00477. This value indicates an ARM Cortex-M3, Version 1 processor. This allows the debuggers to automatically configure themselves to work correctly with the Cortex-M3 during debug. Figure 5-3. IDCODE Register Format Version Part Number Manufacturer ID 1 31 28 27 12 11 1 0 TDI TDO 5.4.2.2 BYPASS Data Register The format for the 1-bit BYPASS Data Register defined by the IEEE Standard 1149.1 is shown in Figure 5-4 on page 56. The standard requires that every JTAG-compliant device implement either the BYPASS instruction or the IDCODE instruction as the default instruction. The LSB of the BYPASS Data Register is defined to be a 0 to distinguish it from the IDCODE instruction, which has an LSB of 1. This allows auto configuration test tools to determine which instruction is the default instruction. March 17, 2008 55 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Figure 5-4. BYPASS Register Format TDI 0 TDO 0 5.4.2.3 Boundary Scan Data Register The format of the Boundary Scan Data Register is shown in Figure 5-5 on page 56. Each GPIO pin, in a counter-clockwise direction from the JTAG port pins, is included in the Boundary Scan Data Register. Each GPIO pin has three associated digital signals that are included in the chain. These signals are input, output, and output enable, and are arranged in that order as can be seen in the figure. In addition to the GPIO pins, the controller reset pin, RST, is included in the chain. Because the reset pin is always an input, only the input signal is included in the Data Register chain. When the Boundary Scan Data Register is accessed with the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction, the input, output, and output enable from each digital pad are sampled and then shifted out of the chain to be verified. The sampling of these values occurs on the rising edge of TCK in the Capture DR state of the TAP controller. While the sampled data is being shifted out of the Boundary Scan chain in the Shift DR state of the TAP controller, new data can be preloaded into the chain for use with the EXTEST and INTEST instructions. These instructions either force data out of the controller, with the EXTEST instruction, or into the controller, with the INTEST instruction. Figure 5-5. Boundary Scan Register Format O TDO TDI O IN E UT O O IN U E T O O IN E UT O O IN U E T I N ... ... GPIO PB6 GPIO m RST GPIO m+1 GPIO n For detailed information on the order of the input, output, and output enable bits for each of the GPIO ports, please refer to the Stellaris® Family Boundary Scan Description Language (BSDL) files, downloadable from www.luminarymicro.com. 5.4.2.4 APACC Data Register The format for the 35-bit APACC Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 5.4.2.5 DPACC Data Register The format for the 35-bit DPACC Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 5.4.2.6 ABORT Data Register The format for the 35-bit ABORT Data Register defined by ARM is described in the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual. 56 March 17, 2008 Preliminary JTAG Interface 6 System Control System control determines the overall operation of the device. It provides information about the device, controls the clocking to the core and individual peripherals, and handles reset detection and reporting. 6.1 Functional Description The System Control module provides the following capabilities: ■ Device identification, see “Device Identification” on page 57 ■ Local control, such as reset (see “Reset Control” on page 57), power (see “Power Control” on page 60) and clock control (see “Clock Control” on page 60) ■ System control (Run, Sleep, and Deep-Sleep modes), see “System Control” on page 62 6.1.1 Device Identification Seven read-only registers provide software with information on the microcontroller, such as version, part number, SRAM size, flash size, and other features. See the DID0, DID1, and DC0-DC4 registers. 6.1.2 Reset Control This section discusses aspects of hardware functions during reset as well as system software requirements following the reset sequence. 6.1.2.1 CMOD0 and CMOD1 Test-Mode Control Pins Two pins, CMOD0 and CMOD1, are defined for use by Luminary Micro for testing the devices during manufacture. They have no end-user function and should not be used. The CMOD pins should be connected to ground. 6.1.2.2 Reset Sources The controller has five sources of reset: 1. External reset input pin (RST) assertion, see “RST Pin Assertion” on page 57. 2. Power-on reset (POR), see “Power-On Reset (POR)” on page 58. 3. Internal brown-out (BOR) detector, see “Brown-Out Reset (BOR)” on page 58. 4. Software-initiated reset (with the software reset registers), see “Software Reset” on page 59. 5. A watchdog timer reset condition violation, see “Watchdog Timer Reset” on page 59. After a reset, the Reset Cause (RESC) register is set with the reset cause. The bits in this register are sticky and maintain their state across multiple reset sequences, except when an internal POR is the cause, and then all the other bits in the RESC register are cleared except for the POR indicator. 6.1.2.3 RST Pin Assertion The external reset pin (RST) resets the controller. This resets the core and all the peripherals except the JTAG TAP controller (see “JTAG Interface” on page 46). The external reset sequence is as follows: March 17, 2008 57 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 1. The external reset pin (RST) is asserted and then de-asserted. 2. The internal reset is released and the core loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. A few clocks cycles from RST de-assertion to the start of the reset sequence is necessary for synchronization. The external reset timing is shown in Figure 22-11 on page 548. 6.1.2.4 Power-On Reset (POR) The Power-On Reset (POR) circuit monitors the power supply voltage (VDD). The POR circuit generates a reset signal to the internal logic when the power supply ramp reaches a threshold value (VTH). If the application only uses the POR circuit, the RST input needs to be connected to the power supply (VDD) through a pull-up resistor (1K to 10K Ω). The device must be operating within the specified operating parameters at the point when the on-chip power-on reset pulse is complete. The 3.3-V power supply to the device must reach 3.0 V within 10 msec of it crossing 2.0 V to guarantee proper operation. For applications that require the use of an external reset to hold the device in reset longer than the internal POR, the RST input may be used with the circuit as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 58. Figure 6-1. External Circuitry to Extend Reset R1 C1 R2 RST Stellaris D1 The R1 and C1 components define the power-on delay. The R2 resistor mitigates any leakage from the RST input. The diode (D1) discharges C1 rapidly when the power supply is turned off. The Power-On Reset sequence is as follows: 1. The controller waits for the later of external reset (RST) or internal POR to go inactive. 2. The internal reset is released and the core loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. The internal POR is only active on the initial power-up of the controller. The Power-On Reset timing is shown in Figure 22-12 on page 549. Note: The power-on reset also resets the JTAG controller. An external reset does not. 6.1.2.5 Brown-Out Reset (BOR) A drop in the input voltage resulting in the assertion of the internal brown-out detector can be used to reset the controller. This is initially disabled and may be enabled by software. The system provides a brown-out detection circuit that triggers if the power supply (VDD) drops below a brown-out threshold voltage (VBTH). If a brown-out condition is detected, the system may generate a controller interrupt or a system reset. 58 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control Brown-out resets are controlled with the Power-On and Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL) register. The BORIOR bit in the PBORCTL register must be set for a brown-out condition to trigger a reset. The brown-out reset is equivelent to an assertion of the external RST input and the reset is held active until the proper VDD level is restored. The RESC register can be examined in the reset interrupt handler to determine if a Brown-Out condition was the cause of the reset, thus allowing software to determine what actions are required to recover. The internal Brown-Out Reset timing is shown in Figure 22-13 on page 549. 6.1.2.6 Software Reset Software can reset a specific peripheral or generate a reset to the entire system . Peripherals can be individually reset by software via three registers that control reset signals to each peripheral (see the SRCRn registers). If the bit position corresponding to a peripheral is set and subsequently cleared, the peripheral is reset. The encoding of the reset registers is consistent with the encoding of the clock gating control for peripherals and on-chip functions (see “System Control” on page 62). Note that all reset signals for all clocks of the specified unit are asserted as a result of a software-initiated reset. The entire system can be reset by software by setting the SYSRESETREQ bit in the Cortex-M3 Application Interrupt and Reset Control register resets the entire system including the core. The software-initiated system reset sequence is as follows: 1. A software system reset is initiated by writing the SYSRESETREQ bit in the ARM Cortex-M3 Application Interrupt and Reset Control register. 2. An internal reset is asserted. 3. The internal reset is deasserted and the controller loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, and the first instruction designated by the program counter, and then begins execution. The software-initiated system reset timing is shown in Figure 22-14 on page 549. 6.1.2.7 Watchdog Timer Reset The watchdog timer module's function is to prevent system hangs. The watchdog timer can be configured to generate an interrupt to the controller on its first time-out, and to generate a reset signal on its second time-out. After the first time-out event, the 32-bit counter is reloaded with the value of the Watchdog Timer Load (WDTLOAD) register, and the timer resumes counting down from that value. If the timer counts down to its zero state again before the first time-out interrupt is cleared, and the reset signal has been enabled, the watchdog timer asserts its reset signal to the system. The watchdog timer reset sequence is as follows: 1. The watchdog timer times out for the second time without being serviced. 2. An internal reset is asserted. 3. The internal reset is released and the controller loads from memory the initial stack pointer, the initial program counter, the first instruction designated by the program counter, and begins execution. March 17, 2008 59 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller The watchdog reset timing is shown in Figure 22-15 on page 549. 6.1.3 Power Control The Stellaris® microcontroller provides an integrated LDO regulator that may be used to provide power to the majority of the controller's internal logic. The LDO regulator provides software a mechanism to adjust the regulated value, in small increments (VSTEP), over the range of 2.25 V to 2.75 V (inclusive)—or 2.5 V ± 10%. The adjustment is made by changing the value of the VADJ field in the LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL) register. Note: The use of the LDO is optional. The internal logic may be supplied by the on-chip LDO or by an external regulator. If the LDO is used, the LDO output pin is connected to the VDD25 pins on the printed circuit board. The LDO requires decoupling capacitors on the printed circuit board. If an external regulator is used, it is strongly recommended that the external regulator supply the controller only and not be shared with other devices on the printed circuit board. 6.1.4 Clock Control System control determines the control of clocks in this part. 6.1.4.1 Fundamental Clock Sources There are four clock sources for use in the device: ■ Internal Oscillator (IOSC): The internal oscillator is an on-chip clock source. It does not require the use of any external components. The frequency of the internal oscillator is 12 MHz ± 30%. Applications that do not depend on accurate clock sources may use this clock source to reduce system cost. The internal oscillator is the clock source the device uses during and following POR. If the main oscillator is required, software must enable the main oscillator following reset and allow the main oscillator to stabilize before changing the clock reference. ■ Main Oscillator (MOSC): The main oscillator provides a frequency-accurate clock source by one of two means: an external single-ended clock source is connected to the OSC0 input pin, or an external crystal is connected across the OSC0 input and OSC1 output pins. The crystal value allowed depends on whether the main oscillator is used as the clock reference source to the PLL. If so, the crystal must be one of the supported frequencies between 3.579545 MHz through 8.192 MHz (inclusive). If the PLL is not being used, the crystal may be any one of the supported frequencies between 1 MHz and 8.192 MHz. The single-ended clock source range is from DC through the specified speed of the device. The supported crystals are listed in the XTAL bit field in the RCC register (see page 74). ■ Internal 30-kHz Oscillator: The internal 30-kHz oscillator is similar to the internal oscillator, except that it provides an operational frequency of 30 kHz ± 30%. It is intended for use during Deep-Sleep power-saving modes. This power-savings mode benefits from reduced internal switching and also allows the main oscillator to be powered down. ■ External Real-Time Oscillator: The external real-time oscillator provides a low-frequency, accurate clock reference. It is intended to provide the system with a real-time clock source. The real-time oscillator is part of the Hibernation Module (“Hibernation Module” on page 119) and may also provide an accurate source of Deep-Sleep or Hibernate mode power savings. The internal system clock (SysClk), is derived from any of the four sources plus two others: the output of the main internal PLL, and the internal oscillator divided by four (3 MHz ± 30%). The frequency of the PLL clock reference must be in the range of 3.579545 MHz to 8.192 MHz (inclusive). 60 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control The Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) and Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 (RCC2) registers provide control for the system clock. The RCC2 register is provided to extend fields that offer additional encodings over the RCC register. When used, the RCC2 register field values are used by the logic over the corresponding field in the RCC register. In particular, RCC2 provides for a larger assortment of clock configuration options. Figure 6-2 on page 61 shows the logic for the main clock tree. The peripheral blocks are driven by the system clock signal and can be programmatically enabled/disabled. The ADC clock signal is automatically divided down to 16 MHz for proper ADC operation. Figure 6-2. Main Clock Tree PLL (240 MHz) ÷ 4 PLL Main OSC (400 MHz) Internal OSC (12 MHz) Internal OSC (30 kHz) ÷ 4 Hibernation Module (32.768 kHz) ÷ 25 PWRDN ADC Clock System Clock USB Clock XTALa USBPWRDNc XTALa PWRDN b MOSCDIS a IOSCDISa OSCSRCb,d BYPASS b,d SYSDIVb,d USESYSDIV a,d PWMDW a USEPWMDIVa PWM Clock a. Control provided by RCC register bit/field. b. Control provided by RCC register bit/field or RCC2 register bit/field, if overridden with RCC2 register bit USERCC2. c. Control provided by RCC2 register bit/field. d. Also may be controlled by DSLPCLKCFG when in deep sleep mode. 6.1.4.2 Crystal Configuration for the Main Oscillator (MOSC) The main oscillator supports the use of a select number of crystals. If the main oscillator is used by the PLL as a reference clock, the supported range of crystals is 3.579545 to 8.192 MHz, otherwise, the range of supported crystals is 1 to 8.192 MHz. The XTAL bit in the RCC register (see page 74) describes the available crystal choices and default programming values. Software configures the RCC register XTAL field with the crystal number. If the PLL is used in the design, the XTAL field value is internally translated to the PLL settings. March 17, 2008 61 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 6.1.4.3 Main PLL Frequency Configuration The main PLL is disabled by default during power-on reset and is enabled later by software if required. Software configures the main PLL input reference clock source, specifies the output divisor to set the system clock frequency, and enables the main PLL to drive the output. If the main oscillator provides the clock reference to the main PLL, the translation provided by hardware and used to program the PLL is available for software in the XTAL to PLL Translation (PLLCFG) register (see page 78). The internal translation provides a translation within ± 1% of the targeted PLL VCO frequency. The Crystal Value field (XTAL) on page 74 describes the available crystal choices and default programming of the PLLCFG register. The crystal number is written into the XTAL field of the Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) register. Any time the XTAL field changes, the new settings are translated and the internal PLL settings are updated. 6.1.4.4 PLL Modes The PLL has two modes of operation: Normal and Power-Down ■ Normal: The PLL multiplies the input clock reference and drives the output. ■ Power-Down: Most of the PLL internal circuitry is disabled and the PLL does not drive the output. The modes are programmed using the RCC/RCC2 register fields (see page 74 and page 79). 6.1.4.5 PLL Operation If a PLL configuration is changed, the PLL output frequency is unstable until it reconverges (relocks) to the new setting. The time between the configuration change and relock is TREADY (see Table 22-6 on page 538). During the relock time, the affected PLL is not usable as a clock reference. The PLL is changed by one of the following: ■ Change to the XTAL value in the RCC register—writes of the same value do not cause a relock. ■ Change in the PLL from Power-Down to Normal mode. A counter is defined to measure the TREADY requirement. The counter is clocked by the main oscillator. The range of the main oscillator has been taken into account and the down counter is set to 0x1200 (that is, ~600 μs at an 8.192 MHz external oscillator clock). . Hardware is provided to keep the PLL from being used as a system clock until the TREADY condition is met after one of the two changes above. It is the user's responsibility to have a stable clock source (like the main oscillator) before the RCC/RCC2 register is switched to use the PLL. If the main PLL is enabled and the system clock is switched to use the PLL in one step, the system control hardware continues to clock the controller from the source to the PLL until the main PLL is stable (TREADY time met), after which it changes to the PLL. Software can use many methods to ensure that the system is clocked from the main PLL, including periodically polling the PLLLRIS bit in the Raw Interrupt Status (RIS) register, and enabling the PLL Lock interrupt. 6.1.5 System Control For power-savings purposes, the RCGCn , SCGCn , and DCGCn registers control the clock gating logic for each peripheral or block in the system while the controller is in Run, Sleep, and Deep-Sleep mode, respectively. 62 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control In Run mode, the processor executes code. In Sleep mode, the clock frequency of the active peripherals is unchanged, but the processor is not clocked and therefore no longer executes code. In Deep-Sleep mode, the clock frequency of the active peripherals may change (depending on the Run mode clock configuration) in addition to the processor clock being stopped. An interrupt returns the device to Run mode from one of the sleep modes; the sleep modes are entered on request from the code. Each mode is described in more detail below. There are four levels of operation for the device defined as: ■ Run Mode. Run mode provides normal operation of the processor and all of the peripherals that are currently enabled by the RCGCn registers. The system clock can be any of the available clock sources including the PLL. ■ Sleep Mode. Sleep mode is entered by the Cortex-M3 core executing a WFI (Wait for Interrupt) instruction. Any properly configured interrupt event in the system will bring the processor back into Run mode. See the system control NVIC section of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more details. In Sleep mode, the Cortex-M3 processor core and the memory subsystem are not clocked. Peripherals are clocked that are enabled in the SCGCn register when auto-clock gating is enabled (see the RCC register) or the RCGCn register when the auto-clock gating is disabled. The system clock has the same source and frequency as that during Run mode. ■ Deep-Sleep Mode. Deep-Sleep mode is entered by first writing the Deep Sleep Enable bit in the ARM Cortex-M3 NVIC system control register and then executing a WFI instruction. Any properly configured interrupt event in the system will bring the processor back into Run mode. See the system control NVIC section of the ARM® Cortex™-M3 Technical Reference Manual for more details. The Cortex-M3 processor core and the memory subsystem are not clocked. Peripherals are clocked that are enabled in the DCGCn register when auto-clock gating is enabled (see the RCC register) or the RCGCn register when auto-clock gating is disabled. The system clock source is the main oscillator by default or the internal oscillator specified in the DSLPCLKCFG register if one is enabled. When the DSLPCLKCFG register is used, the internal oscillator is powered up, if necessary, and the main oscillator is powered down. If the PLL is running at the time of the WFI instruction, hardware will power the PLL down and override the SYSDIV field of the active RCC/RCC2 register to be /16 or /64, respectively. When the Deep-Sleep exit event occurs, hardware brings the system clock back to the source and frequency it had at the onset of Deep-Sleep mode before enabling the clocks that had been stopped during the Deep-Sleep duration. ■ Hibernate Mode. In this mode, the power supplies are turned off to the main part of the device and only the Hibernation module's circuitry is active. An external wake event or RTC event is required to bring the device back to Run mode. The Cortex-M3 processor and peripherals outside of the Hibernation module see a normal "power on" sequence and the processor starts running code. It can determine that it has been restarted from Hibernate mode by inspecting the Hibernation module registers. 6.2 Initialization and Configuration The PLL is configured using direct register writes to the RCC/RCC2 register. If the RCC2 register is being used, the USERCC2 bit must be set and the appropriate RCC2 bit/field is used. The steps required to successfully change the PLL-based system clock are: March 17, 2008 63 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller 1. Bypass the PLL and system clock divider by setting the BYPASS bit and clearing the USESYS bit in the RCC register. This configures the system to run off a “raw” clock source (using the main oscillator or internal oscillator) and allows for the new PLL configuration to be validated before switching the system clock to the PLL. 2. Select the crystal value (XTAL) and oscillator source (OSCSRC), and clear the PWRDN bit in RCC/RCC2. Setting the XTAL field automatically pulls valid PLL configuration data for the appropriate crystal, and clearing the PWRDN bit powers and enables the PLL and its output. 3. Select the desired system divider (SYSDIV) in RCC/RCC2 and set the USESYS bit in RCC. The SYSDIV field determines the system frequency for the microcontroller. 4. Wait for the PLL to lock by polling the PLLLRIS bit in the Raw Interrupt Status (RIS) register. 5. Enable use of the PLL by clearing the BYPASS bit in RCC/RCC2. 6.3 Register Map Table 6-1 on page 64 lists the System Control registers, grouped by function. The offset listed is a hexadecimal increment to the register’s address, relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. Note: Spaces in the System Control register space that are not used are reserved for future or internal use by Luminary Micro, Inc. Software should not modify any reserved memory address. Table 6-1. System Control Register Map See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x000 DID0 RO - Device Identification 0 66 0x004 DID1 RO - Device Identification 1 82 0x008 DC0 RO 0x00FF.007F Device Capabilities 0 84 0x010 DC1 RO 0x0101.33FF Device Capabilities 1 85 0x014 DC2 RO 0x070F.1013 Device Capabilities 2 87 0x018 DC3 RO 0x0F0F.3FC0 Device Capabilities 3 89 0x01C DC4 RO 0x5100.007F Device Capabilities 4 91 0x030 PBORCTL R/W 0x0000.7FFD Brown-Out Reset Control 68 0x034 LDOPCTL R/W 0x0000.0000 LDO Power Control 69 0x040 SRCR0 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 0 114 0x044 SRCR1 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 1 115 0x048 SRCR2 R/W 0x00000000 Software Reset Control 2 117 0x050 RIS RO 0x0000.0000 Raw Interrupt Status 70 0x054 IMC R/W 0x0000.0000 Interrupt Mask Control 71 0x058 MISC R/W1C 0x0000.0000 Masked Interrupt Status and Clear 72 0x05C RESC R/W - Reset Cause 73 64 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control See Offset Name Type Reset Description page 0x060 RCC R/W 0x0780.3AD1 Run-Mode Clock Configuration 74 0x064 PLLCFG RO - XTAL to PLL Translation 78 0x070 RCC2 R/W 0x0780.2800 Run-Mode Clock Configuration 2 79 0x100 RCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 93 0x104 RCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 99 0x108 RCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Run Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 108 0x110 SCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 95 0x114 SCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 102 0x118 SCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 110 0x120 DCGC0 R/W 0x00000040 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 0 97 0x124 DCGC1 R/W 0x00000000 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 1 105 0x128 DCGC2 R/W 0x00000000 Deep Sleep Mode Clock Gating Control Register 2 112 0x144 DSLPCLKCFG R/W 0x0780.0000 Deep Sleep Clock Configuration 81 6.4 Register Descriptions All addresses given are relative to the System Control base address of 0x400F.E000. March 17, 2008 65 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 1: Device Identification 0 (DID0), offset 0x000 This register identifies the version of the device. Device Identification 0 (DID0) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x000 Type RO, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved VER reserved CLASS Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MAJOR MINOR Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31 reserved RO 0 DID0 Version This field defines the DID0 register format version. The version number is numeric. The value of the VER field is encoded as follows: Value Description 0x1 Second version of the DID0 register format. 30:28 VER RO 0x1 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 27:24 reserved RO 0x0 Device Class The CLASS field value identifies the internal design from which all mask sets are generated for all devices in a particular product line. The CLASS field value is changed for new product lines, for changes in fab process (for example, a remap or shrink), or any case where the MAJOR or MINOR fields require differentiation from prior devices. The value of the CLASS field is encoded as follows (all other encodings are reserved): Value Description 0x1 Stellaris® Fury-class devices. 23:16 CLASS RO 0x1 66 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Major Revision This field specifies the major revision number of the device. The major revision reflects changes to base layers of the design. The major revision number is indicated in the part number as a letter (A for first revision, B for second, and so on). This field is encoded as follows: Value Description 0x0 Revision A (initial device) 0x1 Revision B (first base layer revision) 0x2 Revision C (second base layer revision) and so on. 15:8 MAJOR RO - Minor Revision This field specifies the minor revision number of the device. The minor revision reflects changes to the metal layers of the design. The MINOR field value is reset when the MAJOR field is changed. This field is numeric and is encoded as follows: Value Description 0x0 Initial device, or a major revision update. 0x1 First metal layer change. 0x2 Second metal layer change. and so on. 7:0 MINOR RO - March 17, 2008 67 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 2: Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL), offset 0x030 This register is responsible for controlling reset conditions after initial power-on reset. Brown-Out Reset Control (PBORCTL) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x030 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.7FFD 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved BORIOR reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:2 reserved RO 0x0 BOR Interrupt or Reset This bit controls how a BOR event is signaled to the controller. If set, a reset is signaled. Otherwise, an interrupt is signaled. 1 BORIOR R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 68 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control Register 3: LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL), offset 0x034 The VADJ field in this register adjusts the on-chip output voltage (VOUT). LDO Power Control (LDOPCTL) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x034 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved VADJ Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0 LDO Output Voltage This field sets the on-chip output voltage. The programming values for the VADJ field are provided below. Value VOUT (V) 0x00 2.50 0x01 2.45 0x02 2.40 0x03 2.35 0x04 2.30 0x05 2.25 0x06-0x3F Reserved 0x1B 2.75 0x1C 2.70 0x1D 2.65 0x1E 2.60 0x1F 2.55 5:0 VADJ R/W 0x0 March 17, 2008 69 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 4: Raw Interrupt Status (RIS), offset 0x050 Central location for system control raw interrupts. These are set and cleared by hardware. Raw Interrupt Status (RIS) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x050 Type RO, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLRIS reserved BORRIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Raw Interrupt Status This bit is set when the PLL TREADY Timer asserts. 6 PLLLRIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 Brown-Out Reset Raw Interrupt Status This bit is the raw interrupt status for any brown-out conditions. If set, a brown-out condition is currently active. This is an unregistered signal from the brown-out detection circuit. An interrupt is reported if the BORIM bit in the IMC register is set and the BORIOR bit in the PBORCTL register is cleared. 1 BORRIS RO 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 70 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control Register 5: Interrupt Mask Control (IMC), offset 0x054 Central location for system control interrupt masks. Interrupt Mask Control (IMC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x054 Type R/W, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLIM reserved BORIM reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W RO RO RO RO R/W RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Interrupt Mask This bit specifies whether a current limit detection is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, an interrupt is generated if PLLLRIS in RIS is set; otherwise, an interrupt is not generated. 6 PLLLIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 Brown-Out Reset Interrupt Mask This bit specifies whether a brown-out condition is promoted to a controller interrupt. If set, an interrupt is generated if BORRIS is set; otherwise, an interrupt is not generated. 1 BORIM R/W 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 March 17, 2008 71 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 6: Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC), offset 0x058 Central location for system control result of RIS AND IMC to generate an interrupt to the controller. All of the bits are R/W1C and this action also clears the corresponding raw interrupt bit in the RIS register (see page 70). Masked Interrupt Status and Clear (MISC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x058 Type R/W1C, reset 0x0000.0000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PLLLMIS reserved BORMIS reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W1C RO RO RO RO R/W1C RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:7 reserved RO 0 PLL Lock Masked Interrupt Status This bit is set when the PLL TREADY timer asserts. The interrupt is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. 6 PLLLMIS R/W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 5:2 reserved RO 0 BOR Masked Interrupt Status The BORMIS is simply the BORRIS ANDed with the mask value, BORIM. 1 BORMIS R/W1C 0 Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 0 reserved RO 0 72 March 17, 2008 Preliminary System Control Register 7: Reset Cause (RESC), offset 0x05C This register is set with the reset cause after reset. The bits in this register are sticky and maintain their state across multiple reset sequences, except when an external reset is the cause, and then all the other bits in the RESC register are cleared. Reset Cause (RESC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x05C Type R/W, reset - 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved LDO SW WDT BOR POR EXT Type RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - - Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:6 reserved RO 0 LDO Reset When set, indicates the LDO circuit has lost regulation and has generated a reset event. 5 LDO R/W - Software Reset When set, indicates a software reset is the cause of the reset event. 4 SW R/W - Watchdog Timer Reset When set, indicates a watchdog reset is the cause of the reset event. 3 WDT R/W - Brown-Out Reset When set, indicates a brown-out reset is the cause of the reset event. 2 BOR R/W - Power-On Reset When set, indicates a power-on reset is the cause of the reset event. 1 POR R/W - External Reset When set, indicates an external reset (RST assertion) is the cause of the reset event. 0 EXT R/W - March 17, 2008 73 Preliminary LM3S8933 Microcontroller Register 8: Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC), offset 0x060 This register is defined to provide source control and frequency speed. Run-Mode Clock Configuration (RCC) Base 0x400F.E000 Offset 0x060 Type R/W, reset 0x0780.3AD1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 reserved ACG SYSDIV USESYSDIV reserved Type RO RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reserved PWRDN reserved BYPASS reserved XTAL OSCSRC reserved IOSCDIS MOSCDIS Type RO RO R/W RO R/W RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO RO R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 Bit/Field Name Type Reset Description Software should not rely on the value of a reserved bit. To provide compatibility with future products, the value of a reserved bit should be preserved across a read-modify-write operation. 31:28 reserved RO 0x0 Auto Clock Gating This bit specifies whether the system uses the Sleep-Mode Clock Gating Control (SCGCn) registers and Deep-Sleep-Mode Clock Gating Control (DCGCn) registers if the controller enters a Sleep or Deep-Sleep mode (respectively). If set, the SCGCn or DCGCn registers are used to control the clocks distributed to the peripherals when the controller is in a sleep mode. Otherwise, the Run-Mode Clock Gating Control (RCGCn) registers are used when the controller enters a sleep mode. The RCGCn registers are always used to control the clocks in Run mode. This allows peripherals to consume less power when the controller is in a sleep mode and the peripheral is unused. 27 ACG R/W 0 74 March 17, 2008